The URL can be used to link to this page

R2020-050 2020-04-08RESOLUTION NO. R2020-50 A Resolution of the City Council of the City of Pearland, Texas, awarding a construction services contract for the Orange Street Service Center Project (Phase 1), to Construction Masters of Houston, Inc., in the amount of $5,619,510.00. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS: Section 1. That competitive bids for construction of the Orange Street Service Center Project have been reviewed and tabulated. Section 2. That the City Council hereby awards the bid to Construction Masters of Houston, Inc., in the amount of $5,619,510.00. Section 3. The City Manager or his designee is hereby authorized to execute a construction services contract for the Orange Street Service Center Project. PASSED, APPROVED and ADOPTED this the 8th day of April, A.D., 2020. TOM REID MAYOR ATTES CRYSTAL ROAN, TRMC, CMC CITY SECRETARY APPROVED AS TO FORM: DARRIN M. COKER CITY ATTORNEY R 2o26 . b Project Manual for: Orange Street Service Center Phase 1 Administration Building Bid No.: 1220-11 COP No. FA1404 December, 2019 Prepared By: Huitt-Zollars, Inc. TBPE Firm # F-761 10350 Richmond Avenue, Suite 300 Houston, Texas 77042 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TABLE OF CONTENTS ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER CITY OF PEARLAND BRAZORIA COUNTY, TEXAS TABLE OF CONTENTS Specification Sections marked with an asterisk (*) were prepared by Huitt-Zollars, Inc. SECTION TITLE DIVISION 0 — BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00100 Invitation to Propose 00200 Instructions to Offers 00300 Sealed Competitive Proposal 00500 Standard Form of Agreement 00610 Performance Bond 00611 Payment Bond 00612 One -Year Maintenance Bond 00615 Partial Waiver of Lien 00700 General Conditions of Agreement 00800-S* Special Conditions Supplement 00800 Special Conditions of Agreement 00811 Wage Scale for Engineering Construction 00812 Wage Scale for Building Construction DIVISION 1— GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100* Summary of Work 01140 Contractor's Use of Premises 01200 Measurement and Payment Procedures 01290 Change Order Procedures 01310 Coordination and Meetings 01350 Submittals 01380 Construction Photographs 01420 Referenced Standards 01430 Contractor's Quality Control 01440 Observation Services 01450 Testing Laboratory Services 00010-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01505 Mobilization 01550 Stabilized Construction Exit 01555 Traffic Control and Regulation 01560 Filter Fabric Fence 01562 Waste Material Disposal 01563 Tree and Plant Protection 01564 Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 01565 TPDES Requirements 01566 Source Controls for Erosion and Sedimentation 01570 Trench Safety System 01580 Project Identification Signs 01600 Material and Equipment 01630 Product Options and Substitutions 01720 Field Surveying 01760 Project Record Documents 01770 Contract Closeout DIVISION 2 — SITE WORK 02200 Site Preparation 02220 Site Demolition 02252 Cement Stabilized Sand 02255 Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 02316 Excavation and Backfill for Roadways 02317 Excavation and Backfill for Structures 02318 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 02330 Embankment 02335 Subgrade 02370 Geotextile 02372* Drilled Shaft Foundations 02411* Selective Demolition 02510 Water Mains 02511 Water Meters 02515 Water Tap and Service Line Installation 02520 Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults 02530 Gravity Sanitary Sewers 02531 Sanitary Sewer Service Leads or Reconnections 02534 PVC Pipe 02540 Tapping Sleeves and Valves 02541 Water and Wastewater Line Valves 00010-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 02542 Concrete Manholes and Accessories 02582 Thermoplastic Pavement Marking 02603 Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers 02630 Storm Sewers 02631 Precast Inlets, Headwalls, and Wingwalls 02633 Adjusting Manholes, Inlets, and Valve Boxes 02710 Base Course for Pavement 02751 Concrete Pavement 02770 Curb, Curb & Gutter, and Headers 02771 Concrete Sidewalks 02811 Landscape Irrigation 02821 Chain Link Fences and Gates 02910 Topsoil 02922 Sodding 02931 Landscape and Tree Planting 02980 Pavement Repair and Resurfacing 02981 Blast Cleaning of Pavement DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100* 03300 03310 03360* 03471* Concrete Formwork Cast in Place Concrete Structural Concrete Special Concrete Floor Finish Tilt -Up -Concrete Panels DIVISION 4* — MASONRY 04200 Unit Masonry DIVISION 5* — METALS 05120 05210 05310 05400 05500 05511 05521 Structural Steel Framing Steel Joist Framing Steel Decking Cold -Formed Metal Framing Metal Fabrications Metal Pan Stairs Steel Pipe and Tube Railings 00010-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 6* — WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry 06202 Interior Finish Carpentry 06411 Plastic -Laminate -Faced Architectural Cabinets DIVISION 7* — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 0716=1 Crystalline Waterproofing 07210 Thermal Insulation 07215 Thermal Spray Foam Insulation 07421 Metal Composite Material Wall Panels 07521 Torch -Applied Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07710 Roof Specialties 07720 Roof Accessories 07841 Penetration Fire stopping 07844 Fire -Resistive Joint Systems 07920 Joint Sealants DIVISION 8* — DOORS AND WINDOWS 08111 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08121 Aluminum Doors and Frames 08141 Flush Wood Doors 08311 Access Doors and Frames 08331 Coiling Counter Doors 08411 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08710 Door Hardware 08800 Glazing 08811 Decorative Glazing 08911 Fixed Louvers DIVISION 9* — FINISHES 09211 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies 09221 Non Structural Metal Framing 09290 Gypsum Board 09301 Ceramic Tiling 00010-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09651 Resilient Base and Accessories 09652 Resilient Tile Flooring 09681 Tile Carpeting 09700 Wall Finishes 09911 Exterior Painting 09912 Interior Painting 09960 High -Performance Coatings 09965 Elastomeric Coatings DIVISION 10* — SPECIALTIES 10114 Visual Display Fabrics 10141 Dimensional Letter Signage 10142 Panel Signage 10211 Toilet Compartments 10280 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 10441 Fire Protection Cabinets 10442 Fire Extinguishers 10750 Flagpoles DIVISION 11* — EQUIPMENT 11310 Appliances 11812 Facility Fall Protection DIVISION 12* — FUNISHINGS 12241 Roller Window Shades 12362 Plastic -Laminate -Clad Countertops 12366 Solid Surfacing Countertops 12368 Simulated Stone Countertops DIVISION 13* — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13730 Access Control 13760 Video Surveillance 13852 Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System 00010-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 14* — CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14210 Electric Traction Elevators DIVISION 15* — MECHANICAL 15005 Mechanical General Provisions 15058 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 15060 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 15072 Vibration Controls for HVAC 15077 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 15081 Duct Insulation 15083 Pipe Insulation 15093 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping 15160 Storm Drainage Piping 15165 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties 15183 Refrigerant Piping 15300 Fire Suppression 15400 Plumbing 15732 Packaged, Outdoor, Central Station Air Handling Units 15738 Split -System Air -Conditioning Units 15815 Metal Ducts 15820 Air Duct Accessories 15838 HVAC Power Ventilators 15840 Air Terminal Units 15855 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 15900 Building Control System for HVAC 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC DIVISION 16* — ELECTRICAL 16055 Overcurrent Protective Device Short -Circuit Study 16056 Overcurrent Protective Device Arc -Flash Study 16060 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 16073 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 16075 Identification for Electrical Systems 16091 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 16120 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 16130 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 16140 Wiring Devices 16141 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 00010-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 16144 Digital, Addressable Fire -Alarm System 16146 Lightning Protection 16231 Packaged Engine Generators 16289 Surge Protection for Low -Voltage Electrical Power Circuits 16415 Transfer Switches 16440 Static Uninterruptible Power Supply 16442 Panelboards 16461 Low -Voltage Transformers 16475 Fuses-600 Volt and Below 16510 Lighting and Lighting Controls 16714 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 16715 Cable Trays for Communications Systems 16716 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling 16761 Pathways for Communications Systems 16762 Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems 16767 Communications Horizontal Cabling APPENDICES Appendix A — Interior, Exterior and Roof Asbestos Survey Report Appendix B — Geotechnical Engineering Study Report END OF SECTION 00010 00010-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE Section 00100 INVITATION TO PROPOSE COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSAL Electronic Competitive Sealed Proposals (CSP) will be accepted for the following project, through the City's E-bid System. Electronic Proposals shall be submitted through the City's web site at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx All interested Offerors are required to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address by selecting "Supplier Registration". Registration provides automatic access to any changes (addenda) to the Plans, Specifications or Submission time and date. Submission of an Electronic Proposal REQUIRES completing a short registration questionnaire found on this web site. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes, registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services, New (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Trade (New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions, see INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS, SECTION 00200, PART 2 included in the project proposal documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic proposals are to be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebids@pearlandtx.gov. All Proposals submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Proposals shall be submitted on the forms provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer, City of Pearland, City Hall Annex located at 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. Electronic Proposals will be accepted until 2:00 p.m., Tuesday, January 14, 2020. All Proposals shall reference the following project information in the appropriate locations in provided electronic format. All properly submitted proposals shall be publicly "opened" and read aloud into the public record following the closing of the acceptance period for the construction of: Orange Street Service Center Phase 1— Administration Building City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: FA1404 PROPOSAL NO.: 1220-11 A mandatory pre -proposal conference will be held at the City of Pearland Council Chambers at 3519 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 at 2:00 p.m. on Tuesday, December 17, 2019. The project will entail the Orange Street Service Center (Phase 1) Administration Building improvements which include the demolition of two existing buildings and utility services; new construction of a 2-story, approximately 19,000 square feet building consisting mostly of offices and workstations; and major building systems including drilled pier foundations, structural steel 12-2017 00100 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE frame, concrete tilt -walls, aluminum and glass storefronts. The project also includes complete mechanical, plumbing, electrical, automatic sprinklers, fire alarm system, low -voltage access control, and an emergency generator. The Site Work includes concrete pavement, utilities, fencing, landscaping and irrigation systems. Upon award of a contract, the successful Offeror will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, "Manage -It" for the administration of the construction project, including but not limited to, all transmittals and material submittals, RFI's, RFC's, Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City, its Construction Manager and Engineer. This system has certain hardware, internet access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications, documentation and records for the project. For more information, see INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS, SECTION 00200, PART 1.4. Electronic Proposal Documents: Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download at no cost on the City's Website at:: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents are also available at the following locations: Amtek Plan Room (713) 956-0100 4001 Sherwood Houston, TX 77092 The Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. (713) 334-7100 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston, TX 77057 Virtual Builders Exchange (832) 613-0201 7035 W. Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 Houston, TX 77092 McGrawHill Construction — Dodge Reports 1-800-393-6343 No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and Proposal documents obtained through the City's E-bid System. OFFERORS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E-BID SYSTEM IN ORDER TO SUBMIT A PROPOSAL EVEN IF PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES. Offerors accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents, plans, specifications proposal forms and addenda required for submitting a proposal. Proposals must be accompanied by a Contractors Qualification Statement (Section 00300 Part C). No proposal may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety (90) days subsequent to the proposal opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). 12-2017 00100 - 2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE Bid Security and Bonds: Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total bid price must accompany each proposal. Offerors submitting Proposals electronically through the E-bid System shall scan and up -load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two Offerors and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the request. Bid Security shall be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. Performance and Payment Bonds: The successful Offeror must furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law, as amended, upon the form included in the Contract Documents, in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the fmal contract price, such bonds are to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and named in the current list of "Treasury Department Circular No. 570", naming the City of Pearland, Texas as Obligee. Additionally, the successful Offeror shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements installed as part of this work, as provided in the Special Conditions of Agreement if so stated. Equal Opportunity: All responsible Offerors having submitted complete proposals will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The contractor, sub -recipient, or sub -contractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration of DOT -assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this agreement, which may result in the termination of this agreement or such other remedy as the recipient deems appropriate. Nondiscrimination: The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally - Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. DBE/SBE Goal: The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) goal for this project is 0%. The Small Business Enterprise (SBE) goal for this project is 0%. DBEs and SBEs selected must be TxDOT approved. Race neutral participation is encouraged and can be achieved through various supplier and subcontracting opportunities. Selection Criteria: The Contract will be awarded based on provision of "Best Value" to the Owner. "Best Value" is defined as: the lowest price for the provision of the highest quality of goods and services in the performance of the work as determined to be most advantageous to the Owner. (252.043 Local Government Code) 12-2017 00100 - 3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE Owner will attempt to negotiate a contract with the most qualified Offeror. If the Owner is unable to negotiate a satisfactory scope, schedule or price with the selected Offeror, the Owner may end negotiations with that Offeror and proceed to the next highest ranked Offeror in the order of the ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected. The Owner may undertake such investigations as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Offeror to perform the work, the accuracy of information provided and the reputation of the Offeror with former clients. Offeror shall furnish the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any proposal if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such Offeror fails to satisfy the Owner that such Offeror is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work contemplated therein. Proposals containing any Conditional Modifiers will not be accepted. The City of Pearland (Owner) reserves the right to award a contract based on its sole assessment and ranking of the above factors in its own best interests and to reject any or all proposals for any reason. A proposal that has been "opened" may not be changed for the purposes of correcting an error in the proposed price, scope or schedule. State Sales Tax: The Owner qualifies for exemption from State and Local Sales Tax pursuant to Section 151.311 of the Texas Tax Code for material incorporated into the project. Maria Rodriguez Interim City Secretary, City of Pearland First Publication date December 04, 2019 Second Publication date December 11, 2019 12-2017 00100 - 4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS Section 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 1. Defined Terms 1.1 The term "Owner" hereinafter is defined as the City of Pearland and is used interchangeably with the term "the City". 1.2 The term "Offeror" means one who submits a Proposal directly to Owner, as distinct from a sub -bidder, who submits a proposal to an Offeror. The term "Successful Offeror" means, on the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided, the Offeror submitting a proposal that represents, in the Owner's opinion, the Best Value to the City. The term "Proposal Documents" includes the Invitation to Propose, Instructions to Offerors, the Proposal (Parts A, B and C), and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipts of proposals). 1.3 The term "E-bid System" refers to the City's electronic bidding system. This is a web -based system that provides all Proposal Documents electronically to potential Offerors and forms the pathway for interested Offerors to submit proposals in response to advertisement and invitation. The term "e-bid" and/ or "electronic bid" means the Offeror's electronic proposal submitted to the Owner by way of the E-bid System. The terms "electronic bid" or "e-bid" are used inter -changeably to describe the above proposal process to submit an authorized proposal to the City in response to an Invitation to Propose. 1.4 The term "Pro-Trak" means the City's web -based contract administration and construction records management system used by involved parties to administer the project. This system serves as the web accessed centralized information distribution hub for document management, pay application processing and record retention for all project documentation. Operational instructions for this system will be issued to the successful Offeror at the pre -Construction Meeting. 1.5 All other definitions set out in the Contract Documents are applicable to terms used in the Proposal Documents. 1.6 Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean consecutive calendar day(s). 1.7 The term "Alternate(s)" or "Add Alternate(s)" as used interchangeably herein is defined as an additive work item that may be selected or rejected by the Owner based solely on the Owner's acceptance or rejection of the price proposed for this item. Alternate bid prices shall include all labor, material, equipment and overhead costs to perform the work of the Alternate as specified, complete in place. When selected by the Owner, the costs for an Alternate shall be added to the Base Proposal and made a part of the Contract price. 12-2017 00200 - 1 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO Ott ERORS 2. Registration for E-bid System 2.1 The Owner' s E-bid System is accessible via the City's web site at https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. Proposal documents can be viewed by simply selecting a specific project from the BID OPPORTUNITIES list and clicking on that project AFTER registration as a Supplier. Potential Offerors MUST REGISTER as a "Supplier" by clicking on the Supplier Registration button and completing the registration form. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services, New (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Trade (New Construction) Select the appropriate Time Zone for the Offeror's location and whether that location observes Daylight Savings time. Complete the registration information providing all required contact information and establish password security for the E-bid System. Once complete, "suppliers" will receive emails notifying of proposal opportunities. Downloading any project proposal data will automatically place the Offeror's contact information on the list of plan holders list and the E-bid System will automatically send any and all updates, changes or addenda associated with that project. 2.2 The electronic Proposal can only be submitted through this system. The form can be printed for Offeror's use, but the Proposal MUST be submitted on the electronic form within the E-bid System. 2.3 Questions regarding use of the E-bid System may be directed by email to: ebids @pearlandtx.gov. 3. Copies of Proposal Documents 3.1 Complete sets of "electronic" Proposal Documents are available for download to registered Offerors at No Cost from the City's E-bid System at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. Interested Offerors must register as a "Supplier" on this site in order to receive the Proposal Documents, and all Addenda or other notifications of changes, including communications from the Owner or Engineer. All Proposal Documents are available to download and print. 3.2 The Offeror accepts sole responsibility for ensuring that he obtains a full set of these documents by completing the registration and executing a full and complete download of the project documents. Downloading of Proposal Documents automatically ensures receipt of any and all subsequent communications from the City or its Engineer. 3.3 Copies of Proposal Documents are available or may be viewed at any of the Plan Houses listed in the Invitation to Propose. It is recommended that all interested Offerors, whether proposing directly to the Owner or Sub -bidders proposing to an Offeror, register as a Supplier and download the project Proposal Documents. 3.4 Complete sets of Proposal Documents must be used in preparing Proposals; neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations 12-2017 00200 - 2 of 12 CITYOFPEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Proposal Documents including, but not limited to all Addenda issued prior to bid. 3.5 Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Proposal Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Proposals on the Work, and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 3.6 Proposal Documents include but may not be limited to Section 00300 Proposal — Parts A, B and C. 4. Examination of Contract Documents and Site 4.1 It is the responsibility of each Offeror before submitting a Proposal, to (a) examine the Proposal Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, (c) consider federal, state and local laws and regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Offeror's observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors, omissions or discrepancies in the Contract Documents, (f) to recognize and plan for use of the City's "Pro-Trak" software to administer the construction process and perform the work of the project. 4.2 Any reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents will be made available to Offerors for review, but such reports are not part of the Contract Documents. Offeror may not and should not rely upon the accuracy of the data contained in such reports, interpretations or opinions contained therein, or the completeness thereof, for the purposes of bidding or construction. 4.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to underground utilities, equipment or other underground facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such underground facilities or others, and Owner does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof. 4.4 Before submitting a Proposal, each Offeror will, at Offeror's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work and which Offeror deems necessary to determine its Proposal prices for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance with the Contract Time, Contract Price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 4.5 On request in advance, Owner will provide each prospective Offeror access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests as each prospective Offeror deems necessary for submission of a Proposal. Prospective Offerors shall fill all holes, clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations. 12-2017 00200 - 3 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 4.6 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights -of -way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands, access thereto or contractual arrangements for use by the Contractor required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures produced by the work have been obtained and paid for by Owner. 4.7 If Contractor's means and methods require the acquisition of Temporary Construction Easements or any access to private property not already included in the above, such access and documentation along with any costs involved shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 4.8 The submission of a Proposal will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Offeror that Offeror has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception, the Proposal is premised upon performing and furnishing all of the Work required by the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in, required by or reasonably inferred from the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. If the Offeror knows of any discrepancies or omissions in the Contract Documents, he shall notify the Owner and obtain a clarification by Addendum before the proposals are received, and if no such request is received by the Owner prior to the opening of proposals, then it shall be considered that the Offeror fully understands the Work to be performed and has provided sufficient sums in his Proposal to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted in writing no later than five (5) days prior to the opening of proposals. 5. Interpretations and Addenda 5.1 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to Engineer via the City's E-bid system during the question period prior to submittal of proposal. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered or transmitted by electronic means to all registered Offerors in the City's E-bid System. Questions received less than five (5) days prior to the date for opening of Proposals may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 5.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Proposal Documents as deemed advisable by Owner or Engineer. Addenda will automatically be made available to all registered Offerors that have downloaded Proposal Documents from the City's E- bid System. 6. Contract Time 6.1 The number of days in which the Work is to be Substantially Completed, as set forth in the Proposal form and the Standard Form of Agreement, subject to such 12-2017 00200 - 4 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS extension of time as may be due under the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents ("Contract Time"). All references to "time" or "days" shall be interpreted as consecutive calendar days. 7. Liquidated Damages and Early Completion Bonus 7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages and early completion bonus, if any, are set forth in the Standard Form of Agreement. 8. Substitute or "Or -Equal" Items 8.1 The Contract, if awarded, will be awarded on the basis of the selected materials and equipment described in the Plans or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or -equal" items. All "or -equal" references shall be interpreted to mean " approved equal". Application for acceptance of any proposed substitution will not be considered by Engineer until after a contract is in place. Offeror shall assume any and all risk associated with the unauthorized substitution of any material of equipment included in or inferred by the plans and specifications. The procedure for submission of any proposed substitution by the Offeror, and its consideration by Engineer, is set forth in the Contract Documents. 9. Proposal Form 9.1 The Proposal form (Section 00300 — Proposal — Parts A, B, C,) is included with the Proposal Documents when downloaded. This Document must be printed and signed, as required below, and then uploaded as an Attachment to the Proposal. All E-bids and Proposals must be submitted on the City's official E-bid System. All blanks on the Proposal form must be completed or filled in. The Offeror shall propose for all Alternates, if any. Incomplete Proposals will be cause for rejection. Only complete proposals will be considered, scored and ranked. 9.2 Proposals by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president (or other corporate officer accompanied be evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature. Once executed, the document is to be uploaded as an attachment to the Proposal. 9.3 Proposals by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title must appear under the signature, and if a corporate general partner, executed as required above for corporations and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. All names must be typed or printed below the signature. Once executed, the document is to be uploaded as an attachment to the Proposal. 9.4 The Offeror shall acknowledge receipt of all Addenda (the number of which must be filled in on the Proposal form). 12-2017 00200 - 5 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 9.5 The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Proposal must be shown on the Proposal form. 9.6 Bid Security and Bonds: Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total base bid price must accompany each proposal. Bidders submitting bids electronically through the E-bid system shall scan and upload a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. 10. Submission of Proposals 10.1 The place, date and/or time designated for opening Proposals may be changed in accordance with applicable laws, codes and ordinances. Any such changes to the Proposal Schedule shall be made by Addenda. Registered Offerors will receive automatic notification through the E-Bid system by email of any and all changes to the bid documents and or dates and times associated with their submittal. 10.2 Electronic Proposals shall be submitted per the requirements, instructions, terms and conditions as stated in the registration and submittal instructions of the City's E-bid System electronic bidding software. All Offerors utilizing this system MUST register as a potential supplier. E-Bids are submitted directly via the City's Web based system located at https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. Proposals submitted after the proposal date and time will be rejected. Offerors are advised to submit their proposal well in advance of the closing time and to allow for the electronic transfer to complete prior to the closing deadline. 11. Modification and Withdrawal of Proposals 11.1 Prior to submission, E-bid Proposals may be modified or withdrawn without prejudice. 11.2 Once submitted, Proposals may only be modified by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Proposal must be executed) and delivered to Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, Community Development, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 and submitted any time prior to the opening of Proposals. 11.3 An Offeror may not modify or withdraw its Proposal by facsimile or verbal means. A withdrawn Proposal may be resubmitted prior to the designated time for opening Proposals. No proposal may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety (90) days subsequent to the proposal opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. 11.4 If, within twenty-four (24) hours after Proposals are opened, any Offeror files a duly signed, written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material mistake in the preparation of its Proposal, that Offeror may request to withdraw its Proposal. Thereafter, that Offeror will be disqualified from further proposing on the Project to be provided under the Contract Documents. 12. Opening of Proposals 12-2017 00200 - 6 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 12.1 Proposals will be opened and (unless obviously non -responsive) read aloud publicly to identify the names of the Offerors and their respective cost proposals, only. An abstract of the amounts of the base Proposals and major alternates (if any) will be made available to Offerors after the opening of Proposals through the E-Bid system. Proposals, in their entirety, shall be open for public inspection after the contract is awarded, with the exception of any trade secrets or confidential information contained therein, provided Offeror has expressly identified any specific information contained therein as being trade secrets or confidential information. 13. Proposals to Remain Subject to Acceptance 13.1 All Proposals will remain subject to acceptance for ninety (90) days after the day of the Proposal opening, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Proposal prior to that date. 14. Award of Contract 14.1 Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Proposals, to waive any and all informalities not involving price, schedule or scope and to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Offeror deemed, in Owner's sole opinion, to represent the best value. Owner may reject a bid as non -responsive if: 1) Offeror improperly or illegibly completes or fails to complete all information required by the Proposal Documents; 2) Offeror fails to sign the Proposal or improperly signs the Proposal; 3) Offeror qualifies its Proposal; 4) Offeror tardily or otherwise improperly submits its Proposal; 5) Offeror fails to submit the Contractor's Qualifications or fails to respond to any of the required information requested in Section 00300 Proposal or 6) The Proposal is otherwise non -responsive. 14.2 Best Value. The Contract is to be awarded based on provision of "Best Value" to the Owner. Upon receipt of the Proposals, the Owner will consider, score and rank all complete proposals in accordance with the following criteria and select the Proposal that offers the best value to the Owner. Selection Criteria Point Value 1 Proposed price for performance of the full scope of work 50 2 Experience and qualifications of Offeror's project team 15 3 Offeror's experience with projects of similar scope, value and complexity 10 4 Completeness of Offeror's project approach narrative and proposed schedule 5 5 Reputation and Offeror's history with proposed sub -contractors/ vendors 10 6 Offeror's Quality Assurance Program and Safety Record 5 7 Offeror's financial capacity to adequately fund the work of the project 5 12-2017 00200 - 7 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 14.3 In determining to whom to award a contract, the City of Pearland may consider, in addition to the above selection criteria, the following Qualifications of Offeror, and each Offeror must be prepared to submit within two (2) days of Owner's request any or all such additional qualifications requested. Failure to provide this information within the specified time frame may be cause for rejection of the Proposal. A contract to be awarded to the Offeror providing the Best Value may be let on either a Lump Sum basis or a Unit Cost basis dependent on the Proposal format. 14.4 Offeror is required to submit for approval a full schedule of values for the project as component of contract negotiations. 14.5 Upon receipt and opening of the proposals, the Owner will score and rank each proposal with respect to the selection criteria contained in this Competitive Sealed Proposal document. After scoring and ranking, an award may be made on the basis of the proposal as submitted, without discussion, clarification or modification, or, the Owner may discuss with the selected Offeror, offers for scope and schedule changes and associated cost reductions and other elements of the responder's proposal. If the Owner determines that it is unable to reach a satisfactory contract with the selected responder, then the Owner will terminate discussions with the selected Offeror and proceed to the next responder in order of selection ranking until a contract is reached or the Owner has rejected all proposals. 14.6 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Proposal and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Offerors, proposed Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, to Owner's satisfaction, within the Contract Time. 14.7 Offeror Attendance. The successful Offeror or its representative is required to attend the City Council meeting in which the contract will be considered for award. Owner will establish a schedule for the award with Offeror. 15 Contract Security 15.1 When the Successful Offeror delivers the executed Standard Form of Agreement to Owner, it must include the required Performance, Payment, Maintenance and Surface Correction Bonds (if required) by the Contract Documents. Bonds may be on the forms provided herein or an equal form containing no substantive changes, as determined by Owner. 16 Workers' Classification 16.1Texas Government Code § 2155.001 authorizes a penalty of $200 per misclassified individual to be imposed on a person who contracts for certain services with a governmental entity and fails to properly classify their workers and subcontractors. This is effective January 1, 2014. 12-2017 00200 - 8 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 17. Signing of Agreement 17.1 When Owner gives a Notice of Intent to Award to the Successful Offeror, it will be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Standard Form of Agreement, and the required Performance and Payment Bond forms. Within ten (10) days thereafter Contractor shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Standard Form of Agreement to Owner with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter, Owner shall deliver one fully signed counterpart to Contractor. There shall be no contract or agreement between Owner and the Successful Offeror until proper execution and attestation of the Standard Form of Agreement by authorized representatives of the Owner. 18. Pre -Proposal Conference 18.1 A pre -proposal conference will be held as indicated in the Invitation to Propose. Attendance at the pre -proposal conference is MANDATORY to fulfill the prerequisite requirements for Offerors bidding directly to the Owner. 19. Retainage 19.1 Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Contract Documents. 20. Award 20.1 The contract, if awarded, may be awarded to the eligible Offeror submitting the lowest priced and containing the most advantageous proposal for the Owner, complying with these Instructions to Offerors and other proposal requirements in the Documents. By submitting a Proposal, each Offeror agrees and consents that the Owner, in determining the Successful Offeror and his eligibility for award, may consider the Offeror's experience and facilities, conduct and performance under other contracts, financial condition, reputation in the industry, safety record and other factors as noted, which could affect the Offeror's qualifications to perform the work. 20.2 Pursuant to Statute 2269.151 of the Government Code, the City will evaluate the proposals to determine which proposal provides the best value for the Owner. In making said determination, the Owner will consider Criteria as further defined or explained in these Instructions to Offerors and Bid Proposal, including the Offeror's Approach narrative and project schedule, the qualifications and experience of key personnel, quality assurance program and safety record, prior experience on similar projects, acceptability of selected sub -contractors and financial capacity to adequately fund the work of the project. 20.3 The evaluation will be carried out by an evaluation team consisting of members of the Owner's project team and the Engineering Consultant. These team members will assign a score to each of the criteria that ranges from 0-5 described as shown below: Score Description 5 Exceeds Expectations full points 4 Above Expectations 3 Meets Expectations 2 Does not quite Meet Expectations 12-2017 00200 - 9 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 1 Does not meet Expectations 0 Non -responsive 20.4 The average of the team member's individual rating values will be multiplied by the relative weighting points for each of the criteria below, and the total used to rank the Offerors. The Offeror with the highest ranking will be the Offeror considered the Offeror that provides the best responsible value to the Owner and will be recommended to the City for contract award. 20.5 Price = 50 points. The Offeror with the lowest proposed price for all work, including all Add or Deductive Alternates, will be awarded Points. All other Offerors will be awarded a score based on a weighted percentage of the difference from the low Offeror. 20.6 Experience of Key Personnel = 15 points. Offeror must demonstrate minimal experience with its project team. The three (3) key staff include: the Project Manager, General Superintendent and the Scheduler/ Buyer or Safety Coordinator. Minimal experience required for each Key team member shall be as follows: Project Manager, minimum of ten years verified project management experience on projects of similar size, scope and complexity, minimum one year with Offeror's firm, provide list of prior projects, Superintendent, minimum of ten years verified experience in the industry, minimum of two years with the Offeror's firm, provide list of prior projects. Scheduler/ Buyer/ Admin, minimum one year experience providing support to the project team and performing duties in support of the project objectives. Provide three recent examples of this team's: • experience with projects of similar scope, complexity and value • ability to schedule and phase the work properly to meet an Owner's schedule • ability to adjust or accelerate portions of the schedule to meet Owner's needs • ability to deal with end -users concerns and expectations The Offeror must allocate 100% of the work hours of the General Superintendent to this project. No member of this team may be replaced without notification to the Owner and Owner reserves the right to review experience of any team member replacement and reject to any team member on the grounds of reputation or experience 20.7 Offeror's Qualifications and work history of the Offeror's firm = 10 points. The Offeror is required to provide references for projects of similar scope, value and complexity to demonstrate its ability to prosecute complex work including high- technology components or similarly complex electrical, mechanical or building components where the subcontractor and Offeror have worked together. The Offeror acknowledges that it is in the best interest of the Owner and the Offeror to have the work performed by experienced personnel in each particular construction discipline with particular interest and attention to the following with provided references: 12-2017 00200 - 10 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 20.8 Approach and Schedule = 5 points. The thoroughness and detail of the Offeror's approach to prosecuting the work and the ability to commit to an acceptable delivery schedule for the completed project in accordance with the Owner's desired schedule The Offeror's experience and commitment to identifying and meeting the specific milestones for the various components of the project as identified in the approach narrative and schedule. The Offeror's approach to dealing with end -users of the project and shifting concerns. Discuss past performance and lessons learned during project close out phase on the three (3) examples of similar scope, complexity and value. Provide the awarded contract amount, final contract amount and explanation of any change orders. Provide a proposed project schedule using Critical Path Method. Offeror must provide a Critical Path summary level schedule for this Project indicating the Offeror's proposed construction schedule. Owner will assess the quality and clarity of the Offeror's work -plan including schedule, logistics/phasing plan, understanding of the work and sensitivity to ongoing operations in the facilities. 20.9 Identification and History with selected Sub -contractors = 10 points. Submit a complete list of selected sub -contractors and the basis for that selection. Provide a brief list of historic relationship with each and a list of projects each sub -contractor has performed with the Offeror. Owner reserves the right to contact sub -contractors to discuss details of previous projects. The Sub -Contractor's reputation among other governmental entities, owners, suppliers, and will be considered for awarding of points. Strong consideration will be given to first-hand experience on prior City of Pearland projects. Owner places positive emphasis on long-term relationships between General and Sub -Contractors. 20.10 Quality Assurance Program=2points and Safety Record = 3 points for a total = 5 points. The Offeror and the subcontractors must provide owner with their Experience Modification Rate (EMR). The Offeror with the lowest EMR will be awarded a 3 rating. Any Offeror with an EMR above 1.0 or with a planned subcontractor with an EMR above 1.0 will be awarded a 0 rating valve. All Offerors will be awarded a value based on their own EMR. The Offeror must provide a summary of the Offeror firm's Quality Assurance Program based on self -performed work and how this plan includes subcontractors. These criteria will be judged separately for a total of 5 points. 20.11 Financial Statement of Offeror = 5 points. Provide audited financial statement consisting of the balance sheet and annual income statement of Offeror for the Offeror's last fiscal year end preceding the submission of the Bid Proposal, which has been audited or examined by an independent certified public accountant. The Financial Statement of Offeror shall be used to determine a Offeror's net working capital, which is defined as current assets less current liabilities. An Offeror's net working capital shall be considered evidence of the Offeror's ability to provide sufficient financial management of the project being considered. The Offeror's Financial Statement shall be clearly and conspicuously 12-2017 00200 - 11 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS marked as "confidential", and shall be deemed and treated as confidential and excepted from the Public Information disclosure requirements of Texas Government Code Section 552.001 et seq., as such information, if released, would give advantage to a competitor or bidder, and/or would cause substantial competitive harm to Offeror. 20.14 Maximum Possible Score = 100 Points. END OF SECTION 12-2017 00200 - 12 of 12 CITYOFPEARLAND SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL Section 00300 SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART A Date: 1/30/2020 Bid of Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. , an individual proprietorship / a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas / a partnership consisting of a Corporation , for the construction of: To: Orange Street Service Center Phase 1 Administration Building City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: FA1404 PROPOSAL NO.: 1220-11 (Submitted in Electronic format) The Honorable Mayor and City Council of Pearland City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, Texas 77581 Pursuant to the published Invitation to Propose, and Instructions to Offerors, the undersigned Offeror hereby proposes to perform all the work and furnish all necessary superintendence, labor, machinery, equipment, tools and materials, and whatever else may be necessary to complete all the work described in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents for the construction of the Orange Street Service Center - Phase 1 - Administration Building, project limits with all related appurtenances, complete, tested, and operational, in accordance with the Plans and Specifications prepared by Chris Casey, Huitt-Zollars, Inc., 10350 Richmond Avenue, Suite 300 Houston, TX, for the unit prices or applicable prices set forth in Part "B", the electronic bid form as contained in the City's E-bid system, which, once fully executed and submitted shall constitute a legal and executable proposal from the Offeror. It is understood that, in the event any changes are ordered on any part of the Work, the applicable unit prices shall apply as additions to or deductions from the total prices for the parts of the Work so changed. The Bid Security required under the Instructions to Offerors is included and has been uploaded as an attachment within the E-bid system and, that a fully executed, signed and sealed hard copy has been delivered to the Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. The Offeror agrees to submit to the Owner the Qualifications of Offeror, including the Financial Statement of Offeror, as required by the Instructions to Offerors if requested to do so as a condition of the Proposal process. The Offeror binds himself, upon acceptance of his proposal, to execute the Standard Form of Agreement and furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond if required, each in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total Contract Price, according 12-2017 Offeror's Initi. 00`1i 1 of CITYOFPEARLAND SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL to the forms included in the Contract Documents, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated in Part "B" of this proposal along with all required insurance in the required amounts. The undersigned Offeror agrees to commence work within 10 days of the date of a written Notice to Proceed. It is understood that the Work is to be Substantially Complete within 400 days after the date of the Notice to Proceed. Time for Substantial Completion shall begin on the date established by the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor will pay liquidated damages in the amount(s) specified in Section 00500 — Standard Form of Agreement, in the event the Work is not Substantially Complete within the Contract Time. The undersigned agrees that the amounts proposed in this Proposal will not be withdrawn or modified for ninety (90) days following date of Proposal opening, or such longer period as may be agreed to in writing by the City of Pearland and Offeror. It is understood that in the event the Successful Offeror fails to enter into the Standard Form of Agreement and/or to furnish an acceptable Performance and. Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond if required, each in the amount of one hundred (100) percent of the Contract Price, along with all required insurance in the stated amounts within ten (10) days of the Notice of Award, the Successful Offeror will forfeit the Bid Security as provided in the Instructions to Offerors. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). The Offeror acknowledges that the following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Proposal Documents noted therein have been considered and all costs thereto are included in the Proposal prices. Addendum No.: 1 Date: 12/18/2019 Addendum No.: 3 Date: 1/17/2020 Addendum No.: 2 Date: 1/9/2020 Addendum No.: 4 Date: 1/22/2020 Offeror hereby represents that the only person or parties interested in this offer as principals are those named. Offeror has not directly or indirectly entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding. Firm Natrte"" �Ons uctioP_ 11asters of Houston, Inc. Title: Pr dent Address: 3908 3rd Street, Pearland, TX 77581 Phone No: 281-997-2640 ATTEST: Marji Carns (Typed or Printed Name) Signature Date: 1/30/2020 (Seal, if Offeror is a Corporation) 12-2017 Offeror's Initial' . 00300 - 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL END OF SECTION 12-2017 Offeror's Ini 00300 - 3 of 3 C. OF PEARLAND PROP_ _L SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART B PRICE PROPOSAL FORM 50 points Quantity UOM Description Spec Reference Unit Price Total Amount PKHD 1 Base Bid 1 Base Bid Refer to line item tab Refer to line item tab PKLN 1 1 Base Bid 1 LS Mobilization and Demobilization: Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Shall include all costs for Contractor's insurances and bonds, construction/building and stormwater permits and fees, job trailer and site administration expenses and utilities. This item shall not exceed more than three (3) percent of the Total Bid amount of this contract. 01505 Refer to line item tab Refer to line item tab PKLN 1 2 Base Bid 1 LS Demolition: Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required for demolition activities,to include but not limited to, demolition of existing facilities, paving, and utilities. The demolition shall be performed so as to not disrupt operation of the existing facilities. 02411 Refer to line item tab Refer to line item tab PKLN 1 3 Base Bid 1 LS Summary of work: Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required for the construction of the project to include the administration building and its systems, appliances, generator with enclosure, paving, walks, curbs, ramps, pavement markings and signage, fence, landscaping, conduits and utilities. Complete Contract Documents _r,,.«°"`) Refer to line item tab Refer to line item tab Justin Dav Offeror's Authorized Signature Offeror's Init 00300 - Part B - 1 of 1 Bid # 1220- Title Orange Street Service Center Phase 1 — Administration Building Line #s Line Description UOM QTY 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Base Bid Mobilization and Demobilization: Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Shall include all costs for Contractor's insurances and bonds, construction/building and stormwater permits and fees, job trailer and site administration expenses and utilities. This item shall not exceed more than three (3) percent of the Total Bid amount of this contract. Demolition: Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required for demolition activities,to include but not limited to, demolition of existing facilities, paving, and utilities. The demolition shall be performed so as to not disrupt operation of the existing facilities. Summary of Work: Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required for the construction of the project to include the administration building and its systems, appliances, generator with enclosure, paving, walks, curbs, ramps, pavement markings and signage, fence, landscaping, conduits and utilities. LS LS LS 1 1 1 Total Construction Masters $109,000.00 $66,130.00 66,444,380.00 $5,619 510.00; CITY OF PEARLAN.D PROPOSAL SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART C CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT (Required from ALL OFFORERS) Submitted in reference to: Orange Street Service Center - Phase 1- Administration Building By: Justin Davis Title: President, Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. General Offeror Information. The signatory of this questionnaire attests to the truth and accuracy of all statements and of all answers to interrogatories hereinafter made under a penalty of perjury. 1. INDIVIDUAL/PARTNERSHIP/CORPORATION/JOINT VENTURE Principal Office Address: 3908 3rd Street. Pearland, TX 77581 Telephone Number: ( 281 ) 997-2640 Fax Number: (281 ) 485-4702 Email address: justinPcmhou.com Indicate as Applicable: X A Corporation A Partnership An Individual If a Corporation, complete this section: Date of Incorporation: 11/25/1987 State of Incorporation: Texas Chief Executive Officer's Name: N/A President's Name: Justin Davis Vice President's Name(s): N/A Secretary's Name: N/A Treasurer's Name: N/A If a partnership, complete this section: Date of organization: 12-2017 Offeror's Initial 00300 - Part C - 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART C State whether partnership is general or limited: Name and address of each partner: If an individual, complete this section: Name and business address: All Offerors MUST provide the following information: 1. How many years has your organization been in business as a general contractor under your present business name? 32 + years 2. How many years' experience in this type of construction work has your organization had: (a) as a general contractor? 32 + years (b) as a subcontractor? N/A 3. Are you a member of the BBB, International Standards Organization (ISO), or other quality associations or quality certifying organizations? No 4. Dunn & Bradstreet # 18-670-5588 5. Where is your main office located? 3908 3rd Street, Pearland, TX 77581 6. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? No 7. If so, where and why? N/A 2. OFFEROR'S KEY PERSONNEL EXPERIENCE 15 points A Offeror shall provide satisfactory evidence that the minimum qualification requirements are met for each position: 1. Key Personnel Experience - Provide qualifications of the project personnel who will perform key functions. Minimum information to be contained on the resume of each individual shall include: Years in position, years with Offeror's firm, education, position occupied on each prior assignment, description of duties on each assignment. Provide this information on the following team members below. Once identified these team members may not be changed except with written notification and the Owner's approval of any and all replacement personnel. What is the name and percentage of time allocated to the following personnel? For Project Manager Justin Davis / 100% - Dedicated to Executed Duties and Project Management For Project Superintendent Mike Zavala / 100% - Dedicated On -site Superintendent For Scheduler/ Safety Dennis Busby / 100% - Dedicated to Project Management with Scheduling and Safety as components to the duties of CMHOU Project Manager. Provide detailed information regarding each team member's experience on a separate sheet OR provide detailed resume's and add as "Attachment #1 to Part C". Please refer to attached resumes. 12-2017 Offeror's Init als• 00300 - Part - 2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART C 3. OFFEROR'S ORGANIZATIONAL EXPERIENCE 10 points A. Offeror shall provide satisfactory evidence of successful, on -time completion of a minimum of three projects of comparable scope, dollar value and technical complexity as the prime general contractor. Projects shall be drawn from work performed within the last five years and shall be examples of "ground -up" construction. If available, examples should include projects performed for governmental entities and in all cases should include the contact information for persons familiar with the project in the employ of the owner at the time of construction. Provision of contacts shall imply your organization's agreement to the Owner contacting those named individuals. Additional information may be provided on a separate sheet labeled "Attachment 2 to Part C", if required. PROJECT 1: Owner's Name and Contact Information: Spencer Clark (713-842-0540 / sclark@agcm.com) Project Name: EMS Stations 92 and 94 Type of facility: Emergency Medical Services Facility Construction Cost: $6,200,000 Scope of Work: Please refer to attachment 2 to Part C. Year of Completion: 2020 Location (City and State): Houston, TX PROJECT #2 Owner's Name and Contact Information: David Glasco (281-316-4139 / dglasco@cityofwebster.com) Project Name: Webster Animal Control Facility Type of facility: Animal Control Facility Construction Cost: $1,200,000 Scope of Work: Please refer to attachment 2 to Part C. Year of Completion: 2019 Location (City and State): Webster. TX PROJECT #3 Owner's Name and Contact Information: Jennifer Lee (281-652-1760 / jlee @ pearlandtx.gov) Project Name: Delores Fenwick Nature Center Type of facility: Public Services Facility Construction Cost: $2,700,000 Scope of Work: Please refer to attachment 2 to Part C. Year of Completion: 2019 Location (City and State): Pearland, TX 12-2017 Offeror's Initi 00300 - Part - 3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART C 4. OFFEROR'S PROJECT APPROACH 5 points Additional information may be provided on a separate sheet labeled "Attachment 3 to Part C", if required. Please refer to Attachment 3 to Part C for additional information, "Approach and Schedule". A. Provide a brief description of your firm's approach to the work? Explain, in detail, any portions of the Work that will be particularly challenging. Construction of this building is rather simple. The challenging part of the work is the limited work area provided and working around the city's existing operations. Our approach is simple: Improvise, Adapt and Overcome. We have submitted a schedule and work plan but we understand that factors outside of our control will require us to improvise. We have planned for working within an operational public works facility but understand that we will still need to adapt to this environment. We anticipate unforeseen challenges and are prepared overcome whatever those challenges may be. B. Explain your methodology for performing the proposed work, including Cost and Schedule control. Add extra sheets as required. Due to site restraints, we must have a somewhat linear approach at the beginning of the project. Our initial focus is based on getting the building vertical. Without full access to the property we are forced to focus deeper on the critical path. For this project we need to direct all efforts to the footprint of the building until we have the walls erected. At this point we will begin grouping site tasks with building tasks to build more efficiently and re -align the schedule. The phasing solution proposed in our construction schedule limits interference with existing operations and ensures on -time completion. Cost is controlled through proper planning and preparation. We have studied the plans and specifications and accounted for all costs required to complete the project based on those documents and our constructibility review. After construction begins, we will forecast future tasks and work to identify potential conflicts before they become a costly mistake. C. What portions of the work will your firm self -perform? Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. will not self -perform any work. 12-2017 Offeror's Initial 00300 - Part CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART C D. Attach Critical Path milestone schedule, attach on separate sheet, label "Attachment 4 to Part C" 5. IDENTIFICATION & HISTORY WITH SUB -CONTRACTORS 10 points Offeror proposes the following subcontractors to be used for the Project (list others as applicable). List ALL major Sub -contractors (Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, Structural and Civil as a minimum) and any Specialty Item Sub -contractors or any subcontractor scheduled to perform 5 percent or more of the Project work. Provide a brief history of your firm's association with listed Sub -Contractors over the last FIVE YEARS on a separate sheet labeled "Attachment 5 to Part C". Provide three references for each Sub -Contractor along with contact information. No changes to proposed Sub -Contractors may be made without Owner's approval. The information provided will be used in the evaluation of the Offeror. The references shall include name of project, Owner contact information, and Engineer contact information if available. TABLE 00300-2 SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS SUBCONTRACTOR SPECIALTY $ VALUE OF CONTRACT PERCENTAGE OF WORK i • RSW Construction Earthwork $327,300 6.50% 2'Spring Creek Utilities $146,700 2.91% 3. Texas A&M Concrete $535,411 10.63% 4. Ace Fabricators Steel $207,280 4.12% 5' CWW Millwork Millwork $34,400 0.68% 6. F.W. Walton Roofing $268,797 5.34% 7. AmeraProducts Storefront $277,399 5.51% 8. Fort Bend Drywall Drywall $169,500 3.37% 9. Texan Floor Service Flooring $149,455 2.97% 10.Advantage Fire Fire Safety $79,477 1.58% Subcontractors listing continued below. On a separate sheet labeled as "Attachment 5 to Part C" per above instructions: A. Provide a brief description of your firm's history with each of your proposed major Sub- contractors? We have created a working relationship with our subcontractors over the years, thus building a partnership with those that have the same fundamental principals as we do, honesty and integrity. Those subcontractors are listed on this project, and hence confirm our mutual respect and continuing confidence in working together. B. Provide references major Sub -contractors. Please refer to attachment 5 to Part C 12-2017 Subcontractors continued: Innovative Plumbing Plumbing Southland Mech Mechanical SGG Electrical Electrical Offeror's Initials: 00300 - Part $191,603 3.80% $523,831 10.40% $1,018,000 20.21% -5of7 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART C Please refer to the attached QA program outline and OSHA 300 Reports. 6. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND SAFETY RECORD 5 points 6.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM 2 points A. Describe your firm's methodology for ensuring quality control over sub -contracted work. The project will be completely sub -contracted. We carefully qualify each of our sub- contractors and hold them to the same standards we expect from our staff. We approach each project with synergy and collaboration from all parties. Safety Strategies: Education, training and regular supervision are the keys to providing a safe working environment for our staff and tradesmen on any of our projects. CMHOU has developed a comprehensive safety and health program to address our specific safety concerns and to provide guidance of individual lob tasks within the framework of OSHA. Superintendents conduct weekly safety meetings with all on -site employees. B. What quality assurance components does your firm put in place with self -performed work? N/A. Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. does not self -perform work. C. Are you currently in litigation concerning any of your projects or have you litigated any owner in the last five years? Explain Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. is not currently in litigation nor have we been in litigation with any owner in the last five years. 6.2 SAFETY QUESTIONAIRE 3 points A. List your Firm's Worker's Compensation Insurance Experience Modification Rate for the three most recent years as evidenced in Workmen's Compensation Insurance premiums. If your company is not Interstate rated, provide your intrastate EMR. 20I3: 2017:.90 2014: 2018:.94 20-I-5: 2019:.94 12-2017 Offeror's Initi 00300- Part y-6of7 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART C The above -mentioned information should be confirmed by a letter from your Worker Compensation Insurance Carrier. Please refer to attached letters from Resourcing Edge. B. Are accident reports (OSHA 300) and report summaries sent to the following? And if so, how often? • Field Superintendent: Yes, weekly • Vice President — Operations: N/A (President takes care of all reporting) • President of Firm: Yes, weekly C. How are accident records and summaries kept? How often are they reported? Records and Summaries are maintained by our President, Justin Davis. • Accidents totaled for entire Company: Quarterly • Accidents totaled for Project: Quarterly • Accidents Totaled by Superintendent and/or Foreman: Quarterly D. Existing Safety and Orientation Programs: • Summarize and submit the Offeror firm's safety program execution plan (1 page). Outline the training requirements and frequency, meeting types and frequency, and personnel responsible for executing the plan on site as a minimum. Please refer to attachment: Project Manual (Safety Plan) Overview. 7. OFFEROR'S FINANCIAL STATEMENT 5 points Provide audited financial statement consisting of the balance sheet and annual income statement of Offeror for the Offeror's last fiscal year end preceding the submission of the Proposal, which has been audited or examined by an independent certified public accountant. The Financial Statement of Offeror shall be used to determine an Offeror's net working capital, which is defined as current assets less current liabilities. An Offeror's net working capital shall be considered evidence of the Offeror's ability to provide sufficient financial management of the project being considered. The Offeror's Financial Statement shall be clearly and conspicuously marked as "confidential", and shall be deemed and treated as confidential and excepted from the Public Information disclosure requirements of Texas Government Code Section 552.001 et seq., as such information, if released, would give advantage to a competitor or bidder, and/or would cause substantial competitive harm to Offeror. Please refer to attached financials, marked as "Confidential". END OF SECTION 12-2017 Offeror's Initi 00300 - Part O '`of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT Section 00500 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is by and between City of Pearland (hereinafter called OWNER or City) and Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: Article 1. WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all work as specified or indicated in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents (hereinafter the "Work"). The Work is generally described as follows: Orange Street Service Center Phase 1 Administration Building City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: FA1404 BID NO.: 1220-11 Article 2. ENGINEER The Work has been designed by Huitt-Zollars, Inc., 10350 Richmond Avenue, Suite 300 Houston, Texas who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who is to assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Article 3. CONTRACT TIME 3.1 The Work will be Substantially Complete (as defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions) within Four Hundred (400) days (including weekends and holidays) from the date when the Contract Time commences to run as provided in paragraph 5.01 of the General Conditions (as revised in the Special Conditions if applicable), and completed and ready for Final Payment within Four Hundred and Ninety (490) days from the date when the Contract Time commences to run. No work will be allowed on Sundays. 3.2 Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 5 of the General Conditions. OWNER and CONTRACTOR also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring 4-2015 00500 - 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER One Thousand dollars [($1,000.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 3.1 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion, if CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse or fail to complete the remaining Work within the time set out in the Certificate of Substantial Completion or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER One Thousand dollars ($1000.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in the Certificate of Substantial Completion for completion and readiness for Final Payment. 3.3 Inspection Time. Working hours for the Pearland Inspection personnel are from 7:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding City approved holidays. The Contractor shall notify the OWNER of any required inspection overtime work at least 48 hours in advance and shall pay the overtime wages for the required City inspections. Article 4. CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds $5,619,510.00 (the "Contract Price"). The Contract Price includes the Base Bid $5,619,510.00 as shown in Document 00300 — Bid Proposal. Article 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Section 6.0 "Measurement and Payment" of the General Conditions. Application for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1 Progress Payments. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work and actual quantity of Work completed, in accordance with Article 6 "Measurement and Payment" of the General Conditions. 5.1.1 Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage or actual quantity of Work complete, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with the General Conditions. The OWNER shall make payment within 30 days of receipt of application for payment by the ENGINEER. 5.1.2 Each progress payment shall be less retainage as specified in Paragraph 6.06 of the General Conditions, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near 4-2015 00500 - 2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT to completion and some unexpected and unusual delay occurs due to no fault or neglect on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may upon written recommendation of the ENGINEER pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR at the OWNER's option, may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the Work and, thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive payment of the balance due him under the contract subject only to the conditions stated under "Final Payment." 5.2 Final Payment. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 6.09 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 6.09. Article 6. INTEREST Interest on any overdue payment from OWNER to CONTRACTOR shall be paid in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2251.025 of the Texas Government Code, as amended. Article 7. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 7.1 CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance, or furnishing of the Work. 7.2 CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all available surveys, assessments, reports of explorations, investigations, and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions of the site. Such technical reports and drawings are not Contract Documents, and Owner makes no representations or warranties as to the accuracy of such documents or information, or to whether or not they are complete, comprehensive, or all-inclusive. 7.3 CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in paragraphs 7.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, and CONTRACTOR assumes the risk of such subsurface and physical conditions, and shall furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 4-2015 00500-3of7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT 7.4 CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract documents with respect to existing underground facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said underground facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said underground facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and finish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.5 CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.6 CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor knew or should have known, and CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including any written resolution of any such conflict, error or discrepancy by ENGINEER. In the event of a conflict that was not brought to the OWNER's or ENGINEER's attention prior to the bid, the CONTRACTOR is assumed to have bid the most expensive alternative. Article 8. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents, which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work, consist of the following, each of which are incorporated herein by reference: 8.1 Standard Form of Agreement (Section 00500). 8.2 Performance, Payment, and/or Maintenance Bonds (Sections 00610, 00611, and 00612). 8.3 General Conditions of Agreement (Section 00700), including Attachment No. 1 Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage, Attachment No. 2 Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and Attachment No. 3 Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor. 8.4 Special Conditions of Agreement (Section 00800). 8.5 Plans, consisting of sheets numbered 1 through 155 inclusive with attachments with each sheet bearing the following general title: Orange Street Service Center, Phase 1, Administration Building 8.6 Instructions to Bidders and CONTRACTOR's Bid Proposal, including any Addenda referenced therein. 8.7 Technical Specifications for the Work. 4-2015 00500-4of7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT 8.8 The following, which may be delivered or issued after this Agreement becomes effective: Any Change Orders or other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents in accordance with the General Conditions. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 8. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in the General Conditions. Article 9. MISCELLANEOUS 9.1 Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Section 1, "Definitions and Interpretations" of the General Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 9.2 No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 9.3 OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representative to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 9.4 CONTRACTOR agrees to warranty the Work for a period of one (1) year from Substantial Completion against defects in materials and workmanship. CONTRACTOR agrees to repair or replace any defective work within this warranty period immediately unless such repairs require long lead time materials and equipment in which case CONTRACTOR shall provide an agreeable schedule for repairs at no additional cost to OWNER. 9.5 The Work will be completed according to the Contract Documents and in accordance with codes, ordinances, and construction standards of the City of Pearland, and all applicable laws, codes and regulations of governmental authorities. 9.6 In the event any notice period required under the Contract Documents is found to be shorter than any minimum period prescribed by applicable law, the notice period required shall be construed to be the minimum period prescribed by applicable law. 9.7 This Contract and the Contract Documents, insofar as they relate in any part or in any way to the Work undertaken therein, constitute the entire agreement between the parties hereto, and it is expressly understood and agreed that there are no agreements or promises by and between said parties, except as aforesaid, and that any additions thereto or changes shall be in writing. 4-2015 00500 - 5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT 9.8 The provisions of this Contract shall be applied and interpreted in a manner consistent with each other so as to carry out the purposes and the intent of the parties, but if for any reason any provision is unenforceable or invalid, such provisions shall be deemed severed from this Contract and the remaining provisions shall be carried out with the same force and effect as if the severed provision had not been part of this Contract. 9.9 The headings of the paragraphs are included solely for the convenience of reference and if there is any conflict between the headings and the text of this Contract, the Contract text shall control. 9.10 The waiver of any breach hereof shall not constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach of the same or any other provision hereof. Failure by the OWNER in any instance to insist upon observance or performance by CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed a waiver by CONTRACTOR of any such observance or performance. No waiver will be binding upon OWNER unless in writing and then will be for the particular instance only. Payment of any sum by OWNER to CONTRACTOR with knowledge of any breach or default will not be deemed a waiver of such breach or default or any other breach or default. 9.11 The CONTRACTOR acknowledges that the OWNER (through its employee handbook) considers the following to be misconduct that is grounds for termination of an employee of the OWNER: Any fraud, forgery, misappropriation of funds, receiving payment for services not performed or for hours not worked, mishandling or untruthful reporting of money transactions, destruction of assets, embezzlement, accepting materials of value from vendors, or consultants, and/or collecting reimbursement of expenses made for the benefit of the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR agrees that it will not, directly or indirectly; cause an employee of the OWNER to engage in such misconduct. 9.12 The CONTRACTOR agrees to comply with Appendix A (attached) of the City of Pearland's Title VI Nondiscrimination Plan Assurances. 4-2015 00500 - 6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in duplicate. One counterpart each has been delivered to OWNER and one to CONTRACTOR. This Agreement will be effective upon execution and attestation by authorized representatives of the City of Pearland and upon the following date: Prl t , 2020 OWNER: CONTRACTOR: CITY OF PE,� Df / Construction Nas ers of Houston, Inc. By: Title: Date: 2O By: Title: M5/4 71 Date: / '/7-Z02Q (Corporate Seal) ATTEST k-LL 9 ATTEST C4,h/vo- Address for giving notices Pe °-`- l -66 11S 8 8 Phone: a81-6tqZ- 16'4.o Fax: 81-48r- k7 o2- Agent for service of process: JUSTt END OF SECTION 4-2015 00500-7of7 Title VI Nondiscrimination Assurances APPENDIX A During the performance of this contract, the contractor, for itself, its assignees and successors in interest (hereinaffer referred to as the "contractor") agrees as follows: (1) Compliance with Regulations: The contractor shall comply with the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination in Federally -Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation (hereinafter, "DOT") Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 21, as they may be amended from time to time, (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations), which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this contract. (2) Nondiscrimination: The contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the contract, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment. The contractor shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by Section 21.5 of the Regulations, including employment practices when the contract covers a program set forth in Appendix B of the Regulations. (3) Solicitations for Subcontracts, including Procurements of Materials and Equipment: In all solicitations either by competitive bidding or negotiation made by the contractor for work to be performed under a subcontract, including procurements of materials or leases of equipment, each potential subcontractor or supplier shall be notified by the contractor of the contractor's obligations under this contract and the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination on the grounds of race, color, or national origin. (4) Information and Reports: The contractor shall provide all information and reports required by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant thereto, and shall permit access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities as may be determined by the Sub -Recipient or the Federal Highway Administration to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Regulations, orders and instructions. Where any information required of a contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information the contractor shall so certify to the Sub -Recipient, or the Federal Highway Administration as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts it has made to obtain the information. (5) Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination provisions of this contract, the Sub -Recipient shall impose such contract sanctions as it or the Federal Highway Administration may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to: (a) withholding of payments to the contractor under the contract until the contractor complies, and/or (b) cancellation, termination or suspension of the contract, in whole or in part. (6) Incorporation of Provisions: The contractor shall include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (6) in every subcontract, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto. The contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract or procurement as the Sub -Recipient or the Federal Highway Administration may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for non-compliance. Provided, however, that, in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or supplier as a result of such direction, the contractor may request the Sub -Recipient to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the Sub -Recipient, and, in addition, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States, CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT APPENDIX B House Bill 89 Verification ,ru.s (Person name), the undersigned representative (hereafter referred to as "Representative") of ! , (company or business name, hereafter referred to as "Business Entity"), being an adult over the age of eighteen (18) years of age, after being duly sworn by the undersigned notary, do hereby depose and affirm the following: 1. That Representative is authorized to execute this verification on behalf of Business Entity; 2. That Business Entity does not boycott Israel and will not boycott Israel during the term of any contract that will be entered into between Business Entity and the City of Pearland; and 3. That Representative understands that the term "boycott Israel" is defined by Texas Government Code Section 2270.001 to mean refusing to deal with, terminating business activities with, or otherwise taking any action that is intended to penalize, inflict economic harm on, or limit commercial relations specifically with Israel, or with a person or entity doing business in Israel or in an Israeli -controlled territory, but does not include an action made for ordinary business purposes. SIGNATXJRE OF REPRESENTATIVE SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day of r , 20 *\R .;sue l.Qhin�— Notary Pub CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES FORM 1295 1 of 1 Complete Nos. 1- 4 and 6 if there are interested parties. Complete Nos. 1, 2, 3, 5, and 6 if there are no interested parties. OFFICE USE ONLY CERTIFICATION OF FILING Certificate Number: 2020-608588 Date Filed: 04/16/2020 Date Acknowledged: 1 Name of business entity filing form, and the city, state and country of the business entity's place of business. Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. Pearland, TX United States 2 Name of governmental entity or state agency that is a party to the contract for which the form is being filed. City of Pearland 3 Provide the identification number used by the governmental entity or state agency to track or identify the contract, and provide a description of the services, goods, or other property to be provided under the contract. Resolution #R2020-50 Orange St. Service Center, Phase 1, Administration Building 4 Name of Interested Party City, State, Country (place of business) Nature of interest (check applicable) Controlling Intermediary 1 Davis, Justin Pearland, TX United States X 5 Check only if there is NO Interested Party. ❑ 6 UNSWORN DECLARATION My name is Justin Davis , and my date of birth is 12/7/81 My address is 3908 Third St. Pearland TX 77581 USA (street) (city) (state) (zip code) (country) 1 declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed in Brazoria County, State of Texas , on the 16th day of April 20 20 . (month) (year) r, fir, Signatu of authorize. agent of contracting business entity (Declarant) Forms provided by Texas Ethics Commission www.ethics.state.tx.us Version V1.1.3a6aaf7d Bond No. 54-229123 CITY OF PEARLAND PERFORMANCE BOND Section 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Construction Masters of Houston, Inc.of the City of Pearland , County of Brazoria , and State of Texas, as principal, and United Fire & Casualty Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of $ 5,619,510.00*** for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the 23rd day of March , 2020 , (the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Orange Street Service Center Phase 1 Administration Building City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: FA1404 BID NO.: 1220-11 which Contract, including the Contract Documents as defined therein, is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract Work and shall in all respects duly and faithfully observe and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions, and agreements in and by said Contract agreed and covenanted by the Principal to be observed and performed, and according to the true intent and meaning of said Contract and Contract Documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the Work to be performed thereunder. 12/2007 00610 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PERFORMANCE BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 23rd day of March , 2020 . Principal: Construction By: tern of Houston, Inc 10/41VroZt- Title: Justin Davis, President Address: 3908 3rd Street Pearland, Texas 77581 Telephone: (281) 997-2640 Surety: United Fire & C alty m y By. Title: Mar Smith, Attorney -in -Fact Address: 118 Second Avenue S.E. Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52401 Telephone: (800) 343-9130 Fax: (281)485-4702 Fax: (888) 726-9738 NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL -FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 12/2007 00610 -2 of 2 uM� INSU UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, CEDAR RAPIDS, IA UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, WEBSTER, TX FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, ROCKLIN, CA CERTIFIED COPY OF POWER OF ATTORNEY (original on file at Home Office of Company — See Certification) Inquiries: Surety Department 118 Second Ave SE Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 'NOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, That United Fire & Casualty Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws the State of Iowa; United Fire & Indemnity Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas; and . aancial Pacific Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of California (herein collectively called the Companies), and having their corporate headquarters in Cedar Rapids, State of Iowa, does make, constitute and appoint G.C. BLYSTONE, JR., A.A. SHOTWELL, JR., MARK SMITH, BETTY BUSH, JOSEPH CHARLES BLACKSHEAR, JR, DONNA WEINEL, CHASE WORTHAM, EACH INDIVIDUALLY their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact with power and authority hereby conferred to sign, seal and execute in its behalf all lawful bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature provided that no single obligation shall exceed $40 , 000, 000.00 and to bind the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by the duly authorized officers of the Companies and all of the acts of said Attorney, pursuant to the authority hereby given and hereby ratified and confirmed. The Authority hereby granted is continuous and shall remain in full force and effect until revoked by United Fire & Casualty Company, United Fire & Indemnity Company, and Financial Pacific Insurance Company. This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following bylaw duly adopted on May 15, 2013, by the Boards of Directors of United Fire & Casuahy Company, United Fire & Indemnity Company, and Financial Pacific Insurance Company. "Article VI — Surety Bonds and Undertakings" Section 2, Appointment of Attomey-in-Fact. "The President or any Vice President, or any other officer of the Companies may, from time to time, appoint by written certificates attomeys-in-fact to act in behalf of the Companies in the execution of policies of insurance, bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature. The signature of' any officer authorized hereby, and the Corporate seal, may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attomey or special power of attomey or certification of either authorized hereby; such signature and seal, when so used, being adopted by the Companies as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Companies, to be valid and binding upon the Companies with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. Such attomeys-in-fact, subject to the limitations set of f^,-th in their respective certificates of authority shall have full power to bind the Companies by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach the seal Companies thereto. The President or any Vice President, the Board of Directors or any other officer of the Companies may at any time revoke all power and authority viously given to any attorney -in -fact. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the COMPANIES have each caused these presents to be signed by its vice president and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed this 13t h day of November, 2017 UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY By: State of Iowa, County of Linn, ss: 0n 13th day of November 2017, before me"personally"came Dennis J.'Richmann to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say; that he resides in Cedar Rapids, State of Iowa; that he is a Vice President of United Fire & Casualty Company, a Vice President of United Fire & Indemnity Company, and a Vice President of Financial Pacific Insurance Company the corporations described in and which executed the above instrument that he knows the seal of said corporations; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board of Directors of said corporations and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority, and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporations. to* Judith A. Jones Iowa Notarial Seal Commission number 173041 My Commission Expires 4/232021 Notary Public My commission expires: 4/23/2021 I, Mary A. Bertsch, Assistant Secretary of. United Fire & Casualty Company, and Assistant Secretary of United Fire & Indemnity Company, and Assistant Secretary of Financial Pacific Insurance Company, do hereby certify' that I have compared the foregoing copy of the Power of Attorney and affidavit, and the copy of the Section of the bylaws and resolutions of said Corporations as set forth in said Power of Attorney, with the ORIGINALS ON FILE IN THE HOME OFFICE OF SAID CORPORATIONS, and that the same are correct transcripts thereof, and of the whole of the said originals, and that the said Power of Attorney has not been revoked and is now in full force and effect. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seal of the said Corporations this 23rd day of march , 20 20 ,xosMN T`_ti f# CORPORATE SEAL ...''l A.LIII O • BPOA0049 1217 This paper has a colored background and void pantograph. A Bioefu Assistant Secretary, UF&C & OF&I & FPIC 6 UNITED FIRE GROUP IMPORTANT NOTICE TO OBTAIN INFORMATION OR MAKE A COMPLAINT: United Fire & Casualty Company United Life Insurance Company Addison Insurance Company Lafayette Insurance Company Insurance Brokers & Managers, Inc. American Indemnity Companies You may call United Fire Group's toll free telephone number for information or to make a complaint at: 800-343-9130 You may also write to United Fire Group at: United Fire Group Attn: Bond Department P.O. Box 73909 Cedar Rapids, IA 52407-3909 -or street address - United Fire Group Attn: Bond Department 118 Second Avenue SE Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance at: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR BOND. This notice is for information only and does not become a part or a condition of the attached document and is given to comply with Section 2253,48, Governmental Code, and Section 53-202, Property Code, effective September 1, 2001. HOME OFFICE: 118 Second Avenue SE, PO Box 73909, Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52407-3909 Phone: 319-399-5790 FAX: 319-399-5425 Bond No. 54-229123 CITYOFPEARLAND PAYMENT BOND Section 00611 PAYMENT BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN BY TI IESE PRESENTS: That Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. of the City of Pearland , County of Brazoria , and State of Texas, as principal, and United Fire & Casualty Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of $ 5,619,510.00*** for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the 23rd day of March , 20 20 , (the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Orange Street Service Center Phase 1 Administration Building City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: FA1404 BID NO.: 1220-11 which Contract, including the Contract Documents as defined therein, is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor or material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work provided for in said Contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the Work to be performed thereunder. 07/2006 00611 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PAYMENT BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 23rd day of March , 2020 . Principal: Constructiters o Houston, Inc. By: Title: Justin Davis, President Address: 3908 3rd Street Pearland, Texas 77581 Surety: United Fire & By: Title: Mark Smith, Attorney -in -Fact Address: 118 Second Avenue S.E. Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52401 Telephone: (281) 997-2640 Telephone: (800) 343-9130 Fax: (281) 485-4702 Fax: (888) 726-9738 NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL -FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 07/2006 00611 - 2 01'2 utuL�» INSURANCE UNITED FIRE& CASUALTY COMPANY, CEDAR RAPIDS, IA UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITYCOMPANY, WEBSTER, TX FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, ROCKLIN, CA CERTIFIED COPY OF POWER OF ATTORNEY (original on file at Home Office of Company See Certification) Inquiries: Surety Department 118 Second Ave SE Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 "NOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, That United Fire & Casualty Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws the State of Iowa; United Fire & Indemnity Company, a corporation duly organizedand existing under the laws of the State of Texas; and ..nancial Pacific Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of California (herein collectively called the Companies), and having their corporate headquarters in Cedar Rapids, State of Iowa, does make, constitute and appoint G.C. BLYSTONE, JR., A.A. SHOTWELL, JR., MARK SMITH,' BETTY BUSH, JOSEPH CHARLES BLACKSHEAR, JR, DONNA WEINEL, CHASE WORTHAM, EACH INDIVIDUALLY their true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact with power and authority hereby conferred to sign, seal and execute in its behalf all lawful bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature provided that no single obligation shall exceed $40 , 000 , 000.00 and to bind the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by the duly authorized officers of the Companies and all of the acts of said Attorney, pursuant to the authority hereby given and hereby ratified and confirmed. The Authority hereby granted is continuous and shall remain in full force and effect until revoked by United Fire & Casualty Company, United Fire & Indemnity Company, and Financial Pacific Insurance Company. This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following bylaw duly adopted on May 15, 2013, by the Boards of Directors of United Fire & Casualty Company, United Fire & Indemnity Company, and Financial Pacific Insurance Company. "Article VI — Surety Bonds and Undertakings" Section 2, Appointment of Attorney -in -Fact. "The President or any Vice President, or any other officer of the Companies may, from time to time, appoint' by written certificates attorneys -in -fact to act in behalf of the Companies in the execution of policies of insurance, bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature. The signature of any officer authorized hereby, and the Corporate seal, may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or special power of attorney or certification of either authorized hereby; such signature and seal, when so used, being adopted by the Companies as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Companies, to be valid and binding upon the Companies with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. Such attorneys -in -fact, subject to the limitations set of F ,-th is their respective certificates of authority shall have full power to bind the Companies by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach the seal Companies thereto. The President or any Vice President, the Board of Directors or any other officer of the Companies may at any time revoke all power and authority siously given to any attorney -in -fact. *RA,`t95 `0 111Il T[Rl10' •1ltl State of Iowa, County of Linn, ss: ``�,aG\F5G'1NSbggL 2 : a 1ULY 21 gyp,p_ 1966 4. 440ifili MOOS IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the COMPANIES have each caused these presents to be signed by its vice president and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed this 13 t h day of November , 2017 UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY By: Vice President 0n 13th day of November, 2017, before me personally came Dennis J. Richmann to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say; that he resides in Cedar Rapids, State of Iowa; that he is a Vice President of United Fire & Casualty Company; a Vice President of United Fire & Indemnity Company, and a Vice President of Financial Pacific Insurance Company the corporations described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said corporations; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board of Directors of said corporations and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority, and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporations. Judith A. Jones Iowa Notarial Seal Commission number 173041 My Commission Expires 4/23/2021 Notary Public My commission expires: 4/23/2021 I, Mary A. Bertsch, Assistant Secretary of United Fire & Casualty Company and Assistant Secretary of United Fire & Indemnity Company, and Assistant Secretary of Financial Pacific Insurance Company, do hereby certify that I have compared the foregoing copy of the Power of Attorney and affidavit, and the copy of the Section of the bylaws and resolutions of said Corporations as set forth in said Power of Attorney, with the ORIGINALS ON FILE IN THE HOME OFFICE OF SAID CORPORATIONS, and that the same are correct transcripts thereof, and of the whole of the said originals, and that the said Power of Attorney has not been revoked and is now in full force and effect. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seal of the said Corporations this 23rd day of March CORPORATE SEAL a�C CORPORAT —80— SEAL '4 111 1I,gt" Assistant Secretary, UF&C & OF&I & FPIC BPOA0049 1217 0 UNITED FIRE GROUP IMPORTANT NOTICE TO OBTAIN INFORMATION OR MAKE A COMPLAINT: United Fire & Casualty Company United Life Insurance Company Addison Insurance Company Lafayette Insurance Company Insurance Brokers & Managers, Inc. American Indemnity Companies You may call United Fire Group's toll free telephone number for information or to make a complaint at: 800-343-9130 You may also write to United Fire Group at: United Fire Group Attn: Bond Department P.O. Box 73909 Cedar Rapids, IA 52407-3909 -or street address - United Fire Group Attn: Bond Department 118 Second Avenue SE Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance at: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR BOND. This notice is for information only and does not become a part or a condition of the attached document and is given to comply with Section 2253.48, Governmental Code, and Section 53-202, Property Code, effective September 1, 2001. HOME OFFICE: 118 Second Avenue SE, PO Box 73909, Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52407-3909 Phone: 319-399-5790 FAX: 319-399-5425 Bond No. 54-229123 CITY OF PEA RLAND ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND Section 00612 ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Construction Masters of Houston, Inc.of the City of Pearland , County of Brazoria , and State of Texas, as principal, and United Fire & Casualty Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of $ 5,619,510.00*** for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the 23rd day of March , 20 20 , (the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Orange Street Service Center Phase 1 Administration Building City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: FA1404 BID NO.: 1220-11 which Contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully correct all such work not in accordance with the Contract Documents discovered within the one-year period from the date of substantial completion, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder. 07/2006 00612 - 1012 CITY OF PEARLAND ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 23rd day of March , 20 20 . Principal: Construction By: Surety: sters of Houston, Inc. United Fire & Casualty Title: Justin Davis, President By: Title: Mark Smith, Attorney -in -Fact Address: Address: 3908 3rd Street Pearland, Texas 77581 118 Second Avenue S.E. Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52401 Telephone: (281) 997-2640 Telephone: (800) 343-9130 Fax: (281) 485-4702 Fax: (888) 726-9738 NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL -FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 07/2006 00612 - 2 of 2 uM�NSUNE9 UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, CEDAR RAPIDS, IA UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, WEBSTER, TX FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, ROCKLIN, CA CERTIFIED COPY OF POWER OF ATTORNEY (original on file at Home Office of Company — See Certification) Inquiries: Surety Department 118 Second AveSE Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 "NOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, That United; Fire & Casualty Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws the State of Iowa; United Fire & Indemnity Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas; and ,nancial Pacific Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of California (herein collectively called the Companies), and having their corporate headquarters in Cedar Rapids, State of Iowa, does make, constitute and appoint G.C.'BLYSTONE, JR., A.A. SHOTWELL, JR., MARK SMITH, BETTY BUSH, JOSEPH CHARLES BLACKSHEAR, JR, DONNA WEINEL, CHASE WORTHAM, EACH INDIVIDUALLY their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact with power and authority hereby conferred to sign, seal and execute in its behalf all lawful bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature provided that no single obligation shall exceed $40, 000 , 000.00 and to bind the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by the duly authorized officers of the Companies and all of the acts of said Attorney, pursuant to the authority hereby given andhereby ratified and confirmed. The Authority hereby granted is continuous and shall remain in full force and effect until revoked by United Fire & Casualty Company, United Fire & Indemnity Company, and Financial Pacific Insurance Company. This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following bylaw duly adopted on May 15, 2013, by the Boards of Directors of United Fire & Casualty Company, United Fire & Indemnity Company, and Financial Pacific Insurance Company. "Article VI — Surety Bonds and undertakings" Section 2, Appointment of Attomey-in-Fact. "The President or any Vice President, or any other officer of the Companies may, from time to time, appoint: by written certificates attomeys-in-fact to act in behalf of the Companies in the execution of policies of insurance, bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature. The signature of any officer authorized hereby, and the Corporate seal, may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or special power of attorney or certification of either authorized hereby; such signature and seal, when so used, being adopted by the Companies as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Companies, to be valid and binding upon the Companies with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. Such attomeys-in-fact, subject to the limitations set of forth in their respective certificates of authority shall have full power to bind the Companies by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach the seal Companies thereto. The President or any Vice President, the Board of Directors or any other officer of the Companies may at any time revoke all power and authority viously given to any attomey-in-fact. IWSup ... _Q�2 Fa = DULY2• o.o ._ F. U' 1986 tea Illlllllll% State of Iowa, County of Linn, ss: 0n 13th day of November 2017, before me personally -came DennisJ. Richmann to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say; that he resides m Cedar Rapids, State of Iowa; that he is a Vice President of United Fire & Casualty Company, a Vice President of United Fire & Indemnity Company, and a Vice President of Financial Pacific Insurance Company the corporations described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said corporations; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board of Directors Ins name thereto pursuant to like authority, and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporations. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the COMPANIES have each caused these presents to be signed by its vice president and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed this 13th day of November, 2017 UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY By: Judith A::Jones lowa Notarial Seal Commission number 173041 My Commission Expires 4/23/2021 Notary Public My commission expires: 4/23/2021 I, Mary A. Bertsch, Assistant Secretary of United Fire & Casualty Company and Assistant Secretary of United Fire & Indemnity Company, and Assistant Secretary of Financial Pacific Insurance Company, do hereby certify that I have compared the foregoing copy of the Power of Attorney and affidavit, and the copy of the Section of the bylaws and resolutions of said Corporations as set forth in said Power of Attorney, with the ORIGINALS ON FILE IN THE HOME OFFICE OF SAID CORPORATIONS, and that the same are correct transcripts thereof, and of the whole of the said originals, and that the said Power of Attorney has not been revoked and is now in full force and effect. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seal of the said Corporations this 23rd day of march , 20 20 Oil sCAsvq 4 00919994 4:3• j .V2 nac roes a �. ,pg41111I1190 0; This paper has a colored background and void pantograph. Assistant Secretary, UF&C & OF&I & FPIC BPOA0049 1217 to) UNITED FIRE GROUP IMPORTANT NOTICE TO OBTAIN INFORMATION OR MAKE A COMPLAINT: United Fire & Casualty Company United Life Insurance Company Addison Insurance Company Lafayette Insurance Company Insurance Brokers & Managers, Inc. American Indemnity Companies You may call United Fire Group's toll free telephone number for information or to make a complaint at: 800-343-9130 You may also write to United Fire Group at: United Fire Group Attn: Bond Department P.O. Box 73909 Cedar Rapids, IA 52407-3909 -or street address - United Fire Group Attn: Bond Department 118 Second Avenue SE Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance at: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR BOND. This notice is for information only and does not become a part or a condition of the attached document and is given to comply with Section 2253.48, Governmental Code, and Section 53-202, Property Code, effective September 1, 2001. HOME OFFICE: 118 Second Avenue SE, PO Box 73909, Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52407-3909 Phone: 319-399-5790 FAX: 319-399-5425 CITY OF PEARLAND PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN Section 00615 PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN AND PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT The undersigned contracted with City of Pearland to furnish in connection with certain improvements to real property located in the City of Pearland, TX and owned by the City of Pearland which improvements are described as follows: Demolition of 2 buildings on site and new construction of IIB, 19000 sf, 2 story, Group B Administration Building. In consideration of Pay Estimate No. in the amount of $ the undersigned, on oath, states that all persons and firms who supplied labor and materials to the undersigned in connection with said Project will be fully paid within 30 days of the date of this document by the undersigned for such work through In consideration of the payment herewith made, the undersigned does fully and finally release and hold harmless the City of Pearland and its surety, if any, through the above date from any and all claims, liens, or right to claim or lien, arising out of this Project under any applicable bond, law or statue. It is understood that this affidavit is submitted to induce payment of the above sum and for use by the City of Pearland in assuring the Owner and others that all liens and claims relating to the said Project furnished by the undersigned are paid. State of County of Subscribed and sworn to, before me, this My Commission Expires: Signature Printed Name & Title Company Name day of , 20 5-12-12 CITY OF PEARLAND PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN Notary Public 5-12-12 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page No. 1.0 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.01 Owner, Contractor and Engineer 1.02 Contract Documents 1.03 Subcontractor 1.04 Written Notice 1.05 Work 1.06 Extra Work 1.07 Work Day 1.07-1 Rain Day 1.07-2 Impact Day 1.08 Calendar Day 1.09 Substantially Completed 1.10 Interpretation of Words and Phrases 1.11 Referenced Standards 1.12 Contract Time 1.13 Construction Inspector 1.14 Balancing Change Order 2.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE OWNER 4 2.01 No Warranty of Design 2.02 Right of Entry 2.03 Ownership of Plans 10-2012 00700 - i CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 2.04 Changes and Alterations 2.05 Damages 3.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER 3.01 Owner -Engineer Relationship 3.02 Keeping of Plans and Specifications Accessible 3.03 Preliminary Approval 3.04 Inspection by Engineer 3.05 Determination of Questions and Disputes 3.06 Recommendation of Payment 4.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.01 Independent Contractor 4.02 Contractor's Understanding 4.03 Laws and Ordinances 4.04 Assignment and Subletting 4.05 Performance and Payment Bonds [and Maintenance Bond] 4.06 Insurance 4.07 Permits and Fees 4.08 Texas State Sales Tax 4.09 Contractor's Duty and Superintendence 4.10 Character of Workers 4.11 Labor, Equipment, Materials, Construction Plant and Buildings 4.12 Sanitation 4.13 Cleaning and Maintenance 4.14 Performance of Work 4.15 Right of Owner to Accelerate the Work 10-2012 00700 - ii CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.16 Layout of Work 4.17 Shop Drawings 4.18 Engineer -Contractor Relationship; Observations 4.19 Observation and Testing 4.20 Defects and Their Remedies 4.21 Liability for Proper Performance 4.22 Protection Against Accident To Employees and the Public 4.23 Protection of Adjoining Property 4.24 Protection against Claims of Subcontractors, Laborers, Materialmen, and Furnishers of Equipment, Machinery and Supplies 4.25 Protection Against Royalties or Patented Invention 4.26 Indemnification 4.27 Losses From Natural Causes 4.28 Guarantee 5.0 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.01 Time and Order of Completion 5.02 Extension of Time 5.03 Hindrances and Delays 5.04 Suspension of Work 5.05 Liquidated Damages for Delay 5.06 Change of Contract Time 5.07 Delays Beyond Owner's and Contractor's Control 6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6.01 Discrepancies and Omissions 6.02 Quantities and Measurements 10-2012 00700 - 18 21 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.03 Estimated Quantities 6.04 Price of Work 6.05 Payments 6.06 Partial Payments 6.07 Use of Completed Portions & Punchlist 6.08 Substantial Completion 6.08-1 6.09 Final Payment 6.10 Correction of Work Before Final Payment 6.11 Correction of Work After Final Payment 6.12 Payments Withheld 6.13 Delayed Payments 7.0 EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS 27 7.01 Differing Site Conditions 7.02 Change Orders 7.03 Change Orders 7.04 Request for Work Approval for Work on Non -Work Days 7.05 Minor Changes 7.06 Extra Work 7.07 Time of Filing Claims 8.0 DEFAULT 30 8.01 Default by Contractor 8.02 Supplementation of Contractor Forces 8.03 Cumulative Remedies & Specific Performance 8.04 Cross -Default 10-2012 00700 - iv CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 8.05 Insolvency 8.06 Contingent Assignment 8.07 Waiver of Consequential Damages 8.08 Termination for Convenience 8.09 Default by Owner 9.0 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 35 ATTACHMENT NO. 1: WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE Al ATTACHMENT NO. 2: AGREEMENT FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SWORN RELEASE B 1 ATTACHMENT NO. 3: OWNER'S INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTOR C1 10-2012 00700 - v CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 1.0 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.01 OWNER, CONTRACTOR AND ENGINEER. The OWNER, the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER are those persons or organizations identified as such in the Agreement. The term ENGINEER as used in these General Conditions shall refer to the Engineer or Architect identified in the Agreement, as applicable, and means a person authorized to act as a representative of the entity designated by the OWNER to provide professional services required in connection with the preparation of plans and specifications of this Contract. The term CONSTRUCTION MANAGER as used in these General Conditions shall refer to the Construction Manager identified in the Agreement, as applicable, and means a person authorized to act as representative of the entity designated by the OWNER to provide professional services required in connection with the performance of the work of this Contract. The Owner's representative on the project site shall be the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER or ENGINEER as designated. 1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents shall consist of all of the documents identified in Article 8 of the Standard Form of Agreement, which documents, excluding such documents as may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the Agreement, as referenced in Article 8, shall be bound together in a Project Manual for the Work. All references to the "Contract" or the "Agreement" in these General Conditions of Agreement shall include the Contract Documents. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be binding as if required by all. In the event of any conflict among the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall govern in the following order: (1) Modifications in writing and signed by both parties, including any Change Orders; (2) Standard Form of Agreement; (3) Special Conditions of Agreement; (4) General Conditions of Agreement, including Attachment No. 1 — Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage, Attachment No. 2 — Agreement for Final Payment and CONTRACTOR'S Sworn Release, and Attachment No. 3 — Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor; (5) Addenda, if any; (6) Plans and Specifications referenced or included in the Project Manual; (7) Instructions to Bidders; (8) Bid Proposal; and 08-2018 00700 - 1 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (9) Exhibits: The following Exhibits, if any, attached hereto, are incorporated herein, and are a part of this Contract: In the event a conflict or inconsistency remains between or within the Contract Documents, or the Contract Documents and applicable standards, codes and ordinances, CONTRACTOR shall provide the greater quantity or better quality, or CONTRACTOR shall comply with the more stringent requirements, as determined by ENGINEER. Terms or phrases used in the Contract Documents with a well-known technical or construction industry meaning shall have such recognized meanings. References to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the laws or regulations of any governmental authority, shall mean the latest in effect on the effective date of the Contract, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. 1 .03 SUBCONTRACTOR. The term "subcontractor", as employed herein, includes those entities having a contract with the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor for performance of work on the Project. OWNER shall have no responsibility to any subcontractor for performance of work on the Project contemplated by these Contract Documents, and any such subcontractor shall look exclusively to CONTRACTOR for any payments due subcontractor. 1.04 WRITTEN NOTICE. Written Notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person or by electronic means through the Pro-Trak to the individual or to a partner of the partnership or joint venture, or to an officer of the corporation or company for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested, to the last known business address or registered office of such individual, partnership, joint venture or corporation or company, or to the address for giving notices listed in the Standard Form of Agreement. 1.05 WORK. Unless otherwise stipulated, the CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, services, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities or services of any nature whatsoever necessary for the execution and completion of the Work described in the Standard Form of Agreement. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new, and both workmanship and materials shall be of good quality. The CONTRACTOR shall, if required by the ENGINEER as representative of the OWNER, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well-known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials shall be furnished in strict conformity with the Contract Documents. 1.06 EXTRA WORK. The term "Extra Work", as used in this Contract, shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the ENGINEER as representative of the OWNER, to be performed by the CONTRACTOR to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work shown in the plans. Extra work shall be authorized in writing by the ENGINEER prior to commencement. Extra Work items are paid for on an as needed, as authorized basis only. 1.07 WORK DAY: As used herein, a "Work Day" is defined as any Monday through Friday, not a legal holiday, and any Saturday or Sunday specifically approved by the OWNER, in which the CONTRACTOR can perform six or more hours of work per the current construction schedule. CONTRACTOR agrees to request specific approval from the Construction Manager or 08-2018 00700 - 2 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Owner, in advance, to perform work on Saturdays or Sundays and in so doing agrees to pay all charges and costs for Inspection and or Construction Management services required during the performance of any such approved work. Refer to paragraph 7.04 for procedure to determine cost for Construction Management and Inspection Services for work on non -work days. 1.07-1 RAIN DAY: As used herein, is defined as any WORK DAY during which weather related conditions prevent the CONTRACTOR from performing four (4) or more consecutive hours of work on critical path items as identified in the current construction schedule. CONTRACTOR shall record Rain Days on the Pay Application each month for the review and possible approval by the OWNER. The approved Rain Day is then added to the Contract Time. (See 1.12 Contract Time below) 1.07-2 IMPACT DAY: As used herein, is a day that is added to the CONTRACT TIME by the OWNER by Change Order to extend the Contract Time by one full Work Day. (See 1.12 Contract Time below) Impact Days, once approved by the OWNER, shall extend the Contract Time on a one-to-one basis to replace a Work Day lost to conditions that prevented the CONTRACTOR from performing four (4) or more consecutive hours of work on critical path items. Impact Days are added to the Contract Time by Change Order only at the end of the work and then only if, in the opinion of the OWNER, a time extension is warranted due to delays beyond the control of the Contractor and required to complete the work within the Contract Time. 1.08 CALENDAR DAY. A "calendar day" is any day of the week, month or year no days being excepted. Unless otherwise expressly provided, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). 1 .09 SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED: The terms "Substantially Completed", or "Substantially Complete" or "Substantial Completion" as used in this Contract, shall mean that all major process components of the facility or work have been made suitable for use or occupancy, including appropriate documentation from the equipment suppliers that all of the individual components have been installed in accordance with the specifications and manufacturer's recommendations, the installations have been approved by the ENGINEER and the items have met the start-up and testing requirements of the contract documents or is deemed to be in a condition to serve its intended purpose or requires only minor miscellaneous work and adjustment to achieve Final Completion and Acceptance as determined by the ENGINEER. Upon compliance with the above referenced criteria, ENGINEER shall issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion. PARTIAL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: designation will be given on components of the Work that must be placed into service prior to the completion of the entire Work. The contractor's One Year Warranty period for these items shall begin on the date of Partial Substantial Completion as designated by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall determine and make all such designations. 1.10 INTERPRETATION OF WORDS AND PHRASES. Whenever the words "directed", "permitted", "designated", "required", "ordered", "considered necessary", "prescribed" or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, opinion designation or prescription of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative is intended. Similarly, the words "approved", "acceptable", "satisfactory" or words of like import shall mean that no exception is taken by ENGINEER, but does not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. 08-2018 00700 - 3 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Whenever in the Specifications or Plans of the Contract Documents, the terms of description of various qualities relative to finish, workmanship or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their nature, be specifically and clearly described and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms, the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then, in all such cases, any question of the fulfillment of said Specifications shall be decided by the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative, and said work shall be done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words, terms or clauses defining the character of the work. 1.11 REFERENCED STANDARDS. No provision of any referenced standard specification, or manual shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of the Owner, Engineer, Contractor, or their consultants, employees, or representatives from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to the Engineer or its consultants, employees, or representatives any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibilities contrary to provisions of the Contract Documents. 1.12 CONTRACT TIME The term Contract Time as used herein, refers to the number of Calendar days provided to complete the work or the date, stated in the Agreement: (i) to achieve Substantial Completion, and (ii) to complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER's written recommendation of final payment in accordance with Paragraph 6.09 and as modified as a result of any authorized Extensions. The established Contract Time includes 40 Rain Days per year, based on the average number of rain days per year for the period of June 1898 to December 1996 as recorded by the Alvin Weather Center Record. The Contract Time shall only be extended by (a) the addition of Rain Days equal to the number of actual Rain Days in excess of 40 days per year and (b) the number of Impact Days granted for delays, in the opinion of the Owner, beyond the control of the Contractor. The extension of the Contract Time shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for delays. 1.13 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR The term "Construction Inspector" here in includes those professionals engaged by the OWNER to ensure CONTRACT work's compliance with the specifications and any applicable statutory requirements. 1.14 BALANCING CHANGE ORDER is a change order executed during the close-out process that may add/remove pay items, or adjust quantities of existing items or remove unused pay items or quantities Balancing Change Orders are used to reconcile the unit cost of the work performed or installed by the Contractor. 2.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE OWNER 2.01 NO WARRANTY OF DESIGN. It is understood that the OWNER MAKES NO WARRANTY OF THE ADEQUACY, ACCURACY OR SUFFICIENCY OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS OR ANY OTHER DESIGN DOCUMENTS, AND OWNER HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY SUCH WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. Prior to commencing each portion of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the relevant Contract Documents, shall observe conditions at the site affecting the Work, and shall take field measurements of existing conditions related to the Work. Any errors, omissions or 08-2018 00700 - 4 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT inconsistencies in the Contract Documents noted by the CONTRACTOR, and/or any variance between the Contract Documents and applicable codes, standards or ordinances, shall be promptly reported by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER in writing as a Request for Information. Work performed prior to a Request for Information shall be at the Contractor's risk. If CONTRACTOR fails to perform its obligations under this paragraph, CONTRACTOR shall pay such costs and damages to OWNER as would have been avoided if CONTRACTOR had reported any errors, omissions, inconsistencies or variances in the Contract Documents noted by CONTRACTOR or which should have been noted by a careful study of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall comply with the Contract Documents, all approved modifications thereof and additions and alterations thereto approved in writing by the OWNER. The burden of proof of such compliance shall be upon the CONTRACTOR to show that he has complied with the requirements of the Contract Documents and approved modifications thereof and all approved additions and alterations, thereto, as the same shall have been interpreted by the ENGINEER. 2.02 RIGHT OF ENTRY. The OWNER reserves the right to enter the property or location on which the work herein contracted for is to be performed, constructed or installed, for itself or such agent or agents as it may select, for the purpose of inspecting the work, or for the purpose of performing, constructing or installing such collateral work as the OWNER may desire. The OWNER shall have the right to make inspections at all reasonable times, and the CONTRACTOR hereby waives any claims for extension of time and/or compensation for any loss or damage if his work shall be delayed by reason of such inspection, performance, construction or installation of collateral work. 2.03 OWNERSHIP OF PLANS. All plans, specifications and copies thereof furnished by the OWNER shall not be reused on other work and, with the exception of the sets forming the part of the signed Contract Documents, are to be returned to the OWNER on request at the completion of the Work. All plans and models are the property of the OWNER. 2.04 CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations, additions and deletions as the OWNER may see fit, in the Work, including but not limited to changes in line, grade, form, dimensions, plans or specifications for the Work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of construction, without affecting the validity of this Contract and the corresponding Performance and Payment Bonds. If such changes or alterations or deletions diminish the quantity or the value of the Work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for compensation or damages, including lost or anticipated profits on the Work that may be affected. If the amount of Work is increased and the work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid for according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price, if any, established for such work under this Contract, otherwise, such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Article 7 hereof for Extra Work. In case the OWNER shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any Work already done or material already furnished or used in said Work, then the OWNER shall compensate the CONTRACTOR for any material or labor so used and for any actual loss occasioned by such change due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the Work as originally planned. 2.05 DAMAGES. In the event the OWNER is damaged in the course of the work by the act, negligence, omission, mistake or default of the CONTRACTOR, or should the 08-2018 00700 - 5 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR unreasonably delay the progress of the work being done by others on the job so as to cause loss for which the OWNER becomes liable, then the CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for such loss. 3.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER 3.01 OWNER -ENGINEER RELATIONSHIP. The ENGINEER shall serve as the OWNER'S representative during construction. The duties, responsibilities and limitations on the authority of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents; and the ENGINEER shall not have authority to extend the OWNER's liability or to bind the OWNER for any additional liability of any nature whatsoever without the written consent of the OWNER. Any communications by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR regarding the Work shall be issued through the ENGINEER. It is the intent of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the Work; therefore, written decisions or directions rendered by the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising therefrom shall be resolved as provided in Article 7. Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the OWNER'S representative shall have the authority to issue written stop work orders whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE. The ENGINEER shall furnish the CONTRACTOR with four (4) copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to the CONTRACTOR, and the CONTRACTOR shall keep one full size copy of the same constantly accessible on the job site, with the latest revisions noted thereon. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for preserving the Plans and Specifications, timely and accurately updated, for reference and review by the OWNER or the ENGINEER and submittal of redlines during closeout. 3.03 PRELIMINARY APPROVAL. The ENGINEER shall not have the power to waive the obligations imposed under this Contract for the furnishing by the CONTRACTOR of new material of good quality, and for good and workmanlike performance of the Work as herein described, and in full accordance with the Contract Documents, without alteration, deletion or change. No failure or omission of the OWNER'S representative to discover, object to or condemn any non -conforming or defective work or material, or to stop work, shall release the CONTRACTOR from the obligation to fully and properly perform the Contract, including without limitation, the obligation to at once remove and properly replace any defective work or material at any time prior to final acceptance, upon discovery of such non -conforming or defective work or material. Any questioned Work may be ordered taken up or removed for inspection by the ENGINEER prior to final acceptance, and if found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, all expense of removing, inspection and repair or replacement shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR; otherwise the expense thus incurred shall be allowed as Extra Work and shall be paid for by the OWNER, provided that where inspection or approval is specifically required by the Specifications prior to performance of certain work, should the CONTRACTOR proceed with such work without requesting prior inspection or approval, he shall bear all expense of taking up, removing and replacing this work if so directed by the ENGINEER. 08-2018 00700 - 6 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 3.04 INSPECTION BY ENGINEER. The ENGINEER will make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work and to determine if such Work generally meets the essential performance and design features and the technical, functional /or engineering requirements of the Contract Documents, and is in all other respects being performed in compliance with the Contract Documents. However, the ENGINEER shall not be responsible for making any detailed, exhaustive, comprehensive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality and/or quantity of the work, nor shall the ENGINEER be in any way responsible, directly or indirectly, for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, quality, procedures, programs, safety precautions or lack of same incident to the Work being performed or any part thereof. The ENGINEER shall use reasonable care to prevent deviation from the intent and substance of the Contract Documents by the CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Work and any part thereof and, on the basis of such on -site observations, will keep the OWNER informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the CONTRACTOR. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement or any other Contract Document, the ENGINEER shall not be in any way responsible or liable for any acts, errors, omissions or negligence of the CONTRACTOR, any subcontractors, agents, servants or employees or any other person, firm or corporation performing or attempting to perform any of the Work. 3.05 DETERMINATION OF QUESTIONS AND DISPUTES. In order to prevent delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is agreed that the ENGINEER shall, in all cases, determine the quantities and qualities of the several kinds of Work, which are to be paid for under this Contract. The ENGINEER shall address all questions in relation to said Work and the construction thereof, as well as all claims, disputes and other matters in question between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER relating to the execution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents. In the event the ENGINEER shall become aware of or shall receive information that there is a dispute or a possible dispute as to the reasonable interpretation of the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, or any other dispute or question, the ENGINEER shall, within a reasonable time, provide a written interpretation of the Contract Documents or a written decision on all questions arising relative to the execution of the Work, copies of which shall be delivered to all parties to the Contract. If the CONTRACTOR or OWNER desires to take exception to any directions, order, interpretation or instructions of the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR or OWNER shall present any such claim to the ENGINEER in accordance with the provisions of Section 7.07. 3.06 RECOMMENDATION OF PAYMENT. The ENGINEER shall review the CONTRACTOR's application for payment and supporting documents, shall determine the amount owed to the CONTRACTOR and shall provide written recommendation to the OWNER for payment to the CONTRACTOR in such amount. Such recommendation of payment to CONTRACTOR shall constitute a representation to the OWNER of the ENGINEER's judgment that the work has progressed to the point indicated, to the best of his knowledge, information and belief; however, such recommendation of an application for payment to CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed an acceptance of any defective or non -conforming Work. Any recommendation of payment by the ENGINEER shall be subject to OWNER's rights to withhold payment under Section 6.12 and as otherwise provided in the Contract. 08-2018 00700 - 7 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.01 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR is, and shall remain, an independent contractor, solely responsible for the manner and method of completing the Work under this Contract, with full and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise and control his own employees and to determine the means, method and manner of performing such Work, so long as such methods comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and do not adversely affect the completed improvements or any other property abutting or adjoining the Work area, the OWNER and ENGINEER being interested only in the result obtained and conformity of such completed improvements to the Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents. The fact that the OWNER or ENGINEER as the Owner's representative shall have the right to observe CONTRACTOR's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the OWNER and the ENGINEER hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or affect the status of the CONTRACTOR as an independent contractor with respect to either the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER' s representative or to the CONTRACTOR's own employees or to any other person, firm or corporation. 4.02 CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING. It is understood and agreed that the CONTRACTOR has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the Work, the conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the Work, the general and local conditions, including but not limited to weather, access, lay down and storage areas, and all other matters which in any way affect the Work under this Contract. It is further understood that the CONTRACTOR has satisfied himself as to the terms, meaning, intent and requirements of all of the Contract Documents, and applicable laws, codes, regulations and ordinances. CONTRACTOR hereby warrants and represents that it has taken into consideration all of the foregoing factors, and CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work for the Contract Price and within the Contract Time. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the OWNER or the ENGINEER, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 4.03 LAWS AND ORDINANCES. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state or local laws, codes, ordinances, permits and regulations, regardless of whether the same are adopted before or after the execution of this Contract, which in any manner affect the Contract or the work, and shall indemnify, save and hold harmless the OWNER and the ENGINEER against any claim arising out of the violation of any such laws, ordinances and regulations, whether by the CONTRACTOR or his agents, employees, subcontractors or vendors. If the CONTRACTOR observes that the Plans and Specifications are at variance with federal or state laws or codes or the ordinances or regulations of the City, he shall promptly notify the ENGINEER in writing, and any necessary changes shall be made as provided in the Contract for changes in the work. If the CONTRACTOR performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, codes, ordinances, rules or regulations, or if CONTRACTOR reasonably should have known of any such violation, and without such notice to the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The OWNER is a Political Subdivision of the State of Texas, and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the OWNER may enter into contracts, shall be controlling and shall be considered as part of this Contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. Neither the act 08-2018 00700 - 8 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT of OWNER entering into this Contract, nor OWNER's performance hereunder, shall constitute a waiver of any immunity from suit enjoyed by OWNER under applicable law, all such rights and defenses being hereby expressly reserved, notwithstanding any term or provision herein to the contrary. The Code of Ordinances and other applicable regulations of the OWNER shall be deemed to be embodied in this Contract. The prevailing wage rates applicable to this Project shall be either Document 00811 — Wage Scale for Engineering Construction, or Document 00813 — Wage Scale for Building Construction, or both, as set out in the Project Manual. 4.04 ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this Contract and that he will not assign, by power of attorney or otherwise, or sublet said Contract, or any rights, duties or obligations arising thereunder, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of the OWNER, and that no part or feature of the Work will be sublet to anyone objectionable to the ENGINEER or the OWNER. In addition, the OWNER reserves the right to disapprove the subletting of this Contract or any portion hereof on any basis whatsoever. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the subletting of any portion or feature of the Work or materials required in the performance of this Contract shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligations to the OWNER, as provided for by this Agreement. 4.05 PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT AND MAINTENANCE BONDS. In the event the Contract Price shall be in excess of $25,000.00, the CONTRACTOR shall execute separate Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds, each in the sum of one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Price, and each in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. If the Contract Price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statutory bonds will not be required. All required Bonds shall be payable to OWNER and on forms approved by the OWNER, and shall be executed by a corporate surety in accordance with Article 7.19-1 of the Texas Insurance Code. It is agreed that the Contract shall not be in effect until such original Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds are delivered to and approved by the OWNER. The cost of the premium for the Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds, should Maintenance Bonds be required, shall be included in the CONTRACTOR's Bid Proposal. All bonds shall be issued by Texas Department of Insurance approved surety companies. 4.06 INSURANCE. The CONTRACTOR, at his own expense, shall procure, maintain and keep in force throughout the duration of the Work, and throughout the Guarantee Period, insurance as specified in Attachment No. 1 hereto with regard to Workers' Compensation Insurance, and as specified in Attachment No. 3 hereto with regard to all other Insurance. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this Contract, whether performed by the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor, or others for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. 4.07 PERMITS AND FEES. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, licenses, and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, and which are legally required at the time bids are received. Permits required by the City of Pearland will be issued as a NO FEE permit. 4.08 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX. Materials incorporated into this project are exempt from State Sales according to provisions of the Texas Tax Code, Chapter 151, Subsection H. 08-2018 00700 - 9 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit or exemption certificate which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the Work without paying tax at due time of purchase. 4.09 CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE. The CONTRACTOR shall give adequate attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this Contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the ENGINEER as the OWNER'S representative. The superintendent shall represent the CONTRACTOR in his absence and shall act as the agent of the CONTRACTOR, and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the CONTRACTOR is essential to the proper performance of the Work, and lack of such supervision shall be an act of default, and grounds for suspending operations of the CONTRACTOR. The Superintendent cannot be removed from the project without the consent of the Owner; the Superintendent must speak and understand the English language; the Superintendent must be on site when any work on the project is being done, even when a subcontractor is performing the work. The Work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the CONTRACTOR, and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. Neither the OWNER nor the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative will be responsible for the acts or omissions of the CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors or any of its agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work. 4.10 CHARACTER OF WORKERS. The CONTRACTOR agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance of the type of work required under this Contract, to do the Work, and agrees that whenever the ENGINEER shall inform him in writing that any worker or workers on the Work are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful or disorderly, or in the ENGINEER's opinion, are not using their best efforts for the progress of the Work, such worker or workers shall be discharged from the Work and shall not again be employed on the Work without the ENGINEER's written consent. OWNER reserves the right to bar any person, subcontractor, or supplier found to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or not using their best efforts to progress work or considered to be a threat to the health, safety and welfare to the project or workforce. 4.11 LABOR, EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, CONSTRUCTION PLANT, AND BUILDINGS. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, services, tools, equipment, machinery, supplies, facilities, utilities and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this Contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that the OWNER shall furnish same; and further, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, all means of construction and any and all parts of the Work, whether the CONTRACTOR has been paid, partially paid or not paid for such Work, until the entire Work is completed and accepted. The building or placement of structures for housing workers or offices, or the erection of tents or other forms of protection, will be permitted only with the ENGINEER's written permission, and at 08-2018 00700 - 10 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT such places as the ENGINEER shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structures shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER. Any structures of any nature constructed, placed or erected by the CONTRACTOR for the purposes herein set out, shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as to the proper erection, placement or construction thereof; and the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the ENGINEER or OWNER harmless from any claims of any nature whatsoever brought against either of them for damages allegedly sustained by anyone by reason of the erection, placement, construction or maintenance of CONTRACTOR's buildings or structures. 4.12 SANITATION. Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers and others on the Work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the CONTRACTOR in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the ENGINEER, and their use shall be strictly enforced. Any structures of any nature constructed or erected by the CONTRACTOR for the purposes herein set out, shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as to the proper erection or construction thereof, and the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the ENGINEER and OWNER harmless from any claims of any nature whatsoever brought against either of them for damages allegedly sustained by anyone by reason of the erection, construction or maintenance of CONTRACTOR's buildings. 4.13 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times keep and maintain the premises free from accumulation of debris, trash and waste. The CONTRACTOR shall remove waste, debris and trash at the end of each work day. CONTRACTOR shall remove all such debris, trash and waste, tools, scaffolding and surplus materials, and shall leave the Work broom -clean or its equivalent, upon completion of the Work. The Work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute, the OWNER may remove the debris, trash, waste and surplus materials, and charge the cost to the CONTRACTOR. 4.14 PERFORMANCE OF WORK. It is further agreed that it is the intent of this Contract that all Work must be done and all material must be furnished in accordance with the generally accepted practice for such materials furnished or work completed, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.15 RIGHT OF OWNER TO ACCELERATE THE WORK. If at any time the methods or equipment used by the CONTRACTOR, or the work force supplied are found to be inadequate to achieve the progress required to Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time, the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative, may order the CONTRACTOR in writing to supplement its forces and/or equipment, or work shifts or overtime, or otherwise improve its efficiency and rate of progress to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time, and the CONTRACTOR shall comply with such order, at its own cost and expense. 4.16 LAYOUT OF WORK. Except as specifically provided herein, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out work by means of construction surveying and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER and in conformance with the Contract Documents. 4.17 SHOP DRAWINGS. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own Work or in that of any other contractor, six (6) checked copies, unless otherwise specified, of all shop and/or setting drawings and schedules 08-2018 00700 - 11 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT required for the work of the various trades. Contractor will check and approve shop drawings for compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and will so certify by stamp on each drawing prior to submittal to ENGINEER. Any drawings submitted without Contractor's stamp of approval will not be considered and will be returned to him for proper submission. The ENGINEER shall pass upon them with reasonable promptness, indicating desired corrections. The CONTRACTOR shall make any corrections required by the ENGINEER, file with him two (2) corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed. The ENGINEER's approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for deviations from the Contract Documents, unless he has, in writing, called the ENGINEER's attention to such deviations at the time of the submission, and the ENGINEER has acknowledged and accepted such deviations in writing, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to fully and completely review all shop drawings to ascertain their effect on his ability to perform the required Contract Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and within the Contract Time. Such review by the ENGINEER shall be for the sole purpose of determining the apparent sufficiency of said drawings or schedules to result in finished improvements in conformity with the Contract Documents, and shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his duty as an independent contractor as previously set forth, it being expressly understood and agreed that the ENGINEER does not assume any duty to pass upon the propriety or adequacy of such drawings or schedules, or any means or methods reflected thereby, in relation to the safety of either person or property during CONTRACTOR's performance hereunder, and any action taken by the ENGINEER shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility and liability to comply with the Contract Documents. OWNER, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR shall make all submittals, review comments, notes, corrections, schedules and updates, testing results, payment applications, instructions and other communications by means of the OWNER'S Pro-Trak. The OWNER, ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR shall each retain such hard copies form this system as are required for their specific record keeping requirements. No documents shall be removed from this system or destroyed except those being replaced by the systems protocols as a latest version document. All requirements for written communications, submittals, comments, instructions or other documents processed by means of this system shall have the same legal or time sensitive status as if they had been hand delivered in hard copy to their intended addressee. 4.18 ENGINEER -CONTRACTOR RELATIONSHIP; OBSERVATIONS. It is agreed by the CONTRACTOR that the ENGINEER, as the OWNER's representative, shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint such subordinate engineers, representatives or observers as the said ENGINEER may from time to time deem proper to observe the materials furnished and the Work done under this Agreement. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, representatives or observers for the proper observation and examination of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, representatives or observers so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and the Contract Documents, provided, however, should the CONTRACTOR object to any orders by any 08-2018 00700 - 12 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT subordinate engineer, representative or observer, the CONTRACTOR may, within three (3) days, make written appeal to the ENGINEER for his decision. 4.19 OBSERVATION AND TESTING. The OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe, inspect and test the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation, inspection and testing at any location wherever Work is in preparation or progress. The CONTRACTOR shall ascertain the scope of any observation, inspection or testing which may be contemplated by the OWNER or the ENGINEER and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the Work will be ready for such observation, inspection or testing. The OWNER or the ENGINEER may reject any Work found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such deficiencies, and regardless of whether the ENGINEER has previously accepted the Work through oversight or otherwise. If any Work is covered without approval or consent of the OWNER, it must, if requested by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, be uncovered for examination, at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. In the event that any part of the Work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for the OWNER or the ENGINEER to make observations of such Work or require testing of said Work, then in such event, the OWNER or the ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by independent persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the Contract Documents. If any Work, which is required to be inspected, tested or approved, is covered up without written approval or consent of the OWNER or the ENGINEER, it must, if requested by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation and testing, at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR unless otherwise provided herein. Any Work which fails to meet the requirements of such tests, inspections or approval, and any Work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be considered defective. Such defective Work and any other work affected thereby shall be corrected at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. Neither observations by the OWNER or by the ENGINEER, nor inspections, certifications, tests or approvals made by the OWNER, the ENGINEER or other persons authorized under this Agreement to make such inspections, tests or approvals, shall relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.20 DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES. It is further agreed that if the Work or any part thereof or any material brought on the site of the Work for use in the Work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the ENGINEER as unsuitable or not in conformity with the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the ENGINEER, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such Work so that it shall be in full accordance with this Contract, It is further agreed that any such remedial action contemplated herein shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense. 08-2018 00700 - 13 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.21 LIABILITY FOR PROPER PERFORMANCE. Engineering construction drawings and specifications, as well as any additional instructions and information concerning the Work to be performed, passing from or through the ENGINEER, shall not be interpreted as requiring or allowing the CONTRACTOR to deviate from the Contract Documents, the intent of such drawings, specifications and any other such instructions being to define with particularity the agreement of the parties as to Work the CONTRACTOR is to perform. CONTRACTOR shall be fully and completely liable and contractually bound, at his own expense, for design, construction, installation and use or non-use of all items and methods incident to the performance of the Contract, including, without limitation, the adequacy of all temporary supports, shoring, bracing, scaffolding, machinery or equipment, safety precautions or devices, similar items or devices used by him during construction, and work performed either directly or incident to construction, and for all loss, damage or injury incident thereto, either to person or property, whether such damage be suffered by the ENGINEER, the OWNER or any other person not a party to this Contract. Any review of Work in progress or any visit or observation during construction, or any clarification of Contract Documents by the ENGINEER or OWNER, or any agent, employee or representative of either of them, whether through personal observation on the Project site or by means of approval of shop drawings for construction or construction processes, or by other means or methods, is agreed by the CONTRACTOR to be for the purpose of observing the extent and nature of Work completed or being performed, as measured against the Contract Documents, or for the purpose of enabling the CONTRACTOR to more fully understand the Contract Documents so that the completed construction Work will conform thereto, and shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR from full and complete responsibility for proper performance of his Work on the Project, including, without limitation, the propriety of means and methods of the CONTRACTOR in performing said Contract, and the adequacy of any designs, plans or other facilities for accomplishing such performance. Any action by the ENGINEER or the OWNER in visiting or observing during construction, or any clarification of Contract Documents shall not constitute a waiver of CONTRACTOR'S liability for damages as herein set out. Deviation by the CONTRACTOR from Contract Documents, whether called to the CONTRACTOR's attention or not, shall in no way relieve CONTRACTOR from his responsibility to complete all work in accordance with said Contract Documents, and further shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of his liability for loss, damage or injury as herein set out. 4.22 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the safety of himself, his employees and persons entering the project site, as well as for the protection of the improvements being erected and the property of himself or any other person, as a result of his operations hereunder. The CONTRACTOR shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times exercise reasonable precautions for the safety of employees and others on or near the Work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded, as a minimum, in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary machinery guards, safe walkways, ladders, bridges, gangplanks, barricades, fences, traffic control, warning signs and other safety devices. 08-2018 00700 - 14 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT No alcoholic beverages, non-prescription drugs, or unsafe practices shall be allowed on the Work site. CONTRACTOR shall dismiss anyone participating in any of the above from the Work site for the duration of the Project. Only prescription drug uses with a doctor's authorization to perform construction activities shall be allowed on the Work site. Violation of this provision is a default under the Contract. The use, possession, sale, transfer, purchase or being under the influence of alcohol, drugs or any other illegal or unlawful substance by CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR's employees, or CONTRACTOR's subcontractors and employees at any time at the Work site or while on company business is prohibited. CONTRACTOR shall institute and enforce appropriate drug testing guidelines and program. All accidents or injuries to CONTRACTOR's employees working on the job site must be reported verbally and in writing to the ENGINEER immediately, and within no more than eight (8) hours. The safety precautions actually taken and their adequacy shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, in his sole discretion as an independent contractor. Inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative concerning omissions under thus paragraph as the Work progresses, are intended as reminders to the CONTRACTOR of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty by ENGINEER, or OWNER's representative to supervise safety precautions by either the CONTRACTOR or any of his subcontractors. 4.23 PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY. The CONTRACTOR shall employ proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which might be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this Agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent or adjoining property. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, SAVE AND HOLD HARMLESS THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, OWNER AND ENGINEER AGAINST ANY CLAIM OR CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, LOSS, COSTS OR EXPENSES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ATTORNEY'S FEES, DUE TO ANY INJURY TO ANY ADJACENT OR ADJOINING PROPERTY, ARISING OR GROWING OUT OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT SUCH DAMAGE, LOSS, COST OR EXPENSE IS CAUSED IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF OWNER AND/OR ENGINEER. 4.24 PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES THAT HE WILL PROMPTLY PAY WHEN DUE, AND WILL INDEMNIFY, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ALL CLAIMS GROWING OUT OF THE DEMANDS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, WORKERS, MECHANICS, MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY AND PARTS THEREOF, EQUIPMENT, POWER TOOLS AND ALL SUPPLIES, INCLUDING COMMISSARY, INCURRED IN THE FURTHERANCE OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THIS CONTRACT. When so desired by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If the CONTRACTOR fails to do so, then the OWNER may, at the option of the OWNER, either pay directly any unpaid bills of which the OWNER has written notice, or withhold from the CONTRACTOR's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably 08-2018 00700 - 15 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT sufficient to liquidate any and all such claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payments to the CONTRACTOR shall be resumed in full, in accordance with the terms of this Contract. Any and all communications between any parties under this paragraph shall be in writing. Nothing contained in this paragraph or this Agreement shall create, establish or impose any relationship, contractual or otherwise, between OWNER and any subcontractor, laborer or supplier of CONTRACTOR, nor shall it create, establish or impose any duty upon OWNER to pay or to see to the payment of any subcontractor, laborer or supplier of CONTRACTOR. 4.25 PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENTED INVENTION. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright, by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or owner thereof THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DEFEND ALL SUITS OR CLAIMS FOR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT OR COPYRIGHT AND SHALL INDEMNIFY, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ANY LOSS OR LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT THEREOF, EXCEPT SUCH SUITS AND CLAIMS ARISING OUT OF A PARTICULAR DESIGN, DEVICE, MATERIAL OR PROCESS OR THE PRODUCT OF A PARTICULAR MANUFACTURER OR MANUFACTURERS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED BY THE OWNER; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, IF CHOICE OF ALTERNATE DESIGN, DEVICE, MATERIAL OR PROCESS IS ALLOWED TO THE CONTRACTOR, OR IF CONTRACTOR KNEW OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE PATENT OR COPYRIGHT AND FAILED TO PROMPTLY NOTIFY OWNER IN WRITING, THEN THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER HARMLESS FROM ANY LOSS OR LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT THEREOF. 4.26 INDEMNIFICATION. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD THE ENGINEER AND THE OWNER HARMLESS FROM ANY CLAIMS OR DEMANDS OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER MADE BY ANY EMPLOYEE, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR SUBCONTRACTORS OF CONTRACTOR, OR BY ANY UNION, TRADE ASSOCIATION, WORKER'S ASSOCIATION OR OTHER GROUPS, ASSOCIATIONS OR INDIVIDUALS, ALLEGEDLY REPRESENTING EMPLOYEES OF THE CONTRACTOR, IN ANY DISPUTE BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS EMPLOYEES, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY INVOLVING, GROWING OUT OF OR ARISING FROM CLAIMS BY SUCH EMPLOYEES FOR WAGES, SALARY, COMPENSATION, BENEFITS, WORKING CONDITIONS OR ANY OTHER SIMILAR COMPLAINT OR CLAIM WHICH MAY BE MADE. THE CONTRACTOR, HIS SURETIES AND INSURANCE CARRIERS SHALL DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER AND THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS, REPRESENTATIVES, AGENTS AND EMPLOYEES FROM AND AGAINST ALL DAMAGES, CLAIMS, LOSSES, DEMANDS, SUITS, LIABILITIES, JUDGMENTS AND COSTS OF ANY CHARACTER WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEY'S FEES AND EXPENSES, AND SHALL BE REQUIRED TO PAY ANY JUDGMENT THEREFOR, WITH COSTS, WHICH MAY BE OBTAINED AGAINST THE OWNER AND/OR THE ENGINEER OR ANY OF THEIR OFFICERS, REPRESENTATIVES, AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES, ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM OR ALLEGEDLY ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM THE PERFORMANCE 08-2018 00700 - 16 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT OF THE WORK, PROVIDED THAT ANY SUCH DAMAGES, CLAIM, LOSS, DEMAND, SUIT, LIABILITY, JUDGMENT, COST OR EXPENSE: (A) ARISES OUT OF OR RESULTS FROM IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR ALLEGEDLY ARISES OUT OF OR RESULTS FROM IN WHOLE OR IN PART, ANY BREACH OF THIS AGREEMENT OR BREACH OF WARRANTY BY CONTRACTOR; OR (B) IS ATTRIBUTABLE TO BODILY INJURY, SICKNESS, DISEASE OR DEATH OR INJURY TO OR DESTRUCTION OF TANGIBLE PROPERTY, INCLUDING THE LOSS OF USE RESULTING THEREFROM; AND IS CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART OR IS ALLEGEDLY CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY ANY NEGLIGENT ACT OR OMISSION OF THE CONTRACTOR, ANY SUBCONTRACTOR, THEIR AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES OR ANYONE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY EMPLOYED BY ANY ONE OF THEM OR ANYONE FOR WHOSE ACTS ANY OF THEM MAY BE LIABLE, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT IT IS CAUSED IN PART OR ALLEGEDLY CAUSED IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF OWNER, ENGINEER AND/OR A PARTY INDEMNIFIED HEREUNDER. Notwithstanding the foregoing or anything in the Agreement to the contrary, in accordance with the provisions of Section 130.002 of the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code, CONTRACTOR shall not be obligated to indemnify or hold harmless the ENGINEER, his agents, servants or employees, from liability for damage that is caused by or results from defects in plans, designs or specifications prepared, approved or used by the ENGINEER, or negligence of the ENGINEER in the rendition or conduct of professional duties called for or arising out of any construction contract and the plans, designs or specifications that are a part of the construction contract, and arises from personal injury or death, property injury, or any other expense that arises from personal injury, death, or property injury. This indemnity agreement is a continuing obligation, and shall survive notwithstanding completion of the Work, Final Payment, expiration of the warranty period, termination of the Contract, and abandonment or takeover of the Work. CONTRACTOR's indemnification obligations hereunder shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts, and shall not be limited by any limitation on amounts or coverage of insurance provided or to be provided under this Contract. 4.27 LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES. All loss, cost, expense or damage to the CONTRACTOR arising out of the nature of the Work to be done or from any unforeseen circumstances in the prosecution of the same, or from the action of the elements, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the Work, shall be sustained and borne by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost and expense. 08-2018 00700 - 17 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.28 GUARANTEE. The CONTRACTOR hereby guarantees all the Work under the Contract to be free from defects or deficiencies in material in every particular and free from defects or deficiencies in workmanship; and against unusual damage from proper and usual use; and agrees to replace or to re -execute without cost to the OWNER such Work as may be found to be defective, deficient or otherwise not in conformance with the Contract Documents, and to make good all damages caused to other work or material, due to such defective Work or due to its required replacement or re -execution. This guarantee shall cover a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion or Partial Substantial Completion of Work under the Contract, as evidenced by the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Neither the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Final Payment, nor any provision in the Contract Documents shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for defective, deficient or non -conforming material or workmanship during the period covered by the guarantee. The one-year period of guarantee will not limit the OWNER'S other rights under common law with respect to any defects, deficiencies or non -conforming Work discovered after one year. If this one-year guarantee conflicts with other warranties or guarantees, the longer period of warranty or guarantee will govern. 5.0 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.01 TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION. It is the meaning and intent of this Contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed to prosecute his Work at such times and seasons, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conducive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and the time of prosecution shall be such that the Work shall be Substantially Completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this Contract and the Contract Time; provided, also, that when the OWNER is having other work done, either by contract or by his own forces, the ENGINEER may direct the time and manner of constructing the Work done under this Contract, so that conflict will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the OWNER shall be harmonized, and the CONTRACTOR shall fully cooperate and coordinate its Work with OWNER or such other contractors. The CONTRACTOR shall submit, an updated schedule with every pay estimate for review by the ENGINEER, schedules which shall show the order in which the CONTRACTOR proposes to carry on the Work, with dates on which the CONTRACTOR will start the several parts of the work, and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. Such schedules shall show completion of the Work within the Contract Time, and/or shall show such recovery efforts as CONTRACTOR intends to undertake in the event Substantial Completion of the Work is delayed. 5.02 EXTENSION OF TIME. The CONTRACTOR agrees that he has submitted his Bid Proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this Project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions as hereinafter set forth, and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this Contract, except when Substantial Completion of the Work has been delayed solely by strikes, lockouts, fires, Acts of God, or by any other cause which the ENGINEER shall decide justifies the delay. The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER prompt notice, in writing and within three (3) days of the start of any such delay, of the cause of any such delay, and its estimated effect on the Work and the schedule for completion of the Work. Upon receipt of a written request for an extension of the Contract Time from the CONTRACTOR, supported by relevant and all requested documentation, the ENGINEER shall submit such written request, together with his written recommendation, to the 08-2018 00700 - 18 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT OWNER for consideration. If the delay is not attributable in whole or in part to any act or omission of CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors or suppliers, and if the OWNER determines that CONTRACTOR is entitled to an extension of time under the terms of the Contract, the OWNER shall grant an extension of time for Substantial Completion of the Work, sufficient to compensate for the delay, and such extension of time shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy, except as may be otherwise provided herein. No extensions of Contract Time shall be made for delays occurring prior to the Contractor's mobilization as defined in Section 01505 MOBILIZATION. The Contract Time as defined in the Bid Proposal and other sections herein incorporates 40 Rain Days per calendar year or an average of 3.33 days per calendar month. The CONTRACTOR is required to keep record of all weather related delays and to submit the monthly count on each Pay Application. The Owner's Representative shall review and sign off on this record as a part of the Pay Application approval process every month. If, during preparation of the Balancing Change Order, the status of the work progress requires an extension of the Contract Time, Impact Days shall be added to the Completion Date equal to the total number of Weather or Impact Days approved less the original 40 days resident in the original Contract Time. The Addition of Weather or Impact Days will only alter the Contract Time when added by Change Order. If the Work is completed prior to the Completion Date, No Days will be added. The addition of Weather or Impact Days shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole remedy for delays to the completion of the Work and their addition to the Contract Time shall not affect the Contract Price through any "per diem" adjustment to the General Conditions costs, Temporary Facilities costs or any other costs associated with the extension of the Contract Time. 5.03 HINDRANCES AND DELAYS. In executing the Contract, the CONTRACTOR agrees that in undertaking to complete the Work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all interference, disruption, hindrances and delays incident to such Work, whether growing out of delays in securing material, workmen or otherwise. No claim shall be made by the CONTRACTOR for damages, loss, costs or expense resulting from interference, disruption, hindrances or delays from any cause during the progress of any portion of the Work embraced in this Contract, except where the Work is stopped or suspended by order of the OWNER's representative and such stoppage or suspension is not attributable to any act or omission of CONTRACTOR. 5.04 SUSPENSION OF WORK. OWNER may, without cause, order the CONTRACTOR in writing to suspend the Work, in whole or in part, for such period of time as OWNER may request. The Contract Price and/or Contract Time shall be adjusted for any increase in the cost of or the time required for performance of the Work caused by such suspension. No adjustment shall be made to the extent performance was or would have been suspended by a cause for which CONTRACTOR is responsible, or to the extent an adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract Documents. 5.05 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY: It is understood and agreed that time is of the essence, and that the CONTRACTOR will commence the Work on the date specified herein or in any Notice to Proceed, and will Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER, that the time for the Substantial Completion of the Work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that a failure to complete on time will cause damage to the OWNER and that such damages 08-2018 00700 - 19 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT cannot be accurately measured or that ascertainment will be difficult. Therefore, the parties agree that for each and every calendar day the Work or any portion thereof shall remain uncompleted after the expiration of the Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR shall pay, as liquidated damages and as a reasonable estimate of OWNER's damages, and not as a penalty, the amount set out in the Standard Form of Agreement. However, the foregoing agreement as to liquidated damages constitutes only an agreement by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR as to the amount of damages which the OWNER will sustain by reason of the CONTRACTOR'S failure to complete the work within the Contract Time. Should the OWNER suffer damage by reason of any other breach by CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may recover such actual damages in addition to any liquidated damages due. The OWNER shall have the right to deduct and withhold the amount of any and all such damages whether it be the minimum amount stipulated above or otherwise, from any monies owing by it to said CONTRACTOR, or the OWNER may recover such amount from the CONTRACTOR and the sureties of his bond; all of such remedies shall be cumulative and the OWNER shall not be required to elect any one nor be deemed to have made an election by proceeding to enforce any one remedy. 5.06 CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME: The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. Any claim for an adjustment of Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making such claim to the other party and to the ENGINEER promptly, but in no event later than ten (10) days after the event -giving rise to the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim, along with supporting data, shall be delivered within thirty (30) days of the occurrence and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written representation that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in Contract Time shall be determined by the ENGINEER in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. Contractor shall submit, as a minimum, the following data: A. Information showing that the time requested is not included in the existing Contract and in addition to the Contract. B. Information documenting that the number of days requested is accurate for the event. C. Revised, current construction schedule showing that the time requested affects the project's critical path. 5.07 DELAYS BEYOND OWNER'S AND CONTRACTOR'S CONTROL: Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Time due to delays beyond the control of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR, including, but not limited to, interference by utility owners or other contractors performing other work, Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of the Contract Time in an amount equal to the time lost. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Price as a result of such delays. IN NO EVENT SHALL OWNER BE LIABLE TO CONTRACTOR FOR DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM (i) Delays caused by, or within the control of, the CONTRACTOR, or (ii) Delays beyond the control of both parties including, but not limited to, interference by utility owners or other contractors performing other work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, even if such delays are due in part to the negligence, other fault, breach of contract or warranty, violation of the Texas Deceptive Trade Act, or strict liability without regard 08-2018 00700 - 20 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT to fault of OWNER. An extension of Contract time shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for any such delays. Delays attributed to, and within the control of, a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of the CONTRACTOR. 6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6.01 DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS. If the CONTRACTOR knows or reasonably should have known of any discrepancies or omissions in the Contract Documents, he shall notify the ENGINEER and obtain a clarification by Addendum before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the ENGINEER prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the CONTRACTOR fully understands the Work to be performed and has provided sufficient sums in his Bid Proposal to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) days prior to the opening of bids. 6.02 QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS. No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured and/or computed length, area, volume, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. 6.03 ESTIMATED QUANTITIES. This Agreement, including the Contract Documents, and including any estimates contained therein, is intended to convey all Work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of Work to be done and material to be furnished under this Contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the Work and for comparing the Bid Proposals offered for the Work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of Work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this Contract may differ from the estimates and that the items listed or estimated quantities stated, and/or any difference between estimated and actual Work, shall not give rise to a claim by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER for loss, cost, expense, damages, unit price adjustment, quantity differences, unrecovered overhead or lost or anticipated profits, or other compensation. 6.04 PRICE OF WORK. It is agreed that it is the intent of this Contract that all Work described in the Bid Proposal, and Contract Documents, is to be done for the prices bid by the CONTRACTOR and that such prices shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the intent of these Contract Documents as interpreted by the ENGINEER, and all costs, expenses, bond and insurance premiums, taxes, overhead, and profit. In consideration of the furnishing of all the necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all Work by the CONTRACTOR, and upon the completion of all Work and the delivery of all materials embraced in this Contract in full conformity with the Contract Documents, the OWNER agrees to pay to the CONTRACTOR the prices set forth in the Standard Form of Agreement, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that the Contract is a unit cost agreement, unless stated otherwise, and that the final Contract amount is equal to the unit cost multiplied by the number of units authorized, installed and approved by the Owner. The OWNER does not assume any obligation to pay for any services or material not actually authorized and used. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to receive such prices as payment in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid Work, and for all expenses incurred by him, and for full performance of the Work and the whole thereof in the 08-2018 00700 - 21 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT manner and according to this Agreement, Contract Documents, and the requirements of the ENGINEER. 6.05 PAYMENTS. No payments made or approvals or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the Contract, either in whole or in part, nor shall any certificate, approval or payment be considered as acceptance of defective, deficient or non -conforming Work. CONTRACTOR shall, at any time requested during the progress of the Work, furnish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with an affidavit showing the CONTRACTOR's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the Work. Before Final Payment is made, the CONTRACTOR shall satisfy the OWNER, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no unpaid claims due subcontractors, suppliers or laborers by reason of any Work under the Contract. Acceptance by CONTRACTOR of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver of any and all claims of whatsoever nature against OWNER, arising out of or related to the Contract, or the Work, or any acts or omissions of OWNER or ENGINEER, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this Contract. 6.06 PARTIAL PAYMENTS. When the Contract Price is a lump sum amount, prior to the first Application for Payment, CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review and approval a Schedule of Values, which shall fairly allocate the entire Contract Price among the various portions of the Work and shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the ENGINEER may reasonably require. The Schedule of Values shall follow the trade divisions of the Specifications so far as practicable. Upon approval, this Schedule of Values shall be used by ENGINEER as the basis for reviewing the Contractor's Application for Payment. Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. On or before the tenth day of each month, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit to the ENGINEER, for approval or correction, an application for partial payment, being a statement showing as completely as practicable, the agreed unit quantities and extended total value of the Work done by the CONTRACTOR up to and including the twenty-fifth day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all conforming materials to be fabricated into the Work and stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the OWNER or ENGINEER at the Work site only. No payment will be made for materials stored until OWNER has approved in writing storage at the Work site. The ENGINEER shall then review such statement of unit quantities and application for partial payment and the progress of the Work made by the CONTRACTOR and, within ten days after the date ENGINEER receives CONTRACTOR's application for payment, if the application is found to be accurate and correct and the WORK conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER shall certify the application for partial payment and shall deliver his preliminary certification for payment to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR; or, if the ENGINEER finds that CONTRACTOR's application for payment contains an error or is otherwise disputed, he shall notify CONTRACTOR of such error or dispute, and shall prepare a preliminary certificate for partial payment for the undisputed amount of the application for payment due CONTRACTOR, and deliver it to the OWNER and CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER'S notice to CONTRACTOR that a bona fide dispute for payment exists shall include a list of the specific reasons for nonpayment. All payment applications made by CONTRACTOR and delivered to ENGINEER and all verifications and certification of such applications shall be made and transmitted within the Pro- Trak system and signed with the appropriate electronic signatures as provided for in the software. Such applications for payment shall not be considered complete unless accompanied by the 08-2018 00700 - 22 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR'S Partial Waiver of Lien and Payment Affidavit, Section 00615, duly executed by an authorized representative of the CONTRACTOR and reflecting the correct corresponding amount of the payment application. The OWNER shall then pay the CONTRACTOR, within thirty (30) days of the date of ENGINEER' s receipt of the application for payment, the undisputed balance due, less applicable retainage, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained or withheld by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. CONTRACTOR may submit a corrected application for payment after its receipt of the ENGINEER' s notice of error or dispute, and such corrected application for payment shall be reviewed by the ENGINEER and disputed or paid under the same procedure and within the same time limits set out above. As a condition of any progress payment under this Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall execute and deliver to ENGINEER and OWNER a full release of all claims, direct or indirect, at law or in equity, arising out of or related to the Work to date, excluding retainage or any claims previously submitted as required under the terms of the Contract, and specifically identified and excluded by CONTRACTOR in the release. OWNER shall be entitled to retain from each progress payment five percent (5%) of the amount thereof. Such retainage shall be retained until Final Completion and satisfaction of all conditions for Final Payment. It is understood, however, that in case the whole Work be near to completion, as certified by the ENGINEER, and some unexpected or unusual delay occurs, through no neglect or fault on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may, upon written recommendation of the ENGINEER, pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR, at the OWNER'S option, may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the Work, and thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive, at the OWNER'S option, payment of the balance due him under the Contract for Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, subject to OWNER's rights to otherwise withhold or retain payments, and subject to the conditions set forth under "6.09 FINAL PAYMENT." The Owner at its option and in compliance with Texas law may reduce retainage to less than the above -stated percentages. 6.07 USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS & PUNCHLIST. The OWNER shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portions of the Work, notwithstanding that the time for completing the entire work or such portions may not have expired; but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within three (3) days of OWNER's taking possession, give OWNER written notice of same, and CONTRACTOR may be entitled to such extra compensation or extension of time, or both, as may be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. 6.08 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER AND ENGINEER, by letter executed by a duly qualified officer of CONTRACTOR that in CONTRACTOR's opinion, the Work of the Contract, or an agreed portion thereof, is "Substantially Complete". Such notification shall include a list of all outstanding or incomplete items. Upon receipt, and within a reasonable time thereafter, of such notice, the ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR shall jointly perform a walk-through and inspection of the Work to determine the status of all or the identified portion of the work, and the ENGINEER shall prepare a detailed 08-2018 00700 - 23 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT list of unfinished, incomplete, defective and/or non -conforming Work ("Punchlist"). If the ENGINEER determines that the Work is Substantially Complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER shall issue to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR a Certificate of Substantial Completion. OWNER shall have seven (7) days after receipt of Certificate to make written objection to the ENGINEER as to any provision of the Certificate or the attached list of non -conforming work. If ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not Substantially Complete, ENGINEER will, within fourteen (14) days, notify CONTRACTOR of the reason he believes the Work is not Substantially Complete. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, ENGINEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities, pending final payment and acceptance, with respect to security, maintenance, utilities and damage to the Work, except as otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. NEITHER THE SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE WORK, NOR THE OMISSION OF AN ITEM FROM THE PUNCHLIST, SHALL EXCUSE THE CONTRACTOR FROM PERFORMING ALL OF THE WORK UNDERTAKEN, WHETHER OF A MINOR OR MAJOR NATURE, AND THEREBY COMPLETING THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall establish the time period within which CONTRACTOR shall complete the Work for Final Acceptance by the Owner and ENGINEER. 6.08-1 OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of Substantial Completion, for security requirement reasons. OWNER may establish an access procedure to facilitate CONTRACTOR's uninterrupted access to the Work for the purposes of completing and correcting all items on the Punchlist in an expeditious manner. 6.09 FINAL PAYMENT. Final payment of the Retainage withheld from the Contract Price shall be made by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR at such time as: (a) the Work, including all Change Orders and including all Punchlist work, has been fully completed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents; (b) the Contract has been fully performed except for the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to correct nonconforming Work during the warranty period set forth in the Contract Documents, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which necessarily survive final payment; (c) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER; (d) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a Consent of Surety, if any, to final payment; (e) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a complete set of As -Built Drawings, reflecting all deviations from the Plans, Specifications and approved shop drawings in the Work actually constructed, and delivers all maintenance and operating manuals and/or instructions; 08-2018 00700 - 24 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (f) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER all building certificates required prior to occupancy and all other required inspections / approvals / acceptances by city, county, state governmental entities or other authorities having jurisdiction; (g) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER assignments of all guarantees and warranties from subcontractors, vendors, suppliers or manufacturers, as well as names, addresses and telephone numbers of contacts for each subcontractor, vendor, supplier or manufacturer; (h) CONTRACTOR removes all equipment, tools, temporary facilities, surplus materials and rubbish from the site, and final cleans the site to OWNER's satisfaction; (i) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a Full and Final Release and Affidavit of Bills Paid in the form attached hereto as Attachment No. 2, executed by CONTRACTOR; (j) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER all other documentation required to be submitted to OWNER pursuant to the Contract Documents, including but not limited to any special guarantees or warranties, operation and maintenance manuals, etc'. in each case in a form satisfactory to OWNER as determined in OWNER' s sole discretion; and (k) The Final Application for Payment has been approved by the ENGINEER and OWNER. Acceptance of Final Payment by the CONTRACTOR shall constitute a waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than any claims previously made in writing by CONTRACTOR against OWNER, and still unsettled, and except for claims arising out of third party actions, cross -claims and counterclaims. No interest shall be due or payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR on any sums retained or withheld by OWNER pursuant to the terms or provisions of the Contract Documents, except as otherwise provided by applicable law. Neither the Certificate of Substantial Completion nor the Final Payment nor possession or acceptance of the Work shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of its obligation for correction of defective or non- conforming Work, or for fulfillment of any warranty, which may be required by law or by the Contract Documents. 6.10 CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove from OWNER's premises all materials, equipment or Work which is defective or otherwise not in conformance with the Contract Documents, whether actually incorporated in the Work or not, and CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, promptly replace such materials, equipment or Work with other materials conforming to the requirements of the Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of CONTRACTOR or other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If CONTRACTOR does not remove and replace any such unsuitable Work within ten (10) business days after receipt of a written notice from the OWNER or the ENGINEER, the OWNER may remove, replace and remedy such work at CONTRACTOR's expense. 08-2018 00700 - 25 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.11 CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT. If within one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, at its sole cost, correct it and any other work affected thereby promptly after receipt of a written notice from OWNER to do so. In addition, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage to building contents, when such damage results from the CONTRACTOR's use of faulty materials or defective workmanship; to the extent such damage is not covered by OWNER's insurance. This warranty period shall renew and recommence for each corrected item of Work upon completion of the remedial work. This time period for correction by CONTRACTOR is in addition to, and not in lieu of, all warranties or remedies, which exist at common law or by statute. These warranty obligations shall survive the termination of this Contract, and shall be enforceable by a decree of specific performance, in addition to such other rights and remedies available to OWNER at law or in equity. 6.12 PAYMENTS WITHHELD. The OWNER may withhold, or on account of subsequently discovered evidence nullify and demand immediate repayment of, the whole or part of any certificate for payment or payment, to such extent as may be necessary to protect OWNER from loss on account of: (a) Defective or non -conforming Work not remedied; (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims; (c) Failure of the CONTRACTOR to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for material or labor; (d) Damage to another contractor, OWNER, existing improvements on the site, or to adjacent or adjoining property; (e) Reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract amount; (f) Reasonable indication that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time; (g) Failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to execute any and all documents, releases or other documents presented to the CONTRACTOR for execution, as provided for herein or otherwise; (h) Liquidated or other damages due to late completion; and/or (i) Any breach by CONTRACTOR of this Contract or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. When the above grounds are removed to OWNER's satisfaction, the withheld payment shall be made promptly. If the said causes are not so remedied, OWNER may remedy the same for CONTRACTOR's account, charge the entire cost thereof to CONTRACTOR and deduct such cost 08-2018 00700 - 26 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT from the Contract Sum or from any payments due or to become due under any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 6.13 DELAYED PAYMENTS. Should the OWNER fail to make payment to the CONTRACTOR when payment is due in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents, any interest due CONTRACTOR for late payments shall accrue and be paid in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2251 of the Texas Government Code, as amended, and payment of such interest shall fully liquidate and compensate any injury to the CONTRACTOR growing out of such delay in payment. Should OWNER fail to pay CONTRACTOR an undisputed amount due within the time limits provided in the Contract or applicable law, CONTRACTOR shall give the notice required and comply with the provisions of Section 2251.051 of the Texas Government Code, and shall thereupon be entitled to the rights and remedies provided therein. 7.0 EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS 7.01 DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS. During the progress of the work, if subsurface, latent physical conditions or unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature are encountered at the site that differ materially from those indicated in the contract or from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in the work provided for in the contract, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER's Representative in writing within three (3) calendar days of the specific differing conditions before the site is disturbed and before the affected work is performed. (a) Upon written notification, the ENGINEER will investigate the conditions, and if it is determined that the conditions materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the cost or time required for the performance of any work under the contract, an adjustment, excluding anticipated profits, will be made and the contract modified in writing accordingly. The ENGINEER will notify the CONTRACTOR in writing of the determination whether or not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. (b) No contract adjustment which results in a benefit to the CONTRACTOR will be allowed unless the CONTRACTOR has provided the required written notice. (c) No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause for any effects caused on unchanged work. 7.02 SUSPENSIONS OF WORK ORDERED BY THE ENGINEER. If the performance of all or any portion of the work is suspended by the ENGINEER in writing for seven (7) calendar days and the CONTRACTOR believes that additional compensation and/or contract time is due as a result of such suspension, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a written request for adjustment to the ENGINEER within seven (7) calendar days of receipt of the notice to resume work. The request shall set forth the reasons and support for such adjustment. (a) Upon receipt, the ENGINEER will evaluate the CONTRACTOR's request. If the ENGINEER agrees that the cost and/or time required for the performance of the contract has increased as a result of such suspension and the suspension was caused by conditions beyond the control of and not the fault of the CONTRACTOR, its suppliers, or subcontractors at any approved tier, and not caused by weather, the ENGINEER will make an adjustment (excluding profit) and modify the contract in writing accordingly. The CONTRACTOR will be notified of the ENGINEER's determination, in writing, whether or 08-2018 00700 - 27 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. (b) No contract adjustment will be allowed unless the CONTRACTOR has submitted the request for adjustment within the time prescribed. (c) No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause to the extent that performance would have been suspended by any other cause, or for which an adjustment is provided or excluded under any other term or condition of this contract. 7.03 CHANGE ORDERS. Without invalidating this Agreement, the OWNER may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions to the Work; such changes will be authorized by Change Order to be prepared by the ENGINEER for execution by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. The Change Order shall set forth the basis for any change in Contract Price, as hereinafter set forth for Extra Work, and any change in Contract Time, which may result from the change. 7.04 In accordance with paragraph 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S request to work weekends, the Owner's Construction Manager shall, upon receipt of written notice by the CONTRACTOR of the need to conduct work on otherwise non -Work Days, prepare a cost estimate for providing Construction Management and Inspection services during the requested period and submit this to both OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If approved by both parties the Construction Manager shall prepare a Deductive Change Order in the amount stated in the estimate for the signature of the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER for inclusion in the next Pay Application. The Deductive Change Order must be signed and executed by both the OWNER and CONTRACTOR prior to start of work on any non -Work Day. 7.05 MINOR CHANGES. The ENGINEER may authorize minor changes in the Work not inconsistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents and not involving an increase in Contract Price or time. If the CONTRACTOR believes that any minor changes authorized by the ENGINEER involves Extra Work or entitles him to an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR shall give notice of same by written request to the ENGINEER for a written Work Order, with a copy to OWNER. Any such notice and request by the CONTRACTOR shall be given prior to beginning the changed work. CONTRACTOR's commencement of any minor change in the Work prior to such written notice and request shall constitute a waiver of any and all claims for an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time arising out of or related to such changed work. 7.06 EXTRA WORK. It is agreed that the CONTRACTOR shall perform all work when presented with a written Change Order, Work Change Directive or Work Order signed by the ENGINEER, subject, however, to the right of the CONTRACTOR to require written confirmation of such Change Order, Work Change Directive or Work Order by the OWNER. It is agreed that the basis of compensation or adjustment to the CONTRACTOR for work either altered, added or deleted by a Change Order or Work Change Directive, or for which a claim for Extra Work is made, shall be determined by one or more of the following methods: Method (A) --By Contract unit prices applicable to the work, if any; or Method (B) --By agreed unit prices or agreed stipulated lump sum price; or 08-2018 00700 - 28 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Method (C) --If neither Method (A) nor Method (B) can be agreed upon before the Extra Work is commenced, then the CONTRACTOR shall be paid the "Actual Field Cost" of the work plus: a) For subcontractors performing work mark-up shall be limited to fifteen percent, ten (10%) for the subcontractor plus five (5%) for the General Contractor or b) For the General Contractor alone, self -performing the extra work, without subcontractor, the mark-up shall not exceed ten percent (10%), as full and final compensation for the Extra Work and all costs and expenses, direct or indirect, arising out of or related thereto. In the event said Extra Work or Change Order or Work Change Directive work is performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "Actual Field Cost" is hereby defined as the cost to the CONTRACTOR of all workers, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, and materials, supplies, trucks, rentals of machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such Extra Work or Change Order or Work Change Directive work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred together with all power, fuel, lubricants, water and similar operating expenses, plus all necessary incidental expenses incurred directly on account of such Extra Work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits and other payroll taxes, and a rateable proportion of premiums on Performance and Payment Bonds and Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation, and all other insurance as may be required by law or ordinance, or the Contract Documents, plus all payments to subcontractors for such work. The ENGINEER may direct the form in which accounts of the "Actual Field Cost" shall be kept and the records of these accounts shall be made available to the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER or OWNER may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise these matters shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using one hundred percent (100%), unless otherwise specified, of the latest schedule of Equipment Ownership Expense adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America where practicable. The mark-up of the "Actual Field Cost" to be paid to the CONTRACTOR, shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the "Actual Field Cost" as herein defined, save that where the CONTRACTOR's field office must be maintained solely on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "Actual Field Cost." No claim for Extra Work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered by the ENGINEER in a written Work Order. In case any orders or instructions, either oral or written, appear to the CONTRACTOR to involve Extra Work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the Contract Time, he shall make written request to the ENGINEER for a written Work Order authorizing such Extra Work within ten (10) days of ENGINEER's orders or instructions, otherwise the orders or instructions will be considered minor changes. The issuance of a Work Order by the ENGINEER shall not constitute or be construed as an agreement or acknowledgement by the ENGINEER that the work which is the subject of the Work Order is Extra Work outside the scope of the Contract Work, but shall merely constitute a direction to the 08-2018 00700 - 29 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR to perform the work, and the CONTRACTOR shall proceed with the work, and shall keep an accurate account of the "Actual Field Cost" thereof, as provided under Method (C). Upon completion of the alleged Extra Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within ten (10) days submit his claim to the ENGINEER by proper certification and attestation, on forms provided by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall render a written decision on CONTRACTOR's claim within ten (10) days. It is mutually agreed between the parties that the ENGINEER's decision on all claims or questions in relation to the Work, CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work, any changes in the Work or Extra Work, the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, shall be final and conclusive and binding upon the parties. If the ENGINEER shall fail to respond in writing to CONTRACTOR's claim within thirty (30) days of the date of submission, or if CONTRACTOR shall dispute or object to ENGINEER's decision on any claim, and CONTRACTOR fails to file a Request for Mediation of such claim in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.0, within sixty (60) days after the date of submission to the ENGINEER, or such longer period as the parties may agree to in writing, the CONTRACTOR shall lose and forfeit his right to make such claim for Extra Work at any later date, and all such claims held by the CONTRACTOR shall be deemed waived, forfeited and forever barred. CONTRACTOR shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 7.07 TIME OF FILING CLAIMS. Except as otherwise provided herein, all questions of dispute or adjustment shall be made within the Pro-Trak system and filed with the ENGINEER within three (3) days after the ENGINEER has given any directions, order or instruction to which the CONTRACTOR desires to take exception. The ENGINEER shall reply within thirty (30) days to such written exceptions, and render his final decision in writing. It is mutually agreed between the parties that the ENGINEER's decision on all claims or questions in relation to the Work, CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work, any changes in the Work or Extra Work, the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, shall be final and conclusive and binding upon the parties. In case the CONTRACTOR should desire to appeal from the ENGINEER's decision, the CONTRACTOR may request a meeting between representatives of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR for the purposes of appealing the ENGINEER's decision directly to the OWNER, such meeting to occur within ten (10) days after the date of the CONTRACTOR's request, or such longer period as may be agreed to by the parties in writing. If the CONTRACTOR shall still be aggrieved after a meeting with the OWNER and/or his representative, the CONTRACTOR shall have sixty (60) days after the date of the meeting, or such longer period as the parties may agree to in writing, to file a Request for Mediation of such claim in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.0. In the event the CONTRACTOR shall fail, for any reason, to timely file a Request for Mediation, the OWNER shall be released of any and all liability, and the CONTRACTOR's failure to timely file a Request for Mediation shall constitute a waiver, forfeit and final bar of all such claims held by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 8.0 DEFAULT 8.01 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR. In case the CONTRACTOR should abandon and fail or refuse to resume Work within five (5) days after written notification from the OWNER or the ENGINEER, or if the CONTRACTOR fails to comply with the orders of the ENGINEER when such orders are consistent with the Contract Documents, or if the CONTRACTOR otherwise defaults on its obligations under the Contract, OWNER shall have the right, if it so elects and 08-2018 00700 - 30 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT without prejudice to any other rights it may have, after giving five (5) days written notice of default to CONTRACTOR and any surety, to terminate the Contract or any part thereof and/or to take over or cause others to take over the Work or any part thereof, and to complete such Work for the account of CONTRACTOR. Where Performance and Payment Bonds exist, the sureties on these bonds shall be directed to complete the Work in conjunction with the notice of default, and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the CONTRACTOR. After receiving said notice of default, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within no more than three (3) days, remove from the Work any machinery, equipment, or tools then on the job, not intended for incorporation into the Work. Should CONTRACTOR fail to promptly remove such machinery, equipment or tools, OWNER may remove such machinery, equipment or tools and store same at CONTRACTOR's expense; return such machinery, equipment or tools to their purported owner; or otherwise dispose of such machinery, equipment or tools as OWNER sees fit. Any materials, supplies and/or equipment delivered for use in the Work, may be used in the completion of the Work by the OWNER or the surety on the Performance Bond, or another contractor in completion of the Work; it being understood that the use of such equipment, supplies and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the Work and be reflected in the final settlement. Where there is no Performance Bond or in case the surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinabove provided for within ten (10) days after the service of such notice, then the OWNER may provide for completion of the Work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The OWNER may thereupon employ such force of workers and use such machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as the OWNER may deem necessary to expeditiously complete the Work, and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said CONTRACTOR, and expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the OWNER out of such monies as may be due or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been completed by the CONTRACTOR, then said CONTRACTOR shall be credited with the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been completed by such CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall promptly pay the amount of such excess to the OWNER upon demand; or (b) The OWNER, under sealed bids, under the times and procedures provided for by law, may let the contract for completion of the Work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this Contract. In case of any increase in cost to the OWNER under the completion contract, as compared to what would have been the cost under this Contract, such increase shall be charged to the CONTRACTOR, and the amount of such increase may be deducted by the OWNER out of such monies as may be due or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall promptly pay the amount of such increase to the OWNER 08-2018 00700 - 31 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT upon demand. However, should the cost to complete any such completion contract prove to be less than what would have been the cost to complete under this Contract, the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall be credited therewith. In the event of a default by CONTRACTOR, no further payments shall be made to CONTRACTOR under the Contract until the Work is Finally Completed. When the Work shall have been Finally Completed, the CONTRACTOR and his surety shall be so notified. A complete itemized statement of the Contract accounts, certified by the ENGINEER as being correct, shall then be prepared and delivered to the CONTRACTOR and his surety, whereupon the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement. The OWNER, prior to incurring an obligation to make payment hereunder, shall have such statement of completion attested to by the CONTRACTOR and the surety as accurate, and in exchange for payment of the sum stated therein, the OWNER shall be entitled to a full and final release of any claims or demands by the CONTRACTOR or the surety. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the OWNER had the work been completed by the CONTRACTOR under the terms of this Contract, or when the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the OWNER, then all machinery, equipment, tools or supplies left on the site of the Work shall be turned over to the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety. Should the cost to complete the Work exceed the Contract Price, and the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety fail to pay the amount due the OWNER within the time designated above, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies which are the property of CONTRACTOR on the site of the Work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials, shall be mailed to the CONTRACTOR and his surety at the respective addresses designated in the Contract, provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the CONTRACTOR and his surety, subject only to the duty of the OWNER to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of such notice, the OWNER may sell such property, equipment, tools, materials or supplies, and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the CONTRACTOR and his surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the OWNER may elect. The OWNER shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies, which remain on the Work, and belong to persons other than the CONTRACTOR or his surety, to their reputed owners. 8.02 SUPPLEMENTATION OF CONTRACTOR FORCES. If CONTRACTOR at any time shall, in OWNER'S sole opinion, fail to furnish skilled workers, suitable materials, supplies or adequate equipment sufficient for the prompt, timely and diligent prosecution of the Work in accordance with OWNER'S direction, OWNER shall have the right, without prejudice to the exercise of other remedies for the same default and without fully taking over the Work, to supplement CONTRACTOR's forces and to expedite delivery of and to procure and furnish such workers, materials, tools, supplies or equipment for CONTRACTOR's account by employing other contractors and suppliers engaged in the same class of work and charge the entire cost thereof to CONTRACTOR, said cost to be deducted from sums due or to become due to CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any other agreement with OWNER or any parent, subsidiary or affiliate of OWNER. 08-2018 00700 - 32 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 8.03 CUMULATIVE REMEDIES & SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE. All rights and remedies of OWNER, under the terms of the Contract and/or available at law or in equity, are cumulative. In the event CONTRACTOR or any of its subcontractors, vendors or suppliers fails or refuses for any reason to provide timely manufacture, fabrication, delivery, installation, erection, construction or completion of any supplies, materials, expendables, equipment, machinery, accessories or appurtenances to be furnished hereunder, CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that such items are required, necessary, essentially unique to the Project and the Work and will cause irreparable harm to OWNER and the Project if not furnished in accordance with the Contract, and OWNER shall have the right to obtain a decree of specific performance and mandatory injunctive relief from any Court of competent jurisdiction to ensure the timely furnishing of such items. 8.04 CROSS -DEFAULT. If, for any reason, CONTRACTOR is declared in default and/or terminated by OWNER under any other agreement with OWNER, whether related to the Project or not related to the Project, OWNER shall have the right to offset and apply any amounts which might be owed to OWNER by CONTRACTOR under any other such agreements against any earned but unpaid amounts owing to CONTRACTOR by OWNER under the Contract, any retainage earned by CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any unearned, unpaid amount under the Contract. 8.05 INSOLVENCY. It is recognized that if CONTRACTOR becomes a debtor in voluntary or involuntary bankruptcy proceedings, makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, such events could seriously impair or frustrate CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. Accordingly, it is agreed that should CONTRACTOR become a debtor in bankruptcy, either voluntary or involuntary, CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing within twenty-four (24) hours of the filing with the bankruptcy court. Further, it is agreed that upon occurrence of any one or more such events, OWNER shall be entitled to request of CONTRACTOR or its successors, trustees or receivers, adequate assurances of future performance. In the event such adequate assurances are not given to the reasonable satisfaction of OWNER within seventy-two (72) hours of such request, OWNER shall have the right to immediately invoke the remedies of this Section 8 or as provided by law. Pending receipt of such adequate assurances of such future performance, OWNER may proceed with the Work on a temporary basis and deduct the costs, plus reasonable overhead and profit, from any amounts due or which may become due to CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any other agreement with OWNER. In this regard, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that delays in performance could result in more damages to CONTRACTOR than would be sustained if OWNER failed to exercise such remedies. 8.06 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT. CONTRACTOR hereby assigns to OWNER, all of CONTRACTOR's rights under and interest in any and all subcontracts and/or purchase orders entered into by CONTRACTOR pursuant to this Agreement, such assignment to become effective upon CONTRACTOR's default under this Agreement or OWNER's termination of this Contract, and OWNER's acceptance of such assignment. Upon CONTRACTOR's default or OWNER's termination of this Contract, OWNER may, in the event there is no performance bond for the Contract, or in the event the performance bond surety fails to complete the Contract, or if OWNER otherwise so elects in its sole discretion, accept such assignment by written notice of such acceptance to CONTRACTOR and subcontractor, and may require subcontractors to perform all of the then unperformed duties and obligations under the subcontract, for the direct benefit of OWNER. In the event OWNER requires such performance by a subcontractor, then OWNER 08-2018 00700 - 33 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT shall be obligated to pay such subcontractor any amounts due and owing under the terms of the subcontract/purchase order, at the subcontract prices and rates, and subject to any rights of withholding or offset and other terms and conditions of the subcontract, for all work properly performed by such subcontractor, to the date of OWNER's acceptance and thereafter. OWNER's liability in this connection, however, shall not exceed the amount obtained by subtracting all payments made by CONTRACTOR to subcontractor from the Subcontract Price at the time of CONTRACTOR's default or OWNER's termination of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall include a provision in its subcontracts that allows such assignment and allows OWNER to take these actions, and further provides that in the event of CONTRACTOR's termination for default, the subcontractor agrees to give the OWNER or its agent the right to inspect all books and records of subcontractor relating to the Work. 8.07 WAIVER OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. CONTRACTOR expressly waives any and all claims for consequential damages against OWNER arising out of or related to this Contract, or any other agreements between CONTRACTOR and OWNER, including, but not limited to, claims for damages incurred by CONTRACTOR for principal office expenses, including the compensation of personnel stationed there, losses of financing, bonding capacity, business and reputation, and claims for lost profit, whether on this Contract or otherwise. 8.08 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE. OWNER may at its sole discretion, upon five (5) days written notice to CONTRACTOR, terminate this Contract, in whole or in part, if and when OWNER determines that it is in the best interest of OWNER to do so. Upon receipt of such written notice from OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall cease all terminated Work and take reasonable precautions to protect and preserve such work, and shall take all reasonable measures after consultation with OWNER to terminate or assign to OWNER all subcontracts, purchase orders or other commitments related to the Work or the Project on terms and conditions acceptable to OWNER. CONTRACTOR will be paid for all Work performed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, based upon the Contract Price and the percentage of completion on the date of termination, and less amounts previously paid, subject to any reasonable backcharges attributable to CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of the provisions of this Contract and further subject to the other terms of this Contract regarding payment. In no event will CONTRACTOR receive or be entitled to any payment or compensation whatsoever for interruption of business or loss of business opportunities, any other items of consequential damages, for overhead or loss of profits on the unperformed Work and/or services and unfurnished materials or for any intangible, impact or similarly described cost, damages or expense, and under no circumstances shall the total sum paid to or received by CONTRACTOR under this Contract exceed the Contract Price. The compensation provided herein shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy arising out of a termination for convenience. 8.09 DEFAULT BY OWNER. In case the OWNER shall default on its material obligations under this Contract, other than OWNER's failure to pay CONTRACTOR a disputed amount due within the time limits provided in the Contract or applicable law, as addressed by Section 6.13 of this Agreement, and shall fail or refuse to cure, or to commence and diligently pursue cure of such default within fifteen (15) days after written notification by the CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR may suspend or wholly abandon the Work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools and equipment, and all materials on the site of the Work that have not been included in payments to the CONTRACTOR and have not been incorporated into the Work. And thereupon, the ENGINEER shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the CONTRACTOR, which estimate shall include the value of all Work actually completed by 08-2018 00700 - 34 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT said CONTRACTOR (at the Contract Prices), the value of all partially completed Work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this Contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the CONTRACTOR to carry the whole Work to completion and which cannot be utilized. The ENGINEER shall then make a final statement of the balance due the CONTRACTOR by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the OWNER and all other sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement, and shall present the same to the OWNER, and OWNER's payment of said sum to the CONTRACTOR, on or before thirty (30) days after OWNER' s receipt of such statement, shall satisfy any and all rights, claims or causes of action of CONTRACTOR arising out of or related to such default by OWNER, and shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for such default. A disputed or unilateral claim by the Contractor cannot by itself constitute a default hereunder. 9.0 DISPUTE RESOLUTION Any dispute or pending claim or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall not excuse or relieve CONTRACTOR of its obligations under the Contract, and CONTRACTOR shall diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. All claims, disputes and other matters in question arising out of or relating to, the Contract, or the breach thereof, shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to any other dispute resolution process as may be selected by OWNER. Unless mutually agreed otherwise the mediation shall be conducted by a third party who will be selected by agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR, and Request for Mediation shall be filed with the other party. The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. If a claim, dispute or other matter in question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involves the work of a subcontractor or supplier, OWNER or CONTRACTOR may join such subcontractor or supplier as a party to any mediation proceeding between OWNER and CONTRACTOR hereunder. CONTRACTOR shall include in all subcontracts and/or purchase orders related to the Work a specific provision whereby the subcontractor or supplier consents to being joined in mediation between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involving the work of such subcontractor or supplier. This Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Texas and shall be considered performable in Brazoria County, Texas, for venue purposes. Further, the OWNER and CONTRACTOR stipulate that venue for any dispute resolution proceeding involving or touching upon the Contract other than the conduct of an arbitration hearing shall be in Brazoria County, Texas, or, if such choice of venue is prohibited or unenforceable by law, shall be held in the county where the Project is located. CONTRACTOR agrees to pay OWNER all reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by OWNER in the event OWNER seeks to enforce any provision of this Contract whether by arbitration or other dispute resolution process. Further, in the event OWNER defends any claim instituted by CONTRACTOR against OWNER, whether in arbitration or other dispute resolution process, CONTRACTOR agrees to pay OWNER all reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by OWNER in defending such claim provided OWNER is the prevailing party, in whole or in part, in such proceeding. 08-2018 00700 - 35 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 1 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE A. DEFINITIONS: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") . A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83 or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project for the duration of the Project. Duration of the Project . includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the contractor' s/person' s work on the Project has been completed and the Project warranty period has expired. Persons providing services on the project includes persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with due contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, motor carriers and owner - operators, (as defined at Section 406.121 of the Texas Labor Code), leasing companies, and employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. C. The CONTRACTOR must provide a certificate of coverage to the OWNER prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the CONTRACTOR's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the CONTRACTOR must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the OWNER showing that coverage has been extended. E. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from each subcontractor or other person providing services on a project, and provide to the OWNER: (I) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the Project, so the OWNER will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and 05/2007 00700 - Al CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (2) no later than seven days after receipt by the CONTRACTOR and prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The CONTRACTOR shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the CONTRACTOR knew or should have known, of any changes that materially affect the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The CONTRACTOR shall post on each Project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. NOTICE REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512) 440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." I. The CONTRACTOR shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, too: (1) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for all of its employees providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; (2) provide to the CONTRACTOR, prior to that person beginning work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the Project: 05/2007 00700 - A2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (3) provide the CONTRACTOR, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage, showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; (4) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the CONTRACTOR: (5) (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the Project; and (b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and (7) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the CONTRACTOR is representing to the OWNER that all employees of the CONTRACTOR who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage agreements will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the CONTRACTOR to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the CONTRACTOR, which entitles the OWNER to pursue all rights and remedies available to it under the Contract, at law or in equity, if the CONTRACTOR does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the OWNER. 05/2007 00700 - A3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 2 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS AGREEMENT FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SWORN RELEASE In consideration of the Final Payment under that certain contract between [Contractor's Company Name] (hereafter "CONTRACTOR") and the City of Pearland (hereafter "OWNER") for the Project known as [Official Project Title] (the "Contract"), the CONTRACTOR makes the following representations to OWNER, either individually if a proprietorship, or jointly and severally by all general partners if a partnership, or if a corporation, by action of the president and secretary of said corporation, as duly authorized by appropriate action of the stockholders and/or board of directors of said corporation, their signatures hereon constituting a representation under oath by said individuals that they have the authority to execute this Agreement for and on behalf of the said corporation: 1. The undersigned CONTRACTOR represents to OWNER that the Application for Payment for the Final Payment under the Contract, and the final Change Order issued under the Contract if any, whether or not modified, corrected or changed in some way by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR or the OWNER, a copy of which are attached hereto and marked Exhibit "A", are true, correct and accurate, and that CONTRACTOR has received payment in full for all other Applications for Payment submitted under the Contract, and that CONTRACTOR has been fully compensated for all labor, materials, equipment and/or services furnished in connection with the Contract, except for the Final Payment. 2. It is agreed and stipulated by the undersigned CONTRACTOR that upon the receipt of Final Payment in the amount as set out on the attached Application for Payment, the CONTRACTOR, by execution of this instrument of release, does, therefore, RELEASE and FOREVER DISCHARGE OWNER of and from all manner of debts, claims, demands, obligations, suits, liabilities and causes of action of any nature whatsoever, at law or in equity, in contract or in tort, now existing or which may hereafter accrue, arising out of or related to the Contract, any Change Orders or Work Orders, the Work, or any labor, materials, equipment or services furnished by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. 3. The CONTRACTOR, acting by and through the person or persons whose names are subscribed hereto, does solemnly swear and affirm that all bills and claims have been paid to all materialmen, suppliers, laborers, subcontractors, or other entities performing services or supplying materials or equipment, and that OWNER shall not be subject to any bills, claims, demands, litigation or suits in connection therewith. 4. It is further specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a part of the Contract, and it is also specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement shall not act as a modification, waiver or renunciation by OWNER of any of its rights or remedies as set out in the Contract itself, but this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a supplement thereto for the additional protection of OWNER. 05/2007 00700 - B 1 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT SIGNED and EXECUTED this, the day of , 20_ CONTRACTOR: By: Signature Print Name: Title: [If CONTRACTOR is a proprietorship, owner must sign; if a partnership, each general partner must sign; if a corporation, the following language should be used.] SIGNED and EXECUTED this, the day of , 20_ by , a Texas corporation, under authority granted to the undersigned by said corporation as contained in the Charter, By -Laws or Minutes of a meeting of said corporation regularly called and held. CONTRACTOR: By: President ATTEST: Corporate Secretary (Corporate Seal) [This form is for use by either a proprietorship or a partnership. In the event CONTRACTOR is a partnership or a joint proprietorship, additional signature lines should be added for each individual.] 05/2007 00700 - B2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the person or persons whose name(s) are subscribed to the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said: I (We) am (are) the person(s) who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and I (we) have read the facts and statements as therein set out and the representations as made therein, and I (we) state that the above and foregoing are true and correct. CONTRACTOR - Affiant SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me, the day of 20_. Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires: [This form is for use in the event CONTRACTOR is a corporation.] 07/2006 00700 - B3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the persons who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment mid Contractor's Sworn Release, whose names are set out above, who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said: We each are the persons whose names are subscribed above, and hold respectively the offices in the corporation as set out above, and each state under oath that we have the authority to execute this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release for and on behalf of said corporation, pursuant to authority granted to us in the Charter of said corporation, the By -Laws of said corporation and/or the Minutes of said corporation; and the facts, statements and representations as set out in the instrument to which this Affidavit is attached, are true and correct. SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me this, the day of 20 Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires: 07/2006 00700 - B4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 3 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS OWNER'S INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTOR 1. Definitions. For purposes of this Agreement: 1.1 Owner Parties. "Owner Parties" means (a) the City of Pearland, its successors and assigns, and the Engineer, (b) any officers, employees, or agents of such persons or entities, and (c) others as required by the Contract Documents, if any. 1.2 Contractor. "Contractor" shall mean the vendor providing the service or work to be performed under this Agreement. 1.3 Subcontractor. "Subcontractor" shall include subcontractors of any tier. 1.4 ISO. "ISO" means Insurance Services Office. 2. Contractor Insurance Representations to Owner Parties 2.1 It is expressly understood and agreed that the insurance coverages required herein: 2.1.1 represent Owner Parties' minimum requirements and are not to be construed to void or limit the Contractor's indemnity obligations as contained in this Agreement nor represent in any manner a determination of the insurance coverages the Contractor should or should not maintain for its own protection; and 2.1.2 are being, or have been, obtained by the Contractor in support of the Contractor's liability and indemnity obligations under this Agreement. Neither the requirements as to insurance to be carried as provided for herein, the insolvency, bankruptcy or failure of any insurance company carrying insurance of the Contractor, nor the failure of any insurance company to pay claims accruing, shall be held to affect, negate or waive any of the provisions of this Agreement. 2.2 Failure to obtain and maintain the required insurance shall constitute a material breach of, and default under, this Agreement. If the Contractor shall fail to remedy such breach within five (5) business days after notice by the Owner, the Contractor will be liable for any and all costs, liabilities, damages and penalties resulting to the Owner Parties from such breach, unless a written waiver of the specific insurance requirement(s) is provided to the Contractor by the Owner. In the event of any failure by the Contractor to comply with the provisions of this Agreement, the Owner may, without in any way compromising or waiving any right or remedy at law or in equity, on notice to the Contractor, purchase such insurance, at the Contractor's expense, provided that the Owner shall have no obligation to do so and if the Owner shall do so, the Contractor shall not be relieved of or excused from the obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance amounts and coverages. 10-2012 00700 - C I CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 3. Conditions Affecting All Insurance Required Herein 3.1 Cost of Insurance. All insurance coverage shall be provided at the Contractor's sole expense. 3.2 Status and Rating of Insurance Company. All insurance coverage shall be written through insurance companies authorized to do business in the state in which the work is to be performed and rated no less than A-: VII in the most current edition of A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide. 3.3 Restrictive, Limiting, or Exclusionary Endorsements. All insurance coverage shall be provided to the Owner Parties in compliance with the requirements herein and shall contain no endorsements that restrict, limit, or exclude coverage required herein in any manner without the prior express written approval of the Owner. 3.4 Limits of Liability. The limits of liability may be provided by a single policy of insurance or by a combination of primary and umbrella policies, but in no event shall the total limits of liability available for any one occurrence or accident be less than the amount required herein. 3.5 Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal, or Material Reduction in Coverage. All insurance coverage shall contain the following express provision: In the event of cancellation, non -renewal, or material reduction in coverage affecting the certificate holder, thirty (30) days prior written notice shall be given to the certificate holder by certified mail or registered mail, return receipt requested. 3.6 Waiver of Subrogation. The Contractor hereby agrees to waive its rights of recovery from the Owner Parties with regard to all causes of property and/or liability loss and shall cause a waiver of subrogation endorsement to be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on all insurance coverage carried by the Contractor, whether required herein or not. 3.7 Deductible/Retention. Except as otherwise specified herein, no insurance required herein shall contain a deductible or self -insured retention in excess of $25,000 without prior written approval of the Owner. All deductibles and/or retentions shall be paid by, assumed by, for the account of, and at the Contractor's sole risk. The Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. 4. Maintenance of Insurance. The following insurance shall be maintained in effect with limits not less than those set forth below at all times during the term of this Agreement and thereafter as required: 10-2012 00700 - C2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.1 Commercial General Liability Insurance 4.1.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of all locations and operations of the Contractor, including but not limited to liability assumed under this contract (including the tort liability of another assumed in a business contract). Defense shall be provided as an additional benefit and not included within the limit of liability. 4.1.2 Form. Commercial General Liability Occurrence form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CG 0001 0798 or its equivalent). 4.1.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with limits of not less than: Each Occurrence Limit General Aggregate Limit Product -Completed Operations Aggregate Limit Personal and Advertising Injury Limit 4.1.4 Required Endorsements $1,000,000 $2,000,000 $2,000,000 $1,000,000 a. Additional Insured. Additional insured status shall be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on any of the following: i. ISO form CG 20 10 11 85; or ii. ISO form CG 20 26 11 85; or iii. a combination of ISO forms CG 20 33 10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01; or iv. any form providing equivalent protection to Owner. b. Designated Construction Project(s) Aggregate Limit. The aggregate limit shall apply separately to this Agreement through use of an ISO CG 25 03 03 97 endorsement or its equivalent. c. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. d. Personal Injury Liability. The personal injury contractual liability exclusion shall be deleted. e. Primary and Non -Contributing Liability. It is the intent of the parties to this Agreement that all insurance required herein shall be primary to all insurance available to the Owner Parties. The obligations of the Contractor's insurance shall not be affected by any other insurance available to the Owner Parties and shall seek no contribution from the Owner Parties' insurance, whether primary, excess contingent, or on any other basis. The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be endorsed to provide such primary and non- contributing liability. f. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 10-2012 00700 - C3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.1.5 Continuing Commercial General Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to Owner stating Work completion date. 4.2 Auto Liability Insurance 4.2.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of any auto (including owned, hired, and non -owned). 4.2.2 Form. Business Auto form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CA 0001 or its equivalent). 4.2.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 4.2.4 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. b. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 4.3 Employer's Liability Insurance 4.3.1 Coverage. Employer's Liability Insurance shall be provided as follows: 4.3.2 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than: Employer's Liability: $1,000,000 each accident and each disease. 4.3.3 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. b. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 4.4 Umbrella Liability Insurance 4.4.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall be excess over and be no less broad than all coverages described above and shall include a drop -down provision for exhaustion of underlying limits. 4.4.2 Form. This policy shall have the same inception and expiration dates as the commercial general liability insurance required above. 10-2012 00700 - C4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.4.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $5,000,000. 4.4.4 Continuing Umbrella Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.5 Professional Liability Insurance 4.5.1 Coverage. The Contractor shall provide professional liability insurance for any professional design or engineering drawing required by the work. Such insurance shall indemnify the Owner from claims arising from the negligent performance of professional services of any type, including but not limited to design or design/build services as part of the Work to be performed. 4.5.2 Form. This insurance shall include prior acts coverage sufficient to cover all services rendered by the Contractor and by its consultants under this Agreement. It is recognized that this coverage may be provided on a Claims -Made basis. 4.5.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 4.5.4 Continuing Professional Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.6 Builder's Risk 4.6.1 Insureds. Insureds shall include: a. Owner, General Contactor and all Loss Payees and Mortgagees as Named Insureds; and b. subcontractors of all tiers in the Work as Additional Insureds. 10-2012 00700 - C5 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT e. f. Form a. b. c. i. ii. iv. v. vi. vii. viii. ix. x. xi. 4.6.2 Covered Property. Such insurance shall cover: a. all structure(s) under construction, including retaining walls, paved surfaces and roadways, bridges, glass, foundation(s), footings, underground pipes and wiring, excavations, grading, backfilling or filling; b. all temporary structures (e.g., fencing, scaffolding, cribbing, false work, forms, site lighting, temporary utilities and buildings) located at the site; c. all property including materials and supplies on site for installation; d. all property including materials and supplies at other locations but intended for use at the site; all property including materials and supplies in transit to the site for installation by all means of transportation other than ocean transit; and other Work at the site identified in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached. Coverage shall be at least as broad as an unmodified ISO Special form, shall be provided on a completed -value basis, and shall be primary to any other coverage insurance available to the insured parties, with that other insurance being excess, secondary and non- contributing. No protective safeguard warranty shall be permitted. Required coverage shall further include: Additional expenses due to delay in completion of project (where applicable) Agreed value Damage arising from error, omission or deficiency in construction methods, design, specifications, workmanship or materials, including collapse Debris removal additional limit Earthquake (where applicable) Earthquake sprinkler leakage (where applicable) Expediting expenses - Flood (where applicable) Freezing Mechanical breakdown, including hot & cold testing (where applicable) Notice of cancellation, non -renewal or $ TBD Included without sublimit Included without sublimit 25% of direct damage loss $TBD $ TBD $ TBD $ TBD Included without sublimit Included without sublimit Included 10-2012 00700 - C6 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT material reduction — 60 days prior written notice to each insured xii. Occupancy clause, as required in F, Included below xiii. Ordinance or law xiv. Pollutant clean-up and removal xv. Preservation of property xvi. Replacement cost xvii. Theft xviii. Waiver of subrogation as required in G, below. Included without sublimit $ TBD Included without sublimit Included Included without sublimit Included 4.6.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided in an amount equal at all times to the full replacement value and cost of debris removal for any single occurrence. 4.6.4 Deductibles. Deductibles shall not exceed the following: a. All Risks of Direct Damage, Per Occurrence, except b. Delayed Opening Waiting Period c. Flood, Per Occurrence d. Earthquake and Earthquake Sprinkler Leakage, Per Occurrence $5,000 5 Days $25,000 or excess of NFIP if in Flood Zone A, B or V $25,000 4.6.5 Termination of Coverage. The termination of coverage provision shall be endorsed to permit occupancy of the covered property being constructed so long as such occupancy does not exceed 20% of the usable area of the property. This insurance shall be maintained in effect, unless otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, until the earliest of the following dates: a. the date on which all persons and organizations who are insureds under the policy agree that it shall be terminated; b. the date on which final payment, as provided for in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached, has been made; or c. the date on which the insurable interests in the Covered Property of all insureds other than Contractor have ceased. 10-2012 00700 - C7 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.6.6 Waiver of Subrogation. The waiver of subrogation provision shall be endorsed as follows: a. A waiver of subrogation shall be provided in favor of all insureds. b. The waiver of subrogation provisions shall be endorsed as follows: Should a covered loss be subrogated, either in whole or in part, your rights to any recovery will come first, and we will be entitled to a recovery only after you have been fully compensated for the loss. 5. Intentionally left blank. 6. Evidence of Insurance 6.1 Provision of Evidence. Evidence of the insurance coverage required to be maintained by the Contractor, represented by certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements issued by the insurance company or its legal agent, and must be furnished to the Owner prior to commencement of Work and not later than fifteen (15) days after receipt of this Agreement. New certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall be provided to the Owner prior to the termination date of the current certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements. 6.2 Form 6.2.1 All property insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 28, "Evidence of Property Insurance". 6.2.2 All liability insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 25, "Certificate of Insurance". 6.3 Specifications. Such certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall specify: 6.3.1 The Owner as a certificate holder with correct mailing address. 6.3.2 Insured's name, which must match that on this Agreement. 6.3.3 Insurance companies affording each coverage, policy number of each coverage, policy dates of each coverage, all coverages and limits described herein, and signature of authorized representative of insurance company. 6.3.4 Producer of the certificate with correct address and phone number listed. 6.3.5 Additional insured status required herein. 6.3.6 Amount of any deductibles and/or retentions. 6.3.7 Cancellation, non -renewal and material reduction in coverage notification as required by this Agreement. Additionally, the words "endeavor to" and "but failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liability of any kind upon Company, it agents or representatives" shall be deleted from the cancellation provision of the ACORD 25 certificate of insurance form. 10-2012 00700 - C8 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.3.8 Designated Construction Project Aggregate Limits required herein. 6.3.9 Personal Injury contractual liability required herein. 6.3.10 Primary and non-contributing status required herein. 6.3.11 Waivers of subrogation required herein. 6.4 Required Endorsements. A copy of each of the required endorsements shall also be provided. 6.5 Failure to Obtain. Failure of any Owner Party to demand such certificate or other evidence of full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of any Owner Party to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided shall not be construed as a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to maintain such insurance. 6.6 Certified Copies. Upon request of any Owner Party, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a certified copy of all insurance policies required herein within ten (10) days of any such request. Renewal policies, if necessary, shall be delivered to the Owner prior to the expiration of the previous policy. 6.7 Commencement of Work. Commencement of Work without provision of the required certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements, or without compliance with any other provision of this Agreement, shall not constitute a waiver by any Owner Party of any rights. The Owner shall have the right, but not the obligation, of prohibiting the Contractor or any subcontractor from performing any Work until such certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements are received and approved by the Owner. 7. Insurance Requirements of Contractor's Subcontractors 7.1 Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by all subcontractors (or provided by the Contractor on behalf of subcontractors) to cover operations performed under any subcontract agreement. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modification in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. The Contractor shall maintain certificates of insurance from all subcontractors containing provisions similar to those listed herein (modified to recognize that the certificate is from subcontractor) enumerating, among other things, the waivers of subrogation, additional insured status, and primary liability as required herein, and make them available to the Owner upon request. 7.2 The Contractor is fully responsible for loss and damage to its property on the site, including tools and equipment, and shall take necessary precautions to prevent damage to or vandalism, theft, burglary, pilferage and unexplained disappearance of property. Any insurance covering the Contractor's or its subcontractor's property shall be the Contractor's and its subcontractor's sole and complete means or recovery for any such loss. To the extent any loss is not covered by said insurance or subject to any deductible or co-insurance, the Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. Should the Contractor or its subcontractors choose to self insure this risk, it is expressly agreed that the Contractor hereby waives, and shall cause its 10-2012 00700 - C9 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT subcontractors to waive, any claim for damage or loss to said property in favor of the Owner Parties. 8. Use of the Owner's Equipment. The Contractor, its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers shall use the Owner's equipment only with express written permission of the Owner's designated representative and in accordance with the Owner's terms and condition for such use. If the Contractor or any of its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers utilize any of the Owner's equipment for any purpose, including machinery, tools, scaffolding, hoists, lifts or similar items owned, leased or under the control of the Owner, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and be liable to the Owner Parties for any and all loss or damage which may arise from such use. 9. Release and Waiver. The Contractor hereby releases, and shall cause its subcontractors to release, the Owner Parties from any and all claims or causes of action whatsoever which the Contractor and/or its subcontractors might otherwise now or hereafter possess resulting in or from or in any way connected with any loss covered by insurance, whether required herein or not, or which should have been covered by insurance required herein, including the deductible and/or uninsured portion thereof, maintained and/or required to be maintained by the Contractor and/or its subcontractors pursuant to this Agreement. 10-2012 00700 - C 10 ACoRI1 CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MMIDD/YYYY) 4/MM/DDT0 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER Hotchkiss Insurance Agency, LLC - Houston 13430 NW Freeway, Suite 600 Houston TX 77040 CONTACT Certificates Houston PHONE FAX (A/C No Exti. 713-956-9800 (NC, No): 713-956-0331 ADDRESS: certs@hiallc.com INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURER A : Depositors Insurance Company 42587 INSURED CONSMAS-03 Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. P.O. Box 1587 Pearland TX 77588 INSURERB: Travelers Lloyds Insurance Company 41262 INSURERC: ALLIED P & C HIS Co 42579 INSURER D : INSURER E : INSURER F : COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 954681322 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL INSD SUBR WVD POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF (MM/DDIYYYY) POLICY EXP (MM/DDIYYYY) LIMITS A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY GLD07294799735 2/24/2020 2/24/2021 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 CLAIMS -MADE X OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES (Ea occurrence) $ 100,000 MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GEN'L X AGGREGATE POLICY OTHER: X LIMIT APPLIES JECT X PER: LOC GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 PRODUCTS -COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 $ ., AUTOMOBILE X x LIABILITY ANY AUTO OWNED AUTOS ONLY HIRED X SCHEDULED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS ONLY 8APC7294799735 2/24/2020 2/24/2021 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ A X UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB X O OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE CAC/7294799735 2/24/2020 2/24/2021 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000 AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000 DED X RETENT ON $ n $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANYPROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMBEREXCLUDED? (Mandatory In NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below Y / N N/A PER STATUTE OTH- ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ B Builders Risk QT6600J952843TLC20 3/1/2020 3/1/2021 Per Location Per Occurrence 5,000,000 5,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) The general liability policy includes blanket additional insured endorsements (CG7323 1214 & CG7434 0512) that provide additional insured status for ongoing & completed opeartions when required by written contract. The auto liability policy includes a blanket additional insured endorsement that provides additional insured status when required by written contract. The general liability and auto policies include blanket waiver of subrogation endorsements that provide this feature when required by written contract. The general liability policy includes a special endorsement with Primary and Noncontributory wording, (CG7323 1214). The certificate holder is named as loss payee/mortgagee with regard to the Builders Risk policy and is subject the terms and conditions applicable to this policy. Umbrella will follow the underlying policies subject to the policy terms and conditions. The general liability and auto policies include a notice of cancellation endorsement, providing for 30 days' advance notice if the policy is cancelled by the company other than for non-payment of premium, 10 days' notice after the policy is cancelled for non-payment of premium. The endorsement does not provide for notice of cancellation if the named insured requests cancellation. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Dr. Pearland TX 77581 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE © 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25 (2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD - ---+ . ACOR )[a, ilk.-- CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE Acct#:2494132 DATE (MM(DD/YYYY) 0411312020 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: if the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER Lockton Companies, LLC 2100 Ross Ave., Suite 1400 Dallas, TX 75201 CONTACT NAME: PHONE FAX (A/C No.Ext): 214-771-4411 (A/C, No): E-MAIL ADDRESS: wc@resourcingedge.com INSURERS) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURERA : Indemnity Insurance Co. of North America 43575 INSURED Resourcing Edge I, LLC 1309 Ridge Rd., Suite 200 Rockwall, TX 75087 `SEE BELOW INSURER B : INSURERC: INSURER D INSURERE: INSURERF: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PER IOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTRINSD TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUER WVD POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF (MMIDD/YYYY) POLICY EXP (MMIDD/YYYY) LIMITS COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ CLAIMS- OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES (Ea occurrence) $ MED EXP (Any one person) $ PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ GEN'L AGGREGATE POLICY LIMIT APPLIES PRO- IFC:T PER: LOC GENERAL AGGREGATE $ PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ OTHER: $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITYCOMBINED ANY AUTO OWNED SCHEDULED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS ONLY SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident( $ BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ $ UMBRELLA UAB OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ EXCESS LIAR CLAIMS -MADE AGGREGATE $ DED RETENTION $ $ A WORKERS AND EMPLOYOERS' LIABILITY Yi ANYPROPRIETOR/PARTNERJEXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory In NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below N — N/A x C66692000 10/01/2019 10/01/2020 V /\ PER STATUTE H ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS 1 LOCATIONS I VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space Is required) Construction Masters of Houston Inc. (2226) is included as a named insured through endorsement Coverage provided for all leased employees but not subcontractors of: Construction Masters of Houston Inc. WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF CITY OF PEARLAND WHEN REQUIRED BY WRITTEN CONTRACT. CERTIFICATE HOLDER City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Dr. Pearland, TX 77581 ACORD 25 (2016/03) 2494132 CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE © 1988-2016 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SPECIAL CONDITIONS - SUPPLEMENT Section 00800-S SPECIAL CONDITIONS - SUPPLEMENT The following supplement modifies City of Pearland Standard Special Conditions of Agreement, Section 00800 dated 08/2018. Where a portion of the City of Pearland Section is modified, added to or deleted by this Supplementary Section, the unaltered portions of the City of Pearland Section shall remain in effect. 1. Under General Notes : Replace first paragraph under General Notes in its entirety with the following: Section 01500 Temporary Facilities requires CONTRACTOR to provide high speed internet access in the Field Office. BIDDER is Required to provide a Field Office and internet access for this project. All other requirements remain and will be required per the section. END OF SECTION 00800-S - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00800 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The following Special Conditions modify the General Conditions, Document 00700. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Special Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.01 Add the following paragraph to the end of Article 1.01: The OWNER'S representative on the project site is: Susan Johnson: telephone: 281.652. 1734 The CONSTRUCTION MANAGER is: telephone: The CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR is: telephone: ARTICLE 4 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.05 Add the following paragraph to Article 4.05: A Maintenance Bond in accordance with Document 00612 of the Project Manual is required for this Project. The cost of this bond shall be included in the CONTRACTOR'S Bid Proposal. Attachment No. 3 To General Conditions, Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor, Article 4.6 Builder's Risk — Builder's Risk Insurance is Required for this project. ARTICLE 5 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.08 Add Article 5.08: The Contract Time as defined in the bid and other sections of the Contract Documents includes a certain number of rain days. Based on the Alvin Weather Center Records, the average annual rain days from June 1898 to December 1996 is 40 days calculated from all precipitation days of record. The CONTRACTOR is required to keep a record of rain days at the site. The record of rain days must be accepted and signed by the City Inspector monthly, and shall be reported on the monthly pay estimate submittal. At the end of the contract, the CONTRACTOR will be credited only for the number of accepted rain days that exceed 40 rain days per year, proportionate to the original Contract Time. General Notes: Section 01500 Temporary Facilities requires CONTRACTOR to provide high speed internet access in the Field Office. BIDDER is Required to provide either a Field Office or any internet access for this project. All other requirements remain and will be required per the section. 08/2018 00800 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the Owner for all Traffic Control Documents. Contractor to coordinate with the Owner for procurement of Traffic Control Documents prior to permitting. Contractor is to keep a minimum of one lane open at all times, in both directions. No lane closures to extend beyond the defined work day. Contractor will be required to provide an on -site construction office for the duration of this project. END OF SECTION 08/2018 00800 - 2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION Section 00811 WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION 1.01 In accordance with the Prevailing Wage law on Public Works (Article 2258 of the Texas Government Code), the public body awarding the contract does hereby specify the rates shown in Table 00811-A following to be the general prevailing rates in the locality in which the work is being performed. 1.02 This prevailing wage rate does not prohibit the payment of more than the rates stated. 1.03 The wage scale for engineering construction is to be applied to all site work greater than five (5) feet from an exterior wall of new building under construction or from an exterior wall of an existing building. (Attach the current wage rates. Number the pages 00811-2, 00811-3, etc.) 10-2012 00811 - 1 of 1 "General Decision Number: TX20190032 01/04/2019 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20180044 State: Texas Construction Type: Heavy County: Brazoria County in Texas. HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (Including Water and Sewer Lines (Does Not Include Flood Control) Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.60 for calendar year 2019 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis -Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.60 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2019. If this contract is covered by the EO and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must pay workers in that classification at least the wage rate determined through the conformance process set forth in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) (or the EO minimum wage rate, if it is higher than the conformed wage rate). The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Please note that this EO applies to the above -mentioned types of contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis -Bacon Act itself, but it does not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis -Bacon Related Acts, 00811-2 including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/04/2019 * SFTX0669-001 04/01/2017 Rates Fringes SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire Sprinklers) $ 29.03 15.84 SUTX2005-018 05/18/2005 Rates Fringes Carperter $ 14.38 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER$ 11.37 1.13 ELECTRICIAN $ 18.40 1.34 Formbuilder/Formsetter $ 9.83 1.69 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING $ 11.29 0.00 Laborers: Common $ 8.99 Landscape $ 7.35 Mason Tender Cement $ 9.96 1.25 0.00 0.00 00811-3 Pipelayer $ 9.63 1.50 PIPEFITTER $ 17.00 0.04 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR: Backhoe $ 12.74 0.00 Bulldozer $ 12.46 0.00 Crane $ 11.00 0.74 Excavator $ 16.74 0.00 Front End Loader $ 10.47 1.28 Grader $ 12.20 1.48 Tractor $ 11.29 1.45 TRUCK DRIVER $ 14.42 1.00 WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis -Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health -related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health -related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic 00811-4 violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)) . The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of ""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the 00811-5 most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non -union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in 00811-6 the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis -Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: 00811-7 Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. 00811-8 END OF GENERAL DECISION 00811-9 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION Section 00812 WAGE SCALE FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION 1.01 In accordance with the Prevailing Wage law on Public Works (Article 2258 of the Texas Government Code), the public body awarding the contract does hereby specify the rates shown in Table 00811-A following to be the general prevailing rates in the locality in which the work is being performed. 1.02 This prevailing wage rate does not prohibit the payment of more than the rates stated. 1.03 The wage scale for building construction is to be applied to all site work five (5) feet or less from an exterior wall of new building under construction or from an exterior wall of an existing building. (Attach the current wage rates. Number the pages 00812-2; 00812-3, etc.) 07-2019 00812 - 1 of 1 "General Decision Number: TX20190233 03/15/2019 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20180282 State: Texas Construction Type: Building County: Brazoria County in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.60 for calendar year 2019 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis -Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.60 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2019. If this contract is covered by the EO and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must pay workers in that classification at least the wage rate determined through the conformance process set forth in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) (or the EO minimum wage rate,if it is higher than the conformed wage rate). The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Please note that this EO applies to the above -mentioned types of contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis -Bacon Act itself, but it does not apply to contracts subject only to the 00812 - 2 Davis -Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/04/2019 1 01/18/2019 2 03/15/2019 * ASBE0022-009 12/01/2018 Rates Fringes ASBESTOS WORKER/HEAT & FROST INSULATOR (Duct, Pipe and Mechanical System Insulation)....$ 24.38 BOIL0074-003 01/01/2017 13.30 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER., . ................$ 28.00 22.35 CARP0551-009 04/01/2016 Rates Fringes CARPENTER (Excludes Drywall Hanging, Form Work, and Metal Stud Installation) $ 23.05 8.78 ELEC0716-005 08/28/2017 Rates Fringes 00812 - 3 ELECTRICIAN (Excludes Low Voltage Wiring and Installation of Alarms) $ 32.25 9.14 ELEV0031-003 01/01/2019 Rates ELEVATOR MECHANIC $ 42.60 FOOTNOTES: Fringes 33.705 A. 6% under 5 years based on regular hourly rate for all hours worked. 8% over 5 years based on regular hourly rate for all hours worked. B. Holidays: New Year's Day; Memorial Day; Independence Day; Labor Day; Thanksgiving Day; Friday after Thanksgiving Day; Christmas Day; and Veterans Day. ENGI0450-002 04/01/2014 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR Cranes $ 34.85 9.85 IRON0084-011 06/01/2018 Rates IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL $ 23.77 IRON0135-002 09/01/2018 Fringes 7.12 Rates Fringes 00812 - 4 IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL $ 31.85 12.14 PLAS0079-004 01/01/2015 Rates Fringes PLASTERER..... ......... ..... ..$ 19.92 1.00 PLUM0068-002 10/01/2018 Rates Fringes PLUMBER.. ..... ......... .$ 35.60 11.04 PLUM0211-010 10/01/2018 Rates Fringes PIPEFITTER (Including HVAC Pipe Installation) $ 33.30 12.26 SHEE0054-003 07/01/2017 Rates Fringes SHEET METAL WORKER (Excludes HVAC Duct and Unit Installation) $ 27.72 13.70 SUTX2014-008 07/21/2014 Rates Fringes ACOUSTICAL CEILING MECHANIC......$ 16.41 3.98 BRICKLAYER $ 19.86 0.00 00812 - 5 CAULKER $ 15.36 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER$ 13.33 0.00 DRYWALL FINISHER/TAPER $ 16.30 3.71 DRYWALL HANGER AND METAL STUD INSTALLER........................$ 17.45 3.96 ELECTRICIAN (Alarm Installation Only) $ 17.97 3.37 ELECTRICIAN (Low Voltage Wiring Only) $ 18.00 1.68 FLOOR LAYER: Carpet $ 20.00 0.00 FORM WORKER $ 12.57 0.00 GLAZIER ..... ........ $ 19.12 4.41 INSULATOR - BATT $ 14.87 0.73 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING $ 12.10 0.00 LABORER: Common or General $ 10.55 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Brick$ 13.37 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Cement/Concrete $ 10.86 0.00 LABORER: Pipelayer $ 12.94 0.00 LABORER: Roof Tearoff $ 11.28 0.00 LABORER: Landscape and 00812 - 6 Irrigation..« ...............,..,$ 9.49 0.00 LATHER $ 19.73 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe $ 15.56 0.00 OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader $ 13.93 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer.... $ 20.77 0.00 OPERATOR: Drill . $ 16.22 0.34 OPERATOR: Forklift.. $ 15.64 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade $ 13.37 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader $ 13.55 0.94 OPERATOR: Mechanic ..... $ 17.52 3.33 OPERATOR: Paver (Asphalt, Aggregate, and Concrete) $ 16.03 0.00 OPERATOR: Roller $ 16.00 0.00 PAINTER (Brush, Roller and Spray), Excludes Drywall Finishing/Taping..... ..$ 16.77 ROOFER..... ......... .......$ 15.40 SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Duct 4.51 0.00 Installation Only) $ 20.05 4.19 SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Unit 00812 - 7 Installation Only) $ 19.67 2.24 SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire Sprinklers) $ 22.17 9.70 TILE FINISHER... $ 12.00 0.00 TILE SETTER $ 16.17 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: 1/Single Axle Truck It .$ 14.95 5.23 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck $ 12.39 1.18 TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck $ 19.65 8.57 TRUCK DRIVER: Semi -Trailer Truck $ 12.50 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck. $ 12.00 4.11 WATERPROOFER $ 14.39 0.00 WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis -Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their 00812 - 8 own illness, injury or other health -related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health -related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of ""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for Local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 00812 - 9 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non -union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 00812 - 10 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis -Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: 00812 - 11 Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISION" 00812 - 12 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Date: December 18, 2019 PROJECT: Orange Street Service Center Phase 1 - Administration Building BID NO.: 1220-11 BID DATE: January 14, 2020 @ 2:00 p.m. FROM: Susan Johnson Project Manager City of Pearland To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Pre -Proposal Conference sign -in sheet is attached. SPECIFICATIONS: None. CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: None. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 2-22-12 00900 - 1 of 1 PRE -PROPOSAL CONFERENCE SIGN -IN SHEET Orange Street Service Center Phase 1 - Administration Building Project No. FA1404, Bid No. 1220-11 December 17, 2019 2:00 p.m. Tuesday, May 02, 2017 Name (Print) Company Phone Number Email j .A V CAA 4Aitirs Wel4we Cymru e(c ki \ 3 ib' 372—A1°1 +b(nt, ®ww4ber .CaW \._,I1._L t� Siif�L= 1114 (1'b.)/4"'1;\ e} (L 1 61VOL )-l- �5Lt" -)-4 � AAA.ie.5 ALAr►*e,Aet,14,;,1dii;1. c_cv P-e,SS Svf. -1--A-I__ -4• 13- L{6s-S30cr, foss sN._, V; -bea c i An U `' `,~\ k, 4\'c; - c �,i pAgiak ` ;) 0 DQ( PBc- 14,0 (it- e-ussti @ ..- 614vY t-, L'01-4 ,A'4ie ,E/ GCS ,)-i 51-52Z/ ,/jsc,<., -6.s- -t,Y ca.-) Skte1 !+'fOZL -7--c- Li, AI .. EVV- is 5.1-_(i -56A4- i i44 0 Ium, eit4,, sprvi&e5_.c,. kc ioN k iJl)c Z- 1.-i-051R,- -t_ . t r laic �..i v`i 2-) ,�.' (. 6"''L' ,"" /C. raj t t /6 -/ 4.11 t C: f .. to r r i / 4 i 5 i ' eG't:.t J +/4.7i t„ , -- , (..'i e-,V G..rte ZUt 4 ,-23Z2 Je..o;etet,.w e.c...dr„ -efre v0 -7 Pet. r.)a-1 -- , , Lt,'(A. L 1:V`i J ' kl ,1E,1' = :: i ".. ' to q _. pc- ,Y AS ipC'.i Y ta:e ill • 610V ,�u LJ2 b' -\G( 4 • -�, -"332- 99c (4,Q ,,,,a c�u-�� b hc,.j,,A- • co 1 C l 6IlLu it-41 Admin o,op 2 81- f s2-17: ' SJ° �alL3aklC+ --der Ah44-!-,t .1 °V 1 of 1 4. Revised 7/25/08 PRE -PROPOSAL CONFERENCE SIGN -IN SHEET Orange Street Service Center Phase 1 - Administration Building Project No. FA1404, Bid No. 1220-11 December 17, 2019 2:00 p.m. Tuesday, May 02, 2017 Name (Print) Company Phone Number Email >•A :s 12-,j--ii2p3 EZ ItLyr 0 I tzl-j 015 A3I e;a--) - n mac. -14 j� i L" . .1_ c 1 �› 1 `3 = 3 " 0 'J 7 1 Cc_Lh T'r Usi 1t>� i k c-C-- r `J a i j]Q.!!�^Nrj c-X+-lt� �5-14��+) 1�� rJ��tT (,.j� 1YAwhei r44 CV f. �J C��'�� 1� }��q 0�y� 1' / y� [1p �, / J>rWr �Y�ICIS`lltiVTTrI/•f�l%X�r[�flJliGrj2 .CG 'gram. CaurC.;.Pk. A - t)-c.lVet /751` 713/QS6--7070 . -'e,,. cr. .Irev-.iref` M4`r 4 JIAAtAL,444,ria Ail yrr,(t-'car, , `t r3l6 t its? 3 M 1 lr sco4�tOnsf,-. On .c.xvin 7b€:),/iy, id61404 4, at" QV P 10C1 . : e)1% j, w z (% 1 ,Z.,s47 , 11 �C"Anc�tH'\ i.NCX S. A. 'ti r t 4 � v+ �, vn � �n;. cuc.-�' cc,� � l � - G4"I S --133 4 : d e a +� s-1-r ti-, ccxr% � �1.. co,'" e,,i.e..r, i l.. 1- est.k_e'' •-i o,e, r a t L' E ``' 5,- 1 7 't, t d h o u S on e, ,io u 1%..,, t 4 1 i 3J i,/ r h Zo4nrifiy,:_rii.9.4 /' L j 1. ..7 w `' .] k L e i' 1 S( d /L -' G'/r 71-7 A1.- c!/ii'C 544kE Pra-sre: c-7 014")i) Co. 83Z. -11$8-Lf7g3 6D1Es-r ce 0)i4gL- c>,Nr. GOM 1/emAw g-' /e s '77,rca 612Sg-iteel4 c2x, al' 8 - // 't 4ks R ) ,e,f-1 :C SP,'5. R9 [. �. Z C(r ;17 -� C..7/ — Z3Z - (X G1'`r2r rC i..01 C7: -Cii /h a."1-t ( le(.ae. lA ; &r/t-c fig COS 0 2-? 7�7� ' y fr."Jr �. r 4.) Admin 1 of 1 4. Revised 7/25/08 PRE -PROPOSAL CONFERENCE SIGN -IN SHEET Orange Street Service Center Phase 1 - Administration Building Project No. FA1404, Bid No. 1220-11 December 17, 2019 2:00 p.m. Tuesday, May 02, 2017 Name (Print) Company Phone Number Email ,.ji I;lir : ) l&i , B ) -7 ( ••!_`•'. �--f"�oC,1//fl'/- 7/'�% l /-e9 ,, ! 1fce7 Ci'�''c l% Gi�t�//l'Y�^` C..:G`17.Z --r— t•r_Lt I‘:. y ✓1t{/ — Cc),)4iie,-Q.i it, L. ' ' 32 - 13 - C.40 S L" Z<-%-5"64 ?3 5 / / . f LL.6,usr"Je.([s rf c_ttd - k'1e....L SH to rvx -r 4r -A/CS aii- eye- 7f 'a Ls-trey 4 cs . cd eCy tom';n IV�1�-{�` �3)--rT)-73 7)- .o.,1 �S .Gar,".d _k61, e7'Y1 o oo,,✓teYv/h,`ie cart 6il?i,--. 1f Cl"a3d� .06i,e%cfre_ a<„Ye slfd,-,(0•. . :l1116(O G1n" e(,1j11jfr(1t6 113-`A3-25vo Rr-P6 ecorrfre,c-4,rs.Co;r7. 'Max -TA, IJ 441-c> s ultatnavv. Q 62- - '1, 7 Tii -+rf-f -Sore2 o s id e ,L.,.E.. co( II 434,0 "} 7T» 74 O\n' k1 ctkf f t\ Lo --2) --C • e (' Co mm okc—(0.s i 0,7-11 o - ct pc 3-i- e r c 0 m 0, co m CL'vi`; Crt ut,_J iV*C Cs el..4., ^iE - ,1i1'cl0-7I b1vlcPc, ccp -vs .,�' ✓l n4C.1Je `-l`r► u,P -vis1T ur -0' 32 -�%72 - of f4vie / ; a (c , C'oi,ce", C,nuv V- VD1oK \V- - 0 C..$)c)-r\Ac;A- Ors -1\3- SSS'1 -02/. (` \L--10coo S- r icr., .c.,-) - , •Trkj, \ _L l) A- (IN .3 - "13S - 3J b'.ck S G` i \ Lt7 c S- - cic3n Admin 1 of 1 4. Revised 7,25/08 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 2 Date: January 09, 2020 PROJECT: Orange Street Service Center; Phase 1 - Administration Building BID NO.: 1220-11 BID DATE: January 14, 2020; 2:00 p.m. FROM: Susan Johnson Project Manager City of Pearland To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FORDISOUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1. Please note the due date for Proposals has been changed to January 30, 2020; 2:00 p.m. Remove Section 00100 Invitation to Propose - Competitive Sealed Proposal in its entirety and replace with the attached. SPECIFICATIONS: N/A CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: N/A END OF ADDENDUM NO. 2 Susan Johnson 2-22-12 00900 - 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE Section 00100 INVITATION TO PROPOSE COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSAL Electronic Competitive Sealed Proposals (CSP) will be accepted for the following project, through the City's E-bid System. Electronic Proposals shall be submitted through the City's web site at: https://pearland.ionwave.netlLogin.aspx All interested Offerors are required to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address by selecting "Supplier Registration". Registration provides automatic access to any changes (addenda) to the Plans, Specifications or Submission time and date. Submission of an Electronic Proposal REQUIRES completing a short registration questionnaire found on this web site. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes, registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services, New (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Trade (New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions, see INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS, SECTION 00200, PART 2 included in the project proposal documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic proposals are to be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebidsa,pearlandtx.gov. All Proposals submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Proposals shall be submitted on the forms provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer, City of Pearland, City Hall Annex located at 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. Electronic Proposals will be accepted until 2:00 p.m., Thursday, January 30, 2020. All Proposals shall reference the following project information in the appropriate locations in provided electronic format. All properly submitted proposals shall be publicly "opened" and read aloud into the public record following the closing of the acceptance period for the construction of: Orange Street Service Center Phase 1— Administration Building City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: FA1404 PROPOSAL NO.: 1220-11 A mandatory pre -proposal conference will be held at the City of Pearland Council Chambers at 3519 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 at 2:00 p.m. on Tuesday, December 17, 2019. The project will entail the Orange Street Service Center (Phase 1) Administration Building improvements which include the demolition of two existing buildings and utility services; new construction of a 2-story, approximately 19,000 square feet building consisting mostly of offices 12-2017 00100 - 1 of 4 Addendum 2 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE and workstations; and major building systems including drilled pier foundations, structural steel frame, concrete tilt -walls, aluminum and glass storefronts. The project also includes complete mechanical, plumbing, electrical, automatic sprinklers, fire alarm system, low -voltage access control, and an emergency generator. The Site Work includes concrete pavement, utilities, fencing, landscaping and irrigation systems. Upon award of a contract, the successful Offeror will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, "Manage -It" for the administration of the construction project, including but not limited to, all transmittals and material submittals, RFI's, RFC's, Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City, its Construction Manager and Engineer. This system has certain hardware, interne access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications, documentation and records for the project. For more information, see INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS, SECTION 00200, PART 1.4. Electronic Proposal Documents: Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download at no cost on the City's Website at:: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents are also available at the following locations: Amtek Plan Room 4001 Sherwood Houston, TX 77092 The Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston, TX 77057 Virtual Builders Exchange 7035 W. Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 Houston, TX 77092 McGrawHill Construction — Dodge Reports (713)956-0100 (713) 334-7100 (832) 613-0201 1-800-393-6343 No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and Proposal documents obtained through the City's E-bid System. OFFERORS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E-BID SYSTEM IN ORDER TO SUBMIT A PROPOSAL EVEN IF PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES. Offerors accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents, plans, specifications proposal forms and addenda required for submitting a proposal. Proposals must be accompanied by a Contractors Qualification Statement (Section 00300 Part C). 12-2017 00100 - 2 of 4 Addendum 2 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE No proposal may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety (90) days subsequent to the proposal opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). Bid Security and Bonds: Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total bid price must accompany each proposal. Offerors submitting Proposals electronically through the E-bid System shall scan and up -load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two Offerors and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the request. Bid Security shall be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. Performance and Payment Bonds: The successful Offeror must furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law, as amended, upon the form included in the Contract Documents, in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the final contract price, such bonds are to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and named in the current list of "Treasury Department Circular No. 570", naming the City of Pearland, Texas as Obligee. Additionally, the successful Offeror shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements installed as part of this work, as provided in the Special Conditions of Agreement if so stated. Equal Opportunity: All responsible Offerors having submitted complete proposals will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The contractor, sub -recipient, or sub -contractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration of DOT -assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this agreement, which may result in the termination of this agreement or such other remedy as the recipient deems appropriate. Nondiscrimination: The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally - Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. DBE/SBE Goal: The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) goal for this project is 0%. The Small Business Enterprise (SBE) goal for this project is 0%. DBEs and SBEs selected must be TxDOT approved. Race neutral participation is encouraged and can be achieved through various supplier and subcontracting opportunities. 12-2017 00100 - 3 of 4 Addendum 2 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE Selection Criteria: The Contract will be awarded based on provision of "Best Value" to the Owner. "Best Value" is defined as: the lowest price for the provision of the highest quality of goods and services in the performance of the work as determined to be most advantageous to the Owner. (252.043 Local Government Code) Owner will attempt to negotiate a contract with the most qualified Offeror. If the Owner is unable to negotiate a satisfactory scope, schedule or price with the selected Offeror, the Owner may end negotiations with that Offeror and proceed to the next highest ranked Offeror in the order of the ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected. The Owner may undertake such investigations as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Offeror to perform the work, the accuracy of information provided and the reputation of the Offeror with former clients. Offeror shall furnish the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any proposal if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such Offeror fails to satisfy the Owner that such Offeror is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work contemplated therein. Proposals containing any Conditional Modifiers will not be accepted. The City of Pearland (Owner) reserves the right to award a contract based on its sole assessment and ranking of the above factors in its own best interests and to reject any or all proposals for any reason. A proposal that has been "opened" may not be changed for the purposes of correcting an error in the proposed price, scope or schedule. State Sales Tax: The Owner qualifies for exemption from State and Local Sales Tax pursuant to Section 151.311 of the Texas Tax Code for material incorporated into the project. Crystal Roan City Secretary, City of Pearland First Publication date December 04, 2019 Second Publication date December 11, 2019 12-2017 00100 - 4 of 4 Addendum CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 3 Date: January 17, 2020 PROJECT: Orange Street Service Center, Phase 1 - Administration Building BID NO.: 1220-1 I BID DATE: January 30, 2020; 2:00 p.m. FROM: Chris Casey, AIA Architect Huitt-Zollars,Inc. 1001 Fannin Street, Suite 4040 Houston, Texas 77002 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISOUALIFICATION. GENERAL: All bidder questions are officially due on Monday, January 20, 2020 (3:00 p.m. CST). CLARIFICATIONS: Question 1. The insurance requirements are not provided in the specifications. Please provide? Answer: The attachments to Section 00700 were inadvertently left out. Please see attachments No.1, 2 and 3 of Section 00700, added by addendum. Question 2. Has this project been awarded? A well-known bid management website shows Construction LTD as the "general contractor" for this project? Answer: No. Proposals will be publicly opened on January 30, 2020. Question 3. The selection criteria is based on provision of "Best Value" to the Owner ("Best Value" is defined as: the lowest price for the provision of the highest quality of goods and services in the performance of the work as determined to be most advantageous to the Owner. (252.043 Local Government Code)." Yet, there is a scale from 0 to 100 points to select the awarded GC based on price, experience and qualifications of Offeror's project team, offeror's experience with projects of similar scope, value and complexity, among other. 2-22-12 00900 - 1 of 11 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Please clarify whether the selection criteria is "Best Value," which can be interpreted as the lowest bid price with no other qualifications ? Answer: Selection criteria is per the information and rating criteria listed in the contract documents. Section 00200, Paragraph 20. Question 4. Will the metal decking be structurally sloped or will this be a fully tapered roof system. Please advise? Answer: Tapered insulation @ detail 1, sheet A801. RE: Spec. Section 07541, Paragraph 2.8.A, B & C. RE: A 111 for taper insulation installations. RE: S103 Roof Framing is level/ flat. Question 5. Please confirm the door finish. Are the doors to be painted as stated per the door schedule on sheet A603, or are the doors to be plastic laminate? Answer: The door schedule on sheet A603 clearly shows that some doors are painted H.Metal and some are solid core wood -stained (SCW). See door panel material and finish on the door schedule. Question 6. I believe the spec on this project calls for the pipe bollard tops to be formed by hand. We manufacture a precast concrete bollard cap that makes this process faster, less expensive and completely uniform. If you get a second visit us at www.topgardcap.com. There are some installation videos on the site that demonstrate how easy the product is to install and the uniform profile that is achieved. The product is stocked across the country so it is readily available for your job. Please contact me if you need more information or samples. Answer: The bollard detail 9 on the sheet C 112 shows the pipe bollard rounded off concrete above the pipe portion. Question 7. Regarding the attached, could we fence off an area around the north, west and south sides of the building (approximately 40' out from the building on those three sides) and continue the fencing to Old Alvin as shown? We would like to be able to utilize the parking lot and have that entrance as access from Old Alvin. Answer: Construction fencing shall be according to Fence Construction Plan sheet C125. This is per City of Pearland preferred site construction fencing plan. Question 8. Clarify if the interior is RACO frame or Storefront aluminum. There is a contradiction on Sheet A603, detail 5, there is a Note: All interior frame width of sidelights and doors must be same width as wall. No exceptions (that means RACO frame). But at the same time, on detail 6 is calling for storefront metal (1 3/4" x 4'h")? Answer: RACO: for all interior framing for doors, sidelights and/or storefront. Question 9. The finish schedule calls for WC-1 dry erase wall covering to be provided at conference room walls. However the finish plans and elevations for the second floor conference rooms do not show this anywhere. Please advise where this occurs if at all? Answer: See revised Finish Plan sheets A612 and A613 and Finish Schedule sheet A611 for locations of the writeable wall covering (WC-1). 2-22-12 00900 - 2 of 11 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Question 10. Please provide the texture of Elastomeric coating. This is not specified. Answer: Elastomeric coating should be smooth texture. RE: Spec. Section 09965 "Elastomeric Coatings". Question 11. What explicitly are the exterior metals to be painted with the High Performance Paint? Some show to be powder coated. Some anodized. Note 5 page A 111 says to paint all roof top metals. Answer: Spec, Section 09911 Exterior Painting - 1.2 Summary-(B.) All exterior metals shall be painted as required by section 09960 "High-performance Coatings", Sheet A111-Notes/Paint all exposed metal surfaces on roof. Question 12 .Pt 3 A611 has the stair paint to be "Harmony" a PPG product is that correct? Answer: That is correct. Question 13. Since leasing agreements with landowners is extremely volatile and even if we do the research prior to the bid to receive lease pricing from potential land owners there is no guarantee the landowner will still lease it for the same amount, have already leased or sold it by the point when the contractor receives an NTP. I would request that an allowance be designated by the City of Pearland to be included in the Contractor's bid for funds to be used towards a lease agreement. That way all contractor's will carry the same amount in their bid and not have to waste time and effort on researching lease agreements and concentrate on the bid itself? Answer: No, these items should be included in the bid and will be governed by 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls. Question 14. Item 2.5 outlines an Axis PoE+ switch. Is this to be provided by the camera contractor? Answer: This item will be removed and provided under a separate contract. Re: Sheet E502 and Sheet E503. Question 15. Is there a preference on the mounting style for the cameras? (i.e.: wall mount, surface mount, recessed mount..) Answer: Please coordinate with Others and Owner prior to installing rough -ins for cameras. Question 16. Please clarify the following: The architectural rendering showed an exterior sign on the building. There are no exterior signs shown on the architectural elevation drawings or called for in the specifications. Please advise if we need to provide an exterior sign and if so, provide specifications. Also, could you provide a signage schedule to clarify signage required? Answer: No. The building sign is not included in a scope of work of this project. 2-22-12 00900 - 3 of 11 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Question 17. L.J. Power has the generator service contract for the City of Pearland so we service all of their generators and transfer switches. I received a request to bid the generator and automatic transfer switch for the Orange Street Service Center Plaza. In going through your specifications, I found the only manufacturer listed was Cummins. I would like to get Aksa by L.J. Power pre -approved to bid our equipment to the contractors. Please see the spec sheet for this 600 kW diesel attached and let me know if you have any questions and we can get pre -approved to bid. Answer: Huitt-Zollars, Inc. has reviewed the submitted documentation and will approve Aksa as a generator manufacturer so as long as the City of Pearland approves. Question 18. Is there a reason only one manufacturer is listed, or is this an "or approved equal" situation? Answer: It is considered a reference spec and the contractor can submit any comparable generator that meets all of the minimum standards as listed. Question 19. What material is to be used for the Restroom counters? Answer: Solid surface material CT-1 to be used for the Restroom counters. Spec section 12366 "Solid Surfacing" and finish schedule on sheet A611. Question 20. There are no quartz back splashes shown at any countertop please confirm this is the desired application at all counters. Answer: SPEC -Section 12366, Solid Surfacing Countertops/2.2 Countertop Fabrication, B- configuration 2. says "Backsplash", Detail 6, Sheet A701 shows 4" Sched. Continuous Backsplash. Question 21. Cabinet Elevations show cabinet handles but cabinet sections show routed finger pulls, which is correct? Answer: The routered finger pulls are correct. See revised sheets A502 and A503. Question 22. Cabinet sections on sheet A701 show a gaps between the routed finger pull and the cabinet face which will show the melamine interior of the cabinet is this what is desired? Answer: Yes - Reference detail 3, Sheet A702. Question 23. Cabinet section 6/A701 does not identify the face material on the 6" drop below the 1 'Y2" counter top please specify material? Answer: It is PLAM, (Plastic Laminate) RE: Detail 6/A701. Question 24. Cabinet Skirts below the restroom vanities do not indicate laminate colors please provide a laminate color selection for the restrooms. Answer: PLAM-2. See Finish Schedule, Sheet A611. 2-22-12 00900 - 4 of 11 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Question 25. Cabinet detail 6/A701 shows a reveal extending through the entire face of the front apron, just below the 1 ''Y2" counter, flush with the face of the counter. This condition will create water seepage into the cabinet and set up an unwarrantable condition. Please provide a modified detail eliminating the water trap. Answer: See revised detail 6, Sheet A701. Question 26. The material schedule on sheet A611 says that conference rooms are the use CT-2 but elevation 4/A502 indicate CT-1, which is correct? Answer: CT-2 is correct. RE: Sheet A611. Question 27. The material schedule on sheet A611 says that conference rooms are the use PL-1 laminate but elevation 4&5/A502 indicate PL-2, which is correct? Answer: PLAM-1 is correct. RE: Sheet A611. Question 28. The material schedule on sheet A611 says that PL2 and PL3 are to have Glossy finish but the -60 after the color numbers indicate a matt finish, which is correct? Answer: Use; Matte Finish, -60, as indicated on sheet A611. Question 29. The cabinet sections on sheet A701 indicate to use Aluminum base attached with galvanized screws. Aluminum tends to oxidize when in contact with galvanized steel especially when water is in contact such as mopping. 1. May we glue the aluminum directly to the toe kicks? Answer: Stainless steel with structural adhesives only. Question 30. At window W6 between the lobby and the Clerk's office the Quartz top under the window is indicated to stop at the outside corner on the window but the window makes an L shape continuing down the corridor toward door 102. 1. Should the stone counter continue under the entire window? Answer: Yes. Question 31. Wall section 3/A703 indicates a surface mounted divider on the counter top but does not indicate what it is made of or where it locates relative to the deal tray. 1. Please provide a material type for the divider. 2. Please provide an elevation of how many and where the dividers are to be located. Answer: Divider has been removed from the drawing. RE: detail 3, sheet A703. Question 32. Can you please clarify the following questions regarding the above referenced project? Is part "C" of the bid packet to be submitted through E-bid system as well or hard copy? Answer: Per section 00200 Instructions to Offerors, a completed copy of Part C should be uploaded with proposal attachments that are submitted via the E-bid system. Proposal documents should be uploaded to in the "Response Attachments" tab in Ionwave. 2-22-12 00900 - 5 of 11 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Question 33.Is the hard copy of the bid bond to be submitted in person on bid date or only when requested upon award of contract? Answer: A copy of the Bid bond should be included with proposal attachments that are submitted via the E-bid system. Proposal documents should be uploaded to in the "Response Attachments" tab in Ionwave. If an original copy of the bid bond is needed, you will be notified in writing via email. Question 34. Is the financial statement (needed for part "C") to be submitted electronically? Answer: Yes. If desired, you may mark the Financial Statement file "confidential" and include as a separate uploaded file. Also, if preferred, you may submit the Financial Statement via hardcopy. If submitting hardcopy versus the e-bid system, ensure that it is delivered and received by the City of Pearland, City Secretary's Office before 2:00 p.m. on January 30th. The outside of the envelope should be marked with the bid number, bid name and the word "confidential". Question 35. Are there any items of the bid package that need to be submitted in person? Answer: No, documents do not need to be submitted in person. All documents and pricing should be submitted via the e-bid system. The due date for proposal submission has been revised via addendum to January 30, 2020. Question 36. Would a TPO roof system be accepted in place of the 07521 Torch -Applied Styrene- Butadiene-Styrene Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing system? Answer: Yes - TPO roof system would be accepted, but needs to be GARLAND product. Question 37. Section 13730 — Access Control 1. Is this to be a stand-alone system or does it connect to an existing Server and are additional licenses required for this building? 2. Are Client Workstations required for this system and are additional client licenses required? 3. Only three doors are shown with electrified hardware in Section 08710. Who is providing electrified hardware for the remaining doors shown with card readers? 4. Doors 102A and 102C are shown to have card readers, however no locking hardware is specified in the Door Hardware Schedule. Are Magnetic Locks acceptable for these doors? 5. Please define operation of card reader shown at the first -floor elevator lobby. Answer: Items 1-2 will be removed and provided under a separate contract. Re: Sheets E502 and E503. Items 3-4: See Section 08710 — Door Hardware Item 5: Card needed to access the second floor and all first floor space beyond lobby, public restrooms, and large conference room. 2-22-12 00900 - 6 of 11 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Question 38. Section 13760 — Video Surveillance 1. Is this to be a stand-alone system or are these cameras recorded by an existing server? 2. If there is an existing server, what software is running on the server and are additional licenses required for this building? 3. If this is to be a stand-alone system, please specify recording server software and storage requirements. 4. Is division 16767 to provide a network cable drop at each camera location? Answer: These items will be removed and provided under a separate contract. Re: Sheet E502 and Sheet E503. Question 39. Sections 13852 and 16144 — Digital Addressable Fire Alarm System 1. There are two different specifications for the Fire Alarm System. Answer: Use Section 16144 - Digital, Addressable Fire -Alarm System. Question 40. The specifications call for fall arrest systems to be provided, however none is shown on the roof plan. Please advise the scope required for the fall arrest systems. Answer: The specifications call for fall arrest system, (Section 11812) has been removed from the project. Question 41. Are 102B, 102D,105,108,109,110,112,200,201,202, 203,204,205,208,209,210 and 211 interior storefront frames and doors with a side-lite? Answer: Correct. Question 42. Should door# 107C the second floor stairwell be on the door schedule? Answer: 107C is shown on schedule as the first item on Level 2 on sheet A603. Question 43. Does door# 122B have a door type? Answer: Door 122B is door type "E". RE: sheet a603. Question 44. Door #144 is on the door schedule but I don't see it of the floor plan? Answer: Door 144 has been removed from the schedule. RE: sheet A603. Question 45. Are the doors on this project plastic laminate door or stain grade red oak doors. Answer: See door panel material and finish on the door schedule, sheet A603. Some doors are SCW (solid core wood -stained). Question 46. I don't see a hardware schedule on the drawings is there one for this project? Answer: Hardware set (HW Set) is on the door schedule, sheet A603 and in the Specs. Section 08710 "Door Hardware". 2-22-12 00900 - 7 of 11 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Question 47. The civil details show the security fence to be aluminum tube, however the specification calls for the fencing to be chain link. Please advise. It appears from the overall landscape site plan that we are to provide new trees all over the entire site, however I would assume we are only providing (10) new trees in the scope of work area. Please advise. Answer: The security fence shall be a High Security Ornamental Steel Fence and Gate System. See specification Section 02823 for reference. Correct - (10) New trees. Question 48. Specs. call out painted and storefront drawings. Indicate clear anodized? -Are A, B, C, D entrances interior? -Details at interior are showing 1" glazing at the side lite, is this correct? Answer: RE: Spec. Section 08411, Paragraph 2.9.A (2 coat high performance organic finish) Fluoropolymer. Question 49. What is the estimated State Cost Limitation (SCL) or anticipated budget for this project, if available? Answer: Approximately $8.5 million. Question 50. What is the anticipated construction start and finish date(s)? Answer: Construction NTP is anticipated in second quarter 2020 with a 15-month duration. Question 51. Asbestos report is from 2016 and does not seem to include one (1) of the buildings to be demolished. Please confirm and provide updated information if applicable? Answer: See attached Asbestos Survey Report from TERRACON - dated Aug. 28, 2019. Question 52. Geotechnical report is from 2016 and does not reflect test borings at the proposed new building location. Please confirm and provide updated information if applicable? Answer: Not Applicable (No updated report). Question 53. If we do not have prior relationship with City of Pearland, please confirm whether we need to provide the Conflict of Interest Questionnaire (CIQ) form with the bid package? Answer: Yes, Conflict of Interest Questionnaire (CIQ) form needs to be provided with bid package. Question 54. If we do not have ownership nor address in the City of Pearland, please confirm whether we are required to provide the filled out Local Bidder Preferred (LBP) Form ? Answer: Yes. 2-22-12 00900 - 8 of 11 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Question 55. What is the order of precedence for this project's documentation in case of discrepancy (Contract, Drawings, Project Manual, Shop Drawings, Submittals and all other related information)? Answer: Section 00700, paragraph 1.02 indicates the order of governance of contract documents. Question 56. Confirm Certified Payroll requirements are only applicable for site work five (5) feet from the new building? Answer: Federal certified payroll requirements are not applicable to this project. Question 57. Provide/specify what permit and meter fees are required by General Contractor? Answer: City permits are no cost. Water is provided for construction by the City at no cost. Temporary power for construction will require an agreement with a third -party electric provider. Question 58. Will the City secure and pay for the Construction Materials Testing & Special Inspections or will the Contractor be responsible for this? Answer: The City will provide third party CMT. Question 59. Provide erosion control and storm water management design information, if applicable (no drawings/specs available)? Answer: See sheet C-111 for SWPPP See sheet C-120 and C-121 for SWPPP details Specifications section 01560 for Filter Fabric Fence spec. Question 60. Confirm whether TV's for conference rooms, lobby and other are provided by Owner. Answer: This item will be removed and provided under a separate contract. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1. Section 00010 Table of Contents Remove Section 00010 Table of Contents in its entirety, and replace with attached Section 00010 - Table of Contents. 2. Section 00700 - General Conditions of Agreement Add the attached attachments 1, 2, & 3 to Section 00700- General Conditions of Agreement. 3. Section 00811 -Wage Scale for Engineering Construction Remove and Replace Section 00811 -Wage Scale for Engineering Construction in its entirety with attached. 4. Section 00812 -Wage Scale for Building Construction Remove and Replace Section 00812 -Wage Scale for Building Construction in its entirety with attached. 2-22-12 00900 - 9 of 11 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM SPECIFICATIONS: 1. Section 02821 Chain Link Fences and Gates Delete: Section 02821 Chain Link Fences and Gates. 2. Section 02823 High Security Ornamental Steel Fence and Gate System Add Section 02823 High Security Ornamental Steel Fence and Gate System. 3. Section 08710 Door Hardware Remove Section 08710 Door Hardware in its entirety and replace with revised Section 08710 "Door Hardware" (attached). 4. Section 11812 Facility Fall Protection Remove Section 11812 Facility Fall Protection in its entirety. 5. Section 13730 Access Control Remove Section 13730 Access Control in its entirety. 6. Section 13760 Video Surveillance Remove Section 13760 Video Surveillance in its entirety. 7. Section 16716 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling Remove Section 16716 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling in its entirety. 8. Section 16762 Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems Remove Section 16762 Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems in its entirety. 9. Section 16767 Communications Horizontal Cabling Remove Section 16767 Communications Horizontal Cabling in its entirety. CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: 1. Cover Sheet Project Address added to the sheet. 2. Sheet No. A502 - Interior Elevations II Remove and Replace Sheet No. A502 - Interior Elevations II in its entirety with attached. 3. Sheet No. A503 - Interior Elevations III Remove and Replace Sheet No. A503 - Interior Elevations III in its entirety with attached. 4. Sheet No. A603 - Door Schedule & Details Remove and Replace Sheet No. A603 - Door Schedule & Details in its entirety with attached. 5. Sheet No. A604 - Window Schedule & Details Remove and Replace Sheet No. A604 - Window Schedule & Details in its entirety with attached. 6. Sheet No. A611 - Finish Schedule Remove and Replace Sheet No. A611 - Finish Schedule in its entirety with attached. 2-22-12 00900 - 10 of 11 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM 7. Sheet No. A612 - Finish Plan Level 1 Remove and Replace Sheet No. A612 -Finish Plan Level 1 in its entirety with attached. 8. Sheet No. A613 - Finish Plan Level 2 Remove and Replace Sheet No. A613 - Finish Plan Level 2 in its entirety with attached. 9. Sheet No. A701 - Millwork Sections & Details I Remove and Replace Sheet No. A701 - Millwork Sections & Details I in its entirety with attached. 10. Sheet No. A703 - Millwork Sections & Details III Remove and Replace Sheet No. A703 - Millwork Sections & Details III in its entirety with attached. 11. Sheet No. E401 — Security & Comm. Floor Plan — First Floor Remove and Replace Sheet No. E401 — Security & Comm. Floor Plan — First Floor in its entirety with attached. 12. Sheet No. E402 — Security & Comm. Floor Plan — Second Floor Remove and Replace Sheet No. E402 - Security & Comm. Floor Plan — Second Floor in its entirety with attached. 13. Sheet No. E502 — Electrical Details Remove and Replace Sheet No. E502 — Electrical Details in its entirety with attached. 14. Sheet No. E503 - Electrical Details Remove and Replace Sheet No. E503 - Electrical Details in its entirety with attached. 15. Sheet No. E701 — Electrical One -Line Diagram Remove and Replace Sheet No. E701 — Electrical One -Line Diagram in its entirety with attached. ATTACHMENTS: 1. Asbestos Report Remove and Replace Appendix A - Interior, Exterior and Roof Asbestos Survey Report from the project manual with attached Interior, Exterior and Roof Asbestos Survey Report dated August 28, 2019. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 3 Chris Casey, AIA Architect 2-22-12 00900 - 11 of 11 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TABLE OF CONTENTS ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER CITY OF PEARLAND BRAZORIA COUNTY, TEXAS TABLE OF CONTENTS Specification Sections marked with an asterisk (*) were prepared by Huitt-Zollars, Inc. SECTION TITLE DIVISION 0 — BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00100 Invitation to Propose 00200 Instructions to Offers 00300 Sealed Competitive Proposal 00500 Standard Form of Agreement 00610 Performance Bond 00611 Payment Bond 00612 One -Year Maintenance Bond 00615 Partial Waiver of Lien 00700 General Conditions of Agreement 00800-S* Special Conditions Supplement 00800 Special Conditions of Agreement 00811 Wage Scale for Engineering Construction 00812 Wage Scale for Building Construction DIVISION 1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100* Summary of Work 01140 Contractor's Use of Premises 01200 Measurement and Payment Procedures 01290 Change Order Procedures 01310 Coordination and Meetings 01350 Submittals 01380 Construction Photographs 01420 Referenced Standards 01430 Contractor's Quality Control 01440 Observation Services 00010-1 01-17-20 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 01450 Testing Laboratory Services 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01505 Mobilization 01550 Stabilized Construction Exit 01555 Traffic Control and Regulation 01560 Filter Fabric Fence 01562 Waste Material Disposal 01563 Tree and Plant Protection 01564 Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 01565 TPDES Requirements 01566 Source Controls for Erosion and Sedimentation 01570 Trench Safety System 01580 Project Identification Signs 01600 Material and Equipment 01630 Product Options and Substitutions 01720 Field Surveying 01760 Project Record Documents 01770 Contract Closeout DIVISION 2 — SITE WORK 02200 Site Preparation 02220 Site Demolition 02252 Cement Stabilized Sand 02255 Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 02316 Excavation and Backfill for Roadways 02317 Excavation and Backfill for Structures 02318 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 02330 Embankment 02335 Subgrade 02370 Geotextile 02372* Drilled Shaft Foundations 02411* Selective Demolition 02510 Water Mains 02511 Water Meters 02515 Water Tap and Service Line Installation 02520 Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults 02530 Gravity Sanitary Sewers 02531 Sanitary Sewer Service Leads or Reconnections 02534 PVC Pipe 00010-2 01-17-20 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 02540 Tapping Sleeves and Valves 02541 Water and Wastewater Line Valves 02542 Concrete Manholes and Accessories 02582 Thermoplastic Pavement Marking 02603 Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers 02630 Storm Sewers 02631 Precast Inlets, Headwalls, and Wingwalls 02633 Adjusting Manholes, Inlets, and Valve Boxes 02710 Base Course for Pavement 02751 Concrete Pavement 02770 Curb, Curb & Gutter, and Headers 02771 Concrete Sidewalks 02811 Landscape Irrigation 02823* High Security Ornamental Steel Fence and Gate System 02910 Topsoil 02922 Sodding 02931 Landscape and Tree Planting 02980 Pavement Repair and Resurfacing 02981 Blast Cleaning of Pavement DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100* Concrete Formwork 03300 Cast in Place Concrete 03310 Structural Concrete 03360* Special Concrete Floor Finish 03471* Tilt -Up -Concrete Panels DIVISION 4* — MASONRY 04200 Unit Masonry DIVISION 5* — METALS 05120 Structural Steel Framing 05210 Steel Joist Framing 05310 Steel Decking 05400 Cold -Formed Metal Framing 05500 Metal Fabrications 05511 Metal Pan Stairs 00010-3 01-17-20 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 05521 Steel Pipe and Tube Railings DIVISION 6* — WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry 06202 Interior Finish Carpentry 06411 Plastic -Laminate -Faced Architectural Cabinets DIVISION 7* — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07161 Crystalline Waterproofing 07210 Thermal lnsulation 07215 Thermal Spray Foam Insulation 07421 Metal Composite Material Wall Panels 07521 Torch -Applied Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07710 Roof Specialties 07720 Roof Accessories 07841 Penetration Fire stopping 07844 Fire -Resistive Joint Systems 07920 Joint Sealants DIVISION 8* — DOORS AND WINDOWS 08111 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08121 Aluminum Doors and Frames 08141 Flush Wood Doors 08311 Access Doors and Frames 08331 Coiling Counter Doors 08411 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08710 Door Hardware 08800 Glazing 08811 Decorative Glazing 08911 Fixed Louvers DIVISION 9* — FINISHES 09211 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies 00010-4 01-17-20 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 09221 Non Structural Metal Framing 09290 Gypsum Board 09301 Ceramic Tiling 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09651 Resilient Base and Accessories 09652 Resilient Tile Flooring 09681 Tile Carpeting 09700 Wall Finishes 09911 Exterior Painting 09912 Interior Painting 09960 High -Performance Coatings 09965 Elastomeric Coatings DIVISION 10* — SPECIALTIES 10114 Visual Display Fabrics 10141 Dimensional Letter Signage 10142 Panel Signage 10211 Toilet Compartments 10280 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 10441 Fire Protection Cabinets 10442 Fire Extinguishers 10750 Flagpoles DIVISION 1 1 * — EQUIPMENT 11310 Appliances DIVISION 12* — FUNISHINGS 12241 Roller Window Shades 12362 Plastic -Laminate -Clad Countertops 12366 Solid Surfacing Countertops 12368 Simulated Stone Countertops DIVISION 13* — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13852 Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System 00010-5 01-17-20 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 14* — CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14210 Electric Traction Elevators DIVISION 15* — MECHANICAL 15005 Mechanical General Provisions 15058 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 15060 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 15072 Vibration Controls for HVAC 15077 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 15081 Duct Insulation 15083 Pipe Insulation 15093 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping 15160 Storm Drainage Piping 15165 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties 15183 Refrigerant Piping 15300 Fire Suppression 15400 Plumbing 15732 Packaged, Outdoor, Central Station Air Handling Units 15738 Split -System Air -Conditioning Units 15815 Metal Ducts 15820 Air Duct Accessories 15838 HVAC Power Ventilators 15840 Air Terminal Units 15855 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 15900 Building Control System for HVAC 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC DIVISION 16* — ELECTRICAL 16055 Overcurrent Protective Device Short -Circuit Study 16056 Overcurrent Protective Device Arc -Flash Study 16060 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 16073 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 16075 Identification for Electrical Systems 16091 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 16120 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 16130 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 00010-6 01-17-20 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TABLE OF CONTENTS 16140 Wiring Devices 16141 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 16144 Digital, Addressable Fire -Alarm System 16146 Lightning Protection 16231 Packaged Engine Generators 16289 Surge Protection for Low -Voltage Electrical 16415 Transfer Switches 16440 Static Uninterruptible Power Supply 16442 Panelboards 16461 Low -Voltage Transformers 16475 Fuses-600 Volt and Below 16510 Lighting and Lighting Controls 16714 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 16715 Cable Trays for Communications Systems 16761 Pathways for Communications Systems APPENDICES Power Circuits Appendix A — Interior, Exterior and Roof Asbestos Survey Report Appendix B — Geotechnical Engineering Study Report END OF SECTION 00010 00010-7 01-17-20 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 1 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE A. DEFINITIONS: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83 or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project for the duration of the Project. Duration of the Project -includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the contractor's/person's work on the Project has been completed and the Project warranty period has expired. Persons providing services on the project includes persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with due contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, motor carriers and owner - operators, (as defined at Section 406.121 of the Texas Labor Code), leasing companies, and employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. C. The CONTRACTOR must provide a certificate of coverage to the OWNER prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the CONTRACTOR's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the CONTRACTOR must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the OWNER showing that coverage has been extended. E. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from each subcontractor or other person providing services on a project, and provide to the OWNER: (I) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the Project, so the OWNER will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and 05/2007 00700 - AI CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (2) no later than seven days after receipt by the CONTRACTOR and prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The CONTRACTOR shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the CONTRACTOR knew or should have known, of any changes that materially affect the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The CONTRACTOR shall post on each Project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. NOTICE REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512) 440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." I. The CONTRACTOR shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, too: (1) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for all of its employees providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; (2) provide to the CONTRACTOR, prior to that person beginning work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the Project: 05/2007 00700 - A2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (3) provide the CONTRACTOR, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage, showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; (4) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the CONTRACTOR: (5) (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the Project; and (b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and (7) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the CONTRACTOR is representing to the OWNER that all employees of the CONTRACTOR who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage agreements will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the CONTRACTOR to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the CONTRACTOR, which entitles the OWNER to pursue all rights and remedies available to it under the Contract, at law or in equity, if the CONTRACTOR does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the OWNER. 05/2007 00700 - A3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 2 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS AGREEMENT FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SWORN RELEASE In consideration of the Final Payment under that certain contract between [Contractor's Company Name] (hereafter "CONTRACTOR") and the City of Pearland (hereafter "OWNER") for the Project known as [Official Project Title] (the "Contract"), the CONTRACTOR makes the following representations to OWNER, either individually if a proprietorship, or jointly and severally by all general partners if a partnership, or if a corporation, by action of the president and secretary of said corporation, as duly authorized by appropriate action of the stockholders and/or board of directors of said corporation, their signatures hereon constituting a representation under oath by said individuals that they have the authority to execute this Agreement for and on behalf of the said corporation: 1. The undersigned CONTRACTOR represents to OWNER that the Application for Payment for the Final Payment under the Contract, and the final Change Order issued under the Contract if any, whether or not modified, corrected or changed in some way by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR or the OWNER, a copy of which are attached hereto and marked Exhibit "A", are true, correct and accurate, and that CONTRACTOR has received payment in full for all other Applications for Payment submitted under the Contract, and that CONTRACTOR has been fully compensated for all labor, materials, equipment and/or services furnished in connection with the Contract, except for the Final Payment. 2. It is agreed and stipulated by the undersigned CONTRACTOR that upon the receipt of Final Payment in the amount as set out on the attached Application for Payment, the CONTRACTOR, by execution of this instrument of release, does, therefore, RELEASE and FOREVER DISCHARGE OWNER of and from all manner of debts, claims, demands, obligations, suits, liabilities and causes of action of any nature whatsoever, at law or in equity, in contract or in tort, now existing or which may hereafter accrue, arising out of or related to the Contract, any Change Orders or Work Orders, the Work, or any labor, materials, equipment or services furnished by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. 3. The CONTRACTOR, acting by and through the person or persons whose names are subscribed hereto, does solemnly swear and affirm that all bills and claims have been paid to all materialmen, suppliers, laborers, subcontractors, or other entities performing services or supplying materials or equipment, and that OWNER shall not be subject to any bills, claims, demands, litigation or suits in connection therewith. 4. It is further specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a part of the Contract, and it is also specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement shall not act as a modification, waiver or renunciation by OWNER of any of its rights or remedies as set out in the Contract itself, but this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a supplement thereto for the additional protection of OWNER. 05/2007 00700 - B 1 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT SIGNED and EXECUTED this, the _ day of _ , 20_ CONTRACTOR: By: Signature Print Name: Title: [If CONTRACTOR is a proprietorship, owner must sign; if a partnership, each general partner must sign; if a corporation, the following language should be used.] SIGNED and EXECUTED this, the day of 20_ by , a Texas corporation, under authority granted to the undersigned by said corporation as contained in the Charter, By -Laws or Minutes of a meeting of said corporation regularly called and held. CONTRACTOR: By: President ATTEST: Corporate Secretary (Corporate Seal) [This form is for use by either a proprietorship or a partnership. In the event CONTRACTOR is a partnership or a joint proprietorship, additional signature lines should be added for each individual.] 05/2007 00700 - B2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the person or persons whose name(s) are subscribed to the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said: I (We) am (are) the person(s) who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and I (we) have read the facts and statements as therein set out and the representations as made therein, and 1 (we) state that the above and foregoing are true and correct. CONTRACTOR - Affiant SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me, the day of 20. Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires: [This form is for use in the event CONTRACTOR is a corporation.] 07/2006 00700 - B3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the persons who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment mid Contractor's Sworn Release, whose names are set out above, who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said: We each are the persons whose names are subscribed above, and hold respectively the offices in the corporation as set out above, and each state under oath that we have the authority to execute this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release for and on behalf of said corporation, pursuant to authority granted to us in the Charter of said corporation, the By -Laws of said corporation and/or the Minutes of said corporation; and the facts, statements and representations as set out in the instrument to which this Affidavit is attached, are true and correct. SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me this, the day of 20 Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires: 07/2006 00700 - B4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 3 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS OWNER'S INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTOR 1. Definitions. For purposes of this Agreement: 1.1 Owner Parties. "Owner Parties" means (a) the City of Pearland, its successors and assigns, and the Engineer, (b) any officers, employees, or agents of such persons or entities, and (c) others as required by the Contract Documents, if any. 1.2 Contractor. "Contractor" shall mean the vendor providing the service or work to be performed under this Agreement. 1.3 Subcontractor. "Subcontractor" shall include subcontractors of any tier. 1.4 ISO. "ISO" means Insurance Services Office. 2. Contractor Insurance Representations to Owner Parties 2.1 It is expressly understood and agreed that the insurance coverages required herein: 2.1.1 represent Owner Parties' minimum requirements and are not to be construed to void or limit the Contractor's indemnity obligations as contained in this Agreement nor represent in any manner a determination of the insurance coverages the Contractor should or should not maintain for its own protection; and 2.1.2 are being, or have been, obtained by the Contractor in support of the Contractor's liability and indemnity obligations under this Agreement. Neither the requirements as to insurance to be carried as provided for herein, the insolvency, bankruptcy or failure of any insurance company carrying insurance of the Contractor, nor the failure of any insurance company to pay claims accruing, shall be held to affect, negate or waive any of the provisions of this Agreement. 2.2 Failure to obtain and maintain the required insurance shall constitute a material breach of, and default under, this Agreement. If the Contractor shall fail to remedy such breach within five (5) business days after notice by the Owner, the Contractor will be liable for any and all costs, liabilities, damages and penalties resulting to the Owner Parties from such breach, unless a written waiver of the specific insurance requirement(s) is provided to the Contractor by the Owner. In the event of any failure by the Contractor to comply with the provisions of this Agreement, the Owner may, without in any way compromising or waiving any right or remedy at law or in equity, on notice to the Contractor, purchase such insurance, at the Contractor's expense, provided that the Owner shall have no obligation to do so and if the Owner shall do so, the Contractor shall not be relieved of or excused from the obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance amounts and coverages. 10-2012 00700 - CI CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 3. Conditions Affecting All Insurance Required Herein 3.1 Cost of Insurance. All insurance coverage shall be provided at the Contractor's sole expense. 3.2 Status and Rating of Insurance Company. All insurance coverage shall be written through insurance companies authorized to do business in the state in which the work is to be performed and rated no less than A-: VII in the most current edition of A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide. 3.3 Restrictive, Limiting, or Exclusionary Endorsements. All insurance coverage shall be provided to the Owner Parties in compliance with the requirements herein and shall contain no endorsements that restrict, limit, or exclude coverage required herein in any manner without the prior express written approval of the Owner. 3.4 Limits of Liability. The limits of liability may be provided by a single policy of insurance or by a combination of primary and umbrella policies, but in no event shall the total limits of liability available for any one occurrence or accident be less than the amount required herein. 3.5 Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal, or Material Reduction in Coverage. All insurance coverage shall contain the following express provision: In the event of cancellation, non -renewal, or material reduction in coverage affecting the certificate holder, thirty (30) days prior written notice shall be given to the certificate holder by certified mail or registered mail, return receipt requested. 3.6 Waiver of Subrogation. The Contractor hereby agrees to waive its rights of recovery from the Owner Parties with regard to all causes of property and/or liability loss and shall cause a waiver of subrogation endorsement to be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on all insurance coverage carried by the Contractor, whether required herein or not. 3.7 Deductible/Retention. Except as otherwise specified herein, no insurance required herein shall contain a deductible or self -insured retention in excess of $25,000 without prior written approval of the Owner. All deductibles and/or retentions shall be paid by, assumed by, for the account of, and at the Contractor's sole risk. The Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. 4. Maintenance of Insurance. The following insurance shall be maintained in effect with limits not less than those set forth below at all times during the term of this Agreement and thereafter as required: 10-2012 00700 - C2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.1 Commercial General Liability Insurance 4.1.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of all locations and operations of the Contractor, including but not limited to liability assumed under this contract (including the tort liability of another assumed in a business contract). Defense shall be provided as an additional benefit and not included within the limit of liability. 4.1.2 Form. Commercial General Liability Occurrence form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CG 0001 0798 or its equivalent). 4.1.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with limits of not less than: Each Occurrence Limit $1,000,000 General Aggregate Limit $2,000,000 Product -Completed Operations Aggregate Limit $2,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury Limit $1,000,000 4.1.4 Required Endorsements a. Additional Insured. Additional insured status shall be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on any of the following: i. ISO form CG 20 10 11 85; or ii. ISO form CG202611 85;or iii. a combination of ISO forms CG 20 33 10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01; or iv. any form providing equivalent protection to Owner. b. Designated Construction Project(s) Aggregate Limit. The aggregate limit shall apply separately to this Agreement through use of an ISO CG 25 03 03 97 endorsement or its equivalent. c. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. d. Personal Injury Liability. The personal injury contractual liability exclusion shall be deleted. e. Primary and Non -Contributing Liability. It is the intent of the parties to this Agreement that all insurance required herein shall be primary to all insurance available to the Owner Parties. The obligations of the Contractor's insurance shall not be affected by any other insurance available to the Owner Parties and shall seek no contribution from the Owner Parties' insurance, whether primary, excess contingent, or on any other basis. The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be endorsed to provide such primary and non- contributing liability. f. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 10-2012 00700 - C3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.1.5 Continuing Commercial General Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to Owner stating Work completion date. 4.2 Auto Liability Insurance 4.2.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of any auto (including owned, hired, and non -owned). 4.2.2 Form. Business Auto form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CA 0001 or its equivalent). 4.2.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 4.2.4 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. b. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 4.3 Employer's Liability Insurance 4.3.1 Coverage. Employer's Liability Insurance shall be provided as follows: 4.3.2 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than: Employer's Liability: $1,000,000 each accident and each disease. 4.3.3 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. b. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 4.4 Umbrella Liability Insurance 4.4.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall be excess over and be no less broad than all coverages described above and shall include a drop -down provision for exhaustion of underlying limits. 4.4.2 Form. This policy shall have the same inception and expiration dates as the commercial general liability insurance required above. 10-2012 00700 - C4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.4.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $5,000,000. 4.4.4 Continuing Umbrella Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.5 Professional Liability Insurance 4.5.1 Coverage. The Contractor shall provide professional liability insurance for any professional design or engineering drawing required by the work. Such insurance shall indemnify the Owner from claims arising from the negligent performance of professional services of any type, including but not limited to design or design/build services as part of the Work to be performed. 4.5.2 Form. This insurance shall include prior acts coverage sufficient to cover all services rendered by the Contractor and by its consultants under this Agreement. It is recognized that this coverage may be provided on a Claims -Made basis. 4.5.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 4.5.4 Continuing Professional Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.6 Builder's Risk 4.6.1 Insureds. Insureds shall include: a. Owner, General Contactor and all Loss Payees and Mortgagees as Named Insureds; and b. subcontractors of all tiers in the Work as Additional Insureds. 10-2012 00700 - C5 e. f. Form a. b. c. i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. viii. ix. x. xi. CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.6.2 Covered Property. Such insurance shall cover: a. all structure(s) under construction, including retaining walls, paved surfaces and roadways, bridges, glass, foundation(s), footings, underground pipes and wiring, excavations, grading, backfilling or filling; b. all temporary structures (e.g., fencing, scaffolding, cribbing, false work, forms, site lighting, temporary utilities and buildings) located at the site; c. all property including materials and supplies on site for installation; d. all property including materials and supplies at other locations but intended for use at the site; all property including materials and supplies in transit to the site for installation by all means of transportation other than ocean transit; and other Work at the site identified in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached. Coverage shall be at least as broad as an unmodified ISO Special form, shall be provided on a completed -value basis, and shall be primary to any other coverage insurance available to the insured parties, with that other insurance being excess, secondary and non- contributing. No protective safeguard warranty shall be permitted. Required coverage shall further include: Additional expenses due to delay in completion of project (where applicable) Agreed value Damage arising from error, omission or deficiency in construction methods, design, specifications, workmanship or materials, including collapse Debris removal additional limit Earthquake (where applicable) Earthquake sprinkler leakage (where applicable) Expediting expenses Flood (where applicable) Freezing Mechanical breakdown, including hot & cold testing (where applicable) Notice of cancellation, non -renewal or $ TBD Included without sublimit Included without sublimit 25% of direct damage loss $ TBD $ TBD $ TBD $ TBD Included without sublimit Included without sublimit Included 10-2012 00700 - C6 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT material reduction — 60 days prior written notice to each insured xii. Occupancy clause, as required in F, Included below xiii. Ordinance or law xiv. Pollutant clean-up and removal xv. Preservation of property xvi. Replacement cost xvii. Theft xviii. Waiver of subrogation as required in G, below. Included without sublimit $ TBD Included without sublimit Included Included without sublimit Included 4.6.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided in an amount equal at all times to the full replacement value and cost of debris removal for any single occurrence. 4.6.4 Deductibles. Deductibles shall not exceed the following: a. All Risks of Direct Damage, Per Occurrence, except b. Delayed Opening Waiting Period c. Flood, Per Occurrence d. Earthquake and Earthquake Sprinkler Leakage, Per Occurrence $5,000 5 Days $25,000 or excess of NFIP if in Flood Zone A, BorV $25,000 4.6.5 Termination of Coverage. The termination of coverage provision shall be endorsed to permit occupancy of the covered property being constructed so long as such occupancy does not exceed 20% of the usable area of the property. This insurance shall be maintained in effect, unless otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, until the earliest of the following dates: a. the date on which all persons and organizations who are insureds under the policy agree that it shall be terminated; b. the date on which final payment, as provided for in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached, has been made; or c. the date on which the insurable interests in the Covered Property of all insureds other than Contractor have ceased. 10-2012 00700 - C7 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.6.6 Waiver of Subrogation. The waiver of subrogation provision shall be endorsed as follows: a. A waiver of subrogation shall be provided in favor of all insureds. b. The waiver of subrogation provisions shall be endorsed as follows: Should a covered loss be subrogated, either in whole or in part, your rights to any recovery will come first, and we will be entitled to a recovery only after you have been fully compensated for the loss. 5. Intentionally left blank. 6. Evidence of Insurance 6.1 Provision of Evidence. Evidence of the insurance coverage required to be maintained by the Contractor, represented by certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements issued by the insurance company or its legal agent, and must be furnished to the Owner prior to commencement of Work and not later than fifteen (15) days after receipt of this Agreement. New certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall be provided to the Owner prior to the termination date of the current certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements. 6.2 Form 6.2.1 All property insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 28, "Evidence of Property Insurance". 6.2.2 All liability insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 25, "Certificate of Insurance". 6.3 Specifications. Such certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall specify: 6.3.1 The Owner as a certificate holder with correct mailing address. 6.3.2 Insured's name, which must match that on this Agreement. 6.3.3 Insurance companies affording each coverage, policy number of each coverage, policy dates of each coverage, all coverages and limits described herein, and signature of authorized representative of insurance company. 6.3.4 Producer of the certificate with correct address and phone number listed. 6.3.5 Additional insured status required herein. 6.3.6 Amount of any deductibles and/or retentions. 6.3.7 Cancellation, non -renewal and material reduction in coverage notification as required by this Agreement. Additionally, the words "endeavor to" and "but failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liability of any kind upon Company, it agents or representatives" shall be deleted from the cancellation provision of the ACORD 25 certificate of insurance form. 10-2012 00700 - C8 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.3.8 Designated Construction Project Aggregate Limits required herein. 6.3.9 Personal Injury contractual liability required herein. 6.3.10 Primary and non-contributing status required herein. 6.3.11 Waivers of subrogation required herein. 6.4 Required Endorsements. A copy of each of the required endorsements shall also be provided. 6.5 Failure to Obtain. Failure of any Owner Party to demand such certificate or other evidence of full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of any Owner Party to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided shall not be construed as a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to maintain such insurance. 6.6 Certified Copies. Upon request of any Owner Party, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a certified copy of all insurance policies required herein within ten (10) days of any such request. Renewal policies, if necessary, shall be delivered to the Owner prior to the expiration of the previous policy. 6.7 Commencement of Work. Commencement of Work without provision of the required certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements, or without compliance with any other provision of this Agreement, shall not constitute a waiver by any Owner Party of any rights. The Owner shall have the right, but not the obligation, of prohibiting the Contractor or any subcontractor from performing any Work until such certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements are received and approved by the Owner. 7. Insurance Requirements of Contractor's Subcontractors 7.1 Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by all subcontractors (or provided by the Contractor on behalf of subcontractors) to cover operations performed under any subcontract agreement. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modification in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. The Contractor shall maintain certificates of insurance from all subcontractors containing provisions similar to those listed herein (modified to recognize that the certificate is from subcontractor) enumerating, among other things, the waivers of subrogation, additional insured status, and primary liability as required herein, and make them available to the Owner upon request. 7.2 The Contractor is fully responsible for loss and damage to its property on the site, including tools and equipment, and shall take necessary precautions to prevent damage to or vandalism, theft, burglary, pilferage and unexplained disappearance of property. Any insurance covering the Contractor's or its subcontractor's property shall be the Contractor's and its subcontractor's sole and complete means or recovery for any such loss. To the extent any loss is not covered by said insurance or subject to any deductible or co-insurance, the Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. Should the Contractor or its subcontractors choose to self insure this risk, it is expressly agreed that the Contractor hereby waives, and shall cause its 10-2012 00700 - C9 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT subcontractors to waive, any claim for damage or loss to said property in favor of the Owner Parties. 8. Use of the Owner's Equipment. The Contractor, its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers shall use the Owner's equipment only with express written permission of the Owner's designated representative and in accordance with the Owner's terms and condition for such use. If the Contractor or any of its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers utilize any of the Owner's equipment for any purpose, including machinery, tools, scaffolding, hoists, lifts or similar items owned, leased or under the control of the Owner, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and be liable to the Owner Parties for any and all loss or damage which may arise from such use. 9. Release and Waiver. The Contractor hereby releases, and shall cause its subcontractors to release, the Owner Parties from any and all claims or causes of action whatsoever which the Contractor and/or its subcontractors might otherwise now or hereafter possess resulting in or from or in any way connected with any loss covered by insurance, whether required herein or not, or which should have been covered by insurance required herein, including the deductible and/or uninsured portion thereof, maintained and/or required to be maintained by the Contractor and/or its subcontractors pursuant to this Agreement. 10-2012 00700 - CIO "General Decision Number: TX20200032 01/03/2020 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20190032 State: Texas Construction Type: Heavy County: Brazoria County in Texas. HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (Including Water and Sewer Lines (Does Not Include Flood Control) Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.80 for calendar year 2020 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis -Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.80 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2020. If this contract is covered by the EO and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must pay workers in that classification at least the wage rate determined through the conformance process set forth in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) (or the EO minimum wage rate, if it is higher than the conformed wage rate). The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Please note that this EO applies to the above -mentioned types of contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis -Bacon Act itself, but it does not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis -Bacon Related Acts, 00811-2 including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/03/2020 * SFTX0669-001 04/01/2019 Rates Fringes SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire Sprinklers) $ 29.53 21.27 SUTX2005-018 05/18/2005 Rates Fringes Carperter $ 14.38 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER$ 11.37 1.13 ELECTRICIAN $ 18.40 1.34 Formbuilder/Formsetter $ 9.83 1.69 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING $ 11.29 0.00 Laborers: Common $ 8.99 1.25 Landscape $ 7.35 0.00 Mason Tender Cement $ 9.96 0.00 Pipelayer $ 9.63 1.50 00811-3 PIPEFITTER $ 17.00 0.04 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR: Backhoe $ 12.74 0.00 Bulldozer $ 12.46 0.00 Crane $ 11.00 0.74 Excavator $ 16.74 0.00 Front End Loader $ 10.47 1.28 Grader $ 12.20 1.48 Tractor $ 11.29 1.45 TRUCK DRIVER $ 14.42 1.00 WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis -Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health -related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health -related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information 00811-4 on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of ""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 00811-5 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non -union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage 00811-6 determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis -Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: 00811-7 Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISION 00811-8 "General Decision Number: TX20200233 01/03/2020 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20190233 State: Texas Construction Type: Building County: Brazoria County in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.80 for calendar year 2020 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis -Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.80 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2020. If this contract is covered by the EO and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must pay workers in that classification at least the wage rate determined through the conformance process set forth in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) (or the EO minimum wage rate, if it is higher than the conformed wage rate). The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Please note that this EO applies to the above -mentioned types of contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis -Bacon Act itself, but it does not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis -Bacon Related Acts, 00812-2 including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/03/2020 ASBE0022-009 06/01/2019 Rates Fringes ASBESTOS WORKER/HEAT & FROST INSULATOR (Duct, Pipe and Mechanical System Insulation)....$ 24.28 14.16 BOIL0074-003 01/01/2017 Rates BOILERMAKER $ 28.00 Fringes 22.35 CARP0551-009 04/01/2016 Rates Fringes CARPENTER (Excludes Drywall Hanging, Form Work, and Metal Stud Installation) $ 23.05 8.78 * ELEC0716-005 08/28/2019 Rates Fringes 00812-3 ELECTRICIAN (Excludes Low Voltage Wiring and Installation of Alarms) $ 32.25 9.24 ELEV0031-003 01/01/2019 Rates ELEVATOR MECHANIC $ 42.60 Fringes 33.705 FOOTNOTES: A. 6% under 5 years based on regular hourly rate for all hours worked. 8% over 5 years based on regular hourly rate for all hours worked. B. Holidays: New Year's Day; Memorial Day; Independence Day; Labor Day; Thanksgiving Day; Friday after Thanksgiving Day; Christmas Day; and Veterans Day. ENGI0450-002 04/01/2014 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR Cranes $ 34.85 9.85 IRON0084-011 06/01/2019 Rates IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL $ 24.42 Fringes 7.12 IRON0135-002 09/01/2018 00812-4 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL $ 31.85 12.14 PLAS0079-004 01/01/2015 Rates Fringes PLASTERER $ 19.92 1.00 * PLUM0068-002 10/01/2019 Rates Fringes PLUMBER $ 36.15 11.04 PLUM0211-010 10/01/2018 Rates Fringes PIPEFITTER (Including HVAC Pipe Installation) $ 33.30 12.26 SHEE0054-003 07/01/2017 Rates Fringes SHEET METAL WORKER (Excludes HVAC Duct and Unit Installation) $ 27.72 13.70 SUTX2014-008 07/21/2014 Rates Fringes 00812-5 ACOUSTICAL CEILING MECHANIC $ 16.41 3.98 BRICKLAYER $ 19.86 0.00 CAULKER $ 15.36 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER$ 13.33 0.00 DRYWALL FINISHER/TAPER $ 16.30 3.71 DRYWALL HANGER AND METAL STUD INSTALLER $ 17.45 3.96 ELECTRICIAN (Alarm Installation Only) $ 17.97 3.37 ELECTRICIAN (Low Voltage Wiring Only) $ 18.00 1.68 FLOOR LAYER: Carpet $ 20.00 0.00 FORM WORKER $ 12.57 0.00 GLAZIER $ 19.12 4.41 INSULATOR - BATT $ 14.87 0.73 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING $ 12.10 0.00 LABORER: Common or General $ 10.55 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Brick$ 13.37 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Cement/Concrete $ 10.86 0.00 00812-6 LABORER: Pipelayer $ 12.94 0.00 LABORER: Roof Tearoff $ 11.28 0.00 LABORER: Landscape and Irrigation $ 9.49 0.00 LATHER $ 19.73 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe $ 15.56 0.00 OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader $ 13.93 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer $ 20.77 0.00 OPERATOR: Drill $ 16.22 0.34 OPERATOR: Forklift $ 15.64 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade $ 13.37 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader $ 13.55 0.94 OPERATOR: Mechanic $ 17.52 3.33 OPERATOR: Paver (Asphalt, Aggregate, and Concrete) $ 16.03 0.00 OPERATOR: Roller $ 16.00 0.00 PAINTER (Brush, Roller and Spray), Excludes Drywall 00812-7 Finishing/Taping $ 16.77 ROOFER $ 15.40 SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Duct 4.51 0.00 Installation Only) $ 20.05 4.19 SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Unit Installation Only) $ 19.67 2.24 SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire Sprinklers) $ 22.17 9.70 TILE FINISHER $ 12.00 0.00 TILE SETTER $ 16.17 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: 1/Single Axle Truck $ 14.95 5.23 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck $ 12.39 1.18 TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck $ 19.65 8.57 TRUCK DRIVER: Semi -Trailer Truck $ 12.50 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck $ 12.00 4.11 WATERPROOFER $ 14.39 0.00 WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. 00812-8 Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis -Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health -related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health -related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of ""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), 00812-9 a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non -union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which 00812-10 these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: an existing published wage determination 00812-11 * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis -Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage 00812-12 payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISION 00812-13 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH SECURITY ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCE AND GATE SYSTEM SECTION 02823 HIGH SECURITY ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCE AND GATE SYSTEM PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This specification covers fencing materials for a complete total steel ornamental pale high security fence system and gates, including accessories and installation. B. Excavation for post bases, concrete foundation for posts and center drop for gates. 1. Manual gates and related hardware. 2. Automatic Gates. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section 02316 "Excavation and Backfill for Structures" for site excavation, fill, and backfill where chain -link fences and gates are located. 2. Section 02827 Gate Operator. 3. Division 3 Section 03300 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for concrete. 4. Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for motor operators, controls, limit and disconnect switches, and safety features and for system disconnect switches. 5. Contractor shall coordinate all aspects of the fencing, gate operator, electrical, and security work with the indicated related section, work contained herein, and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unit Prices. 1. Payment for fencing shall be on a linear foot basis for height noted. 2. Payment for gates shall be per unit. 3. Refer to Section 01270 - Measurement and Payment. B. Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). If the Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in the total Stipulated Price. 02823-1 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH SECURITY ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCE AND GATE SYSTEM 1.03 REFERENCES C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc - Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. D. ASTM B117 - Practice for Operating Salt -Spray (Fog) Apparatus. E. ASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss. F. ASTM D714 - Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering in Paint G. ASTM D822 - Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials using Filtered Open -Flame Carbon -Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus. H. ASTM D1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments. ASTM D2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. J. ASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact). K. ASTM D3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. L. ASTM F2408 — Ornamental Fences Employing Galvanized Steel Tubular Pickets. M. C 94 — Ready -Mix concrete. N. F 626 — Specification for Fence Fittings O. A 853 — Standard Practice for Installation of Chain Link Fence. P. FS RR F 191 Fencing, Wire and Post Metal (and Gates, Chain Link Fence Fabric, and Accessories). Q. F 900 — Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates. R. ASTM F2200-05 — Standard Specification for Automated Vehicular Gate Construction. See 2.01 D. S. ASTM F 1184-05 Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates, Type II, Class 2. See 3.02 B. T. American Welding Society AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code. See 2.01 C. 02823-2 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH SECURITY ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCE AND GATE SYSTEM 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The manufacturer shall supply a total steel ornamental pale high security fence system of the Ameristar® ImpasseTM GauntletTM design. The system shall include all components (i.e., pales, rails, posts and hardware) required and as shown on Drawings. B. The gates shall be manufactured by Tymetal Corp., 2549 State Route 40, Greenwhich, NY 12834 — 800-328-4283. C. Fence and gate height shall be as indicated on Drawings. D. Fence shall be designed for a wind loading of 120 mph. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate AutoCAD plan layout of site, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, and schedule of components. 2. Supply shop drawings showing the relationship of operating systems with gate components, including details of all major components. 3. Include complete details of gate construction, gate height and post spacing dimensions. C. Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings, and hardware that indicates that items match or exceed the quality of existing items. 1. Provide manufacturer's catalog cuts with printed specifications and installation instructions. 2. Deliver two copies of operation and maintenance data covering the installed products. Manual to include parts list showing manufacturer's names and part numbers for the gate operator. D. Provide CAD drawings of all gates. Drawings shall be specified to this project. E. Indicate weight of all components as well as assembled system. F. Certification: 1. Gate in compliance with ASTM F 2200-05, Standard Specification for Automated Vehicular Gate Construction per section 2.01 D. 2. If operated gate system, gate operator shall be in compliance with UL 325 as evidenced by UL listing label attached to gate operator. 02823-3 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH SECURITY ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCE AND GATE SYSTEM 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience. B. Quality Assurance: The Contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and materials and techniques specified. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 FENCE MATERIAL A. Steel material for fence framework (i.e., corrugated pales, rails and posts), when galvanized prior to forming, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A924/A924M, with a minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi (310 MPa). B. The steel shall be hot -dip galvanized to meet the requirements of ASTM A653/A653M with a minimum zinc coating weight of 0.90 oz/ft2 (276 g/m ), Coating Designation G-90. C. Material for corrugated pales shall be a nominal 2.75" x .75" x 0.075 inches. The cross -sectional shape of the rails shall conform to the manufacturer's Impasse TM rail design a nominal 2.5" x 2" x 1.5" x 0.100 inches. Pre -drilled holes in the Impasse rail shall be spaced 6" on center, providing a pale airspace of no greater than 3.25". Tamperproof fasteners shall be used to fasten each pale to rail at every intersection. D. Posts shall conform to the manufacturer's Impasse I -Beam design with a nominal 4" x 1.75" x 0.100". Fence posts and gate posts shall meet the minimum size requirements of Table 1. E. Strength requirements for posts shall conform to ASTM F 1043. The product of the yield strength and section modulus shall not be Tess then that for pipe conforming to ASTM F 1083. F. Products shall be new from recognized, reputable manufacturers. The manufacturers shall have a minimum of 3 years experience. Used, re -rolled or reglavanized material is not acceptable. G. The steel ornamental pale high security fence system shall conform to Ameristar Impasse Gauntlet 3-Rail Style system. 1. Manufacturer: a. Ameristar Fence Products, Inc., in Tulsa, Oklahoma. Tel: 1-888-333-3422 b. C.E Shepherd Company Inc. Houston TX., c. Or approved equal. 02823-4 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH SECURITY ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCE AND GATE SYSTEM H. Fence Heights: Fence height shall be as shown on the drawings. Table 1 — Minimum Sizes for Impasse Posts Fence Posts Panel Height 4" x 1.75" x 0.100" I-beam Up to & Including 10' Height 4" x 4" x 11 Ga. Over 10' Height Gate Leaf Gate Height Up to & Including 6' Over 6' Up to & Including 8' Over 8' Up to & Including 10' Over 12' Up to 4' 3"x12Ga. 3"x12Ga. 4"x11 Ga. 4"x11 Ga. 4'1"to6' 3"x12Ga. 3"x12Ga. 4"x11 Ga. 4"x11 Ga. 6'1"to8' 4"x11 Ga. 6"x3/16" 6"x3/16" 6"x3/16" 8'1" to 10' 4" x 11 Ga. 6" x 3/16" 6" x 3/16" 6" x 3/16" 10' 1 " to 12' 6" x 3/16" 6" x 3/16" 6" x 3/16" 8" x 1/4" 12'1"to16' 6"x3/16" 6"x3/16" 8"x1/4" 8"x1/4" 2.02 FENCE FABRICATION A. Pales, rails and posts shall be pre-cut to specified lengths. Impasse rails shall be pre -punched to accept the tamperproof security fasteners. Post shall be pre -punched to accept bracket, rail, and post attachment. B. The manufactured galvanized framework shall be subjected to the PermaCoat® thermal stratification coating process (high -temperature, in -line, multi -stage, multi -layer) including, as a minimum, a six -stage pretreatment/wash (with zinc phosphate), an electrostatic spray application of an epoxy base, and a separate electrostatic spray application of a polyester finish. The base coat shall be a thermosetting epoxy powder coating (gray in color) with a minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508mm). The topcoat shall be a "no -mar" TGIC polyester powder coat finish with a minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508mm). The color shall be Black. The stratification -coated framework shall be capable of meeting the performance requirements for each quality characteristic shown in Table 2. Table 2 — Coating Performance Requirements Quality Characteristics ASTM Test Method Performance Requirements Adhesion D3359 — Method B Adhesion (Retention of Coating) over 90% of test area (Tape and knife test). Corrosion Resistance B117, D714 & D1654 Corrosion Resistance over 3,500 hours (Scribed per D1654; failure mode is accumulation of 1/8" coating loss from scribe or medium #8 blisters). Impact Resistance D2794 Impact Resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward impact using 0.625" ball). Weathering Resistance D822 D2244, D523 (60° Method) Weathering Resistance over 1,000 hours (Failure mode is 60% loss of gloss or color variance of more than 3 delta-E color units). 02823-5 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH SECURITY ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCE AND GATE SYSTEM C. Completed panels shall be capable of supporting a 400 Ib. load (applied at midspan) without permanent deformation. Panels shall be biasable to a 30° change in grade. 2.03 GATE SCHEDULE Table 3 — Gate Schedule Location Gate Type Gate Width Actuator Notes Plant Main Entrance on Voss Swing 15-ft Electric per Section 02827 A Road (inbound lanel Plant Main Entrance on Voss Road(outbound lane) Slide 15-ft Electric per Section 02827 A Plant Emergency Exit on Voss Road Double Swing 12 ft (Total 24-ft) Manual C, D Pedestrian Gate on Voss Road Swing 4-ft Manual A, B, C Notes: security system. in addition to other security devices as shown on the Department (HFD) 9-1-1 Key Lock Box. provide provision for locking the double swing gate set with a total alloy chains meeting RR-C-271 (Table 2, Type 1, Grade C, Class padlock. A. Gate system is tied in with plant B. Gate shall be provided with a lockset Drawings and specified herein. C. Provide gate with a Houston Fire D. Fence leafs shall be designed to of two (2) 3/8-inch welded steel 1). Secure with a high security shielded 2.04 PLANT MAIN ENTRANCE OUTBOUND SLIDE GATE CONSTRUCTION DETAILS A. Slide gates shall be TYM-2000 V-Groove Roller Gate System (ornamental) as manufactured by Tymetal Corp. B. Gate Frame: 1. All welds on the gate frame shall conform to Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record to insure conformance to the AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code. All individual welders shall be certified to AWS D1.2 welding code. 2. The gate frame shall be fabricated from 6063-T6 aluminum alloy extrusions. The top member shall be a 3" x 5" aluminum structural channel/tube extrusion weighing not less than 3.0 Ib/If. This is also referred to as "large primary." If fabricated as a single horizontal piece, the bottom member shall be a 2" x 5" aluminum structural tube weighing not less than 2.0 Ib/If. If fabricated in two horizontal pieces, the bottom member shall be a 5" aluminum structural channel weighing not less than 2.65 Ib/If. The two horizontal pieces or sections shall be spliced in the field. a. A 1/4" x 5" x 24" galvanized steel splice plate shall be used to secure the two 5" channel bottom members together utilizing eight (8) 3/8" x 1 1/2" plated carriage bolts with lock nuts. The top members will be spliced together on the side opposite the track member using a 1/4" x 2" x 24" aluminum splice plate secured with six (6) 1/4" x 1/2" drive rivets on one side and welded to the top member on the other side. 02823-6 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH SECURITY ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCE AND GATE SYSTEM On the track side, the track is overlapped a minimum of 24" onto the opposing section, interlocked with the primary member and vertically secured on top using six (6) 1/4" x 1/2" drive rivets and secured on the bottom using six (6) 5/16" x 1" plated hex head cap screws. The respective splice end vertical member shall be 1"x2" weighing not less than .82 Ib/If. The 1"x2" members will be joined utilizing 5/16" x 3" plated hex head cap screws, quantity varying by height of gate. 3. The vertical members at the ends of the opening portion of the frame shall be "P" shaped in cross section with a nominal base dimension of no less than 2"x2" and weighing not less than 1.6 Ib/If. The intermediate vertical members shall alternate between 2"x2" and 1"x2" in cross section weighing not less than 1.1 lb/If and .82 lb/If respectively. The spacing for the vertical intermediates shall be no greater than half the height of the gate. 4. The gate frame shall be fabricated in one or multiple sections depending on size requirements/constraints. 5. The gate frame is supported from the top with two (2) 3" (76mm) UHMW guide wheels. 6. Support posts shall be 4" O.D. round or 4" square galvanized steel with concrete footings as specified by the engineer. 7. The V-Groove wheels shall be furnished with a sealed ball bearing assembly. The V-Groove track shall be fabricated from 11/2" x 1' " x'/<" (38mm x 38mm x 6mm) steel angle welded onto '/," x 5" (6mm x 127mm) steel bar, then galvanized. C. Diagonal Bracing: 1. Diagonal "X" bracing of 3/16" minimum diameter stainless steel aircraft cable shall be installed to brace the gate panels and to provide a ready means of vertical adjustment. D. Gate Filler: 1. Ornamental Picket: Impasse Gauntlet aluminum pickets shall be installed through the entire length of the gate. If a motorized gate operator is to be applied to the gate and the specified picket spacing allows for openings in the gate frame that exceed 2' " (57mm), a secondary gate filler shall be secured at each end of the gate frame and tied at each 2" x 2" (51 mm x 51mm) vertical member. The secondary gate filler shall extend to a minimum height of 48" (1.2m) above grade and shall be sized to prevent a 2' " (57mm) diameter sphere from passing through openings anywhere along the length of the gate frame, and in that portion of the adjacent fence that the gate covers in the open position. E. Finish: 1. Gate to be color coated black with polyester powder as specified. If powder coated, the gate (including track member) and all accessories shall be pretreated chemically by sand blasting or other acceptable method to ensure proper coating adherence. Gate posts shall be coated as specified by Part 2.02. 02823-7 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH SECURITY ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCE AND GATE SYSTEM 2.05 SWING GATE CONSTRUCTION DETAILS A. The swing gates shall be TYM-200 Std Fortress Heavy Duty Swing gate system as manufactured by Tymetal Corp. B. Gate Frame: 1. The gate frame shall be fabricated from 6063-T6 aluminum alloy extrusions. The top member shall be a 3" x 5" (76mm x 127mm) aluminum structural channel/tube extrusion weighing not less than 3.0 lb/If (4.4kg/m) for Internal Picket designs or 2.6 lb/If (3.8kg/m) for External Picket designs. The bottom member shall be a 2" x 5" (51mm x 127mm) aluminum structural tube weighing not less than 2.0 lb/If (2.9kg/m). 2. Vertical Members: a. Ornamental Picket (Internal and External): The vertical members at the ends of the opening portion of the frame shall be 2" x 2" (51 mm x 51 mm) in the cross section weighing not less than 1.1 lb/If (1.6kg/m). The major vertical members separating each bay shall be 1" x 2" (25mm x 51 mm) in cross section weighing not less than .82 lb/If (1.2kg/m). The spacing for the major vertical members shall be less than the gate frame height. b. All welds on the gate frame shall conform to Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record to insure conformance to the AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code. All individual welders shall be certified to AWS D1.2 welding code. See 1.03 C.1. 3. Each gate leaf shall be provided with a minimum of two pivoting hinges to allow proper operation, and shall be connected to the gate side of the hinge by means of two through - bolts. C. Diagonal Bracing: 1. Diagonal "X" bracing of 3/16" minimum diameter stainless steel aircraft cable shall be installed throughout the gate to provide additional vertical adjustment. D. Posts: 1. Gate hanger posts (by others) shall be sized in accordance with gate dimensions as specified by the manufacturer. Height of the post and depth of footing shall be as shown on the Drawings. E. The gate shall be completed by installation of approved filler as specified. 1. Ornamental Picket: The gate shall be completed by installation of aluminum Impasse Gauntlet pickets. 02823-8 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH SECURITY ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCE AND GATE SYSTEM F. Finish: 1. Gate to be color coated black with polyester powder as specified. The gate and all accessories shall be pretreated chemically by sand blasting or other acceptable method to ensure proper coating adherence. Gate posts (to be supplied by others) shall be coated as specified per Part 2.02. 2.06 PEDESTRIAN GATE CONSTRUCTION DETAILS A. General Description: 1. Pedestrian Swing Gate System shall be designed as an exterior security swing gate. 2. The swing gate(s) shall be pre -assembled, pre -hung and tested at the manufacturer's location. 3. The pedestrian gate shall be located near the plant main entrance gate as shown on the Drawings. B. Each gate shall have a clear gate opening width of 4 feet 0 inches and a clear opening gate height of 8 feet 0 inches. C. Operation: 1. When the gate is in the closed position, it can be opened by electrical or mechanical means. D. Self -Closing: 1. The Pedestrian Swing Gate System shall be equipped with a internal door closer. E. Door Position Indication Switch: 1. The Pedestrian Swing Gate System shall be equipped with a internal door position switch. F. Gate Panel Filler: 1. In -fill material to be galvanized steel Impasse Gauntlet pickets w/expanded metal. 2. The expanded metal behind the Impasse Gauntlet Pickets will be "3/4 #9 Flattened Expanded Metal (steel)". G. Coating: 1. The entire gate frame and door assembly shall be hot -dip galvanized after welding. 02823-9 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH SECURITY ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCE AND GATE SYSTEM H. Panic Bar: 1. The Pedestrian Swing Gate System shall be supplied with a panic bar for free exit with keyed access from un-secure side. I. Hinges: 1. Two (2) needle bearing hinges per gate shall be furnished and shall have a thrust capacity (door weight) of 600 lbs per pair. J. Internal Door Closer: 1. Door closer internal parts shall be steel and cast iron with constant viscosity liquid from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. Rust inhibitor paint shall be applied. K. Panic Bar: 1. Panic Bar to be Detex #V40-36 with keyed access and lever style exterior trim. L. Lock: 1. Electric strike to be HES #9600 Genesis 2.0. M. General: 1. Pedestrian Swing Gate systems shall be fully assembled at the factory and shipped to the project site ready for installation. 2. All welds on the gate frame shall conform to Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record to insure conformance to AWS D1.1 / D1.1M Structural Welding Code — Steel. All individual welders shall be certified to AWS D1.1 / D1.1M welding code. See 1.04 C. 3. Steel members shall be straight, true and free from dents, buckle, twist or rough edges. All joints shall be tight metal -to -metal welded finish. All welds shall show uniform section and deep penetration. Clean weld spatter off so that surfaces are easily cleaned. N. Frames, Stiles and Rails: 1. Steel members shall be tubular in cross-section with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16" (5mm). Members shall be mitered and welded at the corners. O. Galvanized: 1. All exposed system parts shall be zinc galvanized and color coated Black. 02823-10 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH SECURITY ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCE AND GATE SYSTEM PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Site Preparation: 1. All new installation shall be laid out by the contractor in accordance with the drawings. 2. Prior to the installation, all necessary grading and cleaning on both sides of fence shall be performed by the General Contractor or others responsible for site grading. 3. Grading shall be done in such a manner as to provide a straight flat and level surface, Soil or stone fill shall be thoroughly compacted 4. All excavation shall be coordinated with respect to electrical and mechanical component installations. All existing utilities shall be located prior to starting excavation. 5. Erect the fencing in straight lines between angle points. Erect framework in accordance with ASTM F 567 and as approved by shop drawings. All fencing shall be grounded as shown on the drawing and as specified herein. Grounding in section (3.01 F) shall be completed by electrical contractor. B. Fence Installation: 1. Fence post shall be spaced according to Table 3, plus or minus '/z". For installations that must be raked to follow sloping grades, the post spacing dimenion must be measured along the grade. Fence panels shall be attached to posts with brackets supplied by the manufacturer. Posts shall be set in concrete footers having a minimum depth of 36" (Note: In some cases, local restrictions of freezing weather conditions may require a greater depth). 2. Section 02316 "Excavation and Backfill for Structures" of this specification shall govern material requirements for the concrete footer. Posts setting by other methods such as plated posts or grouted core -drilled footers are permissible only if shown by engineering analysis to be sufficient in strength for the intended application. 02823-11 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH SECURITY ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCE AND GATE SYSTEM Table 3 — Impasse — Post Spacing By Bracket Type Span 8' Nominal (92.25" Rail) Post Size 1-3/4" x 4" I- beam 3" Sq. 4" Sq. 6" Sq. Bracket Type Impasse Line (BB601) Impasse End (BB602) w/3GPBB3 w/3GPBB4 w/3GPBB6 Post Settings ±1/2" O.C. 96" 98.75" 99.75" 101.75" Span 6' Nominal (71.25" Rail) Post Size 1-3/4" x 4" I- beam 3" Sq. 4" Sq. 6" Sq. Bracket Type Impasse Line (BB601) Impasse End (BB602) w/3GPBB3 w/3GPBB4 w/3GPBB6 Post Settings t'/2" O.C. 72" 74.75" 75.75" 77.75" 3. When cutting/drilling rails or posts adhere to the following steps to seal the exposed steel surfaces; a. Remove all metal shavings from cut area. b. Apply zinc -rich primer to thoroughly cover cut edge and/or drilled hole; let dry. c. Apply 2 coats of custom finish paint matching fence color. 4. Failure to seal exposed surfaces per steps 1-3 above will negate warranty. Ameristar spray cans or paint pens shall be used to prime and finish exposed surfaces; it is recommended that paint pens be used to prevent overspray. Use of non-Ameristar parts or components will negate the manufactures' warranty. C. Gate Installation: 1. Gate posts shall be spaced according to the manufacturers' gate drawings, dependent on standard out -to -out gate leaf dimensions and gate hardware selected. Type and quantity of gate hinges shall be based on the application; weight, height, and number of gate cycles. The manufacturers' gate drawings shall identify the necessary gate hardware required for the application. Gate hardware shall be provided by the manufacture of the gate and shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. The slide gate and installation shall conform to ASTM F 1184-05 standards for aluminum cantilever slide gates, Type II, Class 2. See 1.02 C. 3. The swing gate system is to comply with ASTM F2200-05 and UL 325. D. Concrete Mix: Shall be in accordance with ASTM C 94 with maximum 3/4" (19 mm) aggregate, and having a minimum compression strength of 3000 PSI (20.69 MPa.) at 28 days. Concrete shall be thoroughly worked into the post holes leaving no voids. 02823-12 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH SECURITY ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCE AND GATE SYSTEM E. Allow concrete to cure a minimum of (7 days) before installing fence fabric or fittings. The top surface of the post footing shall have a crown water shed finish. F. Grounding to the Earth: Grounding and bonding of the perimeter systems shall be in accordance with the N.E.C. (National Electric Code), N.E.S.C. (National Electric Safety Code) ASTM F 1916 and as specified herein. 1. Fences crossing power lines of 600 volts or more shall be grounded at or near the point of crossing and at distances not exceeding 150 feet (46 m) on each side of crossing. a. Where electronic detection is an integral part of the fence, grounding electrodes shall be installed at 200'. (61 m) intervals along the fence line. (For additional information consult with the electronic system manufacturer.) 2. The grounding electrodes shall be a minimum 3/4"(19 mm) diameter x 10' (3 m) long copper clad rod, driven into the earth until the top is 12 in (305 mm) below grade. Attach a No. 2 AWG bare stranded copper conductor by exothermically welding to the ground rods and extend underground in the immediate vicinity of the fence post. a. Secure the grounding conductor to the post with 5/16" (7.9 mm) self -tapping galvanized or stainless steel bolts and approved copper compression terminal ends or clamps. 3. After grounding connections have been completed, perform a ground resistance test in the presence of the Owner's Representative. The ground resistance shall not exceed 25 OHMS under normal dry conditions. a. Where resistance requirements cannot be attained, install additional rods no closer than 6'. (1.8 m) on center. Install no more than two additional rods at each location. 3.02 CLEANING A. Upon completion of the installation, clean up all waste material resulting from the fence construction. B. Post -hole excavations shall be scattered uniformly away from posts. 3.03 SYSTEM VALIDATION A. The complete system shall be adjusted to assure it is performing properly. B. The system shall be operated for a sufficient period of time to determine that the system is in proper working order. C. For operated gate systems - test and explain safety features: 1. Each system feature and device is a separate component of the gate system. 2. Read and follow all instructions for each component. 02823-13 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH SECURITY ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCE AND GATE SYSTEM 3. Ensure that all instructions for mechanical components, safety devices and the gate operator are available for everyone who will be using the gate system. 4. The warning signs shipped with the gate operator must be installed in prominent position on both sides of the gate. 5. Ensure the owner is clear with regard to the safety points concerning the basic operational guidelines of the safety features of the gate operator system. These safety points are listed in the gate operator manual and must be read prior to system use. END OF SECTION 02823 02823-14 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Mechanical and electrified door hardware for: a. Swinging doors. b. Sliding doors. 2. Electronic access control system components, including: a. Electronic access control devices. 3. The intent of the hardware specification is to specify the hardware for interior and exterior doors, and to establish a type, continuity, and standard of quality. However, it is the door hardware supplier's responsibility to thoroughly review existing conditions, schedules, specifications, drawings, and other Contract Documents to verify the suitability of the hardware specified. B. Exclusions: Unless specifically listed in hardware sets, hardware is not specified in this section for: 1. Windows 2. Cabinets (casework), including locks in cabinets 3. Signage 4. Toilet accessories 5. Overhead doors 08710- 1 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE C. Related Sections: 1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealant requirements applicable to threshold installation specified in this section. 2. Division 08 Section " Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefront" for hardware requirements applicable to installation of hardware to entrance doors 3. Division 09 sections for touchup, finishing or refinishing of existing openings modified by this section. 4. Division 26 sections for connections to electrical power system and for low -voltage wiring. 5. Division 28 sections for coordination with other components of electronic access control system. 1.03 REFERENCES A. UL - Underwriters Laboratories 1. UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies 2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies 3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware B. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute 1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule 2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware 3. Key Systems and Nomenclature C. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI/BHMA A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and Specialties 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 requirements. 2. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify on submittals deviations from Contract Documents, issues of incompatibility or other issues which may detrimentally affect the Work. 3. Prior to forwarding submittal, comply with procedures for verifying existing door and frame compatibility for new hardware, as specified in PART 3, "EXAMINATION" article, herein. 08710- 2 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE B. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: Technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. 2. Samples for Verification: If requested by Architect, submit production sample or sample installations of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated, and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. a. Samples will be returned to supplier. Units that are acceptable to Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into Work, within limitations of key coordination requirements. 3. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or opening, include: a. b. c. d. e. f. 9- h. j. k. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set number. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet: List locking device and function for each opening. Quantity, type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. Name and manufacturer of each item. Fastenings and other pertinent information. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. Mounting locations for hardware. Door and frame sizes and materials. Name and phone number for local manufacturer's representative for each product. Operational Description of openings with any electrified hardware (locks, exits, electromagnetic locks, electric strikes, automatic operators, door position switches, magnetic holders or closer/holder units, and access control components). Operational description should include operational descriptions for: egress, ingress (access), and fire/smoke alarm connections. 1) Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. 4. Key Schedule: a. After Keying Conference, provide keying schedule listing levels of keying as well as explanation of key system's function, key symbols used and door numbers controlled. b. Use ANSI/BHMA A156.28 "Recommended Practices for Keying Systems" as guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting optimal keying system. 08710- 3 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE c. Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review prepared and detailed in accordance with referenced DHI publication. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key to unique door designations. d. Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions. e. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts and one key system schematic illustrating system usage and expansion. 1) Forward bitting list, key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner, by means as directed by Owner. f. Prepare key schedule by or under supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. 5. Templates: After final approval of hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory or shop prepared for door hardware installation. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Data: For Supplier, Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. 2. Product data for electrified door hardware: a. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire -rated doors complies with listed fire -rated door assemblies. 3. Certificates of Compliance: a. UL listings for fire -rated hardware and installation instructions if requested by Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction. b. Installer Training Meeting Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of installer training meeting specified in "QUALITY ASSURANCE" article, herein. c. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of electrified hardware coordination conference, specified in "QUALITY ASSURANCE" article, herein. 4. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. D. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operations and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Division 01 and include: a. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes. b. Catalog pages for each product. c. Factory order acknowledgement numbers (for warranty and service) d. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. e. Parts list for each product. f. Final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect conditions as -installed. g. Final keying schedule h. Copies of floor plans with keying nomenclature 08710- 4 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE i. As -installed wiring diagrams for each opening connected to power, both low voltage and 110 volts. j. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to identify project. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications and Responsibilities: Recognized architectural hardware supplier with record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that provides certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the Work for consultation. 1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. 4. Coordination Responsibility: Assist in coordinating installation of electronic security hardware with Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors. a. Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and verify that all components are working properly. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: Person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and meets these requirements: 1. For door hardware, DHI-certified, Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). 2. Can provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors. 3. Can inspect and verify components are in working order upon completion of installation. 4. Capable of producing wiring diagrams. 5. Capable of coordinating installation of electrified hardware with Architect and electrical engineers. C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer. D. Fire -Rated Door Openings: Provide door hardware for fire -rated openings that complies with NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed products tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Intertek Testing Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, based on testing at positive pressure and according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C and in compliance with requirements of fire - rated door and door frame labels. E. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 08710- 5 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE F. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with governing accessibility regulations cited in "REFERENCES" article, herein. G. Keying Conference 1. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including: a. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for key control system. d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys. H. Pre -installation Conference 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing -in for electrified door hardware. 4. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. I. Coordination Conferences: 1. Installation Coordination Conference: Prior to hardware installation, schedule and hold meeting to review questions or concerns related to proper installation and adjustment of door hardware. 2. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference: Prior to ordering electrified hardware, schedule and hold meeting to coordinate door hardware with security, electrical, doors and frames, and other related suppliers. J. Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements: This project falls under the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Inspection Program for Inland II. All products, materials and installation systems shall be evaluated and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance, Windstorm Inspection Program, and listed in the TDI Product Evaluation Index or approved by the Windstorm Engineer as outlined below. Products, materials and installation systems not presently approved by the Texas Department of Insurance, Windstorm Inspection Program, may be considered for this project however, they must be properly submitted through the Architect for review by the Windstorm Engineer. This submittal shall be a part of the initial submittal process outlines in Section 013400 and requirements for this portion are detailed within the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Inspection website at the following location: www.tdi.state.tx.us/wind/submittal requi.html. Products, materials and installation systems not approved by the Windstorm Engineer shall NOT be installed or utilized on this project. 08710- 6 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock -up for hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. 1. Deliver each article of hardware in manufacturer's original packaging. C. Project Conditions: 1. Maintain manufacturer -recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and installation periods. 2. Provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to Project. Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. D. Protection and Damage: 1. Promptly replace products damaged during shipping. 2. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Correct, replace or repair products damaged during Work. 3. Protect products against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical agent. E. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. F. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor -recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory or shop prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. D. Electrical System Roughing -In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. E. Existing Openings: Where existing doors, frames and/or hardware are to remain, field verify existing functions, conditions and preparations and coordinate to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation. 08710- 7 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE 1.08 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Beginning from date of Substantial Completion, for durations indicated. a. Closers: 1) Mechanical: 30 years b. Exit Devices: 1) Mechanical: 3 years. 2) Electrified: 1 year. c. Locksets: 1) Mechanical: 3 years. 2) Electrified: 1 year. d. Key Blanks: Lifetime 2. Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operation due to improper installation, improper use or abuse. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools: Furnish complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The Owner requires use of certain products for their unique characteristics and project suitability to insure continuity of existing and future performance and maintenance standards. After investigating available product offerings, the Awarding Authority has elected to prepare proprietary specifications. These products are specified with the notation: "No Substitute." 1. Where "No Substitute" is noted, substitution requests for other products will not be considered. B. Approval of manufacturers and/or products other than those listed as "Scheduled Manufacturer" shall be in accordance with substitution procedure in division 01 25 00. In the individual article for the product category items, shall be in accordance with the QUALITY ASSURANCE article, herein. C. Approval of products is contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all requirements of scheduled manufacturer's product. 08710- 8 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE D. Where specified hardware is not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect's approval in accordance with substitution procedure in division 01 25 00. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Fasteners 1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work including prepared for paint surfaces to receive painted finish. 3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units exposed when door is closed except when no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless thru-bolts are required to fasten hardware securely. Review door specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required. 4. Install hardware with fasteners provided by hardware manufacturer. B. Modification and Preparation of Existing Doors: Where existing door hardware is indicated to be removed and reinstalled. 1. Provide necessary fillers, Dutchmen, reinforcements, and fasteners, compatible with existing materials, as required for mounting new opening hardware and to cover existing door and frame preparations. 2. Use materials which match materials of adjacent modified areas. 3. When modifying existing fire -rated openings, provide materials permitted by NFPA 80 as required to maintain fire -rating. C. Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates and other devices necessary for hardware installation. 1. Where fasteners are exposed to view: Finish to match adjacent door hardware material. D. Cable and Connectors: Hardwired Electronic Access Control Lockset and Exit Device Trim: 1. Data: 24AWG, 4 conductor shielded, Belden 9843, 9841 or comparable. 2. DC Power: 18 AWG, 2 conductor, Belden 8760 or comparable. 3. Provide type of data and DC power cabling required by access control device manufacturer for this installation. 4. Where scheduled in the hardware sets, provide each item of electrified hardware and wire harnesses with sufficient number and wire gauge with standardized Molex plug connectors to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide Molex connectors that plug directly into connectors from harnesses, electric locking and power transfer devices. Provide through -door wire harness for each electrified locking device installed in a door and wire harness for each electrified hinge, electrified continuous hinge, electrified pivot, and electric power transfer for connection to power supplies. 08710- 9 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE 2.03 HINGES A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Ives 5BB series. No substitute. B. Requirements: 1. Provide hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.1. 2. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, up to and including 36 inches (914 mm) wide: a. Exterior: Standard weight, bronze or stainless steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high b. Interior: Standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high 3. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors over 36 inches (914 mm) wide: a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high 4. 2 inches or thicker doors: a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze or stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high 5. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height, and one additional hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height. 6. Where new hinges are specified for existing doors or existing frames, provide new hinges of identical size to hinge preparation present in existing door or existing frame. 7. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: a. Steel Hinges: Steel pins b. Non -Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins c. Out -Swinging Exterior Doors: Non -removable pins d. Out -Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non -removable pins e. Interior Non -lockable Doors: Non -rising pins 8. Width of hinges: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) at 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, and 5 inches (127 mm) at 2 inches (51 mm) or thicker doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door, frame, and wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening. 2.04 ELECTRIC POWER TRANSFER A. Manufacturers: a. Scheduled Manufacturer: Von Duprin EPT-10. No substitute. B. Provide power transfer with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with number and gage of wires sufficient to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. 08710- 10 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE C. Locate electric power transfer per manufacturer's template and UL requirements, unless interference with operation of door or other hardware items. 2.05 FLUSH BOLTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. No substitute. B. Requirements: 1. Provide automatic, constant latching, and manual flush bolts with forged bronze or stainless -steel face plates, extruded brass levers, and with wrought brass guides and strikes. Provide 12 inch (305 mm) steel or brass rods at doors up to 90 inches (2286 mm) in height. For doors over 90 inches (2286 mm) in height increase top rods by 6 inches (152 mm) for each additional 6 inches (152 mm) of door height. Provide dust -proof strikes at each bottom flush bolt. 2.06 MORTISE LOCKS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Falcon MA series. B. Requirements: 1. Provide mortise locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1, and UL Listed for 3 hour fire doors. 2. Provide locks manufactured from heavy gauge steel, containing components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. 3. Provide lock case that is multi -function and field reversible for handing without opening case. Cylinders: Refer to "KEYING" article, herein. 4. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset with full 3/4 inch (19 mm) throw stainless steel mechanical anti -friction latchbolt. Provide deadbolt with full 1 inch (25 mm) throw, constructed of stainless steel. 5. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 6. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Where scheduled, provide a request to exit (RX) switch that is actuated with rotation of inside lever. 7. Lever Trim: Solid brass, bronze, or stainless steel, cast or forged in design specified, with wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Provide thru-bolted levers with 2-piece spindles. a. Lever Design: Falcon Quantum -Gala (QG) b. Tactile Warning (Knurling): Where required by authority having jurisdiction. Provide on levers on exterior (secure side) of doors serving rooms considered to be hazardous. 08710- 11 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE 2.07 EXIT DEVICES A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Von Duprin 99 series. B. Requirements: 1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 and UL listed for Panic Exit or Fire Exit Hardware. 2. Cylinders: Refer to "KEYING" article, herein. 3. Provide touchpad type exit devices, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or aluminum, plated to standard architectural finishes to match balance of door hardware. 4. Touchpad must extend a minimum of one half of door width. No plastic inserts are allowed in touchpads. 5. Provide exit devices with deadlatching feature for security and for future addition of alarm kits and/or other electrified requirements. 6. Provide flush end caps for exit devices. 7. Provide exit devices with manufacturer's approved strikes. 8. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Install exit devices at height recommended by exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and approved by Architect. 9. Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors, or provide spacers to fill gaps behind devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off face of door, provide glass bead kits. 10. Provide cylindrical or hex -key dogging as specified at non fire -rated openings. 11. Provide electrified options as scheduled. 12. Provide delayed egress devices, where scheduled, that are UL 294 listed, meet National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) and International Building Code (IBC) governing delayed egress, and/or other local and national fire codes acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as required. a. Provide non -handed and field sizable device with 3/4 (19mm) throw deadlocking latch bolt. Device incorporates an internal RX switch that detects attempt to exit from applying less than 15lbs to the push pad, which causes this switch to start an irreversible alarm cycle. Key switch in device is capable of arming, disarming, or resetting the device; and indicator lamp determines status of the device b. Provide devices capable of standard 15 second release delay and indefinite release delay as required by code, when tied into fire alarm system will release immediately when an alarm condition exists. c. Provide devices with all control inputs — door position input, external inhibit input, fire alarm input; auxiliary locking; nuisance alarm and internal horn; and, remote signaling output self-contained in the device assembly. 13. Concealed Vertical Cable Exit Devices: provide cable -actuated concealed vertical latch system in two -point for non -rated or fire rated wood doors up to a 90 minute rating and less bottom latch (LBL) configuration for non -rated or fire rated wood doors up to 20 minute rating. Vertical rods not permitted. a. Cable: Stainless steel with abrasive resistant coating. Conduit and core wire ends snap into latch and center slides without use of tools. 08710- 12 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE b. Wood Door Prep: Maximum 1 inch x 1.1875 inch x 3.875 inches top latch pocket and 1 inch x 1.1875 inch x 5 inches bottom latch pocket which does not require the use of a metal wrap or edge for non -rated or fire rated wood doors up to a 45 minute rating. c. Latchbolts and Blocking Cams: Manufactured from sintered metal low carbon copper - infiltrated steel, with molybdenum disulfide low friction coating. d. Top Latchbolt: Minimum 0.38 inch (10 mm) and greater than 90 degree engagement with strike to prevent door and frame separation under high static load. e. Bottom Latchbolt: Minimum of 0.44 inch (11 mm) engagement with strike. f. Latch Operation: Top and bottom latch operate independently of each other. Top latch fully engages top strike even when bottom latch is compromised. Separate trigger mechanisms not permitted. g. Latch release does not require separate trigger mechanism. h. Cable and latching system characteristics: 1) Installed independently of exit device installation, and capable of functioning on door prior to device and trim installation. 2) Connected to exit device at single point in steel and aluminum doors, and two points for top and bottom latches in wood doors. 3) Bottom latch height adjusted, from single point for steel and aluminum doors and two points for wood doors, after system is installed and connected to exit device, while door is hanging 4) Bottom latch position altered up and down minimum of 2 inches (51 mm) in steel and aluminum doors without additional adjustment. Bottom latch deadlocks in every adjustment position in wood doors. 5) Top and bottom latches in steel and aluminum doors and top latch in wood doors may be removed while door is hanging. 14. Top latch mounting: double or single tab mount for steel doors, face mount for aluminum doors eliminating requirement of tabs, and double tab mount for wood doors. 15. Provide exit devices with optional trim designs to match other lever and pull designs used on the project. a. Tactile Warning (Knurling): Where required by authority having jurisdiction. Provide on levers on exterior (secure side) of doors serving rooms considered to be hazardous. 2.08 CYLINDERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Schlage FSIC Primus XP B. Requirements: 1. Provide cylinders/cores, compliant with ANSI/BHMA A156.5; latest revision; cylinder face finished to match lockset, manufacturer's series as indicated. Refer to "KEYING" article, herein. 2. Provide cylinders in the below -listed configuration(s), distributed throughout the Project as indicated. 08710- 13 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE a. High Security: dual -locking cylinder with permanent core requiring restricted, patented keyway. Dual -locking mechanism with interlocking finger pin(s) to check for patented features on keys. 3. Patent Protection: Cylinders/cores requiring use of restricted, patented keys, patent - protected. 4. Nickel silver bottom pins. C. Construction Keying: 1. Replaceable Construction Cores. a. Provide temporary construction cores replaceable by permanent cores, furnished in accordance with the following requirements. 1) 3 construction control keys 2) 12 construction change (day) keys. b. Owner or Owner's Representative will replace temporary construction cores with permanent cores. 2.09 KEYING A. Provide a factory registered keying system, complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference. B. Comply with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference. C. Provide cylinders/cores keyed into Owner's existing keying system managed by Owner's locksmith, complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference. Contact: 1. Firm Name: 2. Contact Person: 3. Telephone: D. Requirements: 1. Provide permanent cylinders/cores keyed by the manufacturer according to the following key system. a. Master Keying system as directed by the Owner. 2. Forward bitting list and keys separately from cylinders, by means as directed by Owner. Failure to comply with forwarding requirements will be cause for replacement of cylinders/cores involved at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Provide keys with the following features: a. Material: Nickel silver; minimum thickness of .107-inch (2.3mm) 08710- 14 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE b. Patent Protection: Keys and blanks protected by one or more utility patent(s). 4. Identification: a. Mark permanent cylinders/cores and keys with applicable blind code per DHI publication "Keying Systems and Nomenclature" for identification. Do not provide blind code marks with actual key cuts. b. Identification stamping provisions must be approved by the Architect and Owner. c. Stamp cylinders/cores and keys with Owner's unique key system facility code as established by the manufacturer; key symbol and embossed or stamped with "DO NOT DUPLICATE" along with the "PATENTED" or patent number to enforce the patent protection. d. Failure to comply with stamping requirements will be cause for replacement of keys involved at no additional cost to Owner. e. Forward permanent cylinders/cores to Owner, separately from keys, by means as directed by Owner. 5. Quantity: Furnish in the following quantities. a. Change (Day) Keys: 3 per cylinder/core. b. Master Keys: 6. 2.10 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Telkee. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: HPC, Lund. B. Requirements: 1. Provide key control system, including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150% of number of locks required for Project. a. Provide complete cross index system set up by hardware supplier, and place keys on markers and hooks in cabinet as determined by final key schedule. b. Provide hinged -panel type cabinet for wall mounting. 2.11 DOOR CLOSERS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Falcon SC80 series. 08710- 15 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE B. Requirements: 1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. 2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with aluminum cylinder. 3. Closer Body: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) diameter, with 5/8 inch (16 mm) diameter heat -treated pinion journal. 4. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. 5. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards. 6. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper -proof, non -critical valves, with separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck. 7. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted. 8. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting. 2.12 DOOR TRIM A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. B. Requirements: 1. Provide push plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick and beveled 4 edges. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit. 2. Provide push bars of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Provide push bars of sufficient length to span from center to center of each stile. Where required, mount back to back with pull. 3. Provide offset pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar. 4. Provide flush pulls as scheduled. Where required, provide back-to-back mounted model. 5. Provide pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar. 6. Provide pull plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick, beveled 4 edges, and prepped for pull. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit. 7. Provide wire pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. 8. Provide decorative pulls as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with pull. 08710- 16 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE 2.13 PROTECTION PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. B. Requirements: 1. Provide kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates minimum of 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick, beveled four edges as scheduled. Furnish with sheet metal or wood screws, finished to match plates. 2. Sizes of plates: a. Kick Plates: 10 inches (254 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs b. Mop Plates: 4 inches (102 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs c. Armor Plates: 36 inches (914 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs 2.14 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. B. Provide door stops at each door leaf: 1. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks are used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used. 2. Where a wall stop cannot be used, provide universal floor stops for low or high rise options. 3. Where wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop. 2.15 THRESHOLDS, SEALS, DOOR SWEEPS, AUTOMATIC DOOR BOTTOMS, AND GASKETING A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Zero International. B. Requirements: 1. Provide thresholds, weather-stripping (including door sweeps, seals, and astragals) and gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural details. Match finish of other items. 2. Smoke- and Draft -Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft -control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 08710- 17 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE 3. Size of thresholds: a. Saddle Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by jamb width by door width b. Bumper Seal Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by 5 inches (127 mm) wide by door width 4. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available. 2.16 SILENCERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. B. Requirements: 1. Provide "push -in" type silencers for hollow metal or wood frames. 2. Provide one silencer per 30 inches (762 mm) of height on each single frame, and two for each pair frame. 3. Omit where gasketing is specified. 2.17 LATCH PROTECTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. B. Provide stainless steel latch protectors of type required to function with specified lock. 2.18 FINISHES A. Finish: BHMA 626/652 (US26D); except: 1. Hinges at Exterior Doors: BHMA 630 (US32D) 2. Continuous Hinges: BHMA 630 (US32D) 3. Continuous Hinges: BHMA 628 (US28) 4. Push Plates, Pulls, and Push Bars: BHMA 630 (US32D) 5. Protection Plates: BHMA 630 (US32D) 6. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA 630 (US32D) 7. Door Closers: Powder Coat to Match 8. Wall Stops: BHMA 630 (US32D) 9. Latch Protectors: BHMA 630 (US32D) 10. Weatherstripping: Clear Anodized Aluminum 11. Thresholds: Mill Finish Aluminum 08710- 18 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation of hardware, examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire -rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Field verify existing doors and frames receiving new hardware and existing conditions receiving new openings. Verify that new hardware is compatible with existing door and frame preparation and existing conditions. C. Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Where on -site modification of doors and frames is required: 1. Carefully remove existing door hardware and components being reused. Clean, protect, tag, and store in accordance with storage and handling requirements specified herein. 2. Field modify and prepare existing door and frame for new hardware being installed. 3. When modifications are exposed to view, use concealed fasteners, when possible. 4. Prepare hardware locations and reinstall in accordance with installation requirements for new door hardware and with: a. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. b. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors." c. Doors in rated assemblies: NFPA 80 for restrictions on on -site door hardware preparation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following, unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, using only fasteners provided by manufacturer. 08710- 19 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Protect all installed hardware during painting. D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. F. Install operating parts so they move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance. G. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than quantity recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. H. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying section. 2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. I. Wiring: Coordinate with Division 26, ELECTRICAL sections for: 1. Conduit, junction boxes and wire pulls. 2. Connections to and from power supplies to electrified hardware. 3. Connections to fire/smoke alarm system and smoke evacuation system. 4. Connection of wire to door position switches and wire runs to central room or area, as directed by Architect. 5. Testing and labeling wires with Architect's opening number. J. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. K. Door Closers: Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors from corridors. Mount closers so they are not visible in corridors, lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect. L. Closer/Holders: Mount closer/holders on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors. M. Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings or in equipment room, or alternate location as directed by Architect. N. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 08710- 20 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE O. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present tripping hazard. P. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. Q. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. R. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports to installed confirm installed work complies with contract documents and where necessary adjust hardware is properly installed and adjusted per manufacturers requirements and recommendations. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 2. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three to six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant must examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors and door hardware. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 08710- 21 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE 3.07 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Hardware items are referenced in the following hardware. Refer to the above -specifications for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements. B. Hardware Sets: HARDWARE GROUP NO. 01 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER EA ALL HARDWARE BY ROOF HATCH SUPPLIER FINISH MFR HARDWARE GROUP NO. 02 Provide each RU door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740-XP 626 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-059-ICX (CAM/COLLAR AS REQ) 626 SCH 1 EA NOTE REMAINDER OF HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER -COORDINATE HARDWARE WITH DOOR MFR. HARDWARE GROUP NO. 03 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD/224HD (AS REQ'D) 628 IVE 1 EA OFFICE LOCK MA521L QG 626 FAL 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740-XP 626 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-094 X B520-698 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 RW/PA FC 689 FAL 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEAL PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER NOTE ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOOR TO REQUIRE 5+ INCH STILE WIDTH TO ACCOMMODATE MORTISE LOCK BODY. 08710- 22 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 04 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER 4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 (3 EA. PER LEAF @ DOORS UNDER 90") 1 EA OFFICE LOCK MA521L QG 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-094 X B520-698 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740-XP 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 1 EA GASKETING 188S PSA H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON -RATED DOORS) HARDWARE GROUP NO. 05 Provide each SGL door(s) with the follow QTY DESCRIPTION 4 EA HINGE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EA EA EA EA EA EA EA STOREROOM LOCK PRIMUS CORE MORTISE CYLINDER SURFACE CLOSER PROTECTION PLATE WALL STOP GASKETING HARDWARE GROUP NO. 06 Provide each SGL door(s) with the follo QTY 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA DESCRIPTION HINGE STOREROOM LOCK PRIMUS CORE MORTISE CYLINDER SURFACE CLOSER WALL STOP CARD READER DOOR CONTACT ELECTRIC STRIKE ing: CATALOG NUMBER 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 (3 EA. PER LEAF @ DOORS UNDER 90") MA581L QG 20-740-XP 26-094 X B520-698 SC81 RW/PA FC 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS WS406/407CCV 188S PSA H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON -RATED DOORS) wing: CATALOG NUMBER 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 MA581L QG 20-740-XP 26-094 X B520-698 SC81 RW/PA FC WS406/407CCV BY: SECURITY CONTRACTOR BY: SECURITY CONTRACTOR BY: SECURITY CONTRACTOR FINISH MFR 652 IVE 626 FAL 626 SCH 626 SCH 630 IVE BK ZER FINISH MFR 652 IVE 626 FAL 626 SCH 626 SCH 689 FAL 630 IVE 630 IVE BK ZER FINISH MFR 652 IVE 626 FAL 626 SCH 626 SCH 689 FAL 630 IVE NOTE: ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOOR TO REQUIRE 5+ INCH STILE WIDTH TO ACCOMMODATE MORTISE LOCK BODY. 08710- 23 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 07 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER 4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 (3 EA. PER LEAF © DOORS UNDER 90") 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK MA581L QG 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-094 X B520-698 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740-XP 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 SS FC 1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 1 EA GASKETING 188S PSA H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON -RATED DOORS) HARDWARE GROUP NO. 08 Provide each SGL door(s) with the follow QTY 3 ing: CATALOG NUMBER 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 (3 EA. PER LEAF © DOORS UNDER 90") MA311 OCCUPIED/VACANT QGM SC81 SS FC 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 188S PSA H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON -RATED DOORS) -LOCKED/UNLOCKED INDICATOR ON OUTSIDE OF DOOR. DESCRIPTION EA HINGE EA EA EA EA PRIVACY LOCK SURFACE CLOSER PROTECTION PLATE GASKETING FINISH MFR 652 IVE 626 FAL 626 SCH 626 SCH 689 FAL 630 IVE BK ZER FINISH MFR 652 IVE 626 FAL 689 FAL 630 IVE BK ZER HARDWARE GROUP NO. 09 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD/224HD (AS REQ'D) 628 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK MA561L QG 626 FAL 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-094 X B520-698 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740-XP 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 RW/PA FC 689 FAL 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEAL PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER NOTE: ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOOR TO REQUIRE 5+ INCH STILE WIDTH TO ACCOMMODATE MORTISE LOCK BODY. 08710- 24 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 10 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION 1 EA CONT. HINGE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 1 EA OH STOP 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER CATALOG NUMBER 112HD/224HD (AS REQ'D) MA561 L QG 26-094 X B520-698 20-740-XP 100S SERIES X SIZE & MOUNTING AS REQ SC81 RW/PA FC X SPECIAL TEMPLATE AS REQ 1 SET SEAL PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER NOTE: ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOOR TO REQUIRE 5+ INCH STILE WIDTH TO ACCOMMODATE MORTISE LOCK BODY. HARDWARE GROUP NO. 11 Provide each SGL door(s) QTY DESCRIPTION 1 EA CONT. HINGE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 1 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1 EA WALL STOP 1 SET SEAL HARDWARE GROUP NO. 12 Provide each SGL door(s) with QTY DESCRIPTION 4 EA HINGE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 1 EA WALL STOP 1 EA GASKETING with the following: CATALOG NUMBER 112HD/224HD (AS REQ'D) 33A-N L-O P 20-740-XP 20-057 ICX W/CONST. CORE 8190-0 10" SC81 RW/PA FC WS406/407CCV PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER the following: CATALOG NUMBER 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 99-L-BE-F-17 SC81 RW/PA FC 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS WS406/407CCV 188S PSA H & J 08710- 25 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 FINISH MFR 628 IVE 626 FAL 626 SCH 626 SCH 630 GLY 689 FAL FINISH MFR 628 IVE 626 VON 626 SCH 626 SCH 630 IVE 689 FAL 630 IVE FINISH MFR 652 IVE 626 VON 689 FAL 630 IVE 630 IVE BK ZER ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 13 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER 4 EA HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA PULL PLATE 8303 CTC10" 4"X16" 1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 4" X 16" 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 RW/PA FC 1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 3 EA SILENCER SR64 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 14 Provide each SGL door(s) QTY DESCRIPTION 1 EA CONT. HINGE 1 EA PUSH/PULL BAR 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1 EA WALL STOP 1 SET SEAL HARDWARE GROUP NO. 15 Provide QTY 3 1 1 EA EA EA each SGL door(s) with DESCRIPTION HINGE PUSH/PULL BAR OH STOP 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1 SET SOUND SEAL EA EA EA CARD READER DOOR CONTACT ELECTRIC STRIKE with the following: CATALOG NUMBER 112HD/224HD (AS REQ'D) 9190-NO-10" SC81 RW/PA FC WS406/407CCV PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER the following: CATALOG NUMBER 5BB1 4.5 x 4.5 9190-NO-10" 100S SERIES X SIZE & MOUNTING AS REQ SC81 RW/PA FC X SPECIAL TEMPLATE AS REQ PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER BY: SECURITY CONTRACTOR BY: SECURITY CONTRACTOR BY: SECURITY CONTRACTOR 08710- 26 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 FINISH MFR 652 IVE 630 IVE 630 IVE 689 FAL 630 IVE 630 IVE GRY IVE FINISH MFR 628 IVE 630 IVE 689 FAL 630 IVE FINISH MFR 652 IVE 630 IVE 630 GLY 689 FAL ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 16 Provide each PR door(s) with the following QTY 2 EA 2 EA 1 EA 2 EA 2 EA 1 SET DESCRIPTION CONT. HINGE PUSH/PULL BAR SURF. AUTO OPERATOR ACTUATOR, WALL MOUNT WALL STOP SEAL 1 SET ASTRAGAL CATALOG NUMBER 112HD/224HD (AS REQ'D) 9190-NO-10" AUTOMATIC OPENERS BY DIVISION 08 71 13 (BOTH LEAFS) ACTUATOR(S) BY DIVISION 08 71 13 WS406/407CCV PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER MEETING STILE SEAL BY DOOR MANUFACTURER OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION: PRESSING EITHER ACTUATOR TO INITIATE AUTO OPERATOR. OPERATOR TO SEQUENCE WITH EXTERIOR VESTIBULE DOOR'S OPERATOR. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. 08710- 27 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 FINISH MFR 628 IVE 630 IVE ANCLR LCN 630 LCN 630 IVE ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 17 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE BY DOOR/FRAME MANUFACTURER 2 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON 1 EA ELEC PANIC RX-QEL-HH-KAW-9947-EO-CON HARDWARE ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RIM CYLINDER PRIMUS CORE 90 DEG OFFSET PULL SURF. AUTO OPERATOR SEQUENCER ACTUATOR, WALL MOUNT SEAL 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 2 EA 2 EA 1 EA 2 EA 1 SET 1 SET ASTRAGAL 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 1 EA HD THRESHOLD 2 EA ACCESSORIES 1 EA MULTITECH READER 2 EA DOOR CONTACT 1 RX-QEL-HH-KAW-9947-NL-OP-110MD- CON 20-057 ICX W/CONST. CORE 20-740-XP 8190-0 10" AUTOMATIC OPENERS BY DIVISION 08 71 13 SEQUENCER BY DIVISION 08 71 13 ACTUATOR(S) BY DIVISION 08 71 13 (BOLLARD POST AS REQ) PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER MEETING STILE SEAL BY DOOR MANUFACTURER APPROVED FOR USE WITH OPENING SYSTEM APPROVED FOR USE WITH OPENING SYSTEM CON -KIT MT15 - BY DIVISION 28 7764 POWER SUPPLY - WORK OF DIVISION 28 @ QELS FINISH MFR 628 KAW 689 VON 626 VON 626 VON 626 SCH 626 SCH 630 IVE ANCLR LCN LCN 630 LCN SCH BLK SCE 628 SCE NOTE: VERIFY WINDSTORM "CERTIFICATION" OF SPECIFIED HARDWARE W/DOOR SYSTEM. HARDWARE BUILT AS A BASIS -OF -DESIGN AROUND KAWNEER 5001R DOOR SYSTEM. OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION: ENTRY BY CARD READER OR MANUAL KEY OVERRIDE. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. 08710- 28 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 18 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 4 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP (3 EA. PER 630 IVE LEAF @ DOORS UNDER 90") 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON 689 VON 1 EA ELEC FIRE EXIT RX-QEL-HH-99-NL-F-CON 626 VON HARDWARE 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 ICX W/CONST. CORE 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740-XP 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR & 689 LCN PLATE AS REQ 1 EA PROTECTION PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 328AA H & J AA ZER 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A DW + 4" AA ZER 1 EA SEALS PS-074 STE 1 EA DOOR SWEEP FAS-SEAL STE 1 EA THRESHOLD 566A-223 A ZER 1 EA ACCESSORIES CON -KIT SCH 1 EA MULTITECH READER MT15 - BY DIVISION 28 BLK SCE 1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05 TYPE AS REQ WHT SCE 1 POWER SUPPLY - WORK OF DIVISION 28 NOTE. VERIFY WINDSTORM "CERTIFICATION" OF SPECIFIED HARDWARE W/DOOR SYSTEM. HARDWARE BUILT AS A BASIS -OF -DESIGN AROUND STEELCRAFT DOOR SYSTEM. OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION ENTRY BY CARD READER OR MANUAL KEY OVERRIDE. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. END OF SECTION 08710- 29 01-17-2020 Issue for Bid Addendum No. 3 �COP PERMIT# COMM19-00247 TDLR# TABS2019011085 PROJECT ADDRESS: 3501 E. Orange Street, Pearland, TX 77581 City of Pearland, Texas Orange Street Service Center - Phase 1 Administration Building Project Number: FA1404 Bid Number: 1220-11 December 2019 MAYOR Tom Reid COUNCIL Mayor Pro Tem Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position 6 Position 7 J. David Little Luke Orlando Tony Carbone Gary Moore Adrian Hernandez Trent Perez Woody Owens CITY MANAGER Clay Pearson DEPUTY CITY MANAGER ASST. CITY MANAGER Jon Branson Trent Epperson DIRECTOR OF ENGINEERING DIRECTOR OF PUBLIC WORKS Robert D. Upton, P.E. Clarence Wittwer HUITTZOLIARS ADVANCEDESI6N' 10550 Rsnmmd Ave Stale 300 Houston TA 7,42 Plats* (Pe ie06U066 F as(261) e913-0220 414111 4)0,1 Brazor catnaps No 4 OATS tee. LATE The above have nipnetlseplle'd plena andiar dot .See .m m. rerommendePon dthe DISTRICTS Engineer MY* Ida them le be in penes. corset/weer... DISTRICTud S RAM Reg.:Adam. and reversed Tghee. pv a Ms approval is only mod for three hundred arty -Me (3651 c.mder days Alter Met erne re -approval is ecu;red. Please note. Me does not necessarily mean that all the calculat.ns provided In these plans arNor pats lwvx Peen emp neery c 1*0*0 and HMlfed Piano submin0a0M ed se teen prepa, signed and seeded by a Professional Frghleer titers. lo cot angulnesnp in the State of Tema end pad has been signed and sealed by • Registered Professional Enid Suneym licensed to pracfice in 1M Slate of Tema 34rdh conveys Me erypneels and/n x nenynys see nsiptlry .d evnuntabdity St1BYTfEO BY: aer saw nra r., w� APPROVED BY : C_• ,./'`S ROMd D Upton, P.E. 11�� Dan, tor of Erginesd p hot l0 CA MP DATE- ii✓V ITIMM1eYXaXnea11W4•14. tsR.ap¢I "R IEVEL, DEIEI DRAWING NOTES HWTf ZOUARS ADVANCEDESION' IMO RRfmv.d AW Sure. Nwabn TX Tro2a e, Rae aaee n•n.mr. mm COPYRIGHT zo,e wulnzoEURs1Nc. a � e 9 w p 2 REHR TO�"` P1E411�pAC'., `�� PARIBFR RCM W ..= a CC....�.E.M, I JrS. WIDa � 1PP 4 sA.IwmlRlM.11 10E1 it, irLEVEle ,CMRWMORXXIX•wa, R.," ORR. M.M'.E u.. E .41 I �� COORDINATE POWER A DATA kW.. WORTS AS NOTED F P1 �� III • I .E ,a1E,kEESS�aES�ME,a,eWORa MS PACO. �Ewsweois PRICED WIRER TRAYS MO S>WRE wSYSTEM `�0111111111 o..zo,t e w�wVor I1� MUM wu GM r® T au I oa�R 7VIIAlw6 _ 1 � I "wFMt.�li .y FFEEEVEI.I ��1Mil _'Pi MA CMOSs O P f, y J' r.rt 4,, �y E� V70. r a.IC •.e fl ' CS. CLERKS 102 17' .1' s I 6 PRINT 226 ELEVATION 1 ,rz. ro• 1 3 Mk Vma ' / if.'r - - W �- • T RE 1.ea *pgil. S. ORRIEW. MS �aF YIVL2CEIU cS ` 111111111111111 I IIIONialkalkIPAIIIII �_\©� g /� & moil ® � \ Q al S. ` "1.milT-L.liu Vs. Q 011.P20 ISSUE FOR ISSUE iOft BID DawnEa N19 ------ __.-.. -- NE DESCRIPTOR DATE .[ PEARLAND [s t. rtJ o p �� WPM Er! INIME INQII ITN �M MOM �L. A RE IEVELI-V aaSC r avY R l VESTIBULE ELEVATION +R O.I 8 CONF. ROOM 200 1/2'• r_D I 5 PLOTTER /COPY ROOM 113 1R • raj 2 CEINC '� A 4j 2CEI lEVE11 �10 Ol2 i. I PVEPL 1 City of Pearland, Texas L-J e MCI M_ Q LLY(U) 0.—'1g ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PEASE t ADMINISTRATION BUILDING !I1��a r g ® _ ''�'�j ,1. E.Kn�E.,1LW m,, o \ '� /�: ° /I511 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS II 1111ill�UWt in 4 $ o` o` I '!'" ....' �FFE LEVEL2 D P —` r:; la EVEN r,u - •� eRaEamael f 11300253 Se* SI.e1w aE w� AS NOTED P. °' '"' CAD EI. A502 PRINT ROOM 226 ELEVATION II ,,2'• - rrr I 7 o COIF ROOM 201 + _ +' o' I 4 LOBBY ELEVATION VI o• r-o I 1 .*rM a, REM WA FFE 90} 'Kr l0) IO TYP CONF ROOM WALL BOARD a•raI 6 OM'RNO RDIEf RUIN TO WO FOR I.LINC11014.01/119%..., CAR MEOW INEEOLE MOICA1101 PLYWOOD 0.1111COVOCCOVIE OEM. RE 10,121 30. FLOOR E. CPR RE 111.31130160.E 30.1E PRE EOM NE ELECIRICA COMMIT POWER ow,. loracwo wars ro OM. MATLITOillE MEER RE tan ACC ICS[MISER. 31,..3E=T TRASH CM RE BAER H1111TZOLLARS ADVANCEDESICN' 10350 R4hmond Ara Sun. KO Rambo TA 010I1 2f11960058 WC maR mm COPYRIGHT 2019 HUITT-ZOLLM9 INC. SYMBOLS 1,1101011) `CD 0111110,113110) 0.00000 pilk LEVEL ICEIU ,R P R.�LL�w�iAscM ai. •1T O I A 0 A CM7 r� Q irtim remom—samm *LE>.EL1W 10 3 , v r,e� r•v r.. --..- • 0 I IrIv 1 0) a-0 MOO MIIMM QrJ.1— ..• A ADDENDUM.] Mx. DESCRIPTION ;DRv1o. 2019 ORE JANITOR CLOSET I ry,10 5 CONFERENCE ROOM 105 TRAINING ROOM ELEVATION Mil I/ RUNIC 501E0 WE fa 10T- 11• (I) r—I AMIMEM T o 1 moo ff1-0 1 Jr O City of Peadand. Texas ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BUILDING INTERIOR ELEVATIONS III 055 AS NOTED JANITOR CLOSET II 1a•ra1 TRAINING ROOM ELEVATION II 2•rat 1 u.M OWL oRx9EN CAD FIR wR Snee1 No A503 . U W m1' Q\� e h!i 4 2 s 44 2 R C2 City of Peadand, Texas ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BUILDING CHEDULE & TAILS C) O M� rHi t7 `3 cg sLaa " a Ii_g ! lAA! R a e �{ ,. a IP 17 cA o4a� . tiMni ill 1 9 $ I i ill 1 . . OEM 1. { rt II . p , a sm } 11 w ------_ _.s.�w 1 "--- Ii s•w SOS 6 ln3 lill 2. -' aka su Mai •i{ o w w 1 i 9 €4 �L yy s i Qqi <1 i ~ g�+3 fy WWe. - -. er - )..i/� r,rrt e o F cc c s h 1 h a9 4 4 S� gg gggg gg gggg. iEPP E 3ii33 i'# _=i V,e,t'�e.EeP __ ii i i pp ippti4 i le Et.Ht azgqzggggppRR , „ _ _ qqpp qq pp 's V555 b?? ? yy ?? ; : e 555 5 , €33np i C 5 11 .. J N v— 1 t..... _s._., ..._.. _.-... ..�� ... ... .. ... a `y1e 6E6 A €€ggg } 3 W FZ 6 sc- p ---°- -- - -- -' -- dF- =58 =9aa SSISI•a .. , . t:R ■e ec¢4omnein n HUITTZDLIARS ADVANCEDESIs H011.111 r= no, Tat .asooee corn COPYRIGHT 2019 HUITT-ZOLLARS INCIs CURTAIN WALL WINDOW r +14 ' TYPES ON LEVEL 1 AND 2 III _,. 1 tl s } T j • a 1, .111. PR 0/.411SYSTDA .493.ATEDOUVI.10 01-4.411 I DU OMO mrsIrtv ciA7974 w• *eve.m WM MO. GLADNO PRE FOOS. WALL PIMA INMATE, I iar. DLO O CURVY WM SUMO MIMEO \ Mk Mt anaa . O PRE FIS49.0 0.14TNN tall Trs704•Di R,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, I a. w. mPmm WA GLAD. roali OM RRS RIMED W411 SYSTEM INSUATIER o«x v DATUM WM OWN] ec® yo, \ �- MN ORL GLUM WON PRE ONSIE0 op.. gyp,. INNUASED SLUM 1 IOU FULLY oaa SR ns.a CUMIN Russ TIOPIERE) OF v ,INu Nu. RR, FN.,. u s outs. uNLL SYSTEMOININSJATEDOLAZAND SUMO I ICIU PAIS TAPERED 1 swaaawimwwunw • AS, "°TEE„o�/m+, ofvmzo EXTERIOR WINDOW TYPES ON LEVEL 1 rNa T rra EXTERIOR WINDOW TYPES ON LEVEL 2 rrea .-r Ra INTERWRWINDOWI TYPES ON LEVEL 1Mk DESCRIPTIONDATE �~ Jr j81 +� '2 � mSe.I. iIL • .. tr IR 64 QUAD 1 IOU RI,. TEIARERSO raTOMS 42.41 1 IOU SILLS DR/DM SUOMI m. twelam 1 '„� I SOU Rills TAMED GLUM I IOU DJ, MIMED . r FS > r NICTORY *MOM RIM F.d . Ea ,. ooa„laaw.nl STILE1.40061 `,,,1""'L„ 43 V—,- , City of Peadand, Texas ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE I ADMINISTRATION BUILDING WINDOW SCHEDULE IN =1n I nwr«,w.ra»� Mara. +.wt MO C1,711C WINDOW SCHEDULE & DETAILS WV xi �� ,.�N�N.Na :. -OI � 4 i,��L I MEE �®a ,SCuEDLASO FRAM m' . _ a ara.., fSERnwaaOS AM RIDOS5.1 SC SwimSorel Na ___ 10. a.w ,00 o. xe AS NOTED a..., oY,; wr �° FM A604 MANUAL SHADING ROLLER DETAIL 1 +rr=171 5 INTERIOR SAFETY WINDOW JAWS r- r.v I 3 - I CURTAIN WALL JAWS r= r v 2 CURTAIN WALL DOOR HEAD r= rn 1 I o+eN „,.„ we FINISH SCHEDULE TOE CARET Is., LE I.LLIIso R.WL FLOORING PME CT MEER IPRDDDDTNAME Imam Neu GOOFELTDRE1 I CARPET IN ALL OFF. AREAS roCSt IY VINYL ROZA TILE 220.1.4111 LVT ♦ •vs..t.+ � � kA ...ty.lN -V ♦ -V V -4 •.AI . MSS RLSEEP BASE TILE ROLL EASE JEWNSONIT CS TILE IRS NL,ERORE. JAVOL SILVER ORE. COTTEN TWO (MARS TILL WALL BABE CO Z. TEE Ti PORCEOLIN TILE RwCEIAx TILE CB I ALN OInn.. 1110 JAN01 II ft TILE LOS. OWN. HAD PATTERN MN WORE TE - MONT METE GROUT Mu WE BATHROOM MT. GROUT 1.1.411x1TI ILOOR MN TILE C. TEC Td MORBIC TILE CURE YR ROURENTRE ORE,' SRFAR ROONO'nSIISX GROW HUITTZOLIARS ADVANCEDESIGN' TOW` a�.nm1 ,Arr suu. 5�n MOW. Tx AOlE 101E210 OOR. rw nRITS4•R corn COPYRIGHT 2010 HUITTZOLLARS INC. PANT PANT PRO IRO41 1114 PPP MOP PPR 170 DEICATENTTE REAOULL SILVER MIMS EGCOWELL IL OW LI. TER FRESH Gr' aVL�bS ERlsvxs� NUICRALS IWO WOAD RAILS RI STAIRWELLS Ind mart PPR ROD MADGE Ctt IaMITT2 COUNTER TOP WILSONART SAILOR 001 AP:EMMA. PANT SOL ED SLEW.. AT CS CLERIC BRE/CROONS BAT OLMILTSCORATER TOP CTION CT. I AurvLC COUNTER TOP CONAN ANTMETICA ANTARTICA CONFERENCE RN ALTERNATE Nu1DRR MALI NAN PREEMIE LATAIWTE ISTAMONE LAIRMME NILSOMART 0321.1 FLORENCE AMMO SAWA. DUE ORANGE GROVE CO4 RN WATT( PINE VELvET FRAM MEM R0011 N 11YORK SORF CROSBY BRASH ..MILL IN NI GLOOM MEW .141941P.FNI•ER' INEWLAILMINATE vT. PICHtECMNL MDDDDOCR1. LED ORR ARMOMMI CRRE CRMR-DOE waRRgETTE RED 0/44 DOM M. T ADDENDUM IN 651E FOR SO 0.1159E 2010 OCI ERMA ID CULTS WORE ED CEILING- PANTO IPRIMED PT-1.SEIRRL WELLODIMENO 1TAO.ELE SURFACE AWNS METER.. VOILLCONER040 TIME. NAIEA.IY-MNTE DoanER tommistiono REEMILI EDOE1s..E nuccanaca area ADOVVIN CORNER Alp TOP CAPS NO vERTIcAL JoINTS ON PANELS LESS TRANS. ITIBMOSITION STRIP TOT TRAMITOTT STRIP TOLtITER PROTECTING EDGE OCIILUTER DOILLITER SONENEA PECEC Reed C.PET TO TILE CARPET TO LW TR 10 TILE TILE COMM ED...TEMA NISCELLANEOLO SEALER CONCRETE GLOSSY. CLEAR FINER SEALED CONCRETE RE NIECE FOR SANS OF DES,. AHD APPROVED MANURACTURERS STEILACNIAINTED CRASS WALL NNUM.. WALL WETS CAP RECIWECTURAL CAP ARCHITECTURAL .N9b.IW COLOR CAST SERIES MTALCLEAR EERME MSN GIACWETTER OR. ON. AFEL TTOR...PEON LEVELS NATI MILLINER MCH• TT]OIEY IT) CAW MLA°. INT NOTED IN PLANS SEEfIIP11011 OYE .1116 PEARLAND tie S/. l8n EXTERIOR MATERIAL SCHEDULE TAG IR nessucT moon I PANT EOI EUSTCENERIC COATING ELASTONERIC COATING EION EA9uoe1Y LOH! GRIT MG I TEO CLEAR ANOVEROMTIRIMPI VENOMS MULLION NORM ELLIOROPOII TO COANCE RU Raee1TR1 FLYORSPON 1004 VALRIPA VALSINR TO ORGE RNDD®SRTMMNSN TO TOD LOUVER FRAME IPSO FILDROPON VAL., Olt TO 1110 ELEVATOR FINISH SCHEDULE I.RDDDDTNDN.ER PAPP INTGDNDTNAE I a COR ELMDeA1HIE ITEO 1- MOSS IIIRM„ IHOLISE„EIC ST...SEMEN RA 1 City of Pearand, Texas ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BUILDING FINISH SCHEDULE Scab AS NOTED OEM OMCTRY 09*x REN CAD Fla TYR sM� A611 FINISH PLAN LEGEND DRAWING NOTES HWTFZOUARS ADVANCEDESI6Ne WOW Richmond Aro Sude 000 Houston TX 7021 3% 014LON z IreNxPRn mm COPYRIGHT 2019 HUITT-ZOLLARS INC. SYMBOLS 0f N1I { -S. A-, *Oa PPM WALL SEW 'L A ADDENDUM XO 01 17 2020 ISSUE FOR BID Decanter 2019 MN. DESCRIPTION DATE PEARLAND Tr AS fJ-A City of Peadand, Texas ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BUILDING FINISH PLAN LEVEL 1 Scale AS NOTED FINISH PLAN LEVEL 1 1rB'=I'O'I Ow Sy DAC 171M romp et REN CAO Fie WA Shoal No A612 FINISH PLAN LEGEND Hl1ITTZOLIARS ADYANCEDESIGN' 10350 Rcnmon7 ALB Sole 300 Houston Tx 11021 2B1 e960066 wow HMI -GNPs Lam COPYRIGHT 2019 H0ITT-ZOLLARS INC. 2 moo To FINSH WNW. FOX OMITS MT PATTERN SYMBOLS WM.L RMS. POOP MS. Of POE 11.191110X VW USED PRITEPelf *MI COV80.3 N n ADDENDOMR3 01172020 ISSUE FOR BID Doom* 2019 MN. DESCRIPTION DATE City of Peadand, Texas ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BUILDING FINISH PLAN LEVEL 2 11300,53 AM 10 04 2019 ASS AS NOTED FINISH PLAN LEVEL 2 I1H'=1'0'I 1 Dotty DAC TRW am By PI_ PEN CAD Fw WA SMe1 Ho A613 �.., .fASTEO "T" abOr __ DRAWING Nora Hl11TTZOLLARS ADVANCEDESICIr 10150 Richmond Ave SuIR 30 .Mmv S COM COPYRIGHT 2019 NUITT.ZOLLARS INC =,.-,x,ov,.,z, ,.<,,,.., <RL.10.>a..o. L.NOD..mxl NAVE ,..,,o,,,.A„F.,o..,o.,.mal.,,•.,a CLOSE q usmfml vrt. m..n • • Ark l& ...- I , I/ WWI. 1q �..—• s wc,...,,2® Naa.roc "' I " E� m.e.D�ra�R seu it aamWIDE. Nv. SECTION AT BASE W/ SINK I IQ'. ED. I 8 SECTION AT BASE CAB W DRAWER , ,7 = + C. 5 I SECTION AT BASE CABINET W/ DOORS ONLY I yr ra 4 4, CEIL.N G j_♦_�_ 9'p r IOi 4 C 1 fEv A ADDENDM.] CI ,)2(10 ISSUE FOR BID Oe®n1e 2019 ____ , .�.9� o Y[ DESCRIPTION DATE's L.J 114,1.r.000... ..w... \ L J .... PI ED .. NeNe„ EEE— mows xr I. A NV r, 11.1 5041:011s154,0150.4514 City of Pearland, Texas r t* '�F1Fp , - &UWE..,aDDCOMEN AP q - tr WINED ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BUILDING \ % %� rI t7. �� SOW ' I •f ¢ RP t •1 , q I =k � ' os f— t ,04 I + I q so�N,rcal.rma dx MILLWORK SECTIONS & DETAILS I —k �! 44101,1151111111 9� k ,SIM ............ �� ..x ..o x 0*o0�, 9<�...,D..I fi #4 # r IS NDIED a ovcx.. A701 CS CLERK SECTION AT UPPER 8 BASE CABINET W/ SOFFIT 1 ,2 =,-O. I 3 n BREAKROOM SECTION AT UPPER 8 BASE CABINET W/ DRAWER 2 • ,-0•1 2 SOFFIT 7= ro• 1 SECTION AT UPPER & BASE CABINET W/ DRAWER 8 n Ie a.w. .rH WA WA MILLWORK NOTES HUITf ZOLIARS ADVANCEDESIRN' 090RAm °Aw3°.9DD Houston i%]]011 93 OM nl,n.mMn corn COPYRIGHT2019 NUITT-ZOLLGR31NC. ro"°=°'^. WED COUNTO r9r lon • D EEEmW.LaR,ET,M,MREMRRENO MEMOS EON COMM. WIRED EDEEN,,,,,C,,,,EN, MAWm� ,. _ _ bOE® MC ESTONE9lN.MMEOPENMOOONACTURSPECIRCAIIPO �B,."U RA911[ a Ur w.XEAM ON 9 BE mra(cIIOY MEow Y I 1 •• ,.ill ;I�.�,�. r NAVE MAW 0,3 FLU ESEMewwawa auEs.oayET CLOSE 3031.0, 30 PACER, SURFACE 3, IDE i11 „ R MOOR o :Eigca3Eal, °RiK�x.A.W,.N3ER SWAM EASTEXER e. .. YOM ' PLAN DETAIL AT PASSTHRU WINDOW 1 VP = I a• I 2 0. 10. . 1 1 SW D. 103 It PROVIDE .«"I«Ru,xMO A. ADDENDUM xB DI 172020 \ ' -..-........ / / ISSUE FOR BID Dewm0a 2019 Mx. DESCRIPTION DATE rRC,x,1AxuMC 0 PEARLAND i E x A A fJ-? ME3.01 •' o°pRww RwasAcnw•wow - L, 3. mat n 'T 1 t y J WOW TO Ma FCR .E aAw, IAeN VENOM./ m \ , . fi op°.aaoE ar ♦-1 CON. City of Peadand, Texas .� rw r m.n EAamEn°E MITE cawFR ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE I ADMINISTRATION BUILDING PC Ku.N.° ,ea11:1=r2"CF91° xAu SUPPORTS 0 C — ..._, 1. a "'*�"*'°`°'� _..... \ - - „2.uE«MEEura.E,Em E9pE i A . .RT-n rr �� _ ' - I '—" , ..1 .�� a• ..a .,T°° w1M MILLWORK SECTIONS & DETAILS III . N..lM1 WED —49 .°CEMO AS 3EEDED __ °"o RRE" -� �e°°A1A E SCKI3R „,R E° eE v,ai ` I��EI N 1' Y I. A n Scale Sheol No �� x • pay ,ow ,o AS NOTED By RIa cw F,a A703 COUNTERTOP AT RECEPTION DETAIL na•= r.a I 3 PASSTHRU WINDOW SECTION 11rz•= ra I 1 c„aa ec RER N/A 4 t WIRE PPOOE 0CAMUY4 1043AFF a FM 1S.RWIRE LE94TRAy FCA.WRAORK GAMMA I... 12d AFF IXAMF R.XI T. pi A9 cc SECURITY & COMM. FLOOR PLAN - FIRST FLOOR EA9 1AE.1'V O S`RF.N :is. �'aaa Z.31*i I, Eta �IF:3 lJ O GENERAL NOTES A REFER TO SHEET EOM FOR ADDITIONAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS NOTES ANIS SYMBOLS B REFER TO SHEETS 501. E502. AN O E503 FOR SYSTEM DETAILS AND IXR q C WORK AREA OUTLETS SNOW)! IN FURNITURE DENCT NUMBER OF DROPS PER WORKSTATION. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF DROP WITH FURNITURE PR OTMARSI. ' 0 PROMISE ACCESS POINT ROUGH -IN AT ALL NOTED LOCATIONS TO VID INCLUDE J-905 AND SC CONDUIT SACK TO NEAREST COMMUNICATIONS CABLE TRAY (BY CONTRACTOR) FRONDE A LAMA CABLE FROM WAP TO R ROOM ON SAME FLOOR. {BY OTHERS) COORDINATE FINAL LOCATIONS AND TERMINATIONS WITH OWNER AND THIRD PARTY CONTRACTOR E , CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL ALL COMMUNICATION/SECURITY ROUGH I/O AND INFRASTRUCTURE 0 E LADDER RACKS AND IT RACK) COORDINATE ALL ROUGHRNS W S THIRD PARTY CONTRACTOR. NOT S Y SYMBOL o 1. WALL MOUNT EXTERIOR CAMERA IN SPACE BETWEEN THE TOP OF THE COOP FRAMING ANO THE G OPY (BY OTHERS. COORDINATE HEIGHTS O: 0ROPS%MTN 0IARER FOR ROOM SCNE0ILERS PRIOR TO INSTALLING ROIGM.IN. ATST A COMCAST SEMARC 5. 4SLEEVES 1S EAFF FIRE TREATED Sr PLYWOOD FROM 2 TO 5' (TVPICAL ALL WALLS) 1.5 SLEEVES FOR EXTERIOR I" CONDUITS 2AOST DATA RACK SM. LADDER RACK TS AFF (TM (COORDINATE MYTH OWNER/OTHERS) EAOI�IT RO114 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN EAOI 1K•1'dOM TRITE = TH PLAN NORTH A F IS' SCALE ® •1'U HUITTZOLIARS ADVANCEDESIGN' 10360 R,cRmoad Ave Saaa TM HoTx nose 2814960066 COPYRIGHT 2019 HUITT.0OLLARS INC. 01 1) 2020 1004 2019 MR DESCRIPTOR DATE City of Peadand, Texas ORANGE STREET SERNCE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BUILDING SECURITY & COMM. FLOOR PLAN - FIRST FLOOR 07-23-19 Scale AS NOTED om ./s AN„ LC CAD Rh WA Sheet No E401 0-3 GENERAL NOTES S.0 SLEEVES 1B-rAFF 98 \J A. REFER TO SHEET EOW FOR AODRIONAL TELECOMS..CATIONS NOTES AND SYMBOLS B. REFER TO SHEETS EMI. Ma AND ES33 FOR SYSTEM DETAINS AND WORN AREA OUTLETS SHOWN IN FURNTURE DEPICT NUMBER OF DROPS PERWORKSTATON. 000R0NATEEXACT LOCATION OF DROP WITH FURNITURE IBY OTIERO. PROVIDE ACCESS POINT ROUGNIN AT ALL NOTED LOCATIONS TO INCLUDE 2-DOS AND Tr CONDUIT BACK TO NEAREST COMMUNICATIONS CABLE TRAY (BY CONTRACTOR) PROVIDEA CATBA CABLE FROM WAP TOR ROOM ON SAME FLOOR. (BY OTHERS) COORDINATE FINAL LOCATORS AND TBRMINATON S WITH 01MIHt AND THIRD PARTY CONTRACTOR COMPACTOR TO INSTALL ALL COMM.RACATI0NSECURITY ROUG INS ANDINFRASTRUCTURE II E UDDER RACKS AND IT RACK) COORDINATE ALL R0UGHINS WITH THIRD PARTY CONTRACTOR NOTES BY SYMBOL 0 2 3 COORDINATE EXACT MOUNTING HE€GM AND BOX CONFIGURATION OF TREMOR ACCESS POINT WTTH OWNER AND OTHERS FOREXTERIOR CAMERA BRACKET -MOUNT TO PARAPET PROVIDE Lr CONDUIT FROM CAMERA TO NEAREST 2ND FLOOR NETWORK CABLE TRAY (BY CORTRACTOR) ROUTE CABLE FROM CAMERA TO CCTV SWITCH LOCATED ON FIRST FLOOR IT ROOM (BY OTTERS) 000R01UTE HEIGHTS OF DROPS WITH OWNER FOR ROOM SCHEDULTRS PRIOR TO INSTILLING ROUGHAN. IT ROOM 220 ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN 6 V.. SECURITY & COMM. FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR E1021AT• 1'.0 TRUE TH PLAN NORTH r 1 r S SCALE FEET 1rr•ra HUITTZOLIARS ADVANCEDESIBN" 10350 Ridlmnna Ave Sims 300 Houton 18 71021 201/900055 Rw NATzollan cam COPYRIGHT 2039 HUITT-2OLLARS INC. ADDENDUMA3 01 17 2020 ISSUE FOR BID 100/2019 Mx. DESCRIPTION DATE City of Pearland, Texas ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BUILDING SECURITY & COMM. FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR Joe No Itn026102 NY 0,7,11 Scale AS NOTED Own By nR uaN LC CAD FAF WA SIMI No E402 i E 1ST FLOOR RACK NOTES 1 2 3 NEW FLOOR MOUNTED 2-POW RACN. VERTICAL WIRE MANAGEPENT(61en MA FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL AND SPLICE TRAY s 6 SNATCH (BY OTHERS) S02100(BY OTHER 6 9. 10 1 12 13. 14 MEDIUM DENSITY ACE CAPABLE GT64 PATCH PANEL MY °TIERS) MEDIUM DENSITY POE CAPABLE GT6 PATCH PANEL I031 OTHERS) POE LIGHTING SNATCHES (BY OTHERS) IC 11 R '1 CCTV CH( OTHERS) NOT USED. WAP SYATCN(BY OT19tS1 GENERAL NOTE COORDINATE WITH TMRD PARTY COMPACTOR PRIOR TO INSTALLING IT INFRASTRUCTURE TI5COIRS FIRST FLOOR IT RACK ELEVATION 610 IIOR00R TSB 61310 1ST FLOOR FOGS GTELECOM GROUNDING RISER NTS ELECTRIC SERVICE GROUNDING BUSEAR 2ND FLOOR RACK NOTES 1. 2 3. NEW FLOOR MOUNTED 0POST RAC) VERTICAL W RE MAIAGEMEM WW1 Sal FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL AND SPLICE TRAY 1 RU OM RE ER 6 9 10 SED 'Fill °NIT RE ER MEDIUM DENSITY POE CAPABLE CAT. PATCH PANEL (BY OTHERS) MEDIUM DENSITY POE CAPABLE GT6 PATOI PANEL (BY°TIERS) POE WIRING SNITCHES (901 OTHERS) AL AN 0l1. GEI ERAL NOTE COORDINATE MATH THIRD PARTY CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO INSTALLNG li INFRASTRUCTURE SECOND FLOOR IT RACK ELEVATION Taws O ° O 0 0-0 0 ° O O O O O O O ° 0 ° 0 ° MAIN TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING BUS (MTGB) ES0' 1e'.1'-0' lawn(5e 16mm ISO 'Manilla RI) 1Sow (12IN) ° O O O ° 0 ° 0 ° IN MImm (/16la) TYPICAL DM MOUNTING HOLES TYP. DIA. 12161. G2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING BUS (TGB) E50212.1'd 4D. •T 0 c> BUNDLE POE CATS IN CABLE GROUPS OF 25 MAX (TYP) POE LIGHTING CABLE TRAY DETAIL E50^MS CABLE TRAY AS DEPICTED ON PLANS HUflTZOL[ARS ADVANCEDESIGN- I0350 R,Are Sane 300 055S Tx 77024 781 96 0066 war hum-rollas mm COPYRIGHT 2019 NUITT-ZOLLARS INC. ADDENDUM N3 011)2020 ISSUE FOR BID 10 04 2019 MK. DESCRIPTION DATE City of Peadand, Texas ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BUILDING ELECTRICAL DETAILS MI6 111301129.1112 Ale 0,2119 Sala AS NOTED OW By TT awry IC CAD Fie WA E502 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM RN ID JUNCTION BOX ABOVE DOOR (TYPI ME CO3 SECOND FLOOR V. TO CCTV SYSTEM ACCESS CO10R0 SYSTEM RM 11A E1-1 LRJ®Eki E111 LIA EI7 LsI MgI EA-1 Li:E®L#i Ell PJ®l ACCESS CONTROL NOTES 1 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM NO SUBSTITUTION. Ell El 8J®li EUJ L0l ffnI 1 1233 0RSTFL00R l aACCESS CONTROL ONE -LINE DIA13 M (BY OTHERS) M5 1ST FLR 13 9A DSP WATER BLOCKED PIKER CABLE :4 A0u, SNELDEO { \C GROUTA PATCH CORDS DATA PATCH PANEL VOIR PHONE � • I PATCH PANEL l�J / 13 SM F0 RISER CABLE F.0 PATCH PANEL AND SPLICE TRAY FO PATCH CORD DATA RISER DIAGR PATCH CORDS GT BA PATCH CABLES CAT Ss PLEAM RATED I1E'PICALI TYPICAL DATANOIP OUTLET DATA PATCH PANEL 3T10000 F0 PATCH CORD CAT W PATCH CABLES CAT BA PLENUM RATED TYPICAL) — TYPICAL DATA OUTLET VON P10NE TYPICAL VdP PATCH PANEL --I • I• TYPICAL VON PHONE PHONE OUTLET OUTLET 2 (77/ ((f///(c(ccg CCTV SMTCH WPOE CAT BA PATCH CABLE CCTV NVR TO CANER'S IT NETWORK BASS OF DESIGN IS AOS COI.MUNCATIONS CAMERA P3T11PNE P3T1]PIE P3T1T-0LE P3T1TPLE PSSOMPVE P3'^9-LV MM II PSV MN II P3'`IST-E{VE P3^`SLV MN II P3LSLVE MN II P3T11-01E P3^.SLV MN II CAA L15 G16 C.1 L19 G2U GCI 0.22 CAMERA P9-9MAIN II P3:-9-V AS II AL301SV MWKV F1294 MII P329.LVE-1II P3325.0/E NII M 0•AV MmaSV MxMSV AUDKN aa CCTV ONE -LINE DIAG ES2NTS ISR PROTECTOR MOCULE OS P SPLCE CASE _`SNOW , ==ici c.t \� a C3 a G3 I CA `--I au �� a GS �� a G5 GM a011 a C.12 4 I —IQ G13 CAT SA 00 POTS CABLING RISER DIAGRAM E503115. 1'd API CAT 9 CABLE 110BLOCN MAIN CROSS CONNECT ELEVATOR IFA HUFJTZOLIARS ADVANCEDESIGNe 10350 RMmon1 Ave Sudo TOO HouAon Tx NON Bl IW 0066 w..0.601aTS PPIP COPYRIGHT 2019 HUITT-ZOLLARS INC. A 042019 M. DESCRIPTION DATE City of Peadand, Texas ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BUILDING ELECTRICAL DETAILS lee Ma 1110DT3102 We 0,2119 Scale AS NOTED A AI CT C. NA Sheet No E503 -UPS NOTE UPS TO BE A VERTIV LIEBERT E. MODULAR UPS NO SUBSTITUTION INCOMNG CENTER POINT SERVICE 1802-1 POLE.MOUNIEO XFMi z.2rs 3030 MAIN FUSED p9CONNECT 2 RAN OF(1)B101010(1P1/0G. IN<'C. ATS BOOA 030/21130.1W 2 RUN OF RE MO kmil(1(M/0 G IN! C. 20075 Boo KW arm. 3P. IW E00A 2 RUN OF (0 BM kmkl(1)111A1 G. R!! C. 15047/1.3P LW BEA MOP ILO 1EOTIY130. OG- 225A 200120V 30.. 403 _ RUNS OF (1P0U.11�G ?C Im'22T30 (101.(108 G. IN 1.1? C 003 RUNS OF (1M0IIM=G. IN: C. HR4(1)44G IN.(! C. m ISRA IBOAM120V IE0.000130V G 01?C f10G II]IM13N ]0.1VJ (1(140(INCG 1112.11.^C. 1 ONE LINE DIAGRAM ETOI Y 7.0' R RI 151WA )01I00(116 G. IN 1.1r C. 1113.0 150A 200120V 30.1W 15 SPACE 14(1(/E0. 101.112 C. BOA BY-PASS SMTCN 1(O.11MSG IN1-1/^C. 151(VA .L2UN1)V (1MA G. IN 1.1n C. 200120V 30.1W HUITTZOLEARS ADV ICEDESI 13350 R.mon1 Ave SUAa 3M Hoodoo Tx 1>021 23119fi 0210 MNM AUR-mbs corn COPYRIGHT 2019 HUITTZOLLARS INC. ADDENDUM R3 01 132020 ISSUE FORBID 10 04 2019 MI(. OESCRIPROM ORTE City of Peadand, Texas ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BUILDING ELECTRICAL ONE -LINE DIAGRAM NY 0,1119 Scale AS NOTED CeMp LC CAD Fie WA SAex1 No E701 • Interior, Exterior and Roof Asbestos Survey • Two Pre-engineered Metal Buildings 3501 East Orange Pearland, Texas 77581 August 28, 2019 Terracon Project No. 92197460 Prepared for: City of Pearland Pearland, Texas Prepared by: Terracon Consultants, Inc. Houston, Texas 1%rracon August 28, 2019 Mr. Anthony Vu Acquisition Manager City of Pearland 2559 Hillhouse Pearland, Texas 77584 Email: avu@pearlandtx.gov Re: Interior, Exterior and Roof Asbestos Survey Two Pre-engineered Metal Buildings 3501 E. Orange Street Pearland, Texas Terracon Project No. 92197460 Dear Mr. Vu: The purpose of this report is to present the results of an interior, exterior and roof asbestos survey performed on August 28, 2019, at the above referenced location. This survey was conducted in general accordance with Terracon Proposal Number P92197460 dated June 20, 2019. We understand this survey was requested identify and quantify asbestos - containing materials (ACM) present on and in the buildings. Suspect asbestos -containing materials were not identified during the inspection. Please refer to the attached report for details. Terracon appreciates the opportunity to provide this service to the City of Pearland. If you have any questions regarding this report, please contact us at 713-690-8989. Sincerely, Terracon Consultants, Inc. Aaron Dominguez Project Manager Terracon Consultants, Inc. 11555 Clay Road. Houston.. TX 77043 P [713] 690-8989 F [713] 690-2055 Thomas R. Martens Senior Principal Terracon Firm Registration No. F 3272 Environmental Facilities Geotecllrticat Materials TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 Project Objective 1 2.0 BUILDING DESCRIPTION 1 3.0 FIELD ACTIVITIES 2 3.1 Visual Assessment 2 4.0 REGULATORY OVERVIEW 3 5.0 FINDINGS AND RECOMMENDATIONS 4 6.0 GENERAL COMMENTS 4 APPENDIX A LICENSES INTERIOR, EXTERIOR AND ROOF ASBESTOS SURVEY Two Pre-engineered Metal Buildings 3501 E. Orange Street Pearland, Texas 77581 Terracon Project No. 92197460 1.0 INTRODUCTION Terracon Consultants, Inc. (Terracon) conducted an interior, exterior and roof asbestos survey of the two pre-engineered metal buildings located at 3501 E. Orange Street, Pearland, Texas. The survey was conducted on August 28, 2019 by a State of Texas licensed asbestos inspector in general accordance with Terracon Proposal Number P92197460 dated June 20, 2019. Interior and exterior building components were surveyed, however no homogeneous areas of suspect asbestos -containing materials (ACM) were visually identified. Although reasonable effort was made to survey accessible suspect materials, additional suspect but unsampled materials could be located in walls, in voids or in other concealed areas. 1.1 Project Objective We understand this asbestos survey was requested to identify and quantify ACM in the building site. The Texas Asbestos Health Protection Rules (TAHPR) and Texas Senate Bill 509 require that an asbestos survey be performed prior to issuance of a city construction permit and prior to any renovation within or demolition of a building. EPA regulation 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP), prohibits the release of asbestos fibers to the atmosphere during renovation or demolition activities. The asbestos NESHAP requires that potentially regulated ACM (RACM) be identified, classified and quantified prior to planned disturbances or demolition activities. 2.0 BUILDING DESCRIPTION The two buildings (building 3540, and the sign shop building) are both approximately 4,200 square foot, two-story steel structures constructed on concrete slab foundations. The buildings consist of metal exterior walls and metal gabled -roofs. Interior finishing materials consist of wood stairs leading to second -level storage areas, wood walls and doors, with unfinished concrete floors on the first level and unfinished wood floors on the second level of each building. The buildings are currently used for materials and supplies storage. Responsive Resourceful Reliable 1 Interior, Exterior and Roof Asbestos Survey Two Pre-engineered Metal Buildings Pearland, Texas August 28, 2019 Terracon Project No. 92197460 3.0 FIELD ACTIVITIES lierracon The survey was conducted by Mr. Jay Stone, a State of Texas licensed asbestos inspector. A copy of his license is included in Appendix A. The survey was conducted in general accordance with the sample collection protocols established in AHERA. A summary of survey activities is provided below. 3.1 Visual Assessment Our survey activities began with visual observation of the interior and exterior of the buildings to identify homogeneous areas of suspect ACM. A homogeneous area consists of building materials that appear similar throughout in terms of color, texture and date of application. Assessment was conducted throughout visually accessible areas of the building. Materials identified as concrete, glass, wood, masonry, metal or rubber were not considered suspect ACM. No suspect ACM was observed during the inspection. 4.0 REGULATORY OVERVIEW The Texas Department of State Health Services (TDSHS) enforces the Asbestos NESHAP as adopted by reference at Texas Administrative Code Title 25, Part 1, Chapter 295, Subchapter C, Rule §295.33. The asbestos NESHAP regulates asbestos fiber emissions and asbestos waste disposal practices. It also requires the identification and classification of existing materials prior to demolition or renovation activity. Under NESHAP, ACM are classified as either friable, Category I non -friable or Category II non -friable ACM. Friable materials are those that, when dry, may be crumbled, pulverized or reduced to powder by hand pressure. Category I non -friable ACM include packings, gaskets, resilient floor coverings and asphalt roofing products containing more than 1 % asbestos. Category II are any non -friable materials other than Category I materials that contain more than 1 % asbestos. Friable ACM, Category I and Category II non -friable ACM that are in poor condition and have become friable or which will be subjected to drilling, sanding, grinding, cutting or abrading and which could be crushed or pulverized during anticipated renovation or demolition activities are considered regulated ACM (RACM). The TDSHS also enforces the Texas Asbestos Health Protection Rules (TAHPR). The TAHPR require that any asbestos -related activity conducted in a public building be performed by personnel licensed by the TDSHS. RACM must be removed prior to renovation or demolition activities that will disturb the materials. Asbestos abatement must be performed by TDSHS-licensed asbestos abatement contractors in accordance Responsive a Resourceful . Reliable 2 Interior, Exterior and Roof Asbestos Survey Two Pre-engineered Metal Buildings Pearland, Texas August 28, 2019 Terracon Project No. 92197460 llerracon with a project design prepared by a TDSHS-licensed asbestos consultant. Third -party air monitoring must be conducted prior to, during and following the abatement activities. Management Plans developed for the in -place management of asbestos -containing materials must be developed by a TDSHS-licensed management planner. Both NESHAP and TAHPR require that the owner or operator of a building must provide the TDSHS with written notification at least 10 working days prior to the commencement of asbestos abatement activities that will disturb any amount of RACM. Written notification is also required for demolition of any building, even those that do not contain ACM. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standards at 29 CFR 1910.1001 and 29 CFR 1926.1101 regulate employee exposure to asbestos. These OSHA standards require that employee exposure to airborne asbestos fibers be maintained below 0.1 asbestos fibers per cubic centimeter of air (0.1 f/cc) as an 8-hour time weighted average (TWA) and not exceed 1.0 asbestos fibers per cubic centimeter of air (1.0 f/cc) over a 30-minute time period, the excursion limit. The TWA and excursion limit together are known as the OSHA permissible exposure limits or PELs. The OSHA standard 29 CFR 1926.1101 categorizes activities that will disturb ACM into four classes and specifies work practices that must be followed when performing each class of work. 5.0 FINDINGS AND RECOMMENDATIONS Suspect ACM was not identified during the inspection on August 28, 2019. 6.0 GENERAL COMMENTS This interior and exterior asbestos survey was conducted in a manner consistent with the level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by members of the profession currently practicing under similar conditions in the same locale. The results, findings, conclusions and recommendations expressed in this report are based on conditions observed during our survey of the building interior and exterior. The information contained in this report is relevant to the date on which this survey was performed and should not be relied upon to represent conditions at a later date. This report has been prepared on behalf of and exclusively for use by the City of Pearland for specific application to their project as discussed. This report is not a bidding document. Contractors or consultants reviewing this report must draw their own conclusions regarding further investigation or remediation deemed necessary. Terracon does not warrant the work of regulatory agencies, laboratories or other third parties supplying information which may have been used in the preparation of this report. No warranty, express or implied, is made. Responsive E Resource -Iv! Reliable 3 APPENDIX A LICENSES Responsive a Resourceful r Reliable 4 Texas Department of State Health Services TERRACON CONSULTANTS INC is certified to perform as an Asbestos Consultant Agency in the State of Texas and is hereby governed by the rights, pm"ileges and responsibilities set forth in Texas Occupations Code, Chapter 1954 and Title 12, Texas Administrative Code, Chapter 295 relating to Texas Asbestos Health Protection, as long as this license is not suspended or revoked license Number: 100157 Control Number. 97144 John Hellerstedi MD., Commissioner ofHealth VOID IF ALTERED NON -TRANSFERABLE Expiration Date::11/30/2020 (Void After Expiration Date) SEE BACK 17,K Texas Department of State Health Services Asbestos Inspector JOHN A STONE JR License No.603704 Control No. 99043 Expiration Date:9/1212020 Terracon Consultants, Inc. 11555 Clay Road, Suite 100 Houston, Texas 77043 Registration No. F-3272 P (713] 690 8989 F [713] 690 8787 terracon.com CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 4 Date: January 22, 2020 PROJECT: Orange Street Service Center, Phase 1 - Administration Building BID NO.: 1220-11 BID DATE: January 30, 2020; 2:00 p.m. FROM: Chris Casey, AIA Architect Huitt-Zollars,Inc. 1001 Fannin Street, Suite 4040 Houston, Texas 77002 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY $E CAUSE FOR DISOUALIFICATION. CLARIFICATIONS: Question 1. If possible, can you setup sub qualification statements to be due the following day after the bid date on 1/31? This would allow us ample time to be able to qualify which subs we are using and provide their requested qualifications for a better overall proposal for the City of Pearland to be able to qualify who we are using. Answer: All qualifications are due with the submittal package by January, 30, 2020 at 2:00 pm (CST), while it is understood that last minute changes may be made, this is true across the board and does not put any one entity at a disadvantage relative to the others. Question 2. The life safety plan only shows (2) fire extinguishers to be provided. According to NFPA code the way the egress path is laid out and with the room layout, this building will require a total of (9) fire extinguishers. Please advise if we are to provide fire extinguishers per code in our bids. Answer: Provide "NFPA" Requirements. 2-22-12 00900 - 1 of 1 I CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Question 3. The specifications call for a torch applied mod bit roofing system. Would it be acceptable to provide a TPO roofing system in lieu of a torch applied system? If so, what would be acceptable manufacturers? Answer: Use product specified in section 07521 "SBS" System, 110 mills. Question 4. The details on the drawings show a non -hurricane impact rated system. The spec calls for a stormax hurricane impact rated system. Can you please advise which we are to provide? Answer: Provide materials in Spec. Section 08800 "Glazing, Paragraphs 1.4.A, B, C & D. Question 5. Note 3 on drawing C 106 states we are to provide 8" of crushed stone beneath paving areas. The paving details do not show this requirement only that we are to prep 18" and lime 8" beneath new paving areas. Please confirm we are not to provide any crushed stone beneath paving areas. Answer: Crushed stone will not be provided beneath paving areas, it only applies at the dumpster pad shown on sheet C 106. Question 6. The finish Schedule A611, T-4 is shown on A612 & A613 Finish Plan Level 1, to be flooring. According to the manufacture, this tile should not be used on the floor. I have attached a brochure of the tile, so that you can look at it and verify that this is what you want. In addition the raw cost of this tile is 42.31 per square foot. Also, T-1 & T-3 is not available in 24" x 48". The largest size in this series is 12" x 24". Is this acceptable? Answer: Size of the tiles 12" x 24" is acceptable on the finish floor legend; sheets A612 and A613; T-4 are porcelain floor tile Latcrete 44 bright white grout. Question 7. Will the City of Pearland be seeking LEED or some other green building certification for this project? Answer: No Question 8. E000, it says, "Contractor to provide telecommunications system... Provide ethernet switches" etc. We just wanted to clarify if the pricing for this equipment should be included with the cabling bid, or if we should only account for the time to install it and that "awarded contractor" is responsible for purchasing the technology equipment. Answer: This item will be removed and provided under a separate contract. Contractor is still to provide IT infrastructure which are on the plans and specifications. (i.e. IT racks, data/security rough -ins, cable trays). Coordinate with "Separate Contract Contractor" and Owner prior to installing rough -ins. Re: Sheet E000. Question 9. Can you please send the plan and profile for the existing fire hydrant connection and lead to the 20" water main. This connection is not shown on the plan and profile provided. Drawing C108 states to remove fire hydrant lead and use 6" lead for feed. In order to perform request, we must access the valve for said fire hydrant that is attached to the existing 20" water main in Old Alvin Rd. Sheet 108A does not show the existing fire hydrant and how the valve/feed was installed. 2-22-12 00900 - 2 of 11 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM We need to see how the valve/feed was installed in order to price accurately. There is an existing 5x4 RCB that will make this potentially challenging. Answer: Attached are two (2) sheets plan and profile, miscellaneous water line cross section and one detail sheet from the City of Pearland drawings showing the existing fire hydrant connection and leads to the 20-inch water line. Question 10. There is no specification section for the walkways coverings. Can you please provide one. Answer: We do not have any walkway covering. Question 11. Fire Alarm -Specs Sect.: 16144 - Part 2 Section 2.2 questions: 2.2 - B. 5. Will this be a Voice Fire Alarm System as stated? Answer: Yes. 2.2 - B. 13. Will a graphic annunciator be required? Answer: Yes. 2.2 - E. 4. How do you want to accomplish this part? Answer: Transmit to City's system. Question 12. Are the sun shades shown on A201 and A202 just where they are pointed out or are they on all the windows? Answer: Sunshades should be on all exterior windows. These are custom devices; reference spec. 05500 "Metal Fabrications." Question 13. Please check Division 07521 Page 10 2.8.B.1 ISO insulation is not spec'd right ss Class 1, Type III. Should read as Type ii, Class 1, 2 or 3, Grade 2 or 3. Please change. Answer: Delete: Paragraph 2.8.B.1 Add: paragraph 2.8.B.1 to read: "Type II, Class 1, 2 or 3". Question 14. Can you confirm that asbestos abatement is part of this project? Answer: There was no asbestos found in the buildings that are to be demolished. Question 15. Clarification for storefront system and curtain wall system. Drawings ask for 1" glazing on the exterior and FG5100 for the storefront system, but a 1" glazing panel does not fit in the FG5100. Please confirm the size glazing, storefront system, and curtain wall system. Answer: FG5100 is for 1 1/4" to 1 1/2" insulated glass (hurricane glass assembly, series 6060XT is center glazed and can accommodate 1" glazing. 2-22-12 00900 - 3 of 11 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Question 16. With reference to L-000 Overall landscape plan, please confirm if the landscape scope shown outside the Phase 1 artificial lot boundary to be included in the bid or not? Answer: Landscape bid scope of work is shown on drawing L001. Question 17. With reference to L-000 Overall landscape plan, shown on west side of the property (Plan North), existing concrete fence to be replaced by 8' wall, is to be included in the bid or not? If so, please provide the wall detail. Answer: There is no 8' wall in the bid scope of work. Question 18. With reference to A001 Overall site plan, proposed fence shown outside the phase 1 scope to be included in this bid or not? Answer: Yes. Question 19. Please clarify wall finish requirement for the restroom walls for which interior elevation is not provided. Answer: RE; A611, A612, A613, A401, and A402. Question 20. Please provide specification section for walk off mats. Answer: RE: Dwg A611. Question 21. Ref A-806. Please provide specification section for sun shades. Also provide location of sun shades on plan. Answer: These are custom devices; RE: Spec. 05500 "Metal fabrications." Question 22. Refer 2/ A-806. Please provide steel framing details of small canopy. Answer: RE: Detail 3/5104. Question 23. Attached documents referred to in section 00500, 8.3 are not included in the documents. Answer: Please refer to Addendum No. 3 for attachments. Question 24. Please provide Dimensional Letter (10141) Text Font and Text height. Answer: Disregard answer to Question #16 on addendum No. 3 and reference the attached rendering. Pear: 6' W x 9' H.Wording: 16' L x 4' H. Question 25. Will there be Site Sealants required? If so, please provide a specification section. Answer: Yes, in specification Section 02751 Concrete Pavement, Paragraph 2.02 Concrete Joints BI. 2-22-12 00900 - 4 of 11 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Question 26. Exterior walls show gyp sheathing, however NO air barrier is drawn (to indicated need). Please confirm NO Air barrier is needed in these (gyp sheathing) situations. Answer: No sheathing for exterior walls. Reference LI -L6, Sheet A601. Question 27. Refer to A801 and spec section 077200. Detail 6 on A801 calls for a 36" x 36" roof hatch, but spec section 077200, Section 2.2 B calls for a 30" x 54" hatch. Please advise. Answer: Use 36"x36" roof hatch. Question 28. Refer to A312 and spec section 075210. Detail 2 on A312 calls for a 50 mil Torch Applied SBS Membrane Roof, however spec section 075210 calls for a 110 mils thick roof membrane. Please advise. Answer: Use specified 110 mils. Question 29. The canopies are structural steel covered with ACM panels. Detail 3 on A805 and 1 on A806 call for 6mm ACM panels, however spec section 074210 calls for 4 mm thick panels. Please advise the desired thickness of the ACM panels. Answer: Use 4mm thick panels. Question 30. Refer to C109. Plan Note 7 calls for Pavers and refers you to A012, however there are no details for pavers on A012 or anywhere else in the plans. Please advise if pavers are required on this project. Answer: Delete note 7 on the sheet C 109. Add note 10 on sheet C 109 for area shown as note 7. Question 31. The roofing company that is providing the information for the substitution request, would like to install a Firestone TPO Roofing system. This would include insulation and overboard of the builder's choice, which would be commonly fastened using the manufacturers screws and plates. They would then fully adhere the TPO membrane to the cover board and heat weld all seams as required and add any needed accessories. Firestone also offers a variety of warranties depending on what the customer desires. Please review the attached submittal information for the system, and a sample warranty. Answer: Owner's standard system is by "Garland". Question 32. Did not see an allowance on the network electronics. See Plan E000, General IT/COMM Notes, #6 1. This is normally an owner furnished item and this note is just too vague/ wide open to give a responsible cost. Can be $10,000 or $100,000! 2. Is it included for Section 167xx Communications 3. This can have cost impact for Section 13760 Video surveillance as well. Answer: This item will be removed and provided under a separate contract. Contractor is still to provide IT infrastructure which are on the plans and specifications. (i.e. IT racks, data/security rough -ins, cable trays). Coordinate with "Separate Contract Contractor" and Owner prior to installing rough -ins. Re: Sheet E000. 2-22-12 00900 - 5 of 11 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: 1. Sheet No. C 109 — Paving Plan Remove and Replace Sheet No. C109- Paving Plan in its entirety with attached. 2. Sheet No. E000- Electrical Notes, Symbols and Abbreviations Remove and Replace Sheet No. E E000- Electrical Notes, Symbols and Abbreviations in its entirety with attached. ATTACHMENTS: 1. Reference drawings from the City of Pearland: Old Alvin Road 20-inch water line, two (2) plan and profile sheets, one (1) miscellaneous water line cross section and one (1) detail sheet. 2. Rendering. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 4 Chris Casey, AIA Architect 2-22-12 00900 - 6 of 11 N _ U • ■ //'�3MHN835Wf 4._ 83 SEE SHEET C-114,— DETAIL 8 REMOVE EXIST S. a 5' CONCRETE SIDEWALK-/ INCLUDING EXIST PAVEMENT %f 4 4* SEE SHEET C-114. DETAIL 3 30' SHEETS C112, • C113 L// /A x1 AD EY SEE NOTE 4 43 LEGEND PROPOSED Re. TRICK CONCRETE PAVING PROPOSIM 6-TRICK CONCRETE PAVING SEE NOTE 16 2 THIS WERT PROPOSED r u.x S EETcK SIDEw80L0uLs. PLAN NOTES Qr cuke MP I. SEE SHEETS C1074 CII 3 FOR DETAILS © PAVEMENT RSEESHEETC,13 FOR DETAILS Poonorr MARRING. SEE SHEET CNa FOR DETAILS p ERPANSION JOINT. SEE SHEET C113 FOR LETA. cp R EH YE1Ar ORDETAIL SE DETAIL p DONA. ON C SEE HEET C113 FOR DETAILS p STRIPED ® FOR SIDEWALK ODMLS SEE SHEET C113 NOTES: 1. UPPER 8' OF THE BEARING SOILS NALL REOLARE 8%LIME SLURRY STABILIZATION BY DRY WEIGHT OF THE SOIL. AND SHALL BE COMPACTED AT A MINIMUM OF %%STANDARD PROCTOR MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY (ASTM D-888) LIME STABILIZATION SHALL BE PREFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH TXDOT ITEM 260. 2 GRADE 8U.14 REBARS a is- SPACING BOTH WAYS. 101 LAPS. 3500 PSI CONCRETE MATCH ALL EXPANSION JOINTS AT EXISTING CONCRETE PAVEMENT REPLACEMENT AREAS. REFERENCE LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS FOR PROPOSED LANDSCAPING • • `LIMBS OF PROP. SIDEWALK RE: UTILIT PLAH SHEET C1011 REPLACE PAVEMENT PER DETAIL 1, SHEET C112. SEE SHEET C113 OLD ALVIN ROAD( - (EC R.O.W.) -PROP SWALE ®0SR U UV L27 • a SEE SHEET C-114. DETAIL4 HU� RS ADVANCEDESIGN' 10350 Richmond Ave Sue. 300 Houston, TX 77042 281 458.0088 wwwM1uet-collars COPYRIGHT 2019 HUITT-ZOLLARS INC. 10/OM2019 i ` [V fps./� Fan .0110.0119.0 . FUM MK. NOTE 7 REMOVED 6 CHANGED TO I ISSUE FOR ISSUE FOR RID 9516CO PERMT I REVIEW DESCRIPTION 10 A 204 01232014 TE City of Peadand, Texas ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BUILDING PAVING PLAN Cola ,110420. Scale AS NOTED wnM OMM CAO FM WA Shsl No C 109 HUI1TZOLiARS ADVANCEDESIBN' 10350 RiMmond Ave RIAx 300 Houston 7%72021 251 WA 0056 wwnual zolazs Rom COPYRIGHT 2019 HUITT-ZOLIARS INC. LIGHTING WIRING ABBREVIATIONS GENERAL POWER NOT' GENERAL IT/COMM NOTES A PILED FIGURE POWERED OVER ETHERNET RNOEI. , a A21 ARROWINACATES IIOAIERIIN TO OAMEI'A'. CIRCUIT- A AMPERE AC ABOVE O]IMER.3�AFF UNLE690TMEMMSE INDICATE ADA AMERICANS WINoSAeIUTIES ACT AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR 1. ALL CIRCUITS SHALL BE IN CONDUIT ALL POWERC0AUSAV&BA TS SHALL WIRAINAMUIMIJM OF ONE EOUIPMBITG -•' CONDUCTOR PROVIDE A DEDICATED NEUTRAL FOR EACH UT 1. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE TELECOMMINICATION CABLING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFICATION SECTIONS. (BY OTHERS UB SOUARECOWNUGIR FIXTURE POWERED OVER ETHERNET (POE). EXTERIOR SITE AL ALUMINUM 1C ONE CONDUCTOR 2 SINGLE POLE CIRCUIT ALL CIRCUITS ARE SHOWN SCHEMATICALLY FINAL ROUT. • RJJ50PBp WALL JACKS STALLSEWIRED INTROS WINING R1.(URATIOIIL JACKS SHALL I I C RESIAOOM COVE LIGH( RWERW OVER BNERIETUPoFJ. —E— NEW UNDERGROUND PRIMARY C CONDUIT CB CIRCUIT BREAKER CKT CIRCUIT 6 CEG0ONSAREBYTI£CONTRACTOR. PROVIDEPLl1 STRING IN CONXRTS. VACATED AS EMPTY 3 CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE WORK AREA OUTLETS. CATEGORY SA HORIZONTAL CABLING(BY OTHERS. FIBER BACKBONE CABLING (BY /ID 1' ( LED RXTURE POWERED OVER ETHERNET POE —ES— EC NEW UNDERGROUND SECONDARY CU COPPER EF ENAUTFAN EMT ELECTRICAL METALLICTUBIG ON PLAIT PLUG OR CAP BIDS OF EMTY CONDUITS AND LABEL AS TO THEIR USE OTHERS) AD RACK MOUNTED PATCH PAIELSIBY OTHERS CONTRACTOR SHALL PRONOE FIBER AND CATEGORY SA LTP PATCHCOROS AS INDICATED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS IBY OTHERS) [�E QF + 1-y0 �p� �I % Ali X �•YY Sus MPI'LID FIXTURE POWERED OVER ETM3tIETUPOEI. EXTERIOR WALL MOUNTED FIXTURE INTERIOR COVE LIGHTING POWERED OVER ETHERNET ryOB EXIT 6IGN`MTN DIRECTIONAL ARROWS A311ACATED. CEUIG MWNIING. SXAp 01400IIACAlES FACEUS REpUREO EST SIGNVATHDIRECTIOIALMROWSASI1AGATED.WALL MOUNTING. SHADOWING INIOGIES FACEISI REOURED. LHMTAI:MVLGHTHAWIL MULTI lECR10LWYWALL SWITCH SENSOR WITHRRELLIDAPT. SINGLE CIRCUIT, ONE BUTTON. NV IN © ❑+ O a l T� NEW UJpERGROUND COMMUNICATIONS NEW PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMER GENERATOR DISTRIG COMMl11ICATI016 MANHOLE NEW COMMUNICATIONS MANHOLE NEW COMMUNICATIONS HANproLE NEVI POLE MOUNTED UGH(ING FIXTURE EVIL ELECTRIC WATER COOLER FACPFIRE ALARMCOMROL PANS. FM FREQUENCY MOMAAT10N GFCI GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER GFP GROUND FAULT PROTECTION HACRHEARNG AIR CONDT10NNG RERIGERATION HP HORSEPOWER HPS NIGH PRESSURE SWUM HT HEIGHT NZ HERTZ IDS INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM J JUNCTION BOX KWH NLOWATT HOUR ( 5 6 T MOUNT POWER AND DATANOICE RECEPTACLES ATIS"AFF TO CENTER UNLESS OTHERWSE NOTED MOUNT WALL SWITCHES AT IB'AFF TO CENTER UNLESS °THEMMSE NOTE. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED PROVIDE3M2 I2 CND •1( CONDUIT FOR 33 AMP SINGLE PHASE RAVER CIRCUITS. CIRCUIT LONGER THAN SHALL BE 3N0 NOGNO- 1d'CONDUIT PPO00E A FIRE SEAL CM ALL FIRE RATED WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS. 4 5 IN -WALL COM.MNICADONS OUTLETS FOR VOICE AID DATA SHALL SEA( SO BOX WITH DEVICE TRIM PLATEAIDRASTIC DUAL JACK OR OUR/ FACEPLATE SET FLUSH IN WALL AT IS A F F UNLESSOTHERVAIE NOTED PROVGE L(COOUIT FROM VOICEDATA OUTLET,N WALLS AND STUB OR ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING TERMINATE CONDUIT WITH A NYLON BUSHING PROVIDE A3H.0Y TEST NRLOS RILL STRING IN EACH CONDUIT TO FAgLRATE CABLE INSTALLATION DATM/OCE OUTLETS IN MODULAR SYSTEMS FURNITURE ARE TO BE PROVIDED. WIRING PATHWAYS ARE LOCATED IN THE MODULAR FURNITURE BASE THROUGH A CABLING WHIP TO THE WALL $1 1000 5F PHOTOCELL LVSMI LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH. MOMETARY.'BUTTON GROUNDING LED LIGHT ROTTING DIODE MCC* MOLDED HAUGECASE CIRLUT BREAKER NH META HALIDE 6 BOTH POWER AND LIGHTING CONDUITS ADU IO CONCTORS TO COMPLY WITH AEC PROVIDE.( CONDUIT FROM WHIP IN WALLS AND STUB OUT ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CBLING. TEAMMATE CONDUIT WITHANYLO! BUSHING. PROVIDE A=TEST NYLON PULL STRING !REACH $I LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH. MONETARY IBMTOI CIO AIR TERMINAL M.0 MAIN LUGS ONLY MTTBMAAIN T14ER1DIE TERMINAL BOARD NEC NATIONAL ELECTRICALCO0E CONDUIT TO FACILITATE CABLE INSTALLATION.. PROVIDE SUFFICIENT SLACK CABLING COILED AND SUPPORTED ABOVE THE LAY -IN CEILING TO ALLOW IT TO BE EXTENDED TO THE FURNITURE IN THE FUTURE. ONCE FURNITURE HAS BEEN PROVIDED FINALIZE® OM6 PASSIVE RIFRAREDA ULTRASONIC CEILING SENSOR WITH IMS.LIDAPT,2IO0 5F. WHITE • GRp1NpNGRCO STATIC STATIC CROWDING RECEPTACLE NF NGN FUSED NO NUMBER GENERAL LIGHTING NO S TEAMNA^0NS LMTHIN FURNITURE T WXSTAT UGH( SENSOR FOR LUXSTAT CONTROL MODULES, 3TO RN FG (I) IF —GC— —RC— LIGHTNING PROTECTION DOWN CONDUCTOR LOCATION GRID COUNTERPOISE CONDUCTOR UGMNING PROTECTION ROOF CONDUCTOR OCCUPANCY SENSOR PH RUSE RR PIGIOGAVANZED RGS MGIDGALVANZEO STEEL SM SINGLE MODE 118 TELEPHONE TERMNALBOARO TV TELEVISION TVSS TRANSIENT SURGE VOLTAGE SGE SUPPRESSOR IRO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE 1 2 3. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF All UGH( FNTNRES ON ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING RAN MO AERLICABL ELEVATIONS. COORDINATE EXACT FIXTURE TYPE AND TRIM �` CEUNG FURNISHED EMERGENCY LIGHTING WALL BE BACKED IN BY TIE UPS EXIT SONS SHALL ARE TO REMAIN UNSWITCH®. S T PROVIDE ETHERNET SWITCHES. ROUTERS AND OTHER REQUIRED IT EQUIPMENT NECESSARY TO MAKE THE IT SYSTEM OPERATIONAL (BY OTHERS. COORDINATE ALL SNITCHING. CCTV AND WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS WITH CITY OF PEARUND CHIEF INFORMATION OFFICER PRIORI° PNCCUREME T (BY OTHERS REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS SECTION13730-ACCESS CONTOL R AND13T6VI0 0•[O SJRVBLLANCE FOR R DETAILED INSTALLATION AND MATERIAL REOUIREMEMS FOR SECURITY SYSTEM COMMUNICATION V VOLT VA VOLTAMFERE VVD VARIABLE VOLUME DAMPER W WARS d FIMURE AND LAMP TYPES ARE TO BE AS 1N3CATED IN TIE LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE B. .(BY OTHERS FIELD VERIFY EXACT CAMERA NO SECURITY DEVICE LOCATIONS O V IN1*608100001FLOOR DINfERDATA AND TELEPHONE CORONATION OUTLET 2RJJ3. DATA AND TELEPHONE COMBINATION OUTLET DRJMS HF* WATERPROOF %fMRTRAMSFORMER 5. 6 T. SECURE CEILING MOU1TED UGHT DEMO MECOLNGERGRID AND EAT SIGNS • COORDINATE STRIP UGH(SWITHM:CHANCAL OUCTWDRK 1 ELECTRICAL AM MECHANCAL ROOMS EMERGENCY LIMITS ANDEXT SONS TO WITH OWNER PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. ADDENDUM NI 01222020 ADDENDUME3 01172020 ISSUE FOR BID 10.042019 MK. DESCRIPTION DATE Pf� Q� s[+'I� �9Z (�� /�� O( 1 EA. LA V D T t A 3 — iS�O >. is POWER V v CAN ONLY OUTLET IRO a DATA ONLY OUTLETIRJ-4S I SE SELF•DIAGN10ST LIGHT SNITCHESBULL 9E MOUNTED AT 3B'AF F UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ElFLOOR X DB if MOUNTED NEMA S.L DUPLEX RECEPTACLE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE F•FL00R MOUNTEOG CEILING MOUNTED 11.AS:D DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MOUNTED 1r AFF UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE 00-2200000IECEPTACLEMOJMED IC AP UNLESS NOTED ©R ® TELEPHONE ONLY OUTLET IAJJS 15'COMMB*5010IS `WHIP TO SYSTEMS FURNITURE BABE FOR CATBA CABLING GROREADER pDORCOMA010*11 1 9. TYPICAL BASISODESIGN LIGHTING ARE POWERED AND CONTROLLED VIA POWER OVER ETHERNET SWTCHNG AND CABLING. ALL POE LIGHTING CABLING SHALL BE PLENUM RATED GT6.INSfALL ALLCADIIG IN CABLE TRAYS WITH:i CATS BUOINSTAM10 }HOOK IN CABLE FROM RArS WITH TO FIXTURES ALL}HOOK35MOIA0SESPACES AT S'IMERVALS. PROVIDE IO% MAXRLLOO CABLE TRAYS A1D0Ip0KS. © JUNCTION BOX MOUNTING HEGH( AS INDICATED Q ® REQUEST TO EXIT� ELECTRIC STRIKE LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE O• UNFUSEDpSCONNECT SWITCH. SIZEAS SH015N TYPE CATALOG NUMBER LAMP TYPE VOLTAGE WATTAGE MANUFACTURER DESCRIPTION NOTE FUSED gSCONR1ELT SNITCH. SIRE FUSES FOREQUIRAER ® CEILING MOULTED WRS.E39 ACCESS PgMR a 0000PH23-3:00.3-0MC NEC POE z:OU 000L& NEC :(I LED 00042ER BASED ON MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS ® DASIROUGHINIJ-0RX AD CONDUIT MTH B IFdSOAL POE ]'M.'MCL LED POE PE:COU'£ SQUARE LEL'Dh+A1LN..HT R%JSTRING TO NEAREST CABLE TRAY 3AE'2330.0 NO'.KR 6YYJ C1351,PDE LED POE 2• IJTECOTRDL RESTROOAVl41tti05H ❑T TRANEFORMER.NUMBERROCATES MS SEE SCHEDULE ,', NP3335-LAC TN POE LED POE 2G5 oa!Rte'T STRP UGHT140 F1%TUBE 9 EKTEIOR WALL -MOWED V6RELESS ACCESS POINT 01 J',PN-0-0,3EG! 1-010-00 . LED POE 13 LI-EC.1113X I PFINCVIT LIGHTING O SURFACE MDILREO PANS.BOARp .-ENCNEE-a POE LED POE 30 UTECOJTROI RECESSEDS_OT 116TURE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH EEG3-2.2VJ LED 120 33 OEGA MEMOIR LIGHTING. MATURE MR-S32337-120-45N. LED 123 IC FEEL. ELEVATOR RD City of Pearland, Texas r MAIN TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARD. FIRE ALARM H KLCN}_Ec HO-CW:-UE-BRZ LEG 123 220 LEI EXTERIOR LICHT POLE T1*610IEGSTRJG POLE-35F30-5Gii-BRIRM16130 --II ELTi0F_?l6Kli'-0EXTERIORLEE 120 3 NUM EXTERIOR EU.?DJLELIGHTNG MOTORIZEDMOTORIZEDRR MOTED DRAPER EN tN SPEAKERSTROBE FOR COMBINATION PRE ALARM. PUBLIC ADDRESS. AND MASS NOTIFICATION J CARE..CHW3TO LOGA: LED 123 12 CARSON CECORATP,E LOBBY F�>' TORE�.10NRDNL+.iE WANDER (h PECES♦V.' HACMTECT+Np 3HEETAI21 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE ADMINISTRATION BUILDING lioci GFCI DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MN IIVMBERNcM1pESIGNATESCANDELA RATINGAIIp >1 LESC54 RED POE GQIALLRE ^aRIGLEFACEE?TTLK.HT 9" GFODUREX RECEPTACLE WITH WEATHER PROOF INUSE COVER NUMBERMN) DESIGNATES SPEAKER WATTAGE S2 LESY.DG LED POE _ DUALLITE O0IBLEFACE EMTLIGHT 55 MDTOR0ED SWITCH ® WV © 17213. a, g ® ® SPEAKER FOR COMBINATION FIRE ALARM PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MASS NOTIFICATION NUMBER.(.) DESIGNATES SPEAKER WATTAGE MANUAL NAL STATION FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL SUPERVISORY SN N FLOWSWITCH DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR SMOKE DETECTOR ELECTRICAL NOTES, SYMBOLS, AND ABBREVIATIONS lob IN 11309 9z Scale Sheet No D. 014119 AS NOTED P.a CT CAD FIR E000 0 40J..A''x! 36 1- 34 sL. PR F. .KA Ai ' (T 100 Or I,. iwnm • r., ?:y7 r Tjjj� 27/, ... 29Y..M•. 0r4 •0.405 /7, /,77.7/7/7.•7/ '7 //7r/7• 7777377 GeS'LT6: IK:y (EAST. FOR 3 Nil] UIYJ-I'R EVEi1T5 ARE FOR :NTrR1I! CONO:T4ON A.0 15 OPI IEAINONARY RESTRICTOR ON 0OTiALL. 60IV(W'AY rS1n11UN Ito (4r1(t 10 TOP 6"Me' .0uk:1. 11m.1 :If 12.v1A1 ]NEE` 1,0) at At& Ektv NNr.1 P. A ., 1 1.151. ' .D0 o xA.uo'r 01.S. (SET. 0.1.1 130) 141)-TA 4K4 -' `,• 3. VP MU ?✓.4i./ '777777 . IA" KY:P 0 0.'OR ORMi: WPY 'OURS 4 10 •UkC.'1. 0C Ha, 119-1. . I.714i1 FBI O''45E1 TO 47O0':. 1,111 1Uti CR E ':E41ENT (AE4r.. U 74. fw1F//f ..n R T, k0% STA.:S4O4.Aa fk C;5S ri a! n'q:l (' 'r B W. L l • n '1:11- 1e W )) 11 ..-WLE1 m ` .0.3202 J9 AS'fi, 1R 3 A' 1.00 T2,00 18ft 39.0#0). PROP El' -le' R(S MVP. 11.0. • AO :I1CT T. "C. 11 `9t0 w) ) ` OLI) ALVIN RD !11400 DRAW ET . 11M U1N W/ 0 COUME,T 10 (%111. 'R1Y Or TA4 0.11. :7S k 13.) < 7 77/77T7.7i /"`/7/, ; : ;' .7 ?= i 41i?Ii 14 1'. 1 (i(4 15.0E e A Cy 11,000 r-A7.:#T'�71'r. w.e 00.10R CIO n .1 F9�.: 44 42 34 2 26 16 -00 !1(.IAAE r.1:$i. MLEI U 4:x f !Y' A46C::CM O (fi:9D:Niµ TC' .. kwM C•itEAATMDRN.I REMO<E Et5T. STORM ST4WR 7104 00 C15V0:R' A4040014 10.10 GROW( I1LL (1:5T 1.1000 S»ER F'LUU E,t:ST. STORM SEER RCMP.: AM I0!i'OSE E4' Ex151 /SR14.k! RA4ETTEe.'.. AND SART COURSE *40.4!0.1R0 CURDS REWM AI40 mite% et t AST. EJNERETE PAYEMENii E*'SPWAY PROP. 0' TW:, CONCRETl PATCI4:N' 'W/ K' CURT NeC 3" SE.E.P E (9.Rr1400E TO CT1EM4 3' •3('TONO CURE) PROP. C'ONCRE I. PAKAIEkt W/ R' ("Ain0 ti�'.3000AEA01 IS00000,00 TO E%11.k0 a' 0£1Y1R0 P.R. REPO< 0.0 RETRACE 6' 1•KEe CONCRETE ORNEWAT REIKNF MO REPLACE T-'ttlC'v CONC., OPM1EWA'I PM'.. 4' •N.Y C:MCR£T0 S14:WµI "Ill PIMP. YA4.ELI:4mP WO PER A0A 0EIX3Rf.K0+'; 'N•. TARD INN. RE0LN:E0011 IIRN%)LII C'!I11 P.M*.1,10 0E0111 AWIO' 0.0 SO4*01( PA 14:04. CUN40014( PAVEMENT NEN(R RELOCATE E051. IRAF00 S,N (ra! %TPAR..... PAT) ACS15T EAST. MET AN0 W.MIW.F 107114KVE 00% IC ORAL (0A0E ROM's AM) PROW(:I POTWR POLE AS REPOT. ABONCC7 FIST, WATER LIME P.CROME AN(1 SL'YA:.( 110*4. ORE. ITTORA1T A<N10ri4 r%5T. s'µ0E CENTER EWE MU ,iMINT (16' MW.1 Cr PROP. »n:EF :?:C AT W.A. SERE.. CROSS... PROP. !643114 .01 WRIER SERN'CE 4KFl.Aff*C'1U INl.N. .1.k4 SOE IMTER SERW,r R17.#4.:I411;I :Ml•R:r NNd:R ACROSS TRW!, 'REFS, 440010nt.. Wt:R»A.S ETC RENO/E. TOP AM CN' (A511N4 ME4 pj)V vRl%', f:Ll INO. r0(0701Y..% 0 SpR N 3� 0 %0P. U.nMAi,C :WrAi+i PTNROWriEST STiy:) GC ENGINEERING INC. cce \,►jPM.a i f 1 IY l 4',. RECORD DOCUMENT 1N4 Raaw4'4e.rr a e'w'. µ Ml:n Mt( •�AMAt.A......,.... OLI) ALVIN ROAD WIDENING PLAN AND PROFILE OLD ALVIN ROAD STA. 1 1 +00.00 TO 16+00.00 9 K 131.0C, O 03 • a 01 La Z •00 3_ RM-101 RODS SURVEYING LD RODS !Div 4399 CI DAMS CIEs, 44.43 a6AYAoen 1Aatl" - )• M s4a et_ 09eL(14tL� SCE NOTE 260 '90'16401Ss 5r I-20'BV BE STA 89.73 19,30' 89'00 N 3' 16' 32. 35' W I-28'%8" TEE 8'Gv68 BL Sin 89.83 19.60' LT 2a 5r. I 1 5i 1 4l �41 PROPI'}76 LF-5%4' (PRGB) STM 5WR O 0.170 VIN RD 846. 91 LIA IPFICF 8' 1041ER LINE: CRITICAL LOCATION .. .. .. _ SEE SPEC 02318-. • ar ▪ (pow •oaaas ®PROP TYPE 'A' INLET 9 BL STA 88+68. 29' LT TG=44.70 A- A' 45' -RYYOKIECr 30 XXEST.A_a STA 8940, 39' ri aa.rt41-2.491 pflp ABANDON EXIST 10" WATER LI TRANSFER SERvICES TO PROP 20' WATER LINE 6 makiCIIITIVarja SEE N41S12413 NO320' .......TRITER. 20'' WATERTER 1.INF BACK TAP I.20'%G' TEE 6"GVIB FH BL-61A-.90.0+ 9. 30' ' T 0 W 4J CO I•&ROA TYPE 'A' 1NL T 10 el STA 90+03. 28 L7 TG=44.00 PROP 51M MH 5 (0N PRCB) STA 90+75, 27.30' LT 1R.446+/- 5'K4' ['RCS FL.36.13 (N4!5) BEEN 5'X4' rocs MELEE(H) SIA 90+79, 27.30' LT 5T O RESERVE "A' / I ANOKCAPF /F1PFN GPAf F 1 PROP 'STM A01-6 ( W/RR:CAS1 JUNCTION BOX Bl $ A 92E51, 31,00' I1 TR+MATCH FIRST PAVING 5'94' fy94C8 FL n34.93 (S) SWSF PROP 178 LI-5'%4' PNCB 5TM ♦WR O 0.12% 1* t .e r 4,19 OS UM (*0e ai)A 43.021 f. 510141 EIRIC3 19.12 v/ALUMINUM SIRING °PROP TYPE 'A' INLET 11 Eft STA 91491. 32.00' ET TOT.45.15 VE'1E »ML N 3' 0301.83 86 , 90' 9 . 71 Jy4 CALLED 00710 AC PETERSON GROUP. INC...' TO CITY OF PEARLANO 200805229R D C 0 R, 06-20--2008 20�� 40 EAST ROW (PROF LL 1 WEST ROW (PROTI EAST DITCH (PROF1 WEST DITCH (PROF TOP OF PAVEMENT W BASELINE NG t• PROP WE WATER METER/SERVICE 10 BE TRANSFERRED CONTROL BENCHMARK, IN BEING A METAL ROD STAMPED 'HGCSD 76 19861LOCAIED ON MAGNOLIA RD 0.2•/- MILE WEST OF INTERSECTION STATE HIGHWAY 35 AND MAGNOLIA. ELEV, 46.00 IH. G. C. 5, D. 1987 ADJ. I NOTE 1 LOCATIONS OF EXISTING UTILITIES ARE APPROXIMATE ONLY. 2. REMOVE AND DISPOSE EXIST STORM SEWER MANHOLES/INLETS AND PIPES 3, FOR REMOVE AND REPLACE EXIST PAVEMENT LIMITS SEE SHTS 42A/4420 9'ws•e. o' l« 691006a'lo cl,y1 uuwn. 3391 AIE UT!L116 11 INEES0 SAWN M�ii Wes. i�M w�aWNl'►�A[�E nA61k 1111 4 x111, tI�NES*OLCOMO41 mil NIFe 0A4 Wm 2tiTt"3rblNr Lw.R r cns 6nr.ii.11 irs 04tn YINx:Aa7' CAIK.I. 61x4•ANT 4 6-- 4 42 -„ 34 32 30 00 Rm36:46 GRATE INLET 'Op 44.22 481N85)36 S7 1-20"8V NG • PROP Wt 8L STA 89.7 PROP 8' WATER LINE 10 DE REMOVE() FT.�A_^..FN LEI UI -3: TO' OF PAVEMENT R BASELINE PROP 20' WATER LTRE] :ram• ArAiFiaE°.G. nd PPirmcaAl di.. ®Fi4�l6�,illr te, Jo.Ii.A ,A EASY DITCH '57 R P((,, STA 89.48 TO 5133 90r2O MP ELF RESTRATNEO JOLR79: GRATE WLET TOP 4369 48"(N85)36 33 Tnbion PROP SIM A4H 5 (ON 17RC8) . .I'A`glji:?5, 17:SP L7 5'x1' PRGB R.36.13 (N85) b 0ni•c�OT EAST ROW PROP SIM M14 6 (ON PRGB) Wi(PRECA$T JUIH1Te004 BO% BE STA 92651, 31 80' LI TR=44.80+/- 5'x4' PRGB F1.35.92 (Na5) GRATE INIE1 TOP 44 81 48'(141e5)35 78 46 4:4 40 3.L., 34. 30 GHARLES D. 0000CN rill CO NSULTING ENONKERS, INC 110A40 OF 9609455M199I1. 59.6165 h120 46049 Row 99, A ws 66 1(XA5 nm, nut P-aPs City of Pearland, Texas OLD ALVIN ROAD 20-INCH WATER LINE PI.AN a PROFILE ALONG BASELINE STA 88.00 TO STA 93+00 666066 A19110 A.k . 9M. .W 1.F 28 Owen Je3*BY.HrI arms tecelbell. OF 92 0*70. 7001,10E 4000E (3) E1IRA C((11E0 L705 0OR l,Os ARE 10 BE DEL10CE0(0510 CO.! 109Hiiv OPERATIONS X3h' 0- E(Vf' o• f SEW 1-1 ♦: �Gr(Y(.....�55..` C.a vIi"LCiR"vim`-' 'lOi C41u-[ W(Cw'iIK -r,0+8 = T, tw WyAL Q HEAVY DUTY MANHOLE RING AND COVER NOTES: HALE SECTION MN 0LF PAVFYEM-�—.... .. f1E.AW OR)Y• NYIG A. COVER( AFC. STANIANO DSEE L)' 4'KFT I 4 (1' MEW' ONMYPLh•E, I SEG 5 SEE SPECRN.00005 _. .YC0ON WO* PREC.SI I L NLCErf4E WMOLES_ :v3 FOCNCI.ASS STAGGERED SEE SK STAGGERED DI TAR .1, SHEET ♦rC N" A 90 READ; PT. EIIP:) A0EO A Y 6094INAEN( **OE, OMEKE, OR M>MbiER MAAL j/ Y St! 0 R15ER ► stENT Pi(4F. Y F AN(E9 O:nce3 [N�LDED oN DARTED f1AR `i/EEL PIPE LVtl:I) PROPOSED WATER LINE SEAL MI11 MAN(NNE S(AUN! (1YP. ALI. MN JOINTS) '�MH V�.AL4VE lAarEET MANHOLE DETAIL" µPF SIEDION TOR TOLE IN OPEN AREA 601 Lsea— FOR SITE REOUIREANNIS. STATICAL ANO °EASE, SEE PLAN a PROFILE r... Y:RAM i0-l E', 3',OP ♦' v[Bil'1[E- � n woy e�VEM % O0N fU{ PnORANI SCH. M CAW. VENTSTEELPE JDBOLUN IANGULAR PATTERN AR PP•YO[0 ANODE PIPE M PATTERN 000053HYDRAN0ENT PPE, _... E. --n/E' mnE x %;' TNT. VIF 99 ZCU STEEL BOLTS SECURED ¢ iJ W/ '16 0M STEEL BSTRA 3 :LASS B CONCRETE DID Of USED N MO1RO (0ARDS _ 5. •.• ♦ SEE PETAL PA ANT LOCATION OF ♦ Y E BOLURB MOUND VENT PINEgl I . _ PI . OM, T.Y. OR !' - 90 B.D. GALV STEEL. NP.T. - 11110 A -- RAT. Gf10 SON AETE COLLAR W/ OM I.ENIIM000S f WR CPCN AREAS PT. .AT r01LVE N!, SHEET AR VALVE AIARENNE OF AEN L ), PROMO /! 6 5 S. ] PIPING B(TW EH Y THREADED IPINC V.LL171?0(SEEI NOt(9AT NR AM VALVE AND MAN110,: DT TALL') .�....-T THREADED pbNO FLANGE S`iIF NOM 3 •IIII'.I NR VALVE AND MANHOLE 0E1AB" Y 0LAN(O CAPE VALVE 'AMR VALVE AND MANHOLES DETAILT')3. sHJJ PROMO( Y 01(1 ECTRAC COUPLING BEMs GATE WAVE AND OUTLET CRUSHED STONE (PAP.) GROUT (TIP )........ .:' /6 0 IY 0.C. EACH 00 000MBINATION AIR VALVE ASSEMBLY (FOR WATER L.S 30-INCHES 1N PRIMMER AND SMALLER) RETURN. CA1.v, SiEEt E ANGI S. T55. W/INSULA6t 5 A ^ GIE1 LAMEEN 7N1(5. SCE PLAN FOR PYRE HYDRANT LOCATOR nSIU. 5(0(NG1N WLV. SIL. PPE f0.LCO Mix DGNG,. LRONx PUP NOTE PROVIDE E-T DE STRIPS }A Or REFLECTOOEEO 1NE ON ADII�Pn l�P PNNI BDLLVV, n IT0 D GRIST 400 APPROVCOLORER ORE SURURI I AND OVEO M CRY ENGINEER. TO I.L.G D04An0 SCE PLAN RPROFF( FOR SIZE NEOUPEBENTS. STATION AND OrrEST. VENT PIPE WITH O 1 BOLLARD DETAIL NOTES - MANHOLE STEPS. 1. PROVIDE MDDEL PSI -Pr STEPS AS w0U1AETUREO MA. INDUSTRIES INC, OR APPROVED NOUN. J': 10110N NwHE 7L„ STEP SHELL BC NO 11I1�IIER THAN 1E' ABOVE 0LE MEAT. Air Volve & Types Water Main Diameter APCO• Series Air Valve Siee APCO•Motlel MH SIZE A30 154C i 60' S 11SC 7C es--x•- Es(e- E' 50 0 VENT PIPE OR FIRE HYDRANT MANHOLE STEP J WITH 3 BOLLARDS DETAIL AND JUNCTION BOX DETAIL R R ONLIrto. AMINE ot Ii LAN. TEIDI oat As vow. ease eE Alf 4N Ntaa n oNs p m ruv 1r• *8 DAN 1� { f y�•VI 1-� .11.101.1191 MO CITY Or (I&LNIAND TSPNAL SACK Tr?. NY T:4iEH'..... �.... wrx"NY'W'ii bi'.•. PIRA Po Win NOTES 1 PROMOE RAN NEVI OR WPRPEO EO1EL DETREEN PRECAST SEGNMS OF T11[ IAANHOLE. E. FOR M7*1(0(CS 01(9(0T*M1 70 FEET. SYETT CLIMBING L UST BE PROVIDED ( 1-0M1* l OR APPROVED COWL) 3. E 3' OR 0 AIR VALVE IS CALLED FOR ON THE PUN AN0 PRdr1L SHEETS I11LN PROVIDE C0 / OR 503C AIR VALVE PMOG AN1 '7001INMCES OF THE SAME DIAMETER AND CONSTRUCTED Of THE ARI S( TEREL AND CLASS. REFER TO TABLE "AIR VALVE a TYPES' ♦ VERNY 1NA1 LOCATION OF VENT PIPE SCREEN 5 1 F001 ABOVE 00-YEAR FLOOD MAIN ELEVATION ORFEET 00001 NAnNEI OROUNO WM EVER IS HIGHER 5 WHEN ONLY 3:f55 1,10001,E • DADS.P ON AND PROFILE. OCLCT1 REOUIREM(NIS FOR AVI VALVE. VENT PIING, AND 0011.0R05. PNOAOE B- RAKED GATE L.( HANOWNEEL OPERATED W/OLIND FUND(.. 6. 0(1(0 10 Plq; AN0 HEEIS r0(1 IOCATNWS O PROFILEsV( P TOR PAVEMENT ilLPAPA. SEE SHEET 'EXCAVATION BEDDING YID PAVIDAIN REPNR 0"CCTAri3S. B. PROVIDE AN APPROVED PETROLEUM BASED TAPE CNCAPSUUT111G ILL BOLTS N ACCESS MANHOLE. A, 9 IF DEPTH 01 COVEN A 5 USE WAP IRA LOW PROFILE DEIHL ♦ PEARLAND City of Pearland, Texas OLD ALVIN ROAD 20-INCH WATER LINE STANDARD DETAILS WATER r. g07(000 LIEFF W M;, 47C PA•. Of N. 46 4 42 40 38 36 34 32 1 30 RGP r9' WATER I.X10j VMl ME RESTMWER ma ..: samPal aeon 111. Wm AM STA 84+55 6 WATER LINE \''YY'sY STA 89+82 V.111. [w STA 102+66 46 40 38 LEGEND 34. NG O PROP W 32 30 CONTROL BENCHMARK: CITY OF PEARLANO GP5 MONUMENT NO 6 BRASS DISC IN CONCRETE LOCATED GH THE WEST 510E OF STATE HIGHWAY 35 ANO THE SOUTH 510E OF 1HE NORTH ENTRANCE INTO THE OLD WAL-MART LOCATION. ELEM. 47.43 (H.G.C5.0. 1987 ADJ ) NDIL 1. LOCATON OF EXISTING UTILITIES 5 APPROXIMATE ONLY. 46 _44 42 40 38 jfi 34 32 30 STA 118+93 STA 126+91 44 42 4O 34 30 A5-0UIL1 1.1.501/11016 JH EH MI POI aa. 0IM1E5 U9EaN0aUN R4 L56 I(IASBSA. WHIa'540.M iM[R 3m NOM[, MUSICK ss;n. City ofPeadand, Texas OLD ALV1N ROAD 20-INCH WATER LINE MISCELLANOUS WATER LINE CROSS SECTIONS wAmn AO AS,slw,J- .`.` b10x IAA. PE Mai 50 CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 04/2008 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BUILDING R300253.02 SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work by Owner. 4. Work under separate contracts. 5. Access to site. 6. Coordination with occupants. 7. Work restrictions. 8. Specification and Drawing conventions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Orange Street Service Center Phase 1 Administration Building. 1. Project Location: 3501 E. Orange St Pearland, TX 77581 2. City of Pearland Project Number FA1404 B. Owner: City of Pearland, Texas. 1. Owner's Representative: Susan Johnson, (281) 652-1732, sjohnsonCcilpearlandtx.gov. C. Architect/Engineer: Huitt-Zollars, Inc. 10350 Richmond Avenue, Suite 300 Houston, Texas 77042 281-496-0066 01100 - 1 10-04-2019 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BUILDING R300253.02 SUMMARY OF WORK D. Web -Based Project Software: Project software administered by Owner will be used for purposes of managing communication and documents during the construction stage. 1. See Section 01310 " Coordination and Meetings." for requirements for using web -based Project software. 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following, along with other Work indicated in the Contract Documents: 1. Orange Street Service Center (Phase 1) Administration Building improvements include demolition of two existing buildings and utility services. New construction of a 2-story, approximately 19,000 square feet, building —consists mostly of offices and workstations. Major building systems include drilled pier foundations, structural steel frame, concrete tilt -walls, aluminum and glass storefronts. The project also includes complete mechanical, plumbing, electrical, automatic sprinklers, fire alarm system, low -voltage access control, and an emergency generator. Site work includes concrete pavement, utilities, fencing, landscaping and irrigation systems. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 WORK BY OWNER A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner. 1.6 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying Work under this Contract or other contracts. 1.7 ACCESS TO SITE General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to Work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. Obtain necessary encroachment permits and permissions. Coordinate with adjacent operations. 1 Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or for storage of materials. 01100 - 2 10-04-2019 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BUILDING R300253.02 SUMMARY OF WORK a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on -site. C. Condition of Existing Grounds: Maintain portions of existing grounds, landscaping, and hardscaping affected by construction operations throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. 1.8 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. Building site must remain secure at all times during construction. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy. 3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work. 1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On -Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:30 a.m. to 6:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. 01100 - 3 10-04-2019 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BUILDING R300253.02 SUMMARY OF WORK C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. Restricted Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times. G. Site is to remain secure and fenced -in at all times during construction. 1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 01100 - 4 10-04-2019 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BUILDING R300253.02 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01100 01100 - 5 10-04-2019 Issue for Bid CITY OF PEARLAND 1.1 GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES Section 01140 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A General use of the Project Site including properties inside and outside of the limits of construction, work affecting roads, ramps, streets and driveways and notification to adjacent occupants. B References to Technical Specifications: 1 Section 01350 — Submittals 2 Section 01730 — Cutting & Patching 3 Section 01555 — Traffic Control & Regulation 4 Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal 5 Section 01720 — Field Surveying 6 Section 02980 — Pavement Repair 7 Section 02770 — Curbs, Curb & Gutter, & Headers 8 Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill, & Embankment Materials 9 Section 02922 — Sodding 10 Section 02921 — Hydromulch Seeding 1.3 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.4 LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A Confine access, operations, and storage areas to limits of construction as shown on the Plans provided by Owner as stipulated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement; trespassing on abutting lands or other lands in the area is not allowed. B Contractor may make arrangements, at Contractor's cost, for temporary use of private properties, in which case Contractor and Contractor's surety shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against claims or demands arising from such use of properties outside of the limits of construction. 1. Improvements to private properties made for the Contractor's use mustbe removed upon completion of the Work. a. No fill material may be placed in temporary work areas or on adjacent private properties without the written permission of the Engineer or the issuance of a Fill Permit by the City of Pearland or other governing entity. C Restrict total length which materials may be distributed along the route of the construction at any one time to 1,000 linear feet unless otherwise approved by Engineer. 01/2018 01 140 - 1 of4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.5 PROPERTIES OUTSIDE OF LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A If Contractor's means and methods require the acquisition of Temporary Construction Easements or any access to private property not already included in the above, such access and documentation along with any costs involved shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B Altering the condition of properties adjacent to and along the limits of construction will not be permitted unless authorized by the Engineer and property owner(s) as noted above. C Means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures which will result in damage to properties or improvements in the vicinity outside of the limits of construction will not be permitted without temporary or permanent easements as determined by the Engineer. D Any damage to properties outside of the limits of construction shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at no cost to the Owner. E Contractor shall protect or replace all property corners, monuments or other demarcations disturbed, damaged or lost as a result of his activities. The replacement of these devices shall be properly documented to the satisfaction of the City by a Registered Public Land Surveyor with copies delivered to the Owner or private property owner. 1.6 USE OF SITE A Obtain approvals of governing authorities prior to impeding or closing public roads or streets. Do not close consecutive intersections simultaneously B Notify Engineer 48 hours prior to closing a street or a street crossing. Permits for street closures are required in advance and are the responsibility of the Contractor. C Maintain access for emergency vehicles including access to fire hydrants. D Avoid obstructing drainage ditches or inlets; when obstruction is unavoidable due to requirements of the Work, provide grading and temporary drainage structures to maintain unimpeded flow. E Locate and protect private lawn sprinkler systems which may exist on rights -of -ways within the Project Site. Repair or replace damaged systems to condition equal to or better than that existing at start of the Work. F When required by the Work, cutting, patching, and fitting of Work to existing facilities, accommodating installation or connection of Work with existing facilities, or uncovering Work for access, inspection, or testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 01730 — Cutting & Patching. G Fires are not permitted on the Project Site. 01/2018 01140 - 2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.7 NOTIFICATION TO ADJACENT OCCUPANTS A Notify individual occupants in areas to be affected by the Work of the proposed construction and time schedule. Notification shall be 24 hours, 72 hours and 2 weeks prior to work being performed within 200 feet of the homes orbusinesses. B Include in notification names and telephone numbers of two representatives for resident contact, who will be available on 24-hour call. Include precautions which will be taken to protect private property and identify potential access or utility inconvenience or disruption. C Submit proposed notification to Engineer for approval. Consideration shall be given to the ethnicity of the neighborhood where English is not the dominant language. Notice shall be in an understandable language. 1.8 EXCAVATION IN STREETS AND DRIVEWAYS A Avoid hindering or needlessly inconveniencing public travel on a street or any intersecting alley or street for more than two blocks at any one time, except by permission of the Engineer. B Obtain the Engineer's approval when the nature of the Work requires closing of an entire street. Permits required for street closure are the Contractor' s responsibility. Avoid unnecessary inconvenience to abutting property owners. C Remove surplus materials and debris and open 1000 feet or less for public use as work in that block is complete. D Acceptance of any portion of the Work will not be based on return of street to public use. E Avoid obstructing driveways or entrances to private property. F Provide temporary crossing or complete the excavation and backfill in one continuous operation to minimize the duration of obstruction when excavation is required across drives or entrances. G Provide barricades and signs in accordance with Section 01555 — Traffic Control & Regulation. 1.9 CLEAN-UP A Maintain Project Site in a neat and orderly manner. B Perform daily clean-up in and around construction zone of dirt, debris, scrap materials, other disposable items. C Leave streets, driveways, and sidewalks broom -clean or its equivalent at the end of each work day. D Promptly remove barriers, signs, and components of other control systems that are no 01/2018 01140-3of4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES longer being utilized. E Dispose of waste and excess materials in accordance with requirements of Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal. 1.10 RESTORATION A Restore damaged permanent facilities to pre -construction conditions unless replacement or abandonment of facilities is indicated on the Plans. B Repair/Replace removed or damaged pavement in accordance with Section 02980 — Pavement Repair and removed or damaged curbs, gutters, and headers in accordance with Section 02770 — Curbs, Curb & Gutter, & Headers. Repair/Replace with like materials to match existing style, lines, grades, etc., unless otherwise directed by Engineer. C Repair turf areas which become damaged by Contractor's operations at no additional cost to Owner. D Level with bank sand or topsoil, conforming to Section 02255 — Bedding, Backf 1l, & Embankment Materials, as approved by the Engineer. E Provide sodding in areas of residential land use over the surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved, or not designated to be paved, in accordance with Section 02922 — Sodding. Use only block sodding; do not use spot sodding or sprigging. F Provide hydromulch seeding in areas of commercial, industrial or undeveloped land use over the surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved, or not designated to be paved, in accordance with Section 02921— Hydromulch Seeding. G Water and level newly sodded areas with adjoining turf using steel wheel rollers appropriate for sodding 2.0 PRODUCTS -NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 01/2018 01140-4of4 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Section 01200 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Procedures for measurement and payment of Work. B Conditions for nonconformance assessment and nonpayment for rejected products. C References to Technical Specifications: See Bid Proposal Sheet D Reference Standards: 1. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 1.02 AUTHORITY A Units and methods delineated in this Section are intended to complement the criteria of the Technical Specifications and Section 00300 — Bid Proposal. B In the event of conflict, the unit specified for Bid Items in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal shall govern. C Measurements and quantities submitted by the Contractor will be verified by the Engineer. D Contractor shall provide necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required by Engineer to verify quantities. 1.03 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A Quantity and measurement estimates stated in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal are for contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements supplied or placed in the Work, authorized and verified by Engineer shall determine payment as stated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement. B If the actual Work requires greater or lesser quantities than those quantities indicated in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, provide the required quantities at the unit prices contracted except as otherwise stated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement or in executed Change Order. 1.04 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A Measurement by Weight: Reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes will be measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction weights. Welded assemblies will be measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction or scale weights. 05/2007 01200 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES B Measurement by Volume: 1. Stockpiles: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width, and height or thickness. 2. Excavation and Embankment Materials: Measured by cubic dimension using the average end area method. C Measurement by Area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius. D Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord. E Stipulated Price Measurement: By unit designated in the agreement. F Other: Items measured by weight, volume, area, or lineal means or combination, as appropriate, as a completed item or unit of the Work. 1.05 PAYMENT A Payment includes full compensation for all required supervision, labor, products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services, and incidentals; and erection, application or installation of an item of the Work; and Contractor's overhead and profit. The price bid shall include the total cost for required Work. Claims for payment as Unit Price Work not specifically covered in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal will not be accepted. B Progress Payments for Unit Price Work will be based on the Engineer's observations and evaluations of quantities incorporated in the Work multiplied by the unit price. C Progress Payments for Lump Sum Work will be based on the Engineer's observations and evaluations of the percentage of quantities included in the schedule of values incorporated in the Work. D Final Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities determined by Engineer multiplied by the unit price for Work which is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work. 1.06 NONCONFORMANCE ASSESSMENT A Remove and replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to the Contract Documents. B If, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Engineer will direct one of the following remedies: 1. The nonconforming Work will remain as is, but the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the Engineer. 2. The nonconforming Work will be modified as authorized by the Engineer, and the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the Engineer, if the modified Work is deemed to be less suitable than originally specified. 05/2007 01200 - 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES C Individual Technical Specifications may modify these options or may identify a specific formula or percentage price reduction. D The authority of the Engineer to assess the nonconforming Work and identify payment adjustment is final. 1.07 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS A Payment will not be made for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable to Engineer. 2. Products determined as nonconforming before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work, unless specified otherwise. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected products. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 05/2007 01200 - 3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES Section 01290 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Procedures for processing Change Orders, including: 1. Assignment of a responsible individual for approval and communication of changes in the Work; 2. Documentation of change in Contract Price and Contract Time; 3. Change procedures, using proposals and construction contract modifications, Work Change Directive, Stipulated Price Change Order, Unit Price Change Order, Time and Materials Change Order; 4. Execution of Change Orders; 5. Correlation of Contractor Submittals. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350 — Submittals 2. Section 01760 — Project Record Documents C Other References: 1. Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (Data Quest Blue Book). Rental Rate is defined as the full unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.03 RESPONSIBLE INDIVIDUAL A Contractor shall provide a letter indicating the name and address of the individual authorized to execute change documents, and who shall also be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ and Subcontractors of changes to the Work. The information shall be provided at the Preconstruction Conference. 1.04 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE AND CONTRACT TIME A Provide full information required for identification and evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of proposed changes in the Work. B Contractor shall document each Proposal for Change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow for its evaluation. 02/2008 01290 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES C Proposal for Change shall include, as a minimum, the following information as applicable: 1. Original Quantities of items in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal with additions, reductions, deletions, and substitutions. 2. When Work items were not included in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, Contractor shall provide unit prices for the new items, with supporting information as required by the Engineer. 3. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 4. Additional data upon request. D For changes in the Work performed on a time -and -material basis, the following additional information may be required: 1. Quantities and description of products and equipment. 2. Taxes, insurance and bonds. 3. Overhead and profit as noted in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 7.03 "Extra Work". 4. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. 5. Time records and certified copies of applicable payrolls. 6. Invoices and receipts for products, rented equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. E Rented equipment will be paid to the Contractor by actual invoice cost for the duration of time required to complete the extra work. If the extra work comprises only a portion of the rental invoice where the equipment would otherwise be on the site, the Contractor shall compute the hourly equipment rate by dividing the actual monthly invoice by 176. (One day equals 8 hours and one week equals 40 hours.) Operating costs shall not exceed the estimated operating costs given for the item of equipment in the Blue Book. F For changes in the work performed on a time -and -materials basis using Contractor - owned equipment, compute rates with the Blue Book as follows: 1. Multiply the appropriate Rental Rate by an adjustment factor of 70 percent plus the full rate shown for operating costs. The Rental Rate utilized shall be the lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly or monthly rates. Use 150 percent of the Rental Rate for double shifts (one extra shift per day) and 200 percent of the Rental Rate for more than two shifts per day. No other rate adjustments shall apply. 2. Standby rates shall be 50 percent of the appropriate Rental Rate shown in the Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed. 1.05 CHANGE PROCEDURES A Changes to Contract Price or Contract Time can only be made by issuance of a Change Order. Issuance of a Work Change Directive or written acceptance by the Engineer of changes will be formalized into Change Orders. All such changes will be in accordance with the requirements of Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 7.01 "Change Orders". 02/2008 01290 - 2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES B The Engineer will advise Contractor of Minor Changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Time as authorized by Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 7.02 "Minor Changes", by issuing supplemental instructions. C Contractor may request clarification of Plans, Technical Specifications or Contract Documents or other information. Response by the Engineer to a Request for Information does not authorize the Contractor to perform tasks outside the scope of the Work. All changes must be authorized as described in this Section. 1.06 PROPOSALS FOR CHANGE AND CONTRACT MODIFICATION A The Engineer may issue a Request for Proposal, which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Plans and Technical Specifications. The Engineer may also request a proposal in the response to a Request for Information. Contractor will prepare and submit its Proposal for Change within 7 days or as specified in the request. B The Contractor may propose an unsolicited change by submitting a Proposal for Change to the Engineer describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change and the effect on the Contract Price and Contract Time including full documentation. 1.07 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE A Engineer may issue a signed Work Change Directive instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. B The document will describe changes in the Work and will designate a method of determining any change in Contract Price or Contract Time. C Contractor shall proceed promptly to execute the changes in the Work in accordance with the Work Change Directive. 1.08 STIPULATED PRICE CHANGE ORDER A A Stipulated Price Change Order will be based on an accepted Proposal for Change including the Contractor's lump sum price quotation. 1.09 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER A Where Unit Prices for the affected items of the Work are included in Section 00300 - Bid Proposal , the Unit Price Change Order will be based on unit prices as originally bid, subject to provisions of Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement. B Where unit prices of the Work are not pre -determined in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, Work Change Directive or accepted Proposal for Change will specify the unit prices to be used. 02/2008 01290 - 3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.10 TIME -AND -MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER A Contractor shall provide an itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated for claims in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement. B Engineer will determine the change allowable in Contract Price and Contract Time as provided in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement. C Contractor shall maintain detailed records of work done on time -and -material basis as specified in this Section, 1.04 "Documentation of Change in Contract Price and Contract Time". D Contractor shall provide full information required for evaluation of changes, and shall substantiate costs for changes in the Work. 1.11 EXECUTION OF CHANGE DOCUMENTATION A Engineer will issue Change Orders, Work Change Directives, or accepted Proposals for Change for signatures of parties named in Section 00500 — Standard Form of Agreement. 1.12 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A For Stipulated Price Contracts, Contractor shall promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Price. B For Unit Price Contracts, the next monthly Application for Payment of the Work after acceptance of a Change Order will be revised to include any new items not previously included and the appropriate unit rates. C Contractor shall promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, and shall revise schedules to adjust time for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit for review. D Contractor shall promptly enter changes to the on -site and record copies of the Plans, Technical Specifications or Contract Documents as required in Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01290 - 4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS Section 01310 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Section includes general coordination including Preconstruction Conference, Site Mobilization Conference, and Progress Meetings. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01100 — Summary of Work 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Coordination is required throughout the documents. Refer to all of the Contract Documents and coordinate as necessary. 1.03 ENGINEER AND REPRESENTATIVES A The Engineer may act directly or through designated representatives as defined in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 1.01 "Owner, Contractor, and Engineer", and as identified by name at the Preconstruction Conference. 1.04 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION A Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various Technical Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. B Coordinate completion and clean up of the Work for Substantial Completion and for portions of the Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy. C Coordinate access to Project Site for correction of nonconforming work to minimize disruption of Owner's activities where Owner is in partial occupancy. 1.05 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A Engineer will schedule a Preconstruction Conference. B Attendance Required: Engineer's representatives, Consultants, Contractor, and major Subcontractors. C Agenda: 1. Distribution of Contract Documents. 2. Designation of personnel representing the parties to the Contract, and the Consultant. 3. Review of insurance. 02/2008 01310 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 4. Discussion of formats proposed by the Contractor for Schedule of Values, and Construction Schedule. 5. Discussion of required Submittals, including, but not limited to, Work Plans, Traffic Control Plans, Safety Programs, Construction Photographs. 6. Procedures and processing of Shop Drawings and other submittals, substitutions, Applications for Payment, Requests for Information, Request for Proposal, Change Orders, and Contract Closeout. 7. Scheduling of the Work and coordination with other contractors. 8. Review of Subcontractors. 9. Appropriate agenda items listed in this Section, 1.06 "Site Mobilization Conference", when Preconstruction Conference and Site Mobilization Conference are combined. 10. Procedures for testing. 11. Procedures for maintaining Project Record Documents. 12. Designation of the individual authorized to execute change documents and their responsibilities. 13. Discussion of requirements of a Trench Safety Program. 1.06 SITE MOBILIZATION CONFERENCE A When required by Section 01100 — Summary of Work, Engineer will schedule a Site Mobilization Conference at the Project Site prior to Contractor occupancy. B Attendance Required: Engineer representatives, Consultants, Contractor's Superintendent, and major Subcontractors. C Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor 2. Safety and first aid procedures 3. Construction controls provided by Owner 4. Temporary utilities 5. Survey and layout 6. Security and housekeeping procedures 1.07 PROGRESS MEETINGS A Progress Meetings shall be held at Project Site or other location as designated by the Engineer. Meeting shall be held at monthly intervals, or more frequent intervals if directed by Engineer. B Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Engineer representatives, and Consultants as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. C Engineer or City's representative will make arrangements for meetings, and recording minutes. D Engineer or City's representative will prepare the agenda and preside at meetings. 02/2008 01310 - 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS E Contractor shall provide required information and be prepared to discuss each agenda item. F Agenda: 1 Review minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of Construction Schedule, Applications for Payment, payroll and compliance submittals. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of Submittal Schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review status of Requests for Information, Requests for Proposal. 7. Review status of Change Orders. 8. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 9. Maintenance of updates to Construction Schedule. 10. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 11. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 12. Coordination of projected progress. 13. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 14. Effect of proposed changes on Construction Schedule and coordination. 15. Other items relating to the Work. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01310 - 3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS Section 01350 SUBMITTALS 1.1 GENERAL This Section contains general lists of Submittals and Technical Specifications that may be required for the Work. When Submittals are required elsewhere in these Technical Specifications, refer to this Section for Submittal requirements and procedures. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A Submittal procedures for: 1. Schedule of Values 2. Construction Schedules 3. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples 4. Operations and Maintenance Data 5. Manufacturer's Certificates 6. Construction Photographs 7. Project Record Documents 8. Design Mixes B References to the following Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01310 — Coordination & Meetings 2. Section 01630 — Product Options & Substitutions 3. Section 01100 — Summary of Work 4. Section 01380 — Construction Photographs 5. Section 01760 — Project Record Documents 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A Scheduling and Handling 1. Schedule Submittals well in advance of the need for material or equipment for construction. Allow time to make delivery of material or equipment after Submittal is approved. 2. Develop a Submittal Schedule that allows sufficient time for initial review, correction, resubmission and final review of all submittals. The Engineer will review and return submittals to the Contractor as expeditiously as possible but the amount of time required for review will vary depending on the complexity and quantity of data submitted. In no case will a Submittal Schedule be acceptable which allows less than 30 days for initial review by the Engineer. This time for review shall in no way be justification for delays or additional compensation to the Contractor. 3. The Engineer's review of submittals covers conformity to the Plans, Technical Specifications, and dimensions which affect the layout. The Contractor is responsible for quantity determination. The Contractor is responsible for any errors, omissions or deviations from the Contract requirements; review of 01/2008 01350 - 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS submittals in no way relieves the Contractor from his obligation to furnish required items according to the Plans and Technical Specifications. 4. Submit 5 copies of documents unless otherwise specified in this Section or by individual Technical Specifications. 5. Revise and resubmit submittals as required. Identify all changes made since previous submittal. 6. The Contractor shall assume the risk for material or equipment which is fabricated or delivered prior to approval. No material or equipment shall be incorporated into the Work or included in Applications for Payment until approval has been obtained in the specified manner. B Transmittal Form and Numbering 1. Transmit each submittal to the Engineer with a transmittal form. 2. Sequentially number each transmittal form beginning with the number 1. Re - Submittals shall use the original number with an alphabetic suffix (i.e., 2A for first Re -Submittal of Submittal 2 or 15C for third Re -Submittal of Submittal 15). Each submittal shall only contain one type of work, material, or equipment. Mixed submittals will not be accepted. 3. Identify variations from requirements of Contract Documents and identify product or system limitations. 4. For submittal numbering of video tapes, see this Section, 1.10 "Video". C Contractor's Certification 1. Each submittal shall contain a statement or stamp signed by the Contractor, certifying that the items have been reviewed in detail and are correct and in accordance with Contract Documents, except as noted by any requested variance. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A Submit a Schedule of Values at least 10 days prior to the first Application for Payment. A Schedule of Values shall be provided for each of the items indicated as Lump Sum (LS) in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal for which the Contractor requests to receive Progress Payments. B Schedule of Values shall be typewritten on 8-1/2" x 11", plain bond, white paper. Use the Table of Contents of this Project Manual as a format for listing costs of Work by Section. C Round off figures for each listed item to the nearest $100.00 except for the value of one item, if necessary, to make the total price for all items listed in the Schedule of Values equal to the applicable Lump Sum in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal. D For Unit Price Contracts, items should include a proportional share of Contractor's overhead and profit, such that the total of all items listed in the Schedule of Values equals the Contract amount. For Stipulated Price Contracts, Mobilization, Bonds, and Insurance may be listed as separate items in the Schedule of Values. 01/2008 01350 - 2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS E For Lump Sum equipment items, where Submittals for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports in conjunction with Operation and Maintenance Data are required, include a separate item for equipment Operation and Maintenance Data Submittals and a separate item for Submittals of equipment Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports, each valued at five (5) percent of the Lump Sum. F Revise the Schedule of Values and resubmit for items affected by contract modifications, Change Orders, and Work Change Directives. Submit revised Schedule of Values 10 days prior to the first Application for Payment after the changes are approved by the Engineer. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES A Submit Construction Schedules for the Work in accordance with the requirements of this Section. The Construction Schedule Submittal shall be, at a minimum, a bar chart, (computer generated or prepared manually) and a narrative report. B During the Preconstruction Meeting, as noted in Section 01310 - Coordination and Meetings, the Contractor shall provide a sample of the format to be used for the Construction Schedule Submittal. The format is subject to approval by the Engineer. Review of the Submittal will be provided within 7 days of the Submittal of the sample. C Within 7 days of the receipt of approval of the Contractor's format, or 14 days of the Notice to Proceed, whichever is later, the Contractor shall submit a proposed Construction Schedule for review. The Construction Schedule Submittal shall meet the following requirements: 1. The Construction Schedule shall usually include a total of at least 20 but not more than 50 activities. Fewer activities may be accepted, if approved by the Engineer. 2. For Projects with work at different physical locations, each location should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 3. For projects with multiple crafts or significant subcontractor components, these elements should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 4. For Projects with multiple types of tasks within the scope, these types of work should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 5. For Projects with significant major equipment items or materials worth over 25 percent of the Total Contract Price, the Construction Schedule shall indicate dates when these items are to be purchased, when they are to be delivered, and when installed. 6. For Projects where operating plants are involved, each period of work which will require the shut down of any process or operation shall be identified in the Construction Schedule and must be agreed to by the Engineer prior to starting work in the area. 7. A Billing Schedule (tabulation of the estimated monthly billings) for the Work shall be prepared and submitted by the Contractor with the first Construction Schedule. This information is not required in the monthly updates, unless significant changes in Work require re -submittal of the Construction Schedule for review. The total for each month and a cumulative total will be indicated. 01/2008 01350 - 3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS These monthly forecasts are only for planning purposes of the Engineer. Monthly payments for actual work completed will be made by the Engineer in accordance with Section 00700 - General Conditions of Agreement. D The Contractor must receive approval of the Engineer for the Construction Schedule and Billing Schedule prior to the first monthly Application for Payment. No payment will be made until these are accepted. E Upon written request from the Engineer, the Contractor shall revise and submit for approval all or any part of the Construction Schedule to reflect changed conditions in the Work or deviations made from the original plan and schedule. F The Contractor's Construction Schedule shall thereafter be updated with the Actual Start and Actual Finish Dates, Percent Complete, and Remaining Duration of each Activity and submitted monthly. The date to be used in updating the monthly Construction Schedule shall be the same Date as is used in the monthly Application for Payment. This monthly update of the Construction Schedule shall be required before the monthly Application for Payment will be processed for payment. G The narrative Construction Schedule Report shall include a description of changes made to the Construction Schedule; Activities Added to the Construction Schedule; Activities Deleted from the Construction Schedule; any other changes made to the Construction Schedule other than the addition of Actual Start Dates and Actual Finish Dates and Remaining Durations. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES A Shop Drawings 1. Submit Shop Drawings for review as required by the Technical Specifications. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures" shall be placed on each Shop Drawing. 3. The Shop Drawing shall accurately and distinctly present the following: a. Field and erection dimensions clearly identified as such. b. Arrangement and section views. c. Relation to adjacent materials or structure including complete information for making connections between work under this Contract and work under other contracts. d. Kinds of materials and finishes. e. Parts list and descriptions. f. Assembly Shop Drawings of equipment components and accessories showing their respective positions and relationships to the complete equipment package. g. Where necessary for clarity, identify details by reference to sheet numbers and detail numbers, schedule or room numbers as shown on the Plans. 4. Shop Drawing Drawings shall be to scale, and shall be a true representation of the specific equipment or item to be furnished. 01/2008 01350 - 4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS B Product Data 1. Submit Product Data for review when required in individual Technical Specifications. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures" shall be placed on each data item submitted. 3. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options to be used in this Project. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project, where required by the Technical Specification. 4. For products specified only by reference standard, submit manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and applicable reference standard. 5. For Approved Products, those designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words "or approved equal", submit manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and applicable reference standard. 6. For products proposed as alternates to Approved Products, refer to Section 01630 - Product Options and Substitutions, 1.04 "Selection Options" and 1.07 "Substitution Procedures". 7. For products that are neither Pre -Approved, Approved, specified only by reference standard, nor proposed as alternates, submit product description, trade name, manufacturer, and supplier. Contractor shall provide additional information upon written request by Engineer or Owner. C Samples 1. Submit samples for review as required by the Technical Specification. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on each sample or a firmly attached sheet of paper. 3. Submit the number of samples specified in the Technical Specification; one of which will be retained by the Engineer. 4. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are identified in the Technical Specifications. 1.7 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A When specified in Technical Specification, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, operation, adjusting, finishing, and maintenance. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section. 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of each document. C Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. 1.8 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A When specified in Technical Specification, submit manufacturers' certificate of compliance for review by Engineer. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of the certificate. 01/2008 01350 - 5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS C Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. D Manufacturer's Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Engineer. 1.9 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Submit photographs in accordance with Section 01380 — Construction Photographs. 1. Prints: Prepare 2 prints of each view and submit 1 print directly to the City's Representative within 7 days of taking photographs. One print shall be retained by the Contractor and made available at all times for reference on the job site. B PRECONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS: 1. Prior to the commencement of any construction, take digital color photographs on the entire route of the project 2. Photographs: Two prints, color, matte finish; 3 x 5 inch size, mounted on 8 % x 11-inch soft card stock, with left edge binding margin for three hole punch, or in plastic pockets in three-ring notebook. 3. Th photographs shall show: a. Date photographs were taken b. Location of the photograph, house number and street name. (This information may be shown on a chalk board in the photograph by a label on the mountings.) 4. Photographs should show the condition of the following a. Esplanades and boulevards b. Yards (near, side and far side of street) c. Housewalk, sidewalk and driveway; curb d. Area between walk and curb 1) Particular features(yard lights, shrubs, fences, trees, etc.) 2) Landscaping and decorative features. C POST CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1. On completion of construction, provide photographs of any public or private property which has been repaired or restored and any damage which is or may be the subject of complaints. 1.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A Submit Project Record Documents in accordance with Section 01760—Project Record Documents. 1.11 VIDEO A Submit television video in DVD format as required in individual Technical Specifications. B Transmittal forms for video disks shall be numbered sequentially beginning with TO1, T02, T03, etc. 01/2008 01350 - 6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS 1.12 DESIGN MIXES A When specified, submit design mixes for review. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of each design mix. C Mark each design mix to identify proportions, gradations, and additives for each class and type of design mix submitted. Include applicable test results on samples for each mix. D Maintain a copy of approved design mixes at mixing plant. 2.0 PRODUCTS -Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 01/2008 01350-7of6 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS Section 01380 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for construction photographs and submittals. B References Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01100 — Summary of Work 2. Section 01350 — Submittals 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Construction Photographs under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for installed Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A When required by Section 01100 — Summary of Work, submit photographs in accordance applicable provisions of this Section. B Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. C Prepare three (3) prints of each view and submit two (2) prints directly to the Project Manager within seven (7) days of taking photographs. One (1) print shall be retained by the Contractor in the field office at the Project Site and available at all times for reference. D When requested by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall submit extra prints of photographs, for distribution directly to designated parties who will pay the costs for the extra prints directly to the photographer. E When required by individual Sections, submit photographs taken prior to start of the Work to show original Project Site conditions. F When required by Contract Documents, submit photographs with Application for Payment. G When required by individual Sections, submit photographs taken following completion of the Work to show the condition in which the Project Site will be left. H With each submittal, include photographic negatives in protective envelopes, identified by Project Name, Contractor, and date photographs were taken. 01/2008 01380 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Contractor shall be responsible for the timely execution of the photographs, their vantage point, direction of shot, and quality. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 PHOTOGRAPHS A Photographs shall be digital quality and shall be submitted on a CD. B The photographs shall show on a non -elective chalkboard or white board, readable in the photograph: 1. Job number. 2. Date and time photographs were taken. 3. Location of the photograph, house number and street, along with the project number. C Indicate the condition of the following: 1. Esplanades and boulevards. 2. Yards (near side and far side of street). 3. House -walk and sidewalk. 4. Curb. 5. Area between walk and curb. 6. Particular features (yard lights, shrubs, fence, trees, etc.). 7. Date shall be on negative. 8. Provide notation of vantage point marked for location and direction of shot on a key plan of the Project Site. D Sufficient number of photographs shall be taken to show the existence or non- existence of cracked concrete and the condition of trees, shrubs and grass. E Identify each photograph with an applied label or rubber stamp on the back with the following information: 1. Name of the Project. 2. Name and address of the photographer (if a professional photographer is used). 3. Name of the Contractor. 4. Date the photograph was taken. 5. Photographs to be in plastic pockets and bound in three -ring notebook for easy access and viewing. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Prior to the commencement of the Work, take photographs of the entire route of the Project Site. 01/2008 01380 - 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 3.02 POST -CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Following the completion of the Work, take photographs from corresponding vantage points and direction of shots. 3.03 PROGESS PHOTOGRAPHS A Take photographs at intervals, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment and submit on CD with monthly Application for Payment. B Select the vantage points for each shot each month to best show the status of construction and progress since the last photographs were taken. Take not less than two (2) shots from the same vantage point creating a time -lapsed sequence. C Follow direction when given by the Project Manager in selecting vantage points. END OF SECTION 01/2008 01380 - 3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS Section 01420 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A General quality assurance as related to Reference Standards and a list of references. B References to Technical Specifications: None 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A For Products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on the date as stated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement. C Request clarification from Engineer before proceeding should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ACI AGC AI AITC American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 19150 Reford Station Detroit, MI 48219-0150 Associated General Contractors of America 1957 E Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building College Park, MD 20740 American Institute of Timber Construction 333 W. Hampden Avenue Englewood, CO 80110 02/2008 01420 - 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS AISC AISI American Institute of Steel Construction 400 North Michigan Avenue, Eighth Floor Chicago, IL 60611 American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 APA API American Plywood Association Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411 American Petroleum Institute 1220 L Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 AREA American Railway Engineering Association 50 F Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 AWPA American Wood -Preservers' Association 7735 Old Georgetown Road Bethesda, MD 20014 AWS American Welding Society P.O. Box 35104 Miami, FL 33135 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 02/2008 01420 - 2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 1101 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 CRD U.S.A. Corps of Engineers CRSI Code of Ordinances City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, TX 77581 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 707 Westchester Avenue White Plains, NY 10604 FDA U.S. Food and Drug Administration 5600 Fisher Lane Rockville, MD 20857-0001 FS ICEA IEEE Federal Standardization Documents General Services Administration, Specifications Unit (WFSIS) 7th and D Street S.W. Washington, DC 20406 Insulated Cable Engineer Association P.O. Box 440 S. Yarmouth, MA 02664 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 445 Hoes Lane P.O. Box 1331 Piscataway, NJ 0855-1331 MIL Military Specifications General Services Administration, Specifications Unit (WFSIS) 7th and D Street S.W. Washington, DC 20406 NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers P. O. Box 986 Katy, TX 77450 02/2008 01420 - 3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association 2101 L Street, N.W., Suite 300 Washington, DC 20037 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park, P.O. Box 9101 Quincy, MA 02269-9101 OSHA Occupational Safety Health Administration U.S. Department of Labor, Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 PCA PCI SDI SSPC Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie, IL 60077-1083 Prestressed Concrete Institute 201 North Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606 Steel Deck Institute Box 9506 Canton, OH 44711 Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Avenue Pittsburgh, PA 15213 TAC Texas Administrative Code TCEQ Texas Commission on Environmental Quality P. O. Box 13087 Austin, TX 78711-3087 TxDOT Texas Department of Transportation 125 East llth Street Austin, TX 78701-2483 Texas MUTCD Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (2003 Adoption) (published by Texas Department of Transportation) UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062 UNI-BELL UNI-BELL Pipe Association 2655 Villa Creek Drive, Suite 155 02/2008 01420 - 4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS Dallas, TX 75234 WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute 942 Main Street — Suite 300 Hartford, CT 06103 WWD/PI Water Well Drillers and Pump Installers Advisory Council Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation P.O. Box 12157 Austin, TX 78711 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01420 - 5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND 1.0 GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL Section 01430 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Quality assurance and control of installation and manufacturer's field services and reports. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350 — Submittals 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce the Work of specified quality at no additional cost to the Owner. B Comply fully with manufacturers' installation instructions, including each step in sequence. C Request clarification from Project Manager before proceeding should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents. D Comply with specified Standards as minimum requirements for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E Perform work by persons qualified to produce the specified level of workmanship. F Obtain copies of Standards and maintain at Project Site when required by individual Technical Specifications. 1.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A When specified in individual Technical Specifications, provide material or product suppliers' or manufacturers' technical representative to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, operator training, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate operation, as required. Conform to minimum time requirements for start-up operations and operator training if defined in Technical Specifications. 02/2008 01430 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL B At the Project Manager's request, submit qualifications of manufacturer's representative to Project Manager fifteen (15) days in advance of required representative's services. The representative shall be subject to approval of Project Manager. C Manufacturer's representative shall report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. Submit report within one (1) day of observation to Project Manager for review. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01430 - 2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND OBSERVATION SERVICES Section 01440 OBSERVATION SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Observation services and references. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 INSPECTION A Project Manager will appoint an Observer as a representative of the Owner to oversee inspections, tests, and other services specified in individual Technical Specifications. B Alternately, Project Manager may appoint, employ, and pay an independent firm to provide additional observation or construction management services as indicated in Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services. C Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to Project Manager, Engineer, and Contractor, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. D Contractor shall assist and cooperate with the Observer; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, and storage. E Contractor shall notify Project Manager 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. Notify Engineer and independent firm when noted. F Contractor shall sign and acknowledge report for Observer. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 09/2009 01440 - 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Section 01450 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Testing Laboratory Services and Contractor responsibilities related to those services. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350 — Submittals C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3740, "Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction" b. ASTM E 329, "Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" 1.02 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A Owner will select, employ, and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform inspection and testing identified in individual Technical Specifications. B Employment of testing laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C Owner or designated representative shall schedule and monitor testing as required to provide timely results and to avoid delay to the Work. D Contractor shall be responsible for paying for services of commercial testing laboratory, with prior approval of Owner, to perform the following: 1. Pipe diameter deflection tests on all flexible and semi -rigid sanitary sewer collection system pipe installation 2. Laboratory services required to establish mix design proposed for use for Portland cement concrete, asphaltic concrete mixtures and other material mixes requiring control by testing laboratory when required because of change in source of materials or other conditions not caused by Owner. 3. Tests required to establish optimum moisture of earth and base materials and to determine required compactive effort to meet density requirements. 4. Cores to test for thickness. 5. Testing and inspection performed for the Contractor's convenience. 6. Retesting and repetitions of laboratory services when initial tests indicate work does not comply with requirements of Contract Documents. 04/2008 01450 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.03 LABORATORY REPORTS A The Engineer will receive 1 copy, the Project Manager will receive 2 copies, and the Contractor will receive 2 copies of Laboratory Reports from the testing laboratory. One of the Contractor's copies shall remain at the Project Site for duration of Project. Test results which indicate non-conformance shall be transmitted immediately via fax from the testing laboratory to the Contractor and Project Manager. 1.04 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. B Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. C Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. D Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A Notify Project Manager and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. Notify Engineer if specification section requires the presence of the Engineer. B Cooperate with laboratory personnel in collecting samples to be tested or collected on Project Site. C Provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities. D Provide samples to laboratory in advance of their intended use to allow thorough examination and testing. E Provide incidental labor and facilities for access to the Work to be tested; to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested; and to facilitate tests and inspections including storage and curing of test samples. F Arrange with laboratory and pay for: 1. Retesting required for failed tests. 2. Retesting for nonconforming Work. 3. Additional sampling and tests requested by Contractor for his own purposes. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION 04/2008 01450-2of3 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 3.01 CONDUCTING TESTING A Laboratory sampling and testing shall conform to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 329, as well as other test standards specified in individual Technical Specifications. END OF SECTION 04/2008 01450 - 3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Section 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Temporary facilities and the necessary controls for the Work including utilities, telephone, sanitary facilities, field office, storage sheds and building, safety requirements, first aid equipment, fire protection, security measures, protection of the Work and property, access roads and parking, environmental controls, disposal of trash, debris, and excavated material, pest and rodent control, water runoff and erosion control. B References to Technical Specifications: Section 00200 — Instructions to Bidders Section 01100 — Summary of Work Section 01350 — Submittals Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation Section 01100 — Summary of Work Section 01600 — Material & Equipment Section 01570 — Trench Safety System Section 01555 — Traffic Control & Regulation Section 01720 — Field Surveying Section 01563 — Tree & Plant Protection Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water & Surface Water Section 13730- Computer Equipment C Referenced Standards: Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas D Definitions: Underground Structures - sewer, water, gas, and other piping, and manholes, chambers, electrical and signal conduits, tunnels, and other existing subsurface installations located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Surface Structures - existing buildings, structures and other constructed installations above the ground surface. Included with such structures are their foundations or any extension below the surface. Surface structures include, but are not limited to 12-2- 2011 01500 - 1 of 10 CITYOFPEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS buildings, tanks, walls, bridges, roads, dams, channels, open drainage, piping, poles, wires, posts, signs, markers, curbs, walks, guard cables, fencing, and other facilities that are visible above the ground surface. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A The facilities and controls specified in this Section are considered minimum for the Work. The Contractor may provide additional facilities and controls for the proper execution of the Work and to meet Contractor's responsibilities for protection of persons and property. B Comply with applicable requirements specified in other Technical Specifications. Maintain and operate temporary facilities and systems to assure continuous service. Modify and extend systems as Work progress requires. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. Restore existing facilities used for temporary services to specified or to original condition. 1.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A Temporary Service Make arrangements with utility service companies for such temporary services as are necessary to construct the work and manage the site. Abide by rules and regulations of the utility service companies or authorities having jurisdiction. Be responsible for utility service costs until the Work is Substantially Complete. Included are fuel, power, light, heat, and other utility services necessary for execution, completion, testing, and initial operation of the Work. B Water Provide water required for and in connection with Work to be performed and for specified tests of piping, equipment, devices, or for other use as required for proper completion of the Work. 12-2-2011 01500 - 2 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS For water to be drawn from public water supply, obtain special permit or license and meter from the proper City officials. For facilities under construction, establish a water/sewer billing account with City's Utility Billing Department. A deposit based on rates established by latest ordinance will be required. For water drawn from fire hydrants, apply for and receive a construction water meter from City' Public Works Department. Identify specific location for construction water meter installation. Once installed, water meter may not be moved without notification of Public Works Department. Install backflow preventer on fire hydrant supply if not included in City provided meter. Provide and maintain an adequate supply of potable water for domestic consumption by Contractor personnel. C Electricity and Lighting 1 Provide temporary electric power service in Contractor's name, as required for the prosecution of the Work, including testing of Work. Provide power for lighting, operation of the Contractor's equipment, or for any other use by Contractor or as necessary to maintain any of Owner's on -going operations as may continue on the site during any scheduled shutdown. Minimum lighting level shall be 5 foot-candles for open areas; 10 foot-candles for stairs and shops. 2 Provide permanent electric power service, in the Contractor's name, to the work or site as and when required by the schedule of the work to achieve Substantial Completion or Partial Substantial Completion. Contractor to establish service billing in its name and transfer service and billing to the Owner upon acceptance of the work as Substantially Complete and suitable for beneficial occupancy by the Owner. D Natural Gas Provide and pay for natural gas service to the work as and when required by the schedule to achieve Substantial Completion. Contractor to establish service billing in its name and transfer service and billing to the Owner upon acceptance of the work as Substantially Complete and suitable for beneficial occupancy by the Owner. E Temporary Heat and Ventilation Provide temporary heat as necessary for protection or completion of the Work. Provide temporary heat and ventilation to assure safe working conditions; maintain enclosed areas at a minimum of 50 degrees F. F Telephone Provide emergency telephone service at the Project Site for use by Contractor personnel and others performing work or furnishing services. G Sanitary Facilities Provide and maintain sanitary facilities for persons on the Project Site, in compliance with federal, state, and local regulations. Locate toilets on the Project Site near the 12-2- 2011 01500 - 3 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS work and secluded from view insofar as possible. Keep toilets clean and supplied throughout the course of the Work. Enforce the use of sanitary facilities by construction personnel at the Project Site. Such facilities shall be enclosed. Pit -type toilets will not be permitted. No discharge will be allowed from these facilities. Collect and store sewage and waste so as not to cause a nuisance or health problem; have sewage and waste hauled off -site and properly disposed in accordance with local regulations. Control areas where sanitary facilities are located in conformance with Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. 1.06 FIELD OFFICE A Provision of a Field Office and other specific temporary facilities as required in paragraph B below UNLESS otherwise stated in Section 00800 - Special Conditions of the Agreement, or Section 01100 — Summary of Work. Provide for transportation, move -in, set-up, tie -down and, when project is complete, removal and move -out. The Contractor shall confirm location of office and other temporary facilities with Owner's Representative at Pre -Construction Meeting prior to delivery and set up. Location of temporary facilities shall be approved by the Owner's Representative by way of the submittal process. B. At a minimum, the Contractor's field office shall provide for, contain or serve to: provide a secured space for project administrative operations, periodic progress meetings, on -site storage for project files and plans, office space for CONTRACTOR's field supervisory personnel and provide a separate securable office space for OWNER's Representative including: meeting table and chairs, a single two drawer filing cabinet, a built-in drawing table and plan holders. Provide electric lighting and HVAC to the mobile office. 1. Field Office shall provide for, at a minimum, a high speed internet connection for use by Owner's Representative or Construction Manager as controlled by Paragraph A above. 1.07 STORAGE OF MATERIALS A Provide for storage of materials under the provisions of Section 01600 — Material & Equipment. 1.08 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A Contractor shall prepare, submit and follow a Safety Program that complies with federal, state, and local safety codes, statutes, and practices. Include in the Safety Program documented response to excavation, embankment, and trench safety requirements as specified in Section 01570 — Trench Safety System. B Conduct operations in strict accord with applicable federal, state and local safety codes and statutes and with good construction practice. The Contractor is fully responsible and obligated to establish and maintain procedures for safety of all work, personnel and equipment involved in the Work. 12-2-2011 01500 - 4 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS C Observe and comply with Texas Occupational Safety Act (Art. 5182a, V.C.S.) and with all safety and health standards promulgated by Secretary of Labor under Section 107 of Contract Work Hours and Standards Act, published in OSHA Standards - 29 CFR, Part 1926, and adopted by Secretary of Labor under the Williams -Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, and to any other legislation enacted for safety and health of Contractor employees. Such safety and health standards apply to subcontractors and their employees as well as to the Contractor and its employees. D Observance of and compliance with the regulations shall be solely and without qualification the responsibility of the Contractor without reliance or superintendence of or direction by the Engineer or the Engineer's representative. Immediately advise the Engineer of investigation or inspection by Federal Safety and Health inspectors of the Contractor or subcontractor's work or place of work on the Project Site under this Contract, and after such investigation or inspection, advise the Engineer of the results. Submit one copy of accident reports to Engineer within ten (10) days of occurrence. E Protect areas occupied by workmen using the best available devices for detection of lethal and combustible gases. Test such devices frequently to assure their functional capability. Constantly observe infiltration of liquids into the Work area for visual or odor evidence of contamination. Take immediate and appropriate steps to seal off entry of contaminated liquids to the Work area. F Safety measures, including but not limited to safety personnel, first -aid equipment, ventilating equipment and safety equipment, in the Plans and Technical Specifications are obligations of the Contractor. G Maintain required coordination with the local Police and Fire Departments during the entire period covered by the Contract. 1.09 FIRST AID EQUIPMENT A Provide a first aid kit throughout the construction period. List telephone numbers for physicians, hospitals, and ambulance services in each first aid kit. B Have at least one person thoroughly trained in first aid procedures present on the Project Site whenever work is in progress. 1.10 FIRE PROTECTION A Fire Protection Standards. Conform to specified fire protection and prevention requirements as well as those that may be established by Federal, State, or local governmental agencies. B. Comply with all applicable provisions of NFPA Standard No. 241, Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition Operations. Provide portable fire extinguishers, rated not less than 2A or 5B in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 10, Portable Fire Extinguishers, for each temporary building, and for every 3000 square feet of floor area of facilities under construction. 12-2- 2011 01500 - 5 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Locate portable fire extinguishers within 50 feet maximum from any point on the Project Site. C. Fire Prevention and Safety Measures. Prohibit smoking in hazardous areas. Post suitable warning signs in areas that are continuously or intermittently hazardous. Use metal safety containers for storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids. Do not store flammable or combustible liquids in or near stairways or exits. Maintain clear exits from all points within a structure. 1.11 SECURITY MEASURES A Protect all materials, equipment, and property associated with the Work from loss, theft, damage, and vandalism. Contractor's duty to protect property includes Owner's property. B If existing fencing or barriers are breached or removed for purposes of construction, provide and maintain temporary security fencing equal to existing as approved by Owner's Representative. 1.12 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC UTILITIES A Prevent damage to existing public utilities during construction. These utilities are shown on the Plans at their approximate locations. Give owners of these utilities at least 48 hours notice before commencing Work in the area, for locating the utilities during construction, and for making adjustments or relocation of the utilities when they conflict with the proposed Work. 1.13 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Preventive Actions. Take precautions, provide programs, and take actions necessary to protect the Work and public and private property from damage. Take action to prevent damage, injury or loss, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Store apparatus, materials, supplies, and equipment in an orderly, safe manner that will not unduly interfere with progress of the Work or the Work of any other contractor, any utility service company, or the Owner's operations. b. Provide suitable storage for materials that are subject to damage by exposure to weather, theft, breakage, or otherwise. c. Place upon the Work or any part thereof only such loads as are consistent with the safety of that portion of the Work. d. Frequently clean up refuse, rubbish, scrap materials, and debris caused by construction operations, keeping the Work safe and orderly. 12-2- 2011 01500 - 6 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS e. Provide safe barricades and guard rails around openings, for scaffolding, for temporary stairs and ramps, around excavations, elevated walkways, and other hazardous areas. Obtain written consent from proper parties before entering or occupying with workers, tools, materials or equipment, privately owned land except on easements provided for construction. Assume full responsibility for the preservation of public and private property on or adjacent to the site. If any direct or indirect damage is done by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in execution of the Work by the Contractor, it shall be restored by the Contractor to a condition equal to or better than that existing before the damage was done. B Barricades and Warning Signals. Where Work is performed on or adjacent to any roadway, right-of-way, or public place, furnish and erect barricades, fences, lights, warning signs, and danger signals; provide watchmen; and take other precautionary measures for the protection of persons or property and protection of the Work. Conform to Section 01555 — Traffic Control & Regulation. C Preserving Control Points Maintain permanent benchmarks, public or private elevation or property demarcation and control monumentation, or other reference points. Unless otherwise directed in writing, replace at no cost to the Owner, those monuments, property corners or other permanent demarcations that are damaged or destroyed in accordance with Section 01720 — Field Surveying. D Tree and Plant Protection. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, outside of grading limits and within the grading limits as designated on the Plans, and in accordance with requirements of Section 01563 — Tree & Plant Protection. E Protection of Underground and Surface Structures Known underground structures, including water, sewer, electric, and telephone services are shown on the Plans in accordance with the best information available, but is not guaranteed to be correct or complete. Contractor is responsible for making Locate Calls. Explore ahead of trenching and excavation work and uncover obstructing underground structures sufficiently to determine their location, to prevent damage to them and to prevent interruption of utility services. Restore to original condition damages to underground structure at no additional cost to the Owner. Immediately notify the agency or company owning any existing utility which is damaged, broken, or disturbed. Obtain approval from the Engineer and agency for any repairs or relocations, either temporary or permanent. 12-2- 2011 01500 - 7 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Necessary changes in location of the Work may be made by the Engineer to avoid unanticipated underground structures. If permanent relocation of an underground structure or other subsurface installations is required and not otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, the Engineer will direct Contractor in writing to perform the Work, which shall be paid for under the provisions for changes in the Contract Price as described in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement. Support in place and protect from direct or indirect injury to underground and surface structures located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Install such supports carefully and as required by the party owning or controlling such structure. Before installing structure supports, Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that the methods and procedures to be used have been approved by the owner of the structure. Avoid moving or in any way changing the property of public utilities or private service corporations without prior written consent of a responsible official of that service or public utility. Representatives of these utilities reserve the right to enter within the limits of this project for the purpose of maintaining their properties, or of making such changes or repairs to their property that may be considered necessary by performance of this Contract. Notify the owners and/or operators of utilities and pipelines of the nature of construction operations to be performed and the date or dates on which those operations will be performed. When construction operations are required in the immediate vicinity of existing structures, pipelines, or utilities, give a minimum of five (5) working days advance notice. Probe and flag the location of underground utilities prior to commencement of excavation. Keep flags in place until construction operations reach and uncover the utility. Assume risks attending the presence or proximity of underground and surface structures within or adjacent to the limits to the Work including but not limited to damage and expense for direct or indirect injury caused by the Work to any structure. Immediately repair damage caused, to the satisfaction of the owner of the damaged structure. 1.14 PROTECTION OF THE WORK Provide protection of installed products to prevent damage from subsequent operations. Remove protection facilities when no longer needed, prior to completion of the Work. Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment, materials, and surfaces. 1.15 ROADS AND PARKING A Prevent interference with traffic and Owner operations on existing roads. B Minimize use of existing streets and driveways by construction traffic. C Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment, materials, and surfaces. 12-2- 2011 01500 - 8 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS D Construct and maintain temporary detours, ramps, and roads to provide for normal public traffic flow when use of public roads or streets is closed by necessities of the Work. E Provide mats or other means to prevent overloading or damage to existing roadways from tracked equipment or exceptionally large or heavy trucks or equipment F Designate temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off -site parking. Locate as approved by Engineer. G Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment unnecessarily in existing parking areas. 1.16 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS A Provide and maintain methods, equipment, and temporary construction as necessary for controls over environmental conditions at the construction site and adjacent areas. B Comply with statutes, regulations, and ordinances which relate to the proposed Work for the prevention of environmental pollution and preservation of natural resources, including but not limited to the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969, PL 91- 190, Executive Order 11514. C Provide, install and maintain storm water runoff control including but not limited to temporary entrance, silt fencing, etc. as specified in Contract Documents. D Recognize and adhere to the environmental requirements of the Project. Disturbed areas shall be strictly limited to boundaries established by the Contract Documents. Burning of rubbish, debris or waste materials is not permitted. 1.17 POLLUTION CONTROL A Provide methods, means, and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water or atmosphere by discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. B Provide equipment and personnel to perform emergency measures required to contain any spillage, and to remove contaminated soils or liquids. Excavate and dispose of any contaminated earth off -site, and replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil. C Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems in conformance with TPDES requirements and Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. D Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. 12-2-2011 01500 - 9 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS E Use equipment during construction that conforms to current federal, state, and local laws and regulations. 1.18 PEST AND RODENT CONTROL A Provide rodent and pest control as necessary to prevent infestation of Project Site. B Employ methods and use materials which will not adversely affect conditions at the Project Site or adjoining properties. 1.19 NOISE CONTROL A Provide vehicles, equipment, and construction activities that minimize noise to the greatest degree practicable. Noise levels shall conform to OSHA Standards - 29 CFR and in no case will noise levels be permitted which create a nuisance in the surrounding neighborhoods. B Conduct construction operations during daylight hours from 7:30 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. except as approved by Engineer. C Comply with Chapter 19 NOISE, Codes of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas. 1.20 DUST CONTROL A Control objectionable dust caused by operation of vehicles and equipment under the provisions of Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. 1.21 WATER RUNOFF AND EROSION CONTROL A Provide methods to control surface water, runoff, subsurface water, and water pumped from excavations and structures to prevent damage to the Work, the Project Site, or adjoining properties in accordance with Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water & Surface Water and Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. B Inspect earthwork periodically to detect any evidence of the start of erosion. Apply corrective measures as required to control erosion. 2.0 PRODUCTS -Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 12-2-2011 01500 - 10 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND MOBILIZATION Section 01505 MOBILIZATION 1.1 GENERAL 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A Mobilization of construction equipment and facilities onto the Work. B Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) 2. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Texas MUTCD) 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 08/2018 A. Payment for Mobilization is on a Lump Sum basis and shall not exceed three percent (3%) of the total bid price. B. Payment for 50% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the first monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the following items, as applicable: 1. Schedule of Values (Section 01350 — Submittals) 2. Trench Safety Program (Section 01570 — Trench Safety System) 3. Construction Schedule (Section 01350 — Submittals) 4. Pre -construction Photographs (Section 01380 — Construction Photographs) 5. Installation and acceptance of Project Identification Sign(s) (Section 01580 — Project Identification Signs) 6. Installation and acceptance of Field Office (Section 01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls) 7. Installation and acceptance of TPDES requirements (Section 01565 - TPDES Requirements) C. Payment for 25% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the second monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the following items, as applicable: 1. Installation of High Speed Internet Access (Section 01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls) D. Payment for 15% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the third monthly Application for Payment. E. Payment for the remaining 10% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the fourth monthly Application for Payment. F. For contracts with a duration of less than 120 days, payment for the remaining 50% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the second monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the items listed in B. and C. above, as applicable. 01505 - 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND MOBILIZATION G. Mobilization payments will be subject to Retainage as stipulated in Section 00700 General Conditions of Agreement. 2.1 PRODUCTS 2.2 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Provide specified number of project identification sign(s) per Section 01580. The name, address and contact information of the general contractor for the project shall be shown on the sign per Section 01580 and the attached exhibit. 3.1 EXECUTION 3.2 PLACEMENT OF PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Place a Project Identification Sign as described in Section 01580, part 1.03, D visible to passing traffic or as directed by Engineer. END OF SECTION 08/2018 01505 - 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND 1.0 GENERAL STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS Section 01550 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of erosion and sediment control for Stabilized Construction Exits used during construction and until final development of the Project site. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350 — Submittals 2. Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal 3. Section 01565 — TPDES Requirements 4. Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4632, "Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required in this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other product data on Geotextile fabric. C Sieve analysis of aggregates conforming to requirements in this Section, 2.02 "Course Aggregates". 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC A Provide woven or non -woven geotextile fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. B By ASTM D 4632, geotextile fabric shall have a minimum grab strength of 270 psi any principal direction, and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C Both the geotextile and threads shall be resistant to chemical attack, mildew, and rot and shall contain ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable life at a temperature range of 0°F to 120°F. 12/2015 01550 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS D Representative Manufacturers: Mirafi, Inc., Or -Equal. 2.02 COARSE AGGREGATES A Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone, gravel, concrete, crushed blast furnace slag, or a combination of these materials. Aggregate shall be composed of clean, hard, durable materials free from adherent coatings, salt, alkali, dirt, clay, loam, shale, soft or flaky materials, or organic and injurious matter. B Course aggregates shall be open graded with a size 3" to 6". 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A The Contractor shall provide stabilized construction exits at the construction, staging, parking, storage, and disposal areas to keep the street clean of mud carried by construction vehicle and equipment. Such erosion and sediment controls shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Plans and specified in this Section. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C Maintain existing erosion and sediment control systems located within the Project Site until acceptance of the Work or until directed by the Engineer to remove and discard the existing system. Maintenance shall be performed routinely to remove soil build up or, as required by the Engineer. D Regularly inspect and repair or replace components of stabilized construction exits. Unless otherwise directed, maintain them until the Work is accepted by the Owner. Remove stabilized construction exits promptly when directed by the Engineer. Discard removed materials in accordance with Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal. E Equipment and vehicles shall be prohibited by the Contractor from maneuvering on areas outside of dedicated rights -of -way and easements for construction. Damage caused by construction traffic to erosion and sediment control systems, including vegetative systems shall be repaired immediately. F Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in the Section 01566 - Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation and Section 01565 TPDES Requirements. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A Provide stabilized access roads, subdivision roads, parking areas, and other on -site vehicle transportation routes where shown on Plans. 12/2015 01550 - 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS B Provide stabilized construction exits, and truck washing areas when approved by Engineer, of the sizes and locations where shown on Plans or as specified in this Section. C Vehicles leaving construction areas shall have their tires cleaned to remove sediment prior to entrance onto public right-of-way. When washing is needed to remove sediment, Contractor shall construct a truck washing area. Truck washing shall be done on stabilized areas which drain into a drainage system protected by erosion and sediment control measures. D Details for Stabilized Construction Exits are shown on the Plans. Construction of all other stabilized areas shall be to the same requirements. Roadway width shall be at least 14 feet for one-way traffic and 20 feet for two-way traffic and shall be sufficient for all ingress and egress. Furnish and place geotextile fabric as a permeable separator to prevent mixing of coarse aggregate with underlying soil. Exposure of geotextile fabric to the elements between laydown and cover shall be a maximum of 14 days to minimize damage potential. E Roads and parking areas shall be graded to provide sufficient drainage away from stabilized areas. Use sandbags, gravel, boards, or similar methods to prevent sediment from entering public right-of-way, receiving stream or storm water conveyance system. F The stabilized areas shall be inspected and maintained daily. Provide periodic top dressing with additional coarse aggregates to maintain the required depth. Repair and clean out damaged control measures used to trap sediment. All sediment spilled, dropped, washed, or tracked onto public right-of-way shall be removed immediately. G The length of the stabilized area shall be as shown on the Plans, but not less than 50 feet. The thickness shall not be less than 8 inches. The width shall not be less than full width of all points of ingress or egress. H Stabilization for other areas shall have the same coarse aggregate, thickness, and width requirements as the stabilized construction exit, except where shown otherwise on the Plans. I Stabilized area may be widened or lengthened to accommodate truck washing area when authorized by Engineer. J Alternative methods of construction may be utilized when shown on Plans, or when approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 12/2015 01550 - 3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND 1.0 GENERAL TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION Section 01555 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for traffic control plans, signs, signals, control devices, flares, lights and traffic signals, as well as construction parking control, designated haul routes and bridging of trenches and excavations. B Requirements for and qualifications of Flaggers. C References to Technical Specifications: 1 Section 01350 — Submittals 2. Section 01140 — Contractor's Use of Premises D Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Texas MUTCD) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Traffic Control and Regulation. Measurement is on a Lump Sum basis for Traffic Control and Regulation, including submittal of a traffic control plan if different from the one provided on the Plans, provision of traffic control devices, and provision of equipment and personnel as necessary to protect the Work and the public. The amount invoiced shall be determined based on the Schedule of Values submitted for traffic control and regulation. B Flaggers. Measurement is on a Lump Sum basis for Flaggers as required for the Work. The amount invoiced shall be determined based on the Schedule of Values submitted for Flaggers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B A Traffic Control Plan responsive to the Texas MUTCD and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer is incorporated into the Plans. If the Contractor proposes to implement traffic control different than the plan provided, he shall submit a Traffic Control Plan in conformance with Texas MUTCD for approval of the Engineer. C For both the Traffic Control Plan and Flaggers' use, submit Schedules of Values within 30 days following the Notice to Proceed. D Each week submit a daily log for Flaggers listing name, badge number, time start, time finish, and hours worked. 03/2008 01555 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1.04 FLAGGERS A Unless otherwise specified, use only Flaggers who are off -duty, regularly employed, uniformed Peace Officers. B Flaggers are required at the following locations: 1. Where multi -lane vehicular traffic must be diverted into single -lane vehicular traffic. 2. Where vehicular traffic must change lanes abruptly. 3. Where construction equipment either enters or crosses vehicular traffic lanes and walks. 4. Where construction equipment may intermittently encroach on vehicular traffic lanes and unprotected walks and cross -walks. 5. Where construction activities might affect public safety and convenience. 6. Where traffic regulation is needed due to rerouting of vehicular traffic around the work site. 7. When requested by Owner. C The use of Flaggers is for the purpose of assisting in the regulation of traffic flow and movement, and does not in any way relieve the contractor of full responsibility for taking such other steps and provide such other Flaggers or personnel as the Contractor may deem necessary to protect the work and the public, and does not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for any damage for which he would otherwise be liable. Flaggers shall be used and maintained at such points for such periods of time as may be required to provide for the public safety and convenience of travel. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGNS, SIGNALS, AND DEVICES A Comply with Texas MUTCD regulations. B Traffic Cones and Drums, Flares and Lights: As approved by agencies having jurisdiction. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PUBLIC ROADS A Abide by laws and regulations of governing authorities when using public roads. If the Contractor's work requires that public roads be temporarily impeded or closed, approvals shall be obtained from governing authorities and permits paid for before starting any work. Coordinate activities with the Engineer. B Contractor shall maintain at all times a 10-foot-wide all-weather lane adjacent to work areas which shall be kept free of construction equipment and debris and shall be for the use of emergency vehicles, or as otherwise provided in the Traffic Control Plan. 03/2008 01555 - 2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION C Contractor shall not obstruct the normal flow of traffic from 7:00 a.m. to 9:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. on designated major arterials or as directed by the Engineer. D Contractor shall maintain local driveway access to residential and commercial properties adjacent to work areas at all times. E Cleanliness of Surrounding Streets: 1. Keep streets used for entering or leaving the job area free of excavated material, debris, and any foreign material resulting from construction operations. Leave the area broom -clean or its equivalent at the end of the work day. F Control vehicular parking to prevent interference with public traffic and parking, and access by emergency vehicles. G Monitor parking of construction personnel's vehicles in existing facilities. Maintain vehicular access to and through parking areas. H Prevent parking on or adjacent to access roads or in non -designated areas. 3.02 FLARES AND LIGHTS A Provide flares and lights during hours of low visibility to delineate traffic lanes and to guide traffic. 3.03 HAUL ROUTES A Utilize haul routes designated by Owner or shown on the Plans for construction traffic. B Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes. C Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic and minimize interference with public traffic. D Contractor shall be responsible for any damage caused by vehicles utilizing haul routes. 3.04 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNALS A Install traffic control devices at approaches to the site and on site, at crossroads, detours, parking areas, and elsewhere as needed to direct construction and affected public traffic. B Relocate traffic signs and control devices as Work progresses to maintain effective traffic control. 3.05 BRIDGING TRENCHES AND EXCAVATIONS A Whenever necessary, bridge trenches and excavation to permit an unobstructed flow of traffic. 03/2008 01555 - 3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION B Secure bridging against displacement by using adjustable cleats, angles, bolts or other devices whenever bridge is installed: 1. On an existing bus route; 2. When more than five percent of daily traffic is comprised of commercial or truck traffic; 3. When more than two separate plates are used for the bridge; or 4. When bridge is to be used for more than five consecutive days. C Install bridging to operate with minimum noise. D Adequately shore the trench or excavation to support bridge and traffic. E Extend steel plates used for bridging a minimum of one foot beyond edges of trench or excavation. Use temporary paving materials (premix) to feather edges of plates to minimize wheel impact on secured bridging. F Use steel plates of sufficient thickness to support H-20 loading, truck or lane, that produces maximum stress. 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140 — Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. C Repair damage caused by installation. D Remove post settings to a depth of 2 feet. END OF SECTION 03/2008 01555 - 4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE Section 01560 FILTER FABRIC FENCE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of filter fabric fence to control erosion and contain sediments and pollutants from overland flow. Filter fabric fence is not for use in channelized flow areas. Filter fabric fence may be reinforced. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 — Measurement & Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 — Submittals 3. Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal 4. Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3786, "Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting strength of Textile Fabrics" b. ASTM D 4632, "Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" 1.02 MEASURMENT AND PAYMENT A Filter fabric fence will be measured by the linear foot between the limits of the beginning and ending of wooden stakes. B Payment for filter fabric fence will include and be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials, supervision, and all incidental expenses for construction of these items, complete in place, including, but not limited to protection of trees, maintenance requirements, repair and replacement of damaged sections, removal of sediment deposits, and removal of erosion and sediment control systems at the end of construction. C Refer to Section 01200 — Measurement & Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other Product Data on geotextile fabric. 03/2008 01560 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILTER FABRIC A Provide woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. B By ASTM D 4632, geotextile fabric shall have a grab strength of 100 psi in any principal direction, a Mullen burst strength exceeding 200psi by ASTM - D3786, and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C Filter fabric shall contain ultraviolet inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F. D Representative Manufacturer: Mirafi, Inc., or equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A Provide erosion and sediment control systems at the locations shown on Plans. Such systems shall be of the type indicated and shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Plans and specified in this Section. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C Regularly inspect and repair or replace damaged components of filter fabric fence as specified in this Section, 3.02F. Unless otherwise directed, maintain the erosion and sediment control systems until the Work is accepted by the Owner. Remove erosion and sediment control systems promptly when directed by the Engineer. Discard removed materials in accordance with Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal. D Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A Provide filter fabric fence systems in accordance with the Plan detail for Filter fabric fence. Filter fabric fence shall be installed in such a manner that surface runoff will percolate through the system in sheet flow fashion and allow sediment to be retained and accumulated. B Attach the filter fabric to 2-inch by 2-inch wooden stakes spaced a maximum of 3 feet apart and embedded a minimum of 8 inches. If filter fabric is factory preassembled 03/2008 01560 - 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE with support netting, then maximum spacing allowable is 8 feet. Install wooden stakes at a slight angle toward the source of anticipated runoff. C Trench in the toe of the filter fabric fence with a spade or mechanical trencher as shown on the Plans. Lay filter fabric along the edges of the trench. Backfill and compact trench. D Filter fabric fence shall have a minimum height of 18 inches and a maximum height of 36 inches above natural ground. E Provide the filter fabric in continuous rolls and cut to the length of the fence to minimize the use of joints. When joints are necessary, splice the Fabric together only at a support post with a minimum 6-inch overlap and seal securely. F Inspect filter fabric fence systems after each rainfall, daily during periods of prolonged rainfall, and at a minimum once each week. Repair or replace damaged sections immediately. Remove sediment deposits when silt reaches a depth one-third the height of the fence or 6 inches, whichever is less. END OF SECTION 03/2008 01560 - 3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL Section 01562 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Disposal of waste material and salvageable material. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350 — Submittals 2. Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation 3. Section 01600 — Materials & Equipment 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Obtain and submit applicable permits for proposed disposal sites. C Submit a Waste Material Disposal Plan. D Submit a copy of written permission from property owners, along with a description of the property, prior to disposal of excess material adjacent to the Project Site. Submit a written and signed release from property owner upon completion of disposal work. City of Pearland requires individual fill placement permits for all fill placed within the City limits. 1.04 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL PLAN A Contractor shall formulate and implement a plan for the collection and disposal of waste materials on the Project Site which includes the following information: 1. Schedule for collection and inspection. 2. Location of trash and waste receptacles. 3. Provisions for liquid waste and potential water pollutants material. B The plan shall comply with applicable federal, state, and local health and safety regulations and Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 07/2006 01562 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SALVAGEABLE MATERIAL A Excavated material: When indicated on Plans, load, haul, and deposit excavated material at a location or locations outside the limits of Project Site. B Base, surface, and bedding material: Deliver gravel, asphaltic, or other base and surfacing material designated for salvage to the location designated by the Engineer. C Pipe culvert: Deliver culverts designated for salvage to Owner's storage area. D Other salvageable materials: Conform to requirements of individual Technical Specifications. E Coordinate delivery of salvageable material with Engineer. F When temporary, on -site storage of salvaged materials is required, comply with applicable provisions of Section 01600 — Materials & Equipment. 3.02 SEDIMENT DISPOSAL A Remove sediment deposits and dispose of them at the designated spoil site for the Project. If a spoil site is not designated on the Plans, dispose of sediment off site at a location not in or adjacent to a stream or floodplain. B Off -site disposal is the responsibility of the Contractor. C Sediment to be placed at the Project Site should be spread evenly throughout the designated area, compacted and stabilized. Sediment shall not be allowed to flush into a stream or drainage way. D If sediment has been contaminated, it shall be disposed of in accordance with existing federal, state, and local rules and regulations. 3.03 EXCESS MATERIAL, WASTE, AND EQUIPMENT A Vegetation, rubble, broken concrete, debris, asphaltic concrete pavement, excess soil, and other materials not designated for salvage, shall become the property of Contractor and shall be removed from the Project Site and legally disposed of. B Dispose of removed equipment, materials, waste and debris in a manner conforming to applicable laws and regulations C Excess soil may be deposited on private property adjacent to the Project Site when written permission is obtained from property owner under the provisions of this Section, 1.03D. 07/2006 01562 - 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL D Verify the flood plain status of any proposed disposal site. Do not dispose of excavated materials in an area designated as within the 100-year Flood Hazard Area. E Waste materials shall be removed from the site on a daily basis, such that the site is maintained in a neat and orderly condition. F No materials shall be disposed in a manner to damage the Owner in any way. END OF SECTION 07/2006 01562 - 3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION Section 01563 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Tree and plant protection. B References to Technical Specifications: None 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Preserve and protect existing trees and plants to remain from foliage, branch, trunk, or root damage that could result from construction operations. B Prevent following types of damage: 1. Compaction of root zone by foot or vehicular traffic, or material storage. 2. Trunk damage from equipment operations, material storage, or from nailing or bolting. 3. Trunk and branch damage caused by ropes or guy wires or machine impacts. 4. Root poisoning from spilled solvents, gasoline, paint, and other noxious materials. 5. Branch damage due to improper pruning or trimming. 6. Damage from lack of water due to: a. Cutting or altering natural water migration patterns near root zones. b. Failure to provide adequate watering. 7. Damage from alteration of soil pH factor caused by depositing lime, concrete, plaster, or other base materials near roots. 8. Cutting feeder of roots or roots larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. 1.04 DAMAGE ASSESSMENT A When trees, other than those designated for removal, are destroyed or badly damaged as a result of construction operations, remove and replace with same size, species, and variety up to and including 8 inches in trunk diameter. Trees larger than 8 inches in diameter shall be replaced with an 8-inch diameter tree of the same species and variety and total contract amount will be reduced by an amount determined from the following International Shade Tree Conference formula: 0.7854 x D2 x $10.00 where D is diameter in inches of tree or shrub trunk measured 12 inches above grade. B All necessary tree replacements shall be as approved by Engineer/Urban Forester. 02/2013 01563 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Asphalt paint: Emulsified asphalt or other adhesive, elastic, antiseptic coating formulated for horticultural use on cut or injured plant tissue, free from kerosene and coal creosote. B Burlap: Suitable for use as tree wrapping. C Fertilizer: Liquid containing 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorus, and 5 percent potash. D. Temporary Barrier Fence: Plastic, bright orange color for visibility, 48 inches in height, 8.5 pounds weight minimum. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING TREES AND SHRUBS A Except for trees and shrubs shown on Plans to be removed, all trees and shrubs within the Project Site area are to remain and be protected from damage. B For designated trees to be removed, perform the following: 1. Stake right-of-way limits and identify any tree of diameter greater than 4 inches which is to be removed. Mark trees prior to felling with an X in orange paint, clearly visible, on the trunk, and at eye level. 2. After marking trees give a minimum of 48-hours notice in writing to the Engineer of intent to begin felling operations. 3. Trees whose trunks are only partially in the right-of-way shall be protected and preserved as described below. C For trees or shrubs to remain, perform the following: 1. Trim trees and shrubs only as necessary. a. Trees and shrubs requiring pruning for construction should also be pruned for balance as well as to maintain proper form and branching habit. b. Cut limbs at branch collar. No stubs should remain on trees. Branch cuts should not gouge outer layer of tree structure or trunk. 2. Use extreme care to prevent excessive damage to root systems. a. Roots in construction areas will be cut smoothly with a trencher before excavation begins. Do not allow ripping of roots with a backhoe or other equipment. b. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out. c. Cover exposed roots with soil as soon as possible. 3. Prevent damage or compaction of root zone (area inside dripline) by construction activities. a. Do not allow scarring of trunks or limbs by equipment or other means. 02/2013 01563 - 2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION b. Do not store construction materials, vehicles, or excavated material inside dripline of trees. c. Do not pour liquid materials inside dripline. 4. Water and fertilize trees and shrubs that will remain to maintain their health during construction period. a. Supplemental watering of landscaping during construction should be done once a week in months receiving average rainfall and twice a week in months receiving below average rainfall. b. This watering shall consist of saturating soils at least 6 to 8 inches beneath surface. 5. Water areas currently being served by private sprinkler systems while systems are temporarily taken out of service to maintain health of existing landscapes. 6. At option of the Contractor and with the Engineer's permission, trees and shrubs to remain may be temporarily transplanted and returned to original positions under supervision of professional horticulturist. 3.02 PROTECTIVE CONTROLS A Protection of trees or shrubs in open area: 1. Install steel drive-in fence posts in protective circle, approximately 8 feet on center, at the dripline of the leaf canopy of trees or 2 ft. around shrubs. 2. Drive steel drive-in fence posts 3 feet minimum into ground, leaving 5 feet minimum above ground. 3. For trees or shrubs in paved areas, use moveable posts constructed from concrete -filled steel pipe 2-1/2 inches minimum in diameter mounted in rubber auto tires filled with concrete. 4. Mount plastic temporary barrier safety fence on posts. B Timber -wrap protection for trees in close proximity of moving or mechanical equipment and construction work: 1. Wrap trunk with layer of burlap. 2. Insta11 2 x 4's or 2 x 6's (5-foot to 6-foot lengths) vertically, spaced 3 inches to 5 inches apart around circumference of tree trunk. 3. Tie in place with 12 to 9 gage steel wire. 3.03 MAINTENANCE OF NEWLY PLANTED TREES A Water newly planted trees adequately to maintain and support healthy plants at the time of planting. B The Contractor guarantees that trees planted for this Work shall remain alive and healthy at least until the end of a one-year warranty period. 1. Within four weeks of notice from Owner, Contractor shall replace, at his expense, any dead trees or any trees that in the opinion of Owner, have become unhealthy or unsightly or have lost their natural shape as a result of additional growth, improper pruning or maintenance, or weather conditions. 02/2013 01563 - 3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 2. When tree must be replaced, the guarantee period for that tree shall begin on date of replacement of tree, subject to the Owner's inspection, for no less than one year. 3. Straighten leaning trees and bear entire cost. 4. Dispose of trees rejected at any time by Engineer at Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 02/2013 01563 - 4 of 4 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER Section 01564 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER AND SURFACE WATER 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Dewatering, depressurizing, draining, and maintaining trench and structure excavations and foundation beds in dry and stable condition. B Protecting work against surface runoff and rising flood waters. C Disposing of removed water. D References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 — Measurement & Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 — Submittals 3. Section 01570 — Trench Safety Systems 4. Section 01565 — TPDES Requirements 5. Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation E Referenced Standards: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 2. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) 3. Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas 4. Water Well Drillers and Pump Installers Advisory Council (WWD/PI) F Definitions: 1. Ground Water Control Systems - installations external to the excavation such as well points, eductors, or deep wells. Ground water control includes dewatering and depressurization. a. Dewatering - lowering the water table and intercepting seepage which would otherwise emerge from slopes or bottoms of excavations and disposing of removed water. The intent of dewatering is to increase stability of excavated slopes; prevent dislocation of material from slopes or bottoms of excavations; reduce lateral loads on sheeting and bracing; improve excavating and hauling characteristics of excavated material; prevent failure or heaving of the bottom of excavations; and to provide suitable conditions for placement of backfill materials and construction of structures and other installations. b. Depressurization - reduction in piezometric pressure within strata not controlled by dewatering alone, as required to prevent failure or heaving of excavation bottom. 2. Surface Water Control - diversion and drainage of surface water runoff and rain water away from the excavation. 3. Excavation Drainage - keeping excavations free of surface and seepage water. 02/2008 01564 - 1 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for and control of ground water for open cut pipe excavations shall be on a linear foot basis and shall not exceed the length of open cut pipe installation in the area requiring ground water control. B Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for control of ground water for any condition(s) other than those described in this Section, 1.02A. No separate payment will be made for control of surface water. Include the cost to control non -pipe excavation ground water and surface water in price for Work requiring such controls. C Refer to Section 01200 — Measurement & Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit a Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan for review by the Engineer prior to start of any field work. The plan shall be signed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. The plan shall include the following: 1. Results of subsurface investigation and description of the extent and characteristics of water bearing layers subject to ground water control. 2. Names of equipment suppliers and installation subcontractors. 3. A description of proposed ground water control systems indicating arrangement, location, depth and capacities of system components, installation details and criteria, and operation and maintenance procedures. 4. A description of proposed monitoring and control system indicating depths and locations of piezometers and monitoring wells, monitoring installation details and criteria, type of equipment and instrumentation with pertinent data and characteristics. 5. A description of proposed filters including types, sizes, capacities and manufacturer's application recommendations. 6. Design calculations demonstrating adequacy of proposed systems for intended applications. Define potential area of influence of ground water control operation near contaminated areas. 7. Operating requirements, including piezometric control elevations for dewatering and depressurization. 8. Excavation drainage methods including typical drainage layers, sump pump application and other necessary means. 9. Surface water control and drainage installations. 10. Proposed methods and locations for disposing of removed water. C Submit the following records upon completed initial installation: 1. Installation and development reports for well points, eductors, and deep wells. 02/2008 01564 - 2 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER 2. Installation reports and baseline readings for piezometers and monitoring wells. 3. Baseline analytical test data of water from monitoring wells. 4. Initial flow rates. D Submit the following records on a weekly basis during operations: 1. Records of flow rates and piezometric elevations obtained during monitoring of dewatering and depressurization. Refer to this Section, 3.02 "Requirements for Eductor, Well Points, or Deep Wells". 2. Maintenance records for ground water control installations, piezometers, and monitoring wells. E Submit the following records at end of the Work. Decommissioning (abandonment) reports for monitoring wells and piezometers installed by other during the design phase and left for Contractor's monitoring and use. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A Conduct subsurface investigations to identify groundwater conditions and to provide parameters for design, installation, and operation of groundwater control systems. B Design a ground water control system, compatible with the requirements of OSHA Standards - 29 CFR, Part 1926, and Section 01570 - Trench Safety Systems of these Technical Specifications, to produce the following results: 1. Effectively reduce the hydrostatic pressure affecting excavations. 2. Develop a substantially dry and stable subgrade for subsequent construction operations. 3. Preclude damage to adjacent properties, buildings, structures, utilities, installed facilities, and other work. 4. Prevent the loss of fines, seepage, boils, quick condition, or softening of the foundation strata. 5. Maintain stability of sides and bottom of excavations. C Ground water control systems may include single -stage or multiple -stage well point systems, eductor and ejector -type systems, deep wells, or combinations of these equipment types. D Provide drainage of seepage water and surface water, as well as water from any other source entering the excavation. Excavation drainage may include placement of drainage materials, such as crushed stone and filter fabric, together with sump pumping. E Provide ditches, berms, pumps and other methods necessary to divert and drain surface water from excavation and other work areas. F Locate ground water control and drainage systems so as not to interfere with utilities, construction operations, adjacent properties, or adjacent water wells. 02/2008 01564 - 3 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER G Assume sole responsibility for ground water control systems and for any loss or damage resulting from partial or complete failure of protective measures and any settlement or resultant damage caused by the ground water control operations. Modify ground water control systems or operations if they cause or threaten to cause damage to new construction, existing site improvements, adjacent property, or adjacent water wells, or affect potentially contaminated areas. Repair damage caused by ground water control systems or resulting from failure of the system to protect property as required. H Provide an adequate number of piezometers installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide meaningful observations of the conditions affecting the excavation, adjacent structures, and water wells. Provide environmental monitoring wells installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide adequate observations of hydrostatic conditions and possible contaminant transport from contamination sources into the work area or into the ground water control system. J Decommission piezometers and monitoring wells installed during design phase studies and left for Contractors monitoring and use. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A Comply with requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. B Comply with TCEQ regulations and WWD/PI Advisory Council for development, drilling, and abandonment of wells used in dewatering system. C Obtain permit from TCEQ under the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES), for storm water discharge from construction sites. Refer to Section 01565 — TPDES, 3.02 "Certification Requirements". D Obtain all necessary permits from agencies with control over the use of groundwater and matters affecting well installation, water discharge, and use of existing storm drains and natural water sources. Because the review and permitting process may be lengthy, take early action to pursue and submit for the required approvals. E Monitor ground water discharge for contamination while performing pumping in the vicinity of potentially contaminated sites. F Implement control of ground and surface water under the provisions of Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A Equipment and materials are at the option of Contractor as necessary to achieve desired results for dewatering. Selected equipment and materials are subject to review 02/2008 01564 - 4 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER of the Engineer through Submittals required in Section 01350 — Submittals, 1.06 "Operations and Maintenance Data". B Eductors, well points, or deep wells, where used, must be furnished, installed and operated by an experienced contractor regularly engaged in ground water control system design, installation, and operation. C Equipment and instrumentation for monitoring and control of the ground water control system includes piezometers and monitoring wells, and devices, such as flow meters, for observing and recording flow rates. D All equipment must be in good repair and operating order. E Sufficient standby equipment and materials shall be kept available to ensure continuous operation, where required. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 GROUND WATER CONTROL A Perform a subsurface investigation by borings as necessary to identify water bearing layers, piezometric pressures, and soil parameters for design and installation of ground water control systems. Perform pump tests, if necessary to determine the drawdown characteristics of the water -bearing layers. The results shall be presented in the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan. Refer to this Section, 1.03B. B Provide labor, material, equipment, techniques and methods to lower, control and handle ground water in a manner compatible with construction methods and site conditions. Monitor effectiveness of the installed system and its effect on adjacent property. C Install, operate, and maintain ground water control systems in accordance with the Plan. Notify Engineer in writing of any changes made to accommodate field conditions and changes to the Work. Provide revised drawings and calculations with such notification. D Provide for continuous system operation, including nights, weekends, and holidays. Arrange for appropriate backup if electrical power is primary energy source for dewatering system. E Monitor operations to verify that the system lowers ground water piezometric levels at a rate required to maintain a dry excavation resulting in a stable subgrade for prosecution of subsequent operations. F Where hydrostatic pressures in confined water bearing layers exist below excavation, depressurize those zones to eliminate risk of uplift or other instability of excavation or installed works. Allowable piezometric elevations shall be defined in the Plan. 02/2008 01564 - 5 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER G Maintain water level below subgrade elevation. Do not allow levels to rise until foundation concrete has achieved design strength. H During backfilling, dewatering may be reduced to maintain water level a minimum of 5 feet below prevailing level of backfill. However, do not allow that water level to result in uplift pressures in excess of 80 percent of downward pressure produced by weight of structure or backfill in place. Do not allow water levels to rise into cement stabilized sand until at least 48 hour after placement. Provide a uniform diameter for each pipe drain run constructed for dewatering. Remove pipe drain when it has served its purpose. If removal of pipe is impractical, provide grout connections at 50-foot intervals and fill pipe with cement-bentonite grout or cement -sand grout when pipe is removed from service. J Extent of construction ground water control for structures with a permanent perforated underground drainage system may be reduced, such as for units designed to withstand hydrostatic uplift pressure. Provide a means of draining the affected portion of underground system, including standby equipment. Maintain drainage system during operations and remove it when no longer required. K Remove system upon completion of construction or when dewatering and control of surface or ground water is no longer required. L Compact backfill as required by the Contract Documents. 3.02 REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCTOR, WELL POINTS, OR DEEP WELLS A For aboveground piping in ground water control system, include a 12-inch minimum length of clear, transparent piping between every eductor well or well point and discharge header so that discharge from each installation can be visually monitored. B Install sufficient piezometers or monitoring wells to show that all trench or shaft excavations in water bearing materials are predrained prior to excavation. Provide separate piezometers for monitoring of dewatering and for monitoring of depressurization. Install piezometers and monitoring wells for tunneling as appropriate for Contractor's selected method of work. C Install piezometers or monitoring wells not less than one week in advance of beginning the associated excavation. D Dewatering may be omitted for portions of underdrains or other excavations, but only where auger borings and piezometers or monitoring wells show that soil is predrained by an existing system such that the criteria of the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan are satisfied. 02/2008 01564 - 6 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER E Replace installations that produce noticeable amounts of sediments after development. F Provide additional ground water control installations or change the methods in the event that the installations according to the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan do not provide satisfactory results based on the performance criteria defined by the Plan and by this Section. Submit a revised Plan according to this Section, 1.03A. G Mechanical dewatering equipment shall comply with Chapter 19 NOISE, Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas. 3.03 EXCAVATION DRAINAGE A Contractor may use excavation drainage methods if necessary to achieve well drained, stable trench conditions. The excavation drainage may consist of the following methods or combination of methods: 1. Sump pumping in combination with: a. Layer of crushed stone and filter fabric. b. Sand and gravel drains. 2. Wells for ground water control. B Use sump pumping and a drainage layer, as defined in ASTM D 2321, placed on the foundation beneath pipe bedding or thickened bedding layer of Class I material. 3.04 MAINTENANCE AND OBSERVATION A Conduct daily maintenance and observation of piezometers or monitoring wells while the ground water control installations or excavation drainage are operating in an area. Keep system in good operating condition. B Replace damaged and destroyed piezometers or monitoring wells with new piezometers or wells as necessary to meet observation schedule. C Cut off piezometers or monitoring wells in excavation areas where piping is exposed, only as necessary to perform observation as excavation proceeds. Continue to maintain and make observations, as specified. D Remove and grout piezometers inside or outside the excavation area when ground water control operations are complete. Remove and grout monitoring wells when directed by the Engineer. 3.05 MONITORING AND RECORDING A Monitor and record average flow rate of operation for each deep well, or for each wellpoint or eductor header used in dewatering system. Also monitor and record water level and ground water recovery. These records shall be obtained daily until steady conditions are achieved, and twice weekly thereafter. 02/2008 01564 - 7 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER B Observe and record elevation of water level daily as long as ground water control system is in operation, and weekly thereafter until the Work is completed or piezometers or wells are removed, except when Engineer determines that more frequent monitoring and recording are required. Comply with Engineer's direction for increased monitoring and recording and take measures as necessary to ensure effective dewatering for intended purpose. 3.06 SURFACE WATER CONTROL A Intercept surface water and divert it away from excavations through use of dikes, ditches, curb walls, pipes, sumps or other approved means. The requirement includes temporary works required to protect adjoining properties from surface drainage caused by construction operations. B Divert surface water and seepage water into sumps and pump it into drainage channels or storm drains, when approved by agencies having jurisdiction. Provide settling basins when required by such agencies. C Provide additional surface water control measures or change the methods in the event that the measures according to the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan do not provide satisfactory results based on the performance criteria defined by the Plan and by this Section. Submit a revised Plan according to this Section, 1.03B. END OF SECTION 02/2008 01564 - 8 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS Section 01565 TPDES REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL A As used herein and in conjunction with TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000, the term OPERATOR refers to the CONTRACTOR. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A Description of the required documentation to be prepared, signed and submitted by the Contractor before conducting construction operations, in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit as issued March 5, 2003, re -issued March 5, 2013, and re -issued March 5, 2018, by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality under the provisions of Section 402 of the Clean Water Act and Section 26.040 of the Texas Water Code. B Contractor's responsibility for implementation, maintenance, and inspection of storm water pollution prevention control measures including, but not limited to, erosion and sediment controls, storm water management plans, waste collection and disposal, off - site vehicle tracking, and other practices shown on the Plans or specified elsewhere in this or other Technical Specifications. This Specification provides guidelines and Best Management Practices (BMP's) information for the Contractor to use in adhering to all local, state and federal environmental regulations with respect to storm water pollution prevention during construction activity. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350 — Submittals 2. Section 01310 — Coordination & Meetings 3. Section 01770 — Contract Closeout D Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) E Other References: 1. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) found in Appendix A of these Technical Specifications. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 08/2018 01565 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIRED NOTICES A The Contractor shall complete, sign, and date the Contractor's Notice of Intent (NOI) attached in Appendix A. The signed copy of the Contractor's NOI shall be returned to the TCEQ. It is contractor's responsibility to pay for any fees associated with the permit. Submission of the NOI is required by both the Owner and the Contractor before construction operations start. B Upon completion of construction and acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Contractor shall complete, sign, and date the Contractor's Notice of Termination (NOT) attached in Appendix A. 3.02 CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A On the Operator's Information form attached in Appendix A, the Contractor shall complete name, address, and telephone number for the Contractor; the names of persons or firms responsible for maintenance and inspection of erosion and sediment control measures and all Subcontractors. B The Contractor and Subcontractors named in the Contractor's Information form shall read, sign, and date the Contractor's/Subcontractor's Certification form, attached in Appendix A. C The persons or firms responsible for maintenance and inspection of erosion and sediment control measures shall read, sign, and date the Contractor's Inspection and Maintenance Certification form, attached in Appendix A. D The Contractor's Information form and all certification forms shall be submitted to the Owner before beginning construction. E Contractor shall review implementation of the SWPPP in a meeting with the Owner and Engineer prior to start of construction in accordance with Section 01310 — Coordination & Meetings. 3.03 RETENTION OF RECORDS A The Contractor shall keep a copy of the SWPPP at the Project Site or at the Contractor's office from the date that it became effective to the date the Work is accepted by the Owner. B At Contract Closeout, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner all TPDES forms and certifications, as well as a copy of the SWPPP, in accordance with Section 01770 — Contract Closeout. The SWPPP records and data will be retained by Owner for a period of 3 years from the date the Work is accepted by the Owner. 08/2018 01565 - 2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS 3.04 POSTING OF NOTICES A The following notices shall be posted from the date that this SWPPP goes into effect until the date the Work is accepted by the Owner: 1. Copies of the Notices of Intent submitted by the Owner and Contractor and a brief Description of Construction Activity being conducted at the Project Site, as given in Article 1 of the SWPPP, shall be posted at the Project Site or at Contractor's office in a prominent place for public viewing. 2. Notice to drivers of equipment and vehicles, instructing them to stop, check, and clean tires of debris and mud before driving onto traffic lanes. Post such notices at every stabilized construction exit area. 3. In an easily visible location on Project Site, post a notice of waste disposal procedures. 4. Notice of hazardous material handling and emergency procedures shall be posted with the NOI on Project Site. Keep copies of Material Safety Data Sheets at a location on Project Site that is known to all personnel. 5. Keep a copy of each signed certification at the Project Site or at Contractor's office. APPENDIX A FOLLOWS THIS SECTION END OF SECTION 08/2018 01565 - 3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS Section 01565 TPDES REQUIREMENTS (APPENDIX A) Table of Contents TCEQ General Permit NOI TCEQ Form 20022 TCEQ Form — 20134 NOC TCEQ Form — 20023 Site Notice Forms 08/2018 01565 - 4 of 4 iMMI MM. NNM 'UMW s � --woe TCEQ printed on recycled paper General Permit to Discharge Under the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activities TXR150000 Effective March 5, 2018 TEXAS COMMISSION ON ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY Texas Commission on Environmental Quality P.O. Box 13087, Austin, Texas 78711-3087 GENERAL PERMIT TO DISCHARGE UNDER THE TEXAS POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM under provisions of Section 402 of the Glean Water Act and Chapter 26 of the Texas Water Code This permit supersedes and replaces TPDES General Permit No. TXRiS0000, issued March 5, 2013 Construction sites that discharge stormwater associated with construction activity located in the state of Texas may discharge to surface water in the state only according to monitoring requirements and other conditions set forth in this general permit, as well as the rules of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ or Commission), the laws of the State of Texas, and other orders of the Commission of the TCEQ. The issuance of this general permit does not grant to the permittee the right to use private or public property for conveyance of stormwater and certain non-stormwater discharges along the discharge route. This includes property belonging to but not limited to any individual, partnership, corporation or other entity. Neither does this general permit authorize any invasion of personal rights nor any violation of federal, state, or local laws or regulations. It is the responsibility of the permittee to acquire property rights as may be necessary to use the discharge route. This general permit and the authorization contained herein shall expire at midnight, five years from the permit effective date. EF FJ SCTWVE DATE: March 5, 2018 ISSUED DATE: 2 r g _ TPDES GENERAL PERMIT NUMBER TXR150000 RELATING TO STORMWATER DISCHARGES ASSOCIATED WITH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES Table of Contents Part I. Flow Chart and Definitions 5 Section A. Flow Chart to Determine Whether Coverage is Required 5 Section B. Definitions 6 Part II. Permit Applicability and Coverage 13 Section A. Discharges Eligible for Authorization 13 1. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity 13 2. Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activities 13 3. Non-Stormwater Discharges 13 4. Other Permitted Discharges 14 Section B. Concrete Truck Wash Out 14 Section C. Limitations on Permit Coverage 14 1. Post Construction Discharges 14 2. Prohibition of Non-Stormwater Discharges 14 3. Compliance with Water Quality Standards 14 4. Impaired Receiving Waters and Total Maximum Daily Load (TMDL) Requirements 14 5. Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge or Contributing Zone 15 6. Discharges to Specific Watersheds and Water Quality Areas 16 7. Protection of Streams and Watersheds by Other Governmental Entities 16 8. Indian Country Lands 16 9. Oil and Gas Production and Transportation 16 io. Stormwater Discharges from Agricultural Activities 16 ii. Endangered Species Act 16 12. Other 17 Section D. Deadlines for Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 17 1. Large Construction Activities 17 2. Small Construction Activities 17 Section E. Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 17 1. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities with Low Potential for Erosion. 17 2. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities: 18 3. Authorization for Large Construction Activities: 19 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 4. Waivers for Small Construction Activities. 20 5. Effective Date of Coverage 20 6. Notice of Change (NOC) 21 7. Signatory Requirement for NOI Forms, Notice of Termination (NOT) Forms, NOC Letters, and Construction Site Notices 22 8. Contents of the NOI 22 Section F. Terminating Coverage 23 1. Notice of Termination (NOT) Required 23 2. Minimum Contents of the NOT 23 3. Termination of Coverage for Small Construction Sites and for Secondary Operators at Large Construction Sites 24 4. Transfer of Day -to -Day Operational Control 24 Section G. Waivers from Coverage 25 1. Waiver Applicability and Coverage 25 2. Steps to Obtaining a Waiver 26 3. Effective Date of a LREW 26 4. Activities Extending Beyond the LREW Period 26 Section H. Alternative TPDES Permit Coverage 27 1. Individual Permit Alternative 27 2. Alternative Authorizations for Certain Discharges 27 3. Individual Permit Required 27 4. Alternative Discharge Authorization 27 Section I. Permit Expiration 27 Part III. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plans (SWP3) 28 Section A. Shared SWP3 Development 29 Section B. Responsibilities of Operators 29 1. Secondary Operators and Primary Operators with Control Over Construction Plans and Specifications 29 2. Primary Operators with Day -to -Day Operational Control 30 Section C. Deadlines for SWP3 Preparation, Implementation, and Compliance 30 Section D. Plan Review and Making Plans Available 30 Section E. Revisions and Updates to SWP3s 31 Section F. Contents of SWP3 31 Section G. Erosion and Sediment Control Requirements Applicable to All Sites 40 Part IV. Stormwater Runoff from Concrete Batch Plants 42 Section A. Benchmark Sampling Requirements 42 Section B. Best Management Practices (BMPs) and SWP3 Requirements 44 Page 3 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Section C. Prohibition of Wastewater Discharges 46 Part V. Concrete Truck Wash Out Requirements 46 Part VI. Retention of Records 47 Part VII. Standard Permit Conditions 47 Part VIII. Fees 48 Appendix A: Automatic Authorization 50 Appendix B: Erosivity Index (EI) Zones in Texas 52 Appendix C: Isoerodent Map 53 Appendix D: Erosivity Indices for EI Zones in Texas 54 Page 4 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Part I. Flow Chart and Definitions Section A. Flow Chart to Determine Whether Coverage is Required When calculating the acreage of land area disturbed, include the disturbed land -area of all construction and construction support activities. How much land will be disturbed? (*l) <lacre ("I) VO Do you meet the definition of "operator?" (*2) YES NO Will 5ormore � acres be disturbed? ("1) YES Permit Coverace Required • Prepare and Implement SWP3 • Post Site Notice • Submit Copy of Site Notice to MS4 Operator Permit Coverage Not Required, unless Part of a Larger Common Plan of Development or Sale NO Are you a "primary operator?" (*2) YES Permit Coverage Reuuired • Prepare and Implement SWP3 • Submit NOI to TCEQ • Post Site Notice • Submit Copy of NOl to MS4 Operator (*1) To determine Me size of the construction project, use the size of the entire area to be disturbed, and include the size of the larger common plan of development or sale, lithe project is part of a larger project (refer to Part LH., "Definitions, "for an explanation of "common plan of development or sale'). (*2) Refer to the definitions for "operator," • primary operator," and "secondary operator" in Part L. Section B. of this permit. Page 5 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Section B. Definitions Arid Areas - Areas with an average annual rainfall of o to io inches. Best Management Practices (BMPs) - Schedules of activities, prohibitions of practices, maintenance procedures, structural controls, local ordinances, and other management practices to prevent or reduce the discharge of pollutants. BMPs also include treatment requirements, operating procedures, and practices to control construction site runoff, spills or leaks, waste disposal, or drainage from raw material storage areas. Commencement of Construction - The initial disturbance of soils associated with clearing, grading, or excavation activities, as well as other construction -related activities (e.g., stockpiling of fill material, demolition). Common Plan of Development - A construction activity that is completed in separate stages, separate phases, or in combination with other construction activities. A common plan of development (also known as a "common plan of development or sale") is identified by the documentation for the construction project that identifies the scope of the project, and may include plats, blueprints, marketing plans, contracts, building permits, a public notice or hearing, zoning requests, or other similar documentation and activities. A common plan of development does not necessarily include all construction projects within the jurisdiction of a public entity (e.g., a city or university). Construction of roads or buildings in different parts of the jurisdiction would be considered separate "common plans," with only the interconnected parts of a project being considered part of a "common plan" (e.g., a building and its associated parking lot and driveways, airport runway and associated taxiways, a building complex, etc.). Where discrete construction projects occur within a larger common plan of development or sale but are located 1/4 mile or more apart, and the area between the projects is not being disturbed, each individual project can be treated as a separate plan of development or sale, provided that any interconnecting road, pipeline or utility project that is part of the same "common plan" is not included in the area to be disturbed. Construction Activity - Includes soil disturbance activities, including clearing, grading, excavating, construction -related activity (e.g., stockpiling of fill material, demolition), and construction support activity. This does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade, hydraulic capacity, or original purpose of the site (e.g., the routine grading of existing dirt roads, asphalt overlays of existing roads, the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways, and similar maintenance activities). Regulated construction activity is defined in terms of small and large construction activity. Construction Support Activity — A construction -related activity that specifically supports construction activity, which can involve earth disturbance or pollutant -generating activities of its own, and can include, but are not limited to, activities associated with concrete or asphalt batch plants, rock crushers, equipment staging or storage areas, chemical storage areas, material storage areas, material borrow areas, and excavated material disposal areas. Construction support activity must only directly support the construction activity authorized under this general permit. Dewatering — The act of draining rainwater or groundwater from building foundations, vaults, and trenches. Discharge — For the purposes of this permit, the drainage, release, or disposal of pollutants in stormwater and certain non-stormwater from areas where soil disturbing activities (e.g., clearing, grading, excavation, stockpiling of fill material, and demolition), construction materials or equipment storage or maintenance (e.g., fill piles, borrow area, concrete truck wash out, fueling), or other industrial stormwater directly related to the construction process (e.g., concrete or asphalt batch plants) are located. Drought -Stricken Area — For the purposes of this permit, an area in which the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration's U.S. Seasonal Drought Outlook indicates for the period during which the construction will occur that any of the following conditions are Page 6 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 likely: (1) "Drought to persist or intensify", (2) "Drought ongoing, some improvement", (3) "Drought likely to improve, impacts ease", or (4) "Drought development likely". See http://www.cpc.ncep.noaa.gov/products/expert assessment/seasonal drought.html. Edwards Aquifer - As defined under Texas Administrative Code (TAC) § 213.3 of this title (relating to the Edwards Aquifer), that portion of an arcuate belt of porous, water -bearing, predominantly carbonate rocks known as the Edwards and Associated Limestones in the Balcones Fault Zone trending from west to east to northeast in Kinney, Uvalde, Medina, Bexar, Comal, Hays, Travis, and Williamson Counties; and composed of the Salmon Peak Limestone, McKnight Formation, West Nueces Formation, Devil's River Limestone, Person Formation, Kainer Formation, Edwards Formation, and Georgetown Formation. The permeable aquifer units generally overlie the less -permeable Glen Rose Formation to the south, overlie the less -permeable Comanche Peak and Walnut Formations north of the Colorado River, and underlie the less -permeable Del Rio Clay regionally. Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone - Generally, that area where the stratigraphic units constituting the Edwards Aquifer crop out, including the outcrops of other geologic formations in proximity to the Edwards Aquifer, where caves, sinkholes, faults, fractures, or other permeable features would create a potential for recharge of surface waters into the Edwards Aquifer. The recharge zone is identified as that area designated as such on official maps located in the offices of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) and the appropriate regional office. The Edwards Aquifer Map Viewer, located at http://www.tceq.texas.gov/compliance/field ops/eapD/mapdisclaimer.html, can be used to determine where the recharge zone is located. Edwards Aquifer Contributing Zone - The area or watershed where runoff from precipitation flows downgradient to the recharge zone of the Edwards Aquifer. The contributing zone is located upstream (upgradient) and generally north and northwest of the recharge zone for the following counties: all areas within Kinney County, except the area within the watershed draining to Segment No. 2304 of the Rio Grande Basin; all areas within Uvalde, Medina, Bexar, and Comal Counties; all areas within Hays and Travis Counties, except the area within the watersheds draining to the Colorado River above a point 1.3 miles upstream from Tom Miller Dam, Lake Austin at the confluence of Barrow Brook Cove, Segment No.14o3 of the Colorado River Basin; and all areas within Williamson County, except the area within the watersheds draining to the Lampasas River above the dam at Stillhouse Hollow reservoir, Segment No. 1216 of the Brazos River Basin. The contributing zone is illustrated on the Edwards Aquifer map viewer at http://www.tceq.texas.gov/compliance/field ops/eapp/mapdisclaimer.html. Effluent Limitations Guideline (ELG) — Defined in 4o Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) § 122.2 as a regulation published by the Administrator under § 304(b) of the Clean Water Act (CWA) to adopt or revise effluent limitations. Facility or Activity — For the purpose of this permit, referring to a construction site, the location of construction activity, or a construction support activity that is regulated under this general permit, including all contiguous land and fixtures (for example, ponds and materials stockpiles), structures, or appurtenances used at a construction site or industrial site. Final Stabilization - A construction site status where any of the following conditions are met: (a) All soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed and a uniform (that is, evenly distributed, without large bare areas) perennial vegetative cover with a density of at least 7o% of the native background vegetative cover for the area has been established on all unpaved areas and areas not covered by permanent structures, or equivalent permanent stabilization measures (such as the use of riprap, gabions, or geotextiles) have been employed. Page 7 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (b) For individual lots in a residential construction site by either: (1) the homebuilder completing final stabilization as specified in condition (a) above; or (2) the homebuilder establishing temporary stabilization for an individual lot prior to the time of transfer of the ownership of the home to the buyer and after informing the homeowner of the need for, and benefits of, final stabilization. If temporary stabilization is not feasible, then the homebuilder may fulfill this requirement by retaining perimeter controls or BMPs, and informing the homeowner of the need for removal of temporary controls and the establishment of final stabilization. Fulfillment of this requirement must be documented in the homebuilder's stormwater pollution prevention plan (SWP3). (c) For construction activities on land used for agricultural purposes (such as pipelines across crop or range land), final stabilization may be accomplished by returning the disturbed land to its preconstruction agricultural use. Areas disturbed that were not previously used for agricultural activities, such as buffer strips immediately adjacent to surface water and areas that are not being returned to their preconstruction agricultural use must meet the final stabilization conditions of condition (a) above. (d) In arid, semi -arid, and drought -stricken areas only, all soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed and both of the following criteria have been met: (1) Temporary erosion control measures (for example, degradable rolled erosion control product) are selected, designed, and installed along with an appropriate seed base to provide erosion control for at least three years without active maintenance by the operator, and (2) The temporary erosion control measures are selected, designed, and installed to achieve 7o % of the native background vegetative coverage within three years. Hyperchlorination of Waterlines — Treatment of potable water lines or tanks with chlorine for disinfection purposes, typically following repair or partial replacement of the waterline or tank, and subsequently flushing the contents. Impaired Water - A surface water body that is identified as impaired on the latest approved CWA §3o3(d) List or waters with an EPA -approved or established total maximum daily load (TMDL) that are found on the latest EPA approved Texas Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality for CWA Sections 3o5(b) and 3o3(d), which lists the category 4 and 5 water bodies. Indian Country Land — All land within the limits of any Indian reservation under the jurisdiction of the United States government, notwithstanding the issuance of any patent, and, including rights -of -way running through the reservation; (2) all dependent Indian communities with the borders of the United States whether within the originally or subsequently acquired territory thereof, and whether within or without the limits of a state; and (3) all Indian allotments, the Indian titles to which have not been extinguished, including rights -of -way running through the same. (4o CFR §122.2) Indian Tribe - Any Indian Tribe, band, group, or community recognized by the Secretary of the Interior and exercising governmental authority over a Federal Indian Reservation (40 CFR §122.2). Infeasible —Not technologically possible, or not economically practicable and achievable in light of best industry practices. (4o CFR §45o.11(b)). Large Construction Activity - Construction activities including clearing, grading, and excavating that result in land disturbance of equal to or greater than five (5) acres of land. Large construction activity also includes the disturbance of less than five (5) acres of total Page 8 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 land area that is part of a larger common plan of development or sale if the larger common plan will ultimately disturb equal to or greater than five (5) acres of land. Large construction activity does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade, hydraulic capacity, or original purpose of the site (for example, the routine grading of existing dirt roads, asphalt overlays of existing roads, the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways, and similar maintenance activities.) Linear Project — Includes the construction of roads, bridges, conduits, substructures, pipelines, sewer lines, towers, poles, cables, wires, connectors, switching, regulating and transforming equipment and associated ancillary facilities in a long, narrow area. Low Rainfall Erosivity Waiver (LREW) - A written submission to the executive director from an operator of a construction site that is considered as small construction activity under the permit, which qualifies for a waiver from the requirements for small construction activities, only during the period of time when the calculated rainfall erosivity factor is less than five (5). Minimize - To reduce or eliminate to the extent achievable using stormwater controls that are technologically available and economically practicable and achievable in light of best industry practices. Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) - A separate storm sewer system owned or operated by the United States, a state, city, town, county, district, association, or other public body (created by or pursuant to state law) having jurisdiction over the disposal of sewage, industrial wastes, stormwater, or other wastes, including special districts under state law such as a sewer district, flood control or drainage district, or similar entity, or an Indian tribe or an authorized Indian tribal organization, that discharges to surface water in the state. Notice of Change (NOC) — Written notification to the executive director from a discharger authorized under this permit, providing changes to information that was previously provided to the agency in a notice of intent form. Notice of Intent (NOI) - A written submission to the executive director from an applicant requesting coverage under this general permit. Notice of Termination (NOT) - A written submission to the executive director from a discharger authorized under this general permit requesting termination of coverage. Operator - The person or persons associated with a large or small construction activity that is either a primary or secondary operator as defined below: Primary Operator — the person or persons associated with construction activity that meets either of the following two criteria: (a) the person or persons have on -site operational control over construction plans and specifications, including the ability to make modifications to those plans and specifications; or (b) the person or persons have day-to-day operational control of those activities at a construction site that are necessary to ensure compliance with a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWP3) for the site or other permit conditions (for example, they are authorized to direct workers at a site to carry out activities required by the SWP3 or comply with other permit conditions). Secondary Operator — The person or entity, often the property owner, whose operational control is limited to: (a) the employment of other operators, such as a general contractor, to perform or supervise construction activities; or Page 9 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (b) the ability to approve or disapprove changes to construction plans and specifications, but who does not have day-to-day on -site operational control over construction activities at the site. Secondary operators must either prepare their own SWP3 or participate in a shared SWP3 that covers the areas of the construction site, where they have control over the construction plans and specifications. If there is not a primary operator at the construction site, then the secondary operator is defined as the primary operator and must comply with the requirements for primary operators. Outfall - For the purpose of this permit, a point source at the point where stormwater runoff associated with construction activity discharges to surface water in the state and does not include open conveyances connecting two municipal separate storm sewers, or pipes, tunnels, or other conveyances that connect segments of the same stream or other water of the U.S. and are used to convey waters of the U.S. Permittee - An operator authorized under this general permit. The authorization may be gained through submission of a notice of intent, by waiver, or by meeting the requirements for automatic coverage to discharge stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges from construction activity. Point Source —Any discernible, confined, and discrete conveyance, including but not limited to, any pipe, ditch, channel, tunnel, conduit, well, discrete fissure, container, rolling stock concentrated animal feeding operation, landfill leachate collection system, vessel or other floating craft from which pollutants are, or may be, discharged. This term does not include return flows from irrigated agriculture or agricultural stormwater runoff (4o CFR §122.2). Pollutant - Dredged spoil, solid waste, incinerator residue, sewage, garbage, sewage sludge, filter backwash, munitions, chemical wastes, biological materials, radioactive materials, heat, wrecked or discarded equipment, rock, sand, cellar dirt, and industrial, municipal, and agricultural waste discharged into any surface water in the state. The term "pollutant" does not include tail water or runoff water from irrigation or rainwater runoff from cultivated or uncultivated rangeland, pastureland, and farmland. For the purpose of this permit, the term "pollutant" includes sediment. Pollution - The alteration of the physical, thermal, chemical, or biological quality of, or the contamination of, any surface water in the state that renders the water harmful, detrimental, or injurious to humans, animal life, vegetation, or property or to public health, safety, or welfare, or impairs the usefulness or the public enjoyment of the water for any lawful or reasonable purpose (Texas Water Code (TWC) §26.00l(14)). Rainfall Erosivity Factor (R factor) - the total annual erosive potential that is due to climatic effects, and is part of the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation (RUSLE). Receiving Water - A "Water of the United States" as defined in 4o CFR §122.2 or a surface water in the state into which the regulated stormwater discharges. Semiarid Areas - areas with an average annual rainfall of 10 to 20 inches. Separate Storm Sewer System - A conveyance or system of conveyances (including roads with drainage systems, streets, catch basins, curbs, gutters, ditches, man-made channels, or storm drains), designed or used for collecting or conveying stormwater; that is not a combined sewer, and that is not part of a publicly owned treatment works (POTW). Small Construction Activity - Construction activities including clearing, grading, and excavating that result in land disturbance of equal to or greater than one (1) acre and less than five (5) acres of land. Small construction activity also includes the disturbance of less than one (1) acre of total land area that is part of a larger common plan of development or sale if the larger common plan will ultimately disturb equal to or greater than one (1) and Page 10 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi5000o less than five (5) acres of land. Small construction activity does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade, hydraulic capacity, or original purpose of the site (for example, the routine grading of existing dirt roads, asphalt overlays of existing roads, the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways, and similar maintenance activities). Steep Slopes — Where a state, Tribe, local government, or industry technical manual (e.g. stormwater BMP manual) has defined what is to be considered a "steep slope", this permit's definition automatically adopts that definition. Where no such definition exists, steep slopes are automatically defined as those that are 15 percent or greater in grade. Stormwater (or Stormwater Runoff) - Rainfall runoff, snow melt runoff, and surface runoff and drainage. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity - Stormwater runoff, as defined above, from a construction activity. Structural Control (or Practice) - A pollution prevention practice that requires the construction of a device, or the use of a device, to reduce or prevent pollution in stormwater runoff. Structural controls and practices may include but are not limited to: silt fences, earthen dikes, drainage swales, sediment traps, check dams, subsurface drains, storm drain inlet protection, rock outlet protection, reinforced soil retaining systems, gabions, and temporary or permanent sediment basins. Surface Water in the State - Lakes, bays, ponds, impounding reservoirs, springs, rivers, streams, creeks, estuaries, wetlands, marshes, inlets, canals, the Gulf of Mexico inside the territorial limits of the state (from the mean high water mark (MHWM) out 10.36 miles into the Gulf), and all other bodies of surface water, natural or artificial, inland or coastal, fresh or salt, navigable or non -navigable, and including the beds and banks of all water -courses and bodies of surface water, that are wholly or partially inside or bordering the state or subject to the jurisdiction of the state; except that waters in treatment systems which are authorized by state or federal law, regulation, or permit, and which are created for the purpose of waste treatment are not considered to be water in the state. Temporary Stabilization - A condition where exposed soils or disturbed areas are provided a protective cover or other structural control to prevent the migration of pollutants. Temporary stabilization may include temporary seeding, geotextiles, mulches, and other techniques to reduce or eliminate erosion until either permanent stabilization can be achieved or until further construction activities take place. Thawing Conditions — for the purposes of this permit, thawing conditions are expected based on the historical likelihood of two or more days with daytime temperatures greater than 32 T. This date can be determined by looking at historical weather data. Note: The estimation of thawing conditions is for planning purposes only. During construction, the permittee will be required to conduct site inspections based upon actual conditions (i.e., if thawing conditions occur sooner than expected, the permittee will be required to conduct inspections at the regular frequency). Total Maximum Daily Load (TMDL) - The total amount of a pollutant that a water body can assimilate and still meet the Texas Surface Water Quality Standards. Turbidity — A condition of water quality characterized by the presence of suspended solids and/or organic material. Waters of the United States - Waters of the United States or waters of the U.S. means: (a) all waters which are currently used, were used in the past, or may be susceptible to use in interstate or foreign commerce, including all waters which are subject to the ebb and flow of the tide; (b) all interstate waters, including interstate wetlands; Page ii Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (c) all other waters such as intrastate lakes, rivers, streams (including intermittent streams), mudflats, sandflats, wetlands, sloughs, prairie potholes, wet meadows, playa lakes, or natural ponds that the use, degradation, or destruction of which would affect or could affect interstate or foreign commerce including any such waters: (1) which are or could be used by interstate or foreign travelers for recreational or other purposes; (2) from which fish or shellfish are or could be taken and sold in interstate or foreign commerce; or (3) which are used or could be used for industrial purposes by industries in interstate commerce; (d) all impoundments of waters otherwise defined as waters of the United States under this definition; (e) tributaries of waters identified in paragraphs (a) through (d) of this definition; (f) the territorial sea; and (g) wetlands adjacent to waters (other than waters that are themselves wetlands) identified in paragraphs (a) through (f) of this definition. Waste treatment systems, including treatment ponds or lagoons designed to meet the requirements of CWA are not waters of the U.S. This exclusion applies only to manmade bodies of water which neither were originally created in waters of the U.S. (such as disposal area in wetlands) nor resulted from the impoundment of waters of the U.S. Waters of the U.S. do not include prior converted cropland. Notwithstanding the determination of an area's status as prior converted cropland by any other federal agency, for the purposes of the CWA, the final authority regarding CWA jurisdiction remains with EPA. Page 12 Part II. Permit Applicability and Coverage Section A. Discharges Eligible for Authorization 1. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity Discharges of stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges from small and large construction activities may be authorized under this general permit. 2. Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activities Discharges of stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges from construction support activities as defined in Part I.B of this general permit may be authorized, provided that the following conditions are met: (a) the construction support activities are located within one (1) mile from the boundary of the construction site where the construction activity authorized under the permit is being conducted that requires the support of these activities; (b) an SWP3 is developed for the permitted construction site according to the provisions in Part III.F of this general permit, and includes appropriate controls and measures to reduce erosion and the discharge of pollutants in stormwater runoff according to the provisions in Part III.G of this general permit; (c) the activities are directly related to the construction site; (d) the activities are not a commercial operation, nor serve other unrelated construction projects; and (e) the activities do not continue to operate beyond the completion of the construction activity at the project it supports. Construction support activities that operate outside the terms provided in (a) through (e) above must obtain authorization under a separate Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) permit, which may include the TPDES Multi Sector General Permit (MSGP), TXRo50000 (related to stormwater discharges associated with industrial activity), an alternative general permit (if available), or an individual water quality permit. 3. Non-Stormwater Discharges The following non-stormwater discharges from sites authorized under this general permit are also eligible for authorization under this general permit: (a) discharges from fire -fighting activities (fire -fighting activities do not include washing of trucks, run-off water from training activities, test water from fire suppression systems, or similar activities); (b) uncontaminated fire hydrant flushings (excluding discharges of hyperchlorinated water, unless the water is first dechlorinated and discharges are not expected to adversely affect aquatic life), which include flushings from systems that utilize potable water, surface water, or groundwater that does not contain additional pollutants (uncontaminated fire hydrant flushings do not include systems utilizing reclaimed wastewater as a source water); (c) water from the routine external washing of vehicles, the external portion of buildings or structures, and pavement, where detergents and soaps are not used, where spills or leaks of toxic or hazardous materials have not occurred (unless spilled materials have been removed; and if local state, or federal regulations are applicable, the materials are removed according to those regulations), and where the purpose is to remove mud, dirt, or dust; Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (d) uncontaminated water used to control dust; (e) potable water sources, including waterline flushings, but excluding discharges of hyperchlorinated water, unless the water is first dechlorinated and discharges are not expected to adversely affect aquatic life; (f) uncontaminated air conditioning condensate; (g) uncontaminated ground water or spring water, including foundation or footing drains where flows are not contaminated with industrial materials such as solvents; and (h) lawn watering and similar irrigation drainage. 4. Other Permitted Discharges Any discharge authorized under a separate National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), TPDES, or TCEQ permit may be combined with discharges authorized by this general permit, provided those discharges comply with the associated permit. Section B. Concrete Truck Wash Out The wash out of concrete trucks at regulated construction sites must be performed in accordance with the requirements of Part V of this general permit. Section C. Limitations on Permit Coverage 1. Post Construction Discharges Discharges that occur after construction activities have been completed, and after the construction site and any supporting activity site have undergone final stabilization, are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. Discharges originating from the sites are not authorized under this general permit following the submission of the notice of termination (NOT) or removal of the appropriate site notice, as applicable, for the regulated construction activity. 2. Prohibition of Non-Stormwater Discharges Except as otherwise provided in Part II.A of this general permit, only discharges that are composed entirely of stormwater associated with construction activity may be authorized under this general permit. 3. Compliance with Water Quality Standards Discharges to surface water in the state that would cause, have the reasonable potential to cause, or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or that would fail to protect and maintain existing designated uses of surface water in the state are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. The executive director may require an application for an individual permit or alternative general permit (see Parts II.H.2 and 3.) to authorize discharges to surface water in the state if the executive director determines that any activity will cause, has the reasonable potential to cause, or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or is found to cause, has the reasonable potential to cause, or contribute to, the impairment of a designated use. The executive director may also require an application for an individual permit considering factors described in Part II.H.3 of this general permit. 4. Impaired Receiving Waters and Total Maximum Daily Load (TMDL) Requirements The permittee shall determine whether the authorized discharge is to an impaired water body on the latest EPA -approved CWA Section 3o3(d) List or waters with an EPA - approved or established TMDL that are found on the latest EPA -approved Texas Page 14 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality for CWA Sections 3o5(b) and 3o3(d), which lists the category 4 and 5 water bodies. New sources or new discharges of the pollutants of concern to impaired waters are not authorized by this permit unless otherwise allowable under 3o TAC Chapter 305 and applicable state law. Impaired waters are those that do not meet applicable water quality standard(s) and are listed as category 4 or 5 in the current version of the Texas Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality, and waterbodies listed on the CWA § 3o3(d) list. Pollutants of concern are those for which the water body is listed as impaired. Discharges of the pollutants of concern to impaired water bodies for which there is a TMDL are not eligible for coverage under this general permit unless they are consistent with the approved TMDL. Permittees must incorporate the conditions and requirements applicable to their discharges into their SWP3, in order to be eligible for coverage under this general permit. For consistency with the construction stormwater-related items in an approved TMDL, the SWP3 must be consistent with any applicable condition, goal, or requirement in the TMDL, TMDL Implementation Plan (I -Plan), or as otherwise directed by the executive director. 5. Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge or Contributing Zone Discharges cannot be authorized by this general permit where prohibited by 3o TAC Chapter 213 (relating to Edwards Aquifer). In addition, commencement of construction (i.e., the initial disturbance of soils associated with clearing, grading, or excavating activities, as well as other construction -related activities such as stockpiling of fill material and demolition) at a site regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213, may not begin until the appropriate Edwards Aquifer Protection Plan (EAPP) has been approved by the TCEQ's Edwards Aquifer Protection Program. (a) For new discharges located within the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone, or within that area upstream from the recharge zone and defined as the Contributing Zone (CZ), operators must meet all applicable requirements of, and operate according to, 3o TAC Chapter 213 (Edwards Aquifer Rule) in addition to the provisions and requirements of this general permit. For existing discharges located within the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone, the requirements of the agency -approved Water Pollution Abatement Plan (WPAP) under the Edwards Aquifer Rule is in addition to the requirements of this general permit. BMPs and maintenance schedules for structural stormwater controls, for example, may be required as a provision of the rule. All applicable requirements of the Edwards Aquifer Rule for reductions of suspended solids in stormwater runoff are in addition to the requirements in this general permit for this pollutant. (c) For discharges located within ten stream miles upstream of the Edwards Aquifer recharge zone, applicants shall also submit a copy of the NOI to the appropriate TCEQ regional office. Counties: Comal, Bexar, Medina, Uvalde, and Kinney Contact: TCEQ Water Program Manager San Antonio Regional Office 1425o Judson Road San Antonio, Texas 78233-4480 (21o) 490-3096 Counties: Williamson, Travis, and Hays Contact: TCEQ Water Program Manager Austin Regional Office 12100 Park 35 Circle (b) Page 15 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Room 179, Building A Austin, Texas 78753 (512) 339-2929 6. Discharges to Specific Watersheds and Water Quality Areas Discharges otherwise eligible for coverage cannot be authorized by this general permit where prohibited by 3o TAC Chapter 311 (relating to Watershed Protection) for water quality areas and watersheds. 7. Protection of Streams and Watersheds by Other Governmental Entities This general permit does not limit the authority or ability of federal, other state, or local governmental entities from placing additional or more stringent requirements on construction activities or discharges from construction activities. For example, this permit does not limit the authority of a home -rule municipality provided by Texas Local Government Code §401.002. 8. Indian Country Lands Stormwater runoff from construction activities occurring on Indian Country lands are not under the authority of the TCEQ and are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. If discharges of stormwater require authorization under federal NPDES regulations, authority for these discharges must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 9. Oil and Gas Production and Transportation Stormwater runoff from construction activities associated with the exploration, development, or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources, including transportation of crude oil or natural gas by pipeline, are not under the authority of the TCEQ and are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. Authorization for stormwater discharges from construction activities that are associated with production of oil or gas or geothermal resources, including transportation of crude oil or natural gas by pipeline must be obtained, as required, from the U.S. EPA or the Texas Railroad Commission, as applicable. Discharge of stormwater related to construction activity, from a facility that stores both refined products intended for off -site use and crude oil in aboveground storage tanks, is regulated by the TCEQ and is eligible for coverage under this general permit. 10. Stormwater Discharges from Agricultural Activities Stormwater discharges from agricultural activities that are not point source discharges of stormwater are not subject to TPDES permit requirements. These activities may include clearing and cultivating ground for crops, construction of fences to contain livestock, construction of stock ponds, and other similar agricultural activities. Discharges of stormwater runoff associated with the construction of facilities that are subject to TPDES regulations, such as the construction of concentrated animal feeding operations, would be point sources regulated under this general permit. 11. Endangered Species Act Discharges that would adversely affect a listed endangered or threatened aquatic or aquatic -dependent species or its critical habitat are not authorized by this permit, unless the requirements of the Endangered Species Act are satisfied. Federal requirements related to endangered species apply to all TPDES permitted discharges and site -specific controls may be required to ensure that protection of endangered or threatened species is achieved. If a permittee has concerns over potential impacts to listed species, the permittee may contact TCEQ for additional information. Page 16 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR15oo00 12. Other Nothing in Part II of the general permit is intended to negate any person's ability to assert force majeure (act of God, war, strike, riot, or other catastrophe) defenses found in 3o TAC Section D. Deadlines for Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 1. Large Construction Activities (a) New Construction - Discharges from sites where the commencement of construction activity occurs on or after the effective date of this general permit must be authorized, either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit, prior to the commencement of those construction activities. (b) Ongoing Construction - Operators of large construction activities continuing to operate after the effective date of this permit, and authorized under the TPDES Construction General Permit TXR150000 (effective on March 5, 2013), must submit an NOI to renew authorization or a NOT to terminate coverage under this general permit within 90 days of the effective date of this general permit. During this interim or grace period, as a requirement of this TPDES permit, the operator must continue to meet the conditions and requirements of the 2013 TPDES general permit. 2. Small Construction Activities (a) New Construction - Discharges from sites where the commencement of construction activity occurs on or after the effective date of this general permit must be authorized, either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit, prior to the commencement of those construction activities. (b) Ongoing Construction - Discharges from ongoing small construction activities that commenced prior to the effective date of this general permit, and that do not meet the conditions to qualify for termination of this permit as described in Part II.F of this general permit, must meet the requirements to be authorized, either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit, within 90 days of the effective date of this general permit. During this interim period, as a requirement of this TPDES permit, the operator must continue to meet the conditions and requirements of the 2013 TPDES Construction General Permit. Section E. Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 1. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities with Low Potential for Erosion: Operators of small construction activity, as defined in Part I.B of this general permit, shall not submit an NOI for coverage, unless otherwise required by the executive director. Operators of small construction activities, which occur in certain counties and during periods of low potential for erosion that do not meet the conditions of the waiver described in Part II.G of this general permit, may be automatically authorized under this general permit if all the following conditions are met. (a) the construction activity occurs in a county and during the corresponding date range(s) listed in Appendix A; (b) the construction activity is initiated and completed, including either final or temporary stabilization of all disturbed areas, within the time frame identified in Appendix A for the location of the construction site; Page 17 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1500o0 (c) all temporary stabilization is adequately maintained to effectively reduce or prohibit erosion, permanent stabilization activities have been initiated, and a condition of final stabilization is completed no later than 3o days following the end date of the time frame identified in Appendix A for the location of the construction site; (d) the permiee signs a completed TCEQ small construction site notice for low potential for erosion, including the certification statement; (e) a signed and certified copy of the small construction site notice for low potential for erosion is posted at the construction site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public, local, state, and federal authorities prior to commencing construction activities, and maintained in that location until completion of the construction activity; NOTE: Posted site notices may have a redacted signature as long as there is an original signed and certified site notice, with a viewable signature, located on - site and available for review by any applicable regulatory authority. (f) a copy of the signed and certified small construction site notice for low potential for erosion is provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge at least two days prior to commencement of construction activities; discharges of stormwater runoff or other non-stormwater discharges from any supporting concrete batch plant or asphalt batch plant is separately authorized under an individual TPDES permit, another TPDES general permit, or under an individual TCEQ permit where stormwater and non-stormwater is disposed of by evaporation or irrigation (discharges are adjacent to water in the state); and (h) any non-stormwater discharges are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization, are not considered by TCEQ to be a wastewater, or are captured and routed for disposal at a publicly operated treatment works or licensed waste disposal facility. If all of the conditions in (a) — (h) above are met, then the operator(s) of small construction activities with low potential for erosion are not required to develop a SWP3. If an operator is conducting small construction activities and any of the above conditions (a) — (h) are not met, the operator cannot declare coverage under the automatic authorization for small construction activities with low potential for erosion and must meet the requirements for automatic authorization (all other) small construction activities, described below in Part II.E.2. For small construction activities that occur during a period with a low potential for erosion, where automatic authorization under this section is not available, an operator may apply for and obtain a waiver from permitting (Low Rainfall Erosivity Waiver — LREW), as described in Part II.G of this general permit. Waivers from coverage under the LREW do not allow for any discharges of non-stormwater and the operator must ensure that discharges on non-stormwater are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization. (g) 2. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities: Operators of small construction activities as defined in Part I.B of this general permit shall not submit an NOI for coverage, unless otherwise required by the executive director. Operators of small construction activities, as defined in Part I.B of this general permit or as defined but who do not meet in the conditions and requirements located in Part II.E.i above, may be automatically authorized for small construction activities, provided that they meet all of the following conditions: Page 18 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (a) develop a SWP3 according to the provisions of this general permit, that covers either the entire site or all portions of the site for which the applicant is the operator, and implement the SWP3 prior to commencing construction activities; (b) all operators of regulated small construction activities must post a copy of a signed and certified Small Construction site notice, the notice must be posted at the construction site in a location where it is safely and readily available for viewing by the general public, local, state, and federal authorities, at least two days prior to commencing construction activity , and maintain the notice in that location until completion of the construction activity (for linear construction activities, e.g. pipeline or highway, the site notice must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway; notice for these linear sites may be relocated, as necessary, along the length of the project, and the notice must be safely and readily available for viewing by the general public; local, state, and federal authorities); (c) operators must maintain a posted site notice at the construction site until final stabilization has been achieved; and NOTE: Posted site notices may have a redacted signature as long as there is an original signed and certified Small Construction site notice, with a viewable signature, located on -site and available for review by an applicable regulatory authority. (d) provide a copy of the signed and certified construction site notice to the operator of any municipal separate storm sewer system (MS4) receiving the discharge at least two days prior to commencement of construction activities. As described in Part I.B of this general permit, large construction activities include those that will disturb less than five (5) acres of land, but that are part of a larger common plan of development or sale that will ultimately disturb five (5) or more acres of land, and must meet the requirements of Part II.E.3. below. 3. Authorization for Large Construction Activities: Operators of large construction activities that qualify for coverage under this general permit must meet all of the following conditions: (a) develop a SWP3 according to the provisions of this general permit that covers either the entire site or all portions of the site where the applicant is the operator. The SWP3 must be developed and implemented prior to obtaining coverage and prior to commencing construction activities; (b) primary operators of large construction activities must submit an NOI prior to commencing construction activity at a construction site. A completed NOI must be submitted to TCEQ electronically using the online e-Permits system on TCEQ's website. Operators with an electronic reporting waiver must submit a completed NOI to TCEQ at least seven (7) days prior to prior to commencing construction activity to obtain provisional coverage seven (7) days from the postmark date for delivery to the TCEQ. An authorization is no longer provisional when the executive director finds the NOI is administratively complete and an authorization number is issued to the permittee for the construction site indicated on the NOI. If an additional primary operator is added after the initial NOI is submitted, the additional primary operator must meet the same requirements for existing primary operator(s), as indicated above. If the primary operator changes due to responsibility at the site being transferred from one primary operator to another after the initial NOI is submitted, the new primary operator must submit a paper NOI or an electronic NOI at least ten (io) Page 19 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 days prior to assuming operational control of a construction site and commencing construction activity. Operators that submit NOIs electronically must use the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website. (c) all operators of large construction activities must post a site notice in accordance with Part III.D.2 of this permit. The site notice must be located where it is safely and readily available for viewing by the general public, local, state, and federal authorities prior to commencing construction activities, and must be maintained in that location until completion of the construction activity (for linear construction activities, e.g. pipeline or highway, the site notice must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway; notice for these linear sites may be relocated, as necessary, along the length of the project, and the notice must be safely and readily available for viewing by the general public, local, state, and federal authorities); (d) two days prior to commencing construction activities, all primary operators must: i. provide a copy of the signed NOI to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge and to any secondary construction operator, and ii. list in the SWP3 the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy; (e) all persons meeting the definition of "secondary operator" in Part I of this permit are hereby notified that they are regulated under this general permit, but are not required to submit an NOI, provided that a primary operator at the site has submitted an NOI, or prior to commencement of construction activities, a primary operator is required to submit an NOI and the secondary operator has provided notification to the operator(s) of the need to obtain coverage (with records of notification available upon request). Any secondary operator notified under this provision may alternatively submit an NOI under this general permit, may seek coverage under an alternative TPDES individual permit, or may seek coverage under an alternative TPDES general permit if available; and (f) all secondary operators of large construction activities must post a copy of the signed and certified Secondary Operator construction site notice and provide a copy of the signed and certified site notice to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge at least two days prior to the commencement construction activities. NOTE: Posted site notices may have a redacted signature as long as there is an original signed and certified Secondary Operator construction site notice, with a viewable signature, located on -site and available for review by an applicable regulatory authority. Effective September 1, 2018, applicants must submit an NOI using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website, or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 4. Waivers for Small Construction Activities: Operators of certain small construction activities may obtain a waiver from coverage under this general permit, if applicable. The requirements are outlined in Part II.G below. 5. Effective Date of Coverage (a) Operators of small construction activities as described in either Part II.E.1 or II.E.2 above are authorized immediately following compliance with the applicable conditions of Part II.E.1 or II.E.2. Secondary operators of large construction Page 20 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 activities as described in Part II.E.3 above are authorized immediately following compliance with the applicable conditions in Part II.E.3. For activities located in areas regulated by 3o TAC Chapter 213, related to the Edwards Aquifer, this authorization to discharge is separate from the requirements of the operator's responsibilities under that rule. Construction may not commence for sites regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213 until all applicable requirements of that rule are met. (b) Primary operators of large construction activities as described in Part II.E.3 above that electronically submit an NOI are authorized immediately following confirmation of receipt of the electronic form by the TCEQ, unless otherwise notified by the executive director. Operators with an electronic reporting waiver are provisionally authorized seven (7) days from the date that a completed paper NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ, unless otherwise notified by the executive director. An authorization is no longer provisional when the executive director finds the NOI is administratively complete and an authorization number is issued to the permittee for the construction site indicated on the NOI. For construction activities located in areas regulated by 3o TAC Chapter 213, related to the Edwards Aquifer, this authorization to discharge is separate from the requirements of the operator's responsibilities under that rule. Construction activities may not commence for sites regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213 until all applicable requirements of that rule are met. (c) Operators are not prohibited from submitting late NOIs or posting late notices to obtain authorization under this general permit. The TCEQ reserves the right to take appropriate enforcement action for any unpermitted activities that may have occurred between the time construction commenced and authorization was obtained. (d) If operators that submitted NOIs have active authorizations for construction activities that are ongoing when the term of the current general permit expires and a new general permit is issued, a 9o-day interim (grace) period is granted to provide coverage that is administratively continued until operators with active authorizations can obtain coverage under the newly issued CGP. The 9o-day grace period starts on the effective date of the newly issued CGP. Deadlines for obtaining coverage for operators of small and large construction are provided in Part II.D.i and 2 above. 6. Notice of Change (NOC) If relevant information provided in the NOI changes, the operator that has submitted the NOI must submit an NOC to TCEQ at least fourteen (14) days before the change occurs, if possible. Where a 14-day advance notice is not possible, the operator must submit an NOC to TCEQ within 14-days of discovery of the change. If the operator becomes aware that it failed to submit any relevant facts or submitted incorrect information in an NOI, the correct information must be submitted to TCEQ in an NOC within 14 days after discovery. The NOC shall be submitted on a form provided by the executive director, or by letter if an NOC form is not available. A copy of the NOC form or letter must also be placed in the SWP3 and provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge. A list that includes the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy of the NOC (or NOC letter) must be included in the SWP3. Information on an NOC may include, but is not limited to, the following: a change in the description of the construction project; an increase in the number of acres disturbed (for increases of one or more acres); or the name of the operator (where the name of the operator has changed). A transfer of operational control from one operator to another, including a transfer of the ownership of a company. Coverage under this general permit is not transferable Page 21 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR15o000 from one operator to another or one company to another, and may not be included in an NOC. A transfer of ownership of a company may include, but is not limited to, the following: changes to the structure of a company, such as changing from a partnership to a corporation or changing corporation types, so that the filing number (or charter number) that is on record with the Texas Secretary of State must be changed. An NOC is not required for notifying TCEQ of a decrease in the number of acres disturbed. This information must be included in the SWP3 and retained on site. Effective September 1, 2018, applicants must submit an NOC using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website, or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 7. Signatory Requirement for NOI Forms, Notice of Termination (NOT) Forms, NOC Letters, and Construction Site Notices NOI forms, NOT forms, NOC letters, and Construction Site Notices that require a signature must be signed according to 3o TAC § 305.44 (relating to Signatories for Applications). 8. Contents of the NOI The NOI form shall require, at a minimum, the following information: (a) the TPDES CGP authorization number for existing authorizations under this general permit, where the operator submits an NOI to renew coverage within 90 days of the effective date of this general permit; (b) the name, address, and telephone number of the operator filing the NOI for permit coverage; (c) the name (or other identifier), address, county, and latitude/longitude of the construction project or site; (d) the number of acres that will be disturbed by the applicant; (e) confirmation that the project or site will not be located on Indian Country lands; (f) confirmation that a SWP3 has been developed in accordance with this general permit, that it will be implemented prior to commencement of construction activities, and that it is compliant with any applicable local sediment and erosion control plans; for multiple operators who prepare a shared SWP3, the confirmation for an operator may be limited to its obligations under the SWP3 provided all obligations are confirmed by at least one operator; (g) name of the receiving water(s); (h) the classified segment number for each classified segment that receives discharges from the regulated construction activity (if the discharge is not directly to a classified segment, then the classified segment number of the first classified segment that those discharges reach); and (i) the name of all surface waters receiving discharges from the regulated construction activity that are on the latest EPA -approved CWA § 3o3(d) List of impaired waters or Texas Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality for CWA Sections 3o5(b) and 3o3(d) as not meeting applicable state water quality standards. Page 22 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Section F. Terminating Coverage 1. Notice of Termination (NOT) Required Each operator that has submitted an NOI for authorization of large construction activities under this general permit must apply to terminate that authorization following the conditions described in this section of the general permit. Authorization of large construction must be terminated by submitting an NOT on a paper form to TCEQ supplied by the executive director or electronically via the online e- Permits system available through the TCEQ website. Authorization to discharge under this general permit terminates at midnight on the day a paper NOT is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ or immediately following confirmation of the receipt of the NOT submitted electronically by the TCEQ. Compliance with the conditions and requirements of this permit is required until an NOT is submitted. Effective September 1, 2018, applicants must submit an NOT using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website, or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. The NOT must be submitted to TCEQ, and a copy of the NOT provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge (with a list in the SWP3 of the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy), within 3o days after any of the following conditions are met: (a) final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the operator; (b) a transfer of operational control has occurred (See Section II.F.4 below); or (c) the operator has obtained alternative authorization under an individual TPDES permit or alternative TPDES general permit. 2. Minimum Contents of the NOT The NOT form shall require, at a minimum, the following information: (a) if authorization for construction activity was granted following submission of an NOI, the permittee's site -specific TPDES authorization number for a specific construction site; (b) an indication of whether final stabilization has been achieved at the site and a NOT has been submitted or if the permittee is simply no longer an operator at the site; (c) the name, address, and telephone number of the permittee submitting the NOT; (d) the name (or other identifier), address, county, and location (latitude/longitude) of the construction project or site; and (e) a signed certification that either all stormwater discharges requiring authorization under this general permit will no longer occur, or that the applicant is no longer the operator of the facility or construction site, and that all temporary structural erosion controls have either been removed, will be removed on a schedule defined in the SWP3, or have been transferred to a new operator if the new operator has applied for permit coverage. Erosion controls that are designed to remain in place for an indefinite period, such as mulches and fiber mats, are not required to be removed or scheduled for removal. Page 23 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 3. Termination of Coverage for Small Construction Sites and for Secondary Operators at Large Construction Sites (a) Each operator that has obtained automatic authorization for small construction or is a secondary operator for large construction must perform the following when terminating coverage under the permit: i. remove the site notice; ii. complete the applicable portion of the site notice related to removal of the site notice; and iii. submit a copy of the completed site notice to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge (or provide alternative notification as allowed by the MS4 operator, with documentation of such notification included in the SWP3). (b) The activities described in Part II.F.3.(a) above must be completed by the operator within 3o days of meeting any of the following conditions: i. final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the operator; ii. a transfer of day-to-day operational control over activities necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions has occurred (See Section II.F.4. below); or iii. the operator has obtained alternative authorization under an individual or general TPDES permit. Authorization to discharge under this general permit terminates immediately upon removal of the applicable site notice. Compliance with the conditions and requirements of this permit is required until the site notice is removed. 4. Transfer of Day -to -Day Operational Control (a) When the primary operator of a large construction activity changes or operational control over activities necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions is transferred to another primary operator, the original operator must do the following: i. submit an NOT within ten (1o) days prior to the date that responsibility for operations terminates, and the new operator must submit an NOI at least ten (1o) days prior to the transfer of operational control, in accordance with condition (c) below; and ii. submit a copy of the NOT from the primary operator terminating its coverage under the permit and its operational control of the construction site and submit a copy of the NOI from the new primary operator to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge in accordance with Part II.F.1 above. (b) For transfer of operational control, operators of small construction activities and secondary operators of large construction activities who are not required to submit an NOI must do the following: i. the existing operator must remove the original site notice, and the new operator must post the required site notice prior to the transfer of operational control, in accordance with the conditions in Part II.F.4.(c) i or ii below; and ii. a copy of the site notice, which must be completed and provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge, in accordance with Part II.F.3 above. (c) Each operator is responsible for determining its role as an operator as defined in Part I.B and obtaining authorization under the permit, as described above in Part Page 24 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 II.E.1— 3. Where authorization has been obtained by submitting an NOI for coverage under this general permit, permit coverage is not transferable from one operator to another. A transfer of operational control can include changes to the structure of a company, such as changing from a partnership to a corporation, or changing to a different corporation type such that a different filing (or charter) number is established with the Texas Secretary of State. A transfer of operational control can also occur when of the following criteria is met, as applicable: i. Another operator has assumed control over all areas of the site that do not meet the definition for final stabilization; ii. all silt fences and other temporary erosion controls have either been removed, scheduled for removal as defined in the SWP3, or transferred to a new operator, provided that the original permitted operator has attempted to notify the new operator in writing of the requirement to obtain permit coverage. Records of this notification (or attempt at notification) shall be retained by the operator transferring operational control to another operator in accordance with Part VI of this permit. Erosion controls that are designed to remain in place for an indefinite period, such as mulches and fiber mats, are not required to be removed or scheduled for removal; or iii. a homebuilder has purchased one or more lots from an operator who obtained coverage under this general permit for a common plan of development or sale. The homebuilder is considered a new operator and shall comply with the requirements of this permit. Under these circumstances, the homebuilder is only responsible for compliance with the general permit requirements as they apply to the lot(s) it has operational control over in a larger common plan of development, and the original operator remains responsible for common controls or discharges, and must amend its SWP3 to remove the lot(s) transferred to the homebuilder. Section G. Waivers from Coverage The executive director may waive the otherwise applicable requirements of this general permit for stormwater discharges from small construction activities under the terms and conditions described in this section. 1. Waiver Applicability and Coverage Operators of small construction activities may apply for and receive a waiver from the requirements to obtain authorization under this general permit, when the calculated rainfall erosivity (R) factor for the entire period of the construction project is less than five (5). The operator must submit either a signed paper Low Rainfall Erosivity Waiver (LREW) certification form to the TCEQ, supplied by the executive director, or complete the form electronically via the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website. The form is a certification by the operator that the small construction activity will commence and be completed within a period when the value of the calculated R factor is less than five (5). The paper LREW certification form must be postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ at least seven (7) days before construction activity begins or, if submitted electronically, construction may begin at any time following the receipt of written confirmation from TCEQ that a complete electronic application was submitted and acknowledged. This waiver from coverage does not apply to any non-stormwater discharges, including what is allowed under this permit. The operator must insure that all non-stormwater discharges are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization, or are captured and routed to an authorized treatment facility for disposal. Page 25 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Effective September 1, 2018, applicants must submit an LREW using the online e- Permits system available through the TCEQ website, or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 2. Steps to Obtaining a Waiver The construction site operator may calculate the R factor to request a waiver using the following steps: (a) Estimate the construction start date and the construction end date. The construction end date is the date that final stabilization will be achieved. (b) Find the appropriate Erosivity Index (EI) zone in Appendix B of this permit. (c) Find the EI percentage for the project period by adding the results for each period of the project using the table provided in Appendix D of this permit, in EPA Fact Sheet 2.1, or in USDA Handbook 703, by subtracting the start value from the end value to find the percent EI for the site. (d) Refer to the Isoerodent Map (Appendix C of this permit) and interpolate the annual isoerodent value for the proposed construction location. (e) Multiply the percent value obtained in Step (c) above by the annual isoerodent value obtained in Step (d). This is the R factor for the proposed project. If the value is less than 5, then a waiver may be obtained. If the value is five (5) or more, then a waiver may not be obtained, and the operator must obtain coverage under Part II.E.2. of this permit. Alternatively, the operator may calculate a site -specific R factor utilizing the following online calculator: http://ei.tamu.edu/index.html, or using another available resource. A copy of the LREW certification form is not required to be posted at the small construction site. 3. Effective Date of a LREW Unless otherwise notified by the executive director, operators of small construction activities seeking coverage under a LREW are provisionally waived from the otherwise applicable requirements of this general permit seven (7) days from the date that a completed paper LREW certification form is postmarked for delivery to TCEQ, or immediately upon receiving confirmation of approval of an electronic submittal, made via the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website. Effective September 1, 2018, applicants seeking coverage under a LREW must submit an application for a LREW using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website, or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 4. Activities Extending Beyond the LREW Period If a construction activity extends beyond the approved waiver period due to circumstances beyond the control of the operator, the operator must either: (a) recalculate the R factor using the original start date and a new projected ending date, and if the R factor is still under five (5), submit a new waiver certification form at least two (2) days before the end of the original waiver period; or (b) obtain authorization under this general permit according to the requirements for automatic authorization for small construction activities in Part II.E.2 of this permit, prior to the end of the approved LREW period. Page 26 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Section H. Alternative TPDES Permit Coverage 1. Individual Permit Alternative Any discharge eligible for coverage under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under an individual TPDES permit according to 3o TAC §305 (relating to Consolidated Permits). Applications for individual permit coverage must be submitted at least three hundred and thirty (33o) days prior to commencement of construction activities to ensure timely authorization. Existing coverage under this general permit should not be terminated until an individual permit is issued and in effect. 2. Alternative Authorizations for Certain Discharges Certain discharges eligible for authorization under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under a separate general permit according to 3o TAC Chapter 205 (relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges), as applicable. 3. Individual Permit Required The executive director may require an operator of a construction site, otherwise eligible for authorization under this general permit, to apply for an individual TPDES permit in the following circumstances: (a) the conditions of an approved TMDL or TMDL I -Plan on the receiving water; (b) the activity being determined to cause, has a reasonable potential to cause, or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or being found to cause, or contribute to, the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state: and (c) any other consideration defined in 30 TAC Chapter 205 (relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges) including 3o TAC Chapter 2435.4(c)(3)(D), which allows the commission to deny authorization under the general permit and require an individual permit if a discharger has been determined by the executive director to have been out of compliance with any rule, order, or permit of the commission, including non-payment of fees assessed by the executive director. A discharger with a TCEQ compliance history rating of "unsatisfactory" is ineligible for coverage under this general permit. In that case, 3o TAC § 60.3 requires the executive director to deny or suspend an authorization to discharge under a general permit. However, per TWC § 26.04o(h), a discharger is entitled to a hearing before the commission prior to having an authorization denied or suspended for having an "unsatisfactory" compliance history. Denial of authorization to discharge under this general permit or suspension of a permittee's authorization under this general permit for reasons other than compliance history shall be done according to commission rules in 30 TAC Chapter 205 (relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges). 4. Alternative Discharge Authorization Any discharge eligible for authorization under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under a separate general permit according to 3o TAC Chapter 205 (relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges), if applicable. Section I. Permit Expiration 1. This general permit is effective for a term not to exceed five (5) years. All active discharge authorizations expire on the date provided on page one (1) of this permit. Following public notice and comment, as provided by 3o TAC §205.3 (relating to Public Notice, Public Meetings, and Public Comment), the commission may amend, Page 27 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 revoke, cancel, or renew this general permit. All authorizations that are active at the time the permit term expires will be administratively continued as indicated in Part II.I.2 below and in Part II.D.i(b) and D.2(b) of this permit. 2. If the executive director publishes a notice of the intent to renew or amend this general permit before the expiration date, the permit will remain in effect for existing, authorized discharges until the commission takes final action on the permit. Upon issuance of a renewed or amended permit, permittees may be required to submit an NOI within 90 days following the effective date of the renewed or amended permit, unless that permit provides for an alternative method for obtaining authorization. 3. If the commission does not propose to reissue this general permit within 90 days before the expiration date, permittees shall apply for authorization under an individual permit or an alternative general permit. If the application for an individual permit is submitted before the expiration date, authorization under this expiring general permit remains in effect until the issuance or denial of an individual permit. No new NOIs will be accepted nor new authorizations honored under the general permit after the expiration date. Part III. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plans (SWP3) All regulated construction site operators shall prepare an SWP3, prior to submittal of an NOI, to address discharges authorized under Parts II.E.2 and II.E.3 of this general permit that will reach Waters of the U.S. This includes discharges to MS4s and privately owned separate storm sewer systems that drain into surface water in the state or Waters of the U.S. Individual operators at a site may develop separate SWP3s that cover only their portion of the project, provided reference is made to the other operators at the site. Where there is more than one SWP3 for a site, operators must coordinate to ensure that BMPs and controls are consistent and do not negate or impair the effectiveness of each other. Regardless of whether a single comprehensive SWP3 is developed or separate SWP3s are developed for each operator, it is the responsibility of each operator to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit in the areas of the construction site where that operator has control over construction plans and specifications or day-to-day operations. An SWP3 must describe the implementation of practices that will be used to minimize to the extent practicable the discharge of pollutants in stormwater associated with construction activity and non-stormwater discharges described in Part II.A.3, in compliance with the terms and conditions of this permit. An SWP3 must also identify any potential sources of pollution that have been determined to cause, have a reasonable potential to cause, or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or have been found to cause or contribute to the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state from discharges of stormwater from construction activities and construction support activities. Where potential sources of these pollutants are present at a construction site, the SWP3 must also contain a description of the management practices that will be used to prevent these pollutants from being discharged into surface water in the state or Waters of the U.S. NOTE: Construction support activities can also include vehicle repair areas, fueling areas, etc. that are present at a construction site solely for the support construction activities and are only used by operators at the construction site. The SWP3 is intended to serve as a road map for how the construction operator will comply with the effluent limits and other conditions of this permit and does not establish the effluent limits that apply to the construction site's discharges. These limits are established in Part III.G of the permit. Page 28 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Section A. Shared SWP3 Development For more effective coordination of BMPs and opportunities for cost sharing, a cooperative effort by the different operators at a site is encouraged. Operators of small and large construction activities must independently obtain authorization under this permit, but may work together with other regulated operators at the construction site to prepare and implement a single, comprehensive SWP3, which can be shared by some or all operators, for the construction activities that each of the operators are performing at the entire construction site. i. The SWP3 must include the following: (a) for small construction activities — the name of each operator that participates in the shared SWP3; (b) for large construction activities - the name of each operator that participates in the shared SWP3, the general permit authorization numbers of each operator (or the date that the NOI was submitted to TCEQ by each operator that has not received an authorization number for coverage under this permit); and (c) for large and small construction activities - the signature of each operator participating in the shared SWP3. 2. The SWP3 must clearly indicate which operator is responsible for satisfying each shared requirement of the SWP3. If the responsibility for satisfying a requirement is not described in the plan, then each permittee is entirely responsible for meeting the requirement within the boundaries of the construction site where they perform construction activities. The SWP3 must clearly describe responsibilities for meeting each requirement in shared or common areas. 3. The SWP3 may provide that one operator is responsible for preparation of a SWP3 in compliance with the CGP, and another operator is responsible for implementation of the SWP3 at the project site. Section B. Responsibilities of Operators 1. Secondary Operators and Primary Operators with Control Over Construction Plans and Specifications All secondary operators and primary operators with control over construction plans and specifications shall: (a) ensure the project specifications allow or provide that adequate BMPs are developed to meet the requirements of Part III of this general permit; ensure that the SWP3 indicates the areas of the project where they have control over project specifications, including the ability to make modifications in specifications; (c) ensure that all other operators affected by modifications in project specifications are notified in a timely manner so that those operators may modify their BMP s as necessary to remain compliant with the conditions of this general permit; and (d) ensure that the SWP3 for portions of the project where they are operators indicates the name and site -specific TPDES authorization number(s) for operators with the day-to-day operational control over those activities necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions. If a primary operator has not been authorized or has abandoned the site, the secondary operator is considered to be the responsible party and must obtain authorization (b) Page 29 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 as a primary operator under the permit, until the authority for day-to-day operational control is transferred to another primary operator. The new primary operator must update or develop a new SWP3 that will reflect the transfer of operational control and include any additional updates to the SWP3 to meet requirements of the permit. 2. Primary Operators with Day -to -Day Operational Control Primary operators with day-to-day operational control of those activities at a project that are necessary to ensure compliance with an SWP3 and other permit conditions must ensure that the SWP3 accomplishes the following requirements: (a) meets the requirements of this general permit for those portions of the project where they are operators; (b) identifies the parties responsible for implementation of BMPs described in the SWP3; (c) indicates areas of the project where they have operational control over day-to- day activities; and (d) the name and site -specific TPDES authorization number of the parties with control over project specifications, including the ability to make modifications in specifications for areas where they have operational control over day-to-day activities. Section C. Deadlines for SWP3 Preparation, Implementation, and Compliance The SWP3 must be prepared prior to obtaining authorization under this general permit, and implemented prior to commencing construction activities that result in soil disturbance. The SWP3 must be prepared so that it provides for compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit. Section D. Plan Review and Making Plans Available 1. The SWP3 must be retained on -site at the construction site or, if the site is inactive or does not have an on -site location to store the plan, a notice must be posted describing the location of the SWP3. The SWP3 must be made readily available at the time of an on -site inspection to: the executive director; a federal, state, or local agency approving sediment and erosion plans, grading plans, or stormwater management plans; local government officials; and the operator of a municipal separate storm sewer receiving discharges from the site. If the SWP3 is retained off -site, then it shall be made available as soon as reasonably possible. In most instances, it is reasonable that the SWP3 shall be made available within 24 hours of the request. 2. Operators with authorization for construction activity under this general permit must post a TCEQ site notice at the construction site at a place readily available for viewing by the general public, and local, state, and federal authorities. (a) Primary and secondary operators of large construction activities must each post a TCEQ construction site notice, respective to their role as an operator at the construction site, as required above and according to requirements in Part II.E.3 of this general permit. (b) Primary and secondary operators of small construction activities must post the TCEQ site notice as required in Part III.D.2.(a) above and for the specific type of small construction described in Part II.E.i and 2 of the permit. (c) If the construction project is a linear construction project, such as a pipeline or highway, the notices must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway. Site notices for small and large construction Page 3o Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1500000 activities at these linear construction sites may be located, as necessary, along the length of the project, but must still be readily available for viewing by the general public; local, state, and federal authorities; and contain the following information: i. the site -specific TPDES authorization number for the project if assigned; ii. the operator name, contact name, and contact phone number; iii. a brief description of the project; and iv. the location of the SWP3. 3. This permit does not provide the general public with any right to trespass on a construction site for any reason, including inspection of a site; nor does this permit require that permittees allow members of the general public access to a construction site. Section E. Revisions and Updates to SWP3s The permittee must revise or update the SWP3 within seven days of when any of the following occurs: 1. a change in design, construction, operation, or maintenance that has a significant effect on the discharge of pollutants and that has not been previously addressed in the SWP3; 2. changing site conditions based on updated plans and specifications, new operators, new areas of responsibility, and changes in BMPs; or 3. results of inspections or investigations by construction site personnel authorized by the permittee, operators of a municipal separate storm sewer system receiving the discharge, authorized TCEQ personnel, or a federal, state or local agency approving sediment and erosion plans indicate the SWP3 is proving ineffective in eliminating or significantly minimizing pollutants in discharges authorized under this general permit. Section F. Contents of SWP3 The SWP3 must be developed and implemented by primary operators of small and large construction activities and include, at a minimum, the information described in this section and must comply with the construction and development effluent guidelines in Part III, Section G of the general permit. 1. A site or project description, which includes the following information: (a) a description of the nature of the construction activity; (b) a list of potential pollutants and their sources; (c) a description of the intended schedule or sequence of activities that will disturb soils for major portions of the site, including estimated start dates and duration of activities; (d) the total number of acres of the entire property and the total number of acres where construction activities will occur, including areas where construction support activities (defined in Part I.B of this general permit) occur; (e) data describing the soil or the quality of any discharge from the site; (f) a map showing the general location of the site (e.g. a portion of a city or county map); (g) a detailed site map (or maps) indicating the following: Page 31 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 i. drainage patterns and approximate slopes anticipated after major grading activities; ii. areas where soil disturbance will occur; iii. locations of all controls and buffers, either planned or in place; iv. locations where temporary or permanent stabilization practices are expected to be used; v. locations of construction support activities, including those located off -site; vi. surface waters (including wetlands) either at, adjacent, or in close proximity to the site, and also indicate whether those waters are impaired; vii. locations where stormwater discharges from the site directly to a surface water body or a municipal separate storm sewer system; viii. vehicle wash areas; and ix. designated points on the site where vehicles will exit onto paved roads (for instance, this applies to construction transition from unstable dirt areas to exterior paved roads). Where the amount of information required to be included on the map would result in a single map being difficult to read and interpret, the operator shall develop a series of maps that collectively include the required information. (h) the location and description of support activities authorized under the permittee's NOI, including asphalt plants, concrete plants, and other activities providing support to the construction site that is authorized under this general permit; (i) the name of receiving waters at or near the site that may be disturbed or that may receive discharges from disturbed areas of the project; (j) a copy of this TPDES general permit; (k) the NOI and the acknowledgement of provisional and non -provisional authorization for primary operators of large construction sites, and the site notice for small construction sites and for secondary operators of large construction sites; (1) stormwater and allowable non-stormwater discharge locations, including storm drain inlets on site and in the immediate vicinity of the construction site where construction support activities will occur; and (m) locations of all pollutant -generating activities at the construction site and where construction support activities will occur, such as the following: Paving operations; concrete, paint and stucco washout and water disposal; solid waste storage and disposal; and dewatering operations. 2. A description of the BMPs that will be used to minimize pollution in runoff. The description must identify the general timing or sequence for implementation. At a minimum, the description must include the following components: (a) General Requirements i. Erosion and sediment controls must be designed to retain sediment on -site to the extent practicable with consideration for local topography, soil type, and rainfall. ii. Control measures must be properly selected, installed, and maintained according to the manufacturer's or designer's specifications. Page 32 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 iii. Controls must be developed to minimize the offsite transport of litter, construction debris, and construction materials. (b) Erosion Control and Stabilization Practices The SWP3 must include a description of temporary and permanent erosion control and stabilization practices for the construction site, where small or large construction activity will occur. The erosion control and stabilization practices selected by the permittee must be compliant with the requirements for sediment and erosion control, located in Part III.G of this permit. The description of the SWP3 must also include a schedule of when the practices will be implemented. Site plans must ensure that existing vegetation at the construction site is preserved where it is possible. i. Erosion control and stabilization practices may include but are not limited to: establishment of temporary or permanent vegetation, mulching, geotextiles, sod stabilization, vegetative buffer strips, protection of existing trees and vegetation, slope texturing, temporary velocity dissipation devices, flow diversion mechanisms, and other similar measures. ii. The following records must be maintained and either attached to or referenced in the SWP3, and made readily available upon request to the parties listed in Part III.D.1 of this general permit: (A) the dates when major grading activities occur; (B) the dates when construction activities temporarily or permanently cease on a portion of the site; and (C) the dates when stabilization measures are initiated. iii. Erosion control and stabilization measures must be initiated immediately in portions of the site where construction activities have temporarily ceased and will not resume for a period exceeding 14 calendar days. Stabilization measures that provide a protective cover must be initiated immediately in portions of the site where construction activities have permanently ceased. The term "immediately" is used to define the deadline for initiating stabilization measures. In the context of this requirement, "immediately" means as soon as practicable, but no later than the end of the next work day, following the day when the earth -disturbing activities have temporarily or permanently ceased. Except as provided in (A) through (D) below, these measures must be completed as soon as practicable, but no more than 14 calendar days after the initiation of soil stabilization measures: (A) Where the immediate initiation of vegetative stabilization measures after construction activity has temporarily or permanently ceased due to frozen conditions, non -vegetative controls must be implemented until thawing conditions (as defined in Part I.B of this general permit) are present, and vegetative stabilization measures can be initiated as soon as practicable. (B) In arid areas, semi -arid areas, or drought -stricken areas, as they are defined in Part I.B of this general permit, where the immediate initiation of vegetative stabilization measures after construction activity has temporarily or permanently ceased or is precluded by arid conditions, other types of erosion control and stabilization measures must be initiated at the site as soon as practicable. Where vegetative controls are infeasible due to arid conditions, and within 14 calendar days of a temporary or permanent cessation of construction activity in any portion of the site, the operator shall immediately install non - Page 33 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 vegetative erosion controls in areas of the construction site where construction activity is complete or has ceased. If non -vegetative controls are infeasible, the operator shall install temporary sediment controls as required in Part III.F.2.(b).iii.(C) below. (C) In areas where non -vegetative controls are infeasible, the operator may alternatively utilize temporary perimeter controls. The operator must document in the SWP3 the reason why stabilization measures are not feasible, and must demonstrate that the perimeter controls will retain sediment on site to the extent practicable. The operator must continue to inspect the BMPs at the frequencies established in Part III.F.7.(c) for unstabilized sites. (D) The requirement for permittees to initiate stabilization is triggered as soon as it is known with reasonable certainty that construction activity at the site or in certain areas of the site will be stopped for 14 or more additional calendar days. If the initiation or completion of vegetative stabilization is prevented by circumstances beyond the control of the permittee, the permittee must employ and implement alternative stabilization measures immediately. When conditions at the site changes that would allow for vegetative stabilization, then the permittee must initiate or complete vegetative stabilization as soon as practicable. iv. Final stabilization must be achieved prior to termination of permit coverage. v. TCEQ does not expect that temporary or permanent stabilization measures to be applied to areas that are intended to be left un-vegetated or un- stabilized following construction (e.g., dirt access roads, utility pole pads, areas being used for storage of vehicles, equipment, or materials). (c) Sediment Control Practices The SWP3 must include a description of any sediment control practices used to remove eroded soils from stormwater runoff, including the general timing or sequence for implementation of controls. Sites With Drainage Areas of Ten or More Acres (A) Sedimentation Basin(s) (1) A sedimentation basin is required, where feasible, for a common drainage location that serves an area with ten (1o) or more acres disturbed at one time. A sedimentation basin may be temporary or permanent, and must provide sufficient storage to contain a calculated volume of runoff from a 2-year, 24-hour storm from each disturbed acre drained. When calculating the volume of runoff from a 2-year, 24-hour storm event, it is not required to include the flows from offsite areas and flow from onsite areas that are either undisturbed or have already undergone permanent stabilization, if these flows are diverted around both the disturbed areas of the site and the sediment basin. Capacity calculations shall be included in the SWP3. (2) Where rainfall data is not available or a calculation cannot be performed, the sedimentation basin must provide at least 3,60o cubic feet of storage per acre drained until final stabilization of the site. Page 34 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1500o0 (3) If a sedimentation basin is not feasible, then the permittee shall provide equivalent control measures until final stabilization of the site. In determining whether installing a sediment basin is feasible, the permittee may consider factors such as site soils, slope, available area, public safety, precipitation patterns, site geometry, site vegetation, infiltration capacity, geotechnical factors, depth to groundwater, and other similar considerations. The permittee shall document the reason that the sediment basins are not feasible, and shall utilize equivalent control measures, which may include a series of smaller sediment basins. (4) Unless infeasible, when discharging from sedimentation basins and impoundments, the permittee shall utilize outlet structures that withdraw water from the surface. (B) Perimeter Controls: At a minimum, silt fences, vegetative buffer strips, or equivalent sediment controls are required for all down slope boundaries of the construction area, and for those side slope boundaries deemed appropriate as dictated by individual site conditions. ii. Controls for Sites With Drainage Areas Less than Ten Acres: (A) Sediment traps and sediment basins may be used to control solids in stormwater runoff for drainage locations serving less than ten (10) acres. At a minimum, silt fences, vegetative buffer strips, or equivalent sediment controls are required for all down slope boundaries of the construction area, and for those side slope boundaries deemed appropriate as dictated by individual site conditions. (B) Alternatively, a sediment basin that provides storage for a calculated volume of runoff from a 2-year, 24-hour storm from each disturbed acre drained may be utilized. Where rainfall data is not available or a calculation cannot be performed, a temporary or permanent sediment basin providing 3,600 cubic feet of storage per acre drained may be provided. If a calculation is performed, then the calculation shall be included in the SWP3. (C) If sedimentation basins or impoundments are used, the permittee shall comply with the requirements in Part III.G.6 of this general permit. 3. Description of Permanent Stormwater Controls A description of any stormwater control measures that will be installed during the construction process to control pollutants in stormwater discharges that may occur after construction operations have been completed must be included in the SWP3. Permittees are responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater management measures, as follows: (a) permittees authorized under the permit for small construction activities are responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater control measures prior to final stabilization of the site; or (b) permittees authorized under the permit for large construction activities are responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater control measures prior to final stabilization of the site and prior to submission of an NOT. 4. Other Required Controls and BMPs Page 35 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (a) Permittees shall minimize, to the extent practicable, the off -site vehicle tracking of sediments and the generation of dust. The SWP3 shall include a description of controls utilized to accomplish this requirement. (b) The SWP3 must include a description of construction and waste materials expected to be stored on -site and a description of controls to minimize pollutants from these materials. (c) The SWP3 must include a description of potential pollutant sources in discharges of stormwater from all areas of the construction site where construction activity, including construction support activities, will be located, and a description of controls and measures that will be implemented at those sites to minimize pollutant discharges. (d) Permittees shall place velocity dissipation devices at discharge locations and along the length of any outfall channel (i.e., runoff conveyance) to provide a non - erosive flow velocity from the structure to a water course, so that the natural physical and biological characteristics and functions are maintained and protected. (e) Permittees shall design and utilize appropriate controls to minimize the offsite transport of suspended sediments and other pollutants if it is necessary to pump or channel standing water from the site. (f) Permittees shall ensure that all other required controls and BMPs comply with all of the requirements of Part III.G of this general permit. For demolition of any structure with at least io,000 square feet of floor space that was built or renovated before January 1, 198o, and the receiving waterbody is impaired for polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs): i. Implement controls to minimize the exposure of PCB -containing building materials, including paint, caulk, and pre-198o fluorescent lighting fixtures to precipitation and to stormwater; and ii. Ensure that disposal of such materials is performed in compliance with applicable state, federal, and local laws. 5. Documentation of Compliance with Approved State and Local Plans (a) Permittees must ensure that the SWP3 is consistent with requirements specified in applicable sediment and erosion site plans or site permits, or stormwater management site plans or site permits approved by federal, state, or local officials. (b) SWP3s must be updated as necessary to remain consistent with any changes applicable to protecting surface water resources in sediment erosion site plans or site permits, or stormwater management site plans or site permits approved by state or local official for which the permittee receives written notice. (c) If the permittee is required to prepare a separate management plan, including but not limited to a WPAP or Contributing Zone Plan in accordance with 3o TAC Chapter 213 (related to the Edwards Aquifer), then a copy of that plan must be either included in the SWP3 or made readily available upon request to authorized personnel of the TCEQ. The permittee shall maintain a copy of the approval letter for the plan in its SWP3. 6. Maintenance Requirements (a) All protective measures identified in the SWP3 must be maintained in effective operating condition. If, through inspections or other means, as soon as the permittee determines that BMPs are not operating effectively, then the permittee shall perform maintenance as necessary to maintain the continued effectiveness (g) Page 36 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR15000o (b) of stormwater controls, and prior to the next rain event if feasible. If maintenance prior to the next anticipated storm event is impracticable, the reason shall be documented in the SWP3 and maintenance must be scheduled and accomplished as soon as practicable. Erosion and sediment controls that have been intentionally disabled, run -over, removed, or otherwise rendered ineffective must be replaced or corrected immediately upon discovery. If periodic inspections or other information indicates a control has been used incorrectly, is performing inadequately, or is damaged, then the operator shall replace or modify the control as soon as practicable after making the discovery. (c) Sediment must be removed from sediment traps and sedimentation ponds no later than the time that design capacity has been reduced by 5o%. For perimeter controls such as silt fences, berms, etc., the trapped sediment must be removed before it reaches 5o% of the above -ground height. (d) If sediment escapes the site, accumulations must be removed at a frequency that minimizes off -site impacts, and prior to the next rain event, if feasible. If the permittee does not own or operate the off -site conveyance, then the permittee shall work with the owner or operator of the property to remove the sediment. 7. Inspections of Controls (a) Personnel provided by the permittee must inspect disturbed areas (cleared, graded, or excavated) of the construction site that do not meet the requirements of final stabilization in this general permit, all locations where stabilization measures have been implemented, areas of construction support activity covered under this permit, stormwater controls (including pollution prevention controls) for evidence of, or the potential for, the discharge of pollutants, areas where stormwater typically flows within the construction site, and points of discharge from the construction site. i. Personnel conducting these inspections must be knowledgeable of this general permit, the construction activities at the site, and the SWP3 for the site. ii. Personnel conducting these inspections are not required to have signatory authority for inspection reports under 3o TAC §305.128. (b) Requirements for Inspections i. Inspect all stormwater controls (including sediment and erosion control measures identified in the SWP3) to ensure that they are installed properly, appear to be operational, and minimizing pollutants in discharges, as intended. ii. Identify locations on the construction site where new or modified stormwater controls are necessary. iii. Check for signs of visible erosion and sedimentation that can be attributed to the points of discharge where discharges leave the construction site or discharge into any surface water in the state flowing within or adjacent to the construction site. iv. Identify any incidents of noncompliance observed during the inspection. v. Inspect locations where vehicles enter or exit the site for evidence of off -site sediment tracking. vi. If an inspection is performed when discharges from the construction site are occurring: identify all discharge points at the site, observe and document the visual quality of the discharge (i.e., color, odor, floating, settled, or Page 37 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 suspended solids, foam, oil sheen, and other such indicators of pollutants in stormwater). vii. Complete any necessary maintenance needed, based on the results of the inspection and in accordance with the requirements listed in Part III.F.6 above. (c) Inspection frequencies: Inspections of construction sites must be conducted at least once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of o.5 inches or greater, unless as otherwise provided below in Part III.F.7.(c).ii — v below. ii. Inspection frequencies must be conducted at least once every month in areas of the construction site that meet final stabilization or have been temporarily stabilized. iii. Inspection frequencies for construction sites, where runoff is unlikely due to the occurrence of frozen conditions at the site, must be conducted at least once every month until thawing conditions begin to occur (See definitions for thawing conditions in Part I.B). The SWP3 must also contain a record of the approximate beginning and ending dates of when frozen conditions occurred at the site, which resulted in inspections being conducted monthly, while those conditions persisted, instead of at the interval of once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of o.5 inches or greater. iv. In arid, semi -arid, or drought -stricken areas, inspections must be conducted at least once every month and within 24 hours after the end of a storm event of o.5 inches or greater. The SWP3 must also contain a record of the total rainfall measured, as well as the approximate beginning and ending dates of when drought conditions occurred at the site, which resulted in inspections being conducted monthly, while those conditions persisted, instead of at the interval of once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of o.5 inches or greater. v. As an alternative to the inspection schedule in Part III.F.7.(c).i above, the SWP3 may be developed to require that these inspections will occur at least once every seven (7) calendar days. If this alternative schedule is developed, then the inspection must occur regardless of whether or not there has been a rainfall event since the previous inspection. vi. The inspection procedures described in Part III.F.7.(c).i. — v above can be performed at the frequencies and under the applicable conditions indicated for each schedule option, provided that the SWP3 reflects the current schedule and that any changes to the schedule are made in accordance with the following provisions: the inspection frequency schedule can only be changed a maximum of one time each month; the schedule change must be implemented at the beginning of a calendar month; and the reason for the schedule change documented in the SWP3 (e.g., end of "dry" season and beginning of "wet" season). (d) Utility line installation, pipeline construction, and other examples of long, narrow, linear construction activities may provide inspection personnel with limited access to the areas described in Part III.F.7.(a) above. i. Inspection of linear construction sites could require the use of vehicles that could compromise areas of temporary or permanent stabilization, cause Page 38 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1500o0 additional disturbance of soils, and result in the increase the potential for erosion. In these circumstances, controls must be inspected at least once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater, but representative inspections may be performed. ii. For representative inspections, personnel must inspect controls along the construction site for o.25 mile above and below each access point where a roadway, undisturbed right-of-way, or other similar feature intersects the construction site and allows access to the areas described in Part III.F.7.(a) above. The conditions of the controls along each inspected o.25 mile portion may be considered as representative of the condition of controls along that reach extending from the end of the o.25 mile portion to either the end of the next o.25 mile inspected portion, or to the end of the project, whichever occurs first. As an alternative to the inspection schedule described in Part III.F.7.(c).i above, the SWP3 may be developed to require that these inspections will occur at least once every seven (7) calendar days. If this alternative schedule is developed, the inspection must occur regardless of whether or not there has been a rainfall event since the previous inspection. iii. The SWP3 for a linear construction site must reflect the current inspection schedule. Any changes to the inspection schedule must be made in accordance with the following provisions: (A) the schedule may be changed a maximum of one time each month; (B) the schedule change must be implemented at the beginning of a calendar month, and (C) the reason for the schedule change must be documented in the SWP3 (e.g., end of "dry" season and beginning of "wet" season). (e) In the event of flooding or other uncontrollable situations which prohibit access to the inspection sites, inspections must be conducted as soon as aerpcs is practicable. (f) Inspection Reports A report summarizing the scope of any inspection must be completed within 24-hours following the inspection. The report must also include the date(s) of the inspection and major observations relating to the implementation of the SWP3. Major observations in the report must include: the locations of where erosion and discharges of sediment or other pollutants from the site have occurred; locations of BMPs that need to be maintained; locations of BMPs that failed to operate as designed or proved inadequate for a particular location; and locations where additional BMPs are needed. ii. Actions taken as a result of inspections must be described within, and retained as a part of, the SWP3. Reports must identify any incidents of non- compliance. Where a report does not identify any incidents of non- compliance, the report must contain a certification that the facility or site is in compliance with the SWP3 and this permit. The report must be retained as part of the SWP3 and signed by the person and in the manner required by 3o TAC §3o5.128 (relating to Signatories to Reports). iii. The names and qualifications of personnel making the inspections for the permittee may be documented once in the SWP3 rather than being included in each report. The SWP3 must be modified based on the results of inspections, as necessary, to better control pollutants in runoff. Revisions to the SWP3 must be completed (g) Page 39 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 within seven (7) calendar days following the inspection. If existing BMPs are modified or if additional BMPs are necessary, an implementation schedule must be described in the SWP3 and wherever possible those changes implemented before the next storm event. If implementation before the next anticipated storm event is impracticable, these changes must be implemented as soon as practicable. 8. The SWP3 must identify and ensure the implementation of appropriate pollution prevention measures for all eligible non-stormwater components of the discharge, as listed in Part II.A.3 of this permit. 9. The SWP3 must include the information required in Part III.B of this general permit. io. The SWP3 must include pollution prevention procedures that comply with Part III.G.4 of this general permit. Section G. Erosion and Sediment Control Requirements Applicable to All Sites Except as provided in 4o CFR §§125.3o-125.32, any discharge regulated under this general permit, with the exception of sites that obtained waivers based on low rainfall erosivity, must achieve, at a minimum, the following effluent limitations representing the degree of effluent reduction attainable by application of the best practicable control technology currently available (BPT). 1. Erosion and sediment controls. Design, install, and maintain effective erosion controls and sediment controls to minimize the discharge of pollutants. At a minimum, such controls must be designed, installed, and maintained to: (a) Control stormwater volume and velocity within the site to minimize soil erosion in order to minimize pollutant discharges; (b) Control stormwater discharges, including both peak flowrates and total stormwater volume, to minimize channel and streambank erosion and scour in the immediate vicinity of discharge point(s); (c) Minimize the amount of soil exposed during construction activity; (d) Minimize the disturbance of steep slopes; (e) Minimize sediment discharges from the site. The design, installation, and maintenance of erosion and sediment controls must address factors such as the amount, frequency, intensity and duration of precipitation, the nature of resulting stormwater runoff, and soil characteristics, including the range of soil particle sizes expected to be present on the site; (f) If earth disturbance activities are located in close proximity to a surface water in the state, provide and maintain appropriate natural buffers if feasible and as necessary, around surface water in the state, depending on site -specific topography, sensitivity, and proximity to water bodies. Direct stormwater to vegetated areas and maximize stormwater infiltration to reduce pollutant discharges, unless infeasible. If providing buffers is infeasible, the permittee shall document the reason that natural buffers are infeasible and shall implement additional erosion and sediment controls to reduce sediment load; (g) Preserve native topsoil at the site, unless the intended function of a specific area of the site dictates that the topsoil be disturbed or removed, or it is infeasible; and (h) Minimize soil compaction. In areas of the construction site where final vegetative stabilization will occur or where infiltration practices will be installed, either: i. restrict vehicle and equipment use to avoid soil compaction; or Page 4o Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TX10.50000 ii. prior to seeding or planting areas of exposed soil that have been compacted, use techniques that condition the soils to support vegetative growth, if necessary and feasible; Minimizing soil compaction is not required where the intended function of a specific area of the site dictates that it be compacted. (i) TCEQ does not consider stormwater control features (e.g., stormwater conveyance channels, storm drain inlets, sediment basins) to constitute "surface water" for the purposes of triggering the buffer requirement in Part III.G.i.(f) above. 2. Soil stabilization. Stabilization of disturbed areas must, at a minimum, be initiated immediately whenever any clearing, grading, excavating, or other earth disturbing activities have permanently ceased on any portion of the site, or temporarily ceased on any portion of the site and will not resume for a period exceeding 14 calendar days. In the context of this requirement, "immediately" means as soon as practicable, but no later than the end of the next work day, following the day when the earth - disturbing activities have temporarily or permanently ceased. Temporary stabilization must be completed no more than 14 calendar days after initiation of soil stabilization measures, and final stabilization must be achieved prior to termination of permit coverage. In arid, semi -arid, and drought -stricken areas where initiating vegetative stabilization measures immediately is infeasible, alternative non - vegetative stabilization measures must be employed as soon as practicable. Refer to Part III.F.2.(b) for complete erosion control and stabilization practice requirements. In limited circumstances, stabilization may not be required if the intended function of a specific area of the site necessitates that it remain disturbed. 3. Dewatering. Discharges from dewatering activities, including discharges from dewatering of trenches and excavations, are prohibited, unless managed by appropriate controls. 4. Pollution prevention measures. Design, install, implement, and maintain effective pollution prevention measures to minimize the discharge of pollutants. At a minimum, such measures must be designed, installed, implemented, and maintained to: (a) Minimize the discharge of pollutants from equipment and vehicle washing, wheel wash water, and other wash waters. Wash waters must be treated in a sediment basin or alternative control that provides equivalent or better treatment prior to discharge; (b) Minimize the exposure of building materials, building products, construction wastes, trash, landscape materials, fertilizers, pesticides, herbicides, detergents, sanitary waste, and other materials present on the site to precipitation and to stormwater; (c) Minimize the exposure of waste materials by closing waste container lids at the end of the work day. For waste containers that do not have lids, where the container itself is not sufficiently secure enough to prevent the discharge of pollutants absent a cover and could leak, the permittee must provide either a cover (e.g., a tarp, plastic sheeting, temporary roof) to minimize exposure of wastes to precipitation, or a similarly effective means designed to minimize the discharge of pollutants (e.g., secondary containment);and (d) Minimize the discharge of pollutants from spills and leaks, and implement chemical spill and leak prevention and response procedures. 5. Prohibited discharges. The following discharges are prohibited: Page 41 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (a) Wastewater from wash out of concrete, unless managed by an appropriate control; (b) Wastewater from wash out and cleanout of stucco, paint, form release oils, curing compounds and other construction materials; (c) Fuels, oils, or other pollutants used in vehicle and equipment operation and maintenance; (d) Soaps or solvents used in vehicle and equipment washing; and (e) Toxic or hazardous substances from a spill or other release. 6. Surface outlets. When discharging from basins and impoundments, utilize outlet structures that withdraw water from the surface, unless infeasible. Part IV. Stormwater Runoff from Concrete Batch Plants Discharges of stormwater runoff from concrete batch plants present at regulated construction sites and operated as a construction support activity may be authorized under the provisions of this general permit, provided that the following requirements are met for concrete batch plant(s) authorized under this permit. Only the discharges of stormwater runoff and non-stormwater from concrete batch plants that meet the requirements of a construction support activity can be authorized under this permit (see the requirements for "Non-Stormwater Discharges" in Part II.A.3 and "Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activity" in Part II.A.2). If discharges of stormwater runoff or non-stormwater from concrete batch plants are not authorized under this general permit, then discharges must be authorized under an alternative general permit or individual permit [see the requirement in Part II.A.2.(c)]. This permit does not authorize the discharge or land disposal of any wastewater from concrete batch plants at regulated construction sites. Authorization for these wastes must be obtained under an individual permit or an alternative general permit. Section A. Benchmark Sampling Requirements 1. Operators of concrete batch plants authorized under this general permit shall sample the stormwater runoff from the concrete batch plants according to the requirements of this section of this general permit, and must conduct evaluations on the effectiveness of the SWP3 based on the following benchmark monitoring values: Table 1. Benchmark Parameters Benchmark Parameter Benchmark Value Sampling Frequency Sample Type Oil and Grease (*i) 15 mg/L i/quarter (*2) (*3) Grab (*4) Total Suspended Solids (*1) 5o mg/L i/quarter (*2) (*3) Grab (*4) pH 6.o — 9.o Standard Units 1/quarter (*2) (*3) Grab (*4) Total Iron(*1) 1.3 mg/L 1/quarter (*2) (*3) Grab (*4) All analytical results for these parameters must be obtained from a laboratory that is accredited based on rules located in 3o TAC §25.4 (a) or through the National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program (NELAP). Analysis must be performed using sufficiently sensitive methods for analysis that comply with the rules located in 4o CFR §136.1(c) and 4o CFR §122.44(i)(1)(iv). Page 42 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR15o000 (*2) When discharge occurs. Sampling is required within the first 30 minutes of discharge. If it is not practicable to take the sample, or to complete the sampling, within the first 3o minutes, sampling must be completed within the first hour of discharge. If sampling is not completed within the first 3o minutes of discharge, the reason must be documented and attached to all required reports and records of the sampling activity. Sampling must be conducted at least once during each of the following periods. The first sample must be collected during the first full quarter that a stormwater discharge occurs from a concrete batch plant authorized under this general permit. January through March April through June July through September October through December For projects lasting less than one full quarter, a minimum of one sample shall be collected, provided that a stormwater discharge occurred at least once following submission of the NOI or following the date that automatic authorization was obtained under Section II.E.2, and prior to terminating coverage. (*4) A grab sample shall be collected from the stormwater discharge resulting from a storm event that is at least o.i inches of measured precipitation that occurs at least 72 hours from the previously measurable storm event. The sample shall be collected downstream of the concrete batch plant, and where the discharge exits any BMPs utilized to handle the runoff from the batch plant, prior to commingling with any other water authorized under this general permit. 2. The permittee must compare the results of sample analyses to the benchmark values above, and must include this comparison in the overall assessment of the SWP3's effectiveness. Analytical results that exceed a benchmark value are not a violation of this permit, as these values are not numeric effluent limitations. Results of analyses are indicators that modifications of the SWP3 should be assessed and may be necessary to protect water quality. The operator must investigate the cause for each exceedance and must document the results of this investigation in the SWP3 by the end of the quarter following the sampling event. The operator's investigation must identify the following: (a) any additional potential sources of pollution, such as spills that might have occurred; (b) necessary revisions to good housekeeping measures that are part of the SWP3; (c) additional BMPs, including a schedule to install or implement the BMPs; and (d) other parts of the SWP3 that may require revisions in order to meet the goal of the benchmark values. Background concentrations of specific pollutants may also be considered during the investigation. If the operator is able to relate the cause of the exceedance to background concentrations, then subsequent exceedances of benchmark values for that pollutant may be resolved by referencing earlier findings in the SWP3. Background concentrations may be identified by laboratory analyses of samples of stormwater run-on to the permitted facility, by laboratory analyses of samples of stormwater run-off from adjacent non -industrial areas, or by identifying the pollutant is a naturally occurring material in soils at the site. (*3) Page 43 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Section B. Best Management Practices (BMPs) and SWP3 Requirements Minimum SWP3 Requirements — The following are required in addition to other SWP3 requirements listed in this general permit, which include, but are not limited to the applicable requirements located in Part III.F.7 of this general permit, as follows: 1. Description of Potential Pollutant Sources - The SWP3 must provide a description of potential sources (activities and materials) that can cause, have a reasonable potential to cause or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or have been found to cause, or contribute to, the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state in stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants authorized under this permit. The SWP3 must describe the implementation of practices that will be used to minimize to the extent practicable the discharge of pollutants in stormwater discharges associated with industrial activity and non-stormwater discharges (described in Part II.A.3 of this general permit), in compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit, including the protection of water quality, and must ensure the implementation of these practices. The following must be developed, at a minimum, in support of developing this description: (a) Drainage — The site map must include the following information: i. the location of all outfalls for stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants that are authorized under this permit; ii. a depiction of the drainage area and the direction of flow to the outfall(s); iii. structural controls used within the drainage area(s); iv. the locations of the following areas associated with concrete batch plants that are exposed to precipitation: vehicle and equipment maintenance activities (including fueling, repair, and storage areas for vehicles and equipment scheduled for maintenance); areas used for the treatment, storage, or disposal of wastes; liquid storage tanks; material processing and storage areas; and loading and unloading areas; and v. the locations of the following: any bag house or other dust control device(s); recycle/sedimentation pond, clarifier or other device used for the treatment of facility wastewater (including the areas that drain to the treatment device); areas with significant materials; and areas where major spills or leaks have occurred. Inventory of Exposed Materials — A list of materials handled at the concrete batch plant that may be exposed to stormwater and that have a potential to affect the quality of stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants that are authorized under this general permit. (c) Spills and Leaks - A list of significant spills and leaks of toxic or hazardous pollutants that occurred in areas exposed to stormwater and that drain to stormwater outfalls associated with concrete batch plants authorized under this general permit must be developed, maintained, and updated as needed. (d) Sampling Data - A summary of existing stormwater discharge sampling data must be maintained, if available. 2. Measures and Controls - The SWP3 must include a description of management controls to regulate pollutants identified in the SWP3's "Description of Potential Pollutant Sources" from Part IV.B.i of this permit, and a schedule for implementation of the measures and controls. This must include, at a minimum: (b) Page 44 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1.50000 (a) Good Housekeeping - Good housekeeping measures must be developed and implemented in the area(s) associated with concrete batch plants. i. Operators must prevent or minimize the discharge of spilled cement, aggregate (including sand or gravel), settled dust, or other significant materials from paved portions of the site that are exposed to stormwater. Measures used to minimize the presence of these materials may include regular sweeping or other equivalent practices. These practices must be conducted at a frequency that is determined based on consideration of the amount of industrial activity occurring in the area and frequency of precipitation, and shall occur at least once per week when cement or aggregate is being handled or otherwise processed in the area. ii. Operators must prevent the exposure of fine granular solids, such as cement, to stormwater. Where practicable, these materials must be stored in enclosed silos, hoppers or buildings, in covered areas, or under covering. (b) Spill Prevention and Response Procedures - Areas where potential spills that can contribute pollutants to stormwater runoff, and the drainage areas from these locations, must be identified in the SWP3. Where appropriate, the SWP3 must specify material handling procedures, storage requirements, and use of equipment. Procedures for cleaning up spills must be identified in the SWP3 and made available to the appropriate personnel. (c) Inspections - Qualified facility personnel (i.e., a person or persons with knowledge of this general permit, the concrete batch plant, and the SWP3 related to the concrete batch plant(s) for the site) must be identified to inspect designated equipment and areas of the facility specified in the SWP3. Personnel conducting these inspections are not required to have signatory authority for inspection reports under 3o TAC §3o5.128. Inspections of facilities in operation must be performed once every seven days. Inspections of facilities that are not in operation must be performed at a minimum of once per month. The current inspection frequency being implemented at the facility must be recorded in the SWP3. The inspection must take place while the facility is in operation and must, at a minimum, include all areas that are exposed to stormwater at the site, including material handling areas, above ground storage tanks, hoppers or silos, dust collection/containment systems, truck wash down and equipment cleaning areas. Follow-up procedures must be used to ensure that appropriate actions are taken in response to the inspections. Records of inspections must be maintained and be made readily available for inspection upon request. (d) Employee Training - An employee training program must be developed to educate personnel responsible for implementing any component of the SWP3, or personnel otherwise responsible for stormwater pollution prevention, with the provisions of the SWP3. The frequency of training must be documented in the SWP3, and at a minimum, must consist of one training prior to the initiation of operation of the concrete batch plant. (e) Record Keeping and Internal Reporting Procedures - A description of spills and similar incidents, plus additional information that is obtained regarding the quality and quantity of stormwater discharges, must be included in the SWP3. Inspection and maintenance activities must be documented and records of those inspection and maintenance activities must be incorporated in the SWP3. (f) Management of Runoff - The SWP3 shall contain a narrative consideration for reducing the volume of runoff from concrete batch plants by diverting runoff or otherwise managing runoff, including use of infiltration, detention ponds, retention ponds, or reusing of runoff. Page 45 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 3. Comprehensive Compliance Evaluation — At least once per year, one or more qualified personnel (i.e., a person or persons with knowledge of this general permit, the concrete batch plant, and the SWP3 related to the concrete batch plant(s) for the site) shall conduct a compliance evaluation of the plant. The evaluation must include the following. (a) Visual examination of all areas draining stormwater associated with regulated concrete batch plants for evidence of, or the potential for, pollutants entering the drainage system. These include, but are not limited to: cleaning areas, material handling areas, above ground storage tanks, hoppers or silos, dust collection/containment systems, and truck wash down and equipment cleaning areas. Measures implemented to reduce pollutants in runoff (including structural controls and implementation of management practices) must be evaluated to determine if they are effective and if they are implemented in accordance with the terms of this permit and with the permittee's SWP3. The operator shall conduct a visual inspection of equipment needed to implement the SWP3, such as spill response equipment. (b) Based on the results of the evaluation, the following must be revised as appropriate within two weeks of the evaluation: the description of potential pollutant sources identified in the SWP3 (as required in Part IV.B.i, "Description of Potential Pollutant Sources"); and pollution prevention measures and controls identified in the SWP3 (as required in Part IV.B.2, "Measures and Controls"). The revisions may include a schedule for implementing the necessary changes. (c) The permittee shall prepare and include in the SWP3 a report summarizing the scope of the evaluation, the personnel making the evaluation, the date(s) of the evaluation, major observations relating to the implementation of the SWP3, and actions taken in response to the findings of the evaluation. The report must identify any incidents of noncompliance. Where the report does not identify incidences of noncompliance, the report must contain a statement that the evaluation did not identify any incidence(s), and the report must be signed according to 3o TAC §305.128, relating to Signatories to Reports. (d) The Comprehensive Compliance Evaluation may substitute for one of the required inspections delineated in Part IV.B.2.(c) of this general permit. Section C. Prohibition of Wastewater Discharges Wastewater discharges associated with concrete production including wastewater disposal by land application are not authorized under this general permit. These wastewater discharges must be authorized under an alternative TCEQ water quality permit or otherwise disposed of in an authorized manner. Discharges of concrete truck wash out at construction sites may be authorized if conducted in accordance with the requirements of Part V of this general permit. Part V. Concrete Truck Wash Out Requirements This general permit authorizes the land disposal of wash out from concrete trucks at construction sites regulated under this general permit, provided the following requirements are met. Any discharge of concrete production waste water to surface water in the state must be authorized under a separate TCEQ general permit or individual permit. A. Discharge of concrete truck wash out water to surface water in the state, including discharge to storm sewers, is prohibited by this general permit. B. Concrete truck wash out water shall be disposed in areas at the construction site where structural controls have been established to prevent discharge to surface water Page 46 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 in the state, or to areas that have a minimal slope that allow infiltration and filtering of wash out water to prevent discharge to surface water in the state. Structural controls may consist of temporary berms, temporary shallow pits, temporary storage tanks with slow rate release, or other reasonable measures to prevent runoff from the construction site. C. Wash out of concrete trucks during rainfall events shall be minimized. The discharge of concrete truck wash out water is prohibited at all times, and the operator shall insure that its BMPs are sufficient to prevent the discharge of concrete truck wash out as the result of rainfall or stormwater runoff. D. The disposal of wash out water from concrete trucks, made under authorization of this general permit must not cause or contribute to groundwater contamination. E. If a SWP3 is required to be implemented, the SWP3 shall include concrete wash out areas on the associated site map. Part VI. Retention of Records The permittee must retain the following records for a minimum period of three (3) years from the date that a NOT is submitted as required in Part II.F.i and 2 of this permit. For activities in which an NOT is not required, records shall be retained for a minimum period of three (3) years from the date that the operator terminates coverage under Section II.F.3 of this permit. Records include: A. A copy of the SWP3; B. All reports and actions required by this permit, including a copy of the construction site notice; C. All data used to complete the NOI, if an NOI is required for coverage under this general permit; and D. All records of submittal of forms submitted to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge and to the secondary operator of a large construction site, if applicable. Part VII. Standard Permit Conditions A. The permittee has a duty to comply with all permit conditions. Failure to comply with any permit condition is a violation of the permit and statutes under which it was issued (CWA and TWC), and is grounds for enforcement action, for terminating, revoking and reissuance, or modification, or denying coverage under this general permit, or for requiring a discharger to apply for and obtain an individual TPDES permit, based on rules located in TWC §23.086, 3o TAC §305.66 and 4o CFR §122.41 (a). B. Authorization under this general permit may be modified, suspended, revoked and reissued, terminated or otherwise suspended for cause, based on rules located in TWC §23.086, 3o TAC §305.66 and 4o CFR §122.41(f). Filing a notice of planned changes or anticipated non-compliance by the permittee does not stay any permit condition. The permittee must furnish to the executive director, upon request and within a reasonable time, any information necessary for the executive director to determine whether cause exists for modifying, revoking and reissuing, terminating or, otherwise suspending authorization under this permit, based on rules located in TWC §23.086, 3o TAC §305.66 and 4o CFR §122.41 (h). Additionally, the permittee must provide to the executive director, upon request, copies of all records that the permittee is required to maintain as a condition of this general permit. C. It is not a defense for a discharger in an enforcement action that it would have been necessary to halt or reduce the permitted activity to maintain compliance with the permit conditions. Page 47 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 D. Inspection and entry shall be allowed under TWC Chapters 26-28, Texas Health and Safety Code §§361.o32-361.033 and 361.037, and 4o CFR §122.41(i). The statement in TWC §26.014 that commission entry of a facility shall occur according to an establishment's rules and regulations concerning safety, internal security, and fire protection is not grounds for denial or restriction of entry to any part of the facility or site, but merely describes the commission's duty to observe appropriate rules and regulations during an inspection. E. The discharger is subject to administrative, civil, and criminal penalties, as applicable, under TWC Chapter 7 for violations including but not limited to the following: 1. negligently or knowingly violating the federal CWA §§3oi, 302, 306, 307, 308, 318, or 405, or any condition or limitation implementing any sections in a permit issued under CWA §402, or any requirement imposed in a pretreatment program approved under CWA §§4o2(a)(3) or 4o2(b)(8); 2. knowingly making any false statement, representation, or certification in any record or other document submitted or required to be maintained under a permit, including monitoring reports or reports of compliance or noncompliance; and 3. knowingly violating CWA §303 and placing another person in imminent danger of death or serious bodily injury. F. All reports and other information requested by the executive director must be signed by the person and in the manner required by 3o TAC §305.128 (relating to Signatories to Reports). G. Authorization under this general permit does not convey property or water rights of any sort and does not grant any exclusive privilege. H. The permittee shall take all reasonable steps to minimize or prevent any discharge in violation of this permit that has a reasonable likelihood of adversely affecting human health or the environment. The permittee shall at all times properly operate and maintain all facilities and systems of treatment and control (and related appurtenances) that are installed or used by the permittee to achieve compliance with the conditions of this permit. Proper operation and maintenance also includes adequate laboratory controls and appropriate quality assurance procedures. This provision requires the operation of back-up or auxiliary facilities or similar systems that are installed by a permittee only when the operation is necessary to achieve compliance with the conditions of the permit. J. The permittee shall comply with the monitoring and reporting requirements in 40 CFR §122.41(j) and (1), as applicable. K. Analysis must be performed using sufficiently sensitive methods for analysis that comply with the rules located in 4o CFR §136.1(c) and 4o CFR §122.44(i)(1)(iv). Part VIII. Fees A. A fee of must be submitted along with the NOI: 1. $325 if submitting a paper NOI, or 2. $ 225 if submitting an NOI electronically. B. Fees are due upon submission of the NOI. An NOI will not be declared administratively complete unless the associated fee has been paid in full. C. No separate annual fees will be assessed for this general permit. The Water Quality Annual Fee has been incorporated into the NOI fees as described above. Page 48 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 D. Effective September i, 2018, applicants seeking coverage under an NOI or LREW must submit their application using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website, or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. Page 49 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Appendix A: Automatic Authorization Periods of Low Erosion Potential by County — Eligible Date Ranges Andrews: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Archer: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Armstrong: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Bailey: Nov.1- Apr. 30, or Nov. 15 - May 14 Baylor: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Borden: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Brewster: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Briscoe: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Brown: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Callahan: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Carson: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Castro: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Childress: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Cochran: Nov. 1- Apr. 30, or Nov. 15 - May 14 Coke: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Coleman: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Collingsworth: Jan. 1- Mar. 30, or Dec. 1- Feb. 28 Concho: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Cottle: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Crane: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Crockett: Nov. 15 - Jan. 14, or Feb. 1- Mar. 30 Crosby: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Culberson: Nov.1- May 14 Dallam: Nov. 1- Apr. 14, or Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Dawson: Nov. - Apr. 30 Deaf Smith: Nov. - Apr. 30 Dickens: Nov. 15 - Jan. 14, or Feb.1- Mar. 30 Dimmit: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Donley: Jan.1- Mar. 30, or Dec.1- Feb. 28 Eastland: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Ector: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Edwards: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 El Paso: Jan. 1- Jul. 14, or May 15 - Jul. 31, or Jun.1- Aug. 14, or Jun. 15 - Sept. 14, or Jul.1- Oct. 14, or Jul. 15 - Oct. 31, or Aug. 1- Apr. 30, or Aug. 15 - May 14, or Sept.1- May 30, or Oct. 1- Jun. 14, or Nov.1- Jun. 30, or Nov. 15 - Jul. 14 Fisher: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Floyd: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Foard: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Gaines: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Garza: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Glasscock: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Hale: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Hall: Feb. 1- Mar. 30 Hansford: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Hardeman: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Hartley: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Haskell: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Hockley: Nov. 1- Apr. 14, or Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Howard: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Hudspeth: Nov. 1- May 14 Hutchinson: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Irion: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Jeff Davis: Nov. 1- Apr. 30 or Nov. 15 - May 14 Jones: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Kent: Nov. 15 - Jan. 14 or Feb.1- Mar. 30 Kerr: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Kimble: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 King: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Kinney: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Knox: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Lamb: Nov. 1- Apr. 14, or Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Page 5o Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Loving: Nov. 1 - Apr. 30, or Nov. 15 - May 14 Lubbock: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Lynn: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Martin: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Mason: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Maverick: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 McCulloch: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Menard: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Midland: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Mitchell: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Moore: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Motley: Nov. 15 - Jan. 14, or Feb. 1- Mar. 30 Nolan: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Oldham: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Parmer: Nov. 1 - Apr. 14, or Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Pecos: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Potter: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Presidio: Nov. 1 - Apr. 30, or Nov. 15 - May 14 Randall: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Reagan: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Real: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Reeves: Nov. 1- Apr. 30, or Nov. 15 - May 14 Runnels: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Schleicher: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Scurry: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Shackelford: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Sherman: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Stephens: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Sterling: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Stonewall: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Sutton: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Swisher: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Taylor: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Terrell: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Terry: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Throckmorton: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Tom Green: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Upton: Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Uvalde: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Val Verde: Nov. 15 - Jan. 14, or Feb. 1 - Mar. 30 Ward: Nov. 1 - Apr. 14, or Nov. 15 - Apr. 30 Wichita: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Wilbarger: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Winkler: Nov. 1 - Apr. 30, or Nov. 15 - May 14 Yoakum: Nov. 1- Apr. 30, or Nov. 15 - May 14 Young: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Wheeler: Jan. 1- Mar. 30, or Dec. 1 - Feb. 28 Zavala: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Page 51 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Appendix B: Erosivity Index (EI) Zones in Texas * • * as • * t ear**3ar *e*+re*a. ♦e +l *.dart t . r w _aw ar OS MO :#1111 *1111111!#11/ 4.11! Air- arrw 01 11111411.* 11w *is r ow* *s aM a111! *ma V. *ikr IOW — 4 SU *ft r w OP .ilk 100 wp #..i.... Adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook dog: "Predicting Soil Erosion by Water: A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation (RUSLE)," U.S. Department of Agriculture, Agricultural Research Service Page 52 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 1 Appendix C: Isoerodent Map IUlilt ! I # aill1111111I11111.111111 Amalfi 1111/Willrill if L` rwas rm. ,1 1 Adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook 703: "Predicting Soil Erosion by Water: A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation (RUSLE)," U.S. Department of Agriculture, Agricultural Research Service Page 53 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 EI # 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 1o6 Appendix D: Erosivity Indices for EI Zones in Texas Periods: 1/1 1/16 1/31 2/15 3/1 3/i6 3/31 4/15 4/30 5/15 5/30 6/14 6/29 7/14 7/29 8/13 8/28 9/12 9/27 10/121o/2711/ a 11/26 12/11 12/31 0 1 1 2 3 4 7 2 8 27 38 48 55 62 69 76 83 90 94 97 98 99 100 100 100 0 1 2 3 4 6 8 13 21 29 37 46 54 6o 65 69 74 81 87 92 95 97 98 99 loo 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 6 16 29 39 46 53 60 67 74 81 88 95 99 99 100 100 100 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 6 16 29 39 46 53 60 67 74 81 88 95 99 99 loo loo loo 0 1 1 2 3 4 6 8 13 25 4o 49 56 62 67 72 76 8o 85 91 97 98 99 99 loo 0 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 21 29 38 47 53 57 61 65 70 76 83 88 91 94 96 98 100 0 1 3 5 7 9 11 14 18 27 35 41 46 51 57 62 68 73 79 84 89 93 96 98 loo 0 2 4 6 9 12 17 23 30 37 43 49 54 58 62 66 70 74 78 82 86 90 94 97 100 0 1 3 5 7 10 14 20 28 37 48 56 61 64 68 72 77 81 86 89 92 95 98 99 loo 0 3 6 9 13 17 21 27 33 38 44 49 55 61 67 71 75 78 81 84 86 90 94 97 100 Each period begins on the date listed in the table above and lasts until the day before the following period. The final period begins on December l I and ends on December 31. Table adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook 703: "Predicting Soil Erosion by Water: A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation (RUSLE)," U.S. Department of Agriculture, Agricultural Research Service Page 54 TCEQ Office Use Only Permit No: CN: RN: Notice of Intent (NOI) for an Authorization for Stormwater Discharges Associated with lag Construction Activity under TCEQ TPDES General Permit TXR150000 IMPORTANT INFORMATION Please read and use the General Information and Instructions prior to filling out each question in the NOI form. Use the NOI Checklist to ensure all required information is completed correctly. Incomplete applications delay approval or result in automatic deniaL Once processed your permit authorization can be viewed by entering the following link into your internet browser: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm or you can contact TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center at 512-239-3700. ePERMITS Effective September 1, 2018, this paper form must be submitted to TCEQ with a completed electronic reporting waiver form (TCEQ 20754). To submit an NOI electronically, enter the following web address into your internet browser and follow the instructions: https://www3.tceq.texas.gov/steers/index.cfm APPLICATION FEE AND PAYMENT The application fee for submitting a paper NOI is $325. The application fee for electronic submittal of a NOI through the TCEQ ePermits system (STEERS) is $225. Payment of the application fee can be submitted by mail or through the TCEQ ePay system. The payment and the NOI must be mailed to separate addresses. To access the TCEQ ePay system enter the following web address into your Internet browser: http://www.tceq.texas.gov/epay. Provide your payment information for verification of payment: • If payment was mailed to TCEQ provide the following: o Check/Money Order Number: o Name printed on Check: • If payment was made via ePay, provide the following: o Voucher Number: o A copy of the payment voucher is attached to this paper NOI form. TCEQ-2oo22 (3/6/2(318) Page I Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRi50000 RENEWAL (This portion of the NOI is not applicable after June 3, 2018) Is this NOI for a renewal of an existing authorization? ❑ Yes If Yes, provide the authorization number here: TXR15 NOTE: If an authorization number is not provided, a new number will be assigned. ❑ No SECTION 1. OPERATOR (_APPLICANT) a) If the applicant is currently a customer with TCEQ, what is the Customer Number (CN) issued to this entity? CN (Refer to Section 1.a) of the Instructions) b) What is the Legal Name of the entity (applicant) applying for this permit? (The legal name must be spelled exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State, County, or in the legal document forming the entity.) c) What is the contact information for the Prefix (Mr. Ms. Miss): First and Last Name: Title: Credentials: Phone Number: E-mail: Mailing Address: City, State, and Zip Code: Mailing Information if outside USA: Territory: Country Code: d) Indicate the type of customer: ❑ Individual ❑ Limited Partnership ❑ General Partnership ❑ Trust ❑ Sole Proprietorship (D.B.A.) ❑ Corporation ❑ Estate e) Is the applicant an independent operator? Operator (Responsible Authority)? Suffix: Fax Number: Postal Code: ❑ Federal Government ❑ County Government ❑ State Government ❑ City Government ❑ Other Government ❑ Other: ❑ Yes ❑ No TCEQ-2oo22 (3/6/2o18) Page 2 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRi50000 (If a governmental entity, a subsidiary, or part of a larger corporation, check No.) f) Number of Employees. Select the range applicable to your company. ti 0-20 0_ 21-100 101-250 0 251-500 501 or higher g) Customer Business Tax and Filing Numbers: (Required for Corporations and Limited Partnerships. Not Required for Individuals, Government, or Sole Proprietors.) State Franchise Tax ID Number: Federal Tax ID: Texas Secretary of State Charter (filing) Number: DUNS Number (if known): t„ SECTION 2. APPLICATION CONTACT Is the application contact the same as the applicant identified above? Yes, go to Section 3 El No, complete this section Prefix (Mr. Ms. Miss): First and Last Name: Suffix: Title: Credential: Organization Name ,;. Phone Number: E-mail: Mailing Address: Internal Routing (Mail Code, Etc.): City, State, and Zip Code: Mailing information if outside USA: Territory: Country Code: Postal Code: SECTION 3. REGULATED ENTITY (RE) INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE a) If this is an existing permitted site, what is the Regulated Entity Number (RN) issued to this site? RN (Refer to Section 3.a) of the Instructions) TCEQ-2oo22 (3/6/2°18) Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXR150000 Page 3 b) Name of project or site (the name known by the community where it's located): c) In your own words, briefly describe the type of construction occurring at the regulated site (residential, industrial, commercial, or other): d) County or Counties (if located in more than one): e) Latitude: Longitude: f) Site Address/Location If the site has a physical address such as 12100 Park 35 Circle, Austin, TX 78753, complete Section A. If the site does not have a physical address, provide a location description in Section B. Example: located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1. Section A: Street Number and Name: City, State, and Zip Code: Section B. Location Description: City (or city nearest to) where the site is located: Zip Code where the site is located: SECTION 4. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS a) Is the project or site located on Indian Country Lands? ❑ Yes, do not submit this form. You must obtain authorization through EPA Region 6. ❑ No b) Is your construction activity associated with a facility that, when completed, would be associated with the exploration, development, or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources? ❑ Yes. Note: The construction stormwater runoff may be under jurisdiction of the Railroad Commission of Texas and may need to obtain authorization through EPA Region 6. ❑ No c) What is the Primary Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at the site? d) What is the Secondary SIC Code(s), if applicable? e) What is the total number of acres to be disturbed? f) Is the project part of a larger common plan of development or sale? TCEQ-2oo22 (3/6/2018) Page 4 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRi50000 Yes No. The total number of acres disturbed, provided in e) above, must be 5 or more. If the total number of acres disturbed is less than 5, do not submit this form. See the requirements in the general permit for small construction sites. g) What is the estimated start date of the project? h) What is the estimated end date of the project? i) Will concrete truck washout be performed at the site? 0 Yes 0 No j) What is the name of the first water body(ies) to receive the stormwater runoff or potential runoff from the site? k) What is the segment number(s) of the classified water body(ies) that the discharge will eventually reach? 1) Is the discharge into a Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4)? CYes 0 No If Yes, provide the name of the MS4 operator: Note: The general permit requires you to send a copy of this NOI form to the MS4 operator. m) Is the discharge or potential discharge from the site within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer, as defined in 30 TAC Chapter 213? 0 Yes, complete the certification below. 0 No, go to Section 5 I certify that the copy of the TCEQ approved Plan required by the Edwards Aquifer Rule (30 TAC Chapter 213) that is included or referenced in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan will be implemented. I3' Yes SECTION 5. NOI CERTIFICATION a) I certify that I have obtained a copy and understand the terms and conditions of the Construction General Permit (TXR150000). 0 Yes b) I certify that the full legal name of the entity applying for this permit has been provided and is legally authorized to do business in Texas. 0 Yes c) I understand that a Notice of Termination (NOT) must be submitted when this authorization is no longer needed. 0 Yes d) I certify that a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan has been developed, will be implemented prior to construction and to the best of my knowledge and belief is compliant with any applicable local sediment and erosion control plans, as required in the Construction General Permit (TXR150000). 13 Yes Note: For multiple operators who prepare a shared SWP3, the confirmation of an operator may be limited to its obligations under the SWP3, provided all obligations are confirmed by at least one operator. TCEQ-2oo22 (3/6/2o18) Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRi50000 Page 5 SECTION 6. APPLICANT CERTIFICATION SIGNATURE Operator Signatory Name: Operator Signatory Title: I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I further certify that I am authorized under 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44 to sign and submit this document, and can provide documentation in proof of such authorization upon request. Signature (use blue ink): Date: TCEQ-20022 (3/6/2018) Page 6 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRi50000 NOTICE OF INTENT CHECKLIST (TXR150000) Did you complete everything? Use this checklist to be sure! Are you ready to mail your form to TCEQ? Go to the General Information Section of the Instructions for mailing addresses. Confirm each item (or applicable item) in this form is complete. This checklist is for use by the applicant to ensure a complete application is being submitted. Missing information may result in denial of coverage under the general permit. (See NOI process description in the General Information and Instructions.) APPLICATION FEE If paying by check: ti Check was mailed separately to the TCEQs Cashier's Office. (See Instructions for Cashier's address and Application address.) Check number and name on check is provided in this application. If using ePay: ❑ The voucher number is provided in this application and a copy of the voucher is attached. RENEWAL �� .. . ❑ If this application is for renewal of an existing authorization, the authorization number is provided. OPERATOR INFORMATION ❑ Customer Number (CN) issued by TCEQ Central Registry ❑ Legal name as filed to do business in Texas. (Call TX SOS 512-463-5555 to verify.) ❑ Name and title of responsible authority signing the application. ❑ Phone number and e-mail address ❑ Mailing address is complete & verifiable with USPS. www.usps.com ❑ Type of operator (entity type). Is applicant an independent operator? ❑ Number of employees. ❑ For corporations or limited partnerships - Tax ID and SOS filing numbers. ❑ Application contact and address is complete & verifiable with USPS. http://www.usps.com REGULATED ENTITY (RE) INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SI"I"E, ❑ Regulated Entity Number (RN) (if site is already regulated by TCEQ) ❑ Site/project name and construction activity description ❑ County ❑ Latitude and longitude http://www.tceq.texas.gov/gis/sqmaview.html TCEQ 20022 Checklist (03/06/2018) Page 1 O Site Address/Location. Do not use a rural route or post office box. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS p Indian Country Lands -the facility is not on Indian Country Lands. ❑ Construction activity related to facility associated to oil, gas, or geothermal resources ❑ Primary SIC Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at the site. www.osha.gov/oshstats/sicser.html ❑ Estimated starting and ending dates of the project. ❑ Confirmation of concrete truck washout. ❑ Acres disturbed is provided and qualifies for coverage through a NOI. ❑ Common plan of development or sale. O Receiving water body or water bodies. • Segment number or numbers. p MS4 operator. ❑ Edwards Aquifer rule. CER 1'1HCATION ❑ Certification statements have been checked indicating Yes. • Signature meets 30 Texas Administrative Code (TAC) §305.44 and is original. TCEQ-20022 Checklist (03/06/2018) Page 2 Instructions for Notice of Intent (NOI) for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under TPDES General Permit (TXR1 50000) GENERAL INFORMATION Where to Send the Notice of Intent (NOI): By Regular Mail: TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center (MC228) P.O. Box 13087 Austin, Texas 78711-3087 By Overnight or Express Mail: TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center (MC228) 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin, TX Application Fee: The application fee of $325 is required to be paid at the time the NOI is submitted. Failure to submit payment at the time the application is filed will cause delays in acknowledgment or denial of coverage under the general permit. Payment of the fee may be made by check or money order, payable to TCEQ, or through EPAY (electronic payment through the web). Mailed Payments: Use the attached General Permit Payment Submittal Form. The application fee is submitted to a different address than the NOI. Read the General Permit Payment Submittal Form for further instructions, including the address to send the payment. ePAY Electronic Payment: http://www.tceq.texas.gov/epay When making the payment you must select Water Quality, and then select the fee category "General Permit Construction Storm Water Discharge NOI Application". You must include a copy of the payment voucher with your NOI. Your NOI will not be considered complete without the payment voucher. TCEQ Contact List: Application - status and form questions: Technical questions: Environmental Law Division: Records Management - obtain copies of forms: Reports from databases (as available): Cashier's office: 512-239-3700, swpermit@tceq.texas.gov 512-239-4671, swgp@tceq.texas.gov 512-239-0600 512-239-0900 512-239-DATA (3282) 512-239-0357 or 512-239-0187 Notice of Intent Process:__, When your NOI is received by the program, the form will be processed as follows: • Administrative Review: Each item on the form will be reviewed for a complete response. In addition, the operator's legal name must be verified with Texas Secretary of State as valid and active (if applicable). The address(es) on the form must be verified with the US Postal service as receiving regular mail delivery. Do not give an overnight/express mailing address. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 1 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 • Notice of Deficiency: If an item is incomplete or not verifiable as indicated above, a notice of deficiency (NOD) will be mailed to the operator. The operator will have 30 days to respond to the NOD. The response will be reviewed for completeness. • Acknowledgment of Coverage: An Acknowledgment Certificate will be mailed to the operator. This certificate acknowledges coverage under the general permit. or Denial of Coverage: If the operator fails to respond to the NOD or the response is inadequate, coverage under the general permit may be denied. If coverage is denied, the operator will be notified. General Permit (Your Permit) For NOIs submitted electronically through ePermits, provisional coverage under the general permit begins immediately following confirmation of receipt of the NOI form by the TCEQ. For paper NOIs, provisional coverage under the general permit begins 7 days after a completed NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ. You should have a copy of your general permit when submitting your application. You may view and print your permit for which you are seeking coverage, on the TCEQ web site http://'\ ww.tceq.texas.gov. Search using keyword TXR150000. Change in Operator An authorization under the general permit is not transferable. If the operator of the regulated project or site changes, the present permittee must submit a Notice of Termination and the new operator must submit a Notice of Intent. The NOT and NOI must be submitted no later than 10 days prior to the change in Operator status. TCEQ Central Registry Core Data Form l _ The Core Data Form has been incorporated into this form. Do not send a Core Data Form to TCEQ. After final acknowledgment of coverage under the general permit, the program will assign a Customer Number and Regulated Entity Number, if one has not already been assigned to this customer or site. For existing customers and sites, you can find the Customer Number and Regulated Entity Number by entering the following web address into your Internet browser: http://wwwl5.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/ or you can contact the TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center at 512-239-3700 for assistance. On the website, you can search by your permit number, the Regulated Entity (RN) number, or the Customer Number (CN). If you do not know these numbers, you can select "Advanced Search" to search by permittee name, site address, etc. The Customer (Permittee) is responsible for providing consistent information to the TCEQ and for updating all CN and RN data for all authorizations as changes occur. For this permit, a Notice of Change form must be submitted to the program area. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 2 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 INSTRUCTIONS FOR FILLING OUT THE NOI FORM Renewal of General Permit. Dischargers holding active authorizations under the expired General Permit are required to submit a NOI to continue coverage. The existing permit number is required. If the permit number is not provided or has been terminated, expired, or denied, a new permit number will be issued. Section 1. OPERATOR (APPLICANT) a) Customer Number (CN) TCEQ's Central Registry will assign each customer a number that begins with CN, followed by nine digits. This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number If the applicant is an existing TCEQ customer, the Customer Number is available at the following website: http://wwwl5.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/. If the applicant is not an existing TCEQ customer, leave the space for CN blank. b) Legal Name of Applicant Provide the current legal name of the applicant. The name must be provided exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State (SOS), or on other legal documents forming the entity, as filed in the county. You may contact the SOS at 512-463-5555, for more information related to filing in Texas. If filed in the county, provide a copy of the legal documents showing the legal name. c) Contact Information for the Applicant (Responsible Authority) Provide information for the person signing the application in the Certification section. This person is also referred to as the Responsible Authority. Provide a complete mailing address for receiving mail from the TCEQ. The mailing address must be recognized by the US Postal Service. You may verify the address on the following website: https://tools.usps.com/go/ZipLookupAction!input.action. The phone number should provide contact to the applicant. The fax number and e-mail address are optional and should correspond to the applicant. d) Type of Customer (Entity Type) Check only one box that identifies the type of entity. Use the descriptions below to identify the appropriate entity type. Note that the selected entity type also indicates the name that must be provided as an applicant for an authorization. Individual An individual is a customer who has not established a business, but conducts an activity that needs to be regulated by the TCEQ. Partnership A customer that is established as a partnership as defined by the Texas Secretary of State Office (TX SOS). If the customer is a `General Partnership' or `Joint Venture' filed in the county (not filed with TX SOS), the legal name of each partner forming the `General Partnership' or `Joint Venture' must be provided. Each `legal entity' must apply as a co -applicant. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 3 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Trust or Estate A trust and an estate are fiduciary relationships governing the trustee/executor with respect to the trust/estate property. Sole Proprietorship (DBA) A sole proprietorship is a customer that is owned by only one person and has not been incorporated. This business may: 1. be under the person's name 2. have its own name (doing business as or DBA) 3. have any number of employees. If the customer is a Sole Proprietorship or DBA, the `legal name' of the individual business `owner' must be provided. The DBA name is not recognized as the `legal name' of the entity. The DBA name may be used for the site name (regulated entity). Corporation A customer that meets all of these conditions: 1. is a legally incorporated entity under the laws of any state or country 2. is recognized as a corporation by the Texas Secretary of State 3. has proper operating authority to operate in Texas The corporation's `legal name' as filed with the Texas Secretary of State must be provided as applicant. An `assumed' name of a corporation is not recognized as the `legal name' of the entity. Government Federal, state, county, or city government (as appropriate) The customer is either an agency of one of these levels of government or the governmental body itself. The government agency's `legal name' must be provided as the applicant. A department name or other description of the organization is not recognized as the `legal name'. Other This may include a utility district, water district, tribal government, college district, council of governments, or river authority. Provide the specific type of government. e) Independent Entity Check No if this customer is a subsidiary, part of a larger company, or is a governmental entity. Otherwise, check Yes. f) Number of Employees Check one box to show the number of employees for this customer's entire company, at all locations. This is not necessarily the number of employees at the site named in the application. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 4 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 g) Customer Business Tax and Filing Numbers These are required for Corporations and Limited Partnerships. These are not required for Individuals, Government, and Sole Proprietors. State Franchise Tax ID Number Corporations and limited liability companies that operate in Texas are issued a franchise tax identification number. If this customer is a corporation or limited liability company, enter the Tax ID number. Federal Tax ID All businesses, except for some small sole proprietors, individuals, or general partnerships should have a federal taxpayer identification number (TIN). Enter this number here. Use no prefixes, dashes, or hyphens. Sole proprietors, individuals, or general partnerships do not need to provide a federal tax ID. TX SOS Charter (filing) Number Corporations and Limited Partnerships required to register with the Texas Secretary of State are issued a charter or filing number. You may obtain further information by calling SOS at 512-463-5555. DUNS Number Most businesses have a DUNS (Data Universal Numbering System) number issued by Dun and Bradstreet Corp. If this customer has one, enter it here. Section 2. APPLICATION CONTACT ° 1 ,451S� Provide the name and contact information for the person that TCEQ can contact for additional information regarding this application. Section 3. REGULATED ENTITY (RE) INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE a) Regulated Entity Number (RN) The RN is issued by TCEQ's Central Registry to sites where an activity is regulated by TCEQ. This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number. Search TCEQ's Central Registry to see if the site has an assigned RN at http://wwwl5.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/. If this regulated entity has not been assigned an RN, leave this space blank. If the site of your business is part of a larger business site, an RN may already be assigned for the larger site. Use the RN assigned for the larger site. If the site is found, provide the assigned RN and provide the information for the site to be authorized through this application. The site information for this authorization may vary from the larger site information. An example is a chemical plant where a unit is owned or operated by a separate corporation that is accessible by the same physical address of your unit or facility. Other examples include industrial parks identified by one common address but different corporations have control of defined areas within the site. In both cases, an RN would be assigned for the physical address location and the permitted sites would be identified separately under the same RN. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 5 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 b) Name of the Project or Site Provide the name of the site or project as known by the public in the area where the site is located. The name you provide on this application will be used in the TCEQ Central Registry as the Regulated Entity name. c) Description of Activity Regulated In your own words, briefly describe the primary business that you are doing that requires this authorization. Do not repeat the SIC Code description. d) County Provide the name of the county where the site or project is located. If the site or project is located in more than one county, provide the county names as secondary. e) Latitude and Longitude Enter the latitude and longitude of the site in degrees, minutes, and seconds or decimal form. For help obtaining the latitude and longitude, go to: http://www.tceq.texas.gov/gis/sqmaview.html. f) Site Address/Location If a site has an address that includes a street number and street name, enter the complete address for the site in Section A. If the physical address is not recognized as a USPS delivery address, you may need to validate the address with your local police (911 service) or through an online map site used to locate a site. Please confirm this to be a complete and valid address. Do not use a rural route or post office box for a site location. If a site does not have an address that includes a street number and street name, provide a complete written location description in Section B. For example: "The site is located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1." Provide the city (or nearest city) and zip code of the site location. Section 4. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS a) Indian Country Lands If your site is located on Indian Country Lands, the TCEQ does not have authority to process your application. You must obtain authorization through EPA Region 6, Dallas. Do not submit this form to TCEQ. b) Construction activity associated with facility associated with exploration, development, or production of oil, gas, or geothermal resources If your activity is associated with oil and gas exploration, development, or production, you may be under jurisdiction of the Railroad Commission of Texas (RRC) and may need to obtain authorization from EPA Region 6. Construction activities associated with a facility related to oil, gas or geothermal resources may include the construction of a well site; treatment or storage facility; underground hydrocarbon or natural gas storage facility; reclamation plant; gas processing facility; compressor station; terminal facility where crude oil is stored prior to refining and at which refined products are stored solely for use at the facility; a TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 6 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 carbon dioxide geologic storage facility; and a gathering, transmission, or distribution pipeline that will transport crude oil or natural gas, including natural gas liquids, prior to refining of such oil or the use of the natural gas in any manufacturing process or as a residential or industrial fuel. Where required by federal law, discharges of stormwater associated with construction activities under the RRC's jurisdiction must be authorized by the EPA and the RRC, as applicable. Activities under RRC jurisdiction include construction of a facility that, when completed, would be associated with the exploration, development, or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources, such as a well site; treatment or storage facility; underground hydrocarbon or natural gas storage facility; reclamation plant; gas processing facility; compressor station; terminal facility where crude oil is stored prior to refining and at which refined products are stored solely for use at the facility; a carbon dioxide geologic storage facility under the jurisdiction of the RRC; and a gathering, transmission, or distribution pipeline that will transport crude oil or natural gas, including natural gas liquids, prior to refining of such oil or the use of the natural gas in any manufacturing process or as a residential or industrial fuel. The RRC also has jurisdiction over stormwater from land disturbance associated with a site survey that is conducted prior to construction of a facility that would be regulated by the RRC. Under 33 U.S.C. §1342(1)(2) and §1362(24), EPA cannot require a permit for discharges of stormwater from field activities or operations associated with {oil and gas} exploration, production, processing, or treatment operations, or transmission facilities, including activities necessary to prepare a site for drilling and for the movement and placement of drilling equipment, whether or not such field activities or operations may be considered to be construction activities unless the discharge is contaminated by contact with any overburden, raw material, intermediate product, finished product, byproduct, or waste product located on the site of the facility. Under § 3.8 of this title (relating to Water Protection), the RRC prohibits operators from causing or allowing pollution of surface or subsurface water. Operators are encouraged to implement and maintain best management practices (BMPs) to minimize discharges of pollutants, including sediment, in stormwater during construction activities to help ensure protection of surface water quality during storm events. For more information about the jurisdictions of the RRC and the TCEQ read the Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) between the RRC and TCEQ at 16 Texas Administrative Code, Part 1, Chapter 3, Rule 3.30, by entering the following link into an internet browser: http://texreg.sos.state.tx.us/public/readtac$ ext.TacPage?s1=R&app=9&p_dir=&p_rloc= &p_tloc=&p_ploc=&pg=1&p_tac=&ti=16&pt=1&ch=3&r1=30 or contact the TCEQ Stormwater Team at 512-239-4671 for additional information. c) Primary Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) Code Provide the SIC Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at this site. Common SIC Codes related to construction activities include: • 1521 - Construction of Single Family Homes • 1522 - Construction of Residential Buildings Other than Single Family Homes • 1541 - Construction of Industrial Buildings and Warehouses TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 7 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 • 1542 - Construction of Non-residential Buildings, other than Industrial Buildings and Warehouses • 1611 - Highway and Street Construction, except Highway Construction • 1622 - Bridge, Tunnel, and Elevated Highway Construction • 1623 - Water, Sewer, Pipeline and Communications, and Power Line Construction For help with SIC Codes, enter the following link into your Internet browser: http://www.osha.gov/pls/imis/sicsearch.html or you can contact the TCEQ Small Business and Local Government Assistance Section at 800-447-2827 for assistance. d) Secondary SIC Code Secondary SIC Code(s) may be provided. Leave this blank if not applicable. For help with SIC Codes, enter the following link into your internet browser: http://www.osha.gov/pls/imis/sicsearch.html or you can contact the TCEQ Small Business and Environmental Assistance Section at 800-447-2827 for assistance. e) Total Number of Acres Disturbed Provide the approximate number of acres that the construction site will disturb. Construction activities that disturb less than one acre, unless they are part of a larger common plan that disturbs more than one acre, do not require permit coverage. Construction activities that disturb between one and five acres, unless they are part of a common plan that disturbs more than five acres, do not require submission of an NOI. Therefore, the estimated area of land disturbed should not be less than five, unless the project is part of a larger common plan that disturbs five or more acres. Disturbed means any clearing, grading, excavating, or other similar activities. If you have any questions about this item, please contact the stormwater technical staff by phone at 512-239-4671 or by email at swgp@tceq.texas.gov. f) Common Plan of Development Construction activities that disturb less than five acres do not require submission of an NOI unless they are part of a common plan of development or for sale where the area disturbed is five or more acres. Therefore, the estimated area of land disturbed should not be less than five, unless the project is part of a larger common plan that disturbs five or more acres. Disturbed means any clearing, grading, excavating, or other similar activities. For more information on what a common plan of development is, refer to the definition of "Common Plan of Development" in the Definitions section of the general permit or enter the following link into your internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/permitting/stormwater/common_plan_of_development_steps.html For further information, go to the TCEQ stormwater construction webpage enter the following link into your Internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/goto/construction and search for "Additional Guidance and Quick Links': If you have any further questions about the Common Plan of Development you can contact the TCEQ Stormwater Team at 512-239-4671 or the TCEQ Small Business and Environmental Assistance at 800-447- 2827. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 8 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 g) Estimated Start Date of the Project This is the date that any construction activity or construction support activity is initiated at the site. If renewing the permit provide the original start date of when construction activity for this project began. h) Estimated End Date of the Project This is the date that any construction activity or construction support activity will end and final stabilization will be achieved at the site. i) Will concrete truck washout be performed at the site? Indicate if you expect that operators of concrete trucks will washout concrete trucks at the construction site. j) Identify the water body(s) receiving stormwater runoff The stormwater may be discharged directly to a receiving stream or through a MS4 from your site. It eventually reaches a receiving water body such as a local stream or lake, possibly via a drainage ditch. You must provide the name of the water body that receives the discharge from the site (a local stream or lake). If your site has more than one outfall you need to include the name of the first water body for each outfall, if they are different. k) Identify the segment number(s) of the classified water body(s) Identify the classified segment number(s) receiving a discharge directly or indirectly. Enter the following link into your internet browser to find the segment number of the classified water body where stormwater will flow from the site: www.tceq.texas.gov/waterquality/monitoring/viewer.html or by contacting the TCEQ Water Quality Division at (512) 239-4671 for assistance. You may also find the segment number in TCEQ publication GI-316 by entering the following link into your internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/publications/gi/gi-316 or by contacting the TCEQ Water Quality Division at (512) 239-4671 for assistance. If the discharge is into an unclassified receiving water and then crosses state lines prior to entering a classified segment, select the appropriate watershed: • 0100 (Canadian River Basin) • 0200 (Red River Basin) • 0300 (Sulfur River Basin) • 0400 (Cypress Creek Basin) • 0500 (Sabine River Basin) Call the Water Quality Assessments section at 512-239-4671 for further assistance. 1) Discharge into MS4 - Identify the MS4 Operator The discharge may initially be into a municipal separate storm sewer system (MS4). If the stormwater discharge is into an MS4, provide the name of the entity that operates the MS4 where the stormwater discharges. An MS4 operator is often a city, town, county, or utility district, but possibly can be another form of government. Please note that the Construction General Permit requires the Operator to supply the MS4 with a TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 9 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 copy of the NOI submitted to TCEQ. For assistance, you may call the technical staff at 512-239-4671. m) Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone and Certification The general permit requires the approved Contributing Zone Plan or Water Pollution Abatement Plan to be included or referenced as a part of the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan. See maps on the TCEQ website to determine if the site is located within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer by entering the following link into an internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/field/eapp/viewer.html or by contacting the TCEQ Water Quality Division at 512-239-4671 for assistance. If the discharge or potential discharge is within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer, a site -specific authorization approved by the Executive Director under the Edwards Aquifer Protection Program (30 TAC Chapter 213) is required before construction can begin. For questions regarding the Edwards Aquifer Protection Program, contact the appropriate TCEQ Regional Office. For projects in Hays, Travis and Williamson Counties: Austin Regional Office, 12100 Park 35 Circle, Austin, TX 78753, 512-339- 2929. For Projects in Bexar, Comal, Kinney, Medina and Uvalde Counties: TCEQ San Antonio Regional Office, 14250 Judson Rd., San Antonio, TX 78233-4480, 210-490- 3096. Section 5. NOI CERTIFICATION Note: Failure to indicate Yes to all of the certification items may result in denial of coverage under the general permit. a) Certification of Understanding the Terms and Conditions of Construction General Permit (TXR150000) Provisional coverage under the Construction General Permit (TXR150000) begins 7 days after the completed paper NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ. Electronic applications submitted through ePermits have immediate provisional coverage. You must obtain a copy and read the Construction General Permit before submitting your application. You may view and print the Construction General Permit for which you are seeking coverage at the TCEQ web site by entering the following link into an internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/goto/construction or you may contact the TCEQ Stormwater processing Center at 512-239-3700 for assistance. b) Certification of Legal Name The full legal name of the applicant as authorized to do business in Texas is required. The name must be provided exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State (SOS), or on other legal documents forming the entity, that is filed in the county where doing business. You may contact the SOS at 512-463 5555, for more information related to filing in Texas. c) Understanding of Notice of Termination A permittee shall terminate coverage under the Construction General Permit through the submittal of a NOT when the operator of the facility changes, final stabilization has TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 10 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 been reached, the discharge becomes authorized under an individual permit, or the construction activity never began at this site. d) Certification of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan The SWP3 identifies the areas and activities that could produce contaminated runoff at your site and then tells how you will ensure that this contamination is mitigated. For example, in describing your mitigation measures, your site's plan might identify the devices that collect and filter stormwater, tell how those devices are to be maintained, and tell how frequently that maintenance is to be carried out. You must develop this plan in accordance with the TCEQ general permit requirements. This plan must be developed and implemented before you complete this NOI. The SWP3 must be available for a TCEQ investigator to review on request. Section 6. APPLICANT CER 11t1CATION SIGNATURE The certification must bear an original signature of a person meeting the signatory requirements specified under 30 Texas Administrative Code (TAC) §305.44. If you are a corporation: The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a)(1) (see below). According to this code provision, any corporate representative may sign an NOI or similar form so long as the authority to sign such a document has been delegated to that person in accordance with corporate procedures. By signing the NOI or similar form, you are certifying that such authority has been delegated to you. The TCEQ may request documentation evidencing such authority. If you are a municipality or other government entity: The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a)(3) (see below). According to this code provision, only a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may sign an NOI or similar form. Persons such as the City Mayor or County Commissioner will be considered ranking elected officials. In order to identify the principal executive officer of your government entity, it may be beneficial to consult your city charter, county or city ordinances, or the Texas statute(s) under which your government entity was formed. An NOI or similar document that is signed by a government official who is not a ranking elected official or principal executive officer does not conform to §305.44(a)(3). The signatory requirement may not be delegated to a government representative other than those identified in the regulation. By signing the NOI or similar form, you are certifying that you are either a ranking elected official or principal executive officer as required by the administrative code. Documentation demonstrating your position as a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may be requested by the TCEQ. If you have any questions or need additional information concerning the signatory requirements discussed above, please contact the TCEQ's Environmental Law Division at 512-239-0600. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 11 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44. Signatories to Applications (a) All applications shall be signed as follows. (1) For a corporation, the application shall be signed by a responsible corporate officer. For purposes of this paragraph, a responsible corporate officer means a president, secretary, treasurer, or vice-president of the corporation in charge of a principal business function, or any other person who performs similar policy or decision - making functions for the corporation; or the manager of one or more manufacturing, production, or operating facilities employing more than 250 persons or having gross annual sales or expenditures exceeding $25 million (in second-quarter 1980 dollars), if authority to sign documents has been assigned or delegated to the manager in accordance with corporate procedures. Corporate procedures governing authority to sign permit or post -closure order applications may provide for assignment or delegation to applicable corporate positions rather than to specific individuals. (2) For a partnership or sole proprietorship, the application shall be signed by a general partner or the proprietor, respectively. (3) For a municipality, state, federal, or other public agency, the application shall be signed by either a principal executive officer or a ranking elected official. For purposes of this paragraph, a principal executive officer of a federal agency includes the chief executive officer of the agency, or a senior executive officer having responsibility for the overall operations of a principal geographic unit of the agency (e.g., regional administrator of the EPA). TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 12 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR1 50000 Texas Commission on Environmental Quality General Permit Payment Submittal Form Use this form to submit your Application Fee only if you are mailing your payment. Instructions: • Complete items 1 through 5 below: • Staple your check in the space provided at the bottom of this document. • Do not mall this form i Ith your NOI form. • Do not mall this form to the same address as your NOT Mail this form and your check to either of the following: By Regular U.S. Mail Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Financial Administration Division Cashier's Office, MC-214 P.O. Box 13088 Austin, TX 78711-3088 By Overnight or Express Mail Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Financial Administration Division Cashier's Office, MC-214 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin, TX 78753 Fee Code: GPA General Permit: TXR150000 1. Check or Money Order No: 2. Amount of Check/Money Order: 3. Date of Check or Money Order: 4. Name on Check or Money Order: 5. NOI Information: If the check is for more than one NOI, list each Project or Site (RE) Name and Physical Address exactly as provided on the NOI. Do not submit a copy of the NOI with this form, as it could cause duplicate permit application entries! If there is not enough space on the form to list all of the projects or sites the authorization will cover, then attach a list of the additional sites. Project/Site (RE) Name: Project/Site (RE) Physical Address: Staple the check or money order to this form in this space. TCEQ-20134 (03/06/2018) Page 1 Texas Commission on Environmental Quality General Permit Payment Submittal Form Use this form to submit your Application Fee only if you are mailing your payment. • Complete items 1 through 5 below: • Staple your check in the space provided at the bottom of this document. • Do not mail this form with your NOI form. • Do not mail this form to the same address as your NOI. Mail this form and your check to: BY REGULAR U.S. MAIL Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Financial Administration Division Cashier's Office, MC-214 P.O. Box 13088 Austin, TX 7871i-3088 BY OVERNIGHT/EXPRESS MAIL Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Financial Administration Division Cashier's Office, MC-214 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin, TX 78753 Fee Code: GPA General Permit: TXG920000 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check / Money Order No: YY Amount of Check/Money Order: Date of Check or Money Order: Name on Check or Money Order: NOI INFORMATION If the check is for more than one NOI, list each Project/Site (RE) Name and Physical Address exactly as provided on the NOI. DO NOT SUBMIT A COPY OF THE NOI WITH THIS FORM AS IT COULD CAUSE DUPLICATE PERMIT ENTRIES. See Attached List of Sites (If more space is needed, you may attach a list.) Project/Site (RE) Name: Project/Site (RE) Physical Address: YYuY Staple Check in This Space TCEQ- 20134 (04/13/2006) Page 1 TCEQ Office Use Only Permit No: CN: li- RN: Region: Notice of Termination (NOT) for Authorizations under TCEQ TPDES General Permit TXR150000 IMPORTANT INFORMATION: Please read and use the General Information and Instructions prior to filling out each question in the form. Effective September 1, 2018, this paper form must be submitted to TCEQ with a completed electronic reporting waiver form(TCEQ-20754). ePermits: This form is available on our online permitting system. Sign up for online permitting at: https://www3.tceq.texas.gov/steers/ What is the permit number to be terminated? TXR15 TXRCW Section 1. OPERATOR (Permittee) a) What is the Customer Number(CN)issued to this entity? CN b) What is the Legal Name of the current permittee? c) Provide the contact information for the Operator(Responsible Authority). Prefix(Mr. Ms. or Miss): First and Last Name: Suffix: N k Title: Credentials: Phone Number: Fax Number Email: Mailing Address: City, State, and Zip Code: , Country Mailing Information, if outside USA: Section 2. APPLICATION CONTACT This is the person TCEQ will contact if additional information is needed regarding this application. Is the application contact the same as the permittee identified above? 0 Yes, go to Section 3. 0 No, complete section below TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 1 Notice of Termination for TXR150000 Prefix (Mr. Ms. or Miss): First and Last Name: Suffix: Title: Credentials: Phone Number: Fax Number: Email: Mailing Address: City, State, and Zip Code: Country Mailing Information, if outside USA: Section 3. REGULATED ENTITY (RE) INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE a) TCEQ issued RE Reference Number(RN): RN b) Name of project or site as known by the local community: c) County,or counties if more than 1: d) Latitude: Longitude: e) Site Address/Location: If the site has a physical address such as 12100 Park 35 Circle, Austin, TX 78753, complete Section 3A. If the site does not have a physical address, provide a location description in Section 3B. Example: located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1. Section 3A: Physical Address of Project or Site: Street Number and Name: City, State, and Zip Code: Section 3B: Site Location Description: Location description: ; g. c_up p,. .., City where the site is located or, if not in a city, what is the nearest city: le Zip Code where the site is located: Section 4. REASON FOR TERMINATION Check the reason for termination: ❑ Final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the Operator and all silt fences and other temporary erosion controls have been removed, or scheduled for removal as defined in the SWP3. ❑ Another permitted Operator has assumed control over all areas of the site that have not been finally stabilized, and temporary erosion controls that have been identified in the SWP3 have been transferred to the new Operator. TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 2 Notice of Termination for TXR150000 ❑ The discharge is now authorized under an alternate TPDES permit. ❑ The activity never began at this site that is regulated under the general permit. Section 5. CERTIFICATION Signatory Name: Signatory Title: I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information,the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I further certify that I am authorized under 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44 to sign and submit this document, and can provide documentation in proof of such authorization upon request. Signature (use blue ink): Date: TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 3 Notice of Termination for TXR150000 Instructions for Notice of Termination (NOT) for Authorizations under TPDES General Permit TXR150000 GENERAL INFORMATION Where to Send the Notice of Termination(NOT): BY REGULAR U.S. MAIL: BY OVERNIGHT/EXPRESS MAIL: Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Stormwater Processing Center(MC-228) Stormwater Processing Center (MC-228) P.O.Box 13087 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin,Texas 78711-3087 Austin, TX 78753 TCEQ Contact List: Application status and form questions: 512-239-3700, swpermit@tceq.texas.gov Technical questions: 512-239-4671, swgp@tceq.texas.gov Environmental Law Division: 512-239-0600 Records Management- obtain copies of forms: 512-239-0900 Reports from databases(as available): 512-239-DATA(3282) Cashier's office: 512-239-0357 or 512-239-0187 Notice of Termination Process: A Notice of Termination is effective on the date postmarked for delivery to TCEQ When your NOT is received by the program,the form will be processed as follows: 1) Administrative Review: The form will be reviewed to confirm the following: • the permit number is provided; • the permit is active and has been approved; • the entity terminating the permit is the current permittee; • the site information matches the original permit record; and • the form has the required original signature with title and date. 2) Notice of Deficiency: If an item is incomplete or not verifiable as indicated above, a phone call will be made to the applicant to clear the deficiency. A letter will not be sent to the permittee if unable to process the form. 3) Confirmation of Termination: A Notice of Termination Confirmation letter will be mailed to the operator. Chan:e in O s erator: An authorization under the general permit is not transferable. If the operator of the regulated entity changes,the present permittee must submit a Notice of Termination and the new operator must submit a Notice of Intent. The NOT and NOI must be submitted not later than 10 days prior to the change in Operator status. INSTRUCTIONS FOR FILLING OUT THE FORM The majority of permit information related to the current operator and regulated entity are available at the following website:http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm. TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 1 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 Section 1. 0 s erator (Current Permittee): a) Customer Number(CN) TCEQ's Central Registry assigns each customer a number that begins with CN, followed by nine digits. This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number. The Customer Number, for the current permittee, is available at the following website: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm. b) Legal Name of Operator The operator must be the same entity as previously submitted on the original Notice of Intent for the permit number provided. The current operator name, as provided on the current authorization,is available at the following website: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm. c) Contact Information for the Operator(Responsible Authority) Provide information for person signing the NOT application in the Certification section. This person is also referred to as the Responsible Authority. Provide a complete mailing address for receiving mail from the TCEQ. Update the address if different than previously submitted for the Notice of Intent or Notice of Change. The mailing address must be recognized by the US Postal Service. You may verify the address on the following website: https://tools.usps.com/go/ZipLookupAction!input.action. The phone number should provide contact to the operator. The fax number and e-mail address are optional and should correspond to the operator. Section 2. A s s lication Contact: Provide the name, title and contact information of the person that TCEQ can contact for additional information regarding this application. Section 3. Re: lated Enti (RE) Information on Pro-ect or Site: a) Regulated Entity Reference Number(RN) A number issued by TCEQ's Central Registry to sites where an activity regulated by TCEQ. This is not a permit number,registration number,or license number. The Regulated Entity Reference Number is available at the following website: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm. b) Name of the Project or Site Provide the name of the site as known by the public in the area where the site is located. c) County Identify the county or counties in which the regulated entity is located. d) Latitude and Longitude Enter the latitude and longitude of the site in degrees,minutes,and seconds or decimal form. The latitude and longitude as provided on the current authorization is available at the following website: httu://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wa_dpa/index.cfm. e) Site/Project(RE)Physical Address/Location Information The physical address/location information, as provided on the current authorization, is available at the following website:http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm. TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 2 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 Section 3A. If a site has an address that includes a street number and street name, enter the complete address for the site. If the physical address is not recognized as a USPS delivery address,you may need to validate the address with your local police(911 service)or through an online map site used to locate the site. Please confirm this to be a complete and valid address. Do not use a rural route or post office box for a site location. Section 3B. If a site does not have an address that includes a street number and street name, provide a complete written location description.For example: "The site is located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1." Provide the city(or nearest city) and Zip Code of the facility location. Section 4. Reason for Termination: The Notice of Termination form is only for use to terminate the authorization(permit). The Permittee must indicate the specific reason for terminating by checking one of the options. If the reason is not listed then provide an attachment that explains the reason for termination. Please read your general permit carefully to determine when to terminate your permit. Permits will not be reactivated after submitting a termination form. The termination is effective on the date postmarked for delivery to TCEQ. Section 5. Certification: The certification must bear an original signature of a person meeting the signatory requirements specified under 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44. IF YOUAREA CORPORATION: The regulation that controls who may sign an application form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a), which is provided below. According to this code provision, any corporate representative may sign an NOI or similar form so long as the authority to sign such a document has been delegated to that person in accordance with corporate procedures. By signing the NOI or similar form,you are certifying that such authority has been delegated to you. The TCEQ may request documentation evidencing such authority. IF YOU ARE A MUNICIPALITY OR OTHER GOVERNMENT ENTITY.• The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a), which is provided below. According to this code provision,only a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may sign an NOI or similar form. Persons such as the City Mayor or County Commissioner will be considered ranking elected officials. In order to identify the principal executive officer of your government entity,it may be beneficial to consult your city charter,county or city ordinances,or the Texas statutes under which your government entity was formed.An NOI or similar document that is signed by a government official who is not a ranking elected official or principal executive officer does not conform to §305.44(a)(3). The signatory requirement may not be delegated to a government representative other than those identified in the regulation.By signing the NOI or similar form,you are certifying that you are either a ranking elected official or principal executive officer as required by the administrative code. Documentation demonstrating your position as a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may be requested by the TCEQ. If you have any questions or need additional information concerning the signatory requirements discussed above,please contact the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality's Environmental Law Division at 512-239-0600. TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 3 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 30 Texas Administrative Code§305.44. Signatories to Applications (a) All applications shall be signed as follows. (1) For a corporation,the application shall be signed by a responsible corporate officer. For purposes of this paragraph,a responsible corporate officer means a president, secretary,treasurer,or vice-president of the corporation in charge of a principal business function,or any other person who performs similar policy or decision-making functions for the corporation;or the manager of one or more manufacturing,production,or operating facilities employing more than 250 persons or having gross annual sales or expenditures exceeding $25 million(in second-quarter 1980 dollars),if authority to sign documents has been assigned or delegated to the manager in accordance with corporate procedures. Corporate procedures governing authority to sign permit or post-closure order applications may provide for assignment or delegation to applicable corporate positions rather than to specific individuals. (2) For a partnership or sole proprietorship,the application shall be signed by a general partner or the proprietor,respectively. (3) For a municipality, state, federal, or other public agency, the application shall be signed by either a principal executive officer or a ranking elected official. For purposes of this paragraph,a principal executive officer of a federal agency includes the chief executive officer of the agency, or a senior executive officer having responsibility for the overall operations of a principal geographic unit of the agency(e.g.,regional administrator of the EPA). TCEQ 20023 (03/09/2018) Page 4 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 NNW m SIM MEM �. a wr LARGE CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 "PRIMARY OPERATOR"NOTICE This notice applies to construction sites operating under Part II.E.3. of the TPDES General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from construction sites equal to or greater than five acres, including the larger common plan of development. The information on this notice is required in Part III.D.2. of the general permit. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the internet at: http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wu construction.html Site-Specific TPDES Authorization Number: Operator Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: Project Description: Physical address or description of the site's location, and estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized. Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan: imumw wow. Mal W w LARGE CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 "SECONDARY OPERA TOR "NOTICE This notice applies to secondary operators of construction sites operating under Part II.E.3. of the TPDES General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from construction sites equal to or greater than five acres, including the larger common plan of development. The information on this notice is required in Part III.D.2. of the general permit. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the internet at: http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wq construction.html ' --Specific TPDES Authorization Number: „tutor Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: Project Description: Physical address or description of the site's location, and estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized. Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan(SWP3): For Large Construction Activities Authorized Under Part II.E.3. (Obtaining Authorization to Discharge) the following certification must be completed: I (Typed or Printed Name Person Completing This Certification)certify under penalty of law that I have read and understand the eligibility requirements for claiming an authorization under Part II.E.3. of TPDES General Permit TXR 150000 and agree to comply with the terms of this permit. A stormwater pollution prevention plan has been developed and will be implemented prior to construction, according to permit requirements. A copy of this signed notice is supplied to the operator of the MS4 if discharges enter an MS4. I am aware there are significant penalties for providing false information or for conducting unauthorized discharges, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Signature and Title Date Date Notice Removed MS4 operator notified per Part II.F.3. 1.111111111 rM rrr arra Noir rr� KIM SMALL CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 The following information is posted in compliance with Part II.E.2. of the TCEQ General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from small construction sites. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the internet at: http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wq construction.html Operator Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: ct Description: Physical address or uescription of the site's location, estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan: For Small Construction Activities Authorized Under Part II.E.2. (Obtaining Authorization to Discharge) the following certification must be completed: I (Typed or Printed Name Person Completing This Certification)certify under penalty of law that I have read and understand the eligibility requirements for claiming an authorization under Part II.E.2. of TPDES General Permit TXR 150000 and agree to comply with the terms of this permit. A stormwater pollution prevention plan has been developed and will be implemented prior to construction, according to permit requirements. A copy of this signed notice is supplied to the operator of the MS4 if discharges enter an MS4. I am aware there are significant penalties for providing false information or for conducting unauthorized discharges, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Signature and Title _ Date Date Notice Removed MS4 operator notified per Part II.F.3. CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION Section 01566 SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Descriptions of measures and practices, in response to TPDES General Permit TXR 150000, which shall be used on the Work to eliminate or significantly minimize pollutants in discharges into Surface Water in the State by controlling erosion and sediments at their source. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01550—Stabilized Construction Exit 2. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls C Definitions: 1. Potential Water Pollutant- any substance that could potentially alter the physical, thermal, chemical, or biological quality of the Surface Water in the State, rendering the water harmful, detrimental, or injurious to humans, animal life, vegetation, or property, or to public health, safety or welfare, or impairs the usefulness or the public enjoyment of the water for any lawful or reasonable purpose. 1.02 MEAUSREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in the Plans and this Technical Specification. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C The Contractor shall install, maintain, and inspect erosion and sediment control measures and practices that operate effectively and as specified in the Plans and in this or other Technical Specifications. 07/2006 01566- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION D Equipment and vehicles shall be prohibited by the Contractor from maneuvering on areas outside of the limits of construction or dedicated rights-of-way and easements. Damage caused by construction traffic to erosion and sediment control systems shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor. E The Contractor shall be responsible for collecting, storing,hauling, and disposing of spoil, silt, waste materials, and contaminated material resulting from erosion and sediment control measures as specified in this or other Technical Specifications and in compliance with applicable federal, state, and local rules and regulations. 3.02 EXPOSED SOIL A When soil is exposed as a result of clearing,grading,excavating,stockpiling,or other soil disturbing activities, the Contractor shall implement measures to effectively control erosion and prevent the escape of sediments from the Project Site. B Control measures may include the following practices: 1. Preserve existing vegetation to the extent possible. 2. Construct drainage swales, berms, or sediment basins. 3. Maintain grades to minimize the velocity of sheet flow over disturbed areas and promote evaporation and infiltration of storm water directly into the ground. 4. Install filter fabric fences or barriers, sediment traps, seepage basins, gabions, or storm drain inlet protection devices. 5. Utilize vegetative buffer strips, mulching, or riprap C When the placement of topsoil,bank sand, or other soil material is specified, after an area has been brought to grade and immediately prior to placement, loosen the subgrade discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 2 inches to permit bonding to the subsoil. D When all soil disturbing activities have been completed, establish a perennial vegetative cover on all areas that are not paved, covered by permanent structures, or otherwise permanently stabilized. 3.03 DUST CONTROL A Implement control measures to minimize dust creation and movement on construction sites and roads and to prevent airborne sediment from reaching receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems, to reduce on-site and off-site damage, to prevent health hazards, and to improve traffic safety. B Control blowing dust by using one or more of the following measures: 1. Mulches bound with chemical binders. 2. Temporary vegetative cover. 3. Tillage to roughen surface and bring clods to the surface. 4. Irrigation by water sprinkling. 07/2006 01566-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 5. Barriers using solid board fences, burlap fences, crate walls, bales of hay, or similar materials. C Implement dust control measures immediately whenever dust can be observed blowing on the Project Site. 3.04 DEMOLITION AREAS A Demolition activities which create large amounts of dust with significant concentrations of heavy metals or other potential water pollutants shall use methods described in this Section,3.03"Dust Control",to limit transport of airborne pollutants. However, water or slurry used to control dust contaminated with heavy metals or potential water pollutants shall be retained on the Project Site and shall not be allowed to run directly into watercourses or storm water conveyance systems by the appropriate use of control measures described in this Section. Methods of ultimate disposal of these materials shall be carried out in accordance with applicable local, state, and federal health and safety regulations. 3.05 SEDIMENT TRACKING A Minimize off-site tracking of sediments and the generation of dust by construction vehicles, keeping the streets clean or construction debris and mud, by implementing one or more of the following control measures: 1. Restrict all ingress and egress to stabilized construction exits. 2. Stabilize areas used for staging, parking, storage or disposal. 3. Stabilize on-site vehicle transportation routes. 4. Remove mud and other debris, washing if necessary, from vehicles prior to entrance onto public roadways from the Project Site. 5. Maintain grade to minimize the occurrence of mud on the Project Site. B Construct stabilized construction areas under the provisions of Section 01550 — Stabilized Construction Exists. C In addition to Stabilized Construction Exits shovel or sweep the pavement to the extent necessary to keep the street clean. Water-hosing or sweeping of debris and mud off of the street into adjacent areas is not allowed. 3.06 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR A Control equipment maintenance and repair so that oils,gasoline,grease,solvents,and other potential water pollutants cannot be washed directly into receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems. B Control measures may include the following practices: 1. Confine maintenance and repair of construction machinery and equipment to areas specifically designated for that purpose. 2. Provide these areas with adequate waste disposal receptacles for liquid as well as solid waste. 07/2006 01566-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 3. Clean and inspect maintenance and repair areas daily. 4. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate. 5. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area. 6. Place plastic matting, packed clay, tar paper, or other impervious material to prevent contamination of soil in the area. 7. Isolate areas of contaminated soil or other materials to facilitate proper removal and disposal. C Where effective control measures are not feasible,equipment shall be taken off-site for maintenance and repair. 3.07 WASTE COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL A Conduct operations in conformance with the plan provided in Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal and utilize such control measures,described in this Section,as may be necessary to eliminate or significantly reduce the discharge of possible water pollutants from the Project Site as a result of waste collection and disposal. B Keep receptacles and waste collection areas neat and orderly to the extent possible. Waste shall not be allowed to overflow its container or accumulate from day-to-day. Locate trash collection points where they will least likely be affected by concentrated storm water runoff. 3.08 WASHING AREAS A Vehicles such as concrete delivery trucks or dump trucks and other construction equipment shall not be washed at locations where the runoff will flow directly into a watercourse or storm water conveyance system. Preventative measures may include the following practices: 1. Designate special areas for washing vehicles. 2. Locate these areas where the wash water will spread out and evaporate or infiltrate directly into the ground, or where the runoff can be collected in a temporary holding or seepage basin. 3. Beneath wash areas construct a gravel or rock base to minimize mud production. B Construct washing areas under the provisions of Section 01550 — Stabilized Construction Exists. 3.09 STORAGE AND USAGE OF POTENTIAL WATER POLLUTANTS A Store and use potential water pollutants such as pesticides,fertilizers,distillate fuels, lubricants, solvents, cements, paints, acids, caustics, and other toxic substances in accordance with manufacturers' guidelines, Material Safety Data Sheets, and with local, state, and federal regulations. 07/2006 01566-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION B Isolate these substances in areas where they are to be stored,opened or used such that they will not cause pollution of runoff from the Project Site. Preventative measures may include the following practices: 1. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate. 2. Store containers on raised platforms. 3. Place plastic matting, packed clay, tar paper, or other impervious material to prevent contamination of soil in the area. 4. Provide protective cover or weather proof enclosure. 5. Minimize accidental spillage. 6. Keep containers tightly closed. 7. Periodically inspect containers for leakage. 8. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area. 9. Provide berms, filter fabric fences or barriers, or sediment basins. 10. Designate washing areas for containers and other items that have come in contact with potential water pollutants. C Avoid overuse of substances such as pesticides and fertilizers which could produce contaminated runoff. 3.10 SANITARY FACILITIES A Provide the Project Site with adequate portable toilets for workers in accordance with Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls,and applicable health regulations. B Control areas where sanitary facilities are located so that sewage or chemicals will not be washed directly into receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems by using one or more of the following measures. 1. Inspect the facilities daily. 2. Service the facilities as often as necessary to maintain cleanliness and prevent overflows. 3. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate 4. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area END OF SECTION 07/2006 01566-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM Section 01570 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Trench safety system for the construction of trench excavations. B. Trench safety system for excavation of utilities, excavation of structures, and embankment which fall under provisions of federal, state, or local excavation safety laws. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement& Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals D. Referenced Standards: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA) E. Definitions: 1. Trench. A narrow excavation(in relation to its depth)made below the surface of the ground. In general, the depth is greater than the width,but the width of a trench(measured at the bottom)is not greater than 15 feet. 2. Trench safety system requirements apply to larger open excavations if the erection of structures or other installations limits the space between the excavation slope and the installation to dimensions equivalent to a trench as defined. 3. Trench safety systems include both Protective Systems and Shoring Systems but are not limited to sloping, sheeting,trench boxes or trench shields, slide rail systems, sheet piling, cribbing,bracing, shoring, dewatering or diversion of water to provide adequate drainage. 5/2013 01570- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM a. Protective System: A method of protecting employees from cave-ins, from material that could fall or roll from an excavation face or into an excavation, or from the collapse of an adjacent structure. b. Shoring System: A structure, which supports the sides of an excavation, to prevent cave-ins,maintain stable soil conditions, or to prevent movements of the ground affecting adjacent installations or improvements. c. Special Shoring: A shoring system meeting Special Shoring Requirements for locations identified on the Plans. 4. Competent Person-one who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for trench safety systems used on utility excavations is on a linear foot basis,measured along the centerline of the trench. Payment for trench safety systems includes payment for manholes and other line structures. B. Unless indicated in as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for shoring systems under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for trench safety systems. C. If shown on the Plans and included in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as a separate Bid Item, Measurement and Payment for Special Shoring system installation for trench excavation is on a square foot basis,measured and completed in place. D. Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for trench safety systems used on structural excavations under this Section. Include cost for trench safety system used on structural excavations in applicable structure installation. E. Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for trench safety systems used on roadway excavation or embankment under this Section. Include cost in applicable Sections. F. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit a safety plan specifically for the construction of trench excavation,excavation of utilities, excavation of structures, and embankment which fall under provisions of 5/2013 01570-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM federal, state, or local excavation safety laws. Design the Trench Safety Plan to be in accordance with OSHA Standards - 29CFR governing the presence and activities of individuals working in and around trench excavations, and in accordance with any Special Shoring requirements at locations shown on the Plans. Include in the plan, submittal of the contact information for the Competent Person. C. Have Shop Drawings for trench safety systems sealed, as required by OSHA, by a Professional Engineer, licensed by the State of Texas, retained and paid by the Contractor. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Install and maintain trench safety systems in accordance with the provision of Excavations,Trenching,and Shoring,OSHA Standards-29 CFR,Part 1926,Subpart P, as amended,including Final Rule,published in the Federal Register Vol.54,No.209 on Tuesday, October 31, 1989. The sections that are incorporated into these Technical Specifications,by reference, include Standard 1926.650—652. B. A reproduction of the OSHA Standards — 29 CFR included in Subpart P — "Excavations"from the Federal Register Vol. 54,No. 209 is available upon request to Contractors bidding on the Work. The Owner assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the reproduction. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining a copy of this section of the Federal Register. C. Include in the Trench Safety Program measures that establish compliance with the standard interpretation of the General Duty Clause,Section 5.(a)(1),of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970—20 USC 654 which states, "Employers must shore or otherwise protect employees who walk/work at the base of an embankment from possible collapse." D. Legislation that has been enacted by the State of Texas with regard to Trench Safety Systems is hereby incorporated, by reference, into these specifications. Under Texas Statutes, refer to Chapter 756 of the Health and Safety Code, SUBCHAPTER C. TRENCH SAFETY. E. Reference materials,if developed for this Work, will be issued by the Engineer along with the Bid Documents, including the following: 1. Geotechnical information obtained for use in design of the trench safety system. 2. Special Shoring Requirements. 1.05 INDEMNIFICATION A. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, its employees, and agents, from any and all damages, costs(including,without limitation,legal fees, court costs, and the cost of investigation),judgments or claims by anyone for injury or death of 5/2013 01570-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM persons resulting from the collapse or failure of trenches constructed under this Contract. B. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that this indemnity provision provides indemnity for the Owner in case the Owner is negligent either by act or omission in providing for trench safety, including, but not limited to safety program and design reviews, inspections, failures to issue stop work orders, and the hiring of the Contractor. C. Review of the safety program by the Engineer will only be in regard to compliance with the Contract Documents and will not constitute approval by the Engineer nor relieve Contractor of obligations under state and federal trench safety laws. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install and maintain trench safety systems in accordance with provisions of OSHA Standards—29 CFR. B. Specially designed trench safety systems shall be installed in accordance with the Contractor's trench excavation safety program for the locations and conditions identified in the program. C. Install Special Shoring at the locations shown on the Plans. D. Obtain verification from a Competent Person,defined in this Section and as identified in the Contractor's Trench Safety Program, that trench boxes and other pre- manufactured systems are certified for the actual installation conditions. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Conduct daily inspections by Contractor or Contractor's independently retained consultant, of the trench safety systems to ensure that the installed systems and operations meet OSHA Standards—29 CFR and other personnel protection regulations requirements. B. If evidence of possible cave-ins or slides is apparent, immediately stop work in the trench and move personnel to safe locations until necessary precautions have been taken to safeguard personnel. C. Maintain a permanent record of daily inspections. 5/2013 01570-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify specific applicability of the selected or specially designed trench safety systems to each field condition encountered on the Work. END OF SECTION 5/2013 01570-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS Section 01580 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Project identification sign description. B. Installation. C. Maintenance and removal. 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. No separate payment will be made for design, fabrication, installation, and maintenance of project identification signs under this Section. Include cost of work performed under this Section in the pay item for Section 01505 - Mobilization. B. If changes to project identification signs are requested by the City Engineer to keep them current,payment will be made by change order. C. Skid-mounted signs shall be relocated as directed by the City Engineer at no additional cost to the City. Post-mounted signs shall be relocated once, if directed in writing by the City Engineer, at no additional cost to the City. If a post-mounted sign is relocated more than once at the written direction of the City Engineer, payment will be made by change order. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Sign Construction: Project identification signs shall be constructed of new materials and painted new for the project. Construct post-mounted signs as shown on Construction Sign Details. B. Appearance: Project identification signs shall be maintained to present a clean and neat look throughout the project duration. C. Sign Manufacturer/Maker: Experienced as a professional sign company. D. Sign Placement: Place signs at locations as directed by the City Engineer. The City Engineer will provide sign placement instructions at the Pre-construction Meeting. 1. A linear project is one involving paving, overlay, sewer lines, storm drainage, or water mains that run in the right-of-way over a distance. A 10/2014 01580-1 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS linear project requires a project identification sign at each end of the construction site. 2. Single Site or Building Projects: Provide one project identification sign. 3. Multiple Sites: Provide one project identification sign at each site. 4. Sign Relocation: As work progresses at each site, it may be necessary to move and relocate project identification signs. Relocate signs as directed in writing by the City Engineer. E. Alternate Skid-mounted Sign Construction: Post-mounted signs are preferred,but skid-mounted signs are allowed, especially for projects with noncontiguous locations where work progresses from one location to another. The skid structure shall be designed so that the sign will withstand a 60-mile-per-hour wind load directly to the face or back of the sign. Use stakes, straps, or ballast. Approval of the use of skid-mounted signs shall not release the Contractor from responsibility of maintaining a project identification sign on the project site and shall not make the City responsible for the security of such signs. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01350 - Submittal Procedures. B. Show content, layout, lettering style, lettering size, and colors. Make sign and lettering to scale, clearly indicating condensed lettering, if used. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGN MATERIALS A. Structure and Framing: All sign materials shall be new. 1. Sign Posts: Use 4-inch by 4-inch treated wood posts, sized to fix top of sign at 6 FEET ABOVE GROUND. 2. Sign Supports and Skid Bracing: 2-inch by 4-inch wood framing material. 3. Skid Members: 2-inch by 6-inch wood framing material. 4. Fasteners: a. Use galvanized steel fasteners. b. Use 3/8-inch by 5-1/2-inch button head carriage bolts to attach sign to posts. Secure with nuts and flat head washers at locations as recommended by Sign Manufacturer. c. Cover button heads with white reflective film or paint to match sign background B. Sign and Sign Header: Use medium density overlaid marine plywood, minimum 1/2-inch thick. Use full-size 4-foot by 8-foot sheets for sign and a single piece for header to minimize joints; do not piece wood to fabricate a sign face. C. Paint and Primers: White paint used to prime surfaces and to resist weathering shall be an industrial?Jude,fast-drying,oil-based paint with gloss finish. Paint structural 10/2014 01580-2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS and framing members white on all sides and edges to resist weathering. Paint sign and sign header material white on all sides and edges to resist weathering. Paint all sign surfaces with this weather-protective paint prior to adding any sign paint or adhesive applications. D. Colors: Follow criteria established by attached Exhibit 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install project identification signs within 10 calendar days after Date of Commencement. B. Erect signs where designated by the City Engineer at the Pre-construction Meeting or as described in part 1.03 of this Section. Position the sign in such a manner as to be fully visible and readable to the general public. C. Erect sign level and plumb. D. If mounted on posts, sink posts a minimum of 30 inches below grade in 10-inch diameter posthole. Stabilize posts with sharp sand or concrete to minimize lateral motion. Leave a minimum of 8 feet of post above existing grade for mounting of the sign and header. E. Erect sign so that the top edge of the sign, is no higher than 6 feet above existing grade. 3.02 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL A. Keep signs and supports clean. Repair deterioration and damage. B. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations to a depth of 2 feet upon completion of Project. Restore the area to a condition equal to or better than before construction. END OF SECTION 10/2014 01580-3 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN EXHIBIT First a`I Prot AIMmmtsapwmrwe'Ths.s4hidohwn PROJECT NAME LOCATED HERE R°TB name wns�rr PROJECT NO. 12345678 Capital improvement CITY OF PEARLAND Sgnage Layout CAPRAIPROJELT PROJECT SCHEDULE: MONTH/YEAR a,ATSS Various MAYoe TOMREIO BUDGET: $DOLLAR AMOUNT COLINCIt PORTION I TONY CANTONS Pearland.Texas COUNCIL POSITION 2: SCOTT SHERMAN ENGINEER/ARCHITEC•T: �•`<. October 2014 COUNCIL POSITION 2,GIRT MOORE NAME GOES HERE r«E.,,s&. MAYOR PRO TUN CUTN ORatNtAUX Capital improvement © El COUNCR POSITION S.ERIE Net CONTRACTOR: 4x8 blank template october 2014 0, omaaNAEER: CLAYPEARSON CONTRACTOR NAME GOES HERE ---- ----- INPUT CITY MANAMA ION ERANSON ,.1 . 10.E,S c;,%4DCAN(A'EEM IM ASST CITY MANAGER:TRENT EPPERSON peariandtx.govldepartmentS/engineenng"capltaI-projects/projects rAxvp+ u.pA ECtt.AveaoY,-t Rtu<xon iif`>91r rC&ex&`.Xer SPECIAL NOTE:CONTACT CITY SECRETARY FOR CURRENT COUNCIL NAMES mstIPIESSOSOADESiakVOLPe SINGLE SIDE MDO MARINE GRADE PLYWOOD FINISHED WITH ALKYD ENAMEL GLOSS WHITE t2u ?avH��w« vICAL Yce EIECTRM:AI.SERVICE£ S`;N COMPUTER CUT VINYL AND DIGITAL PRINT 5 YEAR LIFE MINIMUM MATERIALS MeS 0,4tRvna.Snt,rce INSTALL ON TWO 4`X4"TREATED POSTS.MIN.DEPTH IS 24",OR SKID MOUNTED AS SITE REO'D.. CLIENT APPROVAL 10/2014 01580-4 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT Section 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for transportation, delivery, handling, and storage of materials and equipment. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this work is a component. 1.03 PRODUCTS A Products: Means material,equipment,or systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation,fabrication,conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for reuse. B Do not reuse materials and equipment,designated to be removed,except as specified by the Contract Documents. C Provide equipment and components from the fewest number of manufacturers as is practical, in order to simplify spare parts inventory and to allow for maximum interchangeability of components. For multiple components of the same size,type or application, use the same make and model of component throughout the Work. 1.04 TRANSPORTATION A Make arrangements for transportation, delivery, and handling of equipment and materials required for timely completion of the Work. B Transport and handle products in accordance with instructions. C Consign and address shipping documents to the proper party giving name of Project, street number, and City. Shipments shall be delivered to the Contractor. 1.05 DELIVERY A Arrange deliveries of products to accommodate the Construction Schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation. Avoid deliveries that cause lengthy storage or overburden of limited storage space. 07/2006 01600- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT B Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at the Project Site and to accommodate the following: 1. Work of other contractors or the Owner. 2. Limitations of storage space. 3. Availability of equipment and personnel for handling products. 4. Owner's use of premises. C Have products delivered to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers. D Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipment to assure: 1. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Quantities are correct. 3. Containers and packages are intact; labels are legible. 4. Products are properly protected and undamaged. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A Coordinate the off-loading of materials and equipment delivered to the Project Site. If necessary to move stored materials and equipment during construction, Contractor shall relocate materials and equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. B Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle products, including those provided by the Owner,by methods to prevent damage to products or packaging. C Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent breaking scraping, marring, or otherwise damaging products or surrounding areas. D Handle products by methods to prevent over bending or overstressing. E Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points. F Handle materials and equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. G Do not drop, roll, or skid products off delivery vehicles. Hand carry or use suitable materials handling equipment. 1.07 STORAGE OF MATERIAL A Store and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of these Technical Specifications. Control storage of potential water pollutants in conformance with Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. B Make necessary provisions for safe storage of materials and equipment. Place loose soil materials,and materials to be incorporated into the Work to prevent damage to any part of the Work or existing facilities and to maintain free access at all times to all parts of the Work and to utility service company installations in the vicinity of the Work. 07/2006 01600-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT C Keep materials and equipment neatly and compactly stored in locations that will cause a minimum of inconvenience to other contractors, public travel, adjoining owners, tenants, and occupants. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. D Provide adequately ventilated, watertight storage facilities with floor above ground level for materials and equipment susceptible to weather damage. E Restrict storage to areas available on the construction site for storage of material and equipment as shown on Plans or approved by the Project Manager. F Provide off-site storage and protection when on-site storage is not adequate. G Do not use lawns, grass plots, or other private property for storage purposes without written permission of the owner or other person in possession or control of such premises. Damage to lawns,sidewalks,streets or other improvements shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. H Protect stored materials and equipment against loss or damage. I Store materials in manufacturers' unopened containers. J Materials delivered and stored along the line of the Work shall be not closer than 3 feet to any fire hydrant. Public and private drives and street crossings shall be kept open. K The total length which materials may be distributed along the route of construction at any one time is 1000 lineal feet, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Project Manager. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 07/2006 01600-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS Section 01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Options for making product or process selections. B Procedures for proposing equivalent construction products or processes,including pre- approved, and approved products or processes C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A Product: Means,materials,equipment,or systems incorporated into the Work.Product does not include machinery and equipment used for production,fabrication,conveying, and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for re-use. B Process: Any proprietary system or method for installing system components resulting in an integral, functioning part of the Work. For this Section, the word Product includes Processes. 1.04 SELECTION OPTIONS A Pre-approved Products: Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers are designated in the Technical Specifications as"pre-approved". Products of other manufacturers or suppliers will not be acceptable under this Contract and will not be considered under the submittal process for approving alternate products. B Approved Products: Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words "or approved equal". Approval of alternate products not listed in the Technical Specifications may be obtained through provisions of this Section and Section 01350—Submittals. The procedure for approval of alternate products is not applicable to Pre-approved Products. C Product Compatibility: To the maximum extent possible,provide products that are of the same type or function from a single manufacturer, make,or source. Where more than one choice is available as a Contractor's option, select a product which is compatible with other products already selected, specified, or in use by the Owner. 07/2006 01630- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A Furnish information the Engineer deems necessary to judge equivalency of the alternate product. B Pay for laboratory testing as well as any other review or examination cost needed to establish the equivalency between products which enables the Engineer to make such a judgment. C If the Engineer determines that an alternate product is not equivalent to that named in the Technical Specifications,the Contractor shall furnish one of the specified products. 1.06 ENGINEER'S REVIEW A Alternate products may be used only if approved in writing by the Engineer. The Engineer's determination regarding acceptance of a proposed alternate product is final. B Alternate products will be accepted if the product is judged by the Engineer to be equivalent to the specified product or to offer substantial benefit to the Owner. C The Owner retains the right to accept any product deemed advantageous to the Owner, and similarly, to reject any product deemed not beneficial to the Owner. 1.07 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE A Collect and assemble technical information applicable to the proposed product to aid in determining equivalency as related to the Approved Product specified. B Submit a written request for a product to be considered as an alternate product along with the product information within fourteen(14)days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. C After the submittal period has expired, requests for alternate products will be considered only when a specified product becomes unavailable because of conditions beyond the Contractor's control. D Submit 5 copies of each request for alternate product approval. Include the following information: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. 2. For products: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature with product description, performance and test data, and reference standards. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used and date of installation. Include the name of the Owner, Architect/Engineer, and installing contractor. 07/2006 01630-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 3. For construction methods: a. Detailed description of proposed method. b. Shop Drawings illustrating methods. 4. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. 5. Data relating to changes in Construction Schedule 6. Relationship to separate contracts, if any. 7. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified. 8. Other information requested by the Engineer. E Approved alternate products will be subject to the same review process as the specified product would have been for Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 07/2006 01630-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FIELD SURVEYING Section 01720 FIELD SURVEYING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for surveyors and surveys. B Procedures pertaining to survey control points and reference points. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 QUALITY CONTROL A Conform to State of Texas laws for surveys requiring licensed surveyors. Employ a land surveyor acceptable to Engineer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit to Engineer the name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. C Submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work on request. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. B Submit Record Documents under provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. 1.06 EXAMINATION A Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting Work. B Notify Engineer immediately of any discrepancies discovered. 07/2006 01720- I of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND FIELD SURVEYING 1.07 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS A Control datum for survey is that established by Owner-provided survey and indicated on Plans. B Locate and protect survey control points, including property corners,prior to starting site work. Use caution to preserve permanent reference points during construction. C The Contractor shall not reset; nor cause to be reset, lost, disturbed, or damaged; control points. Promptly notify Engineer of disturbance or damage to any control point(s). D Notify Engineer 48 hours in advance of need for relocation of reference points due to changes in grades or other reasons. E Report promptly to Engineer the loss or destruction of any reference point. F Any re-staking of control points lost,disturbed,or damaged by Contractor's operations will be provided by Owner at Contractor's expense. G Employ a Registered Public Land Surveyor to reset any missing,disturbed,or damaged monumentation. 1.08 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. B Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on Project Site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. C Establish and record in survey notes elevations,lines and levels to provide quantities required for Measurement and Payment and to provide appropriate controls for the Work. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading; fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Mounumented Baseline. D Verify periodically layouts by same means. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 07/2006 01720-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Section 01760 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Maintenance and Submittal of Record Documents and Samples. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01770—Contract Closeout 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. 1.04 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A Maintain one copy of Record Documents at the Project Site in accordance with Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 3.02 "Keeping Plans and Specifications Accessible". B Store Record Documents and Samples in field office if a field office is required by Contract Documents, or in a secure location. Provide files,racks, and secure storage for Record Documents and Samples. C Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. D Maintain Record Documents in a clean,dry,and legible condition. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes. E Keep Record Documents and Samples available for inspection by Engineer. 1.05 RECORDING A Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. B Plans, Change Orders, and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record all actual construction, or "as built" conditions, including: 1. Measured horizontal locations and elevations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 07/2006 01760- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 2. Elevations of underground utilities referenced to bench marks utilized for the Work. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Changes made by modifications. 5. Details not on original Plans. 6. References to related Shop Drawings and Modifications. C Record information with a red pen or pencil on a set of drawings indicated as the Record Document Set, provided by Engineer. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION A Deliver Record Documents and Samples to Owner in accordance with Section 01770— Contract Closeout. END OF SECTION 07/2006 01760-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section 01770 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Closeout procedures including final submittals such as operation and maintenance data, warranties, and spare parts and maintenance materials. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.04 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A Comply with Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement regarding Final Completion and Final Payment when Work is complete and ready for Engineer's final inspection. B Provide Record Documents under provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. C Complete or correct items on punch list,with no new items added. Any new items will be addressed during warranty period. D The Owner will occupy portions of the Work as specified in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. E Contractor shall request Final Inspection at least two weeks prior to Final Acceptance. 1.05 FINAL CLEANING A Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B Clean debris from drainage systems. C Clean Project Site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. 09/2009 01770- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT D Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and temporary construction facilities from the Project Site following the final test of utilities and completion of the Work. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A Submit Operations and Maintenance data under provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.07 WARRANTIES A Provide one original of each warranty from Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Manufacturers. B Provide Table of Contents and assemble warranties in 3-ring/D binder with durable plastic cover. C Submit warranties prior to Final Application for Payment. 1. Warranties shall commence in accordance with the requirements of Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 1.09 "Substantially Completed". 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION Contractor shall diligently pursue completion of the items and activities contained in the Contract Close Out and Project Record Document sections of the project manual. Notwithstanding any performance of warranty work,the work of Contract Closeout shall be complete within thirty (30) days of the date of Final Completion and Acceptance of the work. END OF SECTION 09/2009 01770-2of2 CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 SITE WORK 07/2006 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION Section 02200 SITE PREPARATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Removal of topsoil, stripping and stockpiling, clearing and grubbing. B Removal and disposal of waste materials, excess materials, debris and trash. C Removal of obstructions. D Excavation and fill. E Salvaging of designated item. F References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material 6. Section 02330—Embankment 7. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises G Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If Site Preparation is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit embankment material sources and product quality information in accordance this Section. 1/2018 02200- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING. A Clear Project Site of trees,shrubs,and other vegetation,except for those designated by Owner to be left standing. B Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees designated to remain. C Completely remove stumps,roots,and other debris protruding through ground surface. Y. On areas required for roadway, channel, or structural excavation, remove stumps, 2" diameter or larger limbs and roots,to depth of 2 feet below lower elevation of excavation. 2. On areas required for embankment construction, remove 2" diameter limbs, stumps and roots to depth of 2 feet below ground surface 3. Trees and stumps may be cut off as close to natural ground as practicable on areas which are to be covered by at least 3 feet of embankment D Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth,and thoroughly compact to density equal to adjacent original ground. E Complete operations by bulldozing,blading,and grading so that prepared area is free of holes, unplanned ditches, abrupt changes in elevations and irregular contours,and preserve drainage of area. 1. Blade entire area to prevent ponding of water and to provide drainage,except in areas to be immediately excavated 1/2018 02200-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION 3.02 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING A Obtain approval of topsoil quality before excavating and stockpiling. B Excavate topsoil for esplanades and areas to receive grass or landscaping from areas to be further excavated. C Topsoil Stripping: 1. Remove growths of grass from areas before stripping. 2. Topsoil is defined as surface soil found of depth of not less than 4 inches. 3. Strip topsoil to depths encountered. 4. Perform stripping in a manner to prevent intermingling of topsoil with underlying sterile subsoil and remove objectionable materials, including clay lumps, stones over 2 in. in diameter, weeds,roots, leaves, and debris. 5. Where trees are designated by Owner to be left standing,stop topsoil stripping at extreme limits of tree drip line to prevent damage to main root system. D Topsoil Stockpiling: 1. Stockpile in areas designated on Plans. 2. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water. 3. Cover storage piles, if required to prevent wind-blown dust. 4. Stockpile topsoil to depth not exceeding 8 feet. Stockpile in a manner to prevent erosion. 3.03 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL A Undercut, remove, and replace material which Engineer designates as unsuitable for subsequent construction. B Material used to replace unsuitable material shall be suitable material from site excavation or as indicated on Plans. 3.04 EXCAVATION AND FILL A Construction surveying shall be performed by qualified personnel under the direction of the contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy and correctness of this work. In the event that the work consists of significant alteration of the topographic features of natural grade, contractor shall perform enough topographic survey to substantiate existing pre-construction elevations. No claim shall be made for additional excavation or grade adjustment in excess of quantities contained in the contract documents without demonstrable evidence that such conditions existed prior to start of the work B Depressed site areas shall be filled using material from high areas, insofar as practicable. 1/2018 02200-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION C When fill obtained from high areas is exhausted, fill to indicated rough grade elevations under roadways with"Structural Fill"and open areas not under structures or roadways with"General Fill", or as indicated on Plans. D Place and compact fill in accordance with Section 02330—Embankment. 3.05 SALVAGEABLE ITEMS AND MATERIAL A Items designated by Engineer to be salvaged are to be carefully removed,so as to cause no damage to the salvaged items and delivered to Owner's storage yard. 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. END OF SECTION 1/2018 02200-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION Section 02220 SITE DEMOLITION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Demolishing and removing existing pavements, structures, equipment and materials only to the extent as indicated on the Plans. B Removing concrete paving, asphaltic concrete pavement, and base courses. C Removing concrete curbs, concrete curb and gutters, sidewalks and driveways. D Removing pipe culverts and sewers. E Removing miscellaneous structures of wood,plastics, metals, concrete, masonry, or combination of concrete and masonry, etc. F Disposing of demolished materials and equipment. G References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Control 4. Section 01100—Summary of Work 5. Section 01730—Cutting and Patching 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 7. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for removing and disposing of existing pavement and structures under this Section. Include cost for removing and disposing of existing pavement and structures in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If indicated as a Bid Item, measurement will be as follows: 1. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete base and surfacing,and removing asphaltic surfacing,is on a square yard basis measured between lips of gutters. 2. Measurement for removing and disposing of cement stabilized shell base course,with or without asphalt surfacing, is on a square yard basis. 3. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete base and surfacing with curbs,is on a square yard basis measured from back to back of curbs. Payment includes removal of all base,asphaltic surfacing,concrete pavement,esplanade curbs, curb and gutters, and paving headers. 07/2006 02220- I of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION 4. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete pavement is on a square yard basis measured from back to back of curbs. 5. Measurement for removing and disposing of monolithic curb and gutter, removing monolithic concrete curb,and removing concrete curb,is on a lineal foot basis measured along the face of the curb. 6. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete sidewalk and driveway is on a square yard basis. 7. Measurement for removing and disposing of miscellaneous concrete and masonry removal is on a cubic yard basis of the structure in place. 8. Measurement for removing and disposing of pipe culverts and sewers is on a lineal foot basis for each diameter of type of pipe removed. 9. Measurement for removing and disposing of unlisted materials shall be on the lump sum basis. C No payment will be made for work outside maximum payment limits indicated on Plans, or in areas removed for Contractor's convenience. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials and sequence of operations for demolition. Describe coordination for shutting off,capping,and removing temporary utilities. Plan operations to minimize temporary disruption of utilities to existing facilities or adjacent property. C Submit proposed demolition and removal schedule for approval. Notify Engineer in writing at least 48 hours before starting demolition. D Submit an approved copy of demolition schedule to Engineer prior to commencement of demolition operations. E Obtain a permit for building demolition, as required. 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. B The Contractor shall be responsible for safety and integrity of adjacent structures and shall be liable for any damage due to movement or settlement. Provide proper framing and shoring necessary for support. Cease operations if an adjacent structure appears to be endangered. Resume demolition only after proper protective measures have been taken. 07/2006 02220-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION 1.05 OWNERSHIP OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A Materials and equipment designated for reuse or salvage are listed in Section 01100— Summary of Work. Protect items designated for reuse or salvage from damage during demolition, handling and storage. Restore damaged items to satisfactory condition. B Materials and equipment not designated for reuse or salvage become the property of the Contractor. 1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING A Store and protect materials and equipment designated for reuse until time of installation. B Deliver and unload items to be salvaged to storage areas indicated on Plans. C Remove equipment and materials not designated for reuse or salvage and all waste and debris resulting from demolition from site. Remove material as work progresses to avoid clutter. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS FOR DEMOLITION A Use equipment and materials approved as prescribed in this Section, 1.03"Submittals'. B Use of a"drop hammer"must have the Engineer's prior approval. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Prior to demolition, make an inspection with Engineer to determine the condition of existing structures and features adjacent to items designated for demolition. B Engineer will mark or list existing equipment to remain the property of the Owner. C Do not proceed with demolition or removal operations until after the joint inspection and subsequent authorization by Engineer. B Stop demolition and notify Engineer if underground fuel storage tanks, asbestos, PCB's, contaminated soils, or other hazardous materials are encountered. 3.02 UTILITY SERVICES A Follow rules and regulations of authorities or companies having jurisdiction over communications,pipelines, and electrical distribution services. B Notify and coordinate with utility company and adjacent building occupants when temporary interruption of utility service is necessary. 07/2006 02220-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION C When required by the Work, cutting, patching, and fitting of Work to existing facilities,accommodating installation or connection of Work with existing facilities,or uncovering Work for access, inspection, or testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 01730—Cutting and Patching 3.03 MECHANICAL WORK ITEMS A Mechanical removals consist of dismantling and removing existing piping, pumps, motors,water tanks,equipment and other appurtenances. It includes cutting,capping, and plugging required to restore use of existing utilities. B Remove existing process,water,chemical,gas, fuel oil and other piping not required for new work. Take out piping to the limits shown or to a point where it will not interfere with the new work. Piping not indicated to be removed or which does not interfere with new work shall be removed to the nearest solid support,capped,and the remainder left in place. Purge chemical and fuel lines and tanks. Verify that such lines are safe prior to removal or capping. C Where piping that is to be removed passes through existing walls,cut and cap piping on each side of the wall. Use cap appropriate for pipe material to be capped. Provide fire-rated sealant for walls classified as fire-rated. D When underground piping, which is not located in the public right-of-way, is to be altered or removed,cap the remaining piping. Abandoned underground piping may be left in place unless it interferes with new work or is shown or specified to be removed. Piping less than 15 inches in diameter may be plugged and abandoned in place. For piping 15 inches in diameter and greater to be abandoned,fill with sand,pressure grout or other approved method and plug with concrete or brick masonry. bulkhead. E Remove waste and vent piping to points shown. Plug pipe and cleanouts and plugs. Where vent stacks pass through an existing roof that is to remain,remove the stack and patch the hole in the roof,making it watertight. Comply with requirements of existing roof installer so as to maintain roof warranty. F Conform to applicable codes when making any changes to plumbing and heating systems. 3.04 ELECTRICAL WORK ITEMS A Electrical removals consist of disconnecting and removing existing switchgear, distribution switchboards,control panels,bus duct,conduits and wires,panel boards, lighting fixtures, and miscellaneous electrical equipment. B Remove existing electrical equipment and fixtures to prevent damage to allow continued operation of existing systems and to maintain the integrity of the grounding systems. 07/2006 02220-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION C Remove poles and metering equipment, if designated for removal on the Plans. Coordinate electrical removals with the power company, as necessary. Verify that power is properly de-energized and disconnected. D Where shown or otherwise required, remove wiring in underground duct systems. Verify function of wiring before disconnecting and removing. Plug ducts which are not to be reused at entry to buildings. E Changes to electrical systems shall conform to applicable codes. 3.05 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove from the site all items contained in or upon the structure not designated for reuse or salvage in accordance with this Section and Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. C Follow method of disposal as required by regulatory agencies. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02220-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND Section 02252 CEMENT STABILIZED SAND 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Cement stabilized sand for backfill and bedding. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 558, "Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight)Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures" b. ASTM D 1632, "Practice for Making and Curing Soil-Cement Compression and Flexure Test Specimens in the Laboratory" c. ASTM D 1633, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Molded Soil-Cement Cylinders" d. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" e. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" f. ASTM D 2487, "Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)" g. ASTM C 142, "Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates" h. ASTM C 123, "Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate" i. ASTM C 40, "Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete" j. ASTM C 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" k. ASTM C 94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete" 1. ASTM C 31,"Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as an Extra Item, no separate payment will be made for cement stabilized sand under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for applicable utility or structure installation. B If use of cement stabilized sand is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a per ton basis. A conversion between volumes calculated based on theoretical limits and total weight will be made based on a ratio of 1.64 tons per cubic yard. 02/2009 02252- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit material qualification and design mix tests to include: 1. Three series of tests of sand or fine aggregate material from the proposed source. Tests shall include procedures defined in this Section, 2.01 "Materials". 2. Three moisture-density relationship tests prepared using the material qualified by the tests in this Section, 1.03B1. Blends of fine aggregate from crushed concrete and bank run sand shall be tested at the ratio to be used for the design mix testing. 3. Design mix report to meet the specifications of this Section, 1.04 "Design Requirements". The design mix shall include compressive strength tests after 48-hours and 7 days curing. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A Design sand-cement mixture to produce a minimum unconfined compressive strength of 100 pounds per square inch in 48 hours when compacted to a minimum 95 percent in accordance with ASTM D 558 and when cured in accordance with ASTM D 1632, and tested in accordance with ASTM D 1633. Mix shall contain a minimum of 1-1/2 sacks of cement per cubic yard. Compact mix with a moisture content on the dry side of optimum. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Cement shall be Type 1 Portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150. B Sand shall be clean, durable, and meet grading requirements for fine aggregates of ASTM C 33 and the following requirements: 1. Classified as SW, SP or SM by the United Soil Classification System of ASTM D 2487. 2. Deleterious material content: a. Clay lumps shall comprise less than 0.5 percent by ASTM C 142. b. Lightweight pieces shall comprise less than 5.0 percent by ASTM C 123. c. Organic impurities shall produce color no darker than the standard color by ASTM C 40 ASTM. 3. Plasticity index of 4 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318. C Fine aggregate,manufactured from crushed concrete meeting the quality requirements for crushed rock material in Section 02255 - Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials, may be used as a complete or partial substitute for Bank Sand. The blending ratio of fme aggregate from crushed concrete and Bank Sand shall be defined in the mix design report. 02/2009 02252-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENTi STABILIZED SAND D Water shall be potable,free of oils,acids,alkalies,organic matter,or other deleterious substances,meeting requirements of ASTM C 94. 2.02 MIXING MATERIALS A Thoroughly mix sand, cement and water in proportions of the mix design using a pugmill-type mixer. The plant shall be equipped with automatic weight controls to ensure correct mix proportions. B Stamp batch ticket at plant with time of loading directly after mixing. Material not placed and compacted within 4 hours after mixing shall be rejected. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A Place sand-cement mixture in 8-inch-thick loose lifts and compact to a minimum of 95 percent of ASTM D 558, unless otherwise specified on Plans. The moisture content during compaction shall be on the dry side of optimum but sufficient for hydration. Perform and complete compaction of sand-cement mixture within 4 hours after addition of water to mix at the plant. B Do not place or compact sand-cement mixture in standing or free water. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services. B Mixing plant inspections will be performed periodically. Material samples will be obtained and tested in accordance with this Section, 2.01 "Materials", if there is evidence of change in material characteristic. C One sample of cement stabilized sand shall be obtained for each 150 tons of material placed per day with no less than one sample per day of production. Random samples of delivered cement stabilized sand shall be taken in the field at point of delivery in accordance with ASTM 3665.Obtain three individual samples of approximately 12 to 15 lb each from the first, middle, and last third of the truck and composite them into one sample for test purpose. D Prepare and mold four specimens (for each sample obtained) in accordance with ASTM D558,Method A,without adjusting moisture content.Samples will be molded at approximately same time material is being used,but no later than 4 hours after water is added to mix. E After molding,specimens will be removed from molds and cured in accordance with ASTM D 1632. 02/2009 02252-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND F Specimens will be tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM D 1633, Method A. Two specimens will be tested at 48 hours plus or minus 2 hours and two specimens will be tested at 7 days plus or minus 4 hours. G A strength test will be average of strengths of two specimens molded from same sample of material and tested at same age. Average daily strength will be average of strengths of all specimens molded during one day's production and tested at same age. H Precision and Bias: Test results shall meet recommended guideline for precision in ASTM D 1633 Section 9. I Reporting: Test reports shall contain, as a minimum,the following information: 1. Supplier and plant number 2. Time material was batched 3. Time material was sampled 4. Test age(exact hours) 5. Average 48-hour strength 6. Average 7-day strength 7. Specification section number 8. Indication of compliance/non-compliance 9. Mixture identification 10. Truck and ticket numbers 11. The time of molding 12. Moisture content at time of molding 13. Required strength 14. Test method designations 15. Compressive strength data as required by ASTM D 1633 16. Supplier mixture identification 17. Specimen diameter and height, in. 18. Specimen cross-sectional area, sq. in. J The cement content will be checked on samples obtained in the field whenever there are apparent changes in the mix properties. 3.03 ACCEPTANCE A Strength level of material will be considered satisfactory if: 1. The average 48-hour strength is greater than 100 psi with no individual strength test below 70 psi. 2. All 7-day individual strength tests(average of two specimens)are greater than or equal to100 psi. B Material will be considered deficient when 7-day individual strength test(average of two specimens) is less than 100 psi but greater than 70 psi. See Paragraph 3.04 Adjustment for Deficient Strength. C The material will be considered unacceptable and subject to removal and replacement at Contractors expense when individual strength test(average of two specimens)has 7-day strength less than 70 psi 02/2009 02252-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND D When moving average of three daily 48-hour averages falls below 100 psi,discontinue shipment to project until plant is capable of producing material,which exceeds 100 psi at 48 hours. Five 48-hour strength tests shall be made in this determination with no individual strength tests less than 100 psi. E Testing laboratory shall notify Contractor,Project Manager,and material supplier by facsimile of tests indicating results falling below specified strength requirements within 24 hours. F If any strength test of laboratory cured specimens falls below the specified strength, Contractor may, at his own expense, request test of cores drilled from the area in question in accordance with ASTM C42. In such cases,three(3)cores shall be taken for each strength test that falls below the values given in 3.03.A. G Cement stabilized sand in an area represented by core tests shall be considered satisfactory if the average of three(3)cores is equal to at least 100 psi and if no single core is less that 70 psi.Additional testing of cores extracted from locations represented by erratic core strength results will be permitted. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT FOR DEFICIENT STRENGTH A When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength greater than or equal to 100 psi, then material will be considered satisfactory and bid price will be paid in full. B When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength less than 100 psi and greater than or equal to 70 psi,material shall be accepted contingent on credit in payment Compute credit by the following formula: Credit per Cubic Yard= $30.00 x 2 (100 psi - Actual psi) 100 C When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength less than 70 pounds per square inch, then remove and replace cement-sand mixture and paving and other necessary work at no cost to City. END OF SECTION 02/2009 02252-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS Section 02255 BEDDING,BACKFILL, AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A A reference source for materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment,specified elsewhere in the Technical Specifications,and their associated material qualification testing requirements. B Source qualifications and handling of these materials. C Material use and application is specified on the Plans or in individual Technical Specifications referencing materials either by Material Classification or by Product Description. D References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 2. Section 02910—Topsoil 3. Section 02252—Cement Stabilized Sand E Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 2487, "Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)" b. ASTM C 142, "Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates" c. ASTM C 123, "Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate" d. ASTM C 40, "Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete" e. ASTM C 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" f. ASTM D 1140, "Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils Finer the No. 200 (70-urn) Sieve" g. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" h. ASTM C 136, "Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates" i. ASTM C 131, "Standard Test Methods for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine" 07/2007 02255- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS A Materials shall be classified for the purpose of quality control in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification Symbols as defined in ASTM D 2487. 1. Class I: Well-graded gravels and sands, gravel-sand mixtures, crushed well- graded rock, little or no fines (GW, SW): a. Plasticity index: non-plastic. b. Gradation: D60/D10- greater than 4 percent; amount passing No. 200 sieve - less than or equal to 5 percent. 2. Class II: Poorly graded gravels and sands, silty gravels and sands, little to moderate fines: a. Plasticity index: non-plastic to 4. b. Gradations: Gradation (GP, SP): amount passing No. 200 sieve - less than 5 percent. Gradation(GM,SM): amount passing No.200 sieve-between 12 percent and 50 percent. c. Borderline gradations with dual classifications(e.g., SP-SM): amount passing No. 200 sieve -between 5 percent and 12 percent. 3. Class III: Clayey gravels and sands, poorly graded mixtures of gravel, sand, silt, and clay(GC, SC, and dual classifications, e.g., SP-SC): a. Plasticity index: greater than 7. b. Gradation: amount passing No.200 sieve-between 12 percent and 50 percent. 4. Class WA: Lean clays (CL). a. Plasticity Indexes: Plasticity index: greater than 7, and above A line. Borderline plasticity with dual classifications (CL-ML): PI between 4 and 7. b. Liquid limit: less than 50. c. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve -greater than 50 percent. d. Inorganic. 5. Class IVB: Fat clays (CH) a. Plasticity index: above A line. b. Liquid limit: 50 or greater. c. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve -greater than 50 percent. d. Inorganic. B Use soils with dual class designation according to ASTM D 2487, and which are not defined above, according to the more restrictive class. 2.02 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS A Unsuitable Material. Unsuitable soil materials are the following: 07/2007 02255-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING, BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 1. Materials that are classified as ML,CL-ML,MH,PT,OH and OL according to ASTM D 2487. 2. Materials that cannot be compacted to the required density due to either gradation, plasticity, or moisture content. 3. Materials that contain large clods, aggregates, stones greater than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, vegetation, waste or any other deleterious materials. 4. Materials that are contaminated with hydrocarbons or other chemical contaminants. B Suitable Material. Soil materials meeting specification requirements. Unsuitable soils meeting specification requirements for suitable soils after treatment with,for example, lime or cement shall be considered suitable, unless otherwise indicated. C General Fill. Material that is free of stones greater than 3 inches,free of roots,waste, debris,trash,organic material,unstable material,non-soil matter,hydrocarbon or other contamination, conforming to the following limits for deleterious materials: 1. Clay lumps: Less than 0.5 percent for Class I, and less than 2.0 percent for Class II, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 142. 2. Lightweight pieces: Less than 5 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 123. 3. Organic impurities: No color darker than standard color when tested in accordance with ASTM C 40. D Random Fill. Soils defined by ASTM D 2487 as Class I, II, III, IV, or fat clay(CH), sand,gravel,or a combination,from excavation or borrow,which can be compacted to form stable embankments, and conforming to: 1. Liquid Limit: 65 maximum, ASTM -D4318. 2. Plasticity Index: 0 minimum, 45 maximum, ASTM -D4318. 3. Free from trash, vegetation, organic matter, large stones, hard lumps of earth and frozen, corrosive or perishable material. 4. Well broken up, free of clods greater than 6 inches, hard earth, rocks, and stones greater than 2-inch dimension. E Structural Fill. Soils defined by ASTM D 2487 as Class I,II,III,or IV,sand,gravel,or a combination, from excavation or borrow, which can be compacted to form stable embankments and fills conforming to: 1. Liquid Limit: 45 maximum, ASTM D 4318. 2. Plasticity Index: 12 minimum, 20 maximum, ASTM D 4318. 3. Free from trash, vegetation, organic matter, large stones, hard lumps of earth and frozen, corrosive or perishable material. 4. Well broken up, free of clods greater than 6 inches, hard earth, rocks, and stones greater than 2-inch dimension. F Select Fill. Class III clayey gravel or sand or Class IV lean clay or clayey soils treated with lime or cement, and conforming to: 07/2007 02255 -3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 1. Plasticity Index: 7 minimum, 20 maximum, ASTM D 4318. 2. Free from trash, vegetation, organic matter, large stones, hard lumps of earth and frozen, corrosive or perishable material. 3. Well broken up, free of clods greater than 6 inches, hard earth, rocks, and stones greater than 2-inch dimension. G Concrete Fill. Conform to requirements for Class B concrete as specified in Section 03300- Cast-in-Place Concrete. H Topsoil. Conform to requirements specified in Section 02910-Topsoil. Bank Sand: Durable Bank Sand classified as SP, SW, or SM by the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D 2487) meeting the following requirements: 1. Less than 15 percent passing the number 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1140. The amount of clay lumps or balls not exceeding 2 percent. 2. Material passing the number 40 sieve shall meet the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318: a. Liquid limit: not exceeding 25 percent. b. Plasticity index: not exceeding 7. J Cement Stabilized Sand. Conform to requirements of Section 02252 - Cement Stabilized Sand. K Concrete Sand. Natural sand, manufactured sand, or a combination of natural and manufactured sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 33 and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 3/8" 100 No. 4 95 to 100 No. 8 80 to 100 No. 16 50 to 85 No. 30 25 to 60 No. 50 10 to 30 No. 100 2 to 10 L Gem Sand. Sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 33 for course aggregates specified for number 8 size and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 3/8" 95 to 100 No. 4 60 to 80 No. 8 15 to 40 07/2007 02255-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS M Pea Gravel. Durable particles composed of small,smooth,rounded stones or pebbles and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 1/2" 100 3/8" 85 to 100 No. 4 10 to 30 No. 8 0 to 10 No. 16 0 to 5 N Crushed Aggregates. Crushed aggregates consist of durable particles obtained from an approved source and meeting the following requirements: 1. Materials of one product delivered for the same construction activity from a single source. 2. Non-plastic fines. 3. Los Angeles Abrasion Test wear not exceeding 45 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. 4. Crushed aggregate shall have a minimum of 90 percent of the particles retained on the No.4 sieve with 2 or more crushed faces as determined by TxDOT Tex- 460-A, Part I. 5. Crushed stone: Produced from oversize plant processed stone or gravel,sized by crushing to predominantly angular particles from a naturally occurring single source. Uncrushed gravel are not acceptable materials for embedment where crushed stone is shown on the applicable utility embedment drawing details. 6. Crushed Concrete: Crushed concrete is an acceptable substitute for crushed stone as utility backfill. Gradation and quality control test requirements are the same as crushed stone. Provide crushed concrete produced from normal weight concrete of uniform quality; containing particles of aggregate and cement material, free from other substances such as asphalt, reinforcing steel fragments, soil, waste gypsum (calcium sulfate), or debris. 7. Gradations, as determined in accordance with TxDOT Tex-110-E. PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT FOR PIPE SIEVE EMBEDMENT BY RANGES OF NOMINAL PIPES SIZES >15" 15" - 8" <8" 1" 95 - 100 100 - 3/4" 60- 90 90— 100 100 1/2" 25 - 60 - 90— 100 3/8" - 20—55 40- 70 No. 4 0 - 5 0- 10 0 - 15 No. 8 - 0 - 5 0 - 5 07/2007 02255 -5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING, BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SOURCE QUALIFICATIONS FOR BORROW MATERIAL A Use of material encountered in excavations is acceptable, provided applicable requirements are satisfied. If excavation material is not acceptable,provide from other approved source. B Identify off-site sources for materials at least 14 days ahead of intended use so that the Engineer may obtain samples for verification testing. C Obtain approval for each material source by the Engineer before delivery is started. If sources previously approved do not produce uniform and satisfactory products,furnish materials from other approved sources. Materials may be subjected to inspection or additional verification testing after delivery. Materials which do not meet the requirements will be rejected. Do not use material which,after approval,has become unsuitable for use due to segregation, mixing with other materials, or by contamination. Once a material is approved by the Engineer, a Change Order is required to change to a different material. D Bank sand, select fill, and random fill, if available in the project excavation, may be obtained by selective excavation and acceptance testing. Obtain additional quantities of these materials and other materials required to complete the Work from off-site sources. E The Owner does not represent or guarantee that any soil found in the excavation work will be suitable and acceptable as backfill material. 3.02 MATERIAL HANDLING A When material is obtained from either a commercial or non-commercial borrow pit, open the pit to expose the vertical faces of the various strata for identification and selection of approved material to be used. Excavate the selected material by vertical cuts extending through the exposed strata to achieve uniformity in the product. B Establish temporary stockpile locations for practical material handling and control,and verification testing by the Engineer in advance of final placement. Obtain approval from landowner for storage of backfill material on adjacent private property. C When stockpiling material near the Project Site,use appropriate methods to eliminate blowing of materials into adjacent areas and prevent runoff containing sediments from entering the drainage system. D Place material suitable for backfilling in stockpiles at a distance from the trench to prevent slides or cave-ins. Do not place stockpiles of excavated materials on public streets. 07/2007 02255 -6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS E Place stockpiles in layers to avoid segregation of processed materials. Load material by making successive vertical cuts through entire depth of stockpile. END OF SECTION 07/2007 02255 -7 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS Section 02316 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS 1.1 GENERAL 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation of materials for roadways. B. Excavation of materials for roadside ditches. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 4. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 5. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 6. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material 7. Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems 8. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 9. Section 01720—Field Surveying 10. Section 02220—Site Demolition 11. Section 02200—Site Preparation 12. Section 02330—Embankment 13. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises D. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" b. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" c. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (ShallowDepth)" d. ASTM D 3017,"Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement shall be by the cubic yard measured in place,including labor,equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 1/2018 02316- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS B. Payment includes control of ground water and surface water, trench safety systems, removal of existing pavements and structures,repair and maintenance of excavated or backfilled areas, and other measures specified in this Section and not included in payment elsewhere. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. D. No payment will be made for material excavated under the following conditions: 1. More than 2 feet outside of vertical planes behind back of curbs. 2. For portion within limits of trench for utilities constructed by open-cut methods. 3. As indicated otherwise on Drawings. E. Construction Surveying shall be performed by qualified personnel under the direction of the Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy and correctness of this work. In the event that the Work consists of significant alteration of the topographic features of natural grade, Contractor shall perform enough topographic survey to substantiate existing pre-construction elevations. No claim shall be made for additional excavation or grade adjustment in excess of quantities contained in the contract documents without demonstrable evidence that such conditions existed prior to start of the Work. F. Excavation and Backfill quantities that exceed the construction plans shall be substantiated with topographic survey of finished grade by survey (RPLS) and verified by the Engineer at contractor's expense. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. C. Submit field red lines documenting location of roadway excavation as installed, referenced to survey Control Points,under the provisions of Section 01760—Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. 1.5 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1/2018 02316-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS 1.6 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A. Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.1 PRODUCTS 2.2 MATERIALS A. Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. 3.1 EXECUTION 3.2 PREPARATION A. Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems. B. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C. Identify required lines, levels, and datum. Coordinate with Section 01720 — Field Surveying. D. Identify existing structures and utilities above and below grade. Stake and flag their location. E. Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, in conformance with requirements of Section 02220—Site Demolition, as applicable. F. Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the provisions of Section 02200 — Site Preparation prior to excavation. G. Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200—Site Preparation. H. Upon discovery of unknown or badly deteriorated utilities, or concealed conditions, discontinue work. Notify Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas. 3.3 EXCAVATION A. Excavate to lines and grades shown on Plans. 1/2018 02316-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS B. Areas of unsuitable material shall be removed,backfilled with embankment materials, and compacted under the provisions of Section 02330—Embankment. C. At intersections,grade back at minimum slope of one inch per foot. Produce a smooth riding junction with intersecting street. Maintain proper drainage. 1/2018 02316-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS D. Fill over-excavated areas in accordance with requirements of Section 02330 — Embankment at no cost to the Owner. 3.4 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain moisture content of embankment materials to attain required compaction density. B. Compact to minimum densities at moisture content of optimum to 3 percent above optimum as determined by ASTM D 698,unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1. Areas under future paving and shoulders: Minimum density of 95 percent of maximum dry density. 2. Other areas: Minimum density of 90 percent of maximum dry density. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Top of compacted surface:Plus or minus 1/2 inch in cross section,or in 16 foot length. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compaction Testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 under provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services. B. Three or more tests,at Engineer's/Owner's option,will be taken for each 1,000 linear feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of embankment per lift. C. If tests indicate work does not meet specified compaction requirements,recondition, re-compact, and retest at Contractor's expense. 3.7 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140 - Contractor's Use of Premises. B. In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope from installed appurtenances to natural grade and stabilize as indicated on Plans. 1/2018 02316-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS 3.8 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Maintain excavation and embankment areas until start of subsequent work. Repair and re-compact slides,washouts,settlements,or areas with loss of density at no cost to the Owner B. Prevent erosion at all times. Maintain ditches and cut temporary swales to allow natural drainage in order to avoid damage to roadway. Do not allow water to pond in excavations. C. Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. END OF SECTION 1/2018 02316-6 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES Section 02317 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Excavation,backfilling, and compaction of backfill for structures. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 4. Section 01450-Testing Laboratory Services 5. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 6. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 7. Section 01570-Trench Safety System 8. Section 01564 - Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 9. Section 02220- Site Demolition 10. Section 02200—Site Preparation 11. Section 02252 - Cement Stabilized Sand 12. Section 01562 -Waste Material Disposal C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" b. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" c. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" d. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" e. ASTM D 3017, "Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 3. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) a. Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing b. Tex-110-E, Particle Size Analysis of Soils D Definitions: 1. Backfill - material meeting specified quality requirements, placed and compacted under controlled conditions around pavements, structures and utilities. 07/2006 02317- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 2. Foundation Backfill- natural soil or manufactured aggregate meeting Class I requirements and Geotextile fabrics as required to control drainage and material separation placed and compacted where needed to provide stable support for the structure foundation base. Foundation backfill may include crushed aggregate with filter fabric as required, cement stabilized sand, or concrete seal slab. 3. Foundation Base - provides a smooth, level working surface for the construction of the concrete foundation. 4. Foundation Subgrade-the surface of the natural soil which has been excavated and prepared to support the foundation base or foundation backfill, where needed. 5. Over-Excavation - excavation of subgrade soils with unsatisfactory bearing capacity or composed of otherwise unsuitable materials below the foundation as shown on the Plans. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT UNIT PRICES A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Excavation and Backfill for Structures under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for construction of structures. B If Excavation and Backfill for Structures is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350— Submittals. B Submit for each structure a work plan for excavation and backfill with a complete written description which identifies details of the proposed method of construction and the sequence of operations for construction relative to excavation and backfill activities. The descriptions, with supporting illustrations, shall be sufficiently detailed to demonstrate to the Engineer that the procedures meet the requirements of the Plans and Technical Specifications. C Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. D Submit field red lines documenting location of structures as installed,referenced to survey Control Points, under the provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. 07/2006 02317-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment,backfill,back-dressing,and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A Perform excavation with equipment suitable for achieving the requirements of this Section. B Use equipment which will produce the degree of compaction specified. Backfill within 3 feet of walls shall be compacted with hand operated equipment. Do not use equipment weighing more than 10,000 pounds closer to walls than a horizontal distance equal to the depth of the fill at that time. Use hand operated power compaction equipment where use of heavier equipment is impractical or restricted due to weight limitations. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570-Trench Safety Systems. B Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 - Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, in accordance with requirements of Section 02220- Site Demolition, as applicable. D Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the provisions of Section 02200 - Site Preparation prior to excavation. 07/2006 02317-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES E Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200-Site Preparation F Upon discovery of unknown utilities, badly deteriorated utilities not designated for removal, or concealed conditions, discontinue work. Notify Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas. 3.02 EXCAVATION A Perform excavation work so that the underground structure can be installed to depths and alignments shown on Plans Drawings. Use caution during excavation work to avoid disturbing surrounding ground and existing facilities and improvements. Keep excavation to the absolute minimum necessary. No additional payment will be made for excess excavation not authorized by Engineer. B Avoid settlement of surrounding soil due to equipment operations, excavation procedures, vibration, dewatering, or other construction methods. C Prevent voids from forming outside of sheeting. Immediately fill voids with grout, concrete fill, cement stabilized sand, or other material approved by Engineer. D After completion of the structure, remove sheeting, shoring, and bracing unless Engineer has approved in writing that such temporary structures may remain. Remove sheeting,shoring,and bracing in such a manner as to maintain safety during backfilling operations and to prevent damage to the Work and adjacent structures or improvements. E Immediately fill and compact voids left or caused by removal of sheeting with cement stabilized sand or material approved by Engineer. 3.03 DEWATERING A Maintain ground water control as directed by Section 01564 - Control of Ground Water and Surface Water and until the structure is sufficiently complete to provide the required weight to resist hydrostatic uplift with a minimum safety factor of 1.2. B Maintain the ground water surface a minimum of two feet below the bottom of the foundation base. 3.04 FOUNDATION EXCAVATION A Notify Engineer at least 48 hours prior to planned completion of foundation excavations. Do not place the foundation base until the excavation is accepted by the Engineer. B Excavate to elevations shown on Plans Drawings,as needed to provide space for the foundation base, forming a level undisturbed surface, free of mud or soft material. Remove pockets of soft or otherwise unstable soils and replace with foundation backfill material or a material as directed by the Engineer. Prior to placing material 07/2006 02317-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES over it,re-compact the subgrade,scarifying as needed,to 95 percent of the maximum Standard Proctor Density according to ASTM D 698. If the specified level of compaction cannot be achieved, moisture condition the subgrade and re-compact until 95 percent is achieved,over-excavate to provide a minimum layer of 24 inches of foundation backfill material, or other means acceptable to the Engineer. C Fill unauthorized excessive excavation with foundation backfill material or other material as directed by the Engineer. D Protect open excavations from rainfall, runoff, freezing groundwater, or excessive drying so as to maintain foundation subgrade in a satisfactory,undisturbed condition. Keep excavations free of standing water and completely free of water during concrete placement. E Soils which become unsuitable due to inadequate dewatering or other causes, after initial excavation to the required subgrade, shall be removed and replaced with foundation backfill material, as directed by Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. F Place foundation base, or foundation backfill material where needed, over the subgrade on same day that excavation is completed to final grade. Where base of excavations are left open for longer periods,protect them with a seal slab or cement- stabilized sand. G Where directed by the Plans Drawings,all crushed aggregate,and other free draining Class I materials,shall have a Geo-textile filter fabric separating it from native soils or select material backfill. The fabric shall overlap a minimum of 12 inches beyond where another material stops contact with the soil. H Crushed aggregate, and other Class I materials, shall be placed in uniform layers of 8-inch maximum thickness. Compaction shall be by means of at least two passes of a vibratory compactor. 3.05 FOUNDATION BASE A After the subgrade is properly prepared, including the placement of foundation backfill where needed, the foundation base shall be placed. The foundation base shall consist of a 12-inch layer of crushed aggregate or cement stabilized sand. Alternately, a 4-inch minimum seal slab may be placed. The foundation base shall extend a minimum of 12 inches beyond the edge of the structure foundation. B Where the foundation base and foundation backfill are of the same material,both can be placed in one operation. 07/2006 02317-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 3.06 BACKFILL A Complete backfill to surface of natural ground or to lines and grades shown on Plans Drawings. Use existing material that qualifies as select material, unless indicated otherwise. Deposit backfill in uniform layers and compact each layer as specified. B Do not place backfill against concrete walls or similar structures until laboratory test breaks indicate that the concrete has reached a minimum of 85 percent of the specified compressive strength. Where walls are supported by slabs or intermediate walls,do not begin backfill operations until the slab or intermediate walls have been placed and concrete has attained sufficient strength. C Remove concrete forms before starting backfill and remove shoring and bracing as work progresses. D Maintain fill material at no less than 2 percent below and no more than 2 percent above optimum moisture content. Place fill material in uniform 8-inch maximum loose layers. Compaction of fill shall be to at least 95 percent of the maximum Standard Proctor Density according to ASTM D 698 under paved areas. Compact to at least 90 percent around structures below unpaved areas. E Where backfill is placed against a sloped excavation surface, run compaction equipment across the boundary of the cut slope and backfill to form a compacted slope surface for placement of the next layer of backfill. F Place backfill using cement stabilized sand in accordance with Section 02252 - Cement Stabilized Sand. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Tests will be performed initially on minimum of three different samples of each material type for plasticity characteristics,in accordance with ASTM D 4318,and for gradation characteristics, in accordance with TxDOT Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E. Additional classification tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. B In-place density tests of compacted subgrade and backfill will be performed according to ASTM D 1556, or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017, and at the following frequencies and conditions: 1. A minimum of one test for every 100 cubic yards of compacted backfill material. 2. A minimum three density tests for each full work shift. 3. Density tests will be performed in all placement areas. 4. The number of tests will be increased if inspection determines that soil types or moisture contents are not uniform or if compacting effort is variable and not considered sufficient to attain uniform density. 07/2006 02317-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES C At least three tests for moisture-density relationships will be initially performed for each type of backfill material in accordance with ASTM D 698. Additional moisture-density relationship tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. D If tests indicate work does not meet specified compaction requirements,recondition, re-compact, and retest at Contractor's expense. 3.08 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140 - Contractor's Use of Premises. B In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope from installed appurtenances to natural grade and stabilize as indicated on Plans. 3.09 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Maintain excavation and embankment areas until start of subsequent work. Repair and re-compact slides,washouts,settlements,or areas with loss of density at no cost to the Owner B Prevent erosion at all times. Do not allow water to pond in excavations. C Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02317-7 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES Section 02318 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation,trenching,foundation,embedment,and backfill for installation of utilities, storm sewers including manholes, pipeline structures and other associated appurtenances. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350— Submittals 3. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 4. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 5. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 6. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 7. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 8. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 9. Section 02370—Geotextile 10. Section 02220—Site Demolition 11. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 2321, "Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications" b. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" c. ASTM D 558, "Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight) Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures" d. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" e. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" f. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" g. ASTM D 3017,"Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" 5/2013 02318 - 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 2. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) a. Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing b. Tex-110-E, Particle Size Analysis of Soils D. Definitions: 1. Excavation - Any man-made cut, cavity, trench, or depression in an earth surface, formed by removal of material. a. Extra Hand Excavation- excavation by manual labor at locations designated by the Engineer,which is not included in other Bid Items. b. Extra Machine Excavation- excavation by machine at locations designated by the Engineer, which is not included in other Bid Items. c. Special Excavation-excavation necessitated by obstruction of pipes, ducts, or other structures, not shown on Plans, which interfere with installation of utility piping by normal methods of excavation or augering. Contractor shall be responsible for locating such underground obstructions,sufficiently in advance of trench excavation or augering, to preclude damage to the obstructions. 2. Pipe Foundation-suitable and stable native soils that are exposed at the trench subgrade after excavation to depth of bottom of the bedding as shown on the Plans, or foundation backfill material placed and compacted in over- excavations. 3. Pipe Bedding-the portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of foundation up to a level line at bottom of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. 4. Haunching-the material placed on either side of pipe from top of bedding up to spring-line of pipe and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. 5. Initial Backfill - the portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from spring-line of pipe(top of haunching)up to a level line 12 inches above top of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. 6. Pipe Embedment - the portion of trench backfill that consists of bedding, haunching, and initial backfill. 7. Trench Zone-the portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of pipe embedment up to pavement subgrade or up to final grade when not beneath pavement. 5/2013 02318 -2 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 8. Trench Conditions - description of the stability of trench bottom and trench walls of pipe embedment zone. Maintain trench conditions that provide for effective placement and compaction of embedment material directly on or against undisturbed soils or foundation backfill,except where structural trench support is necessary. a. Dry Stable Trench: Stable and substantially dry trench conditions exist in pipe embedment zone as a result of typically dry soils or achieved by ground water control (dewatering or depressurization) for trenches extending below ground water level. b. Stable Trench with Seepage: Stable trench in which ground water seepage is controlled by excavation drainage. 1) Stable Trench with Seepage in Clayey Soils: Excavation drainage is provided in lieu of or to supplement ground water control systems to control seepage and provide stable trench subgrade in predominately clayey soils prior to bedding placement. 2) Stable Wet Trench in Sandy Soils: Excavation drainage is provided in the embedment zone in combination with ground water control in predominately sandy or silty soils. c. Unstable Trench: Unstable trench conditions exist in the pipe embedment zone if ground water inflow or high water content causes soil disturbances,such as sloughing,sliding,boiling,heaving or loss of density. 9. Sub-trench - a special case of benched excavation. Sub-trench excavation below trench shields or shoring installations may be used to allow placement and compaction of foundation or embedment materials directly against undisturbed soils. Depth of a sub-trench depends upon trench stability and safety as determined by the Contractor. 10. Trench Dam - a placement of low permeability material in pipe embedment zone or foundation to prohibit ground water flow along the trench. 11. Over-Excavation and Backfill - excavation of subgrade soils with unsatisfactory bearing capacity or composed of otherwise unsuitable materials below top of foundation as shown on Plans, and backfilled with foundation backfill material. 12. Foundation Backfill Materials - natural soil or manufactured aggregate of controlled gradation, and geo-textile filter fabrics as required, to control 5/2013 02318-3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES drainage and material separation. Foundation backfill material is placed and compacted as backfill to provide stable support for bedding. Foundation backfill materials may include concrete seal slabs. 13. Trench Shield(Trench Box)-a portable worker safety structure moved along the trench as work proceeds, used as a Protective System and designed to withstand forces imposed on it by cave-in, thereby protecting persons within the trench. Trench shields may be stacked if so designed or placed in a series depending on depth and length of excavation to be protected. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for trench excavation,embedment,and backfill under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for all excavation and backfill associated with the placement and construction of: underground piping,boxes,manholes and associated appurtenances including conduit, or duct work. B. If Special Excavation is allowed,based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic yard basis,measured in place,without deduction for space occupied by portions of pipes, ducts, or other structures left in place across trenches excavated under this item. 1. Payment for Special Excavation shall include: a. Dewatering and surface water control. b. Protection of pipes, ducts, or other structures encountered including bracing, shoring, and sheeting necessary for support. c. Replacement of pipes, ducts, or structures damaged by special excavation operations, except where payment for replacement is authorized by Engineer due to deteriorated condition of pipes,ducts,or structure. d. Temporary disconnecting,plugging, and reconnecting of low volume water pipes,to allow machine excavation or augering,when approved by Engineer. Pipe for replacement shall be new and conform to specification requirements for type of existing pipe removed. e. Placement of material from Special Excavation. f. Geo-textile material and concrete trench dams required to complete the placement of material from Special Excavation. g. Re-sodding required for surface restoration within designated limits of Special Excavation. h. Disposal of excess excavated material not suitable for bedding or backfill, or not required for the Work. 2. The items listed below will not be included in payment for Special Excavation. Include cost in Bid Items for which the Work is a component: 5/2013 02318-4 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES a. Trench safety system including sheeting and shoring. b. Utility piping installed in trenches excavated under this item. c. Removal and replacement of associated streets, driveways, and sidewalks. C. If Extra Hand Excavation is allowed,based on the Engineer's direction,and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic yard basis, measured in place. 1. Payment for Extra Hand Excavation shall include: a. Dewatering and surface water control. b. Disposal of excess excavated material not suitable for bedding or backfill, or not required for the Work. c. Placement of material from Extra Hand Excavation. d. Re-sodding required for surface restoration within designated limits of Extra Hand Excavation. 2. The items listed below will not be included in payment for Special Excavation. Include cost in Bid Items for which the Work is a component.: a. Trench safety system including sheeting and shoring. b. Removal and replacement of associated streets, driveways, and sidewalks. D. If Extra Machine Excavation is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic yard basis, measured in place. 1. Payment for Extra Machine Excavation shall include: a. Dewatering and surface water control. b. Disposal of excess excavated material not suitable for bedding or backfill, or not required for the Work. c. Placement of material from extra machine excavation. d. Re-sodding required for surface restoration within designated limits of Extra Machine Excavation. 2. The items listed below will not be included in payment for Special Excavation. Include cost in Bid Items for which the Work is a component: a. Trench safety system including sheeting and shoring. b. Removal and replacement of associated streets, driveways, and sidewalks. 5/2013 02318 -5 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES E. Refer to Section 01200-Measurement and Payment Procedures. No payment will be made for delays in completion of Work resulting from Extra Item Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit a written description for information only of the planned typical method of excavation,backfill placement and compaction, including: 1. Sequence of work and coordination of activities. 2. Selected trench widths. 3. Procedures for foundation and embedment placement, and compaction. 4. Procedure for use of trench boxes and other pre-manufactured systems while assuring specified compaction against undisturbed soil. 5. Procedure for installation of Special Shoring at locations identified on the Plans. C. Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. D. Submit field red lines documenting location of Utilities as installed, referenced to survey Control Points, under the provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A. Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 5/2013 02318 -6 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1.06 SPECIAL SHORING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Special Shoring shall be,in accordance with Section 01570—Trench Safety System, designed by a Professional Engineer, licensed by the State of Texas, At Contractor's expense. B. Special Shoring shall be designed to provide support for the sides of the excavations, including soils and hydrostatic ground water pressures as applicable, and to prevent ground movements affecting adjacent installations or improvements such as structures, pavements and utilities. C. Special Shoring may be a pre-manufactured system or a field fabricated system that meets the requirements of the Work. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. B. Manufactured materials, such as crushed concrete,may be substituted for natural soil or rock products where indicated in the product specification, and approved by the Engineer,provided that the physical property criteria are determined to be satisfactory by testing. C. Geotextile(Filter Fabric): Conform to requirements of Section 02370—Geotextile. D. Concrete for Trench Dams: Concrete backfill or 3 sack premixed(bag) concrete. E. Timber Shoring Left in Place: Untreated oak. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Perform excavation with track mounted excavator or other equipment suitable for achieving the requirements of this Section. B. Use only hand-operated tamping equipment until a minimum cover of 12 inches is obtained over pipes, conduits, and ducts. Do not use heavy compacting equipment until adequate cover is attained to prevent damage to pipes, conduits, or ducts. C. Use trench shields or other Protective Systems or Shoring Systems which are designed and operated to achieve placement and compaction of backfill directly against undisturbed native soil. 5/2013 02318 -7 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES D. Use Special Shoring systems where required which may consist of braced sheeting, braced soldier piles and lagging, slide rail systems, or other systems meeting the Special Shoring design requirements. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Employ a Trench Safety Program as specified in Section 01570 — Trench Safety Systems. B. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures conform to Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C. Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, to conform with requirements of Section 02220—Site Demolition, as applicable. D. Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the provisions of Section 02200 — Site Preparation prior to excavation. E. Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200—Site Preparation F. Schedule work so that pipe embedment can be completed on the same day that acceptable foundation has been achieved for each section of pipe installation,manhole, or other structures. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Except as otherwise specified or shown on the Plans, install underground utilities in open cut trenches with vertical sides. B. Perform excavation work so that pipe,conduit,and ducts can be installed to depths and alignments shown on the Plans. Avoid disturbing surrounding ground and existing facilities and improvements. C. Determine trench excavation widths using the following schedule as related to pipe outside diameter(O.D.). Maximum trench width shall be the minimum trench width plus 24 inches. NOMINAL MINIMUM TRENCH PIPE SIZE,INCHES WIDTH, INCHES Less than 18 O.D. + 18 18 to 30 O.D. +24 Greater than 30 O.D. + 36 5/2013 02318 -8 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES D. Use sufficient trench width or benches above the embedment zone for installation of well point headers or manifolds and pumps where depth of trench makes it uneconomical or impractical to pump from the surface elevation. Provide sufficient space between shoring cross braces to permit equipment operations and handling of forms, pipe, embedment and backfill, and other materials. E. Upon discovery of unknown utilities, badly deteriorated utilities not designated for removal, or concealed conditions, discontinue work at that location. Notify the Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding. F. Shoring of Trench Walls. 1. Install Special Shoring in advance of trench excavation or simultaneously with the trench excavation, so that the soils within the full height of the trench excavation walls will remain fully laterally supported at all times. 2. For all types of shoring, support trench walls in the pipe embedment zone throughout the installation. Provide trench wall supports sufficiently tight to prevent washing the trench wall soil out from behind the trench wall support. 3. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer,leave sheeting driven into or below the pipe embedment zone in place to preclude loss of support of foundation and embedment materials. Leave rangers,walers,and braces in place as long as required to support sheeting,which has been cut off,and the trench wall in the vicinity of the pipe zone. 4. Employ special methods for maintaining the integrity of embedment or foundation material. Before moving supports,place and compact embedment to sufficient depths to provide protection of pipe and stability of trench walls. As supports are moved, finish placing and compacting embedment. 5. If sheeting or other shoring is used below top of the pipe embedment zone,do not disturb pipe foundation and embedment materials by subsequent removal. Maximum thickness of removable sheeting extending into the embedment zone 1 inch. Fill voids left on removal of supports with compacted backfill material. G. Use of Trench Shields. When a trench shield(trench box) is used as a worker safety device, the following requirements apply: 1. Make trench excavations of sufficient width to allow shield to be lifted or pulled freely, without damage to the trench sidewalls. 2. Move trench shields so that pipe, and backfill materials, after placement and compaction, are not damaged nor disturbed, nor the degree of compaction reduced. 5/2013 02318 -9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 3. When required, place, spread, and compact pipe foundation and bedding materials beneath the shield. For backfill above bedding, move the shield as backfill is placed and ramped in. Place and compact backfill materials against undisturbed trench walls and foundation. 4. Maintain trench shield in position to allow sampling and testing to be performed in a safe manner. 3.03 TRENCH FOUNDATION A. Excavate bottom of trench to uniform grade to achieve stable trench conditions and satisfactory compaction of foundation or bedding materials. B. Place trench dams in Class I foundations in line segments longer than 100 feet between manholes, and not less than one in every 500 feet of pipe placed. Install additional dams as needed to achieve workable construction conditions. Do not place trench dams closer than 5 feet from manholes. 3.04 PIPE EMBEDMENT PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. Immediately prior to placement of embedment materials,the bottoms and sidewalls of trenches shall be free of loose, sloughing, caving, or otherwise unsuitable soil. B. Place Geotextile,if specified,to prevent particle migration from the in-situ into open- graded(Class I) embedment materials or drainage layers. C. Place embedment including bedding, haunching and initial backfill to meet requirements indicated on Plans. PVC & HDPE require cement stabilized sand bedding and backfill to one foot below subgrade or below grade if under pavement,or one foot above top of pipe if not under pavement. D. For pipe installation,manually spread embedment materials around the pipe to provide uniform bearing and side support when compacted. Do not allow materials to free-fall from heights greater than 24 inches above top of pipe. Perform placement and compaction directly against the undisturbed soils in the trench sidewalls, or against sheeting which is to remain in place. E. Do not place trench shields or shoring within height of the embedment zone unless means to maintain the density of compacted embedment material are used. If moveable supports are used in embedment zone, lift the supports incrementally to allow placement and compaction of the material against undisturbed soil. F. Do not damage coatings or wrappings of pipes during backfilling and compacting operations. When embedding coated or wrapped pipes, do not use crushed stone or other sharp, angular aggregates. 5/2013 02318 - l0 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES G. Place haunching material manually around the pipe and compact it to provide uniform bearing and side support. If necessary, hold small-diameter or lightweight pipe in place during compaction of haunch areas and placement beside the pipe with sand bags or other suitable means. H. Place electrical conduit directly on foundation without bedding. Shovel pipe embedment material in place and compact it using pneumatic tampers in restricted spaces,and vibratory-plate compactors or engine-powered jumping jacks in unrestricted spaces. Compact each lift before proceeding with placement of the next lift. 1. Class I embedment materials. a. Maximum 6-inches compacted lift thickness. b. Systematic compaction by at least two passes of vibrating equipment. Increase compaction effort as necessary to effectively embed the pipe to meet the deflection test criteria. c. Moisture content as determined by Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of trench bottom,foundation or trench walls. 2. Class II embedment and cement stabilized sand. a. Maximum 6-inches compacted thickness. b. Compaction by methods determined by Contractor to achieve a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined according to ASTM D 698 for Class II materials and according to ASTM D 558 for cement stabilized materials. c. Moisture content of Class II materials within 3 percent of optimum as determined according to ASTM D 698. Moisture content of cement stabilized sands on the dry side of optimum as determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration. J. Place trench dams in Class I embedments in line segments longer than 100 feet between manholes, and not less than one in every 500 feet of pipe placed. Install additional dams as needed to achieve workable construction conditions. Do not place trench dams closer than 5 feet from manholes. 3.05 TRENCH ZONE BACKFILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. Place backfill for pipe or conduits and restore surface as soon as practicable. Leave only the minimum length of trench open as necessary for construction. Backfill placement and compaction shall apply to all soils excavated for the trench especially including any areas that were "benched" or over-excavated in place of trenched shoring. All disturbed soils generated during excavation,whether inside the trench or associated with it, shall be considered to fall under this requirement. 5/2013 02318- 11 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES B. Where damage to completed pipe installation work is likely to result from withdrawal of sheeting, leave the sheeting in place. Cut off sheeting 1.5 feet or more above the crown of the pipe. Remove trench supports within 5 feet from the ground surface. C. For sewer pipes,use backfill materials described here as determined by trench limits. As trench zone backfill in paved areas for streets and to one foot back of curbs and pavements,use cement stabilized sand for pipe of nominal sizes less than 36 inches,or Bank Sand for pipe of nominal sizes 36 inches and larger as indicated on the Drawings. Uniformly backfill trenches unless specified otherwise according to the paved area criteria. Use select backfill within one foot below pavement subgrade for rigid pavement. For asphalt concrete,use flexible base material within one foot below pavement subgrade. D. For water lines,backfill in trench zone,including auger pits,with Bank Sand, Select Fill, or Random Fill material as specified in this Section. E. For trench excavations under pavement,place trench zone backfill in lifts and compact by methods indicated below. Fully compact each lift before placement of the next lift. 1. Bank Sand. a. Maximum 9-inches compacted lift thickness. b. Compaction by vibratory equipment to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698. c. Moisture content within 3 percent of optimum determined according to ASTM D 698 2. Cement Stabilized Sand. a. Maximum lift thickness determined by Contractor to achieve uniform placement and required compaction,but not exceeding 24 inches. b. Compaction by vibratory equipment to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558. c. Moisture content on the dry side of optimum determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for cement hydration. 3. Select Fill. a. Maximum 6-inches compacted thickness. b. Compaction by equipment providing tamping or kneading impact to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698. c. Moisture content within 2 percent of optimum determined according to ASTM D 698. F. For trench excavations outside pavements,a Random Fill of suitable material maybe used in the trench zone. 5/2013 02318 - 12 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1. Fat clays (CH)may be used as trench zone backfill outside paved areas at the Contractor's option. If the required density is not achieved,the Contractor,at his option and at no additional cost to the Owner,may use lime stabilization to achieve compaction requirements or use a different suitable material. 2. Maximum 9-inch compacted lift thickness for clayey soils and maximum 12- inch lift thickness for granular soils. 3. Compact to a minimum of 90 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698, or to same density as adjacent soils. 4. Moisture content as necessary to achieve density. 3.06 MANHOLES,JUNCTION BOXES AND OTHER PIPELINE STRUCTURES A. Meet the requirements of adjoining utility installations for backfill of pipeline structures, as shown on the Plans. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control I. The Engineer may sample and test backfill at: a. Sources including borrow pits, production plants and Contractor's designated off-site stockpiles. b. On-site stockpiles. c. Materials placed in the Work. 2. The Engineer may resample material at any stage of work or location if changes in characteristics are apparent. B. Production Verification Testing: The Owner's testing laboratory will provide verification testing on backfill materials,as directed by the Engineer. Samples may be taken at the source or at the production plant, as applicable. C. Provide excavation and Trench Safety Systems at locations and to depths required for testing and retesting during construction. D. Tests will be performed on a minimum of three different samples of each material type for plasticity characteristics, in accordance with ASTM D 4318, and for gradation characteristics, in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E. Additional classification tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. 5/2013 02318- 13 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES E. At least three tests for moisture-density relationships will be performed initially for backfill materials in accordance with ASTM D 698,and for cement stabilized sand in accordance with ASTM D 558. Additional moisture-density relationship tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. F. In-place density tests of compacted pipe foundation, embedment and trench zone backfill soil materials will be performed according to ASTM D 1556, or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017, and at the following frequencies and conditions. 1. A minimum of one test for every 100 linear feet measured along pipe for compacted embedment and for every 100 linear feet measured along pipe for compacted trench zone backfill material. Testing shall be performed for each lift thickness for different backfill material specified in Item 3.05. 2. A minimum of three density tests for each full shift of Work when backfill is placed. 3. Density tests will be distributed among the placement areas. Placement areas are: foundation,bedding, haunching, initial backfill and trench zone. 4. The number of tests will be increased if inspection determines that soil type or moisture content are not uniform or if compacting effort is variable and not considered sufficient to attain uniform density, as specified. 5. Density tests may be performed at various depths below the fill surface by pit excavation. Material in previously placed lifts may therefore be subject to acceptance/rejection. 6. Two verification tests will be performed adjacent to in-place tests showing density less than the acceptance criteria. Placement will be rejected unless both verification tests show acceptable results. 7. Re-compacted placement will be retested at the same frequency as the first test series,including verification tests. G. Recondition,re-compact,and retest at Contractor's expense if tests indicate Work does not meet specified compaction requirements. For Cement Stabilized Sand with nonconforming density,core and test for compressive strength at Contractor's expense. H. Acceptability of crushed rock compaction will be determined by inspection. 3.08 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 5/2013 02318 - 14 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 3.09 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Maintain excavation and embankment areas until start of subsequent work. Repair and re-compact slides,washouts,settlements,or areas with loss of density at no cost to the Owner B. Prevent erosion at all times. Do not allow water to pond in excavations. C. Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. D. Coordinate excavation within 15 feet of existing utilities with utility representative. Excavate by hand to locate existing utility, support utility with methods agreed upon by utility representative. All work shall be subsidiary to bid items in Section 00300 Bid Proposal. No additional cost to City. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02318 - 15 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT Section 02330 EMBANKMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Construction of embankments with excess excavated material and borrow. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 4. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 5. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 6. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 7. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material 8. Section 02910—Topsoil 9. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 10. Section 01720—Field Surveying 11. Section 02220—Site Demolition 12. Section 02200—Site Preparation 13. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" b. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" c. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" d. ASTM D 3017,"Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Embankment under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If embankment is included as a Bid Item, measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. 5/2013 02330- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. C Submit field red lines documenting location of embankments as installed,referenced to survey Control Points, under the provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. D Submit a Trench Safety Plan under the provisions of Section 01570—Trench Safety System that included measures that establish compliance with the standard interpretation of the General Duty Clause,Section 5.(a)(1),of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 — 20 USC 654 which states, `Employers must shore or otherwise protect employees who walk/work at the base of an embankment from possible collapse." 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. B Topsoil: Conform to requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil. C Borrow Material: Conform to requirements of intended use. Take borrow material from sources approved by Engineer. 5/2013 02330-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify borrow and excess excavated materials to be reused, are approved. B Verify removals, and clearing and grubbing operations, have been completed. C Verify backfill of new or relocated utilities and structures, below future grade, is complete. 3.02 PREPARATION A Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems. B Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C Identify required lines, levels, and datum. Coordinate with Section 01720 — Field Surveying. D Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, in conformance with requirements of Section 02220—Site Demolition, as applicable. E Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the provisions of Section 02200 — Site Preparation prior to placing embankment or opening borrow source. F Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200—Site Preparation. G Backfill test pits,or stump holes and other surface irregularities such as small swales with embankment materials and compact in proper lift depths according to the compaction requirements of this Section. H Areas of unsuitable material shall be removed,backfilled with embankment materials and compacted in proper lift depths according to the compaction requirements of this Section. I Upon discovery of unknown or badly deteriorated utilities, or concealed conditions, discontinue work. Notify Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas. 3.03 PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A Do not conduct placement operations during inclement weather or when existing ground or embankment materials exceed 3 percent of optimum moisture content. Contractor may manipulate wet material to facilitate drying,by disking or windrowing, at Contractor's expense. 5/2013 02330-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT B Do not place embankment material until density and moisture content of previously placed material complies with specified requirements. C Scarify areas to receive embankment to a minimum depth of 4 inches to bond existing and new materials. Mix with first layer of embankment material. D Spread embankment material evenly,from dumped piles or windrows,into horizontal layers approximately parallel to finished grade. Place to meet specified compacted thickness. Break clods and lumps and mix materials byblading,harrowing,discing,or other approved method. Each layer shall extend across full width of embankment. E Each layer shall be homogeneous and contain uniform moisture content before compaction. Mix dissimilar abutting materials to prevent abrupt changes in composition of embankment. F Layers shall not exceed depth as indicated on the Plans. G Where shown on Plans for steep slopes, cut benches into slope and scarify before placing embankment. Place increasingly wide horizontal layers of specified depth,to the level of each bench. H Build embankment layers on back slopes,adjacent to existing roadbeds,to level of old roadbed. Scarify top of old roadbed to minimum depth of four inches and re-compact with next layer. I Construct to lines and grades shown on Plans. 3.04 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS A Maintain moisture content of embankment materials to attain required compaction density. B Compact to minimum densities shown on the Plans with a moisture content of optimum to 3 percent above optimum as determined by ASTM D 698. 3.05 TOLERANCES A Top of compacted surface: Plus or minus 1/2 inch in cross section,or in 16 foot length. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 under provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services. B A minimum of three tests will be taken for each 1,000 linear feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of embankment per lift. 5/2013 02330-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT C If tests indicate work does not meet specified compaction requirements,recondition, re-compact, and retest at Contractor's expense. 3.07 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope from installed appurtenances to natural grade and stabilize as indicated on Plans. 3.08 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Maintain all embankment areas in good condition until completion of Work. B Repair and re-compact slides, washouts, settlements, areas with loss of density, or excavation damaged by Contractor's operations at no additional cost to Owner. C Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02330-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE Section 02335 SUBGRADE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Foundation course of lime and Portland Cement stabilized in situ subgrade material. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 6. Section 01720—Field Surveying 7. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" b. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" c. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" d. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" e. ASTM D 3017,"Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" f. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. g. ASTM D 558 - Standard Test Method for Moisture-Density Relations of Soil-Cement-Mixtures. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for subgrade is on a square yard basis. Separate payment will be made for each different required type and thickness of stabilized Subgrade. Limits of measurement shall match actual pavement replaced, but no greater than maximum pavement replacement limits shown on Drawings. Limits for measurement will be extended to include installed stabilized subgrade material that extends 2 foot beyond outside edge of pavement to be replaced, except where proposed pavement section 5/2013 02335- 1 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE shares common longitudinal or transverse edge with existing pavement section. No payment will be made for stabilized subgrade in areas beyond these limits. B. Measurement for hydrated lime and quicklime is by the ton of 2,000 pounds dry- weight basis,determined by the area to be covered and the rate of application. Do not include cost of hydrated lime or quicklime in Bid Item for subgrade. C. Measurement for lime slurry is by the ton of 2,000 pounds of lime calculated on the percentage by weight of dry solids for the grade of slurry. Do not include cost of lime slurry in Bid Item for subgrade. D. Measurement for Portland Cement is by the ton of 2,000 pounds of dry weight basis. Do not include cost of Portland Cement in Bid Item for subgrade. E. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit certificates stating that hydrated lime, commercial lime slurry and quicklime complies with the requirements in this Section. C. Submit weight tickets,certified by supplier,with each bulk delivery of lime to Project Site. D. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics for rotary speed mixer and compaction equipment for approval. 1.04 TESTING AND SAMPLING A. Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450 —Testing Laboratory Services. B. Tests and analysis of soil materials will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 4318. C. Sampling and testing of lime slurry shall be in accordance with Tex-600-J. D. Sample mixtures of Portland Cement,hydrated lime or quicklime in slurry form will be tested to establish compliance with the requirements in this Section. E. Soil will be evaluated to establish percent of hydrated lime,quicklime,or lime slurry to be applied to subgrade material. F. Moisture-density relationship will be established on material sample from roadway, after stabilization, in accordance with ASTM D 698. 5/2013 02335 -2 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE G. Soil will be evaluated to establish ratio of cement to soil to obtain desired stability. Normal range is 6 percent to 10 percent by weight. H. The percentage of moisture in soil, at time of cement application,will be determined by ASTM D 558. Moisture will not be allowed to exceed quantity that will permit uniform, complete mixture of soil and cement during dry mixing operations nor specified optimum moisture content for soil cement mixture, as determined. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A. Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Bagged lime shall bear manufacturer's name, product identification, and certified weight.Bags varying more than 5 percent of certified weight maybe rejected;average weight of 50 random bags in each shipment shall not be less than certified weight. B. Store lime in weatherproof enclosures. Protect lime from ground dampness. C. Quicklime can be dangerous; exercise extreme caution if used for the Work. Contractor shall become informed about recommended precautions in the handling, storage and use of quicklime. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER A. Water shall be clean; clear; and free from oil, acids, alkali, or organic matter. 2.02 LIME A. Type A-Hydrated Lime: Dry material consisting essentially of calcium hydroxide or mixture of calcium hydroxide and an allowable percentage of calcium oxide and magnesium hydroxide. B. Type B-Lime Slurry:Liquid mixture consisting essentially of lime solids and water in slurry form. Water or liquid portion shall not contain dissolved material in sufficient quantity to be injurious or objectionable for purpose intended. C. Type C - Quicklime: Dry material consisting essentially of calcium oxide. Furnish quicklime in either of the following grades: 5/2013 02335 -3 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE 1. Grade DS: Pebble quicklime of a gradation suitable for use in the preparation of a slurry for wet placing. 2. Grade S:Finely-graded quicklime for use in the preparation of a slurry for wet placing. Do not use Grade S quicklime for dry placing. (So called "Blue Lime"is not acceptable.) D. Lime shall conform to following requirements: CHEMICAL COMPOSITION TYPE A B C Active lime content, %by weight Ca(OH)2 +CaO 90.0 min 87.0 min` Unhydrated lime content, %by weight CaO 5.0 max - 87.0 min Free water content, %by weight H2O 5.0 max - - SIZING Wet Sieve, as%by weight residue retained: No. 6 0.2 max 0.2 max2 8.0 max3 No. 30 4.0 max 4.0 max2 - Dry sieve, as %by weight residue retained: 1-inch - - 0.0 3/4-inch - - 10.0 max Notes: Maximum 5.0%by weight CaO shall be allowed in determining total active lime content. 2 Maximum solids content of slurry. 3 Total active lime content, as CaO, in material retained on the No. 6 sieve shall not exceed 2.0%by weight of original Type C lime. E. Lime Slurry may be delivered to the Project Site as Commercial Lime Slurry, or may be prepared at the Project Site using Hydrated Lime or Quicklime. The slurry shall be free of liquids other than water and shall be of a consistency that can be handled and uniformly applied without difficulty. 2.03 PORTLAND CEMENT (ONLY WHEN DIRECTED BY ENGINEER) A. ASTM C 150 Type I,bulk or sacked. 5/2013 02335 -4 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE 2.04 SOIL A. Provide soil consisting of approved material free from vegetation or other objectable matter encountered in existing roadbed. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify backfill of new or relocated utilities and structures below future grade is complete. B. Verify compacted subgrade is ready to support imposed loads. C. Verify subgrade lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. B. Identify required lines, levels, and datum. Coordinate with Section 01720 — Field Surveying. C. Cut material to bottom of subgrade using an approved cutting and pulverizing machine meeting following requirements: 1. Cutters accurately provide a smooth surface over entire width of cut to plane of secondary grade. 2. Visible indication that cut is to proper depth. D. Alternatively,scarify or excavate to bottom of stabilized subgrade. Remove material or windrow to expose secondary grade. Correct wet or unstable material below secondary grade by scarifying,adding lime,and compacting. Obtain uniform stability. E. Upon discovery of unknown or badly deteriorated utilities, or concealed conditions, discontinue work. Notify Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas. 3.03 LIME SLURRY APPLICATION A. Mix hydrated lime or quicklime with water to form a slurry of the solids content specified. Commercial lime slurry shall have dry solids content as specified. Conform to cautionary requirements in this Section, 1.06C, concerning use of quicklime. 5/2013 02335 -5 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE B. Apply slurry with a distributor truck equipped with an agitator to keep lime and water in a consistent mixture. Make successive passes over measured section of roadway to attain proper moisture and lime content. Limit spreading to an area where preliminary mixing operations can be completed on the same working day. 3.04 PRELIMINARY MIXING A. Do not mix and place material when temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling. Base may be placed when temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35 degrees F and rising. B. Use approved single-pass or multiple-pass rotary speed mixers to mix soil, lime, and water to required depth. Obtain a homogeneous friable mixture free of clods and lumps. C. Shape mixed subgrade to final lines and grades. D. Seal subgrade as a precaution against heavy rainfall by rolling lightly with light pneumatic rollers. E. Cure soil-lime material for 1 to 4 days. Keep subgrade moist during cure. 3.05 FINAL MIXING A. Use approved single-pass or multiple-pass rotary speed mixers to uniformly mix cured soil and lime to required depth. B. Add water to bring moisture content of soil mixture to a minimum of optimum or above. C. Mix and pulverize until all material passes a 1 inch sieve; a minimum of 90 percent, excluding non-slaking fractions,passes a 3/4-inch sieve;and a minimum of 65 percent excluding non-slaking fractions passes a No. 4 sieve. D. Shape mixed subgrade to final lines and grades. E. Do not expose hydrated lime to open air for more than 6 hours during interval between application and mixing. Avoid excessive hydrated lime loss due to washing or blowing. 3.06 MIXING-PORTLAND CEMENT (ONLY WHEN DIRECTED BY ENGINEER) A. Do not place and mix cement when temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling. Place Portland Cement base when temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35 degrees F and rising. 5/2013 02335-6 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE B. Spread cement uniformly on soil at rate specified by laboratory. When bulk cement spreader is used,position it by string lines or other approved method to ensure uniform distribution of cement. Apply cement only to area where operations can be continuous and completed in daylight,within 1 hour of application. Amount of moisture in soil at time of cement placement shall not exceed quantity that will permit uniform mixture of soil and cement during dry mixing operations. Do not exceed specified optimum moisture content for soil cement mixture. C. Do not allow equipment other than that used in spreading and mixing, to pass over freshly spread cement until it is mixed with soil. D. Dry mix cement with soil after cement application. Continue mixing until cement has been sufficiently blended with soil to prevent formation of cement balls when water is applied. Mixture of soil and cement that has not been compacted and finished shall not remain undisturbed for more than 30 minutes. E. Immediately after dry mixing is complete, uniformly apply water as necessary and incorporate it into mixture. Pressurized equipment must provide adequate supply to ensure continuous application of required amount of water to sections being processed within 3 hours of cement application. Ensure proper moisture distribution at all times. After last increment of water has been added, continue mixing until thorough and uniform mix has been obtained. F. Ensure percentage of moisture in mixture,based on dry weights,is within 2 percentage points of specified optimum moisture content prior to compaction. When uncompacted soil cement mixture is wetted by rain indicating that average moisture content exceeds tolerance given at time of final compaction,reconstruct entire section in accordance with this Section at no additional cost to City. 3.07 COMPACTION-LIME SUBGRADE A. Aerate or sprinkle to attain optimum moisture content as determined by Testing Laboratory. Remove and reconstruct sections where average moisture content exceeds ranges specified at time of final compaction. B. Start compaction immediately after final mixing,unless approved by Engineer. C. Spread and compact in two or more approximately equal layers where total compacted thickness is to be greater than 8 inches. D. Compact with approved heavy pneumatic or vibrating rollers, or a combination of tamping rollers and light pneumatic rollers. Begin compaction at the bottom and continue until entire depth is uniformly compacted. E. Do not allow stabilized base to mix with underlying material. Correct irregularities or weak spots immediately by replacing material and re-compacting. 5/2013 02335-7 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE F. Compact to following minimum densities at a moisture content of optimum to 3 percent above optimum as determined by ASTM D 698,unless otherwise indicated on the Plans: 1. Areas to receive pavement without subsequent base course: Minimum density of 98 percent of maximum dry density. 2. Areas to receive subsequent base course: Minimum density of 95 percent of maximum dry density. G. Seal with approved light pneumatic tired rollers: Prevent surface hair line cracking. Rework and re-compact at areas where hair line cracking develops. H. Contractor shall conduct operations to minimize elapsed time between mixing and compacting stabilized subgrade in order to take advantage of rapid initial set characteristics. Complete compaction within 2 hours of commencing compaction and not more than 6 hours after adding and mixing the last stabilizing agent. 3.08 COMPACTION-PORTLAND CEMENT SUBGRADE(ONLY WHEN DIRECTED BY ENGINEER) A. Prior to beginning compaction,ensure mixture is in loose condition for its full depth. Uniformly compact the loose mixture to specified density, lines and grades. B. After soil and cement mixture is compacted,apply water uniformly as needed and mix thoroughly. Then reshape surface to required lines, grades and cross section and lightly scarify to loosen imprints left by compacting or shaping equipment. C. Roll resulting surface with pneumatic-tired roller and "skin" surface with power grader. Thoroughly compact mixture with pneumatic roller,adding small increments of moisture,as needed. When aggregate larger than No.4 sieve is present in mixture, make one complete coverage of section with flat-wheel roller immediately after skinning operation. When approved by Project Manager, surface finishing methods may be varied from this procedure, provided dense uniform surface, free of surface compaction planes,is produced. Maintain moisture content of surface material at its specified optimum during finishing operations. Compact and finish surface within period not to exceed 2 hours,to produce smooth, closely knit surface, free of cracks, ridges, or loose material, conforming to crown, grade and line shown on Drawings within period not to exceed 2 hours. 3.09 CURING A. Moist cure for a minimum of 3 days before placing base or surface course,or opening to traffic. Time may be adjusted as approved by Engineer. Subgrade may be opened to traffic after 2 days if adequate strength has been attained to prevent damage.Restrict traffic to light pneumatic rollers or vehicles weighing less than 10 tons. 5/2013 02335-8 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE B. Keep subgrade surface damp by sprinkling. Roll with light pneumatic roller to keep surface knit together. C. Place base, surface, or seal course within 14 days after final mixing and compaction unless prior approval is obtained from Engineer. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Top of compacted surface:Plus or minus 1/4 inch in cross section or in 16 foot length. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. A minimum of three phenolphthalein test will be made at random locations per 1000 linear feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of base to determine in-place depth. B. Contractor may, at his own expense, request additional cores in the vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming in-place depths. If the average of the tests falls below the required depth,place and compact additional material at no cost to the Owner. C. Compaction Testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 at random locations near depth determination tests. Three tests will be performed for each 1000 foot roadway section. Rework and re-compact areas that do not conform to compaction requirements at no cost to the Owner. 3.12 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B. Fill test pits with new compacted lime stabilized subgrade. C. Completed surface shall be smooth and conform to typical section and established lines and grades. D. In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope from installed appurtenances to natural grade and stabilize as indicated on Plans. 3.13 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Maintain stabilized Subgrade to lines and grades and in good condition until placement of base or surface course. B. Protect the asphalt membrane, if used, from being picked up by traffic. 5/2013 02335 -9 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE C. Repair settlements, areas with loss of density, or areas of subgrade damaged by Contractor's operations at no additional cost to Owner by replacing and re-compacting material to full depth. D. Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02335- 10 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND GEOTEXTILE Section 02370 GEOTEXTILE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Geotextile, also called filter fabric, in applications such as under a granular fill, as a pipe embedment wrap,around the exterior of a tunnel liner,or around the foundations of pipeline structures. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4632, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" b. ASTM D 4533,"Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles" c. ASTM D 4833,"Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and Related Products" d. ASTM D 3786,"Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting strength of Textile Fabrics" e. ASTM D 4751, "Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile" f. ASTM D 4491, "Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity" 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for Work requiring geotextile. B If Geotextile is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit the standard manufacturer's catalog sheets and other pertinent information,for approval, prior to installation. 07/2006 02370- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND GEOTEXTILE C Submit installation methods,as a part of the work plan for tunneling or for excavation and backfill for utilities. Obtain approval from Engineer for Geotextile material and the proposed installation method prior to use of the geotextile. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GEOTEXTILE A Provide a geotextile(filter fabric)designed for use in geotechnical applications which forms a permeable layer or media while retaining the soil matrix. B Use a fabric which meets the physical requirements for Class A Subsurface Drainage installation conditions as defined in AASHTO M288 and as specified in this Section, 2.02 "Properties". 2.02 PROPERTIES A Material: Non-woven,non-biodegradable, fabric consisting only of continuous chain polymer filaments or yarns, at least 85 percent by weight poly-olefins, polyesters or polyamide, formed into a dimensionally stable network. B Chemical Resistance: Inert to commonly encountered chemicals and hydrocarbons over a pH range of 3 to 12. C Physical Resistance: Resistant to mildew and rot, ultraviolet light exposure, insects and rodents. D Minimum Test Values: PROPERTY VALUE (MIN) TEST METHOD Grab strength 180 lbs ASTM D 4632 Trapezoidal Tear Strength 50 lbs ASTM D 4533 Puncture Strength 80 lbs ASTM D 4833 Mullen Burst Strength 290 psi ASTM D 3786 Apparent Opening Size 0.25 mm ASTM D 4751 Permittivity(sect) 0.2 ASTM D 4491 (1) Maximum average roll value 3.0 EXECUTION - Notused END OF SECTION 07/2006 02370-2 of 2 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DRILLED SHAFT FOUNDATIONS SECTION 02372 DRILLED SHAFT FOUNDATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS American Concrete Institute (ACI): 336.1, Construction of End Bearing Drilled Piers American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A 501, Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No payment will be made for drilled shaft foundations under this Section. Include payment in related items listed on the Unit Price Schedule. B. Measurement and payment is as noted on the Unit Price Schedule. 1.3 DEPTHS OF DRILLED SHAFTS A. Drawings show estimated elevations or depths at which satisfactory bearing material may be encountered. B. No extra compensation will be allowed for concrete required to fill oversize casing or oversize excavation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit accurate log of depths for each drilled shaft. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tolerances: 1. Centerline of drilled shafts: Within 1/2-in. of plan location. 2. Vertical drilled shafts: Plumb to within 1-1/2-in. in 10 ft. 3. Tolerance for drilled shaft diameters: Plus or minus 1-in. 4. Tolerance for shaft top elevations: Plus 1-in., to minus 3-in. B. Codes and Standards: 1. End bearing drilled shaft construction shall conform to requirements of ACI 336.1, except as modified by requirements of this Section. C. Inspection Control: 1. The Owner's representative will make inspections of shaft drilling operation to determine that shafts are properly clean and dry before placing concrete. 2. Place no concrete prior to inspection by Owner's representative. 02372-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DRILLED SHAFT FOUNDATIONS 3. Notify Owner's representative no later than 24 hrs. before drilling is to begin. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Casings: 1. Watertight metal complying with ASTM A 501. 2. Strength to withstand stresses and pressure of concrete. surrounding earth, or backfill materials. 3. Smooth, well oiled, and extended above grade of finished shaft to allow excess concrete to be placed for anticipated slump due to casing removal. 4. Inside diameter: Not less than nominal size of shaft. B. Concrete: See Section 03300. C. Reinforcement: See Section 03200. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Assemble reinforcing steel cage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Excavation shall be free of water and loose material. B. Do not place drilled shaft concrete under water. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Excavation: 1. Excavate to sound footing to dimensions and elevations shown on Drawings or required by site conditions. 2. Excavate underreams to form bearing area. 3. At no additional cost to the Owner, Contractor shall provide casing in shaft excavation to shut off seepage water when necessary. 4. Do not use gasoline driven engines within excavation. B. Caving: 1. When drilling operation reaches point where caving conditions or excess ground water is encountered, do not drill further until construction method is employed which will prevent caving. 2. Use drilling mud to permit use of casing without excessive caving. 3. If elevation of top of shaft is below ground level at time of concrete placement, use oversize casing from ground elevation to point below shaft to control caving into freshly placed concrete. 02372-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DRILLED SHAFT FOUNDATIONS C. Overcutting: 1. Where casings are not required, backfill excavation in excess of shaft and underream sizes with concrete of same strength as footings. 2. Where casings are used, backfill around upper portion of casing with pea gravel or other granular material. D. Casing Removal: 1. Perform extraction of casing by vertical lift, continually plumb, at slow uniform rate. 2. Proceed at rate to allow for continuous observation of interior slumping of concrete. 3. Do not allow concrete surface within casing to slump below casing exterior water level. 4. During extraction, upward movement of steel cage shall not exceed 6-in.; downward movement shall not exceed 6-in. per 20 ft. length of shaft. 5. If movement more than 6-in. occurs, reconsolidate concrete by vibrating or rodding. 3.3 REINFORCING STEEL A. Assemble and place reinforcing steel cage, free of rust, mud and oil, in shaft as a unit. B. Place concrete after cage is positioned and secure against movement. C. Cased Shafts: Support cage of reinforcing steel from top by method to prevent downward movement of cage during casing extraction. D. Uncased Shafts: Use side spacer blocks of concrete at intervals along shaft to ensure concentric spacing for entire length of shaft, or place metal chair-type spacers vertically at intervals around steel cage to ensure concentric spacing inside shaft. 3.4 CONCRETE A. Place concrete immediately after excavation for footing is complete. B. Holes shall not remain open. C. Place concrete continuously from bottom of shaft or underream to top of shaft. D. Place concrete through suitable tremie to prevent segregation of concrete materials and splashing reinforcing steel cage. E. Make tremie in sections to permit discharge and raising as placement progresses. F. Do not use aluminum to convey concrete. G. Vibrate only the top five(5)feet of depth. 02372-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DRILLED SHAFT FOUNDATIONS 3.5 CLEANING A. Dispose of excavated material from shafts and underreams off site. END OF SECTION 02372 02372-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SECTION 02411 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01100 "Summary of Work" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner- occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Section 01500 'Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary protection of existing trees and plants that are affected by selective demolition. 3. Section 01730 "Cutting and Patching"for cutting and patching procedures. 4. Section 02200 "Site Preparation"for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements. 5. Section 02220 "Site Demolition"for site demolition requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 02411 - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, , for dust control, and , for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition. C. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the items indicated, including the following: 02411 - 2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs and preconstruction videotapes. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01380 "Construction Photographs." Digital video recordings and digital photographs are acceptable alternates. 02411 - 3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 01100 "Summary of Work." B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. a. Provide at least 72 hours' written notice to Owner prior to any utility interruption. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 02411 - 4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. 02411 - 5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval. C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 3. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. B. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight.. Coordinate with other work... 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 02411 02411 - 6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS Section 02510 WATER MAINS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Installation of water mains, including valves, fire hydrants,wet connections, cut and plug of mains, disinfection, and hydrostatic testing for pipelines. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 -Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 02514 -Fire Hydrant Assembly 4. Section 03300 -Cast-in-Place Concrete 5. Section 02512 -Polyethylene Wrap 6. Section 02417 -Augering Pipe for Water Lines 7. Section 02515 - Water Tap and Service Line Installation 8. Section 02318 -Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 9. Section 02980 -Pavement Repair 10. Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services 11. Section 02634 - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings C. Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) 2. American Water Works Association(AWWA) 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for water mains open cut or augered, with or without casing, is on a linear foot basis for each size of pipe installed. Mains: Measure along axis of pipe and include fittings and valves. Branch Pipe: Measure from axis of main to end of branch. B. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Pipe shall bear Underwriter's Laboratories(UL)or Factory Mutual(FM)label. 6/2014 02510- 1 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 2. Pipe material acceptable without penalty to State's community fire insurance rating agency. 3. System acceptable to City and TCEQ. 4. Bacteriological disinfection acceptable to local health officials and Texas Department of Health, and TCEQ. 5. Water taps and draw off lines in compliance with local municipal specifications and regulations. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Product Data: 1. Obtain from pipe manufacturer installation instructions,manuals,and printed recommendations, except for Owner furnished pipe. 2. Retain product data on job site for reference. 3. Submit certified record of tests of pipe, fittings, or valves upon request of Engineer. 4. Submit hydrant manufacturer flow and friction loss curve. C. Samples: 1. Notify City when system is pressure tested and disinfected. City will take all samples for bacteriological testing as required by TCEQ. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver pipe to trench in sound, undamaged condition. B. Cut pipe neatly avoiding sharp, ragged, or unbeveled, plain ends and do not damage lining by cutting. C. Remove damaged or rejected materials from project site. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not lay pipe when it is raining or when trench is muddy, soft,or contains standing water. B. 6/20 14 02510-2 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE A. Conform to requirements of Section 02534-PVC Pipe. All pipe used for water mains shall be blue. 2.02 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE A. Conform to requirements of Section 02532W- HDPE 2.03 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER LINES A. Conform to requirements of Section 02513 - Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines. 2.04 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Conform to requirements of Section 02634 -Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2.05 FIRE HYDRANTS A. Conform to requirements of Section 02514 - Fire Hydrant Assembly. 2.06 VALVES A. General: Conform to requirements of Section 02541 — Water and Wastewater Line Valves. 1. Manual operators: a. Provide hand wheel manual operators for in-plant valves. b. Equip buried valves with 2 in. square operating nuts. 2. Furnish no less than one operating key with each lot of 10 buried valves with nut operators. 3. Rotation: a. Direction: OPEN COUNTERCLOCKWISE(OPEN LEFT). 4. Shop coating: a. Shop coat ferrous metal surfaces of valves both interior and exterior for corrosion protection. b.Protect internal and external iron surfaces of valves with coating of 4 mils of two-part thermosetting epoxy: AWWA C 550. 5. Working and test pressures: a. Valves 2 in. through 12 in.: 200 psi working pressure, 400 psi hydrostatic test pressure. b. Valves 14 in.through 36 in.: 150 psi working pressure, 300 psi hydrostatic test pressure. 6/2014 02510-3 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS B. Gate Valves(2 in. Through 36 in.): 1. Buried valves: a. Comply with AWWA C500,non-rising stem(NRS);resilient wedge. b. Epoxy-coated ductile iron body and bonnet, inside screw. c. Bronze: Seat and disc rings, stem and mountings, and disc wedges. d. "0" ring sealed stem and 2 in. square operating nut. e. Valves 2 in. through 12 in.: Vertical type without by-passes. f. Valves 16 in.through 36 in.: Horizontal type with enclosed steel bevel gears resilient wedge, standard size by-pass valves. g. Stuffing box and bonnet bolts and nuts to be 304 stainless steel. h. Install in section of horizontal pipe. i. Mechanical joint ends with gasket complying with AWWA C 111. j. Acceptable product: 1) East Jordan, American Flow Control, Mueller Co. "A-2380 Series" C. Tapping Valves and Tapping Sleeves: 1. Tapping sleeves shall be solid stainless steel and valves shall conform with all others as mentioned above. D. Valve Boxes: 1. Cast iron,threaded screw extension sleeve type,adjustable suitable for depth of cover over pipe, with base and cover. 2. 3/16 in. thick, 5 in. diameter minimum. 3. Provide with suitable cast iron bases and covers. 4. Covers: Cast name designating type of service, e.g., "WATER" for water service. 2.07 RELATED MATERIALS A. Concrete: As specified in Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete. 6/2014 02510-4 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS B. Meter Box: 1. Cast iron to Owner's dimensions: ASTM A 48. C. The service line between Curb stop and Corporation Stop shall be CTS Polyethylene, SDR—9. D. Corporation and Curb Stops and Fittings: ASTM B 62,NSF 61 lead free 3.0 EXECUTION A. Conform to requirements in Section 02534 -PVC Pipe, Section 02634-Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings, Section 02532W—HDPE, Section 02635 Steel Pipe and Fittings, and Section 02513 - Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean pipe interiors of foreign matter before being lowered into trench. B. Clean hydrant and valve interiors of foreign matter before installation. C. Employ workmen who are skilled and experienced in laying pipe of type and joint configuration being furnished. Provide watertight pipe and pipe joints. D. Lay pipe to lines and grades shown on Drawings and Details. E. If asbestos-cement (A.C.) pipe is encountered, follow safety practices outline in American Water Works Association's publication, "Work Practices for A/C Pipe". Strictly adhere to "recommended practices" contained in this publication and make them"mandatory practices"for this project. F. For pipe diameters 36 inches and greater,clearly mark each section of pipe and fitting with unique designation on inside of pipe along with pressure class. Locate unique identifying mark minimum of five feet away from either end of each section of pipe. Provide one unique identifying mark in middle of each fitting. Place markings at consistent locations. Use permanent black paint and minimum letter height of 4 inches to mark designations. G. Contractor is responsible for assuring chosen manufacturer fulfills requirements for extra fittings and,therefore, is responsible for costs due to downtime if requirements are not met. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Inspection: 1. Carefully examine each piece of pipe for soundness and specifications compliance after delivery at trench before placing in trench. 6/2014 02510-5 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 2. Remove rejected pipe and fittings from site of work and replace with sound pipe. 3. Pipe and fittings will be rejected because of any of the following: a. Cracks in pipe or fittings. b. Damaged or cracked ends. c. Damaged gaskets or gasket grooves. d. Less than minimum wall thickness. e. Defects and deformations. B. Cleaning: 1. Clean interior of pipe and fittings of foreign matter before laying. 2. Keep interiors and ends clean during installation. 3. Keep joint contact surfaces clean during installation. 4. Take precautions to prevent foreign material from entering pipe during installation. 5. Do not place rubbish,tools, rags, or other materials in pipe. 6. Whenever pipe laying is stopped,place plugs in uncompleted ends of pipe. C. Installation: 1. Install pipe, couplings, and fittings in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Conform to applicable installation specifications for types of pipes use. 2. Install gaskets and lubricants as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Full length of each barrel of pipe shall rest solidly on pipe bed with recesses excavated to accommodate bells and joints. 4. Take up and relay pipe that has grade or joint disturbed. 5. Do not joint pipe with water in trench. 6. Keep water out of trench until jointing is completed. 7. Do not lay water pipe closer than 10 ft. horizontally from sanitary sewer. 8. Do not locate joints at cross-overs with sanitary sewers closer than 9 ft. from cross-over point. 6/2014 02510-6 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 9. Where water lines cross sanitary sewers,construct in accordance with the City of Pearland Engineering Design Criteria Manual for water line or TCEQ standards whichever is more stringent 10. Where pipe ends are left for future connections, install valve and plug or cap end. Forty feet minimum line section required between valve and plug or cap end. 11. Install concrete thrust blocking at bends and tees and at ends of lines to provide adequate reaction backing. 12. Lay not more than 100 feet of pipe in trench ahead of backfilling operations. 13. Dig trench proper width as shown in details. When trench width below top of pipe becomes 4 feet wider than specified, install higher class of pipe or improved bedding,as determined by Engineer. No additional payment will be made for higher class of pipe or improved bedding. 14. Use adequate surveying methods and equipment;employ personnel competent in use of this equipment. Horizontal and vertical deviations from alignment as indicated on Drawings shall not exceed 0.10 feet. Measure and record "as built"horizontal alignment and vertical grade at maximum of every 100 feet on record drawings. 15. Before assembling couplings,lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets per manufacturer's specification. 16. Prevent damage to coating when placing backfill. Use backfill material free of large rocks or stones, or other material which could damage coatings. D. Setting Valves, Valve Boxes and Fire Hydrants: 1. Set plumb. 2. Center valve boxes on valves. 3. Where feasible, locate valves outside area of roads and streets. 4. Carefully tamp back fill around each valve box to distance of 4 ft. on all sides or to undisturbed trench face if less than 4 ft. 5. Set hydrants at elevation so that connecting pipe will not have less cover than mains. 6. Set hydrants on concrete pad. 7. Depth of bury of hydrant is defined as distance from bottom of inlet pipe to ground line. 6/2014 02510-7 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 8. Place concrete thrust block back of hydrant opposite pipe connections set against vertical face of trench to prevent from blowing off line. 9. Use 5/8 in. stock stainless steel bridle rods and rod collars. 10. Place not less than 5 cu. ft. of broken stone around base of hydrant to ensure drainage. 11. Compact backfill to grade in accordance with specification section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 12. Tighten stuffing boxes. 13. Test hydrant and valve in opened and closed position to ensure that parts are in working condition. E. Joints and Jointing: 1. Rubber Gasketed Bell-and-Spigot Joints for PVC,Steel,and Ductile Iron Pipe: 2. a.After rubber gasket is placed in spigot groove of pipe,equalize rubber gasket cross section by inserting tool or bar recommended by manufacturer under rubber gasket and moving it around periphery of pipe spigot. b. Lubricate gaskets per manufacturer's specification. c.Fit pipe units together in manner to avoid twisting or otherwise displacing or damaging rubber gasket. d.After pipe sections are joined,check gaskets to ensure that no displacement of gasket has occurred.If displacement has occurred,remove pipe section and remake joint as for new pipe. Remove old gasket, inspect for damage and replace if necessary before remaking joint. e.Where preventing movement of 16-inch diameter or greater pipe is necessary due to thrust, use restrained joints as shown on Drawings. 1) Include buoyancy conditions for soil unit weight when computing thrust restraint calculations. 2) Do not include passive resistance of soil in thrust restraint calculations. f. Except for PVC pipe, provide means to prevent full engagement of spigot into bell as shown on Drawings. Means may consist of wedges or other types of stops as approved by Engineer. 6/2014 02510-8 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 2. Flanged Joints where required on Ductile Iron Pipe, or Steel Pipe: a. AWWA C 207. Prior to installation of bolts, accurately center and align flanged joints to prevent mechanical prestressing of flanges,pipe and equipment. Align bolt holes to straddle vertical, horizontal or north-south center line.Do not exceed 3/64 inch per foot inclination of flange face from true alignment. b. Use full-face gaskets for flanged joints. Provide 1/8-inch-thick cloth inserted rubber gasket material. Cut gaskets at factory to proper dimensions. c. Use stainless steelnuts and bolts to match flange material.Use stainless steelnuts and bolts underground.Tighten bolts progressively to prevent unbalanced stress. Maintain at all times approximately same distance between two flanges at points around flanges.Tighten bolts alternately (180°apart)until all are evenly tight.Draw bolts tight to ensure proper seating of gaskets. d. Full length bolt isolating sleeves and washers shall be used with flanged connections. e. For in-line flange joints 30 inches in diameter and greater and at butterfly valve flanges, provide Pyrox G-10 with nitrite seal, conforming to ANSI A 21.11 mechanical joint gaskets. For in-line flange joints sized between 12 inches in diameter and greater and 24 inches in diameter and smaller,provide Phenolic PSI with nitrite seal gasket conforming to ANSI A 21.11 mechanical joint gaskets. 3. Welded Joints (Steel Pipe): a. Prior to starting work,provide certification of qualification for welders employed on project for type of work procedures and positions involved. b. Joints: AWWA C 206. Full-fillet, single lap-welded slip-type either inside or outside, or double butt-welded type; use automatic or hand welders; completely penetrate deposited metal with base metal; use filler metal compatible with base metal; keep inside of fittings and joints free from globules of weld metal which would restrict flow or become loose. Do not use mitered joints. For interior welded joints, complete backfilling before welding. For exterior field-welded joints, provide adequate working room under and beside pipe. Use exterior welds for 30-inch and smaller. 6/2014 02510-9 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS c. Furnish welded joints with trimmed spigots and interior welds for 36- inch and larger pipe. d. Bell-and-spigot,lap-welded slip joints:Deflection may be taken at joint by pulling joint up to 3/4 inch as long as 1 '/2 inch minimum lap is maintained. Spigot end may be miter cut to take deflections up to 5 degrees as long as joint tolerances are maintained. Miter end cuts of both ends of butt-welded joints may be used for joint deflections of up to 5 degrees. e. Align piping and equipment so that no part is offset more than 1/8 inch. Set fittings and joints square and true, and preserve alignment during welding operation. For butt welded joints, align abutting ends to minimize offset between surfaces. For pipe of same nominal wall thickness, do not exceed 1/16 inch offset. Use line-up clamps for this purpose; however, take care to avoid damage to linings and coatings. f. Protect epoxy or cement lining during welding by draping an 18-inch wide strip of heat resistant material over top half of pipe on each side of lining holdback to avoid damage to lining by hot splatter. Protect tape coating similarly if external welding is required. g. Welding rods: Compatible with metal to be welded to obtain strongest bond, E-7018. Root or"Stringer"pass shall be performed with 6011 rods and Filler and Cap shall be done using 7018 rods. h. Deposit metal in successive layers to provide at least 2 passes or beads for automatic welding and 3 passes or beads for manual welding in completed weld. i. Deposit no more than 1/4 inch of metal on each pass.Thoroughly clean each individual pass with wire brush or hammer to remove dirt,slag or flux. j. Do not weld under weather condition that would impair strength of weld, such as wet surface, rain or snow, dust or high winds, unless work is properly protected. k. Make tack weld of same material and by same procedure as completed weld. Otherwise,remove tack welds during welding operation. 1. Remove dirt,scale,and other foreign matter from inside piping before tying in sections, fittings, or valves. m. Welded Joints for Large Diameter Water Lines: 6/2014 02510- 10 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 1) Furnish pipe with trimmed spigots and interior welds for 36 inch and larger pipe. 2) Use exterior welds for 30 inch and smaller. 3) Only one end may be miter cut. Miter end cuts of both ends of butt-welded joints may be used for joint deflections of up to 2 degrees. 4) For large diameter water lines,employ an independent certified testing laboratory, approved by Engineer, to perform weld acceptance tests on welded joints. Include cost of such testing and associated work to accommodate testing in contract unit price bid for water line. Furnish copies of test reports to Engineer for review. Engineer has final decision as to suitability of welds tested. A) Weld acceptance criteria: i) Cracking. ii) Lack of fusion/penetration. iii) Slag which exceeds one-third (t) where (t) quals material thickness. iv) Porosity/Relevant rounded indications greater than 3/16 inch; rounded indication is one of circular or elliptical shape with length equal to or less than three times its width. v) Relevant linear indications in which length of linear indication exceeds three times its width. vi) Four or more relevant 1/16 inch rounded indications in line separated by 1/16 inch or less edge to edge. n. After pipe is joined and prior to start of welding procedure, make spigot and bell essentially concentric by jacking, shimming or tacking to obtain clearance tolerance around periphery of joint except for deflected joints. o. Furnish each welder employed steel stencil for marking welds,so work of each welder can be identified. Mark pipe with assigned stencil adjacent to weld. When welder leaves job, stencil must be voided and not duplicated.Welder making defective welds must discontinue work and leave project site. Welder may return to project site only after recertification p. Provide cylindrical corrosion barriers for epoxy lined steel pipe 24 inch diameter and smaller, unless minimum wall thickness is 0.5 inches or greater. 6/2014 02510- 11 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 1) In additional to welding requirements contained herein Paragraph 3.06, conform to protection fitting manufacturer's installation recommendations. 2) Provide services of technical representative of manufacturer available on site at beginning of pipe laying operations. Representative to train welders and advise regarding installation and general construction methods. Welders must have 12 months prior experience installing protection fittings. 3) All steel pipe is to have cutback 3/4 inch to no greater than 1 inch of internal diameter coating from weld bevel. 4) Furnish steel fittings with cylindrical corrosion barriers with shop welded extensions to end of fittings. Extension length to measure no less than diameter of pipe. Shop apply lining in accordance with AWWA C210 or AWWA C213. 5) All steel pipe receiving field adjustments are to be cold cut using standard practices and equipment. No cutting using torch is to be allowed. 4. Restrained Joints: a. For existing water lines and water lines less than 16 inches in diameter, restrain pipe joints with concrete thrust blocks. b. Thrust restraint lengths shown on Drawings are minimum anticipated lengths. These lengths are based on deflections indicated for large diameter lines and ductile iron pipe for small diameter lines. Adjustments in deflections or use of other pipe material may result in reduction or increase of thrust lengths. Perform calculations by pipe manufacturer to verify proposed thrust restraint lengths. Submit calculations for all pipe materials sealed by a registered Professional Engineer in State of Texas for review by Engineer. Make adjustments in thrust restraint lengths at no additional cost to City. c. Passive resistance of soil will not be permitted in calculation of thrust restraint. d. For 16 inch lines and larger use minimum 16 foot length of pipe in and out of joints made up of beveled pipe where restraint joint lengths are not identified on Drawings. Otherwise, provide restraint joints for a minimum length of 16 feet on each side of beveled joints. e. Installation: 6/2014 02510- 12 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 1) Install restrained joints mechanism in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2) Examine and clean mechanism; remove direct, debris and other foreign material. 3) Apply gasket and joint NSF 61 FDA per manufacturer's specification. 4) Verify gasket is evenly seated. 5) Do not over stab pipe into mechanism f. Prevent any lateral movement of thrust restraints throughout pressure testing and operation. g. Place 2500 psi concrete conforming to Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility Construction, for blocking at each change in direction of existing water lines, to brace pipe against undisturbed trench walls. Finish placement of concrete blocking, made from Type I cement, 4 days prior to hydrostatic testing of pipeline. Test may be made 2 days after completion of blocking if Type II cement is used. 5. Joint Grout(Steel Pipe): a. Mix cement grout mixture by machine except when less than 1/2 cubic yard is required. When less than 1/2 cubic yard is required,grout may be hand mixed. Mix grout only in quantities for immediate use. Place grout within 20 minutes of mixing. Discard grout that has set. Retempering of grout by any means is not permitted. b. Prepare grout in small batches to prevent stiffening before it is used. Do not use grout which has become so stiff that proper placement cannot be assured without retempering. Use grout for filling grooves of such consistency that it will adhere to ends of pipe. c. Surface Preparation: Remove defective concrete, laitance, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign material from concrete surfaces with wire brush or hammer to sound, clean surface. Remove rust and foreign materials from metal surfaces in contact with grout. 6/2014 02510- 13 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS d. Follow established procedures for hot and cold weather concrete placement. e. Complete joint grout operations and backfilling of pipe trenches as closely as practical to pipe laying operations. Allow grouted exterior joints to cure at least 1 hour before compacting backfill. f. Grouting exterior joint space: Hold wrapper in place on both sides of joint with minimum 5/8-inch-wide steel straps or bands. Place no additional bedding or backfill material on either side of pipe until after grout band is filled and grout has mechanically stiffened. Pull ends of wrapper together at top of pipe to form access hole. Pour grout down one side of pipe until it rises on other side. Rod or puddle grout to ensure complete filling of joint recess.Agitate for 15 minutes to allow excess water to seep through joint band. When necessary, add more grout to fill joint completely. Protect gap at top of joint band from backfill by allowing grout to stiffen or by covering with structurally protective material. Do not remove band from joint. Proceed with placement of additional bedding and backfill material. g. Interior Joints for Pipe 24 inches and Smaller: Circumferentially butter bell with grout prior to insertion of spigot,strike off flush surplus grout inside pipe by pulling filled burlap bag or inflated ball through pipe with rope. After joint is engaged, finish off joint grout smooth and clean. Use swab approved by Project Manager for 20-inch pipe and smaller. h. Protect exposed interior surfaces of steel joint bands by metallizing,by other approved coatings,or by pointing with grout.Joint pointing may be omitted on potable water pipelines if joint bands are protected by zinc metalizing or other approved protective coatings. i. Remove and replace improperly cured or otherwise defective grout. j. Strike off grout on interior joints and make smooth with inside diameter of pipe. k. When installed in tunnel or encasement pipe and clearance within casing does not permit outside grout to be placed in normal manner, apply approved flexible sealer,such as Flex Protex or equal,to outside joint prior to joint engagement. Clean and prime surfaces receiving sealer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply sufficient quantities of sealer to assure complete protection of steel in 6/2014 02510- 14 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS joint area. Fill interior of joint with grout in normal manner after joint closure. 1. Interior Joints for Water Lines 30 inches and Larger:Clean joint space, wet joint surfaces,fill with stiff grout and trowel smooth and flush with inside surfaces of pipe using steel trowel so that surface is smooth. Accomplish grouting at end of each work day. Obtain written acceptance from Project Engineer of inside joints before proceeding with next day's pipe laying operation. During inspection, insure no delamination of joint mortar has occurred by striking joint mortar lining with rubber mallet. Remove and replace delaminated mortar lining. m. Work which requires heavy equipment to be over water line must be completed before mortar is applied to interior joints. n. Do not apply grout to joints that are out of tolerance until acceptable repairs are made. 6. Large Diameter Water Main Joint Testing: In addition to testing individual joints with feeler gauge approximately 1/2 inch wide and 0.015-inch thick,use other joint testing procedure approved or recommended by pipe manufacturer which will help ensure watertight installation prior to backfilling.Perform tests at no additional cost to City. 7. Make curves and bends by deflecting joints or other method as recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends which exceed manufacturer's recommended deflection prior to installation. a. Deflection of pipe joints shall not exceed maximum deflection recommended by pipe manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. b. If deflection exceeds that specified but is less than 5 percent, repair entire deflected pipe section such that maximum deflection allowed is not exceeded. c. If deflection is equal to or exceeds 5 percent from that specified, remove entire portion of deflected pipe section and install new pipe. d. Replace, repair, or reapply coatings and linings as required. e. Assessment of deflection may be measured by the Engineer at location along pipe. Arithmetical averages of deflection or similar average measurement methods will not be deemed as meeting intent of standard. 6/2014 02510- 15 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS f. When rubber gasketed pipe is laid on curve, join pipe in straight alignment and then deflect to curved alignment. 8. Closures Sections and Approved Field Modifications to Steel Pipe and Fittings: a. Apply welded-wire fabric reinforcement to interior and exterior of exposed interior and exterior surfaces greater than 6 inches in diameter. Welded-wire fabric: minimum W1; maximum spacing 2 inches by 4 inches; 3/8 inch from surface of steel plate or middle third of lining or coating thickness for mortar thickness less than 3/4 inch. b. Fill exposed interior and exterior surfaces with nonshrink grout. c. For pipe diameters 36 inches and greater, perform field welds on interior and exterior of pipe. d. For large diameter water lines,provide minimum overlap of 4 inches of butt strap over adjacent piece on butt-strap closures. F. Cathodic Protection Appurtenances: 1. Where identified on Drawings,modify pipe for cathodic protection as detailed on Drawings and specified. Unless otherwise noted, provide insulation kits including test stations at connections to existing water system or at locations to isolate one type of cathodic system from another type, between water line, access manhole piping and other major openings in water line,or as shown on Drawings. 2. Bond joints for pipe installed in tunnel or open cut, except where insulating flanges are provided. Weld strap or clip between bell and spigot of each joint or as shown on Drawings. No additional bonding required where joints are welded for thrust restraint.Repair coatings as specified by appropriate AW WA standard,as recommended by manufacturer,and as approved by the Engineer 3. Bonding Strap or Clip: Free of foreign material that may increase contact resistance between wire and strap or clip. 6/2014 02510- 16 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS G. Anchorage of Fittings: 1. Anchor tees, elbows and plugs in water mains with concrete thrust blocks. 2. Place blocks so that joints will be accessible for inspection and repair. H. Handling: 1. Place pipe along project site where storm water or other water will not enter or pass through pipe. 2. Load, transport, unload, and otherwise handle pipe and fittings to prevent damage of any kind. Handle and transport pipe with equipment designed, constructed and arranged to prevent damage to pipe,lining and coating.Do not permit bare chains, hooks, metal bars, or narrow skids or cradles to come in contact with coatings. Where required, provide pipe fittings with sufficient interior strutting or cross bracing to prevent deflection under their own weight. 3. Hoist pipe from trench side into trench by means of sling of smooth steel cable, canvas, leather, nylon or similar material. 4. For large diameter water lines, handle pipe only by means of sling of canvas, leather,nylon,or similar material. Sling shall be minimum 36 inches in width. Do not tear or wrinkle tape layers. 5. Use precautions to prevent injury to pipe,protective linings and coatings. a. Package stacked pipe on timbers.Place protective pads under banding straps at time of packaging. b. Pad fork trucks with carpet or other suitable material.Use nylon straps around pipe for lift when relocating pipe with crane or backhoe. c. Do not lift pipe using hooks at each end of pipe. d. Do not place debris,tools, clothing, or other materials on pipe. 6. Repair damage to pipe or protective lining and coating before final acceptance. 7. For cement mortar line and coated steel pipe,permit no visible cracks longer than 6 inches,measured within 15 degrees of line parallel to pipe longitudinal axis of finished pipe, except: a. In surface laitance of centrifugally cast concrete. b. In sections of pipe with steel reinforcing collars or wrappers. c. Within 12 inches of pipe ends. 6/2014 02510- 17 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 8. Reject pipe with visible cracks (not meeting exceptions) and remove from project site. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean and dry interior of pipe and fittings of foreign matter before installation, and keep interior clean until Work has been accepted. Keep joint contact surfaces clean until jointing is completed.Do not place debris,tools,clothing or other materials in pipe. After pipe laying and joining operations are completed, clean inside of pipe and remove debris. J. Inspection: Before installation, inspect each pipe and fitting for defects. Reject defective, damaged or unsound pipe and fittings and remove them from site. 3.04 WET CONNECTIONS A. Definitions: 1. Wet connections consist of isolating sections of pipe to be connected with installed valves,draining the isolated sections,and completing the connections. 2. Connection of 2 inch or smaller lines,which may be referred to on Plans as "2 inch standard connections"or"gooseneck connections"will be measured as 2" wet connections. This item is not to be used as any part of a 2-inch service line. B. Materials: 1. Corporation stops and saddles shall conform to requirements of Section 02515- Water Tap and Service Line Installation. 2. Valves shall conform to requirements of Section 02541 — Fire Hydrant Assembly. 3. Brass fittings shall conform to requirements of AWWA C800. C. Execution: 1. Plan wet connections in such manner and at such hours as to least inconvenience public. Notify Public Works Department at least 48 hours in advance of making connections. 2. DO NOT OPERATE VALVES ON MAINS IN USE BY OWNER.Owner will handle, at no cost to Contractor,all operations involving opening and closing valves for wet connections. 3. Conduct connection operations when Inspector is at job site. Connection work shall progress without interruption until complete, once existing mains have been cut or plugs have been removed for making connections. 6/2014 02510- 18 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS D. 2-Inch Wet Connections: 1. Tap water main. Provide and install corporation stops,saddles,as required for line and grade adjustment; and brass fittings necessary to adapt to existing main. Provide one Corporation Stop at main line and one Curb Stop at meter. The service line between Curb Stop and Corporation Stop shall be CTS Polyethylene, SDR-9. 3.05 CUT,PLUG AND ABANDONMENT OF MAINS A. Materials: 1. Concrete for thrust blocks: Class B conforming to requirements of Section 03305. 2. Plugs and clamps shall be suitable for type of pipe to be plugged. B. Execution: 1. Do not begin cut,plug and abandonment operations until replacement main has been constructed, disinfected, and tested, and all service lines have been transferred to replacement main. 2. Install plug, clamp, and concrete thrust block and make cut at location shown on Plans. 3. Main to be abandoned shall not be valved off and shall not be cut or plugged other than at supply main or as shown on Plans. 4. After main to be abandoned has been cut and plugged,check for other sources feeding abandoned main. If sources are found,notify Engineer immediately. Cut and plug abandoned main at point of other feed as directed by Engineer. 5. Plug or cap all ends or openings in abandoned main in an acceptable manner approved by Engineer. 6. Remove and dispose of all surface identifications such as valve boxes and fire hydrants. Valve boxes in improved streets,other than shell,may be poured full of concrete after removing cap. 7. Backfill all excavations in accordance with Section 02318 —Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 8. Repair all street surfaces in accordance with Section 02980—Pavement Repair. 6/2014 02510- 19 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 3.06 HYDROSTATIC TESTING A. Hydrostatically test all new water pipelines for liquids before connecting to water distribution system. B. Pipelines shall be tested in lengths between valves, or plugs, of not more than 1,500 feet unless greater length is approved by Engineer. C. Conduct hydrostatic tests in presence of Engineer. D. Preparation: 1. Disinfect water system pipelines prior to hydrostatic testing. E. Test Procedures: 1. Furnish,install,and operate connections,pump,meter and gages necessary for hydrostatic testing. 2. Allow pipeline to sit minimum of 24 hours from time it is initially disinfected until testing begins, to allow pipe wall or lining material to absorb water. Contractor should be aware that periods of up to 7 days may be required for mortar lining to become saturated. 3. Expel all air and apply a minimum test pressure of 125 psi or 150 psi as directed by Engineer. 4. Maintain test pressure for 8 hours. If a large quantity of water is required to maintain pressure during test,testing shall be discontinued until cause of water loss is identified and corrected. F. Allowable Leakage for Water Mains: 1. During hydrostatic tests,no leakage will be allowed for sections of water mains consisting of welded joints. 2. Maximum allowable leakage for water mains with rubber gasketed joints: 11.65 gallons per inch nominal diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours while testing at the required pressure. G. Correction for Failed Tests: 1. Repair all joints showing visible leaks on surface regardless of total leakage shown on test. Check all valves and fittings to ensure that no leakage occurs that could affect or invalidate test. Remove any cracked or defective pipes, fittings and valves discovered during pressure test and replace with new items. 2. Repeat test until satisfactory results are obtained. 6/2014 02510-20 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 3.07 DISINFECTION A. All waterlines constructed shall be promptly disinfected before any tests are conducted on waterlines and before waterlines are connected to water distribution system. B. Water for disinfection and flushing will be furnished without charge to Contractor. C. Preparation: 1. Furnish all required temporary blind flanges,cast-iron sleeves,plugs,and other items needed to facilitate disinfection of new mains prior to connecting them to water distribution system. Normally,each valved section of waterline requires two each 3/4-inch taps. A 2-inch minimum blow-off is required for waterlines up to and including 6-inch diameter. 2. .Fire hydrants shall be used as blow-offs to flush newly constructed waterlines 8-inch diameter and above. Where fire hydrants are not available on waterlines, locations and designs for blow-offs shall be as indicated on Plans. Install temporary blow-off valves and remove promptly upon successful completion of disinfection and testing. Abandon by turning off corp and using a stainless steel cap. 3. Slowly fill each section of pipe with water in a manner approved by Engineer. Average water velocity when filling pipeline should be less than 1 fps and shall not, under any circumstance, exceed 2 fps. Before beginning disinfection operations, expel all air from pipeline. 4. All excavations made shall be backfilled immediately after installation of risers or blow-offs. 5. Install blow-off valves at end of main to facilitate flushing at all dead-end water mains. Install permanent blow-off valves/auto flusher per drawing Ll D. Disinfection: 1. Use not less than 100 parts of chlorine per million parts of water. Introduce chlorinating material to water lines in accordance with AWWA C651. After contact period of not less than 24 hours, flush system with clean water until residual chlorine is no greater than 1.0 parts per million parts of water. Open and close valves in lines being sterilized several times during contact period.If super-chlorinated water (i.e. chlorine concentration above 4mg/1) is used for cleaning water main disinfection and flushing,the water must be dechlorinated prior to discharge.The water discharged into the stormsewer system or natural waterway must meet the Clean Water Act (33 USC § 1251 et seq.) and any subsequent amendments thereof. 2. If a chemical compound is used for a sterilizing agent, it shall be placed in pipes as directed by Engineer. 6/2014 02510-21 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS E. Bacteriological Testing: 1. After disinfection and flushing of waterlines, bacteriological tests will be performed by Owner or testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01450— Testing Laboratory Services. If test results indicate need for additional disinfection of waterlines based upon Texas Department of Health and TCEQ requirements,Contractor shall perform additional disinfection operations at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Completion: 1. Upon completion of disinfection and testing, remove risers except those approved for use in subsequent hydrostatic testing, and backfill excavation promptly. END OF SECTION 6/2014 02510-22 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER METERS Section 02511 WATER METERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Water meters for customer service, including submeters (i.e., cooling tower meters, sewer credit meters, etc.), for fire service in sizes 5/8 inch through 10 inches. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment 2. Section 02510—Water Mains 3. Section 02541 —Water and Wastewater Line Valves 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for installation of water meters furnished by the Owner is on an each basis for each meter type and size. Payment includes all labor and materials required for installation of water meters furnished by the Owner as indicated on Plans. B Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A Water meters shall be furnished by the Owner. 2.02 CONNECTIONS AND FITTINGS A Connections: Provide pipe in accordance with Section 02510 — Water Mains, restrained joints only. B Fittings: Restrained ductile iron; push-on bell joints or mechanical joint fittings outside of meter vault installations; Class 125 flanged inside meter vaults; cement mortar lined and sealed. 2.03 LAYING LENGTHS A The minimum length (with 1 inch tolerance) for meter and standard strainer shall be shown as indicated on the detail drawing for water meters. 03/2008 02511 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ' WATER METERS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 TAPPING AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION A Refer to Section 02541—Water and Wastewater Line Valves for tapping requirements. END OF SECTION 03/2008 02511 -2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION Section 02515 WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Tapping existing mains and furnishing and installing new service lines for water. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 3. Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 2737,"Standard Specification for polyethylene(PE)Plastic Tubing" 2. American Water Works Association(AWWA) a. AWWA C800 Standard Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings b. AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4"— 12" for Water Distribution D Definitions: 1. Short Side Connection - service line connecting proposed curb stop, located inside water meter box,to water main on same side of street. 2. Long Side Connection - service line connecting proposed curb stop, located inside water meter box,to water main on opposite side of street or from center of streets where supply main is located in street center such as boulevards and streets with esplanades. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for installation of 1 inch water taps and service lines is on a per each basis. Separate measurements will be made for "Short Side" and "Long Side" connections. B Measurement for installation of 2 inch water taps and service lines is on a per each basis. Separate measurements will be made for "Short Side" and "Long Side" connections. C Payment for installation of water taps and service lines includes locating water main, tap installation and connection to meter,restoring site,excavation,bedding,backfill, compaction, push-under, etc., and all other labor and materials required to complete installation as indicated on Plans. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 06/2014 02515 - 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit manufacturer's product data for approval. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Polyethylene Tubing- SDR 9 CTS. B Corporation Stops: AWWA C800 as modified herein: 1. Inlet End: AWWA standard thread. 2. Valve Body: Tapered plug type,0-ring seat ball type,or rubber seat ball type. 3. Outlet End: Compression type fitting for use with type-K, soft copper as well as CTS. C Provide taps for various water main types and sizes in accordance with following schedule: PIPE TAPPING SCHEDULE WATER MAIN SERVICE SIZE TYPE AND DIAMETER 1" 2" 4" Cast Iron or Ductile DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS Iron 4" Asbestos Cement WBSS DSS, WBSS 4" PVC (AWWA DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS C900) 6" and 8" Cast Iron or DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS Ductile Iron 6" and 8" Asbestos DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS Cement 6" and 8" Cast Iron or DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS Ductile lion 6" and 8" PVC DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS (AWWA C900) 12" Cast Iron or Ductile DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS Iron 12" Asbestos Cement DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS 12" PVC (AWWA DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS C900) 16" and Up Cast Iron or DWBSS DWBSS Ductile Iron 06/2014 02515-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION 16" and Up Asbestos DWBSS DWBSS Cement 16" and Up PVC DWBSS DWBSS (AWWA C900) DSS—Dual Strap Saddles WBSS—Wide Band Strap Saddles DWBSS—Dual Wide Band Strap Saddles *Mueller H-15092, or equal D Dual Strap Saddles: Red brass body and straps; ductile-iron; vinyl-coated body and straps; or ductile-iron, vinyl-coated body and stainless-steel straps. E Taps for PVC Water Mains: Use dual-strap or single,wide-band strap saddles which provide full support around circumference of pipe and bearing area of sufficient width along axis of pipe, 2 inches minimum, ensuring that pipe will not be distorted when saddle is tightened. Romac Series 101N wide-band,stainless-steel tapping saddle with AWWA standard thread (Mueller thread)or equal. F Taps for Steel Pipe: Not allowed, unless specifically approved by Engineer. Use saddle only if tap is approved on steel pipe. G Curb Stops and Brass Fittings: All Brass fittings shall be lead free conforming to the latest EPA's guideline. AWWA C800 as modified herein. 1. Inlet End: Compression-type fitting. 2. Valve Body: Straight-through or angled,meter-stop design equipped with the following: a. 0-Ring seal straight plug type. b. Rubber seat ball type. 3. Outlet End: Female, iron-pipe thread or swivel-nut, meter-spud thread on 1 inch stops and 2-hole flange on 2 inch sizes. 4. Fittings:Ford or approved equal;use same size open end wrenches and tapping machines as used with respective Ford fittings. 5. Factory Testing of Brass Fittings: a. Submerge in water for 10 seconds at 85 psi with stop in both closed and open positions. b. Reject any fitting that shows air leakage. Owner may confirm tests locally. Entire lot from which samples were taken will be rejected when random sampling discloses unsatisfactory fittings. H Angle Stops: In accordance with AWWA C800; ground-key, stop type with bronze lock-wing head stop cap; inlet and outlet threads conform to application tables of AWWA C800; and inlets compression connection. 1. Outlet for 1-inch size: Meter swivel nut with saddle support. 2. Outlet for 2 inch size: 0-ring sealed meter flange, iron pipe threads. Fittings: In accordance with AWWA C800 and: 1. Castings: Smooth, free from burrs, scales, blisters, sand holes, and defects which would make them unfit for intended use. 06/2014 02515-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION 2. Nuts: Smooth cast and have symmetrical hexagonal wrench flats. 3. Thread fittings, of all types, shall have N.P.T. or AWWA threads, and male threaded ends shall be protected in shipment by plastic coating or other equally satisfactory means. 4. Compression tube fittings shall have Buna-N beveled gasket. 5. Stamp of manufacturer's name or trademark and size on body. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A Set service taps at right angles to proposed meter location and locate taps in upper pipe segment within 45 degrees of pipe springline unless otherwise approved by Engineer. B For service lines and lateral connections larger than those allowed in this Section,Part 2.01C, branch connections must be used. C All 2-inch and smaller service taps on pressurized water mains: Use tapping machine manufactured for pressure tapping purposes. D Install service lines in open-cut trench in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities except that service lines under all paved roadways, other paved areas and areas indicated on Plans shall be installed in bored hole as specified in this Section. E Unless otherwise approved by Engineer,lay service lines with minimum of 30 inches of cover as measured from top of curb or, in absence of curbs, from centerline elevation of crowned streets or roads. Provide minimum of 18 inches of cover below flow line of all ditches to service lines, unless otherwise approved by Engineer. F Service lines across existing street(push-unders): Pull service line through prepared hole under paving. Only full lengths of tubing will be used. Take care not to damage tubing when pulling it through hole. A compression-type union is only permitted if Contractor cannot span underneath pavement with a full length of tubing. Contractor is allowed one compression-type union for each full length of tubing,provided it is not under the pavement. G Maintain service lines free of dirt, coupons and foreign matter at all times. H Install service lines per City of Pearland. Standard Details. I Locate water meters in accordance with City of Pearland Standard Details. Contact Engineer when major landscaping or trees conflict with service line and meter box location. No additional payment will be made for work on customer side of meter. J Joints 1. Minimum joint spacing for 1 inch tubing shall be in multiples of 60 feet and for 2 inch tubing shall be in multiples of 40 feet. 06/2014 02515 -4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION 2. Cut tubing squarely by using an approved cutting tool and avoiding excessive pressure on the cutting wheels which might bend or flatten pipe walls. 3. For compression fittings,cut tubing squarely prior to insertion into the fitting. Final assembly shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedure. K Bends 1. Gradual changes in direction may be made by bending PE pipe. The bending radius should not be less than the coil radius when bending with the coil. 3.02 CURB STOP INSTALLATION A Set curb stops or angle stops at outer end of service line inside of meter box. Secure opening in curb stop to prevent unwanted material from entering. In close quarters, make an "S" curve in the field. No flattening of tube. In all 1-inch services, install meter coupling,swivel-nut,or curb stop ahead of meter. Install straight meter coupling on outlet end of meter. 3.03 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS A Open trench for proposed service line in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B Install curb stop on meter end of service line. C With curb stop open and prior to connecting service line to meter in slack position, open corporation stop and flush service line thoroughly. Close curb stop, leaving corporation stop in full-open position. D Check service line for apparent leaks. Repair any leaks before proceeding. E Call Project Representative to schedule inspection prior to backfilling. After inspection, backfill in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. F Install meter box centered over meter with top of lid 3-inches above finished grade for grasses or landscaped areas,and flush with finished grade for paved areas. Meter box: Refer to Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults. END OF SECTION 06/2014 02515- 5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND VALVE BOXES,METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS Section 02520 VALVE BOXES,METER BOXES,AND METER VAULTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Valve boxes for water service. B Meter boxes for water service. C Meter vaults for water service. D References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 4. Section 02542—Concrete Manholes and Accessories 5. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for valve boxes under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B No separate payment will be made for installation of meter boxes furnished by the Owner under this Section. Include cost of installation of meter boxes in Bid Items for which the Work is a component. C Measurement for installation of meter vaults is on a per each basis for each meter vault type and size,complete in place. Payment includes all labor and materials required to complete installation as indicated on Plans. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit manufacturer's product data for following items for approval: 1. Each type of valve box and lid. 2. Each type of meter box and cover. 3. Each type of meter vault frame and cover. 06/2014 02520- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND VALVE BOXES,METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS C Submit Shop Drawings for cast-in-place meter vaults for approval if proposed construction varies from Plans. D Submit manufacturer's certification that meter boxes purchased for Work meet the requirements of this Section. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE BOXES A Provide adjustable, cast-iron, screw-type, valve boxes as manufactured by Bass and Hays Foundry,Inc.,or approved equal. Design of valve box shall minimize stresses on valve imposed by loads on box lid. B Cast the word"WATER"into lid, 1/2 inch in height and raised 3/32 inch, for valves serving potable water lines. C Provide 6-inch PVC, Class 150, DR 18, riser pipes. D Concrete for valve box placement: 1. For locations in new concrete pavement, use strength and mix design of new pavement. 2. For other locations, use class "A" concrete, with minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi,conforming to requirements of Section 03300—Cast-in- Place Concrete. 2.02 METER BOXES A Refer to City of Pearland Standard Details or contact the Public Works Department for list of acceptable products. 2.03 METER VAULTS A Meter vaults may be constructed of precast concrete, cast-in-place concrete, or solid masonry unless a specific type of construction is required by Plans. B Concrete for meter vaults: Class A concrete, conforming to requirements of Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete,with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days. C Vaults for meters 3" and greater shall be procured through the City's utility billing department. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION 06/2014 02520-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND VALVE BOXES, METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS A Obtain approval from the City Engineer or designee for location of meter vault. B Verify lines and grades are correct. C Verify compacted subgrade will support loads imposed by vaults. 3.02 VALVE BOXES A Provide riser pipe with suitable length for depth of cover indicated on Plans or to accommodate actual finish grade. B Install adjustable valve box and riser piping plumbed in a vertical position. Provide 6 inches telescoping freeboard space between riser pipe top butt end,and interior contact flange of valve box,for vertical movement damping. Riser may rest on valve flange, or provide suitable footpiece to support riser pipe. C Paint covers of new valve boxes as directed by the Owner. 3.03 METER BOXES A Install plastic boxes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B Construct concrete meter boxes to dimensions shown on Plans. C Adjust top of meter boxes to conform to cover elevations specified in this Section, 3.05 "Frame and Cover for Meter Vaults". B Do not locate under paved areas unless approved by Engineer. Use approved traffic- type box with cast iron lid when meter must be located in paved areas. 3.04 METER VAULTS A Construct concrete meter vaults to dimensions and requirements shown on Plans.Do not cast in presence of water. Make bottom as uniform as practicable. B Precast Meter Vaults: 1. Install precast vaults in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Set level on a minimum 3 inch thick bed of sand conforming to the requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 2. Seal lifting holes cement-sand mortar or non-shrink grout. C Meter Vault Floor Slab: 1. Construct floor slabs of 6-inch-thick reinforced concrete. Slope floor 1/4 inch per foot toward sump. Make sump 12 inches in diameter,or 12 inches square, and 4 inches deep, unless other dimensions are required by Plans. Install dowels at maximum of 18 inches,center-to-center,or install mortar trench for keying walls to floor slab. 2. Precast floor slab elements may be used for precast vault construction. 06/2014 02520-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND VALVE BOXES, METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS 3.05 FRAME AND COVER FOR METER VAULTS A Diamond Plate Aluminum as follows: 1. In unpaved areas,set top of meter box or meter vault cover 2 to 3 inches above natural grade. 2. In sidewalk areas,set top of meter box or meter vault cover 1/2 to 1 inch above adjacent concrete. 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises B Backfill and compact in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. C In unpaved areas, slope backfill around meter boxes and vaults to provide a uniform slope 1 to 5 from top to natural grade. D Meter boxes are not allowed in sidewalk. END OF SECTION 06/2014 02520-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Section 02530 GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Gravity sanitary sewers and appurtenances, including cleanouts, stacks, service connections, and reconnections. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 02415 —Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewers 2. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 3. Section 01350—Submittals 4. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 5. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 6. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 7. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 8. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 9. Section 02220—Site Demolition 10. Section 01140 - Contractor's Use of Premises C Reference Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 1784,"Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds" b. ASTM F 477,"Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals(Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe" c. ASTM D 3034, "Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings" d. ASTM F 679,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings" e. ASTM F 949,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a Smooth Interior and Fittings" f. ASTM D 794,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter" g. ASTM D 2241,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)" h. ASTM D 3212,"Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" i. ASTM D 3139,"Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" j. ASTM D 2444, "Standard Test Method for Determination for the Impact Resistance of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a Tup (Falling Weight)" 4/2013 02530- 1 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS k. ASTM F 714, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter" 1. ASTM D 2657, "Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining and Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings" m. ASTM D 1248, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable" n. ASTM D 3350,"Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Materials" o. ASTM D 3681, "Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe in a Deflected Condition" p. ASTM D 4161, "Standard Specification for Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe Joints Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" q. ASTM D 3262, "Standard Specification for Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer Pipe" r. ASTM D 3754, "Standard Specification for Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin)Sewer and Industrial Pressure Pipe" s. ASTM D 618, "Standard Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing" t. ASTM C 828, "Standard Test Method for Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines" u. ASTM C 924, "Standard Practice for Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by Low-Pressure Air Test Method" v. ASTM F 1417,"Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air" 2. American Water Works Association(AWWA) a. AWWA C 900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)Pressure Pipe, 4"— 12"for Water Distribution b. AWWA C 905 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Transmission Pipe, Nominal Diameters, 14in. Through 36 in. 3. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) a. PPI TR3,"Policies and Procedures for Developing Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), Strength Design Basis (SDB), and Minimum Required Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe" 4. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) 5. Texas Administrative Code(TAC) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement of pipe installed at depths 8-feet and less by open cut method is on a linear foot basis,measured and complete in place. Measurement will be taken along the center line of the pipe from center line to center line of manholes,except for pipe in casing or augered installation. B Payment includes sewer pipe, excavation, bedding, backfill and special backfill, shoring, earthwork, connections to existing manholes and pipe, stacks, cleanouts, 4/2013 02530-2 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS accessories, inspection and testing. Depths beyond 8'will be paid by 2 vertical feet increments. C Refer to Section 02415 —Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewers for measurement and payment of augered sewer pipe. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit inspection reports,testing reports,and video tape of television inspections as directed by Engineer. C Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials and sequence of operations for Gravity Sanitary Sewer construction. Plan operations to minimize disruption of utilities to occupied facilities or adjacent property. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Qualifications. Gravity Sanitary Sewer shall be watertight both in pipe-to-pipe joints and in pipe-to-manhole connections. Perform testing in accordance with this Section and Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. B Regulatory Requirements. 1. Install Gravity Sanitary Sewer to meet the minimum separation distance from any potable water line,as scheduled below. The separation distance is defined as the distance between the outside of the water pipe and the outside of the sewer pipe. When possible, install new Gravity Sanitary Sewers no closer to water lines than 9 feet in all directions. Where this separation distance cannot be achieved,new Gravity Sanitary Sewers shall be installed as specified in this Section. 2. Make notification to the Engineer if water lines are uncovered during Gravity Sanitary Sewer installation where the minimum separation distance cannot be maintained. 3. Lay Gravity Sanitary Sewers lines in straight alignment and grade. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A Inspect pipe and fittings upon arrival of materials at the Project Site. 4/2013 02530-3 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS B Handle and store pipe materials and fittings to protect them from damage due to impact,shock,shear,or free fall. Do not drag pipe and fittings along the ground. Do not roll pipe unrestrained from delivery trucks. C Use mechanical means to move or handle pipe. Employ acceptable clamps, rope or slings around the outside barrel of pipe and fittings. Do not use hooks,bars,or other devices in contact with the interior surface of the pipe to lift or move lined pipe 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GASKET MATERIAL FOR USE IN POTENTIALLY CONTAMINATED AREAS A Gravity Sanitary Sewer pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas, especially where free product is found near the elevation of the proposed sewer,shall have the following Gasket Material for the noted contaminants: CONTAMINANT GASKET MATERIAL REQUIRED Petroleum(diesel, gasoline) Nitrile Rubber Other contaminants As recommended by the pipe manufacturer 2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC)PIPE A Use PVC compounds in the manufacture of pipe that contain no ingredient in an amount that has been demonstrated to migrate into water in quantities considered to be toxic. B Furnish PVC pressure pipe manufactured from Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin PVC compounds as defined in ASTM D 1784. Use compounds qualifying for a rating of 4000 psi for water at 73.4° F per requirements of PPI TR3. Provide pipe which is homogeneous throughout, free of voids, cracks, inclusions, and other defects, uniform as commercially practical in color, density, and other physical properties. Deliver pipe with surfaces free from nicks and scratches with joining surfaces of spigots and joints free from gouges and imperfections which could cause leakage. All pipe used for gravity sanitary sewer shall be green. C Gaskets: 1. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477. When no contaminant is identified,use elastomeric factory-installed gaskets to make joints flexible and watertight. D Lubricant for rubber-gasketed joints: Water soluble, non-toxic,non-objectionable in taste and odor imparted to fluid, non-supporting of bacteria growth, having no deteriorating effect on PVC or rubber gaskets. 4/2013 02530-4 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS E PVC Gravity Sanitary Sewer pipe shall be green in color and shall be in accordance with the provisions in the following table: WALL PRODUCT ASTM SDR(MAX.)/ DIAMETER TYPE MANUFACTURER OPTIONS DESIGNATION STIFFNESS SIZE (MIN.) RANGE Solid J-M Pipe Approved D 3034 SDR 26/PS 115 6"to 15" CertainTeed Can-Tex Approved F 679 SDR 26/PS 115 18"to 48" Carlon Approved AWWA C900 DR 18/N/A*** 4"to 12" Diamond Approved AWWA C905 DR 18/N/A*** 14"to 36" Profile* Contech A-2000** Only when F 949 N/A/50 psi 12"to 36" ETI Ultra-Rib included in F 794 N/A/46 psi 12"to 48" the Bid Lamson Vylon Schedule F 794 N/A/46 psi 21"to 48" * Allowed to be used where there are no service taps. ** Allowed to be used to a maximum depth of 10' only. ***For water-sewer separation requirements unless specifically noted in Bid Schedule. F When solid wall PVC pipe 18 inches to 27 inches in diameter is required in SDR 26, provide pipe conforming to ASTM F 679,except provide wall thickness as required for SDR 26 and pipe strength of 115 psi. G For Gravity Sanitary Sewers up to 12 inch diameter crossing over waterlines, or crossing under waterlines with less than 2 feet separation,provide minimum 150 psi pressure-rated pipe conforming to ASTM D 2241 with suitable PVC adapter couplings. H Joints: Spigot and integral wall section bell with solid cross section elastometric or rubber ring gasket conforming to requirements of ASTM D 3212 and ASTM F 477, or ASTM D 3139 and ASTM F 477, shall be provided. Gaskets shall be factory- assembled and securely bonded in place to prevent displacement. The manufacturer shall test a sample from each batch conforming to requirements ASTM D 2444. I Fittings: Provide PVC gravity sanitary sewer bends, tee, or wye fittings for new sanitary sewer construction. PVC pipe fittings shall be full-bodied,either injection molded or factory fabricated. Saddle-type tees,wye fittings,or solvent welds are not acceptable. 2.03 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE(HDPE)SOLID AND PROFILE WALL PIPE A Provide HDPE pipe as follows and only when listed as a Bid Item: WALL PRODUCT ASTM PIPE DIAMETER TYPE MANUFACTURER OPTIONS DESIGNATION STIFFNESS RANGE (MIN) (INCHES) Solid Wall Drisco 1000 Drisco 8600 Approved F 714 115 psi 8 to 10 Quail Pipe 4/2013 02530-5 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Poly Pipe Plexco B Solid wall pipe shall be produced with plain end construction for heat joining (butt fusion)conforming to ASTM D 2657. Utilize controlled temperatures and pressures for joining to produce a fused leak-free joint. C Pipe and Fittings: High density, high molecular weight polyethylene pipe material meeting the requirements of Type III,Class C,Category 5,Grade P34,as defined in ASTM D1248. Material meeting the requirements of cell classification in accordance with ASTM D 3350 are also suitable for making pipe products under these specifications. D Gaskets: 1. Use gaskets meeting requirement of ASTM F 477. Use gasket molded into a circular form or extruded to the proper section and then spliced into circular form. When no contaminant is identified, use gaskets of a properly cured, high-grade elastomeric compound. The basic polymer shall be natural rubber, synthetic elastomer, or a blend of both. E Lubricant. Use a lubricant for assembly of gasketed joints which has no detrimental effect on the gasket or on the pipe, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. F Furnish pipe and fittings that are homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks,holes,foreign inclusions,or other injurious defects. Provide pipe as uniform as commercially practical in color, opacity, density, and other physical properties. 2.04 CENTRIFUGALLY CAST FIBERGLASS PIPE A Manufacturers 1. Pre-approved manufacturer for centrifugally cast fiberglass pipe is Hobas Pipe USA, Inc. B Materials 1. Resin Systems: The manufacturer shall use only polyester resin systems with a proven history of performance in this particular application. The historical data shall have been collected from applications of a composite material of similar construction and composition as the proposed product. 2. Glass Reinforcements: The reinforcing glass fibers used to manufacture the components shall be of highest quality commercial grade glass filaments with binder and sizing compatible with impregnating resins. 3. Fillers: Silica sand or other suitable materials may be used. 4. Additives: Resin additives,such as pigments,dyes,and other coloring agents, if used, shall in no way be detrimental to the performance of the product nor shall they impair visual inspection of the finished products. 5. Rubber Gaskets: Supply from an approved gasket manufacturer in accordance with ASTM F 477, when no contaminant is identified and suitable for the service intended. Gaskets shall either be affixed to the pipe by means of a 4/2013 02530-6 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS suitable adhesive or shall be installed in such a manner so as to prevent the gasket from rolling out of the pre-cut groove in the pipe or sleeve coupling. 6. The internal liner resin shall be suitable for service as sewer pipe,and shall be highly resistant to exposure to sulfuric acid as produced by biological activity from hydrogen sulfide gases. Pipe shall meet or exceed requirements of ASTM D 3681. C Pipes 1. Furnish pipes in the diameters specified and within the tolerances specified below. 2. Manufacture pipe by the centrifugal casting process to result in a dense, nonporous, corrosion-resistant, consistent composite structure to meet the operating conditions as shown on the Plans. 3. Do not use stiffening ribs or rings. D Couplings: Unless otherwise specified, the pipe shall be field connected with fiberglass sleeve couplings that utilize elastomeric sealing gaskets as the sole means to maintain joint watertightness. The joints must meet the performance requirements of ASTM D 4161. E Fittings: Flanges, elbows, reducers, tees, and other fittings shall be capable of withstanding operating conditions when installed. They may be contact molded or manufactured from mitered sections of pipe joined by glass fiber reinforced overlays. F Manhole Connections: Provide a water stop flange (wall pipe) for connection to a cast-in-place manhole base or other structure. G Grout Ports: Provide grout ports in the wall of pipe when required. Provide plugs of 316 stainless steel or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with the pipe. Grout port plugs shall be designed and installed to meet the test pressure of the pipe. H Dimensions 1. Diameters:The actual outside diameter of the pipes shall be in accordance with Table 3 of ASTM D 3262 for Gravity Sanitary Sewers,or ASTM D 3754 for force mains. 2. Lengths: The pipe standard length will be approximately 20 feet. A maximum of 10 percent of the lengths,excluding special order pipes,may be supplied in random lengths. 3. Wall Thickness: The minimum average wall thickness shall be the stated design thickness. The minimum single point thickness shall not be less than 90 percent of the stated design thickness. 4. End Squareness: Pipe ends shall be square to the pipe axis. 5. Tolerance of Fittings: The tolerance of the angle of an elbow and the angle between the main and leg of a wye or tee shall be plus or minus 2 degrees. The tolerance on the laying length of a fitting shall be plus or minus 2 inches. Stiffness Classes 4/2013 02530-7 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 1. Stiffness class of FRP pipe shall satisfy design requirements, but shall not be less than 46 psi, when used in direct bury operation; 36 psi, when installed within a primary tunnel liner. 2. Stiffness class of FRP in a pipe jacking operation shall be governed either by the ring deflection limitations or by a pipe design providing longitudinal strength required by the jacking method and shall satisfy design requirements stated below. Submit design calculations as required in Paragraph 1.05, Submittals. a. Pipe stress calculations based on jacking loads shall be provided by the pipe supplier. b. Ring deflection calculations shall conform to design requirements of 30 TAC Chapter 317.20 pertaining to flexible pipe used in Gravity Sanitary Sewers. The pipe deflection calculations shall ensure that predicted deflection will be less than 5 percent under long-term loading conditions(soil prism load)for the highest density of soil overburden and surcharge loads. Deflection on calculations shall be prepared using long-term (drained) values for soil parameters contained in the geotechnical investigation report for the Project,or other site-specific data obtained by the Contractor as approved by the Engineer. J Testing 1. Pipes shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 3262 or ASTM D 3754,as applicable, except that the factory hydrostatic pressure testing is not required. 2. Joints: Coupling joints shall be qualified per the tests of Section 7 of ASTM D 4161. K Packaging, Handling, and Shipping 1. Packing, handling, and shipping should be done in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. L Installation 1. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with requirements of this Section. 2. The manufacturer must supply a suitable qualified field service representative to be present periodically during the installation of pipe. 3. Pipe Bedding: Conform to requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 4. Pipe Handling: Use textile slings. 5. Jointing a. Clean ends of pipe and coupling components. b. Check pipe ends and couplings for damage. Correct any damage found. c. Coupling grooves must be completely free of dirt. d. Apply joint lubricant to pipe ends and rubber seals of coupling. Use only lubricants approved by the pipe manufacturer. e. Use suitable auxiliary equipment, such as a wire rope puller, to pull joints together. 4/2013 02530-8 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS f. Do not exceed forces recommended by the manufacturer for coupling pipe. If excessive force is required,remove coupling,determine source of problem, and correct it. g. In the process of jointing the pipe,do not allow the deflection angle to exceed the deflection permitted by the manufacturer. 6. If pressure grouting of the pipe is conducted as part of a pipe jacked tunnel installation,seal the grout holes with liner resin to a thickness equal to the pipe liner thickness, or with a threaded plug for that purpose. 7. Tests: Conform to requirements of this Section. 2.05 INSPECTIONS A The Engineer reserves the right to inspect pipes or witness pipe manufacturing. Such inspection shall in no way relieve the manufacturer of the responsibilities to provide products that comply with the applicable standards and these Specifications. B Manufacturer's Notification to Customer. Should the Engineer wish to witness the manufacture of specific pipes, the manufacturer shall provide the Engineer with adequate advance notice of when and where the production of those specific pipes will take place. C Failure to Inspect. Approval of the products or tests is not implied by the Engineer's decision not to inspect the manufacturing,testing, or finished pipes. 2.06 TEST METHODS A Conditioning. Conditioning of samples prior to and during tests are subject to approval by the Engineer. When referee tests are required,condition the specimens in accordance with Procedure A in ASTM D 618 at 73.4 degrees F plus or minus 3.6 degrees F(23 degrees C plus or minus 2 degrees C)and 50 percent relative humidity plus or minus 5 percent relative humidity for not less than 40 hours prior to test. Conduct tests under the same conditions of temperature and humidity unless otherwise specified. B Flattening. Flatten three specimens of pipe, prepared in accordance with Paragraph 2.05A,in a suitable press until the internal diameter has been reduced to 40 percent of the original inside diameter of the pipe. The rate of loading shall be uniform and at 2-inches per minute. The test specimens,when examined under normal light and with the unaided eye, shall show no evidence of splitting, cracking, breaking, or separation of the pipe walls or bracing profiles. C Joint Tightness. Test for joint tightness in accordance with ASTM D 3212, except replace the shear load transfer bars and supports with 6 inch wide support blocks that can be either flat or contoured to conform to the pipe's outer contour. D Purpose of Tests. The flattening and the joint tightness tests are not intended to be routine quality control tests, but rather to qualify pipe to a specified level of performance. 4/2013 02530-9 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 2.07 MARKING A Mark each standard and random length of pipe in compliance with these Specifications with the following information: 1. Pipe size 2. Pipe class 3. Production code 4. Material designation 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems. B Install and operate dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with Section 01564- Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, in conformance with requirements of Section 02220—Site Demolition,as applicable. 3.02 DIVERSION PUMPING A Install and operate required bulkheads, plugs, piping, and diversion pumping equipment to maintain sewage flow and to prevent backup or overflow. Obtain approval for diversion pumping equipment and procedures from the Engineer. B Design piping,joints and accessories to withstand twice the maximum system pressure or 50 psi,whichever is greater. C No sewage shall be diverted into any area outside of the sanitary sewer. D In the event of accidental spill or overflow, immediately stop the overflow and take action to clean up and disinfect spillage. Promptly notify the Engineer so that required reporting can be made to the TCEQ and the Environmental Protection Agency by the Engineer. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A Acceptance testing of sanitary sewers including: 1. Visual inspection of sewer pipes 2. Mandrel testing for flexible sewer pipes. 3. Leakage testing of sewer pipes. 4. Leakage testing of manholes. B Performance Requirements: 1. Gravity sanitary sewers are required to have a straight alignment and uniform grade between manholes. 4/2013 02530- I 0 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 2. Flexible pipe,including"semi-rigid"pipe,is required to show no more than 5 percent deflection. Test pipe no sooner than 30 days after backfilling of a line segment but prior to final acceptance using a standard mandrel to verify that installed pipe is within specified deflection tolerances. 3. Maximum allowable leakage for Infiltration or Exfiltration a. The total exfiltration,as determined by a hydrostatic head test,shall not exceed 50 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours at a minimum test head of 2 feet above the crown of the pipe at the upstream manhole or 2 feet above the groundwater elevation, whichever is greater. b. When pipes are installed more than 2 feet below the groundwater level, an infiltration test shall be used in lieu of the exfiltration test. The total infiltration shall not exceed 50 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours. Groundwater elevation must be at least 2 feet above the crown of the pipe at the upstream manhole. c. Refer to Table 2530-1,Water Test Allowable Leakage,at the end of the Section, for measuring leakage in sewers. Perform leakage testing to verify that leakage criteria are met. 4. Perform air testing in accordance with requirements of this Section and the Texas Natural Resources Conservation Commission requirements. Refer to Table 02530-2, Time Allowed For Pressure Loss From 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig, Table 02530-3,Minimum Testing Times for Low Pressure Air Test,and Table 02530-4, Vacuum Test Time Table, at the end of this Section. C Gravity Sanitary Sewer Quality Assurance: 1. Repair, correct, and retest manholes or sections of pipe which fail to meet specified requirements when tested. 2. Provide testing reports and video tape of television inspection as directed by Engineer. 3. Upon completion of tape reviews by Engineer, Contractor will be notified regarding final acceptance of the sewer segment. D Sequencing and Scheduling: 1. Perform testing as work progresses. Schedule testing so that no more than 1000 linear feet of installed sewer remains untested at any one time. 2. Coordinate testing schedules with Engineer. Perform testing under observation of Engineer. E Deflection Mandrel: 1. Mandrel Sizing. The rigid mandrel shall have an outside diameter(O.D.)equal to 95 percent of the inside diameter(I.D.)of the pipe. The inside diameter of the pipe, for the purpose of determining the outside diameter of the mandrel, shall be the average outside diameter minus two minimum wall thicknesses for O.D. controlled pipe and the average inside diameter for I.D. controlled pipe, dimensions shall be per appropriate standard. Statistical or other "tolerance packages" shall not be considered in mandrel sizing. 2. Mandrel Design. The rigid mandrel shall be constructed of a metal or a rigid plastic material that can withstand 200 psi without being deformed. The 4/2013 02530- 11 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS mandrel shall have nine or more"runners"or"legs"as long as the total number of legs is an odd number. The barrel section of the mandrel shall have a length of at least 75 percent of the inside diameter of the pipe. The rigid mandrel shall not have adjustable or collapsible legs which would allow a reduction in mandrel diameter during testing. A proving ring shall be provided and used for modifying each size mandrel. 3. Proving Ring. Furnish a"proving ring"with each mandrel. Fabricate the ring of 1/2 inch thick, 3-inch-wide bar steel to a diameter 0.02 inches larger than approved mandrel diameter. 4. Mandrel Dimensions (5 percent allowance). Average inside diameter and minimum mandrel diameter are specified in Table 02530-5,Pipe vs. Mandrel Diameter,at the end of this Section. Mandrels for higher strength,thicker wall pipe or other pipe not listed in the table may be used when approved by the Engineer. F Exfiltration Test: 1. Water Meter: Obtain a transient water meter from the City for use when water for testing will be taken from the City system. Conform to City requirements for water meter use. 2. Test Equipment: a. Pipe plugs. b. Pipe risers where the manhole cone is less than 2 feet above highest point in pipe or service lead. G Infiltration Test: 1. Test Equipment: a. Calibrated 90 degree V-notch weir. b. Pipe plugs. H Low Pressure Air Test: 1. Minimum Requirement for Equipment: a. Control panel. b. Low-pressure air supply connected to control panel. c. Pneumatic plugs: Acceptable size for diameter of pipe to be tested; capable of withstanding internal test pressure without leaking or requiring external bracing. d. Air hoses from control panel to: 1) Air supply. 2) Pneumatic plugs. 3) Sealed line for pressuring. 4) Sealed line for monitoring internal pressure. 2. Testing Pneumatic Plugs: Place a pneumatic plug in each end of a length of pipe on the ground. Pressurize plugs to 25 psig;then pressurize sealed pipe to 5 psig. Plugs are acceptable if they remain in place against the test pressure without external aids. Ground Water Determination: 4/2013 02530- 12 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 1. Equipment: Pipe probe or small diameter casing for ground water elevation determination. J Visual Inspection: 1. Check pipe alignment visually by flashing a light between structures. Verify if alignment is true and no pipes are misplaced. In case of misalignment or damaged pipe, remove and re-lay or replace pipe segment. K Mandrel Testing: 1. Perform deflection testing on flexible and semi-rigid pipe to confirm pipe has no more than 5 percent deflection. Mandrel testing shall conform to ASTM D 3034. Perform testing no sooner than 30 days after backfilling of line segment, but prior to final acceptance testing of the line segment. 2. Pull the approved mandrel by hand through sewer sections. Replace any section of sewer not passing the mandrel. Mandrel testing is not required for stubs. 3. Retest repaired or replaced sewer sections. L Leakage Testing: 1. Test Options: a. Test Gravity Sanitary Sewer pipes for leakage by either exfiltration or infiltration methods, as appropriate, or with low pressure air testing. b. Test new or rehabilitated sanitary sewer manholes with water or low pressure air. Manholes tested with low pressure air shall undergo a physical inspection prior to testing. c. Leakage testing shall be performed after backfilling of a line segment, and prior to tie-in of service connections. d. If no installed piezometer is within 500 feet of the sewer segment, Contractor shall provide a temporary piezometer for this purpose. 2. Compensating for Ground Water Pressure: a. Where ground water exists,install a pipe nipple at the same time sewer line is placed. Use a 1/2-inch capped pipe nipple approximately 10 inches long. Make the installation through manhole wall on top of the sewer line where line enters manhole. b. Immediately before performing line acceptance test,remove cap,clear pipe nipple with air pressure,and connect a clear plastic tube to nipple. Support tube vertically and allow water to rise in the tube. After water stops rising, measure height in feet of water over invert of the pipe. Divide this height by 2.3 feet/psi to determine the ground water pressure to be used in line testing. 3. Exfiltration test: a. Determine ground water elevation. b. Plug sewer in downstream manhole. c. Plug incoming pipes in upstream manhole. d. Install riser pipe in outgoing pipe of upstream manhole if highest point in service lead (house service) is less than 2 feet below bottom of manhole cone. 4/2013 02530- 13 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS e. Fill sewer pipe and manhole or pipe riser,if used,with water to a point 2-1/2 feet above highest point in sewer pipe, house lead, or ground water table, whichever is highest. f. Allow water to stabilize for one to two hours. Take water level reading to determine drop of water surface, in inches, over a one-hour period, and calculate water loss (1 inch of water in 4 feet diameter manhole equals 8.22 gallons)or measure the quantity of water required to keep water at same level. Loss shall not exceed that calculated from allowable leakage according to Table 02530-1 at the end of this Section. 4. Infiltration test: Ground water elevation must be not less than 2.0 feet above highest point of sewer pipe or service lead(house service). a. Determine ground water elevation. b. Plug incoming pipes in upstream manhole. c. Insert calibrated 90 degree V-notch weir in pipe on downstream manhole. d. Allow water to rise and flow over weir until it stabilizes. e. Take five readings of accumulated volume over a period of 2 hours and use average for infiltration. The average must not exceed that calculated for 2 hours from allowable leakage according to the Table 02530-1 at the end of this Section. 5. Low Air Pressure Test: When using this test conform to ASTM C 828,ASTM C 924, or ASTM F 1417, as applicable, with holding time not less than that listed in Table 02530-2. a. Air testing for sections of pipe shall be limited to lines less than 36- inch average inside diameter. b. Lines 36-inch average inside diameter and larger shall be tested at each joint. The minimum time allowable for the pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds per square inch gauge to 2.5 pounds per square inch during a joint test shall be 10 seconds, regardless of pipe size. c. For pipe sections less than 36-inch average inside diameter: 1) Determine ground water level. 2) Plug both ends of pipe. For concrete pipe, flood pipe and allow 2 hours to saturate concrete. Then drain and plug concrete pipe. 3) After a manhole-to-manhole section of sanitary sewer main has been sliplined and prior to any service lines being connected to new liner, plug liner at each manhole with pneumatic plugs. 4) Pressurize pipe to 4.0 psig. Increase pressure 1.0 psi for each 2.3 feet of ground water over highest point in system. Allow pressure to stabilize for 2 to 4 minutes. Adjust pressure to start at 3.5 psig (plus adjustment for ground water table). Refer to Table 02530-2 at the end of this Section. 5) To determine air loss, measure the time interval for pressure to drop to 2.5 psig. The time must exceed that 4/2013 02530- 14 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS listed in the Table 02530-2 at the end of this Section for pipe diameter and length. For sliplining, use diameter of carrier pipe. 6. Retest: Any section of pipe which fails to meet requirements shall be repaired and retested. M Test Criteria Tables 1. Exfiltration and Infiltration Water Tests: Refer to Table 02530-1, Water Test Allowable Leakage, at the end of this Section. 2. Low Pressure Air Test: a. Times in Table 02530-2, Time Allowed For Pressure Loss From 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig, at the end of this Section, are based on the equation from TCEQ Design Criteria for Sewerage Systems: 317.2(a)(4)(B). T=0.0850(D)(K)/(Q) Where: T = Time for pressure to drop 1.0 pounds per square inch gauge in seconds K = 0.000419 DL, but not less than 1.0 D = Average inside diameter in inches L = Length of line of same pipe size in feet Q = Rate of loss, 0.0015 ft3/min./sq. ft. internal surface b. Since a K value of less than 1.0 shall not be used, there are minimum testing times for each pipe diameter as given in Table 02732-3, Minimum Testing Times for Low Pressure Air Test. Notes: 1. When two sizes of pipe are involved, the time shall be computed by the ratio of lengths involved. 2. Line with a 27-inch average inside diameter and larger may be air tested at each joint. 3. Lines with an average inside diameter greater than 36 inches must be air tested for leakage at each joint 4. If the joint test is used, a visual inspection of the joint shall be performed immediately after testing. 5. For joint test, the pipe is to be pressurized to 3.5 psi greater than the pressure exerted by groundwater above the pipe. Once the pressure has stabilized,the minimum times allowable for the pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds per square inch gauge to 2.5 pounds per square inch gauge shall be 10 seconds. N Leakage Testing for Manholes 4/2013 02530- 15 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 1. After completion of manhole construction,wall sealing,or rehabilitation,but prior to backfilling, test manholes for water tightness using hydrostatic or vacuum testing procedures. 2. Plug influent and effluent lines, including service lines, with suitably-sized pneumatic or mechanical plugs. Ensure plugs are properly rated for pressures required for test; follow manufacturer's safety and installation recommendations. Place plugs a minimum of 6 inches outside of manhole walls. Brace inverts to prevent lines from being dislodged if lines entering manhole have not been backfilled. 3. Vacuum testing: a. Install vacuum tester head assembly at top access point of manhole and adjust for proper seal on straight top section of manhole structure. Following manufacturer's instructions and safety precautions,inflate sealing element to the recommended maximum inflation pressure; do not over-inflate. b. Evacuate manhole with vacuum pump to 10 inches mercury(Hg), disconnect pump, and monitor vacuum for the time period specified in Table 02530-4,Vacuum Test Time Table. c. If the drop in vacuum exceeds 1 inch Hg over the specified time period tabulated above,locate leaks,complete repairs necessary to seal manhole and repeat test procedure until satisfactory results are obtained. 4. Hydrostatic exfiltration testing shall be performed as follows: a. Seal wastewater lines coming into the manhole with an internal pipe plug. Then fill the manhole with water and maintain it full for at least one hour. b. The maximum leakage for hydrostatic testing shall be 0.025 gallons per foot diameter per foot of manhole depth per hour. c. If water loss exceeds amount tabulated above, locate leaks, complete repairs necessary to seal manhole and repeat test procedure until satisfactory results are obtained. 3.04 BACKFILL A Backfill and compact soil in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B Backfill the trench in specified lifts only after pipe installation is approved by the Engineer. 3.05 CLEAN UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140- Contractor's Use of Premises. 4/2013 02530- 16 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 3.06 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Maintain gravity sanitary sewer installations in good condition until completion of the work. Table 02530-1 WATER TEST ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE DIAMETER OF VOLUME PER INCH OF DEPTH ALLOWANCE LEAKAGE* RISER OR STACK IN INCHES INCH GALLONS PIPE SIZE IN GALLONS/MINUTE INCHES PER 100 FT. 1 0.7854 .0034 6 0.0039 2 3.1416 .0136 8 0.0053 2.5 4.9087 .0212 10 0.0066 3 7.0686 .0306 12 0.0079 4 12.5664 .0306 15 0.0099 • 5 19.6350 .0544 18 0.0118 6 28.2743 .1224 21 0.0138 8 50.2655 .2176 24 0.0518 27 0.0177 30 0.0197 36 0.0237 42 0.0276 For other diameters, multiply square of diameters by Equivalent to 50 gallons per inch value for 1"diameter inside diameter per mile per 24 hours * Allowable leakage rate shall be reduced to 10 gallons per inch of inside diameter per mile per 24 hours, when sewer is identified as located within the 25-year flood plain. 4/2013 02530- 17 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Table 02530-2 ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR SANITARY SEWERS TIME ALLOWED FOR PRESSURE LOSS FROM 3.5 PSIG TO 2.5 PSIG Pipe Min. Length Time for Specification Time for Length(L)Shown(min:sec) Diam Time for Min. Longer (in) (min:sec) Time(ft) Leegct)h 100 ft 150 ft 200 ft 250 11 300 ft 350 ft 400 ft 450 ft 500 ft 550 ft 600 ft 6 5:40 398 0.8548 • 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:42 6:25 7:07 7:50 8:33 8 7:33 298 1.5196 7:33 7:33 7:33 7:33 7:36 8:52 10:08 11:24 12:40 13:36 15:12 10 9:27 239 2.3743 9:27 9:27 9:27 9:54 11:52 13:51 15:50 17:48 19:47 21:46 23:45 12 11:20 199 3.4190 11:20 11:20 11:20 14:15 17:06 19:57 22:48 25:39 28:30 31:20 34:11 15 14:10 159 5.3423 14:10 14:10 17:48 22:16 26:43 31:10 35:37 40:04 44:31 48:58 53:25 18 17:00 133 7.6928 17:00 19:14 25:39 32:03 38:28 44:52 51:17 57:42 64:06 70:31 76:56 21 19:50 114 10.4708 19:50 26:1I 34:54 43:38 52:21 61:05 69:48 78:32 87:15 95:59 104:42 24 22:40 99 13.6762 22:48 34:11 45:35 56:59 68:23 79:47 91:10 102:34 113:58 125:22 136:46 27 25:30 88 17.3089 28:51 43:16 57:42 72:07 86:33 100:58 115:24 129:49 144:14 158:40 173:05 30 28:20 80 21.3690 35:37 53:37 71:14 89:02 106:51 124:39 142:28 160:16 178:05 195:53 213:41 33 31:10 72 25.8565 43:06 64:38 86:11 107:44 129:17 150:50 172:23 193:55 215:28 237:01 258:34 Table 02530-3 MINIMUM TESTING TIMES FOR LOW PRESSURE AIR TEST PIPE MINIMUM LENGTH FOR TIME FOR DIAMETER TIME MINIMUM TIME LONGER LENGTH (INCHES) (SECONDS) (FEET) (SECONDS) 6 340 398 0.855 (L) 8 454 298 1.520 (L) 10 567 239 2.374 (L) 12 680 199 3.419 (L) 15 850 159 5.342 (L) 18 1020 133 7.693 (L) 21 1190 114 10.471 (L) 24 1360 100 13.676 (L) 27 1530 88 17.309 (L) 30 1700 80 21.369 (L) 33 1870 72 25.856 (L) 4/2013 02530- 18 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Table 02530-4 VACUUM TEST TIME TABLE TIME IN SECONDS BY PIPE DIAMETER DEPTH IN FEET 48" 60" 72" 4 10 13 16 8 20 26 32 12 30 39 48 16 40 52 64 20 50 65 80 24 60 78 96 * 5.0 6.5 8.0 *Add T times for each additional 2-foot depth. (The values listed above have been extrapolated from ASTM C 924-85) 4/2013 02530 - 19 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Table 02530-5 PIPE VS. MANDREL DIAMETER NOMINAL AVERAGE MATERIAL AND SIZE I.D. MINIMUM MANDREL WALL CONSTRUCTION (INCHES) (INCHES) , DIAMETER(INCHES) PVC-Solid(SDR 26) 6 5.764 5.476 8 7.715 7.329 10 9.646 9.162 PVC-Solid(SDR 35) 12 11.737 11.150 15 14.374 13.655 18 17.629 16.748 21 20.783 19.744 24 23.381 22.120 27 26.351 25.033 PVC-Profile(ASTM F 794) 12 11.740 11.153 15 14.370 13.652 18 17.650 16.768 21 20.750 19.713 24 23.500 22.325 27 26.500 25.175 30 29.500 28.025 36 35.500 33.725 42 41.500 39.425 48 47.500 45.125 HDPE-Profile 18 18.000 17.100 21 21.000 19.950 24 24.000 22.800 27 27.000 25.650 30 30.000 28.500 36 36.000 34.200 42 42.000 39.900 48 48.000 45.600 54 54.000 51.300 60 60.000 57.000 Fiberglass-Centrifugally Cast 12 12.85 11.822 (Class SN 46) 18 18.66 17.727 20 20.68 19.646 24 24.72 23.484 30 30.68 29.146 36 36.74 34.903 42 42.70 40.565 48 48.76 46.322 54 54.82 52.079 60 60.38 57.361 END OF SECTION 4 2013 02530-20 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS Section 02531 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of service stubs on new sanitary sewers serving areas where sanitary sewer service did not previously exist. B Reconnection of existing service connections along parallel, replacement, or rehabilitated sanitary sewers. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 5. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 6. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 7. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers 8. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises D Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 1784,"Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds" b. ASTM D 3034, "Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings" c. ASTM D 3212,"Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for single, near-side service leads is on a per each basis, complete in place. B Measurement for double, near-side service leads is on a per each basis, completed in place. C Measurement for single,far-side service leads is on a per each basis,complete in place. D Measurement for double, far-side service leads is on a per each basis, complete in place. 02/2008 02531 - 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS E Payment for service leads includes service connections, couplings, clean-outs, adapters, disconnecting existing services, reconnecting new service, fittings, excavation, backfill, and testing. F Measurement for sanitary sewer stacks up to 3 vertical feet is on a per each basis, complete in place. Payment includes riser pipe,service connections,couplings,clean- outs, adapters, disconnecting existing services, reconnecting new service, fittings, excavation, backfill, and testing. G Measurement for extra depth sanitary sewer stacks greater than 3 vertical feet is on a vertical foot basis from the top of the receiving sewer to the invert of the service connection, measured and complete in place. Payment includes excavation, pipe, bedding, and backfill for that portion of the stack in excess of 3 feet. H Measurement for sanitary sewer service reconnections with stacks located within 5 feet of the sanitary sewer main centerline shall be per each reconnection,complete in place. I Measurement for sanitary sewer service reconnections without stacks located within 5 feet of the sanitary sewer main centerline shall be per each reconnection, complete in place. J Payment for sanitary sewer service reconnections includes include service connections, couplings, clean-outs, adapters disconnecting existing services, reconnecting new service, fittings, excavation,backfill, and testing. K Augered pipe for service leads will be paid as provided in Section 02415—Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewer. L One or more connections discharging into a common point are considered one service connection. The Contractor shall not add service reconnections without approval of the Engineer. The Engineer may require reconnections to be moved or relocated to avoid having more than two single family units per reconnection. M Measurement for abandonment of service connection is on a per each basis. No additional payment will be made for abandonment of service connection unless excavation is required beyond new or replacement sewer or service lead trench zone. No separate payment will be made for excavation of sanitary sewer services within the new or replacement sewer trench. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit product data for each pipe product, fitting, coupling and adapter. C Submit field red lines documenting location of sanitary sewer stubs and reconnections as installed,referenced to survey Control Points,under the provisions of Section 01760 02/2008 02531 -2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS — Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. Record the exact distance from each service connection to the nearest downstream manhole. 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 PVC SERVICE CONNECTION A As stubouts, use PVC sewer pipe, 4-inch through 10-inch, conforming to ASTM D 1784 and ASTM D 3034, with a cell classification of 12454-B. The SDR (ratio of diameter to wall thickness) shall be 26 for pipe 10 inches in diameter or less. B PVC pipe shall be gasket jointed with gasket conforming to ASTM D3212. C Provide service connection pipe in sizes shown on the Plans. For reconnection of existing services, select service connection pipe diameter to match existing service diameter. D Provide a 6-inch service connection when more than one service discharges into a single pipe. E Connect service pipes to new parallel or replacement sewer mains with prefabricated, full-bodied tee or wye fittings conforming to specifications for the sewer main pipe material as specified in other Sections for all sewers up to 18 inches in diameter. F Where new sewers are installed using pipe augering or tunneling, or where the new sewer is greater than 18 inches in diameter, use Fowler"Inserta-Tee"to connect the service to the new sewer main. 2.02 PIPE SADDLES A Use pipe saddles only on rehabilitated sanitary sewer mains. Comply with Paragraph 2.01E for new parallel and replacement sanitary sewer mains. 02/2008 02531 -3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS 2.03 COUPLINGS AND ADAPTERS A For connection between new PVC pipe stubout and existing service;4-, 6-, or 8-inch diameter, use flexible adapter coupling consisting of a neoprene gasket and stainless steel shear ring, with 1/2-inch stainless steel band clamps: 1. Fernco Pipe Connectors, Inc., Series 1055 with shear ring SR-8; 2. Band Seal by Mission Rubber Co., Inc.; 3. Approved equal. B For connection between new PVC pipe stub out and new service,use rubber-gasketed adapter coupling: 1. GPK Products, Inc., IPS & Sewer Adapter. 2. Approved Equal. 2.04 STACKS A Provide stacks for service connections wherever the crown of the sewer is 8 feet or more below finished grade. B Construct stacks of the same material as the sanitary sewer and as shown on the Plans. C Provide stacks of the same nominal diameter at the sanitary service line. 2.05 CLEAN-OUTS A Install clean-outs at property line on each service connection as shown in detail on the Plans. 2.06 PLUGS AND CAPS A Seal the upstream end of unconnected sewer service stubs with rubber gasketed plugs or caps of the same pipe type and size. Provide plugs or caps by GPK Products, Inc., or equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A Accurately field locate service connections, whether in service or not, as pipe laying progresses from downstream to upstream. B Properly disconnect existing connections from the sewer and reconnect to the new sewer, as described in this Section. C Reconnect service connections, including those that go to unoccupied or abandoned buildings, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Plug the service connection at the R.O.W. for vacant lots. 02/2008 02531 -4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS D Connect services 8 inches in diameter and larger to the sewer by construction of a manhole. 3.02 PREPARATION A Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety System. B Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C Provide a minimum of 48 hours notice to customers whose sanitary sewer service will potentially be interrupted. D Schedule Work so that reconnection of service lines can be completed within 24 hours after disconnection. E Where sewers are existing,field locate existing service connections,whether in service or not. Use existing service locations for reconnection of service lines to new liner or new sanitary sewer main. F For new parallel and replacement sanitary sewer mains, complete testing and acceptance of downstream sewers as applicable. 3.03 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 3.04 RECONNECTION ON NEW SEWER A Install the new service connection on the new sanitary sewer main for each service connection. B Remove and replace cracked, offset or leaking service line for up to 5 feet, measured horizontally, from the centerline of the new sanitary sewer main. C Make up the connection between the new main and the existing service line using PVC sewer pipe and approved couplings, as shown on the Plans. D Test service connections before backfilling. E Embed the service connection and service line as specified for the new sanitary sewer main at this location, and as shown on the Plans. Place and compact trench zone backfill in compliance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 02/2008 02531 -5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS 3.05 INSTALLATION OF NEW SERVICE LEADS A Install the new service connections on the new sanitary sewer main for each service connection. Provide the length of stub indicated on the Plans. Install plug or cap on the upstream end of the service stub as needed. B Test service connections before backfilling. C Embed the service connection and service line as specified for the new sanitary sewer main at this location, and as shown on the Plans. Place and compact trench zone backfill in compliance with Section 02318 —Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Test service reconnections and service stubs. Follow applicable procedures given in Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers. 3.07 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.08 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain all installations good condition until completion of Work. B Replace installations by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. C Do not allow sand, debris or runoff to enter sewer system. END OF SECTION 02/2008 02531 -6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE Section 02534 PVC PIPE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe for water distribution in nominal diameters 4 inches through 16 inches. B. Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe for gravity sanitary sewers in nominal diameters 4 inches through 48 inches. C. Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe for gravity sanitary sewers and force mains in nominal diameters 4 inches through 36 inches. D. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02634—Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 3. Section 02533 —Sanitary Sewage Force Mains 4. Section 02512—Polyethylene Wrap 5. Section 02510—Water Mains 6. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers 7. Section 02731 —Sanitary Sewage Force Mains 8. Section 02630—Storm Sewers 9. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities E. Referenced Standards: 1. American Water Works Association(AWWA) a. AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4"— 12" for Water Distribution. b. AWWA C905 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Transmission Pipe, Nominal Diameters, 14in. Through 36 in. c. AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 1784,"Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds" b. ASTM F 477,"Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals(Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe" 05/2013 02534- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE c. ASTM D 3139,"Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" d. ASTM D 3034, "Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings" e. ASTM F 949,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a Smooth Interior and Fittings" f. ASTM D 794,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter" g. ASTM F 679,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings" h. ASTM D 2241,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe(SDR Series)" i. ASTM D 3212,"Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" j. ASTM D 2444, "Standard Test Method for Determination for the Impact Resistance of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a Tup(Falling Weight)" k. ASTM D 1248, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable" 1. ASTM D 2321, "Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications" 3. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) a. ANSI A21.10 Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Fittings,2 thru 48 in./Water. b. ANSI A21.11 Rubber Gasket Joints Cast and Ductile Iron Press Pipe. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for PVC pipe under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for Water Mains,Gravity Sanitary Sewer,and Sanitary Sewage Force Mains. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit Shop Drawings showing design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, fabrication, fittings, flanges, and special details. 05/2013 02534-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A. Submit manufacturer's certifications that PVC pipe and fittings meet requirements of this Section and AWWA C900 or AWWA C905 for pressure pipe applications,or the appropriate ASTM standard specified for gravity sewer pipe. B. Submit manufacturer's certification that PVC pressure pipe has been hydrostatically tested at the factory in accordance with AWWA C900 or AWWA C905 and this Section. C. When foreign manufactured material is proposed for use, have material tested for conformance to applicable ASTM requirements by certified independent testing laboratory located in United States. Certification from any other source is not acceptable. Furnish copies of test reports to the Engineer for review. Cost of testing shall be borne by Contractor or Supplier. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Use PVC compounds in the manufacture of pipe that contain no ingredient in an amount that has been demonstrated to migrate into water in quantities considered to be toxic. B. Furnish PVC pressure pipe manufactured from Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin PVC compounds as defined in ASTM D 1784. Use compounds qualifying for a rating of 4000 psi for water at 73.4 degrees F per requirements of PPI TR3. Provide pipe which is homogeneous throughout,free of voids,cracks,inclusions,and other defects, uniform as commercially practical in color, density, and other physical properties. Deliver pipe with surfaces free from nicks and scratches with joining surfaces of spigots and joints free from gouges and imperfections which could cause leakage. C. For PVC pressure pipe used for water mains,provide self-extinguishing PVC pipe that bears Underwriters'Laboratories mark of approval and is acceptable without penalty to Texas State Fire Insurance Committee for use in fire protection lines. D. Gaskets: 1. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 477. Use elastomeric factory- installed gaskets to make joints flexible and watertight. 2. Pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas, especially where free product is found near the elevation of the proposed sewer, shall have the following gasket materials for the noted contaminants. 05/2013 02534 -3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE CONTAMINANT GASKET MATERIAL REQUIRED Petroleum (diesel, gasoline) Nitrile Rubber Other contaminants As recommended by the pipe manufacturer E. Lubricant for rubber-gasketed joints: Water soluble,non-toxic,non-objectionable in taste and odor imparted to fluid, non-supporting of bacteria growth, having no deteriorating effect on PVC or rubber gaskets. 2.02 WATER SERVICE PIPE A. Pipe 4-inch through 12-inch: AWWAC900, Class 150, DR 18; nominal 20-foot lengths; cast iron equivalent outside diameters. B. Pipe 16-inch: AWWA C905; Class 235; DR 18; nominal 20 foot lengths; cast iron equivalent outside diameter. C. Joints: ASTM D 3139; push-on type joints in integral bell or separate sleeve couplings. Do not use socket type or solvent weld type joints. D. Make curves and bends by deflecting the joints. Do not exceed maximum deflection recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends for review by the Engineer. E. Hydrostatic Test: AWWA C900, AWWA C905, ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110); at point of manufacture; submit manufacturer's written certification. 2.03 BENDS AND FITTINGS FOR PVC PRESSURE PIPE A. Bends and Fittings: ANSI A21.10, ductile iron; ANSI A21.11 single rubber gasket push-on type joint; minimum 150 psi pressure rating. B. Coatings and Linings: Conform to requirements of Section 02634—Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2.04 GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE A. PVC gravity sanitary sewer pipe shall be in accordance with the provisions in the following table: 05/2013 02534-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE WALL PRODUCT ASTM SDR(MAX.)/ DIAMETER TYPE MANUFACTURER OPTIONS DESIGNATION STIFFNESS(MIN.) SIZE RANGE Solid J-M Pipe Approved D3034 SDR 26/PS 115 6"to 15" CertainTeed Approved F679 SDR 26/PS 115 18"to 48" Can-Tex Approved AWWA C900 DR 18/N/A*** 4"to 12" Carlo Diamond Approved AWWA C905 DR 18/N/A*** 14"to 36" Profile* Contech A-2000** Only when F949 N/A/50 psi 12"to 36" included in the ETI Ultra-Rib Bid Schedule F794 N/A/46 psi 12"to 48" Lamson Vylon F794 N/A/46 psi 21"to 48" * Allowed to be used where there are no service taps. ** Allowed to be used to maximum depth of 10' only. ***For water-seer separation requirements unless specifically noted in Bid Schedule. B. When solid wall PVC pipe 18 inches to 27 inches in diameter is required in SDR 26, provide pipe conforming to ASTM F679,except provide wall thickness as required for SDR 26 and pipe strength of 115 psi. C. For sewers up to 12-inch-diameter crossing over waterlines, or crossing under waterlines with less than 2 feet separation, provide minimum 150 psi pressure-rated pipe conforming to ASTM D 2241 with suitable PVC adapter couplings. D. Joints: Spigot and integral wall section bell with solid cross section elastometric or rubber ring gasket conforming to requirements of ASTM D 3212 and ASTM F 477. E. ASTM D 3139 and ASTM F 477 shall be provided. Gaskets shall be factory- assembled and securely bonded in place to prevent displacement. The manufacturer shall test a sample from each batch conforming to requirements ASTM D 2444. F. Fittings: Provide PVC gravity sewer sanitary bends, tee, or wye fittings for new sanitary sewer construction. PVC pipe fittings shall be full-bodied, either injection molded or factory fabricated. Saddle-type tee or wye fittings are not acceptable. 2.05 SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAIN PIPE A. Provide PVC pressure pipe conforming to the requirements for water service pipe,and conforming to the minimum working pressure rating specified in Section 02533 — Sanitary Sewage Force Mains. B. Acceptable pipe joints are integral bell-and-spigot,containing a bonded-in elastomeric sealing ring meeting the requirements of ASTM F 477. In designated areas requiring restrained joint pipe and fittings, use EBAA Iron Series 2000PV, Uniflange Series 1350 restrainer,or equal joint restraint device conforming to UNI-B-13,for PVC pipe 12-inch diameter and less. 05/2013 02534-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE C. Fittings: Provide ductile iron fittings as per this Section,2.03 "Bends and Fittings for PVC Pressure Pipe", except furnish all fittings with one of the following internal linings: 1. Nominal 40 mils (35 mils minimum) virgin polyethylene complying with ASTM D 1248,heat fused to the interior surface of the fitting,as manufactured by American Cast Iron Pipe "Polybond", or U.S. Pipe "Polyline". 2. Nominal 40 mils(35 mils minimum)polyurethane,Corro-pipe II by Madison Chemicals, Inc. 3. Nominal 40 mils(35 mils minimum)ceramic epoxy,Protecto 401 by Enduron Protective Coatings. D. Exterior Protection: Provide polyethylene wrapping of ductile iron fittings as required by Section 02512—Polyethylene Wrap. E. Hydrostatic Tests: Hydrostatically test pressure rated pipe in accordance with this Section, 2.02E. F. Manufacturers: Approved manufacturers of pressure rated, solid wall PVC pipe for sanitary sewer force mains are: 1. J &M Manufacturing Company, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corporation 3. Diamond Plastics Corporation 4. Carlon Company 5. North American Pipe Corporation(NAPCO) 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION A. Store pipe under cover out of direct sunlight and protect from excessive heat or harmful chemicals in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Conform to requirements of Section 02510—Water Mains, Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers,Section 02731 —Sanitary Sewage Force Mains,and Section 02630— Storm Sewers. B. Install PVC pipe in accordance with Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities,ASTM D 2321, and manufacturer's recommendations. 05/2013 02534-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE C. Water service pipe 12 inches in diameter and smaller: Installed to clear utility lines and have minimum 4 feet of cover below lowest property line grade of street,unless otherwise required by Plans. D. For water service,exclude use of PVC within 200 feet(along the public right-of-way) of underground storage tanks or in undeveloped commercial acreage. Underground storage tanks are primarily located on service stations but can exist at other commercial establishments. E. Avoid imposing strains that will overstress or buckle the pipe when lowering pipe into trench. F. Hand shovel pipe bedding under the pipe haunches and along the sides of the pipe barrel and compact to eliminate voids and ensure side support. END OF SECTION 05/2013 02534-7 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND TAPPING SLEEVES & VALVES Section 02540 TAPPING SLEEVES & VALVES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Tapping sleeves and valves for connections to existing water system. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement& Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 02541 —Water&Wastewater Line Valves 4. Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, &Meter Vaults 5. Section 02512—Polyethylene Wrap 6. Section 02318 —Excavation &Backfill for Utilities C Referenced Standards: 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C500 Gate Valves, 3 Through 48 in. NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems. b. AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water c. AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service—Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for installation of tapping sleeves and valves is on a per each basis. Payment includes all labor and materials required for installation as indicated on Plans. B Refer to Section 01200—Measurement &Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A Provide manufacturer's affidavit that all valves purchased for tapping of existing waterlines conform to Section 02541 — Water & Wastewater Line Valves and to applicable requirements of AWWA C500 and that they have been satisfactorily tested in accordance with AWWA C500. 02/2008 02540- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TAPPING SLEEVES & VALVES 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Tapping Sleeves: 1. Tapping Sleeve Bodies: Stainless steel; in two sections to be bolted together with high-strength,corrosion-resistant,low-alloy,steel bolts;mechanical joint ends. a. 12 inch and smaller: stainless steel; JCM 432, Romac, or approved equal. b. 16 inch and larger:epoxy coated ductile iron;JCM,or approved equal. 2. Branch Outlet of Tapping Sleeve: Flanged;machined recess; AWWA C207, Class D,ANSI 150 lb drilling. Gasket: Affixed around recess of tap opening to preclude rolling or binding during installation. 3. Where fire service from 6-inch main is approved, use cast iron split sleeve. B Tapping Valves: Meet all requirements of Section 02541—Water&Wastewater Line Valves with following exceptions: 1. Inlet Flanges: a. AWWA C110; Class 125. b. AWWA C110; Class 150 and higher: Minimum eight hole flange. 2. Outlet: Standard mechanical or push-on joint; to fit any standard tapping machine. 3. Valve Seat Opening: Accommodate full-size shell cutter for nominal size tap without any contact with valve body; double disc. 4. Open Left operation only. C Valve Boxes: Furnish and install according to Section 02520— Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, &Meter Vaults. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A Install tapping sleeves and valves at locations and of sizes as shown on Drawings. B Thoroughly clean tapping sleeve, tapping valve and pipe prior to installation and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C Hydrostatically test installed tapping sleeve to 150 psig for a minimum of 15 minutes. Inspect sleeve for leaks, and remedy leaks prior to tapping operation. D When tapping concrete pressure pipe, size on size, use shell cutter one standard size smaller than waterline being tapped. E Do not use Large End Bell(LEB)increasers with a next size tap unless existing pipe is asbestos-cement. 02/2008 02540-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TAPPING SLEEVES & VALVES 3.02 INSTALLATION A Tighten bolts in proper sequence so that undue stress is not placed on pipe. B Align tapping valve properly and attach it to tapping sleeve. C Make tap with sharp, shell cutter: 1. For 12-inch and smaller tap, use minimum cutter diameter one-half inch less than nominal tap size. 2. For 16-inch and larger tap, use manufacturer's recommended cutter diameter. D Withdraw coupon and flush all cuttings from newly-made tap. E Wrap completed tapping sleeve and valve in accordance with Section 02512 — Polyethylene Wrap. F Place concrete thrust block behind tapping sleeve (NOT over tapping sleeve and valve). G Block under valve using concrete blocks. H Request inspection of installation prior to backfilling. I Backfill in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation &Backfill for Utilities. END OF SECTION 02/2008 02540-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES Section 02541 WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Gate valves, Plug Valves, Butterfly Valves, Air Release and Pressure Reducing Valves. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittal Procedures 3. Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults 4. Section 02542—Concrete Manholes 5. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 6. Section 02510—Water Mains C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 307, "Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength" b. ASTM B 763,"Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Casting for Valve Applications" c. ASTM B 62, "Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings" d. ASTM D 429,"Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to Rigid Substrates" e. ASTM A 126, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings" f. ASTM A 48, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings" g. ASTM A 240,"Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium- Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications" h. ASTM A 276, "Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes" i. ASTM B 584,"Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications" j. ASTM A 313,"Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Spring Wire" 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C500 Gate Valves, 3 Through 48 in. NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems. b. AWWA C509 or AWWA C515 Resilient-seated Gate Valves, 3 through 12 NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems c. AWWA C550 Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants d. AWWA C504 Rubber-Sealed Butterfly Valves 04/2009 02541 - 1 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for valves under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for water mains. B Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. C Stipulated Price(Lump Sum). If the Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract,payment for work in this Section is included in the total Stipulated Price. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit manufacturer's product data for proposed valves for approval. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A Submit manufacturer's affidavit that gate valves are manufactured in the United States and conform to stated requirements of AWWA C500, AWWA C509 and AWWA C515 and this Section,and that they have been satisfactorily tested in the United States in accordance with AWWA C500, AWWA C509 and AWWA C515. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GATE VALVES A Gate Valves: AWWA C500, AWWA C509 or C515 and additional requirements of this Section.Direct bury valves and those in subsurface vaults,aboveground and plant valves open counterclockwise. B If type of valve is not indicated on Plans, use gate valves as line valves for sizes less than 16-inches. If type of valve is indicated, no substitute is allowed. C Gate Valves 1-1/2 Inches in Diameter and Smaller: 125 psig; bronze; rising-stem; single-wedge; disc type; screwed ends; such as Crane No. 428, or approved equal. D Coatings for Gate Valves 2 Inches and Larger: AWWA C550; Indurall 3300 or approved equal, non-toxic,imparts no taste to water,functions as physical,chemical, and electrical barrier between base metal and surroundings, minimum 8-mil-thick, fusion-bonded epoxy. Prior to assembly of valve, apply protective coating to interior and exterior surfaces of body. E Gate Valves 2 Inches in Diameter: Iron body,double gate,non-rising stern, 1 50-pound test, 2 inch square nut operating clockwise to open. 04/2009 02541 -2 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES F Gate Valves 4 Inches to 12 Inches in Diameter: Non-directional, resilient seated (AWWA C509 or AWWA C515) or parallel seat double disc (AWWA C500), 200 psig, bronze mounting, push-on bell ends with rubber joint rings, and nut-operated unless otherwise specified. Provide resilient seated valves manufactured by American Darling AFC-500, US Pipe Metroseal 200, or approved equal. Provide double disc valves manufactured by American Darling 52, Clow F-6102, or approved equal. Comply with following requirements: 1. Design: Fully encapsulated rubber wedge or rubber seat ring mechanically attached with minimum 304 stainless-steel fasteners or screws; threaded connection isolated from water by compressed rubber around opening. 2. Body: Cast or ductile iron, flange bonnet and stuffing box together with ASTM A 307 Grade B bolts.Manufacturer's initials,pressure rating,and year manufactured shall be cast in body. 3. Bronze: Valve components in waterway to contain not more than 15 percent zinc and not more than 2 percent aluminum. 4. Stems: ASTM B 763 bronze, alloy number 995 minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi; minimum elongation in 2 inches of 12 percent, non-rising. 5. 0-rings: AWWA C509, sections 2.2.6 and 4.8.2. 6. Stem Seals: Consist of three 0-rings, two above and one below thrust collar with anti-friction washer located above thrust collar. 7. Stem Nut: Independent or integrally cast of ASTM B 62 bronze. 8. Resilient Wedge: Molded,synthetic rubber,vulcanized and bonded to cast or ductile iron wedge or attached with 304 stainless steel screws tested to meet or exceed ASTM D 429, Method B; seat against epoxy-coated surface in valve body. 9. Bolts: AWWA C509 Section 4.4; stainless steel; cadmium plated, or zinc coated. G Gate Valves 16 Inches to 24 Inches in Diameter: AWWA C500 by Mueller;push-on bell ends with rubber rings and nut-operated unless otherwise specified,double disc, 150 psi, and comply with the following: 1. Body: Cast or ductile iron; flange together bonnet and stuffing box with ASTM A 307 Grade B bolts. Manufacturer's initials,pressure rating,and year manufactured shall be cast in body. Equip with rollers, tracks, and scrapers. 2. Stems: Machined from ASTM B 62 bronze rod with integral forged thrust collar machined to size; non-rising. 3. Stem Seals: Consist of one 0-ring above and one 0-ring below thrust collar with anti-friction washer located above thrust collar for operating torque. 4. Stem Nut: Independent or integrally cast of ASTM B 62 bronze. 5. Discs: Cast iron with bronze disc rings securely peened into machined dovetailed grooves. 6. Wedging Device: Solid bronze or cast-iron, bronze-mounted wedges. Thin plates or shapes integrally cast into cast-iron surfaces are acceptable. Other moving surfaces integral to wedging action shall be bronze monel or nickel alloy-to-iron. 04/2009 02541 -3 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 7. Bronze Mounting: Built as integral unit mounted over, or supported on, cast iron base and of sufficient dimensions to be structurally sound and adequate for imposed forces. 8. Gear Cases: Cast iron;furnished on 18-inch and larger valves and of extended type with steel side plates, lubricated, gear case enclosed with oil seal or 0- rings at shaft openings. 9. Stuffing Boxes: Located on top of bonnet and outside gear case. H Gate Valves 20 Inches and Larger: Furnish and equip with bypass valves. 1. Sizes: Provide 3-inch bypass valves for 16-inch through 20 inch gate valves. Provide 4-inch bypass valves for 24-inch gate valves. I Valves 4 Inches through 12 Inches for Installation in Vertical Pipe Lines: 1. Double disc, square bottom. J Valves 14 Inches and Larger for Installation in Horizontal Pipe Lines: 1. Equipped with bronze shoes and slides. K Gate Valves Installed at Greater than 4 foot Depth: 1. Provide non-rising, extension stem having coupling sufficient to attach securely to operating nut of valve. Upper end of extension stem shall terminate in square wrench nut no deeper than 4 feet from finished grade. L Gate Valves in Factory Mutual (Fire Service)Type Meter Installations: 1. Conform to provisions of this specification; outside screw and yoke valves; carry label of Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc.;flanged,Class 125;clockwise to close. M Provide flanged joints when valve is connected to steel or PCCP. 2.02 BUTTERFLY VALVES AND ACTUATORS A Butterfly Valves and Actuators: Conform to AWWA C504, except as modified or supplemented herein. Provide valves manufactured by Keystone International, American-Darling, or approved equal. B If type of valve is not indicated on Plans,butterfly valves shall be used for line valve sizes 16 inch and larger. If type of valve is specified, no substitute will be allowed. C Butterfly valves shall be short-body,flanged design and installed at locations as shown on Plans. D Direct-bury valves,valves in subsurface vaults. Above-ground and plant valves shall open counterclockwise. E Provide flanged joints when valve is connected to steel or PCCP. F Butterfly Valves and Actuators(Additional Requirements for Large-Diameter Water Mains): Valves larger than 72 inches in diameter shall have all components designed 04/2009 02541 -4 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES so that the allowable stresses at rated pressure shall not exceed one-third of the yield strength or one-fifth of the ultimate strength of the material used. Provide valves manufactured by Keystone International, American-Darling, or equal. 2.03 BUTTERFLY VALVE CONSTRUCTION A Valves: AWWA C504, Class 150B. Body: Cast iron, ASTM A 126, Class B. Flanges: ANSI B 16.1, Class 125 lb. B Discs for Butterfly Valves: Either cast iron or ductile iron. C Seats: Buna-N or neoprene, and may be applied to disc or body. Seats shall be mechanically secured and may not rely solely on adhesive properties of epoxy or similar bonding agent to attach seat to body. Seats on disc shall be mechanically retained by stainless steel(18-8)retaining ring held in place by stainless steel(18-8) cap screws that pass through rubber seat for added retention. When seat is on disc, seat shall be retained in position by shoulders located on both disc and stainless-steel retaining ring. Mating surfaces for seats: Type 304 or 316,stainless steel and secured to disc by mechanical means. Sprayed-on or plated mating surfaces will not be allowed. D Coat interior wetted ferrous surfaces of valve,including disc, with epoxy suitable for potable-water conditions. Epoxy, surface preparation, and epoxy application: In accordance with AWWA C550 and coating manufacturer's recommendations. Provide two coats of two-component, high-build epoxy with minimum dry thickness of 10 mils. Epoxy coating: Indurall 3300 or approved equal. Coatings shall be holiday tested and measured for thickness. E Valve shaft and keys,dowel pins, or taper pins used for attaching valve shaft to valve disc: Type-304 or 316 stainless steel. Shaft Bearings: Stainless steel,bronze,nylon, or Teflon (supported by fiberglass mat or backing material with proven record of preventing Teflon flow under load) in accordance with AWWA C504. F Packing: Field-adjustable, split-V type, and replaceable without removing operator assembly. G Retaining Hardware for Seats: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. Nuts and screws used with clamps and discs for rubber seats shall be held securely with locktight, or other approved method, to prevent loosening by vibration or cavitational effects. H Valve disc shall seat in position at 90 degrees to the pipe axis and shall rotate 90 degrees between full-open and tight-closed position. Install valves with valve shafts horizontal and convex side of disc facing anticipated direction of flow, except where shown otherwise on Plans. 2.04 BUTTERFLY VALVE ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION A Provide actuators for valves with size based on line velocity of 16 feet per second, and, unless otherwise shown on Plans, equip with geared manual actuators. Provide 04/2009 02541 -5 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES fully enclosed and traveling-nut type, rack-and-pinion type, or worm-gear type for valves 24 inches and smaller. B Provide actuator designed for installation with valve shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated on Plans. C Provide valve shaft extended from valve to actuator. Space between actuator housing and valve body shall be completely enclosed so that no moving parts are exposed to soil or elements. D Provide oil-tight and watertight actuator housings for valves,specifically designed for buried service or submerged service when located in valve vaults, and factory packed with suitable grease. E Install a valve position indicator on each actuator housing located above ground or in valve vaults. Valves shall be equipped with 2-inch actuator nut only. F Indicate direction of opening of valve on exposed visible part of assembly. G Design worm-gear or traveling-nut actuators so that a torque of 150 foot-pounds, or less,will operate valve at most adverse condition for which valve is designed.Vertical axis of actuating nut shall not move as valve is opened or closed. 2.05 VALVE BOXES A Provide standard adjustable valve boxes only conforming to requirements of Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults. 2.06 VALVE SERVICE MANHOLES A For large-diameter water mains, provide manholes to dimensions shown on Plans conforming to requirements of Section 02542—Concrete Manholes. 2.07 AIR RELEASE AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES A Air Release Valves: Apco No. 200, GA Industries Fig. 2-AR, or equal. Materials: body and cover, ASTM A 48, Class 30, cast iron; float and leverage mechanism, ASTM A 240 or A276 stainless steel;orifice and seat,stainless steel against Buna-N or Viton mechanically retained with hex head nut and bolt;other valve internals,stainless steel or bronze. Provide inlet and outlet connections, and orifice as shown on Plans. B Air Release and Vacuum Valves: Provide single-body, standard combination or duplex-body custom combination valves as indicated on Plans. 1. For 2 inch and 3 inch, single-body valves, provide inlet and outlet sizes as shown on Plans and orifice sized for 100 psi working pressure. Valve materials: body, cover and baffle, ASTM A 48, Class 35, or ASTM A 126, Grade B cast iron;plug or poppet,ASTM A 276 stainless steel;float,ASTM A 240 stainless steel; seat, Buna-N; other valve internals, stainless steel. Valve exterior: Painted with shop-applied primer suitable for contact with potable 04/2009 02541 -6 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES water. Provide Apco Model 145C or 147C, Val-Matic Series 200, or equal valves. 2. For 3 inch and larger duplex body valves as shown on Plans, provide Apco Series 1700 with No. 200 air release valve, GA Industries Fig. No. AR/GH- 21K/280, or equal. Air and vacuum valve materials: body and cover, ASTM A 48, Class 35, cast iron; float, ASTM A 240 stainless steel; seat, Type-304, stainless steel and Buna-N;other valve internals,stainless steel or bronze. Air release valve: Constructed as specified in paragraph above on Air Release Valves. C Vacuum Relief Valves: Provide air inlet vacuum relief valves with flanged inlet and outlet connections as shown on Plans. Provide air release valves in combination with inlet and outlet, and orifice as shown on Plans. Valve shall open under pressure differential not to exceed 0.25 psi. Provide Apco Series 1500 with a No. 200A air release valve, GA Industries Fig. No. HCARV, or approved equal. Materials for vacuum relief valves: valve body, ASTM A 48, Class 35, cast iron; seat and plug, ASTM B 584 bronze, copper alloy 836; spring, ASTM A 313, Type-304, stainless steel;bushing,ASTM B 584 bronze,copper alloy 932;retaining screws,ASTM A 276, Type-304, stainless steel. D Air Release Valve Vault as detailed in Plans. 2.08 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A Provide Cla-Val Model 90-01, or approved equal, PRV with strainer in location and arrangement as shown on Plans. Valve body: ASTM A 48,cast iron or ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with ANSI B16.1, Class 125, flanges. Valve cover: ASTM A 48 cast iron. Valve internals: Type-303, stainless steel or B-62 bronze. Rubber parts: Buna-N. No leather parts shall be allowed. Resilient seat shall have rectangular cross section. B Control Tubing: Contain shutoff cocks with "Y" strainer. C PRV: Equip with valve position indicator. Initially set in field by authorized manufacturer's representative with 60 psi downstream pressure. D Provide basket strainer upstream of PRV as shown on Plans. Strainer body: quick- opening type, fabricated-steel construction with ANSI B16.1, Class 150, flanges. Basket: Type-304, stainless steel. Provide Hayward Model 90, or equal, for PRV 4- inch through 24-inch. Provide Hayward Model 510, or equal, for PRV 14 inches or greater when space limitations dictate the use of smaller strainer housing. E Pilot Systems for PRV: Adjustable and pressure sustaining. F Valve Box: Valve Box conforming to requirements of Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter boxes, and Meter Vaults. 04/2009 02541 -7 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Earthwork. Conform to applicable provisions of Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B Operation. Do not use valves for throttling without prior approval of manufacturer. 3.02 SETTING VALVES AND VALVE BOXES A Remove foreign matter from within valves prior to installation. Inspect valves in open and closed positions to verify that parts are in satisfactory working condition. B Install valves and valve boxes where shown on Plans. Set valves plumb and as detailed. Center valve boxes on valves. Carefully tamp earth around each valve box for minimum radius of 4 feet, or to undisturbed trench face if less than 4 feet. Install valves completely closed when placed in water line. C For pipe section of each valve box,use only cast iron,ductile iron,or DR18 PVC pipe cut to proper length. Size to allow future operation of valve. Assemble and brace box in vertical position as indicated on Plans. 3.03 DISINFECTION AND TESTING A Perform disinfection and testing of valves and appurtenances as required by Section 02510—Water Mains. B Repair or replace valves which exceed the allowable specified leakage rate. 3.04 PAINTING OF VALVES A Paint valves in vaults, stations, and above ground using ACRO Paint No. 2215, or approved equal. END OF SECTION 04/2009 02541 -8 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES Section 02542 CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre-Cast Concrete Manholes for sanitary. B. Pre-Cast and Cast-in-Place Manholes for storm sewer. C. Iron castings for manhole frames and covers, inlet frames and grates, catch basin frames and grates,meter vault frames and covers, adjustment rings and extensions. D. Ring grates. E. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 5. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 7. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers 8. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises F. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM C 478,"Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections" b. ASTM C 443,"Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets" c. ASTM C 270, "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" d. ASTM C 923, "Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures,Pipes and Laterals" e. ASTM C 1107,"Standard Specification for Packaged Dry,Hydraulic- Cement Grout(Nonshrink)" f. ASTM A 48, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings" g. ASTM A 615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" h. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" 05/2013 02542 - 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 3. American Water Works Association(AWWA) 4. American Welding Society(AWS) a. AWS D12.1, "Reinforcing Steel Welding Code" 5. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ). a. Chapter 217.55 "Minimum Clear Opening" G. Definitions: 1. Shallow Depth Manholes-manholes having a depth of 4 feet or less measured from the top of cover to sewer invert. 2. Normal Depth Manholes-manholes having a depth of greater than 4 feet and up to 8 feet measured from top of cover to sewer invert. 3. Extra Depth Manholes- manholes having a depth of greater than 8 feet measured from the top of cover to sewer invert. 4. Corrosion Resistant Manholes- concrete manholes incorporating additional material, such as liners or coatings, which make them more resistant to corrosion than typical concrete manholes. 5. Standard Manholes Drops- drops of up to 3 vertical feet measured from the invert of the T-fitting to the sewer invert. 6. Extra Depth Manhole Drops-drops in excess of 3 vertical feet measured from the invert of the T-fitting to the sewer invert. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for Normal Depth Manholes and/or Normal Depth Corrosion Resistant Manholes shall be per each. B. Measurement for Shallow Depth Manholes and/or Shallow Depth Corrosion Resistant Manholes shall be per each. C. Measurement for Extra Depth Manholes and/or Extra Depth Corrosion Resistant Manholes is on a vertical foot basis for each foot of depth greater than 8 feet. D. Payment for Manholes under this Section shall be for complete installation including riser, frames, grates, adjustment rings, stainless steel inflow preventers, cut-in work, covers,penetrations,other appurtenances,and be in accordance with Section 01200— Measurement and Payment Procedures. 05/2013 02542-2 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES E. Measurement for Standard Manhole Drops shall be per each. F. Measurement for Extra Depth Manhole Drops is on a vertical foot basis for each foot of Drop greater than 3 feet. G. Payment for Drops under this Section shall be for assembly components,encasement, other appurtenances, and be in accordance with Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. H. Payment for Air Release Manhole with Valves and Fittings installed is on a unit price basis for each manhole with air release valves,fittings and appurtenances installed and in accordance with Section 01200 Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Perform work needed to make manholes structurally sound, improve flow, prevent entrance of inflow or groundwater, prevent entrance of soil or debris, and provide protection against hydrogen sulfide gas attack. B. Manufacturer's Product Support. 1. Through the Contractor,manufacturers of wall sealing or lining systems shall submit to Engineer for review and approval a detailed description of the proposed coating installation process. Describe surface preparation, independent laboratory test results, mix design procedures and method of controlling uniform thickness. 2. A representative employed by the manufacturer and having technical training in epoxy or cementitious liner shall be named and available for consultation by telephone during business hours and on site upon 48 hours notice. 3. Manufacturer's representative on concrete lining systems shall provide technical assistance to applicators to ensure proper usage of dispensing equipment and accurate proportions of admixtures. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit proposed design mix and test data for each type and strength of concrete. C. Submit manufacturer's data and details of following items for approval: 1. Frames, grates,rings, and covers. 2. Materials to be used in fabricating drops. 05/2013 02542 -3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 3. Materials to be used for pipe connections at manhole walls. 4. Materials to be used for stubs and stub plugs. 5. Plugs to be used for sanitary sewer hydrostatic testing. 6. Shop Drawings of manhole sections and base units and construction details, including reinforcement,jointing methods,materials and dimensions. 7. Certification from manufacturer that precast manhole design is in full accordance with ASTM C 478 and design criteria as established in this Section, 2.03E, "Design Loading Criteria". 8. Product data, materials and procedures for corrosion resistant liner and coatings, if required. For coating and resistant liner systems requiring 10-yr manufacturer warranty, submit specific coating system including product, thickness, and application for Engineer's approval. 9. Manufacturer's data for pre-mix(bag)concrete,if used for channel inverts and benches. D. Installer Qualifications: Installers of liners and wall repair systems shall submit qualifications to Engineer at least 14 days prior to start of any material application. Submittal shall consist of: 1. Manufacturer's approved equipment list, by name and model number for application of product and contractor's equipment list showing approved equipment available for use in product application. 2. List of contractor's personnel who have satisfactorily completed manufacturer's training in product application within previous two years. Include date of certification for each person. E. Provide Shop Drawings for fabrication and erection of casting assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections and connection details. Show anchorage and accessory items. Include Setting Drawings for location and installation of castings and anchorage devices. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete shall conform to requirements in Section 03300- Cast-In Place Concrete. B. Minimum concrete compressive strength of 4000 psi. 05/2013 02542 -4 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES C. Reinforcing Steel shall conform to requirement in Se ction 03300-Cast-In Place Concrete. D. Mortar shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 270,Type S using Portland cement. 2.02 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES A. Use manhole sections and base sections conforming to ASTM C 478. Use base riser section with integral floors,unless shown otherwise. Provide adjustment rings which are standard components of the manufacturer of the manhole sections meeting material requirements of ASTM C 478. Mark date of manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer on inside of barrel. B. Construct barrels for precast manholes from 48-inch diameter standard reinforced concrete manhole sections unless otherwise indicated on Plans. Use various lengths of manhole sections in combination to provide the correct height with the fewest joints. Wall sections shall be designed for depth as shown and loading conditions as described in this Section,2.03E,"Design Load Criteria",but shall not be less than 5 inches thick. Base section shall have a minimum thickness of 12 inches under the invert. C. Provide cone tops to receive 30-inch cast iron frames and covers, unless indicated otherwise. Use tops designed to support an AASHTO H-20 loading. D. Where the Plans indicate that manholes larger than 48-inch diameter are required, precast base sections of the required diameter shall be provided with flat slab top precast sections used to transition to 48-inch diameter manhole access riser sections. Transition can be concentric or eccentric. The transition shall be located to provide a minimum of 7-foot head clearance from the top of bench to underside of transition. E. Design Loading Criteria: The manhole walls,transition slabs,cone tops,and manhole base slab shall be designed by the manufacturer to the requirements of ASTM C 478 for the depth as shown on Plans and the following design criteria: 1. AASHTO H-20 loading applied to the manhole cover and transmitted down to the transition and base slabs. 2. Unit soil weight of 120 pcf located above all portions of the manhole, including base slab projections. 3. Lateral soil pressure based on saturated soil conditions producing an at-rest equivalent fluid pressure of 100 pcf, with soil pressure acting on empty manhole. 4. Internal liquid pressure based on a unit weight of 63 pcf,with manhole filled with liquid from invert to cover, with no balancing external soil pressure. 5. Dead load of manhole sections fully supported by the transition and base slabs. 05/2013 02542-5 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 6. Design additional reinforcing steel to transfer stresses at openings. 7. The minimum clear distance between any two wall penetrations shall be 12 inches or half the diameter of the smaller penetration, whichever is greater. F. Form joints between sections with 0-ring gaskets conforming to ASTM C 443. G. Do not incorporate manhole steps in manhole sections. H. Do not use brick masonry in construction of sanitary sewer manholes. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS METALS A. Provide cast-iron frames, grates, rings, covers, and stainless steel inflow preventers conforming to requirements of this Section and the City of Pearland Standard Construction Details. 2.04 DROPS A. Drops shall conform to the same pipe material requirements used in the main pipe, unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. 2.05 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Use resilient connectors conforming to requirements of ASTM C 923. Metallic mechanical devices as defined in ASTM C 923 shall be made of the following materials: 1. External clamps: a. Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Internal, expandable clamps on standard manholes: a. Type 304 stainless steel, 11 gage minimum. 3. Internal, expandable clamps on corrosion-resistant manholes: a. Type 316 stainless steel, 11 gage minimum. b. Type 304 stainless steel, 11 gage minimum, coated with minimum 16 mm fusion-bonded epoxy conforming to AWWA C-213. 4. All precast openings shall be fully circular, 360°openings. B. Where rigid joints between pipe and a cast-in-place manhole base are specified or shown on the Plans, use polyethylene-isoprene water-stop meeting the physical property requirements of ASTM C 923, Press-Seal WS Series, or equal. 05/2013 02542-6 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES C. Storm sewer pipe connections: 1. Connections acceptable for sanitary sewers. 2. Line pipe grouted in place with mortar. Rehabilitate. 2.06 WALL CLEANING MATERIAL A. Cleaners: Detergent or muriatic acid capable of removing dirt, grease, oil and other matter which would prevent a good bond of sealing material to wall. Refer to sealing material manufacturer's recommendations. 2.07 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Sealing materials between precast concrete adjustment ring and manhole cover frame shall be Adeka Ultraseal P201, or approved equal. 2.08 WALL REPAIR MATERIALS A. Hydraulic Cements:Use a blend of cement powders or hydraulic cement to stop active leaks in the manhole structure. B. Quickset Mortar: Use a quickset mortar to repair wide cracks, holes or disintegrated mortar. 2.09 CORROSION RESISTANT MANHOLE MATERIALS A. Provide one of the following as indicated on the Plans: 1. Precast cylindrical Portland cement concrete sanitary sewer manhole sections, base sections, and cone sections with one of the following factory applied internal coatings or approved equal: a. NeoPoxyTM NPR-5300 Series "PureEpoxy" spray on epoxy liner and other required fillers/sealants per manufacturer's recommendations: b. NeoPoxy NPR-3501 high tensile elongation epoxy elastomeric gout and sealant. c. NeoPoxy NPR-5305 trowelable epoxy filler, grout and sealant, d. Chemical and cementitious rapid set hydraulic grouts such as Strong-Plug, Strong-Seal QSR, Quadex Hyperform and Quadex Hydro-Plug, or other equivalents pre-approved by the engineer. 05/2013 02542-7 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES e. NeoPoxy P-88 ultraviolet light resistant topcoat. f. EMACO liner(contact City of Pearland Public Works Department for specific type). g. Raven liner(contact City of Pearland Public Works Department for specific type). h. SewperCoat 100% Calcium aluminate by KerneosTM Aluminate Technologies. 2. Type I Coating: The manufacturer of these applied products shall provide a minimum 10-year material and labor warranty. A 10-year manufacturer warranty shall be applicable for the following sanitary sewer manholes: a. Manholes that receive force main discharge. b. Manholes within the lift/pump station site including last manhole before wet well. c. Manholes with 5 feet diameter and larger or manholes that receive discharge from 15"or larger diameter gravity sewer. d. Manholes as determined by City Engineer. 3. Type II Coating: All other sanitary sewer manholes shall be coated with minimum 125 mil thick coating of products specified in Section 2.09.1.a-d,or approved equal. 2.10 BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Backfill materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials. 2.11 NON-SHRINK GROUT A. For non-shrink grout,use prepackaged,inorganic, flowable,non-gas-liberating,non- metallic, cement-based grout requiring only the addition of water. It shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1107 and shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7000 psi. 05/2013 02542 -8 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 2.12 CASTINGS A. Castings for frames, grates, rings and covers shall conform to City of Pearland Standard Construction Details and shall be ASTM A 48, Class 30. Provide locking covers if indicated on Plans. B. Castings shall be capable of withstanding the application of an AASHTO H-20 loading without permanent deformation. C. Fabricate castings to conform to the shapes, dimensions, and with wording or logos shown on the Plans. D. Castings shall be clean, free from blowholes and other surface imperfections. Cast holes in covers shall be clean and symmetrical, free of plugs. 2.13 BEARING SURFACES A. Machine bearing surfaces between covers or grates and their respective frames so that even bearing is provided for any position in which the casting may be seated in the frame. 2.14 SPECIAL FRAMES AND COVERS A. Where indicated on the Plans,provide watertight manhole frames and covers with a minimum of four bolts and a gasket designed to seal cover to frame. Supply watertight manhole covers and frames, Model R-1916 manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company, Model V-2420 by East Jordan Iron Works, or approval equal. B. Where personnel entry is anticipated, minimum clear openings of 30-inches is required. 2.15 FABRICATED RING GRATES A. Ring grates shall be fabricated from reinforcing steel conforming to ASTM A 615. B. Welds connecting the bars shall conform to AWS D12.1. 2.16 INFLOW PREVENTERS A. Provide stainless steel inflow preventers with air release vents on all sanitary sewer manholes. 05/2013 02542 -9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines and grades are correct. B. Determine if the subgrade,when scarified and re-compacted,can be compacted to 95 percent of maximum Standard Proctor Density according to ASTM D 698 prior to placement of foundation material and base section. If it cannot be compacted to that density,the subgrade shall be moisture conditioned until that density can be reached or shall be treated as an unstable subgrade. C. Do not build sanitary or storm sewer manholes in ditches, swales, or drainage paths unless approved by the Engineer. 3.02 PLACEMENT OF PRECAST MANHOLES A. Install precast manholes to conform to locations and dimensions shown on Plans. B. Place manholes at points of change of alignment, grade, size,pipe intersections, and end of sewer. 3.03 MANHOLE BASE SECTIONS AND FOUNDATIONS A. Place precast base on 12-inch-thick(minimum)foundation of cement stabilized sand or a concrete foundation slab. Compact cement-sand in accordance with requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B. Unstable Subgrade Treatment: When unstable subgrade is encountered,the subgrade will be examined by the Engineer to determine if the subgrade has heaved upwards after being excavated. If heaving has not occurred, the subgrade shall be over- excavated to allow for a 24-inch thick layer of crushed stone wrapped in filter fabric as the foundation material under the manhole base. If there is evidence of heaving,a pile- supported concrete foundation, as detailed on the Plans, shall be provided under the manhole base, when indicated by the Engineer. 3.04 PRECAST MANHOLE SECTIONS A. Install sections, joints, and gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Install precast or steel adjustment rings above tops of cones or flat-top sections as required to adjust the finished elevation and to support manhole frame. C. Seal any lifting holes with non-shrink grout. 05/2013 02542 - 10 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES D. Where PVC liners are required, seal joints between sections in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 3.05 PIPE CONNECTIONS AT MANHOLE A. Install approved resilient connectors at each pipe entering and exiting sanitary sewer manholes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Ensure that no concrete,cement stabilized sand,fill,or other rigid material is allowed to enter the space between the pipe and the edge of the wall opening at and around the resilient connector on either the interior or exterior of the manhole. If necessary, fill the space with a compressible material to guarantee the full flexibility provided by the resilient connector. All pipe openings shall be fully circular, 360° openings. C. Where a new manhole is to be constructed on an existing sewer, install precast manhole base with factory installed Fernco type connections and pipe stubouts at least two (2) feet outside manhole wall. Manhole shall be cut-in to existing pipe. No "horseshoe"or"dog house"type connections will be permitted. D. Do not construct joints on sanitary sewer pipe within wall sections of manholes. Use approved connection material. E. Construct pipe stubs with resilient connectors for future connections at locations and with material indicated on Plans. Install approved stub plugs at interior of manhole. F. Test connection for watertight seal before backfilling. 3.06 INVERTS FOR SANITARY SEWERS A. Construct invert channels to provide a smooth flow transition waterway with no disruption of flow at pipe-manhole connections. Conform to following criteria: 1. Slope of invert bench: 1 inch per foot minimum; 1-1/2 inch per foot maximum. 2. Depth of bench to invert: Pipes smaller than 15-inches: one-half largest pipe diameter Pipes 15 to 24-inches: three-fourths the largest pipe diameter Pipes larger than 24-inches: equal to the largest pipe diameter 3. Invert slope through manhole: 0.10-foot drop across manhole with smooth transition of invert through manhole, unless otherwise indicated on Plans. B. Form invert channels with class A concrete if not integral with manhole base. For direction changes of mains, construct channels tangent to mains with maximum possible radius of curvature. Provide curves for side inlets and smooth invert fillets for flow transition between pipe inverts. 05/2013 02542 - 11 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 3.07 DROPS FOR SANITARY SEWERS A. Construct Drops with same materials used in main pipe unless otherwise indicated on Plans or approved by the Engineer. Install a Drop when a sewer line enters a manhole higher than 30-inches above the invert of the manhole. All drops must be interior drops. B. Terminate encasement of blind drops a minimum of 5 inches below top of bell and not less than 12 inches above top of next lower bell. Install approved plug at bell. 3.08 MANHOLE FRAME AND ADJUSTMENT RINGS A. Combine precast concrete adjustment rings so that the elevation of the installed casting cover is 3/8 inch below the pavement surface. Seal between adjustment ring and the manhole top with non-shrink grout; do not use mortar between adjustment rings. Apply a latex-based bonding agent to concrete surfaces to be joined with non-shrink grout. Set the cast iron frame on the adjustment ring in a bed of approved sealant. The sealant bed shall consist of two beads of sealant, each bead having minimum dimensions of 1/2-inch and 3/4-inch wide. B. For manholes in unpaved areas,top of frame shall be set a minimum of 6 inches above existing ground line unless otherwise indicated on Plans. In unpaved areas,encase the manhole frame in mortar or non-shrink grout placed flush with the face of the manhole ring and the top edge of the frame. Provide a rounded corner around the perimeter. 3.09 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill materials in the area of excavation surrounding manholes in accordance with requirements of Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. Use embedment zone backfill material,as specified for the adjacent utilities, from manhole foundation up to an elevation 12 inches over each pipe connected to the manhole. Provide trench zone backfill,as specified for the adjacent utilities,above the embedment zone backfill. B. Where rigid joints are used for connecting existing sewers to the manhole, backfill under the existing sewer up to the spring-line of the pipe with Class B concrete or flowable fill. 3.10 MANHOLE WALL CLEANING A. The floor and interior walls of the manhole shall be thoroughly cleaned and made free of all foreign materials including dirt, grit, roots, oils, grease, sludge, incompatible existing coatings,waxes,form release,curing compounds,efflorescence,sealers,salts, or other contaminants which may affect the performance and adhesion of the coating to the substrate. 05/2013 02542 - 12 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 1. High pressure water blasting with a minimum of 3,500 psi shall be used to clean free all foreign material within the manhole 2. When grease and oil are present within the manhole,an approved detergent or muriatic acid shall be used integrally with the high pressure cleaning water. 3. All materials resulting from the cleaning of the manhole shall be removed prior to application of the coating. 4. All loose grout, ledges, steps and protruding ledges shall be removed to provide an even surface prior to application of coating. B. Prevent any foreign material from entering the adjoining pipes. Remove droppings of foreign and wall sealant materials before they harden on the bottom of the manhole. C. No separate pay shall be made for this item. Include cost for sealing in the unit price for manholes. D. Manufacturer's representative shall be available at all times on site to answer questions and approve manhole preparation work prior to lining. 3.11 MANHOLE WALL SEALING A. Seal active leaks in the manhole structure by using non-shrink grout. B. Remove loose or defective wall material. Wipe or brush surface clean prior to the application of hydraulic cement C. Drill weep holes at bottom of manhole walls to relieve hydrostatic pressure to stop leaks. Plug pressure relief holes after leaks are stopped using hydraulic cement materials. Lead wool may also be used to plug large leaks. D. Repair wide cracks,or holes with quickset mortars. Follow manufacturer's application procedures. E. Shape manhole inverts before wall sealing work. Apply concrete to cleaned manhole benches as specified in Section 03300. F. After all active leaks have been stopped, clean and prepare walls for application of selected liner material. G. Properly apply the sealing compound to provide the minimum required uniform coating to the wall surface. H. Prevent any foreign material from entering the adjoining pipes. Remove droppings of foreign and wall sealant materials before they harden on the bottom of the manhole. 05/2013 02542- 13 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES I. Strictly follow product manufacturer's published technical specifications and recommendations for surface preparation, application and proportioning. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Conduct leakage testing of manholes in accordance with requirements of Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers. Vacuum test shall be completed prior to coating of the manhole. 3.13 INSPECTION A. After manhole wall sealing has been completed, visually inspect the manhole in the presence of Engineer. Check for cleanliness and for elimination of active leaks. B. At completion of manhole construction, assist Engineer in verifying installation of minimum coating thickness of concrete liner. Test several points on the manhole wall. Repair verification points prior to final acceptance for payment. C. During application of corrosion resistant liner, a wet film thickness gauge, meeting ASTM D4414,shall be used. Measurements shall be taken,documented and attested by the Contractor for submission to the Owner. D. At completion of manhole construction, assist Engineer in inspection of installation. 3.14 TESTING A. After the coating product(s)have set in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, all surfaces shall be inspected for holidays with high-voltage holiday detection equipment. Reference NACE RPO 188-99 for performing holiday detection. All detected holidays shall be marked and repaired by abrading the coating surface with grit disk paper or other hand tooling method. After abrading and cleaning,additional coating can be hand applied to the repair area. All touch-up/repair procedures shall follow the coating manufacturer's recommendations. Documentation on areas tested, results and repairs made shall be provided to Owner by Contractor. B. Visual inspection shall be made by the Project Engineer and/or Inspector. Any deficiencies in the finished coating shall be marked and repaired according to the procedures set forth herein by Contractor. 3.15 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 05/2013 02542 - 14 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 3.16 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Protect Manholes from damage until subsequent work has been accepted. B. Repair or replace damaged elements of Manholes at no additional cost to the Owner. C. In unpaved areas,provide positive drainage away from manhole frame to natural grade. END OF SECTION 05/2013 02542- 15 of 15 THERMOPLASTIC City of Pearland PAVEMENT MARKING Section 02582 THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Thermoplastic pavement markings. 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. Measurement for linear pavement markings is on a linear foot basis for each width, measured in place. B. Measurement for words and symbols is on a lump sum basis for each word or symbol. C. Refer to Section 01025 — Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01300—Submittals. B. Each container shall be clearly marked to indicate the color, weight, Type of material, manufacturer's name and the lot/batch number. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. Pavement markings are thermoplastic type marking materials that require heating to elevated temperatures for application. B. Materials shall conform to TxDOT Specification Item 666. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Prepare pavement surfaces and install markings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and TxDOT specifications. B. Accurately locate and install approved markings to conform to classes, colors, lengths, widths, and configurations indicated on Drawings. Page 1 of 2 THERMOPLASTIC City of Pearland PAVEMENT MARKING 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and repair surfaces to receive markups. Blast clean surfaces indicated on Drawings or where directed by the Engineer in accordance with requirements of Section 02581. Do not clean portland cement concrete pavements by grinding. 3.04 SURFACE INSTALLATION A. Test pavement surface for moisture content prior to application of markings. Place an approximate 2 square foot sheet of clear plastic or tar paper on road surface and hold in place for 20 minutes. Immediately inspect the sheet for build up of condensed moisture. If sufficient moisture has condensed to cause water to drip from sheet, do not apply markings. Repeat test as necessary until adequate moisture has evaporated from pavement to allow placement. B. Observe manufacturer's recommended pavement and ambient air temperature requirements for application. If manufacturer has no temperature recommendations, do not install markings if pavement temperature is below 60 degrees F or above 120 degrees F. C. Prime pavement surface and apply markings as recommended by manufacturer. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pavement markings shall present a neat, uniform appearance. B. Repair or replace improperly installed markers at Contractors expense. 3.06 CLEANING A. Keep project site free of unnecessary traffic hazards at all times. B. Clean area upon completion of work and remove rubbish from work site. 3.07 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall warrant material and labor for a period of twelve months from date of installation of markings. Immediately upon notification, replace portions of pavement marking lines or legends that have lifted, shifted or spread, lost daytime color, or nighttime retro-reflectivity. END OF SECTION Page 2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND FRAMES,GRATES, RINGS,AND COVERS Section 02603 FRAMES, GRATES,RINGS,AND COVERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Iron castings for manhole frames and covers, inlet frames and grates, catch basin frames and grates, meter vault frames and covers, adjustment rings and extensions. B. Ring grates. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals D. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 48, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings" b. ASTM A 615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" c. ASTM C 270, "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) a. AASHTO M 306,"Drainage, Sewage,Utility, and Related Castings" 3. American Welding Society(AWS) a. AWS D12.1, "Reinforcing Steel Welding Code" 4. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) a. Chapter 217.55 "Minimum Clear Opening" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for frames, grates, rings, covers, and seals under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B. If frames, grates, rings, covers, and seals are included as a Bid Items, measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 12/2015 02603 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FRAMES,GRATES, RINGS,AND COVERS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Provide copies of manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details, and installation instructions. Manufacturer shall be East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. or as approved by public works. C. Provide Shop Drawings for fabrication and erection of casting assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections and connection details. Show anchorage and accessory items. Include Setting Drawings for location and installation of castings and anchorage devices. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CASTINGS A. Castings for frames,grates,rings and covers shall conform to ASTM A 48,Class 35B and AASHTO M 306. Provide locking covers if indicated on Plans. B. Castings shall be capable of withstanding the application of an AASHTO H-20 loading without permanent deformation. C. Fabricate castings to conform to the shapes, dimensions, and with wording or logos shown on the Plans. D. Castings shall be 75%post-consumer recycled material, clean, free from blowholes and other surface imperfections. Cast holes in covers shall be clean and symmetrical, free of plugs. 2.02 BEARING SURFACES A. Machine bearing surfaces between covers or grates and their respective frames so that even bearing is provided for any position in which the casting may be seated in the frame. 2.03 SPECIAL FRAMES AND COVERS A. Where indicated on the Plans,provide stainless steel inflow preventers and watertight manhole frames and covers with a minimum of four bolts and a gasket designed to seal cover to frame. Supply watertight manhole Frames and Covers, Model R-1916 manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company, Model V-2420 by East Jordan Iron Works, or as approved by public works. B. Where personnel entry is anticipated,minimum clear opening of 30-inches is required. 12/2015 02603-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FRAMES,GRATES, RINGS, AND COVERS 2.04 FABRICATED RING GRATES A. Ring grates shall be fabricated from reinforcing steel conforming to ASTM A 615. B. Welds connecting the bars shall conform to AWS D12.1. 2.05 MORTAR A. Conform to requirements of ASTM C 270, Type S using Portland cement. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All installations that have an elevation difference between the final elevation of the manhole cover and the surrounding finished grade greater than 18 inches will be required to be hinged, lift assist gasketed ring and cover. B. Install castings according to approved Shop Drawings, instructions given in related Sections, and applicable directions from the manufacturer's printed materials. C. Set castings accurately at required locations to proper alignment and elevation. Keep castings plumb, level, true and free of rack. Measure location accurately from established lines and grades. Brace or anchor frames temporarily in formwork until permanently set. D. Ring grates shall be fabricated in accordance with Plans and shall be set in mortar in the mouth of the pipe bell. END OF SECTION 12/2015 02603-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS Section 02630 STORM SEWERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Storm sewers and appurtenances. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350— Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 5. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 7. Section 02415—Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewers 8. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 9. Section 02629 - Safety End Treatments C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM C 76,"Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe b. ASTM C 443,"Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets" c. ASTM C 506,"Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe" d. ASTM C 877,"Standard Specification for External Sealing Bands for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections" e. ASTM C 507, "Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe" f. ASTM C 655, "Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete D- Load Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe" g. ASTM D 3350,"Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Materials" h. ASTM C 1433, "Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers" i. ASTM B 633, "Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel" j. ASTM A 760, "Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated for Sewers and Drains" 5/2013 02630- 1 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for storm sewers is on a linear foot basis taken along the center line of the pipe from center line to center line of manholes or from end to end of culverts, measured and complete in place. Separate measurement will be made for each type and size of pipe installed. B. Payment for storm sewer includes pipe,earthwork,connections to existing manholes and pipe,accessories,equipment and execution required are incidental to storm sewer work. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit manufacturer's literature for product specifications and installation instructions. C. Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The condition for acceptance will be a storm sewer that is watertight both in pipe-to- pipe,box-to-box joints and in pipe-to-manhole connections and in box connections. 5/2013 02630-2 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Handle pipe, fittings, and accessories carefully with approved handling devices. Do not drop or roll pipe off trucks or trailers. Materials cracked,gouged,chipped,dented, or otherwise damaged will not be approved for installation. C. Store pipe and fittings on heavy timbers or platforms to avoid contact with the ground. D. Unload pipe,fittings,and specials as close as practical to the location of installation to avoid unnecessary handling. E. Keep interiors of pipe and fittings completely free of dirt and foreign matter. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Materials for storm sewers shall be of the sizes and types indicated on the Plans. B. Materials for pipe and fittings, other than those specified or referenced, may be considered for use in storm sewers. C. For consideration of other materials, submit complete manufacturer's data including materials,sizes,flow carrying capacity,installation procedures,and history of similar installations to Engineer for pre-bid evaluations,if allowed, or as a substitution. 2.02 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE A. Circular reinforced concrete pipe shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 76, for Class III wall thickness. Joints shall be rubber gasketed conforming to ASTM C 443. B. Reinforced concrete arch pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 506 for Class A-III. Joints shall conform to ASTM C 877. C. Reinforced concrete elliptical pipe, either vertical or horizontal, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 507 for Class VE-III for vertical or Class HE-III for horizontal. Joints shall be rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C 877. D. Reinforced concrete D-load pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 655. 5/2013 02630-3 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 2.03 PRECAST AND CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX SEWERS A. All box sewer sections shall conform to ASTM C1433. B. All pipe and boxes shall be machine-made or cast by a process which will provide for uniform placement of concrete in the forms and compaction by mechanical devices which will assure a dense concrete. C. Concrete shall conform to requirements of Section 03300— Cast-in-Place Concrete with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi. D. Concrete shall be mixed in a central batch plant or other batching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. Transit-mixed concrete is not acceptable. E. Make test specimens in test cylinders at the same time and in the same manner as the box sections they represent. Make a minimum of 4 test cylinders for each day's production run and each mix design. Cure test cylinders in the same manner and for the same times as the boxes they represent. The producer must furnish all equipment required for testing concrete for boxes produced in a precasting plant. F. For precast boxes,provide no more than 4 lifting holes in each section. Lifting holes may be cast, cut into fresh concrete after form removal, or drilled. Provide lifting holes of sufficient size for adequate lifting devices based on the size and weight of the box section. Do not use lifting holes larger than 3 in. in diameter. Do not cut more than 1 longitudinal. G. Rubber gaskted joints for precast reinforced concrete box culverts and sewers may be selected in lieu of boxes with preformed,flexible,mastic gasket material.When rubber gasket joints are selected, they shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1677 for design of the joints, performance and joint tolerances. When selecting the rubber gasket joint for box, neither filter fabric nor external joint wrap shall be required. 2.04 CORRUGATED METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Corrugated metal pipe may be galvanized steel, aluminized steel, aluminum or precoated galvanized steel as indicated on Plans and conforming to the following: Galvanized Steel AASHTO M218 Aluminized Steel AASHTO M274 Aluminum AASHTO M197 Precoated Galvanized Steel AASHTO M246 1. Reference to gauge of metal is to U.S. Standard Gauge for uncoated sheets. Tables in AASHTO M218 and AASHTO M274 list thicknesses for coated sheets in inches. The tables in AASHTO M197 list thicknesses in inches for clad aluminum sheets. 5/2013 02630-4 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS B. Coupling bands and other hardware for galvanized or aluminized steel pipe shall conform to requirements of AASHTO M36 for steel pipe and AASHTO M196 for aluminum pipe. 1. Coupling bands shall be not more than 3 nominal sheet thicknesses lighter than thickness of pipe to be connected and in no case lighter than 0.052 inch for steel or 0.048 inch for aluminum. 2. Coupling bands shall be made of same base metal and coating (metallic or otherwise) as pipe. 3. Minimum width of corrugated locking bands shall be as shown below for corrugations which correspond to end circumferential corrugations on pipes being joined: a. 10 %2 inches wide for 2 2/3 inch x 1/2-inch corrugations. b. 12 inches wide for 3 inch x 1 inch corrugations. 4. Helical pipe without circumferential end corrugations will be permitted only when it is necessary to join a new pipe to an existing pipe which was installed with no circumferential end corrugations. In this event pipe furnished with helical corrugations at ends shall be field jointed with either helically corrugated bands or with bands with projections (dimples). The minimum width of helical corrugated bands shall conform to the following: a. 12 inches wide for 1/2 inch-deep helical end corrugations. b. 14 inches wide for one inch-deep helical end corrugations. 5. Bands with projections shall have circumferential rows of projections with one projection for each corrugation. Width of bands with projections shall be not less than the following: a. 12 inches wide for pipe diameters up to and including 72 inches. Bands shall have two circumferential rows of projections. b. 16 '/ inches wide for pipe diameters of 78 inches and greater. Bands shall have four circumferential rows of projections. 6. Bolts for coupling bands shall be 1/2 inch diameter. Bands 12 inches wide or less will have a minimum of 2 bolts per end at each connection, and bands greater than 12 inches wide shall have a minimum of 3 bolts at each connection. 7. Galvanized bolts may be hot dip galvanized in accordance with requirements of AASHTO M 232,mechanically galvanized to provide same requirements as AASHTO M 232, or electro-galvanized per ASTM B 633, Type RS. 5/2013 02630-5 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS C. Bituminous coated pipe or pipe arch shall be coated inside and out with a bituminous coating which shall meet these performance requirements and requirements of AASHTO M190. 1. Pipe shall be uniformly coated inside and out to a minimum thickness of 0.05 inch,measured on crests of corrugations. 2. Bituminous coating shall adhere to the metal so that it will not chip, crack,or peel during handling and placement;and shall protect pipe from corrosion and deterioration. 3. Where a paved invert is shown on Plans,pipe or pipe arch,in addition to fully- coated treatment described above,shall receive additional bituminous material, same as specified above, applied to the bottom quarter of circumference to form a smooth pavement. Maintain a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch above crests of corrugations. D. Furnish all fittings and specials required for bends, end sections, branches, access manholes,and connections to other fittings. Design fittings and specials in accordance with Plans and ASTM A 760. Fittings and specials are subject to same internal and external loads as straight pipe. 2.05 PIPE FABRICATION A. Steel Pipe: 1. Galvanized or aluminized steel pipe shall be full circle or arch pipe conforming to AASHTO M 36, Type I, Type IA, or Type II, as indicated on the Plans. 2. Fabrication with circumferential corrugations, lap joint construction with riveted or spot-welded seams,helical corrugations with continuous helical lock seam, or ultra-high frequency resistance butt-welded seams is acceptable. B. Aluminum Pipe: 1. Pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 196,Type I,Type IA, circular pipe, or Type II,pipe arch as indicated on the Plans. 2. Fabrication with circumferential corrugations, lap joint construction with riveted or spot-welded seams,or helical corrugations with a continuous helical lock seam. 3. Portions of aluminum pipe that will be in contact with concrete or metal other than aluminum, shall be insulated from these materials with a coating of bituminous material meeting requirements of AASHTO M 190. Extend coating a minimum distance of one foot beyond area of contact. 5/2013 02630-6 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS C. Precoated Galvanized Steel Pipe: 1. Pipe shall be full circle or arch pipe conforming to AASHTO M 245, Type I, Type IA or Type II as indicated on the Plans. 2. Fabrication with circumferential corrugations, lap joint construction with riveted seams, or helical lock seams is acceptable. 3. Inside and outside coating shall be a minimum of 10 mils. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tolerances: Allowable casting tolerances for concrete units are plus or minus 1/4 inch from dimensions shown on the Plans. Concrete thickness in excess of that required will not constitute cause for rejection provided that such excess thickness does not interfere with proper jointing operations. B. Precast Unit Identification: Mark date of manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer clearly on the inside of inlet, headwall or wingwall. C. Rejection: Precast units maybe rejected for non-conformity with these specifications and for any of the following reasons: 1. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell,except for a single end crack that do not exceed the depth of the joint. 2. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture. 3. Damaged or misshaped ends, where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint. D. Replacement: Immediately remove rejected units from the work site and replace with acceptable units. E. Repairs: Occasional imperfections resulting from manufacture or accidental damage may be repaired if, in the opinion of the Engineer, repaired units conform to requirements of these specifications. 2.07 BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND TOPSOIL MATERIAL A. Bedding and Backfill Material: Conform to Plans and requirements of Sections 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials. 5/2013 02630-7 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Conform to requirements of Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities, 3.02 "Preparation". 3.02 EARTHWORK A. Excavate in accordance with requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities, except where tunneling or jacking methods are shown on the Plans. When pipes are laid in a trench,the trench when completed and shaped to receive the pipe,shall be of sufficient width to provide free working space for satisfactory bedding and jointing and thorough tamping of backfill and bedding material under and around pipe. B. Bed pipe in accordance with Plans and Specifications. When requested by Engineer, furnish a simple template for each size and shape of pipe for use in checking shaping of bedding. Template shall consist of a thin plate or board cut to match lower half of cross section. C. Where rock in either ledge or boulder form exists below pipe,remove the rock below grade and replace with suitable materials so that a slightly yielding compacted earth cushion is provided below pipe a minimum of 12 inches thick. D. Where soil encountered at established grade is quicksand, muck or similar unstable materials, such unstable soil shall be removed and replaced in accordance with requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. Do not allow cement stabilized materials for backfill to come into contact with any uncoated aluminum or aluminized pipe surface. E. After metal pipe structure has been completely assembled on proper line and grade and headwalls constructed when required by the drawing details,place selected material from excavation or borrow along both sides of the completed structures equally, in uniform layers not exceeding 6 inches in depth(loose measurement),wetted if required and thoroughly compacted between adjacent structures and between structure and sides of trench, or for a distance each side of structure equal to diameter of pipe. Backfill material shall be compacted to the same density requirements as specified for adjoining sections of embankment in accordance with specifications. Above three-fourths point of structure,place uniformly on each side of pipe in layers not to exceed 12 inches. F. Only hand operated tamping equipment will be allowed within vertical planes 2 feet beyond horizontal projection of outside surface of structure for backfilling, until a minimum cover of 12 inches is obtained. Remove and replace damaged pipe. G. Do not permit heavy earth moving equipment to haul over structure until a minimum of 4 feet of permanent or temporary compacted fill has been placed. 5/2013 02630- 8 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS H. During backfilling, obtain uniform backfill material and uniform compacted density throughout length of structure so that unequal pressure will be avoided. Provide proper backfill under structure. I. Prior to adding each new layer of loose backfill material,an inspection will be made of inside periphery of structure for local or unequal deformation caused by improper construction methods. Evidence of deformation will be reason for such corrective measures as may be directed by Engineer. 3.03 CORRUGATED METAL PIPE INSTALLATION A. Place pipes on prepared foundation starting at outlet end. Join sections firmly together, with side laps or circumferential joints pointing upstream and with longitudinal laps on sides. B. Metal in joints which is not protected by galvanizing or aluminizing shall be coated with an approved asphaltum paint. C. Provide proper equipment for hoisting and lowering sections of pipe into trench without damaging pipe or disturbing prepared foundation and sides of trench. Pipe which is not in alignment or which shows undue settlement after laying,or is damaged, shall be taken up and relaid. D. Multiple installations of corrugated metal pipe and pipe arches shall be laid with the center lines of individual barrels parallel. Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, maintain the following clear distances between outer surfaces of adjacent pipes: DIAMETER CLEAR DISTANCE BETWEEN PIPES PIPE ARCH OF PIPE FULL CIRCLE AND PIPE ARCH DESIGN NO. 18" 1' 2" 2 24" 1' 5" 3 30" 1' 8" 4 36" 1' 11" 5 42" 2' 2" 6 48" 2' 5" 7 54" 2' 10" 8 60"—84" 3' 2" 9 90"— 120" 3' 5" 10 &Over E. Where extensions are attached to existing structures, install a proper connection between structure and existing as indicated on Plans, coat the connection with bituminous material when required. F. When existing headwalls and aprons are indicated for reuse on the Plans,sever portion to be reused from the existing culvert, and relocate to prepared position. Damaged 5/2013 02630-9 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS headwalls,aprons or pipes attached to the headwall,shall be restored to their original condition. 3.04 JOINTING A. Field joints shall maintain pipe alignment during construction and prevent infiltration of side material. B. Coupling bands shall lap equally on pipes being connected to form a tightly-closed joint. C. Use corrugated locking bands to field join pipes furnished with circumferential corrugations including pipe with helical corrugations having reformed circumferential corrugations on ends. Fit locking bands into a minimum of one full circumferential corrugation of pipe ends being coupled. 3.05 CONCRETE PIPE INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the Plans and pipe manufacturer's recommendations and as specified in this Section. B. Install pipe only after excavation is completed, the bottom of the trench shaped, bedding material is installed, and the trench has been approved by the Engineer. C. Install pipe to the line and grade indicated. Place pipe so that it has continuous bearing of barrel on bedding material and is laid in the trench so the interior surfaces of the pipe follow the grades and alignments indicated. D. Install pipe with the spigot ends toward the direction of flow. E. Form a concentric joint with each section of adjoining pipe so as to prevent offsets. F. Place and drive home newly laid sections with come-a-long winches so as to eliminate damage to sections. Use of back hoes or similar powered equipment will not be allowed unless protective measures are provided and approved in advance by the Engineer. G. Keep the interior of pipe clean as the installation progresses. Where cleaning after laying the pipe is difficult because of small pipe size,use a suitable swab or drag in the pipe and pull it forward past each joint immediately after the joint has been completed. H. Keep excavations free of water during construction and until final inspection. I. When work is not in progress,cover the exposed ends of pipes with an approved plug to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe. 5/2013 02630- 10 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 3.06 PRECAST AND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE BOX SEWERS INSTALLATION A. Placement of Boxes: when precast boxes are used to form multiple barrel structures, place the box sections in conformance with the plans or as directed. Place material to be used between barrels as shown on the plans or as directed. Unless otherwise authorized, start the laying of boxes on the bedding at the outlet end and proceed toward the inlet end with the abutting sections properly matched. Fit,match, and lay the boxes to form a smooth,uniform conduit true to the established lines and grades. For trench installations, lower the box sections into the trench without damaging the box or disturbing the bedding and the sides of the trench. Carefully clean the ends of the box before it is placed. Prevent the earth or bedding material from entering the box as it is laid. Remove and re-lay, without extra compensation, boxes that are not in alignments or that show excessive settlement after laying. Form and place cast-in- place boxes in accordance with Section 03300- Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Connections and Stub Ends: Make connections of boxes to existing boxes, pipes, storm drains,or storm drain appurtenances as shown on the plans. Mortar or concrete the bottom of existing structures if necessary to eliminate any drainage pockets created by the connections. Connect boxes to any required headwalls,wingwalls, safety end treatments or riprap, or other structures as shown on the plans or as directed. Repair any damage to the existing structure resulting from making the connections. Finish stub ends for connections to future work not shown on the plans by installing watertight plugs into the free end of the box. C. For precast boxes,fill lifting holes with mortar or concrete and cure. Precast concrete or mortar plugs may be used. 3.07 INSTALLATION OTHER THAN OPEN CUT A. For installation of pipe by augering,boring,or jacking pipe,conform to requirements of Section 02415 - Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewers. B. Design pipe and box sewers for jacking,boring or tunneling considering the specific installation conditions such as the soil conditions, installation methods, anticipated deflection angles and jacking pressures. When requested, provide design notes and drawings signed by a Texas licensed professional engineer. 3.08 CONNECTIONS A. Connect inlet leads to the inlets as shown on the Plans. Use non-shrink grout jointing material as shown on the Plans Drawing or as approved. Make connections water tight. 5/2013 02630- 11 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 3.09 FINISHES A. Cut off inlet leads neatly at the inside face of inlet wall. Point up with mortar or field galvanizing. B. When the box section of the inlet has been completed,shape the floor of the inlet with mortar to conform to the detailed Plans. C. Finish concrete surfaces in accordance with requirements of Section 03300—Cast-in- Place Concrete. 3.10 BACKFILL A. Backfill the trench only after pipe and box sewer installation is approved by the Engineer. B. Bed pipes with materials conforming to requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities and as indicated on Plans. C. Backfill and compact soil in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 3.11 INSPECTION A. Remove and replace all nonconforming work at no additional cost to City. 3.12 SAFETY END TREATMENTS (SET) A. Install safety end treatments in accordance with Section 02629 and as indicated on the plans. Use only approved pre-cast SET's with cross bars. 3.13 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B. In unpaved areas,grade surface as a uniform slope to natural grade as indicated on the Plans. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02630- 12 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND PRECAST INLETS,HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS Section 02631 PRECAST INLETS, HEADWALLS,AND WINGWALLS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Precast concrete inlets for storm or sanitary sewers,including cast iron frame and plate or grate. B. Precast concrete headwalls and wingwalls for storm sewers. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01630—Product Options and Substitution 4. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 5. Section 02542—Concrete Manholes and Accessories 6. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities D. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 76,"Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe b. ASTM C 270, "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" E. Definitions: 1. Normal Depth Type A,Type B,Type C and Type E Inlets-depth of 2.25 feet or less(2'3")plus pipe inside diameter when measured from grating,bottom of gutter, or throat to flow line of inlet lead. 2. Normal Depth Type BB Inlet - depth of 2.55 feet (2' 6 5/8 ") plus pipe inside diameter when measured from curb beam to flow line of inlet lead. 3. Extra Depth Inlet - specified depth exceeding normal depth for the type inlet used. 5/2013 02631 - 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND PRECAST INLETS,HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for normal depth inlets is on a per each basis, complete in place. B. When extra depth is specified on the Plans,measurement for extra depth inlets is on a vertical foot basis for each foot in excess of normal depth,measured and complete in place. C. Measurement for headwalls and wingwalls is on a per each basis, complete in place. D. Payment for inlets and for culvert headwalls and wingwalls includes connection of lines, and furnishing and installing frames, grates,rings and covers. E. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit Shop Drawings for approval of design and construction details for precast concrete inlets,headwalls and wingwalls. . C. Submit proposals for using equivalent construction products or processes according to Section 01630—Product Options and Substitution. D. Submit manufacturer's data and details for frames, grates,rings, and covers. 1.04 STORAGE AND SHIPMENT A. Store precast units on level blocking. Do not place loads on them until design strength is reached. Shipment of acceptable units may be made when the 28 day strength requirements have been met. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Concrete for precast machine-made units meeting requirements of ASTM C 76 regarding reinforced concrete, cement, aggregate, mixture, and concrete test. Minimum 28-day compressive strength shall be 4,000 psi. B. Reinforcing steel: Conform to requirements of Section 03300 — Cast-in-Place Concrete. Place reinforcing steel to conform to details shown on Plans and as follows: 5/2013 02631 -2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND PRECAST INLETS, HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS 1. Provide a positive means for holding steel cages in place throughout production of concrete units. The maximum variation in reinforcement position is plus or minus 10 percent of wall thickness or plus or minus 1/2 inch whichever is less. Regardless of variation, the minimum cover of concrete over reinforcement as shown on the Plans shall be maintained. 2. Welding of reinforcing steel is not permitted unless noted on the Plans. C. Mortar: Conform to requirements of ASTM C 270, Type S using Portland cement. D. Miscellaneous metal: Cast-iron frames and plates conforming to requirements of Section 02542—Concrete Manholes and Accessories. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tolerances: Allowable casting tolerances for concrete units are plus or minus 1/4 inch from dimensions shown on the Plans. Concrete thickness in excess of that required will not constitute cause for rejection provided that such excess thickness does not interfere with proper jointing operations. B. Precast Unit Identification: Mark date of manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer clearly on the inside of inlet,headwall or wingwall. C. Rejection: Precast units may be rejected for non-conformity with these specifications and for any of the following reasons: 1. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell,except for a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint. 2. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture. 3. Damaged or misshaped ends, where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint. D. Replacement: Immediately remove rejected units from the work site and replace with acceptable units. E. Repairs: Occasional imperfections resulting from manufacture or accidental damage may be repaired if, in the opinion of the Engineer, repaired units according to requirements of these specifications. 5/2013 02631 -3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND PRECAST INLETS, HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines and grades are correct. B. Verify compacted subgrade will support loads imposed by inlets. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install inlets,headwalls,and wingwalls complete in place to the dimensions,lines and grades as shown on the Plans. B. Excavate in accordance with requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. C. Bed precast concrete units on cement stabilized sand on foundations of firm, stable material accurately shaped to conform to the shape of unit bases. D. Provide adequate means to lift and place concrete units. 3.03 FINISHES A. Use a cement-sand mortar mix to seal joints, fill lifting holes, and as otherwise required. B. When the box section of the inlet has been completed,shape the floor of the inlet with mortar to conform to Plans details. C. Accurately adjust cast iron inlet plate frames to line,grade,and slope. Grout frame in place with mortar. 3.04 INLET WATERTIGHTNESS A. Test each inlet for leaks. Verify that inlets are free of visible leaks. Repair leaks in an approved manner. 3.05 CONNECTIONS A. Connect inlet leads to the inlets as shown on the Plans. Use non-shrink jointing material as shown on the Plans or as approved. Make connections water tight. 5/2013 02631 -4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND PRECAST INLETS,HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS 3.06 BACKFILL A. Backfill the area of excavation surrounding each completed inlet, headwall or wingwall according to the requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02631 -5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND ADJUSTING MANHOLES,INLETS,AND VALVE BOXES Section 02633 ADJUSTING MANHOLES,INLETS,AND VALVE BOXES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Adjusting elevation of manholes, inlets, and valve boxes to new grades. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 4. Section 02542—Concrete Manholes and Accessories 5. Section 02318 —Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 6. Section 02910—Topsoil 7. Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 270, "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for adjusting utility structures to grade is on a lump sum basis for: 1. Adjusting manholes. 2. Adjusting inlets. 3. Adjusting valve boxes. B Refer to Section 01200-Measurement and Payment Procedures. C Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A For cast in place concrete, refer to Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete. B For precast concrete manhole sections and adjustment rings,refer to Section 02542— Concrete Manholes and Accessories. C For mortar mix, conform to requirements of ASTM C 270, Type S using Portland cement. 07/2006 02633- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND ADJUSTING MANHOLES,INLETS,AND VALVE BOXES 2.02 CAST IRON ADJUSTING RINGS A For cast iron adjusting rings, refer to Section 02542 — Concrete Manholes and Accessories. 2.03 PIPING MATERIALS A For riser pipes and fittings, refer to applicable piping materials specifications in Sections 02542—Concrete Manholes and Accessories. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Examine existing structure, valve box,frame and cover or inlet box,frame and cover or inlet,and piping and connections for damage or defects that would affect adjustment to grade. Report such damage or defects to the Engineer. 3.02 ESTABLISHING GRADE A Coordinate grade related items with existing grade and finished grade or paving, and relate to established bench mark or reference line. 3.03 ADJUSTING MANHOLES AND INLETS A Elevation of manhole or inlet can be raised using precast concrete rings or metal adjusting rings. Use of brick for adjustment to grade is prohibited. Elevation of manhole or inlet can be lowered by removing existing masonry, adjusting rings or the top section of the barrel below the new elevation and then rebuilding or raising the elevation to the proper height. B Grout inside and outside adjusting ring joints. C Salvage and reuse cast iron frame and cover or grate. D Protect or block off manhole or inlet bottom using wood forms shaped to fit so that no debris or soil falls to the bottom during adjustment. E Set the cast iron frame for the manhole cover or grate in a full mortar bed and adjust to the established elevation. In streets, adjust covers to be flush to 1/8 inch above pavement. F Verify that manholes and inlets are free of visible leaks as a result of reconstruction. Repair leaks in a manner subject to the Engineer's approval. 3.04 ADJUSTING VALVE BOXES A If usable, salvage and reuse valve box and surrounding concrete block. 07/2006 02633-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND ADJUSTING MANHOLES,INLETS,AND VALVE BOXES B Remove and replace 6 inch ductile iron riser pipe with suitable length for depth of cover required to establish the adjusted elevation to accommodate actual finish grade. C Reinstall in-kind adjustable valve box and riser piping plumbed in vertical position. Provide minimum 6 inches telescoping freeboard space between riser pipe top butt end and interior contact flange of valve box for vertical movement damping. D After valve box has been set, aligned, and adjusted so that top lid is level with final grade, pour a 24 inch by 24 inch by 8 inch thick concrete pad around valve box. Center valve box horizontally within concrete slab. 3.05 BACKFILL AND GRADING A Backfill the area of excavation surrounding each adjusted manhole, inlet, and valve box and compact according to requirements of Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B Grade the ground surface to drain away from each manhole and valve box. Place earth fill around manholes to the level of the upper rim of the manhole frame. Place earth fill around the valve box concrete block. C In unpaved areas,grade surface at a uniform slope of 1 to 5 from the manhole frame to natural grade. Provide a minimum of 4 inches of topsoil conforming to requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil and seed in accordance with Section 02921—Hydromulch Seeding. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02633-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT Section 02710 BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Base course of crushed stone, recycled crushed concrete base, cement-stabilized crushed stone,cement-stabilized bank-run gravel,recycled crushed stone and hot mix asphalt base course. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350- Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 02742—Prime Coat C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM C 131,"Standard Test Methods for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine" b. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" c. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" d. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" e. ASTM D 1557, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort" f. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" g. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" h. ASTM D 3017,"Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)" 2. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) a. Tex-101-E, "Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing" b. Tex-110-E, "Particle Analysis of Soils" c. Tex-120-E, "Soil-Cement Testing" d. Tex-106-E, "Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils" e. Tex-203-F, "Sand Equivalent Test" 5/2013 02710- 1 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT f. Tex-126-E,"Molding,Testing,and Evaluating Bituminous Black Base Material" g. Tex-204-F, "Design of Bituminous Mixtures" h. Tex-208-F, "Test for Stabilometer Value of Bituminous Material" i. Tex-227-F, "Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Mixtures" j. Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges, 2004 Adoption 1) Item 340, "Dense-Graded Hot-Mix Asphalt(Method)" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for base course is on a square yard basis. Separate measurement will be made for each different required thickness of base course. B. When required by Section 01100—Summary of Work,unit price adjustments shall be made for insufficient in-place depth determined by cores as follows: 1. Adjusted unit price shall be reduced by a ratio of average thickness determined by cores to thickness bid upon, times unit price bid. 2. Adjustment shall apply to lower limit of 90 percent of unit price bid. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit samples of crushed stone,gravel,crushed concrete and soil binder for testing. C. Submit weight tickets,certified by supplier,with each bulk delivery of cement to work site. D. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics for pug mill and associated equipment, spreading machine, and compaction equipment for approval. E. Submit manufacturing description and characteristics of spreading and finishing machine for approval. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the 5/2013 02710-2 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stockpiles shall be made up of layers of processed aggregate materials. Load material by making successive vertical cuts through entire depth of stockpile. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 01600 — Material and Equipment and Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Material. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CRUSHED STONE FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE A. Crushed Stone: Material retained on the No. 40 Sieve meeting the following requirements: 1. Durable particles of crusher-run broken limestone,sandstone,gravel or granite obtained from an approved source. 2. Los Angeles abrasion test percent of wear not to exceed 40 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. B. Soil Binder: Material passing the No. 40 Sieve meeting the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318: 1. Maximum Liquid Limit: 40. 2. Maximum Plasticity Index: 12. 3. Maximum Lineal Shrinkage:7(when calculated from volumetric shrinkage at liquid limit). C. Mixed Materials shall meet the following requirements: 1. Minimum compressive strength of 35 psi at 0 psi lateral pressure and 175 psi at 15 psi lateral pressure using triaxial testing procedures. 2. Grading in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E within the following limits: SIEVE PERCENT RETAINED 1 34-inch 0 to 10 No. 4 45 to 75 No. 40 60 to 85 5/2013 02710-3 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT 2.02 CEMENT STABILIZED BASE COURSE A. Cement: ASTM C 150 Type I;bulk or sacked. B. Water: Clean; clear; and free from oil, acids, alkali, or vegetable matter. C. Crushed Stone: material retained on the No. 40 Sieve meeting the following requirements: 1. Durable particles of crusher-run broken limestone obtained from an approved source. 2. Los Angeles abrasion test percent of wear not to exceed 40 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. D. Gravel: Durable particles of bank-run gravel or processed material. E. Soil Binder: Material passing the No. 40 Sieve meeting the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318: 1. Maximum Liquid limit: 35. 2. Maximum Plasticity index: 10. F. Mixed aggregate and soil binder shall meet the following requirements: 1. Grading in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E within the following limits: PERCENT RETAINED SIEVE CRUSHED PROCESSED GRAVEL BANKRUN STONE GR. 1 GR.2 GRAVEL • 1 3A-inch 0 to 10 0 to 5 - 0 to 5 Y2-inch - - 0 - No. 4 45 to 75 30 to 75 15 to 35 30 to 75 No. 40 55 to 80 60 to 85 55 to 85 65 to 85 2. Obtain prior permission from Engineer for use of additives to meet above requirements. G. Cut back asphalt: MC30 conforming to requirements of Section 02742—Prime Coat. H. Emulsified petroleum resin: EPR-1 Prime conforming to requirements of Section 02742—Prime Coat. 5/2013 02710-4 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT I. Design mix for minimum average compressive strength of 200 psi at 48 hours using Tex-120-E unconfined compressive strength testing procedures. Provide minimum cement content of 1-1/2 sacks, weighing 94 pounds each, per ton of mix. J. Increase cement content if average compressive strength of tests on field samples fall below 200 psi. Refer to Part 3 concerning field samples and tests. K. Mix in stationary pug mill equipped with feeding and metering devices which shall add specified quantities of base material, cement, and water into mixer. Dry mix base material and cement sufficiently to prevent cement balls from forming when water is added. L. Resulting mixture shall be homogeneous and uniform in appearance. 2.03 CEMENT -STABILIZED RECYCLED CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE (RCCB) COURSE A. System Description: Provide RCCB with following performance: 1. Minimum 5 percent cement. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength: 650 psi at 7 days following TxDOT Tex- 120-E. 3. Prepare concrete product in an on- or off -site pug mill, or in an on- or off -site portable concrete mixer. B. Preliminary Design: Prepare preliminary mix for 4 cement ratios; 5, 6, 7 and 8 percent. 1. Designate source of concrete for crushing. 2. Results of compression tests will be used by Engineer to select the final mix design. C. Cement: ASTM C 150 Type I, II or III; bulk or sacked. D. Water: Potable. E. Aggregate: Recycled Crushed Concrete: Material retained on the No. 40 Sieve, and durable coarse particles of crusher -run reclaimed cured Portland cement concrete, obtained from an approved source. Organic material is prohibited. F. Soil Binder (classified below): Meeting the following requirements when tested following TxDOT Tex-106-E: 1. Maximum Liquid Limit: 35 2. Maximum Plasticity Index: 10 5/2013 02710 -5 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT G. Mixed Aggregate and Soil Binder: Grading following Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E within the following limits: SIEVE PERCENT RETAINED 1 3/4-inch 0 to 10 No. 4 45to75 No. 40 55 to 80; classified as "Soil Binder" 1. Obtain prior permission from Engineer for use of additives to meet above requirements. H. Asphaltic Seal Cure: 1. Use following as Contractor's option to curing by sprinkling, at no additional cost or time. 2. Cut -back asphalt: MC30 following Section 02742 — Prime Coat. 3. Emulsified petroleum resin: EPR-1 Prime following Section 02742 — Prime Coat. I. Material Mix and Mixing Equipment 1. Design mix for minimum compressive strength of 650 psi at 7 days following Tex-120-E unconfined compressive strength. 2. Cement Ratio: If compressive strength of field samples of installed products fails to meet strength requirements above, increase cement content in one percent increments up to a maximum of 8 percent. 3. Mix according to the requirement s of this Section, 2.03A, with metering devices adding specified quantities of crushed concrete, cement, and water into mixer. Dry mix crushed concrete and cement to prevent cement balls from forming when water is added. Produce homogeneous and uniformly mixed product. 2.04 HOT MIX ASPHALT BASE COURSE (BLACK BASE) A. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel or crushed stone, or combination thereof that is retained on No. 10 sieve, uniform in quality throughout and free from dirt, organic, or other injurious matter occurring either free or as coating on aggregate. Aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 except for gradation. Furnish rock or gravel with Los Angeles abrasion loss not to exceed 40 percent by weight when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. 5/2013 02710 - 6 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT B. Fine Aggregate: Sand or stone screenings, or combination thereof, passing No. 10 sieve. Aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 except for gradation. Use sand composed of sound, durable stone particles free from loams or other injurious foreign matter. Furnish screenings of same or similar material as specified for coarse aggregate. Plasticity index of that part of fine aggregate passing No. 40 sieve shall be not more than 6 when tested by Tex-106-E. Sand equivalent shall have a minimum value of 45 when tested by Tex-203-F. C. Composite Aggregate: Conform to the grading limits of TxDOT Item 340 for the paving type indicated on the Plans. D. Asphaltic Material: Moisture -free homogeneous material which will not foam when heated to 347° F, meeting the following requirements: VISCOSITY GRADE TEST AC-10 min. max. AC-20 min. max. Viscosity, 140° F stokes 1000 ± 200 2000 ± 400 Viscosity, 275° F stokes 1.9 - 2.5 - Penetration, 77° F, 100 g, 5 sec. 85 - 55 - Flash Point, C.E.C., F. 450 - 450 - Solubility in trichloroethylene, percent 99.0 - 99.0 - Tests on residues from thin film oven tests: Viscosity, 140° F stokes - 3 000 - 6000 Ductility, 77° F, 5 cms per min., cms 70 - 50 Spot tests Negative for all 1. Material shall not be cracked. 2. Engineer will designate grade of asphalt to use after design tests have been made. Use only one grade of asphalt after grade is determined by test design for project. E. Mixing Plant: Weight-batching or drum mix plant with capacity for producing continuously mixtures meeting specifications. Plant shall have satisfactory conveyors, power units, aggregate handling equipment, hot aggregate screens and bins, and dust collectors. Provide equipment to supply materials adequately in accordance with rated capacity of plant and produce finished material within specified tolerances. Following equipment is essential: 1. Cold aggregate bins and proportioning device 2. Dryer 3. Screens 5/2013 02710 - 7 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT 4. Aggregate weight box and batching scales 5. Mixer 6. Asphalt storage and heating devices 7. Asphalt measuring devices 8. Truck scales F. Bins: Separate aggregate into minimum of four bins to produce consistently uniform grading and asphalt content in completed mix. G. Mix: Employ and pay certified testing laboratory to prepare design mixes. Test in accordance with Tex-126-E, Tex-204-F, Tex-208-F, and Tex-227-F. H. Density and Stability Requirements: PERCENT DENSITY PERCENT OPTIMUM HVEEM STABILITY PERCENT NOT LESS THAN MIN MAX 95 99 97 35 I. Proportions for Asphaltic Material: As specified in TxDOT Item 340 for the mix type shown on the Plans. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted subgrade is ready to support imposed loads. B. Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PLACEMENT A. Do not mix and place cement stabilized base when temperature is below 40° F and falling. Base may be placed when temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35° F and rising. B. Place material on prepared subgrade in uniform layers to produce thickness indicated on Plans. Depth of layers shall not exceed 8 inches. Do not dump material in piles or windrows. C. Spread with approved spreading machine. Conduct spreading so as to eliminate planes of weakness or pockets of non -uniformly graded material resulting from hauling and dumping operations. 5/2013 02710 - 8 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT D. Provide construction joints between new material and stabilized base that has been in place 4 hours or longer. Joints shall be approximately vertical. Form joint with a temporary header or make vertical cut of previous base immediately before placing subsequent base. E. Use only one longitudinal joint at center line under main lanes and shoulder. Do not use longitudinal joints under frontage roads and ramps. F. Place base so that projecting reinforcing steel from curbs remain at approximate center of base. Secure a firm bond between reinforcement and base. G. Do not place asphaltic base when air temperature is below 50 F and falling. Base may be placed when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 40 F and rising. H. Haul prepared and heated asphaltic concrete mixture to project in tight vehicles previously cleaned of foreign material. Mixture shall be at temperature between 250° F and 325° F when laid. I. Spread material into place with approved mechanical spreading and finishing machine of screening or tamping type. Use track -mounted finish machine to place base course directly on earth subgrade. J. Place base courses 4 inches or greater in thickness in two or more layers, each having compacted thickness of not greater than 4 inches. Spread all lifts. Attain smooth course of uniform density to section, line and grades as indicated on Plans. K. Place courses as nearly continuously as possible. Pass roller over unprotected ends of freshly laid mixture only when mixture has become cooled. When work is resumed, cut back laid material to produce slightly beveled edge for full thickness of course. Remove old material which has been cut away and lay new mix against fresh cut. L. When new asphalt/concrete is laid against existing asphalt, existing asphalt/concrete shall be saw cut full depth to provide straight smooth joint. M. In restricted areas where use of paver is impractical, spread and finish asphalt by mechanical compactor. Use wood or steel forms, rigidly supported to assure correct grade and cross section. Carefully place materials to avoid segregation of mix. Do not broadcast material. Remove any lumps that do not break down readily. Place asphalt courses in same sequence as if placed by machine. 3.03 COMPACTION A. Start compaction as soon as possible but not more than 60 minutes from start of moist mixing. Compact loose mixture with approved tamping rollers until entire depth is uniformly compacted. Do not allow stabilized base to mix with underlying material. 5/2013 02710 - 9 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT B. Correct irregularities or weak spots immediately by replacing material and recompacting. C. Apply water to maintain moisture between optimum and 3 percent above optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D 1557. Mix in with a spiked tooth harrow or equal. Reshape surface and lightly scarify to loosen imprints made by equipment. D. Remove and reconstruct sections where average moisture content exceeds ranges specified at time of final compaction. E. Finish by blading surface to final grade after compacting final course. Seal with approved pneumatic tired rollers which are sufficiently light to prevent surface hair line cracking. Rework and recompact at areas where hair line cracking develops. F. Compact to minimum density of 95 percent of modified Proctor density at a moisture content of treated material between optimum and 3 percent above optimum as determined by ASTM D 1557, unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. G. Maintain surface to required lines and grades throughout operation. 3.04 CURING A. Moist cure for minimum of 7 days before adding pavement courses. Restrict traffic on base to local property access. Keep subgrade surface damp by sprinkling. B. If indicated on Plans, cover base surface with a curing membrane as soon as finishing operation is complete. Apply with approved self-propelled pressure distributer at following rates, or as indicated on Plans: 1. MC30: 0.1 gallon per square yard. 2. EPR-1 Prime: 0.15 gallon per square yard. C. Do not use cutback asphalt during the period of April 16 to September 15. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Completed surface shall be smooth and conform to typical section and established lines and grades. B. Top surface of base course: Plus or minus 1/4 inch in cross section, or in 16 foot length. 5/2013 02710 - 10 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. At the direction of the Engineer, a minimum of one core will be taken at random locations per 1,000 linear feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of base to determine in -place depth. B. Contractor may, at his own expense, request additional cores in the vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming in -place depths. If the average of the tests falls below the required depth, place and compact additional material at no cost to the Owner. C. Compaction Testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 at a random location near each depth determination core. Rework and recompact areas that do not conform to compaction requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Fill cores and density test sections with new compacted cement stabilized base. 3.07 NONCONFORMING PAVEMENT A. Recompact pavement sections not meeting specified densities or replace them with new asphaltic concrete material. Replace with new material, sections of base course not meeting surface test requirements or having unacceptable surface texture. Patch asphalt pavement sections in accordance with procedures established by Asphalt Institute. B. Remove and replace areas of asphaltic concrete base course found by cores to be deficient in thickness by more than 10 percent at no cost to Owner. Use new asphaltic concrete base material of thickness shown on Plans. C. Areas of asphaltic concrete base course found by cores to be deficient in thickness by less than 10 percent shall be remedied at the Owner's direction by one of the following methods: 1. Remove and replace using new asphaltic concrete base material of thickness shown on Plans and in accordance with the requirements of this Section at no cost to Owner. 2. Reduce the Unit Price by the ratio of the average thickness (as determined by cores) to the thickness required. D. No adjustments will be made for excess thickness. 3.08 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Maintain stabilized base in good condition until completion of work. Repair defects immediately by replacing base to full depth. 5/2013 02710 - 11 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT B. Protect the asphalt membrane, if used, from being picked up by traffic. The membrane may remain in place when proposed surface courses or other base courses are to be applied. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02710-12of12 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT Section 02751 CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Portland Cement Concrete Pavement for Concrete Streets, Driveways and Sidewalks; Joints and Curing Materials. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 — Submittals 3. Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" b. ASTM C 94, "Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete" c. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" d. ASTM C 131, "Standard Test Methods for Resistance to Degradation of Small -Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine" e. ASTM C 136, "Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates" f. ASTM C 40, "Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete" g. ASTM C 260 h. ASTM C 494, "Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete" i. ASTM A 615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" j. ASTM D 994, "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type)" k. ASTM D 1751, "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Type) 1. ASTM D 6690, "Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot -Applied, for Concrete and Asphaltic Pavements" m. ASTM C 39, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Concrete" n. ASTM C 31, "Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" o. ASTM C 143, "Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete" 08/2011 02751 - 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT p. ASTM C 138, "Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight),Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete" q. ASTM C 231,"Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method" r. ASTM C 171, "Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete" s. ASTM C 309, "Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete" t. ASTM C 42, "Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete" 2. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) a. Tex-406-A, "Material Finer than 75-pm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates (Decantation Test for Concrete Aggregates) b. Tex-203-F, "Sand Equivalent Test" c. Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges, 2004 Adoption 1) Item 438 "Cleaning and Sealing Joints and Cracks (Rigid Pavements and Bridge Decks)" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for concrete paving is on square yard basis. Separate measurement will be made for each different required thickness of pavement. B Payment includes all labor and materials required for installation of concrete paving, joints and curing material, as indicated on Plans. C Refer to Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. D Refer to this Section, 3.26 "Nonconforming Pavement" for unit price adjustments for deficient thickness. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01350 - Submittals. B Submit proposed mix design and test data for each type and strength of concrete in Work. Include proportions and actual compressive strength obtained from design mixes at required test ages. C Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics for mixing equipment, and for traveling form paver, if proposed for use, for approval. D Submit manufacturer's certificates giving properties of reinforcing steel. Provide specimens for testing when required by the Engineer. 08/2011 02751 - 2 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT E Submit product data for joint sealing compound and proposed sealing equipment for approval. F Submit samples of dowel cup, metal supports, and deformed metal strip for approval. 1.04 HANDLING AND STORAGE A Do not mix different classes of aggregate without written permission of the Engineer. B Class of aggregate being used may be changed before or during Work with written permission of the Engineer. New class shall comply with specifications. C Segregated aggregate will be rejected. Before using aggregate whose particles are separated by size, mix them uniformly to grading requirements. D Aggregates mixed with dirt, weeds or foreign matter will be rejected. E Do not dump or store aggregate in roadbed. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Portland Cement: 1 Sample and test cement to verify compliance with Standards of ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III. 2. Bulk cement which meets referenced standards may be used if the method of handling is approved by the Engineer. When using bulk cement, provide satisfactory weighing devices. B Water: Conform to requirements for water in ASTM C 94. C Coarse Aggregate: Gravel or crushed stone, or combination thereof, which is clean, hard, durable, conforms to requirements of ASTM C 33, and has abrasion loss not more than 45 percent by weight when subjected to Los Angeles Abrasion Test (ASTM C 131). No pit run gravel will be allowed. 1. Maximum percentage by weight of deleterious substances shall not exceed following values: ITEM PERCENT BY WEIGHT OF TOTAL SAMPLE MAXIMUM Clay lumps and friable particles. 3.0 Material finer than 75-pm (No. 200) sieve: Concrete subject to abrasion. 3.0* 08/2011 02751 - 3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT All other concrete. 5.0* Coal and lignite: Where surface appearance of concrete is of importance. 0.5 All other concrete. 1.0 * In case of manufactured sand, if material finer than 75-pm (No. 200) sieve consists of dust of fracture, essentially free from clay or shale, these limits may be increased to 5 and 7 percent, respectively. 2. Coarse aggregate (size 1 1/2 inch to No. 4 sieve) shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 33. Gradation shall be within following limits when graded in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE DESIGNATION (SQUARE OPENINGS) (PERCENTAGE BY WEIGHT) Retained on 1 3/4 inch sieve 0 Retained on 1 1/2 inch sieve 0 to 5 Retained on 3/4 inch sieve 30 to 65 Retained on 3/8 inch sieve 70 to 90 Retained on No. 4 sieve 95 to 100 Loss by Decantation Test *Method Tex-406-A 1.0 maximum * In case of aggregates made primarily from crushing of stone, if material finer than 200 sieve is dust of fracture essentially free from clay or shale as established by Part III of Tex-406-A, percent may be increased to 1.5 D Fine Aggregate: Sand, manufactured sand, or combination thereof, composed of clean, hard, durable, uncoated grains, free from loams or other injurious foreign matter. Fine aggregate for concrete shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 33. Gradation shall be within following limits when graded in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE DESIGNATION (SQUARE OPENINGS) (PERCENTAGE BY WEIGHT) Retained on 3/8 inch sieve 0 Retained on No. 4 sieve 0 to 5 Retained on No. 8 sieve 0 to 20 Retained on No. 16 sieve 15 to 50 Retained on No. 30 sieve 35 to 75 Retained on No. 50 sieve 65 to 90 08/2011 02751 - 4 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT Retained on No. 100 sieve Retained on No. 200 sieve 90 to 100 97 to 100 1. When subjected to color test for organic impurities (ASTM C 40), fine aggregate shall not show color darker than standard color. Fine aggregate shall be subjected to Sand Equivalent Test (Tex-203-F). Sand equivalent value shall not be less than 80, unless higher value is shown on Plans. E Air Entraining Agent: Furnish an air entraining agent conforming to requirements of ASTM C 260. F Water Reducer: Water reducing admixture conforming to requirements of ASTM C 494 may be used if required to improve the workability of concrete. Amount and type of such admixture shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. G Reinforcing Steel: 1. Provide new billet steel manufactured by open hearth process and conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Store steel to protect it from mechanical injury and rust. At time of placement, steel shall be free from dirt, scale, rust, paint, oil or other injurious materials. 2. Cold bend reinforcing steel to shapes shown. Once steel has been bent, it may not be rebent. 2.02 CONCRETE JOINTS A When allowed on the Plans, or with approval of the Engineer, Board Expansion Joint Material may be used: Filler board of selected stock. Use wood of density and type as follows: 1. Clear, all -heart cypress weighing no more than 40 pounds per cubic foot, after being oven dried to constant weight. 2. Clear, all -heart redwood weighing no more than 30 pounds per cubic foot, after being oven dried to constant weight. 3. Use wood only when part of a load transmission device assembly. B Unless specified otherwise, use Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Bituminous fiber and bituminous mastic composition material conforming to ASTM D 994 and ASTM D 1751. C Joint Sealing Compound: 1. Hot poured rubber -asphalt compound meeting the requirements of ASTM D 6690. 2. When indicated on Plans, self -leveling Low Modulas Silicone sealant single component meeting the requirements of TxDOT Specification 438. D Load Transmission Devices: 08/2011 02751 - 5 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1. Smooth, steel dowel bars conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60. When indicated on Plans, encase one end of dowel bar in approved cap having inside diameter 1/16 inch greater than diameter of dowel bar. 2. Deformed steel tie bars conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60. E Metal Supports for Reinforcing Steel and Joint Assembly: Employ metal supports of approved shape and size that will secure reinforcing steel and joint assembly in correct position during placing and finishing of concrete. Space supports as directed by the Engineer. 2.03 EQUIPMENT A Equipment: Conform to requirements of ASTM C 94. 2.04 MIXING A Employ and pay certified testing laboratory to prepare mix designs. Compressive strength shall be as specified using test specimens prepared in accordance with ASTM C 31 and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39. Contractor shall determine and measure batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water for batch designs and all concrete produced for Work. Mix shall conform to these specifications and other requirements indicated on Plans. B Mix design to produce concrete which will have a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi at 7days and 3500 psi at 28 days. When high -early -strength cement is used, it shall reach a minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi at 7 days and 4000 at 28 days. Slump of concrete shall be at least 2 inch, but no more than 5 inches, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 143. 1. Concrete pavement shall contain at least 5 1/2 sacks (94 pounds per sack) of cement per cubic yard, with not more than 6.5 gallons of water, net, per sack of cement (water cement ratio maximum 0.57). Cement content shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 138. Addition of mineral filler may be used to improve workability or plasticity of concrete to limits specified. 2. Coarse dry aggregate shall not exceed 85 percent of loose volume of concrete. 3. Add air -entraining admixture to ensure uniform distribution of agent throughout batch. Base air content of freshly mixed air -entrained concrete upon trial mixes with materials to be used in Work, adjusted to produce concrete of required plasticity and workability. Percentage of air entrainment in mix shall be 4 1/2 percent plus or minus 1 1/2 percent. Air content shall be determined by testing in accordance with ASTM C 231. 4. Use retardant when temperature exceeds 90 degrees F. Proportion shall be as recommended by manufacturer. Use same brand as used for air -entraining agent. Add and batch material using same methods as used for air -entraining agent. Accelerators will not be allowed unless approved by the Engineer. 08/2011 02751 - 6 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 2.05 COVER MATERIALS FOR CURING A Curing materials shall conform to one of following: 1. Polyethylene Film: Opaque pigmented white film conforming to requirements of ASTM C 171. 2. Waterproofed Paper: Paper conforming to requirements of ASTM C 171. 3. Cotton Mats: Single layer of cotton filler completely enclosed in cover of cotton cloth. Mats shall contain not less than 3/4 of a pound of uniformly distributed cotton filler per square yard of mat. Cotton cloth used for covering materials shall weigh not less than 6 ounces per square yard. Mats shall be stitched so that mat will contact surface of pavement at all points when saturated with water. 4. Liquid Membrane -forming Compounds: Liquid membrane -forming compounds shall conform to ASTM C 309. Membrane shall restrict loss of water to not more than 0.55 kg/m2 of surface in 72 hours. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify compacted base is ready to support imposed loads and meets compaction requirements. B Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A Properly prepare, shape and compact each section of subgrade before placing forms, reinforcing steel or concrete. After forms have been set to proper grade and alignment, use subgrade planer to shape subgrade to its final cross section. Check contour of subgrade with template. B Remove subgrade that will not support loaded form. Replace and compact subgrade to required density. 3.03 EQUIPMENT A Alternate equipment and methods, other than those required by this article, may be used provided the Contractor demonstrates that equal, or better, results will be obtained. Maintain equipment for preparing subgrade and for finishing and compacting concrete in good working order. Unless approved otherwise by the Engineer or the Plans, slip form paving methods shall be used. B Subgrade Planer and Template: 1. Use subgrade planer with adjustable cutting blades to trim subgrade to exact section shown on Plans. Select planer mounted on visible rollers which ride on forms. Planer frame must have sufficient weight so that it will remain on form 08/2011 02751 - 7 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT at all times, and have such strength and rigidity that, under tests made by changing support from wheels to center, planer will not develop deflection of more than 1/8 inch. Tractors used to pull planer shall not produce ruts or indentations in subgrade. When slip form method of paving is used, operate subgrade planer on prepared track grade or have it controlled by electronic sensor system operated from string line to establish horizontal alignment and elevation of subbase. 2. Provide template for checking contour of subgrade. Template shall be long enough to rest upon side forms and have such strength and rigidity that, when supported at center, maximum deflection shall not exceed 1/8 inch. Fit template with accurately adjustable rods projecting downward at 1 foot intervals. Adjust these rods to gauge cross sections of slab bottom when template is resting on side forms. C Texturing Equipment 1. Carpet Drag a. Provide a carpet drag mounted on a work bridge or a moveable support system. Provide a single piece of carpet of sufficient transverse length of carpet is in contact with the concrete being placed to produce the desired texture. D Machine Finisher: Provide a power -driven, transverse finishing machine designed and operated to strike off and consolidate concrete. Machine shall have two screeds accurately adjusted to crown of pavement and with frame equipped to ride on forms. Use finishing machine with rubber tires if it operates on concrete pavement. E Hand Finishing: 1. Provide mechanical strike and tamping template 2 feet longer than width of pavement to be finished. Shape template to pavement section. 2. Provide two bridges to ride on forms and span pavement for finishing expansion and dummy joints. Provide floats and necessary edging and finishing tools. F Vibrators: Furnish mechanically operated synchronized vibrators mounted on tamping bar which rides on forms and hand -manipulated mechanical vibrators. Furnish vibrators with frequency of vibration to provide maximum consolidation of concrete without segregation. 3.04 FORMS A Side Forms: Use clean metal forms of approved shape and section. Preferred depth of form shall be equal to required edge thickness of pavement. Forms with depths greater or less than required edge thickness of pavement will be permitted, provided difference between form depth and edge thickness if not greater than 1 inch, and further provided that forms of depth less than pavement edge are brought to required edge thickness by securely attaching wood or metal strips to bottom of form, or by grouting under form. 08/2011 02751 - 8 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT Bottom flange of form shall be same size as thickness of pavement. Aluminum forms are not allowed. All forms shall be approved by the Engineer. Length of form sections shall be not less than 10 feet and each section shall provide for staking in position with not less than 3 pins. Flexible or curved forms of wood or metal of proper radius shall be used for curves of 200 foot radius or less. Forms shall have ample strength and shall be provided with adequate devices for secure setting so that when in -place they will withstand, without visible springing or settlement, impact and vibration of finishing machine. In no case shall base width be less than 8 inches for form 8 inches or more in height. Forms shall be free from warp, bends or kinks and shall be sufficiently true to provide reasonable straight edge on concrete. Top of each form section, when tested with straight edge, shall conform to requirements specified for surface of completed pavement. Provide sufficient forms for satisfactory placement of concrete. For short radius curves, forms less than 10 feet in length or curved forms may be used. For curb returns at street intersections and driveways, wood forms of good grade and quality may be used. B Form Setting: 1. Rest forms directly on subgrade. Do not shim with pebbles or dirt. Accurately set forms to required grade and alignment and, during entire operation of placing, compacting and finishing of concrete, do not deviate from this grade and alignment more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet of length. Do not remove forms for at least 8 hours after completion of finishing operations. Provide supply of forms that will be adequate for orderly and continuous placing of concrete. Set forms and check grade for at least 300 feet ahead of mixer or as approved by the Engineer. 2. Adjacent slabs may be used instead of forms, provided that concrete is well protected from possible damage by finishing equipment. These adjacent slabs shall not be used for forms until concrete has aged at least 7 days. 3.05 REINFORCING STEEL AND JOINT ASSEMBLIES A Accurately place reinforcing steel and joint assemblies and position them securely as indicated on Plans. Wire reinforcing bars securely together at intersections and splices. Bars and coatings shall be free of rust, dirt or other foreign matter when concrete is placed. Place all reinforcing steel and secure to chairs. All reinforcing steel must be positively supported before pour begins. B Place pavement joint assemblies at required locations and elevations, and rigidly secure all parts in required positions. Install dowel bars accurately in joint assemblies as shown, each parallel to pavement surface and to center line of pavement. Rigidly secure in required position to prevent displacement during placing and finishing of concrete. Accurately cut header boards, joint filler and other material used for forming joints to receive each dowel bar. Drill dowels into existing pavement, secure with epoxy, and provide paving headers, as required, to provide rigid pavement sections. 08/2011 02751 - 9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3.06 PLACEMENT A Place concrete only in rain -free days when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35 degrees F and rising. Concrete shall not be placed when temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling. Place concrete that is between 40 degrees F and 95 degrees F at the time of discharge. Do not exceed 60 minutes between introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge. When the weather is such that the concrete temperature would exceed 90 degrees F, employ effective means, such as pre -cooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain concrete temperature, as placed, below 95 degrees F. Do not place when concrete temperature is above 95 degrees F at the time of discharge. B Place concrete within 60 minutes of mixing. Remove and dispose of concrete not placed within this period. C Concrete slump during placement shall be 2 to 5 inches, except when using traveling - form paver slump shall be a maximum of 3 inches. D Deposit concrete rapidly and continuously on subgrade or subbase in successive batches. Distribute concrete to required depth and for entire width of placement in manner that will require as little rehandling as possible. Where hand spreading is necessary, distribute concrete with shovels or by other approved methods. Use only concrete rakes in handling concrete. At end of day or in case of unavoidable interruption of more than 30 minutes, place transverse construction joint at point of stopping work. Remove and replace sections less than 10 feet long. E Take special care in placing and spading concrete against forms and at longitudinal and transverse joints to prevent honeycombing. Voids in edge of finished pavement will be cause for rejection. 3.07 FINISHING A Finish concrete pavement with power -driven transverse finishing machines or by hand finishing methods. 1. Use transverse finishing machine to make at least two trips over each area. Make last trip continuous run of not less than 40 feet. After transverse screeding, use hand -operated longitudinal float to test and level surface to required grade. 2. Hand finish with mechanical strike and tamping template as wide as pavement to be finished. Shape template to pavement section. Move strike template forward in direction of placement, maintaining slight excess of material in front of cutting edge. Make at least two trips over each area. Screed pavement surface to required section. Work screed with combined transverse and longitudinal motion in direction work is progressing. Maintain screed in contact with forms. Use longitudinal float to level surface. 08/2011 02751 - 10 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT B On narrow strips and transitions, finish concrete pavement by hand. Thoroughly work concrete around reinforcement and embedded fixtures. Strike off concrete with strike - off screed. Move strike -off screed forward with combined transverse and longitudinal motion in direction work is progressing, maintaining screed in contact with forms, and maintaining slight excess of materials in front of cutting edge. Tamp concrete with tamping template. Use longitudinal float to level surface. C While concrete is still workable, give surface final belting to produce a uniform surface of gritty texture. Perform belting with short rapid transverse strokes having sweeping longitudinal motion. 3.08 JOINTS AND JOINT SEALING A When new work is adjacent to existing concrete, place joints at same location as existing joints in adjacent pavement. B If the limit of removal of existing concrete or asphaltic pavement does not fall on existing joint, saw cut existing pavement minimum of 1 1/2 inches deep to provide straight, smooth joint surface without chipping, spalling or cracks. 3.09 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A Place transverse construction joint wherever concrete placement must be stopped for more than 30 minutes. Place longitudinal construction joints at interior edges of pavement lanes using No. 5 deformed tie bars, 30 inches long and spaced 18 inches on centers. 3.10 EXPANSION JOINTS A Place 3/4 inch expansion joints at locations shown on Plans. Use no filler shorter than 6 feet. When pavement is 24 feet or narrower, use not more than 2 lengths of filler. Secure pieces to form straight joint. Shape filler accurately to cross section of concrete slab. Use load transmission devices of type and size shown on Plans. Seal with joint sealing compound. 3.11 CONTRACTION JOINTS A Place contraction joints at same locations as in adjacent pavement or at spaces indicated on Plans. Maximum spacing of contraction/construction joints, 20 feet. Seal groove with joint sealing compound. 3.12 LONGITUDINAL WEAKENED PLANE JOINTS A Place longitudinal weakened plane joints at spaces indicated on Plans. Seal groove with joint sealing compound. 08/2011 02751 - 11 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3.13 SAWED JOINTS A Contractor may use sawed joints as an alternate to contraction and weakened plane joints. Circular cutter shall be capable of cutting straight line groove minimum of 1/2 inch wide. Depth shall be one quarter of pavement thickness plus 1/2 inch. Commence sawing as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting without chipping, spalling or tearing and prior to initiation of cracks. Once sawing has commenced, it shall be continued until completed. Make saw cut with one pass. Complete sawing within 24 hours of concrete placement. Saw joints at required spacing consecutively in sequence of concrete placement. B Concrete Saw: Provide sawing equipment adequate in power to complete sawing to required dimensions and within required time. Provide at least one standby saw in good working order. Maintain an ample supply of saw blades at work site at all times during sawing operations. Sawing equipment shall be on job at all times during concrete placement. 3.14 JOINTS FOR CURB, AND CURB AND GUTTER A Place 3/4 inch preformed expansion joints through curb and gutters at locations of expansion and contraction joints in pavement; at end of radius returns at street intersections and driveways; and at curb inlets. Maximum spacing shall be 60 foot centers. 3.15 JOINTS FOR CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS A Provide 3/4 inch expansion joints conforming to ASTM D 1751 across driveway in line with street face of sidewalks, at existing concrete driveways, and along intersections with sidewalks and other structures. Extend expansion joint material full depth of slab. Where dowels are used, wrap or sleeve one end. 3.16 JOINT SEALING A Seal joints only when surface and joints are dry, ambient temperature is above 50 degrees F but less than 85 degrees F, and weather is not foggy or rainy. B Joint sealing equipment shall be in first-class working condition, and be approved by the Engineer. Use concrete grooving machine or power -operated wire brush and other equipment such as plow, brooms, brushes, blowers or hydro or abrasive cleaning as required to produce satisfactory joints. C Clean joints of loose scale, dirt, dust and curing compound. Term joint includes wide joint spaces, expansion joints, dummy groove joints or cracks, either preformed or natural. Remove loose material from concrete surfaces adjacent to joints. 08/2011 02751 - 12 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT D Fill joints neatly with joint sealer to depth shown. Pour sufficient joint sealer into joints so that, upon completion, surface of sealer within joint will be 1/4 inch below level of adjacent surface or at elevation as directed. 3.17 CONCRETE CURING A Concrete pavement shall be cured by protecting it against loss of moisture for period of not less than 72 hours immediately upon completion of finishing operations. Do not use membrane curing for concrete pavement to be overlaid by asphaltic concrete. B Where curing requires use of water, curing shall have prior right to all water supply or supplies. Failure to provide sufficient cover material shall be cause for immediate suspension of concreting operations. 3.18 POLYETHYLENE FILM CURING A Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply water in the form of a fine spray. Cover surface with polyethylene film so film will remain in intimate contact with surface during specified curing period. B Cover entire surface and both edges of pavement slab. Joints in film sheets shall overlap minimum of 12 inches. Immediately repair tears or holes occurring during curing period by placing acceptable moisture -proof patches or by replacing. 3.19 WATERPROOFED PAPER CURING A Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply water in form of fine spray. Cover surface with waterproofed paper so paper will remain in intimate contact with surface during specified curing period. B Prepare waterproofed paper to form blankets of sufficient width to cover entire surface and both edges of pavement slab, and not be more than 60 feet in length. Joints in blankets caused by joining paper sheets shall lap not less than 5 inches and shall be securely sealed with asphalt cement having melting point of approximately 180 degrees F. Place blankets to secure an overlap of at least 12 inches. Tears or holes appearing in paper during curing period shall be immediately repaired by cementing patches over defects. 3.20 COTTON MAT CURING A Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, completely cover surface with cotton mats, thoroughly saturated before application, in such manner that they will contact surface of pavement equally at all points. B Mats shall remain on pavement for specified curing period. Keep mats saturated so that, when lightly compressed, water will drip freely from them. Keep banked earth or cotton mat covering edges saturated. 08/2011 02751 - 13 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3.21 LIQUID MEMBRANE -FORMING COMPOUNDS A Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply liquid membrane -forming compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.22 TOLERANCES A Test entire surface before initial set and correct irregularities or undulations. Bring surface within requirements of following test and then finish. Place 10 foot straightedge parallel to center of roadway to bridge any depressions and touch all high spots. Do not permit ordinates measured from face of straight edge to surface of pavement to exceed 1/16 inch per foot from nearest point of contact. Maximum ordinate with 10 foot straightedge shall not exceed 1/8 inch. Grind spots in excess of requirements of this paragraph to meet surface test requirements. Restore texture by grooving concrete to meet surface finishing specifications. 3.23 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services. B Test Specimens: Four test specimen cylinders for compressive strength tests will be made for each 150 cubic yards or less of pavement that is placed in one day. Two specimens will be tested at 7 days. For failed 7-day tests, remaining two specimens will be tested at 28 days. Specimens will be made, cured and tested in accordance with ASTM C 31 and ASTM C 39. C Yield test will be made in accordance with ASTM C 138 for cement content per cubic yard of concrete. If such cement content is found to be less than that specified per cubic yard, reduce batch weights until amount of cement per cubic yard of concrete conforms to requirements. D At the Engineer's direction a minimum of one 4-inch core may be taken at random locations per 1,000 feet per lane or 500 square yards of pavement to measure in -place depth. Each core may be tested for 28 day compressive strength according to methods of ASTM C 42. The 28 day compressive strength of each core tested shall be a minimum of 3000 pounds per square inch. E Contractor may, at his own expense, request three additional cores in vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming in -place depths. In -place depth at these locations shall be the average of depth of four cores. F Fill cores and density test sections with new concrete paving or non shrink grout. 08/2011 02751 - 14 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3.24 NONCONFORMING PAVEMENT A Remove and replace areas of pavement found by cores to be deficient in thickness by more than 10 percent, or that fail compressive strength tests, with new concrete pavement of thickness shown on Plans at no cost to the Owner. B Areas of concrete pavement found by cores to be deficient in thickness by less than 10 percent shall be remedied at the Owner's direction by one of the following methods: 1. Remove and replace using new concrete pavement of thickness shown on Plans and in accordance with the requirements of this Section at no cost to Owner. 2. Reduce the Unit Price by the ratio of the average thickness (as determined by cores) to the thickness required. C No adjustments will be made for excess thickness. 3.25 PAVEMENT MARKINGS A Restore pavement markings to match those existing in accordance with City of Pearland Standard Details and the Engineer's requirements. 3.26 PROTECTION A Barricade pavement section from use until concrete has attained minimum design strength. B On those sections of pavement to be opened to traffic, seal joints, clean pavement and place earth against pavement edges before permitting use by traffic. Such opening of pavement to traffic shall not relieve Contractor from his responsibility for Work. C Maintain concrete paving in good condition until completion of Work. D Repair defects by replacing concrete to full depth. END OF SECTION 08/2011 02751 - 15 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND 1.0 GENERAL CURB, CURB & GUTTER, AND HEADERS Section 02770 CURB, CURB & GUTTER, AND HEADERS 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Reinforced concrete curb, reinforced monolithic concrete curb and gutter, and mountable curb. B Paving headers and railroad headers poured monolithically with concrete base or pavement. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 — Submittals 3. Section 02751 — Concrete Pavement 4. Section 02335 — Subgrade 5. Section 02710 — Base Course for Pavement 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for curbs and for curbs and gutter is on linear foot basis measured along face of curb. B Measurement for headers is on linear foot basis measured between lips of gutters adjacent to concrete base and measured between backs of curbs adjacent to concrete pavement. C No separate payment will be made for curbs poured monolithically with concrete pavement. D Refer to Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit details of proposed formwork for approval. C Submit proposed mix design and test data for each type and strength of concrete in Work. Include proportions and actual flexural strength obtained from design mixes at required test ages. D Submit manufacturer's certifications giving properties of reinforcing steel. Provide specimens for testing when required by the Engineer. 07/2006 02770 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS CURB, CURB & GUTTER, AND HEADERS A Concrete: Conform to material and proportion requirements for concrete of Section 02751 — Concrete Pavement. B Reinforcing Steel: Conform to material requirements for reinforcing steel of Section 02751 — Concrete Pavement. C Grout: Nonmetallic, nonshrink grout containing no chloride producing agents conforming to the following requirements. Compressive strength at 7 days 3,500 psi Compressive strength at 28 days 8,000 psi Initial set time 45 minutes Final set time 1.5 hours D Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Conform to material requirements for preformed expansion joint material of Section 02751 — Concrete Pavement. E Joint Sealing Compound: Conform to material requirements of Section 02751 — Concrete Pavement. F Mortar: Mortar finish composed of one part Portland cement and 11/2 parts of fine aggregate. Use only when approved by the Engineer. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Prepare subgrade or base in accordance with applicable portions of Section 02335 — Subgrade or Section 02710 — Base Course for Pavement. 3.02 PLACEMENT A Guideline: Set to follow top line of curb. Attach indicator to provide constant comparison between top of curb and guideline. Insure flow lines for monolithic curb and gutters conform to slopes indicated on Plans. B Forms: Brace sufficiently to maintain position during pour. Use metal templates cut to section shown on Plans. C Reinforcement: Secure in proper position so that steel will remain in place throughout placement. 07/2006 02770 - 2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CURB, CURB & GUTTER, AND HEADERS D Joints: Place in accordance with Section 02751— Concrete Pavement. Place dummy groove joints at 6-foot centers at right angles to curb lines. Cut dummy grooves 1/4 inch deep using an approved edging tool. E Place concrete in forms to required depth. Consolidate thoroughly. Do not permit rock pockets in form. Entirely cover top surfaces with mortar. 3.03 MANUAL FINISHING A After concrete is in place, remove front curb forms. Form exposed portions of curb, and of curb and gutter, using mule which conforms to curb shape, as shown on Plans. B Thin coat of mortar may be worked into exposed face of curb using mule and two - handled wooden darby at least 3 feet long. C Before applying final finish move 10 foot straightedge across gutter and up curb to back form of curb. Repeat until curb and gutter are true to grade and section. Lap straightedge every 5 feet. D Steel trowel finish surfaces to smooth, even finish. Make face of finished curb true and straight. E Edge outer edge of gutter with 1/4-inch edger. Finish edges with tool having 1/4 inch radius. F Finish visible surfaces and edges of finished curb and gutter free from blemishes, form marks and tool marks. Finished curb or curb and gutter shall have uniform color, shape and appearance. 3.04 MECHANICAL FINISHING A Mechanical curb forming and finishing machines may be used instead of, or in conjunction with, previously described methods, if approved by the Engineer. Use of mechanical methods shall provide specified curb design and finish. 3.05 CURING A Immediately after finishing operations, cure exposed surfaces of curbs and gutters in accordance with Section 02751 — Concrete Pavement. 3.06 TOLERANCES A Top surfaces of curb and gutter shall have uniform width and shall be free from humps, sags or other irregularities. Surfaces of curb top, curb face and gutter shall not vary more than 1/8 inch from edge of a 10-foot long straightedge laid along them, except at grade changes. 3.07 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Maintain curbs and gutters in good condition until completion of Work. 07/2006 02770 - 3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Section 02771 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement for Concrete Sidewalks. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 - 2. Section 01350 - 3. Section 01450 - 4. Section 02751 - C. Referenced Standards: Measurement and Payment Procedures Submittals Testing Laboratory Services Concrete Pavement 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" b. ASTM C 94, "Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete" c. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" d. ASTM A 615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" e. ASTM D 994, "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type)" f. ASTM D 1751, "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non extruding and Resilient Bituminous Type) ASTM D 6690, "Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot -Applied, for Concrete and Asphaltic Pavements" h. ASTM C 39, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Concrete" i. ASTM C 31, "Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" j. ASTM C 138, "Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight),Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete" k. ASTM C 231,"Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method" 1. ASTM C 42, "Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete" g. 2. Texas Accessibility Standards of Architectural Barriers Act, Article 9102, Texas Civil Statues 5/2013 02771 - 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for concrete sidewalks is on square foot basis. B. Payment includes all labor and materials required for installation of concrete sidewalks, joints and curing material. No payment will be made for work in areas where sidewalk has been removed for contractor's convenience. C. Refer to Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01350 - Submittals. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Conform to material and proportion requirements for concrete of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. B. Reinforcing Steel: conform to material requirements of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving for reinforcing steel. Use No. 4 reinforcing bars. C. Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Conform to material requirements for preformed expansion joint material of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. D. Expansion Joint Filler: Conform to material requirements for expansion joint material of Section 02751 - Concrete Pavement. E. Forms: Use straight, unwarped wood or metal forms with nominal depth equal to or greater than proposed sidewalk thickness. F. Sand Bed: Conform to material requirements for bank run sand. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 REPLACEMENT A. Replace sidewalks which are removed or damaged during construction with thickness and width equivalent to one removed or damaged unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Finish surface (exposed aggregate, brick pavers, etc.) to match existing sidewalk. B. Provide replaced and new sidewalks with wheelchair ramps when sidewalk intersects curb at street. 5/2013 02771 - 2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify and protect utilities which are to remain. B. Protect living trees, other plant growth and features designated to remain. C. Conduct clearing and grubbing operations in accordance with Section 02200 - Site Preparation. D. Determine sidewalk horizontal and vertical alignment to facilitate drainage and prevent ponding. Location and slopes must be in compliance with Texas Accessibility Academy Standards latest edition and revisions. E. Excavate subgrade 6 inches beyond outside lines of sidewalk. Shape to line, grade and cross section. Compact 6 inches of select fill to minimum of 95% maximum dry density at optimal or above optimal moisture content as per ASTM D698. For soils with plasticity index above 40 percent, stabilize soil with lime in accordance with Section 02335 - Subgrade. Compact subgrade to minimum of 90 percent maximum dry density at optimum to 3 percent above optimum moisture content, as determined by ASTM D 698. No separate pay for this requirement. This work shall be subsidiary to sidewalk square foot unit pricing. 3.03 PLACEMENT A. Setting Forms: Straight, unwarped wood or metal forms with nominal depth 1/2" greater than proposed sidewalk thickness. Securely stake forms to line and grade. Maintain position during concrete placement. B. Reinforcement: 1. Install No. 4 reinforcing bars. 2. Install reinforcing steel as shown on the Drawings. Lay longitudinal bars in walk continuously through expansion joints. Reinforcing bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than 1/4 inch. 3. Use sufficient number of chairs to support reinforcement in manner to maintain reinforcement in center of slab vertically during placement. 4. Drill dowels into existing paving, sidewalk and driveways, secure with epoxy and provide headers as required. C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints with load transfer units in accordance with Section 02751 - Concrete Pavement. D. Place concrete in forms to specified depth and tamp thoroughly with "jitterbug" tamp, or other acceptable method. Bring mortar to surface. 5/2013 02771 - 3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS E. Strike off to smooth finish with wood strike board. Finish smoothly with wood hand float. Brush across sidewalk lightly with fine -haired brush. F. Apply coating to wheelchair ramp with contrasting color. G. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, mark off sidewalk joints 1/2 inch deep, at spacing equal to width of walk. Use joint tool equal in width to edging tool. H. Finish edges with tool having 3/8 inch radius. After concrete has set sufficiently, refill space along sides of sidewalk to 1 inch from top of walk with suitable material. Tamp until firm and solid, place sod as applicable. Dispose of excess material. Repair driveways and parking lots damaged by sidewalk excavation in accordance with Section 02980 - Pavement Repair and Resurfacing. 3.04 CURING A. Conform to requirements of Section 02751 - Concrete Pavement. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services. B. Compressive Strength Test Specimens: Four test specimens for compressive strength test will be made in accordance with ASTM C 31 for each 30 cubic yards or less of sidewalk that is placed on one day. Two specimens will be tested at 7 days. Remaining two specimens will be tested at 28 days. Specimens will be tested in accordance with ASTM C 39. Minimum compressive strength: 2500 psi at 7 days and 3500 psi at 28 days. C. Yield test for cement content per cubic yard of concrete will be made in accordance with ASTM C 138. When cement content is found to be less than that specified per cubic yard, reduce batch weights until amount of cement per cubic yard of concrete conforms to requirements. D. If the Contractor places concrete without notifying the City, Contractor will have the concrete tested by means of core test as specified in ASTM C 42. When concrete does not meet specification, cost of test will be deducted from payment. Contractor will replace the cored section of sidewalk at no cost to City. E. Sampling of fresh concrete shall be in accordance with ASTM C 172. F. Take slump tests when cylinders are made and when concrete slump appears excessive. 5/2013 02771 - 4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS G. Concrete shall be acceptable when average of two 28 day compression tests is equal to or greater than minimum 28 day strength specified. H. If either of two tests on field samples is less than average of two tests by more than 10 percent, that entire test shall be considered erratic and not indicative of concrete strength. Core samples will be required of in -place concrete in question. I. If 28 day laboratory test indicates that concrete of low strength has been placed, test concrete in question by taking cores as directed by Project Manager. Take and test at least three representative cores as specified in ASTM C 42 and deduct cost from payment due. 3.06 NONCONFORMING CONCRETE A. Remove and replace areas that fail compressive strength tests, with concrete of thickness shown on Drawings. B. Replace nonconforming sections at no additional cost to City. Replacement section shall be no less in length than the width of sidewalks. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Maintain newly placed concrete in good condition until completion of Work. B. Replace damaged areas at no cost to City. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02771 - 5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION Section 02811 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Pipe and fittings, valves, sprinkler heads, accessories. B Control system and wiring for automatic control irrigation system. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 — Submittals 3. Section 02931 — Landscape and Tree Planting 4. Section 01310 — Coordination and Meetings D Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 2564, "Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for landscape irrigation under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If landscape irrigation is included as a Bid Item, measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit manufacturer's data and details for landscape irrigation system to include pressure ratings, rated capacities, and settings of selected models for the following: 1. General -duty valves. 2. Specialty valves. 3. Control -valve boxes. 4. Sprinklers. 5. Irrigation accessories. 6. Controllers. C Evidence of State of Texas irrigation license and required experience. 12/2014 02811 - 1 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION D Shop Drawings: Show irrigation system piping, including plan layout, and locations, types, sizes, capacities, and flow characteristics of irrigation system piping components. Include water meters, backflow preventers, valves, piping, sprinklers and accessories, controls, and wiring. Show areas of sprinkler spray and overspray. Show wire size and number of conductors for each control cable. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A Irrigation Lateral Lines: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow. B Drain Piping: Downstream from circuit -piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure. C Irrigation Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water -distribution -system pressure. D Architect: The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the Owner's authorized representative or the Landscape Architect or the design engineer. 1.05 RECORD AND AS -BUILT DRAWINGS A The Contractor shall provide and keep up to date and complete "as -built" record set of drawings which shall be corrected daily and show every change from the original drawings and specifications and the exact "as -built" locations, sizes, and kinds of equipment. This set of drawings shall be kept on the site and shall be used only as a record set. B These drawings shall also serve as work progress sheets and shall be available at all times for inspection and shall be kept in a location designated by the Architect. Should the record as -built progress sheets not be available for review or not up-to-date at the time of any inspection, it will be assumed no work has been completed and the Contractor will be assessed the cost of that site visit at the current billing rate of the Architect. No other observations shall take place prior to payment of that assessment. C The Contractor shall make neat and legible notations on the as -built progress sheets daily as the work proceeds, showing the work as actually installed. D Before the date of the final inspection, the Contractor shall transfer all information from the "as -built" prints to a mylar. Contractor shall use symbols and notation consistent with original drawings. E The Contractor shall dimension from two (2) permanent points of reference, building comers, sidewalk, or road intersections, etc., the location of the following items: 1. Connection to existing water lines 2. Connection to existing electrical power 3. Gate valves 4. Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimensions max. 100' along routing) 12/2014 02811 -2 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 5. Sprinkler control valves 6. Routing of control wiring 7. Quick coupling valves 8. Other related equipment as directed by the Architect 9. Sleeve locations 1.06 EXPLANATION OF DRAWINGS A Due to the scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc., which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting all of his work and plan his work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, etc., as may be required to meet such conditions. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. The work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems, planting, and architectural features. B All work called for on the drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and installed whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications. C The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in engineering. Such obstructions or differences should be brought to the attention of the Owner's authorized representative. In the event this notification is not performed, the irrigation contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revisions necessary. D No irrigation shall be required for undisturbed natural areas or undisturbed existing trees. 1.07 CONTROLLER CHARTS A As -built drawings shall be approved by the Architect before controller charts are prepared. 1. Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number, list of equipment with name and addresses of local manufacturer's representative. 2. Catalog and parts sheets on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Guarantee statement. 4. Complete operating and maintenance instruction on all major equipment. 1.08 UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE (UDC) REFERENCES A Except for single-family lots and developments, all required landscaping areas shall be 100% irrigated by one of, or a combination of, the following methods: 1. An automatic underground irrigation system: 2. A drip irrigation system; 3. A hose attachment within 100 feet of all plant material, provided, however , that a hose attachment within 200 feet of all plant material in non -street yards shall be sufficient 12/2014 02811 -3 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION B Irrigation zone design - A site plan, at a readable and defined scale, shall be submitted illustrating zones, delineating micro -irrigation zones and areas utilizing irrigation techniques other than micro -irrigation. Fifty (50) percent of the on -site green space shall be allowed to utilize irrigation techniques other than micro -irrigation. Turf areas shall be on separate irrigation zones from other landscaping plant zones. The irrigation system should be prepared by a licensed irrigator and designed to accommodate separate landscape plant zones based on different watering requirements unless approved by the Parks Director as indicated in the UDC Section 4.2.2.5, Item 8.D.1. C Overspray/ Runoff - All irrigation systems shall be designed to avoid overspray / runoff, low head drainage, or other similar conditions where water flows onto or over adjacent property, non -irrigated areas, roadways, walkways, structures, or water features. Narrow areas (four feet wide or less) shall not be irrigated unless micro - irrigation is utilized. D Landscaping - a site plan shall be submitted identifying all existing vegetation to be preserved, proposed turf, and other landscape areas. Installed trees and plants should be grouped together into landscape plant zones according to water and cultural (soil, climate and light) requirements. Plant groupings based on water requirements are as follows: natural, drought tolerant, and oasis. E Turf / Turfgrass - A maximum of fifty (50) percent of green space may be planted with turf grass configured with a permanent irrigation system. Turfgrass planted in excess of this limitation shall not have a permanent irrigation system. Micro -irrigation shall not be used on turfgrass unless approved by the Parks Director as indicated in the UDC Section 4.2.2.5, Item 8.D.1. 1.09 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A Electric solenoid controlled underground irrigation system. B Source Power: 120 volt 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B All irrigation systems shall be designed and sealed in accordance with the Texas Licensed Irrigations Act and shall be professionally installed. C Installer - Installation of Irrigation System shall be performed under the direction of a State of Texas licensed irrigator with not less than 5 years' experience in this type of work. D Manufacturer's Directions: Manufacturer's directions and detailed drawings shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturers of articles used in this contract furnish directions covering points not shown in the drawings and specifications. 12/2014 02811 - 4 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION E Ordinances, Codes and Regulations: All local, municipal and state laws, and rules and regulations governing or relating to any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications, and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Anything contained in these specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of the above rules and regulations and requirements of the same. However, when these specifications and drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by the above rules and regulations, these specifications and drawings shall take precedence. 1.11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A Conform to applicable code for piping and component requirements. 1.12 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section. 1.13 COORDINATION A Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01310 — Coordination and Meetings B Coordinate work under provisions of Section 02931 — Landscape and Tree Planting. C Coordinate the work with site landscape grading and delivery of plant life. 1.14 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND HANDLING A Materials shall be delivered in manufacturer's unopened packaging labeled to indicate manufacturer's name and product identification. Ensure that packaging and labeling remain intact until installation. Materials shall be stored protected from the elements, including direct sunlight. B Pipes shall be handled so as to prevent them from being damaged and to maintain their straightness. Pipe ends shall be wrapped; Pipes shall be stored on beds the full length of the pipes; Damaged or dented pipes or fittings shall not be used. 1.15 SUBSTITUTIONS A If the Irrigation Contractor wishes to substitute any equipment or materials for those equipment or materials listed on the irrigation drawings and specifications, he may do so by providing the following information to the Owner's authorized representative for approval: 1. Provide a statement indicating the reason for making the substitution. Use a separate sheet of paper for each item to be substituted. 2. Provide descriptive catalog literature, performance charts and flow charts for each item to be substituted. 3. Provide the amount of cost savings if the substituted item is approved. 12/2014 02811 - 5 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION B Owner's authorized representative shall have the sole responsibility in accepting or rejecting any substituted item as an approved equal to those equipment and materials listed on the irrigation drawings and specifications. 1.16 EXTRA MATERIALS A Furnish extra components listed as Extra Items in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal. 1 Two sprinkler heads of each type and size. 2. Two valve box keys. 3. Two wrenches for each type head core and for removing and installing each type head. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.02 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast -copper -alloy or ASME B 16.22, wrought -copper, solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought -copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast -copper -alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces and solder joint or threaded ends. B Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K, water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast -copper -alloy or ASME B 16.22, wrought- copper, solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought- copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast -copper -alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces and solder joint or threaded ends. C Mainline PVC pipe: 1. Pressure Main Line: 12/2014 0281 1 - 6 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION a. All main line shall be schedule 40 with solvent welded joints. b. Pipe shall be made from an NSF approved Type I, Grade I, PVC compound conforming to ASTM resin specification D1785. All pipe must meet requirements as set forth in Federal Specification PS-22-70, with an appropriate standard dimension (S.D.R.) (Solvent -weld pipe). 2. PVC Non -Pressure Lateral Line Piping: a. Non -pressure buried lateral line piping shall be PVC class 200 with solvent -weld joints. b. Pipe shall be made from NSF approved, Type I, Grade II PVC com- pound conforming to ASTM resin specification D I 784. All pipes must meet requirements set forth in Federal Specification PS-22-70 with an appropriate standard dimension ratio. 3. Fittings 4" and larger shall be push -on Ductile Iron designed and manufactured using ASTM A-536 Grade 70-50-05 ductile iron with tensile strength of 70,000 psi such as manufactured by Harco or approved equal. 4. Fittings 3" and smaller shall be Schedule 40, I-2, II -I NSF approved conforming to ASTM test procedure D2466 PVC solvent -weld fittings. 5. Solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent -weld pipe and fittings shall be of Christie's Red Hot Blue Glue and Primer. 6. All PVC pipe must bear the following markings: a. Manufacturer's name. b. Nominal pipe size. c. Schedule or class. d. Pressure rating in P.S.I. e. NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) approval. f. Date of expiration. 7. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, applicable I.P.S., schedule number and NSF seal of approval D Irrigation Lateral Line pipe 1. Pipes 1/2 inch diameter and larger ASTM D 2231, PVC, 1120 or 1220, SDR 21.0, 200 PSI 2. Pipes 1/4 inch diameter: ASTM D 2241, PVC, 1120 or 1220, SDR 13.5, 315 PSI E Fittings for Threaded Joints 1. ASTM D 2466, PVC, Schedule 80 F Length of pipes used 1. Use of pipe less than five (5) feet in length is prohibited unless otherwise noted on the plans. G No use of small scrap material to extend water lines 2.03 GENERAL DUTY VALVES A Gate valves 4" and smaller shall be MSS SP-80, Class 125, Type 1, nonrising-stem, bronze body with solid wedge, threaded ends, and malleable -iron hand wheel. 12/2014 02811 -7 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION B Gate valves 3" and smaller shall be similar to those manufactured by Nibco, Hammond or approved equal C All gate valves shall be installed per installation detail. D Install six (6) inches of pee gravel into bottom of all valve boxes. E Gate valves 6 inch and larger shall be cast or ductile iron. They shall conform to AWWA C-509. Stem shall be fitted with a 2" x2" square wrench nut and shall be opened counter -clockwise. Stem extension shall be added to bring operating nut to within 2 (two) feet of finished grade. 2.04 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A Plastic Automatic Control Valves: Molded -plastic body, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid. 1. All electric control valves shall be of the same manufacturer. 2. All electric control valves shall have a manual flow adjustment and pressure regulating module. 3. Provide and install one control valve box for each electric control valve. 4. Electric remote control valve shall be Hunter ICV Series. 5. Install six (6) inches of pea gravel into bottom of all valve boxes. B Automatic Drain Valves 1. Spring -loaded -ball type of construction and designed to open for drainage if line pressure drops below 2 Y2 to 3 psi. C Quick -Couplers 1. Factory -fabricated, bronze or brass, two-piece assembly. Include coupler water - seal valve; removable upper body with spring -loaded or weighted, rubber - covered cap; hose swivel with ASME B 1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet; and operating key. a. Manufacturers: i. Hunter 2. All quick couplers shall be installed using "O"-ring style swing joint and located in 10" round valve box with purple lids. D Remote Control -Valve Boxes 1. Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping; designed for installing flush with, grade. Include size as required for valves and service. 2. Valve boxes shall be heavy duty plastic 17 inch by 11-3/4 inch by 12 inch depth, black with black cover. 3. Valve box shall be Series 1419, non -hinged, non -bolt cover, by Carson Industries, Inc., or approved equal. a. Manufacturers: i. Carson Industries, LLC. ii. Christy Concrete Products, Inc. E Gate Valve and Control Wire Splice Boxes 12/2014 02811 - 8 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 1. Gate valves and control wire splice boxes shall be heavy duty plastic 10 inch diameter by 101/4 inch deep, black with black cover, No. 910-12B, by Carson Industries, Inc. or approved equal. F Drainage Backfill 1. Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/8 inch minimum to 1 inch maximum. 2.05 SPRINKLERS A Brass or plastic housing and corrosion -resistant interior parts designed for uniform coverage over entire spray area indicated, at available water pressure. Manufacturers: Hunter Industries. B Flush, Surface Sprinklers or VANs (Variable Angle Nozzle): Fixed pattern, with screw -type flow adjustment. C Bubblers: Fixed pattern, with screw -type flow adjustment. D Shrubbery Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw -type flow adjustment. E Pop-up, Spray Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw -type flow adjustment and stainless -steel retraction spring. F Pop-up, Rotary, Spray Sprinklers: Gear drive, full -circle and adjustable part- circle types. G Pop-up, Rotary, Impact Sprinklers: Impact drive, full -circle and part -circle types. H Aboveground, Rotary, Impact Sprinklers: Impact drive, full -circle and part- circle types. I Matched precipitation rates - Sprays and rotors shall have matching application rates within each irrigation zone. J MP Rotators: wind resistant multi stream nozzle 2.06 CONTROLLERS A The ACC controller shall be capable of two -wire decoder control of up to 99 stations via a plug-in decoder output module. The decoder output module shall be field - installable without tools. The decoder output module shall have an intrinsic capability of up to 99 stations, and shall occupy 3 modular expansion slots inside the ACC controller cabinet. B The decoder output module shall have 6 two -wire output paths to the field. The decoders may be wired in sequence over any combination of the two -wire paths, including all 99 on a single two -wire path. Each path may extend up to 10,000 ft. to the end of the wire run over 14 AWG (1.5mm dia.) wire, or 15,000 ft. over 12 AWG (2mm dia.) 12/2014 0281 1 - 9 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION C The wire paths shall be twisted pair; solid -core, color -coded red/blue pairs with each conductor in a polyethylene jacket suitable for direct burial. The two -wire paths shall be Hunter Industries Model IDWIRE I for 14 AWG (1.5mm) conductors, or Model IDWIRE2 for 12 AWG (2mm) conductors for extended range (over 10,000 ft., up to 15,000 ft.). D All connections in the two -wire paths (outside the controller enclosure) shall be made with 3M DBR-6 waterproof, strain relieving direct burial connectors, or exact equals. Decoder output to solenoid connections shall be made with 3M DBY waterproof, strain -relieving connectors or exact equals. No substitution of wire or wire connection specifications is permissible. All connections, tees, and splices shall be positioned in valve boxes in valve boxes for future location and service. E One Decoder per valve, installed in the valve box is required unless otherwise approved. F The installer shall provide adequate earth ground (not to exceed I 0 Ohms) and connect it to one of the decoder ground leads every 750 ft., or every loth decoder module, whichever is shorter. Also install on each dead end of the wire path. G The ICD decoders and Sensor Decoders shall be UL and c-UL listed, and shall be CE and C-tick approved. H Final location of automatic controllers shall be approved by the Owner's authorized representative. I Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the 120 volt electrical power to the automatic controller location to be furnished by others. The final electric hook-up shall be the responsibility of the Irrigation Contractor. J If two wire systems are not fitting to the system needed, another Hunter Controller with conventional wiring will be used. K Controllers will be capable of communicating with offsite Hunter software, unless otherwise approved by owner. L Control Equipment - Irrigation control equipment shall include and automatic irrigation controller with the following features; program flexibility such as repeat cycles and multiple program capabilities; battery back-up to retain the irrigation programs; and a rain sensor device. 2.07 WIRING A Wiring: AWG-ULUF 600 volt with solid -copper conductors and insulated cable; suitable for direct burial. 1. Manufacturers: 12/2014 02811 - 10 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION a. Paige Cable b. Regency Wire and Cable c. Approved equal B Feeder -Circuit Cables: No. 12 AWG minimum, between building and controllers and runs over 1,000 LF. Low -Voltage, Branch -Circuit Cables: No. 14 AWG minimum, between controllers and automatic control valves; color coded different from feeder - circuit -cable jacket color; with jackets of different colors for multiple -cable installation in same trench. C Insta11 3 spare wires from each controller to farthest valve in each direction. D Where more than one (1) wire is placed in a trench, the wiring shall be taped together at intervals of ten (10) feet. E An expansion curl shall be provided within three (3) feet of each wire connection. Expansion curl shall be of sufficient length at each splice connection at each electric control, so that in case of repair, the valve bonnet may be brought to the surface without disconnecting the control wires. F Control wires shall be laid loosely in trench without stress or stretching of control wire conductors. G All splices shall be made with Scotch-Lok #3576 Connector Sealing Packs, DBY (Direct Bury) Splice by 3M or approved equal. Use one splice per connector sealing pack. H Field splices between the automatic controller and electrical control valves, less than 500' apart, will not be allowed without prior approval of the Architect. I All field splices shall be installed in a 10" round valve box as specified in section 2.04 2.08 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A Backflow Preventers shall be bronze and copper, pressure vacuum breaker assembly Febco No. 765 by Febco Sales, Inc. (CMB Industries), or approved equal. Size as per drawings. 1. Reduced Pressure Backflow: Febco No. 825Y 2. Double Check Assembly: Febco No. 850 3. Or approved equal. 2.09 REMOTE CONTROL VALVE TIES A Remote control valve ties shall be Christy's Valve I.D. tag model ID-STD-Y with wire to attach numbered tag to valve. 2.10 SOLVENT CEMENT FOR SOLVENT WELDED JOINTS 12/2014 02811 - 11 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION A CHRISTY'S RED HOT BLUE GLUE T. Christy Enterprises, Inc., or approved equal. Use a compatible primer recommended by the solvent cement manufacturer. 2.11 SEALANT FOR THREADED JOINTS UNDER CONSTANT PRESSURE A RECTOR SEAL LIQUID TEFLON by Rector Seal Corp., or approved equal. 2.12 SLEEVES UNDER PAVING FOR CONTROL WIRE AND IRRIGATION LINES A ASTM D 2455, PVC, Schedule 40 sized as shown on drawings. 2.13 FITTINGS FOR THREADED JOINTS A ASTM D 2466, PVC, Schedule 80 2.14 BACKFLOW ENCLOSURES A The backflow enclosure shall be of a vandal and weather resistant nature manufactured entirely of formed tubing and rod, coated with a performance polymer alloy coating to prevent injury. The mounting base and locking mechanism shall be manufactured entirely of metal or fiber glass. The locking mechanism shall be of the full release type which allows for complete removal of the enclosure from its mounting base without the use of tools. The handle controlling the locking mechanism shall be concealed within the surface of the enclosure and provide for a padlock. B The backflow enclosure shall be Strong Box Model manufactured by V.I.T. Products Inc., 800-729-1314. No. SBBC-30CR Or approved equal. C Hot Box Enclosure — CDR Systems Corporation or approved equal. 2.15 RAINFALL MONITOR A Provide a Mini-Clik by Hunter Industries or approved equal. 2.16 FLOW SENSOR A Install Flow sensor- Hunter Flow Click 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Site Conditions: 1. Verify location of existing utilities. 2. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use. 3. All scaled dimensions are approximate. 4. The Contractor shall check and verify all size dimensions and receive Architect's approval prior to proceeding with work under this section. 5. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. 12/2014 02811-12of19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 6. Contractor shall be responsible for damages to utilities which are caused by his operations or neglect. Check existing utilities drawings for existing utility locations. 7. Coordinate installation of sprinkler irrigation materials including pipe, so there shall be No interference with utilities or other construction or difficulty in planting trees, shrubs, and ground covers. 8. Coordinate work with other site contractors. 9. The Contractor shall carefully check all grades to satisfy himself that he may safely proceed before starting work on the sprinkler irrigation system. 10. No machine trenching, unless approved by Architect, is to be done within drip line of trees. Trenching is done by hand, tunneling or boring or other methods shall be approved by Architect. 11. It is understood that the piping layout is diagrammatic and piping shall be routed around trees and shrubs in such manner to avoid damage to plants. 3.02 PREPARATION A Physical Layout: 1. Piping and head layout is shown on plans in schematic form only. 2. All pipes to be installed directly behind curbs, walks, and walls wherever possible. 3. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out all pressure supply lines, routing and location of sprinkler heads. 4. All layouts shall be approved by Architect prior to installation. 5. Route pipes to avoid plants, ground cover and structures. 6. Review layout requirements with other affected work. Coordinate locations of sleeves under paving to accommodate system. B Water Supply: 1. Sprinkler Irrigation system shall be connected to water supply points -of - connection as indicated on the drawings. 2. Connections shall be made at approximate locations as shown on drawings. Contractor is responsible for minor changes caused by actual site conditions. 3. Reclaimed systems utilizing purple pipe may be requested by owner. In the event of the installation of a reclaimed system. All components will utilize the same previously described manufacturer to provide `purple pipe' components. 4. All Reclaimed/Purple Pipe systems will conform to 30 TAC §344.1 3.03 TRENCHING A Refer to Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. B Location of Heads - Design location is represented as accurately as possible. Make minor adjustments on site with approval of Landscape Architect as necessary to ensure consistent and even spacing where applicable. Set all heads minimum 6" from back of curb and 6" from edge of concrete walls. 12/2014 02811 - 13 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION C Install piping and wiring in sleeves under sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, and railroads. D Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 to 3, to 12 inches below grade. Cover gravel or crushed stone with sheet of asphalt -saturated felt and backfill remainder with excavated material. E Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following: 1. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 18 inches below finished grade. 2. Circuit Piping: 12 inches. 3. Drain Piping: 12 inches. 4. Sleeves: 24 inches. F Backfill 1. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed, or until cover up is approved by the owner. 2. Trenches shall be carefully back- filled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand, or other approved materials, free from large clods of earth or stones. Backfill shall be mechanically compacted in landscaped areas to a dry density equal to adjacent undisturbed soil in planting area. 3. Backfill will conform to adjacent grades without dips, sunken areas, humps or other surface irregularities. 4. A sand material backfill will be initially placed on all lines (minimum 3" depth). No foreign matter larger than one-half (1/2) inch in size will be per- mitted in the initial backfill. 5. Where rock is encountered in trenching, 4" of sand above the pipe and 4" of sand below the pipe will be used as the initial backfill. 6. Flooding of trenches will be permitted only with approval of Architect. 7. If settlement occurs and subsequent adjustments in pipe, valves, sprinkler heads, lawn or planting, or other construction are necessary, the Contractor shall make all required adjustments without cost to the Owner. 8. Trench shall be excavated to accommodate grade changes. 9. Trench shall not be left open overnight unless caution taped or fenced off. 10. Existing Lawns - Where trenching is required across existing lawns, (or in the event of changes or repairs after new lawn has been established), uniformly cut strips of sod 6 inches wider than trench. Remove sod in rolls of suitable size for handling and keep moistened until replanted. 11. Backfill trench to within 6 inches of finished grade and compact. 12. Continue fill with acceptable topsoil and compact to bring sod even with existing lawn. 13. Replant sod within 2 days after removal, roll and water generously; unless new sod or hydro mulch is to be installed. 14. All sod areas not in healthy condition equal to adjoining lawns 30 days after replanting shall be re -sodded and restored to original condition. 3.04 INSTALLATION 12/2014 02811 - 14 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION A Pipes 1. Piping Mains and Laterals - Lay out sprinkler mainlines and perform line adjustments and site modifications to laterals prior to excavation. Lay pipe on solid sub base, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions. 2. Coordinate pipe installation with conduit installation. 3. PVC pipe Assembly a. Cut PVC pipe square and de -burr. b. Clean pipe and fittings using primer as recommended by the PVC pipe manufacturer. Use tinted primer to aid in visual inspection and blue glue. c. Apply a thin even flow coat of PVC solvent cement to inside of the fitting and pipe mating surface. d. Cure joints as recommended by the manufacturer and keep pipe and fitting out of service during curing period. e. Construct watertight joints equal or greater in strength than the pipe. Do not tap pipe at fittings. f. Install plastic pipe in dry weather, when temperature is above 40 degrees F. and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. g. Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperature above 40 degrees F before testing. h. Plastic pipe shall be snaked in the trenches in a manner to provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by pipe manufacturer. i. Extend primer 1/2" beyond glue joint for visual inspection. j. Ensure that the pipe is not laid on top of fittings and put under stress in any way prior to cover-up. B Sleeves under Paving 1. The majority of sleeves under paving exist as shown on drawings. Where boring is required for new sleeves (refer to drawings), it shall be a "wet bore." Install sleeves 12" beyond edge of pavement. Perform trench and backfill in accordance with these specifications. 2. Sleeves shall be marked on the concrete with 1/4" deep "V" cut into curb. C Concrete Thrust Blocks 1. Install where the rubber-gasketed irrigation main changes direction as at ells and tees and where the rubber-gasketed main terminates. 2. Pressure tests shall not be made for a period of 36 to 48 hours following the completion of pouring of the blocks. 3. Blocks for these mains shall be sized and placed in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's specifications and shall be of an adequate size and so placed as to take all thrust created by the maximum internal water pressure. D Irrigation Heads 1. Flush irrigation lines with full head of water and install heads after hydrostatic test is completed. 2. Install heads at manufacturer's recommended heights. 12/2014 02811 - 15 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 3. Locate part -circle heads to maintain a minimum distance of 4, 12, 24, 48 inches from walls and inches from other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Check for uniformity of coverage and pattern correctness. Adjust for 100% coverage where required. 5. Install nozzles with water running at reduced pressure starting with the head closest to the valve. 6. Adjust arcs and radius at normal operating pressure. 7. Ensure heads do not spray into areas not intended to receive water. Example: streets and sidewalks. 8. Install heads at minimum of six (6) inches from back of curb. 9. Spacing - Sprinkler spacing shall not exceed 55 percent of the sprinkler diameter of coverage. 10. Separate spray and rotors - Sprays and rotors shall not be combined on the same control valve circuit E Drip Tubing 1. Tubing installed in planting beds is to be placed at spacing indicated on drawings in shallow trench and covered with planting backfill mix 1"-2" deep and then covered with mulch. 2. Tubing is to be placed after bed preparation is complete and plant material is planted and root ball anchor is installed. 3. Drip tubing is to be placed on top of root balls of trees in planting beds to allow for even watering of trees. 4. All tubing is to be reviewed by Owner's Representative prior to burying. F Electric Remote Control Valves 1. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate at rated operating pressure required for each irrigation section. 2. Install valves in valve boxes, arranged for easy adjustment and removal. Locate valves to ensure ease of access for maintenance such that no physical interference with other elements of the project exists. 3. Remote Control Valve Tags to be used in Section 2.09 4. One Remote Control Valve Tag shall be attached to stem of each electric remote control valve. Tags shall be numbered sequentially. Numbers shall correspond to station numbers in electric controller. Provide tags and corresponding numbers for wires pulled for future valves. 5. Valve Boxes - Install valve boxes to cover electric remote control valves. Install one valve per valve box. Top of valve box shall be flush with finished grade. Bury minimum 4 bricks under base of each box as support. 6. Control Wire Splice Boxes - Install control wire splice box to cover any splice in control wire. Top of valve box shall be flush with finished grade. Bury minimum 4 bricks under base of each box as support. Install control wire splice box to cover wires pulled for future valves. G Gravel Backfill 1. Backfill valve boxes and control wire splice boxes with gravel, minimum 6 inch depth. 12/2014 02811 - 16 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION H Electric Controller 1. Controllers shall be fully grounded. 2. Connect remote control valves to controller in clockwise sequence to correspond with stations 1, 2, 3, successively. 3. Affix a non -fading copy of irrigation diagram to cabinet door below controller's name. Irrigation diagram shall be sealed between two plastic sheets, 20 mils. Minimum thickness. Irrigation diagram shall show clearly all valves operated by the controller, showing station number, valve size, and type of planting irrigated. 4. Provide lockable cabinet. Provide two keys to Owner. Keys to be matched with existing controller key locking mechanisms. 5. Power to Controller & Locations: Locations shown on plan for controllers is approximate. Final location shall be determined on site by Owner. 6. Contractor shall supply 120 VAC to controller from adjacent existing power sources. Follow local governing codes in electrical work. 7. Lightning Protection and Grounding: Provide full grounding and lightning protection per system manufacturer's recommendations. 8. Wall mounted controllers; electrical meters and breaker boxes shall be mounted on I-beam structures. Irrigation Control Wires 1. Provide 24 volt system for control of automatic circuit -section valves of underground irrigation system. Provide unit capacity to suit number of circuits indicated. 2. Install control wires with irrigation mains and laterals in common trench where possible. Lay control wires neatly together to side of pipe. Provide looped slack at valves, comers, bores and snake wire in trench to allow for contraction. Tie wires in bundles at 10 foot intervals. Line splices will be allowed on runs of 500 Ft. or more. Splices shall be made and placed in control wire splice boxes. 3. Provide 12 inch long expansion loop within 3 feet of each wire connection and splice on runs of wire 100 feet or longer. J Backflow Preventers 1. Make required connection to water supply according to local codes and manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Install pressure type backflow devices at required grade in accordance with the local Plumbing Code. 3. Insulate all above ground piping. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING A General - Notify Landscape Architect 48 hours in advance when testing will be conducted. Conduct tests in presence of Landscape Architect and owner. B The Parks and Recreation Department will conduct open trench inspections daily, prior to cover-up. 12/2014 02811 - 17 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION C Hydrostatic Test - Test irrigation main line, before backfilling trenches, to a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 100 psi for 1 hour. Piping may be tested in sections to expedite work. Remove and repair or replace piping and connections which do not pass hydrostatic testing. D Shut off mainline at backflow preventer during non -working hours until Contractor has demonstrated the mainline is stable. E Operational Testing - Perform operational testing after hydrostatic testing is completed, backfill is in place and irrigation heads are adjusted to final position. F Demonstrate to Landscape Architect that system meets coverage requirements, is as specified and indicated, and that automatic controls function properly. G Coverage requirements are based on operation of one circuit at a time. H After completion of grading, sodding and rolling of grass areas, carefully adjust lawn sprinkler heads so they will be flush with finish grade. Set shrub sprinkler heads not more than 1/2 inch above top of mulch. I Ensure watering does not extend into unintended areas, such as roadways and sidewalks. J Field inspection and testing will be performed. K Prior to filling, test system for leakage for whole system to maintain 100 psi pressure for one hour. 3.06 FILLING A Provide 3 inch sand cover over piping. Fill trench and compact to subgrade elevation. Protect piping from displacement. 3.07 ADJUSTING A Adjust control system to achieve time cycles required. B Change and adjust head types for full water coverage as directed. 3.08 MAINTENANCE A Contractor shall correctly maintain the irrigation system during the installation process and throughout the landscaping maintenance service period. B Contractor shall provide "As Built" Drawings for new work, showing dimensioned location of valves, meters, backflow preventers, controllers, and mainline. Contractor shall request reproducible mylar from the Landscape Architect in preparation of "As Built" Drawings. Contractor shall also provide a small laminated set of plans in each irrigation controller, which is color coded for each set of heads each valve operates. 12/2014 02811 - 18 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION C Maintenance and management - The landscape and irrigation system shall be maintained and managed to ensure water efficiency, and prevent wasteful practices. This should include, but not limited to: resetting the automatic controller according to the season; flushing the filters; testing the rain sensor device; monitoring, adjusting, and repairing irrigation equipment such that the efficiency of the system is maintained and utilizing turf and landscape best management practices during the maintenance period. 3.09 DEMONSTRATION A Provide system demonstration. B Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of system, including adjustment of sprinkler heads. Use operation and maintenance material as basis for demonstration. END OF SECTION 12/2014 02811 - 19 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES Section 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Fence framework, fabric, and accessories. B Excavation for post bases, concrete foundation for posts and center drop for gates. 1. Manual gates and related hardware. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 — Submittals D Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 570, "Standard Practice for Roof System Assemblies Employing Steel Deck, Performed Roof Insulation, and Bituminous Built -Up Roofing" b. ASTM A 1011, "Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, and Strip, Hot -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength Low Alloy and High - Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability" c. ASTM A 307, "Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength" 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for fencing shall be on a linear foot basis for height noted, measured and complete in place. B Measurement for gates shall be per each, complete in place. C Payment for chain link fences and gates includes all labor and materials required to complete installation as indicated on Plans. D Refer to Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 07/2006 02821 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES B Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, and schedule of components. C Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings and hardware that indicates that items match or exceed the quality of existing. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A Fence Height shall be as indicated on Plans or as noted to match height of existing. B Extension arms for barbed wire shall match existing. C Line Post Spacing shall not exceed 10 feet, or as shown on Plans. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GALVANIZED FENCING A Fence fabric shall be No. 9 steel wire, hot galvanized after weaving, to match or exceed existing. B Framework shall be hot -dipped galvanized with a minimum coating of 2 ounces/sf, or one ounce/sf plus 30 micrograms/square inch chromate conversion coating. C Line posts shall be 2" and conform to ASTM A 570 Grade 45 steel or ASTM A 569, cold rolled steel. All posts shall have spherical plugs. D End corner, angle, and pull posts shall be 2 1//2" and conform to ASTM A 570 Grade 45 steel or ASTM A 569 for steel pipe. E Top rails shall be 1.65 x 1.25 inch formed C-section; or 1.6 inch round ASTM A 569, 1.35 lbs/ft; or one 5/8 inch outside diameter steel pipe, 2.27 lbs/ft. Top rails shall pass through openings provided for that purpose in post tops. F Fabric ties shall be hog rings, galvanized steel wire not less than 9-ga with a zinc coating of not less than 1.2 ounces/sf. G Bolts and nuts shall be in conformance with ASTM A 307 and shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M232. 07/2006 02821 - 2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES H Install horizontal braces fabricated of one 5/8 inch, 2.271b copper bearing steel pipe at all corner, gate, and end posts. I All posts to have malleable iron top caps. J Bottom tension wire shall be #7 gauge wire. K Gates shall be either swing or slide as shown on the plans. Swing gates shall be hinged to swing 90 degrees from closed to open or hinged to swing 180 degrees from close to open. Slide gates shall be roller type with no vertical obstructions. All gate leaves shall have intermediate members and diagonal stress rods as required for rigid construction and shall be free from sag or twist. All gates shall be fitted with vertical extension arms or shall have frame end number extended to carry barbed wire. Gate posts for gates shall be 4-inch, 9.1 lb pipe. Gate frames shall be made of 2-inch outside diameter, castings. Fabric shall be the same as for the fence. Gates shall have malleable iron ball and socket hinges, catches, stops and padlocks with 3 keys each. Posts for single gates shall be the same as end posts. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Install chain link fence in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer and these Specifications. B Install line fence posts at not more than loft centers and concreted at least 36 inches x 12" diameter into the ground in a Class B concrete base. Allow concrete to cure for at least 7 days before erecting remainder of fence. Fasten fabric to line posts with wire ties spaced about 14 inches apart and to top rail spaced about 24 inches apart. C Use standard chain link fence stretching equipment to stretch the fabric before tying it to the rails and posts. Repeat the stretching and tying operations about every 100 feet. D Erect gates so they swing or slide in the appropriate direction. Provide gate stops as required. Secure hardware, adjust, and leave in perfect working order. Adjust hinges and diagonal bracing so that gates will hang level. Adjust rollers and guides of sliding gates so that gates are level. E At small natural or drainage ditches where it is not practical for the fence to conform to the contour of the ground, span the opening below the fence with wire fastened to stakes of required length. The finished fence shall be plumb, taut, true to line and ground contour. When directed, stake down the chain link fence at several points between posts. 07/2006 02821 - 3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES F Where new fence joins an existing fence, set a corner post and brace post at the junction and brace as directed. If the connection is made at other than the comer of the new fence the last span of the old fence shall contain a brace. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02821 - 4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL Section 02910 TOPSOIL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Furnishing and placing topsoil for finish grading and for seeding, planting. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 2. Section 01350 3. Section 01450 4. Section 01500 5. Section 02200 6. Section 01140 - Measurement and Payment Procedures — Submittals — Testing Laboratory Services — Temporary Facilities and Controls — Site Preparation — Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT sodding, and A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for topsoil under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which topsoil is a component. B If topsoil is included as a Bid Item, measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit product quality, material sources, and field quality information in accordance with this Section. 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls. 07/2006 02910 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL TOPSOIL A Topsoil shall be fertile, friable, natural sandy loam surface soil obtained from excavation or borrow operations having the following characteristics: 1. pH value of between 5.5 and 6.5. 2. Liquid limit: topsoil not exceed 50 3. Plasticity index: 10 or less. 4. Gradation: maximum of 40 percent with a passing the #280 sieve. B Topsoil shall be reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, weeds, non -soil materials and other litter or contamination. Topsoil shall not contain roots, stumps, and stones larger than 2 inches. C Obtain topsoil from the top material from naturally well drained areas where topsoil occurs at a minimum depth of 4 inches and has similar characteristics to that found at the placement site. Do not obtain topsoil from areas infected with a growth of, or reproductive parts of nut grass or other noxious weeds. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify that excavation and embankment operations have been completed to correct lines and grades. 3.02 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND SOTCKPILING A Conform to topsoil stripping and stockpiling requirements of Section 02200 — Site Preparation. 3.03 PLACEMENT A Contractor shall conduct erosion control practices described in Section 01566 - Source Controls for Erosion and Sedimentation during topsoil placement operations. B For areas to be seeded or sodded, scarify or plow existing surface material to a minimum depth of 4 inches, or as indicated on the Plans. Remove any vegetation and foreign inorganic material. Place 4 inches of topsoil on the loosened material and roll lightly with an appropriate lawn roller to consolidate the topsoil. C Increase depth of topsoil to 6 inches when placed over cement stabilized sand used as bedding and backfill material. D For areas to receive bushes or trees, excavate existing material and place topsoil to the depth and dimensions shown on the Plans. 07/2006 02910 - 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL E Remove spilled topsoil from curbs, gutters, and, paved areas and dispose of excess topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 01140 — Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.04 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain topsoil until a vegetative cover is established. B Repair areas damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02910 - 3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING Section 02922 SODDING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Sodding areas of residential lawns disturbed during construction and not paved or designated to be paved, or as indicated on Plans. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 — 2. Section 01350 — 3. Section 01500 — 4. Section 02910 — 5. Section 02255 — 6. Section 01140 — Measurement and Payment Procedures Submittals Temporary Facilities and Controls Topsoil Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials Contractor's Use of Premises C Definitions: 1. Lawn - ground covered with fine textured grass kept neatly mowed. 2. Sod - blocks, squares, strips of turf grass, and adhering soil used for vegetative planting. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for utility or paving. B If sodding is included as a Bid Item, measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. C No payment shall be made for sodding of restoration areas disturbed by Contractor outside the limits of construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit material sources and product quality information in accordance with this Section. C Submit a certificate stating that fertilizer complies with these specification requirements and the requirements of the Texas Fertilizer Law. 07/2006 02922 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Topsoil: Conform to material requirements of Section 02910 — Topsoil. B Bank Sand: Conform to material requirements of Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials. C Fertilizer: Available nutrient percentage by weight: 12 percent nitrogen, 4 percent phosphoric acid, and 8 percent potash; or 15 percent nitrogen, 5 percent phosphoric acid, and 10 percent potash. D Weed and Insect Treatment: Provide acceptable treatment to protect sod from weed and insect infestation. Submit treatment method to the Engineer for approval. All insect and disease control shall be installed within guidelines set forth by the Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas E Water: Potable, available on -site through Contractor's water trucks. Do not use private resident's water. 2.02 SOD A Species: Bermuda (Cynodon Dactylon), Buffalo (Buchloe Dactyloides), or St. Augustine to match existing or as directed. B Contents: 95 percent permanent grass suitable to climate in which it is to be placed; not more than 5 percent weeds and undesirable grasses; good texture, free from obnoxious grasses, roots, stones and foreign materials. C Size: 12 inch wide strips, uniform in thickness (2 inch minimum with clean-cut edges. D Sod is to be supplied and maintained in a healthy condition as evidenced by the grass being a normal, green color. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory. Do not start work during inclement or impending inclement weather. Perform Sodding only when weather and soil conditions are deemed by Engineer to be suitable for proper placement. 07/2006 02922 - 2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING B After the areas to receive sod are brought to grade, rake out any foreign organic or inorganic material, including stones, hard clay lumps and other debris. C Level with Bank Sand or Topsoil, as approved by the Engineer. D Loosen the subgrade by discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 4 inches. E Place and compact topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 02910 — Topsoil. Top soil shall be free of weeds and foreign material immediately before sodding. F Spread 2-inch (±1 ") layer of Bank Sand over prepared topsoil. G Prior to placing sod, rake areas smooth, free from unsightly variations, bumps, ridges, or depressions, and completely free from stones, hard clay lumps and other debris. H Apply fertilizer at a rate of 25 lbs/1000 SF. Apply after raking soil surface and not more than 48 hours prior to laying sod. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of soil. Lightly water to aid in dissipation of fertilizer. 3.02 APPLICATION A Lay sod with closely fitted joints leaving no voids and with ends of sod strips staggered. Sod shall be laid within 24 hours of harvesting. B After sod is laid, irrigate thoroughly to secure 6-inch minimum penetration into soil below sod. C Tamp and roll sod with approved equipment to eliminate minor irregularities and to form close contact with soil bed immediately after planting and watering. Submit type of tamping and rolling equipment to be used to the Engineer for approval, prior to construction. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A Maintenance Period: 1. Begin maintenance immediately after each section of grass sod is installed and continue for a 30-day period from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Re -sod unacceptable areas. 3. Water, fertilize, control disease and insect pests, mow, edge, replace unacceptable materials, and perform other procedures consistent with good horticultural practice to ensure normal, vigorous and healthy growth. All disease control shall be installed within guidelines set forth by the Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas. 4. Notify Engineer 10 days before end of maintenance period for inspection. B Watering: 1. Water lawn areas once a day with minimum 1/2 inch water for the first 3 weeks after area is sodded. 07/2006 02922 - 3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING 2. After 3-week period, water twice a week with 3/4 inch of water each time unless comparable amount has been provided by rain. 3. Make weekly inspections to determine moisture content of soil unless soil is in frozen condition. 4. Water in the morning to enable soil to absorb maximum amount of water with minimum evaporation. C Mowing: 1. Mow sod at intervals which will keep grass height from exceeding 3-1/2 inches. 2. Set mower blades at 2-1/2 inches. 3. Do not remove more than one-half of grass leaf surface. 4. Sodded areas requiring mowing within 1 month after installation, shall be mowed with a light -weight rotary type mower. The sod shall be mowed only when dry and not in a saturated or soft condition. 5. Remove grass clippings during or immediately after mowing. D Fertilizer and Pest Control: 1. Evenly spread fertilizer composite at a rate of 40 pounds per 5,000 square feet or as recommended by manufacturer. Fertilizer shall not be placed until 2 weeks after placement of sod. 2. Restore bare or thin areas by topdressing with a mix of 50 percent sharp sand and 50 percent sphagnum peat moss. 3. Apply mixture 1/4 to 1/2 inch thick. 4. Treat areas of heavy weed and insect infestation as recommended by treatment manufacturer. 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140 - Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.05 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain sod in good condition until 30 days after Substantial Completion. B Replace sod damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02922 - 4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND 1.0 GENERAL LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING Section 02931 LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Furnishing all plants and trees, labor, equipment, appliances and materials for landscape and tree planting. Rough and finish grading is part of the landscape work. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 — Submittals 3. Section 02910 — Topsoil 4. Section 02921 — Hydromulch Seeding 5. Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for Landscape Planting is on a Lump Sum. B Payment for Tree Planting is on lump sum basis for each tree planted. C Refer to Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit samples of the plants and grasses to be used for approval prior to installation. Inspection will be done on the project site. C Provide materials from the same source and of the same quality and variety as those inspected and approved. D Soils and/or compost materials must be approved at their source prior to delivery. 1.04 REFERENCES A ANSI Z 60.1 - Nursery Stock. B Federal Specification Q-P-166E - Peat, Moss; Peat, Humus; and Peat, Reed -Sedge. 1.05 SCHEDULE A The plant schedule gives quantities, scientific names, common names, sizes, and special remarks. 12/2014 02931 - 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING B The plant list conforms with Standardized PlantNames,1942, and American Standard for Nursery Stock, 1949, revised April 14, 2014, as prepared by the American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature and the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. C In case of discrepancies between the plant list and drawings, the working drawings shall govern. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A Pack all plant material to provide protection against damage from wind, weather or other possible sources. Tie plants to prevent whipping when shipment is made by truck. B When shipment is made by rail, pack plants and ventilate cars as required to prevent sweating. C Provide a platform from all B&B root balls over 24 inches in diameter. D Store plants on the site as directed. E Spray with anti-transpirant at time of delivery in warm season months. Apply at rates in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. F Ship trees with Certificates of Inspection as required by governing authorities. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. Do not remove container grown stock from containers before time of planting. G Deliver packaged materials in fully labeled original containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at Site. H Materials shall not be pruned prior to installation unless approved by the Engineer in writing. Do not bend or bind -tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches, or destroy natural shape. Use protective covering during delivery. 1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS A Substitution of larger size or better grade than specified will be allowed, but with no increase in unit cost. B Substitution of an alternate species may be accepted upon written approval from the Engineer. 1.08 ACCEPTANCE AND APPROVAL A There will be no partial acceptance of grasses. 12/2014 02931 - 2 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING B Upon Contractor's request, final approval will be made within 15 working days of date of notice to the Engineer if contracted work has been satisfactorily completed. C Final approval of grasses will be given when the following conditions are met: 1. There are no bare spots larger than 9 inches square. 2. The total area of bare spots does not exceed 5 percent of the entire grass area. 1.09 WARRANTY A Provide 1-year warranty on all plants and grasses. The warranty period commences after final completion. B Replace plants that fail during the warranty period according to the specifications governing the original plants. C Periodically inspect plants for proper watering and spraying, during warranty period. D Damage caused by natural hazards such as hail, high winds or storm is not covered by the warranty. E Plant materials and grasses which die due to normal insects or diseases are included in the warranty. F Existing in situ plant material required to be moved on the site will be protected under the warranty. G Contractor shall warrant trees against defects including death, unsatisfactory growth, or loss of shape due to improper pruning, maintenance, or weather conditions, for 1 year after completion of planting. Contractor shall plumb leaning trees during warranty period. H Remove and replace trees found to be dead during warranty period. Remove and replace trees which are in doubtful condition at end of warranty period, or if approved by the Engineer, extend warranty period for such trees for a full growing season. 1.10 SOIL ANALYSIS A Submit for approval an analysis of all soils obtained from off -site sources prior to delivery. B Analysis of existing soil is not required. 1.11 PLANT CERTIFICATES A Submit inspection certificates approved by the Engineer as required by law with the invoice for each shipment or order of stock: 1. Submit certificates to the Engineer for review in ample time to be reviewed and meet installation schedule. 12/2014 02931 - 3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 1.12 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A Take all reasonable precautions to prevent injury to people and to avoid damage to existing structures, plants and grasses. Keep the area free of hazardous obstructions. B Construct barricades where necessary for the protection ofpersons and property. Mark all barricades with red and white paint and with red reflectors. Erect barricades in the following locations: 1. Areas dangerous to workmen and passersby. 2. Along adjoining property that requires protection. 3. Across streets and walks that are temporarily closed or rerouted. 4. Around plants and trees to be protected. C Excavations larger than 1 foot deep and 1 foot wide must be covered when not attended. D Existing trees which may be subject to damage must be protected by fencing or boxing. E During the course of planting operations, protect all installed plants and lawns from damage. If heavy equipment or materials must be moved across lawns, use planks or pontoons to protect the turf. Similarly protect walks across which heavy equipment must pass. 1.13 DEFINITIONS A In situ refers to any soil which is existing and in place on the project site at the time landscape work commences. B Establishment period refers to a period of 45 days after installation during which time 5 percent of the construction costs will be withheld. 1.14 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Landscaper shall be a firm specializing in landscape and planting work. B Do not make substitutions of approved trees unless approved in writing by the Engineer. If specified planting material is not obtainable, submit proof of non - availability together with proposal for use of equivalent material. Substitutions of larger size or better grade than specified will be allowed, but with no increase in unit price. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A Topsoil: Conform to requirements of Section 02910 - Topsoil. B Peat moss, bark, and fertilizer: Use material recommended by nursery for establishment of healthy stock after replanting. Moss shall conform to requirements of Federal Specification Q-P-166E. 12/2014 02931 - 4 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 2.02 FERTILIZER A Provide an inorganic commercial fertilizer which is uniform in composition, dry and free flowing, in original unopened containers, each bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Caked, damaged or otherwise unsuitable fertilizer will not be accepted. 1. For lawns: 12-24-12. 2. For ground cover areas, shrub beds and tree holes: 20-10-5 (Except for Genus Pyrus (Pear). 2.03 ADDITIVES A Adjustment of pH. For topsoil to attain the specified pH level, furnish raw, ground agricultural limestone containing not less than 85 percent calcium carbonate of which 50 percent will pass through a 100-mesh sieve and 90 percent through a 70-mesh sieve. Wait 2 months after planting before application of fertilizer. 1. following table is a guideline to establish the pounds of limestone needed per 1000 square feet of turf: LIMESTONE NEEDED PER 1000 SQUARE FEET SOIL PH SANDS, LOAMY SANDS SANDY LOAM CLAY LOAM, CLAY >6.0 5.1 - 6.0 <5.0 0 50 100 0 75 125 0 100 175 B Humus. Provide a rich humus material free of sticks, stones, weedy roots, or other foreign matter. Humus must have ample water holding capacity and plant food retention. Use a humus with a dark brown to black color. C Dressing Mulch. Provide pine or redwood bark that is evenly shredded, consisting of 90 percent organic matter, brown in color, and free of harmful minerals. Maximum particle size not to exceed 3 inches in diameter. D Sharp Sand. Obtain clean sharp sand of hard durable grains, free from dirt, organic matter or other impurities. Use sand with a grade between 0.05 mm and 2 mm. E Concrete Gravel. Provide clean, crushed stone consisting of hard, durable, uncoated particles free from injurious amounts of soft friable, thin or laminated pieces. Use gravel which conforms to ASTM C 33. The sieve size will be 3/4 inch, 90 to 100 percent passing. 2.04 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS A Root Ball Anchors: 1. Duck bills will be used to secure the root ball anchors. B Edging: 12/2014 02931 - 5 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 1. Provide 1/2-inch x 4 inches, Cypress or Treated Lumber headerboard. 2. Provide 1 inch x 2 inches x 12 inches, Cypress or Treated Lumber stakes. C Cloth for Balling Trees. Use burlap of jute weighing at least 7.2 ounces per square yard. Secure balled plants with 2-ply twine made of jute. D Paper for Wrapping Trees. Use first quality, 4-inch-wide bituminous impregnated tape, corrugated or crepe paper, specifically manufactured for tree wrapping and having qualities to resist insect infestation. E Materials for Flagging Trees: 1. Mark guyed trees with surveyors white plastic tape. 2. Use surveyors plastic tape for marking as follows. a. Red to be removed. b. Yellow to be transplanted. c. Green to remain. d. Blue to identify special handling. F Labels. Legibly label plants with durable labels that identify the plant by scientific and common name. Use waterproof ink. G Tree Seal. All pruning cuts, bruises, or scars over 3/4 inch in diameter on trees will be treated with a commercial tree wound dressing. H Polyethylene. Use virgin base, resin blended polyethylene sheeting with carbon black concentrate of 2.5 percent. 2.05 SPRAYS A Sterilization: 1. Use approved solution of Dyclomec 4G, or equal, for areas to be planted. 2. Use Pramitol, or equal, for areas to be paved. B Herbicides: 1. Use an approved systemic non -selective, post emergent herbicide on specified areas to kill all vegetation. 2. Use Confront, or equal, for general control of broadleaf weeds in lawns. 3. Use Preemerg, Eptam, Dryclomec, or equal for ground cover. 4. Use an approved pre -emergent to control seed germination in specified areas. C Antitranspirant: 1. Use approved antitranspirant for all plant material that is stored and/or heeled - in on the site. 2. Use approved antitranspirant on all planted trees and shrubs. D Root Stimulant. Use approved root stimulant on all newly planted trees, shrubs, vines and/or ground cover areas. 12/2014 02931 - 6 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 2.06 PLANT CHARACTERISTICS A Provide plants which are true to type and name, and typical of their species or variety. Plants must have a normal, well -developed branch structure, with a vigorous root system, and must be generally sound and healthy. Use plants which are free from defects, including: 1. Disfiguring knots. 2. Sun scald. 3. Injuries. 4. Bark abrasions. 5. Plant diseases. 6. Insect eggs. 7. Borers. 8. Infestations. B Select well -formed plants balanced between height and spread typical of the species or variety with branches in normal position. Heading back plants to meet size limits will not be permitted. C Unless otherwise specified, all plants will be nursery grown and at least twice transplanted. Use plants which have been growing under similar climatic conditions to those of the project for at least 2 years prior to the date of the contract. Recently stepped -up plants will not be acceptable. All B&B or bare root plants must be freshly dug; heeled -in or cold storage plants will not be accepted. D Balled, bare root, and container -grown plants will conform to the definitions given in American Standards for Nursery Stock. E No tree will be accepted which has had leaders cut or damaged, or which has a thin, weak trunk and/or poorly formed tops. F Regardless of sample selection, a plant may be rejected at the site by the Engineer. 2.07 NURSERY STOCK A Deciduous Trees. Provide trees which are straight and symmetrical and have a persistently preferred main leader. The crown must be in good overall proportion to the entire height of the tree. Where a clump is specified, a plant having a minimum of three stems originating from a common base at the ground line will be furnish. Measure trees by average caliper of trunk. 1. For trees up to 4 inches in diameter, measure caliper 6 inches above ground. 2. For trunks larger than 4 inches, measure caliper 12 inches above ground. B Evergreen Trees. Form of the top will be typical of the species and not unnaturally sheared or color -treated. Measure by average caliper. Caliper will be taken 6 inches above the ground on trees up to 4 inches in diameter and 12 inches above the ground on trees larger than 4 inches. 12/2014 02931 - 7 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING C Vines and Ground Cover. Provide plants which are container -grown for sufficient time to ensure adequate root growth to hold the soil in place and retain the original shape when removed from the container. 2.08 FIELD -COLLECTED PLANTS A Field -collected plants must be grown in favorable locations that ensure fibrous roots and vigorous growth. Such plants will be selected on site by the Landscape architect. B Provide balls at least 1/3 greater in diameter than those specified for nursery stock. C If dug in dormant season and bare root is acceptable, the spread of roots must be at least 1/3 greater than the spread of roots for bare root nursery stock. 2.09 SEED A Seasonal Limitations: 1. Bermuda: a. Hulled seeds may be planted between October and March. b. Unhulled seeds may be planted between April and September. 2. Rye: a. Plant between October and February. B Bermuda. Provide common Bermuda seed that is extra -fancy, treated, lawn type. Deliver in original, unopened container showing weight, analysis, name of vendor and germination test results. Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed will not be accepted. C Rye. Deliver annual Winter Rye seed in original unopened containers. Seed must be fresh, clean, and mixed in labeled proportions. As tested, minimum percentages of impurities and germination must be labeled. 2.10 HYDROMULCH A Provide hydromulch seeding as noted in Section 02921 — Hydromulch Seeding. 2.11 GRASS A Obtain certified sod from an approved source. B Provide material which is true to type and name, and is typical of the species or variety. C Delivery: 1. Identify and tag sods with correct scientific and common name for each species. 2. Do not deliver more sods than can be planted within 8 hours. 3. Transport and deliver sods in/on pallets. 4. Protect sods against dehydration, overheating or contamination during transportation and delivery. 12/2014 02931 - 8 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 5. Cover unplanted sods with moistened burlap to prevent dehydration or overheating while awaiting installation. 6. Sods must be harvested within 12 hours of planting and arrive at the project site in a moist condition. D Products: 1. Material to be uniform in color, leaf texture and density. 2. Material to be graded No. 1, or better. 3. Uniform mowed height at time of harvesting material: 1-1/2 inches. 4. Inspected and certified free of diseases, nematodes, and undesirable insects by authorized representative of State Department of Agriculture. 5. Material will not be acceptable if it contains any quack grass, Johnson grass, poison ivy, nut grass, thistle, common bent grass, wild garlic, morning glory, perennial sorrell, or brome grass. 6. Turf will be considered weed free when found to contain less than 1 percent of dandelion, jimson weed, mustard, chickweed, per 100 square feet. 2.12 TREES A Provide container grown trees which are straight and symmetrical and have a persistently preferred main leader. The crown shall be in good overall proportion to the entire height of tree with branching configuration as recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and species specified. Where a clump is specified, a plant having a minimum of three stems originating from a common base at the ground line shall be furnished. Measure trees by average caliper of trunk as follows: 1. For trunks up to 4 inches or less in diameter, measure caliper 6 inches above top of root ball. 2. For trunks more than 4 inches, measure caliper 12 inches above top of root ball. 3. Caliper measurements shall be by diameter tape measure. Indicated calipers on plans are minimum. Averaging of plant calibers will not be allowed. B Trees shall conform to following requirements: 1. Healthy, vigorous stock, grown in a recognized nursery. 2. Free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae; and free of defects such as knots, sun - scald, injuries, abrasions, disfigurement, or borers and infestations. 2.13 WATER A Water shall be potable from municipal water supplies. 2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A Notify Engineer, prior to installation, of location where trees that have been selected for planting may be inspected. Plant material will be inspected for compliance with following requirements. 1. Genus, species, variety, size and quality. 2. Size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects. 12/2014 02931 - 9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 2.15 WORK CONDITIONS A Site Availability. Begin no landscape work where conflicting site work is incomplete or as otherwise directed by the Engineer. B Weather Restrictions. Stop all work during inclement weather such as drought, high winds, excessive rain, extreme heat, cold, or freeze. Obtain authorization before resuming work. 2.16 PLANTING PROCEDURES A Temporary Nursery. A temporary nursery may be used to store plants, but no more than 5 days before planting. Keep plants well watered and protected. 1. Immediately upon delivery, heel -in balled and burlapped (B&B) plants and spray all plants with an antitranspirant. Apply spray from top to bottom. Thoroughly cover plants, but not to the point of run-off. Spray block units and not individual plants. Use a low-pressure, fine -mist applicator. Spray at rates recommended in the manufacturer's directions. 2. Handle all balled and burlapped plants by the ball only. 3. Upon delivery, immediately heel -in bare root plants. Open bundles, separate plants, set roots in trenches, and cover with topsoil. Water plants with an approved root stimulant containing vitamin B. 4. Handle container plants by the container. 5. Handle ground cover plants in flats. Pack flats tightly together and sprinkle plants everyday. 6. Special plants so designated must be kept in an approved enclosure or planted the day of delivery. 7. Store soils and additives on approved platforms. B Digging and Handling: 1. The actual planting operation must proceed without delay and in a manner to avoid undue drying of the in -situ soil or roots because of exposure to air and sun. Keep an ample supply of sawdust available to cover the roots of B&B stock arriving from the storage nursery. Keep the roots well covered and moist until the plants can be placed in the final location and permanently planted. 2. Handle all plant stock with care to prevent injuries to the trunk, branches and roots. 3. Dig bare root plants when fully dormant. Keep all of the root system intact; do not prune the root system. However, any roots that are broken, crushed, or bruised must be cleanly cut back to sound wood. Make the cut on an angle so that the exposed end faces downward. Seal any cut root exceeding 3/4 inch in diameter with an approved tree wound dressing. 4. Balled and burlapped plants must have the root system encased in a firm, solid ball of natural earth, wrapped in burlap and tightly bound. Each ball must be of sufficient size to encompass all the fibrous feeding roots and not smaller than required by American Standards for Nursery Stock. The ball must remain firm and compact throughout the planting operations. 12/2014 02931 - 10 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE PREPARATION A Schedule work so that planting can proceed rapidly as portions of site become available. Plant trees after final grades are established and prior to planting of lawns, unless otherwise approved by Engineer in writing. If planting of trees occurs after seeding work, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from tree planting operations. B Layout individual trees at locations shown on Drawings. In case of conflicts, notify Engineer before proceeding with Work. Trees shall be staked and approved by Engineer prior to planting. C Existing Trees: 1. Protection: Protect tops, trunks and roots of trees to remain on the site. Before starting work, box, fence or otherwise protect trees subject to construction damage. Remove boxing when directed. Permit no stockpiles of heavy equipment within the branch spread of trees. 2. Removal: Remove trees marked for removal. Do not remove any tree without proper authorization. Stumps within 36 inches of final grade must also be removed. 3. Pruning and Surgery: Cut and trim trees only as directed; do not cut any tree without proper authorization. Trim existing trees of dead or diseased limbs. Cut limbs close to the trunk. Cover cuts over 3/4 inch in diameter with an approved tree would dressing. D Grading Around Trees. As required, fill or grade within the branch spread of trees to remain, observing the following requirements. 1. For trenching beneath trees, tunnel under the tree roots with careful hand digging. Where possible, avoid cutting or injuring roots. 2. Do not raise or lower the grade around an existing tree in any way unless so directed. E Placing Topsoil: 1. Disk, drag, harrow, or handrake subgrade. Scarify the subgrade to a depth of 1- 1/2 inches. Before placing topsoil, rake the subsoil surface clear of stones, wood, rubbish and other debris. Place no topsoil until the subgrade preparation has been approved. 2. Spread, rake, and compact topsoil to form a layer with a minimum depth of 4 inches in lawn areas and 6 inches in shrub areas. Place topsoil to conform to finished gradients as shown on the grading plan. 3. Remove spilled topsoil from curbs, gutters, and, paved areas and dispose of excess topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal. 12/2014 02931 - 11 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING F In Situ Soil Preparation: 1. Cross -till in two directions all existing soil in designated areas to be planted, as follows: a. In lawn areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches. b. In shrub areas to a minimum depth of 10 inches. 2. Evenly broadcast fertilizers and soil additives and thoroughly work into soil. a. Smooth all tilled and amended areas to establish a rough gradient. b. Deeply irrigate all tilled and amended areas to thoroughly wet soil particles and promote settlement. c. After a settlement period of not less than 5 days, and before proceeding with any planting, smooth and rake as necessary to establish finish gradient as required. 3. In all areas which have been utilized for parking, storage or construction lots and/or where heavy equipment has been used, cross -rip the entire compacted areas in two directions to a depth of 10 inches before tilling and amending the soil as specified. A heavy float or drag harrow should be used to smooth all surface areas. a. Verify location of all underground utilities before ripping. b. Ripping teeth should not be set at more than 10-inch spacing. G Fertilizer. Evenly broadcast and work fertilizer into soil at the following rates: 1. Lawns: 1-1/2 N pounds per 1000 square feet. 2. Ground Cover, Shrub, and Tree Areas: 1-1/2 N pounds per 1000 square feet. H Additives: 1. Humus. Evenly broadcast and work into in situ soil at a rate of 1 cubic yard per 200 square feet. 2. Sharp Sand. Evenly broadcast and work into in situ soil at a rate of 1 cubic yard per 200 square feet. 3. Concrete Gravel. Utilize as a drainage course as shown on construction drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION OF PLANTING SOIL A Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth. B Strip and utilize 4-inch layer of top soil, placed on esplanades under Section 02921 — Hydromulch Seeding, for planting soil mixture. C Mix recommended soil amendments with topsoil at following rates: 1. Top soil: 50 percent. 2. Peat moss: 25 percent. 3. Well rotted Bark: 25 percent. 4. Fertilizer: Rate recommended by nursery. Delay mixing of fertilizer if planting will not follow placing of planting soil within 48 hours, unless otherwise directed. 12/2014 02931 - 12 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING E Incorporate amendments into the soil as a part of the soil preparation process prior to fine grading, fertilizing, and planting. Broadcast or spread amendments evenly at the specified rate over the planting area. Thoroughly incorporate amendments into the top 3 or 4 inches of soil until amendments are pulverized and have become a homogeneous layer of topsoil ready for planting. 3.03 PLANTING A Excavate pits, beds, or trenches with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation raised a minimum of 6 inches at center for proper drainage. Provide following minimum widths: 1. 15-gallon containers or larger, 2 feet wider than diameter of root ball. 2. 1- and 5-gallon containers, 6 inches wider than diameter of root ball. B When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as unsatisfactory soil, obstructions, or adverse drainage conditions, notify the Engineer of such conditions before planting. C Deliver trees after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after deliver, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist by covering with mulch, burlap, or other acceptable means of retaining moisture, and water as needed. D Set root ball on undisturbed soil in center of pit or trench and plumb plant. Place plants at such a level that, after settlement, a natural relationship of plant crown with ground surface will be established. E When set, place additional backfill around base and sides of ball, and work each layer to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. When excavation is approximately 2/3 full, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. F Dish top of backfill to allow for mulching. Mulch pits, trenches and planted areas. Provide no more than 4-inch thickness of mulch, work into top of backfill, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Cover entire root ball. G Prune, thin out and shape trees in accordance with standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise directed in writing, do not cut tree leaders, and remove only injured and dead branches from flowering trees. Remove and replace excessively pruned or misformed stock resulting from improper pruning. H Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning and insect infestation and take corrective measures. I Anchor root ball immediately after planting. 12/2014 02931 - 13 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING J Control dust caused by planting operations. Dampen surfaces as required. Comply with pollution control regulations of governing authorities. 3.04 PLANTING GRASS A Preparation: Prepare imported topsoil and/or in situ soil. Hand rake to remove all sticks, stones and clods larger than 1 inch. Apply the final grade but do not mechanically compact the soil. B Seed: 1. Evenly broadcast seed specified in 2.09 at the following rates: a. Bermuda: 1 pound per 1000 square feet b. Rye: 6 pounds per 1,000 square feet 2. Roll the entire seeded area in two directions with a dry/weighted roller. 3. Evenly top dress the entire seeded area with an approved sterilized commercial steer manure. Apply at 2 cubic feet per 100 square feet. 4. Lightly but thoroughly sprinkle the entire seeded area with water after top dress application. C Sod: 1. Use Bermuda, Buffalo, or St. Augustine sod in accordance with 2.11A. 2. Prepare soil in accordance with 3.03. 3. Apply eptam (or approved equal) to all areas to be sodded. Follow manufacturer's recommended rates and apply during soil preparation period. 4. Lay sod in a running bond pattern. Pieces should be consistently cut with joints tightly butted together. Water the in -place sod liberally and roll it in two direction with a heavy roller. Areas not level due to fluctuations in the sod depth should be covered and leveled with a 50/50 mix of sharp sand and topsoil. Fertilize in 6 weeks as directed by landscape Architect. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A The Engineer may reject unsatisfactory or defective material at anytime during progress of Work. Contractor shall remove rejected trees immediately from site and replace with specified materials. Plant material not installed in accordance with these Specifications will be rejected. B An inspection to determine final acceptance will be conducted by the Engineer at the end of the 12 month maintenance period. Additional inspections will be conducted for extended warranty periods provided for in paragraph 1.07B. 3.06 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE A Contractor shall maintain trees during planting operations and for a period of 12 months after completion of planting. B Water trees to full depth a minimum of once each week, or as required to maintain a healthy vigorous growth. 12/2014 02931 - 14 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING C Prune, cultivate, and weed as required for healthy growth. Restore planting saucers. Tighten and repair rootball anchors, and reset trees and shrubs to proper grades or vertical position as required. Restore or replace damaged wrappings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. 3.07 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A During planting work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. B Protect planting work and materials from damage due to planting operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance period. Treat, repair, or replace damaged planting work as directed by the Engineer. C Dispose of excess soil and waste in accordance with requirements of Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal. On -site burning of combustible cleared materials will not be permitted. END OF SECTION 12/2014 02931 - 15 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND PAVEMENT REPAIR Section 02980 PAVEMENT REPAIR 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Repairing streets, highways, driveways, sidewalks, and other pavements that have been cut, broken, or otherwise damaged during construction. B Repairing areas of failed paving in preparation for resurfacing. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 2. Section 01350 3. Section 01500 4. Section 02335 5. Section 02710 6. Section 02330 7. Section 01140 — Measurement and Payment Procedures — Submittals — Temporary Facilities and Controls — Subgrade — Base Course for Pavement — Embankment — Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for pavement repair under this section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If pavement repair is included as a Bid Item, measurement is on a square yard basis. as follows: 1. Trench width plus 48 inches for utilities. 2. Trench width plus 10 feet for structures. 3. As marked in field for failed paving. C If provisions of this Section, 3.01D, require the limits of pavement repairs to be increased, then the payment limits shall be increased to the same extent. D No payment will be made for work outside payment limits, in areas that are not specifically called out as pay items and are incidental to the work or in areas removed for Contractor's convenience. E Refer to Section 01200 - Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make submittals required by this section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 05/2008 02980 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PAVEMENT REPAIR 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Provide materials of the same character as existing materials encountered in a cross section of the area to be repaired, or as approved by the Engineer. B Subgrade: Provide on site soil stabilized with lime, lime fly ash, etc., as required by the testing laboratory under the provisions of Section 02335 — Subgrade. C Base: Provide new base material as required by applicable portions of Section 02710 — Base Course for Pavement. D Pavement: Provide new paving materials as required by Technical Specifications of applicable surface course treatments. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify backfill is complete before repairing pavement over installed utilities or structures. B Verify remaining subgrade is ready to support imposed loads before repairing areas of failed paving. 3.02 PREPARATION A For installation of utilities and utility appurtenances, saw cut and remove pavement (including base material for asphalt paving) 24 inches beyond the width of excavation, unless otherwise indicated on Plans. B For installation of structures, saw cut and remove pavement (including base material for asphalt paving) 5 feet beyond the width of excavation, unless otherwise indicated on Plans. C For repair of areas of failed paving, saw cut and remove pavement (including base material for asphalt paving) where indicated in the field or as directed by Engineer. Remove subgrade that is soft and yielding, or to depth as directed by Engineer. D If removed pavement is greater than one-half of pavement lane width, or within 18 inches of a longitudinal joint, on concrete pavement, replace pavement for full lane width or to nearest longitudinal joint as approved by the Engineer. 05/2008 02980 - 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PAVEMENT REPAIR E Protect edges of existing pavement to remain from damage during removals, utility placement, backfill, and paving operations. For concrete pavement, leave and protect minimum of 18 inches of undisturbed subgrade on each side of trench to support replacement slab. 3.03 EXAMINATION : A Verify backfill is complete before repairing pavement over installed utilities or structures. B Verify remaining subgrade is ready to support imposed loads before repairing areas of failed paving. 3.04 INSTALLATION A Replace subgrade with material specified in this Section, 2.01B. Place and compact under the provisions of Section 02330 — Embankment for areas under future paving to match lines and grade of surrounding subgrade. B Replace base course with material specified in this Section, 2.O1C. Place and compact under the provisions of Section 02710 — Base Course for Pavement to match lines and grade of surrounding base course. C Replace pavement with material specified in this Section, 2.O1D, and according to the Technical Specifications of the particular surface course treatment so that a smooth, hard, well cemented surface, conforming to the lines and grade of the surround pavement is secured D For concrete pavement, install size and length of reinforcing steel and pavement thickness indicated on Plans. Place types and spacing of joints to match existing or as indicated on Plans. E Where existing pavement consists of concrete pavement with asphaltic surfacing, resurface with minimum 2-inch depth asphaltic pavement. F Repair state highway crossings in accordance with highway department permit and within 1 week after utility work is installed. 3.05 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140 — Contractor' s Use of Premises. 3.06 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain all pavement in good condition until completion of Work. B Replace pavement damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 05/2008 02980 - 3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND BLAST CLEANING OF PAVEMENT Section 02981 BLAST CLEANING OF PAVEMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Removal of existing pavement markings. B Preparation of pavement surfaces for new pavement markings. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 — Submittals 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for blast cleaning of lines is on a linear foot basis for each width, measured and complete in place. B Measurement for blast cleaning of symbols and legends is on a square foot basis, measured and complete in place. C Payment includes all labor and materials required to complete blast cleaning where indicated on Plans. D Refer to Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit description and characteristics of proposed blasting medium and equipment for approval. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Blasting Media: Approved quality commercial product capable of producing specified surface cleanliness without deposition of deleterious materials on cleaned pavement surface. Do not use high silica content sand that may result in high levels of free crystalline silica dust particles as a blasting agent. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A Equipment shall be power driven and of sufficient capacity to clean the pavement surface to specified cleanliness. Equipment shall utilize moisture and oil traps of 07/2006 02981 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND BLAST CLEANING OF PAVEMENT sufficient capacity to remove contaminants from the air and prevent deposition of moisture, oil or other contaminants on the pavement surface. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 REMOVAL OF EXISTING MARKINGS A Remove pavement markings where necessary to prevent driver confusion, or where indicated on drawings. Included are areas where it will be necessary for drivers to cross existing markings which they would not normally cross. Remove or obliterate markings to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Do not damage pavement surface. 3.02 CLEANING FOR PLACEMENT OF MARKERS A Remove old pavement markings, loose material, and other contaminants deleterious to the adhesion of new pavement markings to be placed. On Portland cement concrete pavement, minimize over -blasting to prevent damage to pavement surface. Small particles of tightly adhering existing pavement markings may remain if complete removal will result in pavement surface damage. B Follow manufacturer's written instructions for proper cleaning of pavement surfaces to receive pavement marking. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02981 - 2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 07/2006 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CONCRETE FORMWORK SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTION A. Section 03300: Cast -in -Place Concrete for Structures. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No payment will be made for concrete formwork under this Section. Include payment in related items listed on the Unit Price Schedule. B. Measurement and payment is as noted on the Unit Price Schedule. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 347R, Guide to Formwork for Concrete B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A 446, Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process A 525, General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip process 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design formwork for loads, lateral pressure, and allowable stresses outlined in ACI 347R and for design considerations, wind loads, allowable stresses, and other applicable code requirements. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Certifications, installation instructions, samples, and catalog data for: 1. Form accessories. 2. Form release material. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tolerances for Formed Surfaces: 1. Variation from plumb: a. In lines and surfaces of piers and walls: (1) In any 10 ft. of length: 1/4-in. (2) Maximum for entire length: 1-in. 2. Variation in cross sectional dimensions of beams and in thickness of slabs and walls: Minus 1/4-in., plus 1/2-in. 03100-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Forms: Comply with ACI 347R; confine concrete and shape it to required dimensions. Construct forms with sufficient strength to withstand pressure resulting from placement and vibration of concrete and of sufficient rigidity to maintain specified tolerances. B. Form Release Material: Field applied form release agent, sealer, or factory applied nonabsorptive liner, nonstaining type. C. Form Accessories: 1 Use only commercial manufactured type form accessories partially or wholly embedded in concrete. 2 Do not use wire type manufactured for other purposes. 3. Use form ties constructed with removable ends or end fasteners to prevent spalling at face of concrete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Preparation of Form Surfaces: Clean surfaces of forms and embedded materials of accumulated mortar, grout, and other foreign material before placing concrete. Treat surfaces of forms as follows: a. Before placing reinforcing steel, cover surfaces of forms with coating material to prevent absorption of moisture and prevent bond with concrete. b. Do not allow excess form coating material to stand in puddles in forms. c. Do not allow coating to come in contact with hardened concrete against which fresh concrete is to be placed. Establish and maintain sufficient control points and bench marks for reference purposes to check tolerances until final completion and acceptance of project. C. Regardless of tolerances listed, no portion of structure shall extend beyond legal boundary of project. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF FORMWORK A. Maximum deflection of facing materials reflected in concrete surfaces exposed to view: 1/240 of span between structural members. Construct formwork so concrete surfaces will conform to tolerance limits listed. 03100-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CONCRETE FORMWORK C. Construct forms sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar from concrete. D. Place chamfer strips in corners of forms to produce beveled edges on permanently exposed surfaces. E. To maintain specified tolerances, camber formwork to compensate for anticipated deflections in formwork prior to hardening of concrete. F. Provide wedges or jacks to adjust shores and struts to take up settlement during concrete placing. G. Brace forms securely against lateral deflections. H. Form Accessories: 1. Embedded portion of form ties shall terminate not Tess than 3/4-in. from formed faces of concrete to be permanently exposed. 2. When formed surface of concrete is not to be permanently exposed, form ties may be cut off flush with formed surfaces. Construction Joints: 1. Contact surface of form sheathing for flush surfaces exposed to view shall overlap hardened concrete in previous placement by not more than 1-in. 2. Hold forms against hardened concrete to prevent offsets or loss of mortar at construction joint and to maintain true surface. J. Prior to concrete placement, fasten wedges used for final adjustment in position after final check. K. Anchor formwork to shores, other supporting surfaces, or members to prevent upward or lateral movement of any part of formwork system during concrete placement. L. Provide runways for moving equipment with struts or legs supported directly on formwork or structural member without resting on reinforcing steel. 3.3 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Perform needed repairs or treatment required on sloping surfaces at once and follow with curing. B. Formwork for walls, sides of beams, and other parts not supporting weight of concrete may be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations. C. Shoring used to support weight of concrete in beams, slabs and other structural members shall remain in place until concrete has reached strength sufficient to carry weight and construction bads. D. Concrete strength when shores are removed shall not be less than 75 percent of 28 day strength. 03100-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CONCRETE FORMWORK E. When shores and other vertical supports are so arranged that nonload-carrying form facing material may be removed without loosening or disturbing shores and supports, form facing material may be removed at earlier age. F. If forms are removed prior to seven (7) days after placement of concrete, cure concrete as specified in Section 03300. END OF SECTION 03100 03100-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast -in -place concrete building frame members, floors, shear walls, foundation walls, and supported slabs, vaults, manholes and wet wells. B. Cast -in -place concrete work for utility construction or rehabilitation, such as slabs on grade, small vaults, site -cast bases for precast units, cast -in -place manholes, including headwalls and miscellaneous small structures. C. Floors and slabs on grade. D. Concrete seal slabs. E. Control, and expansion and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work, including joint sealants. F. Design, construction, erection, and removal of structural concrete formwork. G. Equipment pads, light pole base, thrust blocks. H. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 - 2. Section 01350 - 3. Section 01310 - 4. Section 03600 - 5. Section 03310 - 6. Section 03100 7. Section 01440 8. Section 01460 I. Reference Standards: Measurement and Payment Submittals Coordination and Meetings Structural Grout Structural Concrete — Concrete Formwork — Inspection Services — Testing Laboratory Services 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 4. American Welding Society (AWS) 5. Wire Reinforcement Institute (WRI) 6. Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemical Analysis 5/2013 03300 - 1 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. Measurement for cast -in -place concrete is on lump -sum basis for each aforementioned item as bid. Payment includes related work performed on these items in accordance with related sections of these Technical Specifications. B. Measurement for extra cast -in -place concrete is on cubic -yard basis. Payment includes related work performed in accordance with related sections. C. Refer to Section 01200 - Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Hot Weather: Any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity tending to impair quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise resulting in abnormal properties. Hot weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI - 305R. B. Cold Weather: Period when, for more than 2 successive days, mean daily temperature is below 40 degrees F. Cold weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI - 306R. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to the requirements of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Shop Drawings detailing reinforcement fabrication, bar replacement location, splices, spacing, bar designation, bar type, length, size, bending, number of bars, bar support type, and other pertinent information, including dimensions. Provide sufficient detail for placement of reinforcement without use of Plans. Information shall correspond directly to data listed on bill of materials. 2. Use of reproductions of Plans by Contractor, Subcontractor, erector, fabricator or material supplier in preparation of Shop Drawings (or in lieu of preparation of Shop Drawings) signifies acceptance by that party of information shown thereon as correct, and acceptance of obligation to pay for any job expense, real or implied, arising due to errors that may occur thereon. Remove references to Design Engineer, including seals, when reproductions of Plans are used as Shop Drawings. 3. Detail Shop Drawings in accordance with ACI 315, Figure 6. 5/2013 03300 - 2 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 4. Submit Shop Drawings showing location of proposed additional construction joints, and obtain approval of the Engineer, prior to submitting reinforcing steel Shop Drawings. C. Bill of Materials: Submit with Shop Drawings. D. Product Data: 1. Mechanical Bar Splices: Submit manufacturer's technical literature, including specifications and installation instructions. 2. Epoxy grout proposed for anchoring reinforcing dowels to hardened concrete: Submit manufacturer's technical literature including recommended installation procedures. 3. Provide data on joint devices, attachment accessories and admixtures. E. Certificates: 1. Submit steel manufacturer's certificates of mill tests giving properties of steel proposed for use. List of manufacturer's test number, heat number, chemical analysis, yield point, tensile strength, and percentage of elongation. Identify proposed location of steel in work. 2. Foreign -manufactured reinforcing bars shall be tested for conformance to ASTM requirements by a certified independent testing laboratory located in United States. Certification from any other source is not acceptable. Submit test reports for review. Do not begin fabrication of reinforcement until material has been approved. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01350-Submittals. B. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components which are concealed from view. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301-99:Specifications for Structural Concrete - IP. B. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work. C. Conform appropriately to ACI 305R-99:Hot Weather Concreting or ACI 306R.1- 90:Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 5/2013 03300 - 3 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01310 — Coordination and Meetings. B. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM - C150, Type I - Normal Portland Type II - Moderate Sulphate resistance Portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM - C33. C. Use coarse limestone aggregate and crushed limestone for fine aggregate. The product of concrete alkalinity (A, as equivalent calcium carbonate) times the thickness of cover over the reinforcing steel (Z, in inches) shall not be less than 0.54, i.e. concrete shall have an AZ factor greater than or equal to 0.54. Provide a minimum concrete cover of 2" over reinforcing steel on the inside of the structures. D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.02 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment: ASTM - C260. B. Chemical: ASTM - C494, Type A - Water Reducing Type D - Water Reducing and Retarding Type E - Water Reducing and Accelerating admixture. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: Two component modified epoxy resin. B. Vapor Barrier: 6 mil clear polyethylene film type recommended for below grade application. C. Non -Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days. 2.04 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS A. Joint Filler Type C: ASTM - D1752; Premolded sponge rubber, fully compressible with recovery rate of minimum 95 percent. 5/2013 03300 - 4 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE B. Sealant: ASTM - D1190; synthetic rubber. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM - C94, Alternative No. 3. A minimum of 5.75 bags of cement per cubic yard of concrete shall be used. For Concrete in Contact with sewage use Portland Type II, ASTM - C 150, Cement. B. Provide concrete to the following criteria: 1. Compressive Strength 7 days: 2400 psi 2. Compressive Strength 28 days: 4000 psi 3. Slump: 3 to 4 inches for concrete cast against earth in slabs and footings and where used as a topping. 5 to 6 inches for concrete in supported slabs, beams, columns and walls. 4. Maximum Water/Cement Ratio: 0.50. C. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Engineer. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. D. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Engineer. E. Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to temperature lower than 40 degrees F. Air content shall be 3 percent maximum for concrete with trowel finished surfaces and 3-5 percent for other concrete. 2.06 FORM MATERIAL A. Smooth Forms: New plywood, metal, plastic, tempered concrete -form hardboard, dressed lumber faced with plywood or lining, or metal -framed plywood -faced panel material, to provide continuous, straight, smooth surfaces. Form material shall be free of raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents or other defects. Furnish material in largest practical sizes to minimize number of joints and, when indicated on Plans, conform to joint system indicated. Form material shall have sufficient strength and thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. B. Rough Forms: Plywood, metal, dressed or undressed lumber free of knots, splits or other defects, or other material acceptable to the Engineer of sufficient strength and thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. C. Plywood: Conform to PS 1, Class 1. D. Lumber: Conform to PS 20. 5/2013 03300 - 5 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE E. Edge Forms and Intermediate Screed Strips: Type and strength compatible with the screed equipment and methods used. F. Plastic Forms: One-piece forms for domes, beams and pan joists. Single lengths for columns not exceeding height of 7'-6". For columns over 7'-6", use 7'-6" sections and filler sections as needed. To facilitate removal of pan joist forms, taper sides 1 inch per foot. G. Metal Pan Joist Forms: Removable type; fabricated of minimum 14-gage steel; one piece between end closures. Adjustable forms not allowed. Taper sides 1 inch per foot to facilitate removal. H. Earth Cuts for Forms: 1. Use earth cuts for forming unexposed sides of grade beams cast monolithically with slabs on grade. 2. Where sides of excavations are stable enough to prevent caving or sloughing, following surfaces may be cast against neat -cut excavations: a. Sides of footings. b. Inside face of perimeter grade beams not monolithic with slab on grade. When inside face is cast against earth, increase beam width indicated on Plans by 1 inch. c. Both faces of interior grade beams not monolithic with slab on grade. When grade beam is cast against earth, increase beam width indicated on Plans by 2 inches. I. Corrugated Fiberboard Carton Forms: 1. Corrugated fiberboard carton forms, when called for, are intended to form a void space beneath pile -supported and pier -supported slabs and other structural elements as shown. 2. Provide products of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in commercial production of double-faced corrugated fiberboard carton forms, constructed of waterproof paper and laminated with waterproof adhesive. 3. Fiberboard forms: Capable of supporting required dead load plus construction loads, and designed to lose their strength upon prolonged contact with moisture and soil bacteria. 4. Seal cuts and ends of each form section by dipping in waterproof wax, unless liners and flutes are completely impregnated with waterproofing. 5/2013 03300 - 6 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 5. Size forms as indicated on Plans. Assemble as recommended by manufacturer, either with steel banding at 4'-0" maximum on centers, or, where liners and flutes are impregnated with waterproofing, with adequate stapling. J. Circular Forms: 1. Form round -section members with paper or fiber tubes, constructed of laminated plies using water-resistant adhesive with wax -impregnated exterior for weather and moisture protection. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist loads imposed by wet concrete without deformation. Provide manufacturer's seamless units to minimize spiral gaps and seams. 2. Fiberglass or steel forms may be used for round -section members. K. Shores: Wood or adjustable metal, with bearing plates; with double wedges at lower end. L. Form Ties: 1. Use commercially -manufactured ties, hangers and other accessories for embedding in concrete. Do not use wire not commercially fabricated for use as a form accessory. 2. Fabricate ties so ends or end fasteners can be removed without causing spalling of concrete faces. Depth from formed concrete face to the embedded portion: At least 1 inch, or twice the minimum dimension of tie, whichever is greater. 3. Provide waterstop feature for form ties used on liquid -containing structures and on concrete walls which will have earth backfill on one side. 4. Removable ties: Taper ties may be used when approved by the Engineer. In the hole left by the removal of the taper tie, insert a preformed neoprene or polyurethane plug sized to seat at the center of the wall. M. Form Coating: Commercial formulation of form oil or form -release agent having proven satisfactory performance. Coating shall not bond with, stain or otherwise adversely affect concrete surfaces, or impair their subsequent treatment, including application of bonding agents, curing compounds, paint, protective liners and membrane waterproofing. N. Coating for Plastic Forms: Alkali -resistant gel -coat. O. Chamfer Strips: Unless otherwise indicated on Plans, provide 3/4 inch chamfer strips in corners of forms to produce beveled edges where required by this Section, 3.0 "Execution". P. Form Gaskets: Polyethylene rod, closed cell, 1-inch diameter. 5/2013 03300 - 7 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 2.07 DESIGN OF FORMWORK A. Conform to ACI 117, ACI 347 and building codes, unless more restrictive requirements are specified or shown on Plans. Contractor shall design and engineer concrete formwork, including shoring and bracing. Design formwork for applicable gravity loads, lateral pressure, wind loads and allowable stresses. Camber formwork to compensate for anticipated deflection during placement of concrete required to maintain specified tolerances. Design formwork to be readily removed without impact, shock or damage to concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. B. Slip Forming: Permitted on written approval of the Engineer. Contractor shall demonstrate suitability of method proposed. 2.08 REINFORCING MATERIAL A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed bars conforming to ASTM - A615, grade as indicated on Plans, except column spirals and those shown on Plans to be smooth bars. Where grade is not shown on Plans, use Grade 60. B. Smooth Bars: Where indicated on Plans, use smooth bars conforming to ASTM - A36; ASTM - A615, Grade 60; or ASTM - A675, Grade 70. C. Column Spirals: Bars conforming to ASTM - A615, Grade 60, or wire conforming to ASTM - A82. D. Epoxy -Coated Deformed Bars, Column Spirals and Smooth Bars: Conform to ASTM - A775/A775M. E. Welded Wire Fabric: 1. Welded Smooth Wire Fabric: Conform to ASTM - A185. 2. Welded Deformed Wire Fabric: Conform to ASTM - A497. 3. Provide wire size, type and spacing as shown. Where type is not shown on Plans, use welded smooth wire fabric. 4. Furnish welded wire fabric in flat sheets only. F. Tie Wire: 16-1/2 gage or heavier annealed steel wire. Use plastic -coated tie wire with epoxy -coated reinforcing steel. G. Bar Supports: Provide chairs. Use bar supports and accessories of sizes required to provide required concrete cover. Where concrete surfaces are exposed to weather, water or wastewater, provide plastic accessories only; do not use galvanized or plastic - tipped metal in such locations. Provide metal bar supports and accessories rated Class 1 or 2 conforming to CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. Use epoxy -coated bar supports with epoxy -coated reinforcing bars. 5/2013 03300 - 8 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE H. Slabs on Grade: Provide chairs with sheet metal bases or provide precast concrete bar supports 3 inches wide, 6 inches long, and thick enough to allow required cover. Embed tie wires in 3-inch by 6-inch side. I. Mechanical Bar Splices: 1. Conform to ACI 318-05:Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; use where indicated on Plans. a. Compression splices shall develop ultimate stress of reinforcing bar. b. Tension splices shall develop 125 percent of minimum yield point stress of reinforcing bar. 2. Regardless of chemical composition of steel, any heat effect shall not adversely affect performance of reinforcing bar. J. Welded Splices: 1. Provide welded splices where shown and where approved by the Engineer. Welded splices of reinforcing steel shall develop a tensile strength exceeding 125 percent of the yield strength of the reinforcing bars connected. 2. Provide materials for welded splices conforming to AWS D1.4 — Structural Welding Code -Reinforcing Steel. K. Epoxy Grout: High -strength rigid epoxy adhesive, conforming to ASTM - C881, Type IV, manufactured for purpose of anchoring dowels into hardened concrete and the moisture condition, application temperature and orientation of the hole to be filled. Unless otherwise shown, depth of embedment shall be as required to develop the full tensile strength (125 percent of yield strength) of dowel, but not less than 12 diameters. 2.09 FABRICATION OF REINFORCING A. Bending: Fabricate bars to shapes indicated on Plans by cold bending. Bends shall conform to minimum bend diameters specified in ACI 318-05:Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. Do not straighten or rebend bars. Fabricate epoxy -coated reinforcing steel to required shapes in a manner that will not damage epoxy coating. Repair any epoxy coating with patching material conforming to Item 4.4 of ASTM - A775/A775M. B. Splices: 1. Locate splices as indicated on Plans. Do not locate splices at other locations without approval of the Engineer. Use minimum number of splices located at points of minimum stress. Stagger splices in adjacent bars. 2. Length of lap splices: As shown on Plans. 5/2013 03300 - 9 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 3. Prepare ends of bars at mechanical splices in accordance with splice manufacturer's requirements. C. Construction Joints: Unless otherwise shown, continue reinforcing through construction joints. D. Bar Fabrication Tolerances: Conform to tolerances listed in ACI 315, Figures 4 and 5. E. Standard Hooks: Conform to the requirements of ACI 318-05:Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. F. Marking: Clearly mark bars with waterproof tags showing number of bars, size, mark, length, and yield strength. Mark steel with same designation as member in which it occurs. 2.10 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Sealer/Dustproofer (VOC Compliant): Water -based acrylic sealer; non -yellowing under ultraviolet light after 200-hour test in accordance with ASTM - D4587. Conform to local, state and federal solvent emission requirements. B. Epoxy Floor Topping: Two -component epoxy resin meeting ASTM - C881 Type III, resistant to wear, staining and chemical attack, blended with granite, sand, trap rock or quartz aggregate, trowel -applied over concrete floor. Topping thickness shall be 1/8 inch. Color shall be gray. C. Abrasive Aggregate for Nonslip Finish: Fused aluminum oxide grit, or crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 40 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide. Material shall be factory graded, packaged, rustproof and nonglazing, and unaffected by freezing, moisture and cleaning materials. D. Epoxy Penetrating Sealer: Low -viscosity, two -component epoxy system designed to give maximum penetration into concrete surfaces. Sealer shall completely seal concrete surfaces from penetration of water, oil and chemicals; prevent dusting and deterioration of concrete surfaces caused by heavy traffic; and be capable of adhering to floor surfaces subject to hydrostatic pressure from below. Color shall be transparent amber or gray. Surface shall be non -slip. E. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable latex base liquid conforming to ASTM - C 1059. When used in water and wastewater treatment structures, bonding agent shall be suitable for use under continuously submerged conditions. Conformance and suitability certification by manufacturer is required. F. Bonding Grout: Prepare bonding grout by mixing approximately one part cement to one part fine sand meeting ASTM - C144 but with 100 percent passing No. 30 mesh sieve. Mix with water to consistency of thick cream. At Contractor's option, a commercially -prepared bonding agent used in accordance with manufacturer's 5/2013 03300 - 10 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE recommendations and instructions may be used. When used in water and wastewater treatment structures, bonding agent shall be suitable for use under continuously submerged conditions. Conformance and suitability certification by manufacturer is required. Submit manufacturer's technical information on proposed bonding agent. G. Patching Mortar: 1. Make patching mortar of same materials and of approximately same proportions as concrete, except omit coarse aggregate. Substitute white Portland cement for part of gray Portland cement on exposed concrete in order to match color of surrounding concrete. Determine color by making trial patch. Use minimum amount of mixing water required for handling and placing. Mix patching mortar in advance and allow to stand. Mix frequently with trowel until it has reached stiffest consistency that will permit placing. Do not add water. 2. Proprietary compounds for adhesion or specially formulated cementitious repair mortars may be used in lieu of or in addition to foregoing patching materials provided that properties of bond and compressive strength meet or exceed the foregoing and color of surrounding concrete can be matched where required. Use such compounds according to manufacturer's recommendations. When used in water and wastewater treatment structures, material shall be suitable for use under continuously submerged conditions. Conformance and suitability certification by manufacturer is required. H. Epoxy Adhesive: Two -component, 100 percent solids, 100 percent reactive compound developing 100 percent of strength of concrete, suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Epoxy used to inject cracks and as a binder in epoxy mortar shall meet ASTM - C881, Type VI. Epoxy used as a bonding agent for fresh concrete shall meet ASTM - C881, Type V. I. Non -shrink Grout: See Section 03600 - Structural Grout. J. Spray -Applied Coating: Acceptable products are Thoro System Products "Thoroseal Plaster Mix" or approved equal. Color: Gray. K. Concrete Topping: Class H concrete with 3/8-inch maximum coarse aggregate size, as specified in this Section. L. Concrete Fill: Class H concrete with 3/8-inch maximum coarse aggregate size, (Class C where fill thickness exceeds 3 inches throughout a placement), as specified in Section 03310 - Structural Concrete. M. Evaporation Retardant: Confilm, manufactured by Master Builders; Eucobar, manufactured by Euclid Chemical Company; or equal. 5/2013 03300 - 11 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 2.11 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS A. Membrane -forming Curing Compound: Conform to ASTM - C309, Type 1D, and following requirements. 1. Minimum solids content: 30 percent. 2. Compound shall not permanently discolor concrete. When used for liquid - containing structures, curing compound shall be white -pigmented. 3. When used in areas that are to be coated, or that will receive topping or floor covering, material shall not reduce bond of coating, topping, or floor covering to concrete. Curing compound manufacturer's technical information shall state conditions under which compound will not prevent bond. 4. Conform to local, state and federal solvent emission requirements. Conform to local, state and federal solvent emission requirements. 5. White pigmented concrete curing compound shall be sprayed on in one even coat with a hand or power sprayer as soon as the surface water disappears from concrete surface. B. Clear Curing and Sealing Compound (VOC Compliant): Conform to ASTM - C309, Type 1, Class B, and the following requirements: 30 percent solids content minimum; non -yellowing under ultraviolet light after 500-hour test in accordance with ASTM - D4587. Sodium silicate compounds are not permitted. Conform to local, state and federal solvent emission requirements. C. Sheet Material for Curing Concrete: ASTM - C171; waterproof paper, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheeting. D. Curing Mats (for use in Curing Method 2): Heavy shag rugs or carpets, or cotton mats quilted at 4 inches on center; 12 ounce per square yard minimum weight when dry. E. Water for curing: Clean and potable. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. B. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. 5/2013 03300 - 12 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. In locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non -shrink grout. 3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING A. Earth Surfaces: 1. Under interior slabs on grade, install vapor barrier. Lap joints at least 6 inches and seal watertight with tape, or sealant applied between overlapping edges and ends. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of reinforcing and inserts with vapor barrier material; lap over damaged areas at least 6 inches and seal watertight. 2. Other Earth Surfaces: Thoroughly wet by sprinkling prior to placing concrete, and keep moist by frequent sprinkling up to time of placing concrete thereon. Remove standing water. Surfaces shall be free from standing water, mud and debris at the time of placing concrete. B. Construction Joints: 1. Definition: Concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed, where the placement of the concrete has been interrupted so that, in the judgment of the Engineer, new concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with that previously placed. 2. Interruptions: When placing of concrete is to be interrupted long enough for the concrete to take a set, use forms or other means to shape the working face to secure proper union with subsequent work. Make construction joints only where acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Preparation: Give horizontal joint surfaces a compacted, roughened surface for good bond. Except where the Plans call for joint surfaces to be coated, clean joint surfaces of laitance, loose or defective concrete and foreign material by hydroblasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate), roughen surface to expose aggregate to a depth of at least 1 /4 inch and wash thoroughly. Remove standing water from the construction joint surface before new concrete is placed. 4. After surfaces have been prepared cover approximately horizontal construction joints with a 3-inch lift of a grout mix consisting of Class A concrete batched without coarse aggregate; place and spread grout uniformly. Place wall concrete on the grout mix immediately thereafter. 5/2013 03300 - 13 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE C. Set and secure reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and similar embedded items in the forms where indicated on Plans, Shop Drawings and as otherwise required. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance before concrete is placed. Accuracy of placement is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. D. Unless otherwise approved by Engineer, place no concrete until at least 4 hours after formwork, inserts, embedded items, reinforcement and surface preparation have been completed and accepted by the Engineer. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded items that have become encrusted with grout or previously -placed concrete before placing adjacent concrete. E. Casting New Concrete Against Old: Where concrete is to be cast against old concrete (any concrete which is greater than 60 days of age), thoroughly clean and roughen the surface of the old concrete by hydro -blasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate). Coat joint surface with epoxy bonding agent following manufacturer's written instructions, unless indicated otherwise. Unless noted otherwise, this provision does not apply to vertical wall joints where waterstop is installed. F. Protection from Water: Place no concrete in any structure until water entering the space to be filled with concrete has been properly cut off or diverted and carried out of the forms, clear of the work. Deposit no concrete underwater. Do not allow still water to rise on any concrete until concrete has attained its initial set. Do not allow water to flow over the surface of any concrete in a manner and at a velocity that will damage the surface finish of the concrete. Pumping, dewatering and other necessary operations for removing ground water, if required, are subject to the Engineer's review. G. Corrosion Protection: Position and support pipe, conduit, dowels and other ferrous items to be embedded in concrete construction prior to placement of concrete so there is at least a 2 inch clearance between them and any part of the concrete reinforcement. Do not secure such items in position by wiring or welding them to the reinforcement. H. Where practicable, provide for openings for pipes, inserts for pipe hangers and brackets, and setting of anchors during placing of concrete. I. Accurately set anchor bolts and maintain in position with templates while they are being embedded in concrete. J. Cleaning: Immediately before concrete is placed, thoroughly clean dirt, grease, grout, mortar, loose scale, rust and other foreign substances from surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Formwork Construction 1. Construct and maintain formwork so that it will maintain correct sizes of members, shape, alignment, elevation and position during concrete placement and until concrete has gained sufficient strength. Provide for required 5/2013 03300 - 14 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, anchorages, and inserts. 2. Construct forms for easy removal without damage to concrete surfaces. 3. Make formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints and provide backup material at joints as required to prevent leakage and fins. Provide gaskets for wall forms to prevent concrete paste leakage at their base. 4. Place chamfer strips in forms to bevel edges and corners permanently exposed to view, except top edges of walls, and slabs which are indicated on Plans to be tooled. Do not bevel edges of formed joints and interior corners unless indicated on Plans. Form beveled edges for vertical and horizontal corners of equipment bases. Unless otherwise indicated on Plans, make bevels 3/4 inch wide. 5. Provide temporary openings at bases of column and wall forms and other points as required for observation and cleaning immediately before concrete is placed. 6. Where runways are required for moving equipment, support runways directly on the formwork or structural members. Do not allow runways or supports to rest on reinforcing steel. 7. Use smooth forms on formed concrete surfaces required to have smooth form finish or rubbed finish. 8. Rough forms may be used on formed concrete surfaces indicated to have rough form finish. B. Forms for Surfaces Requiring Smooth Form Finish: 1. Drill forms to suit ties used and to prevent leakage of concrete mortar around tie holes. Uniformly space form ties and align in horizontal and vertical rows. Install taper ties, if used, with the large end on the wet face of the wall. 2. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersecting planes, without visible edges or offsets. Back up joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true, square intersections. 3. Form molding shapes, recesses and projections with smooth -finish materials and install in forms with sealed joints to prevent displacement. 4. Form exposed corners of beams and columns to produce square, smooth, solid, unbroken lines. 5/2013 03300 - 15 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 5. Provide exterior exposed edges with 3/4-inch chamfer or 3/4-inch radius. 6. Arrange facing material in orderly and symmetrical fashion. Keep number of joints to practical minimum. Support facing material adequately to prevent deflection in excess of allowable tolerances. 7. For flush surfaces exposed to view in completed structure, overlap previously - placed hardened concrete with form sheathing by approximately 1 inch. Hold forms against hardened concrete to maintain true surfaces, preventing offsets or loss of mortar. C. Forms for Surfaces Requiring Rubbed Finish: Provide forms as specified in this Section, 3.04B "Forms for Surfaces Requiring Smooth Form Finish". Use smooth plywood linings or forms, in as large sheets as practicable, and with smooth, even edges and close joints. D. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure supports for types of screeds required. E. Circular Forms: Set forms in one piece for full height of member. F. Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Coordinate surface finish, anchors, reglets, and similar requirements with membrane waterproofing applicator. G. Fireproofing Steel Member: Construct forms to provide not less than the concrete thickness necessary, measured from face of steel member, to provide the required fire rating. Forms for concealed surfaces may be unlined. H. Tolerances: 1. Unless noted otherwise on Plans, construct formwork so concrete surfaces will conform to tolerance limits listed in Tables 03100A and 03100B at end of this Section. 2. Establish sufficient control points and bench marks as references for tolerance checks. Maintain these references in undisturbed condition until final completion and acceptance of the Work. I. Adjustment of Formwork: 1. Use wedges or jacks to provide positive adjustment of shores and struts. After final inspection and before concrete placement, fasten in position wedges used for final adjustment of forms. 2. Brace forms securely against lateral deflections. Prepare to compensate for settling during concrete placement. 5/2013 03300 - 16 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 3. For wall openings, construct wood forms that facilitate necessary loosening to counteract swelling of forms. J. Corrugated Fiberboard Carton Forms: 1. Place on smooth firm bed of suitable material to prevent vertical displacement; set tight to prevent horizontal displacement. Exercise care to avoid buckling of forms. Install in accordance with manufacturer's directions and recommendations. 2. Fit carton forms tightly around piles and piers; completely fill the space between subgrade and concrete placement with carton forms to form a void space. 3. Protect carton forms from moisture and maintain in a dry condition until concrete is placed on them. If they become wet before placement of concrete, allow them to dry and carefully inspect for strength before concrete is placed. 4. Before concrete placement, replace damaged or deteriorated forms which are incapable of supporting concrete dead load plus construction live loads. 3.05 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded materials before placing concrete. Remove accumulated mortar, grout, rust and other foreign matter. B. Coat forms for exposed or painted concrete surfaces with form oil or form -release agent before placing reinforcement. Cover form surfaces with coating material in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not allow excess coating material to accumulate in forms or to contact hardened concrete against which fresh concrete will be placed. Remove coating material from reinforcement before placing concrete. C. Forms for unexposed surfaces, other than retained -in -place metal forms, may be wet with water immediately before concrete placement in lieu of coating. When possibility of freezing temperatures exists, however, the use of coating is mandatory. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCEMENT A. Placement Tolerances: Place reinforcement within tolerances of Table 03210A at the end of this Section. Bend tie wire away from forms to maintain the specified concrete coverage. B. Interferences: Maintain 2-inch clearance from embedded items. Where reinforcing interferes with location of other reinforcing steel, conduit or embedded items, bars may be moved within specified tolerances or one bar diameter, whichever is greater. Where 5/2013 03300 - 17 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE greater movement of bars is required to avoid interference, notify the Engineer. Do not cut reinforcement to install inserts, conduit, mechanical openings or other items without approval of the Engineer. C. Concrete Cover: Provide clear cover measured from reinforcement to face of concrete as listed in Table 03210B at the end of this Section, unless otherwise indicated on Plans. D. Placement in Forms: Use spacers, chairs, wire ties and other accessory items necessary to assemble, space, and support reinforcing properly. Provide accessories of sufficient number, size and strength to prevent deflection or displacement of reinforcement due to construction loads or concrete placement. Use appropriate accessories to position and support bolts, anchors and other embedded items. Tie reinforcing bars at each intersection, and to accessories. Blocking reinforcement with concrete or masonry is prohibited. E. Placement for Concrete on Ground: Support bar and wire reinforcement on chairs with sheet metal bases or precast concrete blocks spaced at approximately 3 feet on centers each way. Use minimum of one support for each 9 square feet. Tie supports to reinforcing bars and wires. F. Vertical Reinforcement in Columns: Offset vertical bars by at least one bar diameter at splices. Provide accurate templates for column dowels to ensure proper placement. G. Splices: 1. Do not splice bars, except at locations indicated on Plans or reviewed Shop Drawings, without approval of the Engineer. 2. Lap Splices: Unless otherwise shown or noted, Class B, conforming to ACI 318-89, Section 12.15.1. Tie securely with wire prior to concrete placement, to prevent displacement of splices during concrete placement. 3. Mechanical Bar Splices: Use only where indicated on Plans or approved by the Engineer. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. a. Couplers located at a joint face shall be of a type which can be set either flush or recessed from the face as shown. Seal couplers prior to concrete placement to completely eliminate concrete or cement paste from entering. b. Couplers intended for future connections: Recess 1/2 inch minimum from concrete surface. After concrete is placed, plug coupler and fill recess with sealant to prevent contact with water or other corrosive materials. c. Unless noted otherwise, match mechanical coupler spacing and capacity to that shown for the adjacent reinforcing. 5/2013 03300 - 18 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 4. Construction Joints: Place reinforcing continuous through construction joints, unless noted otherwise. H. Welded Wire Fabric: Install wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Unless otherwise indicated on Plans, lap adjoining pieces at least 6 inches or one full mesh plus 2 inches, whichever is larger. Lace splices with wire. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams, or directly over beams of continuous structures. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps. Conform to WRI - Manual of Standard Practice for Welded Wire Fabric. Field Bending: Shape reinforcing bent during construction operations to conform to Plans. Bars shall be cold -bent; do not heat bars. Closely inspect reinforcing for breaks. When reinforcing is damaged, replace, Cadweld, or otherwise repair, as directed by the Engineer. Do not bend reinforcement after it is embedded in concrete. J. Epoxy -coated Reinforcing Steel: Install in accordance this Section, 3.06J "Field Bending", and in a manner that will not damage epoxy coating. Repair damaged epoxy coating with patching material as specified in Paragraph 2.09 A - Bending. K. Field Cutting: Cut reinforcing bars by shearing or sawing. Do not cut bars with cutting torch. L. Welding of reinforcing bars is prohibited, except where shown on Plans. 3.07 GROUTING OF REINFORCING AND DOWEL BARS A. Use epoxy grout for anchoring reinforcing and dowel steel to existing concrete in accordance with epoxy manufacturer's instructions. Drill hole not more than 1/4 inch larger than steel bar diameter (including height of deformations for deformed bars) in existing concrete. Just before installation of steel, blow hole clean of all debris using compressed air. Partially fill hole with epoxy, using enough epoxy so when steel bar is inserted, epoxy grout will completely fill hole around bar. Dip end of steel bar in epoxy and twist bar while inserting into partially -filled hole. 5/2013 03300 - 19 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03210A REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT TOLERANCES Placement Tolerances (in inches) Clear Distance - To formed soffit: -1/4 To other formed surfaces: ± 1 /4 Minimum spacing between bars -1/4 Clear distance from unformed surface to top reinforcement - Members 8 inches deep or less: ±1/4 Members more than 8 inches deep but less than 24 inches deep: -1/4, +1/2 Members 24 inches deep or greater: -1/4, +1 Uniform spacing of bars (but the required number of bars shall not reduced): +2 Uniform spacing of stirrups and ties (but the required number of stirrups and ties shall not be reduced): ±1 Longitudinal locations of bends and ends of reinforcement - General: 12 Discontinuous ends of members: 11/2 Length of bar laps: -1 1/2 Embedded length - For bar sizes No. 3 through 11: -1 For bar sizes No. 14 and 18: -2 5/2013 03300 - 20 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03210B MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER FOR REINFORCEMENT Surface Minimum Cover (in inches) Slabs and Joists - Top and bottom bars for dry conditions — No. 14 and No. 18 bars: 1 1/2 No. 11 bars and smaller: 1 Formed concrete surfaces exposed to earth, water, or weather, over, or in contact with, sewage; and for bottoms bearing on work mat, or slabs supporting earth cover - No. 5 bars and smaller: 1 1/2 No. 6 through No. 18 bars: 2 Beams and Columns - For dry conditions - Stirrups, spirals and ties: 1 1 %2 Principal reinforcement: 2 Exposed to earth, water, sewage or weather Stirrups and ties: 2 Principal reinforcement: 2 1/2 Walls - For dry conditions - No. 11 bars and smaller: 1 No. 14 and No. 18 bars: 1 1/2 Formed concrete surfaces exposed to earth, water, sewage or weather, or in contact with ground - Circular tanks with ring tension: 2 All others: 2 Footings and Base Slabs - At formed surfaces and bottoms bearing on concrete work mat: 2 At unformed surfaces and bottoms in contact with earth: 3 Over top of piles: 2 Top of footings - - same as slabs 5/2013 03300 - 21 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 3.08 HANDLING, TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE A. Conform to applicable requirements of this Section and Chapter 8 of ACI 301- 99:Specifications for Structural Concrete — IP, Chapter 8. Use no aluminum materials in conveying concrete. B. Rejected Work: Remove concrete found to be defective or non -conforming in materials or workmanship. Replace rejected concrete with concrete meeting requirements of Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Unauthorized Placement: Place no concrete except in the presence of the Engineer. Notify the Engineer in writing at least 24 hours before placement of concrete. D. Placement in Wall Forms: 1. Do not drop concrete through reinforcing steel. 2. Do not place concrete in any form so as to leave an accumulation of mortar on form surfaces above the concrete. 3. Pump concrete or use hoppers and, if necessary, vertical ducts of canvas, rubber or metal (other than aluminum) for placing concrete in forms so it reaches the place of final deposit without separation. Free fall of concrete shall not exceed 4 feet below the ends of pump hoses, ducts, chutes or buggies. Uniformly distribute concrete during depositing. 4. Do not displace concrete in forms more than 6 feet in horizontal direction from place where it was originally deposited. 5. Deposit in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2 feet; take care to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where required for sloping members. 6. Place each layer while the previous layer is still soft. 7. Provide sufficient illumination in form interior so concrete at places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway. E. Conveyors and Chutes: Design and arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates and other points of concrete discharge in the conveying, hoisting and placing system so concrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle immediately receives it. Conveyors, if used, shall be of a type acceptable to the Engineer. Do not use chutes longer than 50 feet. Slope chutes so concrete of specified consistency will readily flow. If a conveyor is used, it shall be wiped clean by a device operated in such a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will be wasted. All conveyors and chutes shall be covered. 5/2013 03300 - 22 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE F. Placement of Slabs: In hot or windy weather, conducive to plastic shrinkage cracks, apply evaporation retardant to slab after screeding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not use evaporation retardant to increase water content of the surface cement paste. Place concrete for sloping slabs uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. As work progresses, vibrate and carefully work concrete around slab reinforcement. Screed the slab surface in an up -slope direction. G. When adverse weather conditions affect quality of concrete, postpone concrete placement. Do not mix concrete when the air temperature is at or below 40 degrees F and falling. Concrete may be mixed when temperature is 35 degrees F and rising. Take temperature readings in the shade, away from artificial heat. Protect concrete from temperatures below 32 degrees F until the concrete has cured for a minimum of 3 days at 70 degrees F or 5 days at 50 degrees F. When concrete temperature is 85 degrees F or above, do not exceed 60 minutes between introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge. When the weather is such that the concrete temperature would exceed 90 degrees F, employ effective means, such as pre -cooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain concrete temperature, as placed, below 90 degrees F. 3.09 PUMPING OF CONCRETE A. If pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory results, in the judgment of the Engineer, discontinue pumping operations and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods. B. Pumping Equipment: Use a 2-cylinder pump designed to operate with only one cylinder if one is not functioning, or have a standby pump on site during pumping. C. The minimum hose (conduit) diameter: Comply with ACI 304.2R-96:Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. D. Replace pumping equipment and hoses (conduits) that do not function properly. E. Do not use aluminum conduits for conveying concrete. F. Field Quality Control: Take samples for slump, air content and test cylinders at the placement (discharge) end of the line. 3.10 CONCRETE PLACEMENT SEQUENCE A. Place concrete in a sequence acceptable to the Engineer. To minimize effects of shrinkage, place concrete in units bounded by construction joints shown. Place alternate units so each unit placed has cured at least 7 days for hydraulic structures, or 3 days for other structures, before contiguous unit or units are placed, except do not 5/2013 03300 - 23 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE place corner sections of vertical walls until the 2 adjacent wall panels have cured at least 14 days for hydraulic structures and 7 days for other structures. B. Level the concrete surface whenever a run of concrete is stopped. To ensure straight and level joints on the exposed surface of walls, tack a wood strip at least 3/4-inch thick to the forms on these surfaces. Carry concrete about 1 /2 inch above the underside of the strip. About one hour after concrete is placed, remove the strip, level irregularities in the edge formed by the strip with a trowel and remove laitance. 3.11 TAMPING AND VIBRATING A. Thoroughly settle and compact concrete throughout the entire depth of the layer being consolidated, into a dense, homogeneous mass; fill corners and angles, thoroughly embed reinforcement, eliminate rock pockets and bring only a slight excess of water to the exposed surface of concrete during placement. Use ACI 309R-96:Guide for Consolidation of Concrete, Group 3, immersion -type high-speed power vibrators (8,000 to 12,000 rpm) in sufficient number and with sufficient (at least one) standby units. Use Group 2 vibrators only when accepted by the Engineer for specific locations. Do not transport concrete by vibrating. B. Use care in placing concrete around waterstops. Carefully work concrete by rodding and vibrating to make sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Where flat -strip type waterstops are placed horizontally, work concrete under waterstops by hand, making sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Give concrete surrounding the waterstops additional vibration beyond that used for adjacent concrete placement to assure complete embedment of waterstops in concrete. C. Concrete in Walls: Internally vibrate, ram, stir, or work with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels or forked tools until concrete completely fills forms or excavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Do not place subsequent layers of concrete until previously -placed layers have been so worked. Provide vibrators in sufficient numbers, with standby units as required, to accomplish the results specified within 15 minutes after concrete of specified consistency is placed in the forms. Keep vibrating heads from contact with form surfaces. Take care not to vibrate concrete excessively or to work it in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents. 3.12 PLACING MASS CONCRETE A. Observe the following additional restrictions when placing mass concrete. 1. Use specified superplasticizer. 2. Maximum temperature of concrete when deposited: 70 degrees F. 3. Place in lifts approximately 18 inches thick. Extend vibrator heads into previously -placed layer. 5/2013 03300 - 24 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAIVD CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 4. Refer to Section 03310 - Structural Concrete for Mass Concreting. 3.13 CONCRETE FINISHING 3.14 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES A. Unfinished Surfaces: Finish is not required on surfaces concealed from view in completed structure by earth, ceilings or similar cover, unless indicated otherwise on Plans. B. Rough Form Finish: 1. No form facing material is required on rough form finish surfaces. 2. Patch tie holes and defects. Chip off fins exceeding 1/4 inch in height. 3. Rough form finish may be used on concrete surfaces which will be concealed from view by earth in completed structure, except concealed surfaces required to have smooth form finish, as shown on Plans. C. Smooth Form Finish: 1. Form facing shall produce smooth, hard, uniform texture on concrete. Use plywood linings or forms in as large sheets as practicable, and with smooth, even edges and close joints. 2. Patch tie holes and defects. Rub fins and joint marks with wooden blocks to leave smooth, unmarred finished surface. 3. Provide smooth form finish on the wet face of formed surfaces of water - holding structures, and of other formed surfaces not concealed from view by earth in completed structure, except where otherwise indicated on Plans. Walls that will be exposed after future construction, at locations indicated on Plans, shall have smooth form finish. Smooth form finish on exterior face of exterior walls shall extend below final top of ground elevation. Exterior face of all perimeter grade beams shall have smooth form finish for full depth of grade beam. D. Rubbed Finish: 1. Use plywood linings or forms in as large sheets as practicable, and with smooth, even edges and close joints. 2. Remove forms as soon as practicable, repair defects, wet surfaces, and rub with No. 16 carborundum stone or similar abrasive. Continue rubbing sufficiently to bring surface paste, remove form marks and fins, and produce smooth, dense 5/2013 03300 - 25 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE surface of uniform color and texture. Do not use cement paste other than that drawn from concrete itself. Spread paste uniformly over surface with brush. Allow paste to reset, then wash surface with clean water. 3. Use rubbed finish at locations indicated on Plans, except where rubbed finish is indicated for a wall which will be containing a liquid, use spray -applied coating. E. Spray -applied Coating: At Contractor's option, in lieu of rubbed finish, spray -applied coating may be applied after defects have been repaired and fins removed. Remove form oil, curing compound and other foreign matter that would prevent bonding of coating. Apply coating in uniform texture and color in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. F. Related Unformed Surfaces: Tops of piers, walls, bent caps, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces shall be struck smooth after concrete is placed. Float unformed surfaces to texture reasonably consistent with that of formed surfaces. Continue final treatment on formed surfaces uniformly across unformed surfaces. 3.15 HOT WEATHER FINISHING A. When hot weather conditions exist, as defined in the Section, 1.03A "Hot Weather", and as judged by the Engineer, apply evaporation retardant to the surfaces of slabs, topping and concrete fill placements immediately after each step in the finishing process has been completed. 3.16 FINISHING SLABS AND SIMILAR FLAT SURFACES TO CLASS A, B AND C TOLERANCES A. Apply Class A, B and C finishes at locations indicated on Plans. Class B or better finish shall be applied if not shown otherwise by the Plans. B. Shaping to Contour: Use strike -off templates or approved compacting -type screeds riding on screed strips or edge forms to bring concrete surface to proper contour. See Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork for edge forms and screeds. C. Consolidation and Leveling: Concrete to be consolidated shall be as stiff as practicable. Thoroughly consolidate concrete in slabs and use internal vibration in beams and girders of framed slabs and along bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidate and level slabs and floors with vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds or other approved means. After consolidation and leveling, do not permit manipulation of surfaces prior to finishing operations. D. Tolerances for Finished Surfaces: Check tolerances by placing straightedge of specified length anywhere on slab. Gap between slab and straightedge shall not exceed tolerance listed for specified class. 5/2013 03300 - 26 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Straightedge Tolerance Class Length in Feet in Inches A 10 1/8 B 10 1/4 C 2 1/4 E. Raked Finish: After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled to Class C tolerance, roughen surface before final set. Roughen with stiffbrushes or rakes to depth of approximately 1 /4 inch. Notify the Engineer prior to placing concrete requiring initial raked surface finish so that acceptable raked finish standard may be established for project. Protect raked, base -slab finish from contamination until time of topping. Provide raked finish for following: 1. Surfaces to receive bonded concrete topping or fill. 2. Steep ramps, as noted on Plans. 3. Additional locations as noted on Plans. F. Float Finish: 1. After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled, do not work further until ready for floating. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared, or when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper operation of power -driven float. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats. Use hand floating with wood or cork -faced floats in locations inaccessible to power - driven machine and on small, isolated slabs. 2. After initial floating, re -check tolerance of surface with 10-foot straightedge applied at not less than two different angles. Cut down high spots and fill low spots to Class B tolerance. Immediately re -float slab to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 3. Provide float finish at locations not otherwise specified and not otherwise indicated on Plans. G. Trowel Finish: 1. Apply float finish as previously specified. After power floating, use power trowel to produce smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still contain some trowel marks. Do additional troweling by hand after surface has hardened sufficiently. Do final troweling when ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling operations. 2. Produce finished surface free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and conforming to Class A tolerance. On surfaces intended to 5/2013 03300 - 27 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE support floor coverings, remove defects which might show through covering by grinding. 3. Provide trowel finish for floors which will receive floor covering and additional locations indicated on Plans. H. Broom or Belt Finish: 1. Apply float finish as previously specified. Immediately after completing floated finish, draw broom or burlap belt across surface to give coarse transverse scored texture. 2. Provide broom or belt finish at locations indicated on Plans. 3.17 FINISHING SLABS AND SIMILAR FLAT SURFACES TO "F-NUMBER SYSTEM" FINISH A. Shaping to Contour: Use strike -off templates or approved compacting -type screeds riding on screed strips or edge forms to bring concrete surface to proper contour. Edge forms and screeds: Conform to Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork. B. Consolidation and Leveling: Concrete to be consolidated shall be as dry as practicable. Thoroughly consolidate concrete in slabs and use internal vibration in beams and girders of framed slabs and along bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidate and level slabs and floors with vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds or other approved means. After consolidation and leveling, do not manipulate surfaces prior to finishing operations. C. Tolerances for Finished Surfaces: Independent testing laboratory will check floor flatness and levelness in accordance with this Section, 3.23F "Field Quality Control". D. Float Finish: 1. After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled, do not work further until ready for floating. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared, or when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper operation of power -driven float. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats. Use hand floating with wood or cork -faced floats in locations inaccessible to power - driven machine and on small, isolated slabs. 2. Check tolerance of surface after initial floating with a 10-foot straightedge applied at not less than two different angles. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Immediately refloat slab to uniform, smooth, granular texture to FF20/FL17 tolerance, unless shown otherwise on Plans. 3. Provide "F-Number System" float finish at locations indicated on Plans. 5/2013 03300 - 28 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE E. Trowel Finish: 1. Apply float finish as previously specified. After power floating, use power trowel to produce smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still contain some trowel marks. Do additional trowelings by hand after surface has hardened sufficiently. Do final troweling when ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling operations. 2. Produce finished surface free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and conforming to an FF25/FL20 tolerance for slabs on grade and FF25/FL17 for elevated slabs, unless shown otherwise on Plans. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, remove defects, which might show through covering, by grinding. 3. Provide "F-Number System" trowel finish at locations indicated on Plans. 3.18 BONDED CONCRETE TOPPING AND FILL A. Surface Preparation: 1. Protect raked, base -slab finish from contamination until time of topping. Mechanically remove oil, grease, asphalt, paint, clay stains or other contaminants, leaving clean surface. 2. Prior to placement of topping or fill, thoroughly dampen roughened slab surface and leave free of standing water. Immediately before topping or fill is placed, scrub coat of bonding grout into surface. Do not allow grout to set or dry before topping or fill is placed. B. Concrete Fill: 1. Where concrete fill intersects a wall surface at an angle steeper than 45 degrees from vertical, provide a 1.5-inch deep keyway in the wall at the point of intersection; size keyway so that no portion of the concrete fill is less than 1.5 inches thick. Form keyway in new walls; create by saw cutting the top and bottom lines and chipping in existing walls. 2. Apply wood float finish to surfaces of concrete fill. 3. Provide concrete fill at locations shown on Plans. C. Bonded Concrete Topping in Bottom of Clarifiers and Thickeners: 1. Minimum thickness of concrete topping: 1 inch. Maximum thickness when swept in by clarifier and thickener equipment: 3 inches. 5/2013 03300 - 29 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 2. Compact topping and fill by rolling or tamping, bring to established grade, and float. Topping grout placed on sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. Coat surface with evaporation retardant as needed between finishing operations to prevent plastic shrinkage cracks. 3. Screed topping to true surface using installed equipment. Protect equipment from damage during sweeping -in process. Perform sweeping -in process under supervision of equipment manufacturer's factory representative. After topping has been screeded, apply wood float finish. During finishing, do not apply water, dry cement or mixture of dry cement and sand to the surface. 4. As soon as topping or fill finishing is completed, coat surface with curing compound. After the topping is set and sufficiently hard in clarifiers and where required by the Engineer, fill the tank with sufficient water to cover the entire floor for 14 days. 5. Provide bonded concrete topping in bottom of all clarifiers and thickeners. 3.19 EPDXY PENETRATING SEALER A. Surfaces to receive epoxy penetrating sealer: Apply wood float finish. Clean surface and apply sealer in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Rooms with concrete curbs or bases: Continue application of floor coating on curb or base to its juncture with masonry wall. Rooms with solid concrete walls or wainscots: Apply minimum 2-inch-high coverage of floor coating on vertical surface. C. Mask walls, doors, frames and similar surface to prevent floor coating contact. D. When coving floor coating up vertical concrete walls, curbs, bases or wainscots, use masking tape or other suitable material to keep a neat level edge at top of cove. E. Provide epoxy penetrating sealer at locations indicated on Plans. 3.20 EPDXY FLOOR TOPPING A. Surfaces to receive epoxy floor topping: Apply wood float finish unless recommended otherwise by epoxy floor topping manufacturer. Clean surface and apply epoxy floor topping in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. Thickness of topping: 1 /8 inch. B. Rooms with concrete curbs or bases: Continue application of floor coating on curb or base to its juncture with masonry wall. Rooms with solid concrete walls or wainscots: apply 2-inch-high coverage of floor coating on vertical surface. 5/2013 03300 - 30 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE C. Mask walls, doors, frames and similar surfaces to prevent floor coating contact. D. When coving floor coating up vertical concrete walls, curbs, bases or wainscots, use masking tape or other suitable material to keep a neat level edge at top of cove. E. Finished surface shall be free of trowel marks and dimples. F. Provide epoxy floor topping at locations indicated on Plans. 3.21 SEALER/DUSTPROOFER A. Where sealer or sealer/dustproofer is indicated on Plans, just prior to completion of construction, apply coat of specified clear sealer/dustproofing compound to exposed interior concrete floors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.22 NONSLIP FINISH A. Apply float finish as specified. Apply two-thirds of required abrasive aggregate by method that ensures even coverage without segregation and re -float. Apply remainder of abrasive aggregate at right angles to first application, using heavier application of aggregate in areas not sufficiently covered by first application. Re -float after second application of aggregate and complete operations with troweled finish. Perform finishing operations in a manner that will allow the abrasive aggregate to be exposed and not covered with cement paste. B. Provide nonslip finish at locations indicated on Plans. 3.23 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301- 99:Specifications for Structural Concrete - IP and under provisions of Sections 01440 — Inspection Services and Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services. B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work. D. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 50 cu yds or less of concrete or as directed by the Engineer. F. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 5/2013 03300 - 31 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE G. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. H. Provide the results of alkalinity tests of concrete used in sanitary structures. Provide one test for each structure. These tests shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory. Perform the test on the concrete covering reinforcing steel on the inside of the pipe or structure. Alkalinity tests are to be in accordance with Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemical Analysis, Vol. 15, Page 230, Interscience Publishers Division, John Wiley and Sons. 3.24 PATCHING A. Allow Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Engineer upon discovery. C. Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301-99:Specifications for Structural Concrete - IP. 3.25 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Engineer. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Engineer for each individual area. 3.26 CURING A. Comply with ACI 308.1-98:Standard Specifications for Curing Concrete. Cure by preventing loss of moisture, rapid temperature change and mechanical injury for a period of 7 curing days when Type II or IP cement has been used and for 3 curing days when Type III cement has been used. Start curing as soon as free water has disappeared from the concrete surface after placing and finishing. A curing day is any calendar day in which the temperature is above 50 degrees F for at least 19 hours. Colder days may be counted if air temperature adjacent to concrete is maintained above 50 degrees F. In continued cold weather, when artificial heat is not provided, removal of forms and shoring may be permitted at the end of calendar days equal to twice the required number of curing days. However, leave soffit forms and shores in place until concrete has reached the specified 28-day strength, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. B. Cure formed surfaces not requiring rub -finished surface by leaving forms in place for the full curing period. Keep wood forms wet during the curing period. Add water as 5/2013 03300 - 32 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE needed for other types of forms. Or, at Contractor's option, forms may be removed after 2 days and curing compound applied. C. Rubbed Finish: 1. At formed surfaces requiring rubbed finish, remove forms as soon as practicable without damaging the surface. 2. After rub -finish operations are complete, continue curing formed surfaces by using either approved curing/sealing compounds or moist cotton mats until normal curing period is complete. D. Unformed Surfaces: Cure by membrane curing compound method. 1. After concrete has received a final finish and surplus water sheen has disappeared, immediately seal surface with a uniform coating of approved curing compound, applied at the rate of coverage recommended by manufacturer or as directed by the Engineer. Do not apply less than 1 gallon per 180 square feet of area. Provide satisfactory means to properly control and check rate of application of the compound. 2. Thoroughly agitate the compound during use and apply by means of approved mechanical power pressure sprayers equipped with atomizing nozzles. For application on small miscellaneous items, hand -powered spray equipment may be used. Prevent loss of compound between nozzle and concrete surface during spraying operations. 3. Do not apply compound to a dry surface. If concrete surface has become dry, thoroughly moisten surface immediately prior to application. At locations where coating shows discontinuities, pinholes or other defects, or if rain falls on a newly coated surface before film has dried sufficiently to resist damage, apply an additional coat of compound at the specified rate of coverage. 3.27 CURING MASS CONCRETE A. Observe the following additional restrictions when curing mass concrete. 1. Minimum curing period: 2 weeks. 2. When ambient air temperature falls below 32 degrees F, protect surface of concrete against freezing. 3. Do not use steam or other curing methods that will add heat to concrete. 4. Keep forms and exposed concrete continuously wet for at least the first 48 hours after placing, and whenever surrounding air temperature is above 90 degrees F during final curing period. 5/2013 03300 - 33 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 5. During 2-week curing period, provide necessary controls to prevent ambient air temperature immediately adjacent to concrete from falling more than 30 degrees F in 24 hours. 3.28 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Time Limits: 1. When repair of surface defects or finishing is required before concrete is aged, forms on vertical surfaces may be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations. 2. Remove top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete as soon as concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging. Loosen wood forms for wall openings as soon as this can be accomplished without damage to concrete. Leave formwork for water -retaining structures in place for at least 2 days. Formwork for non -water -retaining columns, walls, sides of beams and other formwork components not supporting weight of concrete may be removed after 12 hours, provided concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations, and provided removal of forms will not disturb members supporting weight of concrete. 3. Forms and shoring supporting weight of concrete or construction loads: Leave in place until concrete has reached minimum strength specified for removal of forms and shoring. Do not remove such forms in less than 4 days. B. Circular Paper or Spiral Tube Forms: Follow manufacturer's directions for form removal. Take necessary precautions to prevent damage to concrete surface. When removal is done before completion of curing time, replace form, tie in place, and seal to retard escape of moisture. C. Removal Strength: 1. Control Tests: Suitable strength -control tests will be required as evidence that concrete has attained specified strength for removal of formwork or shoring supporting weight of concrete in beams, slabs and other structural members. Furnish test cylinders and data to verify strength for early form removal. a. Field -cured Test Cylinders: When field -cured test cylinders reach specified removal strength, formwork or shoring may be removed from respective concrete placements. b. Laboratory -cured Test Cylinders: When concrete has been cured as specified for structural concrete for same time period required by laboratory -cured cylinders to reach specified strength, formwork or shoring may be removed from respective concrete placements. 5/2013 03300 - 34 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Determine length of time that concrete has been cured by totaling the days or fractions of days, not necessarily consecutive, during which air temperature surrounding concrete is above 50 degrees F and concrete has been damp or thoroughly sealed against evaporation and loss of moisture. 2. Compressive Strengths: The minimum concrete compressive strength for removal of formwork supporting weight of concrete is 75 percent of specified minimum 28-day strength for class of concrete involved. 3.29 RESHORING A. When reshoring is permitted, plan operations in advance and obtain the Engineer's approval of such operations. While reshoring is under way, keep live load off new construction. Do not permit concrete in any beam, slab, column or other structural member to be subjected to combined dead and construction loads in excess of loads permitted for developed concrete strength at time of reshoring. B. Place reshores as soon as practicable after form -stripping operations are complete but in no case later than end of day on which stripping occurs. Tighten reshores to carry required loads without over stressing construction. Leave reshores in place until tests representative of concrete being supported have reached specified strength at time of removal of formwork supporting weight of concrete. C. Floors supporting shores under newly -placed concrete: Leave original supporting shores in place, or re -shore. Locate reshores directly under shore position above. Extend reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute weight of newly - placed concrete, forms and construction live loads in such manner that design superimposed loads of floors supporting shores are not exceeded. 3.30 FORM REUSE A. Do not reuse forms that are worn or damaged beyond repair. Thoroughly clean and recoat forms before reuse. For wood and plywood forms to be used for exposed smooth finish, sand or otherwise dress concrete contact surface to original condition or provide form liner facing material. For metal forms, straighten, remove dents and clean to return forms to original condition. 5/2013 03300 - 35 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03100A TOLERANCES FOR FORMED SURFACES CONCRETE IN BUILDINGS** Variation From Variation In For any 10-foot length For any 20-foot len h or any bay Maximum for Entire Dimension Plumb or Specified Batter Lines and Surfaces of Columns, Piers, Walls and Arrises 1/4" - - - 1" Exposed Corner Columns, Control Joint Grooves, and Other Conspicuous Lines - - - 1 /4" 1 %2" Level of Specified Grade Slab Soffits, Ceilings, Beam Soffits, and Arrises (measured before removal of shores), 1/4" 3/8" 3i4" Exposed Lintels, Sills, Parapets, Horizontal Grooves and Other Conspicuous Lines - - - 1/4" 1 /2" Drawing Dimensions Position of Linear Building Lines, Columns, Walls and Partitions - - - if)" 1 Size and Location of Sleeves, Floor Openings and Wall Openings - - - - - - + 1; 4" Cross Section of Columns, Beams, Slabs, and Walls - - - - - - + 1 /2", -1/4" Footings* in Plan - - - - - - +2", -1/2" Footing Misplacement or Eccentricity in Direction of Error (the lesser of) - - - - - - 2% of Width or 2" Footing Thickness Decrease - - - - - - 5% Footing Thickness Increase - - - - - - No Limit Step Rise in Flight of Stairs - - - - - - ±1/8" Step Tread in Flight of Stairs - - - - - - ±1/4" Consecutive Step Rise - - - - - - ±1/16" Consecutive Step Tread - - - - - - ±1/8" *Footing tolerances apply to concrete dimensions only, not to positioning of vertical reinforcing steel, dowels, or embedded items **Includes water and wastewater process structures 5/2013 03300 - 36 0138 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03100B TOLERANCE FOR FORMED SURFACES CONCRETE IN BRIDGES, WHARVES AND MARINE STRUCTURES Variation From Variation In Maximum Plumb of Specified Batter Surfaces of columns, piers and walls 1/2" in 10' Level or Specified Grade Top surfaces of slabs See Section 03345 Top surfaces of curbs and railings 3/16" in 10' Drawing Dimensions Cross section of columns, caps, walls, beams, and similar members Thickness of deck slabs Size and location of slab and wall openings Footings in plan Footing misplacement or eccentricity in direction of error (the lesser of) Footing thickness decrease Footing thickness increase Step rise in flight of stairs Step tread in flight of stairs Consecutive step rise Consecutive step tread +1 /2", -1 /4" ±1/4", -1 /8" ±1/2" +2, -1/2" o „ 2 /o of width or 2 5% No limit +1/8" + 1 /4" ±1/16" ±1/8" 5/2013 03300 - 37 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 3.31 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete against damage until final acceptance by the Owner. B. Protect fresh concrete from damage due to rain, hail, sleet or snow. Provide such protection while the concrete is still plastic and whenever such precipitation is imminent or occurring. C. Do not backfill around concrete structures or subject them to design loadings until all components of the structure needed to resist the loading are complete and have reached the specified 28-day compressive strength, except as authorized otherwise by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 5/2013 03300 - 38 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SECTION 03310 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast -in -place normal -weight structural concrete and mass concrete. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 00300 — 2. Section 01200 — 3. Section 01350 4. Section 01450 5. Section 03300 Bid Proposal Measurement — Submittals — Testing Laboratory Services — Cast -in -Place Concrete 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for structural concrete is on an each basis for each structure as bid. Payment includes related work performed on these structures in accordance with related sections of these Specifications. B. If Extra Structural Concrete is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal as an Extra Item, measurement will be on a cubic -yard basis, measured in place. Payment includes related work performed in accordance with related sections of these Specifications. C. Refer to Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. D. No provisions shall be provided for temperature controlled curing of test cylinder. Test cylinder(s) shall be cured in identical environment until picked up by lab. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Mass Concrete: Concrete sections 4 feet or more in least dimension. B. Hot Weather: Any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity tending to impair quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise resulting in abnormal properties. Hot weather concreting shall be done in accordance with ACI - 305R. C. Cold Weather: Period when, for more than 2 successive days, mean daily temperature is below 40 degrees F. Cold weather concreting shall be done in accordance with ACI - 306R. 5/2013 03310-1 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Mill Certificates: Required for bulk cement. C. Design Mixes: 1. Submit test data on proposed design mixes for each type of concrete in the Work, including each class, and variations in type, source or quantity of material. Include type, brand and amount of cementitious materials; type, brand and amount of each admixture; slump; air content; aggregate sources, gradations, specific gravity and absorption; total water (including moisture in aggregate); water/cement ratio; compressive strength test results for 7 and 28 days; and shrinkage tests for Class C and D concrete at 21 or 28 days of drying. 2. Submit abrasion loss and soundness test results for limestone aggregate. 3. Testing of aggregates, including sieve analysis, shall be performed by a certified independent testing laboratory. Tests shall have been performed no earlier than 3 months before Notice to Proceed. 4. Provide standard deviation data for plant producing concrete. Data shall include copies of laboratory test results and standard deviation calculated in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.3.1. Laboratory tests shall have been performed within past 12 months. When standard deviation data is not available, comply with ACI 318, Table 5.3.2.2. 5. Review and acceptance of mix design does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to provide concrete of quality and strength required by these Specifications. D. Admixtures: Submit manufacturer's technical information, including following: 1. Air -Entraining Admixture: Give requirements to control air content under all conditions, including temperature variations and presence of other admixtures. 2. Chemical Admixtures: Give requirements for quantities and types to be used under various temperatures and job conditions to produce uniform, workable concrete mix. Submit evidence of compatibility with other admixtures and cementitious materials proposed for use in design mix. E. High -Range Water Reducer (Superplasticizer): When proposed for use, submit manufacturer's technical information and instructions for use of superplasticizer. State whether superplasticizer will be added at ready -mix plant or job site. When superplasticizer will be added at job site, submit proposed plan for measuring and adding superplasticizer to concrete mix at job site, and establish dosing area on site with holding tanks and metering devices. When superplasticizer is to be added at 5/2013 03310-2 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ready -mix plant, submit contingency plans for adding additional superplasticizer at job site when required due to delay in placing concrete. Identify portions of Work on which superplasticizer is proposed for use. F. Hot and Cold Weather Concreting: Submit, when applicable, proposed plans for hot and cold weather concreting. Review and acceptance of proposed procedure will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for quality of finished product. G. Project Record Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that are concealed from view. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide necessary controls during evaluation of materials, mix designs, production and delivery of concrete, placement and compaction to assure that the Work will be accomplished in accordance with Contract Documents. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record dates, locations, quantities, air temperatures, and test samples taken. B. Code Requirements: Concrete construction for buildings shall conform to ACI 318. Concrete construction for water and wastewater treatment and conveying structures shall conform to ACI 318 with modifications by ACI 350R, Item 2.6. Where this Specification conflicts with ACI 318 or ACI 350R, this Specification governs. C. Testing and Other Quality Control Services: 1. Concrete testing required in this section, except concrete mix design, limestone aggregate test data, and testing of deficient concrete, will be performed by an independent commercial testing laboratory employed and paid by the Owner in accordance with Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services. 2. Provide material for and cooperate fully with Owner's testing laboratory technician in obtaining samples for required tests. 3. Standard Services: The following testing and quality control services will be provided by Owner in accordance with Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services: a. Verification that plant equipment and facilities conform to NRMCA "Certification of Ready -Mix Concrete Production Facilities". b. Testing of proposed materials for compliance with this Specification. c. Review of proposed mix design submitted by Contractor. 5/2013 03310-3 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE d. Obtaining production samples of materials at plants or stockpiles during work progress and testing for compliance with this Specification. e. Strength testing of concrete according to following procedures: 1) Obtaining samples for field test cylinders from every 100 cubic yards and any portion less than 100 cubic yards for each mix design placed each day, according to ASTM C172, with each sample obtained from a different batch of concrete on a representative, random basis. Selecting test batches by any means other than random numbers chosen before concrete placement begins is not allowed. 2) Molding four specimens from each sample according to ASTM C31, and curing under standard moisture and temperature conditions as specified in Sections 7(a) and (b) of ASTM C31. 3) Testing two specimens at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days according to ASTM C39, reporting test results averaging strengths of two specimens. However, when one specimen evidences improper sampling, molding or testing, it will be discarded and remaining cylinder considered test result. When high -early -strength concrete is used, specimens will be tested at 3 and 7 days. f. Air content: For each strength test, determination of air content of normal weight concrete according to ASTM C231. g• Slump: For each strength test, and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, conducting slump test in accordance with ASTM C143. h. Temperature: For each strength test, checking concrete temperature in accordance with ASTM C1064. i. Lightweight concrete: For each strength test, or more frequently when requested by the Engineer, determination of air content by ASTM C567 and unit weight by ASTM C567. Monitoring of current and forecasted climatic conditions to determine when rate of evaporation, as determined by Figure 2.1.5 of ACI 305R, will produce loss of 0.2 pounds of water, or more, per square foot per hour. Testing lab representative will advise Contractor to use hot weather precautions when such conditions will exist during concrete placement, and note on concrete test reports when Contractor has been advised that hot weather conditions will exist. 5/2013 03310-4 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE k. Class A and D Concrete Shrinkage Tests: Performance of drying shrinkage tests for trial batches as follows: 1) Preparation and Testing of Specimens: Compression and drying shrinkage test specimens will be taken in each case from the same concrete sample; shrinkage tests will be considered a part of the normal compression tests for the project. 4-inch by 4-inch by 11-inch prisms with an effective gage length of 10 inches, fabricated, cured, dried and measured in accordance with ASTM C157, modified as follows: (a). Wet curing: Remove specimens from molds at an age of 23 hours ±1 hour after trial batching and immediately immerse in water at 70 degrees F ±3 degrees F for at least 30 minutes; (b). Measure within 30 minutes after first 30 minutes of immersion to determine original length (not to be confused with "base length"); (c). Then submerge in saturated limewater, at 73 degrees F ±3 degrees F, for 7 days; (d). Then measure at age 7 days to establish "base length" for drying shrinkage calculations ("zero" days drying age); (e). Calculate expansion (base length expressed as a percentage of original length); (f). Immediately store specimens in a temperature and humidity controlled room maintained at 73 degrees F, ±3 degrees, and 50 percent relative humidity, ±4 percent, for the remainder of the test. (g). Measure to determine shrinkage, expressed as percentage of base length. Compute the drying shrinkage deformation of each specimen as the difference between the base length (at ?zero@ days drying age) and the length after drying at each test age. Compute the average drying shrinkage deformation of the specimens to the nearest 0.0001 inch at each test age. If the drying shrinkage of any specimen departs from the average of that test age by more than 0.0004 inch, disregard the results obtained from that specimen. 5/2013 03310-5 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Report results of shrinkage tests to the nearest 0.001 percent of shrinkage. (h). Report shrinkage separately for 7, 14, 21, and 28 days of drying after 7 days of moist curing. 4. Additional Testing and Quality Control Services: The following will be performed by an independent commercial testing laboratory employed and paid by the Owner in accordance with Section 01450, Testing Laboratory Services, when requested by the Engineer. a. Checking of batching and mixing operations. b. Review of manufacturer's report of each cement shipment and conducting laboratory tests of cement. c. Molding and testing reserve 7-day cylinders or field cylinders. d. Conducting additional field tests for slump, concrete temperature, and ambient temperature. e. Alkalinity Tests: For concrete used in sanitary structures, one test for each structure. Perform alkalinity tests on concrete covering reinforcing steel on the inside of the pipe or structure in accordance with "Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemical Analysis," Vol. 15, page 230. 5. Contractor shall provide the following testing and quality control services: a. Employ an independent commercial testing laboratory, acceptable to Owner, to prepare and test design mix for each class of concrete for which material source has been changed. b. Notify commercial testing laboratory employed by Owner 24 hours prior to placing concrete. 6. Testing of deficient concrete in place: a. When averages of three consecutive strength test results fail to equal or exceed specified strength, or when any individual strength test result falls below specified strength by more than 500 psi, strength of concrete shall be considered potentially deficient and core testing, structural analysis or load testing may be required by the Engineer. b. When concrete in place proves to be deficient, Contractor shall pay costs, including costs due to delays, incurred in providing additional 5/2013 03310-6 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE testing and analysis services provided by the Engineer, or the independent commercial testing laboratory selected by the Owner. c. Replace concrete work judged inadequate by core tests, structural analysis or load tests at no additional cost to the Owner. d. Core Tests: 1) Obtain and test cores in accordance with ASTM C42. Where concrete in structure will be dry under service conditions, air dry cores (temperature 60 to 80 degrees F, relative humidity less than 60 percent) for 7 days before test; test dry. Where concrete in structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, test cores after moisture conditioning in accordance with ASTM C42. 2) Take at least three representative cores from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially deficient. Location of cores shall be determined by the Engineer so as to least impair strength of structure. When, before testing, one or more cores shows evidence of having been damaged during or after removal from structure, replace the damaged cores. 3) Concrete in area represented by core test will be considered adequate when average strength of cores is equal to at least 85 percent of specified strength, and when no single core is less than 75 percent of specified strength. 4) Patch core holes in accordance with Section 03300 — Cast -in - Place Concrete, Paragraph 3.13. e. Structural Analysis: When core tests are inconclusive or impractical to obtain, the Engineer may perform additional structural analysis at Contractor's expense to confirm safety of structure. f. Load Tests: When core tests and structural analysis do not confirm safety of structure, load tests may be required, and their results evaluated, in accordance with ACI 318. g• Testing by impact hammer, sonoscope, probe penetration tests (Windsor probe), or other nondestructive device may be permitted by the Engineer to determine relative strengths at various locations in structure, to evaluate concrete strength in place, or for selecting areas to be cored. However, such tests, unless properly calibrated and correlated with other test data, shall not be used as basis for acceptance or rejection of structure's safety. 5/2013 03310-7 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS A. Cement: Store cement in weather tight buildings, bins or silos to provide protection from dampness and contamination and to minimize warehouse set. When there is any doubt as to the expansive potential of shrinkage -compensating cements because of method or length of storage and exposure, laboratory test cement before use. B. Aggregate: Arrange and use aggregate stockpiles to avoid excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. Build stockpiles in successive horizontal layers not exceeding 3 feet in thickness. Complete each layer before next is started. C. Fine Aggregate: Before using, allow fine aggregate to drain until uniform moisture content is reached. D. Admixtures: Store admixtures to avoid contamination, evaporation or damage. For those used in form of suspensions or non -stable solutions, provide suitable agitating equipment to assure uniform distribution of ingredients. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and other temperature changes which would adversely affect their characteristics. E. Lightweight Aggregates: Uniformly pre -dampen lightweight aggregates as necessary to prevent excessive variations in moisture content. Allow pre -dampened aggregates to remain in stockpiles, under continuous fog spray, for minimum of 24 hours before use. Provide adequate drainage in stockpile areas to eliminate excess water and accumulation of contaminated fines. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: 1. Use same brand of cement used in concrete mix design. Use only one brand of each type in each structure, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, gray in color. Use Type III only when specifically authorized by the Engineer in writing. Use Type II, including the requirements of Table 2, in construction of liquid -containing structures and cooling towers, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. B. Admixtures: 1. Do not use calcium chloride, thiocyanate or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. 2. Air -Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260, compatible with other admixtures used. 5/2013 03310-8 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 3. Chemical Admixtures: Polymer type, non -staining, chloride -free admixtures conforming to ASTM C494, Type A, C, D or E. 4. High -Range Water Reducer (Superplasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or G, compatible with and by the same manufacturer as other admixtures. C. Mixing Water: Use clean, potable water, free from harmful amounts of oils, acids, alkalis or other deleterious substances, meeting requirements of ASTM C94. D. Aggregates: Use coarse aggregate from only one source and fine aggregate from only one source, for exposed concrete in any single structure. 1. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel, crushed gravel or crushed limestone conforming to ASTM C33. 2. Fine Aggregate: Natural sand complying with ASTM C33. 3. Limestone aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33 and the following additional requirements: a. Clean, hard, strong and durable particles free of chemicals and coatings of silt, clay, or other fine materials that may affect hydration and bond of cement paste. b. Select crushed limestone: High -calcium limestone (minimum 95 percent CaCO3 and maximum 3.5 percent MgCO3) with maximum Los Angeles Abrasion loss of 38 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or ASTM C535. c. Test aggregate for soundness in accordance with ASTM C88; maximum loss shall not exceed 18 percent after 5 cycles of magnesium sulfate test. 4. Maximum size of coarse aggregate: a. Normal weight concrete, except as noted below: 1-1/2 inches. b. Formed members 6 inches or less in least dimension: 1/5 least dimension. c. Slabs: 1/3 depth of slab. d. Drilled shafts: 1/3 clearance between reinforcing steel, but not greater than 3/4 inch. e. Concrete fill, seal slabs and bonded concrete topping in clarifiers: 3/8 inch. 5/2013 03310-9 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 5. Coarse aggregate for lightweight concrete: ASTM C330. Grading limits: 3/4 inch to No. 4. 6. Abrasive Aggregate: Conform to requirements of Section 03300 — Cast -in - Place Concrete, Paragraph 3.13. E. Calcium Chloride: Not permitted. F. Evaporation Retardant: Masterbuilders "Confilm", Euclid "Eucobar", or equal. G. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Bonding Agent: Two -component modified epoxy resin. 2. Vapor barrier: 6-mil clear polyethylene film of type recommended for below - grade application. 3. Non -shrink grout: premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement and water -reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days. 2.02 CONCRETE MIX A. Objective: Select proportions of ingredients to produce concrete having proper placability, durability, strength, appearance and other specified properties. B. Mix Design: Employ and pay an independent commercial testing laboratory, acceptable to Owner, to prepare and test mix designs for each type of concrete specified. Proportion mix design ingredients by weight. Submit mix designs and test results for approval. 1. During the trial batches, aggregate proportions may be adjusted by the testing laboratory using two coarse aggregate size ranges to obtain the required properties. If one size range produces an acceptable mix, a second size range need not be used. Such adjustments shall be considered refinements to the mix design and shall not be the basis for extra compensation to the Contractor. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of this Section, whether the aggregate proportions are from the Contractor's preliminary mix design, or whether the proportions have been adjusted during the trial batch process. Prepare trial batches using the aggregates, cement and admixtures proposed for the project. Make trial batches large enough to obtain 3 drying shrinkage test specimens and 6 compression test specimens from each batch. Shrinkage testing is required only for Class A and D concrete. 5/2013 03310-10 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. Determine compressive strength by testing 6-inch diameter by 12-inch high cylinders, made, cured and tested in accordance with ASTM C192 and ASTM C39. Test 3 compression test cylinders at 7 days and 3 at 28 days. Average compressive strength for the 3 cylinders tested at 28 days for any given trial batch shall be not less than 125 percent of the specified compressive strength. 3. Perform sieve analysis of the combined aggregate for each trial batch according to of ASTM C136. Report percentage passing each sieve. 4. In mix designs for Class A and D concrete, fine aggregate shall not exceed 41 percent of total aggregate by weight. C. Shrinkage Limitations, Class A and D Concrete 1. Maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the laboratory from the trial batch: 0.036 percent as measured at 21-day drying age or 0.042 percent at 28-day drying age. Use for construction only mix designs that meet trial batch shrinkage requirements. Shrinkage limitations apply only to Class A and D concrete. 2. Maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the field shall not exceed the trial batch maximum shrinkage requirement by more than 25 percent. 3. If the required shrinkage limitation is not met during construction, take any or all of the following actions, at no additional cost to the Owner, for securing the specified shrinkage requirements: Changing the source or aggregates, cement or admixtures; reducing water content; washing of aggregate to reduce fines; increasing the number of construction joints; modifying the curing requirements; or other actions designed to minimize shrinkage or its effects. D. Selecting Ingredient Proportions for Concrete: 1. Proportion concrete mix according to ACI 301, Chapter 3. 2. Establish concrete mix design by laboratory trial batches prepared by independent testing laboratory, or on basis of previous field experience in accordance with provisions of ACI 318, Item 5.3; however, minimum cement content for each class of concrete shall not be less than specified. 3. Concrete mix design data submitted for review shall have average 28-day compressive strength calculated in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.3.2.1. When data is not available to determine standard deviation in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.3.1, average 28-day strength of mix design shall conform to ACI 318, Table 5.3.2.2. E. Water -Cement Ratios: 1. Maximum allowable water -cement ratios shall be as follows: 5/2013 03310-11 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE a. Concrete for liquid -containing structures: 0.45. b. Concrete subjected to brackish water, salt spray or deicers: 0.40. c. All other concrete: 0.55. 2. Superplasticizer may be added to maintain specified maximum water -cement ratios. Include free water in aggregate in water -cement ratio computations. F. Adjustment of Mix Proportions: After sufficient data becomes available during construction, mix may be adjusted upon approval of the Engineer, in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.5; however, minimum cement content for each class of concrete shall not be less than specified. G. Entrained Air: Air -entrain all concrete except drilled shafts. Total air content in accordance with ASTM C 173: 4 to 6 percent. H. Consistency, Workability, and Slump: 1. The quantity of water in a batch of concrete shall be just sufficient, with a normal mixing period, to produce concrete which can be worked properly into place without segregation, and which can be compacted by vibratory methods as specified, to give the desired strength, density, impermeability and smoothness of surface. Change the quantity of water as necessary, with variations in the nature or moisture content of the aggregates, to maintain uniform production of a desired consistency. Determine the consistency of the concrete in successive batches by slump tests in accordance with ASTM C 143. Slumps shall be as follows: Concrete Type Minimum Slump Maximum Slump Portland Cement Concrete 2" 4" Concrete to be dosed with superplasticizer: 1" 3" Normal Weight Concrete after dosing with superplasticizer 4" 9" Lightweight Concrete after dosing with superplasticizer 4" 7" Drilled Shaft Concrete: 4"* 8" * Minimum slump where drilled shafts are cast in temporary casings: 5 inches 2. Specified slump shall apply at time when concrete is discharged at job site. Perform slump tests to monitor uniformity and consistency of concrete delivered to job site; however, do not use as basis for mix design. Do not exceed water -cement ratios specified. 5/2013 03310-12 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE I. Admixtures: Proportion admixtures according to manufacturer's recommendations. Use of accelerator is permitted when air temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Use of retarder is permitted when temperature of placed concrete exceeds 65 degrees F. J. High -Range Water Reducers (Superplasticizers): Use superplasticizer to improve workability of concrete or delay hydration of cement, in accordance with requirements and recommendations of product manufacturer and approved submittals. K. Concrete Classification and Strength: 1. Strength: Conform to values for class of concrete indicated on Drawings for each portion of Work. Requirements are based on 28-day compressive strength. If high early -strength concrete is allowed, requirements are based on 7-day compressive strength. 2. Classification: Minimum 28-day Class Compressive Strength Minimum Cement Content (Normal -weight) (psi) Pounds per Cubic Yard Concrete for Structures Containing Water or Wastewater A 4,000 564 (6 sacks) B 1,500 329 (3 '/2 sacks) C 3,000 470 (5 sacks) D 5,000 658 (7 sacks) H 3,000 611 (6 '/h sacks) Concrete for Buildings, Slabs on Grade and Miscellaneous Structures AB 4,000 Not Applicable BB 1,500 Not Applicable CB 3,000 Not Applicable DB 5,000 Not Applicable Minimum 28-day Class Compressive Strength Minimum Cement Content (Light -weight) (psi) Pounds per Cubic Yard E 3,000 Not Applicable F 4,000 Not Applicable G 5,000 Not Applicable 3. Maximum size aggregate for Class H concrete: 3/8 inch. Maximum size aggregate for all other normal -weight concrete: 1-1/2 inches, except as specified in Paragraph 2.01 D.4. 4. When required strength is not obtained with minimum cement content as specified, add cement, lower water -cement ratio or provide other aggregates as necessary. 5/2013 03310-13 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 5. In addition to conforming to specified strength, lightweight concrete must be within specified unit weight limits. Maximum air-dry unit weight is 118 pounds per cubic foot; minimum is 110 pounds per cubic foot unless shown otherwise on Drawings. Determine air-dry unit weight in accordance with ASTM C567. Correlate air-dry unit weight with fresh unit weight of the same concrete as a basis for acceptance during construction. L. Use of Classes of Concrete: 1. Use classes of concrete as indicated on the Drawings and in other specifications. 2. Liquid -containing structures: If not otherwise indicated, use the following classes for structures containing water or wastewater and for utility applications in the locations described: a. Class A: All reinforced concrete and where not otherwise defined. b. Class B: Unreinforced concrete used for plugging pipes, seal slabs, thrust blocks, and trench dams, unless indicated otherwise. c. Class H: Fill and topping. Where concrete fill thickness exceeds 3 inches in the majority of a placement and is not less than 1.5 inches thick, Class A concrete may be used. 3. All other structures: If not otherwise indicated, use the following classes in the locations described: a. Class AB: All reinforced concrete and where not otherwise defined. b. Class CB: Duct banks; see Section 16402 — Underground Duct Banks for additional requirements. c. Class BB: Unreinforced concrete fill under structures. 2.03 MIXING NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE A. Conform to ACI 301, Chapter 7. B. Ready -Mixed Concrete: 1. Measure, batch, mix and transport ready -mixed concrete according to ASTM C94. Plant equipment and facilities shall conform to NRMCA "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities". 5/2013 03310-14 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. Provide batch tickets with information specified in ASTM C94. Deliver batch ticket with concrete and give to Owner's on -site testing laboratory representative. C. Batch Mixing at Site: 1. Mix concrete in batch mixer conforming to requirements of CPMB "Concrete Plant Mixer Standards". Use mixer equipped with suitable charging hopper, water storage tank and water measuring device. Batch mixer shall be capable of mixing aggregates, cement and water into uniform mass within specified mixing time, and of discharging mix without segregation. Operate mixer according to rated capacity and recommended revolutions per minute printed on manufacturer's rating plate. 2. Charge batch into mixer so some water will enter before cement and aggregates. Keep water running until one-fourth of specified mixing time has elapsed. Provide controls to prevent discharging until required mixing time has elapsed. When concrete of normal weight is specified, provide controls to prevent addition of water during mixing. Discharge entire batch before mixer is recharged. 3. Mix each batch of 2 cubic yards or less for not less than 1 minute and 30 seconds. Increase minimum mixing time 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or fraction of cubic yard. 4. Keep mixer clean. Replace pick-up and throw -over blades in drum when they have lost 10 percent of original depth. D. Admixtures: 1. Charge air -entraining and chemical admixtures into mixer as solution using automatic dispenser or similar metering device. Measure admixture to accuracy within + 3 percent. Do not use admixtures in powdered form. 2. Two or more admixtures may be used in same concrete, provided that admixtures in combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on concrete or on properties of each other. Inject admixtures separately during batching sequence. 3. Add retarding admixtures as soon as practicable after addition of cement. E. Temperature Control: 1. When ambient temperature falls below 40 degrees F, keep as -mixed temperature above 55 degrees F to maintain concrete above minimum placing temperature. 5/2013 03310-15 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. When water or aggregate has been heated, combine water with aggregate in mixer before cement is added. Do not add cement to mixtures of water and aggregate when temperature of mixture is greater than 100 degrees F. 3. In hot weather, maintain temperature of concrete below maximum placing temperature. When necessary, temperature may be lowered by cooling ingredients, cooling mixer drum by fog spray, using chilled water or well - crushed ice in whole or part for added water, or arranging delivery sequence so that time of transport and placement does not generate unacceptable temperatures. 4. Submit hot weather and cold weather concreting plans for approval. 2.04 MIXING LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE A. Determining Absorption of Aggregates: Mixing procedures vary according to total absorption by weight of lightweight aggregates. Determine total absorption by weight before pre -damping in accordance with ASTM C127. B. Ten Percent or Less Absorption: Follow same requirements as for mixing normal - weight concrete when preparing concrete made with low -absorptive lightweight aggregates having 10 percent or less total absorption by weight. To be low -absorptive, aggregates must absorb less than 2 percent additional water in first hour after mixing. C. More Than 10 Percent Absorption: Batch and mix concrete made with lightweight aggregates having more than 10 percent total absorption by weight, as follows: 1. Place approximately 80 percent of mixing water in mixer. 2. If aggregates are pre -dampened, add air -entraining admixture and all aggregates. Mix for minimum of 30 seconds, or 5 to 10 revolutions of truck mixer. 3. When aggregates have not been pre -dampened, mix aggregates and water for minimum of 1 minute and 30 seconds, or 15 to 30 revolutions of truck mixer. Then add air -entraining admixture and mix for additional 30 seconds. 4. Then, in the following sequence, add specified or permitted admixtures (other than air -entraining agent), all cement, and mixing water previously withheld. 5. Complete mixing using procedures for normal -weight concrete. 2.05 MASS CONCRETE A. Do not use high early -strength cement (Type III) or accelerating admixtures. 5/2013 03310-16 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE B. Use high -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer) to minimize water content and cement content. C. Specified water -reducing retarding admixture may be required to prevent cold joints when placing large quantities of concrete, to permit revibration of concrete, to offset effects of high temperature in concrete or weather, and to reduce maximum temperature or rapid temperature rise. 2.06 EQUIPMENT A. Select equipment of size and design to ensure continuous flow of concrete at delivery end. Conform to following equipment and operations requirements. B. Truck mixers, agitators and manner of operation: Conform to ASTM C94. Use of non -agitating equipment for transporting concrete is not permitted. C. Belt conveyors: Configure horizontally, or at a slope causing no segregation or loss. Use approved arrangement at discharge end to prevent separation. Discharge long runs without separation into hopper. D. Chutes: Metal or metal -lined (other than aluminum). Arrange for vertical -to - horizontal slopes not more than 1 to 2 or less than 1 to 3. Chutes longer than 20 feet or not meeting slope requirements may be used if concrete is discharged into hopper before distribution. E. Do not use aluminum or aluminum -alloy pipe or chutes for conveying concrete. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Concreting Under Water: Not permitted except where shown otherwise on Drawings or approved by the Engineer. When shown or permitted, deposit concrete under water by methods acceptable to the Engineer so fresh concrete enters mass of previously - placed concrete from within, causing water to be displaced with minimum disturbance at surface of concrete. B. Protection from Adverse Weather: Unless adequate protection is provided or the Engineer's approval is obtained, do not place concrete during rain, sleet, snow or freezing weather. Do not permit rainwater to increase mixing water or to damage surface finish. If rainfall occurs after placing operations begin, provide adequate covering to protect Work. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING A. Earth Surfaces: 5/2013 03310-17 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1. Under interior slabs on grade, install vapor barrier. Lap joints at least 6 inches and seal watertight with tape, or sealant applied between overlapping edges and ends. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of reinforcing and inserts with vapor barrier material; lap over damaged areas at least 6 inches and seal watertight. 2. Other Earth Surfaces: Thoroughly wet by sprinkling prior to placing concrete, and keep moist by frequent sprinkling up to time of placing concrete thereon. Remove standing water. Surfaces shall be free from standing water, mud and debris at the time of placing concrete. B. Construction Joints: 1. Definition: Concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed, where the placement of the concrete has been interrupted so that, in the judgment of the Engineer, new concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with that previously placed. 2. Interruptions: When placing of concrete is to be interrupted long enough for the concrete to take a set, use forms or other means to shape the working face to secure proper union with subsequent work. Make construction joints only where acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Preparation: Give horizontal joint surfaces a compacted, roughened surface for good bond. Except where the Drawings call for joint surfaces to be coated, clean joint surfaces of laitance, loose or defective concrete and foreign material by hydroblasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate), roughen surface to expose aggregate to a depth of at least 1/4 inch and wash thoroughly. Remove standing water from the construction joint surface before new concrete is placed. 4. After surfaces have been prepared cover approximately horizontal construction joints with a 3-inch lift of a grout mix consisting of Class A concrete batched without coarse aggregate; place and spread grout uniformly. Place wall concrete on the grout mix immediately thereafter. C. Set and secure reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and similar embedded items in the forms where indicated on Contract Drawings, shop drawings and as otherwise required. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance before concrete is placed. Accuracy of placement is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. D. Place no concrete until at least 4 hours after formwork, inserts, embedded items, reinforcement and surface preparation have been completed and accepted by the Engineer. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded items that have become encrusted with grout or previously -placed concrete before placing adjacent concrete. 5/2013 03310-18 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE E. Casting New Concrete Against Old: Where concrete is to be cast against old concrete (any concrete which is greater than 60 days of age), thoroughly clean and roughen the surface of the old concrete by hydroblasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate). Coat joint surface with epoxy bonding agent following manufacturer's written instructions, unless indicated otherwise. Unless noted otherwise, this provision does not apply to vertical wall joints where waterstop is installed. F. Protection from Water: Place no concrete in any structure until water entering the space to be filled with concrete has been properly cut off or diverted and carried out of the forms, clear of the work. Deposit no concrete underwater without special methods. Do not allow still water to rise on any concrete until concrete has attained its initial set. Do not allow water to flow over the surface of any concrete in a manner and at a velocity that will damage the surface finish of the concrete. Pumping, dewatering and other necessary operations for removing ground water, if required, are subject to the Engineer's review. G. Corrosion Protection: Position and support pipe, conduit, dowels and other ferrous items to be embedded in concrete construction prior to placement of concrete so there is at least a 2 inch clearance between them and any part of the concrete reinforcement. Do not secure such items in position by wiring or welding them to the reinforcement. H. Where practicable, provide for openings for pipes, inserts for pipe hangers and brackets, and setting of anchors during placing of concrete. I. Accurately set anchor bolts and maintain in position with templates while they are being embedded in concrete. J. Cleaning: Immediately before concrete is placed, thoroughly clean dirt, grease, grout, mortar, loose scale, rust and other foreign substances from surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete. 3.03 HANDLING, TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE A. Conform to applicable requirements of Chapter 8 of ACI 301 and this Section. Use no aluminum materials in conveying concrete. B. Rejected Work: Remove concrete found to be defective or non -conforming in materials or workmanship. Replace rejected concrete with concrete meeting requirements of Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Unauthorized Placement: Place no concrete except in the presence of the Engineer. Notify the Engineer in writing at least 24 hours before placement of concrete. D. Placement in Wall Forms: 1. Do not drop concrete through reinforcing steel that will not be covered by current pour. 5/2013 03310-19 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. Do not place concrete in any form so as to leave an accumulation of mortar on form surfaces above the concrete. 3. Pump concrete or use hoppers and, if necessary, vertical ducts of canvas, rubber or metal (other than aluminum) for placing concrete in forms so it reaches the place of final deposit without separation. Free fall of concrete shall not exceed 4 feet below the ends of pump hoses, ducts, chutes or buggies. Uniformly distribute concrete during depositing. 4. Do not displace concrete in forms more than 6 feet in horizontal direction from place where it was originally deposited. Do not transport concrete with vibrators. 5. Deposit in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2 feet; take care to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where required for sloping members. 6. Place each layer while the previous layer is still soft. Rate of placement shall not exceed 5 feet of vertical rise per hour. 7. Provide sufficient illumination in form interior so concrete at places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway. E. Conveyors and Chutes: Design and arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates and other points of concrete discharge in the conveying, hoisting and placing system so concrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle immediately receives it. Conveyors, if used, shall be of a type acceptable to the Engineer. Do not use chutes longer than 50 feet. Slope chutes so concrete of specified consistency will readily flow. If a conveyor is used, it shall be wiped clean by a device operated in such a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will be wasted. All conveyors and chutes shall be covered. F. Placement of Slabs: In hot or windy weather, conducive to plastic shrinkage cracks, apply evaporation retardant to slab after screeding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not use evaporation retardant to increase water content of the surface cement paste. Place concrete for sloping slabs uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. As work progresses, vibrate and carefully work concrete around slab reinforcement. Screed the slab surface in an up -slope direction. G. When adverse weather conditions affect quality of concrete, postpone concrete placement. Do not mix concrete when the air temperature is at or below 40 degrees F and falling. Concrete may be mixed when temperature is 35 degrees F and rising. Take temperature readings in the shade, away from artificial heat. Protect concrete from temperatures below 32 degrees F until the concrete has cured for a minimum of 3 days at 70 degrees F or 5 days at 50 degrees F. 5/2013 03310-20 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE H. When concrete temperature is 85 degrees F or above, do not exceed 60 minutes between introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge. When the weather is such that the concrete temperature would exceed 90 degrees F, employ effective means, such as pre -cooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain concrete temperature, as placed, below 90 degrees F. 3.04 PUMPING OF CONCRETE A. If pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory results, in the judgment of the Engineer, discontinue pumping operations and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods. B. Pumping Equipment: Use a 2-cylinder pump designed to operate with only one cylinder if one is not functioning, or have a standby pump on site during pumping. C. The minimum hose (conduit) diameter: Comply with ACI 304.2R. D. Replace pumping equipment and hoses (conduits) that do not function properly. E. Do not use aluminum conduits for conveying concrete. F. Field Control: Take samples for slump, air content and test cylinders at the placement (discharge) end of the line. 3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT SEQUENCE A. Place concrete in a sequence acceptable to the Engineer. To minimize effects of shrinkage, place concrete in units bounded by construction joints shown. Place alternate units so each unit placed has cured at least 7 days for hydraulic structures, or 3 days for other structures, before contiguous unit or units are placed, except do not place corner sections of vertical walls until the 2 adjacent wall panels have cured at least 14 days for hydraulic structures and 7 days for other structures. B. Level the concrete surface whenever a run of concrete is stopped. To ensure straight and level joints on the exposed surface of walls, tack a wood strip at least 3/4-inch thick to the forms on these surfaces. Carry concrete about 1 /2-inch above the underside of the strip. About one hour after concrete is placed, remove the strip, level irregularities in the edge formed by the strip with a trowel and remove laitance. 3.06 TAMPING AND VIBRATING A. Thoroughly settle and compact concrete throughout the entire depth of the layer being consolidated, into a dense, homogeneous mass; fill corners and angles, thoroughly embed reinforcement, eliminate rock pockets and bring only a slight excess of water to the exposed surface of concrete during placement. Use ACI 309R Group 3 immersion - type high-speed power vibrators (8,000 to 12,000 rpm) in sufficient number and with 5/2013 03310-21 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE sufficient (at least one) standby units. Use Group 2 vibrators only when accepted by the Engineer for specific locations. B. Use care in placing concrete around waterstops. Carefully work concrete by rodding and vibrating to make sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Where flat -strip type waterstops are placed horizontally, work concrete under waterstops by hand, making sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Give concrete surrounding the waterstops additional vibration beyond that used for adjacent concrete placement to assure complete embedment of waterstops in concrete. C. Concrete in Walls: Internally vibrate, ram, stir, or work with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels or forked tools until concrete completely fills forms or excavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Do not place subsequent layers of concrete until previously -placed layers have been so worked. Provide vibrators in sufficient numbers, with standby units as required, to accomplish the results specified within 15 minutes after concrete of specified consistency is placed in the forms. Keep vibrating heads from contact with form surfaces. Take care not to vibrate concrete excessively or to work it in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents. 3.07 PLACING MASS CONCRETE A. Observe the following additional restrictions when placing mass concrete. 1. Use specified superplasticizer. 2. Maximum temperature of concrete when deposited: 70 degrees F. 3. Place in lifts approximately 18 inches thick. Extend vibrator heads into previously -placed layer. 3.08 REPAIRING SURFACE DEFECTS AND FINISHING A. Conform to Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 3.09 CURING A. Conform to Section 03300 - Cast -in- Place Concrete. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete against damage until final acceptance by the Owner. B. Protect fresh concrete from damage due to rain, hail, sleet or snow. Provide such protection while the concrete is still plastic and whenever such precipitation is imminent or occurring. 5/2013 03310-22 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE C. Do not backfill around concrete structures or subject them to design loadings until all components of the structure needed to resist the loading are complete and have reached the specified 28-day compressive strength, except as authorized otherwise by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 5/2013 03310-23 of 23 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH SECTION 03360 SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes polished concrete finishing and scoring. 1. Concrete for polished concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, initial finishing, and curing is specified in Section 03300 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03300 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for concrete not designated as polished concrete. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Design Reference Sample: Sample designated by Architect in the Contract Documents that reflects acceptable surface quality and appearance of polished concrete. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with polished concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready -mix concrete manufacturer. d. Cast -in -place concrete subcontractor. e. Polished concrete finishing Subcontractor. 2. Review cold- and hot -weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction joints, concrete repair procedures, concrete finishing, and protection of polished concrete. 03360-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH 1.5 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM-C779, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces 2. ASTM G23-81, Ultraviolet Light & Water Spray 3. ASTM C805, Impact Strength B. American Concrete Institute 1. ACI 302. 1 R-89, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction C. Other Test: 1. Reflectivity 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01630-Product Options and Substitutions. 1. Provide submittal information within 35 calendar days after the contractor has received the owner's notice to proceed. B. Product Data: C. 1. Submit special concrete finishes manufacturer's specifications and test data. 2. Submit special concrete finishes describing product to be provided, giving manufacturer's name and product name for the specified material proposed to be provided under this section. 3. Submit special concrete finishes manufacturer's recommended installation procedures; which when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. 4. Submit special concrete finishes technical data sheet giving descriptive data, curing time, and application requirements. 5. Submit special concrete finishes manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and other safety requirements. 6. Follow all special concrete finishes published manufacturer's installation instructions. 03360-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH D. Test Reports: 1. Provide certified test reports, prepared by an independent testing laboratory, confirming compliance with specified performance criteria. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Use an experienced installer and adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary craft. 2. The special concrete finish manufacturer shall certify applicator. 3. Applicator shall be familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of work of this section. B. Manufacturer's Certification: 1. Provide letter of certification from concrete finish manufacturer stating that installer is certified applicator of special concrete finishes, and is familiar with proper procedures and installation requirements required by the manufacturer. C. Mock-ups: 1. Apply mock-ups of each type finish, to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, color variation (if any), and standard of workmanship. a. Build mock-ups approximately 50 square feet in the location indicated or if not indicated, as directed by the Architect or Owner Representative. b. Notify Architect or Owner Representative seven days in advance of dates and times when mock-ups will be constructed. c. Obtain from the Architect or Owner Representative approval of mock-ups before starting construction. d. If the Architect or Owner Representative determines that mock-ups do not meet requirements, demolish and remove them from the site and cast others until mock- ups are approved. e. Maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed work. f. Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed work if undisturbed at time of substantial completion. 03360-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH D. Protection 1. No satisfactory chemical or cleaning procedure is available to remove petroleum stains from the concrete surface. Prevention is therefore essential. a. All hydraulic powered equipment must be diapered to avoid staining of the concrete. b. No trade will park vehicles on the inside slab. If necessary to complete their scope of work, drop cloths will be placed under vehicles at all times. c. No pipe cutting machine will be used on the inside floor slab. d. Steel will not be placed on interior slab to avoid rust staining. e. Acids and acidic detergents will not come into contact with slab. f. All trades informed that the slab must be protected at all times. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original containers, with seal's unbroken, bearing manufacturer labels indicating brand name and directions for storage. B. Dispense special concrete finish material from factory numbered and sealed containers. Maintain record of container numbers. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental limitations: 1. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting topping performance. a. Concrete Floor Flatness rating recommended at least 40, where possible. b. Concrete Floor Levelness rating recommended at least 30, where possible. c. Concrete must be cured a minimum of 45 days or as directed by the manufacturer before application of Retro Plate can begin. d. Application of Retro-Plate shall take place 10 days prior to installation of equipment and substantial completion, thus providing a complete, uninhibited concrete slab for application. B. Close areas to traffic during floor application and after application, for time period recommended in writing by manufacturer. 03360-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS: BASIS -OF -DESIGN A. Hardening/Sealing Agent 1. Retro-Plate 99, manufactured by Advanced Floor Products, Inc., P.O. Box 50533, Provo, Utah 84605, 801-812-3420. a. Performance Criteria: i. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C779-Up to 400% increase in abrasion resistance. ii. Impact Strength: ASTM C805 — Up to 21 % increase impact strength. iii. Ultra Violet Light and Water Spray: ASTM G23-81- No adverse effect to ultra violet and water spray. iv. Reflectivity: Up to 30% increase in reflectivity. 2. Certified Applicators 3. Manufacturer's Regional Representative 2.2 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatments for Polished Concrete Finish: Clear, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and is suitable for polished concrete surfaces. 1. Neutralizing Agent: a. Tri-sodium Phosphate 2. Water a. Potable PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS: A. Examine substrate, with installer present, for conditions affecting performance of finish. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 03360-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH B. Verify that base slab meet finish and surface profile requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast -In - Place Concrete," and Project Conditions above. C. Prior to application, verify that floor surfaces are free of construction latents. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Start any of the floor finish applications in presence of manufacturer's technical representative. B. Sealing, Hardening and Polishing of Concrete Surface 1. Concrete must be in place a minimum of 45 days or as directed by the manufacturer before application can begin. 2. Application is to take place at least 10 days prior to racking and other in-store accessory installation, thus providing a complete, uninhibited concrete slab for application. 3. Only a certified applicator shall apply Retro-Plate 99. Applicable procedures must be followed as recommended by the product manufacturer and as required to match approved test sample. 4. Achieve waterproofing, hardening, dust -proofing, and abrasion resistance of the surface without changing the natural appearance of the concrete, except for the sheen. 5. Polish to required sheen level: 4 (Grit:1200-1600). 3.3 Workmanship and Cleaning: A. The premises shall be kept clean and free of debris at all times. B. Remove spatter from adjoining surfaces, as necessary. C. Repair damages to surface caused by cleaning operations. D. Remove debris from jobsite 1. Dispose of materials in separate, closed containers in accordance with local regulations. 3.4 Protection: A. Protect finished work until fully cured in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 03360 03360-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TILT -UP CONCRETE PANELS SECTION 03471 TILT -UP CONCRETE PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes load -bearing, tilt -up concrete, including the following: 1. Monolithic panels. 2. Monolithic panels with texture. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Face -down Surface: Concealed surface of as -cast, tilt -up panel formed against the casting slab. B. Face -up Surface: Exposed upper surface of as -cast, tilt -up panel. C. Reveal: Projection of the coarse aggregate from the matrix after exposure. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Before submitting design mixes, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with tilt -up concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready -mix concrete manufacturer. d. Tilt -up concrete subcontractor. 2. Review special inspection procedures; testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control; tilt -up concrete finishes and finishing; cold- and hot -weather concreting procedures; curing procedures; casting -slab construction, flatness and levelness, finish, and joint requirements; steel reinforcement installation; hoisting and erection plans; measurement of fabrication and erection tolerances; tilt -up concrete repair procedures; and tilt -up concrete protection. 03471-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. LEED Submittals: TILT -UP CONCRETE PANELS 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Design Mixtures for Credit ID 1.1: For each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements and for equivalent concrete mixtures that do not contain portland cement replacements. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of tilt -up concrete units. Indicate panel locations. plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes. cross sections, and details of steel embedments. Match panel identification designations on Shop Drawings with those on Contract Drawings. 1. Include steel reinforcement, detailing fabrication, bending, and placing. Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent -bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. 2. Include additional steel reinforcement to resist hoisting and erection stresses. 3. Include locations and details of hoisting points and lifting devices for handling and erection. 4. Include engineering analysis data of additional steel reinforcement and hoisting and erection details, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 5. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail cast -in inserts, connections, and joints, including accessories. 6. Include layout of wythe connectors for sandwich panels. Samples: 20-Ib (9-kg) Sample of exposed aggregate. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. B. Welding certificates. C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 4. Bondbreakers. 03471-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TILT -UP CONCRETE PANELS 5. Curing compounds. 6. Inserts and embedments. 7. Sandwich -panel insulation and wythe connectors. D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified with requirements: 1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity. E. Field quality -control reports. testing agency, indicating compliance absence of deleterious expansion of 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs a supervisor on Project who is an ACI- certified Tilt -up Supervisor. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade I, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II. D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel." E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. F. Mockups: Cast and erect tilt -up concrete panel mockups to demonstrate typical reveals, surface finishes, texture, color, and standard of workmanship. 1. Build mockup panels in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. In presence of Architect, damage part of an exposed surface for each finish, color, and texture required, and demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repairs to match adjacent undamaged surfaces. 03471-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TILT -UP CONCRETE PANELS 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TILT -UP CONCRETE Comply with ACI 301. "Specifications for Structural Concrete." Sections 1 through 5, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures from one source from a single manufacturer. 2.2 FORMS AND ACCESSORIES Forms: Metal, dressed lumber. or other approved materials that are nonreactive with concrete and that will provide continuous, true. and smooth concrete surfaces. Chamfer Strips: Wood. metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm). C. Form Liners: Units of face design, texture, arrangement, and configuration indicated. Furnish with manufacturer's recommended liquid -release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface treatments of concrete. 1. Fitzgerald: Fluted Rib No. 14304 Reveal Strips: Urethane or straight dressed wood with sides kerfed. 1. GreenStreak: 1/2" x %" 0 x 3/" Sealer: Penetrating, clear, polyurethane wood form sealer formulated to reduce absorption of bleedwater and prevent migration of set -retarding chemicals from wood or plywood. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 60 percent. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. Low -Alloy -Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, galvanized. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 03471-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TILT -UP CONCRETE PANELS F. Deformed -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet. G. Bar Supports: Manufactured according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" of plastic or CRSI Class 1 plastic -protected steel wire or Class 2 stainless -steel wire. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I gray 2. Fly Ash: None. B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal. C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33 or ASTM C 144, manufactured or natural sand, from same source for Project, free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. D. Exposed Coarse Aggregate: Hard and durable; washed; free of material that reacts with cementitious material or causes staining; from single source, as follows: 1. Aggregate Sizes: 1/2 to 3/4 inch (13 to 19 mm) nominal. 2. Gradation: Uniformly graded. 3. Source and Material: Insert source and material. E. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High -Range, Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. C. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral -oxide pigments or colored water -reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 03471-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TILT -UP CONCRETE PANELS 2.6 BONDBREAKERS Solvent -Borne, Membrane -Forming Bondbreaker: Dissipating polymerized solution containing no oils, waxes, paraffins, or silicones, and compatible with casting -slab curing compound. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dayton Superior Corporation; [Conspec Tilt-Eez VOC] [Edoco Super Bondbreaker VOC]. b. Universal Building Products, Inc.; Unitilt VOC. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 2.8 CONNECTION MATERIALS Embedded Metal Items and Loose Hardware: Materials for securing tilt -up concrete panels together and to supporting and adjacent construction are specified in Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications." Loose Hardware: Materials for securing tilt -up concrete panels together and to supporting and adjacent construction are specified in Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications." Carbon -Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Carbon -Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); carbon -steel, hex -head bolts and studs; carbon -steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. E. Unheaded Carbon -Steel Rods and Nuts: ASTM A 36/A 36M, threaded rods with ASTM A 563, nuts. F. Welded Headed Studs: AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B headed studs, and cold -finished, carbon - steel bars. G. Low -Alloy -Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. H. Chord Bar Sleeves: Tubular sheathing, plastic or moisture -resistance -treated cardboard. I. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 03471-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TILT -UP CONCRETE PANELS J. Hot -Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating to steel connections by hot -dip process, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M as applicable. 1. Zinc Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20. K. Shop -Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of steel connections, except those surfaces to be embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPC-SP 3, and shop -apply primer according to SSPC-PA 1. 1. Primer: MPI#79, "Alkyd Anti -Corrosive Metal Primer Alkyd Metal Primer." 2.9 LIFTING INSERTS AND ACCESSORIES A. Furnish inserts, dowels, bolts, nuts, washers, and other items to be cast in panels for tilting and lifting. 1. Manufacture inserts with feet of plastic, galvanized -steel wire, plastic -tipped steel wire, or stainless -steel -tipped steel wire. B. Furnish brace anchors and other accessories to be cast in panels and in casting slab for attaching bracing. 1. Manufacture wall brace anchors and accessories with feet of galvanized -steel wire, plastic -tipped steel wire, or stainless -steel -tipped steel wire. 2. Manufacture floor brace anchors that will not penetrate vapor retarder under slab -on - grade. 2.10 BEARING PADS A. Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100 percent polychloroprene (neoprene) elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet; Type A Shore durometer hardness of 50 to 70, ASTM D 2240; and minimum tensile strength 2250 psi (15.5 MPa), ASTM D 412. B. Random, Fiber -Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, randomly oriented synthetic fibers set in elastomer with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of 70 to 90, ASTM D 2240. C. Cotton -Duck -Fabric -Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, horizontally layered cotton -duck fabric bonded in elastomer with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of 80 to 100, ASTM D 2240. D. High -Density Plastic Strips: Multimonomer, nonleaching plastic. 2.11 GROUT A. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. 03471-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TILT -UP CONCRETE PANELS B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage -compensating agents, and plasticizing and water -reducing agents; complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application. 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Chemical Surface Retarder: Water-soluble, liquid set retarder with color dye, for horizontal concrete surface application, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of concrete to depth of reveal or etch required of specified finish. Form Retarder: Chemical liquid set retarder, for application on hardened horizontal concrete and capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of newly placed concrete to depth of reveal specified. 1. Mold Release: Solution specially formulated by manufacturer for use under form retarder. C. Flashing Reglets: Open type having continuous groove not less than 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) deep by 3/16 inch (5 mm) wide at opening and sloped upward to 45 degrees. Temporarily fill or cover face openings of reglets to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, soft annealed, not less than 0.0187 inch (0.5 mm) thick. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot -dip galvanized -steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch (0.85 mm) thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. Embedded anchors: "Unistrut" P3251, 6 inch long with hot dip galvanized finish. Include stainless steel bolts, washers and spring nuts. 2.13 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. B. Patching Mortar: Dry -pack mix consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. 2.14 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Proportion concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 03471-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TILT -UP CONCRETE PANELS 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches (125 mm) plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: 5-1/2 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size at point of delivery. 5. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1-inch (25-mm) 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size at point of delivery. 6. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete according to ACI 301 requirements. C. Limit water-soluble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 0.30 percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water -reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. E. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup. 2.15 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. B. Project -Site -Produced Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum -type batch machine mixer. 1. Provide a batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record panel locations where concrete is deposited. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMS A. Construct and brace formwork so tilt -up concrete panels are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated. 1. Construct forms on slab -on -grade or on temporary casting slab, at Contractor's option. 2. Provide for openings, offsets, recesses, reveals, rustications, reglets, and blockouts. 03471-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TILT -UP CONCRETE PANELS 3. Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid backing and supports to maintain stability of liners during concreting. Coat form liner with form -release agent. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Use kerfed inserts, such as those forming reglets, rustications, and recesses, for easy removal. Set edge forms for panels to achieve required panel thickness. Chamfer exposed corners and edges, unless otherwise indicated, using chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform, smooth lines and tight edge joints. Coat contact surfaces of wood forms and chamfers with sealer before placing reinforcement. 3.2 BONDBREAKERS Uniformly and continuously apply two coats of bondbreaker to casting -slab surfaces by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing steel reinforcement. Recoat areas subjected to moisture before drying. Maintain continuity of coating until concrete placement. After placing steel reinforcement, touch up or recoat worn or damaged areas with bondbreaker. Do not splash or coat steel reinforcement and inserts. 3.3 FORM RETARDER Uniformly and continuously apply form retarder to slab surfaces by power spray, roller, or brush according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing steel reinforcement. Recoat areas subjected to moisture before drying. Maintain continuity of coating until concrete placement. 1. Uniformly apply mold release according to manufacturer's written instructions and allow it to dry before applying form retarder. B. After placing steel reinforcement, touch up or recoat worn or damaged areas with form retarder. Do not splash or coat steel reinforcement and inserts. 3.4 REINFORCEMENT AND INSERTS General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating and placing reinforcement. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. 1. Field weld reinforcement according to AVVS D1.4/D1.4M, where indicated. 2. Do not tack -weld crossing reinforcing bars. 3. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 03471-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TILT -UP CONCRETE PANELS C. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. D. Accurately place and securely support embedded items, anchorages, inserts, cramps, retainers, bar chords and sleeves, and other items to be built into panels. Coordinate with other trades for installing cast -in items. E. Wythe Connectors: Accurately place and securely support stainless -steel anchors and connecting pins for sandwich panels. 3.5 PANEL CASTING, GENERAL A. Comply with ACI 301 for handling, placing, and consolidating concrete. B. Maintain position of steel reinforcement, inserts, and anchors during concrete placement, consolidation, and finishing. C. Screed panel surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. 1. Begin initial floating before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Use bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open -textured surface plane free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb panel surfaces before beginning finishing operations. D. Form chamfers at top edges of panel perimeters, openings, and similar locations not formed by chamfer strips unless otherwise indicated. E. Surface Defects: Limit visible surface defects to those permitted by TCA's "Tilt -up Concrete Association's Guideline Specifications" for Grade A, Architectural panel surfaces. 3.6 CASTING TOLERANCES A. Cast tilt -up concrete panels without exceeding the following tolerances: 1. Height and Width of Panels: a. For Panels up to 20 Feet (6.1 m) Tall: 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide. b. For Panels 20 to 30 Feet (6.1 to 9.1 m) Tall: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide. c. Each Additional 10 Feet (3.05 m) in Excess of 30 Feet (9.1 m) Tall: 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide. 2. Thickness: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 3. Skew of Panel or Opening: Difference in length of diagonals of 1/8 inch per 72 inches (3 mm per 1830 mm) with a maximum difference of 1/2 inch (13 mm). 4. Openings Cast into Panel: a. Size of Opening: 1/4 inch (6 mm). b. Location of Centerline of Opening: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 03471-11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TILT -UP CONCRETE PANELS 5. Location and Placement of Embedded Items: a. Inserts, Bolts, and Pipe Sleeves: 3/8 inch (10 mm). b. Lifting and Bracing Inserts: As required by manufacturer. c. Lateral Placement of Weld Plate Embedments: 1 inch (25 mm). d. Tipping and Flushness of Weld Plate Embedments: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 6. Deviation of Steel Reinforcement Cover: Maintain minimum cover required by ACI 301. 3.7 FACE -UP FINISHES Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate plastic concrete by hand trowel or power -driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and is uniform in texture and appearance. 1. Immediately after floating, spray chemical surface retarder on panel surface according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Cover with plastic sheeting. sealing laps with tape. and remove after concrete has hardened. 3. Apply abrasive -blast finish using abrasive grit, equipment, application techniques, and cleaning procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces as follows: a. Light Exposure: Expose fine aggregate with occasional exposure of coarse aggregate and uniform color; maximum reveal of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Medium Exposure: Generally expose coarse aggregate with slight reveal; maximum reveal of 1/4 inch (6 mm). c. Heavy Exposure: Expose and reveal coarse aggregate to a maximum projection of 1/3 of its diameter; reveal of 1/4 to 1/2 inch (6 to 13 mm). Acid Cleaning: After abrasive blasting, clean surfaces with a 5 to 10 percent concentration of hydrochloric acid wash. Thoroughly neutralize and flush acid from finished surfaces with water under pressure. Protect casting slab and adjacent panels from acid wash. 3.8 FACE -DOWN FINISHES A. Smooth, As -Cast Finish: Cast panel to produce a surface free of pockets, sand streaks, and honeycombs. Produce a surface appearance of uniform color and texture. Bushhammer Exposed -Aggregate Finish: Allow concrete to cure at least 14 days before starting bushhammer surface finish operations. Surface Continuity: Perform bushhammer finishing in as continuous an operation as possible, maintaining continuity of finish on each surface or area of Work. Maintain required patterns or variances of cut as shown on Drawings or to match mockup. 03471-12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TILT -UP CONCRETE PANELS 2. Surface Cut: Maintain required depth of cut and general aggregate exposure. Use power tool with bushhammer attachments for large, flat surfaces, and use hand hammers for small areas, at corners and edges, and for restricted locations where power tools cannot reach. C. Sand -Bed, Exposed -Aggregate Finish: Place selected exposed aggregate on a sand bed over casting slab before placing reinforcement, embedments, and concrete. After erecting panel, remove sand to expose aggregate. 3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures according to ACI 301. 1. Apply evaporation retarder in hot, dry, or windy weather to protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after screeding and bull floating concrete, but before float finishing. B. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure by one or a combination of the following methods according to ACI 308.1: Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for no fewer than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for no fewer than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.10 ERECTION A. Use erection equipment with care to prevent damage to floor slabs and panels. B. Lift, support, and erect panels only at designated lifting or supporting points indicated on Shop Drawings. C. Do not erect panels until 75 percent of 28-day compressive strength of concrete has been verified. 03471-13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TILT -UP CONCRETE PANELS D. Do not erect panels until verified compressive strength of concrete exceeds 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). E. Install tilt -up concrete panels level, plumb, square, and true. Place panels on leveled grout - setting pads or shims in correct position. Maintain joint width of 1/2 inch (13 mm) between panels. Install tilt -up concrete panels with face -down surfaces exposed to exterior of building. F. Temporarily brace and support panels securely in position against loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to panels are secured. Anchor panels in place and, if indicated, to one another. 1. Weld steel connectors to steel supports and embedments indicated, complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Solidly grout -fill gaps between foundation system and bottom of panels. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector and qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before erection of tilt -up panels. Testing Services: Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301. Tilt -up concrete panels will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.12 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install tilt -up concrete panels without exceeding the following erection tolerances: Joint Width Variation (Exterior Face): Without decreasing or increasing more than 50 percent from specified joint width. maintain joint width as follows: 03471-14 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TILT -UP CONCRETE PANELS a. For Panels up to 20 Feet (6.1 m) Tall: 1/4 inch (6 mm). b. Each Additional 10 Feet (3.05 m) in Excess of 20 Feet (6.1 m) Tall: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 2. Joint Taper: Maximum 3/8 inch (10 mm) over length, but not greater than the following: a. For Panels up to 20 Feet (6.1 m) Tall: 1/4 inch (6 mm). b. Each Additional 10 Feet (3.05 m) in Excess of 20 Feet (6.1 m) Tall: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. Panel Alignment: a. Alignment of Horizontal and Vertical Joints: 1/4 inch (6 mm). b. Offset in Exterior Face of Adjacent Panels: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3.13 FILLING AND REPAIRS A. Patch holes and voids left by erecting and bracing inserts on tilt -up panels and slabs -on -grade. Cut or chip edges of voids perpendicular to concrete surface. Fill blockouts where indicated. 1. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes, voids, and blockouts with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar of a stiff consistency before bonding agent has dried. 2. Finish surfaces of fills and repairs to Architect's approval, with materials of same colors and textures as finishes on surrounding surfaces. B. Repair damaged galvanized -steel surfaces of connectors by cleaning and applying a coat of zinc repair paint. C. Repair damage to tilt -up panels and slabs -on -grade resulting from tilt -up work, as directed by Architect. D. Remove and replace tilt -up panels that do not comply with requirements in this Section. E. Demolish and remove temporary concrete casting slabs. END OF SECTION 03471 03471-15 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pre -faced concrete masonry units. (split -faced) 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Steel reinforcing bars. 4. Masonry -joint reinforcement. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05500 Metal Fabrications for enerator enclosure gates as indicated. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315. Show elevations of reinforced walls. 3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end -dam units, and other special applications. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Pre -faced CMUs: Split -Face 04200-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 UNIT MASONRY 2. Colored mortar. D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Pre -faced CMUs. 2. Pigmented and colored -aggregate mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. 3. Accessories embedded in masonry. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. 1. Submittal is for information only. Receipt of list does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. Include data on material properties and material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing average net -area compressive strength of units. 2. Integral water repellent used in CMUs. 3. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type. 4. Mortar admixtures. 5. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 6. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 7. Reinforcing bars. 8. Joint reinforcement. D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C109/C109M for compressive strength, ASTM C1506 for water retention, and ASTM C91 /C91 M for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. 04200-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 UNIT MASONRY E. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net -area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net -area compressive strength of masonry determined according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. F. Cold -Weather and Hot -Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1093 for testing indicated. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture -resistant containers. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each days work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely in place. B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 04200-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 UNIT MASONRY 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold -weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. 1. Cold -Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. Hot -Weather Requirements: Comply with hot -weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net -area compressive strengths at 28 days. 1. Determine net -area compressive strength of masonry from average net -area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit -strength method) according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. Determine net -area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C1314. 2.3 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. 04200-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 UNIT MASONRY B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work and will be within 20 feet (6 m) vertically and horizontally of a walking surface. 2.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Split -faced CMUs: Lightweight hollow and solid concrete units complying with ASTM C90, with manufacturer's standard smooth resinous facing complying with ASTM C744. 1. Boral-Split face concrete masonry units. 2. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive strength of 2000 psi. 3. Size: Manufactured to dimensions specified in "CMUs" Paragraph but with split -faced surfaces having 1/16-inch- (1.5-mm-) wide returns of facing to create 1/4-inch- (6.5-mm-) wide mortar joints with modular coursing. 8" x 8" x 16" nominal and 8"x 8"x8" nominal. 4. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold - weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. C. Portland Cement -Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C1329/C1329M. E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C979/C979M. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. F. Colored Cement Products: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime or masonry cement and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients. 1. Colored Portland Cement -Lime Mix: 2. Colored Masonry Cement: 3. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 4. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 04200-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 UNIT MASONRY 5. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight. G. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. 3. Colored -Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C395, epoxy -resin -based material formulated for use as pointing mortar for split faced masonry units and approved for such use by manufacturer of units; in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's colors. J. Cold -Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C494/C494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar. Water -Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer. L. Water: Potable. 2.6 REINFORCEMENT Uncoated -Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M or ASTM A996/A996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch (3.77- mm) steel wire, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated. C. Masonry -Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A951 /A951 M. 1. Exterior Walls: [Hot -dip galvanized carbon or Stainless steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inch (4.76-mm) diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.187-inch (4.76-mm) diameter. 4. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. 5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units. Masonry -Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. 04200-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 UNIT MASONRY 2.7 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard -strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. "PROSOCO" Products for concrete masonry units. a. Use: per manufacturer's written instruction. b. Rinse: potable water per manufacturer's written instructions. 2.8 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement -lime, masonry cement, or mortar cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement -lime, masonry cement, or mortar cement mortar. 4. Add cold -weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For reinforced masonry, use Type S 2. For exterior, above -grade, and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type S. D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products. 1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight. 3. Mix to match Architects sample. 4. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units: a. Pre -faced CMUs. E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476. 04200-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 UNIT MASONRY 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi (14 MPa). 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL Thickness: Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor -driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and. where possible, cut edges concealed. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm). 3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total. 04200-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 UNIT MASONRY B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed -joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less -than -half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less -than -nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core. 04200-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 UNIT MASONRY Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING Lay hollow brick and CMUs as follows: 1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 3. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. Rake out mortar joints at pre -faced CMUs to a uniform depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) and point with epoxy mortar to comply with epoxy -mortar manufacturer's written instructions. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct -applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. Cut joints flush where indicated to receive waterproofing or cavity wall insulation barriers unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 MASONRY -JOINT REINFORCEMENT General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 04200-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 UNIT MASONRY 3.7 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other Toads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm) 12.67 ft. (3.86 m). 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level B in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5. 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site - prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site -prepared grout. C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof. E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C140 for compressive strength. F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C780. G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength. 04200-11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 UNIT MASONRY H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C1019. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C1314 at 7 days and at 28 days. 3.9 REPAIRING. POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. In -Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners: remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A. 3.10 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil - contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling. 04200-12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 UNIT MASONRY D. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04200 04200-13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. 2. Field -installed shear connectors. 3. Grout. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05310 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck. 2. Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel items not defined as structural steel. 3. Section 09911 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09912 "Interior Painting" and Section 09960 "High -Performance Coatings" for surface -preparation and priming requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. 05120-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural -steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip -critical, high -strength bolted connections. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: For structural -steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. B. Welding certificates. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. E. Product Test Reports: For the following: 1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct -tension indicators. 3. Tension -control, high -strength, bolt -nut -washer assemblies. 4. Shear stud connectors. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout. F. Survey of existing conditions. G. Source quality -control reports, including fabricator's certificate of compliance prepared for the building official per building code. 05120-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD and is currently approved by a special inspection agency per building code. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use shall not be used. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural -steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained. 05120-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 2.2 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M, Fy = 50 ksi. B. Channels, Angles, M , S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M. structural tubing. 1. Grade C: Square, and rectangular, Fy= 50 ksi. 2. Grade B: Round, Fy= 42 ksi Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B, Fy= 35 ksi. 1. Weight Class: Standard, unless noted otherwise. 2. Finish: Black except exterior galvanized. F. Steel Castings: ASTM A 216/A 216M. Grade WCB with supplementary requirement S11. G. Steel Forgings: ASTM A 668/A 668M. H. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct -Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible -washer type with plain finish. Zinc -Coated High -Strength Bolts. Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH (ASTM A 563M, Class 10S) heavy - hex carbon -steel nuts: and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers. 1. Finish: Hot -dip zinc coating. 2. Direct -Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible -washer type with mechanically deposited zinc coating, baked epoxy -coated finish. C. Tension -Control, High -Strength Bolt -Nut -Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy -hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts, and hardened carbon -steel washers. 05120-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating. D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed -stud type, cold -finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B. E. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Configuration: As indicated. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy -hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel where exposed to weather. 5. Finish: Interior: Plain. Exterior: Hot -dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. F. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy -hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Interior Plain, Exterior Hot -dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. G. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy -hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Finish: Interior: Plain. Exterior: Hot -dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. 2.4 PRIMER A. Insert proprietary primers if required as part of special coating or painting system. Coordinate primer selection with surface preparation and topcoats, requirements for slip -critical joints, and limitations of sprayed fire -resistive materials. Insert color if required. B. Primer: Comply with Section 09911 "Exterior Painting," Section 09912 "Interior Painting," and Section 09960 "High -Performance Coatings." As required. C. Primer in first "Primer" Paragraph below requires SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3 commercial blast - cleaning surface preparation or better and 24 hours' drying before recoating. Type II has lower VOC content than Type I. D. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate -free, nonasphaltic, rust -inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat, where compatibility with top -coat and painting systems is not required. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M. 05120-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 2.5 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory -packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360. 1. Identify high -strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 2. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. 3. Complete structural -steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop - priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Thermal cat bolt holes only if pre -approval by engineer of record. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. 2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Shop install high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: As indicated. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material. 2.8 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 05120-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high -strength bolted, slip -critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. 6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. 2.9 GALVANIZING A. Hot -Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot -dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 2. Galvanize exterior standard steel lintels. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural -steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop -bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop -welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 05120-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast -in - place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. Baseplates ,Bearing Plates, and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials. and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug -tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage -resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in 05120-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless preapproved by Engineer of Record. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Install high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Pretensioned. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where visible in completed work, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Verify structural -steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high -strength bolted connections. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 05120-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING C. Bolted Connections: Inspect bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709: performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field -welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less -than -continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 09911 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09912 "Interior Painting." C. Touchup Priming: Cleaning and touchup priming are specified in Section 09960 "High - Performance Coatings." END OF SECTION 05120 05120-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOIST FRAMING A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. B. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. K-series steel joists. 2. Joist accessories. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03300 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for installing bearing plates in concrete. 2. Section 05120 "Structural Steel Framing" for field -welded shear connectors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. SJI's "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders." B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders nonuniform, unequal, or special loading "Specifications." "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight requiring modification by manufacturer to support conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists. 2. Include joining and anchorage details; bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. 3. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction. 05210-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. B. Welding certificates. C. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation. Field quality -control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field -welding procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.7 DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Deliver steel bearing plates to be built into cast -in -place concrete construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads indicated. 1. Use ASD; data are given at service -load level. 2. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live -load deflections no greater than the following: 05210-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL JOIST FRAMING a. Floor Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span. b. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. 2.2 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specification for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel -angle top- and bottom -chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord. 1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists. B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel -angle or -channel members. C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists. D. Top -Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top -chord extensions where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications." E. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications." F. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications." G. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48). 2.3 PRIMERS A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15. 2.4 JOIST ACCESSORIES A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. B. Fabricate steel bearing plates from ASTM A 36/A 36M steel with integral anchorages of sizes and thicknesses indicated. Shop prime paint. C. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. D. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist assembly. 05210-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 2.5 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories by hand -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2. Do not prime paint joists and accessories to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials. C. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous. dry paint film not less than 1 mil (0.025 mm) thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line: securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications joist manufacturer's written instructions. and requirements in this Section. 1. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 2. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. 3. Delay rigidly connecting bottom -chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads are applied. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 05210-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL JOIST FRAMING B. Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. In addition to visual inspection, test field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165/E 165M. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709. c. Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Testing: ASTM E 94. C. Visually inspect bolted connections. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime -painted joists, bearing plates, abutting structural steel, and accessories. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand -tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 2 or power -tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 3. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as primer used on adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION 05210 05210-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL DECKING SECTION 05310 STEEL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof deck. 2. Composite floor deck. 3. Noncomposite form deck. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03300 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for normal -weight and lightweight structural concrete fill over steel deck. 2. Section 05120 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field -welded shear connectors. 3. Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes. 4. Section 09912 "Interior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting of deck. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck. 05310-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL DECKING C. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck, and for powder -actuated mechanical fasteners. from ICC- ES. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." B. FM Global Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM Global and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-xx windstorm ratings as indicated in Div 07 roofing section. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members." B. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.2 ROOF DECK A. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top -flange stiffening grooves, to comply with " ANSI/ SDI RD- 2010, Standard for Steel Roof Deck", and with the following: 1. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230) G90 (Z275) zinc coating. 2. Deck Profile: Wide rib, as indicated. 3. Profile Depth: As indicated. 4. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As indicated. 5. Span Condition: As indicated. 6. Side Laps: Overlapped. 05310-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL DECKING 2.3 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK A. Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "ANSI/SDI C 2011 Standard for Composite Steel Floor Deck -Slabs", with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Prime -Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230) minimum, with top surface phosphatized and unpainted and underside surface shop primed with manufacturers' standard gray or white baked -on, rust -inhibitive primer. 2. Profile Depth: As indicated. 3. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As indicated. 4. Span Condition: As indicated. 2.4 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK A. Noncomposite Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed -steel sheet noncomposite form -deck panels to comply with "ANSI/SDI NC-2010 Standard for Non -Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230) G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 2. Profile Depth: As indicated. 3. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As indicated. 4. Span Condition: As indicated. 5. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, low -velocity, powder -actuated or pneumatically driven carbon -steel fasteners; or self -drilling, self -threading screws. C. Side -Lap Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, hexagonal washer head; self -drilling, carbon -steel screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of same material and finish as deck, and of minimum thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 31 for overhang and slab depth unless otherwise indicated. 05310-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL DECKING G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated. H. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck. I. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, with factory -punched hole of 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter. J. Provide flat sump plates or recessed sump pans at Contractor's option unless otherwise indicated. 1. Flat Sump Plates: Single -piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field. 2. Recessed Sump Pans: Single -piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and finish as deck, with 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide flanges and level recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) minimum depth. For drains, cut holes in the field. K. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M, SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. L. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust -inhibitive primer of same color as primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable ANSI/SDI specifications and commentary, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations. C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side -lap interlocks. E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. 05310-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL DECKING F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 ROOF -DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten roof -deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long, and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds 12 inches (305 mm) apart in the field of roof and 6 inches (150 mm) apart in roof corners and perimeter, based on roof -area definitions in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28 unless otherwise indicated. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location where minimum uncoated steel thickness is less than 0.028 inch (0.71 mm). B. Side -Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of one-half of the span or 18 inches (457 mm), and as follows: 1. Mechanically fasten with self -drilling, No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger, carbon -steel screws. 2. Mechanically clinch or button punch. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum. D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and mechanically fasten flanges to top of deck. Space mechanical fasteners not more than 12 inches (305 mm) apart with at least one fastener at each corner. 1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld or mechanically fasten to structure. E. Miscellaneous Roof -Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 05310-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL DECKING Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof -deck panels unless otherwise indicated. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over non -fire rated partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure. 3.4 FLOOR -DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten floor -deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an average of 12 inches (305 mm) apart, but not more than 18 inches (457 mom) apart, unless otherwise indicated. Side -Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of one-half of the span or 36 inches (914 mm), and as follows: 1. Mechanically fasten with self -drilling, No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger, carbon -steel screws. 2. Mechanically clinch or button punch. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints, Composite Deck: butted. 2. End joints, form deck: Lapped. D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated. Floor -Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight -fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck. Install piercing hanger tabs at 14 inches (355 mm) apart in both directions, within 9 inches (228 mm) of walls at ends, and not more than 12 inches (305 mm) from walls at sides unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. 05310-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL DECKING 3.6 PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 05310 05310-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 05400 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior non -load -bearing wall framing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel shapes, masonry shelf angles, and connections used with cold -formed metal framing. 2. Section 09211 "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for interior non -load -bearing, metal -stud -framed, shaft -wall assemblies, with height limitations. 3. Section 09221 "Non -Structural Metal Framing" for standard, interior non -load -bearing, metal -stud framing, with height limitations and ceiling -suspension assemblies. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold -formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: For cold -formed steel framing. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Welding certificates. 05400-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING C. Product Certificates: For each type of code -compliance certification for studs and tracks. D. Evaluation Reports: For nonstandard cold -formed steel framing post -installed anchors and power -actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base -metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic -coating thickness. B. Code -Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide ICC-ES documentation that framing members are certified according to the requirements of the building code. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified Texas registered professional engineer to design cold - formed steel framing. B. Structural Performance: Provide cold -formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Non -Load -Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height. 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C). 4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows: a. Upward and downward movement of 1/2 inch (13 mm) per floor. 05400-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 5. Design exterior non -load -bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials. C. Cold -Formed Steel Framing Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, framing shall comply with AISI S100, AISI S200, and the following: as applicable 1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210. 2. Wall Studs: AISI S211. 3. Headers: AISI S212. 4. Lateral Design: AISI S213. 2.3 COLD -FORMED STEEL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating designation as follows: 1. Grade: ST33H (ST230H). 2. Coating: G90 (Z275) or equivalent. 2.4 EXTERIOR NON -LOAD -BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) ("16 ga."). 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).min. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm). 2. Flange Width: 2 inches (51 mm). Drill weep at exterior leg every 24" oc. 2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel -framing accessories from ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated steel sheet, of same grade and coating designation used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 05400-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 8. Joist hangers and end closures. 9. Hole -reinforcing plates. 10. Backer plates. 2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 threaded carbon -steel carbon -steel nuts, and flat, hardened -steel washers; zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. Post -Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with bolts with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. based on ICC-ES AC58 or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. 1. Uses: Securing cold -formed steel framing to structure. 2. Type: adhesive anchor. 3. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Material for Exterior or Interior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 2 (A4) stainless -steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). Power -Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513. corrosion -resistant -coated, self -drilling, self -tapping, steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low -profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M or SSPC-Paint 20. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Factory -packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, and with a fluid consistency and 30-minute working time. Shims: Load -bearing, high -density, multimonomer, nonleaching plastic; or cold -formed steel of same grade and metallic coating as framing members supported by shims. 05400-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed -cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members as required. 1. Provide under bottom track. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold -formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates where possible. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold -formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screws penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold -formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies by means that prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold -formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out -of - square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, conditions, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 05400-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install grout between the underside of load -bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. B. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install cold -formed steel framing according to AISI S200, AISI S202, and manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Install shop- or field -fabricated, cold -formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true -to -line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). C. Install cold -formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold -formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners, install according to Shop Drawings, and comply with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. D. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. E. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads equal to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold -formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. G. Install insulation, specified in Section 07210 'Thermal Insulation," in framing -assembly members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. H. Fasten hole -reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings. 05400-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 3.4 EXTERIOR NON -LOAD -BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom non -deflection track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as indicated: 1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches (406 mm). C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non -load -bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single deep -leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Channel Bridging: Cold -rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 18 inches (450 mm) of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges. 1. Install solid blocking as indicated. G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall - framing system. 1. Coordinate with existing steel framing. 3.5 JOIST INSTALLATION A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track. 1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 05400-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers, steel clip angles, or steel -stud sections. C. Space joists not more than 2 inches (51 mm) from abutting walls, and as follows: 1. Joist Spacing: 16 inches (406 mm). D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers, consisting of joist and joist track or another combination of connected joists if indicated. E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement. 1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above. F. Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as follows: 1. Joist -Track Solid Bridging: Joist -track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist webs. 2. Combination Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and joist -track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs. G. Secure joists to load -bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange. H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist -framing assembly. 3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install cold -formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. 05400-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold -formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold -formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05400 05400-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Slotted — channel Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 2. Elevator hoist beams. 3. Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills. 4. Metal ladders. 5. Elevator pit sump covers. 6. Rooftop equipment louver screen supports, and gate. 7. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted -channel inserts, and wedge -type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 2. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03300 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted -channel inserts, wedge -type inserts, and other items cast into concrete. 2. Section 05120 "Structural Steel Framing." 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. 05500-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL FABRICATIONS Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. Grout. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Slotted Channel Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 2. Elevator hoist beams. 3. Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills. 4. Metal ladders. 5. Metal bollards 6. Elevator pit sump covers. 7. Rooftop equipment louver screen supports and gate. 8. Loose bearing and levelling plates. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: For ladders and alternating tread devices, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Welding certificates. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post -installed anchors, from ICC-ES. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 05500-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold -formed steel tubing. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold -formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm). 2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.064-inch (1.6-mm) nominal thickness. 3. Material: Cold -rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230); 0.0528-inch (1.35-mm) minimum thickness; hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. F. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless -steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc -plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless -steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Stainless -Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head annealed stainless -steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 2 (A4). D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Hot -dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. 05500-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL FABRICATIONS Anchors. General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47 M malleable irons or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot -dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. Post -Installed Anchors: chemical anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941 M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 2 (A4) stainless -steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts. ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). Slotted -Channel Inserts: Cold -formed. hot -dip galvanized -steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee -head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc -plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09911 "Exterior Painting," Section 09912 Interior Painting," and Section 09960 "High -Performance Coatings." Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 03300 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for normal - weight, air -entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa). 05500-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL FABRICATIONS 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat -head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150- mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. 05500-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL FABRICATIONS B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous framing and supports. 2.6 METAL LADDERS A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, except for elevator pit ladders. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. B. Steel Ladders: 1. Space siderails 16 inches (406 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Space siderails 18 inches apart at metal ladder. 3. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch (9.5-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased edges. 4. Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bars. 5. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug -weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 6. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum -oxide granules set in epoxy -resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum -oxide grout. 7. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. 8. Galvanize and prime exterior ladders, including brackets. C. Aluminum Ladders: (Contractor Option): 1. Space siderails as indicated for steel ladders. 2. Siderails: Continuous extruded -aluminum channels or tubes, not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) deep, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick. 3. Rungs: Extruded -aluminum tubes, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep and not less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, with ribbed tread surfaces. 4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; fasten by welding or with stainless -steel fasteners or brackets and aluminum rivets. 5. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. with welded or bolted aluminum brackets. 2.7 ELEVATOR PIT SUMP COVERS A. Fabricate from welded or pressure -locked steel bar grating Limit openings in gratings to no more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in least dimension. B. Provide steel angle frame supports. 05500-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL FABRICATIONS 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. C. Galvanize and prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim. D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with primer specified in Section 09960 "High - Performance Coatings." 2.9 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with primers specified in Section 09912 "Interior Painting". C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 1. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 09960 "High -Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 05500-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL FABRICATIONS D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld. cut. or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in -place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. 05500-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL FABRICATIONS 3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches (75 mm) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 3.4 INSTALLING PIPE GUARDS A. Provide pipe guards at exposed vertical pipes where not protected by curbs or other barriers. Install by bolting to wall or column with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts at each pipe guard. Mount pipe guards with top edge 26 inches (660 mm) above driving surface. 3.5 INSTALLING NOSINGS, TREADS, AND THRESHOLDS A. Center nosings on tread widths unless otherwise indicated. B. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and level with tread surfaces. C. Seal thresholds exposed to exterior with elastomeric sealant complying with Section 07920 "Joint Sealants" to provide a watertight installation. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. END OF SECTION 05500 05500-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL PAN STAIRS SECTION 05511 METAL PAN STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Prefabricated steel stairs with concrete -filled formed -metal treads. 2. Railing gates at the level of exit discharge. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03300 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms. 2. Section 05521 "Steel Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe railings. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they do not encroach on required stair width and are within the fire -resistance -rated stair enclosure. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal pan stairs and the following: 1. Prefilled metal -pan -stair treads. 2. Abrasive nosings. 3. Paint products. 05511-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL PAN STAIRS B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of nosing and tread. D. Delegated -Design Submittal: For stairs and railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Welding certificates. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Delegated Design: Engage a Texas registered professional engineer, to design stairs and railings. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform Load: 100 Ibf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m). 2. Concentrated Load: 300 Ibf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm). 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), whichever is less. 2.2 METALS Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 05511-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL PAN STAIRS B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed), Grade B, Fy= 42 Ksi. D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. E. Uncoated, Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170), unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed. F. Uncoated, Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205), unless another grade is required by design loads. G. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating, structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230), unless another grade is required by design Toads. 2.3 ABRASIVE NOSINGS A. Extruded Units: Aluminum units with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy -resin binder. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Wooster Products, Inc. 2. Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above aluminum extrusion. 3. Nosings: Square -back units, 3 inches (75 mm) with Hp; Wooster Type 238/Type 138 or equal. B. Provide integral anchors for embedding units in concrete. Aggregate color: black. C. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units set into concrete. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide zinc -plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Stainless steel at exterior. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. 05511-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL PAN STAIRS 1. Provide hot -dip, zinc -coated anchor bolts for exterior stairs. D. Post -Installed Anchors: chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 2 (A4) stainless -steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09911 "Exterior Painting," Section 09912 "Interior Painting," and Section 09960 "High -Performance Coatings." Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc -coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. E. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 03300 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for normal -weight, air -entrained, ready -mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa) (5-sack minimum) unless otherwise indicated. F. Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm), W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 05511-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL PAN STAIRS C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. F. Weld connections to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 3 welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed. G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 2.7 STEEL -FRAMED STAIRS A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," Commercial Class, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels. a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers. 2. Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements. 3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces. 4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board shaft -wall assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. Locate hanger rods and struts where they do not encroach on required stair width and are within the fire - resistance -rated stair enclosure. 5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry. C. Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 0.067 inch (1.7 mm). 05511-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL PAN STAIRS 1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated hot -rolled steel sheet. 2. Steel Sheet: Galvanized -steel sheet; at exterior location. 3. Neatly attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting. 4. Shape metal pans with nosing integral with riser, to accept and form abrasive nosing inserts. 5. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing. a. Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with flat metal under surfaces to produce smooth soffits. 2.8 STAIR RAILINGS Comply with applicable requirements in Section 05521 "Steel Pipe and Tube Railings." 2.9 FINISHES A. Finish metal stairs after assembly. B. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Galvanize exterior stair assemblies. 2. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. 3. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with SSPC- SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1. "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLING METAL PAN STAIRS Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in -place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through -bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. 05511-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL PAN STAIRS B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. F. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article. G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 03300 "Cast -in - Place Concrete." 1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. Center nosings on tread width. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. END OF SECTION 05511 05511-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS SECTION 05521 STEEL PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel pipe railings. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Railing brackets. 2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 05521-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. C. Product Test Reports: For pipe and tube railings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: as applicable. 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified Texas registered professional engineer, to design railings, including attachment to building construction. B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: 05521-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS a. Concentrated load of 50 Ibf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). b. Infill Toad and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C, material surfaces). 2.2 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage and that provides 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface. 2.3 STEEL AND IRON A. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade B, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: 1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941 M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating. 2. Hot -Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless -steel or hot -dip zinc -coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Post -Installed Anchors: Chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 05521-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc -plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 2 (A4) stainless -steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). Includes Type 316 alloy. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 1. For railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09911 "Exterior Painting," Section 09912 "Interior Painting," and Section 09960 "High -Performance Coatings." Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc -coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.6 FABRICATION General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage[, but not less than that required to support structural loads]. Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. 05521-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. I. Form Changes in Direction as Follows: 1. By bending as detailed. J. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. K. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall -mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns. M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush - resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. N. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. O. Toe Boards: Where required, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open -sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated. 2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings: 1. Hot -dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 05521-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot -dip galvanized railings. 3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot -dip galvanized hardware. 4. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. 5. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. For galvanized railings, provide hot -dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves. and other ferrous components. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with SSPC- SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Shop prime interior railings to conform to Section 09912 "Interior Painting" unless indicated. 2. Shop prime exterior railings to conform to Section 09960 "High -Performance Coatings" unless indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements are clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 05521-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (6 mm in 3.5 m). C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. E. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in -place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS A. Core -drill holes not Tess than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout , mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B. Leave anchorage joint exposed with 1/8-inch (3-mm) buildup, sloped away from post. C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces. 3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to railing ends. B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing ends. C. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets[, except where end flanges are used. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled -in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 05521-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STEEL PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 4. For steel -framed partitions, use one of the following : a. Hanger or lag bolts set into fire -retardant -treated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 5. Self -tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to concealed steel reinforcements. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop -painted surfaces. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. 3.7 PROTECTION Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05521 05521-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes furnishing and installing wood furring, grounds, nailers and blocking. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Related Work of Other Sections: 1. Section 03300 — Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2. Section 04200 — Unit Masonry. 3. Section 05120 - Structural Steel Framing. 4. Section 05310 — Steel Decking. 5. Section 05400 — Cold -Formed Metal Framing. 6. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications. 7. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 8. Section 10114 - Visual Display Fabrics. 9. Section 10280 — Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories. 10. Division 16 Sections: Electrical, data, and telephone equipment and distribution. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. B. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation with- in and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. 06100-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DIMENSION LUMBER ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Provide lumber manufactured to comply with DOC PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certi- fied by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. Pro- vide dressed lumber, S4S, air seasoned with maximum 19 percent maximum moisture content, "S-DRY", 2-inch (50 mm) or less in nominal thickness. Provide graded and grade -marked lumber as follows, complying with the association grading rules, under whose rules the material was produced. In the event Con- tractor wishes to use lumber of other species or grades, submit pertinent data for City's approval prior to placing orders. 1. Blocking, Furring, Rough Lumber, Joists, Rafters, Headers Beams and Other Horizontal Framing, Not Otherwise Specified: Douglas Fir - Larch No. 2 (WWPA) or Southern Pine No. 2 (SPIB). 2. Concealed Board Lumber: Southern Pine No. 3 (SPIB), any species No. 4 (WCLIB) or any species "Standard" (WWPA). 3. Exposed lumber for fencing: No. 1 Treated Southern Pine (SPIB) 4. Preservative treat as specified roof curbs and cants; all nailers, blocking, and plates in contact with concrete or masonry; roof edges; wood framing members less than 18" above grade, structural support for decks, fencing; and other items indicated. 5. Fire retardant treat all interior blocking and nailers concealed in construc- tion and for use as IT/DATA mounting panels. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Provide plywood panels complying with DOC PS1 "US Product Standard for Con- struction and Industrial Plywood" and mat formed or composite panels complying with DOC PS2 "Performance Standards for Wood -based Structural -Use Panels". Factory -mark each panel with APA trademark indicating compliance with grade requirements. Provide the following: Plywood Wall Sheathing: APA RATED SHEATHING, EXTERIOR or EXPOSURE 1, 32/16, minimum 1/2" thick. veneer plywood only. Plywood IT/DATA Mounting Sheets: APA; B-C grade, ' inch thick fire rated panels 2.03 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (Lumber) and AWPA C9 (ply- wood). Provide treatment after members are shaped with waterborne chromated copper arsenate (CCA), ammonical copper quat-B (ACQ-B), alkaline copper quat-D (ACQ-D), or copper azole (CA-B) preservative oil borne pentachlorophenol (Penta) preservative by vacuum pressure full -cell process in accordance with AWPA Standard Specification P-5 P-8/P-9and as follows: 06100-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1. Above Ground Use Waterborne Dry Salt Retention: 0.25 lb./cu. ft. 2. Kiln dry members after treatment to 15% MC. Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 3. Re -grade and re -stamp lumber after kiln drying in accordance with lumber producer's grading rules. 2.04 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT A. Comply with AWPA Standards C20 (Lumber) and C27 (Plywood). Provide materials with a flame spread not exceeding 25 (ASTM E 84). Identify "fire retardant treated wood" with appropriate UL classification marking or other testing and inspection agen- cy marking acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Interior Exposure Treatment Process: Hickson Corporation "Dricon", Os- mose "Flameproof LHC-HTT". 2. Kiln dry after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15% for plywood, 19% for lumber. 3. Do not use twisted, warped, bowed or otherwise defective wood. 4. Schedule of Locations: Except as otherwise indicated, provide fire retard- ant treated work for interior miscellaneous framing and blocking. 2.05 FASTENERS A. Fasteners and Anchors: Provide size and type suited to application shown. 1. Nails: ASTM F 1667. Staples are not an acceptable substitute. 2. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307 (Grade A; ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6), with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and flat washers. 3. Fasteners Exposed to Exterior/Moisture: For nails, washers, nuts, and bolts cast Into concrete, or permanent exposure to weather, or high hu- midity, or ground contact, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153, or of AISI Type 304 stainless steel. Use stainless steel screws on exterior fencing. 4. Power Driven Nails: CABO NER-272. 5. Mechanical Fasteners (Insulating Sheathing Panel to Steel Deck Sys- tems): Corrosion -resistant coated, self -drilling, self -threading steel drill screws with low profile head below sheathing and manufacturer's stand- ard head elsewhere, and complying with Code: Atlas Roofing "Atlas Nail Base Fastener", or equivalent recommended in writing by the manufac- turer of the roof insulating sheathing. Provide fastener length sufficient to penetrate steel roof deck by not less than 3/4" (Minimum 3 full screw threads excluding tapered threads at tip). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Set rough carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted. 06100-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by the Nailing Schedule requirements of local codes of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed or covered with finish materials. Make tight connections between mem- bers. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre -drilled wood mem- bers as required. 3. Do not use materials with defects that might impair quality of rough car- pentry or pieces that are too small to use with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. 4. Use hot -dip galvanized nails for all exterior work. B. Plywood: Follow applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E30L, "APA Design/Construction Guide -Residential & Commercial", for plywood product types and applications shown. C. As a minimum, space screw fasteners at 6" o. c. along panel edges supported by framing and roof deck, and space 12" o.c. along intermediate framing or deck (maximum 16" row spacing) within panels, to comply with APA T625 "Wood Structural Panels Over Metal Framing". END OF SECTION 06100 06100-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY SECTION 06105 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Wood furring and grounds. 3. Plywood backing panels. 4. Section 06100 Rough Carpentry "Sheathing." 5. Section 06411 "Plastic -Laminate -Faced Architectural Cabinets" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 06105-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 2. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: Preservative -treated wood. Fire -retardant -treated wood. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. Deliver interior wood materials that are to be exposed to view only after building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work other than painting is dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy levels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules -writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground or roof and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX); Use category UC3B for exterior construction not in contact with ground: and use caterogy UC4a for items in contact. 06105-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat Presenative - items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Provide products with a flame -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84. 3. Use Exterior type for all locations. 4. Kiln dry to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. B. Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry. C. Application: Fire -treat all miscellaneous carpentry, except these items required to be preservative -treated, and the following: 1. Concealed framing and blocking. 2. Root framing and blocking, including woodcants, nailers, curbs and similar members 3. Plywood backing panels. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. 4. Grounds. 06105-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide No. 2 or better grade lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of any species. C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. Spruce -pine -fir (south) or spruce -pine -fir, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. For concealed boards. provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade or better; SPIB. 2. Spruce -pine -fir (south) or spruce -pine -fir, No. 2 grade or better; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent -over nails and damage to paneling. 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, B-C Plugged, fire -retardant treated, not less than %-inch nominal thickness. 1. Provide two coats of intumescent paint. 2. Leave at least one grade and treatment stamp conspicuously exposed. 2.6 FASTENERS General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact. pressure -preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 Stainless Steel. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES- AC70, including NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: 06105-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY E. Screws for Fastening to Cold -Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. H. Material (Interior exposure): Carbon -steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. a. Manufacturer: Basis -of- Design; "HILTI." I. Material (Exterior exposure): Stainless steel with bolt and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, alloy group I (Type 304). Except provide alley group Z ( Type 316) within 5 miles of an ocean. J. Post -Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction based on the following as appropriate for the substrates: 1. ICC-ES AC01, for mechanical anchors in masonry. 2. ICC-ES AC58, for mechanical anchors in concrete 3. ICC-ES AC193, for chemical/adhesive anchors in masonry. 4. ICC-ES AC308, for chemical/adhesive anchors in concrete. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 06105-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. Where wood- preservative —treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator — between wood and metal deck. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power -driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. Use steel common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure -preservative -treated, key -beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. Furring to Receive Plywood: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-63-mm actual-) size furring vertically at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. Fire block. 06105-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron -treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA -registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label. END OF SECTION 06105 06105-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY SECTION 06202 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Finish Carpentry at the following: 1. Wood shelving and cabinets. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards", 6th Edition, Ver. 1.1, 1994, except comply with more stringent requirements specified. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings showing location of each item, elevations, and large scale details, indicating related work and complete method of connections, jointing, support, anchorage, reinforcement, material types (including wood species, cut, high pressure decorative laminate grade, finish and color), hardware, and finishes. Show and note field dimensions requiring field measurement for verification and coordination with related work. Submit samples of plastic laminate, each type of hardware, transparent finished lumber and panel products, veneer leaves, and opaque finished wood. B. Environmental Submittals: 1. Certification of compliance with the environmental performance requirements specified. 2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for adhesive and coatings. 3. Energy performance data. 4. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: Arrange for work of this Section to be performed by a firm with not Tess than 3 years successful experience in fabrication and finishing of woodwork similar to required work. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. 06202-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY C. Mockups for typical plastic -laminate cabinets. D. Environmental Requirements: 1 Provide wood products for which all solid and veneer wood material originates from a sustainably managed forest certified by a Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) accredited certification agency. 2. Adhere wood veneer or plastic laminate to substrate using adhesive that complies with low-VOC (volatile organic compound) requirements defined in Table B in Division 1 "Environmental Impact of Materials" Section. 1.5 WOOD CABINETS A. Grade: Premium. B. Type of Construction: Frameless. C. Cabinet and Door and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Post -formed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. Cabinet Interior: Thermoset decorative panels. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing. blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 06202-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Wood Materials, General: Quality grade, wood specie, cut and match required are specified for each category of architectural woodwork item. Unless otherwise specified, provide lumber and panel products of the grades required by the referenced "Quality Standard" for each quality grade for each woodwork item specified. Where optional materials are indicated within each "Quality Standard" grade, choice is left to fabricator, unless otherwise specified. 1. Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI referenced "Quality Standard" for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards, that apply to product characteristics indicated. a. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. b. High Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3. c. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS-1, EXTERIOR Grade A/B, unless otherwise shown. d. Formaldehyde Emissions: Comply with formaldehyde emission requirements of the following: 1) Hardwood Plywood: HPMA FE. B. Provide matching 0.030" thick PVC edge banding equivalent to material produced by Flexible Materials, Incexcept where solid wood edging is shown. C. Composite Wood Materials: Urea -formaldehyde free. D. Adhesives: Low VOC. E. Fire -Retardant -Treated Materials: All interior lumber and plywood. F. Wood Shelving: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Wood Species and Cut: White birch, plain sawn or sliced. G. High Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD3 for each exposure and grade required. 06202-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 1. Cabinet Exposed and Semi -Exposed Laminate (Except EMS): WilsonArt "color to be selected by architect". 2. Countertop Exposed Laminate (Except EMS): WilsonArt "color to be selected by architect". 3. Cabinet Shelf Laminate (Concealed Behind Doors, Except EMS): WilsonArt "color to be selected by architect". 4. EMS Cabinets: Pionite SW811 "white" 5. Bonding Adhesive: Aliphatic resin glue. WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from materials extracted and manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. 3. FSC-certified wood. 4. Type of Construction: Frameless. 5. Cabinet and Door and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay. 6. Wood for Exposed Surfaces - WD1: a. Species: Maple. b. Cut: As scheduled. 7. Veneer Matching: Book match veneer leaves and running match within panel face. a. Cabinet veneers in each space from a single flitch. b. Blueprint match with paneling. 8. Cabinet Interior: Compatible species stained to match exterior 9. SHOP FINISHING a. Retain first "Grade" Subparagraph below or retain and revise second "Grade" Subparagraph below to suit Project. b. Grade: Premium for transparent finish. c. Extent: All cabinets shop finished. Cabinet Hardware and Miscellaneous Item Schedule: 1. Cabinet Shelf Support Pins: KV 331 ANO or PG306-nk, or equivalent accepted by City. 2. Concealed Self -Closing Cabinet Hinges: Hafele Salice Series 200 110 deg opening with matching mounting plate or equivalent accepted by City. Provide 1-1/2 pr. for heights up to 32 inches, and 2 pair for doors more than 32 inches, or door weights of 40 to 60 Ib. 3. Door/Drawer Pulls: Hafele silver colored anodized aluminum handles no. 116.05.922 or equivalent accepted by City. 4. Cabinet Catches (Where Shown): KV 916 aluminum, or equivalent accepted by City. 5. Full Extension Drawer Slides (100 Ib. Capacity For Drawers Up to 24" Wide): Grant 5632, Accuride 3832, or equivalent accepted by City. 6. Full Extension Heavy Load Drawer Slides (150 Ib. Capacity For Drawers Up to 30" Wide): Accuride 4034, or equivalent accepted by City. 7. Ball Bearing, Rail Mount, Full Extension, Heavy Duty Drawer Slides (200 Ib. Capacity For Drawers Up to 42" Wide): Accuride 3640, or equivalent accepted by City. 8. Ball Bearing, Rail Mount, Full Extension Pencil Drawer Slides: Accuride 2632, or 2006, or equivalent accepted by City. 9. Ball Bearing. Rail Mount, Full Extension Keyboard Drawer Slides: Accuride 2632, or 2009, or equivalent accepted by City. 06202-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 10. Closet Rods (Where Shown): KV-2, or equivalent accepted by City. 11. Cupboard Door and Drawer Locks: Yale 5591 x US 26D x 6 pin tumbler keyed alike in each shift area (4 shifts), or equivalent accepted by City. 12. Wardrobe Door Lock: Yale 511 x US 26D x 6 pin tumbler keyed alike in each shift area (4 shifts) and at each EMS cabinet, or equivalent accepted by City. 13. Elbow Catches (Inactive Leaf of Locked Pairs of Doors): Ives 2A92 aluminum, or equivalent accepted by City. 14. Countertop Grommets: Doug Mockett & Company, Inc. "BG Series", black plastic, or equivalent accepted by City. 15. Robe Hook: Stanley No. CD80-4025 x US 3 bright brass finish. J. Standing and Running Trim and Rails: Comply with AWI Section 300 for standing and running trim door casings, fascias, cornice, soffits, window casings, stools, aprons, guardrails, handrails, crown moldings, chair rails, base and shoe moldings, and coat hooks on boards. 1. Interior Trim for Opaque Finish: "Custom Grade"; Eastern White Pine, Sugar Pine, Idaho White Pine, Clear Heart Redwood, or Ponderosa Pine. 2. Architectural Cabinets, Laminate Clad: Comply with AWI Section 400 and Division 400B, and AWI "Architectural Casework - General". 3. Laminate Clad Cabinets: "Custom Grade"; flush overlay construction, with any close - grained hardwood listed in the referenced "Quality Standard" for the quality grade specified. 4. Panel product for exposed panel product parts with high pressure decorative laminate shall be softwood veneer core plywood, or meranti veneer core plywood (EMS Cabinets) listed in the referenced "Quality Standard" for the quality grade specified, except shelves spanning more than 12" shall be veneer or meranti plywood (EMS Cabinets) only. Provide 8 adjustable shelves at EMS cabinets. 5. Panel product for semi -exposed panel parts shall be veneer or meranti plywood (EMS Cabinets). Provide panel color as specified. Provide 1 mm PVC edge banding, matching panel face, at all edges exposed to view, except provide solid white oak edging at EMS cabinets. 6. Laminate for Exposed Surfaces and Edges: GP-50 grade. 7. Laminate for Semi -Exposed Surfaces and Edges: GP-28 grade. K. Architectural Cabinet Tops: Comply with AWI Section 400 and Division 400C, and AWI "Architectural Casework - General". Provide the following: 1. Laminate Clad Tops: "Custom Grade"; with PF-42 grade laminate at exposed surfaces and edges, BK-50 grade backer sheet at underside of veneer or meranti plywood (EMS Cabinets). 2. Laminate core to rails, except provide glued -under -pressure lumber drop edge with dado and rabbet continuous lock joint wherever unsupported area of top exceeds 4 sq. ft. Use maximum length laminate with a minimum number of joints. Install laminate on edge first and then on surface. Uniformly bevel edges 15° from edge surface. L. Closet and Utility Shelving: Comply with AWI Section 600. Provide the following: 1. Shelving for Opaque Finish: "Economy Grade"; Ponderosa Pine or Poplar lumber, or Birch faced veneer core plywood shelving. Where indicated, provide glued -under - pressure lumber drop edge with dado and rabbet continuous lock joint. 06202-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY M. Shop and Field Finishing of Interior Architectural Woodwork: Comply with AWI Section 1500; shop (factory) finish to greatest extent possible. Seal concealed surfaces with same finish used on exposed faces. Stain exposed and semi -exposed sapwood to match heartwood. Provide the following: Catalyzed Opaque Vinyl & CAB Acrylic Lacquer Finish for Open and Closed Grain Woods: Premium Grade, AWI Finish System OP-2 consisting of Sherwin-Williams D70T1 Natural Filler, a catalyzed Sherwin-Williams "Sher -Wood 24% Solids Vinyl Sealer" T67F3, sanding with 220 - 280 grit stearated paper, and two top coats of catalyzed Sherwin-Williams "Sher -Wood CAB -Acrylic Lacquer" T75F17 for medium rubbed effect. Provide three coats of Tung oil finish at oak edging. 2.2 FABRICATION Comply with AWI "Quality Standards" for lumber moisture content at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in the installation areas. Complete fabrication, assembly, finish hardware application, and other work before shipment to the Project Site to maximum extent possible. Allow for scribing and fitting. Pre-cut openings for related work. Take field measurements for work required to be fitted to other construction. Edge band shelf edges, cabinet door edges and exposed cabinet edges with 3/8 inch hardwood, except where greater depth is required to secure hardware. Use full length pieces only. Edge band shelf edges, cabinet door edges and exposed cabinet edges with 1 mm PVC edge banding, except at EMS cabinets provide solid white oak edging. Use full length pieces only. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with maximum manufactured sizes. Make corners and joints hairline. Locate counter butt joint minimum 2 feet from sink cut- outs. Apply plastic laminate face sheets after application of plastic laminate to edges. Bevel edges 15° from edge surface G. Cap exposed plastic laminate edges with material of same finish and pattern. Mechanically fasten splashbacks to countertops with steel brackets at 16" o.c. unless shown or noted otherwise. Apply laminate backing sheet to concealed side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. 06202-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 1. Pre -Installation Meeting: Meet at the Project Site prior to delivery of architectural woodwork and review coordination and environmental controls required for proper installation and ambient conditioning in areas to receive work. 2. Include in meeting the Contractor and City Representatives (if any), Installers of architectural woodwork, wet work including plastering, other finishes, painting, mechanical work and electrical work, and firms and persons responsible for continued operation (whether temporary or permanent) of HVAC system as required to maintain temperature and humidity conditions. B. Proceed with woodwork installation only when everyone concerned agrees that required ambient conditions can be maintained. 3.2 EXECUTION A. Install the work rigid, plumb, level and true with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8'-0" for plumb and level, and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. B. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work leaving gap of 1/32 inch to adjacent surfaces. Repair or replace damaged finish at cuts. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. C. Where field cutting or trimming is necessary, perform Work in a neat, accurate, professional manner without damaging woodwork and adjacent Work. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. E. For exposed nailing of solid wood, use fine finishing nails, countersunk, with heads filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. Conceal screw fasteners with solid plugs of species to match surrounding wood, grain and color. Finish flush with surrounding surfaces. F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns, miter at corners, and comply with Quality Standards for joinery. G. Cabinets: Install with concealed fasteners, without distortion, so that doors and drawers will fit openings properly, and be accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. H. Tops: Anchor securely to base units with concealed fasteners and other support systems as indicated. Join countertop cores with a minimum of 4 wood biscuits arranged to provide flush, tight joints. 06202-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Repair damaged and defective woodwork and finishes; where possible eliminate functional and visual defects; where repair is not possible, replace item. END OF SECTION 06202 06202-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS SECTION 06411 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic -laminate -faced architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic -laminate -faced architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets that are concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 2. Section 12362 "Plastic -Laminate -Clad Countertops." 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to support Toads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Section 08710 "Door Hardware" to fabricator of architectural cabinets; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical -treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: For plastic -laminate -faced architectural cabinets. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 06411-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 2. Show large-scale details. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic -laminate architectural cabinets. 5. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's or fabricator's standard size. 1. Plastic Laminates: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required. a. Provide one sample applied to core material with specified edge material applied to one edge. 2. Thermoset Decorative Panels: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm), for each color, pattern, and surface finish. a. Provide edge banding on one edge. 3. Exposed Cabinet Hardware and Accessories: One full-size unit for each type and finish. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1. Composite wood and agrifiber products. 2. Thermoset decorative panels. 3. High-pressure decorative laminate. 4. Glass. 5. Adhesives. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. 1. Shop Certification: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant. B. Installer Qualifications: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant. 06411-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet -work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide inspections of fabrication and installation together with labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. B. Grade: Custom. C. Type of Construction: Frameless. D. Door and Drawer -Front Style: Flush overlay. 06411-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS E. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard. F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS or Grade VGS. 4. Edges: Grade HGS. 5. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade CLS or Thermoset decorative panels. a. Edges of Plastic -Laminate Shelves: PVC tape, 0.018-inch (0.460-mm) minimum thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. b. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding. c. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic -laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid -hardwood lumber or Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge banding. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood or Thermoset decorative panels. H. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops. I. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic -Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL. J. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints. No nails are permitted. K. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. 06411-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLASTIC -LAM INATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Medium -Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. No added formaldehyde (NAF): Provide panels complying with California Air Resources Board (GARB) Phase 2 formaldehyde emissions standards. 3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 4. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or MDF finished with thermally fused, melamine -impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for Test Methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10. 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. Fire -Retardant -Treated Materials, General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire -test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. 1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire -retardant -treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 3. Identify fire -retardant -treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Kiln -dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. 2. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire - test -response characteristics, using a woodworking shop certified by testing and inspecting agency. C. Fire -Retardant Fiberboard: MDF panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire -retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame -spread index of 75 or less and smoke -developed index of 450 or less per ASTM E 84. 1. Roseburg Forest Products, Arreis, Grade 130 2. Arauco Trupan, Grade 130 3. Georgia-Pacific, Ultrastock, Grade 130 06411-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 08710 "Door Hardware." B. Back of house door and drawer pulls: 1. Acceptable products: a. Epco, Inc., #MC-402/2-4 b. Sugatsune America, Inc., #SST-30M, c. Stanley Works #4484, 4" long. 2. Type: 4" long wire pull, US26D finish. C. Front of house door and drawer pulls: 1. Acceptable products: Doug Mockett, DP 105 Series, DP105A/3, satin stainless steel (SSS) finish. D. Magnetic catches: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Basis of design: Stanley Works #SP41. b. Epco, Inc. c. Sugatsune America, Inc. 2. Finish: US26D satin chrome finish. E. Concealed hinges: BHMA Grade 1 equivalent 1. Basis of Design: a. Grass America, Inc., Institutional hinges, with third screw and adjusting at tabs. b. Julius Blum, Inc., #71.6500 Series. c. Sugatsune America, Inc., #H160-C. 2. Type: 180 degree opening, self -closing. F. Closet shelf and rod brackets: 1. Acceptable products: a. Knape and Vogt Mfg. Co., #1195. b. Stanley Works, #7046. c. Johnson Hardware, Inc., #9003. 06411-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLASTIC -LAM INATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 2. Provide one for each two feet or portion thereof, minimum two per shelf. G. Heavy-duty shelf standards and supports: (shelves only): 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Basis of design: Knape and Vogt Mfg. Co., #87 #186/187 Heavy -Duty Brackets. b. c. d. e. Stanley Works. Johnson Hardware, Inc. Sugatsune America, Inc. Hafele America Co. 2. Type: Steel, heavy-duty applications. 3. Finish: Finish as selected by Architect. H. Side mount drawer slides: BHMA-Grade 1 equivalent 1. Acceptable products: a. Basis of design: Accuride, #3832 b. Grant Hardware Co., #5632 J. c. Knape and Vogt Mfg. Co., #1429 2. Type: Full extension, steel ball bearing. 3. Capacity: 100 Ib. capacity; typical. 4. Capacity: 200 Ib., file drawers. Cabinet drawer/door lock: - 5-disc-tumbler, removable care. 1. Acceptable products: a. Knape and Vogt Mfg. Co., #986. b. Sugatsune America, Inc., #3310 Heavy -Duty Standard with c. Timberline Supply, Ltd., Style CB-230 deadlock and Type 230 cylinder body with lock plug. 2. Finish: Nickel -plated. Invisible latch: 1. Acceptable product: Ives Architectural Hardware, CL11 Invisible Latch with CL14 Auxiliary Pusher. 06411-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 2. Finish: US26D satin chrome finish. K. Wire management grommet for back of house locations: 1. Acceptable products: a. Outwater Plastics, Inc., #31-2". b. Sugatsune America, Inc., #V60-B. c. Hafele America, Inc. 2. Provide set including grommet, grommet cap and slot cover; color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard selection. L. Wire management grommet for front of house locations: 1. Acceptable products: Doug Mockett, MG3 and MG3A, satin stainless steel (SSS) finish. M. Trash/towel grommet: Doug Mockett, TM2B, satin stainless steel (SSS) finish. N. Push/Pulls: Level 1 Concealed Doors; Satin Stainless Steel. 1. Rockwood, MezzoTek; 72". 2. Rockwood, NeoMax; 72" O. Fasteners: Provide bolts, nails, screws, toggle bolts and similar fasteners as indicated or required to attach and secure work. 1. Fasteners for trim shall be finishing nails for attachment to wood framing, trim -head screws for attachment to metal framing. 2. Material and finish for non -pressure treated and fire -retardant -treated components shall be G90 hot dip galvanized steel or Type 304 stainless steel, except nails shall be hot dip galvanized. 3. Material and finish for pressure -treated components shall be G185 hot -dip galvanized steel or Type 304L stainless steel. Adhesives, general: 1. Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde. 2. Adhesives used in cabinets installed adjacent to slide -in ranges or wallovens, or similar equipment must have a temperature rating of at least 194 degrees. Q. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. R. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011. S. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Dark, Oxidized, Satin Bronze, Oil Rubbed: BHMA 613 for bronze base; BHMA 640 for steel base; match Architect's sample. 06411-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLASTIC -LAM INATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 2. Bright Brass, Clear Coated: BHMA 605 for brass base; BHMA 632 for steel base. 3. Bright Brass, Vacuum Coated: BHMA 723 for brass base; BHMA 729 for zinc -coated - steel base. 4. Satin Brass, Blackened, Bright Relieved, Clear Coated: BHMA 610 for brass base; BHMA 636 for steel base. 5. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. 6. Bright Chromium Plated: BHMA 625 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 651 for steel base. 7. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire -retardant -treated softwood lumber, kiln -dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post -installed anchors. Use nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement Resorcinol. D. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot -melt adhesive[ or adhesive specified above for faces]. E. VOC Limits for Adhesives: Installation adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart (EPA Method 24): F. Wood glues: 30 g/L G. Multipurpose construction adhesives: 70 g/L H. Contact adhesive: 80 g/L 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate architectural cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. C. Shop -cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 06411-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLASTIC -LAM INATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours. 3.2 INSTALLATION Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer -head cabinet installation screws. D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm)using concealed shims. 1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. 2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer -head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) penetration into wood or metal framing, blocking, or hanging strips. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace architectural cabinets. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 06411 06411-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING SECTION 07161 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes crystalline waterproofing. 1. Elevator pit waterproofing. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS A. Crystalline Waterproofing: Prepackaged, gray or white -colored proprietary blend of portland cement, specially treated sand, and active chemicals that, when mixed with water and applied, penetrates into concrete and concrete unit masonry and reacts chemically with the byproducts of cement hydration in the presence of water to develop crystalline growth within substrate capillaries to produce an impervious, dense, waterproof substrate; with properties complying with or exceeding the criteria specified below. 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. ICS Penetrating Systems. b. Kryton International, Inc. c. Xypex Chemical Corp. 2. Basis of Design: Xypex Chemical Corp, as follows: a. Walls and floors: 1) First coat: Xypex Concentrate, brush -applied with a compound -to -water ratio of 5 parts powder to 2 parts water. 2) Second coat: Spray -applied, sponge -finished Xypex Concentrate compound mixed at ratio of 5 parts water to 3 parts water. b. Joints, coves and similar conditions: 1) Xypex Concentrate Slurry and Concentrate Dry-Pac formulations. 07161-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING c. Crack repair, honeycombs and similar concrete deficiencies: 1) First coat: Xypex Concentrate, as required for walls and floors. 2) Second coat: Xypex Patch 'n Plug mixed with Quickset liquid. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Water: Potable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, application, curing and execution. B. Surface Preparation: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, mortar spatter, grease, oils, paint, curing compounds, and form -release agents to ensure that waterproofing bonds to surfaces. Remove loose and foreign material and projections. Fill holes, honeycombs and depressions with waterproofing patching material. Roughen and moisten surfaces, remove standing water. 1. Saturate concrete substrate and provide damp surface to accept waterproofing. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Adjust application process and materials to field conditions at joint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for 1) No water flow, 2) Water flow, or 3) High-pressure water flow. Waterproofing material shall be installed in thin lifts of slightly less than 0.0625 inches. Cracks, honeycombs and similar concrete deficiencies: Rout out larger cracks. Remove unbonded material from surface. 1. Comply with manufacturer's multiple step application process, including all required materials. Apply specified slurry -consistency mixture at the min. rate of 1.5 lb/sq. yd. to cracks, honeycombs s and similar conditions using trowel or putty knife to force mixture into joints. Then fill slot, crack, joint, cove or other depression with specified dry -packing material. Proceed with additional coats per manufacturer's instructions. D. Joints, coves and similar areas: Comply with manufacturer's multiple step application process, including all required materials. Apply specified slurry -consistency mixture at the min. rate of 1.5 lb/sq. yd. to joints, cracks, coves, control joints, construction joints and similar conditions using trowel or putty knife to force mixture into joints. Then fill slot, crack, joint, cove or other depression with specified dry -packing material. Proceed with additional coats per manufacturer's instructions. for walls and floors, extending these additional coats over joints, coves, etc. 07161-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 1. After completion of work for cracks, honeycombs, deficiencies, joints, coves and similar conditions, proceed with application for walls and floors, extending these additional coats over joints, coves, etc. E. Following repair of concrete deficiencies and treatment of cracks proceed with treatment for walls and floors, extending these additional coats over the treated cracks, honeycombs, joints, coves, etc. F. Two -coat application for walls and floors: G. 1. First coat: Mix powder and water in accord with specified requirements and manufacturer's product data. Brush -apply mixture using a semi -stiff short bristle brush at the rate of 1.5 Ibs/sq. yd. Work well into the surface; fill hairline cracks, surface pores and similar imperfections. 2. Second coat: Apply while first coat is still green, but after it has reached initial set. Mix powder and water in accord with specified requirements and manufacturer's product data. a. Lightly pre -water first coat if rapid drying conditions exist. b. Spray -apply second coat with nozzle held close enough to force sprayed slurry into hairline cracks, surface pores and similar imperfections. Apply at the min. rate of 1.5 lbs./sq. yd. c. Finish second coat with a sponge -float finish, applying additional material as necessary for a uniform surface appearance. 1 A misty fog spray of clean water must be used for curing the waterproof treatment. Curing should begin as soon as the material has set to the point where it will not be damaged by a fine spray of water. 2. Under normal conditions, it is sufficient to fog -spray treated surfaces three times per day for two to three days. In hot or arid climates, fog -spray more frequently to prevent premature drying of the coating. 3. Moist cure for a period of not less than three days. 4. During the curing period, the coating must be protected from rainfall, frost, wind, the puddling of water and temperatures below 36°F for a period of not less than 48 hours after application. If plastic sheeting is used as protection, it must be raised off the treatment to allow the coating to breathe. a. If required, cover treated concrete surfaces with moisture retaining covers placed in widest practical width, with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches. Seal all seams and penetrations with waterproof tape.Curing: Moist cure as follows: 5. For concrete structures intended to hold liquids (e.g. sump pits, swimming pools, reservoirs, wet wells, tanks, etc.), cure the waterproofing treatment for three days and then allow to set for 12 days before filling the structure with liquid. H. Final Coat Finish: Smooth, sponge float finish. 07161-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Completed waterproofing installation shall be free of leaks. END OF SECTION 07161 07161-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 07210 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass -fiber blanket. 2. Glass -fiber board. 3. Mineral -wool blanket. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07521 "SBS Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction. 2. Section 09290 "Gypsum Board" for sound attenuation blanket used as acoustic insulation. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS -FIBER BLANKET A. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass -fiber blanket insulation as follows: 1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde. 2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde. 07210-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 THERMAL INSULATION B. Glass -Fiber Blanket, Unfaced,: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame -spread and smoke - developed indexes of 25 and 50. respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 2.2 GLASS -FIBER BOARD A. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass -fiber board insulation as follows: 1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde. 2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde. B. Glass -Fiber Board, Unfaced,: ASTM C 612, Type IA; unfaced, with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84, passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft. , thermal resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F or other desnity as required to meet thermal requirements within spatila limitations. 2.3 MINERAL -WOOL BLANKETS A. Mineral -Wool Blanket, Unfaced,: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle -Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-locking washer in place. 1. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. 2. Spindle: Copper -coated, low -carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation. 3. Provide angle -shaped spindle anchors, prong anchors, welding pins, pointed rods, netting or other fasteners as necessary and suitable. Insulation -Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick galvanized - steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter. 1. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in the following, and similar locations subject to human contact: a. Crawl spaces. b. Ceiling plenums. c. Attic spaces. 07210-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 THERMAL INSULATION C. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild -steel sheet for fitting over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of 1 inch between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached, or as indicated. D. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates without damaging insulation, fasteners, or substrates. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210 07210-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 THERMAL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION SECTION 07215 THERMAL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Spray polyurethane foam insulation. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 09 Section 09290 "Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam -plastic insulation, from the ICC-ES. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface -Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. 07215-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 THERMAL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION Closed -Cell Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, with maximum flame -spread and smoke - developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. ICYNENE Insulation [Basis -of -Design] Minimum density of 2 lb/cu. ft. thermal resistivity of : R-VALUE ='s 7 per inch of thickness and permeability orating of 45ng. 3. Material Description: Spray -in -Place, environmentally safe, 2 part soya based polyurethane foam that emits NO VOC's and contains NO Formaldehyde, CFC's or Bleach and has NO harmful side effects. Materials shall NOT contain any air -borne fibers either in application processes or after it has cured in place]. Insulation shall NOT be a "food source" and shall NOT support bacteria or fungal/mold growth and shall be resistant to pests and rodents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation including removing projections capable of puncturing or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Spray around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. Provide depth of applications so as to fully fill air cavities between existing or new metal framing and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses. Apply spray foam insulation in uniform thickness throughout all cavities. Trim off excess insulation after it has fully expanded, as per the manufacturer's specifications flush with the interior side face of all metal studs. 07215-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 THERMAL SPRAY FOAM INSULATION E. Spray -Applied Insulation: Apply spray -applied insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF RADIANT BARRIERS A. Install interior radiation control coating system according to ASTM C 1321. B. Install sheet radiant barriers according to ASTM C 1158. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. 3.5 INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation Type: 1 Polyurethane spray foam insulation. END OF SECTION 07215 07215-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS SECTION 07421 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes metal composite material wall panels, extruded aluminum sub -support framing/flashings and fasteners for a weather tight exterior system and a smooth, even and plumb interior system. 1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 05120 Structural Steel Framing B. Section 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing C. Section 07215 Thermal Insulation D. Section 07920 Joint Sealants E. Section 09211 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's, metal composite material panel Installer, metal composite material panel manufacturer's representative, structural -support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal composite material panels, including installers, windows. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review methods and procedures related to metal composite material panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and attachment to structural members. 5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other construction that affect metal composite material panels. 07421-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections if applicable. 7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal composite material panel assembly during and after installation. 8. Review procedures for repair of panels damaged after installation. 9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory. Shop Drawings: 1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal composite material panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment assembly, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. 2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim and anchorage, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches (1:10). Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal composite material panel indicated with factory -applied color finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. Metal Composite Material Panels: 12 inches (305 mm) long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other metal composite material panel accessories. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each product, tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Field quality -control reports. D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Maintenance Data: For metal composite material panels to include in maintenance manuals. 07421-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical metal composite material panel assembly as shown on Drawings, including corner, soffits, supports, attachments, and accessories. 2. Water -Spray Test: Conduct water -spray test of mockup of metal composite material panel assembly, testing for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, metal composite material panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal composite material panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal composite material panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack metal composite material panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal composite material panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal composite material panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal composite material panels during installation. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal composite material panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate metal composite material panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 07421-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 1.12 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal composite material panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including rupturing. cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal composite material panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory -applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS; GENERAL: Fire — Rated 2 sided aluminum sheet composite panels for exterior and interior use. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide metal composite material panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 330: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads. no greater than 1/240 of the span. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test -pressure difference: 1. Test -Pressure Difference: 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at the following test -pressure difference: 1. Test -Pressure Difference: 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). 07421-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat Toss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. E. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.3 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS A. Metal Composite Material Wall Panel Systems: Provide factory -formed and -assembled, metal composite material wall panels fabricated from two metal facings that are bonded to a solid, extruded thermoplastic core; formed into profile for installation method indicated. Include attachment assembly components, panel stiffeners, and accessories required for weathertight system. 1 Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide: "Alucobond A2" a. 3A Composites USA, Inc.; Alucobond A2. b. Alcoa Inc.; Reynobond FR. c. CENTRIA Architectural Systems; Formabond Wall System. d. Citadel Architectural Products, Inc.; Envelope 2000 RS. B. Aluminum -Faced Composite Wall Panels: Formed with 0.020-inch- (0.50-mm-) thick, coil -coated aluminum sheet facings. 1. Panel Thickness: 4 mm. 2. Core: Fire retardant. 3. Exterior Finish: Three -coat fluoropolymer. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Attachment Assembly Components: Formed from extruded aluminum. D. Attachment Assembly: Manufacturer's standard Rainscreen system. 07421-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Miscellaneous Metal Sub -framing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold -formed, metallic -coated steel sheet ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275 hot -dip galvanized) coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) aluminum -zinc -alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal composite material panel system. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal composite material panels unless otherwise indicated. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal composite material panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal composite material panels. Panel Fasteners: Self -tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal composite material panels by means of plastic caps or factory -applied coating. Provide LIV Resistant PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners. Panel Sealants: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal composite material panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer. 2.5 FABRICATION General: Fabricate and finish metal composite material panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. Fabricate metal composite material panel joints with factory -installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal -to -metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat - lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 07421-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 4. Sealed Joints: Form non -expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards. 5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.6 FINISHES A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Aluminum Panels and Accessories: 1 Three -Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal composite material panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Examine wall framing to verify that gilts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal composite material wall panel manufacturer. 2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal composite material wall panel manufacturer. a. Verify that air- or water -resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. 07421-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS B. Examine roughing -in for components and assemblies penetrating metal composite material panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal composite material panels before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION Miscellaneous Supports: Install sub -framing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal composite material panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.3 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PANEL INSTALLATION General: Install metal composite material panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes. and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal composite material panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal composite material panels. 2. Flash and seal metal composite material panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self -tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water -resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal composite material panels are installed. 3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Install flashing and trim as metal composite material panel work proceeds. 6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four -panel lap splice condition. 7. Align bottoms of metal composite material panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self -tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self -tapping screws. 8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit -penetrating panels. Fasteners: Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use aluminum or galvanized -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer. Attachment Assembly, General: Install attachment assembly required to support metal composite material wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including sub-girts. perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels. Include attachment to supports, panel -to -panel joinery, panel -to -dissimilar -material joinery, and panel -system joint seals. 07421-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS E. Installation: Attach metal composite material wall panels to supports at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer to achieve performance requirements specified. 1. Exterior Wet Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal composite material wall panels with sealant backing and sealant. Install sealant backing and sealant according to requirements specified in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants." 2. Interior Dry Hairline System: Attach extruded aluminum, low profile supports to gypsum board partitions, as indicated, with flush hairline joints [without sealants] as indicated on the drawings. F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal composite material panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal composite material panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer. G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (605 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal composite material wall panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), non -accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated, and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field tests and inspections. B. Water -Spray Test: After installation, test area of assembly as directed by Architect for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2. 07421-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect completed metal composite material wall panel installation, including accessories. Metal composite material wall panels will be considered defective if they do not pass test and inspections. Additional tests and inspections. at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal composite material panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal composite material panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal composite material panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. After metal composite material panel installation. clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. C. Replace metal composite material panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07421 07421-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TORCH -APPLIED STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING SECTION 07521 TORCH -APPLIED STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS)-modified bituminous membrane roofing and roofing insulation. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07620 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1. ASCE 7-05, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM D41 Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Damp Proofing and Waterproofing. 2. ASTM D312 Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing. 3. ASTM D451 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Granular Mineral Surfacing for Asphalt Roofing Products. 4. ASTM D1079 Standard Terminology Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing and Bituminous Materials. 5. ASTM D1227 Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt used as a Protective Coating for Roofing. 6. ASTM D1863 Standard Specification for Mineral Aggregate used as a Protective Coating for Roofing. 7. ASTM D2178 Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt used as a Protective Coating for Roofing. 8. ASTM D2822 Standard Specification for Asphalt Roofing Cement. 9. ASTM D2824 Standard Specification for Aluminum -pigmented Asphalt Roof Coating. 10. ASTM D4601 Standard Specification for Asphalt Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet used in Roofing. 11. ASTM D5147 Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials. 12. ASTM D6162 Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials using a combination of Polyester and Glass Fiber Reinforcements. 13. ASTM D6163 Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials using Glass Fiber Reinforcements. 14. ASTM E108 Standard Test Methods for Fire Test of Roof Coverings. 07521-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TORCH -APPLIED STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING C. Factory Mutual Research (FM): 1. Roof Assembly Classifications. D. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): 1. Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. Fire Hazard Classifications. F. Warnock Hersey (WH): 1. Fire Hazard Classifications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS Product Data: Provide manufacturer's technical product data for each type of roofing product specified. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. B. Specimen Warranty: Provide an unexecuted copy of the warranty specified for this Project, identifying the terms and conditions required of the Manufacturer and the Owner. Thirty Year, Leak -Free Warranty. C. Any material submitted as equal to the specified material must be accompanied by a report signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state in which the installation is to take place. This report shall show that the submitted equal meets the Design and Performance criteria in this specification. Substitution requests submitted without licensed engineer approval will be rejected for non-conformance. Manufacturer's Shop Drawings depicting actual field condition and recommended details for installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions and recommendations indicating special precautions required for installing the membrane. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that roof system furnished is approved by Factory Mutual, Underwriters Laboratories, Warnock Hersey or approved third party testing facility in accordance with ASTM E108, Class A for external fire and meets local or nationally recognized building codes. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the roof system furnished is approved or accepted by Factory Mutual Approval Standard 4470. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that materials are manufactured in the United States and conform to requirements specified herein, are chemically and physically compatible with each other, and are suitable for inclusion within the total roof system specified herein. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Submit a certified copy of the roofing manufacturer's ISO 9001 compliance certificate. 07521-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TORCH -APPLIED STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING F. Test Reports: Submit test reports, prepared by an independent testing agency, for all modified bituminous sheet roofing, indicating compliance with ASTM D5147. G. Written certification from the roofing system manufacturer certifying the applicator is currently authorized for the installation of the specified roof system. H. Design Loads: Submit copy of manufacturer's minimum design load calculations according to ASCE 7-05, Method 2 for Components and Cladding, sealed by a registered professional engineer. In no case shall the design Toads be taken to be less than those detailed in Design and Performance Criteria article of this specification. I. Qualification data for firms and individuals identified in Quality Assurance Article below. 1.5 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with Requirements of Division 01 Section 01770 - Contract Closeout B. Special Project Warranty: Provide specified warranty for the Project, executed by the authorized agent of the Manufacturer. C. Roofing Maintenance Instructions. Provide a manual of manufacturer's recommendations for maintenance of installed roofing systems. D. Insurance Certification: Assist Owner in preparation and submittal of roof installation acceptance certification as may be necessary in connection with fire and extended coverage insurance on roofing and associated work. E. Demonstration and Training Schedule: Provide a schedule of proposed dates and times for instruction of Owner's personnel in the maintenance requirements for completed roofing work. Refer to Part 3 for additional requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with not less than 15 years documented experience and have ISO 9001 certification. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in modified bituminous roofing installation with not less than 5 years' experience and authorized by roofing system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's roofing materials. C. Installer's Field Supervision: Maintain a full-time Supervisor/Foreman on job site during all phases of roofing work while roofing work is in progress. Supervisor/Foremen must be fluid in the English language and maintain proper supervision of workmen. D. Maintain a copy of the Contract Documents in the possession of the Supervisor/Foreman and on the roof at all times. 07521-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TORCH -APPLIED STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING E. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of roof system from a single manufacturer. Secondary products that are required shall be recommended and approved in writing by the roofing system Manufacturer. 1. Upon request of the Owner, submit Manufacturer's written approval of secondary components in list form, signed by an authorized agent of the Manufacturer. Source Quality Control: Manufacturer shall have in place a documented, standardized quality control program such as ISO-9001. 1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Pre -installation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof -mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including set up and mobilization areas for stored material and work area. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 10. Review notification procedures for weather or non -working days. 1.8 MANUFACTURERS INSPECTIONS A. While the project is in progress, the roofing manufacturer will provide the following: 1. Report progress and quality of the work as observed. Reports shall contain photos and written documentation of work observed. 2. Provide job site inspections, minimum of three days per week, by a full time employee of the manufacturer. 3. Report to the owner and architect, in writing, any refusal or failure of the contractor to correct unacceptable practices called to the roofing contractor's attention. 4. Confirm after completion that the manufacturer has observed no application procedures in conflict with the specifications other than those that may have been previously reported and corrected. 07521-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TORCH -APPLIED STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit a unit of work to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements. B. Do not apply roofing insulation or membrane to damp deck surface. C. Do not expose materials subject to water or solar damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during same day 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installation of roofing with related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that roof assemblies, including roof accessories, flashing, trim and joint sealers, are protected against damage from effects of weather, corrosion and adjacent construction activity. B. Complete all roofing field assembly work each day. Phased construction will not be accepted. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Upon completion of installation, and acceptance by the Owner and Architect, the Manufacturer will supply to the Owner an "NDL" warranty, without monetary limitations in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Thirty (30) years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Installer's Warranty: Provide roofing installers warranty, to the membrane manufacturer, in which the roofing installer will, at his own expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.12 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Uniform Wind Uplift Load Capacity: 1. Installed roof system shall withstand negative (uplift) design wind loading pressures complying with the roof system manufacturer's current printed negative uplift calculations. Attachment shall be installed exactly as given in provided calculation by the manufacturer. a. Design Code: ASCE 7-05, Method 2 for Components and Cladding 1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. 07521-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TORCH -APPLIED STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.14 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS GENERAL A. Refer to Division 01 Section 01630 Product Options and Substitutions Basis of Design: Materials, manufacturer's product designations, and/or manufacturer's names specified herein shall be regarded as the minimum standard of quality required for work of this Section. Comply with all manufacturer and contractor/fabricator quality and performance criteria specified in Part 1. C. Substitutions: Products proposed as equal to the products specified in this Section shall be submitted in accordance with Bidding Requirements and Division 01 provisions. 1. Proposals shall be accompanied by a copy of the manufacturer's standard specification Section. That specification Section shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state in which the installation is to take place. Substitution requests containing specifications without licensed engineer certification shall be rejected for non- conformance. 2. Include a list of three (3) projects of similar type and extent, located within a fifty (50) mile radius from the location of the project. In addition, the three projects must be at least five (5) years old and be available for inspection by the Owner or Owner's Representative. 3. Equivalency of performance criteria, warranty terms, submittal procedures, and contractual terms will constitute the basis of acceptance. 4. The Owner's decision regarding substitutions will be considered final. Unauthorized substitutions will be rejected. 07521-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TORCH -APPLIED STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The Basis of Design is: 1. The Garland Company, Inc. or pre -approved equal B. Manufacturer's Representative - Blake Dieste: 1. bdieste@garlandind.com 2. (m) 832-488-4783 C. Modified bituminous roofing work including but not limited to: 1. Base Ply Sheet Modified Membrane: Type II membrane complying with ASTM 6163, Grade S. Physical requirements below. 2. Cap Ply Sheet Modified Membrane: Type III membrane complying with ASTM 6163, Grade G. Physical requirements below. 3. Stripping Ply Sheet Modified Membrane: Type II membrane complying with ASTM 6163, Grade S. Physical requirements below. 4. Base Flashing Assembly: Two ply hybrid modified/thermoplastic system, heat fused base ply meeting Type II membrane complying with ASTM 6163, Grade G minimum and finish ply meeting ASTM D 6754. 2.3 ROOFING SHEET MATERIALS A. Base Ply Sheet Modified Membrane: ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type II, 110 mil SBS-modified asphalt sheet; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: HPR Torchbase by The Garland Company, Inc. 1. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 210 Ibf/in XD 210 Ibf/in b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 36.75 kN/m XD 36.75 kN/m 2. Tear Strength, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 250 Ibf XD 250 Ibf b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 1112N XD 1112N 3. Elongation at Maximum Tensile, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 4.0% XD 4.0% b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 4.0% XD 4.0% 4. Low Temperature Flexibility, ASTM D5147, Passes -35 deg. F (-37 deg. C) B. Granule -Surfaced Roofing Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade G, Type III, 195 mil SBS-modified asphalt sheet with fiberglass and polyester composite scrim; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: Stressply IV Plus UV Mineral by The Garland Company, Inc. 1. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 310 Ibf/in XD 310 Ibf/in b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 54.25 kN/m XD 54.25 kN/m 2. Tear Strength, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 510 Ibf XD 510 Ibf b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 2269 N XD 2269 N 3. Elongation at Maximum Tensile, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 6% XD 6% b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 6% XD 6% 4. Low Temperature Flexibility, ASTM D 5147, Passes -40 deg. F (-40 deg. C) 5. Granule Color: White. 6. SRI: 90 07521-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TORCH -APPLIED STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 7. Thermal Emissivity: 0.89 8. Solar Reflectance: 0.73 2.4 BASE FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS A. Base Ply Sheet Modified Membrane: ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type II, 110 mil SBS-modified asphalt sheet; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: HPR Torchbase by The Garland Company, Inc. 1. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 210 Ibf/in XD 210 Ibf/in b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 36.75 kN/m XD 36.75 kN/m 2. Tear Strength, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. © 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 250 Ibf XD 250 Ibf b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 1112N XD 1112N 3. Elongation at Maximum Tensile, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. © 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 4.0% XD 4.0% b. 50 mm/min. © 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 4.0% XD 4.0% 4. Low Temperature Flexibility, ASTM D5147, Passes -35 deg. F (-37 deg. C) Thermoplastic Roofing Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6754, 60 mil fleece -backed KEE sheet with polyester reinforcement scrim; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: KEE- Stone FB 60 Flashing by The Garland Company, Inc. 1. Breaking Strength, ASTM D 751: a. 378 Ibf. 2. Tearing Strength, ASTM D 751: a. 120 Ibf. min. 3. Factory Seam Strength, ASTM D 751: a. 620 Ibf. min. 4. SRI: 110 5. Thermal Emissivity: 0.88 6. Solar Reflectance: 0.87 2.5 BITUMINOUS ROOFING MATERIALS General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing. B. Walk -way pads: Manufacturer's standard '/2 inch thick reinforced pads, as indicated on the drawings and fully adhered to the Cap Sheet with the manufacturer's recommended adhesives. C. Liquid Flashing - Tuff -Flash: An asphaltic -polyurethane, low odor, liquid flashing material designed for specialized details unable to be waterproofed with typical modified membrane fleshings. D. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M. Garla-Prime by The Garland Company, Inc. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application. Flashing -Bond by The Garland Company, Inc. 07521-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TORCH -APPLIED STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING F. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene, plain or modified bitumen; non -hardening, non -migrating, non - skinning, and non-drying. Garla-Flex by The Garland Company, Inc. G. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide those recommended by roofing system manufacturer. 2.6 SURFACING A. Roofing Granules: Ceramic -coated roofing granules as provided by the prime material manufacturer, No. 11 screen size with 100 percent passing No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and 98 percent of mass retained on No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve, color to match roofing. 2.7 RELATED MATERIALS A. Drain Flashings should be 41b (1.8kg) sheet lead formed and rolled. B. Plumbing stacks should be 41b (1.8kg) sheet lead formed and rolled. C. Pitch Pans and Counter-flashings should be 304 Stainless Steel and fully welded. D. Nails and Fasteners: Non-ferrous metal or galvanized steel, except that hard copper nails shall be used with copper; aluminum or stainless steel nails shall be used with aluminum; and stainless steel nails shall be used with stainless steel. Fasteners shall be self -clinching type of penetrating type as recommended by the manufacturer of the deck material. Nails and fasteners shall be flush -driven through flat metal discs of not less than one (1) inch diameter. Omit metal discs when one-piece composite nails or fasteners with heads not less than one (1) inch diameter are used. E. Butyl Tape: 100% solids, asbestos free and compressive tape designed to seal as recommended and furnished by the membrane manufacturer. F. Non -Shrink Grout: Use an all weather fast setting chemical action concrete material to fill pitch pans. GarRock by The Garland Company or pre -approved equal. 1. Flexural Strength (ASTM C78 (modified)) 7 days 1100psi 2. High Strength (ASTM C109 (modified)) 24 days 84001bs (3810kg) G. Thermoplastic Base Flashing Ply Adhesive: Dual component, elastomeric low-rise polyurethane foam adhesive; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: KEE-Lock Foam Adhesive by The Garland Company, Inc. H. Thermoplastic Base Flashing Ply Strip -in Mastic: Cold -applied, trowel grade polyether mastic; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: KEE-Lock Mastic by The Garland Company, Inc. I. Cant Strips: Non-flammable, inorganic fibrous glass. Glass Cant by the Garland Company or pre -approved equal. J. Wood Blocking and Nailers: Pressure -preservative -treated structural grade no. 2 or better southern pine, Douglas fir, or APA exterior grade plywood. 07521-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TORCH -APPLIED STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING K. Termination Bars: 1/8" X 3/4" extruded Aluminum, or approved equivalent. 2.8 INSULATION AND COVER BOARD R-Value: Average R-Value of roof insulation, tapered insulation (excluding crickets) and cover board shall be R-30 minimum. B. Polyisocyanurate roof insulation: 1. Type: Rigid isocyanurate closed -cell foam boards, permanently bonded to non -asphaltic coated glass facing sheets, complying with requirements of ASTM C1289-10, Class 1, Type III. 2. Thickness: AS indicated in drawings, in minimum two layers; first layer minimum 1-1/2" thickness. 3. Face Size: Minimum 4'-0" by 8'-0". a. Exception: Insulation to be attached using adhesive or asphalt may be no larger than 48 inches by 48 inches, nominal. 4. Long-term thermal resistance (LTTR) R-Value in accord with ASTM C1289-10: minimum R-30. 5. Fire Hazard Classification: FM Class I. 6. Density: Minimum 2 pcf. 7. Blowing Agents: Manufactured using non-HCFC, zero ozone depleting blowing agents. 8. Roof Covering Classification: UL Classified for installation with Class A roof covering. 9. Tapered Units: a. Face Size: Minimum 2'-0" by 4'-0" b. Thickness: As required to achieve roof slopes indicated. Minimum thickness at drains shall be 3.2". c. Slope for Tapered Boards: Minimum 1/4" per foot, across board width. C. Insulation Cover Board: One of following: 1. Acceptable Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC, DensDeck Prime Glass -Mat Faced Gypsum Roof Board. a. Thickness: '/z". b. Size: 48 inches by 48 inches. c. Weight: 1.95 psf. d. Surfacing: Glass -mat. e. Flexural Strength, parallel (ASTM C473): 80 Ibf, minimum. f. Flute Span (ASTM E661): 5 inches. g. Permeance (ASTM E96): Not more than 35 perms. h. R-Value (ASTM C518): Not Tess than 0.56. i. Water Absorption (ASTM C1177): Less than 10 percent of weight. j. Compressive Strength (Applicable Sections of ASTM C472): 500 — 900 pounds per square inch. k. Surface Water Absorption (ASTM C473): Not more than 2.5 grams. I. Resistance to Mold (D 3273): Pass. D. Insulation Fastener System: Type required by roof system manufacturer and meeting characteristics and wind uplift pressures: 1. Corrosion Resistance: Pass FM 4470 Corrosion Test, modified DIN 50018 standard, with a maximum of 15 percent red rust after 15 wet and dry acidic atmosphere cycles in Kesternich cabinet. 2. Plates: Minimum 3" diameter, non -corrosive material. 07521-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TORCH -APPLIED STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING E. Low -Rise Foam Adhesive: Dual component VOC compliant urethane foam adhesive dispensed from cartridges. Insul-lock HR by The Garland Company or pre -approved equal. 2.9 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight. B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI): Not less than 90 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency. D. Energy Performance: Roofing system shall have an initial solar reflectance index of not less than 0.73 and an emissivity of not Tess than 0.89 when tested according to CRRC-1. E. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. F. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire -resistance -rated assembly designs indicated. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION GENERAL A. Comply with requirements of Division 01. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify that deck surfaces and project conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. B. Verify that deck is supported and secured to structural members. C. Verify that deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, projections or ripples, and is properly sloped. D. Verify that adjacent roof substrate components do not vary more than ['/4] inch in height. E. Verify that deck surfaces are dry. 07521-11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TORCH -APPLIED STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING F. Confirm that moisture content does not exceed twelve (12) percent by moisture meter tests. On concrete deck, pour hot asphalt on to deck, if it bubbles / foams and once cooled does not adhere to the substrate, the moisture levels are too high. G. Verify that openings, curbs, pipes, conduit, sleeves, ducts, and other items which penetrate the roof are set solidly, and that cant strips, wood nailing strips, and reglets are set in place. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Cooperate with manufacturer, inspection and test agencies engaged or required to perform services in connection with installing the roof system. Insurance/Code Compliance: Where required by code, install and test the roofing system to comply with governing regulation and specified insurance requirements. C. Protect other work from spillage of roofing materials and prevent materials from entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace or restore other work damaged by installation of the modified bituminous roofing system. Coordinate installation of roofing system components so that insulation and roofing plies are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed overnight. Provide cut-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed ply sheets and insulation. Remove cut-offs immediately before resuming work. Substrate Joint Penetrations: Prevent bitumen from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. Apply roofing materials as specified by manufacturer's instructions: 1. Keep roofing materials dry before and during application. 2. Do not permit phased construction. 3. Complete application of roofing plies, modified sheet and flashing in a continuous operation. 4. Begin and apply only as much roofing in one day as can be completed that same day. G. Cut -Offs (Waterstops): At end of each days roofing installation, protect exposed edge of incomplete work, including ply sheets and insulation. Broadcast minerals into the bleed out of bitumen while bitumen is at its recommended EVT temperature to achieve a monolithic appearance. 3.4 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL Cooperate with manufacturer, inspection and test agencies engaged or required to perform services in connection with installing the roof system. Insurance/Code Compliance: Where required by code, install and test the roofing system to comply with governing regulation and specified insurance requirements. 07521-12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TORCH -APPLIED STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING C. Protect other work from spillage of roofing materials and prevent materials from entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace or restore other work damaged by installation of the coal tar modified bituminous roofing system. D. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations in ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing". E. Coordinate installation of roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofing system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. 1. Provide tie -offs at end of each days work to cover exposed roofing sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt, with joints and edges sealed. 2. Complete terminations and base flashings, and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system. 3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. F. Cut -Offs (Waterstops): At end of each days roofing installation, protect exposed edge of incomplete work, including ply sheets and insulation. Provide temporary covering of one (1) ply of torch -grade modified bituminous roofing with joints and edges sealed. 3.5 BASE PLY INSTALLATION A. Install modified bituminous membrane base ply according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows: 1. Lay out the roll in the course to be followed and unroll 6 feet (1.8 m). 2. Using a roofing torch, heat the surface of the coiled portion until the burn -off backer melts away. At this point, the material is hot enough to lay into the substrate. Progressively unroll the sheet while heating and press down with your foot to insure a proper bond. 3. After the major portion of the roll is bonded, re -roll the first 6 feet (1.8 m) and bond it in a similar fashion. 4. Repeat this operation with subsequent rolls with side laps of 4 inches (101 mm) and end laps of 8 inches (203 mm). 5. Give each lap a finishing touch by passing the torch along the joint and spreading the melted bitumen evenly with a rounded trowel to insure a smooth, tight seal. 6. Extend underlayment 2 inches (50 mm) beyond top edges of cants at wall and projection bases. 7. Install base flashing ply to all perimeter and projections details. B. Laps: Accurately align roofing sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids. 1. Repair voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed. C. Install roofing sheets so side and end laps shed water. 07521-13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TORCH -APPLIED STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 3.6 SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS CAP SHEET MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install modified bituminous membrane cap sheet according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows: 1. Using a roofing torch, heat the surface of the coiled portion until the burn -off backer melts away. At this point, the material is hot enough to lay into the substrate. Progressively unroll the sheet while heating and press down with your foot to insure a proper bond. 2. After the major portion of the roll is bonded, re -roll the first 6 feet (1.8 m) and bond it in a similar fashion. 3. Repeat this operation with subsequent rolls with side laps of 4 inches (101 mm) and end laps of 8 inches (203 mm). 4. Give each lap a finishing touch by passing the torch along the joint and spreading the melted bitumen evenly with a rounded trowel to insure a smooth, tight seal. 5. Immediately broadcast new granules into bleedout while hot bitumen is still at EVT. All loose granules to be removed at end of project. 3.7 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing ply over cant strips and other sloped and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Minimum base -flashing height of 8 inches (200 mm) is required. Install modified bituminous roofing sheet and cap sheet according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows: 1. Seal all curb, wall and parapet flashings with an application of mastic and mesh on a daily basis. Do not permit conditions to exist that will allow moisture to enter behind, around or under the roof or flashing membrane. 2. Prepare all walls, penetrations, expansion joints [and where shown on the drawings] to be flashed with asphalt primer at the rate of one hundred (100) square feet per gallon. Allow primer to dry tack free. 3. Heat fuse entire base ply membrane until burn off paper is gone. Fully adhere membrane to the underlying substrate. 4. After the laps have been tested and complete positive bond has been achieved, the applicator shall heat the seam edge and trowel along the seam edge. Troweling shall continue until a sloped, beveled edge has been produced. 5. Apply Fleece -Backed KEE Flashing with specified cold -applied Foam adhesive. 6. Once the membrane is in place, roll the membrane with a single ply roller or a dry paint roller to ensure contact with the adhesive and remove any air pockets from behind the membrane. If the height of the continuous membrane exceeds 24 in., horizontal reinforcement must be added using screws and plates or a termination bar. 7. Once the KEE Flashing is installed, heat weld KEE Utility Roll over the seam of the membrane. 8. After KEE Flashing Membrane is installed, use KEE Mastic in a three -course application with PVC mesh to seal the leading edge of the KEE Flashing where it ties into the field of the modified bituminous roof membrane. Install roofing cap -sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 07521-14 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TORCH -APPLIED STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING C. Roof Drains: Set 30-by-30-inch- (760-by-760-mm) lead flashing in bed of asphaltic adhesive on completed roofing membrane sheet. Cover metal flashing with roofing membrane sheet stripping, and extend a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of roofing membrane. Install completed cap sheet over entire assembly. Clamp roofing membrane, metal flashing, and stripping into roof -drain clamping ring. 1. Install stripping according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Set all roof layers in mastic six inches around drain perimeter. 3.8 ROOFING DETAILS AND ACCESSORIES A. Coordinate counter flashing, cap flashings, expansion joints, and similar work with modified bitumen roofing work [as specified in other Sections. B. Coordinate roof accessories, miscellaneous sheet metal accessory items, including piping vents and other devices with the roofing system work as specified in other Sections. C. Curb Detail/Air Handling Station & Exhaust Fan: 1. Minimum curb height is eight (8) inches. Prime vertically at a rate of one hundred (100) square feet per gallon and allow to dry. 2. Set cant in bitumen. Run all field plies over cant a minimum of two (2) inches. 3. Install base flashing assembly per Article 3.7 of this specification section. 4. Install pre -manufactured counter -flashing with fasteners and neoprene washers or per manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Set equipment on neoprene pad and fasten as required by equipment manufacturer. D. Plumbing Stack: 1. Minimum stack height is twelve (12) inches. 2. Run roof system over the entire surface of the roof. Seal the base of the stack with elastomeric sealant. 3. Prime both surfaces of flange of new sleeve. Install properly sized sleeves set in ('/<) inch bed of roof cement. 4. Install stripping as described in Article 3.7 of this specification section. 5. Turn sleeve a minimum of one (1) inch down inside of stack. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and as required a minimum of three (3) days per week. B. Correct defects or irregularities discovered during field inspection. C. Require attendance of roofing materials manufacturers' representatives at site during installation of the roofing system. A copy of the specification should also be on site at all times. 3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. 07521-15 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TORCH -APPLIED STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Remove bitumen adhesive drippings from all walls, windows, floors, ladders and finished surfaces. D. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other sources of soiling caused by work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning instructions and conform to their instructions. E. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section. 3.11 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Remove and properly dispose of waste products generated during roofing procedures. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.12 FINAL INSPECTION A. At completion of roofing installation and associated work, meet with Contractor, Architect, installer, installer of associated work. Owner, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of roofing system. Walk roof surface areas of the building, inspect perimeter building edges as well as flashing of roof penetrations, walls, curbs and other equipment. List all items requiring correction or completion and furnish copy of list to each party in attendance. C. The roofing system manufacturer reserves the right to request a thermographic scan of the roof during final inspection to determine if any damp or wet materials have been installed. The thermographic scan shall be provided by the Roofing Contractor. D. If core cuts verify the presence of damp or wet materials, the Roofing Contractor shall be required to replace the damaged areas at his own expense. E. Repair or replace deteriorated or defective work found at time above inspection as required to a produce an installation which is free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. F. Notify the Owner and Architect upon completion of corrections. G. Following the final inspection, provide written notice of acceptance of the installation from the roofing system manufacturer. Immediately correct roof leakage during construction. If the Contractor does not respond within twenty four (24) hours, the Owner will exercise rights to correct the Work under the terms of the Conditions of the Contract. 07521-16 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TORCH -APPLIED STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 3.13 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. At a time and date agreed to by the Owner, instruct the Owner's facility manager, or other representative designated by the Owner, on the following procedures: 1. Roof troubleshooting procedures. 2. Notification procedures for reporting leaks or other apparent roofing problems. 3. Roofing maintenance. 4. The Owner's obligations for maintaining the roofing warranty in effect and force. 5. The Manufacturer's obligations for maintaining the roofing warranty in effect and force. END OF SECTION 07521-17 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed low -slope roof sheet metal fabrications. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Section 07521 "SBS Roofing "for materials and installation of sheet metal flashing and trim integral with roofing. 3. Section 07720 "Roof Accessories" for set -on -type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials. B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 07620-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion -joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field -assembled work. 3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 6. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion -joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points. 8. Include details of roof -penetration flashing. 9. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable. 10. Include details of special conditions. 11. Include details of connections to adjoining work. 12. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches . C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory - applied finishes. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 1. For copings and roof edge flashings that are SPRI ES-1 tested and FM Approvals approved, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. 07620-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. FM Approvals Listing: Manufacture and install copings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, as indicated in PVC roofing section. Identify materials with name of fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals. D. Manufacture and install copings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure: 1. Wind Loads: ASCE 7-10 as indicated on the drawings. a. Wind Speed (Basis of Design): Texas Department of Insurance requirements for Brazoria County, Inland Zone II, 110 mph, 3-sec gust. b. Wind Speed (Ultimate): IBC 2015, 141 mph, 3-sec gust. c. Wind Speed (Allowable Stress Design): IBC 2015, 110 mph, 3-sec gust. 2. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Tested according to SPRI ES-1. E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F , ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces. 2.2 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 , T 3003 alloy, as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat surface. 1. Exposed Coil -Coated Finish: a. Two -Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. 07620-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self -tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws, gasketed, with hex -washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory -applied coating. Provide metal -backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. b. Blind Fasteners: High -strength aluminum or stainless -steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. C. Sealant Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 07620-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard and by FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not Tess than thickness of metal being secured. 1. Hidden Cleats: Galvanized steel sheet, G90 coating, min. one ga. heavier than material being secured are acceptable. E. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 2.5 LOW -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Counterflashing, Equipment Support Counterflashings and Roof Penetration Flashings: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: Min. 0.050 inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 07620-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure -treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated -aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with elastomeric coating or sheets where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Elastomeric coatings shall be compatible with roof membrane. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. 1. Use sealant -filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F , set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant -type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants." 3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. 07620-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at min. 24 inches centers as tested. 2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at min. 24 inches centers as tested. C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified FM Approvals' listing for required windstorm classification. D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close -fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless -steel draw band and tighten. E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches . Secure in waterproof manner by means of anchor and washer at 36-inch centers unless otherwise indicated. F. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof -penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean off excess sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07620 07620-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROOF SPECIALTIES SECTION 07710 ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Copings. 2. Reglets and counterflashings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Section 07620 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for custom- and site -fabricated sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Section 07720 "Roof Accessories" for set -on -type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. 4. Section 07920 "Joint Sealants" for field -applied sealants between roof specialties and adjacent materials. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties. 1. Include plans, elevations, expansion -joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant- and field -assembled work. 2. Include details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including direction of expansion and contraction. 3. Indicate profile and pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. 4. Detail termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 5. Include details of special conditions. 07710-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROOF SPECIALTIES C. Samples: For each type of roof specialty and for each color and texture specified. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For copings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer offering products meeting requirements that are FM Approvals listed for specified class and SPRI ES-1 tested to specified design pressure. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof -specialty installation. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify profiles and tolerances of roof -specialty substrates by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordination: Coordinate roof specialties with flashing, trim, and construction of parapets, roof deck, roof and wall panels, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. FM Approvals' Listing: Manufacture and install copings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classifications. Identify materials with FM Approvals' markings. C. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures: 1. Wind Loads: ASCE 7-10, as indicated on the Drawings. 07710-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROOF SPECIALTIES a. Wind Speed (Basis of Design): Texas Department of Insurance, Brazoria County, Inland Zone II, 110 mph, 3-sec gust. b. Wind Speed (Ultimate): IBC 2015, 141 mph, 3-sec gust. c. Wind Speed (Allowable Stress Design): IBC 2015, 110 mph, 3-sec gust. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 COPINGS A. Metal Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of metal coping cap in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet , concealed anchorage; with corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice plates with finish matching coping caps. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Basis of Design: W. P. Hickman Co., Permasnap MC Coping System b. Petersen Aluminum Corporation; PAC- Continuous Cleat Coping c. Metal -Era, Inc.; Perma-Tite Continuous Cleat Coping 2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Coping Caps: Aluminum sheet, min 0.050 inch, with increased thickness as required to meet performance requirements. a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. b. Finish: Two -coat fluoropolymer. 3. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight or continuously welded. 4. Coping -Cap Attachment Method: face leg hooked to continuous cleat with back leg fastener exposed, fabricated from coping -cap material. a. Face -Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous galvanized -steel sheet. 2.3 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Cheney Flashing Company. 2. Fry Reglet Corporation; Springlok Flashing System STX (Basis of Design). 3. Keystone Flashing Company, Inc. 4. Metal -Era, Inc. 07710-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROOF SPECIALTIES C. Counterflashings: Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings by 4 inches and in lengths not exceeding 12 feet designed to snap into reglets base of surface - mounted receiver and compress against base flashings with joints lapped, from the following exposed metal: 1. Formed Aluminum: 0.040 inches min. thick. Accessories: 1. Flexible -Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where reglet is provided separate from metal counterflashing. 2. Counterflashing Wind -Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge. E. Aluminum Finish: Siliconized polyester. 1. Color: Gray or white.. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 , alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required. 2.5 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self -Adhering, High -Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip -resisting polyethylene -film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release -paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M; stable after testing at 240 deg F . 2. Low -Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M; passes after testing at minus 20 degF. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of sheet metal. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing -specialty manufacturer for each application. 07710-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROOF SPECIALTIES 2.7 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties. C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage where applicable, and securely anchored. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self -Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches . Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 1. Coordinate application of self -adhering sheet underlayment under roof specialties with requirements for continuity with adjacent air barrier materials. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, underlayments, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof -specialty systems. 1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil -canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks. 07710-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROOF SPECIALTIES 2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in weathertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof specialties with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof specialties for waterproof performance. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties. 1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners or intersections unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F , set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. Seal concealed joints with butyl sealant or other sealant as required by roofing -specialty manufacturer. Seal joints as required for weathertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F . 3.4 COPING INSTALLATION A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners. B. Anchor copings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet performance requirements. 1. Interlock face -leg drip edge into continuous cleat anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance requirements. Anchor back leg of coping with screw fasteners and elastomeric washers at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance requirements. 3.5 REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION General: Coordinate installation of reglets and counterflashings with installation of base flashings. 07710-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROOF SPECIALTIES B. Surface -Mounted Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without embedded reglets is indicated on Drawings. Install at height so that inserted counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. C. Counterflashings: Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers; ensure that counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with butyl sealant. Fit counterflashings tightly to base flashings. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition during construction. B. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07710 07710-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROOF ACCESSORIES SECTION 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof hatches. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and stairs for access to roof hatches. 2. Section 07620 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field -formed metal flashing, roof -drainage systems, roof expansion -joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories. 3. Section 07710 "Roof Specialties" for manufactured fasciae, copings, gravel stops, gutters and downspouts, and counterflashing. 4. Section 15838 "HVAC Power Ventilators" for power roof -mounted ventilators. 5. Section 15732 "Packaged, Outdoor, Central -Station Air -Handling Units" for standard curbs specified with rooftop units. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation. B. Coordinate dimensions with rough -in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory. 07720-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROOF ACCESSORIES Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. B. Wind -Restraint Performance: As indicated in Section 07521 "SBS Roofing" 2.2 ROOF HATCH Roof Hatches: Metal roof -hatch units with lids and insulated double -walled curbs, welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid -to -curb counterflashing and weathertight perimeter gasketing, straight sides, and integrally formed deck -mounting flange at perimeter bottom. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Basis of Design: The Bilco Co. Model NB-20 HZ, ladder access. b. J. L. Industries, div. Activar Construction Products Group, Inc.; Model RHG Roof Hatch, ladder access c. Milcor, div. Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Model M Ladder Access Roof Hatch B. Type and Size: Single -leaf lid, 30 by 54 inches . C. Loads: Comply with the minimum requirements indicated on the Drawings, and the following: 1. Live Load: Minimum 40 Ibs/sq. ft. external live load 2. Wind Loads: ASCE 7-10 as indicated on the drawings. a. Wind Speed (Basis of Design): Texas Department of Insurance, Brazoria County, Inland Zone II, 110 mph, 3-sec gust. b. Wind Speed (Ultimate): IBC 2015, 141 mph, 3-sec gust. c. Wind Speed (Allowable Stress Design): IBC 2015, 110 mph, 3-sec gust. D. Hatch Material: Zinc -coated (galvanized) steel sheet. 1. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness for hatch size indicated. 2. Finish: Factory prime coating. Construction: 1. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board. a. R-Value: 5.0 according to ASTM C 1363. 2. Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid. 07720-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROOF ACCESSORIES 3. Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal curb. 4. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless otherwise indicated. 5. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter curb height that is tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surfaces of perimeter curb are level. Equip hatch with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow. F. Hardware: Spring operators, hold -open arm, galvanized -steel spring latch with turn handles, galvanized -steel butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside. G. Ladder -Assist Post: Roof -hatch manufacturer's standard device for attachment to roof -access ladder. 1. Operation: Post locks in place on full extension; release mechanism returns post to closed position. 2. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck. 3. Material: Steel tube. 4. Post: nominal 1.5 inch steel tube. 5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel or powder coat. 2.3 METAL MATERIALS A. Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation and mill phosphatized for field painting where indicated. 1. Factory Prime Coating: Where field painting is indicated, apply pretreatment and white or light-colored, factory -applied, baked -on epoxy primer coat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil . B. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221 , manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for type of use, finished to match assembly where used; otherwise mill finished. C. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M unless otherwise indicated. D. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500/A 500M, round tube. E. Galvanized -Steel Tube: ASTM A 500/A 500M, round tube, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, galvanized. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, thickness and thermal resistivity as indicated. 07720-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROOF ACCESSORIES C. Underlayment: 1. Self -Adhering, High -Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip - resisting polyethylene -film top surface laminated to layer of butyl adhesive, with release - paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. D. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Fasteners for Zinc -Coated Steel or Aluminum: Series 300 stainless steel. E. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork. F. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks. 2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads. 3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates. 4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals. B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 07720-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROOF ACCESSORIES 1. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with manufacturer's recommended slip sheet. C. Roof -Hatch Installation: 1. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating mechanism and hardware. 2. Attach ladder -assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer. 3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to ASTM A 780/A 780M. B. Touch up factory -primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to Section 09911 "Exterior Painting." C. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07720 07720-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 07841 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fire -resistance -rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, provide published UL listing. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements.," or that is a "Hilti Accredited Fire Stop Specialty Contractor." 1. Installer qualified by Hilti Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. A 07841-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING supplier's willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. B. Installation Responsibility: assign installation of through -penetration firestop systems and fire -resistive joint systems in Project to a single sole source firestop specialty contractor. C. The work is to be installed by a contractor with at least one of the following qualifications: FM 4991 Approved Contractor UL Approved Contractor Hilti Accredited Fire Stop Specialty Contractor D. Firm with not less than 3 years experience with fire stop installation. E. Successfully completed not less than 3 comparable scale projects using similar systems. 2. Installer shall also be certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer(s) as having been provided the necessary training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. 3. Fire stop specialty contractor shall not have less than 3 years experience with fire stop installation. B. Sole -Source Installation Responsibility: Installation of through -penetration firestop systems and fire -resistive joint systems throughout Project shall be performed by a single qualified firestop specialty contractor. C. Firestop System Responsibility: Firestop specialty contractor shall select and install appropriate systems from the generic types specified. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced -air circulation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core -drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: 07841-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency. 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire -resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. RectorSeal. d. Specified Technologies, Inc. e. Tremco, Inc. B. Penetrations in Fire -Resistance -Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg . 1. F-Rating: 1 hour minimum, but not less than the fire -resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg . 1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire -resistance rating of constructions penetrated. D. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. 07841-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers. B. Silicone Sealants: Single -component, silicone -based, neutral -curing elastomeric sealants. C. Mineral Wool Batt Insulation: Density as required by listing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions. with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross -sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping. C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results: 07841-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire -resistance ratings. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Wall Identification: In accordance with IBC section 703.7, permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes. 1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor -ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. 3.6 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ. B. Select, submit and provide appropriate fire stop system for actual field conditions from the subsets below. C. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing (Framed Walls): 1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L- 1001-1999. 2. F-Rating: 1 hour minimum, 2 hours where required to match wall rating.. 3. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. D. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing (Framed Walls): 1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L- 2001-2999. 2. F-Rating: 1 hour minimum, 2 hrs where required to match wall rating. 3. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. E. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Insulated Pipes (Framed Walls): 1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L- 5001-5999. 2. F-Rating: 1 hour minimum, 2 hours where required to match wall rating.. 3. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. 07841-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING F. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants (Framed Walls): 1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L- 6001-6999. 2. F-Rating: 1 hour minimum, 2 hours where required to match wall rating.. 3. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants (Framed Walls): 1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L- 7001-7999. 2. F-Rating: 1 hour minimum, 2 hours where required to match wall rating.. 3. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating. H. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Floor Penetrants (Concrete Floor less than 5" thick)): 1. UL Classified Systems: C-AJ, series suffix as appropriate to penetrating item, per above. 2. Floors are not fire rated. However, provide fire stop protection of 1 hour min. for all penetrations. END OF SECTION 07841 07841-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS SECTION 07844 FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Joints in or between fire -resistance -rated constructions. 2. Joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections. 3. Joints in smoke barriers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07841 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetrations in fire -resistance -rated walls, horizontal assemblies and smoke barriers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For fire -resistive joint system sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For fire -resistive joint system sealants, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Product Schedule: For each fire -resistive joint system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing agency. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration for a particular fire -resistive joint system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by fire -resistive joint system manufacturer's fire -protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire -resistance -rated assembly. 07844-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating fire -resistive joint systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for fire -resistive joint systems. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing fire -resistive joint systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire -resistive joint system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Fire -resistive joint systems shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire -resistive joint system tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Fire -resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Fire -Resistive Joint Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Fire -resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing agency. b. Fire -resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by reference to designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire -resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire -resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure fire -resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced -air circulation. 07844-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire -resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire -resistive joint systems. C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of fire -resistive joint system installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Where required, provide fire -resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire -resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire -resistive joint systems are installed. Fire -resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases. B. Joints in or between Fire -Resistance -Rated Construction: Provide fire -resistive joint systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079: 1. Joints include those installed in or between fire -resistance -rated walls, floor or floor/ceiling assemblies, and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies. 2. Fire -Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire -resistance rating of construction they will join. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. b. CEMCO. c. Fire Trak Corp. d. Grace Construction Products. e. Hilti, Inc. f. Johns Manville. g. Nelson Firestop Products. h. RectorSeal Corporation. i. Specified Technologies Inc. j. 3M Fire Protection Products. k. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. I. USG Corporation. C. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide fire -resistive joint systems with rating determined by ASTM E 119 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg or ASTM E 2307. 1. Fire -Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire -resistance rating of the floor assembly. 07844-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ND Fire Protection Systems Inc. b. Grace Construction Products. c. Hilti, Inc. d. Johns Manville. e. Nelson Firestop Products. f. RectorSeal Corporation. g. Specified Technologies Inc. h. 3M Fire Protection Products. i. Thermafiber, Inc. j. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. k. USG Corporation. D. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire -resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft of joint at 0.30 inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ND Fire Protection Systems Inc. b. Grace Construction Products. c. Hilti, Inc. d. Johns Manville. e. Nelson Firestop Products. f. NUCO Inc. g. Passive Fire Protection Partners. h. RectorSeal Corporation. i. Specified Technologies Inc. j. 3M Fire Protection Products. k. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. I. USG Corporation. E. Exposed Fire -Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame -spread and smoke - developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. F. VOC Content: Fire -resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. G. Low -Emitting Materials: Fire -resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." 07844-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS H. Accessories: Provide components of fire -resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by fire -resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for systems indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire -resistive joint systems to comply with fire -resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire -resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire -resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire -resistive joint system's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire -resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross -sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 07844-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire -resistive joint system. C. Install fill materials for fire -resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire - resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify fire -resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of joint edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical fasteners or self - adhering -type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words 'Warning - Fire -Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Where deficiencies are found or fire -resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace fire -resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing fire -resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire -resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur. 07844-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire - resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire -resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire - resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. 3.7 FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN or Category XHDG. B. Where Intertek ETL SEMKO-listed systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers in Intertek ETL SEMKO's "Directory of Listed Building Products" under product category Expansion/Seismic Joints or Firestop Systems. C. Head -of -Wall, Fire -Resistive Joint Systems 1. UL-Classified Systems: HW-D- 0000-0999. 2. Intertek ETL SEMKO-Listed Systems. 3. Assembly Rating: 1 hour 4. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated, 3/4' min. 5. Movement Capabilities: Class I. D. Perimeter Fire -Resistive Joint Systems 1. UL-Classified Perimeter Fire -Containment Systems: CW-DS- 0000-0999. 2. Intertek ETL SEMKO-Listed, Perimeter Fire -Barrier Systems. 3. Integrity Rating: 1 hour 4. Insulation Rating: 0 hour 5. Linear Opening Width: As indicated. 6. Movement Capabilities: Class I. END OF SECTION 07844 07844-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Mildew -resistant joint sealants. 4. Latex joint sealants. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product. B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. C. Joint -Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint -sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint -sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint -sealant formulation. 4. Joint -sealant color. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint - sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint -sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 07920-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 JOINT SEALANTS 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.5 WARRANTY Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint -sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following: 1. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single -component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral -curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation.; 791 b. GE Construction Sealants; SCS2000 Silpruf c. Pecora Corporation, PCS 07920-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 JOINT SEALANTS d. Sika Corporation US; Sikasil WS-295 B. Silicone, Paintable, S, NS, 25, NT: Single -component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral -curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, paintable. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following where exterior joints are finished with acrylic paints: a. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc. ; GE 7000, GE Silicone II Paintable Sealant 2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Urethane, S, NS, 35, T, NT: Single -component, non -sag, plus 35 percent and minus 35 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 35, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex la b. Sealant shall be compatible with PVC roofing system. c. Sealant shall be acceptable to PVC roofing system manufacturer. 2.4 MILDEW -RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew -Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth. B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew -resistant, single -component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid -curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; DOW CORNING® 786 SILICONE SEALANT -. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc; SCS1700 Sanitary. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200. 2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20. b. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); PowerHouse Siliconized Acrylic Latex Sealant. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. 07920-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 JOINT SEALANTS 2.6 JOINT -SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed -cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Primer: Material recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 07920-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 JOINT SEALANTS 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint - sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 07920-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 JOINT SEALANTS 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CLEANING Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 JOINT -SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint -Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces[.]. 1. Joint Locations: a. Interior and exterior joints in concrete panels. b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT. a. At interior (roof) side of parapet, provide silicone or urethane sealant compatible with roof system and fluid -applied membrane air barrier. b. Where exterior painted joints are indicated, provide paintable silicone sealant or urethane sealant. 3. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Joint -Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 07920-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 JOINT SEALANTS 1. Joint Locations: a. Tile control and expansion joints. b. Joints on interior (roof) side of concrete parapet panels. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 35, NT, T. 3. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. C. Joint -Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement. 1. Joint Locations: a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. 3. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Joint -Sealant Application: Mildew -resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. END OF SECTION 07920 07920-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08111 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow -metal work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08710 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" for door hardware for hollow - metal doors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM- HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow -metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire -resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal -edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 08111-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow -metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver hollow -metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project -site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory -finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow -metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY. 2. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY. 3. Mesker Door Inc. 4. Premier Products, Inc. 5. Republic Doors and Frames. 6. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand; Steelcraft Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow -metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Fire -Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 08111-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Heavy -Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2... 1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches . c. Face: Uncoated, cold -rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch . d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral -board, or vertical steel -stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion. 3. Frames: a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch . b. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW -METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Extra -Heavy -Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3... 1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches c. Face: Metallic -coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch , with minimum A40 coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Core: Mineral board. 1) Thermal -Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal -resistance value (R-value) of not Tess than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 08111-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 3. Frames: a. Face: Metallic -coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch, with minimum A60 coating. b. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 2. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In -Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch , and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip -type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.6 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. Power -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow -metal frames of type indicated. G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches , as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. 08111-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES H. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08800 "Glazing." J. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow -metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow -Metal Doors: 1. Vertical Edges for Single -Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches . 2. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. 3. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors where required for attachment of weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 4. Exterior Doors: Provide weep -hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 5. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire -performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency. C. Hollow -Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 3. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Stud -Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 08111-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES b. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 4. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single -Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double -Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot -rolled steel sheet. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow -metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow -metal work for hardware. F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow - metal work. 2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 3. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow -metal work. 4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard. fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field -applied coatings even after prolonged exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. 08111-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow -metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow -Metal Frames: Install hollow -metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire -rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. e. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. f. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power -actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal -Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral -fiber insulation. 5. In -Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow -metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: 08111-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow -Metal Doors: Fit hollow -metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non -Fire -Rated Steel Doors: a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch . b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch . c. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch . d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch . 2. Fire -Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08800 "Glazing" and with hollow - metal manufacturer's written instructions. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval -head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow -metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow -metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying, rust -inhibitive primer. Metallic -Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 08111 08111-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08121 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes interior aluminum frames, doors and glazing installed in gypsum board partitions. 1. Work includes aluminum -framed glass doors and sidelights installed in interior aluminum frames. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08141 "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in interior aluminum frames. 2. Section 08411 "Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for aluminum -framed glass doors installed in exterior aluminum frames. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 2. Locations of reinforcements and preparations for hardware. 3. Details of each different wall -opening condition. 4. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 5. Details of accessories. 6. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 7. Details of conduits and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. 08121-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Frameworks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2. RACO Interior Products, Inc. (Basis of Design) 3. Versatrac Frames; a division of American Door Products Inc. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements, not less than 0.062 inch thick. B. Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes, and closers. C. Aluminum -Framed Glass Doors: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes, and closers. 1. Glazing: 1/4" clear tempered glass in accordance with Section 08800 "Glazing". 2. Finish: Match interior aluminum frames. 3. Style: Wide -stile (nominal 5 inches) and rail, to accommodate standard hardware. 4. Basis of Design: Raco Series 550. D. Glazing Frames: Extruded aluminum, for glazing thickness indicated. E. Ceiling Tracks: Extruded aluminum. F. Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick, with removable snap -in casing trim, glazing stops, and door stops without exposed fasteners. 1. Trim Style: As indicated.. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless -steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened. B. Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard continuous mohair, wool pile, or vinyl seals color - matched to aluminum.. C. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded plastic, to accommodate glazing thickness indicated. D. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08800 "Glazing." 08121-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES E. Hardware: Comply with requirements in Section 08710 "Door Hardware". 2.4 FABRICATION A. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairline joints at butted or mitered connections. B. Factory prepare interior aluminum frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcements, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 08710 "Door Hardware." C. Fabricate frames for glazing with removable stops to allow glazing replacement without dismantling frame. 1. Locate removable stops on the inside of spaces accessed by keyed doors. D. Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, and ceilings, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by throat size indicated. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install interior aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Set frames accurately in position and plumbed, aligned, and securely anchored to substrates. 08121-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES C. Install frame components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 108 3/4 inches long must be one piece. 1. Fasten to suspended ceiling grid on maximum 48-inch centers, using sheet metal screws or other fasteners approved by frame manufacturer. 2. Use concealed installation clips to produce tightly fitted and aligned splices and connections. 3. Secure clips to extruded main-frame components and not to snap -in or trim members. 4. Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete. D. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, Doors up to 108 3/4 high must be one piece. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods recommended by frame manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610. B. Touch up marred frame surfaces. Remove and replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. END OF SECTION 08121 08121-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08141 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid -core doors with plastic -laminate faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08111 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for metal frames to accept flush wood doors. 2. Section 08800 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 6. Fire -protection ratings for fire -rated doors. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. 08141-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FLUSH WOOD DOORS B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during remainder of construction period. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid -Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Graham Wood Doors; ASSA ABLOY Group company. 4. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc: Laminate Surfaced Doors. 5. Oshkosh Door Company. 6. Poncraft Door Company. 7. VT Industries Inc. 08141-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. B. Low -Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. C. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Temperature -Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire -test exposure. 2. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire -protection rating indicated. 3. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 4. Pairs: Provide fire -retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed -steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. D. Particleboard -Core Doors: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard -core doors as needed to eliminate through -bolting hardware. a. 5-inch top -rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. b. 5-inch bottom -rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor plates. 3. Provide doors with glued -wood -stave or structural -composite -lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices. E. Mineral -Core Doors: 1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire -protection rating indicated. 2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw -holding capability approved for use in doors of fire -protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through -bolting hardware. a. 5-inch top -rail blocking. b. 5-inch bottom -rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates. c. 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have armor plates. d. 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices. 08141-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated -edge construction with improved screw -holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. a. Screw -Holding Capability: 475 Ibf per WDMA T.M.-10. 2.3 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED DOORS A. Interior Solid -Core Doors.: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Plastic -Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. 3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated. 4. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Plastic laminate that matches faces, applied before faces. 5. Core: Particleboard. 6. Construction: Three plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before faces are applied. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 2.4 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS A. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire -Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch-thick, cold -rolled steel sheet; with baked -enamel- or powder -coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire -protection rating indicated. 1. Metal frame shall match plastic laminate color. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame -opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire -rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA- 156.115-W, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 08141-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Factory finish doors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08710 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire -rated doors according to NFPA 80. C. Factory -Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Factory -Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 08141 08141-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07720 "Roof Accessories" for roof hatches. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire -test -response characteristics according to the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for fire -rated access door assemblies installed vertically. 2. NFPA 288 for fire -rated access door assemblies installed horizontally. 08311-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single manufacturer. B. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges.: 1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer's standard -width exposed flange, proportional to door size. 2. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 3. Door Size: As indicated or as necessary to accommodate service access. 4. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch, 16 gage. a. Finish: Factory prime. 5. Stainless -Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.062 inch, 16 gage. a. Finish: No. 4. b. Provide at toilet room walls and other similar locations where exposed to view. 6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 7. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 8. Hardware: Latch. C. Fire -Rated, Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges.: 1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineral -fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self -latching door with automatic closer and interior latch release. Provide manufacturer's standard -width exposed flange, proportional to door size. 2. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 3. Fire -Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 4. Temperature -Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes. 5. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.040 inch , 20 gage. a. Finish: Factory prime. 6. Stainless -Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.038 inch , 20 gage. a. Finish: No. 4. b. Provide at fire -rated toilet room walls and other similar locations where exposed to view. 7. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 8. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 9. Hardware: Latch. D. Hardware: 1. Latch: Cam latch operated by screwdriver. 08311-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 2.3 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating. C. Stainless -Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. D. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated. D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 2.5 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Steel and Metallic -Coated -Steel Finishes: 1. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 08311-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 2. Factory Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two -coat, baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry -film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat. E. Stainless -Steel Finishes: 1. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. 2. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. a. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. c. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 08311 08311-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COILING COUNTER DOORS SECTION 08331 COILING COUNTER DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coiling Counter Doors, manually operated. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Support framing and framed opening. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. B. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. C. ASTM A 924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of the Contract, including TPWD's Uniform General Conditions, and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Details of construction and fabrication. 4. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Include detailed plans, elevations, and details of framing members, required clearances, anchors, and accessories. Include relationship with adjacent construction. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 083313 - Page 1 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COILING COUNTER DOORS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with a minimum of five years' experience in the fabrication and installation of security closures. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years and approved by manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Protect materials from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver until after wet work is complete and dry. C. Store materials in a dry, warm, ventilated weathertight location. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work with other operations and installation of adjacent finish materials to avoid damage to installed materials. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer's limited door warranty for 2 years for all parts and components. B. Manufacturer's 5 year limited warranty for Weathered Powder Coat Finish applied to complete door system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. MANUFACTURER 1. Basis of Design: Overhead Door Corp, 651 Series B. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Cookson 2. Cornell 3. Clopay Building Products 08331-2 06-18-2019 95% Construction Documents ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COILING COUNTER DOORS 2.2 OVERHEAD COILING STEEL COUNTER DOORS A. Stainless Steel Counter Doors 1. Wall Mounting Condition : Face -of -wall mounting 2. Curtain: Interlocking slats, Type F-158 fabricated of 22 gauge stainless steel. Endlocks attached to alternate slats to maintain curtain alignment and prevent lateral slat movement 3. Finish a. Slats and hood stainless steel with a No. 4 stainless steel finish. b. Non -galvanized exposed ferrous surfaces shall receive one coat of rust - inhibitive primer. 4. Bottom Bar: Single stainless steel angle bottom bar. 5. Guides: Stainless steel shapes. 6. Brackets: Steel plate to support counterbalance, curtain and hood. 7. Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type housed in a steel tube or pipe barrel. 8. Hood: Provided with intermediate support brackets as required and fabricated of Stainless steel. 9. Operation: Manual push up. 10. Locking: Slide bolt locks suitable for use with padlock. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. B. Examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under which this work is to be performed. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only. 08331-3 06-18-2019 95% Construction Documents ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COILING COUNTER DOORS D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Test for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper operation without binding or distortion. B. Adjust hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean curtain and components using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer. B. Remove labels and visible markings. C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. END OF SECTION 08331 08331-4 06-18-2019 95% Construction Documents ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior storefront framing. 2. Exterior manual -swing entrance doors and door -frame units. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08710 "Door Hardware" for door hardware. 2. Section 08800 "Glazing" for glass systems. 3. Section 13730 "Access Control" for security requirements, 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. Include Texas Department of Insurance current product evaluations along with referenced TDI-approved design drawings.Shop Drawings: For aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 3. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. a. Include custom variations to standard details. 08411-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 4. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical -to -horizontal intersection of aluminum - framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage. 5. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. C. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, access control and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. D. Delegated -Design Submittal: For aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Include professional analysis of custom variations to standard details, if any. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 2. Compliance with Texas Department of Insurance requirements is mandatory. Provide only products having a current TDI evaluation as posted on TDI's website. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer to design aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts. 08411-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: ASCE 7-10, as indicated on Drawings. a. Wind Speed (Basis of Design): Texas Department of Insurance requirements for Brazoria County, Inland Zone II, 110 mph, 3-sec gust. 1) Impact resistance is Owner request. b. Wind Speed (Ultimate): IBC 2015, 141 mph, 3-sec gust. c. Wind Speed (Allowable Stress Design): IBC 2015, 110 mph, 3-sec gust. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/250 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch , whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch , whichever is smaller. E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind -load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not Tess than 10 seconds. F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows: 1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area: a. Maximum air leakage of at a static -air -pressure differential of 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. . 08411-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2. Entrance Doors: a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static -air -pressure differential of 1.57 Ibf/sq. ft. . b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static -air -pressure differential of 1.57 Ibf/sq. ft. . G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static -air -pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind -load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. . H. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows: 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of not more than 0.70 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100. a. Entrance Doors: U-factor less than or equal to 1.10. 2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.25 as determined according to NFRC 200. Large -Missile Test: For glazed openings located within 30 feet of grade (9-Ib missile at 50 mph).Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Pass missile -impact and cyclic -pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 for TDI, Inland Zone II, 110 mph wind speed, 3-sec gust. J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F , ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces. 2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5. a. High Exterior Ambient -Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal - surface temperature of 180 deg F . b. Low Exterior Ambient -Air Temperature: 0 deg F c. Interior Ambient -Air Temperature: 75 deg F . 08411-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. B. No known equivalents utilizing specified entrance configuration.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Series FG-5100 StormMaxTm— Impact-Resistant Storefront" as manufactured by Oldcastle Building Envelope..Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Series MSD- 375 StormMax Entrances as manufactured by Oldcastle Building Envelope.. a. No known equivalents utilizing specified entrance configuration. b. For pairs of entrance doors, provide removable center mullion accepting rim exit devices. Incorporate security features indicated.Aluminum-Framed Entrances: C. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum -framed entrance and storefront system, including framing 2.3 FRAMING A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed -aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Nonthermal. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Center. 4. Finish: High-performance organic finish. 5. Fabrication Method: Field -fabricated stick system. B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction. C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high -strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. D. Materials: 1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 . b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 . c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 08411-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc -rich, corrosion -resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual -swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded -aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 2. Door Design: Medium stile; 4-3/4 inch nominal width. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap -on, extruded -aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule for each entrance door to comply with building code and with the requirements in this Section. 1. Coordinate all door hardware with TDI requirements and with access control requirements. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. 3. Opening -Force Requirements: a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 Ibf to release the latch and not more than 30 Ibf to set the door in motion. b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 Ibf to fully open door. 2.6 GLAZING Glazing: Comply with Section 08800 "Glazing." Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed -corner pressure -glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer. 08411-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. 1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot -dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable -iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements. C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt -mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E. Structural -Sealant -Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures. F. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear -block system. G. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 08411-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 2. Exterior doors are not expected to meet air and water infiltration criteria at full wind load. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding -type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory -installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. Factory -prepare door frames, jambs and accessories for field -installed hardware to greatest extent possible, including finishes. J. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High -Performance Organic Finish: Two -coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and TDI approvals. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 08411-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation. F. Install glazing as specified in Section 08800 "Glazing." G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field -Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface -mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances unless otherwise indicated or required: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet ; 1/4 inch in 40 feet . 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet ; 1/4 inch in 40 feet . 3. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch . b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch . c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch . 4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet ; 1/2 inch over total length. END OF SECTION 08411 08411-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Mechanical and electrified door hardware for: a. Swinging doors. b. Sliding doors. 2. Electronic access control system components, including: a. Electronic access control devices. 3. The intent of the hardware specification is to specify the hardware for interior and exterior doors, and to establish a type, continuity, and standard of quality. However, it is the door hardware supplier's responsibility to thoroughly review existing conditions, schedules, specifications, drawings, and other Contract Documents to verify the suitability of the hardware specified. B. Exclusions: Unless specifically listed in hardware sets, hardware is not specified in this section for: 1. Windows 2. Cabinets (casework), including locks in cabinets 3. Signage 4. Toilet accessories 5. Overhead doors 08710- 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE C. Related Sections: 1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealant requirements applicable to threshold installation specified in this section. 2. Division 08 Section " Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefront" for hardware requirements applicable to installation of hardware to entrance doors 3. Division 09 sections for touchup, finishing or refinishing of existing openings modified by this section. 4. Division 26 sections for connections to electrical power system and for low -voltage wiring. 5. Division 28 sections for coordination with other components of electronic access control system. 1.03 REFERENCES A. UL - Underwriters Laboratories 1. UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies 2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies 3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware B. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute 1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule 2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware 3. Key Systems and Nomenclature C. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI/BHMA A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and Specialties 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 requirements. 2. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify on submittals deviations from Contract Documents, issues of incompatibility or other issues which may detrimentally affect the Work. 3. Prior to forwarding submittal, comply with procedures for verifying existing door and frame compatibility for new hardware, as specified in PART 3, "EXAMINATION" article, herein. B. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: Technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. 08710- 2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE 2. Samples for Verification: If requested by Architect, submit production sample or sample installations of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated, and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. a. Samples will be returned to supplier. Units that are acceptable to Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into Work, within limitations of key coordination requirements. 3. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or opening, include: a. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set number. b. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet: List locking device and function for each opening. c. Quantity, type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. d. Name and manufacturer of each item. e. Fastenings and other pertinent information. f. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings. g. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. h. Mounting locations for hardware. i. Door and frame sizes and materials. j. Name and phone number for local manufacturer's representative for each product. k. Operational Description of openings with any electrified hardware (locks, exits, electromagnetic locks, electric strikes, automatic operators, door position switches, magnetic holders or closer/holder units, and access control components). Operational description should include operational descriptions for: egress, ingress (access), and fire/smoke alarm connections. 1) Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. 4. Key Schedule: a. After Keying Conference, provide keying schedule listing levels of keying as well as explanation of key system's function, key symbols used and door numbers controlled. b. Use ANSI/BHMA A156.28 "Recommended Practices for Keying Systems" as guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting optimal keying system. c. Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review prepared and detailed in accordance with referenced DHI publication. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key to unique door designations. d. Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions. e. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts and one key system schematic illustrating system usage and expansion. 08710- 3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE 1) Forward bitting list, key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner, by means as directed by Owner. Prepare key schedule by or under supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. 5. Templates: After final approval of hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory or shop prepared for door hardware installation. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Data: For Supplier, Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. 2. Product data for electrified door hardware: a. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire -rated doors complies with listed fire -rated door assemblies. 3. Certificates of Compliance: a. UL listings for fire -rated hardware and installation instructions if requested by Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction. b. Installer Training Meeting Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of installer training meeting specified in "QUALITY ASSURANCE" article, herein. c. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of electrified hardware coordination conference, specified in "QUALITY ASSURANCE" article, herein. 4. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. D. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operations and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Division 01 and include: a. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes. b. Catalog pages for each product. c. Factory order acknowledgement numbers (for warranty and service) d. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. e. Parts list for each product. f. Final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect conditions as -installed. g. Final keying schedule h. Copies of floor plans with keying nomenclature i. As -installed wiring diagrams for each opening connected to power, both low voltage and 110 volts. j. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to identify project. 08710- 4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications and Responsibilities: Recognized architectural hardware supplier with record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that provides certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the Work for consultation. 1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. 4. Coordination Responsibility: Assist in coordinating installation of electronic security hardware with Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors. a. Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and verify that all components are working properly. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: Person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and meets these requirements: 1. For door hardware, DHI-certified, Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). 2. Can provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors. 3. Can inspect and verify components are in working order upon completion of installation. 4. Capable of producing wiring diagrams. 5. Capable of coordinating installation of electrified hardware with Architect and electrical engineers. C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer. D. Fire -Rated Door Openings: Provide door hardware for fire -rated openings that complies with NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed products tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Intertek Testing Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, based on testing at positive pressure and according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C and in compliance with requirements of fire - rated door and door frame labels. E. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with governing accessibility regulations cited in "REFERENCES" article, herein. G. Keying Conference 1. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including: 08710- 5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE a. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for key control system. d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys. H. Pre -installation Conference 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing -in for electrified door hardware. 4. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. I. Coordination Conferences: 1. Installation Coordination Conference: Prior to hardware installation, schedule and hold meeting to review questions or concerns related to proper installation and adjustment of door hardware. 2. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference: Prior to ordering electrified hardware, schedule and hold meeting to coordinate door hardware with security, electrical, doors and frames, and other related suppliers. J. Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements: This project falls under the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Inspection Program for Inland II. All products, materials and installation systems shall be evaluated and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance, Windstorm Inspection Program, and listed in the TDI Product Evaluation Index or approved by the Windstorm Engineer as outlined below. Products, materials and installation systems not presently approved by the Texas Department of Insurance, Windstorm Inspection Program, may be considered for this project however, they must be properly submitted through the Architect for review by the Windstorm Engineer. This submittal shall be a part of the initial submittal process outlines in Section 013400 and requirements for this portion are detailed within the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Inspection website at the following location: www.tdi.state.tx.us/wind/submittal requi.html. Products, materials and installation systems not approved by the Windstorm Engineer shall NOT be installed or utilized on this project. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock -up for hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. 1. Deliver each article of hardware in manufacturer's original packaging. 08710- 6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE C. Project Conditions: 1. Maintain manufacturer -recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and installation periods. 2. Provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to Project. Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. D. Protection and Damage: 1. Promptly replace products damaged during shipping. 2. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Correct, replace or repair products damaged during Work. 3. Protect products against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical agent. E. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. F. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor -recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory or shop prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. D. Electrical System Roughing -In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. E. Existing Openings: Where existing doors, frames and/or hardware are to remain, field verify existing functions, conditions and preparations and coordinate to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Beginning from date of Substantial Completion, for durations indicated. a. Closers: 1) Mechanical: 30 years 08710- 7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE b. Exit Devices: 1) Mechanical: 3 years. 2) Electrified: 1 year. c. Locksets: 1) Mechanical: 3 years. 2) Electrified: 1 year. d. Key Blanks: Lifetime 2. Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operation due to improper installation, improper use or abuse. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools: Furnish complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The Owner requires use of certain products for their unique characteristics and project suitability to insure continuity of existing and future performance and maintenance standards. After investigating available product offerings, the Awarding Authority has elected to prepare proprietary specifications. These products are specified with the notation: "No Substitute." 1. Where "No Substitute" is noted, substitution requests for other products will not be considered. B. Approval of manufacturers and/or products other than those listed as "Scheduled Manufacturer" shall be in accordance with substitution procedure in division 01 25 00. In the individual article for the product category items, shall be in accordance with the QUALITY ASSURANCE article, herein. C. Approval of products is contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all requirements of scheduled manufacturer's product. D. Where specified hardware is not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect's approval in accordance with substitution procedure in division 01 25 00. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Fasteners 08710- 8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE 1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work including prepared for paint surfaces to receive painted finish. 3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units exposed when door is closed except when no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless thru-bolts are required to fasten hardware securely. Review door specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required. 4. Install hardware with fasteners provided by hardware manufacturer. B. Modification and Preparation of Existing Doors: Where existing door hardware is indicated to be removed and reinstalled. 1. Provide necessary fillers, Dutchmen, reinforcements, and fasteners, compatible with existing materials, as required for mounting new opening hardware and to cover existing door and frame preparations. 2. Use materials which match materials of adjacent modified areas. 3. When modifying existing fire -rated openings, provide materials permitted by NFPA 80 as required to maintain fire -rating. C. Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates and other devices necessary for hardware installation. 1. Where fasteners are exposed to view: Finish to match adjacent door hardware material. D. Cable and Connectors: Hardwired Electronic Access Control Lockset and Exit Device Trim: 1. Data: 24AWG, 4 conductor shielded, Belden 9843, 9841 or comparable. 2. DC Power: 18 AWG, 2 conductor, Belden 8760 or comparable. 3. Provide type of data and DC power cabling required by access control device manufacturer for this installation. 4. Where scheduled in the hardware sets, provide each item of electrified hardware and wire harnesses with sufficient number and wire gauge with standardized Molex plug connectors to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide Molex connectors that plug directly into connectors from harnesses, electric locking and power transfer devices. Provide through -door wire harness for each electrified locking device installed in a door and wire harness for each electrified hinge, electrified continuous hinge, electrified pivot, and electric power transfer for connection to power supplies. 2.03 HINGES A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Ives 5BB series. No substitute. 08710- 9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE B. Requirements: 1. Provide hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.1. 2. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, up to and including 36 inches (914 mm) wide: a. Exterior: Standard weight, bronze or stainless steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high b. Interior: Standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high 3. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors over 36 inches (914 mm) wide: a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high 4. 2 inches or thicker doors: a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze or stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high 5. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height, and one additional hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height. 6. Where new hinges are specified for existing doors or existing frames, provide new hinges of identical size to hinge preparation present in existing door or existing frame. 7. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: a. Steel Hinges: Steel pins b. Non -Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins c. Out -Swinging Exterior Doors: Non -removable pins d. Out -Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non -removable pins e. Interior Non -lockable Doors: Non -rising pins 8. Width of hinges: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) at 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, and 5 inches (127 mm) at 2 inches (51 mm) or thicker doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door, frame, and wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening. 2.04 ELECTRIC POWER TRANSFER A. Manufacturers: a. Scheduled Manufacturer: Von Duprin EPT-10. No substitute. B. Provide power transfer with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with number and gage of wires sufficient to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. C. Locate electric power transfer per manufacturer's template and UL requirements, unless interference with operation of door or other hardware items. 08710- 10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE 2.05 FLUSH BOLTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. No substitute. B. Requirements: 1. Provide automatic, constant latching, and manual flush bolts with forged bronze or stainless -steel face plates, extruded brass levers, and with wrought brass guides and strikes. Provide 12 inch (305 mm) steel or brass rods at doors up to 90 inches (2286 mm) in height. For doors over 90 inches (2286 mm) in height increase top rods by 6 inches (152 mm) for each additional 6 inches (152 mm) of door height. Provide dust -proof strikes at each bottom flush bolt. 2.06 MORTISE LOCKS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Falcon MA series. B. Requirements: 1. Provide mortise locks conforming to ANSI/BHMAA156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1, and UL Listed for 3 hour fire doors. 2. Provide locks manufactured from heavy gauge steel, containing components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. 3. Provide lock case that is multi -function and field reversible for handing without opening case. Cylinders: Refer to "KEYING" article, herein. 4. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset with full 3/4 inch (19 mm) throw stainless steel mechanical anti -friction latchbolt. Provide deadbolt with full 1 inch (25 mm) throw, constructed of stainless steel. 5. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 6. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Where scheduled, provide a request to exit (RX) switch that is actuated with rotation of inside lever. 7. Lever Trim: Solid brass, bronze, or stainless steel, cast or forged in design specified, with wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Provide thru-bolted levers with 2-piece spindles. a. Lever Design: Falcon Quantum -Gala (QG) b. Tactile Warning (Knurling): Where required by authority having jurisdiction. Provide on levers on exterior (secure side) of doors serving rooms considered to be hazardous. 2.07 EXIT DEVICES A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Von Duprin 99 series. 08710- 11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE B. Requirements: 1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 and UL listed for Panic Exit or Fire Exit Hardware. 2. Cylinders: Refer to "KEYING" article, herein. 3. Provide touchpad type exit devices, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or aluminum, plated to standard architectural finishes to match balance of door hardware. 4. Touchpad must extend a minimum of one half of door width. No plastic inserts are allowed in touchpads. 5. Provide exit devices with deadlatching feature for security and for future addition of alarm kits and/or other electrified requirements. 6. Provide flush end caps for exit devices. 7. Provide exit devices with manufacturer's approved strikes. 8. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Install exit devices at height recommended by exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and approved by Architect. 9. Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors, or provide spacers to fill gaps behind devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off face of door, provide glass bead kits. 10. Provide cylindrical or hex -key dogging as specified at non fire -rated openings. 11. Provide electrified options as scheduled. 12. Provide delayed egress devices, where scheduled, that are UL 294 listed, meet National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) and International Building Code (IBC) governing delayed egress, and/or other local and national fire codes acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as required. a. Provide non -handed and field sizable device with 3/4 (19mm) throw deadlocking latch bolt. Device incorporates an internal RX switch that detects attempt to exit from applying less than 15lbs to the push pad, which causes this switch to start an irreversible alarm cycle. Key switch in device is capable of arming, disarming, or resetting the device; and indicator lamp determines status of the device b. Provide devices capable of standard 15 second release delay and indefinite release delay as required by code, when tied into fire alarm system will release immediately when an alarm condition exists. c. Provide devices with all control inputs — door position input, external inhibit input, fire alarm input; auxiliary locking; nuisance alarm and internal horn; and, remote signaling output self-contained in the device assembly. 13. Concealed Vertical Cable Exit Devices: provide cable -actuated concealed vertical latch system in two -point for non -rated or fire rated wood doors up to a 90 minute rating and less bottom latch (LBL) configuration for non -rated or fire rated wood doors up to 20 minute rating. Vertical rods not permitted. a. Cable: Stainless steel with abrasive resistant coating. Conduit and core wire ends snap into latch and center slides without use of tools. b. Wood Door Prep: Maximum 1 inch x 1.1875 inch x 3.875 inches top latch pocket and 1 inch x 1.1875 inch x 5 inches bottom latch pocket which does not require the use of a metal wrap or edge for non -rated or fire rated wood doors up to a 45 minute rating. c. Latchbolts and Blocking Cams: Manufactured from sintered metal low carbon copper - infiltrated steel, with molybdenum disulfide low friction coating. d. Top Latchbolt: Minimum 0.38 inch (10 mm) and greater than 90 degree engagement with strike to prevent door and frame separation under high static load. e. Bottom Latchbolt: Minimum of 0.44 inch (11 mm) engagement with strike. 08710- 12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE f. Latch Operation: Top and bottom latch operate independently of each other. Top latch fully engages top strike even when bottom latch is compromised. Separate trigger mechanisms not permitted. g. Latch release does not require separate trigger mechanism. h. Cable and latching system characteristics: 1) Installed independently of exit device installation, and capable of functioning on door prior to device and trim installation. 2) Connected to exit device at single point in steel and aluminum doors, and two points for top and bottom latches in wood doors. 3) Bottom latch height adjusted, from single point for steel and aluminum doors and two points for wood doors, after system is installed and connected to exit device, while door is hanging 4) Bottom latch position altered up and down minimum of 2 inches (51 mm) in steel and aluminum doors without additional adjustment. Bottom latch deadlocks in every adjustment position in wood doors. 5) Top and bottom latches in steel and aluminum doors and top latch in wood doors may be removed while door is hanging. 14. Top latch mounting: double or single tab mount for steel doors, face mount for aluminum doors eliminating requirement of tabs, and double tab mount for wood doors. 15. Provide exit devices with optional trim designs to match other lever and pull designs used on the project. a. Tactile Warning (Knurling): Where required by authority having jurisdiction. Provide on levers on exterior (secure side) of doors serving rooms considered to be hazardous. 2.08 CYLINDERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Schlage FSIC Primus XP B. Requirements: 1. Provide cylinders/cores, compliant with ANSI/BHMA A156.5; latest revision; cylinder face finished to match lockset, manufacturer's series as indicated. Refer to "KEYING" article, herein. 2. Provide cylinders in the below -listed configuration(s), distributed throughout the Project as indicated. a. High Security: dual -locking cylinder with permanent core requiring restricted, patented keyway. Dual -locking mechanism with interlocking finger pin(s) to check for patented features on keys. 3. Patent Protection: Cylinders/cores requiring use of restricted, patented keys, patent - protected. 4. Nickel silver bottom pins. 08710- 13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE C. Construction Keying: 1. Replaceable Construction Cores. a. Provide temporary construction cores replaceable by permanent cores, furnished in accordance with the following requirements. 1) 3 construction control keys 2) 12 construction change (day) keys. b. Owner or Owner's Representative will replace temporary construction cores with permanent cores. 2.09 KEYING A. Provide a factory registered keying system, complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference. B. Comply with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference. C. Provide cylinders/cores keyed into Owner's existing keying system managed by Owner's locksmith, complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference. Contact: 1. Firm Name: 2. Contact Person: 3. Telephone: D. Requirements: 1. Provide permanent cylinders/cores keyed by the manufacturer according to the following key system. a. Master Keying system as directed by the Owner. 2. Forward bitting list and keys separately from cylinders, by means as directed by Owner. Failure to comply with forwarding requirements will be cause for replacement of cylinders/cores involved at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Provide keys with the following features: a. Material: Nickel silver; minimum thickness of .107-inch (2.3mm) b. Patent Protection: Keys and blanks protected by one or more utility patent(s). 4. Identification: a. Mark permanent cylinders/cores and keys with applicable blind code per DHI publication "Keying Systems and Nomenclature" for identification. Do not provide blind code marks with actual key cuts. b. Identification stamping provisions must be approved by the Architect and Owner. 08710- 14 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE c. Stamp cylinders/cores and keys with Owner's unique key system facility code as established by the manufacturer; key symbol and embossed or stamped with "DO NOT DUPLICATE" along with the "PATENTED" or patent number to enforce the patent protection. d. Failure to comply with stamping requirements will be cause for replacement of keys involved at no additional cost to Owner. e. Forward permanent cylinders/cores to Owner, separately from keys, by means as directed by Owner. 5. Quantity: Furnish in the following quantities. a. Change (Day) Keys: 3 per cylinder/core. b. Master Keys: 6. 2.10 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Telkee. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: HPC, Lund. B. Requirements: 1. Provide key control system, including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150% of number of locks required for Project. a. Provide complete cross index system set up by hardware supplier, and place keys on markers and hooks in cabinet as determined by final key schedule. b. Provide hinged -panel type cabinet for wall mounting. 2.11 DOOR CLOSERS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Falcon SC80 series. B. Requirements: 1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. 2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with aluminum cylinder. 3. Closer Body: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) diameter, with 5/8 inch (16 mm) diameter heat -treated pinion journal. 4. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. 5. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards. 08710- 15 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE 6. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper -proof, non -critical valves, with separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck. 7. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted. 8. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting. 2.12 DOOR TRIM A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. B. Requirements: 1. Provide push plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick and beveled 4 edges. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit. 2. Provide push bars of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Provide push bars of sufficient length to span from center to center of each stile. Where required, mount back to back with pull. 3. Provide offset pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar. 4. Provide flush pulls as scheduled. Where required, provide back-to-back mounted model. 5. Provide pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar. 6. Provide pull plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick, beveled 4 edges, and prepped for pull. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit. 7. Provide wire pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. 8. Provide decorative pulls as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with pull. 2.13 PROTECTION PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. B. Requirements: 1. Provide kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates minimum of 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick, beveled four edges as scheduled. Furnish with sheet metal or wood screws, finished to match plates. 2. Sizes of plates: a. Kick Plates: 10 inches (254 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs b. Mop Plates: 4 inches (102 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs 08710- 16 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE c. Armor Plates: 36 inches (914 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) Tess width of door on pairs 2.14 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. B. Provide door stops at each door leaf: 1. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks are used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used. 2. Where a wall stop cannot be used, provide universal floor stops for low or high rise options. 3. Where wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop. 2.15 THRESHOLDS, SEALS, DOOR SWEEPS, AUTOMATIC DOOR BOTTOMS, AND GASKETING A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Zero International. B. Requirements: 1. Provide thresholds, weather-stripping (including door sweeps, seals, and astragals) and gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural details. Match finish of other items. 2. Smoke- and Draft -Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft -control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 3. Size of thresholds: a. Saddle Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by jamb width by door width b. Bumper Seal Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by 5 inches (127 mm) wide by door width 4. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available. 2.16 SILENCERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. 08710- 17 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE B. Requirements: 1. Provide "push -in" type silencers for hollow metal or wood frames. 2. Provide one silencer per 30 inches (762 mm) of height on each single frame, and two for each pair frame. 3. Omit where gasketing is specified. 2.17 LATCH PROTECTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. B. Provide stainless steel latch protectors of type required to function with specified lock. 2.18 FINISHES A. Finish: BHMA 626/652 (US26D); except: 1. Hinges at Exterior Doors: BHMA 630 (US32D) 2. Continuous Hinges: BHMA 630 (US32D) 3. Continuous Hinges: BHMA 628 (US28) 4. Push Plates, Pulls, and Push Bars: BHMA 630 (US32D) 5. Protection Plates: BHMA 630 (US32D) 6. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA 630 (US32D) 7. Door Closers: Powder Coat to Match 8. Wall Stops: BHMA 630 (US32D) 9. Latch Protectors: BHMA 630 (US32D) 10. Weatherstripping: Clear Anodized Aluminum 11. Thresholds: Mill Finish Aluminum PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation of hardware, examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire -rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Field verify existing doors and frames receiving new hardware and existing conditions receiving new openings. Verify that new hardware is compatible with existing door and frame preparation and existing conditions. C. Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 08710- 18 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE 3.02 PREPARATION A. Where on -site modification of doors and frames is required: 1. Carefully remove existing door hardware and components being reused. Clean, protect, tag, and store in accordance with storage and handling requirements specified herein. 2. Field modify and prepare existing door and frame for new hardware being installed. 3. When modifications are exposed to view, use concealed fasteners, when possible. 4. Prepare hardware locations and reinstall in accordance with installation requirements for new door hardware and with: a. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. b. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors." c. Doors in rated assemblies: NFPA 80 for restrictions on on -site door hardware preparation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following, unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, using only fasteners provided by manufacturer. C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Protect all installed hardware during painting. D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. F. Install operating parts so they move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance. G. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than quantity recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. H. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 08710- 19 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE 1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying section. 2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. I. Wiring: Coordinate with Division 26, ELECTRICAL sections for: 1. Conduit, junction boxes and wire pulls. 2. Connections to and from power supplies to electrified hardware. 3. Connections to fire/smoke alarm system and smoke evacuation system. 4. Connection of wire to door position switches and wire runs to central room or area, as directed by Architect. 5. Testing and labeling wires with Architect's opening number. J. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. K. Door Closers: Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors from corridors. Mount closers so they are not visible in corridors, lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect. L. Closer/Holders: Mount closer/holders on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors. M. Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings or in equipment room, or alternate location as directed by Architect. N. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." O. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present tripping hazard. P. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. Q. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. R. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports to installed confirm installed work complies with contract documents and where necessary adjust hardware is properly installed and adjusted per manufacturers requirements and recommendations. 08710- 20 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 2. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three to six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant must examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors and door hardware. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.07 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Hardware items are referenced in the following hardware. Refer to the above -specifications for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements. B. Hardware Sets: HARDWARE GROUP NO. 01 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER EA ALL HARDWARE BY ROOF HATCH SUPPLIER 08710- 21 10-04-19 Issue for Bid FINISH MFR ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 02 Provide each RU door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740-XP 626 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-059-ICX (CAM/COLLAR AS REQ) 626 SCH 1 EA NOTE REMAINDER OF HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER -COORDINATE HARDWARE WITH DOOR MFR. HARDWARE GROUP NO. 03 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD/224HD (AS REQ'D) 628 IVE 1 EA OFFICE LOCK MA521L QG 626 FAL 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740-XP 626 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-094 X B520-698 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 RW/PA FC 689 FAL 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEAL PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER NOTE: ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOOR TO REQUIRE 5+ INCH STILE WIDTH TO ACCOMMODATE MORTISE LOCK BODY. HARDWARE GROUP NO. 04 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 (3 EA. PER LEAF @ 652 IVE DOORS UNDER 90") 1 EA OFFICE LOCK MA521 L QG 626 FAL 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-094 X B520-698 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740-XP 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 188S PSA H & J (USE SILENCERS @ BK ZER NON -RATED DOORS) 08710- 22 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 05 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 (3 EA. PER LEAF @ DOORS UNDER 90") MA581 L QG 20-740-XP 26-094 X B520-698 SC81 RW/PA FC 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS WS406/407CCV 188S PSA H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON -RATED DOORS) QTY 4 EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EA EA EA EA EA EA EA HARDWARE Provide each QTY 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 SET STOREROOM LOCK PRIMUS CORE MORTISE CYLINDER SURFACE CLOSER PROTECTION PLATE WALL STOP GASKETING GROUP NO. 06 SGL door(s) with the following: DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER 112HD/224HD (AS REQ'D) MA581 L QG 20-740-XP 26-094 X B520-698 SC81 RW/PA FC WS406/407CCV PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER NOTE: ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOOR TO REQUIRE 5+ INCH STILE WIDTH TO ACCOMMODATE MORTISE LOCK BODY. FINISH MFR 652 IVE 626 FAL 626 SCH 626 SCH 689 FAL 630 IVE 630 IVE BK ZER CONT. HINGE STOREROOM LOCK PRIMUS CORE MORTISE CYLINDER SURFACE CLOSER WALL STOP SEAL HARDWARE GROUP NO. 07 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 (3 EA. PER LEAF @ DOORS UNDER 90") MA581 L QG 26-094 X B520-698 20-740-XP SC81 SS FC 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 188S PSA H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON -RATED DOORS) QTY 4 EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 EA EA EA EA EA EA STOREROOM LOCK MORTISE CYLINDER PRIMUS CORE SURFACE CLOSER PROTECTION PLATE GASKETING 08710- 23 10-04-19 Issue for Bid FINISH MFR 628 IVE 626 FAL 626 SCH 626 SCH 689 FAL 630 IVE FINISH MFR 652 IVE 626 FAL 626 SCH 626 SCH 689 FAL 630 IVE BK ZER ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 08 Provide each SGL door(s) with the follow QTY DESCRIPTION 3 EA HINGE EA EA EA EA ing: CATALOG NUMBER 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 (3 EA. PER LEAF @ DOORS UNDER 90") MA311 OCCUPIED/VACANT QGM SC81 SS FC 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 188S PSA H & J (USE SILENCERS @ NON -RATED DOORS) -LOCKED/UNLOCKED INDICATOR ON OUTSIDE OF DOOR. PRIVACY LOCK SURFACE CLOSER PROTECTION PLATE GASKETING FINISH MFR 652 IVE 626 FAL 689 FAL 630 IVE BK ZER HARDWARE GROUP NO. 09 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD/224HD (AS REQ'D) 628 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK MA561 L QG 626 FAL 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-094 X B520-698 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740-XP 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 RW/PA FC 689 FAL 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 SET SEAL PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER NOTE: ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOOR TO REQUIRE 5+ INCH STILE WIDTH TO ACCOMMODATE MORTISE LOCK BODY. HARDWARE GROUP NO. 10 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD/224HD (AS REQ'D) 628 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK MA561 L QG 626 FAL 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-094 X B520-698 626 SCH 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740-XP 626 SCH 1 EA OH STOP 100S SERIES X SIZE & MOUNTING AS 630 GLY REQ 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 RW/PA FC X SPECIAL 689 FAL TEMPLATE AS REQ 1 SET SEAL PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER NOTE: ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOOR TO REQUIRE 5+ INCH STILE WIDTH TO ACCOMMODATE MORTISE LOCK BODY. 08710- 24 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 11 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER 1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD/224HD (AS REQ'D) 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 33A-NL-OP 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740-XP 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 ICX W/CONST. CORE 1 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190-0 10" 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 RW/PA FC 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 1 SET SEAL PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER HARDWARE GROUP NO. 12 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY 4 1 1 1 1 1 EA EA EA EA EA EA DESCRIPTION HINGE FIRE EXIT HARDWARE SURFACE CLOSER PROTECTION PLATE WALL STOP GASKETING CATALOG NUMBER 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 99-L-BE-F-17 SC81 RW/PA FC 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS WS406/407CCV 188S PSA H & J HARDWARE GROUP NO. 13 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY 4 1 1 1 1 1 3 EA EA EA EA EA EA EA DESCRIPTION HINGE PULL PLATE PUSH PLATE SURFACE CLOSER PROTECTION PLATE WALL STOP SILENCER CATALOG NUMBER 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 8303 CTC10" 4"X16" 8200 4" X 16" SC81 RW/PA FC 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS WS406/407CCV S R64 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 14 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY 1 1 1 1 1 EA EA EA EA SET DESCRIPTION CONT. HINGE PUSH/PULL BAR SURFACE CLOSER WALL STOP SEAL CATALOG NUMBER 112HD/224HD (AS REQ'D) 9190-NO-10" SC81 RW/PA FC WS406/407CCV PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER 08710- 25 10-04-19 Issue for Bid FINISH MFR 628 IVE 626 VON 626 SCH 626 SCH 630 IVE 689 FAL 630 IVE FINISH MFR 652 IVE 626 VON 689 FAL 630 IVE 630 IVE BK ZER FINISH MFR 652 IVE 630 IVE 630 IVE 689 FAL 630 IVE 630 IVE GRY IVE FINISH MFR 628 IVE 630 IVE 689 FAL 630 IVE ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 15 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: QTY 1 1 1 EA EA EA DESCRIPTION CONT. HINGE PUSH/PULL BAR OH STOP 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1 SET SEAL HARDWARE GROUP NO. 16 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION 2 EA CONT. HINGE 2 EA PUSH/PULL BAR 1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 2 EA ACTUATOR, WALL MOUNT 2 EA WALL STOP 1 SET SEAL 1 SET ASTRAGAL CATALOG NUMBER 112HD/224HD (AS REQ'D) 9190-NO-10" 100S SERIES X SIZE & MOUNTING AS REQ SC81 RW/PA FC X SPECIAL TEMPLATE AS REQ PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER CATALOG NUMBER 112HD/224HD (AS REQ'D) 9190-NO-10" AUTOMATIC OPENERS BY DIVISION 08 71 13 (BOTH LEAFS) ACTUATOR(S) BY DIVISION 08 71 13 WS406/407CCV PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER MEETING STILE SEAL BY DOOR MANUFACTURER OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION: PRESSING EITHER ACTUATOR TO INITIATE AUTO OPERATOR. OPERATOR TO SEQUENCE WITH EXTERIOR VESTIBULE DOOR'S OPERATOR. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. FINISH MFR 628 IVE 630 IVE 630 GLY 689 FAL 08710- 26 10-04-19 Issue for Bid FINISH MFR 628 IVE 630 IVE ANCLR LCN 630 LCN 630 IVE ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 17 Provide each QTY 2 EA 2 EA 1 EA PR door(s) with the following: DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER CONTINUOUS HINGE BY DOOR/FRAME MANUFACTURER POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON ELEC PANIC RX-QEL-HH-KAW-9947-EO-CON HARDWARE 1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 1 EA PRIMUS CORE 2 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 2 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 1 EA SEQUENCER 2 EA ACTUATOR, WALL MOUNT 1 SET SEAL 1 SET ASTRAGAL 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 1 EA HD THRESHOLD 2 1 2 1 EA EA EA ACCESSORIES MULTITECH READER DOOR CONTACT RX-QEL-H H-KAW-9947-N L-O P-110M D- CON 20-057 ICX W/CONST. CORE 20-740-XP 8190-0 10" AUTOMATIC OPENERS BY DIVISION 08 71 13 SEQUENCER BY DIVISION 08 71 13 ACTUATOR(S) BY DIVISION 08 71 13 (BOLLARD POST AS REQ) PERIMETER SEAL BY FRAME MANUFACTURER MEETING STILE SEAL BY DOOR MANUFACTURER APPROVED FOR USE WITH OPENING SYSTEM APPROVED FOR USE WITH OPENING SYSTEM CON -KIT MT15 - BY DIVISION 28 7764 POWER SUPPLY - WORK OF DIVISION 28 @ QELS FINISH MFR 628 KAW 689 VON 626 VON 626 VON 626 SCH 626 SCH 630 IVE ANCLR LCN LCN 630 LCN SCH BLK SCE 628 SCE NOTE: VERIFY WINDSTORM "CERTIFICATION" OF SPECIFIED HARDWARE W/DOOR SYSTEM. HARDWARE BUILT AS A BASIS -OF -DESIGN AROUND KAWNEER 5001R DOOR SYSTEM. OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION: ENTRY BY CARD READER OR MANUAL KEY OVERRIDE. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. 08710- 27 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DOOR HARDWARE HARDWARE GROUP NO. 18 Provide each SGL door(s) with the follow QTY DESCRIPTION 4 EA HINGE 1 EA 1 EA 1 1 1 EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA POWER TRANSFER ELEC FIRE EXIT HARDWARE RIM CYLINDER PRIMUS CORE SURFACE CLOSER PROTECTION PLATE GASKETING RAIN DRIP SEALS DOOR SWEEP THRESHOLD ACCESSORIES MULTITECH READER DOOR CONTACT ing: CATALOG NUMBER 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP (3 EA. PER LEAF @ DOORS UNDER 90") EPT10 CON RX-Q E L-H H-99-N L-F-C O N 20-057 ICX W/CONST. CORE 20-740-XP 4040XP SCUSH X MTG BRKT, SPCR & PLATE AS REQ 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 328AA H & J 142A DW + 4" PS-074 FAS-SEAL 566A-223 CON -KIT MT15 - BY DIVISION 28 679-05 TYPE AS REQ POWER SUPPLY - WORK OF DIVISION 28 FINISH MFR 630 IVE 689 VON 626 VON 626 SCH 626 SCH 689 LCN 630 IVE AA ZER AA ZER STE STE A ZER SCH BLK SCE WHT SCE NOTE: VERIFY WINDSTORM "CERTIFICATION" OF SPECIFIED HARDWARE W/DOOR SYSTEM. HARDWARE BUILT AS A BASIS -OF -DESIGN AROUND STEELCRAFT DOOR SYSTEM. OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION: ENTRY BY CARD READER OR MANUAL KEY OVERRIDE. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. END OF SECTION 08710- 28 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GLAZING SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Glazed entrances. 4. Interior lites/walls. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating -glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 08800-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GLAZING Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated -glass standard. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: 120 mph sustained and 150 mph gusts. b. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour (meters per second) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. 1) Basic Wind Speed: 120 MPH 2) Importance Factor: I. 3) Exposure Category: C. c. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4 edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less, without damage. 1) For monolithic -glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads. 2) For insulating glass. 3) For laminated -glass lites. d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 9/16 inch. e. Thickness of Tinted and Heat -Absorbing Glass: Provide the same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project. 08800-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GLAZING C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic -glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick of thickness indicated. 2. For laminated -glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating -glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 4. Center -of -Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program for the following methodologies: a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Samples for glass. 1. Each color of tinted float glass. 2. Each type of laminated glass with colored interlayer. 3. Insulating glass for each designation indicated. 4. For each color (except black) of exposed glazing sealant indicated. C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1. For solar -control low-e-coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer. E. Qualification Data: For installers. F. Product Test Reports: For each of the following types of glazing products: 08800-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GLAZING 1. Tinted float glass. 2. Laminated glass. 3. Insulating glass. 4. Glazing sealants. G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single manufacturer for each glass type: clear float glass, coated float glass, laminated glass, glass - clad polycarbonate, and insulating glass. C. Source Limitations for Glass Sputter -Coated with Solar -Control Low-E Coatings: Where solar - control low-e coatings of a primary glass manufacturer that has established a certified fabricator program is specified, obtain sputter -coated solar -control low-e-coated glass in fabricated units from a manufacturer that is certified by coated -glass manufacturer. D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated. E. Glazing for Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. Glazing for Fire -Rated Window Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. G. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and, for wired glass, ANSI Z97.1. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency or manufacturer acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m) in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m) or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 08800-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GLAZING H. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA Laminated Division's "Laminated Glass Design Guide" and GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units." I. Insulating -Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and inspecting agency: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council. 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. For insulating -glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating -glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated -Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by coated -glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated -glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 08800-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GLAZING B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by laminated -glass manufacturer agreeing to replace laminated -glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by insulating -glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating -glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for each glazing product is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. a. Manufacturer: VITRO/PPG 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of class indicated. B. Heat -Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller -hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide Kind HS (heat -strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. 3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 4. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass). 5. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat - strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated. 08800-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GLAZING C. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with other requirements specified and with the following: 1. Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral or cured resin of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation. a. For polyvinyl butyral interlayers, laminate lites in autoclave with heat plus pressure. b. For cured -resin interlayers, laminate lites with laminated -glass manufacturer's standard cast -in -place and cured -transparent -resin interlayer. 2. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets. D. Insulating -Glass Units, General: Factory -assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating -Glass Units" Article. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat -strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. 2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety glass is indicated. 3. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating - glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge. 4. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows: a. Manufacturer's standard sealants. b. Polyisobutylene, silicone and structural silicone. 5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 6. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction complying with the following requirements: a. Spacer Material: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish, Aluminum with black, color anodic finish, Aluminum with bronze, color anodic finish, Aluminum with powdered metal paint finish in color selected by Architect, Galvanized steel, or Stainless steel. b. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. c. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction. 2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 08800-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GLAZING 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid -applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1. Single -Component Neutral- and Basic -Curing or Neutral -Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants: a. Available Products: 1) Dow Corning Corporation; 993. 2) GE Silicones; SilPruf SCS2000. 3) Tremco; Spectrem 3 b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: 50. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates indicated, O. 1) Use 0 Glazing Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, and wood. 2. Class 25 Neutral -Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: a. Available Products: 1) Dow Corning Corporation; 797. 2) GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000. 3) GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000AC. 4) Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-631. 5) Schnee -Morehead, Inc.; SM5731 Poly -Glaze Plus. 6) Tremco; Proglaze SG. 7) Tremco; Spectrem 2. 8) Tremco; Tremsil 600. b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: 25. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates indicated, O. 08800-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GLAZING 1) Use 0 Glazing Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, and wood. C. Glazing Sealants for Fire -Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to products used in test assemblies to obtain fire -protection rating. 2.4 GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl -based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed -cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 08800-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GLAZING F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open -cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire -Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire -resistance rating. 2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat -grind vertical edges of butt -glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. 2.7 MONOLITHIC FLOAT -GLASS UNITS: INTERIOR GLAZING A. Uncoated Ultra -Clear Float -Glass Units MG: Class 2 (clear) Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass where required by code. 1. Thickness: 9.0 mm. (3/8" inch), 12mm (1/2" inch) and 18.0mm (3/4" inch). 2. Color: Ultra -Clear, by: PPG, "Starfire". 2.8 LAMINATED -GLASS UNITS A. Heat -Treated Laminated -Glass Units LG: 1 (For Exterior Doors) 1. Kind LT, consisting of two lites of fully tempered float glass. 2. Lite: 2 (tinted) float glass. a. Tint Color: "Clear" by PPG Industries, Inc. b. Kind FT (fully tempered). c. Thickness: 6.0 mm minimum. d. Basis -of -Design: PPG SOLARBAN 90 and CLEAR 3. Inner Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass. a. Kind FT (fully tempered). b. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 4. Plastic Interlayer: 08800-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GLAZING a. Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), but not less than that required to comply as a Type II safety glass material. b. Interlayer Color: Clear 5.Overall Thickness: 9/16 inch 2.9 INSULATING -GLASS UNITS A. Solar -Control Low-E Insulating -Glass Units IG: #1 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1- inch. 2. Interspace/ Content: IA inch/ ARGON 3. Indoor Lite: Ultra -Clear float glass complying with ceramic -coated vision -glass requirements. a. Tint Color: Ultra -Clear 'Vitro" SOLARBAN 100 (2) Clear + Clear b. Kind FT (fully tempered). c. Self -Cleaning, Low -Maintenance Coating: Pyrolytic coating on first surface. d. Thickness: 1/4 inch Laminated 4. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 Ultra -clear float glass. a. Kind FT (fully tempered). b. Thickness: '/4 inch 5. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on third surface 6. Visible Light Transmittance: 42 percent minimum. 7. Winter Argon U-Factor: 0.25 maximum (with ARGON). 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.23 maximum. 9. Reflectance: [Exterior lite] 32% 10. Reflectance: [Interior lite][ 14% 11. Light to Solar Gain (LSG) 1.83 12. Basis -of -Design: "VITRO" SOLARBAN 100 (2) Clear + Clear 2.10 INSULATING UNITS (FOR INSULATED GLASS DOORS A. Solar — Control Low-E Insulating Glass Units IG # 2 1. Overall thickness: 9/16 inch 2. Interspace content: 1/4 inch/argon 3. Indoor Lite: Ultra -Clear float glass complying with ceramic coated vision glass requirements. a. Tint Color: Ultra -Clear Solarban 100 (2) Clear + Clear b. Kind FT (fully tempered) 08800-11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GLAZING c. Self cleaning, low maintenance coatings pyrolytic coating on first surface d. Thickness: 3/6 inch 4. Outdoor Lite: Class I Ultra -Clear float glass a. Kind FT (Fully tempered) b. Thickness: 1/8 inch 5. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on third surface 6. Visible light transmittance: 54 percent maximum 7. Basis -of -Design: "Vitro" Solarban 100 (2) Clear + Clear 2.11 INTERIOR GLASS FOR FULL HEIGHT GLASS PARTITIONS AND DOORS. 1. "Vitro" — Starfire, Glass I Ultra -Clear Float Glass 2. Kind FT — (Fully Tempered) 3. Thickness: As indicated on the drawings 2.12 SPANDREL GLASS A. Glass Type: Silicone -coated spandrel glass; fully tempered float glass. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Vitro/PPG 2. Glass: Clear float glass. 3. Coating Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Minimum Thickness: 6mm 5. Coating Location: Second surface. 6. Winter Nightime U-Factor: 0.25 maximum. 7. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.23 maximum. 8. Fallout Resistance: Passes fallout -resistance test in ASTM C1048 for an assembly of glass and adhered reinforcing material. 08800-12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GLAZING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass -framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant -substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as follows: 08800-13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GLAZING 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that. when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 08800-14 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GLAZING 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. 08800-15 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GLAZING E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 08800-16 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING SECTION 08811 DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. Section Includes: Laminated glass with color interlayer. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09700 — Wall Finishes 3. Section 08111 — Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 5. Section 08411 — Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 1.2 References A. ASTM International 1. ASTM C 1036 Specification for Flat Glass 2. ASTM C 1048 Specification for Heat -Treated Flat Glass -Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass 3. ASTM C 1172 Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass 4. ASTM E-774-Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units where insulating glass is specified B. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 1. ANSI Z-97.1 Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test Used in Buildings 2. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials, Category I and II 1.3 Submittals A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, installation drawings, installation instructions and maintenance instructions. C. Submit environmental impact data for all materials. D. Submit samples no less than 6" x 6" for all specified glass configurations.. E. Manufacturer information: 1. Provide overview literature describing manufacturer's overall scope of products and manufacturing capabilities. 2. Provide URL for manufacturer's web site; web site must provide access to technical data, images and general product information. 08811-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer Qualifications 1. Minimum 10 years experience in the manufacture of laminated glass. 2. Minimum 10 years experience in the fabrication of laminated glass. 3. Provide test reports indicating products meet or exceed specified requirements. B. Installer Qualifications 1. Minimum three years experience in the installation of glass. 1.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Deliver materials to installation site in manufacturer's original packaging. Handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Store in dry, secure location, protected against direct sunlight and excessive heat. Protect finished surfaces with strippable film. 1.6 Warranty A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty. 1. Warranty terms: one year against defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.1 Manufacturer (Basis of Design) A. Forms+Surfaces 30 Pine Street Pittsburgh, PA 15223 phone: 800-451-0410 fax: 412-781-7840 email: sales(forms-surfaces.com website: www.vividglass.com B. Bendheim. ltd C. Or approved equal per Submitall Procedure. 2.2 ViviChrome Chromis Laminated Glass A. Material 1. Configuration: Reflect 2. Color: Seaglass, 3. Finish: Standard 4 Translucency: LumiLevel #6 5. Processing: polished edges 6. Overall Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm 7. Fire rating: ViviChrome Chromis glass is Class A fire rated in accordance with ASTM designation E84-09, standard test method of surface burning characteristics of building materials. The foregoing test procedure is comparable to UL 723, ANSI/NFPA No. 255, and UBC No. 8-1. 08811-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING Associated Components A. Top Lite 1. Type: Tempered 2. Thickness: 6.0 mm, 3. Class: Clear B. Bottom Lite 1. Type: Tempered 2. Thickness: 6.0 mm 3. Class: Clear C. Interlayer 1. Design: Manufactured by VividGlass, a Forms+Surfaces company. 2. Thickness: 2 mm. 2.3 Hardware A. Slot Mount Standoff 1. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel B. Edge Grip Standoff 1. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel C. Round Standoff 1. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel 2. Base Length: To be verified with manufacturer D. Spider Fitting 1. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel 2. Configuration: To be verified with manufacturer E. Square Mall Clamp 1. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel F. Tapered Rail: 1. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel 08811-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING PART - 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Preparation A. Protect glass and equipment from damage caused by work of this Section. 3.2 Installation A. Install ViviChrome Chromis in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at locations indicated on the drawings. 3.4 Cleaning and Protection A. Protect laminated glazing in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual. B. Clean laminated glazing materials in accordance with GANA Bulletin 01-0300. END OF SECTION 08811 08811-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIXED LOUVERS SECTION 08911 FIXED LOUVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fixed, extruded -aluminum louvered mechanical equipment screen. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for steel support structure for equipment screen. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. B. Vertical Louver: Louver with vertical blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are vertical). 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals. B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. 1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion. 2. Show mullion profiles and locations. C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required. 08911-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIXED LOUVERS D. Delegated -Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural performance requirements, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory -applied color finish. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using structural performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver -blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building. 1. Wind Loads: ASCE 7-10 as indicated on the drawings. a. Wind Speed (Basis of Design): Texas Department of Insurance requirements for Brazoria County, Inland Zone II, 110 mph, 3-sec gust. b. Wind Speed (Ultimate): IBC 2015, 141 mph, 3-sec gust. c. Wind Speed (Allowable Stress Design): IBC 2015, 110 mph, 3-sec gust. 2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED -ALUMINUM LOUVERS Vertical, Sightproof Louver at Equipment Screen: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Airolite Company, LLC (The). b. All-Lite Architectural Products. c. Construction Specialties, Inc ' Vert -a -Cade 1200 Equipment Screen" (Basis of Design). d. Industrial Louvers Inc. 08911-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIXED LOUVERS e. Ruskin Company. 2. Louver Depth: 4 inches nominal. 3. Blade Profile: Labyrinth or Z-shaped blade. 4. Blade Nominal Thickness: Not Tess than 0.080 inch . 5. Blade Spacing: 6 inches o.c. maximum 6. Mullion Type: Exposed blades; frameless and mullion -less. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 , Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 1. Use hex -head or Phillips pan -head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless -steel fasteners. 3. Use 300 series stainless -steel fasteners. 4. For color -finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. D. Galvanic Separator: Non -bituminous flexible flashing. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance. C. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. D. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish louvers after assembly. 08911-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIXED LOUVERS B. High -Performance Organic Finish: Two -coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. E. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous -metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 07920 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period. END OF SECTION 08911 08911-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09211 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Comply with requirements of Section 09212, Non -Structural Metal Framing. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Gypsum board shaft wall assemblies. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each component of gypsum board shaft wall assembly. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 09211-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 2.2 A. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and inspecting agency. GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES: Fire -Resistance Rating: As indicated. STC Rating: As indicated. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated. 1. Depth: As indicated. 2. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As supported by analysis.. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with manufacturer's standard long -leg length, but at least 2 inches long and matching studs in depth. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.021 inch . E. Firestop Tracks: Provide firestop track at head of shaft wall on each floor level. F Elevator Hoistway Entrances: Manufacturer's standard J-profile jamb strut with long -leg length of 3 inches , matching studs in depth, and not less than 0.033 inch thick. G. Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets. 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.4 NON -LOAD -BEARING STEEL FRAMING A. Steel Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 09211-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot -dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. B. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes as specified in Section 09290 "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated. D. Track Fasteners: Power -driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. 1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a Toad equal to 5 times design Toad, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency. 2. Power -Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in Section 09290 "Gypsum Board." F. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 09290 "Gypsum Board." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer present, including hollow -metal frames, elevator hoistway door frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing. Examine for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 09211-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 3.2 PREPARATION Sprayed Fire -Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum board shaft wall assemblies so both elements of Work remain complete and undamaged. 3.3 INSTALLATION General: Install gypsum board shaft wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire - resistance -rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and ASTM C 754 other than stud -spacing requirements. B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft wall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support. C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, wall -mounted door stops, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft wall assembly framing. 1. Elevator Hoistway: At elevator hoistway-entrance door frames, provide jamb struts on each side of door frame. 2. Reinforcing: Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft wall assemblies, provide galvanized steel reinforcing strip with 0.033-inch minimum thickness of base metal (uncoated), accurately positioned and secured behind at least one layer of face panel. D. Penetrations: At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire -resistance rating of shaft wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items. E. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while maintaining continuity of fire -rated construction. F. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated. G. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect while maintaining fire -resistance rating of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies. Sound -Rated Shaft Wall Assemblies: Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Cant Panels: At projections into shaft exceeding 4 inches , install 1/2- or 5/8-inch-thick gypsum board cants covering tops of projections. 09211-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 1. Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels in adhesive and secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches o.c. with screws fastened to shaft wall framing. 2. Where steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants, install framing at 24 inches o.c. and extend studs from the projection to shaft wall framing. J. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09211 09211-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING SECTION 09221 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non -load -bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05400 "Cold -Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load -bearing and exterior non -load -bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Delegated Design Submittal: Submit for deferred approval and Architect's record. Provide for non -load -bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies, shaft wall, and interior ceiling, soffit and grid systems, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer licensed in the State of Texas. B. Evaluation Reports: For firestop tracks, from ICC-ES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies that incorporate non - load -bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 09221-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. C. Framing Member Requirements: Comply with ASTM C 645, ASTM C 955 ASTM A 1003and ASTM A 653 as modified below. 1. Stud Material: Provide roll -formed studs from hot dip galvanized steel only, min. G40 coating. Minimum 1.625-inch faces. No EQ coatings permitted. 2. Stud Spacing: 24 inches o.c. max. 3. Stud Gauge: As required by the more stringent of ASTM C 754, manufacturer's product data and Steel Stud Manufacturer's Association (SSMA) for limiting heights, structural determinations, and conditions of use. Installed gauge of studs shall not be less than required thickness as calculated, nor less than 95% of Design Thickness. 4. Minimum Elevator Shaft Air Pressure Loads: a. Elevator Velocity 0 to 180 feet per minute: 5.0 pounds per sq. ft. (psf) for all configurations. b. Elevator Velocity 181 to 700 feet per minute: 7.5 psf for one or two elevators per shaft; 5.0 psf for three or more elevators per shaft. c. Elevator Velocity 701 to 1,600 feet per minute: 10.0 psf for one or two elevators per shaft; 7.5 psf for three or more elevators per shaft. d. Elevator Velocity 1,601 to 2,000 feet per minute: 15.0 psf for two elevators per shaft; 7.5 psf for three or more elevators per shaft. Provide calculations for shafts with one elevator. e. Provide structural cold -formed metal framing for partition loads exceeding 15.0 psf. 5. Maximum Allowable Deflections of Gypsum Board Assemblies: a. Stairs, Elevators, Hoistways and other Vertical Shafts, excluding those with tile, stone and GFRC finishes: Maximum L/240. b. Ground Floor Lobbies, excluding those with tile, stone and GFRC finishes: Maximum L/120. c. Partitions to Receive Tile, Stone and GFRC Finishes: Maximum L/360. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 , hot -dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Dimpled studs not allowed. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch but not less than required by analysis. 09221-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Single Long -Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Double -Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch or as indicated. F. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base -metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches . 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches , 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel. G. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch . 2. Depth: 7/8 inch . H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical. I. Cold -Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 3/4 inch . 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated -steel thickness of 0.033 inch . 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire. 09221-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING J. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches , wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch , minimum uncoated -metal thickness of 0.018 inch , and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. a. Type: Cast -in -place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete forms or Post - installed, expansion anchor. 2. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated. E. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base -metal thickness of 0.053 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches . F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold -Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch . 3. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: hat shaped. 09221-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct -hung system composed of main beams and cross -furring members that interlock. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive -backed, closed -cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire -Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire -resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c. 2. After sprayed fire -resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non -load -bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire -resistive materials below that required for fire -resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire - resistive materials from damage. 09221-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation. 2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation. 3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation. 4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load -bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. Stud spacings shall not exceed spacing required by analysis, listings, and the following: 1. Single -Layer Application: 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 09221-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire -Resistance -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire -resistance - rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound -rated assembly indicated. E. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. F. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 07210 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced not more than 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw -attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: Maximum 48 inches o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 24 inches o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 09221-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast -in -place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled -in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Seismic Bracing: Sway -brace suspension systems with hangers used for support and as indicated. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross -furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 09221 09221-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09290 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09221 "Non -Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. a. The performance and deflection criteria of this section applies to all finished, composite gypsum assemblies. 2. Section 09211 "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for metal shaft -wall framing, gypsum shaft liners, and other components of shaft -wall assemblies. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 09290-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GYPSUM BOARD 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper -faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch . 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. B. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch . 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Moisture- and Mold -Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold -resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch , Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 09290-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GYPSUM BOARD 2.4 SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board, Type C: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to have increased fire -resistive capability. 1. Thickness: As required by fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated on Drawings. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges. Use at wall tile surfaces, except showers and FRP. 1. Core: 5/8 inch , Type X. 2. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges. Use at tiled shower walls and under FRP. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation; FiberCement BackerBoard. b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. c. James Hardie Building Products, Inc; Hardiebacker 500. d. United States Gypsum Company; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Plastic. a. Basis of Design: Products manufactured by Trim -Tex, Inc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. d. Expansion (control) joint. 2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 09290-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GYPSUM BOARD 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting -type taping compound. a. Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high -build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of assembly. D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Hilti, Inc; CP 506 Smoke and Acoustical Sealant. 09290-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GYPSUM BOARD b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. c. Specified Technologies, Inc; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. d. United States Gypsum Company; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07210 'Thermal Insulation." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow -metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Ventilation: Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's written recommendations for ventilation during and following adhesive and joint treatment applications, and drying and curing times. 1. Use temporary air circulators in enclosed areas where ventilation is inadequate. 2. Allow additional time between coats of joint treatment under slow drying conditions. 3. Protect installed materials from drafts during hot, dry weather. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever is more stringent. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 09290-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GYPSUM BOARD 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load -bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 4. Moisture- and Mold -Resistant Type: Locker rooms, lavatory vestibules, vestibules and similar damp locations.. 5. Type C: Where required for specific fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated. Single -Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. 09290-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GYPSUM BOARD Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face -layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base -layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face -layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base -layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. 3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile, except showers. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at showers, tubs, and where indicated. C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. L-Bead: Use where indicated or required. 3. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges and where indicated or required. 3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. 09290-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GYPSUM BOARD D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09912 "Interior Painting." E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 PROTECTION Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non -drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09290 09290-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CERAMIC TILING SECTION 09301 CERAMIC TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Porcelain tile. 3. Waterproof membrane. 4. Metal edge strips. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07920 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 2. Section 09290 "Gypsum Board" for glass -mat, water-resistant backer board and cementitious backer units. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. 09301-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CERAMIC TILING 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12 inches square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. 3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 4. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. 5. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS System Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard 25-year warranty information.. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Provide 25-year system warranty on tile setting systems for shower enclosures, equivalent to Laticrete "25 Year System Warranty". 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. 09301-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CERAMIC TILING PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or producer. 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer. 1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer. 2. Obtain waterproof membrane, except for sheet products, from manufacturer of setting and grouting materials. C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer: 1. Metal edge strips. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. D. Mounting: For factory -mounted tile, provide back- or edge -mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where tile is indicated for installation on exteriors or in wet areas, do not use back- or edge -mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Ceramic Tile Types: As indicated 09301-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CERAMIC TILING 1. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.6, for wet areas. 2. Tile Color and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 3. Grout Color: as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Base Cove, Mosaic Tile: Cove, module size,. Basaes shall extend on walls to height indicated, but not less than 4 inches.. b. Straight Base for Thinset Mortar Installations: 6 inch x 24 inch, module size, with Schluter "Jolly" aluminum cap... c. External Corners for Mosaic Tile Installations: Bead (bullnose), module size 2 by 1 inch d. Internal Corners for Mosiac Tile: Cove, module size 2 by 1 inch . e. Internal Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations : Field -butted square corners. For coved base and cap, use angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes. 2.4 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. Fluid -Applied Membrane: Liquid -latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Custom Building Products; RedGard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane. b. LATICRETE International, Inc.; Laticrete Hydro Ban (Basis of Design). c. MAPEI Corporation; MapelasticTM AquaDefense. 2.5 SETTING MATERIALS Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02. 1. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded -wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches by 0.062-inch diameter; comply with ASTM A 185/A 185M and ASTM A 82/A 82M, except for minimum wire size. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Custom Building Products; FlexBond b. LATICRETE International, Inc.; 254 Platinum (Basis of Design). c. MAPEI Corporation; Granirapid® System. 2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. 09301-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CERAMIC TILING C. Medium -Bed, Latex -Portland Cement Mortar: Comply with requirements in ANSI A118.4. Provide product that is approved by manufacturer for application thickness indicated.. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide of same product quality and line as thinset mortar manufacturer or comparable product by one of the following: 2.6 GROUT MATERIALS A. High -Performance Tile Grout (General Purpose): ANSI A118.7. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by one of the following: a. Custom Building Products; Fusion Pro b. LATICRETE International, Inc.; "Permacolor Select" (Basis of Design). c. MAPEI Corporation; Ultracolor® Plus. B. Water -Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or Tess for Shower Enclosures and Shower Room Floors. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Custom Building Products. b. LATICRETE International, Inc.; "Spectralock Pro Premium" (Basis of Design). c. MAPEI Corporation; Kerapoxy®. 2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F , respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile -setting materials for installations indicated. B. Vapor -Retarder Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 4.0 mils thick. C. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting -bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; stainless -steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series or aluminum exposed -edge material. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Blanke Corporation; Blanke Edge Protector. b. Ceramic Tool Company, Inc. 09301-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CERAMIC TILING c. Schluter Systems L.P, "Schiene" for floors, "Jolly" for walls (Basis of Design). D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. 2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile -setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with bonded mortar bed comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 09301-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CERAMIC TILING 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile -setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors in laundries. c. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting -bed thickness so that tiles are flush. F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 09301-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CERAMIC TILING 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor. base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/8 inch typical unless noted otherwise. 2. Porcelain Tile: 1/8 inch unless noted otherwise. H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant -filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw -cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. J. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3.5 PROTECTION Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. 09301-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CERAMIC TILING 3.6 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation, Shower Floors: TCNA B421C and ANSI A108.1B; cement mortar bed (thickset) bonded to concrete. a. Provide waterproofing membrane. b. Bond Coat for Cured -Bed Method: Latex- portland cement mortar. 2. Ceramic Tile Installation Typical Floors: TCNA F113; thinset mortar. a. Thinset Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. b. Grout: High-performance sanded grout. B. Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation, Shower Walls: TCNA W244 and ANSI A108.1B; thinset mortar on cementitious backer units. a. Bond Coat for Cured -Bed Method: Latex-portland cement mortar. b. Waterproof Membrane: Provide full -height membrane per TCNA B421C and TCNA W244. c. Grout: Water -cleanable epoxy grout. 2. Ceramic Tile Installation Typical Walls: TCNA W245 or TCNA W248; thinset mortar on glass -mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board. a. Thinset Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. b. Grout: High-performance sanded grout. END OF SECTION 09301 09301-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch-square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension -System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch-long Samples of each type, finish, and color. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 09511-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 5 percent of quantity installed. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver acoustical panels, suspension -system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 50 or less. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer. C. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795. 09511-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS D. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS: A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc "Ultima" (typical) and "Ultima Health" (at shower rooms), as Basis of Design. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3. United States Gypsum Company. B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane -faced overlay; Form 2, water felted; with vinyl overlay on face. 2. Pattern: E (lightly textured). C. Color: White. D. Edge/Joint Detail: Square. E. Thickness: 3/4 inch . F. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches . 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension -System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct -hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. 1. High -Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high -humidity finishes are indicated. B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 09511-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Corrosion Protection: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition. C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc -Coated, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM: A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc Prelude ML or Prelude XL Basis of Design. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3. United States Gypsum Company. Wide -Face, Capped, Double -Web, Hot -Dip Galvanized, G60 , Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold -rolled steel sheet; hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation; with prefinished, cold -rolled, 15/16-inch-wide aluminum caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system. 2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Face Finish: Painted white. 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM: A. Roll -Formed, Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension -system runners. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. 09511-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant. 2. Acoustical sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 09511-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension -system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling -suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms, floor deck or roof deck. Fasten hangers to cast -in -place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power -actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast -in -place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet . Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension -system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension -system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. b. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of space. c. Install panels in a basket -weave pattern. 2. For square -edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension -system runners and moldings. 09511-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 3. For reveal -edged panels on suspension -system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 4. For reveal -edged panels on suspension -system members with box -shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension -system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners. 5. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension -system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09511 09511-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 09651 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard -size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections. 09651-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F . 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not Tess than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F , in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F . C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOSET -RUBBER BASE: A. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous). 1. Style and Location: a. Style A, Straight:.. B. Thickness: 0.125 inch . C. Height: 4 inches . D. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length but not less than 100 feet. E. Outside Corners: Preformed. F. Inside Corners: Preformed. G. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2.2 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY: A. Description: Rubber carpet edge for glue -down applications. 09651-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES B. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated. C. Locations: Provide aluminum trim at all transitions.. D. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowel -able Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or approved by resilient -product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient -product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowel -able leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 09651-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient -product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09651 09651-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING SECTION 09652 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid vinyl floor tile. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 20 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required. 09652-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F . Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F , in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F . C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 2.2 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE: A. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700. 1. Class: As indicated by product designations. 2. Type: B, embossed surface. B. Thickness: 0.100 inch. C. Size: As indicated. D. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 09652-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. C. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor -polish products recommended by floor tile manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture -vapor -emission rate of 5 Ibs water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 80 percent relative humidity level. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. 09652-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile. 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated. C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated. D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion -joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 09652-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply two coat(s). E. Joint Sealant: Apply sealant to resilient terrazzo floor tile perimeter and around columns, at door frames, and at other joints and penetrations. F. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09652 09652-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TILE CARPETING SECTION 09681 TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes modular, fusion -bonded carpet tile. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09651 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Laboratory Test Reports: For carpet and installation adhesives, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. 09681-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TILE CARPETING 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber,. and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE: A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. As indicated.. B. Applied Soil -Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew -resistant, nonstaining, pressure -sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 09681-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TILE CARPETING 1. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 03300 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive. E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 09681-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TILE CARPETING 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full -spread, releasable, pressure -sensitive adhesive. C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open -bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face -beater element. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09681 09681-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 WALL FINISHES SECTION 09700 WALL FINISHES Part 1 GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. Section Includes: Pre-engineered wall system including wall panels, mounting extrusions, bases and frame. Wall system comes "ready to install" with fasteners, adhesives, and other materials required for a complete assembly. Fasteners shall be concealed type. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08811 — Decorative Glazing 1.2 References A. ASTM E84 — Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 Submittals A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01350 — Submittal. B. Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, installation drawings, installation instructions and maintenance instructions. C. Submit environmental impact data for all materials. D. Submit samples no less than 4" x 4" for all specified material finishes. E. Submit panel edge extrusion samples no less than 4" of specified finish. F. Submit mock-up of wall system no less than 12" x 12". G. Manufacturer information: 1. Provide overview literature describing manufacturer's overall scope of products and manufacturing capabilities. 2. Provide URL for manufacturer's web site; web site must provide access to technical data, images and general product information. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer Qualifications 1. Minimum 10 years experience in the manufacture of architectural surface materials. 2. Minimum 10 years experience in the fabrication of wall systems. 3. Provide reference list of at least 20 public space projects currently using walls fabricated by the manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications 1. Minimum three years experience in the installation of wall systems. 1.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Deliver materials to installation site in manufacturer's original packaging. Handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Store in dry, secure location, protected against direct sunlight and excessive heat. Protect finished surfaces with strippable film. 09700-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 WALL FINISHES 1.6 Warranty A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty. 1. Warranty terms: one year against defects in materials and workmanship. Part 2 PRODUCT 2.1 Manufacturer (Basis of Design) A. Provide LEVELe Wall System by Forms+Surfaces 30 Pine Street Pittsburgh, PA 15223 phone: 800-451-0410 fax: 412-781-7840 email: sales(c�forms-surfaces.com B. Bendheim Wall system C. or approved equal. 2.2 Wall Panels A. General 1. Provide interlocking grid panel system with inset panels mounted to extruded aluminum frames on structural backer. The recommended substrate is 3/4" fire -rated OSB or plywood. 2. Panel configuration: Forms+Surfaces' LEVELe Wall System with Minimal style panel frames. See drawings for panel layout and reveal spacing. 3. Provide inset panels in the finishes specified. 4. Weight per square foot: average 2.40 Ibs to 3.04 Ibs 5. Frames are extruded aluminum. Aluminum is inherently non-combustible. B. Inset Materials 1. Laminated Glass Panels a. Material: VividGlass: ViviChrome Chromis, b. Fire rating: VividGlass glass is Class A fire rated in accordance with ASTM designation E84-09, standard test method of surface burning characteristics of building materials. The foregoing test procedure is comparable to UL 723, ANSI/NFPA No. 255, and UBC No. 8-1. C. Panel Frames and Outside Corner Extrusion 1. Material: Extruded, anodized aluminum 2. Finish: Clear anodized D. Reveals 1. Material: Extruded, anodized aluminum 2. Finish: Clear anodized. 09700-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 WALL FINISHES Part 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Preparation A. Protect wall finishes, fixtures and equipment from damage caused by work of this Section. 3.2 Installation A. Install in accordance with wall system manufacturer's instructions 3.4 Cleaning and Protection A. Remove strippable film. Clean exposed surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Protect exposed surfaces from damage by subsequent construction. END OF SECTION 09700 09700-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 EXTERIOR PAINTING SECTION 09911 EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. 1. Concrete. 2. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 3. Wood. B. Exterior painting includes all substrates that are not shop -finished. All exterior metals shall be painted as required by Section 09960 "High Performance Coatings" C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming metal fabrications. 2. Section 09960 "High -Performance Coatings" for coatings for all exterior metals. 3. Section 09965 "Elastomeric Coatings" for coating typical exterior concrete and stucco building walls. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 1 (Flat): Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 according to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 3 (Eggshell): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 according to ASTM D 523. units at 85 degrees, units at 85 degrees, C. MPI Gloss Level 4 (Satin): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units degrees, according to ASTM D 523. MPI Gloss Level 5 (Semi -gloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. MPI Gloss Level 6 (Gloss): 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. E. 09911-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid at 85 ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 EXTERIOR PAINTING F. MPI Gloss Level 7 (High Gloss): More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 2. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F . 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F . B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide provide premium paint products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co.; "Aqua" Exterior water -borne paints. 2. PPG Architectural Coatings; "Regency" Exterior water -borne paints. 3. Pratt & Lambert; "Accolade" Exterior water -borne paints.. 4. Sherwin-Williams Co.; "Emerald" Exterior water -borne paints. 09911-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 EXTERIOR PAINTING 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber -Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent. 5. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent. 09911-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 EXTERIOR PAINTING 6. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. D. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Aluminum Substrates (not pre -finished or anodized): Remove loose surface oxidation. G. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 09911-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 EXTERIOR PAINTING 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual," whichever is most restrictive. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames. 4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed to view: a. Equipment, including panelboards if not pre -finished.. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory -applied final finishes. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 09911-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 EXTERIOR PAINTING 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Latex System MPI EXT 3.1 K: a. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #10. 2. For concrete tilt wall and similar , see Section 09965 Elastomeric Coatings. B. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex System MPI EXT 4.2A: a. Prime Coat: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #10. C. Galvanized -Metal Substrates, Aluminum, Stainless Steel: 1. Comply with requirements of Section 09960 "High Performance Coatings." D. Wood Substrates: Wood trim and wood fences. 1. Latex over Latex Primer System MPI EXT 6.3L: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex for exterior wood, MPI #6. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi -gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #11. END OF SECTION 09911 09911-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 INTERIOR PAINTING SECTION 09912 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: B. 1. Concrete. 2. Steel and iron. 3. Galvanized metal. 4. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 5. Wood. 6. Plastic. 7. Gypsum board. 8. Plaster. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05120 " Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming structural steel. 2. Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming metal fabrications. 3. Section 05511 "Metal Pan Stairs" for shop priming metal pan stairs. 4. Section 05521 " Steel Pipe and Tube Railings" for shop priming pipe and tube railings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include instructions. 1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved specified, with the proposed product highlight 2. Indicate VOC content. preparation requirements and application Products List" for each product category ed. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 09912-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 INTERIOR PAINTING 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F . 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F . B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide premium products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co; "AURA" Interior paint. 2. PPG Architectural Coatings; "Regency" Interior paint. 3. Pratt & Lambert; "Accolade" Interior paint. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); "Emerald" Interior paint. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." 09912-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 INTERIOR PAINTING B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Wood: 15 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 4. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. 09912-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 INTERIOR PAINTING E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 3. F. Shop -Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -primed surfaces. G. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. H. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. I. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 09912-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 INTERIOR PAINTING 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Pipe hangers and supports. c. Metal conduit. d. Other items as directed by Architect. 2. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 09912-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 INTERIOR PAINTING 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1. Water -Based Concrete Floor Sealer System MPI INT 3.2G: a. First Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99. B. Steel Substrates: 1. High -Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 5.1 R: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (Min. MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #140. C. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: 1. High -Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 5.3M: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. 09912-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 INTERIOR PAINTING c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (Min. MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #140. D. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates: 1. High -Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 5.4F: a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, MPI #95. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (Min. MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #140. E. Wood Substrates: Wood trim and wood board paneling. 1. High -Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 6.3A: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi -gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141. F. Plastic Substrates: 1. High -Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 6.8A: a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based, MPI #69. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi -gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141. G. Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates: 1. High -Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 9.2B: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139. END OF SECTION 09912 09912-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS SECTION 09960 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of high-performance coating systems. 1. Exterior Substrates: a. Steel. b. Galvanized metal. c. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). d. Stainless steel. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05521 "Steel Pipe and Tube Railings" for shop priming pipe and tube railings with coatings specified in this Section. 2. Section 09911 "Exterior Painting" for general field painting. 3. Section 09912 "Interior Painting" for general field painting. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 09960-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 2. Indicate VOC content. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product List: Cross-reference to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Coatings: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F . 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F . Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow. rain, fog, or mist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide premium products complying with the requirements in the High -Performance Coating Schedule or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 09960-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 2. PPG Architectural Coatings. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 4. Tnemec Inc. 2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 3. Products shall be of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. C. Low -Emitting Materials: Interior coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." D. Colors: As indicated in color schedule. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Coating Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If coating materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 09960-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating systems indicated. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3. E. Shop -Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -primed surfaces. F Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied coatings. G. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Coat backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 09960-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 4. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates: 1. Pigmented Polyurethane over Epoxy System MPI EXT 5.1H: a. Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti -corrosive, for metal, MPI #101. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77. 09960-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS c. First and Second Topcoat: Polyurethane, two component, pigmented, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6), MPI #72. B. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: 1. Pigmented Polyurethane over Epoxy Primer System MPI EXT 5.3L: a. Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti -corrosive, for metal. MPI #101. b. Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane, two component, pigmented, gloss matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Polyurethane, two component, pigmented, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6), MPI #72. C. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates: 1. Pigmented Polyurethane over Epoxy System MPI EXT 5.4B: a. Prime Coat: Primer, vinyl wash, MPI #80. b. Intermediate Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti -corrosive, for metal, MPI #101. c. First and Second Topcoat: Polyurethane, two component, pigmented, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6), MPI #72. Stainless -Steel Substrates: 1. Pigmented Polyurethane System MPI EXT 5.6B: a. Prime Coat: Primer, vinyl wash, MPI #80. b. Intermediate Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti -corrosive, for metal, MPI #101. c. First and Second Topcoat: Polyurethane, two component, pigmented, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6), MPI #72. END OF SECTION 09960 09960-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS SECTION 09965 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and application of elastomeric coatings to the following exterior substrates: 1. Concrete. 2. Stucco. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of elastomeric coating indicated. 1.4 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage in unopened, factory -sealed containers and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 1 percent but not less than 5 gal. of each material, color, and texture applied. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Prepare two mockups of each coating system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select two wall surfaces of at least 100 sq. ft. to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type and texture of elastomeric coating. 2. Final approval of color and texture selections will be based on mockups. 09965-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, prepare additional mockups of additional color and textures selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide elastomeric finish coatings and crack fillers, primers, and block fillers as applicable for use within elastomeric finish coatings that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each material or coat, provide products and spreading rates recommended in writing by elastomeric coating manufacturer for use on substrate indicated. 2.2 ELASTOMERIC FINISH COATINGS A. Exterior Flat Waterborne, Pigmented Elastomeric Coating. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Basis of Design: Sika Corporation, Sikagard 670W b. BASF, MasterProtect 330EL c. Euclid Chemical Co., Tammscoat 2. VOC Content: 100 g/L or less. 3. Moisture -Vapor Transmission: Minimum 12 perms, based on testing according to ASTM D 1653.. 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS A. Crack Fillers: Elastomeric coating manufacturer's recommended, factory -formulated crack fillers or sealants, including crack filler primers, compatible with substrate and other materials indicated; VOC content complying with limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Primer: Elastomeric coating manufacturer's recommended, factory -formulated, alkali -resistant primer compatible with substrate and other materials indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 09965-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS B. Begin coating only when moisture content of substrate, measured with an electronic moisture meter, is within manufacturer's required range. C. Begin coating no sooner than 14 days after substrate is constructed and is visually dry on both sides. D. Verify that substrate is within the range of alkalinity recommended by manufacturer. E. Verify suitability of substrates including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. F. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions applicable to substrates and coating systems indicated. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce coating systems indicated. 2. Perform cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminants from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. C. Crack Repair: Fill cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions before coating surfaces. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply elastomeric coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Provide minimum two -coat application. Apply each coat separately according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Primers: Apply at a rate to ensure complete coverage. C. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats similar to color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. D. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform finish, color, and appearance. 09965-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS E. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. F. Spray Application: Use spray equipment for application only when permitted by authorities having jurisdiction. Wherever spray application is used, do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of two coats in one pass. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. 3.5 COATING SCHEDULE A. Concrete and Stucco Substrates: 1. Primer: Concrete primer. 2. Elastomeric Finish Coat(s):. Minimum two coats with a total dry film thickness of 5 mils. 3. Finish -Coat Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. END OF SECTION 09965 09965-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 VISUAL DISPLAY FABRICS SECTION 10114 VISUAL DISPLAY FABRICS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes dry -erase wall coverings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09720 'Wall Coverings" for standard vinyl wall coverings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of dry -erase wall covering. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, and flame -resistance characteristics. B. Samples for Verification: Full width by 12-inch by 12-inch section of dry -erase wall covering. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install dry -erase wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet -work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Lighting: Do not install dry -erase wall covering until a permanent level of lighting is provided on the surfaces to receive dry -erase wall covering. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. 10114-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 VISUAL DISPLAY FABRICS 2.2 DRY -ERASE WALL COVERINGS Dry -Erase Wall Covering: Intended for use with dry -erase markers and consisting of moderate - gloss plastic film bonded to fabric backing. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Source One/Tri-Kes; "Write Away" (Basis of Design). b. Egan Visual Inc.; "Versa Pro". c. Optima, Inc.; "Opti-Rite 1". 2. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives for Field Application: Strippable, mildew -resistant, nonstaining adhesive for use with dry -erase wall coverings; and for substrate application; as recommended in writing by dry -erase wall covering manufacturer. B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew -resistant primer/sealer complying with requirements, and recommended in writing by dry -erase wall covering manufacturer for intended substrate. C. Aluminum J-Trim: Clear satin anodized aluminum trim, 12 feet lengths, with approximate face size of 1/4 inch and pocket size of 1/8 inch. Provide the following, or accepted equal: 1. C. R. Laurence Company, Inc.; "CRL D18A 1/8-inch aluminum J-channel". D. Markers, Erasing and Cleaning Kit: Provide one set of the following items for each dry erase wall covering location. (Basis of Design: "Write Away") 1. Set of four color markers as recommended by visual display fabric manufacturer ("Expo Bold Color Markers"). 2. One spray bottle of cleaning solution ("Expo Whiteboard Spray Cleaner"). 3. One microfiber towel eraser. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation for dry -erase wall covering. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 10114-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 VISUAL DISPLAY FABRICS 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances, including dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the bond of dry -erase wall coverings or affect the smooth, finished surfaces of dry -erase wall coverings. C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, and depressions. D. Prepare substrates indicated to receive dry -erase wall covering as required by manufacturer's written instructions to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface that is uniform in color. 1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 10 percent when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall -covering manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Dry -Erase Wall Covering: Comply with dry -erase wall -covering manufacturers' written installation instructions. 1. Coordinate wall covering installation with installation of aluminum trim. 2. Install seams horizontal and level, with lowest seam 24 inches above finished floor. Railroad fabric (reverse roll direction) to ensure color matching. 3. Double cut seams, with no gaps or overlaps. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. a. Install horizontal installation without seams. 4. After installation, clean dry -erase wall covering according to manufacturer's written instructions. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Clean dry -erase wall covering according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one removable cleaning instructions label to dry -erase wall covering in each room. C. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION 10114 10114-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE SECTION 10141 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cast dimensional characters. 2. Fabricated channel dimensional characters larger than 12". 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For dimensional letter signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half size. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows: 1. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. Cast Characters:: Characters with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, and as follows: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 10141-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE a. ASI Sign Systems. b. Gemini Incorporated. c. Impact Architectural Signs. 2. Character Material: Cast aluminum. 3. Character Height: As indicated. 4. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of character, but not less than 1/2 inch. 5. Finishes: a. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 6. Mounting: Projecting studs. B. Fabricated Channel Characters:: Metal face and side returns, formed free from warp and distortion; with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; internally braced for stability and for securing fasteners; and as follows. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ASI Sign Systems. b. Gemini Incorporated. c. Impact Architectural Signs. 2. Character Material: Sheet or plate aluminum. 3. Material Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size and design of character. 4. Character Height: As indicated. 5. Character Depth: Manufacturer's standard for size of character, but not less than 1 inch. 6. Finishes: a. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 7. Mounting: Projecting studs. a. Hold characters at distance as selected by Architect from wall surface. 2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTER MATERIALS A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated. B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 , alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 , alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and exposure indicated. 10141-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: 1. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless -steel devices unless otherwise indicated. 2. Sign Mounting Fasteners: a. Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped Tugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated. b. Standoff: Provide min. 3/8 inch standoff from face of wall to back of letter. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly. 2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners. 6. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated. 10141-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils . Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work. B. Verify that sign -support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. 3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B. Mounting Methods: 1. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface. a. Masonry and Cementitious Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten. END OF SECTION 10141 10141-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PANEL SIGNAGE SECTION 10142 PANEL SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic panel room -identification and other signs. 2. Field -applied, vinyl -character signs and decals. 3. Exterior aluminum accessible path -of -travel signage. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01500 'Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary Project identification signs and for temporary information and directional signs. 2. Section 10141 "Dimensional Letter Signage". 3. Section 14210 "Electric Traction Elevators" for code -required conveying equipment signage. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Furnish templates for placement of sign -anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and layout for each sign at least half size. 10142-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PANEL SIGNAGE C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish. 1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows: 1. Room -Identification Signs: Full-size Sample. 2. Field -Applied, Vinyl -Character Signs: Full size sample of characters.. 3. Variable Component Materials: 8-inch Sample of each base material, character (letter, number, and graphic element) in each exposed color and finish not included in Samples above. 4. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for signs. 1. Comply with the requirements of the Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) as administered by the Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation (TDLR). 2. Braille: Provide Grade 2 Braille. 3. Font Height and Stroke Widths: Comply with applicable regulations. 4. Contrast: Comply with regulations. B. Signage Type Requirements: Provide the minimum signage required by the applicable Building Code and the Fire Code, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Building address identification (see Section 101419 "Dimensional Letter Signage"). 2. Occupant capacity. 3. Elevator emergency signage not provided by elevator manufacturer. Provide signage complying with IFC 404.2 and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.38. a. Incorporate an emergency evacuation floor plan per ASTM E 2238. 4. Key -locked main entrance doors. 5. Accessible path of travel, including parking, loading and walks. 6. Building entrances, if not all are accessible. 7. Accessible toilet rooms. 8. Permanent room signage. C. Signage Sizes: As required to meet minimum requirements, and the following: 1. Provide signs of consistent size and proportion, large enough to convey necessary information. 10142-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PANEL SIGNAGE a. Room signs shall be nominal 6 inches by 6 inches. b. Signs shall be interchangeable message signs to extent feasible. Provide signs with fixed numbers and Braille, with two interchangeable message strips to accommodate present and future uses. c. For rooms with an obvious permanent function that cannot be re -purposed, provide interchangeable message sign with only one message slot, for sign size of approximately 6 inches wide by 5 inches high. Typical permanent -function rooms include electrical room, mechanical room, toilet room, etc. d. For special-purpose signs, provide signage consistent with room signage, meeting regulatory requirements. D. Signage Layout: 1. The room number shall precede the line that includes a name or window insert. 2. The room number shall be consistent with the room designation in any energy management software, electrical panel directories, fire alarm system, etc. 3. Provide a unique room number for each space. 4. If a single space has multiple doors, all signage at doors shall reference the same room number. 5. Room numbers shall not exceed four digits. a. The first number of a room number shall be the floor level in multiple -story buildings. b. Numbers ending in "00" shall be reserved for corridors. 6. Generally number odd numbers on one side of a corridor with corresponding even numbers opposite. 2.2 INTERIOR SIGNS A. Panel Sign:: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows: 1. Basis -of -Design, Product: Nova Polymers; "Novacryl PT Series Photopolymer". 2. Basis of Design, Style: Similar to Kroy Sign Systems, "Model Q28081" (without final backing plate), and as follows: 1) Composition: 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick moisture resistant, non -glare interior nylon photopolymer on ultraviolet resistant clear PETG sign base, single piece construction. Total sheet thickness to match adjacent cast acrylic sheet, 0.125 inches (3.0 mm) nominal.. 2) Sustainable Certification: Minimum 40 percent pre -consumer recycled content. 3) Photopolymer Tactile Header: Laminated photopolymers, added -on or adhered characters, and engraved characters are not acceptable. 4) Surface -Applied Graphics: Applied vinyl film. 5) Size: 3.5 inch by 5.5 inch 10142-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PANEL SIGNAGE b. Acrylic Lens Messaging: 1) 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick non -glare clear cast acrylic sheet. 2) Subsurface graphic color to match photopolymer color. 3) Size: 5.5 inch by 2.5 inch, with two 0.75 inch by 5.5 inch changeable insert slots. Insert slots shall be independent and shall accept 100-Ib. cardstock. 4) Graphic Application: By users, using laser -jet/ xerographic or ink -jet processes. c. Acrylic Back Plate: 1) 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick acrylic sheet. 2) Size: 6.0 inch by 6.0 inch. Back plate defines a 0.25-inch border with message plane. 3) Surface -Applied Graphics: Paint or integral plastic color, continuous including edges. Laminated -Sheet Changeable Signs: Photopolymer face sheet with raised graphics and clear acrylic lens, both laminated over subsurface graphics to acrylic backing sheet to produce composite sign panel with changeable message slots. d. Additional Surface -Applied Graphics: Applied photo image. e. Additional Subsurface Graphics: Reverse halftone or dot -screen image. 3. Sign -Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth. a. Edge Condition, Vertical and, Horizontal Edges: Square cut. b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Square. 4. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard method for substrates indicated with two -face tape. 5. Surface Finish and Applied Graphics: a. Integral Acrylic Sheet Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 6. Text and Typeface: Accessible raised characters and Braille. Finish raised characters to contrast with background color, and finish Braille to match background color. a. Design message inserts to accept 5/8 inch high sans serif font style, (Helvetica, Optima, Futura). 7 Flatness Tolerance: Sign panel shall remain flat or uniformly curved under installed conditions as indicated and within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner. 2.3 FIELD -APPLIED, VINYL -CHARACTER SIGNS Field -Applied, Vinyl -Character Sign:: Prespaced characters die cut from 3- to 3.5-mil thick, weather -resistant vinyl film with release liner on the back and carrier film on the front for on -site alignment and application. 1. Size: As required to meet regulatory requirements. 2. Substrate: Doors and glass. 10142-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PANEL SIGNAGE 3. Text and Font: As required to meet regulatory requirements.. 2.4 EXTERIOR PANEL -SIGN MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 , minimum 0.080 inches (2 mm) thick, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. B. Vinyl Film: UV -resistant vinyl film of nominal thickness indicated, with pressure -sensitive, permanent adhesive on back; die cut to form characters or images as indicated and suitable for exterior applications. 1. Provide retro-reflective film complying with ASTM D 4956, "Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control," Type 1 min. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: 1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless -steel devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Sign Mounting Fasteners: a. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of head indicated, installed in predrilled holes. B. Adhesives: As recommended by sign manufacturer and that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Two -Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high -bond, foam -core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with adhesive on both sides. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly. 2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 10142-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PANEL SIGNAGE 5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners. 6. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish. B. Subsurface -Applied Graphics: Apply graphics to back face of clear face -sheet material to produce precisely formed image. Image shall be free of rough edges. C. Shop- and Subsurface -Applied Vinyl: Align vinyl film in final position and apply to surface. Firmly press film from the middle outward to obtain good bond without blisters or fishmouths. 2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work. B. Verify that sign -support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Verify that anchor inserts are correctly sized and located to accommodate signs. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. B. Mounting Heights (Above Finished Floor): Comply with accessibility standards. Room Identification Signage and Toilet Signage: Mount 5 feet 0 inches to center of sign. 10142-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PANEL SIGNAGE C. Mounting Methods: 1. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template. Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install through fasteners and tighten. 2. Two -Face Tape: Clean bond -breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive. 3. Transparent or Translucent Surfaces: Provide additional masking plate, min. 1/16" thick, on opposite side of mounting surface to obscure mount. Match color to back plate of sign. D. Field -Applied, Vinyl -Character Signs: Clean and dry substrate. Align sign characters in final position before removing release liner. Remove release liner in stages, and apply and firmly press characters into final position. Press from the middle outward to obtain good bond without blisters or fishmouths. Remove carrier film without disturbing applied vinyl film. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 10142 10142-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10211 TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Stainless -steel toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures, entrance screens, and urinal screens. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for blocking. 2. Section 10280 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment -mounted toilet accessories. 2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment -mounted grab bars. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 4. Show overhead support or bracing locations. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for units, prepared on 6-inch-square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 2. Each type of hardware and accessory. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements in GSA's CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete." 10211-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TOILET COMPARTMENTS B. Surface -Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and Texas Accesibility Standards (TAS) for toilet compartments designated as accessible. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 . B. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher -leveled standard of flatness. C. Stainless -Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M. D. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.2 STAINLESS -STEEL UNITS: A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Accurate Partitions Corp.; ASI Group. 2. Ampco Products, LLC (Basis of Design). 3. Global Partitions; ASI Group. B. Toilet -Enclosure Style: Floor anchored. C. Entrance -Screen Style: Floor anchored. D. Urinal -Screen Style: Wall hung flat panel. 10211-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TOILET COMPARTMENTS E. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped -and -formed edge closures; corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Provide with no- sightline system. Exposed surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections. 1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound -deadening honeycomb of resin - impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches for pilasters. 2. Grab -Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units. 3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units. F. Urinal -Screen Construction: 1. Flat -Panel Urinal Screen: Matching panel construction. G. Facing Sheets and Closures: Stainless -steel sheet of nominal thicknesses as follows: 1. Pilasters, Unbraced at One End: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.050 inch . 2. Panels: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.031 inch . 3. Doors: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not Tess than 0.031 inch . 4. Flat -Panel Urinal Screens: Thickness matching the panels. H. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless -steel sheet, not less than 0.031-inch nominal thickness and 3 inches high, finished to match hardware. I. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Full -Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. J. Stainless -Steel Finish: No. 4 bright, directional polish on exposed faces. Protect exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard heavy-duty continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or partially open position. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard heavy-duty surface -mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper, sized to prevent in -swinging door from hitting compartment -mounted accessories. 10211-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber -tipped bumper at out -swinging doors and entrance -screen doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out -swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded -aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome -plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft -resistant - type heads. Provide sex -type bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot -dip galvanized steel, or other rust -resistant, protective -coated steel. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Floor -Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage. B. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide, in -swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide, out -swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch . b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch . B. Floor -Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb, and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position. 10211-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors and doors in entrance screens to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 10211 10211-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESORIES SECTION 10280 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public -use washroom accessories. 2. Custodial accessories. B. Owner -Furnished Material: 1. Paper towel dispensers. 2. Toilet paper dispensers. 3. Soap dispensers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer. 10280-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESORIES B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings. C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inc.,, minimum nominal thickness. D. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot -dip zinc coating. E. Galvanized -Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper -and -theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear -glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation. 2.2 PUBLIC -USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1 American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc (Basis of Design). a. Toilet accessories are scheduled on the drawings. 10280-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESORIES 3. Bradley Corporation. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion - resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibf , when tested according to ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 10280 10280-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS SECTION 10441 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire -protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 10442 "Fire Extinguishers." 2. Section 15300 " Fire -Suppression" for sizes, types, and finishes for hoses, hose valves, hose couplings, nozzles, and hose racks. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing -in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semirecessed-, or surface -mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction. B. Product Schedule: For fire -protection cabinets. Indicate whether recessed, semirecessed, or surface mounted. Coordinate final fire -protection cabinet schedule with fire-extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire -protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire -protection cabinets with wall depths. 10441-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 1.5 SEQUENCING A. Apply vinyl lettering on field -painted fire -protection cabinets after painting is complete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Fire -Rated Fire -Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire -resistance rating of walls where they are installed. 2.2 FIRE -PROTECTION CABINET: A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group; (Basis of Design Ambassador Series, Ambassador FX2 Series). b. Larsens Manufacturing Company. c. Potter Roemer LLC. B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated and 1-hour fire rated as required. 1. Fire -Rated Cabinets: Construct fire -rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.043-inch-thick cold -rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick fire -barrier material. Provide factory -drilled mounting holes. C. Cabinet Material: Cold -rolled steel sheet. D. Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 1. Rolled -Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth. E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet. F. Door Style: Flush opaque panel, frameless, with no exposed hinges. G. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door -operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide projecting door pull and friction latch. 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees. 10441-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS H. Accessories: 1. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire -protection cabinet with the words " FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Pressure -sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical. I. Materials: 1. Cold -Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. a. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. b. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire -Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory -drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow -metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. 2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged. 3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire -protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 10441-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS C. Finish fire -protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire -protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire -protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire -Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet. B. Fire -Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire -protection cabinets. If wall thickness is inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire -protection cabinets. 2. Provide inside latch and lock for break -glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire -protection cabinets, square and plumb. C. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated. Apply after field painting, if any. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire -protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire -protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire -protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. 10441-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire -protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory - finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire - protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire -protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 10441 10441-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS SECTION 10442 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand -carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 10441 "Fire Protection Cabinets." 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire -protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Local Code Requirements: Houston Fire Department Life Safety Bureau (LSB) Standard 01, rev. 05, "Installation and Maintenance of Portable Fire Extinguishers," effective date 05/01/2012. C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global. 10442-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 2.2 PORTABLE, HAND -CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire -protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following product or comparable product by one of the following: a. JL Industries. Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group; "Cosmic 10E" b. Larsens Manufacturing Company. c. Potter Roemer LLC. Multipurpose Dry -Chemical Type:: UL-rated 4:A 60:BC nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate -based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container. 2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS: Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated. with plated or black baked -enamel finish. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket -mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Vertical. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. 10442-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS END OF SECTION 10442 10442-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FLAGPOLES SECTION 10750 FLAGPOLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes ground -mounted flagpoles made from aluminum. B. Owner -Furnished Material: Flag s. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following Toads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to the following wind speed design criteria: 1. Basis of Design: Texas Department of Insurance, Brazoria County, Inland Zone II, 110 mph, 3-sec gust. 2. IBC 2015 (Allowable Stress Design): 109 mph, 3-sec gust. 3. IBC 2015 (Ultimate): 141 mph, 3-sec gust. 4. Base flagpole design on polyester flags of 5' x 8' maximum flag size. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operating characteristics, fittings, accessories, and finishes for flagpoles. B. Shop Drawings: For flagpoles. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show general arrangement, jointing, fittings, accessories, grounding, anchoring, and support. 1. Include section, and details of foundation system for ground -mounted flagpoles. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: For flagpole assemblies indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. [Re: GEOTECHNICAL REPORT] 10750-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FLAGPOLES 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flagpoles to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flagpole as complete unit, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices, from single source from single manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other protective container. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Flagpole. 2. Concord Industries, Inc. 3. Admiral Flag Poles, Inc. 2.2 FLAGPOLES: A. Flagpole Construction, General: Construct flagpoles in one piece if possible. If more than one piece is necessary, comply with the following: 1. Fabricate shop and field joints without using fasteners, screw collars, or lead calking. 2. Provide flush hairline joints using self -aligning, snug -fitting, internal sleeves. 3. Provide self -aligning, snug -fitting joints. B. Exposed Height: 25 feet . C. Quantity: 2 D. Flags: 100% Nylon fabric, non -fading with stainless steel grommets. One American flag and One Texas flag E. Size of flags 5' x 9'-6' F. Aluminum Flagpoles: Provide cone -tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241/B 241M, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch . G. Metal Foundation Tube: Manufacturer's standard corrugated -steel foundation tube, not less than 0.064-inch-nominal wall thickness. Provide with 3/16-inch steel bottom plate and support 10750-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FLAGPOLES plate; 3/4-inch-diameter, steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges welded together. Galvanize steel after assembly. Provide loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation tube for plumbing pole. 1. Provide flashing collar of same material and finish as flagpole. 2. Provide steel ground protectors extending 12 inches aboveground and 6 inches belowground for steel flagpoles where flashing collars are not provided. 2.3 FITTINGS A. Finial Ball:: Manufacturer's standard flush -seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to match flagpole -butt diameter. 1. 0.063-inch spun aluminum, finished to match flagpole. B. Internal Halyard, Cam Cleat System:: 5/16-inch-diameter, braided polypropylene halyard; cam cleat; and concealed revolving truck assembly with plastic -coated counterweight and sling. Provide flush access door secured with cylinder lock. Finish truck assembly to match flagpole. 1. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide two stainless -steel swivel snap hooks per halyard. a. Provide with neoprene or vinyl covers. 2. Plastic Halyard Flag Clips: Made from injection -molded, UV -stabilized, acetal resin (Delrin). Clips attach to flag and have two eyes for inserting both runs of halyards. Provide two flag clips per halyard. a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Quiet Halyard" flag clasp by Lingo. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Non -shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. B. Drainage Material: Crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; coarse aggregate. C. Sand: ASTM C 33, fine aggregate. D. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Single -component non -sag urethane joint sealant complying with requirements in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants" for Use NT (non -traffic) and for Use M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, for Use O. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 10750-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FLAGPOLES B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Natural Satin Finish: AA-M32, fine, directional, medium satin polish; buff complying with AA- M20; seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard -coat wax. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, including foundation; accurate placement, pattern, orientation of anchor bolts, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION Prepare uncoated metal flagpoles that are set in foundation tubes by painting below -grade portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. Place and compact drainage material at excavation bottom. C. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of flagpole base at grade. Secure and brace forms to prevent displacement during concreting. Place concrete, as specified in Section 03300 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." Compact concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist -cure exposed concrete for not less than seven days or use non- staining curing compound. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter of concrete base. 3.3 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install flagpoles where shown and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Ground Set: Place foundation tube, center, and brace to prevent displacement during concreting. Place concrete. Plumb and level foundation tube and allow concrete to cure. Install flagpole, plumb, in foundation tube. 1. Foundation Tube: Place tube seated on bottom plate between steel centering wedges and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact concrete or cement -stabilized sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2-inch layer of elastomeric joint sealant and cover with flashing collar. 10750-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FLAGPOLES END OF SECTION 10750 10750-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 APPLIANCES SECTION 11310 APPLIANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cooking appliances. 2. Kitchen exhaust ventilation. 3. Refrigeration/Freezer appliances. 4. Dishwasher 5. Icemaker B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06411 "Plastic Laminate Faced Architectural Cabinets 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, dimensions, furnished accessories, and finishes for each appliance. 1. Product Data for Credit EA 1 and Credit EA 4: For appliances indicated, documentation that products are ENERGY STAR rated. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's standard 6 inch by 6 inch size. C. Product Schedule: For appliances. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of appliance, from manufacturer. C. Field quality -control reports. 11310-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 APPLIANCES D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For each residential appliance to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintains, within 50 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs. B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. C. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances from single source and each type of residential appliance from single manufacturer. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. ANSI: Provide gas -burning appliances that comply with ANSI Z21 Series standards. E. Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and Accessibility Standards (T.A.S.). Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Electric Range: Full warranty including parts and labor -site service on surface -burner elements. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Microwave Oven: Full warranty including parts and labor for on -site service on the magnetron tube. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Refrigerator/Freezer, Icemaker, Sealed System: Full warranty including parts and labor for on - site service on the product. 11310-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 APPLIANCES 1. Warranty Period for Sealed Refrigeration System Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Other Components: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. E. Dishwasher: Full warranty including parts and labor for on -site service on the product. 1. Warranty Period for Deterioration of Tub and Metal Door Liner 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Other Components: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 RANGE Mark # 1 A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Electrolux Home Products (Frigidaire). 2. General Electric Company (GE). 3. Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation. B. Electric Range RG # 1 GE Profile 30" Slide -In Electric Double Oven Convection Range: Model No. PS960ELES (ADA Accessible) 1. Width: 30 inches (762 mm). 2. Electric Burner Elements: Four [4] under a Black Ceramic Top "True European Convection with Precise Air. a. Coil Type: Two 1500 W and two 2600 W. b. Controls: Digital panel controls, located on front with touchpads 3. Oven Features: a. Total Capacity: 6.7 cu. ft.. b. Operation: Baking. c. Broiler: Located in top of oven. d. Oven Door(s): Counterbalanced, removable, with observation window and full - width handle. e. Electric Power Rating: 1) Oven(s): Manufacturer's standard. 2) Broiler: Manufacturer's standard. f. Controls: Digital panel controls and timer display, located on front. 4. Anti -Tip Device: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Electric Power Supply: 240 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 30 A. 11310-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 APPLIANCES 6. Cooking Technology: Traditional Upper and Convection Lower 7. Material: Stainless steel. 8. Quantity: One [1] 2.2 MICROWAVE OVEN Mark # 2 A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Amana; a division of Whirlpool Corporation. 2. Frigidaire 3. General Electric Company (GE). B. Microwave Oven MO # 1: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: General Electric ; No. PEB9159SJSS 2. Mounting: Countertop. 3. Cooking technology: Microwave/Convection 4. Dimensions: 1. 13inches x 20inches x 21-3/4 inches 5. Capacity: 1.5 cu. ft. 6. Oven Door: Door with observation window and push-button latch release. 7. Exhaust Fan: Variable -speed fan, non -vented, recirculating type with charcoal filter and with manufacturer's standard capacity. 8. Microwave Power Rating: 1000 W. a. Convection Element Power Rating: Manufacturer's standard. 9. Electric Power Supply: 120 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 15 A. 10. Controls: Digital panel controls and timer display. 11. Other Features: Glass Recessed Turntable, lock -out feature, Instant On Controls, 2 Removaable Pedestal Oven Racks, Sound Control Volume, Scrolling Control with HELP and Combination Cooking Controls.. 12. Material: Stainless steel. 13. Quantity: Two [1] and One [1] without Trim Kit 14. Built -In Trim Kit: JX9152 or jX9153 2.3 KITCHEN EXHAUST VENTILATION Mark # 3 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or comparable product by one of the following: 11310-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 APPLIANCES 1. Frigidaire 2. General Electric Company (GE). 3. Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation. C. Overhead Exhaust Hood EX # 1: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Frigidaire; No FHWC3060 LS. 2. Type: Suspended exhaust -hood system. 3. Dimensions: a. Width: 30 inches (762 mm). b. Depth: 19 11/16 inches. 4. Exhaust Fan: Variable -speed fan built into hood and with manufacturer's standard capacity. a. Venting: Vented to outside through wall with weatherproof wall cap, backdraft damper, and rodent -proof screening. b. Fan Control: Hood Wall -mounted touch -pad to control fan switch, with separate hood -light control switch. 5. Duct Type: Manufacturer's standard. 6. Finish: Stainless steel and clear fully tempered glass. 7. Quantity: One [1] 8. Features: a. Built-in halogen. 2.4 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER Mark # 4 A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Frigidaire. 2. General Electric Company (GE). 3. Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation. B. Refrigerator/Freezer RF #1 Frigidaire; No. FFSC2323LS: Two -door, side -by -side refrigerator/freezer and complying with AHAM HRF-1. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: General Electric; No. PSS28KSHSS [ADA Compliant] 2. Type: Freestanding. 3. Dimensions: a. 69-1/2 inches x 36-1/2 inches x 35-3/4 inches 4. Storage Capacity: a. Refrigeration Compartment Volume: 18.0 cu. ft. . 11310-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 APPLIANCES b. Freezer Volume: 10.20 cu. ft c. Shelf Area: Three adjustable wire glass shelves, 26 sq. ft. (2.42 sq. m). 5. General Features: a. Door Configuration: Framed Overlay. b. Dispenser in door for ice and cold water with dispenser lock. c. Built-in water filtration system. d. Dual refrigeration systems. e. Separate touch -pad temperature controls for each compartment. 6. Refrigerator Features: a. Interior light in refrigeration compartment. b. Compartment Storage: vegetable crisper and meat compartment. c. Door Storage: Modular compartments and Gallon (3.8 L-)milk-container storage. d. Temperature -controlled meat/deli bin. 7. Freezer Features: Two freezer compartment(s). a. Automatic defrost. b. Interior light in freezer compartment. c. Automatic icemaker and storage bin. d. Cold water dispenser in door with Water Filtration [Filter Location: Upper right hand Corner]. 8. Energy Performance, ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program. 9. 3 Fresh food Drawers 10. 4 adjustable shelves 11. Freezer; 2 Glass Shelves 12. Freezer: 3 Storage Baskets 13. Appliance Color/Finish: Stainless steel. 14. Quantity: Three [3] 2.5 DISHWASHER Mark # 5 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or comparable product by one of the following: 11310-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 APPLIANCES C. 1. BSH Home Appliances Corporation (Gaggenau). 2. Frigidaire 3. General Electric Company (GE). 4. Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation. Basis -Of -Design: GE with Hidden Controls. Model No. GLDT696DSS [ADA Accessible] 1. Type: Built-in undercounter. 2. Dimensions: a. 32-11/32 inches x 24 inches x 24 inches 3. Capacity: a. International Place Settings of China: Eight 12 14. b. Water Consumption for Full Load: 3.2 gal. (12 L) per cycle. 4. Sound Level: Maximum 49 dB. 5. Tub and Door Liner: Manufacturer's standard automatic rinsing -aid dispensers. 6. Rack System: Nylon -coated sliding dish racks, 7. Controls: Touch -pad Rotary -dial controls with drying cycle options. 8. Features: a. b. c. d. e. f. 9. h. Stainless steel with sealed detergent and with removable cutlery basket. four wash cycles and hot-air and heat -off Waste food disposer. Self-cleaning food -filter system. Hot-water booster heater for 160 deg F (71 deg C) wash water with incoming water at 100 deg F (38 deg C). Lock -out feature. Half -load option. Delay -wash option. Digital display panel. Water softener. Soil -sensing water use control system. 9. Energy Performance, ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program. 10. Appliance Color/Finish: Stainless Steel. 11. Quantity: One [1] 2.6 ICEMAKER Mark # 6 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or comparable product by one of the following: 11310-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 APPLIANCES HOSHIZAKI AMERICA, INC. C. Countertop lcemaker IC1 #1: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: HOSHIZAKI No. DCM-270BAH-OS 2. Type: Free standing. 3. Dimensions: a. 16-9/16 inches x 23-9/16 inches x 27-9/16 inches 4. Ice Capacity: a. Production: 288 pounds per 24 hours. 5. Features: a. Automatic shutoff. b. 2 second flush cycle every hour c. Easy to chew, cubelet ice d. Dispenses Water and Ice e. Self-contained design to reduce opportunities for cross -contamination f. Antimicrobial Agent: YES g. Refrigerant: R-404A h. Air cooled 6. Appliance Color/Finish: Stainless steel. 7. Quantity: One [1] 2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and performance of residential appliances. Examine roughing -in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before appliance installation. 11310-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 APPLIANCES C. Examine walls, ceilings, and roofs for suitable conditions where overhead exhaust hoods downdraft exhaust and microwave ovens with vented exhaust fans will be installed. D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. D. Range Anti -Tip Device: Install at each range according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Utilities: Comply with plumbing and electrical requirements. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each appliance according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with each manufacturer's appliance -performance parameters. 2. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and components. C. An appliance will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 11310-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 APPLIANCES 3.4 DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain residential appliances. END OF SECTION 11310 11310-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FACILITY FALL PROTECTION SECTION 11812 FACILITY FALL PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide design and installation of rooftop horizontal cable fall protection system for rooftop access including end anchors, intermediate cable supports, variable cable supports, and corner cable supports. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 05120 "Structural Steel Framing". B. Section 05310 "Steel Decking". C. Division 07 Section "Roofing". 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's data and product information for manufactured materials, products and equipment. Include catalog data indicating the sizes, descriptions, capacities, test certifications, performance data and other descriptive data showing in sufficient detail that the product complies with the contract requirements shall be submitted. B. Shop Drawings: 1. For fabrication, showing the complete fall protection system. Layout drawings of each system in relation to the supporting structure indicating the locations of all components and connections in the system properly labeled for identification. C. Manufacturer's Certification: Furnish a copy of the Installer's current certificate issued by the manufacturer of the fall -arresting devices. D. System Manual: 1. Parts List and Maintenance Procedures: Provide a parts list for all equipment, including the manufacturer's name, model number, part number, serial number and maintenance requirements of each individual component used in the systems. 11812-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FACILITY FALL PROTECTION Include catalog data indicating the sizes, descriptions, capacities, test certifications, and other descriptive data. 2. Operation Procedures: Indicating proper use of equipment for safe operation of the systems. 3. Test Certificate: Indicating completion of proof load testing on installed systems. 4. Record Drawings: Include a copy of the drawings describing the installed system. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Delegated -Design Submittal: Submit for Architect's information only. Facility fall protection system shall be designed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Texas. Indicate compliance with specified design criteria. Indicate that engineer has reviewed shop drawings. Calculations and other analysis data shall bear the seal of the qualified engineer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. OSHA 1926.502 Fall Prevention Systems and Criteria and Practices. 2. ANSI A10.32 - Requirements for Safety Belts, Harnesses, Lanyards, Lifelines - Construction and Demolition. 3. ANSI Z 359.1 American National Standard Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems And Components. Performance Requirement: The fall protection system shall be designed to fully protect connected users at all times while in the area of potential fall hazard. The fall protection system shall allow users to walk uninterrupted the entire length of each system and provide secure anchorage to arrest a fall by the users. All components shall be included, so as to provide a complete and fully operational system. Fall protection zones beyond 250ft in length shall be accomplished by multiple systems in series. 1. The fall protection system shall be designed for two (2) simultaneous users. 2. Fall protection zones longer than 250 feet shall be accomplished by multiple systems in series. 3. Attached to the supporting structure with appropriate fasteners. The fasteners shall be designed to support a load on the system of 2 times the maximum design load without failure 4. Provide system capable of spanning up to 39 feet (12 m) between anchors. C. Installer's Certification: Facility fall protection Installer shall be fully certified by the manufacture in the design and installation of the fall protection system and shall have a minimum of 5 years experience with similar systems. D. Proof -load Testing: Perform and document proof load test(s) on the installed system as required to demonstrate compliance with the design load performance. 11812-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FACILITY FALL PROTECTION 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements and Conditions: Review prior to preparation of shop drawings to ensure proper coordination for required fit and dimensions. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened packaging. Store materials in original protective packaging at location specified. Prevent soiling, physical damage or wetting. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide facility fall protection systems as designed, supplied and installed by one the following: 1. Basis of Design: Flexible Lifeline Systems, 14325 West Hardy Road, Houston TX 77060, phone: (281) 448-8821; fax: (281) 448-9225; website: www.flexiblelifeline.com. 2. Diversified Fall Protection. 3. Fall Protection Systems. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 316. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B or AISI Type 304 or 316 D. Welding rods and bare electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. E. Fabricated Supports: Provide corrosion -resistant carbon steel as follows: a. Hot -dipped Galvanizing: ASTM A 123. F. Material Control: All critical cable assembly components shall contain serial numbers, permanently stamped or engraved, identifying the specific job and system they are used for. These serial numbers shall be recorded in the system manual. G. Signage: Provide signs and system identification tags per OSHA regulations. H. Flashing: Comply with requirements of Division 07 for roofing and flashing. 11812-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FACILITY FALL PROTECTION 2.3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS Force -Limiting Anchorage Posts: Designed to limit load to 10kN in the event of a fall and absorb the energy integrally. The body of the anchorage is to deploy in the event of a fall pulling the fixings in shear and preventing damage to the roof system. Weather proof construction and designed for attachment to all major composite, built-up on site, standing seam and single ply membrane roofing. Based on compliance with the manufacturer's structural requirements, the posts shall be attached by means of stitching screws, spilt clamps and toggle bolts with no need for fixing to purlins or structural steel. B. Energy -Absorbing Devices: Provide two (2) appropriate length lanyards that meet or exceed applicable standards of ANSI Z 359.1 and OSHA 1926.104. C. Body Harnesses: Provide two (2) full body harnesses with single back D-ring that meet or exceed applicable standards of ANSI Z 359.1 and OSHA 1926.104. Cable: Marine grade stainless steel wire rope with a minimum breaking strength of 10,000 pounds. 1. Swaging: Swaged in -line with the anchor points and provide a slip indicator. E. Transfastener/Trolley: Type 316 stainless steel with a minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds. The transfastener shall allow for easy pass-thru of support points without disconnecting from the system. Tension Indicator: Include a tension indicator that will allow the user to physically inspect that the correct cable tension is achieved and maintained. G. End Anchors: Type 316 stainless steel end anchors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. Fabricate anchoring devices as recommended by the manufacturer to provide adequate support for intended use. B. Parts List and Maintenance Procedures: Provide a parts list for all equipment, including the manufacturer's name, model number, part number, serial number and maintenance requirements of each individual component used in the systems. Include catalog data indicating the sizes, descriptions, capacities, test certifications, and other descriptive data. C. Fabricate primary cable system components of same material, Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate joints in a manner to discourage water accumulation. Provide weep holes to drain any water, which could accumulate in the exposed joints. E. Exposed work shall be true to line and level with accurate angles, surfaces and with straight square edges. 11812-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FACILITY FALL PROTECTION F. Coordinate anchorage system with supporting structure. Fabricate anchoring devices as recommended by the manufacturer to provide adequate support for intended use. 3.2 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fall protection equipment. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Coordinate location of fall protection equipment indicated to be attached to structural substrate or surface of roofing system, and furnish anchoring devices with templates, and diagrams. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install according to the approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions, using trained personnel acceptable to the manufacturer. B. Install anchorage and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to obtain the allowable working Toads published in the product literature and required fro performance . C. Do not load or stress fall protection system until all materials and fasteners are properly installed and ready for testing. D. Install components a minimum of 6 feet from the roof edge 3.4 TESTING A. Design -Load Proof Testing: Design and implement testing program at earliest possible stage in construction. 1. Tests shall be witnessed by Owner and Architect. 2. Proof -load testing shall be non-destructive and shall be performed after completion of structural steel and decking, but prior to application of building roofing. 3. Performed proof -load testing after completion of structural steel and decking, but prior to application of building roofing. 4. Repair any damage to building structure, roofing or finishes resulting from test procedures. 5. Certify system complete after successful proof load tests. 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove all loose materials, crating and packing materials from site. 3.6 TRAINING A. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of operator training after system has been installed and proof tested. Training shall be for the users of the system, conducted at the installation site. 11812-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FACILITY FALL PROTECTION 1. Briefly describe function, operation and inspection of each component. 2. Demonstrate operation of system to Owner's personnel. 3. Re -certify system for use after demonstration if necessary. END OF SECTION 11812 11812-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES SECTION 12241 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of shadeband material. 1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade. 1. Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches square. Mark inside face of material if applicable. D. Roller -Shade Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 12241-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Draper Inc. 2. Hunter Douglas Contract. 3. MechoShade Systems, Inc. (Basis of Design: "Mecho/ 5"). 4. Springs Window Fashions; SWFcontract; SWFcontract Solar Shades. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS Chain -and -Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous -loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated. 1. Bead Chains: Manufacturer's standard. a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. c. Chain -Retainer Type: Chain tensioner, sill mounted. 2. Spring Lift -Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller -shade weight and lifting heavy roller shades. a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb or for shades as recommended by manufacturer, whichever criteria are more stringent. B. Rollers: Corrosion -resistant steel or extruded -aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands 12241-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive -end assemblies and idle - end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service. 1. Roller Drive -End Location: Right side of inside face of shade. 2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller. 3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method. C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated. D. Shadebands: 1. Shadeband Material: Light -filtering fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. a. Type: Manufacturer's standard.. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Installation Accessories: 1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. a. Shape: L-shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband when shade is fully open, but not less than 3 inches . 2. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS A. Shadeband Material Flame -Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Source: Roller -shade manufacturer; 'ThermoVeil 1500 Dense Series". 2. Type: PVC -coated fiberglass. 3. Weave: Basketweave. 4. Thickness: 0.03 inches. 5. Weight: 16.9 oz./sq. yd. 6. Roll Width: 96 inches. 7. Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt. 8. Openness Factor: 3 percent. 9. Color: Silver Birch 1519.Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant. 2.4 ROLLER -SHADE FABRICATION A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain -loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels. 12241-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F : 1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb -to -jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2-inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch . Length equal to head -to -sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch , plus or minus 1/8 inch . C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible except as follows: 1. Vertical Shades: Where width -to -length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ROLLER -SHADE INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 1 inch to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean roller -shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 12241 12241-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD COUNTERTOPS SECTION 12362 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes plastic -laminate countertops. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including, panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate, and adhesive for bonding plastic laminate. 1. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical -treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures installed in plastic - laminate countertops. 2. Apply WI Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches , for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish and specified edge material applied to one edge. 2. Wood -grain plastic laminates, 12 by 24 inches , for each type, pattern and surface finish and specified edge material applied to one edge. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 12362-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD COUNTERTOPS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire - retardant -treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Do not deliver countertops until painting and similar operations that could damage countertops have been completed in installation areas. If countertops must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. D. Established Dimensions: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where countertops are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC -LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements. 12362-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD COUNTERTOPS 1. Provide certificates from AWI certification program indicating that countertops, including installation, comply with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. B. Grade: Custom. C. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2. Grain Direction: Vertical to cabinet fronts unless otherwise indicated. E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. F. Core Material: Medium -density fiberboard. G. Core Material at Sinks: exterior -grade plywood. H. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch . 1. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back, and ends with additional layers of core material laminated to top. I. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic -laminate backer sheet, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent. B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Medium -Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 2. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, exterior grade for all countertops with sinks. Also provide backer sheet. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch OD, black, molded -plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 12362-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD COUNTERTOPS 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "SG series" by Doug Mockett & Company, Inc. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. B. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement, except use Resorcinol for all fire -retardant work. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot -melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. C. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Sealants: Use products that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 3. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L. 4. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Solid -Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 12362-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD COUNTERTOPS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing countertops, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. 1. Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. 2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. C. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project -site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings. 1. Secure field joints in plastic -laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices located within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches . Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy - clamping pressure at joints. D. Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches . E. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive. 3. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew -resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 12362-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD COUNTERTOPS B. Clean countertops on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 12362 12362-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS SECTION 12366 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid surface material countertops. 2. Solid surface material backsplashes. 3. Solid surface material end splashes. 4. Solid surface material sinks. 5. Solid surface material thresholds. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 15400 "Plumbing "for non -integral sinks and plumbing fittings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks. B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. 1. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view. 1. Countertop material, 6 inches (150 mm) square. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For solid surface material countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products. 12366-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom -fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops. C. Standard: AWI/WI "Architectural Woodwork Standards" including Section 11- countertops. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements before countertop fabrication is complete. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous -filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. E.I. DuPont de Nemours & Co.; Corian. 2. Wilsonart, LLC; Wilsonart Solid Surface 3. Aristcoh Surfaces; Avonite 4. The Diller Corporation; Formica Solid Surfacing C. Type: Provide Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated. D. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with CSA B45.5/IAPMO Z124. E. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. F. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade A-C Plugged, touch sanded. 2.2 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 12366-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 1. Grade: Custom. B. Configuration: 1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. 3. End Splash: Matching backsplash. C. Countertops: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) with front edge built up with same material. D. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid surface material. E. Fabricate tops with shop -applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication and finishing. 1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly. 2. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop. Sink bowls should match countertop material. F. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints to extent feasible. 1. Joint Locations: Not within 24 inches (450 mm) of a sink or cooktop and not where a countertop section less than 48 inches (900 mm) long would result, unless unavoidable. 2. Splined Joints: Accurately cut kerfs in edges at joints for insertion of metal splines to maintain alignment of surfaces at joints. Make width of cuts slightly more than thickness of splines to provide snug fit. Provide at least three splines in each joint. G. Cutouts and Holes: a. Provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and bottom surfaces of countertop and projecting 3/16 inch (5 mm) into fixture opening. b. Provide vertical edges, rounded to 3/8-inch (10-mm) radius at juncture of cutout edges with top surface of countertop, slightly eased at bottom, and projecting 3/16 inch (5 mm) into fixture opening. c. Provide 3/4-inch (20-mm) full bullnose edges projecting 3/8 inch (10 mm) into fixture opening. 2. Counter -Mounted Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter -mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical. 3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer. B. Sealant for Countertops: Mildew -Resistant, Single -Component, Nonsag, Acid -Curing Silicone Joint ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Basis of Design Product: DOW CORNING 786 Silicone Sealant 12366-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 2. Hardness, ASTM D 2240: 25 durometer Shore A 3. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 36 g/L maximum. 4. NSF Standard 51 and FDA Regulation No. 21 CFR 177.2600 compliant. 5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to receive solid surface material countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m), 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch (0.4-mm) difference between planes of adjacent units. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane. C. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, clean and polish entire surface. D. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. 1. Install metal splines in kerfs in countertop edges at joints. Fill kerfs with adhesive before inserting splines and remove excess immediately after adjoining units are drawn into position. 2. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width. E. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. F. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. G. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to 12366-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. H. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07920 "Joint Sealants." I. Set thresholds as required for adjacent flooring system. 1. Set with ceramic tile where ceramic tile is adjacent 2. Adhere to substrate at epoxy flooring END OF SECTION 12366 12366-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. HZ R300253.02 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS SECTION 12368 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Quartz agglomerate countertops and backsplashes. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 12366 "Solid Surfacing Countertops" for homogenous plastic resin countertops. 2. Section 15400 "Plumbing" for nonintegral sinks and plumbing fittings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For countertop materials. B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Countertop material, 6 inches square. 2. One full-size quartz agglomerate countertop, with front edge, 8 by 10 inches, of construction and in configuration specified. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. 12368-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. HZ R300253.02 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style: 1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. 3. Endsplash: None. B. Countertops: 3/4-inch- thick, quartz agglomerate with front edge built up with same material. C. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch- thick, quartz agglomerate. D. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop -applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly. 2.2 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin and complying with the "Physical Characteristics of Materials" Article of ANSI SS1. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, as indicated: a. Cambria. b. Cosentino USA. c. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. d. LG Chemical, Ltd. e. OKITE Quartz Surfacing by Seieffe Corporation; OKITE Quartz Surfacing. f. Samsung Chemical USA, Inc. 2. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet. B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Pre -drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 12368-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. HZ R300253.02 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 1. Install backsplashes to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. END OF SECTION 12368 12368-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL SECTION 13730 ACCESS CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Security access operating system and application software. 2. Security access controllers connected to high-speed electronic -data transmission network. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CPU: Central processing unit. B. Credential: Data assigned to an entity and used to identify that entity. C. dpi: Dots per inch. D. DTS: Digital Termination Service. A microwave -based, line -of -sight communication provided directly to the end user. E. GFI: Ground fault interrupter. F. Identifier: A credential card; keypad personal identification number; or code, biometric characteristic, or other unique identification entered as data into the entry -control database for the purpose of identifying an individual. Where this term is presented with an initial capital letter, this definition applies. G. I/O: Input/Output. H. LAN: Local area network. Location: A Location on the network having a PC -to -controller communications link, with additional controllers at the Location connected to the PC -to -controller link with a TIA 485-A communications loop. Where this term is presented with an initial capital letter, this definition applies. 13730 - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL J. PDF: Portable Document Format. The file format used by the Acrobat document -exchange - system software from Adobe. K. RAS: Remote access services. L. RF: Radio frequency. M. ROM: Read-only memory. ROM data are maintained through losses of power. N. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows. O. TWAIN: Technology without an Interesting Name. A programming interface that lets a graphics application, such as an image editing program or desktop publishing program, activate a scanner, frame grabber, or other image -capturing device. P. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply. Q. USB: Universal serial bus. R. WAN: Wide area network. S. WAV: The digital audio format used in Microsoft Windows. T. WMP: Windows media player. U. Wiegand: Patented magnetic principle that uses specially treated wires embedded in the credential card. V Windows: Operating system by Microsoft Corporation. W. Workstation: A PC with software that is configured for specific, limited security -system functions. X. WYSIWYG: What You See Is What You Get. Text and graphics appear on the screen the same as they will in print. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Reference each product to a location on Drawings. Test and evaluation data presented in Product Data shall comply with SIA BIO-01. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Diagrams for cable management system. 2. System labeling schedules, including electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cable and asset identification system of the software specified in Parts 2 and 3. 3. Wiring Diagrams. For power, signal, and control wiring. Show typical wiring schematics including the following: a. Workstation outlets, jacks, and jack assemblies. 13730 - 2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL b. Patch cords. c. Patch panels. 4. Cable Administration Drawings: As specified in "Identification" Article. 5. Battery and charger calculations for central station, workstations, and controllers. C. Other Action Submittals: 1. Project planning documents as specified in Part 3. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality -control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For security system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01760 "Project Record Documents": include the following: 1. Microsoft Windows software documentation. 2. PC installation and operating documentation, manuals, and software for the PC and all installed peripherals. Software shall include system restore, emergency boot diskettes, and drivers for all installed hardware. Provide separately for each PC. 3. Hard copies of manufacturer's specification sheets, operating specifications, design guides, users guides for software and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hard - copy submittal. 4. System installation and setup guides with data forms to plan and record options and setup decisions. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. 1. Cable installer must have on staff a registered communication distribution designer certified by Building Industry Consulting Service International. B. Source Limitations: Obtain central station, workstations, controllers, Identifier readers, and all software through one source from single manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code." E. Comply with SIA DC-03 and SIA DC-07. 13730 - 3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Controllers: 1. Store in temperature- and humidity -controlled environment in original manufacturer's sealed containers. Maintain ambient temperature between 50 and 85 deg F, and not more than 80 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. 2. Open each container; verify contents against packing list; and file copy of packing list, complete with container identification, for inclusion in operation and maintenance data. 3. Mark packing list with the same designations assigned to materials and equipment for recording in the system labeling schedules that are generated by software specified in "Cable and Asset Management Software" Article. 4. Save original manufacturer's containers and packing materials and deliver as directed under provisions covering extra materials. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: System shall be capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability: 1. Indoor, Controlled Environment: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. System components, except the central -station control unit, installed in air-conditioned indoor environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of 36 to 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION Security Access System: Access control system controllers shall be manufactured by Open Options. No Substitute B. System Software: Make programming modifications required to monitor and operate the access control devices installed in the building. C. Network(s) connecting Central Monitoring System and controllers shall consist of one or more of the following: 1. Local area, IEEE 802.3 Fast Ethernet Gigabit -Ethernet, star topology network based on TCP/IP. 13730 - 4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL 2.2 CONTROLLERS A. Controllers: Intelligent peripheral control unit, complying with UL 294, that stores time, date, valid codes, access levels, and similar data downloaded from the central station or workstation for controlling its operation. B. Subject to compliance with requirements in this article, manufacturers may use multipurpose controllers. C. Battery Backup: Sealed, lead acid; sized to provide run time during a power outage of 90 minutes, complying with UL 924. D. The Alarm Annunciation Controller: 1. Controller shall automatically restore communication within 10 seconds after an interruption with the field device network, with dc line supervision on each of its alarm inputs. a. Inputs: Monitor dry contacts for changes of state that reflect alarm conditions. Provides at least eight alarm inputs, which are suitable for wiring as normally open or normally closed contacts for alarm conditions. b. Alarm -Line Supervision: 1) Supervise the alarm lines by monitoring each circuit for changes or disturbances in the signal, and for conditions as described in UL 1076 for line security equipment using dc change measurements. System shall initiate an alarm in response to an abnormal current, which is a dc change of 5 percent or more for longer than 500 ms. 2) Transmit alarm -line -supervision alarm to the central station during the next interrogation cycle after the abnormal current condition. c. Outputs: Managed by central -station software. 2. Auxiliary Equipment Power: A GFI service outlet inside the controller enclosure. E. Entry -Control Controller: 1. Function: Provide local entry -control functions including one- and two-way communications with access -control devices such as card readers, door strikes, magnetic locks, and exit push buttons. a. Operate as a stand-alone portal controller using the downloaded database during periods of communication Toss between the controller and the field -device network. b. Accept information generated by the entry -control devices; automatically process this information to determine valid identification of the individual present at the portal: 1) On authentication of the credentials or information presented, check privileges of the identified individual, allowing only those actions granted as privileges. 13730 - 5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL 2) Privileges shall include, but are not limited to, time of day control, day of week control, group control, and visitor escort control. c. Maintain a date-, time-, and Location -stamped record of each transaction. A transaction is defined as any successful or unsuccessful attempt to gain access through a controlled portal by the presentation of credentials or other identifying information. 2. Inputs: a. Data from entry -control devices; use this input to change modes between access and secure. b. Database downloads and updates from the central station that include enrollment and privilege information. 3. Outputs: a. Indicate success or failure of attempts to use entry -control devices and make comparisons of presented information with stored identification information. b. Grant or deny entry by sending control signals to portal -control devices and mask intrusion -alarm annunciation from sensors stimulated by authorized entries. c. Maintain a date-, time-, and Location -stamped record of each transaction and transmit transaction records to the central station. d. Door Prop Alarm: If a portal is held open for longer than 20 seconds, alarm sounds. 4. With power supplies sufficient to power at voltage and frequency required for field devices and portal -control devices. 5. Data Line Problems: For periods of loss of communication with the central station, or when data transmission is degraded and generating continuous checksum errors, the controller shall continue to control entry by accepting identifying information, making authentication decisions, checking privileges, and controlling portal -control devices. a. Store up to 1000 transactions during periods of communication loss between the controller and access -control devices for subsequent upload to the central station on restoration of communication. 6. Controller Power: NFPA 70, Class II power -supply transformer, with 12- or 24-V ac secondary, backup battery and charger. a. Backup Battery: Premium, valve -regulated, recombinant -sealed, lead -calcium battery; spill proof; with a full one-year warranty and a pro rata 19-year warranty. With single -stage, constant -voltage -current, limited battery charger, comply with battery manufacturer's written instructions for battery terminal voltage and charging current recommendations for maximum battery life. b. Backup Power -Supply Capacity: 90 minutes of battery supply. Submit battery and charger calculations. 13730 - 6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL c. Power Monitoring: Provide manual, dynamic battery -load test, initiated and monitored at the control center; with automatic disconnection of the controller when battery voltage drops below controller limits. Report by using local controller - mounted digital displays and by communicating status to central station. Indicate normal power on and battery charger on trickle charge. Indicate and report the following: 1) Trouble Alarm: Normal power -off load assumed by battery. 2) Trouble Alarm: Low battery. 3) Alarm: Power off. 2.3 ACCESS POWER CONTROLLERS A. Type: Altronix, ACM8. B. Features: 1. UL 294 listed device 2. 12 to 24 V DC operation 3. Eight inputs/outputs 4. Output Fuses are rated 3.5A. 5. Main fuse is rated 10A. 6. Fire alarm disconnect option. 7. FACP output relay 8. Red LEDs indicate when outputs are triggered. 9. Green LEDs indicate FACP disconnect is triggered. 2.4 CARD READERS, CREDENTIAL CARDS, AND KEYPADS A. Card Reader Type: HID - RP40. B. Card -Reader Power: Powered from its associated controller, including its standby power source, and shall not dissipate more than 5 W. C. Response Time: Card reader shall respond to passage requests by generating a signal that is sent to the controller. Response time shall be 800 ms or less, from the time the card reader finishes reading the credential card until a response signal is generated. D. Enclosure: Suitable for surface, semi -flush, or weatherproof mounting. Mounting types shall additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations: 1. Indoors, controlled environment. 2. Outdoors, with built-in heaters or other cold -weather equipment to extend the operating temperature range as needed for operation at the site. E. Display: Digital visual indicator shall provide visible and audible status indications and user prompts. Indicate power on or off, whether user passage requests have been accepted or rejected, and whether the door is locked or unlocked. F. Combination magnetic stripe and proximity readers: 13730 - 7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL 1. Magnetic stripe card reader shall read tracks 1 2 and 3 on coded magnetic stripe cards bi directionally, using a single read head, 3-60 ips card speed. Reads encoded data that meets ANSI/ISO/AAMVA standards. 2. The card reader shall read proximity cards in a range from direct contact to at least 6 inches from the reader. G. Communication Protocol: Compatible with local processor. DOOR SENSOR: 1. Type: Bosch, ISM-CSD80; Color Brown 2.5 PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES Push -Button Switches: Momentary -contact back -lighted push buttons with stainless -steel switch enclosures. B. Electrical Ratings: 1. Minimum continuous current rating of 10 A at 120-V ac or 5 A at 240-V ac. 2. Contacts that will make 720 VA at 60 A and that will break at 720 VA at 10 A. C. Enclosures: Flush or surface mounting. Push buttons shall be suitable for flush mounting in the switch enclosures. Enclosures shall additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations: 1. Indoors, controlled environment. 2. Indoors, uncontrolled environment. 3. Outdoors. E. Power: Push-button switches shall be powered from their associated controller, using do control. 2.6 REQUEST TO EXIT MOTION SENSOR. 1. Type: Detection Systems. DS160 or equivalent. 2. Functions: a. Door monitor with sound alert. b. Wrap -around coverage c. Adjustable latch time. d. Selectable trigger, and fail safe/fail secure modes. e. Adjustable volume f. Integral active LED 13730 - 8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL 2.7 FIELD -PROCESSING SOFTWARE A. Operating System: 1. Local processors shall contain an operating system that controls and schedules that local processor's activities in real time. 2. Local processor shall maintain a point database in its memory that includes parameters, constraints, and the latest value or status of all points connected to that local processor. 3. Execution of local processor application programs shall utilize the data in memory resident files. 4. Operating system shall include a real-time clock function that maintains the seconds, minutes, hours, date, and month, including day of the week. 5. Local processor real-time clock shall be automatically synchronized with the central station at least once per day to plus or minus 10 seconds (the time synchronization shall be accomplished automatically, without operator action and without requiring system shutdown). B. Startup Software: 1. Causes automatic commencement of operation without human intervention, including startup of all connected I/O functions. 2. Local processor restart program based on detection of power failure at the local processor shall be included in the local processor software. 3. Initiates operation of self -test diagnostic routines. 4. Upon failure of the local processor, if the database and application software are no longer resident, the local processor shall not restart and systems shall remain in the failure mode indicated until the necessary repairs are made. 5. If the database and application programs are resident, the local processor shall immediately resume operation. C. Operating Mode: 1. Local processors shall control and monitor inputs and outputs as specified, independent of communications with the central station or designated workstations. 2. Alarms, status changes, and other data shall be transmitted to the central station or designated workstations when communications circuits are operable. 3. If communications are not available, each local processor shall function in a stand-alone mode and operational data, including the status and alarm data normally transmitted to the central station or designated workstations, shall be stored for later transmission to the central station or designated workstations. 4. Storage for the latest 4000 events shall be provided at local processors, as a minimum. 5. Local processors shall accept software downloaded from the central station. 6. Panel shall support flash ROM technology to accomplish firmware downloads from a central location. D. Failure Mode: Upon failure for any reason, each local processor shall perform an orderly shutdown and force all local processor outputs to a predetermined (failure -mode) state, consistent with the failure modes shown and the associated control device. 13730 - 9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL E. Functions: 1. Monitoring of inputs. 2. Control of outputs. 3. Reporting of alarms automatically to the central station. 4. Reporting of sensor and output status to central station upon request. 5. Maintenance of real time, automatically updated by the central station at least once a day. 6. Communication with the central station. 7. Execution of local processor resident programs. 8. Diagnostics. 9. Download and upload data to and from the central station. 2.8 FIELD -PROCESSING HARDWARE A. Alarm Annunciation Local Processor: 1. Respond to interrogations from the field device network, recognize and store alarm status inputs until they are transmitted to the central station, and change outputs based on commands received from the central station. 2. Local processor shall also automatically restore communication within 10 seconds after an interruption with the field device network and provide dc line supervision on each of its alarm inputs. 3. Local processor inputs shall monitor dry contacts for changes of state that reflect alarm conditions. 4. Local processor shall have at least eight alarm inputs which allow wiring contacts as normally open or normally closed for alarm conditions; and shall provide line supervision for each input by monitoring each input for abnormal open, grounded, or shorted conditions using dc current change measurements. 5. Local processor shall report line supervision alarms to the central station. 6. Alarms shall be reported for any condition that remains abnormal at an input for longer than 500 milliseconds. 7. Alarm condition shall be transmitted to the central computer during the next interrogation cycle. 8. Local processor outputs shall reflect the state of commands issued by the central station. 9. Outputs shall be a form C contact and shall include normally open and normally closed contacts. 10. Local processor shall have at least four command outputs. 11. Local processor shall be able to communicate with the central station via RS-485 or TCP/IP as a minimum. B. Processor Power Supply: 1. Local processor and sensors shall be powered from an uninterruptible power source. 2. Uninterruptible power source shall provide eight hours of battery back-up power in the event of primary power failure and shall automatically fully recharge the batteries within 12 hours after primary power is restored. 3. If the facility is without an emergency generator, the uninterruptible power source shall provide 24 hours of battery backup power. 4. There shall be no equipment malfunctions or perturbations or loss of data during the switch from primary to battery power and vice versa. 13730 - 10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL 5. Batteries shall be sealed, non-outgassing type. 6. Power supply shall be equipped with an indicator for ac input power and an indicator for dc output power. 7. Loss of primary power shall be reported to the central station as an alarm. C. Auxiliary Equipment Power: A GFI service outlet shall be furnished inside the local processor's enclosure. D. Entry -Control Local Processor: 1. Entry -control local processor shall respond to interrogations from the field device network, recognize and store alarm status inputs until they are transmitted to the central station, and change outputs based on commands received from the central station. 2. Local processor shall also automatically restore communication within 10 seconds after an interruption with the field device network and provide dc line supervision on each of its alarm inputs. 3. Entry -control local processor shall provide local entry -control functions including communicating with field devices such as card readers, keypads, biometric personnel identity -verification devices, door strikes, magnetic latches, gate and door operators, and exit push buttons. 4. Processor shall also accept data from entry -control field devices as well as database downloads and updates from the central station that include enrollment and privilege information. 5. Processor shall send indications of successful or failed attempts to use entry -control field devices and shall make comparisons of presented information with stored identification information. 6. Processor shall grant or deny entry by sending control signals to portal -control devices and mask intrusion -alarm annunciation from sensors stimulated by authorized entries. 7. Entry -control local processor shall use inputs from entry -control devices to change modes between access and secure. 8. Local processor shall maintain a date -time- and location -stamped record of each transaction and transmit transaction records to the central station. 9. Processor shall operate as a stand-alone portal controller using the downloaded database during periods of communication loss between the local processor and the central station. 10. Processor shall store a minimum of 4000 transactions during periods of communication loss between the local processor and the central station for subsequent upload to the central station upon restoration of communication. 11. Local processor inputs shall monitor dry contacts for changes of state that reflect alarm conditions. 12. Local processor shall have at least eight alarm inputs which allow wiring contacts as normally open or normally closed for alarm conditions; and shall also provide line supervision for each input by monitoring each input for abnormal open, grounded, or shorted conditions using dc current change measurements. 13. Local processor shall report line supervision alarms to the central station. 14. Alarms shall be reported for any condition that remains abnormal at an input for longer than 500 ms. 15. Alarm condition shall be transmitted to the central station during the next interrogation cycle. 13730 - 11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL 16. Entry -control local processor shall include the necessary software drivers to communicate with entry -control field devices. Information generated by the entry -control field devices shall be accepted by the local processor and automatically processed to determine valid identification of the individual present at the portal. 17. Upon authentication of the credentials or information presented, the local processor shall automatically check privileges of the identified individual, allowing only those actions granted as privileges. 18. Privileges shall include, but are not limited to, time of day control, day of week control, group control, and visitor escort control. The local processor shall maintain a date -time - and location -stamped record of each transaction. 19. Transaction is defined as any successful or unsuccessful attempt to gain access through a controlled portal by the presentation of credentials or other identifying information. 20. Local processor outputs shall reflect the state of commands issued by the central station. 21. Outputs shall be a form C contact and shall include normally open and normally closed contacts. 22. Local processor shall have at least four addressable outputs. 23. The entry -control local processor shall also provide control outputs to portal -control devices. 24. Local processor shall be able to communicate with the central station via RS-485 or TCP/IP as a minimum. 25. The system manufacturer shall provide strategies for downloading database information for panel configurations and cardholder data to minimize the required download time when using IP connectivity. 2.9 TIA 232-F ASCII INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS A. ASCII interface shall allow TIA 232-F connections to be made between the control station operating as the host PC and any equipment that will accept TIA 232-F ASCII command strings, such as CCTV switches, intercoms, and paging systems. 1. Alarm inputs in system shall allow for individual programming to output up to four unique ASCII character strings through two different COM ports on the host PC. 2. Inputs shall have the ability to be defined to transmit a unique ASCII string for alarm and one for restore through one COM port, and a unique ASCII string for a nonalarm, abnormal condition and one for a normal condition through the same or different COM port. 3. Predefined ASCII character strings shall have the ability to be up to 420 characters long with full use of all the ASCII control characters, such as return or line feed. Character strings shall be defined in the system database and then assigned to the appropriate inputs. 4. COM ports of the host PC used to interface with external equipment shall be defined in the setup portion of the software. COM port's baud rate, word length, stop bits, and parity shall be definable in the software to match that of the external equipment. Pager -System Interface: Alarms shall be able to activate a pager system with customized message for each input alarm. 13730 - 12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL 1. TIA 232-F output shall be capable of connection to a pager interface that can be used to call a paging system or service and send a signal to a portable pager. System shall allow an individual alphanumeric message per alarm input to be sent to the paging system. This interface shall support both numeric and alphanumeric pagers. C. Alarm -System Interface: 1. TIA 232-F output shall be capable of transmitting alarms from other monitoring and alarm systems to central -station automation software. 2. Alternatively, alarms that are received by this access -control system are to be transferred to the alarm automation system as if they were sent through a digital alarm receiver. a. System shall be able to transmit an individual message from any alarm input to a burglar -alarm automation monitoring system. b. System shall be able to append to each message a predefined set of character strings as a prefix and a suffix. 2.10 CABLES A. General Cable Requirements: Comply with requirements as recommended by system manufacturer for integration requirement. B. PVC -Jacketed, TIA 232-F Cables: 1. Two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, polypropylene insulation, and individual aluminum-foil/polyester-tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage; PVC jacket. 2. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper drain wire. 3. NFPA 70, Type CM. 4. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 vertical tray. C. PVC -Jacketed, TIA 485-A Cables: Two pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, PVC jacket, and NFPA 70, Type CMG. D. Multiconductor, PVC, Reader and Wiegand Keypad Cables: 1. No. 22 AWG, paired and twisted multiple conductors, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, semirigid PVC insulation, overall aluminum-foil/polyester-tape shield with 100 percent shield coverage, plus tinned copper braid shield with 65 percent shield coverage, and PVC jacket. 2. NFPA 70, Type CMG. 3. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 vertical tray. 4. For TIA 232-F applications. 13730 - 13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL E. Paired, PVC, Reader and Wiegand Keypad Cables: 1. Three pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, polypropylene insulation, individual aluminum-foil/polyester-tape shielded pairs each with No. 22 AWG, stranded tinned copper drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage, and PVC jacket. 2. NFPA 70, Type CM. 3. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 vertical tray. F. Paired, Lock Cables: 1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned copper conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, and PVC jacket. 2. NFPA 70, Type CMG. 3. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 vertical tray. G. Paired, Lock Cables: 1. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned copper conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, and PVC jacket. 2. NFPA 70, Type CMG. 3. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 vertical tray. H. Paired, Input Cables: 1. One pair, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, polypropylene insulation, overall aluminum-foil/polyester-tape shield with No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage, and PVC jacket. 2. NFPA 70, Type CMR. 3. Flame Resistance: UL 1666 riser flame test. I. Paired, AC Transformer Cables: 1. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (7x26) tinned copper conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, and PVC jacket. 2. NFPA 70, Type CMG. J. LAN Cabling: 1. Comply with requirements in Section 16767 "Communications Horizontal Cabling." 2. NFPA 262. 2.11 TRANSFORMERS A. NFPA 70, Class II control transformers, NRTL listed. Transformers for security access -control system shall not be shared with any other system. 13730 - 14 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation. B. Examine roughing -in for LAN and control cable conduit systems to PCs, controllers, card readers, and other cable -connected devices to verify actual locations of conduit and back boxes before device installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with recommendations in SIA CP-01. B. Comply with TIA/EIA 606-A, "Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure." C. Obtain detailed Project planning forms from manufacturer of access -control system; develop custom forms to suit Project. Fill in all data available from Project plans and specifications and publish as Project planning documents for review and approval. 1. For each Location, record setup of controller features and access requirements. 2. Propose start and stop times for time zones and holidays, and match up access levels for doors. 3. Set up groups, facility codes, linking, and list inputs and outputs for each controller. 4. Assign action message names and compose messages. 5. Set up alarms. Establish interlocks between alarms, intruder detection, and video surveillance features. 6. Prepare and install alarm graphic maps. 7. Develop user -defined fields. 8. Develop screen layout formats. 9. Propose setups for guard tours and key control. 10. Discuss badge layout options; design badges. 11. Complete system diagnostics and operation verification. 12. Prepare a specific plan for system testing, startup, and demonstration. 13. Develop acceptance test concept and, on approval, develop specifics of the test. D. In meetings with Architect and Owner, present Project planning documents and review, adjust, and prepare final setup documents. Use final documents to set up system software. 3.3 CABLING A. Comply with NECA 1, "Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction." 13730 - 15 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL B. Install cables and wiring according to requirements in Section 16120. C. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces. D. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use NRTL-listed plenum cable in environmental airspaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. E. Install LAN cables using techniques, practices. and methods that are consistent with Category 5E rating of components and fiber-optic rating of components, and that ensure Category 6 and fiber-optic performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end. Boxes and enclosures containing security -system components or cabling, and which are easily accessible to employees or to the public, shall be provided with a lock. Boxes above ceiling level in occupied areas of the building shall not be considered accessible. Junction boxes and small device enclosures below ceiling level and easily accessible to employees or the public shall be covered with a suitable cover plate and secured with tamperproof screws. G. Install end -of -line resistors at the field device location and not at the controller or panel location. 3.4 CABLE APPLICATION Comply with TIA 569-B, "Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces." B. Cable application requirements are minimum requirements and shall be exceeded if recommended or required by manufacturer of system hardware. C. TIA 232-F Cabling: Install at a maximum distance of 50 ft.. D. TIA 485-A Cabling: Install at a maximum distance of 4000 ft.. E. Card Readers: 1. Install number of conductor pairs recommended by manufacturer for the functions specified. 2. Unless manufacturer recommends larger conductors, install No. 22 AWG wire if maximum distance from controller to the reader is 250 ft., and install No. 20 AWG wire if maximum distance is 500 ft.. 3. For greater distances, install "extender" or "repeater" modules recommended by manufacturer of the controller. 4. Install minimum No. 18 AWG shielded cable to readers and keypads that draw 50 mA or more. F. Install minimum No. 16 AWG cable from controller to electrically powered locks. Do not exceed 250 ft.. 13730 - 16 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL G. Install minimum No. 18 AWG ac power wire from transformer to controller, with a maximum distance of 25 ft.. 3.5 GROUNDING A. Comply with Section 16762 "Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems." B. Comply with IEEE 1100, "Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Electronic Equipment." C. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common -mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. D. Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit. E. Signal Ground: 1. Terminal: Locate in each equipment room and wiring closet; isolate from power system and equipment grounding. 2. Bus: Mount on wall of main equipment room with standoff insulators. 3. Backbone Cable: Extend from signal ground bus to signal ground terminal in each equipment room and wiring closet. 3.6 INSTALLATION A. Push Buttons: Where multiple push buttons are housed within a single switch enclosure, they shall be stacked vertically with each push-button switch labeled with 1/4-inch- high text and symbols as required. Push-button switches shall be connected to the controller associated with the portal to which they are applied, and shall operate the appropriate electric strike, electric bolt, or other facility release device. B. Install card readers, keypads, push buttons, and biometric readers. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. In addition to requirements in this article, comply with applicable requirements in Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and with TIA/EIA 606-A. B. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. 1. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered, and each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building -mounted device shall be identified with the name and number of the particular device as shown. 2. Each wire connected to building -mounted devices is not required to be numbered at the device if the color of the wire is consistent with the associated wire connected and numbered within the panel or cabinet. 13730 - 17 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL C. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as -built conditions. 3.8 SYSTEM SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE A. Develop, install, and test software and hardware, and perform database tests for the complete and proper operation of systems involved. Assign software license to Owner. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. LAN Cable Procedures: Inspect for physical damage and test each conductor signal path for continuity and shorts. Use Class 2, bidirectional, Category 5 tester. Test for faulty connectors, splices, and terminations. Test according to TIA/EIA 568-B.1, "Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards - Part 1: General Requirements." Link performance for UTP cables must comply with minimum criteria in TIA/EIA 568-B.1. 2. Test each circuit and component of each system. Tests shall include, but are not limited to, measurements of power -supply output under maximum load, signal loop resistance, and leakage to ground where applicable. System components with battery backup shall be operated on battery power for a period of not less than 10 percent of the calculated battery operating time. Provide special equipment and software if testing requires special or dedicated equipment. 3. Operational Test: After installation of cables and connectors, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. Test each signal path for end -to -end performance from each end of all pairs installed. Remove temporary connections when tests have been satisfactorily completed. C. Devices and circuits will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.10 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to supervise and assist with startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to approved procedures that were developed in "Preparation" Article and with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Enroll and prepare badges and access cards for Owner's operators, management, and security personnel. 13730 - 18 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ACCESS CONTROL 3.11 PROTECTION A. Maintain strict security during the installation of equipment and software. Rooms housing the control station, and workstations that have been powered up shall be locked and secured with an activated burglar alarm and access -control system reporting to a central station complying with UL 1610, "Central -Station Burglar -Alarm Units," during periods when a qualified operator in the employ of Contractor is not present. 3.12 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain security access system. Provide for 8 hours of training for up to 16 maintenance staff for operation, maintenance and repair procedures, 8 hours of training for IT or security staff from programming and database management and 4 hours of training for up to 8 building staff for operation procedures. END OF SECTION 13730 13730 - 19 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SECTION 13760 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes a video surveillance system consisting of cameras, digital video recorder, data transmission wiring, and a control station with its associated equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AGC: Automatic gain control. B. BNC: Bayonet Neill-Concelman - type of connector. C. B/W: Black and white. D. CCD: Charge -coupled device. E. FTP: File transfer protocol. F. IP: Internet protocol. G. LAN: Local area network. H. MPEG: Moving picture experts group. I. NTSC: National Television System Committee. J. PC: Personal computer. K. PTZ: Pan -tilt -zoom. L. RAID: Redundant array of independent disks. M. TCP: Transmission control protocol - connects hosts on the Internet. N. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply. O. WAN: Wide area network. 13760 - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions and data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For cameras, power supplies, video switches, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Conditions: Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability. 1.7 WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of cameras, equipment related to camera operation, and control -station equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Video -signal format shall digital and IP addressable. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on enclosures, control units, pull boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper -alarm signal when unit is opened or partially disassembled. Control -station, control -unit alarm display shall identify tamper alarms and indicate locations. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NECA 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 13760 - 2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 2.3 CAMERAS A. Basis of Design: is AXIS Network Cameras. Refer to CCTV one -line for camera identification. 2.4 CAMERA -SUPPORTING EQUIPMENT A. Minimum Load Rating: Rated for load in excess of the total weight supported times a minimum safety factor of two. B. Mounting Brackets for Fixed Cameras: Type matched to items supported and mounting conditions. 2.5 NETWORK SWITCH A. Basis of design: AXIS PoE+ Network Switch. B. Network: DHCP, VLAN C. Security Password protection, IP address filtering, HTTPS encryption, IEEE 802.1X network access control, ACL, Private VLANs, DHCP Snooping. D. Supported protocols: IPv4, IPv6, HTTP, HTTPS, QoS, Bonjour, UPnP, SNMP v1/v2c/v3, DNS, NTP, TCP, UDP, IGMP, ICMP, DHCP, ARP, SSH, STP, RSTP, MSTP, LLDP, LLDP-MED, TFTP, SMTP, BPDU. E. Throughput: 38.7 Mpps F. Switching capacity: 52 Gbps G. MAC table: 8 K H. Jumbo frames 9216 Bytes. I. Casing: Metal, Color: Black J. Power requirements 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz K. PoE class: Power over Ethernet Plus (PoE+) IEEE 802.3at Type 2 Class 4 L. PoE output Port 1 to 24: Up to 30 W. Power budget: 370 W M. Connectors: PoE ports; RJ45 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T (24x) Uplink Combination port RJ45/SFP 100Base-TX/1000Base-T (2x), Power connector port. N. Operating conditions: 0 °C to 50 °C (32 °F to 122 °F) Humidity 10-90% RH (non -condensing) 13760 - 3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerance, hazards to camera installation, and other conditions affecting installation. B. Examine roughing -in for LAN, WAN, and IP network before device installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 WIRING A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways unless otherwise indicated. 1. Except raceways are not required in accessible indoor ceiling spaces and attics. 2. Except raceways are not required in hollow gypsum board partitions. 3. Conceal raceways and wiring except in unfinished spaces. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. C. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. D. For communication wiring, comply with the following: 1. Section"16767 - Communications Horizontal Cabling." E. Grounding: Provide independent -signal circuit grounding recommended in writing by manufacturer. 3.3 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM INSTALLATION Install cameras and infrared illuminators level and plumb. Install cameras with 84-inch- minimum clear space below cameras and their mountings. Change type of mounting to achieve required clearance. C. Set pan unit and pan -and -tilt unit stops to suit final camera position and to obtain the field of view required for camera. Connect all controls and alarms, and adjust. D. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components at control stations unless otherwise indicated. 13760 - 4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE E. Avoid ground loops by making ground connections only at the control station. F. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled, and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. 2. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify that they comply with specified requirements. Conduct tests at varying lighting levels, including day and night scenes as applicable. Prepare video -surveillance equipment for acceptance and operational testing as follows: a. Prepare equipment list described in "Informational Submittals" Article. b. Verify operation of auto -iris lenses. c. Set back -focus of fixed focal length lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image. Adjust until image is in focus with and without the filter. d. Set back -focus of zoom lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image. Additionally, set zoom to full wide angle and aim camera at an object 50 to 75 feet away. Adjust until image is in focus from full wide angle to full telephoto, with the filter in place. e. Set and name all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel. f. Set sensitivity of motion detection. g. Connect and verify responses to alarms. h. Verify operation of control -station equipment. 3. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed and system has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice of test schedule. 4. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation in all functional modes. E. Video surveillance system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 13760 - 5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other -than -normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Tasks shall include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Check cable connections. 2. Check proper operation of cameras and lenses. Verify operation of auto -iris lenses and adjust back -focus as needed. 3. Adjust all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel. 4. Recommend changes to cameras, lenses, and associated equipment to improve Owner's use of video surveillance system. 5. Provide a written report of adjustments and recommendations. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. B. Clean video -surveillance -system components, including camera -housing windows, lenses, and monitor screens. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain video -surveillance equipment. END OF SECTION 13760 13760 - 6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM SECTION 13852 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire -alarm control unit. 2. Manual fire -alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Air -sampling smoke detectors. 5. Nonsystem smoke detectors. 6. Heat detectors. 7. Notification appliances. 8. Device guards. 9. Remote annunciator. 10. Addressable interface device. 11. Digital alarm communicator transmitter. 12. Network communications. 13. System printer. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 16120 " Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for cables and conductors for fire -alarm systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing. B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel. C. HLI: High Level Interface. D. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies. E. PC: Personal computer. 13852 - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM F. VESDA: Very Early Smoke -Detection Apparatus. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: For fire -alarm system. 1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring. 4. Detail assembly and support requirements. 5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification -appliance circuits. 6. Include battery -size calculations. 7. Include input/output matrix. 8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72. 9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector. 10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air -handling system is operating. 11. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them. a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm. c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 12. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams. C. General Submittal Requirements: 1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect. 2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications: a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire -alarm system design. b. NICET-certified, fire -alarm technician; Level III minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Delegated -Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 13852 - 2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the device. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals and sound -pressure levels for audible appliances. 3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Field quality -control reports. 1.6 Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire -alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Division 01, include the following and deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction: a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. b. Provide "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point with indication of origination and termination points. d. Riser diagram. e. Device addresses. f. Record copy of site -specific software. g. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following: 1) Equipment tested. 2) Frequency of testing of installed components. 3) Frequency of inspection of installed components. 4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. 5) Manufacturer's user training manuals. h. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. i. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire -alarm control unit and each annunciator unit. 13852 - 3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than one unit. 2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than one unit. 3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type. 4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type. 5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked or tamperproofed components. 6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed. 7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system. Provide in a box or cabinet with compartments marked with fuse types and sizes. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire -alarm Level II technician. C. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL (nationally recognized testing laboratory). 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform a full test of the existing system prior to starting work. Document any equipment or components not functioning as designed. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are placed in service to protect the facility during construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and horn/strobe evacuation. B. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors. C. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system. 13852 - 4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION A. Fire -alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems: 1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Duct smoke detectors. 5. Carbon monoxide detectors. 6. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. B. Fire -alarm signal shall initiate the following actions: 1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire -alarm control unit and remote annunciators. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 6. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 7. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors. 8. Activate elevator power shunt trip. 9. Activate emergency lighting control. 10. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 11. Record events in the system memory. 12. Record events by the system printer. 13. Indicate device in alarm on the remote annunciator. C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Valve supervisory switch. 2. Elevator shunt -trip supervision. 3. Fire pump running. 4. Fire -pump loss of power. 5. Fire -pump power phase reversal. 6. User disabling of zones or individual devices. 7. Loss of communication with any panel on the network. D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm -initiating and supervisory signal -initiating devices. 3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control module, remote annunciator, or printer interface. 4. Loss of primary power at fire -alarm control unit. 5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire -alarm control unit. 6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire -alarm control unit. 13852 - 5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 7. Break in standby battery circuitry. 8. Failure of battery charging. 9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire -alarm control unit or annunciator. E. System Supervisory Signal Actions: 1. Initiate notification appliances. 2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire -alarm control unit and remote annunciators. 3. Record the event on system printer. 4. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 5. Transmit system status to building management system. 6. Display system status on graphic annunciator. 2.3 FIRE -ALARM CONTROL UNIT A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, the fire alarm system provided shall use an open protocol sytem. B. General Requirements for Fire -Alarm Control Unit: 1. Field -programmable, microprocessor -based, modular, power -limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864. a. System software and programs shall be held in nonvolatile flash, electrically erasable, programmable, read-only memory, retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies. b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer. c. Provide communication between the FACP and remote circuit interface panels, annunciators, and displays. d. The FACP shall be listed for connection to a central -station signaling system service. e. Provide nonvolatile memory for system database, logic, and operating system and event history. The system shall require no manual input to initialize in the event of a complete power down condition. The FACP shall provide a minimum 500-event history log. 2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate which communication zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification appliance by building communication zone. 3. Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and Mechanical Equipment: The FACP shall be listed for releasing service. C. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire -alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu. Annunciator and Display: Liquid -crystal type, three line(s) of 40 characters, minimum. 13852 - 6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke -detector sensitivity and other parameters. D. Initiating -Device, Notification -Appliance, and Signaling -Line Circuits: 1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class A. 2. Pathway Survivability: Level 1. 3. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling -line circuit. 4. Serial Interfaces: a. One dedicated RS 485 port for remote station operation using point ID DACT. b. One RS 485 port for remote annunciators, Ethernet module, or multi -interface module (printer port). c. One USB port for PC configuration. E. Smoke -Alarm Verification: 1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm -verification" signal at fire -alarm control unit. 2. Activate an approved "alarm -verification" sequence at fire -alarm control unit and detector. 3. Record events by the system printer. 4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified. 5. Cancel fire -alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified. F. Notification -Appliance Circuit: 1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three -pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72. 2. Where notification appliances provide signals to sleeping areas, the alarm signal shall be a 520-Hz square wave with an intensity 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level, or at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater, measured at the pillow. 3. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72. G. Elevator Recall: 1. Elevator recall shall be initiated only by one of the following alarm -initiating devices: a. Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor. b. Smoke detector in elevator machine room. c. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway. 2. Elevator controller shall be programmed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor if lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors are activated. 3. Water -flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room shall shut down elevators associated with the location without time delay. a. Water -flow switch associated with the sprinkler in the elevator pit may have a delay to allow elevators to move to the designated floor. 13852 - 7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM H. Remote Smoke -Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time -scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity -adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted values on system printer. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station. J. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power -supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory signals supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source. 1. Alarm current draw of entire fire -alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power - supply module rating. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch. 1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless -steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. 2.4 MANUAL FIRE -ALARM BOXES A. General Requirements for Manual Fire -Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised -letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1. Double -action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull -lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual -station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire -alarm control unit. 2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench -operated switch. 3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory -fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery - powered audible horn intended to discourage false -alarm operation. 4. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory -fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. 13852 - 8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: 1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be four -wire type. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire -alarm control unit. 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist -lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. 5. Self -Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 6. Integral Visual -Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power -on status. 7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital -addressable type, individually monitored at fire -alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire -alarm control unit. a. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor. b. Sensitivity levels based on time of day. B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire -alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire -alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A. 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire -alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire -alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). 3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector for smoke detection in HVAC system ducts. 4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 13852 - 9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor -control circuit. 2.6 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS A. General: Carbon monoxide detector listed for connection to fire -alarm system. 1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Testable by introducing test carbon monoxide into the sensing cell. 3. Detector shall provide alarm contacts and trouble contacts. 4. Detector shall send trouble alarm when nearing end -of -life, power supply problems, or internal faults. 5. Comply with UL 2075. 6. Locate, mount, and wire according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Provide means for addressable connection to fire -alarm system. 8. Test button simulates an alarm condition. 2.7 HEAT DETECTORS A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521. 1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F (57 deg C) or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F (8 deg C) per minute unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting: Twist -lock base interchangeable with smoke -detector bases. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire -alarm control unit. 2.8 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a signaling -line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections. Combination Devices: Factory -integrated audible and visible devices in a single - mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections. Horns: Electric -vibrating -polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound -pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet (3 m) from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol. C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) high letters on the lens. 13852 - 10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 1. Rated Light Output: a. Candella ratins as indicated. b. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field. 2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with guards in place. 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red. 2.9 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire -alarm control unit for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire -alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing. 1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1. B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shall match those of fire -alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals. 2.10 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE A. General: 1. Include address -setting means on the module. 2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type. 3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers. B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm -initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts. C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator recall and to circuit -breaker shunt trip for power shutdown. 1. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command. 2. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for field wiring. D. Control Module: 1. Operate notification devices. 2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service. 13852 - 11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 2.11 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632. B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire - alarm control unit and automatically capture one telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal. C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following: 1. Verification that both telephone lines are available. 2. Programming device. 3. LED display. 4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication. 5. Communications failure with the central station or fire -alarm control unit. D. Digital data transmission shall include the following: 1. Address of the alarm -initiating device. 2. Address of the supervisory signal. 3. Address of the trouble -initiating device. 4. Loss of ac supply. 5. Loss of power. 6. Low battery. 7. Abnormal test signal. 8. Communication bus failure. E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. F. Self -Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station. 2.12 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS A. Provide network communications for fire -alarm system according to fire -alarm manufacturer's written requirements. Provide network communications pathway per manufacturer's written requirements and requirements in NFPA 72 and NFPA 70. C. Provide integration gateway using Modbus for connection to building automation system. 13852 - 12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 2.13 DEVICE GUARDS A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong, or other device requiring protection. 1. Factory fabricated and furnished by device manufacturer. 2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before installation begins. B. Examine roughing -in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire -alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems." 1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be replaced. 2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust, debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage instructions. B. Install wall -mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches (1980 mm) above the finished floor. C. Manual Fire -Alarm Boxes: 1. Install manual fire -alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches (1520 mm) of the exit doorway. 2. Mount manual fire -alarm box on a background of a contrasting color. 3. The operable part of manual fire -alarm box shall be between 42 inches (1060 mm) and 48 inches (1220 mm) above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise indicated. 13852 - 13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM D. Smoke- or Heat -Detector Spacing: 1. Comply with the "Smoke -Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke -detector spacing. 2. Comply with the "Heat -Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for heat -detector spacing. 3. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 36 inches (910 mm) from air -supply diffuser or return -air opening. 4. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches (300 mm) from any part of a lighting fixture and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting. E. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover. F. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches (9100 mm) long shall be supported at both ends. 1. Do not install smoke detector in duct smoke -detector housing during construction. Install detector only during system testing and prior to system turnover. G. Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location. Do not install smoke detectors in sprinklered elevator shafts. H. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector, sprinkler water -flow switch, and valve -tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position. I. Audible Alarm -Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install horns on flush -mounted back boxes with the device -operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated. J. Visible Alarm -Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated. K. Device Location -Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor. 3.3 PATHWAYS A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in nonaccessible locations may be routed exposed. 1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches (2440 mm) above the floor shall be installed in EMT. B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT. C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel. 13852 - 14 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches (910 mm) from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled. 1. Alarm -initiating connection to smoke -control system (smoke management) at firefighters' smoke -control system panel. 2. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems. 3. Electronically locked doors and access gates. 4. Alarm -initiating connection to elevator recall system and components. 5. Alarm -initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 6. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. 7. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt -trip breaker. 8. Data communication circuits for connection to building management system. 9. Supervisory connections at fire -pump power failure including a dead -phase or phase - reversal condition. 10. Supervisory connections at fire -pump engine control panel. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 " Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire -alarm control unit. 3.6 GROUNDING A. Ground fire -alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire -alarm control unit. B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. D. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative: 1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing. 13852 - 15 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components. 2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound -level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4. 4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Factory -authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances. F. Fire -alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire -alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. 3.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 1. Include visual inspections according to the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Perform tests in the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Perform tests per the "Testing Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 13852 - 16 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 3.9 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire -alarm system. END OF SECTION 13852 13852 - 17 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. HZ R300253.02 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS SECTION 14210 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes machine -room -less (MRL) electric traction passenger elevators. 1. Subject to compliance with the requirements, machine -room Tess hydraulic elevators are indicated to be an acceptable alternate. Requirements include the design spatial limitations of hoist way, pit and overhead, and the requirement for a center -opening door. 2. Proposed elevators that are not MRL electric traction -type shall be administered as substitutions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01500 'Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary use of elevators for construction purposes. 2. Section 03300 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete. 3. Section 05120 "Structural Steel Framing" for the following: a. Attachment plates, angle brackets, and other preparation of concrete and structural steel for fastening guide -rail brackets. b. Hoist beams. 4. Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for the following: a. Structural -steel shapes for subsills. b. Pit ladders and grates. 5. Section 09301 "Ceramic Tiling"" for finish flooring in elevator cars. 6. Division 16 Section for telephone service for elevators. 7. Division 13 Section for fire alarm system. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in ASME A17.1/CSA B44 apply to work of this Section. 14210-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. HZ R300253.02 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information. Include product data for car enclosures, hoistway entrances, and operation, control, and signal systems. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment. 2. Include large-scale layout of car -control station. 3. Indicate maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands. 4. Include maximum required heating and cooling loads. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For exposed car, hoistway door and frame, and signal equipment finishes; 3-inch-square Samples of sheet materials; and 4-inch lengths of running trim members. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include the following: 1. Manufacturer's standard maintenance and operations manual. 2. Diagnostic Tools: Furnish any specialized tool(s) that may be required to perform diagnostic evaluations, adjustments, and/or parametric software changes and/or test and inspections on any piece of elevator control or monitoring equipment installed. This shall include any specialized tool(s) required for monitoring, inspection and/or maintenance where the means of suspension other than conventional wire ropes are provided. Any and all such tool(s) shall become property of the Owner. Any diagnostic tool provided to the Owner shall be configured to perform all levels of diagnostics, systems adjustment and parametric software changes available to the Contractor. In those cases where diagnostic tools provided to the Owner require periodic recalibration/or re -initiation, the Contractor shall perform such tasks at no additional cost to the Owner for a period equal to the term of the maintenance agreement from the date of final acceptance of the competed project. During those intervals in which the Owner might find it necessary to surrender a diagnostic tool for re -calibration, re -initiation, or repair, the Contractor shall provide a temporary replacement for the tool at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner printed instructions for the proper use of any tool that may be necessary to perform diagnostic evaluations, system adjustment, and/or parametric software changes on any unit of microprocessor -based elevator control equipment and means of suspension other than standard elevator steel cables furnished and install by the Contractor. Accompanying the printed instructions shall be any and all access codes, password, or other secure information that is necessary to interface with the microprocessor -control equipment. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 14210-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. HZ R300253.02 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS B. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard one-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components, and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and other items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates, sleeves, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to electric traction elevators including pit ladders; sumps and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; electrical service; and electrical outlets, lights, and switches in hoistways, pits, and machine rooms. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain elevators from single manufacturer. 1. Major elevator components, including driving machines, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators, car frames, cars and entrances, shall be manufactured by single manufacturer. 2. Basis of Design: Provide the following named product, or an acceptable product by one of the other listed manufacturers meeting the requirements and conforming to the project's spatial limitations: a. Kone, U.S., "EcoSpace" (Basis of Design). b. Otis Elevator Co.; "Gen2". c. ThyssenKrupp Elevator Americas; "Endura HMRL Twinpost CO". 14210-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. HZ R300253.02 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 3. Substitution Responsibility: Contractor assumes all responsibility and cost for modifications to any building system required by the use of any product not listed as the Basis -of -Design. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 407 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC A117.1. 1. Comply with requirements of 2012 Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) as administered by Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation (TDLR). 2.3 ELEVATORS A. Elevator System, General: Manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Unless otherwise indicated, manufacturer's standard components shall be used, as included in standard elevator systems and as required for complete system. B. Elevator Description: 1. Machine Location: Hoistway; no machine room is provided. 2. Control Location: Hoistway or hoistway enclosure only; no control room is provided. 3. Machine Type: Gearless traction. 4. Rated Load: 3500 lb . 5. Rated Speed: 150 fpm (0.77 m/s). 6. Operation System: Selective -collective automatic operation. a. Simplex (one elevator). 7. Auxiliary Operations: a. Nuisance call cancel. 8. Number of Openings: Two. 9. Number of Landings: Two. 10. Travel: As indicated on the drawings 11. Overhead Clearance: 13'-0". 12. Pit Depth: 5 feet. 13. Car Enclosures: a. Inside Width: 80 inches from side wall to side wall. b. Inside Depth: 51 inches from back wall to front wall (return panels). c. Inside Height: 96 inches to underside of ceiling (approx.). d. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. f. Sides and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate.[As Indicated] g. Reveals: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. h. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. i. Door Sills: Aluminum, mill finish. j. Ceiling; :Segmented stainless steel panels with No. 4 finish and LED lighting 14210-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. HZ R300253.02 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS k. Handrails: 1/2 by 2 inches rectangular satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish, at rear of car. I. Floor prepared to receive resilient flooring. 14. Hoistway Entrances: a. Width: 42 inches . b. Height: 84 inches . c. Type: Single -speed center opening. d. Frames Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. e. Doors at First Floor: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. f. Doors at Other Floors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. g. Sills Aluminum, mill finish. 15. Hall Fixtures Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 16. Car Fixtures (Lantern and Chime): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 17. Additional Requirements: a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. b. Provide hooks for protective pads in all cars and one complete set(s) of full -height protective pads. c. Provide all other items required for a complete, code -compliant installation, including electrical power, ventilation, low -voltage wiring, etc. 2.4 TRACTION SYSTEMS A. Elevator Machines: Variable -voltage, variable -frequency, ac-type hoisting machines or variable - voltage do -type hoisting machines and solid-state power converters. 1. Provide non -regenerative system. B. Fluid for Hydraulic Buffers: If using hydraulic buffers, use only fire-resistant fluid. C. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work. Device installation is specified in another Section. D. Machine Beams: Provide framing to support elevator hoisting machine and deflector sheaves from the building structure. Comply with Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for materials and fabrication. E. Car Frame and Platform: Bolted- or welded -steel units. F. Guides: Roller guides or polymer -coated, non -lubricated sliding guides. Provide guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames. 2.5 OPERATION SYSTEMS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation systems as required to provide Selective -Collective operation. 14210-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. HZ R300253.02 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS B. Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following operational features for elevators where indicated: 1. Single -Car Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, car is returned to a designated floor and parked with doors open. Car can be manually put in service on standby power, either for return operation or for regular operation, by switches in control panel located at ground floor elevator lobby. Manual operation causes automatic operation to cease. 2. Nuisance CaII Cancel: When car calls exceed a preset number while car load is less than a predetermined weight, all car calls are canceled. Preset number of calls can be adjusted. 2.6 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening device with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor - controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen. B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time, through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy. 2.7 CAR ENCLOSURES A. General: Provide steel -framed car enclosures with nonremovable wall panels, with car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation. 1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 on car tops where required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44. B. Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Subfloor: Exterior, underlayment grade plywood, not less than 5/8-inch nominal thickness. 2. Plastic -Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to 1/2-inch fire - retardant -treated particleboard with plastic -laminate panel backing and manufacturer's standard protective edge trim. Panels have a flame -spread index of 75 or less, when tested according to ASTM E 84. Plastic -laminate color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from elevator manufacturer's full range. a. Provide 0.75 inch reveals between panels, with No. 4 stainless steel finish at base of reveal. 3. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. 4. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car. 5. Stainless -Steel Doors: Flush, hollow -metal construction; fabricated from stainless -steel sheet. 6. Unfinished -Steel Doors: Flush, hollow -metal construction; fabricated from cold -rolled steel sheet, with factory -applied enamel. 7. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors. 8. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick. 14210-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. HZ R300253.02 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 9. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic or other permanent rigid plastic. 10. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of shape, metal, and finish indicated. 2.8 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard horizontal -sliding, door -and -frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Frame size and profile shall accommodate hoistway wall construction. 1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, frames shall be self-supporting with reinforced head sections. B. Fire -Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies shall comply with NFPA 80 and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction based on testing at as close -to -neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252. 1. Fire -Protection Rating: 1 hour. C. Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Stainless -Steel Frames: Formed from stainless -steel sheet. 2. Stainless -Steel Doors: Flush, hollow -metal construction; fabricated from stainless -steel sheet. 3. Unfinished -Steel Doors: Flush, hollow -metal construction; fabricated from cold -rolled steel sheet, with factory -applied enamel. 4. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges. 5. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick. 6. Non -shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, non -staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. 2.9 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide hall -call and car -call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with LEDs. B. Car -Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed car -control stations. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mark buttons and switches for required use or function. Use both tactile symbols and Braille. 2. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car -control station, either integral with car -control station or mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Firefighters Emergency Operation: Provide Phase I emergency recall operation and Phase II emergency in -car operation in accordance with ASME A17.1. D. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital -type car position indicator, located above car door or above car -control station. Also, provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car 14210-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. HZ R300253.02 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car -control station. E. Hall Push -Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing. 1. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall. 2. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator. F. Emergency Communications: Provide integrated pre-programmed, ADA phone, accessible through help button. G. Emergency Alarm: Provide 80 dB (A) alarm. Activate with "Alarm" button on the car operating panel. H. Emergency Car Lighting: Provide sealed, rechargeable battery -power to illuminate car and activate emergency alarm in the event of power failure. I. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings. Provide the following: 1. Units mounted in both car door jambs. J. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. 1. At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on cars. K. Emergency Pictorial Signs: Fabricate from materials matching hall push-button stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire, elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push-button station unless otherwise indicated. 2.10 FINISH MATERIALS A. General: Provide the following materials for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated. B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte finish. C. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. D. Stainless -Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304. E. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063. F. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS for flat applications. 14210-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. HZ R300253.02 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Examine hoistways, hoistway openings, pits, and machine rooms as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators. C. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration -isolating mounts to minimize vibration transmission to structure and structure -borne noise due to elevator system. D. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers. E. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing. F. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8 inch, up or down, regardless of load and travel direction. G. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. H. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as indicated in shop drawings. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevator use (either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and agencies. B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times that tests are to be performed on elevators. 14210-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. HZ R300253.02 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 3.4 PROTECTION Temporary Use: Comply with the following requirements for elevator used for construction purposes: 1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to protect finishes from damage. 2. Provide strippable protective film on entrance and car doors and frames. 3. Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and frame faces. 4. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to protect elevator and elevator equipment. 5. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 6. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleanup, and adjustment as necessary for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 7 Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate, adjust, and maintain elevator(s). B. Check operation of elevator with Owner's personnel present before date of Substantial Completion and again not more than one month before end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. 3.6 MAINTENANCE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 1. Perform maintenance during normal working hours. 2. Perform emergency callback service during normal working hours with response time of two hours or less. 3. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service with response time of two hours or less. END OF SECTION 14210 14210-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15005 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . All work shall be in accordance with the General Conditions, Special Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, and other related to project documents as issued by the Owner or Owner's Representative. This and other parts of these Specifications are herewith made a part of all other sections of these Project Specifications and Contract Documents. 1.2 COORDINATION A . All work shall be in accordance with City of Pearland, Brazoria County and State of Texas Building, Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Mechanical Codes and Energy Conservation Code and with all state and national codes as they may apply to the project and to public safety. B . Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC and plumbing installations. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. C . Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in - place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. D . Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." E . Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of the various system equipment and materials. F . Coordinate the installation of the various system materials and equipment above ceilings with suspension system, Tight fixtures, and other installations. G . Coordinate the connection of the various systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide all required connections for each service. H . All materials, equipment and apparatus installed on the project shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 15005-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS The manufacturer, or his authorized Representative, shall certify, in writing, to the Owner and Owner's Representative that the installation has been made in accordance with such printed requirements. I . Model numbers as may be specified or indicated on the Drawings are only for reference convenience. The Contractor, through the manufacturer, shall be responsible to confirm the correctness of all model numbers so as to meet the specific project requirements and minimum indicated performance data. J It is the intent that the Contractor shall install complete and operable systems, fully tested, adjusted and ready for use. K Materials and equipment shall have been carefully selected for the project. The Contractor is expected to furnish and install, where required, items as near as possible to those of the Drawings and Specifications. L The Drawings accompanying these Specifications show the extent of the work and the general arrangement. The Drawings, however, are diagrammatic and exact coordinated layout of the various systems is the responsibility of the Contractor. M . The Contractor shall obtain all permits and pay all fees and charges to all local and other related agencies as required. N Contractor shall coordinate the exact location of this work with the work of other trades prior to fabrication or installation of same. Verify all dimensions and elevations. Provide additional offsets and sections of material as may be required to meet the applicable job condition requirements. Coordinate with and review all related Contractor construction Drawings and Shop Drawings of all equipment suppliers prior to start of any work. O . It will be the responsibility of each Contractor to coordinate between his equipment suppliers and any subcontractor as to which devices are supplied with equipment, required wiring and voltages and other coordination items as related to a proper and operable installation. P . It is to be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate between his equipment suppliers and his temperature control subcontractor as to which control devices are supplied with equipment, required control pneumatics or wiring and voltages and other related coordination items, so as to insure a complete, proper, and operable installation. 1.3 WARRANTY A . In entering into a contract covering this work, the Contractor accepts the Specifications and Contract Documents and guarantees that the work will be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings or such 15005-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS authorized modifications as may be made in the Contract Documents. Contractor further guarantees that the workmanship and material will be of the best procurable and that none but experienced workers familiar with each particular class of work will be employed. The Contractor further guarantees to replace and make good at his own expense any defects which may develop, within one (1) year after final payment and acceptance by the Owner, due to faulty workmanship or material, upon receipt of written notification from the Owner. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Regulations and Standards. 1. All equipment, apparatus, and systems shall be fabricated and installed in complete accordance with the Owner's fire insurance related rules and regulations, the Life Safety Code, Applicable Building, Mechanical, Plumbing, Fire and Energy Conservation Codes, and the latest (authority adopted) edition or revision of the following applicable regulations, standards, and codes: AGA American Natural Gas Association AIA American Institute of Architects ANSI American National Standard Institute ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWWA American Water Works Association AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association MCAA Mechanical Contractor's Association of America, Inc. MSSV Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers NFPA National Fire Protection Association NEC National Electric Code OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (1995) UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. 2. Give all required notices so as to comply with, and meet, all inspections that are required by Federal, State, and Local authorities. 3. It is not the intent herewith to modify, reduce, or change any rules, standards, regulations, or requirements that are applicable under local, state and federal codes, ordinances, or regulations of the various authorities having jurisdiction. Where the standards differ among the various authorities, the most rigid shall apply. 15005-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Where the requirements called for in the Specifications exceed code requirements, these Specifications shall take precedence. Where the requirements within the Specifications of this division of work conflict with the hereinbefore referenced documents (including Division 1 requirements of these Specifications), the documents having the excess, or more rigid and higher cost requirements shall apply. B . Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel." C . Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. D . Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. E . In general, most wiring and conduit requirements are addressed either as a part of a packaged equipment assembly, within Division 15 of the Project Specifications, or within these Specifications. However, should an equipment component, panel, or system device need additional wiring and conduit so as to be complete, approved and fully operational, the Contractor who supplied the equipment component, panel or system device shall be responsible for the required wiring and conduit for same when it is not otherwise covered by the Project Specifications or Drawings. All wiring shall be done by State (and Local as required) licensed electricians. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Protect equipment and trim against damage and injury due to building materials, acid, tools, equipment and any causes incidental to construction. Cover the finished surface of each piece of equipment with building paper or similar protection. Replace all equipment damaged by any cause and any trim with marred or scratched finish at no cost to the Owner, upon receipt of written notification from the Owner's Representative. B Where materials to be installed are being stored at or near the project during construction, arrange such materials so as to minimize the possibility of contamination, corrosion and damage. Keep ends of pipe, ductwork, equipment and specialties, properly closed during construction and installation to avoid the possibility of miscellaneous materials being placed in the openings. 15005-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.6 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS A . The Trade Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. He shall defend and shall indemnify and save the Owner and Owner's Representative harmless from any and all suits, demands or claims for infringement of any patent rights. B . The review by the Owner's Representative of any method of construction, invention, appliance, process, article, device or material of any kind shall be for its adequacy for the work, and shall not be an approval of the use thereof by the Contractor in violation of any patent or other rights of any third person. 1.7 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS A . These Specifications and Drawings are intended to describe and provide for a complete and finished project. They are intended to be complementary. All items of work called for by either shall be as binding as if called for by both. The work described shall be complete in every detail, notwithstanding the fact that every item necessarily involved is not particularly mentioned or shown. B . If the Bidder, Supplier, or Contractor sees anything to question, it must be brought to the attention of the Owner's Representative immediately. C . Minor Deviations. The Drawings accompanying these Specifications indicate, generally, the design and arrangement of equipment, apparatus, fixtures, accessories and piping necessary to complete the installation of the system. The exact location or arrangement of the apparatus and equipment, unless otherwise dimensioned, is subject to minor changes necessitated by field conditions and shall be required without additional cost to the Owner. Measurements shall be verified by actual observation at the construction site. Each Trade Contractor shall be responsible for all of his work fitting into place in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner to the approval of the Owner's Representative. D . Provide all labor and materials necessary for the completion of the work described. Referenced codes and industry standards and methods shall apply when no other specifics are indicated. Bring questions relating to this paragraph to the attention of the Owner's Representative for resolution prior to the receipt of Bids. E . The Specifications are divided into various sections and divisions only for the distinct purpose of facilitating the work. However, this Contractor will become responsible for furnishing all labor and materials necessary to complete the project as contemplated by the Drawings and Specifications. Any item mentioned under any heading of the Specifications must be supplied even though it is not called for again under the heading for the respective work. F . Should discrepancies occur within the Contract Documents, the more stringent and more costly approach shall apply for bidding purposes. The Contractor is to notify the Owner's Representative of discrepancies for clarification. 15005-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Clarifications issued after the contract is awarded are to be incorporated by the Contractor at no additional costs and are to be reviewed by the Owner's Representative to determine if a reduction in cost is justified. 1.8 TRADE CONTRACTORS, SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS A . The Trade Contractor is any person or organization who contracts to perform work for the Project. Wherever the word "Contractor" is used on the Drawings or in the Specifications, it shall be construed to mean the Trade Contractor applicable to the work requirements of these Specifications. B . A subcontractor is a person or organization who has a direct contract with a Trade Contractor to perform any of the Work at the site and includes all who furnish material worked to a special design in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, but excludes suppliers or persons furnishing material not specially designed. Wherever the term "subcontractor" is encountered in the Contract Documents, it shall mean the subcontractor and/or his sub -subcontractors and/or his material suppliers. C . A sub -subcontractor is a person or organization who has a direct or indirect contract with a subcontractor to perform any of the Work at the project site or for the subject project. D . A material supplier is a person or organization who has a direct contract with a Trade Contractor to furnish material not specially designed. E . It is to be the responsibility of each Trade Contractor to be fully familiar with various local trade jurisdictional requirements and to engage the services of any other subcontractors as may be required within the various trades to complete all of the work as indicated upon the Drawings and within the Specifications. Only Trade Subcontractors with established knowledge and skills of their specific trade shall be used so that all work is performed in a complete, finished, and workmanship like manner. 1. Whenever any provisions of any section of the Specifications conflict with any agreements or regulations of any kind at any time in force among members of any Trade Associations, Unions, or Councils, which regulate or distinguish what work shall or shall not be included in the work of any particular trade, the Trade Contractor shall make all necessary efforts to reconcile any such conflict without delay, damage or cost to the Owner or Owner's Representative. 2. If the progress of the work is affected by any undue delay in furnishing or installing any items of material or equipment required under the contract because of a conflict involving any such agreement or regulation, the Owner's Representative may require that other material or equipment of equal kind and quality be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 15005-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 3. Any Trade Contractor, subcontractor, or material supplier not normally employing union labor shall make all provisions necessary to avoid any resulting disputes with labor unions and shall be responsible for any delays, damages or extra cost caused by employment of such non -union labor, except as otherwise governable by state or federal rules and regulations. 4. Each Trade Contractor shall pay for all applicable Federal, State and Local taxes on all materials, labor or services furnished by him, and all taxes arising out of his operations under the Contract Documents which may be imposed upon or collectable from the Owner or become a lien against his property. Such taxes shall include but not be limited to, Occupational, Sales, Use, Excise, Old Age Benefit and Unemployment Taxes, customs duties, and all income taxes and other taxes not in force or hereafter enacted prior to final acceptance of the work. The Trade Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of and shall pay any unemployed benefits payable under any Federal or State law to individuals employed by him during the progress of the work covered by the Contract. 1.9 OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A . All operational and maintenance instructions that are provided to various Owner - selected members of the facility engineering and/or maintenance staff are, at the same time presented, to be fully video-taped by the Contractor so that all such sessions can be later reviewed by the Owner's staff on a retraining basis as needed. All such DVDs are to become the property of the Owner at the end of each applicable training period, with one copy of each also being supplied to the Owner's Representative for the Owner's Representative project files. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCTS/SUBMITTALS A . Under the Base Bid, no other manufacturers except those indicated on the Drawings or those listed within the sections of this Division, that are in turn able to comply with the contract document requirements and minimum standards of these Specifications, will be acceptable. In addition to specific required "Alternates," proposed substitutions, that may or may not be acceptable to the Owner, may be submitted by the Contractor only at the time of initial base bid submittal. B . Although design base models of various manufacturers may be indicated within the various schedules, it will be the responsibility of the various equipment manufacturers to verify the model selections so that all items of equipment comply with the minimum standards of performance that are indicated within the schedules, as well as the requirements within various sections of the Specifications under which the equipment is also specified. C . All submittals shall conform completely to the requirements of the Contract Documents, including all requirements set forth in the various Division 1 procedures. 15005-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS D . Shop Drawings are to be submitted on each item of specified or scheduled equipment, valves, specialties, insulation, fixtures, drains, controls and related accessories as indicated within the Specifications. All control submittals must include a typed sequence of control for each system. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A . Unless otherwise indicated, each Trade Contractor is to locate and furnish all access doors required for non -accessible surfaces (such as ceilings, walls, chases, and similar locations), so that all fire dampers, volume dampers, valves, terminal boxes, coils, control devices, vents, and similar items, as well as items needing lubrication and inspection, are easily accessible for operation, inspection and maintenance. Access panels and doors for ceiling, walls, chases, etc. are to be installed by the Contractor. Each Trade Contractor, whose item or device the access panel door serves, shall bear the costs of the installation of the access panels or doors. Install equipment, materials and piping systems to provide required access for servicing, maintenance, and general inspection. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. Piping systems shall not block service access of any nature, such as filter removal, equipment access panels, cleaning of tubes, and similar items. C . Requirements for access panel sizing or distance from provided access panel shall be as follows: 1 Minimum of 16" x 16" size when the item requiring access is less than 18" (radius) from center of access panel. 2. Minimum of 24" x 24" size when the item requiring access is less than 5'-0" and greater than 18" (radius) from center of access panel. 3. Minimum of 36" x 24" size when the item requiring access is greater than 5'-0". D . Access doors in ductwork and plenums are to be provided as part of Ductwork Accessories. 2.3 SLEEVES This Contractor is to provide properly sized, secured and fire stopped sleeves for all of their piping systems, plumbing systems, fire protection systems, ductwork systems, and control systems conduits and tubes at all penetrations of walls, foundations, partitions, floors and roofs throughout the entire facility. 15005-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A . Provide all materials, labor, equipment, and services necessary for a complete and operable installation as specified and shown on the Drawings. The word "Provide" shall mean "Furnish and Install." B . Provide new material and equipment in strict accordance with these Specifications and the Project Drawings. C . At all times, take such precautions as are necessary to protect materials from damage. Close all pipe and duct openings to prevent obstructions and contamination. D . Pitch Pockets and Roof Penetrations. 1 Provide pitch pockets, or special pre -fabricated penetration -type fittings for all pipes, ducts, flue pipes, etc. which pass through the roof. Such pre- fabricated fittings shall be as manufactured by Thycurb or approved equal. 2. All such fittings shall be properly flashed and counterflashed to conform to the requirements of the roofing system, or as may be approved in writing by the Owner's Representative. 3. No roof openings shall be left open overnight, but shall be provided with temporary covers until the installation is completed, and watertightness assured. 3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING IN BUILDINGS A . Each Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with the necessary cutting and patching as required for the installation of his work, unless otherwise indicated. B . Patching is to be performed by the trade proper for each material to be patched. Patching shall leave premises and finishes in a complete and neat condition comparable to the original. Painting of patched surfaces to be by the proper painting trade of the Contractor, unless otherwise specifically indicated. Maintain the fire integrity of all walls, floors, ceilings, roof and partitions. C . The cutting and patching of components shall also include proper removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components and equipment. D . Refer to the Division 1 Section. Cutting and Patching for general requirements for cutting and patching. E . Refer to Division 15 sections for requirements related to cutting and patching for installation of electrical equipment, components, and materials. 15005-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS F . Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching. NO STRUCTURAL MEMBER MAY BE CUT WITHOUT THE WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. G . Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of mechanical installations. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching Work that is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non -conforming installations. 3.3 ROOF -MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A . Install roof -mounted equipment and appliances on a well -drained surface. Maintain at least six (6) foot clearance between the appliance and the edge of a roof or similar hazard. Otherwise, provide rigidly fixed rails or guards at least three (3) feet in height on the exposed side, except that parapets at least three (3) feet in height may be utilized in lieu of rails or guards. B Each roof -mounted item of equipment or appliance is to be provided with an accessible weatherproof disconnect switch and a 110-120 volt AC, 60 Hz. grounding -type weatherproof convenience outlet adjacent to the appliance. The convenience outlet is to be on the line side of the disconnect switch. C . Provide adequate and safe access to appliances and equipment located on roofs or other elevated locations. 3.4 ACCESSIBILITY A . Install equipment, materials and piping systems to provide required access for servicing, maintenance, and general inspection. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. B . Piping systems shall not block service access of any nature, such as filter removal, equipment access panels, cleaning of tubes, and similar items. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A . Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B . Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. 15005-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS C . Install HVAC and plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D . Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.6 PAINTING A Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting." B Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory -painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.7 CONCRETE BASES A . Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy -coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive -strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A . Refer to Division 05 Section Miscellaneous Metal for structural steel. B . Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment. C . Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 15005-11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 3.9 GROUTING Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B . Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C . Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F . Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G . Place grout around anchors. H . Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 15005 15005-12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT SECTION 15058 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A . Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general- purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel -cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.3 COORDINATION A . Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A . Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections. B . Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. C . Comply with IEEE 841 for severe -duty motors. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A . Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 100 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. 15058 - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT B . Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A . Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. C . Service Factor: 1.15. D . Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed. E . Rotor: Random -wound, squirrel cage. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. G . Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. H Insulation: Class F. I . Code Letter Designation: Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. J . Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T. 2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS Motors Used with Reduced -Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture -resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse -width modulated inverters. 15058 - 2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 2. Energy- and Premium -Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter -Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. C . Severe -Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor. 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A . Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent -split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B . Multispeed Motors: Variable -torque, permanent -split -capacitor type. C . Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. D . Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded -pole type. E . Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal -protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 15058 15058 - 3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE A . All applicable requirements of other portions of the Contract Documents apply to the Work of this Section, including, but not limited to, Section 15005, Mechanical General Provisions. 1.2 SUMMARY A . Extent of supports and anchors required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified herein or in other Division-15 sections. B . Types of supports and anchors specified in this section include the following: 1. Pipe and equipment hangers, supports, and anchors. 2. Equipment bases. C . Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory -fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division-15 sections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Codes and Standards 1. Code Compliance. Comply with applicable plumbing codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and anchors. 2. MSS Standard Compliance. a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with MSS SP-58. b. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69. c. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89. d. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90. 15060 - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL -PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS General. Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated horizontal -piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal -piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper- plated hangers and supports for copper -piping systems. B . Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers. MSS Type 1. C . Yoke Type Pipe Clamps. MSS Type 2. D Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamps. MSS Type 3. E . Steel Pipe Clamps. MSS Type 4. F . Pipe Hangers. MSS Type 5. G . Adjustable Swivel Pipe Rings. MSS Type 6. H . Adjustable Steel Band Hangers. MSS Type 7. I . Adjustable Band Hangers. MSS Type 9 J . Adjustable Swivel Rings, Band Type. MSS Type 10. K . Split Pipe Rings. MSS Type 11 L Extension Split Pipe Clamps. MSS Type 12 M . U-Bolts. MSS Type 24 N . Clips. MSS Type 26 O . Pipe Slides and Slide Plates. MSS Type 35, including one of the following plate types: 1. Plate. Unguided type. 15060 - 2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2. Plate. Guided type. 3. Plate. Hold-down clamp type P . Pipe Saddle Supports. MSS Type 36, including steel pipe base -support and cast-iron floor flange. Q . Pipe Stanchion Saddles. MSS Type 37, including steel pipe base support and cast-iron floor flange. R . Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports. MSS Type 38, including steel pipe base support and cast-iron floor flange. S . Single Pipe Rolls. MSS Type 41. T . Adjustable Roller Hangers. MSS Type 43. U . Pipe Roll Stands. MSS Type 44. V . Pipe Rolls and Plates. MSS Type 45. W . Adjustable Pipe Roll Stands. MSS Type 46. 2.2 VERTICAL -PIPING CLAMPS A . General. Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated vertical -piping clamps complying with MSS SP- 58, of one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide copper -plated clamps for copper -piping systems. B . Two -Bolt Riser Clamps. MSS Type 8. C . Four -Bolt Riser Clamps. MSS Type 42. 2.3 HANGER -ROD ATTACHMENTS A . General. Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated hanger -rod attachments complying with MSS SP- 58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal -piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger -rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper -plated hanger -rod attachments for copper -piping systems. 15060 - 3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT B . Steel Turnbuckles. MSS Type 13. C . Steel Clevises. MSS Type 14. D . Swivel Turnbuckles. MSS Type 15. E . Malleable Iron Sockets. MSS Type 16. F . Steel Weldless Eye Nuts. MSS Type 17. 2.4 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS A . General. Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper -plated building attachments for copper -piping systems. B . Top Beam C-Clamps. MSS Type 19. C . Side Beam or Channel Clamps. MSS Type 20. D . Center Beam Clamps. MSS Type 21. E . Welded Beam Attachments. MSS Type 22 F . C-Clamps. MSS Type 23. G . Top Beam Clamps. MSS Type 25 H . Side Beam Clamps. MSS Type 27 Steel Beam Clamps W/Eye Nut. MSS Type 28 J Linked Steel Clamps W/Eye Nut. MSS Type 29 K . Malleable Beam Clamps. MSS Type 30 15060 - 4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT L . Steel Brackets. One of the following for indicated loading. Light Duty. MSS Type 31, suspending 750 lbs. max. Medium Duty. MSS Type 32, suspending 1500 lbs. max. Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33, suspending 3000 lbs. max. M . Side Beam Brackets. MSS Type 34. N . Plate Lugs. MSS Type 57. O . Horizontal Travelers. MSS Type 58 2.5 CONCRETE INSERTS A . Cast -In -Place Spot Type. Malleable iron, or steel with recommended insert nut. Size inserts nut to suite threaded hanger rod. MSS SP-69, Type 18. B . Drill -In Spot Type. Steel, attached wedge, lock washer and nut. Size inserts to suite threaded hanger rod. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models. Hilti "Kwik Bolt" Ramset 'Wedge Anchor" Rawl "Stud" C . Continuous Channel Type. Steel, anchoring lugs, with channel nuts, rated for 2000 lbs. per foot minimum load. Size channel nut to suit threaded hanger rod. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models. B-Line B22 Elcen 1150 Unistrut P3200 PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 700 2.6 SADDLES AND SHIELDS A . General. Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangers and supports, factory- fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. B . Protection Saddles. MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation. C Protection Shields. MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing of insulation. 15060 - 5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT D . Thermal Hanger Shields. Constructed of 360° insert of high density, 125 psi compressive strength, water -proofed calcium silicate, encased in 360° sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. Acceptable Manufacturers. Elcen Metal Products Co. Pipe Shields, Inc. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 2.7 MANUFACTURERS OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Acceptable Manufacturers. B-Line Systems Inc. Fee & Mason Mfg. Co.; Div. Figgie International. ITT Grinnel Corp. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A . Metal Framing. Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1. B . Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars. Provide products complying with ASTM A 36. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic -cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. D . Auxiliary Steel. Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. E . Pipe Guides. Provide factory -fabricated guides, of cast semi -steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted two -section outer cylinder and base with two -section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. 2.9 CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING BASES A . Concrete housekeeping bases shall be in accordance with Division 3 and constructed of 3,500 psi concrete and reinforced with welded wire fabric in accordance with ASTM A 185 or deformed reinforcing bar in accordance with ASTM A 615, Grade 60. 15060 - 6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT B . Reinforcement shall be provided for base thickness as follows unless otherwise noted: Thickness Size and Type of Base of Reinforcement 4" W 1.4 x 1.4 welded wire fabric 6" to 8" No. 4 bars 12" No. 4 bars PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION Spacing and Location of Reinforcement 6" x 6" at centerline of pad 18" on center each way (3" from top of pad) 16" on center each way (3" from top of pad) A . Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments. B . Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet at project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection and testing agency representatives (if any), installers of other work requiring coordination with work of this section and Owner's Representative for purpose of reviewing material selections and procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with requirements specified. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS A . Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert securely to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. 15060 - 7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS General. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. C . Support fire -water piping independently of other piping. D Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods. E . Support and laterally brace vertical pipe runs at every floor level and at intervals not to exceed 20'-0". Support vertical pipe with riser clamps installed below hubs, couplings or lugs welded to the pipe. Provisions for Movement. 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. 2. Load Distribution. Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 3. Pipe Slopes. Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded. G . Insulated Piping. Comply with the following installation requirements. 1. Clamps. Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. 2. Piping hangers shall be sized large enough to allow insulation to pass through. Hangers for piping 2-1/2" and greater shall be provided with pipe covering protection saddle, or high compressive strength insulation saddle. Hangers for piping 2" and less shall be provided with pipe covering shields. On cold or chilled water piping provide vapor barrier through hanger. 15060 - 8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3.5 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS A . Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. B . Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ANSI B31 and with AWS standards. C . Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces to maximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit. D . Anchor Spacings. Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe -runs, at intermediate points in pipe -runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping. 3.6 CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING BASES A . Provide concrete housekeeping bases for all floor -mounted equipment furnished as part of the work of Division 15 in accordance with Division 3. Size bases to extend minimum of 4" beyond equipment base in any direction, and 4" above finished floor elevation, unless otherwise noted on drawing. Construct of reinforced concrete, roughen floor slab beneath base for bond, and provide steel rod anchors between floor and base. Locate anchors bolts using equipment manufacturer's templates. Chamfer top and edge corners. 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base. 2. For supported equipment, install epoxy -coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A . Provide structural steel stands to support equipment not floor mounted or hung from structure. Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Provide factory -fabricated tank saddles for tanks mounted on steel stands. B . Furnish roof equipment supports to Contractor for installation as part of work of Division 7; not work of this section. 15060 - 9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Hanger Adjustments. Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. B Support Adjustment. Provide grout under supports so as to bring piping and equipment to proper level and elevations. C . Cleaning. Clean factory -finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. END OF SECTION 15060 15060 - 10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC SECTION 15072 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A . This Section includes the following: 1. Isolation pads. 2. Isolation mounts. 3. Freestanding spring isolators. 4. Housed spring mounts. 5. Spring hangers. 6. Spring hangers with vertical -limit stops. 7. Seismic snubbers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A . IBC: International Building Code. B . ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A . Wind -Restraint Loading: 1. Basic Wind Speed: 130 mph. 2. Building Classification Category: II. 3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal. 15072 - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC 1.5 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: For the following: 1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device. 2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads. B . Welding certificates. C . Qualification Data: For testing agency. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3. Isolation Technology, Inc. 4. Kinetics Noise Control. 5. Mason Industries. 6. Vibration Eliminator Co. Inc. 7. Vibration Isolation. 8. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. B . Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized -steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. C Mounts: Double -deflection type, with molded, oil -resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory -drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color -code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. 15072 - 2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC 1. Materials: Cast -ductile -iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil -resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock -absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge -bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO. D . Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open -spring isolators. 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated Toad. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. E . Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers. 1. Housing: Ductile -iron or steel housing to provide all -directional seismic restraint. 2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure. 3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel up or down before contacting a resilient collar. F . Spring Hangers: Combination coil -spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger -rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated Toad. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil -resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel - washer -reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Self -centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil. G . Spring Hangers with Vertical -Limit Stop: Combination coil -spring and elastomeric- insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical -limit stop. 15072 - 3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger -rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil -resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up -stop" on lower threaded rod. 8. Self -centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil. 2.2 SEISMIC -RESTRAINT DEVICES (FOR WIND FORCE PROTECTION) A . Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Kinetics Noise Control. 5. Loos & Co.; Cableware Division. 6. Mason Industries. 7. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC. 8. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. B . General Requirements for Restraint Components for outdoor -installed equipment: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic (wind) forces to which they will be subjected. C . Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural -steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings. 1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic -rated, drill -in, and stud -wedge or female -wedge type. 2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. 3. Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch- thick resilient cushion. 15072 - 4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC D . Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field -fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion -resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces. E . Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless -steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement. F . Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. G . Bushings for Floor -Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs. H . Bushing Assemblies for Wall -Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water- resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face. J . Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled -in and stud -wedge or female -wedge type in zinc - coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic- and wind - control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B . Examine roughing -in of reinforcement and cast -in -place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. C . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 15072 - 5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC 3.2 APPLICATIONS A . Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B . Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces. C . Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. 3.3 VIBRATION -CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION Equipment Restraints: 1. Install seismic snubbers for wind force protection on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure. 2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch. B . Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. C . Install wind -restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for equipment installed outdoors. D . Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor -mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base. E . Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall -mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment -mounting channels are attached to wall. F Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists. or at concrete members. 15072 - 6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC G . Drilled -in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc -coated steel anchors for interior and stainless -steel anchors for exterior applications. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B . Perform tests and inspections. C . Tests and Inspections: 1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice. 3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary Toad -spreading members. 4. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 5. Measure isolator deflection. 6. Verify snubber minimum clearances. 7. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. D . Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. E . Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A . Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. 15072 - 7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC B . Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. C . Adjust active height of spring isolators. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. END OF SECTION 15072 15072 - 8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 15077 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A . Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Duct labels. 5. Stencils. 6. Valve tags. 7. Warning tags. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B . Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device. C . Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. D . Valve numbering scheme. E . Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 COORDINATION A . Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. 15077 - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C . Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A . Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three -fourths the size of principal lettering. 4. Fasteners: Stainless -steel rivets or self -tapping screws. 5. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. C . Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by- 11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A . Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B . Letter Color: Black. C . Background Color: White. D Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 15077 - 2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT E . Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. F . Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is Tess than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three -fourths the size of principal lettering. G . Fasteners: Stainless -steel rivets or self -tapping screws. H . Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions. 2.3 PIPE LABELS A . General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color -coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B . Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. C . Self -Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact -type, permanent -adhesive backing. D . Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 2.4 DUCT LABELS A . Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B . Letter Color: Black. C . Background Color: Black. D . Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 15077 - 3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT E . Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. F . Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three -fourths the size of principal lettering. G . Fasteners: Stainless -steel rivets or self -tapping screws self -tapping screws. H . Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings. 1. Flow -Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high. 2.5 STENCILS A Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels; equipment labels, and similar operational instructions. 1. Stencil Material: Brass. 2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray -can form. 3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated. 4. Paint shall meet LEED requirements for low VDC. 2.6 VALVE TAGS A . Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers. 1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners: Brass wire -link or beaded chain; or S-hook. 15077 - 4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT B . Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal -operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. Valve -tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.7 WARNING TAGS A . Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident -prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large -size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A . Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A . Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B . Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A . Piping Color -Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09. B . Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 15077 - 5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. C . Pipe Label Color Schedule: Install PVC pipe covers as manufactured by Seton for all piping throughout building. Install per manufacturers instructions. 1. Domestic Cold Water — Green background with white letters. 2. Domestic Hot Water — Yellow background with black letters. 3. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation - Yellow background with black letters. 4. Non -Potable Water - Yellow background with black letters. 5. Sanitary Sewer - Yellow background with black letters. 6. Sanitary Vent - Yellow background with black letters. 7. Oily Waste - Yellow background with black letters. 8. Oily Vent- Yellow background with black letters. 9. Natural Gas - Yellow background with black letters.. 10. Lubrication EO, ATF. EC, & HO — Yellow background with black letters. 11. Refrigeration — Yellow background with black letters. 12. Condensate — Yellow background with black letters. 13. Compressed Air — Green background with white letters. 3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION A . Install plastic -laminated, self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes: 1. Blue: For cold -air supply ducts. 2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts. 3. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed -air ducts. 4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust. B . Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. 3.5 VALVE -TAG INSTALLATION Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory -fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn -watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing -in connections of end -use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. 15077 - 6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT B . Valve -Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs: 1. Valve -Tag Size and Shape: 1-1/2 inches, round. 2. Valve -Tag Color: Natural. 3. Letter Color: Black. 3.6 WARNING -TAG INSTALLATION A . Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required. END OF SECTION 15077 15077 - 7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION SECTION 15081 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A . Section includes insulating the following duct services: 1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 4. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 5. Outdoor, exposed supply. B . Related Sections: 1. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation." 2. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water -vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field -applied if any). B . Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each type of insulation. 3. Detail application of field -applied jackets. 4. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 15081-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION C . Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. D . Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed. E . Field quality -control reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B . Surface -Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke - developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame -spread index of 75 or less, and smoke -developed index of 150 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION A . Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B . Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field -applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C . Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 15081-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION 1.7 SCHEDULING A . Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B . Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A . If retaining more than one type of insulation in this article, indicate where each type applies in insulation system schedules. B . Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. C . Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. D . Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. E . Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. F . Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. G . Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded -rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials. 1. Products: a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Sheet, K-Flex Gray Duct Liner, and K-FLEX LS. H . Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 15081-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; SOFTR All -Service Duct Wrap. 2. Sustainability Requirement: Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation without factory -applied jacket. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board. f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series. J . Mineral -Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory -applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation. 2.2 FIRE -RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS A . Fire -Rated Board: Structural -grade, press -molded, xonolite calcium silicate, fireproofing board suitable for operating temperatures up to 1700 deg F. Comply with ASTM C 656, Type II, Grade 6. Tested and certified to provide a 1-hour fire rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Products: a. Johns Manville; Super Firetemp M. 15081-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION B . Fire -Rated Blanket: High -temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is tested and certified to provide a 1-hour fire rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; FlameChek. b. Johns Manville; Firetemp Wrap. c. Nelson Fire Stop Products; Nelson FSB Flameshield Blanket. d. Thermal Ceramics; FireMaster Duct Wrap. e. 3M; Fire Barrier Wrap Products. f. Unifrax Corporation; FyreWrap. 2.3 ADHESIVES A . Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B . Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. 1. Products: a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. d. K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive. C . Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-60/85-70. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. D . ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Products: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-82. 15081-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-50. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. 2.4 MASTICS A . Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II. B . Vapor -Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-80/30-90. b. Vimasco Corporation; 749. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. C . Vapor -Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-30. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 501. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-35. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-10. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. D . Vapor -Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Encacel. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 570. 15081-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 60-95/60-96. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. 2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES A . Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. Products: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-50 AHV2. b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-36. c. Vimasco Corporation; 713 and 714. 2. Fire-resistant, water -based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct insulation. 3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Color: White. 2.6 SEALANTS A . FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. 15081-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION B . ASJ Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. 2.7 FACTORY -APPLIED JACKETS A . Insulation system schedules indicate factory -applied jackets on various applications. When factory -applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with aluminum -foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure -sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 2.8 FIELD -APPLIED JACKETS A . Field -applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B . FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil -face, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing. 1 Products: a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 15081-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION C . Metal Jacket: 1. Products: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Metal Jacketing Systems. b. ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless Steel Jacketing. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate. 2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14. a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field -applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. D . Self -Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil- thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white aluminum -foil facing. 1. Products: a. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Alumaguard 60. 2.9 TAPES A . ASJ Tape: White vapor -retarder tape matching factory -applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836. c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B . FSK Tape: Foil -face, vapor -retarder tape matching factory -applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 15081-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. c. Compac Corporation; 110 and 111. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C . Aluminum -Foil Tape: Vapor -retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. c. Compac Corporation; 120. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 Ibf/inch in width. 2.10 SECUREMENTS A . Bands: 1. Products: a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals. b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. 3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application. B . Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Capacitor -Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc -coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor -discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. 15081-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS. 2. Cupped -Head, Capacitor -Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc -coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor -discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1- 1/2-inch galvanized carbon -steel washer. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CHP-1. 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP. 3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Perforated Base Insul- Hangers. 2) GEMCO; Perforated Base. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle. b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. c. Spindle: Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 4. Insulation -Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016- inch- thick, galvanized -steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150. 2) GEMCO; R-150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips. b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. C . Staples: Outward -clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel. D . Wire: 0.062-inch soft -annealed, galvanized steel. 15081-11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. C & F Wire. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. B . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A . Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. B . Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules. C . Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D . Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E . Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F . Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. G . Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. H . Install insulation with least number of joints practical. 15081-12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor -barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. J . Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. K . Install insulation with factory -applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor -barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor -barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings. L . Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. M . Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. N . Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A . Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 15081-13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B . Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. C . Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. D . Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire -rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"firestopping and fire -resistive joint sealers. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION A . Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION A . Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 15081-14 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION 3. Install either capacitor -discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped - head, capacitor -discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward -clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field -applied jacket, adhesive, vapor -barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor -barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor -barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches. 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. B . Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor -discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor -discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: 15081-15 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward -clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field -applied jacket, adhesive, vapor -barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor -barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor -barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not Tess than 3 inches. 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 3.7 FIELD -APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A . Where glass -cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory -applied jackets. 1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation. 15081-16 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION B . Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor -retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor -barrier mastic. C . Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless -steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. 3.8 FIRE -RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A . Where fire -rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and supports to maintain a continuous fire rating. B . Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct. C . Install firestopping at penetrations through fire -rated assemblies. Fire -stop systems are specified in Division 07 Section " Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.9 FINISHES A . Insulation with ASJ, Glass -Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections. 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex -emulsion size. B . Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C . Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. D . Do not field paint aluminum or stainless -steel jackets. 15081-17 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B . Perform tests and inspections. C . Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field -applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article. D . All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.11 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A . Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Outdoor, exposed supply. B . Items Not Insulated: 1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 2. Factory -insulated flexible ducts. 3. Factory -insulated plenums and casings. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Vibration -control devices. 6. Factory -insulated access panels and doors. 3.12 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE AND FIELD -APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE. A . See Table 1 for duct and field -applied jacket schedule. B . Exposed, supply -air duct insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. 2. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-Ib/cu. ft. nominal density. 3. Mineral -Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 15081-18 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION 3.13 ABOVEGROUND, OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A . Exposed supply -air duct insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches and 0.75-Ib/cu. ft. nominal density. 2. Mineral -Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 15081-19 10-04-19 Issue for Bid nRANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER 'OFPEARLAND ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DUCT INSULATION DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE AND FIELD -APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE TABLE 1 Service Insulation Material Min. Installed R- Value, h.ft2°F/Btu Insulation Thickness, Inches Number of Layers Field- Applied Jacket Vapor Retarder Required Yes/No A. Indoor Duct and Plenum Located in Attic with Insulated Roof or in Indirectly Air -Conditioned Spaces 1. Round and oval supply -air, return air and outside -air duct, concealed. Mineral -Fiber Blanket 5.0 2.0 One - Yes 2. Rectangular supply -air, return -air and outside air duct, concealed. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Mineral -Fiber Board 5.0 2.0 One - Yes B. Indoor Duct and Plenum Located in Air -Conditioned Spaces 1. Round supply -air and return air duct, concealed. Mineral -Fiber Blanket 3.5 1.5 One - Yes 2. Rectangular supply -air and return -air duct, concealed. Mineral -Fiber Blanket 3.5 1.5 One - Yes 3. Round and rectangular supply -air and return -air duct, exposed. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Mineral -Fiber Board Liner 3.5 1.5 One - Yes C. Duct and Plenum Located in Unconditioned Space 1. Round and rectangular supply -air and return -air duct. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Mineral -Fiber Board 6.0 2.0 One Yes D. Duct and Plenum Located Outside of Building Envelope 1. Round and rectangular supply -air and return -air duct. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Mineral -Fiber Board 8.0 2.0 One Aluminum Yes END OF SECTION 15081 15081-20 05-01-2019 95% Construction Documents ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PIPE INSULATION SECTION 15083 PIPE INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification Sections, and all other specification sections apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A . This Section includes mechanical insulation including jackets, accessories and attachments for pipe, pumps and boiler breeching as follows: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Mineral fiber. b. Cellular glass. c. Flexible elastomeric. d. Polyolefin. e. Calcium silicate. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A . ASJ: All -service jacket. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated. B . Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: 1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 3. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 4. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections. 5. Application of field -applied jackets. 15083-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PIPE INSULATION 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B . Insulation Contractor Company Qualifications: Insulation shall be installed by a company with 5 years minimum experience and whose principal business is the application and installation of thermal insulating material on piping systems and equipment. Materials shall be by recognized manufacturers and shall be installed by skilled mechanics in accordance with manufacturer's standard published instructions except as otherwise specified. C Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame -spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke - developed rating of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame -spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke -developed rating of 150 or less. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A . Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. B . On -site Storage: Insulation materials shall be protected from the weather and kept dry during shipping, storage, and installation. Contractor shall replace any material which becomes wet during storage and installation without any additional cost to the owner. 1.7 COORDINATION A . Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields. B Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application. 15083-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PIPE INSULATION 1.8 SCHEDULING A . Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and where required, after installing and testing heat -trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have satisfactory test results. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A . Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Manson Insulation b. Knauf Insulation c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. d. Schuller International, Inc. e. Fibrex Insulation f. Johns Manville 2. Cellular -Glass Insulation: a. Pittsburgh -Corning Corp. b. Cell-U-Foam Corporation 3. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. RBX Corporation c. Aeroflex USA, Inc. 4. Polyolefin Insulation: a. Armacell LLC b. Nomaco Inc., IMCOA c. RBX Corporation 5. Fire -Rated Insulation: a. Johns Mansville b. CertainTeed Corp. c. Nelson Firestop Products d. Thermal Ceramics e. 3M f. Unifrax Corporation g. Vesuvius 15083-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PIPE INSULATION 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A . Mineral -Fiber, Pipe Insulation: 1. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m) or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 75 deg F (55 deg C) is 0.25 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.042 W/m x K) or Tess. 2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A. 3. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type II, 1200 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A. 4. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing. 5. Fire -Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and grades: a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass -cloth and tape to unfaced glass - fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass -fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass -fiber insulation. b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass -fiber insulation to metal surfaces. 6. Vapor -Barrier Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor -barrier mastic for indoor applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II. 7. Mineral -Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195. 8. Mineral -Fiber, Hydraulic -Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M. B . Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. 1 Maximum service temperature is 900 deg F, (55 deg C) 7.5 Ibs/ft3 minimum nominal density, 0.0 perm -in water permeability, 0.0% (by volume) water absorption and the thermal conductivity (k-value) at 75 deg F (55 deg C) is 0.32 Btu-in./hr- ft3-°F (0.042 W/m x K). 2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 3. Special -Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. C . Flexible Elastomeric: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded -rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials and Type II, Grade 1 for sheet materials. 1. Maximum service temperature is 220 deg. F, 1.5 Ibs/ft3 minimum nominal density, 0.10 perm -in water permeability, 0.0% (by volume) water absorption and the thermal conductivity (k-value) at 75 deg. F (55 deg C) is 0.27 Btu- in./hr- ft3-°F (0.042 W/m x K). D . Flexible Polyolefin: Polymer based, low density, closed cell insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 15083-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PIPE INSULATION 1 Maximum service temperature is 210 deg F, 1.5 lbs/ft3 minimum nominal density, 0.0 perm -in water permeability, 0.0% (by volume) water absorption and the thermal conductivity (k-value) at 75 deg. F (55 deg C) is 0.25 Btu- in./hr- ft3-°F (0.042 W/m x K). 2.3 FIRE -RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS A . Fire -Rated Board: Structural -grade, press -molded, xonolite calcium silicate, fireproofing board suitable for operating temperatures up to 1700 deg F (927 deg C). Comply with ASTM C 656, Type II, Grade 6. UL tested and certified to provide a 2- hour fire rating. 1. Fire -Rated Blanket: High -temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is UL tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating. 2.4 INSULATION JACKETS A Provide insulation with insulation manufacturer's factory applied standard reinforced fire retardant all service jacket with or without integral vapor barrier as required by the service. All service jackets shall be white, kraft-paper, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with aluminum -foil backing or self-sealing, pressure -sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. B . Field -applied jackets shall be a properly sealed foil, scrim, kraft-paper jacket, common with factory -applied jackets for mineral -fiber insulation, meets vapor - retarder requirements of ASTM C 921, Type I. C . PVC Jacket: High -impact, ultraviolet -resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. 1. PVC Jacket Color: White. 2. Flame -spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke -developed rating of 50 or less. D . Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory -fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-mil- thick, high -impact, ultraviolet -resistant PVC. 1 Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long -radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, reducers, end caps, soil -pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P- trap and supply covers for lavatories for the disabled. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 3. Flame -spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke -developed rating of 50 or less. E . Aluminum Jacket: Factory cut and rolled to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003 alloy, H-14 temper. 15083-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PIPE INSULATION 1. Finish and Thickness: Smooth finish, 0.016 inch thick. 2. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil- thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 3. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long -radius elbows; same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 4. Bands: Stainless steel, 3/4 inch minimum width. 2.5 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS A . Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass -fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. 1. Tape Width: 4 inches. B Pressure Sensitive Tape: Aluminum foil tape listed and labeled under UL 181A, Part 1(P), T identified by a date of manufacture, product model number and UL 181A(P). Tapes shall be a minimum of 2-1/2" wide. C . Adhesive, Mastics and Sealants: All materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets and substrates and as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 1. Sustainability Requirement: a. Adhesives: 50g/L b. Mastics: 50g/L c. Sealants: 420 g/L D . Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch (0.5 mm) thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick. 3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick. 4. Wire: 0.062-inch soft -annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft -annealed, galvanized steel. 2.6 VAPOR BARRIERS Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C- 19565C, Type II. 15083-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PIPE INSULATION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A . Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A . Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B . Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C . Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D . Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E . Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F . Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G . Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H . Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 15083-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PIPE INSULATION I . Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J . Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor -barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K . Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L . In mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, shop areas, maintenance areas, and other areas subject to high traffic or potential damage, provide PVC or metal jackets on all exposed insulated piping from finished floor up to 8 feet above finished floor. M Weatherproof exterior pipe insulation with weatherproof aluminum jacket. N . In mechanical rooms provide PVC fitting covers on all ells and tees. O . Install insulation with factory -applied all service jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) on center. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches (100 mm) on center. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor -barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are required, apply vapor -barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. P . Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. 15083-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PIPE INSULATION Q . Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. R . Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. S . For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration -control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A . Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B Insulation Installation at Below -Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C . Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm). 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D . Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. 15083-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PIPE INSULATION E . Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire -rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire -rated wall and partition penetrations. 1. Firestopping and fire -resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Penetration Firestop Systems." F . Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Install pipe insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire -rated assemblies according to Division 7 Section 'Through -Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A . Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B . Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor -retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing -box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 15083-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PIPE INSULATION 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor -barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric -reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well - shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field -applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. C . Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D . Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless -steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless -steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field -applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.6 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A . Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 15083-11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PIPE INSULATION 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor -barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) on center. 4. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor - barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral -fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant. C . Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D . Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.7 CELLULAR -GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION A . Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor -barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) on center. 15083-12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PIPE INSULATION 4. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor - barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B . Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular -glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant. C . Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular -glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D . Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular -glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.8 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION A . Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 15083-13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PIPE INSULATION C . Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.9 FLEXIBLE POLYOLEFIN INSULATION INSTALLATION A . Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: Seal split -tube longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B . Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyolefin sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C . Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of polyolefin pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 15083-14 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PIPE INSULATION D . Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install cut sections of polyolefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.10 FIELD -APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A . Where jackets are provided, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory -applied jackets. 1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation. B . Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor -retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor -barrier mastic. C . Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. D . Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless -steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) on center. and at end joints. 15083-15 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PIPE INSULATION 3.11 FINISHES Coordinate first paragraph below with Division 9 painting Sections. If PVC jackets are specified, consult jacket manufacturers to determine suitable paint products and edit painting Sections to suit Project. B . Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9 painting Sections. 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex -emulsion size. C . Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. Flexible Polyolefin Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. E . Color: Final color white. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. F Do not field paint aluminum jackets. 3.12 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS A . Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedule at the end of this Section. B . Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment: 1. Flexible connectors. 2. Vibration -control devices. 3. Fire -suppression piping. 4. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, shut-off and balancing valves, and flow regulators. 3.13 INSULATION INSTALLATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A . Refer to insulation application schedule for required insulation materials, vapor barriers, and jackets. 15083-16 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PIPE INSULATION B . Application schedule identifies piping system and indicates pipe size ranges and material, thickness, and jacket requirements. 3.14 INTERIOR PIPING INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE Service Pipe Size, Inches Insulation Material Min. Insulation Thickness, Inches Jacket Vapor Barrier Required Yes/No Domestic and Non- All Mineral Fiber 1.0 ASJ Yes Potable Cold Water All Cellular Glass 1.5 NR No All Flex.Elastom. 1.0 NR No All Polyolefin 1.0 NR No Domestic Hot Water Non- <4 Mineral Fiber 1.0 ASJ No circulated and Circulated >_4 Mineral Fiber 1.5 ASJ No All Cellular Glass 1.5 NR No <4 Flex.Elastom. 1.0 NR No <4 Polyolefin 1.0 NR No Buried or Below Slab <4 Polyolefin 1.0 NR No Domestic Hot Water Non -circulated and Circulated Condensate and All Mineral Fiber 1.0 ASJ Yes Equipment Drain Water All Cellular Glass 1.5 ASJ No below 60 deg. F. All Flex.Elastom. 0.5 NR No Refrigerant Suction and <_1.5 Mineral Fiber 1.5 ASJ zzzzzz-<-< o o o o o o w N Hot -Gas Piping >1.5 Mineral Fiber 1.5 ASJ <1.5 Cellular Glass 1.5 NR >1.5 Cellular Glass 2 NR <1.5 Flex.Elastom. 1.5 NR >1.5 Flex.Elastom. 1.5 NR <_1.5 Polyolefin 1.5 NR >1.5 Polyolefin 1.5 NR Refrigerant Suction and <1.5 Flex.Elastom. 1.5 NR No Hot -Gas Flexible Tubing >1.5 Flex.Elastom. 1.5 NR No <1.5 Polyolefin 1.5 NR No >1.5 Polyolefin 1.5 NR No PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE NOTES: 1. 1 inch and smaller branch domestic hot and cold water pipes within plumbing chases or walls serving individual fixture does not require insulation except piping located on exterior walls. Horizontal header serving more than one fixture requires insulation as scheduled. 15083-17 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PIPE INSULATION 2. The portion of condensate drain lines run on the floor in equipment rooms does not require insulation. END OF SECTION 15083 15083-18 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING SECTION 15093 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves. 2. Stack -sleeve fittings. 3. Sleeve -seal systems. 4. Sleeve -seal fittings. 5. Grout. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 A. SLEEVES Cast -Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized -Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated. C. Galvanized -Steel -Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends. D. PVC -Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. E. Galvanized -Steel -Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; with welded longitudinal joint. F. Molded -PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered -cup shaped, and smooth nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 15093-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid round tube closed outer surface with ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING G. Molded -PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.2 STACK -SLEEVE FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 2. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group. C. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews. 2.3 SLEEVE -SEAL SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. Metraflex Company (The). 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 5. Proco Products, Inc. Description: Modular sealing -element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve. 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel, Plastic, or Stainless steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion -resistant coating, of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 2.4 SLEEVE -SEAL FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Presealed Systems. 15093-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING C. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve -type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. 2.5 GROUT A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post -hardening and volume -adjusting, dry, hydraulic -cement grout. B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications. C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. B. For sleeves that will have sleeve -seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls. 1. Sleeves are not required for core -drilled holes. C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed. 1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded -PE or -PP sleeves. 2. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. 3. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve -seal system. D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants." 15093-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING E. Fire -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 07841 "Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.2 STACK -SLEEVE -FITTING INSTALLATION Install stack -sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed. 1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 07620 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. 4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. 5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack -sleeve fittings. Fire -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 07841 "Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.3 SLEEVE -SEAL -SYSTEM INSTALLATION Install sleeve -seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs -on -grade at service piping entries into building. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve -seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal. 3.4 SLEEVE -SEAL -FITTING INSTALLATION Install sleeve -seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall. C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve -seal fittings. END OF SECTION 15093 15093-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SECTION 15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings. 3. Encasement for underground metal piping. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02630 "Storm Sewers" for storm drainage piping outside the building. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated: 1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water 30 kPa. 2. Storm Drainage, Force -Main Piping: 50 psig. B. Seismic Performance: Storm drainage piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 15160-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Shop Drawings: For roof drainage system. Include calculations, plans, and details. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For storm drainage piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. Field quality -control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF -drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF - sewer" for plastic sewer piping. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS Interruption of Existing Storm -Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of storm -drainage service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of storm -drainage service without Architect's, and Owner's written permission. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 15160-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 2.2 HUB -AND -SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra Heavy classes. B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber. 2.3 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. B. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ANACO-Husky. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. c. Fernco Inc. d. Matco-Norca, Inc. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. g. Stant. h. Tyler Pipe. 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. 3. Description: Stainless -steel corrugated shield with stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. C. Heavy -Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ANACO-Husky. b. Clamp -All Corp. c. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. d. MIFAB, Inc. e. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. f. Stant. g. Tyler Pipe. 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540. 3. Description: Stainless -steel shield with stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. D. Cast -Iron, Hubless-Piping Couplings: 15160-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. MG Piping Products Company. 2. Standard: ASTM C 1277. 3. Description: Two-piece ASTM A 48/A 48M, cast-iron housing; stainless -steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 2.4 GALVANIZED -STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS Galvanized -Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Standard Weight. Include square -cut - grooved or threaded ends matching joining method. Galvanized -Cast -Iron Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.12 threaded. C. Steel -Pipe Pressure Fittings: 1. Galvanized -Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method. 2. Malleable -Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Class 150; hexagonal -stock body with ball-and- socket, metal -to -metal, bronze seating surface; and female threaded ends. 3. Galvanized -Gray -Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern. Cast -Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125. 1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full -face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos -free, 1/8- inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. 2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. Grooved -Joint, Galvanized -Steel -Pipe Appurtenances: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International. b. Grinnell Mechanical Products. c. Shurjoint Piping Products. d. Victaulic Company. 2. Galvanized, Grooved -End Fittings for Galvanized -Steel Piping: ASTM A 536 ductile -iron castings, ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable -iron castings, ASTM A 234/A 234M forged -steel fittings, or ASTM A 106/A 106M steel pipes with dimensions matching ASTM A 53/A 53M steel pipe, and complying with AWWA C606 for grooved ends. 3. Grooved Mechanical Couplings for Galvanized -Steel Piping: ASTM F 1476, Type I. Include ferrous housing sections with continuous curved keys; EPDM-rubber gasket suitable for hot and cold water: and bolts and nuts. 15160-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 2.5 DUCTILE -IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Ductile -Iron, Mechanical -Joint Piping: 1. Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical -joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 2. Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, mechanical -joint ductile- or gray -iron standard pattern or AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile -iron compact pattern. 3. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray -iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. B. Ductile -Iron, Push -On -Joint Piping: 1. Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51, with push -on -joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 2. Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, push -on -joint ductile- or gray -iron standard pattern or AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile -iron compact pattern. 3. Gaskets: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber. C. Ductile -Iron, Grooved -Joint Piping: 1. Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51 with round -cut -grooved ends according to AWWA C606. 2. Ductile -Iron -Pipe Appurtenances: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1) Anvil International. 2) Shurjoint Piping Products. 3) Star Pipe Products. 4) Victaulic Company. b. Grooved -End, Ductile -Iron Fittings: ASTM A 536 ductile -iron castings with dimensions matching AWWA C110/A21.10 ductile -iron pipe or AWWA C153/A21.53 ductile -iron fittings and complying with AWWA C606 for grooved ends. c. Grooved Mechanical Couplings for Ductile -Iron Pipe: ASTM F 1476, Type I. Include ferrous housing sections with continuous curved keys; EPDM-rubber center -leg gasket suitable for hot and cold water; and bolts and nuts. 2.6 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast -copper fittings or ASME B16.29, wrought - copper, solder -joint fittings. C. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, drawn temper. 15160-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING D. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, annealed temper. Copper Pressure Fittings: 1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast -copper -alloy fittings or ASME B16.22, wrought - copper, solder -joint fittings. Furnish wrought -copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper -alloy, hexagonal -stock body with ball-and-socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces, and solder -joint or threaded ends. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder -joint end. 1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full -face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos -free, 1/8- inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. 2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux. 2.7 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid -Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40. B. Cellular -Core ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40. C. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns. D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. 1. ABS solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 325 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.8 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid -Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665. drain, waste, and vent. B. Cellular -Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891. Schedule 40. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665. made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59. Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." 15160-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING E. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.9 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Transition Couplings: 1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. 2. Fitting -Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified -piping - system fitting. 3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. 2) Fernco Inc. 3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc. b. Standard: ASTM C 1173. c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve -type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring and corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. d. Sleeve Materials: 1) For Cast -Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. 4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. b. Standard: ASTM C 1460. c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion -resistant outer shield and corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 15160-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 5. Pressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Dresser, Inc. 3) EBAA Iron, Inc. 4) Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The) 5) JCM Industries, Inc. 6) Romac Industries, Inc. 7) Smith -Blair, Inc.; a Sensus company. 8) Viking Johnson; c/o Mueller Co. b. Standard: AWWA C219. c. Description: Metal, sleeve -type couplings same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined. d. Center -Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. e. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. f. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion -resistant coating or material. B. Dielectric Fittings: 1. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. 2. Dielectric Unions: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Capitol Manufacturing Company. 2) Central Plastics Company. 3) Hart Industries International, Inc. 4) Jomar International Ltd. 5) Matco-Norca, Inc. 6) McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. 7) Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 8) Wilkins; a Zurn company. b. Description: 1) Standard: ASSE 1079. 2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 180 deg F. 3) End Connections: Solder -joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. 3. Dielectric Flanges: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 15160-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 1) Capitol Manufacturing Company. 2) Central Plastics Company. 3) Matco-Norca, Inc. 4) Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 5) Wilkins; a Zurn company. b. Description: 1) Standard: ASSE 1079. 2) Factory -fabricated, bolted, companion -flange assembly. 3) Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 4) End Connections: Solder -joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder -joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. 4. Dielectric -Flange Insulating Kits: a. M Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1) Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2) Calpico, Inc. 3) Central Plastics Company. 4) Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. b. Description: 1) Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 3) Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 4) Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 5) Washers: Phenolic with steel -backing washers. 5. Dielectric Nipples: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1) Elster Perfection. 2) Grinnell Mechanical Products. 3) Matco-Norca, Inc. 4) Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. 5) Victaulic Company. b. Description: 1) Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. 2) Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C). 3) End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 4) Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene. 15160-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 2.10 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. B. Material: High -density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004-inch (0.10-mm) or LLDPE film of 0.008- inch (0.20-mm) minimum thickness. C. Form: Sheet or tube. D. Color: Black or natural. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTH MOVING A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 2, "Site Work." 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations from layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Install seismic restraints on piping in compliance with project seismic design requirements. 15160-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING K. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long -sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. L. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. M. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Storm Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Storm -Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. N. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. O. Install steel piping according to applicable plumbing code. P. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." Q. Install aboveground ABS piping according to ASTM D 2661. R. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665. S. Install underground ABS and PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. T. Install engineered drain specialties and storm drainage piping in locations indicated. U. Install underground, ductile -iron, force -main piping according to AWWA C600. Install buried piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to storm sewer piping outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust -block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets. 1. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. V. Install underground, copper, force -main tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." 1. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. W. Install force mains at elevations indicated. X. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Install backwater valves in storm drainage gravity -flow piping. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 15165 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." 15160-11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers in storm drainage gravity -flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force -main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 15165 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." 3. Install drains in storm drainage gravity -flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 15165 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." Y. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 15400, "Plumbing." AA. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 15400, "Plumbing." BB. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Hub -and -Spigot, Cast -Iron Soil Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. B. Hub -and -Spigot, Cast -Iron Soil Piping Calked Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead -and -oakum calked joints. C. Hubless, Cast -Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints. D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. E. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828 procedure. Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead -free -alloy solder. F. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe according to AVWVA C606. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fittings. Install coupling housing sections, over gasket, with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts. G. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern. 15160-12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING H. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent -Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe -handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes. 3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION A. Transition Couplings: 1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's. 2. In Drainage Piping: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. 3. In Aboveground Force -Main Piping: Fitting -type transition couplings. 4. In Underground Force -Main Piping: a. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting -type transition couplings. b. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Pressure transition couplings. B. Dielectric Fittings: 1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. 2. Dielectric Fittings for [NPS 2 (DN 50)] and Smaller: Use dielectric unions. 3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric nipples. 4. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sump pump discharge. 1. Install gate or full -port ball valve for piping NPS 2 and smaller. 2. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. B. Check Valves: Install swing -check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sump pump discharge. C. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow. 1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 3. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 15165 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with seismic design requirements. 15160-13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Section 15400, "Plumbing. 11 1. Install carbon -steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install stainless -steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments. 3. Install carbon -steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 4. Install stainless -steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments. 5. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 6. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 7. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 8. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting, valve, and coupling. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double -rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8 (DN 150 and DN 200): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. 5. NPS 10 and NPS 12 (DN 250 and DN 300): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod. 6. Spacing for 10-foot (3-m) pipe lengths may be increased to 10 feet (3 m). Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches (1500 mm). Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m). H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 3 (DN 80): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 15160-14 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 7. NPS 6 and NPS 8 (DN 150 and DN 200): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. 8. NPS 10 and NPS 12 (DN 250 and DN 300): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod. I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m). J. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 4. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 6. NPS 8 (DN 200): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. K. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m). L. Install hangers for ABS and PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8 (DN 150 and DN 200): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. 5. NPS 10 and NPS 12 (DN 250 and DN 300): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod. M. Install supports for vertical ABS and PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm). N. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties. 1. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor, and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor. 2. Install horizontal backwater valves with cleanout cover flush with floor. 15160-15 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 3. Comply with requirements for backwater valves, cleanouts, and drains specified in Section 15165 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." D. Connect force -main piping to the following: 1. Storm Sewer: To exterior force main. 2. Sump Pumps: To sump pump discharge. E. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. F. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3.8 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed storm drainage piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 15400, "Plumbing." 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 15160-16 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing -in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts until completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. E. Test force -main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force -main piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 2. Cap and subject piping to static -water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 3. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. 3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Galvanized -steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints. 4. Copper DVVV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. 5. Solid -wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 6. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 7. Dissimilar Pipe -Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition C. Aboveground, storm drainage piping and larger shall be any of the following: 15160-17 10-04-19 Issue for Bid couplings. ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Galvanized -steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints. 4. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. 5. Solid -wall Cellular -core PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 6. Dissimilar Pipe -Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. D. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed calking materials; and calked joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, cast-iron, hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Solid -wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 4. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 5. Dissimilar Pipe -Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. E. Underground, storm drainage piping [NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed, calking materials; and calked joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, cast-iron, hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 4. Cellular -core, sewer and drain series, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent - cemented joints. 5. Dissimilar Pipe -Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. F. Aboveground storm drainage force mains NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50) shall be[ any of] the following: 1. Hard copper tube, copper pressure fittings, and soldered joints. 2. Galvanized -steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints. G. Aboveground storm drainage force mains NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6 (DN 65 to DN 150) shall be any of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, copper pressure fittings, and soldered joints. 2. Galvanized -steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints. 3. Grooved -end, galvanized -steel pipe; grooved -joint, galvanized -steel -pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints. 4. Fitting -type transition couplings if dissimilar pipe materials. H. Underground storm drainage force mains NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Soft copper tube; wrought -copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 2. Ductile -iron, mechanical -joint piping and mechanical joints. 3. Ductile -iron, push -on -joint piping and push -on joints. 4. Ductile -iron, grooved -joint piping and grooved joints. 5. Fitting -type transition coupling for piping smaller than NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and pressure transition coupling for NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and larger if dissimilar pipe materials. 15160-18 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING I. Underground storm drainage force mains NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be any of the following: 1. Hard copper tube; wrought -copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 2. Ductile -iron, mechanical -joint piping and mechanical joints. 3. Ductile -iron, push -on -joint piping and push -on joints. 4. Ductile -iron, grooved -joint piping and grooved joints. 5. Pressure transition couplings if dissimilar pipe materials. END OF SECTION 15160 15160-19 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15165 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof drains. 2. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties. 3. Cleanouts. 4. Backwater valves. 5. Trench drains. 6. Channel drainage systems. 7. Through -penetration firestop assemblies. 8. Flashing materials. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL ROOF DRAINS A. Cast -Iron, Large -Sump, General -Purpose Roof Drains: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by one of the following: 15165-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES a. Josam Company. b. Marathon Roofing Products. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. e. Tyler Pipe. f. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 3. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general-purpose roof drains. 4. Body Material: Cast iron. 5. Dimension of Body: Nominal 14-inch diameter. 6. Outlet: Bottom. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES Downspout Adaptors: 1. Description: Manufactured, gray -iron casting, for attaching to horizontal -outlet, parapet roof drain and to exterior, sheet metal downspout. 2. Size: Inlet size to match parapet drain outlet. Downspout Boots: 1. Description: Manufactured, ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray -iron casting, with strap or ears for attaching to building; NPS 4 (DN 100) outlet; and shop -applied bituminous coating. 2. Size: Inlet size to match downspout and NPS 4 (DN 100) outlet. C. Conductor Nozzles: 1. Description: Bronze body with threaded inlet and bronze wall flange with mounting holes. 2. Size: Same as connected conductor. 2.3 CLEANOUTS Wall Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfq. Co. d. Tyler Pipe. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for cleanouts. Include wall access. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 4. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil -pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 15165-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 5. Closure: Countersunk cast-iron plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 7. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome -plated brass or stainless -steel cover plate with screw. 8. Wall Access: Round, nickel -bronze, copper -alloy, or stainless -steel wall -installation frame and cover. 2.4 THROUGH -PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES A. Through -Penetration Firestop Assemblies: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ProSet Systems Inc. 2. Standard: ASTM E 814, for through -penetration firestop assemblies. 3. Certification and Listing: Intertek Testing Service NA for through -penetration firestop assemblies. 4. Size: Same as connected pipe. 5. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast -in -place concrete slabs. 6. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray -iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene 0-ring at base and gray -iron plug in thermal -release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug. 7. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings. 2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M,12 oz./sq. ft. B. Zinc -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04- inch minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot -dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated. C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil (1.01-mm) minimum thickness. D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. F Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy. 15165-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions. 1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 2. Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets. 3. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance. Install downspout adapters on outlet of back -outlet parapet roof drains and connect to sheet metal downspouts. C. Install downspout boots at grade with top 12 inches. Secure to building wall. D. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade. E. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following instructions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. F. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. G. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. H. Install horizontal backwater valves in floor with cover flush with floor. I. Install drain -outlet backwater valves in outlet of drains. J. Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor. K. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door in wall if indicated. L. Install through -penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors at concrete floor penetrations. M. Install sleeve flashing device with each conductor passing through floors with waterproof membrane. 15165-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 15160 "Storm Drainage Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: 1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of 6.0-Ib/sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints of 4.0-Ib/sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner. 2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets. B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching the pipe size, with a minimum length of 10 inches and with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 15165 15165-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING SECTION 15183 REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A . This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A . Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A: 1. Suction Lines for Air -Conditioning Applications: 300 psig. 2. Suction Lines for Heat -Pump Applications: 535 psig. 3. Hot -Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following: 1. Thermostatic expansion valves. 2. Solenoid valves. 3. Hot -gas bypass valves. 4. Filter dryers. 5. Strainers. 6. Pressure -regulating valves. B . Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment. 15183-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING C . Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment. D . Welding certificates. E Field quality -control test reports. F . Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." B . Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems." C . Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components." 1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A . Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when installed. 1.7 COORDINATION A . Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or L, to be cleaned, dehydrated, sealed and marked labeled for refrigerant use. 15183-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING B . Wrought -Copper Fittings: ASME 616.22. C . Wrought -Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. D . Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper socket fittings on copper pipe. E . Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. F . Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Tin -bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned -bronze -wire - reinforced protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Socket ends. 3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch- long assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. 2.2 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES A . Diaphragm Packless Valves: 1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight - through or angle pattern. 2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless -steel spring. 3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel. 4. Seat: Nylon. 5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. B . Packed -Angle Valves: 1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze. 2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure. 3. Operator: Rising stem. 4. Seat: Nonrotating, self -aligning polytetrafluoroethylene. 5. Seal Cap: Forged -brass or valox hex cap. 6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged. 7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. C . Check Valves: 1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern. 15183-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING 2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug. 3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat. 4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel. 5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated -steel stem, and graphite seal. 6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged. 7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig. 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. Service Valves: 1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core. 2. Core: Removable ball -type check valve with stainless -steel spring. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Copper spring. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. E . Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel. 2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24 or 115-V ac coil. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. 8. Manual operator. F . Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene 0-ring seal. 2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. G . Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750. 1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel. 2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Packing and Gaskets: Non -asbestos. 4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge. 5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F. 6. Superheat: Adjustable. 7. Reverse -flow option (for heat -pump applications). 15183-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING 8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union. 9. Working Pressure Rating: 700 psig. H . Hot -Gas Bypass Valves: Comply with UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Ductile iron or steel. 2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Packing and Gaskets: Non -asbestos. 4. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel. 5. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 6. Equalizer: Internal. 7. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24 or 115-V ac coil. 8. End Connections: Socket. 9. Throttling Range: Maximum 5 psig. 10. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. Straight -Type Strainers: 1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion -resistant coating. 2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel. 3. End Connections: Socket or flare. 4. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. J . Angle -Type Strainers: 1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze. 2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug. 3. Screen: 100-mesh monel. 4. End Connections: Socket or flare. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. K . Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 1. Body: Forged brass. 2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by filter screen. 3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm. 4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm. 5. End Connections: Socket or flare. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. 15183-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING L . Replaceable -Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730. 1. Body and Cover: Painted -steel shell with ductile -iron cover, stainless -steel screws, and neoprene gaskets. 2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless -steel support. 3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina. 4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat -pump applications). 5. End Connections: Socket. 6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement. 7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig Insert value. 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. M . Receivers: Comply with ARI 495. 1. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 2. Comply with UL 207; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 3. Body: Welded steel with corrosion -resistant coating. 4. Tappings: Inlet, outlet, liquid level indicator, and safety relief valve. 5. End Connections: Socket or threaded. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. N Liquid Accumulators: Comply with ARI 495. 1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion -resistant coating. 2. End Connections: Socket or threaded. 3. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. 2.3 REFRIGERANTS A . Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Atofina Chemicals, Inc. 2. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div. 3. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants. 4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC. 15183-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING B . ASHRAE 34, R-410A; Pentafluoroethane Diffuoromethane PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A A . Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air -Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR, annealed -temper tubing and wrought -copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints. 3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS A . Install diaphragm packless valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor. B . Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot -gas bypass valves and strainers if they are not an integral part of valves and strainers. C . Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor suction connection. D . Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet side of filter dryers. E . Install a full-sized, three -valve bypass around filter dryers. F . Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot -gas bypass valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top. G . Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators. 1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb. 2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line. 3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction -line pressure at bulb location. H . Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe safety -relief -valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube. 15183-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING J . Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an integral assembly for device being protected: 1. Solenoid valves. 2. Thermostatic expansion valves. 3. Hot -gas bypass valves. 4. Compressor. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve. L . Install receivers sized to accommodate pump -down charge. M . Install flexible connectors at compressors. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location of HVAC equipment. Based on field conditions, the Contractor shall verify piping routing and arrangements in order to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as approved on Shop Drawings. B . Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15 and equipment manufacturer's instructions. C . Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F . Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance. G . Install piping free of sags and bends. H . Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. 15183-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING J . Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings. K . Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels as specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces. L . Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground. M . Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury. N . Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. Install horizontal hot -gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor. 2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level. O . When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid -valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion -valve bulb. P . Install pipe sleeves at penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies. Q . Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07. R . Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation. S . Install sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full - thickness insulation. T . Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and methods. U . Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 15 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 15183-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A . Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B . Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C . Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or welding, to prevent scale formation. D . Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube." 1. Use Type BcuP, copper -phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe. 2. Use Type BAg, cadmium -free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. F . Threaded Joints: Thread steel pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry -seal threading is specified. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G . Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M. 3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B Install the following pipe attachments: 1 Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long. 2. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 3. Copper -clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. 15183-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING C . Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. D . Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B . Tests and Inspections: 1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. 2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure. 3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure. b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test. c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints. d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. 3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING A . Charge system using the following procedures: 1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. 3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig. 4. Charge system with a new filter -dryer core in charging line. 3.8 ADJUSTING A . Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat. 15183-11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING B . Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure. C . Adjust set -point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled -water controllers to the system design temperature. D Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's written instructions: 1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit. 2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct. 3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves. 4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes. 5. Check open compressor -motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates and pressures are established. END OF SECTION 15183 15183-12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE SUPPRESSION SECTION 15300 FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, and other Division Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Design, furnish and install a complete automatic sprinkler system throughout the entire building. Design shall include complete piping and sprinkler layout, details, sections and hydraulic calculations. Furnishing and installation shall include all related excavation, bedding, backfilling, piping, fittings, valves, hangers and supports, fire pumps and controls, alarm switches, painting, equipment and all appurtenant and incidental work required to complete and provide operable and approved fire protection system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. B. All fees and permits to be obtained and paid for by the Contractor installing that portion of the work. C. Provide "Record" drawings after completion of project. D. The fire sprinkler contractor shall be responsible for submitting the design to the City of Houston, Texas Fire Marshall and obtain and pay for the permit. No additional costs will be paid for this work. All tapping fees for the main fire sprinkler water line to the building will be paid for by the contractor. 1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Design systems to the occupancy requirements of NFPA 13-2010, International Fire Code (IFC) 2006 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. B. Provide Fire Department connection. C. Provide inspector's test station and drains. D. Provide detailed shop drawings of the automatic sprinkler systems in accordance with NFPA 13. E. System design pressure is 175 psig. 15300-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE SUPPRESSION F. Provide hydraulic calculations of the automatic sprinkler systems in accordance with NFPA 13. Hydraulic calculations shall not exceed 90 percent of the available pressure. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Specialist Company. Company specializing in sprinkler systems design and installation. Licensed Fire Protection Contractor by the State of Texas. B. Design Certification. Person performing design of sprinkler systems shall have a NICET Level 3 or higher certification. All drawings and calculations shall be signed and sealed accordingly. C. Installation Certification. Persons performing fire protection installation shall have a current Texas State and City of Houston, Texas Fire Protection Installation License. D. Persons performing electrical work shall have a current Texas State and City of Houston, Electricians License. E. Persons welding shall be certified in accordance with AWS QC11 — Specification for Qualification and Certification for Level II — Advanced Welders. F. Pipe sizes, as shown on the Drawings and or specified herein, are minimum pipe sizes. Pipe sizes shall be increased at no additional cost to the Contract if so required by applicable codes and ordinances, or if sizes are not available in certain materials and equipment. Under no circumstances shall pipe sizes be decreased. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide in accordance with NFPA 13-2010, NFPA 20-2010, NFPA 24-2010, International Fire Code (IFC) 2006 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. The Authority Having Jurisdiction includes City of Houston, Texas (City Fire Marshal) and the requirements of Owner's Insurance Underwriter. B. Welding shall be in accordance with AWS D10.12 — Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe. C. Piping materials specified herein are acceptable products to the Owner's Representative but all are not necessarily acceptable to applicable local codes and ordinances. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide materials, from the options listed herein, that are acceptable to both the Owner's Representative and applicable local codes and ordinances. D. Pipe sizes as shown on the Drawings are minimum pipe sizes. Contractor shall increase those pipe sizes if calculations so require, but under no circumstance shall pipe sizes be decreased. 15300-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE SUPPRESSION 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to submittal to Owner's Representative, submit shop drawings, product data, and hydraulic calculations to the Authority Having Jurisdiction for approval in accordance with NFPA 13 and 01330 Submittal Procedures. B. After approval from the Authority Having Jurisdiction, submit shop drawings, product data, and hydraulic calculations to Owner's Representative (with Certificate of Approval from the Authority Having Jurisdiction) for approval in accordance with NFPA 13 and 01330 Submittal Procedures. C. Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. D. Indicate valve data and ratings. E. Submit certificates in accordance with 01330 Submittal Procedures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All products shall be UL listed and or FM approved and in accordance with NFPA 13. 2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Aboveground Piping 1. Steel Pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM A53, A135 and A795. Steel pipe shall have a Corrosion Resistance Ratio (CRR) of 1 as issued by UL. Fittings shall be in accordance with NFPA 13. In addition, pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with City Fire Marshal, City of Houston, Texas and Owner's Insurance Underwriter. B. Underground Pipe And Fittings 1. Piping within 5'-0" of the building, provide ductile iron piping for 3-inch diameter and greater. ANSI/AVWVA C115, Class 53. Fittings. ANSI/AVWVA C110, ductile iron, standard thickness. Joints: Flanged, full face, 1/8-inch thick red rubber, 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts. Pipe, fittings, bolts and nuts to be tar coated outside. Pipe and fitting to be cement mortar lined inside, ANSI A21.4. Pipe and fittings to be polyethylene encased, ANSI/AVWVA C105. 2. In lieu of ductile iron piping above, piping within 5'-0" of the building may be a manufactured one piece in -building riser, UL listed/FM approved, composed of 304 stainless steel pipe and 90 degree fitting with a working pressure of 175 psi. 15300-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE SUPPRESSION The riser shall have a grooved -end connection on the outlet side and cast iron hub on the inlet side. In -building riser shall be manufactured by Ames Company. 3. Piping beyond 5'-0" of the building shall be ductile iron pipe (AVVWA C151) or polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe (AWWA C900). Fittings for ductile iron and PVC shall be ductile iron (AWWA C110), 250 pound rated, mechanical joint or push -on. Joints shall be mechanical joint or push - on (AWWA C111). Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be tar coated outside and cement -mortar lined inside (AWWA C104)]. Beyond 5'-0" outside of building provide below ground pipe, fittings and valves in accordance with Section 02541. 2.3 VALVES AND ACCESSORIES A. Valves and accessories shall be in accordance with NFPA 13. 2.4 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Suspended Ceiling Type 1. In ceilings less than 9 feet high, provide quick response concealed pendent type heads with white factory painted cover. 2. In ceilings 9 feet high and greater, provide quick response semi -recessed low profile pendent type heads with white factory painted escutcheon and head. B. Horizontal Sidewall Type. Sidewall sprinklers located less than 9 feet above finished floor shall be quick response concealed type heads with white factory painted finish. 2. Sidewall sprinklers located 9 feet and greater above finished floor shall be quick response semi - recessed low profile type heads with white factory painted finish. C. Exposed Non -Finished Non -Ceiling Non -high rack storage Area type 1. Commercial quick response, low profile, upright type brass finish. 2. Commercial quick response, low profile, pendent type with brass finish. D. Provide sprinkler head guards on all pendent sprinkler heads less than 8 feet above finished floor in non -finished non -ceiling areas. 15300-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE SUPPRESSION 2.5 ELECTRIC SWITCHES A. Alarm switch. 1. Vane type, 24 VDC, adjustable retard (wet system only), dual SPDT. 2. Pressure Type, Snap Action, NEMA 4 construction, 5 psi to 15 psi adjustment range, 24 VDC (dry system only), dual SDPT. Designed to activate alarm on increase in pressure. B. Supervisory switch. 1. OS&Y gate valve type, 24 VDC. 2. Indicator Post Type, 24 VDC, weatherproof 3. Pressure switch. 24 VDC, dual SPDT. 2.6 ALARM BELL A. Exterior Alarm Bell. Electric 10" diameter, weatherproof, 97 dB at 10'-0", 24 VDC, marked "Sprinkler Alarm." 2.7 FIRE PUMP, JOCKEY PUMP, DRIVERS, CONTROLLERS AND ACCESSORIES A. Pumps, drivers, controllers and accessories provided under this Section shall be new and currently listed as approved by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. B. Fire Pumps and Accessories. 1. Fire Pump shall deliver 150% of rated capacity at not less that 65% of total rated head. The shut-off head shall not exceed 120% of total rated head. a. Pump shall be in -line centrifugal type, bronze fitted, with cast iron casing, steel shaft, stuffing boxes with conventional packing, and water seals or lantern rings. See Drawing for proper rotation. b. Pump shall be provided with the following accessories. 1) Capacity plate. 2) Eccentric tapered reducer at suction inlet. 3) Automatic air release. 4) 3/4 inch circulation relief valve in spool piece on discharge side of pump. 15300-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE SUPPRESSION 5) Suction and discharge pressure gauges, 3-1/2" round dial, brass finished plain steel case, clear glass lens, bronze or copper alloy Bourdon tube, brass tip and socket, brass movement, and 1/4" N.P.T. male bottom connection. Dial range shall be approximately double the normal operating pressure. Accuracy shall be ±1% of total dial range. Suction gauge shall be compound type. Gauges shall be provided with a pulsation dampener and installed with a gauge cock. 6) Concentric tapered increaser at discharge outlet. 7) Safety guard over flexible coupling between pump and driver. 2. Fire Pump Electric Driver shall be drip proof fan -cooled electric motors, of such capacity that at rated voltage and frequency the full load ampere rating will not be exceeded under any conditions of pump load, except as allowed by the service factor stamped on the nameplate. Rotation of driver shall be compatible with pump. 3. Fire Pump and respective driver shall be mounted as a complete unit assembly on one-piece cast iron or steel drip -rim baseplates, direct connected through pin and rubber bushing type flexible coupling, by the pump Manufacturer before shipment from factory. Foundation anchor bolts shall be furnished by the pump Manufacturer. 4. Fire Pump Electric Drive Controller. a. Controller shall be of the combined automatic and manual, across the line type. Controller shall be furnished in free-standing NEMA 3R raintight steel enclosure. A pressure switch having a range of 0-300 psi with adjustment for setting cut -in pressure point shall be provided to cause controller to automatically start pump driver. Once the pump driver is started, it shall remain in operation until shut down manually. b. Controllers shall be arranged for operation of external supervisory circuit signals by provision of two sets of contacts, one set normally open and one set normally closed for each of the following conditions. 1) Pump running. 2) Loss of line power on line side of motor starter in any case. (This shall be accomplished by means of drop -out type relays controlling a supervisory circuit and the relay contacts shall close on failure of voltage). C. Automatic Transfer Switch. 1. The main fire pump controller shall be factory assembled and wired with an Automatic Transfer Switch shall be UL listed and FM approved for Transfer Switch Service and Fire Pump Service. The Power Transfer Switch and Fire Pump Controller shall be factory assembled, wired and tested units and shall conform to all requirements of the latest edition of NFPA 20 Centrifugal Fire Pumps and NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. 2. The Automatic Transfer Switch shall be housed in a NEMA Type 3R Raintight and Weatherproof enclosure provided with mounting feet for floor mounting. The Power Transfer Switch shall include a motor rated disconnect/isolating switch capable of interrupting the motor locked rotor current. 15300-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE SUPPRESSION The disconnect/ isolating switch shall be mechanically interlocked so that the enclosure door cannot be opened with the handle in the "On" position except by a hidden tool operated defeater mechanism. The disconnect/isolating switch shall be capable of being padlocked in the "Off' position with up to three padlocks for installation and maintenance safety, and shall also be capable of being locked in the "On" position. The Automatic Transfer Switch enclosure door shall have a locking type handle and three point cam and roller type vault hardware. 3. The transfer switch circuitry shall be capable of sensing both the normal power source and the emergency power source. The normal power source pickup shall be set at 95 percent nominal voltage and dropout of 85 percent nominal voltage. The emergency power source shall be set to pickup at 90 percent nominal voltage and 95 percent nominal frequency. The transfer signal shall be delayed for one second, delaying the transfer and engine start signals so as to override momentary normal power outages. 4. The transfer switch shall have "Transfer Switch Normal," "Transfer Switch Emergency" and "Emergency Isolating Switch Off' pilot lights, "Test" and 'Transfer Bypass" switches, audible alarm and "Silence Alarm" pushbutton mounted on the flange of the enclosure. No indicating lights or switch devices shall be mounted on the enclosure door. The automatic transfer switch shall be furnished with both normally open and normally closed auxiliary contacts for engine start signal when normal power failure occurs. Auxiliary contacts shall also be provided and wired to terminals to indicate the transfer switch position. The transfer switch shall be electrically operated and mechanically held, and shall be capable of being operated by a manual transfer mechanism located on the switch. D. Jockey Pump and Accessories. 1. Pump shall be vertical shaft centrifugal type, single -stage, bronze fitted, with stainless steel shaft, mechanical seals, cast iron casing having integral base, and including anchor bolts. Drive shall be drip -proof fan cooled electric motor, of the manufacture furnished as standard by the fire pump Manufacturer and of such capacity as not to overload at any point on the pump curve from design to shut-off. 2. Pump shall be provided with the following accessories. a. Suction pressure gauge. b. Discharge pressure gauge. 3. Jockey Pump Controller shall be of the automatic, across -the -line type, with NEMA 2 drip -proof, time delay fuses, "Manual -Off -Automatic" selector switch for manual operation, and without running period timer. A pressure switch having a pressure range of 0-300 psi with independent adjustments for setting cut -in and cut-out pressure points shall be provided to automatically control pump driver. 15300-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE SUPPRESSION E. Fire Pump Accessories 1. Flow meter shall be UL listed and FM approved provided and installed to measure and indicate water flow in fire pump test loop as shown on the Drawings. Flow meter shall be venturi type with attached dial meter. Metering device shall be capable of water flow of not less than 175 percent of pump rated capacity. The accuracy of the meter shall be no less than 0.5 percent full scale. The meter case shall be waterproof and coated with appropriate paint. Meter device shall be furnished with necessary mounting brackets, bleed -off and shut-off valves, color coded connectors, fittings and assemble piping. Flow meter shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Acceptable Manufacturer and Model or Approved Equal: Victaulic Style 735 F. Fire Pump Hose Valve Test Manifold: Rough chrome plated cast brass body, polished chrome plated brass trim, hose gate valves shall be straightway type with 2-1/2" female N.P.T. inlet by 2-1/2" male hose thread outlet, rated for 300 psi working pressure. Hose threads shall be National Standard Hose or same as Municipal Fire Department threads. Valve shall be provided with polished chrome plated brass caps and chains. Valves shall be UL listed and FM approved. 2.8 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide 1-1/2" piping labels at 25' intervals and 1-1/2" valve tags numbered and scheduled. Place schedule in Mechanical Room or as directed by Owner's Representative under glass and mounted to wall. In addition, provide signage as required by NFPA 13. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION — GENERAL A. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, NFPA 20 and NFPA 24 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. B. Excavating, trenching, bedding, backfilling, and compacting are specified in Division 2, "Site Work." 3.2 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Ream pipe and tube ends to full inside diameter and remove burrs and bevel plain end pipe. B. Remove scale and foreign material, inside and outside, before assembly. 15300-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE SUPPRESSION C. Thread steel pipe joints up to and including 1-1/2 inch diameter. Thread, weld, or groove 2-inch diameter and larger, including branch connections. D. Mechanical joints may be used instead of threaded or welded joints. E. Die -cut threaded joints with full -cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non -toxic joint compound applied to male threads only. F. Coat threaded ends with pipe lubricant compound. G. In steel piping, main sized saddle branch connections or direct connection of branch lines to mains is permitted if main is two pipe sizes larger than the branch. Do not project branch pipes inside the main pipe. H. Do not penetrate or cut building structural members unless otherwise noted or shown on drawings. I. Fire protection water service piping below building shall be provided with both flanged joints or rodding and thrust block restraint in accordance with NFPA 24. Flange bolts and nuts shall be 316 stainless steel. All rodding shall be coated with bitumastic coating. Gravity thrust block restraint shall be provided on the below floor elbow at the base of the riser. Minimum size of concrete thrust block shall be 48"x 48" x 48". J. Establish elevation of buried pipe outside the building to ensure not less than 3 feet of cover over top of pipe. K. Piping shall not run through grade beams. Piping shall run under grade beams. L. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. M. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. 3.3 INSTALLATION - VALVES A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. B. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valve and after all zone valves. In addition, provide auxiliary drains at all low points. 15300-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE SUPPRESSION 3.4 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT A. Locate Fire Department connection in accordance with City Fire Marshal, with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent siamese connectors to allow full swing of Fire Department wrench handles. B. Locate exterior alarm bellon outside building wall next to riser. C. Center heads in two directions in 2'-0" x 2'-0" ceiling tile and provide piping offsets as required and one direction (short side) only in ceiling tile with location in other direction (long side) variable, dependent upon spacing and coordination with ceiling elements. D. Apply strippable tape or paper cover to ensure sprinkler heads do not receive field paint finish. E. Provide inspectors test stations in accordance with NFPA 13 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction to properly test all alarms and flow. Inspectors test station locations shall be acceptable to the Owner's Representative. F. Provide 3/4-inch ball drip at low point of Fire Department Connection and pipe to floor drain or through exterior wall. G. Sprinkler heads located under glass or plastic skylights exposed to direct rays of sun shall be intermediate temperature classification. 3.5 INSTALLATION — FIRE PUMPS A. Fire pump, jockey pump, drivers, controllers and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 20. B. Fire pump and driver shall be set plumb and square on a 12" thick reinforced concrete pad. C. Fire jockey pump and driver shall be in -line type or pad- mounted type set plumb and square on a 4" thick reinforced concrete pad. D. Provide all interconnecting electrical power wiring between control panels and pumps for complete operable system. All wiring shall be in conduit. 3.6 CLEANING A. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24. 15300-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE SUPPRESSION 3.7 TESTING A. Hydrostatically leak test entire piping system in accordance with the Authority Having Jurisdiction, NFPA 13 and NFPA 24 or 1-1/2 times the operating pressure, whichever is greater. B. Leak testing shall be witnessed and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction and Owner's Representative. C. Submit "Certificates of Test Completion and Approval" for Piping Systems Leak Testing stating that all test results are satisfactory. Certificates must be signed by Contractor, the Authority Having Jurisdiction and Owner's Representative. D. Test automatic sprinkler systems, including alarm switches, supervisory switches, electric alarm bells, and interfacing with building fire and smoke alarm system to ensure proper operation. Tests shall be performed in accordance with the Authority Having Jurisdiction and NFPA 13. E. Operational tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction and Owner's Representative. F. After completion and approval of testing submit "Certificate of Test Completion and Approval" for automatic sprinkler systems operation stating that all test results are satisfactory. Certificates must be signed by Contractor, the Authority Having Jurisdiction and Owner's Representative. G. Test fire pump, jockey pump, drivers, controllers and accessories including pump operation and performance, related fire and supervisory alarm interfacing with building fire and smoke alarm system to ensure proper operation. Tests shall be performed in accordance with the Authority Having Jurisdiction and NFPA 20. 1. Fire Protection Contractor shall obtain the services of the Fire Pump Manufacturer's Representative to visit job site a minimum of two (2) times for testing. First visit shall be a minimum of 4 hours for "Preliminary Field Performance Test" and second visit shall be a minimum of 4 hours for "Final Field Performance/Acceptance Test. Fire Protection Contractor shall arrange times and dates satisfactory to all persons required to be in attendance. 2. Preliminary Field Performance Test. a. Fire Protection Contractor shall have ready a complete leak free, serviced, pre -started, pre -balanced and pre -adjusted operational system with all connected electrical and fire alarm systems in operation. b. Fire Pump Manufacturer's Representative shall inspect installation, service and supervise final balancing, and adjustments for "Preliminary Field Performance Test". Fire Pump Manufacturer's Representative shall supervise "Preliminary Field Performance Test" and place fire pump system ready for "Final Field Performance/Acceptance Test". c. Operational tests shall be witnessed and approved by Fire Pump Manufacturer's Representative and Fire Protection Contractor. 15300-11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE SUPPRESSION d. When tests are completed and system is approved by all in attendance, the Fire Protection Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative a "Certificate of Approval" stating that the Fire Pump System "Preliminary Field Performance Test" has been completed and ready for the "Final Field Performance/Acceptance Test". Certificate shall show date when "Preliminary Field Performance Test" was performed and approval signatures of all in attendance. 3. Final Field Performance/Acceptance Test. a. After completion of "Preliminary Field Performance Test" and the receiving of the "Certificate of Approval" from the Fire Protection Contractor, the Manufacturer's Representative shall supervise "Final Field Performance/Acceptance Test" by demonstrating the system operation. b. Entire fire pump system including related fire and supervisory alarms shall be Field Acceptance Tested in accordance with NFPA 20. c. Operational tests shall be witnessed and approved by Fire Pump Manufacturer's Representative, Fire Protection Contractor, the Authority Having Jurisdiction and Owner's Representative. d. When system is approved by all in attendance, the Fire Protection Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative "Final Field Performance/Acceptance Test Certificate of Approval" showing date of test and approval signatures of all in attendance. e. If system is not approved and accepted by all in attendance, corrections shall be made and the Fire Protection Contractor and the "Final Field Performance/Acceptance Test" procedure shall be repeated as specified above until system is approved and accepted. 4. The Fire Protection Contractor will not be acceptable as the Manufacturer's Representative. 3.8 OWNERS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING A. Fire Protection Contractor shall provide a minimum of 4 hours (or as long as required by the Owner) to demonstrate to the Owner the proper operation and maintenance of the automatic sprinkler system including associated accessories and alarms. Fire Protection Contractor shall arrange times and dates satisfactory to all persons required to be in attendance. B. After completion and approval of demonstrations, submit "Certificates of Demonstration Completion and Approval" for automatic sprinkler system stating that the Demonstrations of the systems is satisfactory. Certificates must be signed by the Manufacturer's Representative, Contractor, Owner and Owner's Representative. C. Fire Protection Contractor shall obtain the services of the Fire Pump Manufacturer's Representative to visit job site a minimum of four (4) hours (or as long as required by the Owner) to demonstrate to the Owner the proper operation and maintenance of the fire pump and associated accessories and alarms. Fire Protection Contractor shall assist Fire Pump Manufacturer's Representative. Fire Protection Contractor shall arrange times and dates satisfactory to all persons required to be in attendance. 15300-12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FIRE SUPPRESSION D. After completion and approval of demonstrations, submit "Certificates of Demonstration Completion and Approval" for fire system stating that the Demonstrations of the systems is satisfactory. Certificates must be signed by the Manufacturer's Representative, Contractor, Owner and Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION 15300 15300-13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING SECTION 15400 PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, and other Division Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Plumbing systems including related excavation, bedding, backfilling, piping, fittings, valves, hangers and supports, controls, painting, insulation, plumbing fixtures and trim, and plumbing specialties and equipment; cutting and patching of floors, walls and pavement; and all appurtenant and incidental work to complete and provide operable systems as shown on the drawings and specified herein. B. Demolition of plumbing systems including piping, fittings, valves plumbing fixtures and appurtenant and incidental work as shown on the drawings. C. Fees and permits to be obtained and paid for by the Contractor installing that portion of the work. D. Provide "Record" drawings after completion of project. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Persons performing plumbing work shall have a current Texas State Plumbing License. B. Persons performing electrical work shall have a current Texas State Electricians License. C. Welding Materials and Procedures. Conform to ASME Code or AWS 10.12. D. Welders Certification. Employ certified welders conforming to ANSI/ASME Sec. 9. or AWS QC11-Level II Advanced Welders. 15400-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING Manufacturer's model numbers listed under the acceptable manufacturers and models are provided to indicate the basic product series required. In addition, features listed in the product description shall be included whether or not included with the listed model number. Pipe sizes, as shown on the Drawings and or specified herein, are minimum pipe sizes. Pipe sizes shall be increased at no additional cost to the Contract if so required by applicable codes and ordinances, or if sizes are not available in certain materials and equipment. Under no circumstances shall pipe sizes be decreased. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Plumbing work to Conform to the most recent editions of the City of Houston, Texas applicable codes and ordinances, International Plumbing Code-2006 and International Energy Conservation Code-2006. B. Conform to the most recent editions of the Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS). C. Materials specified herein are acceptable products to these specifications, but are not necessarily acceptable to applicable local codes and ordinances. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide materials, from the options listed herein, that are acceptable to both these specifications and applicable local codes and ordinances. D. Under PART 2- PRODUCTS where acceptable products and models are called out by product "acceptable manufacturer and model or approved equal", contractor may substitute an equal product and submit that product to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to ordering product. Where it is called out "acceptable manufacturers and models" contractor shall select from one of those listed and submit it to the Owner's Representative. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data on valves, fixtures and trim, plumbing specialties and equipment and other items specified herein and shown on the drawings to the Owner's Representative for review. B. Submit product data on pipe materials, fittings, valves and accessories specified within this Section in accordance with Section 01350 Submittals. C. Submit certificates required within this specification section in accordance with Section 01350 Submittals. 15400-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Domestic and non -potable Water Piping (Within 5 feet of the building). 1. Interior, above ground - 4-inch diameter and less. Pipe: copper tubing, ASTM B88, Type "L" hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI B16.22 wrought copper, ANSI B16.18 cast copper or copper press fittings with EPDM 0-rings as manufactured by ProPress. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA or press type. 2. Interior and exterior, below ground, 3-inch diameter and greater. Pipe. Ductile iron ANSI/AWWA C151, Class 50. Fittings. Ductile iron, ANSI/AWWA C110, standard thickness. Joints: Restrained mechanical joint, rubber gasket, ANSI/AWWA C111. Pipe and fittings tar coated outside and cement mortar lined inside ANSI A21.4. 3. Interior and exterior, below ground, 2-1/2-inch and less. Pipe: copper tubing, ASTM B88, Type "K" hard drawn or annealed. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.18, cast copper or ANSI/ASME B16.22, wrought copper. Joints: AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze or no joints. B. Sanitary Sewer Waste and Vent Piping (Within 5 feet of the building). 1. Interior aboveground. No -hub cast iron soil pipe and fittings - CISPI 301. Joints: Couplings shall conform to ASTM A-888, 3" wide for pipe 1-1/2' to 4" diameter, 4" wide for pipe sizes 5" to 10" diameter, with neoprene sealing conforming to ASTM C-564, 28 gauge 304 stainless steel shields and 304 stainless steel worm drive clamps with a minimum clamp torque of 80 in/Ibs, as manufactured by Clamp -All Products, Model HI-TORQ 80. 2. Interior above and below ground. Pipe: PVC, ASTM D2665, Schedule 40. Fittings: PVC, DWV type, Schedule 40. Joints: ASTM D2855 and D2564, solvent weld. 3. Exterior below ground. Pipe: PVC, ASTM D2665, Schedule 40. Fittings: PVC, DWV type, Schedule 40. Joints: ASTM D2855 and D2564, solvent weld. 4. Above and Belowground. Pipe and fittings: Hub and spigot service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings - ASTM A74 joined with a compression type rubber gasket. Pipe and fittings tar coated inside and outside. 15400-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING 2.2 VALVES A. Ball Valves. For Water Shut -Off. MSS-SP-110 and NSF 61, lead free, 600 PSI working pressure, brass or bronze construction, reinforced TFE seat and Viton seal materials, lever handle, threaded or soldered connections. Throttling valves shall be provided with memory stops. B. Check Valves. For Water. Conforms to MSS-SP-80, swing type, 200 PSI minimum working pressure, NFS 61, lead free, brass or bronze construction, bronze disc, PTFE seat, threaded or soldered connections. C. Vacuum Relief Valves. For Water Heater Tank. Conform to ANSI Z21.22, lead free, swing type, 200 PSI minimum working pressure, brass or bronze construction, silicone disc, Buna-N o-ring, glass filled polysulfone float stainless steel spring and threaded connections. 2.3 INSULATION A. Fiberglass pipe insulation - ASTM C547, Class 1. Jackets for piping shall be ASTM C921, Type I for piping with temperatures below ambient and Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. Encase pipe fittings insulation with one piece premolded PVC fitting covers. Acceptable manufacturers or approved equal: Owens-Corning Fiberglass Certainteed Corp. Knauf Fiberglass Manville Products Corp. B. Staples, bands, wire, cements, adhesives, sealers and protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 15400-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING 2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide hangers and supports in accordance with Manufacturer Standardization Society (MSS) SP-58, SP-69 and SP-89. 2.5 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES A. Floor Drains. 1. FD-1. Cast iron body, double drainage flange, weepholes, bottom outlet, 6" diameter nickel bronze adjustable flat strainer, and non -puncturing flashing collar. Acceptable manufacturers and models or approved equal: Josam 30,000-A Smith 2010-A Wade W-1100 Zurn Z-415 2. FD-2. Cast iron body, double drainage flange, weepholes, bottom outlet, 7" diameter nickel bronze adjustable heavy duty tractor type flat strainer, and non - puncturing flashing collar. Acceptable manufacturers and models or approved equal: Josam 30,000-E Smith 2010-D Wade W-1100-TS Zurn Z-415-N B. Floor Sink Drain. 1. FSD-1. Square cast iron body, double drainage flange, weepholes, bottom outlet, aluminum dome strainer, non -puncturing flashing collar, porcelain enamel or epoxy coated interior, and Tess grate. Size 8" x 8" x 6". Acceptable manufacturers and models or approved equal: Josam 49000 Smith 3100 Wade W-9110-24 Zurn Z-1910 15400-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING C. Cleanout. 1. FCO-1. Floor cleanout, cast iron body, adjustable type, round nickel bronze top, and thread plastic plug. Acceptable manufacturers and models or approved equal: Josam 56,000 Smith 4128-NB Wade W-6000 Zurn Z-1400-BP-ZN 2. FCO-2. Floor cleanout, cast iron body, adjustable type, heavy duty tractor type, round nickel bronze top, and threaded plastic plug. Acceptable manufacturers and models or approved equal: Josam 56040-1 Smith 4248-NB Wade W-6000-X Zurn Z-1400-BP-HD-ZN 3. WCO. Wall cleanout, Recessed type, cast iron body with threaded brass plug, flush mounted stainless steel access cover with countersunk center screw. Acceptable manufacturers and models or approved equal: Josam 58710 Smith 4402 Wade W-8450-R Zurn Z-1441-Z Wall Hydrants and Hose Bibbs. 1. NWH-1. Non -freeze wall hydrant, exposed type, chrome plated brass or nickel bronze finish on brass casting body, 3/4" hose thread nozzle, integral vacuum breaker, loose key handle. Vacuum breaker to be in conformance with ANSI/ASSE 1011. Acceptable manufacturer and model or approved equal: Woodford 65 2. HB-1. Hose bibb, brass, exposed piping, 1/2" male NPT inlet by 3/4" hose thread outlet, vacuum breaker to be in conformance with ANSI/ASSE 1011. 15400-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING Acceptable manufacturers and models or approved equal: Woodford 24 CP 3. HB-2. Sanitary non -freeze yard hydrant hose bibb. ASSE 1057 approved, lead free, potable water post type yard hydrant, 3/4" NHT brass nozzle, galvanized steel post and reservoir pipe with 1" FPT inlet, freezeless, field testable, with hose connection backflow preventer and designed to automatically drain for freezing conditions. Acceptable manufacturer and model or approved equal: Woodford Hoeptner E. Water Hammer Arresters. S3 213XS 1. WHA. ASSE 1010 and PD1 WH-201, permanently sealed bellows or expanding chamber. Sizing symbols indicated on drawings are standard classification established by PD1-WH2O1. F. Trap Protection Device 1. Trap Protection Device. ASSE 1072 Certified, designed to allow wastewater to open and adequately discharge floor drain through its interior and closes and returns to original position after wastewater discharge is complete. Acceptable manufacturers and models or approved equal: Proset Systems Trap Guard SureSeal Inline Trap Seal Smith 2692 G. Backflow Preventers. 1. DCBP. Double check backflow preventer 2" and smaller. ANSI/ASSE 1015; complete unit of two independently acting check valves, two ball valves, strainer and four test cocks, stainless steel or bronze body with bronze internal parts, 150 psi working pressure, and shall comply with AWWA Standard C506 and USC-FCCCHR. H. Flashings 1. Sheet lead shall be 4 pound weight. 2. Sheet copper shall be 16 ounce weight. 15400-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING 2.6 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Combination Water Closet/Flush Valve and Trim. WC-1. Combination water closet/flush valve, right height 16-1/2" high, wall mounted, HET flush valve type, back outlet, white vitreous china, siphon jet action, elongated bowl, 2-1/8" diameter fully glazed trapway, 1-1/2" top inlet spud, designed to operate on 1.28 gallons per flush maximum. Flush valve shall be 10-year long -life battery powered sensor operated, exposed and piston or diaphragm type. Combination water closet/flush valve shall have a MaP test score of 1000 grams as certified by the latest Maximum Performance Test. Acceptable manufacturer and model or approved equal: American Standard Sloan 2257.528 2. WC-2. Same as WC-1 but mounted at TAS handicapped height 17" to 19" from finished floor to top of seat. 3. Seat for WC-1 and WC-2. Heavy duty white polypropylene, posture molded, elongated, open front, concealed one piece stainless steel self-sustaining check hinges and integral molded bumpers. Acceptable manufacturer and model or approved equal: American Standard Sloan 5901.100 4. Carrier for WC-1 and WC-2. Heavy duty, wall -mounted type, adjustable height, compatible with specified water closet, complete with chrome -plated finished exposed trim, foot support, through wall frame, and required accessories for the appropriate type for the pipe materials specified. Assembly to include an adjustable horizontal cast iron closet fitting of the inlet type compatible with the piping type and arrangement as shown on the drawings. Acceptable manufacturer or approved equal: Josam 15400-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING B. Combination Urinal/Flush Valve and Trim 1. U-1. Combination urinal and flush valve, wall -mounted, HEU flush -valve type, white vitreous china, 14 inch minimum elongated rim type, extended privacy sides, washout flush action, flushing rim, integral trap, 3/4" top inlet spud and designed to operate on 0.125 gallon per flush maximum. Standard urinal shall be mounted at TAAS handicapped height 17" from finished floor to top of bowl rim. Flush valve shall be 10- year Tong -life battery powered sensor operated, exposed and piston or diaphragm type. Acceptable manufacturer and model or approved equal: American Standard Sloan 6590.525 C. Lavatories and Trim. 1. L-1. Counter top mounted, TAS handicapped with lavatory insulation kit, white vitreous china, size 20" x 17" oval, self -rimming, fitting ledge, template and sealant, front overflow and single center hole. Mount 29" from finished floor to bottom lavatory front edge. Acceptable manufacturer and model or approved equal: American Standard Sloan 0475.047 2. Faucet for L-1. TAS handicapped, chrome plated brass, lead free, for single center hole with hot and cold supplies, vandal resistant laminar flow spout, 10-year long -life battery powered sensor operated with above -deck lever operated integral mixing valve, 0.5 gpm maximum flow. Provide ASSE 1070 thermostatic mixing valve on hot water supply to each lavatory faucet and set for 105 degrees F. Acceptable manufacturer and model or approved equal: American Standard Sloan 7053.205 3. Point of use thermostatic mixing valve for lavatories (L-1). Thermostatic mixing valve for installation into hot water supply to lavatory faucet, ASSE 1070 listed for control of temperature of hot water, bronze body, stainless steel disc and springs, Buna-N o-rings, integral filter washers and check valves and adjustment cap with locking feature. Connections shall be 1/2". Acceptable Manufacturer and Model: Watts MMV-M1 15400-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING 4. Supplies and stops for L-1. Through the wall angle type, chrome plated lead free brass, 1/4 turn, 1/2" threaded or soldered inlet by 3/8" O.D. compression type outlet, 3/8" O.D. chrome -plated flexible copper riser and wall escutcheon. 5. Strainer and Tailpiece for L-1. Chrome plated cast brass drain and tailpiece, with flat strainer. Size: 1-1/4" diameter. 6. P-trap for L-1. 17 gauge chrome plated brass with integral cleanout and wall escutcheon. Size: 1-1/4" diameter. 7. Lavatory insulation kit for L-1. Fully molded, specifically manufactured insulation covering for lavatory -P-trap, tailpiece, angle stop valve and supply assembly. Assembly to include manufacturer's fasteners kit to be designed for removal and reinstallation. Color of assembly to be white. Minimum "K" value of assembly to be 1.17 conforming to ASTM C177. Provide on lavatories located in toilet rooms that are designed for handicapped. Acceptable manufacturers or approved equal: Truebro Plumberex D. Sink S-1 and Trim. 1. S-1. Undermount, TAS handicapped, single compartment, 18-gauge stainless steel, with sound-dampering pads,3.5 drain locations, under -mount bracket, and soap dispenser. Acceptable manufacturer and model or approved equal: Elkay Sloan ELUHAD191650 2. Faucet for S-1. TAS handicapped, chrome plated cast brass, lead free, deck mount, 8-6" highspout, 1.5 faucet hole and 2.6" level handle. Maximum flow is 1.5 gpm. Acceptable manufacturer and model or approved equal: Elkay Sloan LKD20858C 3. Strainer and Tailpiece for sinks. Stainless steel body, conical strainer, and tailpiece, with neoprene stopper. 15400-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING 4. P-Trap for sinks. 17 gauge, chrome plated brass and wall escutcheon. Size 1-1/2" diameter. E. Sink S-2 and Trim 1. S-2. Undermount, TAS handicapped, double compartment, 18-gauge stainless steel, with sound-dampering pads,3.375 rear center drain locations, under -mount bracket, and soap dispenser. Acceptable manufacturer and model or approved equal: Elkay Sloan ELUHAD311850PD 2. Faucet for S-2. TAS handicapped, chrome plated cast brass, lead free, deck mount, 12.5" highspout, 1.5 faucet hole and 2.6" level handle. Maximum flow is 1.5 gpm. Acceptable manufacturer and model or approved equal: Elkay Sloan LKD208513C 3. Strainer and Tailpiece for sinks. Stainless steel body, conical strainer, and tailpiece, with neoprene stopper. 4. P-Trap for sinks. 17 gauge, chrome plated brass and wall escutcheon. Size 1-1/2" diameter. F. Janitor Sink and Trim. 1. JS-1. Floor mounted, molded polyester or fiberglass material, size. 24" x 24" x 10", 3" drain, mop hanger, hose and hose bracket, vinyl bumperguard, removable combination dome strainer and stainless steel lint basket, white color. Acceptable manufacturer and models or approved equal: Fiat MSB 2424 15400-11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING 2. Faucet for JS-1. Rough chrome plated brass, 3/4" hose thread outlet, wall mounted for concealed supply pipe, wall brace, integral stops, pail hook, and vacuum breaker. Acceptable manufacturer and model or approved equal: American Standard 8344.212 Trap for JS-1. 3" under floor. G. Drinking Fountain with Bottle Filling Station 1. DF-1 Wall -mounted, Bi-level ADA cooler, with Bottle Filling Station, compliant with NSF 42, 53, 61 and 372. Stainless steel, filtered, lead free, 8 GPH. Acceptable manufacturer and model or approved equal: Elkay Halsey- Taylor LZSTL8WSSP Showers and Trim 1. SH-1. (Right Handed Seat) One-piece, seamless, heavy-duty, acrylic with fiberglass/plywood reinforcement, TAS handicapped, wheelchair roll -in shower stall designed for institutional use, white, fold -down seat, 2" cast brass drain and stainless steel strainer, 1-1/2" O.D. 18-gauge stainless steel grab bars, and 1" O.D. 18-gauge stainless steel curtain rod mounted at top of unit and stainless steel soap dish. Bottom lip of shower to be 1/2" maximum above finished floor. Inside dimension is 60" wide x 30" deep x 78-3/4" high. Acceptable manufacturer or approved equal: Freedom Showers APTG6239BF875R 2. SH-2. (LEFT HANDED SEAT) One-piece, seamless, heavy-duty, acrylic with fiberglass/plywood reinforcement, TAS handicapped, wheelchair roll -in shower stall designed for institutional use, white, fold -down seat, 2" cast brass drain and stainless steel strainer, 1-1/2" O.D. 18-gauge stainless steel grab bars, and 1" O.D. 18-gauge stainless steel curtain rod mounted at top of unit and stainless steel soap dish. Bottom lip of shower to be 1/2" maximum above finished floor. Inside dimension is 60" wide x 30" deep x 78-3/4" high. Acceptable manufacturer or approved equal: 15400-12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING Freedom Showers APT6239BF875L 3. Mixing valve assembly for SH-1 & SH-2. TAS handicapped, complete assembly for concealed piping installation with polished chrome exposed parts complete with mixing valve, in -line vacuum breaker, wall supply with wall escutcheon for hand held shower head assembly. Mixing valve shall be pressure balancing type with adjustable temperature limit stop, single lever handle, and integral checks and stops. Hand held shower head assembly shall include a 69" minimum long polished chrome metal hose, 3- function with pause feature hand held shower head and 36" minimum long slide bar with up/down and right/left pivoting sprayer slide bracket. Shower valve shall be provided with universal rough -in. Maximum flow to be 1.5 GPM. Acceptable manufacturers and models or approved equal: American Standard 1662.211 w/accessories 2.7 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT A. Domestic Water Heater 1. DWH-1. Energy efficient, insulated tank with minimum "R" value of 16, residential electric vertical type, porcelain Tined tank, anode protection, drain valve, safety relief valve, high temperature cut off, individual operating thermostats, insulated tank, baked enamel exterior steel jacket, and UL listed. Acceptable Manufacturer and Model: A. O. Smith ECT Series 2. Circulation pumps (DWCP-1). Inline type, flanged connections, rated for 125 psi at 220°F, single stage, vertical split case, all bronze or stainless steel and provided with oil cups. See Schedule for capacity. Acceptable Manufacturers or approved equal: Bell & Gossett Armstrong Taco Grundfos B. Elevator Waste Water Pump and Accessories 15400-13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING 1. Elevator Waste Water Pump System (EWP-1): Continuous duty, submersible type, cast-iron body, bronze impeller, carbon/ceramic mechanical shaft seal, upper and lower ball bearings, oil -filled motor with automatic thermal overload protection. Provide float switch and 120 volt cord. See Schedule on drawing for pump capacity. Acceptable manufacturers and models or approved equal: Hydromatic OSP 2. Control/Alarm Panel for EWP-1: Panel shall cycle pump on and off and alarm on high liquid level in elevator sump. Panel shall be UL listed and NEMA 4X Thermplastic enclosure, magnetic motor contactor. Panel shall have a Hand -Off -Automatic switch and audio/visual alarm. Panel shall have high liquid level alarm and pump on -off floats. Provide power and control wiring between control panel, pump, float switches and panel. Acceptable manufacturer and model or approved equal: SJE Rhombus 112 1W 114H 3A 17J 2.8 PIPING PENETRATIONS A. Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: 1. Galvanized Steel -Pipe Floor and Wall. Fabricate from Schedule 10 (minimum) steel pipe; remove burrs. 2. Floor sleeves shall be provided with water stop around perimeter of sleeve. B. Caulked Seals. Provide seals for penetrations through interior walls of one of the following: 1. Mineral Wool. Packed tightly between sleeve and pipe. 2.9 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide 1-1/2" piping labels at 25' intervals and 1-1/2" valve tags numbered and scheduled. Place schedule in Mechanical Room under glass and mounted to wall. In addition, provide labels for all equipment. 15400-14 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Installation to be in accordance with the most recent edition of the City of Houston, Texas applicable codes and ordinances and the International Plumbing Code. B. Provide chrome plated brass stops on fixtures. C. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections whenever joining dissimilar metals. D. Fixtures and trim to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Install fixtures and equipment level, plumb, and at right angles to walls. F. Provide carriers on wall mounted fixtures. G. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with white silicone sealant. H. Provide manufactured removable insulation covering kit on stops and supplies, tailpieces and P-traps of handicapped lavatories. Provide water hammer arresters on hot and cold water supplies to plumbing fixtures. Water hammer arresters to be as shown on diagrams and, if not shown, provide for each fixture in accordance with Standard PDI-WH-201. Sizing shown on the drawings to be in accordance with PD1-WH-201. J. Provide excavation, bedding, backfilling and compaction for underfloor plumbing piping. Excavation shall be down to 6" below pipe. Bedding material shall be clean sand from 6" below pipe to 6" above pipe. Backfill shall be excavated material free from any debris. Compact 6" increments to 95% proctor per ASTM D1557. K. Vent through roof to be made watertight by the use of 4 pound lead flashing made into an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be suitably formed and the skirt or flange shall extend not less than 8" from the pipe and shall be set over the roof membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement. Extend flashing up the pipe and turn down into the pipe to form a waterproof joint. The annular space between the flashing and the bare pipe shall be sealed with tightly packed fiberglass wool insulation. 15400-15 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING Extend floor cleanouts to flush with finished floor. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with non -hardening teflon pipe dope. M. Trap drains connected to sanitary sewer. N. Install new floor drains with top depressed 1/4" below finished floor. O. Piping hangers shall be sized large enough to allow insulation to pass through. Hangers for piping 2-1/2" and greater shall be provided with pipe covering protection saddle, or high compressive strength insulation saddle. Hangers for piping 2" and less shall be provided with pipe covering shields. On cold or chilled water piping provide vapor barrier through hanger. Materials within ducts or plenums (ceiling spaces used as supply or return air plenums) shall have a flame -spread index of not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating of not more than 50 when tested in accordance with the Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Materials, U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1. Q. Installation of equipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. R. Seal piping penetrations to achieve fire and smoke resistance equivalent to fire and smoke assembly rating. S. Handicapped fixtures shall be provided in accordance with TAS regulations. T. Provide identifying tags and markers on piping valves. U. Provide cutting and patching of floors, walls, ceilings and roof for plumbing system to match existing. V. Electrically heat trace domestic hot water for hot water temperature maintenance within 15 feet of each fixture. W. Provide access for serving, maintenance, and general inspection. Coordinate the location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with location of access panels and doors. Allow ample removal space and coordinate piping locations so not to block access. Provide access for the following equipment. Valves Unions 15400-16 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING X. Provide record drawings to indicate revisions to piping, size and location, both exterior and interior; including locations of equipment, inverts and locations of underground piping, mains and branches of piping systems with valves located and numbered, items requiring maintenance, etc. Y. Provide operation and maintenance manuals showing description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts, printed operating procedures, routine preventive maintenance, servicing instructions and lubrication charts. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Piping hangers shall be sized large enough to allow insulation to pass through. Hangers for piping 2-1/2" and greater shall be provided with pipe covering protection saddle, or high compressive strength insulation saddle. Hangers for piping 2" and less shall be provided with pipe covering shields. On cold water piping provide vapor barrier through hanger. B. Install hangers for horizontal and vertical piping as follows: 1. Install hangers for horizontal cast iron soil piping with the following maximum spacing and the minimum rod sizes: a. 2 inch and smaller: Maximum span - 5 feet and minimum rod size - 3/8 inch. b. 3 inch: Maximum span - 5 feet and minimum rod size - 1/2 inch. c. 4 inch and 5 inch: Maximum span — 5 feet and minimum rod size - 5/8 inch. d. 6 inch: Maximum span — 5 feet and minimum rod size - 3/4 inch. e. Spacing for 10-foot pipe lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 5 feet. f. Install supports for vertical cast iron piping every 15 feet. 2. Install hangers for horizontal hard copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and the minimum rod sizes: a. 3/4 inch and smaller: Maximum span - 5 feet and minimum rod size - 3/8 inch. b. 1 inch through 1-1/4 inch: Maximum span - 6 feet and minimum rod size - 3/8 inch. c. 1-1/2 inch through 2 inch: Maximum span - 8 feet and minimum rod size - 3/8 inch. d. 2-1/2 inch: Maximum span - 9 feet and minimum rod size - 1/2 inch. e. 3 inch through 5 inch: Maximum span - 10 feet and minimum rod size - 1/2 inch. f. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. 3. Install hangers for horizontal PVC piping with the following maximum spacing and the minimum rod sizes: 15400-17 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING a. 2 inch and smaller: Maximum span - 4 feet and minimum rod size - 3/8 inch. b. 2-1/2 inch and 3 inch: Maximum span - 4 feet and minimum rod size - 1/2 inch. c. 4 inch and 5 inch: Maximum span - 4 feet and minimum rod size - 5/8 inch. d. 6 inch: Maximum span — 4 feet and minimum rod size - 3/4 inch. e. Install supports for vertical PVC tubing every 4 feet. 3.3 INSULATION. Insulate domestic cold and hot water piping. Insulation thickness schedule. Cold Water Piping Fiberglass. 1" thick for all pipe sizes. Hot Water Piping Fiberglass. 1" thick for pipe sizes up to 1", 1-1/2" thick for pipe sizes from 1-1/4" to 2", 2" thick for pipe sizes from 2-1/2" and larger. 3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS. A. Threaded Connections Threaded joints shall be in accordance with ANSI B1.20.1. Threaded joints shall be made up teflon tape or lead free pipe joint compound applied to the male thread only. Should a joint be loosened after being made up, it shall not be made up a second time unless the threads are cleaned and new compound applied. 2. Steel piping which is assembled with screwed joints shall have exposed threads thoroughly primed with a coat of lead free rust resistant paint. Paint immediately after installation. This shall apply to both piping which is to be covered as well as uncovered. B. Soldered Connections 1. Soldered joints shall be in accordance with ASTM B32. Flux shall be nonacid type. Remove composition discs from solder end valves during soldering. Pipe ends, fittings and valves shall be properly cleaned before soldering and wiped clean to remove flux and excess solder after soldering. C. Copper Tubing Press Type. In lieu of providing soldered fittings in copper tubing, Installer may, as option, provide press connections, providing they are in accordance with following: 15400-18 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING 1. Press connections: Copper press fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturers installation instructions. •The tubing shall be inserted into the fitting and the tubing marked at the shoulder of the fitting. The fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark on the tubing to assure the tubing is fully engaged (inserted) in the fitting. The joints shall be pressed using the tool approved by the manufacture. D. Welded joints shall be in accordance with AWS D10.12 and made by the oxyacetylene or electric process. E. Solvent cement connections. 1. Solvent cement connections shall be joined with primer and PVC solvent cement complying to ASTM D2564. Solvent cement connections shall be in compliance with GSR Bulletin #SCJ-1 Solvent Cementing Procedure. 3.5 PIPE PENETRATIONS. A. Sleeve or core drill new construction or core drill existing construction pipe penetrations as specified below where piping passes through walls, floors, and roofs. Do not penetrate structural members, or cut concrete reinforcement except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Owner's Representative. Install penetrations accurately centered on pipe runs. Size penetrations so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than two pipe sizes larger than piping run. Where insulation includes vapor -barrier jacket, provide penetration with sufficient clearance for installation. When sleeves are required, install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, and finish flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves two inches above finished floor. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeve. Pipe penetrations shall be as follows. 1. New floors on grade. Provide sleeved penetrations for piping except piping two inches and less and waste, drain, and vent piping. Piping not requiring sleeves shall be provided with 30 Ib. asphalt saturated roofing felt wrapped around pipe through the thickness of the floor with concrete floor placed up to roofing felt. 2. New floors above grade. Provide sleeved or core drilled penetrations for piping. 3. Existing Floors Above Grade. Provide core drilled penetrations for piping. 4. New and Existing Walls. Provide sleeved or core drilled penetrations for piping. 15400-19 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING 5. Floor type drains, cleanouts, and water closet waste connections do not require sleeved or core drilled penetrations. Concrete shall be placed tight to connection. B. Pipe Sleeves. Install in accordance with the following: 1. Install sheetmetal on steel pipe sleeves in interior walls. 2. Install steel pipe sleeves in interior floors above grade. 3. Install galvanized steel pipe sleeves in floors on grade and in exterior walls above grade and below grade. C. Penetration Seals. 1. Install caulked seals as follows. a. In interior walls where piping passes from one space to another, where any one of the spaces the piping penetration is not concealed by a ceiling. 2. Install mechanical seals in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations as follows. a. In interior floors on grade. b. In exterior walls above grade and below grade. c. In roof penetrations except vent piping, flue piping, roof or overflow drain piping or any other piping as otherwise detailed on drawing. 3. Install fire barrier seals in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Piping penetrations through conventional built-up roof shall be made water tight by flashing and counter flashing in roof system and sealed with bituminous sealant. Piping penetrations through non -conventional roof such as membrane, standing seam, etc. shall be in accordance with the roofing manufacturer's requirements and meet the roofing manufacturer's warranty. 3.6 TESTING A. Testing piping systems in accordance with the most recent editions of the City of Houston, Texas applicable codes and ordinances and the International Plumbing Code. B. Test water heaters and accessories to ensure proper operation. 15400-20 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PLUMBING 3.7 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION A. Flush and disinfect domestic water piping system in accordance with the most recent editions of the City of Houston, Texas applicable codes and ordinances and the International Plumbing Code. 3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust and balance stops for intended water flow to fixtures without splashing, noise or overflow. B. At completion, clean plumbing fixtures. END OF SECTION 15400 15400-21 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS SECTION 15732 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes packaged, outdoor, central -station air -handling units (rooftop units) with the following components and accessories: 1. Direct -expansion cooling. 2. Integral, space temperature controls. 3. Roof curbs. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. DDC: Direct -digital controls. B. ECM: Electrically commutated motor. C. Outdoor -Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the outdoor -air stream to reject heat during cooling operations and to absorb heat during heating operations. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system. D. Outdoor -Air Refrigerant -Coil Fan: The outdoor -air refrigerant -coil fan in RTUs. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system. E. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, outdoor, central -station air -handling units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground. F. Supply -Air Fan: The fan providing supply air to conditioned space. "Supply air is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus. G. Supply -Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply -air stream to absorb heat (provide cooling) during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus. 15732-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design RTU supports to comply with wind performance requirements, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Wind -Restraint Performance: 1. Basic Wind Speed: 2. Building Classification Category: 3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft (48.8 kg/sq. m) multiplied by the maximum area of the mechanical component projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal. C. Seismic Performance: RTUs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: For RTU supports indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration isolation bases. 2. Detail mounting. securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system. 3. Wind Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of wind and seismic restraints. Show anchorage details. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings: Plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Structural members to which RTUs will be attached. 2. Roof openings 3. Roof curbs and flashing. 15732-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS B. Manufacturer Wind Loading Qualification Certification: Submit certification that specified equipment will withstand wind forces identified in "Performance Requirements" Article." 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculations. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of wind force and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Field quality -control test reports. D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fan Belts: One set for each belt -driven fan. 2. Filters: sets of filters for each unit. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ARI Compliance: 1. Comply with ARI 203/110 and ARI 303/110 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs. 2. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs. B. ASHRAE Compliance: 1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety. 2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air -Conditioning." D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995. 15732-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of RTUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Desiqn Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Carrier Corp. Any other manufacturer must be pre -approved by the Owner and from the following list: 1. AAON 2. Daikin Applied 3. Johnson Controls / York International 4. Lennox Industries Inc. 5. Trane 2.2 CASING General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double -wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory -painted finish, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs. 1. Exterior Casing Thickness: 0.052 inch (1.3 mm) thick. C. Inner Casing Fabrication Requirements: 1. Inside Casing: Galvanized steel, 0.034 inch (0.86 mm). 15732-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS D. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. 1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm). 3. Liner materials shall have air -stream surface coated with an erosion- and temperature - resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric. 4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. E. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of stainless -steel sheet, a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) deep, and complying with ASHRAE 62.1. 1. Double -Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal moisture tight. 2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple. 3. Pan -Top Surface Coating: Corrosion -resistant compound. F. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 2.3 FANS A. Belt -Driven Supply -Air Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single -speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the casing. Aluminum or painted -steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted -steel fan scrolls. B. Condenser -Coil Fan: Propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated motor. C. Fan Motor: Comply with requirements in Section 15058 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 2.4 COILS A. Supply -Air Refrigerant Coil: 1. Aluminum -plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing -type vertical distributor. 2. Polymer strip shall prevent all copper coil from contacting steel coil frame or condensate pan. 3. Coil Split: Interlaced. 4. Baked phenolic or Cathodic epoxy coating. 5. Condensate Drain Pan: Stainless steel formed with pitch and drain connections complying with ASHRAE 62.1. B. Outdoor -Air Refrigerant Coil: 1. plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing -type vertical distributor. 2. Polymer strip shall prevent all copper coil from contacting steel coil frame or condensate pan. 3. Baked phenolic or Cathodic epoxy coating. 15732-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS 2.5 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS A. Compressor: Hermetic, reciprocating or Semihermetic, reciprocating or Hermetic, scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and high -temperature protection, internal pressure relief[, and crankcase heater. B. Refrigeration Specialties: 1. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A. 2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. 3. Refrigerant filter/dryer. 4. Manual -reset high-pressure safety switch. 5. Automatic -reset low-pressure safety switch. 6. Minimum off -time relay. 7. Automatic -reset compressor motor thermal overload. 8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines. 9. Low -ambient kit high-pressure sensor. 10. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable magnetic coil, thermostatic expansion valves with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator. 2.6 AIR FILTRATION A. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 1. Pleated: Minimum 90 percent arrestance, and MERV 8. 2.7 DAMPERS A. Outdoor -Air Damper: Linked damper blades, for 0 to 25 percent outdoor air, with motorized damper filter. B. Outdoor- and Return -Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel- or opposed -blade galvanized -steel dampers mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized -steel operating rod in reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously. 1. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position. 2. Relief -Air Damper: Gravity actuated or motorized, as required by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, with bird screen and hood. 2.8 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTION A. Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit -mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control -circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection. 15732-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS 2.9 CONTROLS A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Section 15900 'Building Control System for HVAC". B. Basic Unit Controls: 1. Control -voltage transformer. 2. Wall -mounted thermostat or sensor with the following features: a. Heat -cool -off switch. b. Fan on -auto switch. c. Fan -speed switch. d. Manual or Automatic changeover. e. Adjustable deadband. f. Exposed set point. g. Exposed indication. h. Degree F indication. i. Unoccupied -period -override push button. j. Data entry and access port to input temperature set points, occupied and unoccupied periods, and output room temperature and humidity, supply -air temperature, operating mode, and status. 3. Mounted Annunciator Panel for Each Unit: a. Lights to indicate power on, cooling, heating, fan running, filter dirty, and unit alarm or failure. b. DDC controller or programmable timer and interface with HVAC instrumentation and control system. c. Digital display of outdoor -air temperature, supply -air temperature, return -air temperature, economizer damper position, indoor -air quality, and control parameters. C. Electronic or DDC Controller: 1. Controller shall have volatile -memory backup. 2. Safety Control Operation: a. Smoke Detectors: Stop fan and close outdoor -air damper if smoke is detected. Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel. b. Firestats: Stop fan and close outdoor -air damper if air greater than 130 deg F (54 deg C) enters unit. Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel. c. Fire Alarm Control Panel Interface: Provide control interface to coordinate with operating sequence described in Section 13852 "Digital, Addressable Fire -Alarm System". d. Low -Discharge Temperature: Stop fan and close outdoor -air damper if supply air temperature is less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). e. Defrost Control for Condenser Coil: Pressure differential switch to initiate defrost sequence. 15732-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS 3. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on seven-day clock with a minimum of four programmable periods per day. 4. Supply Fan Operation: a. Occupied Periods: Run fan continuously. b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle fan to maintain setback temperature. 5. Refrigerant Circuit Operation: a. Occupied Periods: Cycle or stage compressors, and operate hot -gas bypass to match compressor output to cooling load to maintain discharge temperature. b. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle compressors and condenser fans for heating to maintain setback temperature. 6. Fixed Minimum Outdoor -Air Damper Operation: a. Occupied Periods: Open to 7.5 percent. b. Unoccupied Periods: Close the outdoor -air damper. Interface Requirements for HVAC Instrumentation and Control System: 1. Interface relay for scheduled operation. 2. Interface relay to provide indication of fault at the central workstation and diagnostic code storage. 3. Provide BACnet or LonWorks compatible interface for central HVAC control workstation for the following: a. Adjusting set points. b. Monitoring supply fan start, stop, and operation. c. Inquiring data to include outdoor -air damper position, supply- and room -air temperature and humidity. d. Monitoring occupied and unoccupied operations. e. Monitoring constant and variable motor loads. f. Monitoring variable -frequency drive operation. g. Monitoring cooling load. h. Monitoring air -distribution static pressure and ventilation air volume. 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Duplex, 115-V, ground -fault -interrupter outlet with 15-A overcurrent protection. Include transformer if required. Low -ambient kit using staged damper on or variable -speed condenser fans for operation down to 35 deg F (1.7 deg C) C. Filter differential pressure switch with sensor tubing on either side of filter. Set for final filter pressure loss. D. Coil guards of painted, galvanized -steel wire. 15732-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS E. Hail guards of galvanized steel, painted to match casing. 2.11 ROOF CURBS A. Roof curbs with vibration isolators." B. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion -protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factory - installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards. 1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II. b. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of curb. a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet. c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air -stream surface coated with a temperature -resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service air velocity. d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. C. Curb Height: 14 inches (355 mm). 2.12 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS — SEE SCHEDULE ON PLANS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs. B. Examine roughing -in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before equipment installation. C. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 15732-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS 3.2 INSTALLATION Equipment Mounting: 1. Install RTUs on cast -in -place concrete equipment bases. 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 15072 'Vibration Controls for HVAC." B. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to [NRCA's "Low -Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts."] or [ARI Guideline B.] Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Section 07720 "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural curbs. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction. Secure RTUs to structural support with anchor bolts. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain or area drain. B. Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance. C. Duct installation requirements are specified in other HVAC Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb. 2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under entire roof curb. 3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 15820 "Duct Accessories." 4. Install return -air duct continuously through roof structure. 5. Install normal -weight, 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), compressive strength (28-day) concrete mix inside roof curb, 4 inches (100 mm) thick. Concrete, formwork, and reinforcement are specified with concrete. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Report results in writing. 15732-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS C. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie -down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service. B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following: 1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. 2. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber. 3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans. 4. Inspect internal insulation. 5. Verify that labels are clearly visible. 6. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 7. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 8. Verify that filters are installed. 9. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris. 10. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris. 11. Remove packing from vibration isolators. 12. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings. 13. Inspect fan -wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. 14. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 15. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Start refrigeration system. b. Do not operate below recommended low -ambient temperature. c. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report. 16. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. 17. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. 18. Calibrate thermostats. 19. Adjust and inspect high -temperature limits. 20. Inspect outdoor -air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return -air dampers. 21. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following when ambient is a minimum of 15 deg F (8 deg C) above return -air temperature: a. Coil leaving -air, dry- and wet -bulb temperatures. b. Coil entering -air, dry- and wet -bulb temperatures. c. Outdoor -air, dry-bulb temperature. d. Outdoor -air -coil, discharge -air, dry-bulb temperature. 15732-11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS 22. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown. 23. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve. a. Supply -air volume. b. Return -air volume. c. Relief -air volume. d. Outdoor -air intake volume. 24. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following: a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot -gas pressures. b. Short circuiting of air through condenser coil or from condenser fans to outdoor -air intake. 25. Verify operation of remote panel including pilot -light operation and failure modes. Inspect the following: a. Low -temperature safety operation. b. Filter high-pressure differential alarm. c. Smoke and firestat alarms. 26. After startup and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace existing filters with new filters. 3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site during other -than -normal occupancy hours for this purpose. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and air - distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain RTUs. END OF SECTION 15732 15732-12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS SECTION 15738 SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A . This Section includes split -system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate evaporator -fan and compressor -condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics. B . Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C . Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory -applied color finishes. D . Field quality -control test reports. E . Operation and Maintenance Data: For split -system air-conditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. F . Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split -system units and are based on the specific system indicated. 15738-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS B . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C . ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." D . ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air -Conditioning." 1.5 COORDINATION 1.6 A . Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." B . Coordinate size, location, and connection details with supports, and roof penetrations. WARRANTY A. Cast anchor -bolt inserts specified in Division 03 roof curbs, equipment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of split -system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Filters: Three sheets of filters for each unit. 2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Carrier Corp. Any other manufacturer must be pre -approved by the Owner and from the following list: 15738-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 1. Daikin Applied 2. Johnson Controls / York International Corp. 3. Lennox Industries Inc. 4. Trane 2.2 CONCEALED EVAPORATOR -FAN COMPONENTS A . Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and insulation on back of panel. 1. Insulation: Faced, glass -fiber duct liner. 2. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated and complying with ASHRAE 62.1-2007. 3. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007. B . Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with thermal -expansion valve. C . Electric Coil: Helical, nickel -chrome, resistance -wire heating elements with refractory ceramic support bushings; automatic -reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual -reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one- time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection. D . Fan: Forward -curved, double -width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to motor, where shown. E . Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1 Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. F . Disposable Filters: See Mechanical Schedules. G . Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection. 2.3 CEILING -MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR -FAN COMPONENTS A . Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection. 1. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007. 2. Drain Pan and Drain Connection: Comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2007. 15738-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS B . Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with thermal -expansion valve. C . Electric Coil: Helical, nickel -chrome, resistance -wire heating elements with refractory ceramic support bushings; automatic -reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual -reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one- time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection. D . Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal fan and integral condensate pump. E . Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. F . Filters: See Mechanical Schedules 2.4 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR -CONDENSER COMPONENTS A . Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. B . Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current -sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor. 1. Compressor Type: Reciprocating or Scroll. 2. Two -speed compressor motor with manual -reset high-pressure switch and automatic -reset low-pressure switch. 3. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A. C . Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler. D . Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low -temperature air cut-off thermostat. E . Fan: Aluminum -propeller type, directly connected to motor. F . Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal -overload protection. 15738-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS G . Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F. H . Mounting Base: Polyethylene. Minimum Energy Efficiency: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007, "Energy Standard for Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings." 2.5 ACCESSORIES A . Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 15 Section "Building Control System for HVAC." B . Ductless mini split units shall be controlled by the low voltage thermostat with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan. 1. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan, with the following features 2. Compressor time delay. 3. 24-hour time control of system stop and start. 4. Liquid -crystal display indicating temperature, set -point temperature, time setting, operating mode, and fan speed. 5. Fan -speed selection, including auto setting. C . Automatic -reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor. D . Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft -annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory -insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends. 1. Minimum Insulation Thickness: 1 inch thick. E . Low -ambient kit: low ambient kit for unit operation down to 10°F. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A . Install units level and plumb. B . Install evaporator -fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure. 15738-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS C . Install ground -mounting, compressor -condenser components on 4-inch- thick, reinforced concrete base; 4 inches larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base. D . Install compressor -condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static deflection of 1 inch. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Vibration Controls for HVAC." E . Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to components quick -connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A . Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B . Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance. C . Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to split -system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Division 15 Section "Air Duct Accessories." D . Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems." E . Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B . Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no Teaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 15738-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS C . Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE A . Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. END OF SECTION 15738 15738-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL DUCTS SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A . Section Includes: 1. Single -wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Double -wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 3. Single -wall round and flat -oval ducts and fittings. 4. Double -wall round and flat -oval ducts and fittings. 5. Sheet metal materials. 6. Duct liner. 7. Sealants and gaskets. 8. Hangers and supports. B . Related Sections: 1. Division 15 Section 15950 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Division 15 Section 15820 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound - control devices, duct -mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A . Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. B Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 15815 - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL DUCTS C . Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. 3. Seismic -restraint devices. B . Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop -fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static -pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire -rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, and vibration isolation. C . Delegated -Design Submittal: 1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing 3. Underfloor supporting structure and building system components.. 4. Reinforcement details and spacing. 5. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. D . Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1 Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 15815 - 2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL DUCTS 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire -rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Perimeter moldings. E . Welding certificates. F . Field quality -control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. B . Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports. 3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. C . ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start -Up." D . ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1- 2007, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SINGLE -WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A . General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static -pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) 15815 - 3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL DUCTS Joints," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular Ducts," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D . Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct - support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.2 DOUBLE -WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A . Manufacturers: 1. McGill AirFlow LLC. 2. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. Rectangular Ducts: Fabricate ducts with indicated dimensions for the inner duct. C . Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static -pressure class unless otherwise indicated. D . Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular Ducts," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." F . Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous -glass liner complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." 15815-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL DUCTS 1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. 2. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without compressing insulation. 3. Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating. 4. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1. G . Inner Duct: Minimum 0.028-inch perforated galvanized sheet steel having 3/32-inch- diameter perforations, with overall open area of 23 percent. H . Formed -on Transverse Joints (Flanges): Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Traverse (Girth) Joints," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular Ducts," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.3 SINGLE -WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A . General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static -pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: a. McGill AirFlow LLC. b. Lindab Inc. c. SEMCO Incorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc. B . Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C . Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 15815-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL DUCTS D . Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A . General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B . Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C . Carbon -Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts. D . Factory- or Shop -Applied Antimicrobial Coating: Apply to the surface of sheet metal that will form the interior surface of the duct. An untreated clear coating shall be applied to the exterior surface. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems. Coating containing the antimicrobial compound shall have a hardness of 2H, minimum, when tested according to ASTM D 3363. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame -spread index of 25 and maximum smoke -developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. Shop -Applied Coating Color: Black. Antimicrobial coating on sheet metal is not required for duct containing liner treated with antimicrobial coating. E . Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. Where black- and galvanized -steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. F . Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 15815 - 6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL DUCTS 2.5 DUCT LINER A . Fibrous -Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." 1. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. 2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: a. Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. b. Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. 3. Antimicrobial Erosion -Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion -resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems. 4. Solvent or Water -Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. a. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 70 South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168, Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits list. B . Insulation Pins and Washers: 1. Cupped -Head, Capacitor -Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc -coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor -discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1- 1/2-inch galvanized carbon -steel washer. 2. Insulation -Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016- inch- thick stainless steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. C . Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation." 1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited. 2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing. 3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. 4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted -edge overlapping. 15815 - 7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL DUCTS 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary. 6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm. 7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally. 8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations: a. Fan discharges. b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than 2500 fpm or where indicated. 9. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation. a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent. 10. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire -damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. 2.6 SEALANT AND GASKETS A . General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface -burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame -spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke -developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. Two -Part Tape Sealing System: 1 Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. 2. Tape Width: 3 inches . 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static -Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. 15815 - 8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL DUCTS C . Water -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static -Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. D . Solvent -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Base: Synthetic rubber resin. 3. Solvent: Toluene and heptane. 4. Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent. 5. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60. 6. Water resistant. 7. Mold and mildew resistant. 8. Maximum Static -Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or negative. 9. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 10. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. E . Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1. General: Single -component, acid -curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. F . Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. G . Round Duct Joint 0-Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static -pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM 0-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double -lipped, EPDM 0-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory - fabricated couplings and fitting spigots. 15815-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL DUCTS 2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium -plated steel rods and nuts. B Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all -thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc -chromate primer after installation. C . Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D . Steel Cables for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. E . Steel Cables for Stainless -Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492. F . Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium -plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic -locking and clamping device. G . Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. H . Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized -steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless -Steel Ducts: Stainless -steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A . Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air -handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C . Install round and flat -oval ducts in maximum practical lengths. 15815 - 10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL DUCTS D . Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E . Install factory- or shop -fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. F . Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G . Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H . Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. J . Where ducts pass through non -fire -rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. K . Where ducts pass through fire -rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section 15820 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. L . Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A . Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B . Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system. C . Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D . Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. 15815 - 11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL DUCTS E Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. 3.3 DUCT SEALING A . Seal ducts for duct static -pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." B . Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible": 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Outdoor, Supply -Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Unconditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class B. 5. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 6. Conditioned Space, Supply -Air and Return Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2- Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class C. 7. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A . Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports." B . Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder -actuated fasteners, or structural - steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder -actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for standard -weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight -aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. C . Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1. "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. 15815 - 12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL DUCTS D . Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E . Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. F . Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull- out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported Toads and building materials where used. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A . Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 15 Section 15820 "Air Duct Accessories." B . Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.6 PAINTING A . Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized -steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Perform tests and inspections. B . Leakage Tests: 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test. 2. Test the following systems: a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 3-Inch wg (vehicle exhaust ductwork): Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. 3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. 4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. 5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If static -pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. 15815 - 13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL DUCTS 6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. C . Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D . Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.8 DUCT CLEANING A . Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. B . Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static - pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Division 15 Section 15820 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. C . Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles. 2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. D . Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air -handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return -air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply -air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. 15815 - 14 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL DUCTS E . Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum -collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 4. Clean fibrous -glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous -glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth. 5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. 6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash -down procedures. 7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA -registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris. 3.9 START UP A . Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section 'Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE A . Supply Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units and Terminal Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg . b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12. 2. Ducts Connected to Constant -Volume Air -Handling Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg . b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C (Class A for supply duct located outdoors. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 3. 15815 - 15 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL DUCTS B . Return Ducts: Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, and Terminal Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg . b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 12. 2. Ducts Connected to Air -Handling Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg . b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 3. C . Exhaust Ducts: Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air: a. Pressure Class: Negative 1-inch wg . b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. D . Intermediate Reinforcement: 1. Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel . E . Liner: Liner shall be provided on the first 15 feet of supply air and return air ducts of air handling units and the first 10 feet of the exhaust duct at Administration Area. 1. Supply Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1.5 inch thick. 2. Return Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick. 3. Exhaust Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick. 4. Supply Fan Plenums: Fibrous glass, Type II, 1 inch thick. 5. Return- and Exhaust -Fan Plenums: Fibrous glass, Type II, 1 inch thick. 6. Transfer Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick. F . Double -Wall Duct Interstitial Insulation (make-up air duct outside of building): 1. Supply Air Ducts: 1 inch thick. G . Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius -to -diameter ratio. 15815 - 16 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL DUCTS 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius -to -diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius -to -diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius -to -diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius -to -diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius -to -diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius -to -diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius -to -Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with Tess than 90- degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius -to -diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius -to -diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius -to -diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow. 4) Radius -to Diameter Ratio: 1.5. b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam. 15815 - 17 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 METAL DUCTS H Branch Configuration: Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral. END OF SECTION 15815 15815 - 18 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES SECTION 15820 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A . Section Includes: 1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Barometric relief dampers. 3. Manual volume dampers. 4. Control dampers. 5. Fire dampers. 6. Flange connectors. 7. Turning vanes. 8. Remote damper operators. 9. Duct -mounted access doors. 10. Flexible connectors. 11. Flexible ducts. 12. Duct accessory hardware. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Control damper installations. d. Fire -damper, smoke -damper, combination fire- and smoke -damper, including sleeves; and duct -mounted access doors and remote damper operators. e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 15820 - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES B . Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling - mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved. C . Source quality -control reports. D . Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B . Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A . Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A . Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. Exposed -Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. C . Stainless -Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish for concealed ducts and No. 2 finish for exposed ducts. D . Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts. 15820 - 2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES E . Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6. F . Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless - steel ducts. G . Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or Tess; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS A . Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Ruskin Company. 3. Nailor Industries Inc. 4. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 5. Vent Products Company, Inc. 6. SEMCO Incorporated. 7. Duro Dyne Inc. B . Description: Gravity balanced. C . Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm. D . Maximum System Pressure: 1-inch wg. E . Frame: 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange. F . Blades: Multiple single -piece blades, center -pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025- inch- thick, roll -formed aluminum with sealed edges. G . Blade Action: Parallel. H . Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked. Blade Axles: 1. Material: Nonferrous metal. 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch. J . Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. 15820 - 3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES K . Return Spring: Adjustable tension. L . Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings. M . Accessories: 1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2. Counterweights and spring -assist kits for vertical airflow installations. 3. Electric actuators. 4. Chain pulls. 5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve. a. Sleeve Thickness: 20-gage minimum. b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum. 6. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted. 7. Screen Material: Galvanized steel. 8. Screen Type: Bird. 9. 90-degree stops. 2.3 BAROMETRIC RELIEF DAMPERS A . Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Ruskin Company. 3. Nailor Industries Inc. 4. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 5. Vent Products Company, Inc. 6. SEMCO Incorporated. 7. Duro Dyne Inc. B . Suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting. C . Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm. D . Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg. E . Frame: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange. F . Blades: 1. Multiple, 0.025-inch- thick, roll -formed aluminum. 2. Maximum Width: 6 inches. 3. Action: Parallel. 4. Balance: Gravity. 15820 - 4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 5. Eccentrically pivoted. G . Blade Seals: Neoprene. H . Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. Tie Bars and Brackets: 1. Material: Galvanized steel. 2. Rattle free with 90-degree stop. J . Return Spring: Adjustable tension. K . Bearings: Synthetic. L . Accessories: 1. Flange on intake. 2. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressures. 2.4 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A . Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Ruskin Company. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. Nailor Industries Inc. d. METALAIRE, Inc. e. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. f. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. g. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: a. Hat -shaped, galvanized -steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed -blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized -steel, 0.064 inch thick. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 15820 - 5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 7. Bearings: a. Oil -impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. B Low -Leakage, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Ruskin Company. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. Nailor Industries Inc. d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. e. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. f. METALAIRE, Inc. g. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Low -leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: a. Hat shaped. b. Galvanized -steel channels, 0.064 inch thick. c. Mitered and welded corners. d. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed -blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized, roll -formed steel, 0.064 inch thick. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: a. Molded synthetic. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Blade Seals: Neoprene. 9. Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel. 10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. 11. Accessories: a. Include locking device to hold single -blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. C . Jackshaft: 1. Size: 1-inch diameter. 2. Material: Galvanized -steel pipe rotating within pipe -bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple -damper assemblies. 15820 - 6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple -damper assembly. D Damper Hardware: 1. Zinc -plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc - plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. 2. Include center hole to suit damper operating -rod size. 3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 2.5 CONTROL DAMPERS A . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Ruskin Company. 3. McGill AirFlow LLC. 4. Nailor Industries Inc. 5. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 6. Young Regulator Company. 7. METALAIRE, Inc. 8. Vent Products Company, Inc. 9. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 10. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. 11. Duro Dyne Inc. B . Low -leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage. C . Frames: 1. Hat shaped. 2. Galvanized -steel channels, 0.064 inch thick. 3. Mitered and welded corners. D . Blades: 1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches. 2. Opposed -blade design. 3. Galvanized steel. 4. 0.064 inch thick. 5. Blade Edging: Closed -cell neoprene edging. 6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals. E . Blade Axles: 1/2-inch- diameter; galvanized steel; blade -linkage hardware of zinc - plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings. 15820 - 7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. F Bearings: 1. Oil -impregnated bronze. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 2.6 FIRE DAMPERS Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Ruskin Company. 3. McGill AirFlow LLC. 4. Nailor Industries Inc. 5. METALAIRE, Inc. 6. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 7. Vent Products Company, Inc. 8. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B . Type: Static and dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL. C . Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm velocity. D . Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours. E . Frame: Curtain type with blades inside airstream; fabricated with roll -formed, 0.034- inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners. F . Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field -installed, galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application. 2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper -frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements. G . Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated. 15820 - 8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES H . Blades: Roll -formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized -steel blade connectors. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless -steel closure spring. J . Heat -Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links. 2.7 TURNING VANES A . Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. METALAIRE, Inc. 4. SEMCO Incorporated. 5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B . Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil -shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous -glass fill. C . General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, 'Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, 'Vane Support in Elbows." D . Vane Construction: Double wall. 2.8 DUCT -MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A . Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. Nailor Industries Inc. 4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 5. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 6. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. 7. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 15820 - 9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES B . Duct -Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct." 1. Door: a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend -over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches. d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. C . Pressure Relief Access Door: 1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Door: Double wall with insulation fill with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure class. 3. Operation: Open outward for positive -pressure ducts and inward for negative -pressure ducts. 4. Factory set at 10-inch wg. 5. Doors close when pressures are within set -point range. 6. Hinge: Continuous piano. 7. Latches: Cam. 8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber. 9. Insulation Fill: 1-inch- thick, fibrous -glass or polystyrene -foam board. 2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B . Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. 15820 - 10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES C . Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. D . Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. E . Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 Ibf/inch in the warp and 360 Ibf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. F . Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Minimum Tensile Strength: 500 Ibf/inch in the warp and 440 Ibf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F. G . Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle -iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil -resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at start and stop. 2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A . Manufacturers: 1. McGill AirFlow LLC. 2. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. 15820 - 11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES B . Noninsulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring -steel wire. 1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F. C Noninsulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helically wound, spring -steel wire. 1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F. D . Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring -steel wire; fibrous -glass insulation; polyethylene vapor -barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F. 4. Insulation R-Value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004. E . Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound, spring -steel wire; fibrous -glass insulation; polyethylene vapor -barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F. 4. Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004. 5. Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004. F . Flexible Duct Connectors: Clamps: Stainless -steel band with cadmium -plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm -gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size. Non -Clamp Connectors: Adhesive plus sheet metal screws. 2.11 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct -insulation thickness. B . Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. 15820 - 12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A . Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts. B . Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories in galvanized -steel and fibrous -glass ducts, stainless -steel accessories in stainless -steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C . Install backdraft and control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated. D . Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts. E . Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. F . Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. G . Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing. H . Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. At outdoor -air intakes and mixed -air plenums. 2. At drain pans and seals. 3. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment. 4. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers. 5. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing. 6. Upstream from turning vanes. 7. Control devices requiring inspection. 8. Elsewhere as indicated. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. 15820 - 13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES J . Access Door Sizes: 1. One -Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two -Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. K . Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door. L Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. M . For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. N . Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. O . Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. P . Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws. Q . Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. R . Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and stop of fans. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat -response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. 5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and damper. END OF SECTION 15820 15820 - 14 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 15 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 15838 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A . Section Includes: 1. Centrifugal roof ventilators. 2. Ceiling -mounted ventilators. 3. Propeller fans. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A . Project Altitude: Base fan -performance ratings on actual Project site elevations. B . Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound -power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Roof curbs. 7. Fan speed controllers. B . Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 15838 - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances. method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C . Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved: 1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations. 2. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Ceiling -mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. D . Field quality -control reports. E Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B . AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. C . UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762. 1.6 COORDINATION A . Coordinate size and location of structural -steel support members. B . Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. C . Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 15838 - 2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 1. Belts: One set for each belt -driven unit. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS A . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acme Engineering & Manufacturing Corporation. 2. Aerovent; a division of Twin City Fan Companies, Ltd. 3. American Coolair Corporation. 4. Broan-NuTone LLC. 5. Broan-NuTone LLC; NuTone Inc. 6. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 7. Loren Cook Company. 8. PennBarry. 9. W.W. Grainger, Inc.; Dayton Products. B . Housing: Removable, spun -aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle or galvanized steel, mushroom -domed top; square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone. 1 Hinged Subbase: Galvanized -steel hinged arrangement permitting service and maintenance. C . Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward -inclined blades. D . Belt Drives: 1. Resiliently mounted to housing. 2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self -aligning ball bearings. 4. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable -pitch motor pulley. 5. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream. E Accessories: 1. Variable -Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent where shown. 2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal -overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel -blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close when fan stops. 15838 - 3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 5. Motorized Dampers: Parallel -blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator; wired to close when fan stops. F . Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. 1. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange. 2. Overall Height: 16 inches. 3. Sound Curb: Curb with sound -absorbing insulation. 4. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope. 5. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel. 2.2 CEILING -MOUNTED VENTILATORS A . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Coolair Corporation. 2. Broan-NuTone LLC. 3. Broan-NuTone LLC; NuTone Inc. 4. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 5. Loren Cook Company. 6. PennBarry. 7. W.W. Grainger, Inc.; Dayton Products. B Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation. C . Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service. Grille: Painted aluminum, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing. E . Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in. Accessories: 1. Variable -Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent where shown. 2. Manual Starter Switch: Single -pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light. 3. Time -Delay Switch: Assembly with single -pole rocker switch, timer, and cover plate. 4. Isolation: Rubber -in -shear vibration isolators. 15838 - 4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 5. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings. 2.3 PROPELLER FANS A Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acme Engineering & Manufacturing Corporation. 2. American Coolair Corporation. 3. Big Ass Fan Company 4. Broan-NuTone LLC; NuTone Inc. 5. Greenheck FanCorporation 6. King Company; part of Mestek, Inc. 7. Loren Cook Company. 8. PennBarry. 9. W.W. Grainger, Inc.; Dayton Products. B . Housing: Galvanized -steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked -enamel finish coat applied after assembly. C . Steel Fan Wheels: Formed -steel blades riveted to heavy -gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron hub. D . Fan Wheel: Replaceable, cast -aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast -aluminum hub; factory set pitch angle of blades. E . Fan Drive: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing. F . Fan Drive: 1. Resiliently mounted to housing. 2. Statically and dynamically balanced. 3. Selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 4. Extend grease fitting to accessible location outside of unit. 5. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.4. 6. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 7. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self -aligning ball bearings. a. Ball -Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L,o of 100,000 hours. 8. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. 9. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. 15838 - 5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 10. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. 11. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet. G Accessories: 1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame; interlocked blades with nylon bearings. 2. Motor -Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications, removable for maintenance. 3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size. 4. Variable -Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent where shown. 5. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal -overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 2.4 MOTORS A . Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 15 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 15 Sections. B . Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A . Certify sound -power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. B . Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. 15838 - 6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A . Install power ventilators level and plumb. B . Support units using spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration - control devices are specified in Division 15 Section 'Vibration Controls for HVAC." 1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete base. C . Secure roof -mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium -plated hardware. D . Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps. E . Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration -control devices are specified in Division 15 Section 'Vibration Controls for HVAC." F Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. G . Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Identification for HVAC Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.2 CONNECTIONS A . Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section 15820 "Air Duct Accessories." B . Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. C . Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" D . Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 15838 - 7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A . Perform tests and inspections. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B . Tests and Inspections: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal -overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Disable automatic temperature -control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature -control operators. 11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. C . Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D . Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 ADJUSTING A . Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B . Adjust belt tension. C . Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting. and balancing procedures. 15838 - 8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS D . Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. E . Lubricate bearings. END OF SECTION 15838 15838 - 9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR TERMINAL UNITS SECTION 15840 AIR TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fan -powered air terminal units. 2. Shutoff, single -duct air terminal units. 3. Diffuser -type air terminal units. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following products, including rated capacities, furnished specialties, sound -power ratings, and accessories. 1. Air terminal units. 2. Liners and adhesives. 3. Sealants and gaskets. B. Shop Drawings: For air terminal units. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 3. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: 1. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. 2. Design Calculations: Calculations for selecting hangers and supports. 15840 - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustic tile. 3. Ceiling -mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. B. Field quality -control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01350 "Submittals" include the following: 1. Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes. 2. Instructions for adjusting software set points. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fan -Powered -Unit Filters: Furnish one spare filter(s) for each filter installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start -Up." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" 15840 - 2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.3 PARALLEL FAN -POWERED AIR TERMINAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Carrier Corp. or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Anemostat Products; a Mestek Company. 2. Carnes. 3. Environmental Technologies, Inc. 4. Krueger. 5. METALAIRE, Inc. 6. Nailor Industries Inc. 7. Price Industries. 8. Titus. 9. Trane; a business of American Standard Companies. 10. Tuttle & Bailey. C. Configuration: Volume -damper assembly and fan in parallel arrangement inside unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud. D. Casing: 0.034-inch (0.85-mm) steel or 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) aluminum, single wall. 1. Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick, coated, fibrous -glass duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071, and having a maximum flame -spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke -developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84. a. Cover liner with nonporous foil and perforated metal. 2. Air Inlets: Round stub connections or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment. 3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections. 4. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket and quarter -turn latches. 5. Fan: Forward -curved centrifugal, located at plenum air inlet. 6. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. E. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with flow -sensing ring and peripheral gasket and self- lubricating bearings. 1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg (750-Pa) inlet static pressure. 2. Damper Position: Normally open or closed. 15840 - 3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR TERMINAL UNITS Velocity Sensors: Multipoint array with velocity sensors in cold- and hot -deck air inlets and air outlets. G. Motor: 1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 15058 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 2. Type: Electronically commutated motor. 3. Fan -Motor Assembly Isolation: Rubber isolators. 4. Enclosure: Open dripproof Totally enclosed, fan cooled or Totally enclosed, air over. 5. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron Cast aluminum or Rolled steel. 6. Motor Bearings: 7. Unusual Service Conditions: a. Ambient Temperature: 60 deg F. b. Altitude: 50 feet above sea level. c. High humidity. 8. Efficiency: Premium efficient. a. Speed Control: Infinitely adjustable with pneumatic -electric and electronic controls. 9. Electrical Characteristics: See Schedules on Mechanical Plans H. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1 and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 1. Material: Pleated cotton -polyester media having 90 percent arrestance and 7 MERV. Electric -Resistance Heating Coils: Nickel -chromium heating wire, free of expansion noise and hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized -steel housing; with primary automatic, and secondary manual, reset thermal cutouts. Terminate elements in stainless -steel, machine - staked terminals secured with stainless -steel hardware. 1. Location: Terminal Outlet. 2. Stage(s): 1, 2, or 3. 3. Access door interlocked disconnect switch. 4. Downstream air temperature sensor with local connection to override discharge -air temperature to not exceed a maximum temperature set point (adjustable.) 5. Nickel chrome 80/20 heating elements. 6. Airflow switch for proof of airflow. 7. Fan interlock contacts. 8. Fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection (for coils more than 48 A). 9. Mercury contactors. 10. Pneumatic -electric switches and relays. 11. Magnetic contactor for each step of control (for three-phase coils). 15840 - 4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR TERMINAL UNITS J. Factory -Mounted and -Wired Controls: Electrical components mounted in control box with removable cover. Incorporate single -point electrical connection to power source. 1. Control Transformer: Factory mounted for control voltage on electric and electronic control units with terminal strip in control box for field wiring of thermostat and power source. 2. Wiring Terminations: Fan and controls to terminal strip. Terminal lugs to match quantities, sizes, and materials of branch -circuit conductors. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box that is sized according to NFPA 70. 3. Disconnect Switch: Factory -mounted, fuse type. K. Control Panel Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1, with access panel sealed from airflow and mounted on side of unit. L. Electric Controls: 24-V damper actuator with wall -mounted electric thermostat and appropriate mounting hardware. M. Electronic Controls: Bidirectional damper operator and microprocessor -based controller with integral airflow transducer and room sensor. Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls specified in Section 15900 "Building Control System for HVAC" and shall have the following features: 1. Occupied and unoccupied operating mode. 2. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points. 3. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal. 4. Communication with temperature -control system specified in Section 15900 "Building Control System for HVAC". N. Control Sequence: 1. Occupied (Primary Airflow On): a. Operate as throttling control for cooling. b. As cooling requirement decreases, control valve throttles toward minimum airflow. c. As heating requirement increases, fan energizes to draw in warm plenum air and electric heat is energized in steps. 2. Unoccupied (Primary Airflow Off): a. When pressure at primary inlet is zero or less, fan is de -energized. b. As heating requirement increases, fan energizes to draw in warm plenum air and electric heat is energized in steps. 2.4 SHUTOFF, SINGLE -DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CarrieCorp or comparable product by one of the following: 15840 - 5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 1. Anemostat Products; a Mestek Company. 2. Carnes. 3. Environmental Technologies, Inc. 4. Krueger. 5. METALAIRE, Inc. 6. Nailor Industries Inc. 7. Phoenix Controls Corporation. 8. Price Industries. 9. Titus. 10. Trane; a business of American Standard Companies. 11. Trox USA Inc.; a subsidiary of the TROX GROUP. 12. Tuttle & Bailey. 13. Warren Technology. C. Configuration: Volume -damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud. D. Casing: 0.034-inch (0.85-mm) steel or 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) aluminum, single wall. 1. Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick, coated, fibrous -glass duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071, and having a maximum flame -spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke -developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84. a. Cover liner with nonporous foil and perforated metal. 2. Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick, polyurethane foam insulation complying with UL 181 erosion requirements, and having a maximum flame - spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke -developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84. 3. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment. 4. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections. 5. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket. 6. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. Regulator Assembly: System -air -powered bellows section incorporating polypropylene bellows for volume regulation and thermostatic control. Bellows shall operate at temperatures from 0 to 140 deg F (minus 18 to plus 60 deg C), shall be impervious to moisture and fungus, shall be suitable for 10-inch wg (2500-Pa) static pressure, and shall be factory tested for leaks. F Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings. 1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg (750-Pa). 2. Damper Position: Normally open or closed. 15840 - 6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR TERMINAL UNITS G. Electric -Resistance Heating Coils: Nickel -chromium heating wire, free of expansion noise and hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized -steel housing; with primary automatic, and secondary manual, reset thermal cutouts. Terminate elements in stainless -steel, machine - staked terminals secured with stainless -steel hardware. 1. Access door interlocked disconnect switch. 2. Downstream air temperature sensor with local connection to override discharge -air temperature to not exceed a maximum temperature set point (adjustable.) 3. Nickel chrome 80/20 heating elements. 4. Airflow switch for proof of airflow. 5. Fan interlock contacts. 6. Fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection (for coils more than 48 A). 7. Mercury contactors. 8. Pneumatic -electric switches and relays. 9. Magnetic contactor for each step of control (for three-phase coils). H. Electric Controls: Damper actuator and thermostat. 1. Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed. 2. Thermostat: Wall -mounted electronic type with clock display, temperature display in Fahrenheit and Celsius, and space temperature set point. Electronic Controls: Bidirectional damper operator and microprocessor -based thermostat with integral airflow transducer and room sensor. Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls specified in Section 15900 "Building Control System for HVAC" and shall have the following features: 1. Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed. 2. Velocity Controller: Factory calibrated and field adjustable to minimum and maximum air volumes; shall maintain constant airflow dictated by thermostat within 5 percent of set point while compensating for inlet static -pressure variations up to 4-inch wg (1000 Pa); and shall have a multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet. 3. Thermostat: Wall -mounted electronic type with temperature set -point display in Fahrenheit and Celsius. J. Direct Digital Controls: Bidirectional damper operators and microprocessor -based controller and room sensor. Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls specified in Section 15900 "Building Control System for HVAC" and shall have the following features: 1. Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed. 2. Terminal Unit Controller: Pressure -independent, variable -air -volume controller with electronic airflow transducer with multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet, factory calibrated to minimum and maximum air volumes, and having the following features: a. Occupied and unoccupied operating mode. b. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points. c. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal. d. Communication with temperature -control system specified in Section 15900 " Building Control System for HVAC ". 15840 - 7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 3. Room Sensor: Wall mounted with temperature set -point adjustment and access for connection of portable operator terminal. K. Control Sequence: 1. Suitable for operation with duct pressures between 0.25- and 3.0-inch wg (60- and 750- Pa) inlet static pressure. 2. System -powered, wall -mounted thermostat. 2.5 DIFFUSER -TYPE AIR TERMINAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Acutherm. 2. Rickard Air Diffusion. 3. Warren Technology. C. Configuration: Volume -damper, diffuser, controller assembly wall -mounted thermostat. D. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings. 1. Damper Position: Normally open or closed. E. Diffuser: Galvanized steel with white baked -enamel finish. Electronic Controls: Bidirectional damper operator and microprocessor -based thermostat with integral airflow transducer and room sensor. Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls specified in Section 15900 " Building Control System for HVAC " and shall have the following features: 1. Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed. 2. Velocity Controller: Factory calibrated and field adjustable to minimum and maximum air volumes; shall maintain constant airflow dictated by thermostat within 5 percent of set point while compensating for inlet static -pressure variations up to 4-inch wg (1000 Pa); and shall have a multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet. 3. Thermostat: Wall -mounted electronic type with the following features: a. Proportional, plus integral control of room temperature. b. Temperature set -point display in Fahrenheit and Celsius. Integral thermally powered actuators control diffusion dampers based on duct and room temperature. 15840 - 8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium -plated steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all -thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc -chromate primer after installation. C. Steel Cables: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium -plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic -locking and clamping device. E. Air Terminal Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. F. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings; aluminum for units with aluminum casings. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880. 1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum factory -set airflows, and ARI certification seal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance. C. Install wall -mounted thermostats. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder -actuated fasteners, or structural -steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 15840 - 9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 2. Install powder -actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for standard -weight aggregate concretes and for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 4. Do not use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight -aggregate concretes and for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 5. Do not use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Install piping adjacent to air terminal unit to allow service and maintenance. B. Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Section 15815 "Metal Ducts." C. Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements in Section 15820 "Duct Accessories." 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum factory -set airflows. Comply with requirements in Section 15077 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 15840 - 10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no Teaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit manufacturer to achieve proper performance. 3. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible. 4. Verify that control connections are complete. 5. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible. 6. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units. END OF SECTION 15840 15840 - 11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES SECTION 15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A . Section Includes: 1 Round ceiling diffusers. 2. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers. 3. Louver face diffusers. 4. Drum louvers. 5. Adjustable bar registers and grilles. 6. Fixed face registers and grilles. B . Related Sections: 1. Division 15 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume -control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A . Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static -pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. B . Source quality -control reports. 15855 - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES: A . See Mechanical Schedules on Drawings 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. b. Carnes. c. Hart & Cooley Inc. d. METALAIRE, Inc. e. Nailor Industries Inc. f. Price Industries. g. Titus. h. Tuttle & Bailey. Krueger 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A . Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A . Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. B . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A . Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. B . Ceiling -Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. 15855 - 2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES For units installed in lay -in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C . Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.3 ADJUSTING A . After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 15855 15855 - 3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC SECTION 15900 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK A. This project shall be an extension to the Climatec City Wide BAS. No exceptions. 1. Contact Eddie Rodriguez — Erodriguez(a�climatec.com or 713-983-6500 B. General: The building control system (BCS) shall be comprised of a Network Server and/or System Network Controller(s) (SNC) and application/unitary controllers within the facility. The network server and/or SNC's shall connect to the owner's local or wide area network. Access to the system, either locally in the building, or remotely from a central site or sites, shall be accomplished through standard web browsers, via the Internet and/or local area network. Each SNC shall communicate to MS/TP resident BACnet DDC controllers provided under this section. C. THE CONTROLS SHALL BE BID TO THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR AND SHALL NOT BE BUNDLED WITH ANY EQUIPMENT PRICE. THE CONTROLS PRICE SHALL BE COMPLETELY SEPARATE FROM ANY EQUIPMENT PRICE. NO EXCEPTIONS. D. The BCS shall be a BACnet-compliant web -based system that is stand alone in all aspects and shall consist of a high-speed, peer -to -peer network of direct digital controls (DDC), an operator's workstation, the network server, SNC's, application controllers, and all input/output devices. All BCS controllers and workstations shall communicate using the protocols and network standards as defined by ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2010, BACnet or latest revision. Management level Ethernet network speeds shall be 1 Gbps minimum and DDC level MSTP network speeds shall be 76.8 Kbps minimum. E. The web server(s) shall gather data from the system and generate web pages accessible through a conventional web browser from all personal computers (PC's) connected to the network. System shall include any and all software and hardware to support at least 50 simultaneous users. Web -browser software shall be Microsoft Internet Explorer 9.0 as a minimum. F. Operators shall be able to view and configure systems through the standard web browser and all graphical/data representations shall appear identical, whether the user is on site or viewing via the Internet at a remote location. Standard operator functions such as control point manipulation, configuration and viewing of trends, schedules and alarms shall be performed through the standard web -browser. Each mechanical system and building floor plan shall be depicted on the operator workstation by point -and -click graphics. G. The system shall directly control HVAC equipment as specified in the sequences of operation. Furnish energy conservation features such as optimal start and stop, night setback, request -based logic, and demand level adjustment of set points as specified in the sequences or on the input/output (I/O) summary. 15900-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC H. The BCS supplier shall provide the following additional services as part of this specification: warranty and service during the warranty period; submittals, samples and record documentation; comprehensive commissioning and testing of the BCS with documentation; training services for the owner and BCS operators; coordination with other site contractors and suppliers; operator and technician training program. I. Products furnished under this specification but installed by other. 1. Mechanical devices installed under Division 15 by the mechanical contractor or other suppliers: temperature sensing thermowells; automatic control valves; pipe taps for flowmeters; water pressure sensors and switches; automatic control dampers not installed in air handling unit mixing boxes or louver schedules; damper actuators for variable air volume (VAV) terminal units; mounting cost of controller and actuator for VAV terminal units. 2. Electrical devices installed under Division 16 by the electrical contractor: a. 120 VAC power to controllers and control panels at locations indicated on the drawings. Review and verify that these locations are adequate for the proposed BCS. b. Interlock wiring to duct mounted smoke detector or fire alarm shutdown relays to HVAC equipment motor starters and variable frequency drives (VFD). J. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between all operator's terminals and peripheral devices (such as printers, etc.) supplied under this section. 1.2 WEB SOFTWARE OVERVIEW A. Dynamic Colored Floor plans: Dynamic colored floor plans that compare actual space conditions to setpoints shall be provided on all floorplan graphics displayed on the front-end. Floorplan enlargements shall also use the thermographs to display space conditions. Zones within the set point range shall appear transparent white. As the space gets warmer the zone color shall gradually modulate from transparent white to transparent red to identify a hot zone. As the space conditions get cooler the zone color shall gradually modulate from transparent white to transparent blue to identify a cold zone. Each zone shall indicate the current actual zone temperature within the zoneFrom the floorplan graphic the operator shall be able to click on any zone and go directly to the graphic for the piece of equipment controlling that zone. All dynamic floorplans shall be visible via web interface as well as on the LAN. The authorized system operator shall be able to change the zone or system identifier (or name) on the graphic and that change shall be distributed to other associated graphics and to the equipment controller. B. Imbedded Trend Logs: Provide trend Togs that automatically pop up when the operator mouse clicks on the point from the graphic. Provide imbedded trends for all dampers, control valves, temperature sensors, CO2 sensors, humidity sensors, airflows, static pressures, flow meters, VFD speeds, etc. The BCS contractor shall set up all trends for the owner. The embedded trend shall include a trend tool that allows the operator to modify the trend time scale and sample interval for up to 10 sample values. The trends shall be graphical on the computer screen but shall provide an output as an .xls/.csv, .pdf, HTML, oBIX or text file. The owner shall not be responsible for setting up trendlogs for those points on each equipment graphic. 15900-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC C. Custom User HTML applications: The BCS shall utilize HTML applications as an extra feature. At minimum provide 7 day forecast, weather radar, traffic map and hurricane tracker. All of these features shall be imbedded into the BCS system. D. Remote Support: The BCS shall provide a remote support feature allowing the owner and contractor to engage in a remote session where both parties are seeing the same computer screen. The owner and contractor shall be able to swap control of the computer allowing for trouble shooting and training purposes at the same time. E. Provided a web -based BCS platform; contractor shall provide an Open License software. Licenses that are not open are not acceptable. There shall be no per seat or per user licensing fee charged to the owner by the contractor. F. System shall use the BACnet protocol for communication to the operator workstation or web server and for communication between control modules. Schedules, set points, trends, and alarms shall be BACnet Objects. G. User access shall include 50 assigned operators that shall include five levels of access within the web system. Each operator log -in shall have an expiration date to allow for temporary access to the system. The operator's access description shall include his e-mail address and cell/phone numbers. The operator access can be limited from 5 minutes to permanent access. The user shall be limited to eight bad login attempts before being locked out of the system. H. The system operator shall be able to override the output signal to the valves, dampers, variable frequency drives, lighting outputs, etc. with the use of the PC mouse click on the device. The system override shall include a Hand -Off -Auto (HOA) capability. If the output is commanded to the hand position the operator shall designate an output value of 0-100% in 1 % increments. The hand override position shall be permanent or expire after an owner designated time period and revert to the auto position. The color -graphic shall indicate the device that has been overridden by a color change of the output value. I. For non -emergency in -warranty events the system operator may submit a Service Request directly from the floor plan or system graphic. The web interface shall include the BCS suppliers contact information including phone numbers and e-mail address. The service request will be logged into the BCS suppliers service department. A non -response by the assigned technician shall elevate the request to the next highest manager or supervisor until the system operator receives an response that their request has been received and is scheduled for a resolution. All requests for service shall be maintained in the customer's database for future reference. The service request capability may be extended after the expiration of the warranty as part of a service agreement. J. The web -based system shall be accessible from Tablet PC's or Smart Phones and provide the same functionality that is available from personal computers connected through the LAN or WAN to the system operator. The tablet PC's as a minimum shall include an Apple iPad and Google Android based tablet PC. Operation shall include touch screen capability and use of the tablet keyboard screen. The operator shall be able to view color -graphics, system trends, override setpoints, change time schedules, and override damper and valve positions and override points the same as you can from a PC. 15900-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 1.3 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. The BCS Contractor shall: 1. Have a local staff of trained personnel capable of giving instructions and providing routine and emergency maintenance on the BCS, all components and software/firmware and all other elements of the BCS. 2. Have a proven record of experience in the supply and installation of equivalent BACnet systems over a minimum period of five years. Provide documentation of at least three equal or greater size and complexity, if so requested by the owner's representative. 3. Be a factory certified representative for the native BACnet BCS manufacturer for design, installation, and maintenance of the proposed systems. 4. Have comprehensive local service, training and support facilities for the total BCS as provided. Maintain local, supplies of essential expendable parts. 5. The base bid shall be manufactured by Alerton and installed by Climatec. CLIMATEC. No exceptions o Contact Eddie Rodriguez • ERodriguez(u�climatec.com • 713-983-6500 1.4 RELATED DOCUMENTS & REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract documents, apply to this section including: 1. General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections. 2. Division 15 for mechanical equipment, ductwork, piping, systems 3. Division 16 for electrical, lighting, and fire alarm equipment. B. The latest edition of the following standards and codes in effect as approved by the authority having jurisdiction and amended as of supplier's proposal date, and any applicable subsections thereof, shall govern design and selection of equipment and material supplied: 1. ANSI MC85.1 - Terminology for Automatic Control. 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 3. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2010, BACnet (building automation and controls network). 4. BTL Mark by the BACnet Testing Laboratories. 5. International Building Code (IBC), including local amendments. 15900-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 6. UL 916 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Energy Management Equipment. Canada and the US. 7. National Electrical Code (NEC). 8. FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A. 9. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. The following information shall be included on the cover page for each shop drawing and equipment documentation submittal: a. Project name with date. Refer to the applicable specifications by name and number. b. Provide submittal number and re -submittal number and date as applicable. c. Provided name and address of Consulting Engineer, Mechanical Contractor, General Contractor 2. Shop drawings shall be CAD generated, plot size of 8-1/2" x 11" or 11" x 17". Drawings shall include diagrams, mounting instructions, installation procedures, equipment details and software descriptions for all aspects of the system to be installed. 3. Provide schematic of systems indicating instrumentation locations, all interconnecting cables between supplied cabinets on a mechanical floor plan. 4. Software specifications and descriptions including operating sequences. 5. Provide a bill of material that indicates specific manufacturer, part number, part description and quantity of each device for all system components. 6. Provide a list of the wire labels to be installed on each end of the control wiring, at the device and the control panel terminal. Labels shall be machine generated, typed and legible with a maximum of 17 characters. The label description "AHU-1 SAT" shall indicate the supply air temperature of AHU-1. 7. Equipment Schematic: Provide an electronic equipment schematic for each piece of mechanical equipment. The schematic shall display all mechanical equipment characteristics including fans, dampers, valves, sensors and other applicable control devices. The schematic shall show wiring terminations to each control device as shown in the submittal and as -build documentation. Control devices shall be labeled by a symbol that can easily be identified in a bill of material that is shown on this graphic. The bill of material shall show the device symbol, description, manufacture and part number. 8. Sequences of Operation: The sequences of operation shall be viewable for each piece of mechanical equipment and be in a text format as shown in the as built documentation. The sequence of operations shall be selectable at the applicable location for the control program. 15900-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC B. Control component submittals: 1. Component technical data sheets with mounting and installation details. 2. The documentation shall include comprehensive and complete details of the BIBB and automation level documentation including address, associated controller type, etc. as required and for the interface to the BCS. 3. Details of networks/communications equipment, cabling and protocols proposed. Provide schedule of cabling including details of proposed cable types. 4. Module Drawing: Provide an electronic wiring diagram of each control module (as shown in submittal documentation). Diagram shall display wiring schematic and terminations to end devices. Diagram shall display each input and output terminals and label those that are used for the control application. Diagram shall display module type/name and network address. 4. Field sensor and instrumentation specification sheets. Provide complete manufacturer's specifications for all items that are supplied. Include vendor name of every item supplied. 5. Schedule and specification sheets for dampers, valves and acutators. 6. Design and provide layout of all components of panel mounted control devices, terminal strips and power supplies. C. Colorgraphics: Provide sample layout of colorgraphic representations of the systems for review. The submittal shall indicate the quality of the graphic to be provided with the system with a sample of the specific control points to be included. Control points shall as a minimum include points indicated in the input/output summary, control schematic and primary controlling points defined in the sequences of operation. Provide a sample of a floor plan layout, typical AHU, terminal unit, outside air pretreatment unit, variable frequency drive, exhaust/supply fan, chiller plant and hot water plant. For control points to be provided by equipment BACnet integration provide sample of the control points, up to 25 total. D. Commissioning reports. The submittal shall include a sample of the commissioning reports to be utilized during the commissioning section of this specification. Sample reports shall be approved as submitted or be modified by the engineer or owner's representative. The commissioning reports shall be included in the final operation and maintenance manuals. Reports shall be provided in hard -copy paper forms or electronic (.pdf) format. 1. Project Commissioning/System Verification Form for each controller. a. General information for each form shall include: project name; associated equipment with mark number; control panel number and location; controller number and model number; controller device instance number (address); MS/TP LAN segment number; verifying technician and date. b. Each connected control point and device shall contain the following columns with a separate line for each connected physical point: point description (same as device label); input/output number for each connected control device (IN-XX or AO-XX). 15900-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC c. Check boxes confirming that the commissioning tasks have been completed: device location, proper termination at device; proper termination at control panel; sequence is verified; point trend is enabled. d. Data entry boxes indicating measured/confirmed values: preliminary control point value on the graphic; observed control point value; calibration or adjustment value to correct offset; final displayed point value on the color -graphic; date of commissioning; engineer or owner's representative verification. 2. Control Panel Commissioning Form for each control panel. a. General information: panel location and identification number; panel dimensions and NEMA rating; panel properly installed; Class 1 and Class 2 wiring are properly separated; correct voltage to the panel; no shorts or grounds in panel; no induce voltages in panel wiring; point to point termination match submittal; devices are mounted in the correct location; controller software revision number; address of controllers; panel device checkout is complete; panel startup is complete. 3. Sequence of Operation Commissioning Form per piece of equipment (DX -split System, Outside Air Split System, etc.). a. General information: project name; system identifier; building area served; control panel and controller numbers; controller model number and instance number (address); MS/TP LAN segment number; name of verifying technician and date. b. Each step of the sequence of operation for each piece of equipment shall be documented shall include a "description of test", "input to trigger test" and "expected outcome". A pass/fail checkbox shall indicate each of these actions. Provide space for technician approval with associated date. E. Operating and Maintenance (O&M) manuals: Provide O&M manual with full information to allow the owner to operate, maintain and repair installed products. Include trade names with model numbers, color, dimensions and other physical characteristics. 1. Format: Produce on 8-1/2 x 11-inch pages, and bind in 3-ring/D binders with durable plastic covers. Label binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL", title of project, and subject matter and "Number _ of _" of binder. Provide substantial dividers tabbed and titled by section/component number. 2. Table of Contents for each volume: a. Part 1: Directory with name, address and telephone number of Designer, Contractor and Subcontractors and Suppliers for each Project Manual section. b. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by Project Manual Section number where practical and where not, by system. Include: 15900-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC Product design criteria, functions, normal operating characteristic and limiting conditions. Installation, alignment, adjustment, checking instructions and troubleshooting guide. Operating instructions for start-up, normal operation, regulation and control, normal shutdown and emergency shutdown. Test data and performance curves. Spare parts list for operating products, prepared by manufacturers including detailed drawings giving location of each maintainable part, lists of spares recommended for user- service inventory and nearest source of in -stock spares. Record Documentation: 1. Details of all alarm, diagnostic, error and other messages. Detail the Operator action to be taken for each instance. 2. Detail special programs provided and provide a complete programming instruction manual. Detail operation of all software applications. 3. Detailed list of the database for all installed devices. 4. Record drawings shall be CAD generated and shall include final locations and point ID for each monitored and controlled device. 5. In additional to the required hard -copies, provide a CD with all of the record documentation in PDF format and a CD(s) containing backup copies of all installed software and graphics. 6. Online as -built documentation: provide digital replications of as-builts that shall be accessible from each equipment graphic controlled or monitored by the BCS. 1.6 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Refer to Division 0 and Division 1 for allowances and related contractual requirements. B. Refer to Section 15 for General Mechanical Provisions, chillers, air handling units, VAV terminal units, computer room units and other mechanical equipment specifications as applicable to this project. C. Refer to Section 16 for General Electrical Provisions. 1. Division 16 shall provide all conduit and wiring for 120 volts and above, such as power to DDC control panels, 120v valve operators, VAV terminal units, power supplies, etc. 2. Switchgear manufacturer shall provide BACnet or Modbus interface to BCS. 3. Fire alarm manufacturer shall provide contacts within 18 inches of Division 23 control panels for monitoring of binary inputs. 1.7 ELECTRICAL POWER PROVISIONS A. Power (120 VAC) shall be provided under Division 16 by the electrical contractor to the DDC panel locations indicated on the mechanical & electrical drawings. Provide step down transformers within panel enclosures. Provide all necessary fuses and circuit protection devices 15900-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC B. Normal power shall be provided to the controllers serving fan powered terminal units with electric heat via the control transformer provided with the unit. C. All components of the BCS shall be powered from the sources above. Provide final terminations from the locations indicated on the Division 15 Drawings. D. The BCS Contractor shall provide any additional control (24 volt) power that is required as part of this contract and not indicated by other. This shall include all conduit, cabling, circuit breakers, etc. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Warranty work and the equipment provided under this contract shall be for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion. Warranty shall cover all components, system software, parts and assemblies supplied by this contractor and shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion. Labor to troubleshoot, repair, reprogram or replace system components that have failed due to defects in materials and workmanship shall be provided by this contractor at no charge to the owner during the warranty period. All corrective software modifications made during warranty service periods shall be updated on all user documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks. All warranty work shall be performed by the BCS contractor's local service group. B. Warranty shall not include routine maintenance, e.g., equipment cleaning, mechanical parts lubrication, pilot lamp replacement, operational testing, etc. Warranty shall not cover repair or replacement of equipment damaged by under- or over -voltage, misuse, lack of proper maintenance, lightning, water damage from weather or piping failure. C. Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty agreement shall provide on - site or off -site service in a timely manner after failure notification to the BCS contractor. The maximum acceptable response time to provide this service at the site shall be 24 hours, during normal working hours. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 NETWORK SERVER (City of Pearland already has an existing City Wide Network Server that hosts Climatec building automaton software. Climatec shall add this project to that server) A. This contractor shall supply one Central Network Server (CNS) as part of this system. The CNS shall utilize the Internet and provide efficient integration of standard open protocols, such as BACnet, LonWorks and Modbus. The CNS shall maintain comprehensive database management, alarm management and messaging services, and graphical user interface as follows: 15900-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC Support an unlimited number of users over the Internet/intranet with a standard web browser to access alarms, trend logs, graphics, schedules and configuration data. The web browser shall be Internet Explorer 9.0 or newer. Access to the Network Server shall be password protected utilizing Java authentication and encryption techniques. An audit trail of database changes indicating user, time stamp, and audit action shall be provided. Enterprise level information exchange using an SQL database and HTTP/HTML/XML text formats. 3. Synchronize controller databases, database storage scheduling, control and energy management routines 4. Alarm processing and routing which includes email, SMS text messages and paging. 5. HTML based help system that includes comprehensive online system documentation. 6. Support of multiple System Network Controller (SNC) controllers, as hereinafter specified, connected to a local Ethernet or the Internet network. Network Server Functions and Hardware 1. It shall be possible to provide access to all System Network Controller (SNC) via a single connection to the server and the Ethernet LAN. In this configuration, each System Network Controller can be accessed from a remote Graphical User Interface (GUI) or from a standard Web browser Internet Explorer 9.0 by connecting to the server. 2. The Central Network Server shall provide the following functions, at a minimum: a. The server shall provide complete access to distributed global data. The server shall provide the ability to execute global control strategies based on control and data objects in any SNC in the network, local or remote. b. The server shall include a master clock service for its subsystems and provide time synchronization for all SNC's. c. The server shall provide scheduling for all SNC's and their underlying field control devices. d. The server shall provide demand limiting control that operates across all SNC's. The network server shall be capable of multiple demand limiting programs for sites with multiple meters and or multiple sources of energy. Each demand program shall be capable of supporting separate demand shed lists for effective demand control. e. The server shall implement the BACnet Command Prioritization scheme (16 levels) for safe and effective contention resolution of all commands issued to SNC's. Each System Network Controller supported by the server shall have the ability to archive its log data, alarm data and database to the server, automatically. Archiving options shall be user -defined including archive time and archive frequency. 15900-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC f. The server shall provide central alarm management for all SNC's supported by the server. Alarm management shall include: routing of alarms to a video display, a printer, an email and pager; view and acknowledge alarms; query alarm logs based on user -defined parameters The server shall provide central management of log data for all SNC's supported by the server. Log data shall include process logs, runtime and event counter Togs, audit logs and error logs. Log data management shall include: viewing and printing log data; exporting log data to other software applications; query log data based on user - defined parameters 3. The Central Network Server shall be capable of supporting the following open system drivers, OPC, Modbus TCP Drive, LonWorks IP or MSTP. g. 2.2 NETWORK SERVER PLATFORM REQUIREMENTS A. Network Server is existing and shall be re -used B. Minimum Computer Configuration (Hardware Independent). 1. Central Server. Owner shall provide a dedicated BAS server with configuration that includes the following components as a minimum: 2. Processor: Intel Xeon CPU E5-2640 x64 (or better), compatible with dual- and quad - core processors. 3. Memory: 2 GB or more recommended for large systems, 8 GB or more recommended for the Windows 64-bit version. 4. Hard Drive: 256 GB minimum, more recommended depending on archiving requirements. 5. Display: Video card and monitor capable of displaying 1024 x 768 pixel resolution or greater. 6. Network Support: Ethernet adapter (10/100 Mb with RJ-45 connector). 7. Connectivity: Full-time high-speed ISP connection recommended for remote site access (i.e. T1, ADSL, cable modem). C. Standard Client: The thin -client Web Browser BAS GUI shall be Microsoft Internet Explorer (10.0 or later) running on Microsoft 7+. No special software shall be required to be installed on the PCs used to access the BAS via a web browser. 2.3 SYSTEM NETWORK CONTROLLER (SNC) A. These controllers are designed to manage communications between the Unitary Controllers, manage communications between itself and other system network controllers (SNC) and with any operator workstations (OWS) that are part of the BAS, and perform control and operating strategies for the system based on information from any controller connected to the BAS. B. The controllers shall be fully programmable to meet the unique requirements of the facility it shall control. 15900-11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC C. The controllers shall be capable of peer -to -peer communications with other SNC's and with any OWS connected to the BAS. whether the OWS is directly connected, connected via cellular modem or connected via the Internet. The communication protocols utilized for peer -to -peer communications between SNC's will be Niagara 4 Fox, BACnet TCP/IP and SNMP. Use of a proprietary communication protocol for peer -to -peer communications between SNC's is not allowed. E. The SNC shall employ a device count capacity license model that supports expansion capabilities. The SNC shall be enabled to support and shall be licensed with the following Open protocol drivers (client and server) by default: 1. BACnet 2. Lon 3. MODBUS 4. SNMP 5. KNX G. The SNC shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide: 1. Calendar functions. 2. Scheduling. 3. Trending. 4. Alarm monitoring and routing. 5. Time synchronization. 6. Integration of LonWorks, BACnet, and MODBUS controller data. 7. Network management functions for all SNC, PEC and ASC based devices. H. The SNC shall provide the following hardware features as a minimum: 1. Two 10/100 Mbps Ethernet ports. 2. Two Isolated RS-485 ports with biasing switches. 3. 1 GB RAM 4. 4 GB Flash Total Storage / 2 GB User Storage 5. Wi-Fi (Client or WAP) 6. USB Flash Drive 7. High Speed Field Bus Expansion 8. -20-60 degreesC Ambient Operating Temperature 9. Integrated 24 VAC/DC Global Power Supply 10. MicroSD Memory Card Employing Encrypted Safe Boot Technology The SNC shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support a minimum of 16 simultaneous users. J. The SNC shall provide alarm recognition, storage, routing, management and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers. K. The SNC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether connected to a local network or remote via cellular modem, or wide -area network. 1. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements including but not limited to: a. Alarm. b. Return to normal. 15900-12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC c. To default. 2. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user: a. Screen message text. b. Email of complete alarm message to multiple recipients. c. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message. d. Graphics with flashing alarm object(s). 3. The following shall be recorded by the SNC for each alarm (at a minimum): a. Time and date. b. Equipment (air handler #, access way, etc.). c. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement. L. Programming software and all controller "Setup Wizards" shall be embedded into the SNC. M. The SNC shall support the following security functions. 1. Module code signing to verify the author of programming tool and confirm that the code has not been altered or corrupted. 2. Role -Based Access Control (RBAC) for managing user roles and permissions. 3. Require users to use strong credentials. 4. Data in Motion and Sensitive Data at Rest be encrypted. 5. LDAP and Kerberos integration of access management. N. The SNC shall support the following data modeling structures to utilize Search; Hierarchy; Template; and Permission functionality: 1. Metadata: Descriptive tags to define the structure of properties. 2. Tagging: Process to apply metadata to components 3. Tag Dictionary O. The SNC shall employ template functionality. Templates are a containerized set of configured data tags, graphics, histories, alarms... that are set to be deployed as a unit based upon manufacturer's controller and relationships. All lower level communicating controllers (PEC, AUC, AVAV, VFD.) shall have an associated template file for reuse on future project additions. P. The SNC shall be provided with a 5 Year Software Maintenance license. Labor to implement not included. 2.4 MANAGEMENT LEVEL NETWORK A. Extension of the management level network shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements: Ethernet TCP/IP network; BACnet standards; cabling shall be Category 5 or higher quality and shall be tested and certified for 1 GBps data transfer rate. 2.5 OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE FOR THE SNC A. The distributed architecture of the operating system for the CNS and SNC's shall provide the operator a comprehensive interface to allow the operator to configure and customize the BCS to optimize the HVAC system to save energy, schedule and maintain equipment and provide occupant comfort. The provided graphical toolset shall allow the operator to create applications in a drag and drop environment. 15900-13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 1. Input/output capability shall allow the operator to request the current value or status of the control point; command/override equipment to a specific state; add, change or delete control points, alarm limits and controllers; change descriptors to control points and equipment; modify parameters; create or modify DDC loops; Operator System Access: Via software password with five access levels at work stations and at each control unit. C. Color graphic tools shall allow the user to create equipment and floor plan graphics from a standard library of symbols; allow custom generation of symbols; utilize over 64 or more colors; create real-time dynamic data for the graphics. Up to 60 control points may be displayed on each graphic. 1. Provide a link between compatible graphics to minimize the paths to additional information. For example provide the link from the zone sensor to the VAV terminal to the air handling unit and to the central plant. Web pages shall be provided to allow the operator to zoom into specific areas of the facility and then link the space to the floor plan to the overall building and then to the facility site plan. 2. Graphical tools shall allow the creation of bar graphs, pie graphs and other tools to visualize control information such as run time hours, energy consumed and occupant comfort. D. Alarm processing tools shall allow the operator to create alarm messages that include as a minimum: time of alarm, point descriptor, alarm condition and remote annunciation. Critical alarms shall be displayed, archived to a storage device or printed on a alarm printer. Alarms shall be displayed in order of occurrence and have an optional audible alarm indicator. 1. Print alarm messages, up to 60 characters in length, for each alarm point specified. 2. Alarms may be routed to other devices including web -enabled cell phones, pagers, tablet PC's and designated personal computers on the network or Internet. 3. Operator specifies when alarm requires acknowledgment. Continue to indicate uSNCknowledged alarms after return to normal. An alarm log shall be maintained to archive alarms for future reference with the above specified parameters as well as indicating the person acknowledging the alarm. 4. The graphical display shall indicate the number of the current uSNCknowledged alarms by individual building site or by sum of all campus -wide facilities. 5. The operator may create and forward an e-mail message to another user directly from the graphical interface so that the message can be read when the second user logs on to the system. E. Upon a power failure to equipment in the facility the BCS shall automatically start equipment upon the restoration of power. Program a time delay between individual equipment restart on a schedule to minimize demand charges from the utility company. 15900-14 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC F. Custom reports may be created by the operator with a requested time and date manually or automatically. All reports may be logged to a storage device for future reference. The data reports shall allow customization and scaling of the X-Y coordinates; plotting of tabular reports; provide multi -point graphical reports with not less than eight variables on the same report. Print reports on daily, weekly, monthly, yearly or scheduled basis as scheduled. G. The network server current operating system, database, color -graphics, custom reports shall be backed up automatically to a remote server or storage device as directed by the owner's representative. H. Maintenance Management capability shall allow the system to monitor and log the run- time for HVAC equipment; schedule maintenance reports that include recommended material and labor for the assigned task. 2.6 EXPANDABLE APPLICATION CONTROLLERS (EAC) A. Expandable application controllers shall be capable of implementing control strategies for the system based on information from any or all connected inputs. The EAC shall utilize factory pre-programmed global strategies that may be modified by field personnel on -site. Global control algorithms and automated control functions should execute via a 32-bit processor B. Programming shall be object -oriented using control program blocks that will support a minimum of 500 Analog Values and 500 Binary Values. Analog and binary values shall support standard BACnet priority arrays. Provide means to graphically view inputs and outputs to each program block in real-time as program is executing. C. Controller shall have adequate data storage to ensure high performance and data reliability. Battery shall retain static RAM memory and real-time clock functions for a minimum of 1.5 years (cumulative). Battery shall be a field -replaceable (non - rechargeable) lithium type. The onboard, battery -backed real time clock must support schedule operations and trend logs. D. Controller shall include both on -board 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet BACnet communication over a twisted pair cable (UTP) and shall include BACnet IP communication E. The base unit of the EAC shall host up to 8 expansion modules with various I/O combinations including universal 10-bit inputs, binary triac outputs, and 8-bit switch selectable analog outputs (0-10V or 0-20 mA). Inputs shall support 3K and 10K thermistors, 0-5VDC, 0-10VDC, 4-20mA, dry contacts and pulse inputs directly. F. All outputs must have onboard Hand -Off -Auto switches and a status indicator light. HOA switch position shall be monitored. Each analog output shall include a potentiometer for manually adjusting the output when the HOA switch is in the Hand position. The position of each and every HOA switch shall be available system wide as a BACnet object. G. BACnet Conformance 1. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum: Analog Input, Binary Input, Analog Output, Binary Output, Analog Value, Binary Value, Device, File, Group, Event Enrollment, Notification Class, Program and Schedule object types. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information. 15900-15 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 2. The Controller shall comply with Annex J of the BACnet specification for IP connections. This device shall use Ethernet to connect to the IP internetwork, while using the same Ethernet LAN for non-IP communications to other BACnet devices on the LAN. Must support interoperability on wide area networks (WANs) and campus area networks (CANs) and function as a BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD). H. Schedules: Each EAC shall support a minimum of 50 BACnet schedule objects. Logging Capabilities: Each controller shall support a minimum of 200 trend logs. Sample time interval shall be adjustable at the operator's workstation. Controller shall periodically upload trended data to system server for long term archiving if desired. Archived data stored in database format shall be available for use in third -party spreadsheet or database programs. J. Alarm Generation: Alarms may be generated within the system for any object change of value or state either real or calculated. This includes things such as analog object value changes, binary object state changes, and various controller communication failures. Alarm logs shall be provided for alarm viewing. Log may be viewed on -site at the operator's terminal or off -site via remote communications. Controller must be able to handle up to 200 alarm setups stored as BACnet event enrollment objects — system destination and actions individually configurable. 2.7 UNITARY CONTROLLERS - GENERAL A. The BCS Contractor shall provide all Unitary Controllers (UC). UC shall be fully programmable or applications specific controllers with pre -packaged operating sequences maintained in EEPROM or flash RAM. B. The UC shall be a node on one of the automation LANs and shall control its own communications so that the failure of any one node, shall not inhibit communications on the network between the remaining nodes. UC shall be totally independent of other LAN nodes for their monitoring and control functions. C. Provide each UC with a battery back-up or EEPROM for the protection of volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. Batteries shall be rated for a seven year life. D. All associated applications programs shall reside at the UC. The UC shall not require communication to any other panel for normal operating sequences other than time scheduled base commands. E. Control shall be based on algorithms, i.e. proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID), proportional plus integral (PI), or proportional to comply with the sequences of operation PID algorithms shall maintain the system operation within + or - 1.0 Deg. F. of the space temperature set points. F. The UC shall be configured with sufficient input/output capacity to achieve the required control points to meet the sequence of operations. 2.8 UNITARY CONTROLLER — VAV TERMINAL UNITS A. The BCS Contractor shall provide all UC's required for all variable air volume (VAV) terminal units. The number and location of terminal units and air flow rates shall be as indicated on the mechanical drawings. 15900-16 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC B. The UC shall be capable of monitoring and controlling the following parameters for VAV terminal units per the sequences of operation and input/output summary: space temperature; primary air flow rate; damper modulation; heating coil stage control, heating valve control, heating SCR control (as applicable); fan on/off control; supply air sensor; occupancy senor; CO2 Sensor or humidity sensor. C. Furnish primary damper actuators, for factory mounting, meeting the following requirements: direct shaft mounting; adequate torque, to properly operate the damper from fully open to fully closed without binding; locking "V' groove or similar means to prevent slippage between actuator and shaft. D. The BCS Contractor shall field install the following components for each terminal unit: space temperature sensor; supply air temperature sensor; occupancy sensor and/or CO2 sensor as indicated on the drawings or input/output summary; E. The BCS Contractor shall furnish to the terminal unit manufacturer the following components for factory installation and wiring for each terminal unit: VAV controller with integral differential pressure transducer for the monitoring of the terminal unit primary air flow rate and damper actuator. F. The terminal unit manufacturer shall provide the following components for each terminal unit for interface and mounting of the UC: primary air dampers; enclosure to house the UC and associated components including suitable mounting brackets shall be NEMA 1 rating and located outside the terminal unit; multi -point averaging type flow sensor at the primary air inlet to the terminal unit; 24 VAC control transformer; 24 VAC fan control relay interface; 24 VAC heater control relay interface (up to two stages); 24 volt SCR heater input as scheduled (0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA). 2.9 UNITARY CONTROLLER AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) & FAN COIL UNITS (FCU) A. The BCS Contractor shall provide UC's required for chilled/hot water and DX/electric heat air handling units and fan coil units. Provide an enclosure to house the UC and associated components including suitable mounting brackets shall be NEMA 1 rated and located outside the UV's and FCU's. B. The UC shall be capable of monitoring and controlling the following parameters per the sequences of operation and input/output summary; space temperature; space relative humidity sensor ; cooling/heating stage control or modulating valve control; fan on/off control and status; supply air sensor; occupancy sensor; space CO2 sensor; VFD control and monitoring. 2.10 BCS CONTROLLER LEVEL NETWORK A. BCS Automation Level LAN shall consist of BACnet/MSTP (76.8 Kbps minimum). Data transfer rate and data throughput as required to meet the alarm annunciation requirements. 2.12 FIELD INSTRUMENTATION A. Temperature: All temperature sensors to be solid state electronic thermistor or RTD, factory -calibrated to within 0.5°F, totally interchangeable with housing appropriate for application. Sensors shall be 10,000 ohm thermistor @ 77 F (type II or III as applicable) with temperature curve rated for the application. Sensor wiring terminations shall be in a galvanized box (not plastic). 15900-17 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 1. Outside air temperature sensor: Sensors shall be installed in weather proof enclosure with ventilated PVC sun -shied 2. Duct mounted temperature sensor shall be averaging type for supply air, mixed air and low temperature applications for air handling units. Duct probe temperature sensor shall be acceptable for terminal units. 3. Intelligent space temperature sensor shall contain a backlit LCD digital display and user function keys along with temperature sensor, setpoint adjustment and after-hours override use. The intelligent room sensor shall simultaneously display room setpoint, room temperature, outside temperature, and fan status (if applicable) at each controller. Override time may be set and viewed in half-hour increments. If intelligent room sensor is connected to VAV controller, VAV box shall be balanced and all air flow parameters shall be viewed and set from the intelligent room sensor with no computer or other field service tool needed. Provide flat plate stainless steel space temperature sensor for monitoring & Alarming of the IDF/MDF which is served by a ductless split A/C. Equipment TAG AC-1. C. Relative humidity sensors: All relative humidity sensors shall be a two wire type, 4-20 mA output proportional to the relative humidity range of 0-100%. The accuracy of the sensors shall be +3% over a range of 5-95% r.h. The sensor shall be replaceable. Sensor wiring terminations shall be in a galvanized box (not plastic). Veris HO series or approved equal. 1. Outdoor air relative humidity sensors: provide non -corroding outdoor shield to minimize wind effects and solar heating. Install wall -mount weather proof enclosure with conduit fitting. 2. Interior air relative humidity sensor: wall mounted humidity sensors shall be installed in a wall mounted enclosure with white or off-white cover to match the wall temperature sensors. 3. Duct mounted relative humidity sensor: Duct mounted relative humidity sensors shall be provided with a moister resistant enclosure with conduit fitting. The probe length shall be 8" minimum. D. Combination Temperature/Humidity wall sensor 1. Humidity sensor shall be 4-20 mA output proportional to the relative humidity range of 0-100%. The accuracy of the sensors shall be ±3% over a range of 5- 95% r.h. 2. Temperature sensor shall be solid state electronic thermistor or RTD. The accuracy of the temperature sensor shall be ±0.5°F. 3. Veris HEW series or approved equal. E. Differential pressure sensors: 1. Duct static pressure sensor: The differential pressure sensors shall have an input range compatible with the medium being measured. The proportional output signal shall be 0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA. Accuracy of the sensor shall be +5% over an operating range of 0-2.0 inches w.g. 15900-18 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC F. Freezestat: Provide freezestats for all chilled water air handling systems that receive more than 10% untreated outside air. Freezestats shall provide vapor tension elements, which shall serpentine the inlet face on all coils. Provide additional sensors, wired in series, to provide one linear foot per square foot of coil surface area. Freezestat shall be manually reset at the switch. Interlock to the associated fan so that fan will shut down when HOA switch is in hand or auto position. Provide time delay relays with a 0-10 minute time delay relay duration to minimize nuisance freezestat trips. Time delay relay shall be adjustable at the associated control panel. G. Air differential pressure switch: For fan shutdown provide air differential pressure switches for all fans controlled by a variable frequency drive (VFD) to shut down the associated fan in the event of sensing high differential pressure. Air differential pressure switches shall have an adjustable setpoint with a range of 0-10 inches w.g. with manual reset at the switch. Provide'/4 inch copper tubing with compression fittings to mount to the side of the duct. H. Momentary control relays: Provide momentary control relays as indicated. . Relays shall have coil ratings of 120 VAC, 50 mA or 10-30 VACNDC, 40 mA as suitable for the application. Contact ratings shall be 10 amp. Provide complete isolation between the control circuit and the digital output. Relays shall be located in the UC or other local enclosures and have pin -type terminals. Relays shall have LED indication of status. Current sensing relay: Current sensing relays shall be rated for the applicable load. The output relay shall have an accessible trip adjustment over its complete operating range. Enclosure shall have an LED to indicate relay status. J. Photocell: Ambient light level shall by a photocell in a non -corroding in a weatherproof housing with sun shield suitable for exterior installation. The photocell The control signal output shall be 4-20 ma or binary contact closure as specified in the sequences of operation. Mount the photocell on the north side of the building on the roof. The sensor reading shall be 0-750 foot candles. 2.14 AUTOMATIC DAMPERS A. Furnish automatic dampers (AD) as indicated on the Division 23 Mechanical Drawings for installation by the Division 23 Mechanical Contractor. The maximum leakage rate for AD shall not exceed 10 cfm per square foot at 4 inches W.C. Provide actuators for BCS furnished automatic dampers and for dampers provided as part of a factory installation within an AHU or fan -coil unit to comply with the sequence of operations including actuator mountings, installation, drive arms, linkages and damper end switches. Actuators shall be directly coupled to damper drive blades with no intermediate linkages or shall be rotary type actuators directly coupled to the damper drive shaft. Where required by the sequences of operation, actuators shall have a spring return to the de -energized position upon loss of power. Damper normal and failure positions shall be as identified within the sequences of operation. Power rating shall be 120 Vac + or - 10% 60 Hz or 24 Vac power supply. B. Control Dampers. The control contractor shall furnish and size all automatic control dampers unless provided with the HVAC equipment. The sheet metal contractor shall install all dampers unless provided with HVAC equipment. 15900-19 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 1. All dampers used for modulating service shall be opposed blade type arrange for normally open or normally closed operation as required to comply with the sequences of operation. The damper is to be sized so that when wide open the pressure drop is a sufficient amount of its close -off pressure drop for effective throttling. 2. All dampers used for two -position or open -close control shall be parallel blade type arranged for normally open or closed operation as required. 3. Damper linkage hardware shall be constructed of corrosion resistant zinc & nickel -plated steel. Blade -to -blade linkage shall be concealed within the frame. 4. Frame shall utilize a heavy duty 5 in. by 1 in. 16 gauge galvanized steel hat channel frame designed for installation inside the ductwork. Frame shall have reinforced corners and low profile head and sill on dampers less than 17 in high. 5. Blades shall be 3-V, single thickness of 16 gauge galvanized steel. Provide dampers with flexible metal compression -type jamb seals and extruded vinyl blade edge seals for low leakage performance. 6. Shafts shall be in. diameter square plated steel axles positively locked to the blades to eliminate slippage between blades and axles. Actuator shaft shall be removable. Provide molded synthetic (acetyl) bearings in a polished extruded frame raceway. 7. Dampers shall be Honeywell D2 or Ruskin CD36 series. Damper Actuators: 1. Outside air and exhaust air damper actuators shall be mechanical spring return. The actuator mounting arrangement and spring return feature shall permit normally open or normally closed positions of the damper as required. 2. Outside and return air modulating actuators shall utilize analog (proportional) control 2-10 VDC. Actuators shall be driven in both the open and closed directions. 3. Electric damper actuators shall be direct shaft mounted and use a V-bolt and toothed V-clamp causing a cold weld effect for positive gripping. Single bolt or setscrew type fasteners are not acceptable. 4. Single section dampers shall have one electronic actuator direct shaft mounted. 5. Multi -section dampers with electric actuators shall be arranged so that each damper section operates individually. One electronic actuator shall be direct shaft mounted per damper section. 6. Damper actuators shall be Belimo or Honeywell. 2.18 PANELS AND ENCLOSURES A. Provide panels and enclosures for all components of the BCS, which are susceptible to physical or environmental damage. B. Interior panels and enclosures shall meet be NEMA 1 rated painted steel panels with locking door. 15900-20 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC C. Exterior mounted panels and enclosures shall be NEMA 4 painted steel panels with locking door. D. Panels for UC's shall be mounted on the outside of all unit ventilators and fan coil units with three feet of wall clearance in front of them and no higher than 7 feet to the bottom of the panel. 2.19 LABELING and WARNING NOTICES A. Provide labeling for all control panels and enclosures. B. Provide labeling of all control wires and input/output points at the controller and at the control device; the label at each end of the wire shall be the same Labels shall be machine generated, typed and clearly legible with a maximum of 17 characters. Hand written labels or labels written on the control wire jacket will not be acceptable. Each label shall be unique to its function and shall reference the applicable system. For example "AHU-1 SAT" will indicate the supply air temperature sensor for AHU-1. Improper labeling shall be removed and shall require re -commissioning of the control device and controller to document correct functionality. C. Provide high voltage warning notices at all equipment controlled by the BCS and at all associated motor starters when used by equipment controller. 2.20 TUBING AND PIPING A. Provide tubing and piping as required for the field instrumentation. B. Tubing within equipment rooms, vertical risers, and penetrations to ductwork shall be either copper pipe or shall be plastic tubing within conduit. Tubing for all water -based instrumentation shall be copper pipe. Identify the type of tubing proposed in the shop drawing submittal. C. Provide suitable bulk head fittings for duct and panel penetrations. D. Tubing in plenum rated areas may be plastic tubing. Polyethylene tubing shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements: flame retardant; crack resistant; 300 psi burst pressure. 2.21 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Provide all conduit, raceways and fittings for the BCS monitoring, communication and control cabling. All work shall meet all applicable codes. B. Conduit, where required, shall meet, the requirements specified within Division 26 . D. BCS monitoring and control cable shall not share conduit with cable carrying voltages in excess of 48 volts. 2.22 CABLING A. Provide all cables for the BCS. Cable shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements: 1. Minimum 98% conductivity stranded copper. 2. Proper impedance for the application as recommended by the BCS component manufacturer. 15900-21 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 3. Monitoring and control cable shall be #18 AWG or larger, dependent on the application. Analog input and output cabling shall be shielded. Monitoring and control cable shall be in a YELLOW color jacket. 4. Management Level Area Network (MLAN) cable shall be CAT 6, 24 gauge unshielded, and shall be in a BLUE color jacket. 5. Field Level Area Network (FLAN) cable shall be #24 AWG shielded and shall in a RASPBERRY color jacket. 6. Shield shall be grounded at the CCP, UC, or control panel. Ground at one end only to avoid ground loops. 7. Identification of each end at the termination point. Identification should be indicated on and correspond to the record drawings. 120 VAC power wiring shall be of #12 AWG solid conductor or larger as required. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PRE -CONSTRUCTION A. The BCS supplier shall provide a pre -construction coordination meeting with the affected trades to ensure a cooperative efficient process of installation. The invited trades shall include the general contractor, mechanical contractor, electrical contractor, test and balance contractor, owner's representative, consulting engineer and others with a direct interest in the coordination of the affected systems. The BCS contractor shall provide an outline of the meeting agenda highlighting the construction schedule, coordination with mechanical and electrical trades. Provide a sign -in sheet and submit it through the attendees along with a summary of the meeting notes for future reference. 3.2 INSPECTION DURING INSTALLATION A. Provide a technician to assist the engineer or owner's representative with inspections made during the installation period that are required to review the progress and quality of ongoing work. The engineer/owner's representative shall generate field observation reports on the findings of the inspection. The engineer or owner's representative shall advise the BCS contractor during the inspection of any concerns noted with respect to the installation and shall repeat the concerns in writing as soon as possible after the inspection is completed. The BCS contractor shall take corrective action to meet the requirements of the specifications. Upon correction the BCS contractor shall submit written documentation through the contractors to the engineer. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS A. Provide all interlock and control wiring. All wiring shall be installed in a neat and professional manner in accordance with specification division 26 and all national, state and local electrical codes. 15900-22 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC B. Provide wire and wiring techniques recommended by equipment manufacturers. Control wiring shall not be installed in power circuit raceways. Magnetic starters and disconnect switches shall not be used as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary junction boxes as required. Coordinate location and arrangement of all control equipment with the Owner's Representative prior to rough -in. Provide auxiliary pilot duty relays on motor starters as required for control function. C. Electrical Contractor shall provide 120 or 277 volt power at a junction box within 48" of the controller. The BAS Contractor shall coordinate with the Electrical Contractor to identify locations of power requirements prior to the installation of the controls. D. Conduit for control wiring shall be provided whenever one of the following conditions exists: 1. Conduit is indicated on the drawings or specifically required by the specifications. 2. Cabling runs through iSNCcessible areas such as within partitions/walls, above closed in ceilings, under floor; within trenches and underground; on the exterior of the building; exposed on the surface of the building; when encased in concrete or other material that makes the cable iSNCcessible or when located such that access to the cable is not readily obtained. 3. Cable within mechanical, telecommunications and electrical equipment rooms and control rooms. 4. Conduit shall be installed, inside wall from sensor box to above the wall, for all wall mounted temperature, humidity and CO2 sensors. E. Control wiring located above an accessible ceiling space may be plenum rated cable. Plenum rated wire shall be bundled and routed at right angles to the building lines and secured to the building structure every 15 feet. F. When communication bus enters or exits a building, a surge suppressor shall be installed. The surge suppressor shall be installed according to the controls manufacturer's instructions. G. Provide sleeves for all cable and conduit passing through walls, partitions, structural components, floors and roof H. All sensor wiring shall be labeled to indicate the origination (at the device) and destination of data (at the control panel). The description shall indicate the type and location of the control device such as "AHU-1 SA temp" or "VAV 1-1 space temp". Wall temp sensors at 48" above the finished floor to comply with ADA requirements and to match the height of the Tight switches. Mount humidity sensor at equal height to wall temperature sensor. 15900-23 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 3.3 COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS A. Commissioning shall be provided by the BCS contractor to demonstrate and confirm that the installed system complies with the specifications and the control sequences of operation herein specified. upon completion of the commissioning process the BCS contractor shall demonstrate to the engineer or owner's representative the functionality of the control system devices are in compliance with the contract documents. B. Technicians provided by the BCS contractor shall be factory trained and qualified in the operation of the provided control system. The BCS contractor shall provide, if requested, the factory training certificates of the individuals providing the commissioning services on this project. C. Commissioning tools, applicable to the system provided, shall be utilized by the factory trained technicians for proper verification of system operation and functionality. Temperature verification sensors shall be NIST certified within the last 12 months. Meters such as Fluke 52 series or better shall be utilized. Use of non -certified meters may require the system to be re -commissioned with certified meters at no cost to the owner. D. Documentation of the commissioning process shall be provided per the project general conditions in a hard -copy paper or electronic (.pdf) format as requested. Documentation shall include the following forms: 1. Project Commissioning/System Verification Form for each controller provided on the project to verify the proper function of each controller, control device and system component provided. 2. Panel Commissioning Form for each control panel to document the proper installation and function of each control panel provided. 3. Sequence of Operation Commissioning Form for each piece of controlled equipment to confirm compliance of the control system with the specified sequences of operation. 4. Not providing proper documentation for each control devices, panel, or system, upon request by the engineer or owner's representative, may require the BCS contractor to re -commission the applicable systems at no additional cost to the owner. E. After completion of the commissioning, the BCS contractor shall be able to demonstrate the sequence of operations for each system to the engineer and the owner's representative. F. Equipment checkout sheets are to be produced by this contractor showing checkboxes and compliance with the following procedures for each piece of equipment and turned over to the owner and/or mechanical engineer. 3.4 COLORGRAPHICS A. The CNS/SNC colorgraphics shall be provided for the BCS system prior to system acceptance and owner training. B. The colorgraphics provided shall include the following as a template. Provide forward and backward links on the graphic. 15900-24 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 1. Site plan with link to overall building plan including detached buildings. The site plan shall be referenced to an automatically updated aerial view or map view of the area such as Google Maps or Bing Maps. Provide link to proceed to the overall building floor plan. 2. The overall building plan shall indicate space temperature conditions referenced by the color of the zone. Specific details of the zone temperatures and equipment are not required. Provide a link to the floor plan wings, upper floors and remote buildings. 3. The floor plan colorgraphics shall indicate the space temperatures by color references. Additional information shall indicate the space temperature, the occupancy of the zone, air handling units, VAV terminals and ductwork with diffusers. A link at each terminal unit or AHU shall automatically connect the system operator to the equipment colorgraphic. 4. The colorgraphics for the equipment shall as a minimum be equal to the points from the input/output summary or control schematic. Primary control devices as required by the sequences of operation shall also be provided. 5. Control points from equipment that are integrated into the BCS via a factory BACnet card shall be provided to convey the operating conditions of the attached equipment. Up to 25 key operating points per equipment graphic may be required. Coordination of the specific points shall be provided during the submittal phase. 3.5 CONTROL SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION and ACCEPTANCE A. Startup testing documentation: Prepare the checklist documenting startup testing of each input and output device, with technician's initials and date certifying each device has been tested and calibrated prior to acceptance testing. This document shall indicate proof that the following functions have been commissioned and shall be included in the as -built documentation: short to ground check, configuration of trends, confirmation that color -graphics are accurately representing actual systems, point to point checkout, all damper and valve actuators respond to input change, control modules are addressed and have functional descriptors, specified interlocks are functional, calibration report of all sensors, discrete outputs respond to time schedule or manual enable command. B. Demonstration. Prior to acceptance, demonstrate the following performance tests to demonstrate system operation and compliance with specifications. 1. Engineer, owner's representative and mechanical contractor shall be invited to observe and review system demonstration. Provide attendees at least 10 days notice. 2. Demonstration shall follow process approved as part of the submittal and shall include complete checklists and forms for each system as part of system demonstration. 3. Demonstrate actual field operation of each sequence of operation as specified. Demonstrate calibration and response of any input and output points requested by engineer or owner's representative. 5. Demonstrate complete operation of operator interface including review of color - graphics, time schedules, trend logs, alarm notification, functionality of tablet PC operation. 15900-25 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC a. DDC loop response. Supply graphical trend data output showing each DDC loop's response to a set point change representing an actuator position change of at least 25% of full range. Trend sampling rate shall be selectable from 10 seconds to 3 minutes, depending on loop speed. Each sample's trend data shall show set point, actuator position, and controlled variable values. b. Demand limiting if applicable in the sequence of operations. Supply trend data output showing demand -limiting algorithm action. Trend data shall document action sampled each minute over at least a 30-minute period and shall show building kW, demand -limiting set point, and status of set points and other affected equipment parameters. c. Trend logs for each system. Trend data shall indicate set points, operating points, valve positions, and other data as specified. Logs shall be accessible through system's operator interface and shall be retrievable for use in other software programs. 6. Alarms and Interlocks. Check each alarm with an appropriate signal at a value that will trip the alarm. Trip interlocks using field contacts to check logic and to ensure that actuators fail in the proper direction. Alarm verification shall include temperatures exceeding alarm threshold (high and low), fan failure safety, duct high static pressure switch, freezestat, smoke detector shutdown. 7. Tests that fail to demonstrate proper system operation to the engineer shall be repeated after contractor makes necessary repairs or revisions to hardware or software to successfully complete each test. C. Acceptance. 1. After tests described in this specification are performed to the satisfaction of both engineer and owner's representative, the engineer shall accept the control system as meeting completion requirements. Engineer may exempt tests from completion requirements that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond BCS contractor's control. Engineer shall provide written statement of each exempted test. Exempted tests shall be performed as part of warranty. 2. System shall not be accepted until completed demonstration forms and checklists are submitted and approved by the engineer. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND OWNER TRAINING A. Furnish basic operator training for multiple persons on data display, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, execution commands and log requests. Include a minimum of 16 hours: 8 hours instructor time for onsite training and 8 hours of hands on class environment training. Training sessions may be provided in 4-hour increments as approved by the owner's representative. 1. Change/modify temperature setpoints. 2. Change/modify time of day, holiday and override schedules. 3. Display, create, and modify trends of system points. 4. Update room numbers on the color -graphics. 15900-26 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC B. Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner. Provide written documentation listing the attendees of the specified training with sign -in sheet and training time and date. 3.7 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION A. Reference mechanical drawings for Sequence of Operation. END OF SECTION 15900-27 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PART 1 - GENERAL TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract. including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Constant -volume air systems. b. Variable -air -volume systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3. C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article. 15950 - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC D. Certified TAB reports. E. Sample report forms. F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: 1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. 5. Dates of calibration. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC. NEBB, or TABB. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician. TAB Conference: Meet with Construction Manager on approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. 1. Agenda Items: a. The Contract Documents examination report. b. The TAB plan. c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow. C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Construction Manager. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation." F. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." G. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." 15950 - 2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. 1.7 COORDINATION Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TAB SPECIALISTS Subject to compliance with requirements. • 3.2 EXAMINATION • Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells. flow -control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Section 15815 "Metal Ducts "and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire -stopped if required. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 15950 - 3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system -effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality -control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased. belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. J. Examine terminal units, such as variable -air -volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. Examine heat -transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. B. Complete system -readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical -power wiring is complete. 2. Automatic temperature -control systems are operational. 3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air -pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 15950 - 4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance". ASHRAE 111, NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems", or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing. Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Section 15820 "Duct Accessories." 3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 15081 "Duct Insulation," and Section 15083 "Piping Insulation." C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper -control positions, valve position indicators, fan -speed -control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch -pound (IP) units. 3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as -built" duct layouts. C. For variable -air -volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct -airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor -air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust - air dampers through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start -stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. 15950 - 5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air -handling -unit components. L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 15815 "Metal Ducts." 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT -VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure total airflow. a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements. measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow. 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double -inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air -handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air -handling and -treating equipment. a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured. 4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat - recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system -effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 6. Obtain approval from Construction Manager for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air -handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air -handling -unit performance. 7. Do not make fan -speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan -speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan - motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full -cooling, full -heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. 15950 - 6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. 3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments. Measure terminal outlets using a direct -reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE -AIR -VOLUME SYSTEMS Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set -point airflow with the remainder at maximum -airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced -airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. B. Pressure -Independent, Variable -Air -Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable -air -volume systems as follows: 1. Set outdoor -air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust -air dampers at a position that simulates full -cooling load. 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply -fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal -unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal -unit discharge system losses. 3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 15950 - 7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal -unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant -volume air systems. 5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant -volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a. Adjust the fan and balance the return -air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant -volume air systems. 7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static -pressure controller at the main supply -air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. 8. Record final fan -performance data. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors. 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer's name. model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal -protection -element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable -Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data. 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS A. Verify proper rotation of fans. B. Measure entering- and leaving -air temperatures. C. Record compressor data. 15950 - 8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC (66,- 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates within the following tolerances: • 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3.11 REPORTING A. Initial Construction -Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. Status Reports: Prepare monthly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress. and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors. 3.12 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field -report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 15950 - 9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust -air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable -air -volume systems. g. Settings for supply -air, static -pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single -line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices. E. Air -Handling -Unit Test Reports: For air -handling units with coils, include the following: Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. i. Center -to -center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). j. Number, make, and size of belts. k. Number, type, and size of filters. 15950 - 10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full -load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f. Center -to -center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total air flow rate in cfm (Us). b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Filter static -pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). f. Preheat -coil static -pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). g. Cooling -coil static -pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). h. Heating -coil static -pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). i. Outdoor airflow in cfm (Us). j. Return airflow in cfm (L/s). k. Outdoor -air damper position. I. Return -air damper position. m. Vortex damper position. F. Electric -Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in central -station air -handling units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil identification. d. Capacity in Btu/h (kW). e. Number of stages. f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz. g. Rated amperage. h. Air flow rate in cfm (Us). i. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m). j. Minimum face velocity in fpm (m/s). 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Heat output in Btu/h (kW). b. Air flow rate in cfm (Us). c. Air velocity in fpm (m/s). d. Entering -air temperature in deg F (deg C). e. Leaving -air temperature in deg F (deg C). f. Voltage at each connection. g. Amperage for each phase. 15950 - 11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. h. Center -to -center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full -load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f. Center -to -center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). g. Number, make, and size of belts. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa). H. Round, Flat -Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: Report Data: a. System and air -handling -unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C). d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Duct size in inches (mm). f. Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m). g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm (L/s). h. Indicated velocity in fpm (m/s). i. Actual air flow rate in cfm (L/s). j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s). k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa). I. Air -Terminal -Device Reports: 15950 - 12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 Unit Data: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC a. System and air -handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Apparatus used for test. d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. i. Effective area in sq. ft. (sq. m). Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Air velocity in fpm (m/s). c. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm (L/s). d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s). e. Final air flow rate in cfm (L/s). f. Final velocity in fpm (m/s). g. Space temperature in deg F (deg C). J. System -Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air -handling -unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size. e. Flowmeter type. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Entering -water temperature in deg F (deg C). c. Leaving -water temperature in deg F (deg C). d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig (kPa). e. Entering -air temperature in deg F (deg C). f. Leaving -air temperature in deg F (deg C). K. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following: Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model number and serial number. f. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s). 15950 - 13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches (mm). k. Motor make and frame size. I. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full -load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa). b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). c. Actual impeller size in inches (mm). d. Full -open flow rate in gpm (L/s). e. Full -open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s). j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase. L. Instrument Calibration Reports: Report Data: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. 3.13 INSPECTIONS A. Initial Inspection: 1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report. 2. Check the following for each system: a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading to the set point. c. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. d. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report. B. Final Inspection: 15950 - 14 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Owner. 2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Owner. 3. Construction Manager shall randomly select measurements. documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day. 4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." 5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows: 1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection. 2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.14 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near -peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near -peak summer and winter conditions. END OF SECTION 15950 15950 - 15 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY SECTION 16055 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section includes a computer -based, fault -current study to determine the minimum interrupting capacity of circuit protective devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. One -Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes the affected portion from the system. C. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies. B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals may be in digital form. 1. Short-circuit study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Short-circuit study and equipment evaluation report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory. b. Revised single -line diagram, reflecting field investigation results and results of short-circuit study. 16055-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Short -Circuit Study Software Developer. B. Product Certificates: For short-circuit study software, certifying compliance with IEEE 399. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are unacceptable. Short -Circuit Study Software Developer Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices. 1. The computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development Professional certification. C. Short -Circuit Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer. D. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to adjust overcurrent devices and to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available software developers offering software that may be used for the Work include only the following: 1. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc. B. Comply with IEEE 399 and IEEE 551. C. Analytical features of fault -current -study computer software program shall have the capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399. D. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time -current - characteristic curves as part of its output. 16055-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY E. Owner shall receive SKM data base files and an electronic copy of the report. The electronic copy shall be an indexed PDF file using version 7.0 of Stem Software. 2.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENTS Executive summary. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for interpretation of the computer printout. One -line diagram. showing the following: 1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Cable size and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor -control center, and panel board designations. D. Comments and recommendations for system improvements, where needed. E. Protective Device Evaluation: 1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings. 2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings versus calculated short-circuit duties. 3. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. 4. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. 5. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents; verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground -fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. F. Short -Circuit Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article in the Evaluations. G. Short -Circuit Study Output: 1. Low -Voltage Fault Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location: a. Voltage. b. Calculated fault -current magnitude and angle. c. Fault -point X/R ratio. d. Equivalent impedance. 2. Momentary Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location: a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault -current magnitude and angle. c. Fault -point X/R ratio. d. Calculated asymmetrical fault currents: 1) Based on fault -point X/R ratio. 2) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 1.6. 3) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 2.7. 16055-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY 3. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location: a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault -current magnitude and angle. c. Fault -point X/R ratio. d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e. Equivalent impedance. f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical basis. g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the study. 1. Verify completeness of data supplied on the one -line diagram. Call any discrepancies to the attention of Architect. 2. For equipment provided that is Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project. 3. For equipment that is existing to remain, obtain required electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and engineers. The qualifications of technicians and engineers shall be qualified as defined by NFPA 70E. B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support the short-circuit study. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 551 as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification. 1. Product Data for Project's overcurrent protective devices involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings. 2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service. 3. Power sources and ties. 4. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type, impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent. and phase shift. 5. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and impedance. 6. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of breaker, type of trip, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings. 7. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated kVA. rated voltage, and X/R ratio. 8. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and conductor material. 9. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 10. Cable sizes, lengths, number. conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or nonmagnetic). 16055-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY floy 3.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399. B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551. C. Base study on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer. D. The extent of the electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings. l Begin short-circuit current analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent protective devices as follows: 1. To normal system low -voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less. 2. Exclude equipment rated 240-V ac or less when supplied by a single transformer rated less than 125 kVA. F Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system -switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions. The calculations shall include the ac fault -current decay from induction motors, synchronous motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium -voltage, three-phase ac systems. The calculations shall also account for the fault -current do decrement, to address the asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment. 1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line -to -ground fault -current study for areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault at each of the following: 1. Electric utility's supply termination point. 2. Incoming switchgear. 3. Unit substation primary and secondary terminals. 4. Low -voltage switchgear. 5. Motor -control centers. 6. Control panels. 7. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches. 8. Branch circuit panelboards. 9. Disconnect switches. 3.3 ADJUSTING Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short-circuit study. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's operating and maintenance personnel in the use of study results. END OF SECTION 16055 16055-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid c ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC -FLASH STUDY Copyright 2011 by The American Institute of Architects (AIA) SECTION 16056 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC -FLASH STUDY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections. apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section includes a computer -based. protective device coordination study, equipment adequacy report and an arc -flash study to determine the arc -flash hazard distance and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical equipment. Contractor shall provide adhesive arc -flash labels on all equipment that describes the arc -flash hazard level, approach distances and required PPE. • 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. One -Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein. • Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes the affected portion from the system. C. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating. D. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies. B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following submittals after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals may be in digital form. 1. Submit time current curves (TCC) showing protective device coordination signed and sealed by a Texas professional electrical engineer. 2. Arc -flash study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 3. Arc -flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional electrical engineer registered in the state of Texas. 16056-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC -FLASH STUDY a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing. obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Arc -Flash Study Software Developer. B. Product Certificates: For arc -flash hazard analysis software, certifying compliance with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E-2018 Version. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance procedures according to requirements in NFPA 70E-2018 Version shall be provided in the equipment manuals. B. Operation and Maintenance Procedures: provide maintenance procedures for use by Owner's personnel that comply with requirements in NFPA 70E-2018 Version. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are unacceptable. Studies shall be sealed and signed by a Texas registered professional engineer. B. Arc -Flash Study Software Developer Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices. 1. The computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development Professional certification. Arc -Flash Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study, analyzing the arc flash, and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer. D. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to adjust overcurrent devices and to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 16056-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PART 2 - PRODUCTS OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC -FLASH STUDY 2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS A. Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available software developers offering software that shall be used for the Work shall be, the following: 1. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc. B. Comply with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E-2018 Version. C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the capability to calculate "mandatory." "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399. 2.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENT A. Executive summary. B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope. C. One -line diagram, showing the following: 1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Cable size and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor -control center and panelboard designations. D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article. Short -Circuit Study Output: 1. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations. showing the following for each overcurrent device location: a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault -current magnitude and angle. c. Fault -point X/R ratio. d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e. Equivalent impedance. f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical basis. g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis. Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations: 1. Arcing fault magnitude. 2. Protective device clearing time. 3. Duration of arc. 4. Arc -flash boundary. 5. Working distance. 6. Incident energy. 7. Hazard risk category. 8. Recommendations for arc -flash energy reduction. 16056-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC -FLASH STUDY G. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault -current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout. Owner to receive indexed electronic copy of report in PDF format and SKM data base files using V7.0 of System Software. Time current curves (TCC) in protective device study shall be color coded curves where the same color is used for one device if it is appearing on multiple TCC curves. Include partial I -line showing devices that are being coordinated on the TCC curve. Include transformer damage curve and cable damage curve. 2.3 ARC -FLASH WARNING LABELS A. Comply with requirements in Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch thermal transfer label of high -adhesion polyester for each work location included in the analysis. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC -FLASH HAZARD," and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc -flash hazard analysis: 1. Location designation. 2. Nominal voltage. 3. Flash protection boundary. 4. Hazard risk category. 5. Incident energy. 6. Working distance. 7. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date. C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field -applied markings. Provide electronic replacement stickers and replacement stickers from the manufacturer for the switchgear. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals. Proceed with arc -flash study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to arc -flash study may not be used in study. 3.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399. B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551. 1. Reference Section 26.05.73.13 for full short circuit study requirements. 16056-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 3.3 • 46, OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC -FLASH STUDY PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A. Comply with IEEE 242 for calculating short-circuit currents and determining coordination time intervals. B. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures. C. The study shall be based on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer. D. The extent of the electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings. Begin analysis at the service. extending down to the system overcurrent protective devices as follows: 1. To normal system low -voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less. 2. Exclude equipment rated 240-V ac or less when supplied by a single transformer rated less than 45 kVA. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system -switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions. G. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices: 1. Device shall not operate in response to the following: a. Inrush current when first energized. b. Self -cooled, full -load current or forced -air-cooled, full -load current, whichever is specified for that transformer. c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by unusual loading or emergency conditions. 2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents. Motor Protection: 1. Select protection for low -voltage motors according to IEEE 242 and NFPA 70. 2. Select protection for motors served at voltages more than 600 V according to IEEE 620. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P- 32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and protection recommendations in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current. J. Generator Protection: Select protection according to manufacturer's written recommendations and to IEEE 242. The calculations shall include the ac fault -current decay from induction motors, synchronous motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium -voltage, three-phase ac systems. The calculations shall also account for the fault -current do decrement, to address the asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment. 1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line -to -ground fault -current study for areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study. 16056-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC -FLASH STUDY L. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault and single line -to -ground fault at each of the following: 1. Electric utility's supply termination point. 2. Switchgear. 3. Unit substation primary and secondary terminals. 4. Low -voltage switchgear. 5. Motor -control centers. 6. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches. 7. Branch circuit panelboards. M. Protective Device Evaluation: 1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings. 2. Adequacy of switchgear, motor -control centers, and panelboard bus bars to withstand short-circuit stresses. 3. Any application of series -rated devices shall be recertified, complying with requirements in NFPA 70. 3.4 ARC -FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS A. Comply with NFPA 70E-2018 Version and its Annex D for hazard analysis study. B. Use the short-circuit study output and the field -verified settings of the overcurrent devices. C. Calculate maximum and minimum contributions of fault -current size. 1. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and shall assume no motor load. 2. The maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating under full -load conditions. D. Calculate the arc -flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in the electrical distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts. E. Include medium- and low -voltage equipment locations, except 240-V ac and 208-V ac systems fed from transformers less than 5 kVA. F Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based on the calculated arc -flash boundary. considering incident energy of 1.2 cal/sq.cm. G. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc -flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented as follows: 1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond three to five cycles. 2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed to match the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g., contributions from permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to three per unit after 10 cycles). H. Arc -flash computation shall include both line and load side of a circuit breaker as follows: 1. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure. 16056-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC -FLASH STUDY 2. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location. Base arc -flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap maximum clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B.1.2. 3.5 POWER SYSTEM DATA Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the arc -flash hazard analysis. 1. Verify completeness of data supplied on the one -line diagram on Drawings. Call discrepancies to the attention of Architect. 2. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project. 3. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated, obtain required electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and engineers. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E-2018 Version as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification. 1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams. overcurrent protective device submittals. input and output data, and recommended device settings. 2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service. 3. Power sources and ties. 4. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type, impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in per cent, and phase shift. 5. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating and impedance. 6. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings. 7. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio. 8. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation. current transformer ratios, potential transformer ratios, and relay settings. 9. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and conductor material. 10. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 11. Low -voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or nonmagnetic). 12. Medium -voltage cable sizes, lengths, conductor material. and cable construction and metallic shield performance parameters. 16056-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 3.6 LABELING OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC -FLASH STUDY A. Apply one arc -flash label for 600-V ac, 480-V ac, and applicable 208-V ac panelboards and disconnects and for each of the following locations: 1. Low -voltage switchboard. 2. Medium -voltage switch. 3. Control panel. 3.7 APPLICATION OF WARNING LABELS A. Install the arc -fault warning labels under the direct supervision and control of the Arc -Flash Study Specialist. END OF SECTION 16056 16056-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PART 1 - GENERAL GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system. 2. Foundation steel electrodes. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to. the following: 1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. Fushi Copperweld Inc. 5. Galvan Industries. Inc.: Electrical Products Division, LLC. 6. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 7. ILSCO. 16060-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 8. O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 9. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 10. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc. 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned -copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned -copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper. 1/4 by 4 inches (6.3 by 100 mm) in cross section, with 9/32-inch (7.14-mm) holes spaced 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. 2.4 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic -welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. Bus -Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression -type wire terminals, and long -barrel, two -bolt connection to ground bus bar. 16060-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 L2.5 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper -clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade. Duct -Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when indicated as part of duct -bank installation. C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green -colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow. D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 6 inches (150 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus. E. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses. 3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. 16060-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Metal -clad cable runs. C. Air -Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct -mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more. including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. D. Water Heater, Heat -Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat -tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch -circuit conductors. G. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2. 1. Grounding Conductor: Bare copper, not less than No. 8 AWG. 2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper. 3. Barbed Wire: Strands shall be bonded to the grounding conductor. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit. C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. 16060-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic -welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect -type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug -type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided -type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. G. Concrete -Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; using electrically conductive coated steel reinforcing bars or rods, at least 20 feet (6.0 m) long. If reinforcing is in multiple pieces, connect together by the usual steel tie wires or exothermic welding to create the required length. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground -resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. 16060-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall -of -potential method according to IEEE 81. B. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. D. Report measured ground resistances that exceed 5 ohms. E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 16060 16060-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PART 1 - GENERAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 16073 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract. including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections. apply to this Section, 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems. 16073 - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Welding certificates. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Section 07720 "Roof Accessories." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory -fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line. Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Metallic Coatings: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. 4. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items. 5. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except exterior mounted metal items may be stainless steel. 6. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. 16073 - 2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory -fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non -armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud. for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type, zinc -coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable -iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel, 1/4" (6 mm) minimum diameter. 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES Description: Welded or bolted, structural -steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. 16073 - 3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two -bolt conduit clamps. Spring -steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg). D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface -Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder -actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard -weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight -aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 or Spring -tension clamps. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted -channel racks attached to substrate. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 16073 - 4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 46- 3.3 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field -painted surfaces. • • 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). Touchup: Touch up paint on finished surfaces as directed by the Contracting Officers Representative.. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 16073 16073 - 5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PART 1 - GENERAL IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 16075 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for conductors. 2. Underground -line warning tape. 3. Equipment identification labels. 4. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. 1.4 COORDINATION Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings. manufacturer's wiring diagrams. and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size. 16075-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Label exposed conduits every 10 feet with circuiting or source information. Empty conduits shall have a nylon pull rope installed with 10 additional feet of pull rope coiled at each end. 2.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color -Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide. 2.3 UNDERGROUND -LINE WARNING TAPE A. Tape: 1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. 2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. Self -Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory -printed, multicolor, pressure -sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER — ARC FLASH HAZARD. APPROPRIATE PPE REQUIRED. FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN DEATH OR INJURY. REFER TO NFPA 70E." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)." 2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Self -Adhesive. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark -gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). 2.6 CABLE TIES General -Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 16075-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black except where used for color -coding. B. Plenum -Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi (48.2 MPa). 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C). 5. Color: Black. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self -tapping, stainless -steel screws or stainless -steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. System Identification Color -Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color -coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. F. Underground -Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground -line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall. 16075-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Power -Circuit Conductor Identification. 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color -coding conductor tape to identify the phase. Color -Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch -circuit conductors. a. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. c. Field -Applied, Color -Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half -lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. B. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field -installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions. terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory -installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground -line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 16075-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. e. Variable -speed controllers. f. Push-button stations. g. Power -generating units. END OF SECTION 16075 16075-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING SECTION 16091 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: • 1.3 1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non -fire -rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve -seal systems. 3. Sleeve -seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants. ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SLEEVES A. Wall Sleeves: Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated. plain ends. Cast -Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non -Fire -Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized -steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw -fastening the sleeve to the board. C. PVC -Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. D. Molded -PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 16091 - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING E. Molded -PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered -cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Material: Galvanized sheet steel. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm). b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm). 2.2 SLEEVE -SEAL SYSTEMS Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM or Nitrile (Buna N) rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 2.3 GROUT A. Description: Non -shrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non -fire - rated walls or floors. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Grade B, post -hardening and volume -adjusting, dry, hydraulic -cement grout. C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. 2.4 SILICONE SEALANTS A. Silicone Sealants: Single -component, silicone -based, neutral -curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below. Grade: Pourable (self -leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated. 16091 - 2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone -based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, non -shrinking foam. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON -FIRE -RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Comply with NECA 1. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above -Grade Non -Fire -Rated Concrete and Masonry -Unit Floors and Walls: Interior Penetrations of Non -Fire -Rated Walls and Floors: a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants." b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing. 2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core -drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non -Fire -Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. D. Roof -Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot -type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. E. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. END OF SECTION 16091 16091 - 3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 16120 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices. and terminations rated 600 V and less. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. Alpha Wire. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation. 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Southwire Incorporated. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN-2. D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for metal -clad cable, Type MC with ground wire. 16120-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Gardner Bender. 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. 9. Tyco Electronics. Description: Factory -fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating. material, type, and class for application and service indicated. 2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Electrical Components, Devices. and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. B. Exposed Circuits: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. C. Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway and Metal -clad cable, Type MC. 16120-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES D. Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on -Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2- THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway and Metal -clad cable, Type MC. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 16130 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. C. Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary: compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. Use pulling means, including fish tape. cable, rope. and basket -weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. F. Support cables according to Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION Identify and color -code conductors and cables according to Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor. 16120-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. END OF SECTION 16120 16120-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PART 1 - GENERAL RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 16130 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract. including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 5. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes. hinged -cover enclosures, and cabinets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to. the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 16130-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. O-Z/Gedney. 6. Picoma Industries. 7. Republic Conduit. 8. Robroy Industries. 9. Southwire Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 12. Wheatland Tube Company. B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. F. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. G. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc -coated steel or aluminum. H. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. I. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Setscrew or compression. 2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651. rated for environmental conditions where installed. and including flexible external bonding jumper. J. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS. TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to. the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corporation. 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. Kraloy. 16130-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 9. Lamson & Sessions: Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 11. RACO; Hubbell. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation. B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits. tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653. D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. F. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. G. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B. 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Mono -Systems, Inc. 4. Square D. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, type as indicated on plans and sized according to NFPA 70. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse -Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 16130-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman. 7. Hubbell Incorporated. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. Mono -Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney. 12. RACO; Hubbell. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non -Metallic Enclosures. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wremold / Legrand. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb (32 kg). F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. G. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm by 60 mm by 60 mm deep). I. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, type as indicated on plans galvanized -steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 16130-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 4 2.5 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: 1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70. for intended location and application. 2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Polymer -Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer -Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin. and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. NewBasis. d. Oldcastle Precast. Inc. e. Quazite: Hubbell Power System, Inc. f. Synertech Moulded Products. 2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial. 4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper -resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering. "ELECTRIC." 7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit -terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Aboveground: GRC or IMC. 2. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC or LFNC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Subject to Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the following: a. Apparatus bays • 16130-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): FMC. except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1 C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch (16-mm) trade size. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. F. Do not install aluminum conduits. boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. 3.2 INSTALLATION Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Comply with requirements in Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. G. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm)of enclosures to which attached. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m)intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 16130-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to GRC or IMC before rising above floor. I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive. or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. K. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. L. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. M. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. P. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. Q. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. R. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. S. Expansion -Joint Fittings: 1. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: 16130-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C)] temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F (70 deg C)] temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change. 2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits. 3. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 4. Install each expansion -joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. T. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. V. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. W. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. X. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. Y Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct -Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 02318 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities" for pipe less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter. 2. Install backfill as specified in Section 02318 " Excavation and Backfill for Utilities." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. 16130-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 022230 "Excavating, Trenching, and Backfilling for Pipe." 4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub -up ducts throughout length of elbow. 5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of the coupling. b. For stub -ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 6. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions. cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure. Field -cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. 3.5 FIRESTOPPING Install firestopping at penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07841 "Penetration Firestopping." 16130-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 3.6 PROTECTION RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 16130 16130-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS WIRING DEVICES Drawings and general provisions of the Contract. including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Isolated -ground receptacles. 3. Weather -resistant receptacles. 4. Snap switches and wall -box dimmers. 5. Wall -switch occupancy sensors. 6. Communications outlets. 7. Floor service outlets, poke -through assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter. C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch -circuit conductor. D. RFI: Radio -frequency interference. E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Receptacles for Owner -Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 16140-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS WIRING DEVICES A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing - label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 GENERAL WIRING -DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency. and marked for intended location and application. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section. 2.3 STRAIGHT -BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V. 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. B. Isolated -Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from 16140-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 WIRING DEVICES mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. 2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. General Description: 1. Straight blade. non -feed -through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 2.5 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION RECEPTACLES A. Available Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with NEMA FB 11 and UL 1010. 2.6 TOGGLE SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 2.7 DECORATOR -STYLE DEVICES A. Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, and UL 498. B. GFCI, Non -Feed -Through Type, Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A. C. GFCI, Tamper -Resistant and Weather -Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A. 1. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper -Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section. Toggle Switches, Square Face, 120/277 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W- S-896. E. Telephone/Data Outlet: 1. Description: Duplex RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four -pair UTP: TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 6. Comply with UL 1863. 16140-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 WIRING DEVICES F. Combination TV and Telephone Outlet: 1. Description: Simplex coax jack and Simplex RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four -pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 6. Comply with UL 1863. 2.8 FAN SPEED CONTROLS A. Modular, 120-V, full -wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on -off switches and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters. B. Comply with UL 1917. C. Continuously adjustable slider. 2.9 WALL PLATES Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high -impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. B. Wet -Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather - resistant thermoplastic with lockable cover. 2.10 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS A. Type: Modular, flush -type, dual -service units suitable for wiring method used. B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. C. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated. Quantity as noted on plans. D. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: RJ-45 jacks for UTP cable complying with requirements in Section 16767 "Communications Horizontal Cabling." Quantity as noted on plans. 2.11 POKE -THROUGH ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Factory -fabricated and -wired assembly of below -floor junction box with multichanneled, through -floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service -outlet assembly. 16140-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 WIRING DEVICES 2. Comply with UL 514 scrub water exclusion requirements. 3. Service -Outlet Assembly: Flush type complying with requirements in Section 16767 "Communications Horizontal Cabling." Receptacle and data port quantities as indicated on plans. 4. Size: Selected to fit nominal 4-inch (100-mm) cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness. 5. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor -ceiling assembly. 2.12 FINISHES A. Device Color: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound. mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. Device Installation: 16140-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 WIRING DEVICES 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding -head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three -fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device -mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal -to -metal contact. E. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra -deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. F. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. G. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. B. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 16140-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 C. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 16140 16140-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid WIRING DEVICES ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PART 1 - GENERAL ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 16141 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Receptacle switches. 4. Shunt trip switches. 5. Molded -case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 6. Molded -case switches. 7. Enclosures. 411 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NC: Normally closed. B. NO: Normally open. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. • 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. 6. Include time -current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 16141-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Field quality -control reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. C. Manufacturer's field service report. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 2. Time -current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device: include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on -site testing. B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 16141-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that shall be incorporated into the Work shall be one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D: a brand of Schneider Electric. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 4. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 5. Service -Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 16141-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. available manufacturers offering products that shall be incorporated into the Work shall be one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D: a brand of Schneider Electric. Type HD. Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 2.3 MOLDED -CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that shall be incorporated into the Work shall be one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. C. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. D. Adjustable, Instantaneous -Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front -mounted, field -adjustable trip setting. E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field -replaceable rating plug. rms sensing, with the following field -adjustable settings: 1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short -time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short -time time adjustments. 4. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response. Current -Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let -through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 16141-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS G. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal -magnetic trip element with integral limiter -style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door. H. Ground -Fault, Circuit -Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two -pole configurations with Class A ground -fault protection (6-mA trip). I. Ground -Fault, Equipment -Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground -fault protection (30-mA trip). J. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes. trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size. trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high -intensity discharge lighting circuits. 4. Ground -Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self -powered type with mechanical ground -fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time -delay settings, push -to -test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero - sequence current transformer/sensor. 2.4 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Mechanical room: NEMA 250, Type 12 3. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250. 316 SS Type 4X. 4. Kitchen Wash -Down Areas: NEMA 250. 316 SS Type 4X. 5. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, 316 SS Type 4X. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install individual wall -mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. Install fuses in fusible devices. 16141-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 D. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Comply with requirements in Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated -plastic nameplate. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components. assemblies. and equipment installations, including connections. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. 16141-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS B. Set field -adjustable circuit -breaker trip ranges based upon the Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study. END OF SECTION 16141 16141-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PART 1 - GENERAL DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM SECTION 16144 DIGITAL. ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Fire -alarm control unit. 2. Manual fire -alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Heat detectors. 5. Notification appliances. 6. Device guards. 7. Graphic annunciator. 8. Addressable interface device. 9. Digital alarm communicator transmitter. 10. Radio alarm transmitter. 11. Network communications. 12. System printer. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing. B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel. C. HLI: High Level Interface. D. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies. E. PC: Personal computer. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes. 16144-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: For fire -alarm system. 1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification -appliance circuits. 3. Include battery -size calculations. 4. Include input/output matrix. 5. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72. 6. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams. C. General Submittal Requirements: 1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect. 2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications: a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire -alarm system design. b. NICET-certified, fire -alarm technician; Level III minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire -alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Software operating and upgrade manuals. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. Device address list. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform a full test of the existing system prior to starting work. Document any equipment or components not functioning as designed. B. Interruption of Existing Fire -Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire -alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service. C. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are placed in service to protect the facility during construction. 16144-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM A. Source Limitations for Fire -Alarm System and Components: Components shall be compatible with, and operate as an extension of, existing system. Provide system manufacturer's certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION A. Fire -alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices[ and systems]: 1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Duct smoke detectors. 5. Carbon monoxide detectors. 6. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. Fire -alarm signal shall initiate the following actions: 1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire -alarm control unit. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 5. Activate voice/alarm communication system. 6. Switch heating. ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire -alarm mode. 7. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors. 8. Activate elevator power shunt trip. 9. Activate emergency lighting control. 10. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 11. Record events in the system memory. 12. Record events by the system printer. 13. Indicate device in alarm on the graphic annunciator. C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Valve supervisory switch. 2. Elevator shunt -trip supervision. 3. User disabling of zones or individual devices. 4. Loss of communication with any panel on the network. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 16144-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm -initiating and supervisory signal -initiating devices. 3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input modulerelay, control module, remote annunciator, printer interface, or Ethernet module. 4. Loss of primary power at fire -alarm control unit. 5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire -alarm control unit. 6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire -alarm control unit. 7. Break in standby battery circuitry. 8. Failure of battery charging. 9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire -alarm control unit or annunciator. E. System Supervisory Signal Actions: 1. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire -alarm control unit. 2. Record the event on system printer. 3. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Transmit system status to building management system. 5. Display system status on graphic annunciator. 2.3 FIRE -ALARM CONTROL UNIT Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Bosch Security Systems. 2. Faraday. 3. Fike Corporation. 4. Fire-Lite Alarms. 5. GAMEWELL. 6. GE UTC Fire & Security; A United Technologies Company. 7. Keltron Corporation. 8. Mircom Technologies, Ltd. 9. Notifier. 10. Siemens Industry, Inc.; Fire Safety Division. 11. Silent Knight. 12. SimplexGrinnell LP. B. General Requirements for Fire -Alarm Control Unit: Field -programmable, microprocessor -based, modular, power -limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864. a. System software and programs shall be held in nonvolatile flash, electrically erasable, programmable, read-only memory, retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies. b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer. c. Provide communication between the FACP and remote displays. 16144-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM d. The FACP shall be listed for connection to a central -station signaling system service. e. Provide nonvolatile memory for system database, logic, and operating system and event history. The system shall require no manual input to initialize in the event of a complete power down condition. The FACP shall provide a minimum 500-event history log. 2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate which communication zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification appliance by building communication zone. 3. Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and Mechanical Equipment: The FACP shall be listed for releasing service. C. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire -alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu. D. Initiating -Device, Notification -Appliance, and Signaling -Line Circuits: 1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class A. E. Notification -Appliance Circuit: 1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three -pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72. 2. Where notification appliances provide signals to sleeping areas, the alarm signal shall be a 520-Hz square wave with an intensity 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level, or at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater, measured at the pillow. 3. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72. F. Elevator Recall: 1. Elevator recall shall be initiated only by one of the following alarm -initiating devices: a. Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor. b. Smoke detector in elevator machine room. c. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway. 2. Elevator controller shall be programmed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor if lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors are activated. 3. Water -flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room shall shut down elevators associated with the location without time delay. a. Water -flow switch associated with the sprinkler in the elevator pit may have a delay to allow elevators to move to the designated floor. G. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm. supervisory. and trouble signals to a remote alarm station. 16144-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM H. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events. I. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power -supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source. J. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch. K. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless -steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. 2.4 MANUAL FIRE -ALARM BOXES A. Manufacturers: match control panel. B. General Requirements for Manual Fire -Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised -letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS A. Manufacturers: match control panel. B. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: 1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire -alarm control unit. 3. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist -lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. 4. Self -Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 5. Integral Visual -Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated. C. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Detector address shall be accessible from fire -alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 16144-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 2. An operator at fire -alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A. Detector address shall be accessible from fire -alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. An operator at fire -alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). 3. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 4. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 5. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor -control circuit. 2.6 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS A. General: Carbon monoxide detector listed for connection to fire -alarm system. 1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Testable by introducing test carbon monoxide into the sensing cell. 3. Detector shall provide alarm contacts and trouble contacts. 4. Detector shall send trouble alarm when nearing end -of -life, power supply problems, or internal faults. 5. Comply with UL 2075. 6. Locate, mount, and wire according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Provide means for addressable connection to fire -alarm system. 8. Test button simulates an alarm condition. 2.7 MULTICRITERIA DETECTORS Mounting: Twist -lock base interchangeable with smoke -detector bases. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire -alarm control unit. 16144-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM C. Automatically adjusts its sensitivity by means of drift compensation and smoothing algorithms. The detector shall send trouble alarm if it is incapable of compensating for existing conditions. Test button tests all sensors in the detector. E. An operator at fire -alarm control unit, having the designated access levelshall be able to manually access the following for each detector: 1. Primary status. 2. Device type. 3. Present sensitivity selected. 4. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). F. Sensors: The detector shall be comprised of four sensing elements including a smoke sensor, a carbon monoxide sensor, an infrared sensor, and a heat sensor. 1. Smoke sensor shall be photoelectric type as described in "System Smoke Detectors" Article. 2. Carbon monoxide sensor shall be as described in "Carbon Monoxide Detectors" Article. 3. Heat sensor shall be as described in "Heat Detectors" Article. 4. Each sensor shall be separately listed according to requirements for its detector type. 2.8 HEAT DETECTORS A. Manufacturers: match control panel. B. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521. 1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F (57 deg C) or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F (8 deg C) per minute unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting: Twist -lock base interchangeable with smoke -detector bases. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire -alarm control unit. 2.9 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Manufacturers: match control panel B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a signaling -line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections. 16144-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM C. Horns: Electric -vibrating -polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound -pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet (3 m) from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol. D. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) high letters on the lens. 1. Rated Light Output: a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field. 2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with guards in place. 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 2.10 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE A. General: 1. Include address -setting means on the module. 2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type. 3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers. B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm -initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts. C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal. 1. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command. Control Module: 1. Operate notification devices. 2.11 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632. B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire - alarm control unit and automatically capture telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. 16144-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal. C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following: 1. Verification that both telephone lines are available. 2. Programming device. 3. LED display. 4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication. 5. Communications failure with the central station or fire -alarm control unit. D. Digital data transmission shall include the following: 1. Address of the alarm -initiating device. 2. Address of the supervisory signal. 3. Address of the trouble -initiating device. 4. Loss of ac supply. 5. Loss of power. 6. Low battery. 7. Abnormal test signal. 8. Communication bus failure. E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. F. Self -Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station. 2.12 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS A. Provide network communications for fire -alarm system according to fire -alarm manufacturer's written requirements. Provide network communications pathway per manufacturer's written requirements and requirements in NFPA 72 and NFPA 70. C. Provide integration gateway for connection to building automation system. 2.13 SYSTEM PRINTER A. Printer shall be listed and labeled as an integral part of fire -alarm system. 2.14 DEVICE GUARDS A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong, or other device requiring protection. Factory fabricated and furnished by device manufacturer. 16144-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire -alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760. "Fire Alarm Systems." Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be replaced. 2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust, debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage instructions. B. Install wall -mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches (1980 mm) above the finished floor. C. Manual Fire -Alarm Boxes: Install manual fire -alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches (1520 mm) of the exit doorway. Mount manual fire -alarm box on a background of a contrasting color. The operable part of manual fire -alarm box shall be between 42 inches (1060 mm) and 48 inches (1220 mm) above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise indicated. D. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover. E. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches (9100 mm) long shall be supported at both ends. 16144-11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM Do not install smoke detector in duct smoke -detector housing during construction. Install detector only during system testing and prior to system turnover. F. Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location. Do not install smoke detectors in sprinklered elevator shafts. G. Audible Alarm -Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush -mounted back boxes with the device -operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated. H. Visible Alarm -Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches (910 mm) from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled. 1. Electronically locked doors and access gates. 2. Alarm -initiating connection to elevator recall system and components. 3. Alarm -initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control. 4. Alarm -initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 5. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. 6. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt -trip breaker. 7. Data communication circuits for connection to building management system. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION Identify system components, wiring. cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Install instructions in a location visible from fire -alarm control unit. 3.5 GROUNDING A. Ground fire -alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire -alarm control unit. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative: 16144-12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid 46, • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM 1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing. a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. b. Comply with the 'Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components. 2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound -level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4. 4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Factory -authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances. C. Fire -alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. E. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire -alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. 3.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3.8 DEMONSTRATION Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire -alarm system. END OF SECTION 16144 16144-13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SECTION 16146 LIGHTNING PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS LIGHTNING PROTECTION A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section includes lightning protection for structures. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit plans for the system design, stamped by a Certified UL or LPI Master Designer. Layout of the lightning protection system, along with details of the components to be used in the installation. Include indications for use of raceway, data on how concealment requirements will be met, and calculations required by NFPA 780 for bonding of grounded and isolated metal bodies. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Certified by UL or LPI as a Master Installer/Designer, trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. System Certificate: 1. UL Master Label. 2. LPI System Certificate. 3. UL Master Label Recertification. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 780, "Definitions" Article. 16146-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 1.5 COORDINATION LIGHTNING PROTECTION A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building materials, metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and building finishes. Coordinate installation of air terminals attached to roof systems with roofing manufacturer and Installer. C. Flashings of through -roof assemblies shall comply with roofing manufacturers' specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Comply with UL 96 and NFPA 780. B. Roof -Mounted Air Terminals: NFPA 780, Class I. unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. East Coast Lightning Equipment Inc. b. ERICO International Corporation. c. Hamer. d. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co. Inc. e. Independent Protection Co. f. Preferred Lightning Protection. g. Robbins Lightning, Inc. h. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. 2. Air Terminals More than 24 Inches (600 mm) Long: With brace attached to the terminal at not less than half the height of the terminal. 3. Single -Membrane, Roof -Mounted Air Terminals: Designed specifically for single - membrane roof system materials. Comply with requirements in roofing Sections. C. Main and Bonding Conductors: Copper. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96A and NFPA 780. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid sharp bends. 16146-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 C. Conceal the following conductors: LIGHTNING PROTECTION 1. System conductors. 2. Down conductors. 3. Interior conductors. 4. Conductors within normal view of exterior locations at grade within 200 feet (60 m) of building. D. Cable Connections: Use crimped or bolted connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components. Use exothermic -welded connections in underground portions of the system. Air Terminals on Single -Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with roofing membrane and adhesive manufacturer's written instructions. F. Bond extremities of vertical metal bodies exceeding 60 feet (18 m) in length to lightning protection components. Bond lightning protection components with intermediate -level interconnection loop conductors to grounded metal bodies of building at 60-foot (18-m) intervals. 3.2 CORROSION PROTECTION Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such materials. B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightning protection components. UL Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain a UL Master Label for system. LPI System Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain an LPI System Certificate. END OF SECTION 16146 16146-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 16231 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes packaged engine -generator sets for standby power supply with the following features: 1. Diesel engine. 2. Unit -mounted cooling system. 3. Unit -mounted control and monitoring. 4. Performance requirements for sensitive loads. 5. Load banks. 6. Outdoor enclosure. Related Sections include the following: Section 16415 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic -starting and -stopping signals for engine -generator sets. 1.3 DEFINITIONS Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter. LP: Liquid petroleum. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the following: 16231 - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 Thermal damage curve for generator. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 2. Time -current characteristic curves for generator protective device. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine -generator set and other components specified. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration isolation bases. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For installer, manufacturer, and service representative conducting tests. B. Source quality -control test reports. 1. Certified summary of prototype -unit test report. 2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not identical, to those tested on prototype unit. 3. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements. 4. Report of sound generation. 5. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations. 6. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110. C. Field quality -control test reports. D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01770 "Contract Closeout," include the following: 16231 - 2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each. 2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of each. 3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion -air filters. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. 1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than four hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vibration isolators of engine skid mounts, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs. C. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer. Electrical Components, Devices. and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. E. Comply with ASME B15.1. F. Comply with NFPA 37. G. Comply with NFPA 70. H. Comply with NFPA 99. I. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 2 emergency power supply system. J. Comply with UL 2200. K. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements. 16231 - 3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS L. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling -air intake and discharge, and other components of installation. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: Notify Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission. Environmental Conditions: Engine -generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability: 1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 40 deg C. 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Cast anchor - bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.12 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 16231 - 4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PART 2 - PRODUCTS PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.(Basis of Design) 2.2 ENGINE -GENERATOR SET Factory -assembled and -tested, engine -generator set. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator -set center of gravity. Capacities and Characteristics: Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as required to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing. 2. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire. 3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and address, and model and serial number of component. D. Generator -Set Performance: 1. Steady -State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step -load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady- state operating band within three seconds. 3. Steady -State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load. 4. Steady -State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady- state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed. 5. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step - load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within five seconds. 16231 - 5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 6. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent. 7. Sustained Short -Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full -load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator system components. 8. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements. 2.3 ENGINE A. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF-2. B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm. C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four -Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm. D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid: Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe. 3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools. or appliances. E. Engine Fuel System: Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions. 2. Relief -Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to source. F. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric -immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity. G. Governor: Mechanical. H. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine -generator - set mounting frame and integral engine -driven coolant pump. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene -glycol -based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer. 16231 -6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid oi, r ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition. 3. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic -control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion -resistant fabric. a. Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F, and noncollapsible under vacuum. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with damps to suit piping and equipment connections. Muffler/Silencer: Industrial type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements. Minimum sound attenuation of 12 dB at 500 Hz. 2. Sound level measured at a distance of 25 feet from exhaust discharge after installation is complete shall be 87 dBA or less. J. Air -Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine -mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry -filter element and "blocked filter" indicator. Starting System: 24-V electric, with negative ground. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine -cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. 2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding. 3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified. 4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least twice without recharging. 5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories. 6. Battery -Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating. 7. Battery Charger: Current -limiting. automatic -equalizing and float -charging type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features: 16231 - 7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS a. Operation: Equalizing -charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float - charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again. b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures. c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging rates. e. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall -mounted cabinet. 2.4 FUEL OIL STORAGE A. Comply with NFPA 30. B. Base -Mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, complying with UL 142 fuel oil tank. Features include the following: 1. Tank level indicator. 2. Capacity: Fuel for 24 hours' continuous operation at 100 percent rated power output. 3. Vandal -resistant fill cap. 4. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode -selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote -control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode -selector switch is switched to the on position. generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator -set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency -stop switch also shuts down generator set. B. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator -set vibration. C. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level [1] [2] system. and the following: 16231 -8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 1. AC voltmeter. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine -coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating -oil pressure gage. 7. Running -time meter. 8. Ammeter -voltmeter, phase -selector switch(es). 9. Generator -voltage adjusting rheostat. 10. Fuel tank derangement alarm. 11. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. 12. Generator overload. D. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated. E. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush - mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated. F. Remote Emergency -Stop Switch: Flush: wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated: and labeled. Push button shall be protected from accidental operation. 2.6 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded -case, thermal -magnetic type; 100 percent rated; complying with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection. 2. Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protective devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel. 16231 - 9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 5. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel. B. Generator Protector: Microprocessor -based unit shall continuously monitor current level in each phase of generator output, integrate generator heating effect over time, and predict when thermal damage of alternator will occur. When signaled by generator protector or other generator -set protective devices. a shunt -trip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the switch to disconnect the generator from load circuits. Protector shall perform the following functions: Initiates a generator overload alarm when generator has operated at an overload equivalent to 110 percent of full -rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is integrated with other generator -set malfunction alarms. 2. Under single or three-phase fault conditions, regulates generator to 300 percent of rated full -load current for up to 10 seconds. 3. As overcurrent heating effect on the generator approaches the thermal damage point of the unit, protector switches the excitation system off. opens the generator disconnect device, and shuts down the generator set. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated voltage to avoid overshoot. C. Ground -Fault Indication: Comply with NFPA 70, "Emergency System" signals for ground -fault. Integrate ground -fault alarm indication with other generator -set alarm indications. 2.7 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR A. Comply with NEMA MG 1. B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor. C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F. D. Stator -Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required. E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity. F. Enclosure: Dripproof. G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure. H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent adjustment of output -voltage operating band. 16231 - 10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew point. J. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding. K. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum. 2.8 OUTDOOR GENERATOR -SET ENCLOSURE A. Description: Vandal -resistant, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 100 mph. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control shall be mounted within enclosure. Description: Prefabricated or preengineered walk-in enclosure with the following features: 1. Construction: Galvanized -steel, metal -clad. integral structural -steel -framed building erected on concrete foundation. 2. Structural Design and Anchorage: Comply with ASCE 7 for wind loads. 3. Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled and sized to prevent condensation. Louvers: Equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation when engine is not running while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents. 5. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions. 6. Ventilation: Louvers equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents. Thermal Insulation: Manufacturer's standard materials and thickness selected in coordination with space heater to maintain winter interior temperature within operating limits required by engine -generator -set components. 8. Muffler Location: Within enclosure. C. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions. 1. Louvers: Fixed -engine, cooling -air inlet and discharge. Storm -proof and drainable louvers prevent entry of rain and snow. 2. Automatic Dampers: At engine cooling -air inlet and discharge. Dampers shall be closed to reduce enclosure heat loss in cold weather when unit is not operating. D. Interior Lights with Switch: Factory -wired, vaporproof-type fixtures within housing; arranged to illuminate controls and accessible interior. Provide for external electrical connection. 1. AC lighting system and connection point for operation when remote source is available. 16231 - 11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS E. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired, GFCI. Provide electrical connection. 2.9 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES A. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized -steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area. and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Material: Standard neoprene or natural rubber. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open -spring isolators with seismic restraint. 1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical -limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory -drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 2.10 FINISHES A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion -resistant pretreatment and compatible primer. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine -generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115. B. Project -Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine -generator set and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests: 1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability. 2. Full load run. 3. Maximum power. 16231 - 12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Transient and steady-state governing. 6. Single-step load pickup. 7. Safety shutdown. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 8. Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by Owner's representative. 9. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine -generator performance. Examine roughing -in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine -generator installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION Comply with packaged engine -generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance. C. Install packaged engine generator with elastomeric isolator pads or restrained spring isolators having a minimum deflection of 1 inch on 6-inch- high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints and connect to engine muffler. Install thimble at wall. Piping shall be same diameter as muffler outlet. Flexible connectors and steel piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Section 15400 "Plumbing." 1. Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full size of drain connection with a shutoff valve, stainless -steel flexible connector, and Schedule 40, black steel pipe with welded joints. Flexible connectors and piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Section 15400 "Plumbing." Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted. 16231 - 13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 3.3 CONNECTIONS PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. B. Connect fuel, cooling -system, and exhaust -system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector. D. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector. E. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." F. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Low -voltage electrical power conductors and cables." 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components according to Section 16075 " Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing. B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection (except those indicated to be optional) for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here including. but not limited to, single-step full -load pickup test. 3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages. a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full -charging and float -charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions. 16231 - 14 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery. c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications. Battery -Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float - charging conditions. 5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine -generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks. 6. Exhaust -System Back -Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40- inch wg. Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure at full -rated load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the engine. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria. 8. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step -load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified. 9. Harmonic -Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits. 10. Noise Level Tests: Measure A -weighted level of noise emanating from generator -set installation, including engine exhaust and cooling -air intake and discharge, at six locations on the property line, and compare measured levels with required values. D. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently. E. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records available for examination on request. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. H. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 16231 - 15 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS J. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met. K. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each bus connection. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are accessible to portable scanner. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies terminations and connections checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. END OF SECTION 16231 16231 - 16 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS SECTION 16289 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes field -mounted SPDs for low -voltage (120 to 600 V) power distribution and control equipment. Related Requirements: Section 16442 "Panelboards" for factory -installed SPDs. • 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Inominal: Nominal discharge current. B. MCOV: Maximum continuous operating voltage. MOV: Metal -oxide varistor: an electronic component with a significant non -ohmic current - voltage characteristic. D. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device. E. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating. F. SPD: Surge protective device. G. VPR: Voltage protection rating. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 16289-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 2. Copy of UL Category Code VZCA certification. as a minimum, listing the tested values for VPRs, (nominal ratings, MCOVs, type designations, OCPD requirements, model numbers, system voltages, and modes of protection. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality -control reports. B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Maintenance Data: For SPDs to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace or replace SPDs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 ABB France. 2. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT). 3. Eaton Corporation. 4. GE Zenith Controls. 5. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 6. PowerLogics. Inc. 7. Schneider Electric Industries SAS. 8. Siemens Industry, Inc. 2.2 GENERAL SPD REQUIREMENTS A. SPD with Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with UL 1449. 16289-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS D. MCOV of the SPD shall be at least 125 percent of the nominal system voltage. 2.3 PANEL SUPPRESSORS SPDs: Comply with UL 1449, Type 2. 1. Include LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 2. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal suppressor components. 3. Include Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed. for remote monitoring of protection status. B. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single -pulse surge current withstand rating per phase shall not be less than 100 kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode. C. Comply with UL 1283. D. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V and 208Y/120 V, three-phase, four -wire circuits shall not exceed the following: 1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V and 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V and 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V and 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 4. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V and 1200 V for 208Y/120 V E. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for 240/120-V, single-phase, three -wire circuits shall not exceed the following: 1. Line to Neutral: 700 V. 2. Line to Ground: 700 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 700 V. 4. Line to Line: 1200 V. SCCR: Equal or exceed 100 kA. G. Inominal Rating: 20 kA. 2.4 ENCLOSURES A. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2.5 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Power Wiring: Same size as SPD leads, complying with Section 16120 " Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 16289-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS B. Class 2 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG, complying with Section 16120 " Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Install an OCPD or disconnect as required to comply with the UL listing of the SPD. C. Install SPDs with conductors between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible, and adjust circuit -breaker positions to achieve shortest and straightest leads. Do not splice and extend SPD leads unless specifically permitted by manufacturer. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground. D. Use crimped connectors and splices only. Wire nuts are unacceptable. E. Wiring: Power Wiring: Comply with wiring methods in Section 16120 " Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative. 1. Compare equipment nameplate data for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. 2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. 3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation requirements. B. An SPD will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.3 STARTUP SERVICE A. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Do not perform insulation -resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with SPDs installed. Disconnect SPDs before conducting insulation -resistance tests, and reconnect them immediately after the testing is over. Energize SPDs after power system has been energized, stabilized. and tested. 16289-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate and maintain SPDs. END OF SECTION 16289 16289-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TRANSFER SWITCHES SECTION 16415 TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and Tess, including the following: 1. Automatic transfer switches. 2. Bypass/isolation switches. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 16231 "Packaged Engine Generators." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified. 1. Single -Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch, power sources, and Toad; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and individual supervising field tests. B. Field quality -control reports. 16415 - 1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TRANSFER SWITCHES A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01770 "Contract Closeout," include the following: 1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay -setting and calibration instructions, including software, where applicable. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification. B. Factory Authorized Service Representative: Person currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on -site testing specified in Part 3. C. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches and bypass/isolation switches through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1. F. Comply with NFPA 70. G. Comply with NFPA 99. H. Comply with NFPA 110. I. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service: 16415-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TRANSFER SWITCHES 1. Notify Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission. 1.8 COORDINATION Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 03300 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Contactor Transfer Switches: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group. 2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER -SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated. B. Tested Fault -Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008. Where transfer switch includes internal fault -current protection, rating of switch and trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault -current value at installation location. C. Solid -State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage -surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage -impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric - motor -operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions. 16415-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TRANSFER SWITCHES F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous -duty repetitive transfer of full -rated current between active power sources. 1. Limitation: Switches using molded -case switches or circuit breakers or insulated -case circuit -breaker components are not acceptable. 2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load -current switching. Conventional automatic transfer -switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts. G. Neutral Switching. Where four -pole switches are indicated, provide neutral pole switched simultaneously with phase poles. H. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated. Oversize Neutral: Ampacity and switch rating of neutral path through units indicated for oversize neutral shall be double the nominal rating of circuit in which switch is installed. J. Heater: Equip switches exposed to outdoor temperatures and humidity, and other units indicated, with an internal heater. Provide thermostat within enclosure to control heater. K. Annunciation, Control. and Programming Interface Components: Devices at transfer switches for communicating with remote programming devices, annunciators, or annunciator and control panels shall have communication capability matched with remote device. L. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, either by color -code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations. Color -coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Section 16075 " Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated. Power -Terminal Arrangement and Field -Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated. 3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips. M. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 3R, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110. 16415 - 4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TRANSFER SWITCHES Switching Arrangement: Double -throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated. C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation. D. Manual Switch Operation: Unloaded. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation. Signal -Before -Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds. Programmed Neutral Switch Position: Switch operator has a programmed neutral position arranged to provide a midpoint between the two working switch positions, with an intentional, time -controlled pause at midpoint during transfer. Pause is adjustable from 0.5 to 30 seconds minimum and factory set for 0.5 second, unless otherwise indicated. Time delay occurs for both transfer directions. Pause is disabled unless both sources are live. G. Automatic Transfer -Switch Features: 1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase -to -ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent. 2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal -source voltage sensing to delay transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored. 5. Test Switch: Simulate normal -source failure. 6. Switch -Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 7. Source -Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer -switch normal- and emergency -source sensing circuits. a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available." 16415-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TRANSFER SWITCHES b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Available." 8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single -pole, double -throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac. 9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status. 10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V do minimum. 11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine -generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source. 12. Engine -Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable -time switch starts engine generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool -down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5- minute cool -down period. Exerciser features include the following: a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without load transfer. b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings. c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not available. 2.4 BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCHES Comply with requirements for Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110. Description: Manual type, arranged to select and connect either source of power directly to load, isolating transfer switch from load and from both power sources. Include the following features for each combined automatic transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch: 1. Means to lock bypass/isolation switch in the position that isolates transfer switch with an arrangement that permits complete electrical testing of transfer switch while isolated. While isolated, interlocks prevent transfer -switch operation, except for testing or maintenance. 2. Drawout Arrangement for Transfer Switch: Provide physical separation from live parts and accessibility for testing and maintenance operations. 3. Bypass/Isolation Switch Current, Voltage, Closing, and Short -Circuit Withstand Ratings: Equal to or greater than those of associated automatic transfer switch, and with same phase arrangement and number of poles. 16415 - 6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid t • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TRANSFER SWITCHES 4. Contact temperatures of bypass/isolation switches shall not exceed those of automatic transfer -switch contacts when they are carrying rated load. Operability: Constructed so load bypass and transfer -switch isolation can be performed by 1 person in no more than 2 operations in 15 seconds or less. 6. Legend: Manufacturer's standard legend for control labels and instruction signs shall describe operating instructions. Maintainability: Fabricate to allow convenient removal of major components from front without removing other parts or main power conductors. C. Interconnection of Bypass/Isolation Switches with Automatic Transfer Switches: Factory - installed copper bus bars: plated at connection points and braced for the indicated available short-circuit current. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time -delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Floor -Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting. Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more than 2 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switch. Construct concrete bases according to Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." B. Identify components according to Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems." C. Set field -adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock. 3.2 CONNECTIONS Wiring to Remote Components: Provide type and number of cables and conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring. 16415 - 7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TRANSFER SWITCHES B. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems " C. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Low -voltage electrical power Conductors and Cables." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Perform the following tests and inspections under the supervision of a factory -authorized service representative: After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Measure insulation resistance phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground with insulation - resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance. a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation. 4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times. a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available. b. Simulate loss of phase -to -ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time -delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings. e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer -switch operations. f. Perform contact -resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles. g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting. transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool - down and shutdown. 16415-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 TRANSFER SWITCHES 5. Ground -Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground -fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources. a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors. C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. F Prepare test and inspection reports. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected. remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Retain paragraph below if generators are in Project. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment. END OF SECTION 16415 16415-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PART 1 - GENERAL STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SECTION 16440 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Three-phase, on-line, double -conversion, static -type, UPS units with the following features: a. Surge suppression. b. Input harmonics reduction. c. Rectifier -charger. d. Inverter. e. Static bypass transfer switch. f. Battery and battery disconnect device. g. Internal maintenance bypass/isolation switch. h. Output isolation transformer. i. Remote UPS monitoring provisions. j. Battery monitoring. k. Remote monitoring. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. LCD: Liquid -crystal display. C. LED: Light -emitting diode. D. PC: Personal computer. E. THD: Total harmonic distortion. F. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply. 16440-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on features, components, ratings, and performance. Shop Drawings: For UPS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions. weights, components, and location and identification of each field connection. Show access, workspace, and clearance requirements; details of control panels; and battery arrangement. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified powered quality specialist. B. Manufacturer Certificates: For each product, from manufacturer. C. Factory Test Reports: Comply with specified requirements. D. Field quality -control reports. E. Performance Test Reports: Indicate test results compared with specified performance requirements, and provide justification and resolution of differences if values do not agree. F. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For UPS units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: One (1) for every ten (10) of each type and rating, but no fewer than one (1) of each. 2. Cabinet Ventilation Filters: One complete set(s). 16440-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 (16 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY A. Power Quality Specialist Qualifications: A registered professional electrical engineer or engineering technician, currently certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies, NICET Level 4, minimum, experienced in performance testing UPS installations and in performing power quality surveys similar to that required in "Performance Testing" Article. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on -site testing. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. UL Compliance: Listed and labeled under UL 1778 by an NRTL. NFPA Compliance: Mark UPS components as suitable for installation in computer rooms according to NFPA 75. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Battery Warranties: Specified form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace UPS system storage batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranted Cycle Life for Valve -Regulated, Lead -Calcium Batteries: Equal to or greater than that represented in manufacturer's published table, including figures corresponding to the following, based on annual average battery temperature of 77 deg F (25 deg C): Discharge Rate Discharge Duration 8 hours 30 minutes 15 minutes 8 hours 30 minutes 45 seconds Discharge End Voltage 1.67 1.67 1.67 Cycle Life 6 cycles 20 cycles 120 cycles 2. Warranted Cycle Life for Premium Valve -Regulated, Lead -calcium Batteries: Equal to or greater than that represented in manufacturer's published table, including figures corresponding to the following, based on annual average battery temperature of 77 deg F (25 deg C): Discharge Rate Discharge Duration 8 hours 30 minutes 15 minutes 8 hours 30 minutes 1.5 minutes Discharge End Voltage 1.67 1.67 1.67 Cycle Life 40 cycles 125 cycles 750 cycles 3. Warranted Cycle Life for Flooded Batteries: Equal to or greater than that represented in manufacturer's published table, including figures corresponding to the following, based on annual average battery temperature of 77 deg F (25 deg C): 16440-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 Discharge Rate 8 hours 1 hour 15 minutes Discharge Duration 8 hours 1 hour 45 seconds STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Discharge End Voltage 1.75 1.75 1.67 Cycle Life 40 cycles 80 cycles 2700 cycles B. Special UPS Warranties: Specified form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within special warranty period. 1. Special Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Automatic operation includes the following: 1. Normal Conditions: Load is supplied with power flowing from the normal power input terminals, through the rectifier -charger and inverter, with the battery connected in parallel with the rectifier -charger output. 2. Abnormal Supply Conditions: If normal supply deviates from specified and adjustable voltage, voltage waveform, or frequency limits, the battery supplies energy to maintain constant, regulated inverter power output to the load without switching or disturbance. 3. If normal power fails, energy supplied by the battery through the inverter continues supply -regulated power to the load without switching or disturbance. 4. When power is restored at the normal supply terminals of the system, controls automatically synchronize the inverter with the external source before transferring the load. The rectifier -charger then supplies power to the load through the inverter and simultaneously recharges the battery. 5. If the battery becomes discharged and normal supply is available, the rectifier -charger charges the battery. On reaching full charge, the rectifier -charger automatically shifts to float -charge mode. 6. If any element of the UPS system fails and power is available at the normal supply terminals of the system, the static bypass transfer switch switches the load to the normal ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption. 7 If a fault occurs in the system supplied by the UPS, and current flows in excess of the overload rating of the UPS system, the static bypass transfer switch operates to bypass the fault current to the normal ac supply circuit for fault clearing. 8. When the fault has cleared, the static bypass transfer switch returns the load to the UPS system. 9. If the battery is disconnected, the UPS continues to supply power to the load with no degradation of its regulation of voltage and frequency of the output bus. Manual operation includes the following: Turning the inverter off causes the static bypass transfer switch to transfer the load directly to the normal ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption. 16440-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 2. Turning the inverter on causes the static bypass transfer switch to transfer the load to the inverter. C. Maintenance Bypass/Isolation Switch Operation: Switch is interlocked so it cannot be operated unless the static bypass transfer switch is in the bypass mode. Device provides manual selection among the three conditions in subparagraphs below without interrupting supply to the load during switching: 1. Full Isolation: Load is supplied, bypassing the UPS. Normal UPS ac input circuit, static bypass transfer switch, and UPS load terminals are completely disconnected from external circuits. 2. Maintenance Bypass: Load is supplied, bypassing the UPS. UPS ac supply terminals are energized to permit operational checking. but system load terminals are isolated from the load. 3. Normal: Normal UPS ac supply terminals are energized and the load is supplied through either the static bypass transfer switch and the UPS rectifier -charger and inverter, or the battery and the inverter. D. Environmental Conditions: The UPS shall be capable of operating continuously in the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability, except battery performance. 1. Ambient Temperature for Electronic Components: 32 to 104 deg F (0 to 40 deg C). 2. Ambient Temperature for Battery: 41 to 95 deg F (5 to 35 deg C). 3. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing. 4. Altitude: Sea level to 4000 feet (1220 m). 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. The UPS shall perform as specified in this article while supplying rated full -load current, composed of any combination of linear and nonlinear load, up to 100 percent nonlinear load with a load crest factor of 3.0, under the following conditions or combinations of the following conditions: 1. Inverter is switched to battery source. 2. Steady-state ac input voltage deviates up to plus or minus 10 percent from nominal voltage. 3. Steady-state input frequency deviates up to plus or minus 5 percent from nominal frequency. 4. THD of input voltage is 15 percent or more with a minimum crest factor of 3.0, and the largest single harmonic component is a minimum of 5 percent of the fundamental value. 5. Load is 50 percent unbalanced continuously. Minimum Duration of Supply: If battery is sole energy source supplying rated full UPS load current at 80 percent power factor, duration of supply is 10 minutes. C. Input Voltage Tolerance: System steady-state and transient output performance remains within specified tolerances when steady-state ac input voltage varies plus 10, minus 15 percent from nominal voltage. 16440-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY D. Overall UPS Efficiency: Equal to or greater than 80 percent at 100 percent load, 80 percent at 75 percent load, and 80 percent at 50 percent load. E. Maximum Energizing Inrush Current: Six times the full -load current. F. Maximum AC Output -Voltage Regulation for Loads up to 50 Percent Unbalanced: Plus or minus 2 percent over the full range of battery voltage. G. Output Frequency: 60 Hz. plus or minus 0.5 percent over the full range of input voltage, load, and battery voltage. H. Limitation of harmonic distortion of input current to the UPS shall be as follows: Description: Either a tuned harmonic filter or an arrangement of rectifier -charger circuits shall limit THD to 5 percent, maximum, at rated full UPS load current, for power sources with X/R ratio between 2 and 30. Description: THD is limited to a maximum of 32 percent, at rated full UPS load current, for power sources with X/R ratio between 2 and 30. I. Maximum Harmonic Content of Output -Voltage Waveform: 5 percent rms total and 3 percent rms for any single harmonic, for 100 percent rated nonlinear load current with a load crest factor of 3.0. J. Maximum Harmonic Content of Output -Voltage Waveform: 5 percent rms total and 3 percent rms for any single harmonic, for rated full load with THD up to 50 percent. with a load crest factor of 3.0. Minimum Overload Capacity of UPS at Rated Voltage: 125 percent of rated full load for 10 minutes, and 150 percent for 30 seconds in all operating modes. Maximum Output -Voltage Transient Excursions from Rated Value: For the following instantaneous load changes, stated as percentages of rated full UPS load, voltage shall remain within stated percentages of rated value and recover to, and remain within, plus or minus 2 percent of that value within 100 ms: 1. 50 Percent: Plus or minus 5 percent. 2. 100 Percent: Plus or minus 5 percent. 3. Loss of AC Input Power: Plus or minus 1 percent. 4. Restoration of AC Input Power: Plus or minus 1 percent. M. Input Power Factor: A minimum of [0.70] [0.85] lagging when supply voltage and current are at nominal rated values and the UPS is supplying rated full -load current. EMI Emissions: Comply with FCC Rules and Regulations and with 47 CFR 15 for Class A equipment. 2.3 UPS SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include. but are not limited to, the following: 16440-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 1. Eaton Corporation. 2. Liebert Corporation. 3. MGE UPS SYSTEMS. 4. Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc. 5. Toshiba Corporation; Industrial Systems. Electronic Equipment: Solid-state devices using hermetically sealed, semiconductor elements. Devices include rectifier -charger, inverter, static bypass transfer switch, and system controls. C. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. D. Control Assemblies: Mount on modular plug -ins, readily accessible for maintenance. E. Surge Suppression: Protect internal UPS components from surges that enter at each ac power input connection including main disconnect switch, static bypass transfer switch, and maintenance bypass/isolation switch. Protect rectifier -charger. inverter, controls, and output components. 1. Use factory -installed surge suppressors tested according to IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. 2. Additional Surge Protection: Protect internal UPS components from low -frequency, high- energy voltage surges described in IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Design the circuits connecting with external power sources and select circuit elements, conductors, conventional surge suppressors, and rectifier components and controls so input assemblies will have adequate mechanical strength and thermal and current -carrying capacity to withstand stresses imposed by 40-Hz, 180 percent voltage surges described in IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Maintainability Features: Mount rectifier -charger and inverter sections and the static bypass transfer switch on modular plug -ins, readily accessible for maintenance. G. Capacity Upgrade Capability: Arrange wiring, controls, and modular component plug-in provisions to permit future 25 percent increase in UPS capacity. H. UPS Cabinet Ventilation: Redundant fans or blowers draw in ambient air near the bottom of cabinet and discharge it near the top rear. I. Output Circuit Neutral Bus, Conductor, and Terminal Ampacity: Rated phase current times a multiple of 1.73, minimum. 2.4 RECTIFIER -CHARGER A. Capacity: Adequate to supply the inverter during rated full output load conditions and simultaneously recharge the battery from fully discharged condition to 95 percent of full charge within 10 times the rated discharge time for duration of supply under battery power at full load. B. Output Ripple: Limited by output filtration to less than 0.5 percent of rated current, peak to peak. C. Control Circuits: Immune to frequency variations within rated frequency ranges of normal and emergency power sources. 16440-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Response Time: Field adjustable for maximum compatibility with local generator -set power source. D. Battery Float -Charging Conditions: Comply with battery manufacturer's written instructions for battery terminal voltage and charging current required for maximum battery life. 2.5 INVERTER A. Description: Pulse -width modulated. with sinusoidal output. B. Description: Pulse -width modulated, with sinusoidal output. Include a bypass phase synchronization window adjustment to optimize compatibility with local engine -generator -set power source. 2.6 STATIC BYPASS TRANSFER SWITCH A. Description: Solid-state switching device providing uninterrupted transfer. A contactor or electrically operated circuit breaker automatically provides electrical isolation for the switch. B. Switch Rating: Continuous duty at the rated full UPS load current, minimum. 2.7 BATTERY A. Description: Valve -regulated, recombinant, lead -calcium units, factory assembled in an isolated compartment of UPS cabinet, complete with battery disconnect switch. 1. Arrange for drawout removal of battery assembly from cabinet for testing and inspecting. B. Description: Valve -regulated, premium, heavy-duty, recombinant, lead -calcium units; factory assembled in an isolated compartment or in a separate matching cabinet, complete with battery disconnect switch. Arrange for drawout removal of battery assembly from cabinet for testing and inspecting. C. Description: Flooded, lead -calcium. heavy-duty industrial units in styrene acrylonitrile containers mounted on three-tier, acid -resistant, painted steel racks. Assembly includes battery disconnect switch, intercell connectors, hydrometer syringe, and thermometer with specific gravity - correction scales. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include. but are not limited to, the following: 1. C&D Technologies, Inc. 2. Eaton Corporation. 3. EnerSys. 4. Panasonic Corporation of North America; Panasonic Industrial Company. 16440-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY E. Seismic -Restraint Design: Battery racks, cabinets, assemblies, subassemblies, and components (and fastenings and supports, mounting, and anchorage devices for them) shall be designed and fabricated to withstand static and seismic forces. 2.8 CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS A. Description: Group displays, indications, and basic system controls on a common control panel on front of UPS enclosure. Minimum displays, indicating devices, and controls include those in lists below. Provide sensors, transducers, terminals, relays. and wiring required to support listed items. Alarms include audible signals and visual displays. C. Indications: Labeled LED 1. Quantitative indications shall include the following: a. Input voltage, each phase, line to line. b. Input current, each phase, line to line. c. Bypass input voltage, each phase, line to line. d. Bypass input frequency. e. System output voltage. each phase, line to line. f. System output current, each phase. g. System output frequency. h. DC bus voltage. i. Battery current and direction (charge/discharge). j. Elapsed time discharging battery. 2. Basic status condition indications shall include the following: a. Normal operation. b. Load -on bypass. c. Load -on battery. d. Inverter off. e. Alarm condition. 3. Alarm indications shall include the following: a. Bypass ac input overvoltage or undervoltage. b. Bypass ac input overfrequency or underfrequency. c. Bypass ac input and inverter out of synchronization. d. Bypass ac input wrong -phase rotation. e. Bypass ac input single-phase condition. f. Bypass ac input filter fuse blown. g. Internal frequency standard in use. h. Battery system alarm. i. Control power failure. j. Fan failure. k. UPS overload. I. Battery -charging control faulty. m. Input overvoltage or undervoltage. 16440-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY n. Input transformer overtemperature. o. Input circuit breaker tripped. P. Input wrong -phase rotation. q. Input single-phase condition. r. Approaching end of battery operation. s. Battery undervoltage shutdown. t. Maximum battery voltage. u. Inverter fuse blown. v. Inverter transformer overtemperature. w. Inverter overtemperature. x. Static bypass transfer switch overtemperature. y. Inverter power supply fault. z. Inverter transistors out of saturation. aa. Identification of faulty inverter section/leg. bb. Inverter output overvoltage or undervoltage. cc. UPS overload shutdown. dd. Inverter current sensor fault. ee. Inverter output contactor open. ff. Inverter current limit. 4. Controls shall include the following: a. Inverter on -off. b. UPS start. c. Battery test. d. Alarm silence/reset. e. Output -voltage adjustment. D. Dry -form "C" contacts shall be available for remote indication of the following conditions: 1. UPS on battery. 2. UPS on-line. 3. UPS load -on bypass. 4. UPS in alarm condition. 5. UPS off (maintenance bypass closed). Emergency Power Off Switch: Capable of local operation and operation by means of activation by external dry contacts. 2.9 MAINTENANCE BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCH A. Description: Manually operated switch or arrangement of switching devices with mechanically actuated contact mechanism arranged to route the flow of power to the load around the rectifier - charger, inverter, and static bypass transfer switch. Switch shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked to prevent interrupting power to the load when switching to bypass mode. Switch shall electrically isolate other UPS components to permit safe servicing. B. Comply with NEMA PB 2 and UL 891. 16440-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY C. Switch Rating: Continuous duty at rated full UPS load current. D. Mounting Provisions: Internal to system cabinet E. Retain paragraph below for externally mounted switch. F. Key interlock requires unlocking maintenance bypass/isolation switch before switching from normal position with key that is released only when the UPS is bypassed by the static bypass transfer switch. Lock is designed specifically for mechanical and electrical component interlocking. 2.10 OUTPUT ISOLATION TRANSFORMER A. Description: Shielded unit with low forward transfer impedance up to 3 kHz, minimum. Include the following features: 1. Comply with applicable portions of UL 1561, including requirements for nonlinear load current -handling capability for a K-factor of approximately [4] [9] [13] [20]. 2. Output Impedance at Fundamental Frequency: Between 3 and 4 percent. 3. Regulation: 5 percent, maximum, at rated nonlinear load current. 4. Full -Load Efficiency at Rated Nonlinear Load Current: 96 percent, minimum. 5. Electrostatic Shielding of Windings: Independent for each winding. 6. Coil Leads: Physically arranged for minimum interlead capacitance. 7. Shield Grounding Terminal: Separately mounted; labeled "Shield Ground." 8. Capacitive Coupling between Primary and Secondary: 33 picofarads, maximum, over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz. 2.11 OUTPUT DISTRIBUTION SECTION A. Panelboards: Comply with Section 16442 "Panelboards" except provide assembly integral to UPS cabinet. 2.12 MONITORING BY REMOTE STATUS AND ALARM PANEL A. Description: Labeled LEDs on panel faceplate indicate 5 basic status conditions. Audible signal indicates alarm conditions. Silencing switch in face of panel silences signal without altering visual indication. Cabinet and Faceplate: Surface or flush mounted to suit mounting conditions indicated. 2.13 MONITORING BY REMOTE COMPUTER A. Description: Communication module in unit control panel provides capability for remote monitoring of status, parameters, and alarms specified in "Controls and Indications" Article. The remote computer and the connecting signal wiring are not included in this Section. Include the following features: 1. Connectors and network interface units or modems for data transmission via RS-232 link. 16440-11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 2. Software designed for control and monitoring of UPS functions and to provide on -screen explanations, interpretations, diagnosis, action guidance, and instructions for use of monitoring indications and development of meaningful reports. Permit storage and analysis of power -line transient records. Designs for Windows applications, software. and computer are not included in this Section. 2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory test complete UPS system before shipment. Use actual batteries that are part of final installation. Include the following: 1. Test and demonstration of all functions, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective devices. 2. Full -load test. 3. Transient -load response test. 4. Overload test. 5. Power failure test. Observation of Test: Give 14 days' advance notice of tests and provide opportunity for Owner's representative to observe tests at Owner's choice. C. Report test results. Include the following data: 1. Description of input source and output loads used. Describe actions required to simulate source load variation and various operating conditions and malfunctions. 2. List of indications, parameter values, and system responses considered satisfactory for each test action. Include tabulation of actual observations during test. 3. List of instruments and equipment used in factory tests. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting performance of the UPS. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION Equipment Mounting: Install UPS on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 03300 "Cast -in -Place Concrete. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. For supported equipment, install epoxy -coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 16440-12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STATIC UN INTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and NFPA 70. C. Connections: Interconnect system components. Make connections to supply and load circuits according to manufacturer's wiring diagrams unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 GROUNDING A. Separately Derived Systems: If not part of a listed power supply for a data-processing room, comply with NFPA 70 requirements for connecting to grounding electrodes and for bonding to metallic piping near isolation transformer. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and wiring according to Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify each battery cell individually. 3.5 BATTERY EQUALIZATION A. Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual -cell voltages. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Inspect interiors of enclosures, including the following: a. Integrity of mechanical and electrical connections. b. Component type and labeling verification. 16440-13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY c. Ratings of installed components. 3. Inspect batteries and chargers according to requirements in NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications. 4. Test manual and automatic operational features and system protective and alarm functions. 5. Test communication of status and alarms to remote monitoring equipment. 6. Load the system using a variable -load bank to simulate kilovolt amperes, kilowatts, and power factor of loads for unit's rating. Use instruments calibrated within the previous six months according to NIST standards. a. Simulate malfunctions to verify protective device operation. b. Test duration of supply on emergency, low -battery voltage shutdown, and transfers and restoration due to normal source failure. c. Test harmonic content of input and output current less than 25, 50, and 100 percent of rated loads. d. Test output voltage under specified transient -load conditions. e. Test efficiency at 50, 75, and 100 percent of rated loads. f. Test remote status and alarm panel functions. g. Test battery -monitoring system functions. E. Seismic -restraint tests and inspections shall include the following: 1. Inspect type, size, quantity, arrangement. and proper installation of mounting or anchorage devices. 2. Test mounting and anchorage devices according to requirements in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." F. The UPS system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Record of Tests and Inspections: Maintain and submit documentation of tests and inspections, including references to manufacturers' written instructions and other test and inspection criteria. Include results of tests, inspections, and retests. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.7 PERFORMANCE TESTING A. Engage the services of a qualified power quality specialist to perform tests and activities indicated for each UPS system. 6. Monitoring and Testing Schedule: Perform monitoring and testing in a single 10-day period. Schedule monitoring and testing activity with Owner, through Architect, with at least 14 days' advance notice. Schedule monitoring and testing after Substantial Completion, when the UPS is supplying power to its intended load. Monitoring and Testing Instruments: Three-phase, recording, power monitors. Instruments shall provide continuous simultaneous monitoring of electrical parameters at UPS input terminals and at input terminals of loads served by the UPS. Instruments shall monitor, measure, and graph 16440-14 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY voltage current and frequency simultaneously and provide full -graphic recordings of the values of those parameters before and during power -line disturbances that cause the values to deviate from normal beyond the adjustable threshold values. Instruments shall be capable of recording either on paper or on magnetic media and have a minimum accuracy of plus or minus 2 percent for electrical parameters. Parameters to be monitored include the following: 1. Current: Each phase and neutral and grounding conductors. 2. Voltage: Phase to phase, phase to neutral, phase to ground, and neutral to ground. 3. Frequency transients. 4. Voltage swells and sags. 5. Voltage Impulses: Phase to phase, phase to neutral, phase to ground, and neutral to ground. 6. High -frequency noise. 7. Radio -frequency interference. 8. THD of the above currents and voltages. 9. Harmonic content of currents and voltages above. D. Monitoring and Testing Procedures for Each Test Period: Exploratory Period: For the first two days of the first scheduled monitoring and testing period, make recordings at various circuit locations and with various parameter -threshold and sampling -interval settings. Make these measurements with the objective of identifying optimum UPS, power system, load, and instrumentation setup conditions for subsequent test and monitoring operations. Remainder of Test Period: Perform continuous monitoring of at least two circuit locations selected on the basis of data obtained during exploratory period. a. Set thresholds and sampling intervals for recording data at values selected to optimize data on performance of the UPS for values indicated, and to highlight the need to adjust, repair, or modify the UPS, distribution system, or load component that may influence its performance or that may require better power quality. b. Perform load and UPS power source switching and operate the UPS on generator power during portions of test period according to directions of Owner's power quality specialist. c. Operate the UPS and its loads in each mode of operation permitted by UPS controls and by the power distribution system design. d. Using loads and devices available as part of the facility's installed systems and equipment and a temporarily connected portable generator set, create and simulate unusual operating conditions, including outages, voltage swells and sags, and voltage, current, and frequency transients. Maintain normal operating loads in operation on system to maximum extent possible during tests. e. Using temporarily connected resistive/inductive load banks and a temporarily connected portable generator set, create and simulate unusual operating conditions, including outages, voltage swells and sags, and voltage, current, and frequency transients. Maintain normal operating loads in operation on system to maximum extent possible during tests. f. Make adjustments and repairs to UPS, distribution, and load equipment to correct deficiencies disclosed by monitoring and testing and repeat appropriate monitoring and testing to verify success of corrective action. 16440-15 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY E. Coordination with Specified UPS Monitoring Functions: Obtain printouts of built-in monitoring functions specified for the UPS and its components in this Section that are simultaneously recorded with portable instruments in this article. 1. Provide the temporary use of an appropriate PC and printer equipped with required connections and software for recording and printing if such units are not available on -site. 2. Coordinate printouts with recordings for monitoring performed according to this article, and resolve and report any anomalies in and discrepancies between the two sets of records. F. Monitoring and Testing Assistance by Contractor: 1. Open UPS and electrical distribution and load equipment and wiring enclosures to make monitoring and testing points accessible for temporary monitoring probe and sensor placement and removal as requested. 2. Observe monitoring and testing operations; ensure that UPS and distribution and load equipment warranties are not compromised. 3. Perform switching and control of various UPS units, electrical distribution systems, and load components as directed by power quality specialist. Specialist shall design this portion of monitoring and testing operations to expose the UPS to various operating environments, conditions, and events while response is observed, electrical parameters are monitored, and system and equipment deficiencies are identified. 4. Make repairs and adjustments to the UPS and to electrical distribution system and load components, and retest and repeat monitoring as needed to verify validity of results and correction of deficiencies. 5. Engage the services of the UPS manufacturer's factory -authorized service representative periodically during performance testing operations for repairs, adjustments, and consultations. G. Documentation: Record test point and sensor locations, instrument settings, and circuit and load conditions for each monitoring summary and power disturbance recording. Coordinate simultaneous recordings made on UPS input and load circuits. Analysis of Recorded Data and Report: Review and analyze test observations and recorded data and submit a detailed written report. Include the following in each report: 1. Description of corrective actions performed during monitoring and survey work and their results. 2. Recommendations for further action to provide optimum performance by the UPS and appropriate power quality for non -UPS loads. Include a statement of priority ranking and a cost estimate for each recommendation that involves system or equipment revisions. 3. Copies of monitoring summary graphics and graphics illustrating harmonic content of significant voltages and currents. 4. Copies of graphics of power disturbance recordings that illustrate findings, conclusions, and recommendations. 5. Recommendations for operating, adjusting, or revising UPS controls. 6. Recommendation for alterations to the UPS installation. 7. Recommendations for adjusting or revising generator -set or automatic transfer switch installations or their controls. 8. Recommendations for power distribution system revisions. 9. Recommendations for adjusting or revising electrical loads, their connections, or controls. 16440-16 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Interim and Final Reports: Provide an interim report at the end of each test period and a final comprehensive report at the end of final test and analysis period. 3.8 DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust. operate, and maintain the UPS. END OF SECTION 16440 16440-17 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SECTION 16442 PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS PAN ELBOARDS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch -circuit panelboards. 3. Electronic -grade panelboards. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating. B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. 16442-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PANELBOARDS B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NEMA PB 1. E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight. wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's and Owner's written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.9 COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping. encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. 16442-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A. Enclosures: Surface -mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. PANELBOARDS 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface -mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush -mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Skirt for Surface -Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 4. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 5. Finishes: a. Panels and Trim: factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two -coat, baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder. B. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch -circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. 3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch -circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from box. 4. Extra -Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as suitable for nonlinear loads. 5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Lugs: Compression or Mechanical type. D. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. 16442-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PANELBOARDS E. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series -connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series -connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying with UL 1449 SPD Type 1. 2.3 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company: GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation. Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. C. Doors: Secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on circuit breakers replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. E. Multifunction Digital -Metering Monitor: Microprocessor -based unit suitable for three- or four - wire systems and with the following features: Switch -selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy tolerances as indicated: a. Voltage Phase -to -Phase b. Voltage Phase -to -Neutral c. Average Voltage Line -to -Line d. Average Voltage Line -to -Neutral e. Current, Amps per Phase. Neutral and ground f. Power: Real, Reactive. Apparent (system and per phase) g. Energy and Demand h. Individual Current and Voltage Harmonics. Magnitude and Phase Angle i. %THD: Current and Voltage j. Waveform Capture k. Minimum and Maximum values I. Event Logging/Disturbance Recording Mounting: Display and control flush mounted in door. 16442-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PAN ELBOARDS 2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH -CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch -circuit type. C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. D. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 2.5 LOAD CENTERS Shall not be used. 2.6 ELECTRONIC -GRADE PANELBOARDS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Current Technology; a subsidiary of Danahar Corporation. 2. Eaton Electrical Inc.: Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 3. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 4. Liebert Corporation. 5. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 6. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; with factory -installed, integral TVSS; labeled by an NRTL for compliance with UL 67 after installing TVSS. C. Doors: Secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. D. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on thermal -magnetic circuit breakers. E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on thermal -magnetic circuit breakers. F. Buses: 1. Copper phase and neutral buses: 200 percent capacity neutral bus and lugs. 2. Copper equipment and isolated ground buses. 16442-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 2.7 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Manufacturers: match panel manufacturer PAN ELBOARDS B. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series -connected rating to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two -pole configurations with Class A ground -fault protection (6-mA trip). 3. Arc -Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single -pole configuration. 4. Molded -Case Circuit -Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Shunt Trip: coil energized from separate circuit. 2.8 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. 2.9 PANEL SUPPRESSORS Provide integral to the service entrance panel and server room panel for this facility. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ABB France. 2. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT ). 3. Eaton Corporation. 4. Emerson Electric Co. 5. GE Zenith Controls. 6. LEA International; Protection Technology Group. 7. Leviton Manufacturing Co.. Inc. 8. PowerLogics, Inc. 9. Schneider Electric Industries SAS. 10. Siemens Industry. Inc. C. SPDs: Comply with UL 1449 Include LED indicator lights for power and protection status. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal suppressor components. 16442-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PANELBOARDS D. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single -pulse surge current withstand rating per phase shall not be less than 100 kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode. E. Comply with UL 1283. F. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V and 208Y/120 V, three-phase. four -wire circuits shall not exceed the following: 1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V, 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V. 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V, 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 4. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V, 1200 V for 208Y/120 V G. SCCR: Equal or exceed 100 kA. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. B. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1. B. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. C. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. D. Install filler plates in unused spaces. E. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. 16442-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PANELBOARDS C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems." D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 16442 16442-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SECTION 16461 LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of dry -type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated -type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor - bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. 16461-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ACME Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division. 2. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp.; a division of Eaton Corp. 3. Controlled Power Company. 4. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Products. 5. Federal Pacific Transformer Company; Division of Electro-Mechanical Corp. 6. General Electric Company. 7. Hammond Co.; Matra Electric, Inc. 8. Magnetek Power Electronics Group. 9. Micron Industries Corp. 10. Myers Power Products, Inc. 11. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 12. Sola/Hevi-Duty. 13. Square D; Schneider Electric. 2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS A. Description: Factory -assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service. B. Cores: Grain -oriented. non -aging silicon steel. C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. 1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Copper. 2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561. B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces. C. Cores: One leg per phase. D. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250. E. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250. F. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity. 16461-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS G. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature. H. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: Complying with NEMA TP 1 Class 1 efficiency levels. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current -handling capability to the degree defined by designated K-factor. 1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full -load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K-factor. 2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core. 2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 2.5 Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems." SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient -temperature requirements for each transformer. B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions. C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed. D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 16461-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 3.2 INSTALLATION LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS A. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor -mounting transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. B. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above. 3.5 ADJUSTING Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings. 3.6 CLEANING A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. END OF SECTION 16461 16461-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid I 4, ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SECTION 16475 FUSES- 600 VOLT AND BELOW FUSES - 600 VOLT AND BELOW PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A . This section specifies the furnishing and installation of low voltage fuses rated 600 volts and below. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A . NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. B . UL 198C - High -Interrupting -Capacity Fuses, Current -Limiting Type. C . UL 198D - Class K Fuses. D . UL 198E - Class R Fuses. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VOLTAGE A . Provide fuses with a voltage rating suitable for the nominal voltage of the system in which they are to be applied. 2.02 TYPES A Time Delay Fuses. Unless otherwise indicated, provide UL Class RK-5 time delay, current limiting fuses having 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes interrupting rating. Use on all 600- ampere or smaller circuits supplying individual motors and transformers, and where otherwise indicated. B Non -Time Delay Fuses. Fuses indicated by "K-1" on the drawings are UL Class RK-1 non - time delay having 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes interrupting rating. Use on all 600- ampere or smaller circuits supplying branch circuit panelboards, resistance heating and where otherwise indicated. 16475-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 FUSES- 600 VOLT AND BELOW C . Class L Fuses. Fuses rated 601-6000 amperes are UL Class L with 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes interrupting rating. Cable Limiters. Provide cable limiters rated 600 volts with tubular -type terminals for compression connection to cable. Cable limiters shall be compatible with the cable to be protected. 2.03 MANUFACTURER A . Low voltage fuses must be products of a single manufacturer. 2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A . Acceptable manufacturers are Bussman, Gould-Shawmut, and Littelfuse. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A . Instructions. Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions. B . Fuse Clips. Check fasteners on fuse clips for tightness when installing fuses. C . Labels. Install fuses so label is in an upright, readable position. Fuses without labels are not acceptable. 3.02 SPARE FUSES A . As spares, provide the greater amount of either three fuses or 10 percent of each size and type installed. Deliver the spare fuses to the Owner at the time of final acceptance of the project. Neatly encase the spare fuses in suitable containers or cabinets. END OF SECTION 16475 16475-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 LIGHTING AND LIGHTING CONTROLS POWER HUBIEr PoE LIGHT INr F. CONTROL Hubbell PowerHUBBT'" PoE Lighting and Control Guide Specification Hubbell's PowerHUBBTM is an enterprise -level Power over Ethernet (PoE) lighting and control platform that seamlessly integrates luminaires, sensors, user interfaces and software for a scalable, intelligent building control solution. Software and Controls: Hubbell Control Solutions' PowerHUBB platform delivers intelligent sensors, intui- tive user interfaces and scalable PoE technology that enables a highly configurable, enterprise software solution with cloud analytics. PoE Enabled Luminaires: Hubbell Lighting's portfolio of PowerHUBB enabled luminaires deliver quality illumination while reducing energy consumption, and total cost of ownership for PoE installations. Infrastructure: Hubbell Premise Wiring manufactures a fully integrated system of copper and fiber network cabling, and components that are designed to meet PoE performance and reliability standards. Hubbell Control Solutions' advanced systems and lighting controls offer a comprehensive portfolio of sim- ple, scalable and seamless solutions for indoor and outdoor applications from a single partner. Our ad- vanced lighting control technologies provide intuitive and flexible deployment options to meet code, en- hance comfort, increase energy savings and improve operating efficiency for enterprises of any size. Hubbell Control Solutions' product suite includes partially distributed and centralized wired systems, lumi- naire integrated sensors, color tuning controls, occupancy sensors, photocell sensors, and emergency functionality. Hubbell controls systems are an integral part of energy optimization provisions in sustainable design and LEED certified projects worldwide. Incorporation of targeted user -definable controls, occupancy sensors, and daylight sensors linked to lighting and HVAC daylight harvesting and load -shedding designs may contribute to several LEED credits, including LEED-NC/LEED-Cl/LEED for Schools Minimum Energy Per- formance, Optimize Energy Performance, Controllability of Systems — Lighting, and Controllability of Sys- tems — Thermal Comfort. Hubbell offers a variety of products to solve business challenges, increase energy efficiency, enhance safety, operate in harsh environs, manage your wiring and improve grounding systems in and around building structures. Contact Hubbell Lighting, Inc., Phone (800)888-8006, www.hubbell.com, email: hcstechhubbell.com. PowerHUBB' is a registered trademark of Hubbell Incorporated. This document is Copyright 2018 Hubbell Incorporated. 16510-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 SECTION 16510 LIGHTING AND LIGHTING CONTROLS LIGHTING AND LIGHTING CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Section Includes: Low voltage DC nodes for Power over Ethernet (PoE) Network system utilizing Solid State Lighting (SSL) and low voltage input devices. Optional software provides code compliance and integration capabilities. System includes: 1. PowerHUBB nodes 2. Low Voltage control devices 3. Power Source Equipment (PSE) 4. Cables 5. Software B. Related Information: 1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for backboxes required for PSE equipment. 2. Division 16 Section "Cable Trays for Communications Systems." 1.2 REFERENCES A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., (IEEE): 1. IEEE 802.3 Approved Standard for Ethernet. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. PoE: Power over Ethernet B. IEEE 802.3: Approved Standard for Ethernet. C. PD: Powered device or PowerHUBB node. D. PSE: Power Source Equipment such as a PoE switch. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Sheets: For each type of product required for complete lighting control system, demonstrating compliance with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate the following: 1. Schematic diagram of system including physical location of devices. 16510-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 LIGHTING AND LIGHTING CONTROLS 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Electronic Files of Following Manufacturer Resources: 1. Installation instructions 2. Connectivity diagrams of control input devices: (Upon request). 3. Sample of manufacturer's warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operating and maintenance instructions: Electronic files. Record drawings of physical location of each fixed device and list with serial numbers of portable devices: Electronic files. 1.7 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. System software and manuals: Electronic files. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Requirements: Provide controls hardware and software through a single source from a single manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: Experienced Installer meeting requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and trained and approved by manufacturer to install specified products. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer of control system listed in this Section with minimum five years record of satisfactory manufacturing and support of components comparable to basis of design system. 1. Approval of Comparable Products: Submit the following in accordance with project substitution requirements, within time allowed for substitution review: a. Product data indicating compliance with requirements. b. Samples of each component. c. Sample submittal from similar project. d. Project references: Minimum of 5 completed installations, with Owner and Architect contact information. e. Sample warranty. 2. Substitutions following award of contract are not allowed except as stipulated in Division 01 General Requirements. 3. Approved manufacturers must comply with separate requirements of Submittals Article. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: UL listed and labeled. E. Regulatory Requirements: Provide components and systems that comply with requirements of the following: 1. NFPA 70. 2. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) standards. 16510-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 LIGHTING AND LIGHTING CONTROLS F. California Appliance Efficiency Listing: Provide products that comply with provisions of CEC CCR Title 24, Part 6. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions Range: 1. Temperature: 32 — 104 deg. F (0 - 40 deg. C). 2. Relative Humidity: 10 — 90 percent, noncondensing. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of dimming and environmental controls system that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period following substantial completion. 1. Warranty Period: Five years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of HUBBELL Control Solutions, (800) 888-8006, www.hubbell.com [or comparable products from a single manufacturer approved by Architect/Engineer of record prior to bidding], with the following components and characteristics. 2.2 PoE LIGHITNG, DIMMING AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEM A. Master/Control Node: Plenum -rated Class 2 electrical device suitable for indoor applications; replaces standard electronic AC driver in luminaire, providing dimming function down to one percent; programmed for optimized performance of LED; DHCP-enabled. Includes sensor input/output connections and wall switch connections. 1. Basis of Design Product: Hubbell Control Solutions, PowerHUBB Node — Master/Control PHM1PC, PHM1PC (-EM), PHM4PC, and PHM4PC (-EM). 2. Mounting: Within luminaire or remotely, as indicated on Drawings. 3. LED Driver Outputs: a. Channels: Single LED driver channel. b. Driver Design: Constant current LED driver design. programmable in 10mA increments from 100mA to 1750mA. c. Dimming: Full range 1 to 100 percent dimming control in 1 percent increments via CCR, PWM or Hybrid mode. d. Output Voltage Range: 12VDC - 48VDC. e. Rated Output Power: 53W max. f. Protection: Short circuit and open circuit protection. g. Connections: Screw terminals, accept 14-26 AWG conductors. 4. Sensor I/O Connections: 16510-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 LIGHTING AND LIGHTING CONTROLS a. Power Supply: One 24VDC terminal for powering external sensors, 500 mA total capacity. b. Occupancy Sensor Input. c. Analog Sensor Inputs: 2. d. Connections: Screw terminals, accept 16-26 AWG conductors. e. Relay control outputs: Two relay control outputs for actuating (1) latching relay or (2) electromechanical relays (24VDC coils). 5. Wall Switch Connections: a. Switch Inputs: Five momentary dry contact pushbutton inputs. b. Pilot Light Outputs: Five pilot light outputs, 24 VDC at 7.5 mA each. c. Connections: Screw terminals, accept 16-26 AWG conductors 6. User Set-up Characteristics: a. Performed using Gateway software communicating bi-directionally over CAT5e/6a cable connected to node. 7 Electrical Characteristics: a. PoE Interface: IEEE 802.3at-2009 PD Type 2, Class 4, Compliant Input b. Input: 48-57VDC c. Peak operating power: 60W d. Nominal standby power: 2.0W 8. Safety and EMC Characteristics: a. Safety Standards: UL 2108, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 9; UL 1598C, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 250.0-08, CSA B-79A, b. UL 2043, Suitable for Use in Air Handling Spaces (Plenum rated). c. EMC Emissions: Compliance to EN 55015:2013. d. EMC Immunity: Compliance to EN 61547:2009. e. FCC: Compliance to Title 47 Part 15 Subpart B Section 15.109. f. EU: RoHS Compliant. g. UL 924. CAN/CSA C.22.2 No. 141-15-Emergency Lighting: For -EM version nodes. Master Nodes: Plenum -rated Class 2 electrical device suitable for indoor applications; replaces standard electronic AC driver in luminaire, providing dimming function down to one percent; programmed for optimized performance of LED. DHCP-enabled. Basis of Design Product: Hubbell Control Solutions, PowerHUBB Master Node PHM1P and PHM1P (-EM). Characteristics: Same as described for Master/Control Node above, less Sensor I/O Connections and Wall Switch Connections. Satellite/Control Node: Plenum -rated Class 2 electrical device suitable for indoor applications; replaces standard electronic AC driver in luminaire. providing dimming function down to one percent; programmed for optimized performance of LED. Satellite/Control node connects to a master node via Ethernet patch cable. Includes sensor input/output connections and wall switch connections 16510-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 LIGHTING AND LIGHTING CONTROLS 1. Basis of Design Product: Hubbell Control Solutions, PowerHUBB Satellite/Control Node PHS1PC, PHS1PC (-EM), PHS4PC and PHS4PC (-EM). 2. Characteristics: Same as described for Master/Control Node above. Satellite Node: Plenum -rated Class 2 electrical device suitable for indoor applications; replaces standard electronic AC driver in luminaire, providing dimming function down to one percent; programmed for optimized performance of LED. Satellite node connects to a master node via Ethernet patch cable. 1. Basis of Design Product: Hubbell Control Solutions, PowerHUBB Satellite Node PHS1PC and PHS1P (-EM). 2. Characteristics: Same as described for Satellite/Control Node above, less Sensor I/O Connections and Wall Switch Connections. 2.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTING NODES A. Emergency Node versions of products noted and described above and designated by (EM) B. Emergency Lighting Note Additional Characteristics: During normal operation the Gateway establishes a heartbeat to the —EM nodes. Upon loss of normal power and the absence of the heartbeat, -EM nodes will go to full light output (100 percent) and local control will not be possible until the heartbeat is re-established. C. The full light output (100 percent) emergency value can be field adjusted during commissioning to meet code and requirements of the installation 2.4 WALL STATIONS A. Low Voltage Wall Switches: 24 VDC low voltage device supported by I/O connections on control system nodes. 1. Buttons: As indicated on Drawings and Legend. 2. Button Action: Momentary. 3. LED Pilot Lights: Required. 4. Color: White. 5. Basis of Design Product: Hubbell Control Solutions, LV Series Low Voltage Switches. B. Low Voltage Wall Switches, RJ45 Enabled: 24 VDC low voltage device supported by I/O connections on control system nodes. 1. 2: RJ45 ports in rear. 2. Buttons: As indicated on Drawings and legend with built-in LED pilot lights. 3. Color: White. 4. Basis of Design Product: Hubbell Control Solutions, LVS Series Low Voltage Switches. 2.5 LOW -VOLTAGE SENSORS OccupancyNacancy Sensors: 1. Ceiling Mount Sensors: Capable of self -learning and self-adjusting false trigger prevention technology 16510-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 LIGHTING AND LIGHTING CONTROLS a. Combination passive infrared (PIR) and ultrasonic (US) type. b. Basis of Design Product: Hubbell Control Solutions, Omni. Wall Mount Sensors: Capable of self -learning and self-adjusting false trigger prevention technology a. Combination passive infrared and acoustic sensor type. b. Basis of Design Product: Hubbell Control Solutions, LightOWL. OccupancyNacancy/Daylight Sensors: 1. Wall Switch/ Sensor: With false trigger prevention technology. a. Combination passive infrared (PIR) and ultrasonic (US) type. b. Automatic -ON (occupancy sensor). c. Built-in photo sensor for automatic daylight harvesting. d. Dual relay. e. Basis of Design Product: Hubbell Control Solutions, LightHawk. C. Daylight Sensors: 1. Open Loop Sensors. 2. Range include: 3-300fc. 3. 3 wire connection to node with control inputs. 2.6 NETWORK AND POWER SOURCING EQUIPMENT Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE): Control systems manufacturer -approved network switch, emergency network switch, and midspan equipment sized for required number of ports indicated plus 20 percent future expansion allowance. IEEE 802.3 or Cisco uPoE. B. Uninterrupted Power Supply: UL924 and sized in accordance with system requirements and selective coordination of designated emergency (EM) nodes. 2.7 GATEWAY SOFTWARE A. General: Software communicates bi-directionally with control system nodes to control lighting levels for each space as well as receiving incoming commands form sensors and other devices. Software is installed on Owner -furnished Windows -based computer with operating system, processor, memory. hard disc space, and Ethernet compatible network interface card meeting control system manufacturer's specifications. Required Software: Microsoft SQL Server Express and Microsoft .NET Framework, versions as indicated in control system manufacturer's specifications. B. Control System Software: Browser -based open -platform software suite with configurable options for customized energy saving strategies, building automation integration, and loT solutions. Scalable application ranging from simple lighting control to software and cloud -based energy management analytics, including the following control software packages: 1. Basis of Design Product: Hubbell Control Solutions. PowerHUBB Software Suite. 2. Lighting Control Software Package: 16510-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 LIGHTING AND LIGHTING CONTROLS a. Supports lights, wall controls On/Off/Dim, motion sensors, and daylight sensors. b. Lighting system commissioning, rapid -commissioning, and diagnostic tools. c. Occupancy control, software -defined. d. Lighting scheduling. 3. Connectivity Software Package: a. Application Program Interface access and test suite. b. Multi-IP network binding management. 4. Automation Access Software Package: a. Accepts BACnet commands and inquiries. b. Manufacturer to provide command PICS list for review and approval. 5. Service Package: a. Access to service via cloud portal. b. Near real-time system monitoring. c. System status, analytics, statistics, and dashboards. d. Advanced multi -recipient email alerts for critical system status. e. Daily backups of configuration. 6. Advanced Energy Software Package: a. Requires Service Package. b. Access to service via cloud portal. c. Energy analytics, statistics, dashboards, and interactive reports. d. Energy data repository. Energy Management Software Package: a. Requires Service Package. b. Access to service via cloud portal. c. Require Service Package. d. Access to service via cloud portal. e. Multi -site enterprise performance and service dashboard. f. Advanced log dashboard and analyzer. 2.8 PoE NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE Cables supplied shall meet at least the following requirements: 1. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 AND ISO/IEC 11801 component compliance. 2. IEEE 802.3af (PoE). IEEE 802.3at (PoE+), IEEE 802.3bt (4PPoE Type 3 and 4). 3. 10BASE-T through 1000BASE-T. 4. NEC Article 800 compliant. 5. Third party verified. 6. UL/c(UL) Listed, LP listed for product safety in high heat/high power PoE applications. 7. HDBaseT Certified, Class A and B. 8. RoHS/RoHS 2 compliant. 16510-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 LIGHTING AND LIGHTING CONTROLS B. Power Source Equipment supplied shall meet at least the following minimum requirements: Standards: a. IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet). b. IEEE 802.3u (100Base-TX Fast Ethernet). c. IEEE 802.3ab (1000Base-TX). d. IEEE 802.3az (Energy Efficient Ethernet). e. IEEE 802.3x (Flow Control and Back Pressure) f. IEEE 802.3af and at (Power over Ethernet). g. IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol. Regulatory Compliance: a. IEEE802.3at (PoE). b. CE. c. RoHS-compliant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation of system, examine work area to verify measurements, and that work area complies with manufacturer's requirements. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements of all sections in Division 16. B. Comply with requirements of Division 16 Section "Cable Trays for Communications Systems." C. Do not install system until all networking cables, terminations and related connections are complete and tested. D. Do not install system until the entire space is enclosed, HVAC systems are running and all unrelated overhead and wet work in work spaces is complete. E. Install control systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Grounding: Provide electrical grounding in accordance with NFPA 70. G. Verify network connectivity, network switch and related Power Supply Equipment (PSE) is functional and configured according to manufacturer's instructions and as specified in: H. Perform [field] [factory] configuration and setup for space and node. 3.3 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Comply with requirements of Division 16 Section "Lighting and Lighting Controls" for software and integration hardware for network -based lighting controls. 16510-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 LIGHTING AND LIGHTING CONTROLS B. Provide system programming, startup, and adjustment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and Owner's requirements. C. Perform operational testing to verify compliance with Specifications. Adjust as required. D. Measure and record load on each controlled circuit. Submit report of load measurements. 3.4 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstration: Provide control systems demonstration with Owner to allow verification that systems function as required. B. Training: Train Owner's personnel to operate, maintain, and program control systems. Furnish set of approved submittals and record drawings of actual installation for Owner's personnel in attendance at training session. END OF SECTION 16510 16510-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PART 1 - GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS SECTION 16714 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Telecommunications equipment racks and cabinets. 2. Power Strips 3. Grounding 4. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 16767 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. B. LAN: Local area network. C. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations, sections. details, and attachments to other work. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 16714-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable connections. 3. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail showing standoff insulators and wall mounting brackets. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct supervision of RCDD/NTS. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. 3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as RCDD to perform the on -site inspection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES A. Contact telecommunications service provider and arrange for installation of demarcation point, protected entrance terminals, and a housing when so directed by service provider. 2.2 EQUIPMENT FRAMES A. COMMSCOPE. B. General Frame Requirements: 1. Distribution Frames: Freestanding, modular -steel units designed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported. 2. Module Dimension: Width compatible with EIA 310-D standard, 19-inch panel mounting. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked -polyester powder coat. C. Modular Freestanding Cabinets: 1. 84" high units 2. Removable and lockable side panels. 3. Hinged and lockable front and rear perforated metal doors. 4. Adjustable feet for leveling. 5. Screened ventilation openings in the roof and rear door. 16714-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 6. Cable access provisions in the roof and base. 7. Grounding bus bar. 8. Roof -mounted, 550-cfm fan with filter. 9. Power strip. 10. Baked -polyester powder coat finish. 11. All cabinets keyed alike. D. Cable Management for Equipment Frames: 1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers. 2. Baked -polyester powder coat finish. 3. Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with covers. 2.3 POWER STRIPS Power Strips: Comply with UL 1363. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Rack mounting. 3. Twelve. 20-A, 120-V ac, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R receptacles. 4. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 5. LED indicator lights for reverse polarity and open outlet ground. 6. Circuit Breaker and Thermal Fusing: When protection is lost, circuit opens and cannot be reset. 7. Circuit Breaker and Thermal Fusing: Unit continues to supply power if protection is lost. 8. Close -coupled, direct plug-in line cord. 9. Rocker -type on -off switch, illuminated when in on position. 10. Peak Single -Impulse Surge Current Rating: 33 kA per phase. 11. Protection modes shall be line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground. UL 1449 clamping voltage for all three modes shall be not more than 330 V. 2.4 GROUNDING A. Comply with requirements in Section 16762 "Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors. Telecommunications Main Bus Bar: 1. Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression -type wire terminals, and long -barrel, two -bolt connection to ground bus bar. 2. Ground Bus Bar: Copper, minimum 1/4 inch thick by 4 inches wide with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. 3. Stand -Off Insulators: Comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. C. Comply with TIA-607-B. 0 16714-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 2.5 LABELING COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials. including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment rooms. C. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier. 1. Meet jointly with Owner's IT Staff to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. 2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants. 3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross -connects, and patch panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment. 4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross -connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room. E. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate. 3.2 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping." B. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. 3.3 GROUNDING A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. Comply with J-STD-607-A. 16714-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements in Section 16195 "Electrical Identification." Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 3 level of administration including optional identification requirements of this standard. C. Labels shall be preprinted or computer -printed type. END OF SECTION 16714 16714-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PART 1 - GENERAL CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECTION 16715 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ladder cable tray. 2. Wire -mesh cable tray. 3. Cable tray accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cable tray. 1. Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray. 1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable trays, including plans, elevations, and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice -plate connectors, expansion -joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for cable trays, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. 16715-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS B. Field quality -control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Cable trays and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the cable trays will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.0. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE TRAYS A. Cable Trays and Accessories: Identified as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location, application, and grounding. Source Limitations: Obtain cable trays and components from single manufacturer. B. Sizes and Configurations: See the Cable Tray Schedule on Drawings for specific requirements for types, materials, sizes, and configurations. C. Structural Performance: See articles for individual cable tray types for specific values for the following parameters: 1. Uniform Load Distribution: Capable of supporting a uniformly distributed load on the indicated support span when supported as a simple span and tested according to NEMA VE 1. 2. Concentrated Load: A load applied at midpoint of span and centerline of tray. 3. Load and Safety Factors: Applicable to both side rails and rung capacities. 2.3 LADDER CABLE TRAY A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. B-line. an Eaton business. 2. Chalfant Manufacturing Company. 3. Cope Cable Tray; A Part of Atkore International. 4. MonoSystems, Inc. 5. MP Husky USA Cable Tray & Cable Bus. 6. Niedax Inc. 7. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. 16715-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 B. Description: CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 1. Configuration: Two longitudinal side rails with transverse rungs swaged or welded to side rails, complying with NEMA VE 1. 2. Width: 12 inches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3. Minimum Usable Load Depth: 3 inches. 4. Straight Section Lengths: 10 feet, except where shorter lengths are required to facilitate tray assembly. 5. Rung Spacing: 9 inches o.c. 6. Radius -Fitting Rung Spacing: 9 inches at center of tray's width. 7. Minimum Cable -Bearing Surface for Rungs: 7/8-inch width with radius edges. 8. No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the bottom plane of side rails. 9. Structural Performance of Each Rung: Capable of supporting a maximum cable load, with a safety factor of 1.5, plus a 200-Ib concentrated load, when tested according to NEMA VE 1. 10. Fitting Minimum Radius: 12 inches. 11. Class Designation: Comply with NEMA VE 1, Class 5A. 12. Splicing Assemblies: Bolted type using serrated flange locknuts. 13. Splice -Plate Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated loading capacity of cable tray. Materials and Finishes: 1. Steel: a. Straight Section and Fitting Side Rails and Rungs: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A 1011 /A 1011 M, SS, Grade 33 . b. Steel Tray Splice Plates: ASTM A 1011/A 1011 M, HSLAS, Grade 50, Class 1. c. Fasteners: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A 510/A 510M, Grade 1008. d. Finish:Powder-coat enamel paint. 1) Powder -Coat Enamel: Cable tray manufacturer's recommended primer and corrosion -inhibiting treatment, with factory -applied powder -coat paint. 2) Epoxy -Resin Prime Coat: Cold -curing epoxy primer, MPI# 101. 3) Epoxy -Resin Topcoat: Epoxy, cold -cured gloss, MPI# 77. 4) Hardware: Chromium -zinc plated, ASTM F 1136. e. Finish: Factory -standard primer, ready for field painting, with chromium -zinc -plated hardware according to ASTM F 1136. f. Finish: Black oxide finish for support accessories and miscellaneous hardware according to ASTM D 769. 2.4 WIRE -MESH CABLE TRAY Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. B-line, an Eaton business. 16715-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 2. GSMetals 3. Flextray 4. Cablofil B. Description: 1. Configuration: Galvanized- steel wire mesh, complying with NEMA VE 1. 2. Width: 12 inches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3. Minimum Usable Load Depth: 4 inches. 4. Straight Section Lengths: 10 feet, except where shorter lengths are required to facilitate tray assembly. 5. Structural Performance: Capable of supporting a maximum cable load, with a safety factor of 1.5, plus a 200-Ib concentrated load, when tested according to NEMA VE 1. 6. Class Designation: Comply with NEMA VE 1. 7. Splicing Assemblies: Bolted type using serrated flange locknuts. 8. Splice -Plate Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated loading capacity of cable tray. C. Materials and Finishes: 1. Steel: a. Straight Sections and Fittings: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A 1011/A 1011 M, SS, Grade 33. b. Steel Tray Splice Plates: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, HSLAS, Grade 50, Class 1. c. Fasteners: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A 510/A 510M, Grade 1008. d. Finish: Electrogalvanized after fabrication, complying with ASTM B 633. 1) Hardware: Galvanized, ASTM B 633. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION A. Install cable trays according to NEMA VE 2. B. Install cable trays as a complete system, including fasteners, hold-down clips, support systems. barrier strips, adjustable horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, crosses, cable dropouts, adapters, covers, and bonding. Install cable trays so that the tray is accessible for cable installation and all splices are accessible for inspection and adjustment. D. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays. E. Join aluminum cable tray with splice plates; use four square neck -carriage bolts and locknuts. 16715-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS F. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure and install seismic restraints. G. Design fasteners and supports to carry cable tray. the cables, and a concentrated load of 200 Ib. Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules and provide clearances shown on Drawings. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the load -carrying capacity of the tray rungs. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall -bracket form as required by application. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading. Install center -hung supports for single -rail trays designed for 60 versus 40 percent eccentric loading condition, with a safety factor of 3. Locate and install supports according to NEMA VE 2. Do not install more than one cable tray splice between supports. M. Support wire -basket cable trays with trapeze hangers. N. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable trays and to equipment. Support cable trays independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable trays on equipment enclosure. Install expansion connectors where cable trays cross building expansion joints and in cable tray runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA VE 2. Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard. P. Make changes in direction and elevation using manufacturer's recommended fittings. Q. Make cable tray connections using manufacturer's recommended fittings. R. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. Comply with requirements in Section 07841 "Penetration Firestopping." S. Install capped metal sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed cable tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers. T. Install cable trays with enough workspace to permit access for installing cables. U. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data processing; or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5000, and 15 000 V. Install permanent covers, if used, after installing cable. Install cover clamps according to NEMA VE 2. Clamp covers on cable trays installed outdoors with heavy-duty clamps. 16715-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS X. Install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays after cable tray installation. 3.2 CABLE TRAY GROUNDING A. Ground cable trays according to NFPA 70 unless additional grounding is specified. Comply with requirements in Section 16762 "Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems." B. Cable trays shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers. C. When using epoxy- or powder -coat painted cable trays as a grounding conductor, completely remove coating at all splice contact points or ground connector attachment. After completing splice -to -grounding bolt attachment, repair the coated surfaces with coating materials recommended by cable tray manufacturer. D. Comply with TIA-607-C. 3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Install cables only when each cable tray run has been completed and inspected. B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties according to NEMA VE 2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket. Install cable ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure -limiting device. C. Fasten cables on vertical runs to cable trays every 18 inches. D. Fasten and support cables that pass from one cable tray to another or drop from cable trays to equipment enclosures. Fasten cables to the cable tray at the point of exit and support cables independent of the enclosure. The cable length between cable trays or between cable tray and enclosure shall be no more than 72 inches. E. Tie MI cables down every 36 inches where required to provide a 2-hour fire rating and every 72 inches elsewhere. F In existing construction, remove inactive or dead cables from cable trays. 3.4 CONNECTIONS Remove paint from all connection points before making connections. Repair paint after the connections are completed. B. Connect pathways to cable trays according to requirements in NEMA VE 2 and NEMA FG 1. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections 16715-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 1. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for compliance with requirements. 2. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in cable trays. vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or have caused damage. 3. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable trays do not exceed that permitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communications or data-processing circuits are separated from power circuits by barriers or are installed in separate cable trays. 4. Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in the cable tray. 5. Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any blockage of tray ventilation. 6. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in suspect areas. 7 Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers. 8. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads. or nuts. When found, replace with specified hardware. 9. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. Test entire cable tray system for continuity. Maximum allowable resistance is 1 ohm. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 PROTECTION Protect installed cable trays and cables. 1. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to safeguard exposed cables against falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable tray can be constructed of wood or metal materials and shall remain in place until the risk of damage is over. 2. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by cable tray manufacturer. 3. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by cable tray manufacturer. END OF SECTION 16715 16715-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING SECTION 16716 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 9/125 micrometer single -mode, inside plant optical fiber cable (0S2). 2. 9/125 micrometer single -mode, outside plant optical fiber cable (0S2). 3. Optical fiber cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross -connects. 4. Cabling identification products. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. B. Cross -Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross -connection. C. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. 1.4 OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION A. Optical fiber backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications equipment rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main cross -connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone -to - backbone cross -connection. Backbone cabling cross -connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or at entrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner. 16716-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING 2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling and asset identification system of the software. 3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts. 4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics including the following: a. Telecommunications rooms plans and elevations. b. Telecommunications pathways. c. Telecommunications system access points. d. Telecommunications grounding system. e. Cross -connects. f. Patch panels. g. Patch cords. 5. Cross -connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components. B. Optical fiber cable testing plan. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For RCDD, installation supervisor, and field inspector. B. Source quality -control reports. C. Product Certificates: For each type of product. D. Field quality -control reports. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For optical fiber cable, splices, and connectors to include in maintenance manuals. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Patch -Panel Units: One of each type. 2. Plugs: Ten of each type. 3. Jacks: Ten of each type. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing program development by an RCDD. 16716-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. 3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on -site testing. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD . 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical loss test set. 2. Test optical fiber cable while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector, including the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data. 1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry. and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. 1.13 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary. 16716-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PART 2 - PRODUCTS COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA-568-C.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard. Surface -Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 50 or less. C. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA-569-D. D. Grounding: Comply with TIA-607-B. 2.2 9/125 MICROMETER SINGLE -MODE, INSIDE PLANT OPTICAL FIBER CABLE (0S2) Description: Single mode, 9/125-micrometer, tight buffered, optical fiber cable. Number of fibers are indicated on plans. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Belden CDT Networking Division/NORDX. 2. CommScope, Inc. Standards: 1. Comply with TIA-492CAAB for detailed specifications. 2. Comply with TIA-568-C.3 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties. D. Maximum Attenuation: 0.5 dB/km at 1310 nm; 0.5 dB/km at 1550 nm. E. Jacket: 1. Jacket Color: Yellow. 2. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types: 1. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP or Type OFNR in listed riser or plenum communications raceway. 16716-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING 2.3 9/125 MICROMETER SINGLE -MODE, OUTSIDE PLANT OPTICAL FIBER CABLE (0S2) A. Description: Single mode, 9/125-micrometer, single loose tube, optical fiber cable, number of fibers indicated on drawing. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3M. Belden CDT Networking Division/NORDX. 3. CommScope, Inc. 4. Corning Cable Systems. 5. General Cable; General Cable Corporation. 6. Hitachi Cable America Inc. 7. Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc. 8. Superior Essex Inc. 9. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope Inc. brand. C. Standards: 1. Comply with TIA-492CAAB for detailed specifications. 2. Comply with TIA-568-C.3 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with ICEA S-87-640 for mechanical properties. Maximum Attenuation: 0.5 dB/km at 1310 nm; 0.5 dB/km at 1550 nm. E. Jacket: 1. Jacket Color: Black. 2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit. and group color shall be according to TIA-598-D. 3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches. 2.4 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC. 2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 3. Belden CDT Networking Division/NORDX. 4. Berk-Tek Leviton: a Nexans/Leviton alliance. 5. Corning Cable Systems. 6. Dynacom Corporation. 7. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 8. Molex Premise Networks. 9. Optical Cable Corporation. 16716-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING 10. Optical Connectivity Solutions Division. 11. Siemon Co. (The). B. Standards: Comply with Fiber Optic Connector lntermateability Standard (FOCIS) specifications of the TIA-604 series. Comply with TIA-568-C.3. C. Cross -Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple -numbered, duplex cable connectors. 1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria. D. Patch Cords: Factory -made, dual -fiber cables in 36-inch lengths. E. Connector Type: Type LC complying with TIA-604-10-B, connectors. F. Plugs and Plug Assemblies: 1. Male; color -coded modular telecommunications connector designed for termination of a single optical fiber cable. 2. Insertion loss not more than 0.25 dB. 3. Marked to indicate transmission performance. G. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: 1. Female; quick -connect, simplex and duplex; fixed telecommunications connector designed for termination of a single optical fiber cable. 2. Insertion loss not more than 0.25 dB. 3. Marked to indicate transmission performance. 4. Designed to snap -in to a patch panel or faceplate. 2.5 GROUNDING A. Comply with TIA-607-B. 2.6 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS Comply with TIA-606-B and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables. B. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA-526-14-B and TIA-568-C.3. 16716-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING C. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by communications service provider. 3.2 WIRING METHODS Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces. including plenum ceilings. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 301, and NECA/BICSI 568. B. General Requirements for Optical Fiber Cabling Installation: 1. Comply with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.3. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Terminate all cables; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross -connects, and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets. racks, frames, and terminals. 5. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 6. Bundle, lace, and train cable to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools. 7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 16716-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING 8. Cold -Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 9. In the communications equipment room, provide a 10-foot- long service loop on each end of cable. 10. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. 11. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted. C. Open -Cable Installation: 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. D. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields. 3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with TIA-569-D, Annex A, "Firestopping." B. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, "Firestopping" Chapter. 3.5 GROUNDING Install grounding according to BICSI ITSIMM, "Grounding (Earthing), Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. Comply with TIA-607-B and NECA/BICSI-607. C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground. D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring. and cabling complying with TIA-606-B. Comply with requirements for identification specified. 1. Administration Class: Class 1. 2. Color -code cross -connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels. 16716-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ta. • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project. C. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration -point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. D. Cable and Wire Identification: Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Each wire connected to building -mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. 3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet. 4. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames. 5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable -terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. Labels shall be preprinted or computer -printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA 606-B, for the following: Flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 2. Optical Fiber Cable Tests: a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. b. Link End -to -End Attenuation Tests: 16716-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING 1) Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in one direction according to TIA-526-14-B, Method B. One Reference Jumper. 2) Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than those calculated according to equation in TIA-568-C.1. C. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. D. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. E. End -to -end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 16716 16716-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECTION 16761 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 46- 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Pathway routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. C. Source quality -control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings: 16761-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-B. B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. C. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. D. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. E. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel. b. Type: compression. 2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL-467, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 3. Coating for Fittings for PVC -Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. F. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved. as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.2 HOOKS A. General Requirements for Hooks: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-C. 3. Galvanized steel. 4. J shape. 2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: 1. Comply with TIA-569-B. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. B. Sheet -Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. 16761-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS C. Cast -Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover. D. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70. by a qualified testing agency. and marked for intended location and application. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. G. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep). H. Gangable boxes are prohibited. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION A. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed. Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Pathway locations include the following: a. Loading dock. b. Mechanical rooms. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1, except use NEMA 250 Type 4 stainless steel in damp or wet locations. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size. Minimum size for optical -fiber cables is 1 inch (27 mm). Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location. 16761-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. D. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-B for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum pathways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation. Arrange stub -ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. E. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical -fiber cables. F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. G. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached. Pathways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m) intervals. 2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location. I. Stub -ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub -ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. 16761-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. M. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length. O. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-Ib (90-kg)tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm)of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside pathways in use. Pathways for Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 3/4-Inch (21-mm) Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet (15 m). 1-Inch (27-mm) Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet (23 m). Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. Q. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. R. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings. 16761-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 T. Expansion -Joint Fittings: PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 1. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has straight -run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m). 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change. 3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits. 4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 5. Install each expansion -joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. U. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. V. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw -cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. W. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. X. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. Y Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. Z. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. 16761-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. 3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. Use firestopping systems approved for the particular installation by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 3.5 PROTECTION Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 16761 16761-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid (6, c ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS SECTION 16762 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract. including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Grounding conductors. 2. Grounding connectors. 3. Grounding busbars. 4. Grounding labeling. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BCT: Bonding conductor for telecommunications. B. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. C. TGB: Telecommunications grounding busbar. D. TMGB: Telecommunications main grounding busbar. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room signal reference grid. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS As -Built Data: Plans showing as -built locations of grounding and bonding infrastructure, including the following: 1. Ground rods. 2. Ground and roof rings. 3. BCT. TMGB, TGBs, and routing of their bonding conductors. 16762-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS B. Qualification Data: For Installer, installation supervisor, and field inspector. C. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor. D. Field quality -control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of ITS Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. 2. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as a registered communications distribution designer to perform the on -site inspection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS Comply with J-STD-607-A. 2.2 CONDUCTORS Comply with UL 486A-486B. Insulated Conductors: Stranded copper wire, green or green with yellow stripe insulation, insulated for 600 V, and complying with UL 83. 1. Ground wire for custom -length equipment ground jumpers shall be No. 6 AWG, 19- strand, UL-listed, Type THHN wire. C. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG. stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Tinned -copper tape, braided conductors terminated with two -hole copper ferrules: 1-5/8 incheswide and 1/16 inchhick. 16762-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 2.3 CONNECTORS A. Irreversible connectors listed for the purpose. Listed by an NRTL as complying with NFPA 70 for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. Comply with UL 486A-486B. Compression Wire Connectors: Crimp -and -compress connectors that bond to the conductor when the connector is compressed around the conductor. Comply with UL 467. Electroplated tinned copper. C and H shaped. C. Busbar Connectors: Cast silicon bronze, solderless compression -type, mechanical connector; with a long barrel and two holes spaced on 5/8- or 1-inchcenters for a two -bolt connection to the busbar. Welded Connectors: Exothermic -welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. 2.4 GROUNDING BUSBARS A. TMGB: Predrilled, wall -mounted, rectangular bars of hard -drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section by 24-inches in length. The busbar shall be NRTL listed for use as TMGB and shall comply with J-STD-607-A. 1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section. 2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide a 4-inch 3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in 600-V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V. Rack and Cabinet Grounding Busbars: Rectangular bars of hard -drawn solid copper, accepting conductors ranging from No. 14 to No. 2/0 AWG, NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and complying with J-STD-607-A. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section. 1. Cabinet -Mounted Busbar: Terminal block, with stainless -steel or copper -plated hardware for attachment to the cabinet. 2. Rack -Mounted Vertical Busbar: 72 or 36 inchesstainless-steel or copper -plated hardware for attachment to the rack. 2.5 LABELING Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV -resistant seal for label. 16762-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine the ac grounding electrode system and equipment grounding for compliance with requirements for maximum ground -resistance level and other conditions affecting performance of grounding and bonding of the electrical system. Inspect the test results of the ac grounding system measured at the point of BCT connection. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer. listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with connection of the BCT only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION Bonding shall include the ac utility power service entrance, the communications cable entrance, and the grounding electrode system. The bonding of these elements shall form a loop so that each element is connected to at least two others. B. Comply with NECA 1. C. Comply with TIA-607-C. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. 1. The bonding conductors between the TMGB and structural steel of steel -frame buildings shall not be smaller than No. 6 AWG. B. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. C. Conductor Support: 1. Secure grounding and bonding conductors at intervals of not less than 36 inches. D. Grounding and Bonding Conductors: 16762-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid 4.„ ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 1. Install in the straightest and shortest route between the origination and termination point, and no longer than required. The bend radius shall not be smaller than eight times the diameter of the conductor. No one bend may exceed 90 degrees. 2. Install without splices. 3. Support at not more than 36-inchintervals. 4. Install grounding and bonding conductors in 3/4-inchPVC conduit until conduit enters a telecommunications room. The grounding and bonding conductor pathway through a plenum shall be in EMT. Conductors shall not be installed in EMT unless otherwise indicated. a. If a grounding and bonding conductor is installed in ferrous metallic conduit, bond the conductor to the conduit using a grounding bushing that complies with requirements in Section 16761 "Pathways for Communications Systems," and bond both ends of the conduit to a TMGB. 3.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM A. The BCT between the TMGB and the ac service equipment ground shall not be smaller than No. 1/0 No. 3/0 AWG. 3.5 GROUNDING BUSBARS A. Install busbars where indicated horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inchesminimum from wall, 12 inchesabove finished floor unless otherwise indicated. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down: connect to horizontal bus. 3.6 CONNECTIONS Bond metallic equipment in a telecommunications equipment room to the grounding busbar in that room, using equipment grounding conductors not smaller than No. 6 AWG. Stacking of conductors under a single bolt is not permitted when connecting to busbars. C. Assemble the wire connector to the conductor, complying with manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Use crimping tool and the die specific to the connector. 2. Pretwist the conductor. 3. Apply an antioxidant compound to all bolted and compression connections. Primary Protector: Bond to the TMGB with insulated bonding conductor. E. Telecommunications Enclosures and Equipment Racks: Bond metallic components of enclosures to the telecommunications bonding and grounding system. Install vertically mounted rack grounding busbar unless the enclosure and rack are manufactured with the busbar. Bond the equipment grounding busbar to the TGB No. 2 AWG bonding conductors. 16762-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS F. Structural Steel: Where the structural steel of a steel frame building is readily accessible within the room or space, bond TMGB to the vertical steel of the building frame. G. Electrical Power Panelboards: Where an electrical panelboard for telecommunications equipment is located in the same room or space, bond the TMGB to the ground bar of the panelboard. H. Rack- and Cabinet -Mounted Equipment: Bond powered equipment chassis to the cabinet or rack grounding bar. Power connection shall comply with NFPA 70: the equipment grounding conductor in the power cord of cord- and plug -connected equipment shall be considered as a supplement to bonding requirements in this Section. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Labels shall be preprinted or computer -printed type. 1. Label TMGB with "fs-TMGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for the space containing the TMGB. 2. Label the BCT and each telecommunications backbone conductor at its attachment point: 'WARNING! TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING CONDUCTOR. DO NOT REMOVE OR DISCONNECT!" 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections, B. Perform tests and inspections. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test the bonding connections of the system using an ac earth ground -resistance tester, taking two -point bonding measurements in the telecommunications equipment room containing the TMGB and using the process recommended by BICSI TDMM. Conduct tests with the facility in operation. a. Measure the resistance between the busbar and the nearest available grounding electrode. The maximum acceptable value of this bonding resistance is 100 milliohms. 3. Test for ground loop currents using a digital clamp -on ammeter, with a full-scale of not more than 10 A, displaying current in increments of 0.01 A at an accuracy of plus/minus 2.0 percent. a. With the grounding infrastructure completed and the communications system electronics operating, measure the current in every conductor connected to the TMGB. Maximum acceptable ac current level is 1 A. 16762-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS D. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground at the BCT exceeds 5 ohms, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. E. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 16762 16762-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING SECTION 16767 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. UTP cabling. 2. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross -connects. 3. Telecommunications outlet/connectors. 4. Cabling system identification products. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. B. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways. Cross -Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross -connection. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. LAN: Local area network. MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of several telecommunications outlet/connectors. H. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates. I. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. J. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 16767-1 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For coaxial cable. include the following installation data for each type used: a. Nominal OD. b. Minimum bending radius. c. Maximum pulling tension. Shop Drawings: 1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner. 2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling and asset identification system of the software. 3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts. 4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following: a. Cross -connects. b. Patch panels. c. Patch cords. Cross -connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. B. Source quality -control reports. C. Field quality -control reports. 16767-2 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals. B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Patch -Panel Units: One of each type. 2. Connecting Blocks: One of each type. 3. Device Plates: One of each type. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing program development by an RCDD. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. 3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on -site testing. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on -site testing. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. 16767-3 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross -connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called a "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols. 1. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors be installed for each work area. 2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation point between the horizontal cross -connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector. 3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling. 4. Splitters shall not be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling. B. A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft., and includes the components that extend from the telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment. C. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet. This maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment or in the horizontal cross -connect. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1 when tested according to test procedures of this standard. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 50 or less. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Grounding: Comply with J-STD-607-A. 2.3 NETWORK UTP CABLE CATEGORY 6a TWISTED PAIR CABLE B. Description: Four -pair, balanced -twisted pair cable, certified to meet transmission characteristics of Category 6a cable at frequencies up to 500MHz. 16767-4 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Belden CDT Networking Division/NORDX. 2. CommScope, Inc. D. Standard: Comply with TIA-568-C.2 for Category 6a cables. E. Conductors: 100-ohm, 23 AWG solid copper. F. Shielding/Screening: Unshielded twisted pairs (UTP) G. Cable Rating: Plenum. H. Jacket: Blue thermoplastic. 2.4 POE LIGHTING UTP CABLE CATEGORY 6 TWISTED PAIR CABLE Description: Four -pair, balanced -twisted pair cable certified to meet transmission characteristics of Category 6 cable at frequencies up to 250MHz. C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Belden CDT Networking Division/NORDX. 2. CommScope, Inc. D. Standard: Comply with NEMA WC 66/ICEA S-116-732 and TIA-568-C.2 for Category 6 cables. E. Conductors: 100-ohm, 23 AWG solid copper. F. Shielding/Screening: Unshielded twisted pairs (UTP) G. Cable Rating: Plenum. H. Jacket: Purple thermoplastic. 2.5 UTP CABLE HARDWARE Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Belden CDT Networking Division/NORDX. 2. CommScope, Inc 16767-5 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch -down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher. C. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple -numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables. 1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four -pair UTP cable. D. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, green colored, eight -position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals. Patch Cords: Factory -made, four -pair cables in 72-inch lengths; terminated with eight -position modular plug at each end. 1. Patch cords shall have bend -relief -compliant boots and color -coded icons to ensure Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging. 2. Patch cords shall have color -coded boots for circuit identification. 3. Provide one (1) patch cord for each active port plus 25 percent spare. 2.6 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, Category 6a, twisted -pair connector; four -pair, eight -position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. B. Workstation Outlets: Two or four -port -connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate. 1. Plastic Faceplate: High -impact plastic. Coordinate color with Section 16140 'Wiring Devices." 2. For use with snap -in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial work area cords. a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle. 3. Legend: Snap -in, clear -label covers and machine -printed paper inserts. 2.7 CATV COAXIAL CABLE C. Description: Coaxial cable with a 75-ohm characteristic impedance designed for CATV transmission. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Belden CDT Networking Division/NORDX. 16767-6 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 2. CommScope, Inc. NFPA and UL compliance, listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655 and with NFPA 70, "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution Systems" Article. Types are as follows: 1. RG-6/U: UL Type CATVP. a. No. 18 AWG. solid, copper -covered steel conductor. b. Plenum rated. c. Gas -injected, foam -PE insulation. d. Shielded with 100 percent aluminum tape and 40 percent aluminum braid. e. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum foil shield, 60 percent aluminum braided inner shield, and 40 percent aluminum braided outer shield. f. Jacketed with black, Plenum Rated g. Suitable for indoor installations. 2.8 COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE A. Description: Hardware designed to connect, splice, and terminate coaxial cable with a 75-ohm characteristic impedance. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Emerson Network Power Connectivity Solutions. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3. Siemon Co. (Thel. C. Coaxial -Cable Connectors: Type F, 75 ohms. D. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color -coded, with female Type F connectors. E. Patch Cords: Factory -made cables in 36-inch lengths; terminated with a male Type F connector at each end. F. Faceplates: 1. Plastic Faceplate: High -impact plastic. Coordinate color with Section 16140 "Wiring Devices." 2.9 GROUNDING A. Comply with 16762 — Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems. B. Comply with TIA-607-C. 16767-7 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 2.10 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. Comply with requirements in Section 16075 " Identification for Electrical Systems." 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables. B. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2. C. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by communications service provider. 3.2 WIRING METHODS A. Install cables in pathways except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal pathways and cables except in unfinished spaces. 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. B. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: 1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. 2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. 16767-8 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • 4i, ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES Comply with NECA 1. Install cables and connecting hardware in accordance with this specification and the City of Houston's Information Technology Systems Standards attached at the end of these specifications. Where conflicts between this specification and the City of Houston's Information Technology Systems Standards exist the City of Houston's standards shall govern the installation. C. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Terminate conductors: no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross -connects, and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 5. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 6. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 8. Cold -Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 9. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- long service loop on each end of cable. 10. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. UTP Cable Installation: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. Open -Cable Installation: Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. Suspend UTP cable not in a pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. 16767-9 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. 5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. 6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches. 3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Section 07841 "Penetration Firestop Systems." B. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping." C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. 16767-10 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 3.5 GROUNDING Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. Comply with J-STD-607-A. C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 16195 "Electrical Identification." Administration Class: 3. 2. Color -code cross -connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels. B. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 3 level of administration, including optional identification requirements of this standard. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration -point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets. backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Owner. E. Cable and Wire Identification: Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 16767-11 10-04-19 Issue for Bid ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 2. Each wire connected to building -mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. 3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet. 4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building - mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown. b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames. 5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable -terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. F. Labels shall be preprinted or computer -printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A. 1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Visually inspect UTP cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color - coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA- 568-B.1. 2. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels. 3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. UTP Performance Tests: a. Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA- 568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2: 1) Wire map. 2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). 3) Insertion loss. 4) Near -end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. 16767-12 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • ORANGE STREET SERVICE CENTER PHASE 1 ADMINISTRATION BLDG. R300253.02 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 5) Power sum near -end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. 6) Equal -level far -end crosstalk (ELFEXT). 7) Power sum equal -level far -end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). 8) Return loss. 9) Propagation delay. 10) Delay skew. 5. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed. a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off -hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call. b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network. C. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. D. End -to -end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 16767 16767-13 10-04-19 Issue for Bid • APPENDIX A INTERIOR, EXTERIOR, AND ROOF ASBESTOS SURVEY REPORT • Interior, Exterior and Roof Asbestos Survey • Offices Nationwide Established in 1965 Employee -Owned terracon.com Central Maintenance Yard 3501 E. Orange Street Pearland, Texas May 31, 2016 Terracon Project No. 92167156 f t2e19t0 15:t'r Prepared for: City of Pearland Pearland, Texas Prepared by: Terracon Consultants, Inc. Houston, Texas lierracon Geotechnical Environmental Construction Materials Facilities lierracon (iNpe May 31, 2016 Mr. Anthony Vu City of Pearland. 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, Texas 77581 Phone: 281.652.1794 Email: avu@pearlandtx.gov Re: Interior, Exterior and Roof Asbestos Survey Central Maintenance Yard 3501 E. Orange Street Pearland, Texas Terracon Project No. 92167156 Dear Mr. Vu: The purpose of this report is to present the results of an interior, exterior and roof asbestos survey performed on April 8, 2016, at the above referenced location. This survey was conducted in general accordance with Terracon Proposal No. P92167156 dated February 15, 2016. We understand that this survey was requested due to the possible future renovation or demolition of the buildings. Friable asbestos was identified in light brown and tan linoleum. Non -friable asbestos was identified in brown floor tile mastic and tan/brown patterned sheet flooring. Please refer to the attached report for details. Terracon appreciates the opportunity to provide this service to the City of Pearland. If you have any questions regarding this report, or if you need assistance with project oversight and sampling during renovation or demolition of the building, please contact us at 713-690-8989. Sincerely, Terracon Consultants, Inc ichael E. Solomon Senior Project Manager Jaye R. Stanley Senior Project Manager Terracon Consultants, Inc. 11555 Clay Rd. Houston, Texas 77043 P 713 690 8989 F [713; 690 8787 terracon.com Geotechnical • Environmental • Construction Materials • Facilities TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1.0 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 Project Objective 1 2.0 BUILDING DESCRIPTIONS 1 3.0 FIELD ACTIVITIES 2 3.1 Visual Assessment 2 3.2 Physical Assessment 2 3.3 Sample Collection 2 3.4 Sample Analysis 3 4.0 REGULATORY OVERVIEW 3 5.0 FINDINGS AND RECOMMENDATIONS 4 6.0 GENERAL COMMENTS 5 APPENDIX A CONFIRMED ASBESTOS -CONTAINING MATERIALS APPENDIX B ASBESTOS ANALYTICAL LABORATORY DATA APPENDIX C LICENSES • • INTERIOR, EXTERIOR AND ROOF ASBESTOS SURVEY CENTRAL MAINTENANCE YARD 3501 E. ORANGE STREET PEARLAND, TEXAS Terracon Project No. 92167156 May 31, 2016 1.0 INTRODUCTION Terracon Consultants, Inc. (Terracon) conducted an interior, exterior and roof asbestos survey of the City of Pearland Central Maintenance Yard located at 3501 E. Orange Street, Pearland, Texas. The survey was conducted on April 12-14, 2016, by State of Texas licensed asbestos inspectors in general accordance with Terracon Proposal No. P92167156 dated February 15, 2016. Interior, exterior and roof building components were surveyed, and homogeneous areas of suspect asbestos -containing materials (ACM) were visually identified and documented. Although reasonable effort was made to survey accessible suspect materials, additional suspect but un-sampled materials could be located in walls, voids or in other concealed areas. Suspect ACM samples were collected in general accordance with the sampling protocols outlined in EPA regulation 40 CFR 763 (Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act, AHERA) and the Texas Asbestos Health Protection Rules (TAHPR). Samples were delivered to a State of Texas licensed laboratory for analysis by polarized light microscopy. 1.1 Project Objective We understand this asbestos survey was requested due to the possible future renovation or demolition of the buildings. The Texas Asbestos Health Protection Rules (TAHPR) and Texas Senate Bill 509 require that an asbestos survey be performed prior to issuance of a city construction permit and prior to any renovation within or demolition of a building. EPA regulation 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP), prohibits the release of asbestos fibers to the atmosphere during renovation or demolition activities. The asbestos NESHAP requires that potentially regulated ACM (RACM) be identified, classified and quantified prior to planned disturbances or demolition activities. 2.0 BUILDING DESCRIPTIONS There are three buildings in the Central Maintenance Yard: • Main administrative / fire station building is an approximately 10,670 square foot (s.f.) single -story brick and steel structure with a gable membrane roof, atop a poured concrete floor slab. Interior finishes include gypsum board walls, wallpaper, suspended Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 1 Interior, Exterior and Roof Asbestos Survey Central Maintenance Yard Pearland, Texas May 26. 2016 Terracon Project No. 92167156 lierracon ceiling tiles, painted drywall ceilings, cove base, carpeting, linoleum, and vinyl and ceramic tile floors. The subject building is currently occupied by the City of Pearland Administration and Volunteer Fire Department. • Locker / training building is an approximately 4,800 s.f. two story steel structure with a gable steel roof, atop a poured concrete floor slab. Interior finishes include wood paneling, gypsum board, suspended ceiling tiles, carpeting, and ceramic tile floors. • Old EMS building is an approximately 5,300 s.f. one-story steel and wood frame structure with a gable steel roof, atop a poured concrete floor slab. Interior finishes include wood paneling, gypsum board walls, suspended ceiling tiles, painted drywall ceilings, carpeting, and ceramic tile floors. 3.0 FIELD ACTIVITIES The survey was conducted by Koruthu Keerikattu and Aaron Dominguez, State of Texas licensed asbestos inspectors. Copies of their licenses are included in Appendix C. The survey was conducted in general accordance with the sample collection protocols established in AHERA. A summary of survey activities is provided below. 3.1 Visual Assessment Our survey activities began with visual observation of the interiors, exteriors and roofs of the buildings to identify homogeneous areas of suspect ACM. A homogeneous area consists of building materials that appear similar throughout in terms of color, texture and date of application. Assessment was conducted throughout visually accessible areas of the building. Materials identified as concrete, glass, wood, masonry, metal or rubber were not considered suspect ACM. 3.2 Physical Assessment A physical assessment of each homogeneous area of suspect ACM was conducted to assess the friability and condition of the materials. A friable material is defined by the EPA as a material that can be crumbled, pulverized or reduced to powder by hand pressure when dry. Friability was assessed by physically touching suspect materials. 3.3 Sample Collection Based on results of the visual observation, bulk samples of suspect ACM were collected in general accordance with AHERA sampling protocols and the TAHPR. Random samples of suspect materials were collected in each homogeneous area. Sample team members Responsive in Resourceful ■ Reliable 2 Interior, Exterior and Roof Asbestos Survey Central Maintenance Yard Pearland, Texas May 26, 2016 Terracon Project No. 92167156 lierracon collected bulk samples using wet methods as applicable to reduce the potential for fiber release. Samples were placed in sealable containers and labeled with unique sample numbers using an indelible marker. Two -hundred (200) bulk samples were collected from fifty-eight (58) homogeneous areas of suspect ACM. A summary of suspect ACM samples collected during the survey is included in the chain of custody and HA Worksheet in Appendix B. 3.4 Sample Analysis Bulk samples were submitted under chain of custody to J3 Resources, Inc. (J3) of Houston, Texas, for analysis by polarized light microscopy per EPA methodology EPA/600/R-93/116. The percentage of asbestos, where applicable was determined by microscopic visual estimation. J3 is accredited under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP Accreditation No. 200525-0) and licensed by the TDSHS (TDSHS No. 30-0273). 4.0 REGULATORY OVERVIEW The Texas Department of State Health Services (TDSHS) enforces the Asbestos NESAHP as adopted by reference at Texas Administrative Code Title 25, Part 1, Chapter 295, Subchapter C, Rule §295.33. The asbestos NESHAP (40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M) regulates asbestos fiber emissions and asbestos waste disposal practices. It also requires the identification and classification of existing materials prior to demolition or renovation activity. Under NESHAP, ACM are classified as either friable, Category I non -friable or Category II non -friable ACM. Friable materials are those that, when dry, may be crumbled, pulverized or reduced to powder by hand pressure. Category I non -friable ACM include packings, gaskets, resilient floor coverings and asphalt roofing products containing more than 1% asbestos. Category II are any non -friable materials other than Category I materials that contain more than 1 % asbestos. Friable ACM, Category I and Category II non -friable ACM that are in poor condition and have become friable or which will be subjected to drilling, sanding, grinding, cutting or abrading and which could be crushed or pulverized during anticipated renovation or demolition activities are considered regulated ACM (RACM). The TDSHS also enforces the Texas Asbestos Health Protection Rules (TAHPR). The TAHPR require that any asbestos -related activity conducted in a public building be performed by personnel licensed by the TDSHS. RACM must be removed prior to renovation or demolition activities that will disturb the materials. Asbestos abatement must be performed by TDSHS- licensed asbestos abatement contractors in accordance with a project design prepared by a TDSHS-licensed asbestos consultant. Third -party air monitoring must be conducted prior to, during and following the abatement activities. Management Plans developed for the in -place Responsive • Resourceful ■ Reliable 3 Interior, Exterior and Roof Asbestos Survey Central Maintenance Yard Pearland. Texas May 26, 2016 Terracon Project No. 92167156 lierracon management of asbestos -containing materials must be developed by a TDSHS-licensed management planner. Both NESHAP and TAHPR require that the owner or operator of a building must provide the TDSHS with written notification at least 10 working days prior to the commencement of asbestos abatement activities that will disturb any amount of RACM. Written notification is also required for demolition of any building, even those that do not contain ACM. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standards at 29 CFR 1910.1001 and 29 CFR 1926.1101, regulates employee exposure to asbestos. These OSHA standards require that employee exposure to airborne asbestos fibers be maintained below 0.1 asbestos fibers per cubic centimeter of air (0.1 f/cc) as an 8-hour time weighted average (TWA) and not exceed 1.0 asbestos fibers per cubic centimeter of air (1.0 f/cc) over a 30 minute time period, the excursion limit. The TWA and excursion limit together are known as the OSHA permissible exposure limits or PELs. The OSHA standard 29 CFR 1926.1101 categorizes activities that will disturb ACM into four classes and specifies work practices that must be followed when performing in each class of work. 5.0 FINDINGS AND RECOMMENDATIONS Laboratory analysis confirmed the presence of asbestos in the following materials: • Friable light brown and tan linoleum • Non -friable brown floor tile mastic • Friable tan linoleum • Non -friable tan and brown patterned sheet flooring A summary of the confirmed ACM is presented in Appendix A. The laboratory analytical report is included in Appendix B. The identified asbestos -containing friable linoleum must be removed prior to demolition or renovation. The removal must be performed under a 10-day notification to TDSHS. The removal must be designed by a TDSHS-licensed asbestos consultant and be performed by a TDSHS-licensed asbestos contractor. Air monitoring must be performed before, during, and following asbestos abatement activities by a TDSHS-licensed asbestos consultant agency. The non -friable floor tile mastic and sheet flooring must be removed prior to renovation. The removal must be performed under a 10-day notification to TDSHS. The removal must be designed by a TDSHS-licensed asbestos consultant and be performed by a TDSHS-licensed asbestos contractor. Air monitoring must be performed before, during, and following asbestos abatement activities by a TDSHS-licensed asbestos consultant agency. Responsive • Resourceful • Reliable 4 • Interior, Exterior and Roof Asbestos Survey Central Maintenance Yard Pearland, Texas May 26. 2016 Terracon Project No. 92167156 lierracon The non -friable floor tile mastic and sheet flooring should be removed prior to demolition. The removal should be performed under a 10-day notification to TDSHS. The removal should be designed by a TDSHS-licensed asbestos consultant and be performed by a TDSHS-licensed asbestos contractor. Air monitoring should be performed before, during, and following asbestos abatement activities by a TDSHS-licensed asbestos consultant agency. Alternatively, the non -friable mastic and sheet flooring may be left in place during demolition. Up -wind -downwind air monitoring should be performed during demolition by a TDSHS-licensed asbestos consultant agency. All of the demolition debris must be disposed of as Category I ACM in a landfill authorized to accept it. The concrete slab must not be recycled if ACM mastic and/or sheet flooring remains attached to the slab. If suspect asbestos -containing materials are discovered during the course of the renovation or demolition work that were not sampled as part of this inspection, they should not be disturbed until the presence of asbestos is either confirmed or ruled out by laboratory analysis. Terracon can provide The City of Pearland with a proposal for developing asbestos abatement specifications and for performing abatement oversight and air monitoring upon request. 6.0 GENERAL COMMENTS This interior, exterior and roof asbestos survey was conducted in a manner consistent with the level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by members of the profession currently practicing under similar conditions in the same locale. The results, findings, conclusions and recommendations expressed in this report are based on conditions observed during our survey of the buildings. The information contained in this report is relevant to the date on which this survey was performed, and should not be relied upon to represent conditions at a later date. This report has been prepared on behalf of and exclusively for use by The City of Pearland for specific application to their project as discussed. This report is not a bidding document. Contractors or consultants reviewing this report must draw their own conclusions regarding further investigation or remediation deemed necessary. Terracon does not warrant the work of regulatory agencies, laboratories or other third parties supplying information which may have been used in the preparation of this report. No warranty, express or implied is made. Responsive • Resourceful • Reliable 5 APPENDIX A CONFIRMED ASBESTOS -CONTAINING MATERIALS CENTRAL MAINTENANCE YARD 3501 E. ORANGE STREET PEARLAND, TEXAS Terracon Project No. 92167156 Sample No. Description Material Location Percent/Typ e Asbestos NESHAP Classificatio n Estimated Quantity Main 04-FC1-10, 11, 12 Light brown / tan linoleum Administration Building — John Batiste office 20% Chrysotile Friable 100 s.f Main 12-FT2-44 Brown floor tile mastic Administration Building — hallway and map room 4% Chrysotile Category I 2,000 s.f. Main 15-FC1-51, 52, Administration 20% 53 Tan linoleum Building — 2nd floor Chrysotile Friable 300 s.f. Tan and brown Old EMS Building ° 53-FC1-183, 184, 185 patterned sheet flooring — 2nd floor restroom 2 /0 Chrysotile Category I 80 s.f. s.f. = square feet Category I ACM include non -friable gaskets, packings, asphaltic roofing materials, and resilient flooring containing more than 1 % asbestos. Category II ACM include all other non -friable materials containing more than 1% asbestos. • APPENDIX B ASBESTOS ANALYTICAL LABORATORY DATA Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com resources, inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: JH1673598 Project #: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Central Maint. Yard Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 01-MG7-01 01-MG7-02 01-MG7-03 (2WB504 Carpet Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous Carpet Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected Synthetic Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Synthetic Fiber Non -Fibrous Material <1% 100% <1% 100% Carpet Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous Wall Cover, Tan, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected 02-VVB5-05 Wall Cover, Tan, Homogeneous None Detected Synthetic Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material 02-WB5-06 Wall Cover, Tan, Homogeneous None Detected 03-FC3-07 LAYER 1 Cove Base, Black, Homogeneous 03-FC3-08 LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Cove Base, Black, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material 100% 5% 15% 80% 5% 15% 80% 5% 15% 80% 100% 100% 100% 100% Lee W.Pouf " Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources. Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed. matrix interference. sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval. certification. or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST. or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 1 of 36 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com 1116 resources, inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: JH1673598 Project #: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Central Maint. Yard Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 03-FC3-09 LAYER 1 Cove Base, Black, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic. Yellow, Homogeneous 04-FC1-10 LAYER 1 Linoleum, Yellow/Tan, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 04-FC1-11 LAYER 1 Linoleum, Yellow/Tan, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Chrysotile 20% Non -Fibrous Material 80% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Chrysotile 20% None Detected 04-FC1-12 LAYER 1 Linoleum, Yellow/Tan, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic. Yellow, Homogeneous 05-PI4-13 LAYER 1 Mastic Wrap, White, Homogeneous Joseph rtinez LAYER 2 Insulation, Yellow, Homogeneous Analyst Non -Fibrous Material 80% Non -Fibrous Material 100% 4110 Chrysotile 20% Non -Fibrous Material 80% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected None Detected Wbllastonite <1% Fibrous Glass 10% Cellulose Fiber 5% Non -Fibrous Material 85% Fibrous Glass 95% Non -Fibrous Material 5% Lee W. P Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full, without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size. and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 2 of 36 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized 1113 resources, Inc. r Light Microscopy (PLM) Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R Central Maint. Yard J3 Order #: Project #: Date Received: Date Analyzed: Date Reported: JH1673598 92167156 14-Apr-2016 19-Apr-2016 20-Apr-2016 Asbestos Sample ID # Sample Description Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 05-P14-14 05-PI4-15 06-WB4-16 LAYER 1 None Detected Mastic Wrap, White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 None Detected Insulation, Yellow, Homogeneous LAYER 1 None Detected Mastic Wrap, White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 None Detected Insulation, Yellow, Homogeneous Wollastonite Fibrous Glass Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material Wollastonite Fibrous Glass Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material <1% 10% 5% 85% 95% 5% <1% 10% 5% 85% 95% 5% Ceiling Texture, Off M,ite/White, None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Homogeneous 06-WB4-17 LAYER 1 Ceiling Texture, Off WhiteANhite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Wallboard, BrownANhite, Homogeneous 06-WB4-18 Ceiling Texture, Off White/IM1ite, Homogeneous 06-WB4-19 Ceiling Texture, Off WhiteANhite, Homogeneous Analyst None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material 100% 10% 90% 100% 100% Lee W.' Paw Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full, without written approval by J3 Resources. Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed. matrix interference, sample preparation. fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification, or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 3 of 36 -93/116 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources. com —Z13— resources, inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order#: JH1673598 Project #: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Central Maint. Yard Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 06-WB4-20 06-WB4-21 06-WB4-22 LAYER 1 Ceiling Texture, Off VVhiteNVhite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Wallboard, BrownANhite, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Ceiling Texture, Off VVhiteMthite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Wallboard, Brown/Wlite, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Ceiling Texture, Off WhiteNVhite, None Detected Homogeneous 07-WB5-23 Wall Cover, Off White, Homogeneous None Detected Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Fibrous Glass Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material 07-WB5-24 LAYER 1 None Detected Wall Cover, Off White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 None Detected Texture, White, Homogeneous LAYER 3 None Detected Wallboard, BrownfV kite, Homogeneous Fibrous Glass Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material 100% 10% 90% 100% 10% 90% 100% 15% 5% 80% 15% 5% 80% 100% 10% 90% Lee W.'Pow' Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full, without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference. sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils. vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification, or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST. or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 4 of 36 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized resources, inc. Light Microscopy (PLM) Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R Central Maint. Yard J3 Order #: Project #: Date Received: Date Analyzed: Date Reported: JH1673598 92167156 14-Apr-2016 19-Apr-2016 20-Apr-2016 Asbestos Sample ID # Sample Description Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 07-WB5-25 LAYER 1 Wall Cover, Off White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Texture, White, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Wallboard, Brown/White. Homogeneous 08-FC3-26 LAYER 1 Cove Base, Green, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 08-FC3-27 LAYER 1 Cove Base, Green, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 08-FC3-28 LAYER 1 Cove Base, Green, Homogeneous 09-WB4-29 Joseph Njbrtinez LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off White/Mite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Wallboard, BrownMlhite, Homogeneous Analyst None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Fibrous Glass 15% Cellulose Fiber 5% Non -Fibrous Material 80% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 10% Non -Fibrous Material 90% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 10% Non -Fibrous Material 90% Lee W. Pow Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources. Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils. vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification, or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 5 of 36 -93/116 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com .r .le resources, inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: JH1673598 Project #: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Central Maint. Yard Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 09-WB4-30 09-WB4-31 10-WB1-32 10-WB1-33 Joseph N}brtinez LAYER 1 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Painted Texture. Off WhiteNVnite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 None Detected Cellulose Fiber 10% Wallboard, Brown/White, Homogeneous Non -Fibrous Material 90% LAYER 1 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Painted Texture, Off White/White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 None Detected Cellulose Fiber 10% Wallboard, BrownAMiite, Homogeneous Non -Fibrous Material 90% LAYER 1 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Painted Texture, Off White/White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Cellulose Fiber 100% Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Non -Fibrous Material 100% Joint Compound, White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownANhite, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off WhiteANhite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownMlhite, Homogeneous Aczi. Analyst None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Cellulose Fiber 10% Non -Fibrous Material 90% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 10% Non -Fibrous Material 90% Lee WPouf' Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full, without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation. fiber size. and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils. vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval. certification. or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST. or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 6 of 36 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized resources, inc. :r Light Microscopy (PLM) Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 -93/116 EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R Central Maint. Yard J3 Order #: Project #: Date Received: Date Analyzed: Date Reported: JH1673598 92167156 14-Apr-2016 19-Apr-2016 20-Apr-2016 Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 10-WB 1-34 10-WB 1-35 t. LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off WhiteMlhite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Wallboard, BrownNWhite, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off White/IM1ite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape. Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownNlhite, Homogeneous 10-WB1-36 10-WB1-37 None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off White/Wnite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Wallboard, BrownNVhite, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Pink/White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownM/hite, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material 100% 10% 90% 100% 100% 100% 10% 90% 100% 10% 90% 100% 100% 100% 10% 90% Lee W. PQW ' Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST. or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 7 of 36 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized resources, inc. Light Microscopy (PLM) Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R Central Maint. Yard -93/116 J3 Order #: Project #: Date Received: Date Analyzed: Date Reported: JH1673598 92167156 14-Apr-2016 19-Apr-2016 20-Apr-2016 Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 10-WB1-38 LAYER 1 Painted Texture, RedMittite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Joint Compound. White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, Brown/White, Homogeneous 11-FC4-39 LAYER 1 Stair Tread, Black, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 11-FC4-40 LAYER 1 Stair Tread, Black, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 11-FC4-41 LAYER 1 Stair Tread, Black, Homogeneous 12-FT2-42 Joseph NJbrtinez LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Floor Tile, Gray, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous Analyst None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 10% Non -Fibrous Material 90% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Lee W. P Lab Director I This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full, without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils. vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 8 of 36 i J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources. com 113 resources, inc. y 46. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: JH1673598 Project #: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 Central Maint. Yard Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 12-FT2-43 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, Gray, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 12-FT2-44 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, Gray, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Brown, Homogeneous 13-FT2-45 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, Tan, Homogeneous 41. LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 13-FT2-46 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, Tan, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 13-FT2-47 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, Tan, Homogeneous 13-WB4-48 I 46 Joseph rtinez LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected None Detected Chrysotile None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material 4% Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off White/Wiite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Wallboard, BrownANhite, Homogeneous Analyst None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material 100% 100% 100% 96% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 10% 90% Lee W. P Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources. Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed. matrix interference. sample preparation. fiber size. and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification, or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 9 of 36 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources. com resources, inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM1 EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: JH1673598 Project #: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Central Maint. Yard Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 14-WB4-49 14-WB4-50 14-FC1-51 15-FC1-52 15-FC1-53 15-CT 154 LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off WhiteANhite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Wallboard, BrownM/hite, Homogeneous Joseph N}brtinez None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off V iteM/hite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Wallboard, BrownMlhite, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Linoleum, Tan, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Linoleum, Tan, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Linoleum, Tan, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected Chrysotile 20% None Detected Chrysotile 20% None Detected Chrysotile 20% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Ceiling Tile, White/Brown, Homogeneous None Detected Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material AC,4 Analyst 10% 90% 100% 10% 90% 10% 100% 10% 100% 10% 100% 65% 35% Lee W. Pow ' Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification, or endorsement by NVLAP, NISI, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 10 of 36 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources. com Cr Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 _Y3 resources, Inc. Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R Central Maint. Yard J3 Order #: Project #: Date Received: Date Analyzed: Date Reported: JH1673598 92167156 14-Apr-2016 19-Apr-2016 20-Apr-2016 Asbestos Sample ID # Sample Description Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 16-CT1-55 16-CT1-56 16-MG5-57 46:7-MG5-58 Ceiling Tile, White/Brown, Homogeneous None Detected Ceiling Tile, White/Brown, Homogeneous None Detected Mastic Wrap, White/Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Mastic Wrap, White/Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Insulation, Yellow, Homogeneous 17-MG5-59 Mastic Wrap, White/Brown, Homogeneous 17-FC3-60 LAYER 1 Cove Base, White, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected None Detected Cellulose Fiber 65% Non -Fibrous Material 35% Cellulose Fiber 65% Non -Fibrous Material 35% Cellulose Fiber 60% Non -Fibrous Material 40% Cellulose Fiber 60% Non -Fibrous Material 40% Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material LAYER 2 Cove Base Mastic. Yellow, Homogeneous 18-FC3-61 LAYER 1 Cove Base, White, Homogeneous Joseph rtinez LAYER 2 Cove Base Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous Analyst None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Lee W 95% 5% 60% 40% 100% 100% 100% 100% Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full, without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation. fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils. vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST. or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 11 of 36 -93/116 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources. com Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized resources, inc. 40- Light Microscopy (PLM) Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R Central Maint. Yard -93/116 J3 Order #: Project #: Date Received: Date Analyzed: Date Reported: JH 1673598 92167156 14-Apr-2016 19-Apr-2016 20-Apr-2016 Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 18-FC3-62 LAYER 1 Cove Base, White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Cove Base Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 19-FC3-63 LAYER 1 Cove Base, Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Cove Base Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 19-FC3-64 LAYER 1 Cove Base, Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Cove Base Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 19-FC3-65 LAYER 1 Cove Base, Brown, Homogeneous 20-FT2-66 20-FT2-67 LAYER 2 Cove Base Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Floor Tile, Off White/ Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Floor Tile, Off White/ Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Lee WP Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full, without written approval by J3 Resources. Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference. sample preparation. fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification. or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 12 of 36 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com resources, inc. :r Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: JH1673598 Project #: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Central Maint. Yard Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Non -Asbestos Constituents Constituents 20-FT2-68 21-FT5-69 •-FT5-70 21-FT5-71 22-WB 1-72 ( Joseph rtinez LAYER 1 Floor Tile, Off White/ Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Vinyl Sheeting, Tan/Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Vinyl Sheeting, Tan/Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Vinyl Sheeting, Tan/Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off White/White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Painted Texture, Off White/White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownMlhite, Homogeneous Analyst None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Cellulose Fiber 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Cellulose Fiber 10% Non -Fibrous Material 90% Lee WP Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources. Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1 % by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification. or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 13 of 36 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com resources, inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: JH1673598 Project #: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Central Maint. Yard Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 22-WB1-73 22-WB1-74 23-CT3-75 23-CT3-76 LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off WhiteM/hite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Painted Texture, Off WhiteM.hite, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownMlhite, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off WhiteMthite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Painted Texture, Off WhiteMlhite, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownANhite, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Ceiling Tile, White/Gray, Homogeneous None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 10% Non -Fibrous Material 90% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 10% Non -Fibrous Material 90% Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material Ceiling Tile, White/Gray, Homogeneous None Detected Analyst Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material 55% 5% 40% 55% 5% 40% Lee W. P Lab Direct or This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full, without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference -- of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval. certification. or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 14 of 36 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com resources, inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: Project #: Date Received: Date Analyzed: Date Reported: Central Maint. Yard JH1673598 92167156 14-Apr-2016 19-Apr-2016 20-Apr-2016 Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 23-CT3-77 Ceiling Tile, White/Gray, Homogeneous None Detected 24-CT3-78 Ceiling Tile, White/Pink, Homogeneous None Detected 24-CT3-79 Ceiling Tile, Mite/Pink, Homogeneous None Detected 24-CT3-80 25-SC6-81 25-SC6-82 25-SC6-83 26-F P 1-84 41. Joseph N}brtinez Ceiling Tile, White/Pink, Homogeneous None Detected Sink Undercoat. Gray. Homogeneous Sink Undercoat, Gray, Homogeneous Sink Undercoat, Gray, Homogeneous Fire Proofing, White, Homogeneous Analyst None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material 55% 5% 40% 10% 2% 88% 10% 2% 88% 10% 2% 88% 5% 85% Cellulose Fiber 5% Non -Fibrous Material 85% Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Fibrous Glass Synthetic Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Lee WP 5% 85% 55% 5% 40% Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources. Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed. matrix interference. sample preparation. fiber size. and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval. certification. or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST. or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 15 of 36 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources. com resources, inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: JH1673598 Project #: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Central Maint. Yard Asbestos Non -Asbestos Sample ID # Sample Description Constituents Constituents 26-FP1-85 26-F P 1-86 Fire Proofing, White. Homogeneous None Detected Fire Proofing, White, Homogeneous None Detected 26-FP1-87 26-FP1-88 26-FP1-89 26-FP1-90 Joseph rtinez Fire Proofing, White, Homogeneous None Detected Fire Proofing, White, Homogeneous None Detected Fire Proofing, White. Homogeneous None Detected Fire Proofing, White, Homogeneous None Detected Analyst Fibrous Glass 55% Synthetic Fiber 5% Non -Fibrous Material 40% Fibrous Glass 55% Synthetic Fiber 5% Non -Fibrous Material 40% Fibrous Glass Synthetic Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Fibrous Glass Synthetic Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Fibrous Glass Synthetic Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Fibrous Glass Synthetic Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Lee W 55% 5% 40% 55% 5% 40% 55% 5% 40% 55% 5% 40% Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full, without written approval by J3 Resources. Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference. sample preparation. fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification, or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST. or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 16 of 36 c J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized 113 resources, inc. :r Light Microscopy (PLM) Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R Central Maint. Yard -93/116 J3 Order #: Project #: Date Received: Date Analyzed: Date Reported: JH1673598 92167156 14-Apr-2016 19-Apr-2016 20-Apr-2016 Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 27-RF6-91 LAYER 1 Wrap, White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Insulation, Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Foam Insulation, Yellow, Homogeneous 27-RF6-92 LAYER 1 Wrap, White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Insulation, Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Foam Insulation, Yellow, Homogeneous 27-RF6-93 LAYER 1 Wrap, White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Insulation, Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Foam Insulation, Yellow, Homogeneous 28-FT2-94 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, Brown, Homogeneous 28-FT2-95 Joseph rtinez LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Floor Tile, Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 7g(h Analyst None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Synthetic Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Synthetic Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Synthetic Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Lee W; 60% 40% 100% 100% 60% 40% 100% 100% 60% 40% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full, without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1 % by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils. vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification, or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 17 of 36 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com resources, inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM)S EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: JH1673598 Project #: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Central Maint. Yard Asbestos Non -Asbestos Sample ID # Sample Description Constituents Constituents 28-FT2-96 LAYER 1 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Floor Tile, Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 2 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Mastic. Yellow, Homogeneous 29-FT2-97 LAYER 1 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Floor Tile. Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 2 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Mastic. Yellow, Homogeneous 29-FT2-98 LAYER 1 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Floor Tile. Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 2 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Mastic. Yellow, Homogeneous 29-FT2-99 30-CT4-100 LAYER 1 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Floor Tile. Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 2 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Mastic. Yellow, Homogeneous Ceiling Tile, White/Gray, Homogeneous None Detected Cellulose Fiber 55% Fibrous Glass 10% Non -Fibrous Material 35% 30-CT4-101 Ceiling Tile, White/Gray, Homogeneous None Detected Cellulose Fiber 55% Fibrous Glass 10% Non -Fibrous Material 35% 30-CT4-102 Ceiling Tile, White/Gray, Homogeneous None Detected Cellulose Fiber 55% Fibrous Glass 10% Non -Fibrous Material 35% Lee WP Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full, without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 18 of 36 I t. J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized l resources, inc. Light Microscopy (PLM) Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R Central Maint. Yard J3 Order #: Project #: Date Received: Date Analyzed: Date Reported: JH1673598 92167156 14-Apr-2016 19-Apr-2016 20-Apr-2016 Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 31-WB1-103 LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off White/White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White, Homogeneous 31-WB1-104 31-WB1-105 I t LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off White/White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownNVhite, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off White/White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownNVhite, Homogeneous Analyst None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material 100% 100% 10% 90% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material 100% 100% 10% 90% Lee W' Po»' Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources. Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size. and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1 % Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval. certification, or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 19 of 36 -93/116 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com resources, inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: Project #: Date Received: Date Analyzed: Date Reported: Central Maint. Yard JH1673598 92167156 14-Apr-2016 19-Apr-2016 20-Apr-2016 Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 31-WB1-106 31-WB1-107 LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off W ]iteANhite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, Brown/Wnite, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off Wfiite/1M ite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownANhite. Homogeneous 31-WB1-108 LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off WniteNVnite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownMlhite. Homogeneous None Detected Non -Fibrous Material None Detected None Detected None Detected Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material 100% 100% 100% 10% 90% 100% 100% 100% 10% 90% 100% 100% 100% 10% 90% Lee WPow' Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources. Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed. matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification. or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 20 of 36 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources. com resources, inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: JH1673598 Project#: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Central Maint. Yard Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 31-WB1-109 2-MG8-110 lir 32-MG8-111 32-MG8-112 33-FC3-113 LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off White/1M1ite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownMAlite, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Fiber Glass Panel, White, Homogeneous None Detected Fiber Glass Panel, White, Homogeneous None Detected Fiber Glass Panel, White, Homogeneous None Detected LAYER 1 Cove Base, Brown. Homogeneous LAYER 2 Cove Base Mastic, Tan, Homogeneous 33-FC3-114 LAYER 1 Cove Base, Brown, Homogeneous C Joseph LAYER 2 Cove Base Mastic, Tan, Homogeneous AEA rtinez Analyst None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 10% Non -Fibrous Material 90% Fibrous Glass 35% Non -Fibrous Material 65% Fibrous Glass 35% Non -Fibrous Material 65% Fibrous Glass 35% Non -Fibrous Material 65% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Direct or W. P Lab This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources. Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed. matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1 % by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification. or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST. or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 21 of 36 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com 1103 resources, inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLC EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 Central Maint. Yard J3 Order #: Project #: Date Received: Date Analyzed: Date Reported: JH1673598 92167156 14-Apr-2016 19-Apr-2016 20-Apr-2016 Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 33-FC3-115 LAYER 1 Cove Base, Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Cove Base Mastic, Tan, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected 34-CT3-116 Ceiling Tile, White/Gray, Homogeneous None Detected 34-CT3-117 34-CT3-118 35-CT3-119 Ceiling Tile, White/Gray, Homogeneous None Detected Ceiling Tile, White/Gray, Homogeneous None Detected Ceiling Tile, White/Brown, Homogeneous None Detected 35-CT3-120 Ceiling Tile, White/Brown, Homogeneous None Detected Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material 35-CT3-121 Ceiling Tile. White/Brown, Homogeneous None Detected Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material Joseph rtinez Analyst Lee WP 100% 100% 55% 10% 35% 55% 10% 35% 55% 10% 35% 10% 3% 87% 10% 3% 87% 10% 3% 87% Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full, without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference -- of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference. sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval. certification. or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 22 of 36 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com 113 resources, inc. -4P Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: JH1673598 Project #: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Central Maint. Yard Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Non -Asbestos Constituents Constituents 36-MG4-122 LAYER 1 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Stair Tread, Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 2 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Mastic, Tan, Homogeneous 36-MG4-123 LAYER 1 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Stair Tread, Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 2 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Mastic, Tan, Homogeneous 36-MG4-124 LAYER 1 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Stair Tread, Brown, Homogeneous CO LAYER 2 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Mastic, Tan, Homogeneous 37-MG7-125 Carpet Glue, Yellow, Homogeneous None Detected Synthetic Fiber <1% Non -Fibrous Material 100% 37-MG7-126 Carpet Glue, Yellow, Homogeneous None Detected Synthetic Fiber <1% Non -Fibrous Material 100% 37-MG7-127 Carpet Glue, Yellow, Homogeneous None Detected Synthetic Fiber <1% Non -Fibrous Material 100% 38-SC6-128 Sink Undercoat, White, Homogeneous None Detected Cellulose Fiber 8% Non -Fibrous Material 92% 38-SC6-129 Sink Undercoat, White, Homogeneous None Detected Cellulose Fiber 8% Non -Fibrous Material 92% Joseph NJ rtinez Analyst Lee VU P Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference. sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1%Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval. certification. or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST. or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 23 of 36 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources. com 1113 resources, inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: JH1673598 Project #: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Central Maint. Yard Asbestos Non -Asbestos Sample ID # Sample Description Constituents Constituents 38-SC6-130 Sink Undercoat, White, Homogeneous None Detected Cellulose Fiber 8% Non -Fibrous Material 92% 39-FT2-131 LAYER 1 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Floor Tile, Gray, Homogeneous LAYER 2 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 39-FT2-132 LAYER 1 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Floor Tile, Gray, Homogeneous LAYER 2 None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 39-FT2-133 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, Gray, Homogeneous 40-WB1-134 LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow. Homogeneous LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off WhiteAMiite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White. Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownMlhite, Homogeneous None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Cellulose Fiber 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Cellulose Fiber 10% Non -Fibrous Material 90% Lee W.' P Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full, without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference ----- of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation. fiber size. and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval. certification, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 24 of 36 i Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources. com resources, inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: JH1673598 Project #: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Central Maint. Yard Asbestos Non -Asbestos Sample ID # Sample Description Constituents Constituents 40-WB1-135 (t0B1136 LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off White/Mite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige. Homogeneous LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownANhite, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off WhiteMlhite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownMlhite, Homogeneous 40-WB1-137 Joseph rtinez None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Cellulose Fiber 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Cellulose Fiber 10% Non -Fibrous Material 90% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Cellulose Fiber 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Cellulose Fiber 10% Non -Fibrous Material 90% LAYER 1 Painted Texture. Off WhiteM/hite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Wallboard, Brown/White, Homogeneous /AA( Analyst None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Cellulose Fiber 10% Non -Fibrous Material 90% Lee W. P Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources. Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification, or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 25 of 36 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources. com resources, inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: JH1673598 Project #: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Central Maint. Yard Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 40-WB1-138 40-WB1-139 LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off WhiteMlhite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White. Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownANhite, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off White/Vuhite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Joint Compound. White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownANhite, Homogeneous 40-WB1-140 LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off VVhiteANbite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected LAYER 3 Joint Compound, VVhite, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownANhite, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material 100% 100% 10% 90% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material 100% 100% 10% 90% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material 100% 100% 10% 90% Joseph IV rtinez Analyst Lee W. PLab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources. Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification, or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 26 of 36 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com (6, Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 resources, inc. Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R Central Maint. Yard J3 Order #: Project #: Date Received: Date Analyzed: Date Reported: JH1673598 92167156 14-Apr-2016 19-Apr-2016 20-Apr-2016 Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 41-WB1-141 41-WB1-142 LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off WhiteANhite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Wallboard, BrownMlhite, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off WhiteMfhite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownNVhite, Homogeneous 41-WB1-143 Joseph LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off WhiteMlhite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material 10% 90% 100% 100% 100% 10% 90% LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownMlhite, Homogeneous AEA rtinez Analyst None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material 100% 100% 10% 90% Lee W. P Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed. matrix interference. sample preparation. fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification. or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST. or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 27 of 36 -93/116 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources. com resources, inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: Project #: Date Received: Date Analyzed: Date Reported: Central Maint. Yard JH1673598 92167156 14-Apr-2016 19-Apr-2016 20-Apr-2016 Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 42-WB4-144 42-WB4-145 LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off WhiteM kite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, Brown/White, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off White/Wiite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Wallboard, Brown/White, Homogeneous 42-WB4-146 LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off WhiteMhfite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Wallboard, BrownM/hite, Homogeneous 42-WB4-147 Joseph rtinez LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off White/White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Wallboard, BrownM/hite. Homogeneous 7gc,4 Analyst None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 10% Non -Fibrous Material 90% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 10% Fibrous Glass <1 Non -Fibrous Material 90% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 10% Fibrous Glass <1 Non -Fibrous Material 90% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 10% Fibrous Glass <1 Non -Fibrous Material 90% Lee W' P Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size. and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1 % by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils. vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval. certification, or endorsement by NVLAP, NISI. or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 28 of 36 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com resources, Inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: JH1673598 Project #: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Central Maint. Yard Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 42-WB4-148 LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off White/VN1ite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, BrownMlhite, Homogeneous I,t-WB4-149 43-WB4-150 None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off White/White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Wallboard, BrownMlhite, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off White/White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Tape, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 3 Joint Compound, White, Homogeneous LAYER 4 Wallboard, Brown/White, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material 10% <1 90% 100% 10% <1 90% 100% 100% 100% Cellulose Fiber 10% Fibrous Glass <1 Non -Fibrous Material 90% Lee W.'Pow' Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed. matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1 % by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification. or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST. or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 29 of 36 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized resources, inc. -40 Light Microscopy (PLM) Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R Central Maint. Yard J3 Order #: Project #: Date Received: Date Analyzed: Date Reported: JH1673598 92167156 14-Apr-2016 19-Apr-2016 20-Apr-2016 Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 43-WB4-151 43-WB4-152 LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off WhiteMlhite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Wallboard, BrownANhite, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off WhiteMfhite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Wallboard, Brown/White, Homogeneous 43-WB4-153 44-FP1-154 44-FP1-155 44-FP1-156 Joseph N}brtinez None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 10% Fibrous Glass <1 Non -Fibrous Material 90% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 10% Fibrous Glass <1 Non -Fibrous Material 90% LAYER 1 Painted Texture, Off WhiteANhite, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Wallboard, BrownANhite, Homogeneous Fire Proofing, Brown, Homogeneous Fire Proofing, Brown, Homogeneous Fire Proofing, Brown, Homogeneous Ach Analyst None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 10% Fibrous Glass <1 Non -Fibrous Material 90% Cellulose Fiber 90% Non -Fibrous Material 10% Cellulose Fiber 90% Non -Fibrous Material 10% Cellulose Fiber 90% Non -Fibrous Material 10% Lee W. PLab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference — of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval. certification, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 30 of 36 -93/116 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com 1113 resources, inc. :r Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: JH1673598 Project #: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Central Maint. Yard Asbestos Non -Asbestos Sample ID # Sample Description Constituents Constituents 44-F P 1-157 44-FP1-158 Fire Proofing, Brown, Homogeneous None Detected Cellulose Fiber Non -Fibrous Material 90% 10% Fire Proofing, Brown, Homogeneous None Detected Cellulose Fiber 90% Non -Fibrous Material 10% 45-FP1-159 45-FP1-160 45-FP1-161 46-FC3-162 LAYER 1 None Detected Synthetic Fiber 65% Carpet, Brown, Homogeneous Non -Fibrous Material 35% LAYER 2 None Detected Synthetic Fiber <1% Carpet Glue, Yellow, Homogeneous Non -Fibrous Material 100% LAYER 1 None Detected Synthetic Fiber 65% Carpet, Brown, Homogeneous Non -Fibrous Material 35% LAYER 2 None Detected Synthetic Fiber <1% Carpet Glue, Yellow, Homogeneous Non -Fibrous Material 100% LAYER 1 None Detected Synthetic Fiber 65% Carpet, Brown, Homogeneous Non -Fibrous Material 35% LAYER 2 None Detected Synthetic Fiber <1% Carpet Glue, Yellow, Homogeneous Non -Fibrous Material 100% LAYER 1 Cove Base, Brown, Homogeneous None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% LAYER 2 None Detected Cove Base Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous Non -Fibrous Material 100% Lee W.' P Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full, without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed. matrix interference. sample preparation. fiber size. and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1%Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification, or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST. or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 31 of 36 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized resources, inc. Light Microscopy (PLM) Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R Central Maint. Yard -93/116 J3 Order #: Project #: Date Received: Date Analyzed: Date Reported: JH1673598 92167156 14-Apr-2016 19-Apr-2016 20-Apr-2016 Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 46-FC3-163 LAYER 1 None Detected Cove Base, Brown, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Cove Base Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 46-FC3-164 LAYER 1 Cove Base, Brown, Homogeneous 47-FC3-165 LAYER 2 Cove Base Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous None Detected None Detected None Detected LAYER 1 None Detected Cove Base, Green, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Cove Base Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 47-FC3-166 LAYER 1 Cove Base, Green, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Cove Base Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 47-FC3-167 LAYER 1 Cove Base, Green, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Cove Base Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 48-FC3-168 LAYER 1 Cove Base, Black, Homogeneous 48-FC3-169 Joseph IV}brtinez None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected LAYER 2 Cove Base Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous LAYER 1 Cove Base, Black, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Cove Base Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous Analyst None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Lee WP Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full, without written approval by J3 Resources. Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval. certification. or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 32 of 36 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources. com resources, inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: JH1673598 Project #: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Central Maint. Yard Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 48-FC3-170 LAYER 1 Cove Base, Black, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Cove Base Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 49-CT4-171 Ceiling Tile, White/Gray, Homogeneous 49-CT4-1 72 I 46, 49-CT4-173 None Detected None Detected None Detected Ceiling Tile, White/Gray, Homogeneous None Detected Ceiling Tile, White/Gray, Homogeneous None Detected 50-FT2-174 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 50-FT2-175 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 50-FT2-176 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber 55% Fibrous Glass 10% Non -Fibrous Material 35% Cellulose Fiber 55% Fibrous Glass 10% Non -Fibrous Material 35% Cellulose Fiber 55% Fibrous Glass 10% Non -Fibrous Material 35% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Lee W.' P Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed. matrix interference. sample preparation. fiber size. and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval. certification. or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST, or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 33 of 36 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 113 resources, inc. Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R Central Maint. Yard -93/116 J3 Order #: Project #: Date Received: Date Analyzed: Date Reported: JH1673598 92167156 14-Apr-2016 19-Apr-2016 20-Apr-2016 Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 51-FT2-177 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 51-FT2-178 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 51-FT2-179 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 52-FT2-180 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 52-FT2-181 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 52-FT2-182 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, White, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 53-FC1-183 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous Analyst None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Chrysotile 2% Non -Fibrous Material 98% None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Lee W Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full, without written approval by J3 Resources. Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification. or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST. or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 34 of 36 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com resources, inc. '40 Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: Project #: Date Received: Date Analyzed: Date Reported: Central Maint. Yard JH1673598 92167156 14-Apr-2016 19-Apr-2016 20-Apr-2016 Sample ID # Sample Description Asbestos Constituents Non -Asbestos Constituents 53-FC1-184 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, Beige, Homogeneous LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous 53-FC1-185 LAYER 1 Floor Tile, Beige, Homogeneous 54-FC1-187 54-FC1-188 55-M G 5-189 55-MG5-1 90 55-MG5-1 91 56-CA1-192 LAYER 2 Mastic, Yellow, Homogeneous Chrysotile None Detected Chrysotile None Detected Ceiling Tile, White/Gray, Homogeneous None Detected Ceiling Tile, White/Gray, Homogeneous None Detected Ceiling Tile, White/Gray, Homogeneous None Detected Mastic, Gray, Homogeneous Mastic, Gray, Homogeneous Mastic, Gray, Homogeneous Caulk, Gray, Homogeneous Analyst None Detected None Detected None Detected None Detected 2% Non -Fibrous Material 98% Non -Fibrous Material 100% 2% Non -Fibrous Material 98% Non -Fibrous Material 100% Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass 55% 10% 35% 55% 10% Non -Fibrous Material 35% Cellulose Fiber Fibrous Glass Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material Non -Fibrous Material 55% 10% 35% 100% 100% 100% 100% Lee W. Po ' Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full. without written approval by J3 Resources. Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed. matrix interference, sample preparation. fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval, certification. or endorsement by NVLAP. NIST. or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 35 of 36 Mike Solomon Terracon Consulting 11555 Clay Road Houston TX 77043 J3 Resources, Inc. 6110 W. 34th Street, Houston, Texas 77092 Phone: (713) 290-0221 - Fax: (713) 290-0248 J3Resources.com resources, inc. Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) EPA 600/M4-82-020; 600/R-93/116 J3 Order #: JH1673598 Project #: 92167156 Date Received: 14-Apr-2016 Date Analyzed: 19-Apr-2016 Date Reported: 20-Apr-2016 Central Maint. Yard Asbestos Non -Asbestos Sample ID # Sample Description Constituents Constituents 56-CA1-193 Caulk, Gray, Homogeneous None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% 56-CA1-194 Caulk, Gray, Homogeneous None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% 57-CA2-195 Caulk, Black, Homogeneous None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% 57-CA2-196 Caulk, Black, Homogeneous None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% 57-CA2-197 Caulk, Black, Homogeneous None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% 58-CA5-198 Caulk, White, Homogeneous None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% 58-CA5-199 Caulk, White, Homogeneous None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% 58-CA5-200 Caulk, White, Homogeneous None Detected Non -Fibrous Material 100% Acti Joseph IV Srtinez Analyst Lee W. Pq Lab Director This report relates only to the materials tested. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed client and shall not be reproduced except in full, without written approval by J3 Resources, Inc. (J3). Samples are analyzed according to the methods listed above and are subject to the inherent limitations of PLM and interference of matrix components. Reporting limit for the above method is a function of the quantity of sample analyzed, matrix interference, sample preparation, fiber size, and distribution. Asbestos may be detected in concentrations of <1% by area if sufficient material is analyzed. J3 recommends TEM confirmation of soils, vermiculite and non -friable organically bound materials (NOB) reported as None Detected or < 1% Asbestos by PLM. All samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. This report shall not be used to claim product approval. certification, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST. or any agency of the federal government. NVLAP Lab Code: 200525-0; AIHA Lab ID: 157714; TDSHS License: 30-0273 Page 36 of 36 Submitter Name: Company: Address: 114 CHAIN OF CUSTODY A1n.u� c t•-ttm- ( S5-s c,L=-1 State: t v VLrz 1. Tv) Project Name: Project #: 921671.E Special Instructions: =P : n r /R-93/116 Visual Estimation (<1%) O 400 Point Count 0.25% O 1,000 Point Count 0.1% O Gravimetric Reduction O Matrix Reduction (+I-) O NIOSH 9002 O OSHA ID-191 Flame AA O NIOSH 7400 O ASTM D7201 O ISO 8672 O OSHA ID-160 O Lead In Paint — SW846 7420/3050R O Lead In Air — NIOSH 7082 O Lead In Wipes — SW846 7420/3050S O Lead In Soil — SW846 7420/305013 Zi.: 77c 4-3 O AHERA 0 NIOSH 7402 O ASTM D8281 0 ISO 10312 0 ISO 13794 BM to: Address: Clty/State: ��•-� Po #: 16 E- 22 ',f: i t ,- , y,,," :=rf i�i"'tri,.�-�kt�rb.�in -fir(' •oi��+, Project Manager: M I ,k SIbrs-)crts-3 Notification By: Email Invoice To: 0 Gravimetric Reduction (<1 %) O Matrix Reduction (+/-) O Quaittative (+/-) o Drop Mount o Filtration Graphite Furnace AA - LEAD 0 Drinking Water— EPA 200.9 O Wastewater— SW846-7421 O Soli/Sludge — SW846-7421 O Air — NIOSH 7105 Total Number of Samples Submitted: 2© r �� ":11 r y r �• Relinquished Sy: Received By: r , Date; -'squished By: Date: O EPA 100.2 Drinking Water o >10pmfibers o z0.5 pm fibers OEPA 100.2 Effluent / WW O Elements in Ali— NIOSH 7300 O Wipe/Soil - SW846-60109 O Effluent — SW846.60108 O Welding Fume — NIOSH 730081 O TCLP — 9W846-1311/801013 O ASTM D5755 Mlcrovec O ASTM D6480 Wipe o 600/J-93/167 Carpet - EPA O Bulk Dust Qualttative Zip: O ASTM 7521-TEM (+/-) O ASTM 5721-TEM (<1%) O CARB 435-Modified O Soil — PLM Only (+/-) O Vermiculite - TEM (+/-) O Vermiculite -Cincinnati O Erionite ID Gravimetric C NIOSH 0500 Tote! Particulates 0 NIOSH 0600 — Respirable Particulates Positive Stop: ❑ YES r._ ,slued By: Date: • Emergency TAT reg ikes prlorlab notification. All samples analyzed outskle normal business hours are charged at Emus/Icy rate. "TAT's are In Bushiest Days rather than Hours (1.e.1 Day TAT a End of Next Business Day) Time: e: / 5 Time: 7 _ Time: Time: J3 Resources, Inc. • 6110 West 34th Street • Houston, Texas 77092 • tel: 713/290-0221 • fax: 713/290-0246 Asbestos Sample Location Log Terraoon PN: g 2 (b7 I %. Inspector: f< •K • ,46 9 Page J.. of \ 7/ Sample No: Mn, as Code, sample No.) 0 1 Mt o - oz Written location where bulk sample is collected. Ve t(o'f car pef - (4, (o,ku5fw. - OJ 07-WgS.-by 03 - FC3 - d1.-co.-l0 -It ........ 9 - glow vi41(��oei J 1,A1C6—cc" 014 c e C a J& base 5�3. • 'Vtlfi r-k< COS) Fcjcnce co'Q— AD •„t r'J V2,I-06 yk.c{A ((Do A- DM/ ?U T3')6 0514 sk (-FtoortA5 rI )i() !ems ' . <i 1, II W(AI FrbeislCSS ee t�niwltif:on WA( 1 t A+ S+e o n+-c Cr 11 • 1� W k {G' Pciio or IA 4/PC . a-c X~l?.kre �r (e 00PA •L•__N_ 1•••■••____-- Collection Date Asbestos Sample Location Log Page of _ 2 Terracon PN: 4 21 b 3 S(o Inspector. k K f, AG Sample No: (HA, 88 Code; Sample No.) -20 ft z' Wr tten location where bulk sample h collected. Wii6MPf^'} PoPeo rv(�t/ --Yoe C /� e (I r hs 11 1v -, I�___w____rw_w G(-awetw_c.cewwc __.kwr�.- w�ir^rr__w_wr_rrrr_Ltd + to 6.,/\ wOveo wul(lcgte_u365 ).3 LLe40f--_rrw_w___w r f' - �J 0 'TG3 -2G ............ rwrw M__ 3° . I _0111_YM_w___M-_w_ to - W8- 32. - 33 rrw_•I___wrr______1_�1 WO 3. l 1 • _wrw__-wr__ 1 �__rw_ It tl ,s c \ at e l -t. c. ;, .� r �w_rrr�irra_wrv_ �wr_ww �1 __r. (4IA i �C5 vtb 0 4- f Ce ; (11 j !(e. Uj r., v.-,cst Ekirv,t4 — A9IA( Ai . L Con111 "C(ef\CC' Woo cdr'l.ei),knd 4"TA"�G E2lcs or rice ; ,e �.\.Sr`M.__�w2-r�...�i_�rwr r`_irirrri Boc. O _YI c.rrrr__i_ I�I�w�-rwwr.rw__rirw_ tliDr Collection Date Y.meow _rrr1=1,_ MIl•__-r � I �rlwlrr_-�rrw_r_wrw__r --. rwMAM_r_ ,K1 4 M d a ', 0 (y v�� 11-�-�6� evf- Cow � pooA �i to KOb j\ vUe S•1. (1,Lb A ()mcn) Asbestos Sample Location Log Terracon PN: g7 (6 1 f Inspector. Sample No: auk, 88 Code, Sample No.) JL:iLLJ.� Fid-�2 WC - LiL1 W 13LI - Ow • t-CTL- 54 r r S 5 SG Page of Written location where bulk sample b collected. Mrj roof) 5rrod of y �-� ti -� „�-� co .,1 C,r( •-':(' er0s-4- . F l CtcK S%-a'r tC r C;t t _.lmilOwr.___w-. 4t fe 12 x 1'2; (oor I 1;3.1 w t1 -4. 4. r a isLIwC-1 t .__ MCt P Poo vvt - R 0r1(4( I Gt l2' x 12: -Ctoor \ i1 It_ ;A3.4,!' -1-•(! I(m.0 -.r_-_ww a.-_r_ww l)f04,A) 5vnoc ^ / L .10 to vrvt 2� �� r L14DM1°v II Il i `'X 1 c e ; f. I rtq �-% (e U1) / -HA ye a 0. tit e �r CollecBon Date -_NIOMr. Terraoon PN: Inspector. 24b?-t5� ( r e 0 Asbestos Sample Location Log Page a ` L.) - Sample No: (HA, BS Code, Sample No.) OP . 5q 1 1-FC3-�3 - (05 64 Written location where bulk sample k collected. 0In; f2 D R c 1\44-; c Collection Date It • t co lir i3i'7c 6J/ AA/ hrci5/; J! // • kk IMMILL1/41011.4 `, r DDPI--LLED. ex 12" y{. (6),-ti Plot) r41 Ve / >> 1 t K Lk,' 8fnutlti ctoos 6-11 M - V FV f1 I �_ __.._-.._ 0 - i 1 l - 7a bO „ 1' . V\)'1(l '�_ av -----________ ____ __________r _____ _momirim ')3 • • • ___.•_ ____1•••._ __N_N_ /; Asbestos Sample Location Log Terracon PN: "� 2 (G115 G Inspector: Sample No: (HA, BS Code, Sample No.) ! a3 -Cr3_ 2'4 -CT3 `co 5 -SO&`�I Page of Written location where bulk sample is collected. UMf x ccL_114 fife tf/"°.tide w an t{f. g.` X a 1 c d i RLA w/ 5 M Q 0-1-11 Collection Date kSIrreo . v 2 () { Cd S { /l t c o a w k'ti O M .1k UFP -3 li(+ - _ l-..-,.. 1Njh; +e Ire^Fr04-Pd it "viar ;RT : (o -e? ti - c . - % <�, -1-( Inc k R M..0 *al( Uri ... --r- ..�__ M--fir __1••_•111N " ilo ki ___ ..... —_..... 4.._�_—IFel_ - - . 2Ao -(oo( -- vu) • • v t V V' r.rr,Z_—r—rw—____�.__—w_i_--rr^.--r_____NO --__21/4 kaA l A._e, g14p0-t-, N (M_ M/ C A -{ �- - ! 1 � 7 - 1 i D 2- k 1 • - - 11 i 1i Asbestos Sample Location Log Terracon PN: Gf 7 1 fo 1 I S. G Inspector: k. -l- i)C-1D Sample No: (HA, SS Code, Sample No • ciT 2'1, - Fla 9? _ q g -CT- 100 - I as t •wa1 - co3. - log} - 10 INOlm R Page of c 2- J Written location where bulk sample is collected. a Igt P tf► # r 144 b n M t 2' X 1 e -C t o o r -VI (-e -t- rua sue! c 1� — NOA Roo . 11 � inMDa(k 3r ,,.,,� 1Z X I r (o r -ii` i e Go/ye ((G ado 1, ik Cam/ KO04'N l Collectlon Date goon M. Maw Z Ova _ oct.(.. !?iZa=^----------------- U&SACk «oc 107 r_r _I..._r (og, .....r_—r__w_N_ 31 -w3! to- �co ill Tra..1L� niQo�. _rw_rr }_ --r _---_—__ SOs CLOOr Nall vJcaU .rrrrrrrr__r_r __•_rr_r-_----------- TC% �� 1 -e ✓et n Gf C PGk. _1 t-A-cavl S Kiss-E- c o cif^^ irrrrrr_r_r__—r tMf 4,s+room , C Terraoon PN: Inspector. Asbestos Sample Location Log Page 2' of \ 7! Clz. I64 (S(, 1 Sample No: (HA, SS code, Sample No.) 39 - MEg- (,a, - 11LI -C 3._` I , r Written location where bulk sample is collected. `-co i IhP R-e el -Corked pcuae C. • i�J _ 1\ 0Ckp( in1-14-e Cyr' 1 i -4-; (e w J lL-p�►1 - — U___________ - -_ .L L I1 wc�.v. I s-4- �C0 e- 5h�T-e a'X� ` Dr.tvmc,l1 Cetli� -11iE -____________�rla�_................. S__rr �o wl - la\ 36 - ►A614 ` 12, ti _...... _.r___ —__ 3g -500- (g - 12 • ,St -ro c - (2-'cown -1-1-ea c( w,.T4-1 -1-41,.i tut.q _STD rz S ►1 4-5 _r.... ��I..rrMFrYYY._r♦r-r ]N____r _____ t IAe, — 21L a LLVe 1 C \A 1.1 -----___rrr_—r ranrs_rrr___r r__..._— ii r� K Q r� -Fmil Ccol W7 ��--rrr-rrrrrr_r__ Collection Date • ole 5 Coo S`9 im do. 2YOS 3Sf 1\ Terracon PN: q2 4) 15-'6 Asbestos Sample Location Log Page Inspector: /C 1C . -% '1-C Sample No: (H& eS Coda Sample No.) J - Z•'31 - 132, 3� _ 133 rrrr.rMr.^rrM rrr.rrwrt 10 as rrr.rME rrrrrr_r__rrrr. OP IMP rM.r.1.1 Written location where bulk sample la collected. (j(e.y (A) / 51-rc k 55(�/T (oor (e. �..rTrrriiT �'ri�dwr_�r rrrr a M__ L-(4Vch Rod, r...mor............. 1.-,cV1 Poo 'vt rrrrrr•y.... of t7� 'SO StC- NI/WMr. r1,010,11••rMEr4••r MEr,. .rrr...rrrrr rrrrr.rME.. •.i•.ME..rrrrr� r.MNDND rrrr N r.•w......r rain --rfr.rr MrrrrrMrrrrMrrrrrrU.arrrrrrrr • flm rr'rrMErr MErr•immal rrrr • ND r r rM..r MEr r •. r•.ME ME.M rr rr rrFrr. MEr MErrrrrrr.r MEND IMO .... ME•rrr0..rrrMMErr Mr MrMrMrr1rMEMEr.. ..... �MMr.Mrrrrr MMr NMrrNriMEME•=111 rrrrrrrrrir�� rrrraME.rrr rrrrrrMErMEr ...rrr.rrr ME.MrrrrMEME rr.rr..rMEMEfY Asbestos sample Location Log Page of 1 v Terraoon PN: -1 /46 ? Inspector: KA"i A6) Sample No: (HA, ss Code, Sample No.) qo -, w 01 - 134 - 135 - 130, Written location where bulk sample is collected. tom»lairi 1A)lA0'94- of yvi c.f l 47, v\ .•< Po w A 6 i al 0.000001 - 131 -HI - 0.0 __ _ sLasrvi21 0-- c.ok4 iro cl In WO1I b o a . -4- (� wF^-- ():tal eve l __pc, ,0 ^•.? c� 4- Tc, pe- WOOD Sr o-� 4+ TT 1Zoa_ -_r_-__ _- - _ __•._-r..- . 1 fo • 1 r1la�vU IS4 1..02.1. 4_ Ost Q-- __r__wrrrr_LL_vA .•rr_f__{1_ 4_ � •• --- 514 e'er . Lt-1 i-e ovt51,p cf. wl _- Ilair-_tir••____ it •.___ _oM i Ft +� a 6 fie—�. 0000.1.001.1001100.11. VS1 \ V; i c O" -f Cl Terraoon PN: Asbestos Sample Location Log 121'71�� Inspector: -r -4 6D Page Et) of r _ Sample No: (HA, BS Code, Sample No_) Written location where bulk sample is collected. 5 - W 3y ' 15a W ti . -fie E C'.e :1, -� -t-C)4---tee y `( • FP1- I S.`f -f55 —.. ram.____... __.r._ •••___._...__ _ r _ _._ r _ _ r_ r—y_..w_ w. Om Snell _ • C3 - 1bLi 11+ - FCC ` (b5 _ _ _ r _-..—_ _ r _r_r r...._ _ w gt-0' ' Sp(Qi 4,,PPI'l-ea cite pro v w LS ,1 V f3(10) cc, p-c-t- c T-1 c Gt yE EMS Seca t-AO-y -- . 2 (ct 1-e vc ,__ R_QS2N_ __ (3(ow 4 ('dam totse 4- wlcr S kc. — 2 ro o M 11 \ 11 6lee'i co v-e .b c_e M 4 144 c .. -— rem --- rw r-..w.._r.r__r... Coltectton Date Oar 30 0 S1 250051 45 - :G3 - le - - \ f cam} ___rr_______r___r__ _'.'r___'T-'__ _______ r . spot sc ++ten n,L 4.3+1 s{e_c-rot . Asbestos Sample Location Log Page 11 of VZ- Terraoon PN: q 9, i 6-4I s 6 Inspector: KK f AGO Sample No: (HA, B8 Code. Sample No.) Written location where bulk sample /a collected. (A)1; T'C' 2 X LI ce + n -H i c c,» 1 p — Y ROOM Collection Dabs 12 X Ii.'". -Poo, Tao wit YeftovJ Wktis+r C5 \I z x 12 '.) i-e w/ b Cficectr5 too wJ_ Iio tit ►M..es-1 c c P L-aye( 1_-� LTcc-i� it a `Fla - i �� Qi�° (�=11 "±L_la,_, aS ! _�sf�d .eY - 1 I 53 - Eci - 153 ww-__r-rf.w Tar\ 1N11-11‘ blown 1)4\farrI f' (t>M :_-----)21-0s-- Le t o d w\ g5� - 'X I re .Its • Terraoon PN: Inspector: Asbestos Sample Location Log qt (. ? I STD K Sample No: (HA, 88 Code, Sample No.) 5-5- -M6S-igJ « - - (93 Page a of ( Written location where bulk sample is collected. (�vt Cf i1--f S 7Li c 2 A cf l vLl..-N L-rw------- 11 I. I.. ims rm. —w•___r.r_r—_—_NE - lac 4i4rll41._ ..... _N v -.Mw.ilmr—.wN ...... cfr - 1612' ter r._--/.—.—N--ww.w—w—..Iq1_ ma _..�.r.-.Yr _—_N.----- -------------- ...... N---_NM_____—__N��--n,. _—�... N61.rr_-- i wT...... N—N_—N—r—M _!.-w.M___--r--i_�w.______N_PI.—r—ww---_I-_—I—__—M_/w—r---Nw.—i-- ---_-----------r--- • • • APPENDIX C LICENSES • • TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF STATE HEALTH SERVICES Expiration Date: 11 /30/2016 License Number: 100157 (Void After Expiration Date) NON -TRANSFERABLE VOID IF ALTERED TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF STATE HEALTH SERVICES SOURCES INC is certified to perform as a License Number: 300273 (Void After Expiration Date) Control Number: 96105 NON -TRANSFERABLE VOID IF ALTERED 1 Texas Department of State Health Services Asbestos Project Manager KORUTHU 0 KEERIKATTU License No. 501408 Control No. 97271 Expiration Date: 7/29/2017 Texas Department of State Health Services Asbestos Air Monitoring Technician KORUTHU 0 KEERIKATTU License No. 706433 Control No. 97367 Expiration Date: 7/10/2017 1' ki Texas Department of 1 State Health Services Asbestos Inspector KORUTHU 0 KEERIKATTU License No. 602809 Control No. 97887 Expiration Date: 4/12/2017 Texas Department of State Health Services ' } Asbestos Inspector AARON DOMINGUEZ License No. 603392 Control No. 97848 Expiration Date: 1/14/2017 J • • • APPENDIX B GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING STUDY REPORT • 4, Geotechnical Engineering Study New Administration Building City of Pearland Public Service Center Pearland, Texas Prepared For H u itt-Zol l a rs Houston, Texas Prepared By Paradigm Consultants, Inc. 9980 W. Sam Houston Pkwy. South, Suite 500 Houston, Texas 77099 TBPE Reg. No. F-001478 January 2016 January 21, 2016 Paradigm Project No. 16-1002 Mr. Chris Manthei, AIA, RAS Vice President Huitt-Zollars 1500 South Dairy Ashford Rd , Ste 200 Houston, TX 77077 Geotechnical Study New Administration Building City of Pearland Public Service Center Pearland, Texas Mr. Manthei: Paradigm Consultants, Inc. 9980 W. Sam Houston Pkwy s. Suite 600 Houston, Texas 77099 Tel: 713.686.6771 Fax: 713.686.6795 paradigogortiultants.tern PIPE Reg. No. F-001478 Paradigm Consultants, Inc. presents this report of our geotechnical study for the above referenced project. This study was authorized with a signed agreement between Hulti- Zollars and Paradigm Consultants, Inc. dated January 7, 2016. The performed scope of service was in general accordance with our submitted Proposal 15-328, dated January 4, 2016. Our report presents options that will affect the design, construction, performance, and cost of the structure, and involve compromises and varying levels of risk associated with movement, building distress, and other 'actors. These issues should be discussed with the Owner and appropriate members of the Owner's design team including the Geotechnical Engineer to help ensure that the issues and options are understood and applied in a manner commensurate with the Owner's budget, tolerance of risk, and expectations of performance and maintenance. We appreciate the opportunity to work with you during the design phase of this project and look forward to the opportunity to provide construction materials testing and monitoring services during the construction phase. If we may be of further assistance, please call us at your convenience. Sincerely, oft r Ronald Gutierrez Graduate Engineer .ST . 9l,: Te4. '1 tt ANK S. ONG i •1 �'•., 83982 r' 'F,jank Ong, P.E. tf -P {/ r o , a`; nginee-ing Manager it ltst ON `�EHG.. :f TABLE OF CONTENTS Important Information about your Geotechnical Engineering Report Page EXECUTIVE SUMMARY INTRODUCTION 1 FIELD EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING 1 Drilling Operations 1 Soil Sampling 2 Water -Level Measurements 2 Laboratory Testing 2 Boring Logs 3 SURFACE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 4 Surface Conditions 4 Subsurface Conditions 4 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS 5 Foundation Design 5 Foundation Installation 5 Foundation Performance 7 FLOOR SLAB SYSTEM 7 Structurally Isolated Floor Slab 7 Slab -on Grade 8 Slab Performance 9 PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS 12 Design Considerations 12 Rigid Paving Section 12 EXTERIOR SIDEWALKS, PATIOS, AND SURFACE PAVING 14 SITE DEVELOPMENT CONSIDERATIONS 14 Site Drainage 15 Existing Foundations 15 Existing Utilities 15 Existing Fill Materials 15 Proofrolling 16 Select Fill Placement and Testing 16 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION 16 LIMITATIONS 17 Design Review 17 Standard of Care 17 Report Reproduction 17 REFERENCES 18 Plan of Borings Figure 1 Soil Boring Logs Appendix Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 Impor1aut IoIormaDoo About Your Geotechnical Engineering Report Subsurface problems are a principal cause of construction delays, cost overruns, claims, and disputes. The following information is provided to help you manage your risks. Geotechnical Services Are Performed for Specific Purposes, Persons, and Projects Geotechnical engineers structure their services to meet the specific needs of their clients. A geotechnical engineering study conducted for a civil engi- neer may not fulfill the needs of a construction contractor or even another civil engineer. Because each geotechnical engineering study is unique, each geotechnical engineering report is unique, prepared solely for the client. No one except you should rely on your geotechnical engineering report without first conferring with the geotechnical engineer who prepared it. And no one — not even you — should apply the report for any purpose or project except the one originally contemplated. Read the Full Report Serious problems have occurred because those relying on a geotechnical engineering report did not read it all. Do not rely on an executive summary. Do not read selected elements only. A Geotechnical Engineering Report Is Based on A Unique Set of Project -Specific Factors Geotechnical engineers consider a number o1 unique, project -specific fac- tors when establishing the scope of a study. Typical factors include: the client's goals, objectives, and risk management preferences; the general nature of the structure involved, its size, and configuration; the location of the structure on the site; and other planned or existing site improvements, such as access roads, parking lots, and underground utilities. Unless the geotechnical engineer who conducted the study specifically indicates oth- erwise, do not rely on a geotechnical engineering report that was: • not prepared for you, • not prepared for your project, • not prepared for the specific site explored, or • completed before important project changes were made. Typical changes that can erode the reliability of an existing geolechnical engineering report include those that affect: • the function of the proposed structure, as when it's changed from a parking garage to an office building, or from a light industrial plant to a refrigerated warehouse, • elevation, configuration, location, orientation, or weight of the proposed structure, • composition of the design team, or • project ownership. As a general rule, always inform your geotechnical engineer of project changes —even minor ones —and request an assessment of their impact. Geotechnical engineers cannot accept responsibility or liability for problems that occur because their reports do not consider developments of which they were not informed. Subsurface Conditions Can Change A geotechnical engineering report is based on conditions that existed at the time the study was performed. Do not rely on a geotechnical engineer- ing report whose adequacy may have been affected by: the passage of time; by man-made events, such as construction on or adjacent to the site; or by natural events, such as floods, earthquakes, or groundwater fluctua- tions. Always contact the geotechnical engineer before applying the report to determine if it is still reliable. A minor amount of additional testing or analysis could prevent major problems. Most Geotechnical Findings Are Professional Opinions Site exploration identifies subsurface conditions only at those points where subsurface tests are conducted or samples are taken. Geotechnical engi- neers review field and laboratory data and then apply their professional judgment to render an opinion about subsurface conditions throughout the site. Actual subsurface conditions may differ —sometimes significantly — from those indicated in your report. Retaining the geolechnical engineer who developed your report to provide construction observation is the most effective method of managing the risks associated with unanticipated conditions. A Report's Recommendations Are Not Final Do not overrely on the construction recommendations included in your report. Those recommendations are not final, because geotechnical engi- neers develop them principally from judgment and opinion. Geotechnical engineers can finalize their recommendations only by observing actual subsurface conditions revealed during construction. The geotechnical engineer who developed your report cannot assume responsibility or liability for the report's recommendations if that engineer does not perform construction observation. A Geotechnical Engineering Report Is Subject to Misinterpretation Other design team mernbers' misinterpretation of geotechnical engineering reports has resulted in costly problems. Lower that risk by having your geo- technical engineer confer with appropriate members of the design team after submitting the report. Also retain your geotechnical engineer to review perti- nent elements of the design team's plans and specifications. Contractors can also misinterpret a geolechnical engineering report. Reduce that risk by having your geotechnical engineer participate in prebid and preconstruction conferences, and by providing construction observation. Do Not Redraw the Engineer's Logs Geotechnical engineers prepare final boring and testing logs based upon their interpretation of field logs and laboratory data. To prevent errors or omissions, the logs included in a geotechnical engineering report should never be redrawn for inclusion in architectural or other design drawings. Only photographic or electronic reproduction is acceptable, but recognize that separating logs from the report can elevate risk. Give Contractors a Complete Report and Guidance Some owners and design professionals mistakenly believe they can make contractors liable for unanticipated subsurface conditions by limiting what they provide for bid preparation. To help prevent costly problems, give con- tractors the complete geotechnical engineering report, but preface it with a clearly written letter of transmittal. In that letter, advise contractors that the report was not prepared for purposes of bid development and that the report's accuracy is limited; encourage them to confer with the geotechnical engineer who prepared the report (a modest fee may be required) and/or to conduct additional study to obtain the specific types of information they need or prefer. A prebid conference can also be valuable. Be sure contrac- tors have sufficient time to perform additional study. Only then might you be in a position to give contractors the best information available to you, while requiring them to at least share some of the financial responsibilities stemming from unanticipated conditions. Read Responsibility Provisions Closely Some clients, design professionals, and contractors do not recognize that geotechnical engineering is far less exact than other engineering disci- plines. This lack of understanding has created unrealistic expectations that have led to disappointments, claims, and disputes. To help reduce the risk of such outcomes, geotechnical engineers commonly include a variety of explanatory provisions in their reports. Sometimes labeled "limitations" many of these provisions indicate where geotechnical engineers' responsi- bilities begin and end, to help others recognize their own responsibilities and risks. Read these provisions closely. Ask questions. Your geotechnical engineer should respond fully and frankly. Ceoenvironmental Concerns Are Not Covered The equipment, techniques. and personnel used to perform a geoenviron- mental study differ significantly from those used to perform a geotechnical study. For that reason, a geotechnical engineering report does not usually relate any geoenvironmental findings, conclusions, or recommendations; e.g., about the likelihood of encountering underground storage tanks or regulated contaminants. Unanticipated environmental problems have led to numerous project failures. If you have not yet obtained your own geoen- vironmental information, ask your geolechnical consultant for risk man- agement guidance. Do not rely on an environmental report prepared for someone else. Obtain Professional Assistance To Deal with Mold Diverse strategies can be applied during building design, construction, operation, and maintenance to prevent significant amounts of mold from growing on indoor surfaces. To be effective, all such strategies should be devised for the express purpose of mold prevention, integrated into a com- prehensive plan, and executed with diligent oversight by a professional mold prevention consultant. Because just a small amount of water or moisture can lead to the development of severe mold infestations, a num- ber of mold prevention strategies focus on keeping building surfaces dry. While groundwater, water infiltration, and similar issues may have been addressed as part of the geotechnical engineering study whose findings are conveyed in this report, the geotechnical engineer in charge of this project is not a mold prevention consultant: none of the services per- formed in connection with the geotechnical engineer's study were designed or conducted for the purpose of mold preven- tion. Proper implementation of the recommendations conveyed in this report will not of itself be sufficient to prevent mold from growing in or on the structure involved. Rely, on Your ASFE-Member Geotechncial Engineer for Additional Assistance Membership in ASFE/The Best People on Earth exposes geotechnical engineers to a wide array of risk management techniques that can be of genuine benefit for everyone involved with a construction project. Confer with you ASFE-member geotechnical engineer for more information. 1 ASFE The Besl Pennlo on Earth 8811 Colesville Road/Suite G106, Silver Spring, MD 20910 Telephone: 301/565-2733 Facsimile: 301/589-2017 e-mail: inlo@asfe.org www.asfe.org Copyright 2004 by ASFE, Inc. Duplication, reproduction. or copying of this document, in whole or to part, by any means whatsoever, is strictly prohibited. except with ASFE's specific written permission. Excerpting, quoting, or otherwise extracting working from this document is permitted onty with the express written permission of ASFE, and only for purposes of scholarly research or book review. Only members of ASFE may use this document as a complement to or as an element of a geotechnkal engineering report, Any other firm, individual, or other entity that so uses this document without being an ASFE member could be committing negligent or intentional (fraudulent) misrepresentation. IIG11108041 OM -i- EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Huitt-Zollars engaged Paradigm Consultants, Inc. to provide geotechnical design recommendations and construction considerations for the new administration building at City of Pearland Public Service Center in Pearland, Texas. This summary presents selected highlights of our findings and recommendations as a courtesy to the reader. It does not present crucial details needed for the proper application of our findings and recommendations. The findings of this study and recommendations are related through the full report only. The subsurface soils, based on intercepted soils from six exploratory soil borings, consist of mostly fat clays within the 25-ft explored depth. Water was encountered at depths ranging from 4 to 6 ft below the existing grade in Boring B-2. No water was encountered in the remaining borings during our field exploration. The building can be supported on drilled-and-underreamed piers bearing at a depth of about 14 ft below existing grade. The foundations can be sized using net allowable bearing pressures of 4.2 kips/ft2 for total load and 2.8 kips/ft2 for dead load plus sustained live load. A bell -to -shaft ratio of 3:1 may be considered. If a 3:1 bell -to -shaft ratio in the pier excavation is not possible during construction, a reduced bell -to -shaft ratio or a straight - sided shaft with a design bell diameter will be required. We recommend test piers be drilled to determine the construction feasibility. The clays within the anticipated zone of seasonal moisture change have plasticity indices ranging from 50 to 75. These soils have a very high shrink -swell potential with changes in moisture content. Two floor systems can be considered to address the risk and consequences of swelling for the floor: a structurally supported floor slab or a slab -on -grade. To reduce potential movements of a slab -on -grade, we recommend a minimum 5-ft thick buffer of select fill be prepared beneath the slab. This method will also require that the concrete pavement is placed around the building perimeter with no exposed soil adjacent to the slab. Paradigm recommends 5-in. thick concrete paving for passenger vehicle parking areas only, 6-in. thick concrete paving for passenger vehicle driveways, and 7-in. thick concrete paving for the entrance, access to dumpster pads, and heavy truck traffic areas. For planning purpose, the pavement subgrade should be stabilized with lime to an 8-in. depth. The appropriateness of stabilizer and application rate for the subgrade should be determined at the time of construction. Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 1 0 INTRODUCTION Paradigm Consultants, Inc. (Paradigm) presents this report of our geotechnical study for a new administration building at City of Pearland Public Service Center in Pearland, Texas. This study was authorized with a signed agreement between Huitt-Zollars and Paradigm Consultants, Inc. dated January 7, 2016. The performed scope of service was in general accordance with our submitted Proposal 15-328, dated January 4, 2016. The project is a 12,000-ft2 two-story building with associated paving and underground utilities. The objectives of this study were to develop design recommendations and construction considerations for building foundations, paving, and subgrade preparation. Our study included the following tasks: • Drilling and sampling six soil borings to explore the subsurface stratigraphy and groundwater levels; • Geotechnical laboratory tests to aid in soil classification and determine the engineering properties of the soils encountered at the sites; • Analysis of the field and laboratory test data to model the soil stratigraphy; • Evaluation of the construction requirements and soil stratigraphy to develop foundation and paving design and construction related recommendations; and • Preparing this report presenting our findings and recommendations. FIELD EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING Our field exploration included drilling and sampling three 25-ft borings and three 5-ft borings. The approximate boring locations are shown on Figure 1. The borings were located in the field using the proposed development plan and existing landmarks. Drilling Operations Van and Sons, a subcontractor to Paradigm, drilled and sampled soil borings on January 12 2016 using truck mounted drilling equipment. Paradigm's field representative was on -site to monitor drilling activities, direct the sampling efforts, and log the boreholes. Our field operations were performed in general accordance with ASTM International (ASTM D 1452' and ASTM D 57832). Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 2 Soil Sampling Soil was sampled continuously at 2-ft intervals to 12-ft depth (unless terminated at shallower depth) with additional samples taken between 13-ft and 15-ft depths, and at 5-ft intervals thereafter to the completion of the borehole. The sampling method is determined based on the anticipated soils. Cohesive Soil. Soils interpreted to be cohesive soils (clay) during field operations were sampled by hydraulically pushing a 3-in. diameter, thin -walled steel tube a distance of about 24 in. Our field sampling procedures were in general accordance with ASTM D 1587.3 For each recovered sample, our representative extruded the sample in the field, visually classified the soil, and measured the penetration resistance using a pocket penetrometer. A representative portion of the recovered sample was wrapped in aluminum foil and placed into a plastic bag for transport to our laboratory. Cohesionless Soil. Soils interpreted to be cohesionless soils (sand and silt) during field operations were sampled as part of the Standard Penetration Test (SPT) by driving a 2-in. diameter split -barrel sampler. The sampler was driven 18 in. by a 140-Ib hammer falling 30 in. in general accordance with the ASTM D 1586.4 Our representative recorded the number of blows required to drive the sampler through three consecutive 6-in. intervals. As permitted by ASTM D 1586, sampling was terminated if 50 blows were recorded within any one 6-in. interval. The sum of blows required to penetrate the final 12 in. is the SPT "N" value. For each sample, our representative visually classified the soils within the split -barrel sampler and placed a portion of the recovered sample into a plastic bag for transport to our laboratory. Water -Level Measurements Drilling protocol includes dry augering from ground surface to the depth where water or borehole sidewall instability occurs. If neither water nor instability is encountered, dry -auger drilling techniques are used to the full depth of the boring. If water is encountered, the water level within the borehole is measured at 5-minute intervals for at least 15 minutes before drilling resumes using wet rotary methods. Laboratory Testing Paradigm performed geotechnical laboratory tests in general accordance with ASTM methods on selected soil samples to aid in soil classification and determine engineering properties. The test methods performed are presented in Table 1. Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 -3 Table 1: Laboratory Test Methods Test Name Test Method Moisture Content ASTM D 2216 Liquid and Plastic Limits and Plasticity Index ASTM D 4318b Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil ASTM D 2166' Unconsolidated-Undrained Triaxial Compression Test on Cohesive Soil ASTM D 28508 Boring Logs Paradigm's field representative logged each soil boring recording the drilling method, sampling method and interval, and penetration resistance. Details of the stratigraphic conditions encountered at each boring location were recorded on the field log in general accordance with ASTM D 5434.9 Identification and descriptions of the soils were based on visual -manual procedures described in ASTM D 2488.1° The boring logs were developed using the stratigraphic and soil property data obtained during our field exploration and laboratory testing programs. Each log represents our interpretation of general soil and water conditions at the boring location. The boring logs include the type and interval depth for each sample, the corresponding penetration resistance, and the results of the index properties and strength testing. Soil classifications were based on the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D 248711). The boring logs and a key to the terms and symbols used on the logs are included in Appendix. When a penetration resistance value of 4.5 tsf is recorded and penetration resistance is used to determine soil consistency, Paradigm describes consistency as very stiff to hard. In the absence of unconfined compressive strength data, Paradigm does not expressly state that soil is hard consistency. In the absence of the appropriate field and/or laboratory test data at the interval depth, no estimate of consistency or density is noted. Unified Soil Classification System. ASTM D 2487 classifies soil as either fine-grained or coarse -grained with the percentage of soil particles finer than the No. 200 sieve size used to differentiate between coarse -grained and fine-grained soil. Clay and silt are fine-grained soils and have 50% or more of their particles finer than the No. 200 sieve size. Gravel and sand are coarse -grained soils and have less than 50% of their particles finer than the No. 200 sieve size. Clay has a plasticity index (PI) of 4 or greater and the plot of plasticity index versus liquid limit falls on or above the "A" line of the plasticity chart. Silt typically has a PI less than 4 and the plot of plasticity index versus liquid limit falls below the "A" line of the plasticity chart. For clay and silt, the descriptor "with sand" is used if 15% to 30% of the particles are sand size. If more than 30% of the particles within a clay or silt sample are sand size, the descriptor Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 -4- "sandy" is used. Fat clay has a liquid limit greater than or equal to 50, and lean clay has a liquid limit less than 50. Silty clay (CL-ML) has a PI between 4 and 7. SURFACE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS General surface conditions were noted during our field exploration program. Subsurface conditions were evaluated by drilling six exploratory soil borings within the project site. Discussions of the site, subsurface and groundwater conditions encountered during our field exploration are presented in the following sections. Surface Conditions The site is generally level with existing building and paving. Subsurface Conditions The subsurface soils, based on intercepted soils from six exploratory soil borings, consist of mostly fat clays within the 25-ft explored depth. Additional details of encountered soils with laboratory test results are presented on boring logs in Appendix. Water was encountered at depths ranging from 4 to 6 ft below the existing grade in Boring B-2. No water was encountered in the remaining borings during our field exploration. Short- term water level observations should not be interpreted to represent long-term conditions. Water levels vary seasonally and with climatic conditions. Expansiveness of Soils Encountered. The clays within the anticipated zone of seasonal moisture change, the existing ground surface to a depth of about 10 ft, have a very high swell/shrinkage potential (Holtz & Gibbs12, Raman13, and Chen"), as shown in Table 2. Pls for the tested clays within the upper 10-ft depth ranged from 50 to 75. Table 2: Potential for Expansion Expansion Potential Plasticity Index Range Liquid Limit Range Low PI<18 ---- Medium 15 <_ PI 5 28 35 <_ LL <_ 50 High 255PI541 505LL570 Very High PI > 35 LL > 70 Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 -5 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS The foundation system for the proposed structures must satisfy two independent engineering criteria with respect to foundation soils. First, the foundation system should be designed with an appropriate factor of safety against failure of the foundation soils. Second, the movement to the foundation system due to compression (consolidation) or expansion (swell) of the soils supporting the foundation system must be within tolerable limits for the structure. Foundation Design The field and laboratory data acquired indicate that competent soils were encountered within the 25-ft depth explored. Recommended foundation design parameters for a drilled pier foundation system are outlined in Table 3. Table 3: Foundation Design Parameters Parameter Recommendation Comments Foundation Type Bearing Depth, ft Bearing Material Net Allowable Bearin�q Pressure*, gall Total Load. kips/ft Dead Load plus Sustained Live Load, kips/ft2 Lateral Resistance, giaterai , kips/ft2 Pier (Footing) Spacing Bell to Shaft Ratio Pier Reinforcement Drilled-and-Underreamed Pier 14 Clay Below existing grade 4.2 Includes factor of safety (F.S.) of 2 2.8 Includes factor of safety( F.S.) of 3 1.0 At least two underream or shaft diameters; whichever is greater 3:1 Includes F.S. of 3; neglect upper 5 ft Measured center -to -center 2:1 or Straight -sided if sloughing is encountered Minimum of 0.5% to 1% of Extend the full depth of shaft and concrete area underream Notes: * May be increased 33% for transient loading conditions such as wind. A bell -to -shaft ratio of 3:1 may be considered. If a 3:1 bell -to -shaft ratio in the pier excavation is not possible during construction, a reduced bell -to -shaft ratio or a straight - sided shaft with a design bell diameter will be required. Foundation Installation Installation considerations include test pier, water conditions, reinforcing and concrete placement, and monitoring. These topics are discussed in the following sections. 4 Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 -6- Test Pier. We recommend test piers be drilled to verify the construction feasibility of drilled- and-underreamed piers, as planned. Test piers provide beneficial information for the contractor about cleaning, sloughing, and water conditions. Installation of underreamed piers may proceed provided the bearing surface is clean before concrete placement. If test piers are drilled, at least two piers should be installed across the site. The geotechnical engineer or his qualified representative should observe test pier installation. Test piers should be drilled with the largest diameter shaft and bell with the largest bell to shaft ratio proposed for the project. The piers should extend to the recommended bearing elevation. Piers should be located within the footprint of the building but should not be located at working pier locations. Test piers may be backfilled with concrete, cement -stabilized sand, or flowable fill. Cement stabilized sand should meet a specification similar to Item 400 of TxDOT Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges.15 Flowable fill should meet a specification similar to Item 434 of Specifications for the Construction of Roads and Bridges within Harris County.16 Excavated soil should not be used to backfill test piers. For planning purposes, test piers should remain open for 2 hr to evaluate sidewall stability. Production drilling may proceed immediately after test pier installation provided no difficulty is encountered during test pier installation. Water Conditions. Based upon the observations during the field exploration, seepage into drilled-and-underreamed piers is not anticipated during the excavation. If water in excess of about 2 in. accumulates at the bottom of the excavation, the water should be pumped out before concrete placement. Water levels vary seasonally and with climatic conditions. Therefore, the contractor should verify that groundwater will not adversely affect pier installation prior to foundation construction. Reinforcing and Concrete Placement. Reinforcing steel should be clean and free of any bond -inhibiting coating or mud. Reinforcing steel should be properly positioned and supported to assure the design concrete cover around the reinforcing steel is achieved. Before concrete placement, the bottom of each excavation should be cleaned. If water in excess of about 2 in. accumulates at the bottom of the excavation, the water should be pumped out before concrete placement. Concrete should be placed in pier excavations within 2 hr after excavation to reduce the potential for soil sloughing and/or perched water seepage from the excavation walls. If sloughing soils are encountered in the excavation, it may be necessary to place reinforcing steel and concrete immediately after completion of excavation. Concrete should conform to applicable requirements of ACI 301,17 ACI 318,18 and ASTM C 94/C 94M.19 The concrete slump should be 5 in. ± 1 in. Concrete should be placed with a tremie to direct the concrete toward the bottom of the foundation excavation. The concrete should not be allowed to ricochet off the walls of the excavation or the reinforcing steel. Pier design and placement should comply with the requirements of ACI 318, ACI 336.3R20 and ACI 336.1.2' Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 -7- Monitoring. Depth to competent bearing soils is based on conditions encountered at the boring locations. Significant variations can occur over short horizontal distances from the boring locations. Our representative should be present during foundation construction to verify that the proper bearing stratum has been reached, the pier dimensions are as designed, the reinforcing steel is as specified, and that the excavation is clean and dry before reinforcing and concrete placement. Foundation Performance The recommended depth of the pier foundation system is predicated on existing and anticipated soil and water conditions. It is generally acknowledged that the depth of seasonal moisture change or "active zone" in the Houston and surrounding areas is about 10 ft below grade. That is, the moisture content of the soils to that depth undergo moisture fluctuations caused by climatic conditions often characterized by cycles of dry then wet weather. In addition, geotechnical engineers have documented that factors other than climate can exert an influence to much greater depths. Instances of trees affecting subgrade moisture as far as 15 to 20-ft below the ground surface have been reported. The recommended bearing depth of the pier foundations will provide protection of the piers from significant influence by seasonal moisture change but will not necessarily provide protection from non -climatic factors. Discussions of climatic and non -climatic factors affecting foundation performance as well as site specific factors are presented in the Slab Performance section of this report. FLOOR SLAB SYSTEM The in -situ clays encountered during our field exploration program generally have very high shrink/swell potential with soil moisture changes. A range of options from structurally - isolated floor slab to slab -on -grade may be considered for floor slab design. The selection of a specific option depends on risk of movement and consequential damage to the structure. Structurally Isolated Floor Slab The use of a structurally isolated floor slab with crawl space or void form is the most effective method to avoid the effects of moisture -related soil movement. A structurally supported floor should be selected if equipment installed on the first floor or if building elements or finishes on the first floor will be sensitive to movement and movement approaching 1 in. cannot be tolerated. If the potential for slab movement must be eliminated, we recommend the structural slab. Void forms should be used to provide at least 6-in. void beneath the slab to accommodate swelling movement of the subgrade soils. The building subgrade for a structurally isolated floor slab, if selected, should be prepared to provide a level and firm surface for placement of the collapsible void forms. Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 -8 Slab -on Grade To reduce potential movements of a slab -on -grade, we recommend at least 5-ft thick buffer of select fill be prepared beneath the slab. This method will also require that the concrete pavement is placed around the building perimeter with no exposed soil adjacent to the slab. Recommendations for subgrade preparation, select fill soils, and moisture conditioning of natural soils are presented in the Site Development Considerations section of this report. Grade Beams. Grade beams can be used to transfer loads to the drilled piers and to stiffen the floor slab. The depth of exterior and interior grade beams can be varied according to the structural requirements of the floor slab. We recommend the depth of the exterior grade beams be at least 2.5-ft below the lowest adjacent grade. We do not recommend the use of void boxes below grade beams because of the potential to collect free water within the void space. Finished Grade Conditions. Slab -on -grade construction should proceed as soon as possible after completion of the building pads to prevent changes in the density and moisture conditions of the building pad soils. If construction is delayed and the fill soils are exposed to inclement weather or traffic, recompaction or moisture adjustment of the pad to at least 6- in. depth may be needed to return the soils to the specified density and moisture range. Alternately, protection of the fill soils with plastic sheeting or the placement of a protective fill layer may be considered. The plastic sheeting or protective fill layer must be removed before slab construction. The final lift should be moisture adjusted and recompacted before the floor slab is placed. Construction should not proceed on dry or saturated subgrade. Leveling Course. A leveling course, typically bank sand, is commonly used beneath floor slabs in the Gulf Coast area. Because of the potential for a granular course to act as a conduit for water, we recommend that the leveling course be limited to about 2-in. thickness, or eliminated. Vapor Retarder. ACI 302.1R-04, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction22 recommends that a vapor retarder with a permeance of less than 0.3 US perms (ASTM E 9623). The thickness of the vapor retarder should not be less than 10 mils, placed under the concrete floor slab on ground to reduce the transmission of water vapor from the supporting soil through the concrete slab. The vapor retarder should function as a slip -sheet to reduce subgrade drag friction. Local practice is to place the concrete floor directly on the vapor retarder. The vapor retarder should be installed according to ASTM E 164324. Water that collects within the building pad area after the vapor retarder is placed should be removed before concrete placement. Utility Bedding and Backfill. Cement -stabilized sand is a preferred bedding material for utilities within the limits of the building and paving. Cement stabilized sand should meet the requirements of Item 400.3 of the TxDOT Specifications (Cement Stabilized Backfill25), or Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 -9- equivalent. Backfill for utility trenches within and for a distance of 10 ft from the building footprint should be select structural fill or cement -stabilized sand. Material and placement criteria for structural fill were presented in the Building Pad Preparation section. A testing frequency of one in -place density and moisture test for each 75 linear feet of utility trench or a minimum of two tests per lift should be included in the project specifications. A bentonite seal should be placed within utility trenches where the trenches exit the building footprint. The seals should be located within 5-ft of the building and should be at least 2-ft in length; bentonite should not be placed under grade beams. The bentonite seal will prevent water infiltration into the utility bedding and backfill. Slab Performance Throughout much of the State, buildings supported on pier foundations use a slab -on -grade supported on a constructed building pad of relatively low -plasticity fill. This system is widely used and generally provides Owners with years, if not a lifetime, of acceptable performance. Nevertheless, a slab -on -grade presents a risk of poor long-term building performance. The practice of most geotechnical engineers is to provide at least two options for the floor slab system: 1) a structural slab elevated above the site grade and supported by a deeper foundation system, and 2) a slab -on -grade. These two systems will not provide comparable assurance of performance. The structural slab relies on support by the foundations, typically piers that are placed at a sufficient depth to greatly reduce the risk of movement due to most causes of moisture fluctuation. A slab -on -grade, however, is susceptible to the inherent instability of the supporting clay subgrade, including any clay fill that will shrink or swell with any moisture fluctuation whether it occurs during or following construction. Thus, the selection of the floor slab system should be made by the Owner with the counsel of the design and construction team to adequately advise the Owner of the risks each system presents and the relative costs. Owners select the least expensive system only to discover later that the performance of the system does not meet their expectations. This discussion is intended to assist the Owner in that decision. Design methods for slab -on -grade construction consider only climatic factors and are based on average climatic conditions being present before construction and throughout the structure life. Maintaining balanced soil moisture conditions in the subgrade throughout the structure life reduces the potential for differential movements. Early in the life of the structure, the performance of a slab -on -grade will be affected by the soil moisture conditions at the time of construction, and they may be different than the conditions that existed during the geotechnical study. The conditions will be affected by the weather before and during construction, construction techniques, and site preparation including drainage. Steps should be taken to reduce moisture content fluctuations within the near -surface soils. Positive drainage to carry runoff away from the structure will minimize excess migration into the soils. Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 -10- Following construction, Owner influences begin to control soil moisture and the potential for soil movement. Rainfall, drainage, irrigation, or unintended water sources such as broken or leaking irrigation or utility lines can disrupt the post -construction moisture conditions and cause soils to swell. Landscaping, particularly trees, and dry weather can cause shrinkage of the clays and settlement. The amount of movement considered acceptable to many Owners is less than that tolerated by the structural members. Movements often result in cracks in brick or masonry veneer or walls; cracks in drywall; separation of the joints in trim; cracks in tile floors, walls, and countertops; and distortion to windows and doors making them difficult to open and close. While these consequences of movement are annoying and may be unsightly, they do not necessarily indicate unacceptable structural performance or failure. Movements sufficient to cause those types of distress should be anticipated if a slab -on -grade floor slab is constructed on active clay soils. Climatic Factors. Average annual climatic conditions are documented in the area, but these conditions occur in cycles of dry weather followed by wet weather. Such cycles coupled with the time of construction have a significant influence on the long-term performance of the structure. If construction proceeds during or immediately after a dry period, the soils within the upper 5 ft to 10-ft depth are expected to be dry. When moisture is introduced, such as, through infiltration of rainfall along the slab edges, the dry soils likely will swell. Conversely, if construction proceeds after a wet period, the soils likely are wet and have experienced some swell. Although additional swell may occur, the amount of swell likely will be less than that experienced by dry soils. Shrinkage of wet soils likely will occur during dry periods. Non -Climatic Factors. Factors unrelated to climate may result in soil movements that may be greater than those resulting only from climatic influences. The presence of many non - climatic factors is generally beyond the direct influence of the design team and is often manifested during the structure life. Non -climatic factors that affect the moisture content of the site soils include the presence of trees (existing and recently removed) and landscaping, inadequate drainage or altered drainage during the structure life, and the availability of moisture from unplanned sources such as roof drains, air conditioning drains, or below - grade utility or irrigation system leaks. Design methods cannot account for movements resulting from these non -climatic factors. Since the slab performance is related to soil properties, climatic factors, non -climatic factors, and the interaction between factors that may occur during the structure life, the actual amount of movement that can be expected over the life of the structure cannot be quantified. Non -climatic factors and their potential effects on structure performance are discussed in the following paragraphs. Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 Drainage. Improper drainage can have significant negative effects on the performance, especially if the structure were constructed during or immediately after a dry period. The following are general notes concerning proper drainage considerations: • Positive drainage away from the structure must be designed, constructed, and maintained throughout the structure life. • Landscaping systems must maintain the positive drainage away from the structure and not permit water to impound adjacent to the structure. • Downspouts from roof drainage systems and air conditioning unit drains should be designed to discharge water away from, and preferably 10-ft or more from, the foundation. • Drainage through drainpipes to the storm sewer is preferred for all roof drains. • Splash blocks are not effective in draining water away from the foundation and should not be used. • Water drains should be tied to the storm sewer and not be allowed to drain along the boundary of the building with discharge at the foundation. Unplanned Water Sources. Following the effects of landscaping and improper drainage, unplanned water releases such as from poorly constructed or broken below -grade utility lines, pool leaks, irrigation system leaks. or other unintended or unanticipated water sources are the most prevalent causes of poor foundation and slab -on -grade performance. The sources may be particularly problematic because they often go unnoticed for weeks or months causing significant movement of the soils and significant distress to the structure. Again, design methods do not account for soils movements resulting from these non -climatic factors. Summary. Based on our experience, a slab -on -grade is selected for well over 95% of light loaded structures. Few problems may develop when subgrade moisture conditions are affected only by climatic factors. However, where non -climatic factors over which the design team has little or no control are allowed to influence the subgrade moisture variations, the result is frequently unsatisfactory foundation performance. Therefore, the selection of a slab -on -grade carries a substantially greater risk than a structurally -isolated floor slab. The Owner should understand that with the selection of a slab -on -grade, they must accept the associated risks and consequences. Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 - 12 - PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS We understand that the pavement for the service drives and parking lot will be concrete paving. Design, material requirements, and maintenance considerations for the pavement and subgrade preparation are discussed in the following section. Design Considerations ACI 330R26 was used as the basis for rigid pavement recommendations. The recommended concrete thicknesses have performed satisfactorily under similar use conditions and have an anticipated life of 15 to 20 years provided the paving sections are based on a properly prepared and stabilized subgrade as outlined in Subgrade Preparation. Rigid Paving Section Paving should consist of 5-in. thick hydraulic cement concrete paving for vehicle parking areas only, 6-in. thick concrete paving for passenger vehicle driveways, and 7-in. thick concrete paving for entrance, access to dumpster pads, and truck traffic areas. The pavement subgrade be stabilized with lime to an 8-in. depth. Subgrade stabilizations are presented in the Site Development Considerations section of this report. Concrete Mixture. The concrete paving mixture should be proportioned to achieve a compressive strength of at least 3500 Ib/in.2 at 28 days or a minimum flexural strength of 500 Ib/in.2 in third -point loading (ASTM C 7827) at 7 days. Joints. Although the ACI 330R addresses design and construction of joints to control cracking and facilitate construction, the Guide does not consider the possible effects of joint layout on subgrade performance. The following are some general notes regarding joint placement: • Spacing between joints should comply with Table 3.5 below from ACI 330R: Pavement thickness, in. Maximum spacing, ft 4, 4.5 10 5, 5.5 12.5 6 or greater 15 Note that joint spacing should not exceed 15 ft; • Avoid doweled expansion joint with winged retention plate on pavements less than 8 in. thick; • Panels between joints should be square, or nearly so, with the ratio of length to width no greater than 1.5; Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 - 13 - • Isolation or doweled joints should be installed between the building or penetrations such as inlets or manholes and adjoining pavement; • Isolation joints should be installed at junctions of pavement with walks, curbs, or other obstructions where independence of movement is needed; • Install a joint at any change in direction; • Joints should be installed perpendicular to tangent along curve in pavement, preferably at point of smallest diameter; • Reinforce re-entrant corners with three #3 diagonal or corner bars; • Do not allow joints intersections to form a "T"; • Avoid, if possible, longitudinal joints in or near wheel paths, particularly where heavy vehicles are expected; and • Avoid positioning joints where water flows along the joint since joint sealant is not 100% effective in sealing moisture infiltration. Water intrusion at joints is frequently a major contributor to subgrade damage and loss of subgrade support. Distributed Steel Reinforcement and Dowels. Local practice is to use distributed steel reinforcement in hydraulic cement concrete pavements to control opening of intermediate cracks that develop between joints in response to shrinkage, temperature differentials, uneven subgrade support, or load -related stresses. The function of the distributed steel is to hold together the crack's fracture faces. ACI 330R addresses distributed steel reinforcement and provides an equation to determine the required area of distributed steel. Plain smooth dowels are recommended to provide load transfer across contraction joints while permitting the joints to move. ACI 330R contains recommendations for dowel size, length, and spacing. Avoid locating a dowel closer than three times the pavement thickness from a joint parallel to the dowel. Maintenance. During the paving life, maintenance to seal surface cracks and reseal joints within concrete paving should be performed to achieve the desired paving life. Adequate drainage should be provided to prevent or retard influx of surface water from areas surrounding the paving. Water penetration into the pavement subgrade leads to paving degradation. Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 - 14 - Subgrade Stabilization The appropriateness of stabilizer and application rate for the subgrade should be determined at the time of construction. The paving subgrade should be lime stabilized to an 8-in. depth. An application rate of 53 Ib/yd2 of hydrated lime may be used for planning purposes. This application rate corresponds to 8% hydrated lime. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Specifications, Item 260, can be used as procedural guide for placing, mixing, and compacting the stabilizer and the soils. Stabilized soils should be compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry density determined by standard effort (ASTM D 69828). The moisture content should be at 3% wet of the optimum moisture content. Paving should be placed within 14 days to prevent deterioration of the prepared subgrade, or the subgrade should be sealed with an emulsion -based sealer. EXTERIOR SIDEWALKS, PATIOS, AND SURFACE PAVING Lightly -loaded exterior sidewalks, patios, and similar concrete surface paving are very susceptible to movement when supported on an expansive subgrade. If surface paving is adjacent to building slabs, differential movement may occur between the exterior concrete paving and building slabs creating problems such as binding of outward -swinging doors and trip hazards. If surface paving is attached to the building, differential movement may cause the surface paving to move upward more that the building slab and cause reverse drainage toward the buildings. We recommend that consideration be given to stabilizing the subgrade soils supporting sidewalks, patios and, surface paving abutting the slab in a manner similar to that for vehicular pavements or by extending the low -expansion buffer beyond the building limits to support the exterior concrete to reduce differential movement between the slab (or grade beam) and abutting exterior concrete. The buffer should extend at least 5-ft beyond the limits of the exterior concrete. SITE DEVELOPMENT CONSIDERATIONS To plan the construction, initial earthwork will include remove existing building and paving, proofrolling, and select fill placement and testing. Recommendations for each of these preparation items are presented in the following sections. Material specifications and placement criteria for select fill soils are also provided. Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 - 15 - Site Drainage Based on our experience with similar projects, drainage should be established early in the site development and maintained as the site grades change. Drainage could be critical if construction begins following or during a period of wet weather. Existing Foundations The existing building will be demolished to accommodate site redevelopment. Complete removal of former foundations often is not undertaken for new development. Existing features may likely conflict with the proposed new foundation construction. We recommend complete removal of these features within the footprint of the new structure. Excavations for foundation removal will require backfilling under controlled compaction conditions. Large excavations should be backfilled with select fill. Fill should be placed in 8-in. thick maximum loose lifts, with each lift compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry density determined by standard effort (ASTM D 69829). Isolated excavations may be more economically backfilled with controlled low -strength material (CLSM) or flowable fill. If CLSM is used, the mixture should be proportioned to produce the desired strength at the time of excavation. Existing Utilities The presence of existing building at this site suggests that below -grade utility lines should be expected. Paradigm recommends that the former utilities including water service, sewer service, and electrical service be removed in their entirety if located within the footprint of the new building. Removal should include the pipes, bedding, and backfill. It is likely that sand was used as bedding and backfill for on -site utility excavations. Sand bedding and backfill should not remain within the footprint of the proposed building since the presence of sand will increase risks for water intrusion and resulting movements of a grade -supported floor. If utilities are located within the surface paving areas, the utilities may be abandoned in place. We recommend that the lines be grouted as part of the abandonment process. Existing Fill Materials Any on -site fill encountered in the building and pavement areas during construction should have records of successful compaction tests that confirm the use of the fill and record of passing density tests. These tests should have been performed on all lifts. In the event that no compaction tests results are available, the fill must be removed, processed and re - compacted, if suitable, in accordance with our fill placement recommendations. Excavations should be extended at least 5 ft beyond the building and pavement area. Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 - 16 - Proofrolling Proofrolling is a method to evaluate the performance of the surface soils within 18-in. under load application. Proofrolling should be performed in building areas using a heavy rubber - tired vehicle such as loaded dump truck, a large maintainer or pneumatic equipment weighing about 20 tons. Proofrolling operations should be observed by our representative to delineate areas that require remediation. Remediation typically involves removing and replacing the soft areas; disking, drying and recompacting the soils; or treating the soils with a chemical additive. Select Fill Placement and Testing Additional select fill for the building pad should consist of lean clay, free of roots, organics, and deleterious materials. The select fill should have at least 50% passing the No. 200 sieve and have a PI between 12 and 20, with a liquid limit less than 35. Representative samples of the fill materials should be tested to confirm their material characteristics. Select fill should be placed in maximum 8-in. thick loose lifts and compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density (ASTM D 698). Over -compaction should be avoided. The moisture contents for select fill should be within 1% dry to 3% wet of the optimum moisture content. Fill placement greater than one 6-in. thick compacted lift should be tested and documented by the geotechnical engineer or an experienced soils technician. A testing frequency of one in -place density and moisture test for each 2,500 ft2 or less per lift of fill should be considered, with a minimum of two tests per lift. CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION As dictated by common practice, our geotechnical engineering analysis and recommendations are based on the information on the subsurface conditions obtained from small diameter. widely -spaced borings and our judgment based on our education and experience. Because the borings indicate subsurface conditions only at the specific locations and time and only to the depths penetrated, they do not necessarily reflect strata variations that may exist between boring locations. Therefore, the validity of the recommendations in this report is based in part on assumptions about the stratigraphy made by the geotechnical engineer. Because variations may not be evident until construction begins, Paradigm should be retained to observe foundation installation and perform construction materials monitoring and test, particularly earthwork construction, during the construction phase of the project. Our involvement enables Paradigm's geotechnical engineer or his/her representative to monitor the foundation and earthwork activities and be available to personally evaluate unanticipated conditions, conduct additional tests, if necessary, and to provide alternative recommendations where appropriate. Therefore, our recommendations on issues such as Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 - 17 - final bearing elevation, depth of undercutting unsuitable materials, and appropriateness of subgrade stabilization agent and quantity should be considered preliminary until actual subsurface conditions are revealed during construction. LIMITATIONS Opinions, conclusions, and recommendations presented in this geotechnical engineering report are based on the data obtained from the field and laboratory programs, our interpretation of the data, and information received from our client and construction professionals associated with the project. If changes in the nature, design, or location of the project are made, the opinions, conclusions, and recommendations contained in this report are not valid unless the changes are reviewed by Paradigm and the recommendations included within this report are modified or verified in writing by Paradigm. If subsurface conditions different from those described are noted during construction, recommendations in this report must be reevaluated. The scope of our services did not include environmental assessment, compliance with applicable laws, geologic faults, and wetlands. Our scope did not include the investigation, detection, or design related to the presence of any biological pollutants. The term "biological pollutants" include, and is not limited to, mold, fungi, spores, bacteria, and viruses, and the byproducts of any such biological organisms. Design Review Paradigm should review the design drawings and specifications before being released for construction. Our review will confirm that the geotechnical recommendations and construction criteria presented in this report have been correctly interpreted and implemented. Paradigm is not responsible for any claims, damages, or liability associated with non-compliance with or misinterpretation of the recommendations and construction criteria presented in our geotechnical report. Design review is not within the scope of services authorized in this study. We would be pleased to submit a budget for this activity. Standard of Care This study was performed in a manner consistent with the level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by reputable geotechnical engineers practicing contemporaneously in the local area. No warranty or guarantee, express or implied, is made or intended. Report Reproduction Paradigm's report was prepared exclusively for Huitt-Zollars and its project team for use in preparing design and construction documents. This report shall not be reproduced or used for any other purpose without Paradigm's express written authorization. If included in construction documents, the report should be provided in its entirety with the caveat that it is included as a construction reference. Specific project requirements including options selected from this report must be obtained from the design drawings and specifications. Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 - 18 - REFERENCES 1. ASTM D 1452-09 "Standard Practice for Soil Investigation and Sampling by Auger Borings," Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 04.08, ASTM International, West Conshohocken, PA. 2. ASTM D 5783-95 (2012) "Standard Guide for Use of Direct Rotary Drilling with Water - Based Drilling Fluid for Geoenvironmental Exploration and the Installation of Subsurface Water -Quality Monitoring Devices," Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 04.08, ASTM International, West Conshohocken, PA. 3. ASTM D 1587-08 "Practice for Thin -Walled Tube Sampling of Soils for Geotechnical Purposes," Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Part 04.08, ASTM, West Conshohocken, PA. 4. ASTM D 1586-99 "Practice for Penetration Test and Split -Barrel Sampling of Soils," Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 04.08, ASTM, West Conshohocken, PA. 5. ASTM D 2216-10 "Test Method for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass," Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 04.08, ASTM, West Conshohocken, PA. 6. ASTM D 4318-10 "Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soil," Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 04.08, ASTM, West Conshohocken, PA. 7. ASTM D 2166-06 "Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil," Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 04.08, ASTM, West Conshohocken, PA. 8. ASTM D 2850-03a "Standard Test Method for Unconsolidated-Undrained Traixial Compression Test on Cohesive Soils," Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 04.08, ASTM International, West Conshohocken, PA. 9. ASTM D 5434-03 "Guide for Field Logging of Subsurface Explorations of Soil and Rock," Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Part 04.09, ASTM, West Conshohocken, PA. 10. ASTM D 2488-00 "Description and Identification of Soils (Visual -Manual Procedure)," Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 04.08, ASTM, West Conshohocken, PA. 11. ASTM D 2487-00 "Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)," Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 04.08, ASTM, West Conshohocken, PA. 12. Holtz, W. G., and Gibbs, H.J., "Engineering Properties of Expansive Clays," Transactions ASCE 121, 1956, pages 641 to 677. 13. Raman, V., "Identification of Expansive Soils from the Plasticity Index and the Shrinkage Index Data," Indian Engineering, Calcutta 11 (1), 1967, pages 17 to 22. 14. Chen, F. H., Foundations on Expansive Soils, American Elsevier Science Publication, New York, 1988. 15. Item 400, Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, Texas Department of Transportation, Austin, TX, 2004. Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 -19- 16. Item 434 Specifications for the Construction of Roads and Bridges Within Harris County, Harris County Engineering Department, Houston, TX, April 1988 with Rev. 1 through 9. 17. ACI Committee 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete (ACI 301-09)," ACI International, Farmington, MI. 18. ACI Committee 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318- 11)," and "Commentary (ACI 318R-11)," ACI International, Farmington, MI. 19. ASTM C94 / C94M-11, "Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete," Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 04.02, ASTM, West Conshohocken, PA. 20. ACI Committee 336, "Specification for Construction of Drilled Piers," (ACI 336.3R-93), ACI International, Farmington, MI. 21. ACI Committee 336, "Design and Construction of Drilled Piers," (ACI 336.1R-01), ACI International, Farmington, MI. 22. ACI Committee 302, "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction (ACI 302.1R-04)," ACI International, Farmington, MI. 23. ASTM E 96-00e1 "Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials," Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 15.04, ASTM, West Conshohocken, PA. 24. ASTM E 1643-98 "Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs," Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 04.11, ASTM, West Conshohocken, PA. 25. TxDOT Item 400.3, "Cement Stabilized Backfill," Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of the Highways, Streets and Bridges, Texas Department of Transportation, Austin, TX, June 2004. 26. ACI Committee 330, "Guide for Design and Construction of Concrete Parking Lots (ACI 330R-01)," ACI International, Farmington, MI. 27. ASTM C 78-08 "Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third Point Loading)," Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 02.06, ASTM, West Conshohocken, PA. 28. ASTM D 698-07e1 "Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ib/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3))," Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 04.08, ASTM, West Conshohocken, PA. 29. ASTM D 698-00ae1 "Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ib/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3))," Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 04.08, ASTM, West Conshohocken, PA. Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 8 § • .1 • 1.1 g TIT11 t11111,1, 4 / El CS3:004S tiK I mowed Om +kr a 148 4.! 1 • \ LTD 1 .1 6 0") 0 ct 0) H TY) 0 c\I u..I CC (9 LL 0.1 0 PROJECT NO. PLAN OFBORINGS cj c • o 0 o_ >, _o (13 a) (T3 • — >cc 2 o o CL •••=• @ CO 0_ 0 0 coo cy- ) c (1) • 03 0 0 Ca CO CO 4- a) (I) (7) ow Z —1 CITY OF PEARLAND - NEW ADMIN BUILDING 3501 E. ORANGE STREET • Appendix SOIL BORING LOGS Paradigm Consultants, Inc. Project No. 16-1002 LOG OF BORING Project: City of Pearland New Admin Building 3501 E. Orange Street Pearland, Texas Client: New Administration Building Ilr Pearland, Texas Project No.: 16-1002 Boring Number: 1 Surface Elevation: Drilled: 1/12/16 - 1/12/16 Sheet 1 of 1 c' E 0 FIELD DATA a 5 10 15 20 Remarks: P = 1.75 P = 1.0 P = 0.75 P = 0.5 P = 1.5 P = 1.75 P = 2.75 P = 1.0 P = 2.0 37.7 40.7 42.6 40.9 31.7 31.3 25.9 30.0 30.7 LABORATORY DATA E v J 89 100 78 33 31 28 56 69 50 83 101 50 1940 14.1 5.1 7 14 E E U Bulge, Multiple Shear Bulge, Multiple Shear, Slickensided Drilling Method(s): Dry -auger drilling: 0 ft to 25 ft Borehole Water Levels: First encountered After elapsed None DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM CONCRETE PAVING: 7 inches. FAT CLAY (CH): Firm to very stiff, dark gray. - with ferrous nodules, 0 to 4 ft. - with sand pockets and slickensided, 4 to 6 ft. - becoming light gray and reddish tan, 4 to 8 ft. - with calcareous nodules, 6 to 12 ft. - with ferrous stains, 8 to 12 ft. - becoming reddish brown, 8 to 25 ft. - with calcareous nodules and ferrous nodules, 23 to 25 ft. Borehole terminated at 25-ft depth -1- Paradigm Consultants, Inc. LOG OF BORING Project: Client: City of Pearland New Admin Building 3501 E. Orange Street Pearland, Texas New Administration Building Pearland, Texas Project No: 16-1002 Boring Number: 2 Surface Elevation: Drilled: 1/12/16 - 1/12/16 Sheet 1 of 1 E N 1- Remarks: 25 FIELD DATA d 0 Sample Interval, Sampler 5 - 10 - - 15 - - 20 - GEOTECH1 P = 1.25 P = 0.75 LABORATORY DATA 22.3 48.0 P = 1.0 V45.5 P = 0.5 P = 2.0 P = 1.25 P = 1.75 P = 3.0 P = 3.0 43.3 28.3 21.0 21.9 28.3 27.4 E Q J 108 93 37 33 32 16 75 61 21 97 111 107 990 1490 1310 5.6 14.1 9 11 Bilge, Multi le Shear, Slickensided Bulge Bulge, Single Shear Drilling Method(s): Dry -auger drilling: 0 ft to 25 ft Borehole Water Levels: First encountered After 15 minutes elapsed 6.0 ft 4.3 ft DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM CONCRETE PAVING: 8.5 inches. FILL: Gray with gravel and sandy fat clay. FAT CLAY (CH): Firm to stiff, gray. - becoming reddish tan, 4 to 8 ft. - with slickensided, 4 to 6 ft. - becoming reddish brown, 8 to 13 ft. - with ferrous stains, 8 to 10 ft. - with sand pockets, 10 to 13 ft. LEAN CLAY (CL): Stiff, reddish brown and gray. FAT CLAY (CH); Stiff to very stiff, reddish brown and gray. Borehole terminated at 25-ft depth Paradigm Consultants, Inc. LOG OF BORING Project: City of Pearland New Admin Building 3501 E. Orange Street Pearland, Texas Client: New Administration Building Pearland, Texas Project No.: 16-1002 Boring Number: 3 Surface Elevation: Drilled: 1/12/16 -1/12/16 Sheet 1 of 1 </) FIELD DATA o. 0 P = 1.25 P = 1.0 P = 1.0 -5- P = 1.25 P = 2.0 P = 1.5 P = 1.5 - 15 - P = 2.0 - 20 - P = 3.25 4111,4/°--/emarks: LABORATORY DATA 40.7 43.3 42.3 39.6 32.2 39.9 23.3 25.3 28.2 E J V J 98 98 29 27 69 71 88 83 101 c in co c a 940 650 1270 7.3 10.3 4.2 9 11 19 E E 0 U Bulge Bulge, Multiple Shear Bulge, Single Shear, Slickensided Drilling Method(s): Dry -auger drilling: 0 ft to 25 ft Borehole Water Levels: First encountered After elapsed None DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM CONCRETE PAVING: 7.5 inches. FAT CLAY (CH): Stiff to hard, dark gray. - with slickensided, 0 to 4 ft. - with ferrous nodules, 4 to 6 ft. - becoming gray and reddish tan, 4 to 15 ft. - with ferrous stains, 6 to 8 ft. - with ferrous nodules, 6 to 10 ft. - with calcareous nodules, 13 to 15 ft. - with sand pockets, 13 to 20 ft. - becoming reddish brown, 18 to 25 ft. Borehole terminated at 25-ft depth -3- Paradigm Consultants, Inc. LOG OF BORING Project: Client: City of Pearland New Admin Building 3501 E. Orange Street Pearland, Texas New Administration Building Pearland, Texas Project No.: 16-1002 Boring Number: 4 Surface Elevation: Drilled: 1/12/16 - 1/12/16 Sheet 1 of 1 FIELD DATA 2 N 0 0) 0. 1 2 3 0 x 0 4 0 0 0 / o / c Z N ...5. Remarks: 0 O w O P = 1.25 P = 1.0 P = 1.25 LABORATORY DATA Moisture Conte 34.8 37.7 35.2 88 28 60 87 1160 6.89 C E E ° U Bulge. Multiple Shear. Slickensided Drilling Method(s): Dry -auger driling: 0 ft to 5 ft Borehole Water Levels: First encountered After elapsed None DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM ASPHALT PAVING: 1.5 inches. FILL: Gray and reddish tan clay, with shells. - with garvel, 0 to 2 ft. FAT CLAY (CH): Stiff, gray and reddish tan with shell particles, sand seams and calcareous nodules. Borehole terminated at 5-ft depth Paradigm Consultants, Inc. LOG OF BORING Project: City of Pearland New Admin Building 3501 E. Orange Street Pearland, Texas Client: New Administration Building Pearland, Texas Project No.: 16-1002 Boring Number: 5 Surface Elevation: Drilled: 1/12/16 - 1/12/16 Sheet 1 of 1 FIELD DATA P = 1.5 P = 0.75 P = 1.5 -...5 Remarks: LABORATORY DATA 42.6 42.3 41.9 93 29 64 80 620 1.42 C Q) E E 0 U Bulge, Multiple Shear, Slickensided Drilling Method(s): Dry -auger drilling: 0 ft to 5 ft Borehole Water Levels: First encountered After elapsed None DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM CONCRETE PAVING: 7 inches. FAT CLAY (CH): Firm to stiff, gray. - with sand seams, 3 to 5 ft. - with ferrous nodules, 4 to 5 ft. Borehole terminated at 5-ft depth -5- Paradigm Consultants, Inc. LOG OF BORING GEOTECH.G a 0 0 0 0 z 0 m 0 w 0 O w 0 Project: City of Pearland New Admin Building 3501 E. Orange Street Pearland, Texas Client: New Administration Building Pearland, Texas Project No.: 16-1002 Boring Number: 6 Surface Elevation: Drilled: 1/12/16 - 1/12/16 Sheet 1 of 1 E (n (a) FIELD DATA z o. m 0 1 2 3 4 r 5 Remarks: P = 1.75 P = 1.0 P = 0.75 LABORATORY DATA 34.5 36.8 38.7 ATTERBERG LIMITS E 0 J 81 27 54 82 730 9.49 E E 0 Bulge, Single Shear, Slickensided Drilling Method(s): Dry -auger drilling: 0 ft to 5 ft Borehole Water Levels: First encountered After elapsed None DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM CONCRETE PAVING: 8 inches. FAT CLAY (CH): Firm to stiff, gray. - with ferrous nodules, 0 to 2 ft. - becoming reddish tan with ferrous nodules, 4 to 5 ft. Borehole terminated at 5-ft depth Paradigm Consultants, Inc. KEY TO BORING LOG TERMS AND SYMBOLS Fat Clay (CH) Lean Clay (CL) Sandy Silt (ML) I ilil Elastic Silt (MH) Well Graded Sand (SW) Poorly Graded ° 3,O/ Gravel (GP) 9 q c) c ? o 7 G If Auger , Poorly Graded Sand (SP) Silty Gravel (GM) Base MATERIAL SYMBOLS Sandy Lean Clay (CL) Organic Clay or Silt (OH) High Plasticity Silty Sand (SM) Clayey Gravel (GC) SAMPLER SYMBOLS Thin -walled tube (� ;j Split barrel ////// 0///0/ iO•ii O•i' 1. Ae I I STANDARD PENETRATION TEST (SPT) Silty Clay (CL-ML) Organic Clay or Silt (OL) Low Plasticity Clayey Sand (SC) ,11, .+ Silt (ML) Peat (PT) :' Well Graded • Gravel (GW) Fill ■ Asphalt Concrete Core No recovery N = 25 The sampler was seated 6 in. with blows from a 140-Ib hammer then 25 blows were required to advance the sampler through the two 6-in. intervals of the test. The "N" value is the sum of the blows needed to penetrate the final 12 in. 12, 26, 50/3" The sampler was seated 6 in. by 12 blows from a 140-Ib hammer then 76 blows were required to advance the sampler a distance of 9 in. Full penetration of 12 in. below the seating interval could not be achieved before the 50 blow limit was recorded in one interval. 50/4" Sampler was driven 4 in. of the 6-in. seating interval by blows of a 140-Ib hammer before the 50 blow limit was reached. WATER SYMBOLS Depth where water was first encountered during drilling Depth where water was encountered within the open borehole after completion of drilling (see log for elapsed time) Consistency Very soft Soft Firm Stiff Very stiff Hard Fine -Grained (Major portion passing No. 200 sieve) Silt and Clay Undrained Shear Strength, ksf Less than 0.25 0.25 to 0.50 0.50 to 1.00 1.00 to 2.00 2.00 to 4.00 Greater than 4.00 DESCRIPTIVE TERMS SPT "N" Value Less than 2 2 to 4 4 to 8 9 to 15 15 to 30 Greater than 31 Coarse -Grained (Major portion retained on No. 200 Gravel and Sand Description Very loose Loose Medium dense Dense Very dense Relative Density 0 to 15% 15% to 35% 35% to 65% 65% to 85% 85% to 100% sieve) SPT "N" Value Less than 4 4to10 10 to 30 30 to 50 Greater than 50 PCI's geotechnical engineer reviewed and compiled the field and laboratory data to develop each boring log. Each log represents our interpretation of general soil and water conditions at the boring location. Strata lines on the log may be transitional and are approximate in nature. Water levels refer only to those conditions observed at the time and location indicated. Paradigm Consultants, Inc.